Dawyer

2015ofcobc_Layout 4 7/7/14 3:38 PM Page 1
CT-D-I
Instrumentation leaders for over 80 years through

innovation, service & quality
www.dwyer-inst.com
pressure
air quality
flow
temperature
level
process control
test equipment
valves
RIGHT CHOICE. RIGHT PRICE. RIGHT NOW.
2015
Phone: 219/879-8000 | Fax: 219/872-9057

www.dwyer-inst.com
www.dwyer-inst.com
2015
TO ORDER:
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL
pressure
air quality
flow
temperature
level
process control
test equipment
valves
2015
Printed in U.S.A. 09/14 - INTL
ifc/ibc_Layout 1 7/30/14 11:37 AM Page 1
ORDERING IS EASY FROM DWYER
PRESSURE CONVERSION CHART
PHONE
EMAIL
219/879-8000
orders@dwyermail.com
FAX
WEBSITE
219/872-9057
www.dwyer-inst.com
DWYER AROUND THE GLOBE | LOCAL SUPPORT GLOBALLY

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
AUSTRALIA
DWYERINSTRUMENTS, INC.
DWYERINSTRUMENTS, PTY. LTD.
102 Indiana Highway 212,

P.O. Box 373
Michigan City, IN 46360, U.S.A.
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive

P.O. Box 359
Unanderra, NSW 2526 Australia
PHONE
219/879-8000
PHONE
(+61) (0) 2 4272 2055
FAX
219/872-9057
FAX
(+61) (0) 2 4272 4055
UNITED KINGDOM
HONG KONG
DWYERINSTRUMENTS LTD
DWYERINSTRUMENTS HK, LTD.
Unit 16, The Wye Estate, London Road

High Wycombe, Bucks HP11 1LH-U.K.
Unit 605A, 6/F, Shui Hing Centre

13 Sheung Yuet Road, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
PHONE
(+44) (0) 1494 461707
PHONE
+852-23181007
FAX
(+44) (0) 1494 465102
FAX
+852-27561565
INTERNATIONAL CUSTOMERS
Dwyer has local distributors in over 50 countries. Contact the office of your country or contact the corporate headquarters to
find your local distributor. You can also go to our website at the following address to be contacted by your local distributor:
http://www.dwyer-inst.com/Distributors/DistContactInfo.cfm.
OTHERCONTACTS
TECHNICAL
SUPPORT
LITERATURE
REQUESTS
QUOTATION/
BIDREQUESTS
GENERAL
INFORMATION
tech@dwyermail.com
lit@dwyermail.com
quotes@dwyermail.com
info@dwyermail.com
in/H2O
P.S.I.
in/Hg
mm/H2O mm/Hg
.1
.2
.4
.6
.8
1.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
.0036
.0072
.0144
.0216
.0289
.0361
.0722
.1083
.1444
.1804
.2165
.2526
.2887
.3248
.3609
.3970
.4331
.4692
.5053
.5414
.5774
.6136
.6496
.6857
.7218
.7579
.7940
.8301
.8662
.9023
.9384
.9745
1.010
1.047
1.083
1.119
1.155
1.191
1.227
1.263
1.299
1.335
1.371
1.408
1.444
1.480
1.516
1.552
1.588
1.624
1.660
1.696
1.732
1.768
1.804
1.841
1.877
1.913
1.949
1.985
2.021
2.057
2.093
2.129
2.165
2.202
2.238
2.274
2.310
2.346
2.382
2.418
2.454
2.490
2.526
2.562
2.598
2.635
2.671
2.707
2.743
2.779
2.815
2.851
2.887
2.923
2.959
2.996
3.032
3.068
3.104
3.140
3.176
3.212
3.248
3.284
3.320
3.356
3.392
3.429
3.456
3.501
3.537
3.573
3.609
.0073
.0146
.0293
.0440
.0588
.0735
.1470
.2205
.2940
.3673
.4408
.5143
.5878
.6613
.7348
.8083
.8818
.9553
1.029
1.102
1.176
1.249
1.322
1.396
1.470
1.543
1.616
1.690
1.764
1.837
1.910
1.984
2.056
2.132
2.205
2.278
2.352
2.425
2.498
2.571
2.645
2.718
2.791
2.876
2.940
3.013
3.086
3.160
3.233
3.306
3.378
3.453
3.526
3.600
3.673
3.748
3.822
3.895
3.968
4.041
4.115
4.188
4.261
4.335
4.408
4.483
4.556
4.630
4.703
4.776
4.850
4.923
4.996
5.070
5.143
5.216
5.290
5.365
5.438
5.511
5.585
5.658
5.731
5.805
5.878
5.951
6.024
6.100
6.173
6.246
6.320
6.393
6.466
6.450
6.613
6.686
6.760
6.833
6.906
6.981
7.055
7.128
7.201
7.275
7.348
2.534
5.067
10.13
15.20
20.34
25.41
50.81
76.22
101.62
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
279.4
304.8
330.2
355.6
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
660.4
685.8
710.8
736.8
762.2
787.5
812.8
836.2
863.5
888.9
914.2
939.5
964.9
990.9
1016
1042
1067
1092
1118
1143
1168
1194
1219
1244
1270
1296
1321
1346
1372
1397
1422
1448
1473
1498
1524
1550
1575
1600
1626
1651
1676
1702
1727
1752
1778
1803
1828
1854
1880
1905
1930
1956
1981
2006
2032
2057
2082
2108
2134
2159
2184
2210
2265
2260
2286
2311
2336
2362
2387
2413
2438
2464
2489
2514
2540
.1863
.3726
.7452
1.118
1.496
1.868
3.736
5.604
7.472
9.335
11.203
13.072
14.940
16.808
18.676
20.544
22.412
24.280
26.148
28.016
29.879
31.752
33.616
35.484
37.352
39.22
41.09
42.96
44.82
46.69
48.56
50.43
52.26
54.18
56.04
57.91
59.77
61.63
63.49
65.36
67.22
69.08
70.95
72.86
74.72
76.59
78.45
80.31
82.18
84.04
85.90
87.76
89.63
91.49
93.35
95.27
97.13
98.99
100.8
102.7
104.6
106.4
108.3
110.2
112.0
113.9
115.8
117.7
119.5
121.4
123.3
125.1
127.0
128.8
130.7
132.6
134.4
136.4
138.2
140.1
141.9
143.8
145.7
147.5
149.4
151.2
153.1
155.0
156.9
158.8
160.6
162.5
164.4
166.2
168.1
169.9
171.8
173.7
175.5
177.4
179.3
181.2
183.0
184.9
186.8
kg/cm2
bar
mbar
Pa
kPa
P.S.I.
in/H2O
in/Hg
mm/H2O mm/Hg
kg/cm2
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0051
.0076
.0102
.0127
.0152
.0178
.0203
.0228
.0254
.0279
.0304
.0330
.0355
.0381
.0406
.0431
.0457
.0482
.0507
.0533
.0558
.0584
.0609
.0634
.0660
.0685
.0710
.0736
.0761
.0787
.0812
.0837
.0862
.0888
.0913
.0938
.0964
.0990
.1015
.1040
.1066
.1091
.1116
.1142
.1167
.1192
.1218
.1243
.1268
.1294
.1320
.1345
.1370
.1395
.1421
.1146
.1471
.1497
.1522
.1548
.1573
.1599
.1624
.1649
.1674
.1700
.1725
.1750
.1776
.1801
.1826
.1852
.1878
.1903
.1928
.1954
.1979
.2004
.2030
.2055
.2080
.2106
.2131
.2157
.2182
.2207
.2233
.2258
.2283
.2309
.2334
.2359
.2384
.2410
.2436
.2461
.2486
.2512
.2537
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0050
.0075
.0099
.0124
.0149
.0174
.0199
.0224
.0249
.0274
.0299
.0324
.0348
.0373
.0398
.0423
.0448
.0473
.0498
.0523
.0547
.0572
.0597
.0622
.0647
.0672
.0696
.0722
.0747
.0772
.0796
.0821
.0846
.0871
.0896
.0920
.0945
.0971
.0996
.1020
.1045
.1070
.1095
.1120
.1144
.1169
.1194
.1219
.1244
.1269
.1294
.1319
.1344
.1369
.1393
.1418
.1443
.1468
.1493
.1518
.1543
.1568
.1593
.1618
.1642
.1667
.1692
.1717
.1742
.1766
.1791
.1817
.1842
.1866
.1891
.1916
.1941
.1966
.1991
.2015
.2040
.2066
.2091
.2115
.2140
.2165
.2190
.2215
.2239
.2264
.2289
.2314
.2339
.2364
.2389
.2414
.2439
.2464
.2488
.2482
.4964
.9928
1.489
1.992
2.489
4.978
7.467
9.956
12.44
14.93
17.42
19.90
22.39
24.88
27.37
29.86
32.35
34.84
37.33
39.81
42.31
44.79
47.28
49.77
52.26
54.74
57.23
59.72
62.21
64.70
67.19
69.64
72.19
74.67
77.15
79.63
82.12
84.60
87.08
89.56
92.04
94.53
97.08
99.56
102.0
104.5
107.0
109.5
112.0
114.5
116.9
119.4
121.9
124.4
126.9
129.4
131.9
134.4
136.9
139.3
141.8
144.3
146.8
149.3
151.8
154.3
156.8
159.3
161.8
164.2
166.7
169.2
171.7
174.2
176.6
179.1
181.7
184.2
186.6
189.1
191.6
194.1
196.6
199.1
201.5
204.0
206.6
209.1
211.5
214.0
216.5
219.0
221.5
223.9
226.4
228.9
231.4
233.9
236.4
238.9
241.4
243.9
246.4
248.8
24.82
49.64
99.28
148.9
199.2
248.9
497.8
746.7
995.6
1244
1493
1742
1990
2239
2488
2737
2986
3235
3484
3733
3981
4231
4479
4728
4977
5226
5474
5723
5972
6221
6470
6719
6964
7219
7467
7715
7963
8212
8460
8708
8956
9204
9453
9708
9956
10204
10452
10701
10949
11197
11445
11694
11942
12190
12438
12693
12941
13190
13438
13686
13934
14182
14431
14679
14927
15182
15430
15679
15927
16175
16423
16672
16920
17168
17416
17664
17912
18168
18416
18664
18912
19160
19409
19657
19905
20153
20402
20657
20905
21153
21401
21650
21898
22146
22394
22642
22890
23139
23387
23642
23890
24138
24387
24635
24883
.0248
.0496
.0993
.1489
.1992
.2489
.4978
.7476
.9956
1.244
1.493
1.742
1.990
2.239
2.488
2.737
2.986
3.235
3.484
3.733
3.981
4.231
4.479
4.728
4.977
5.226
5.474
5.723
5.972
6.221
6.470
6.719
6.964
7.219
7.467
7.715
7.963
8.212
8.460
8.708
8.956
9.204
9.453
9.708
9.956
10.20
10.45
10.70
10.95
11.20
11.44
11.69
11.94
12.19
12.44
12.69
12.94
13.19
13.44
13.69
13.93
14.18
14.43
14.68
14.93
15.18
15.43
15.68
15.93
16.18
16.42
16.67
16.92
17.17
17.42
17.66
17.91
18.17
18.42
18.66
18.91
19.16
19.41
19.66
19.90
20.15
20.40
20.66
20.90
21.15
21.40
21.65
21.90
22.15
22.39
22.64
22.89
23.14
23.39
23.64
23.89
24.14
24.39
24.64
24.88
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
14.7
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
27.71
30.45
33.22
35.98
38.75
41.52
44.29
47.06
49.82
52.59
55.36
58.13
60.90
63.67
66.43
69.20
71.97
74.74
77.51
80.27
83.04
85.81
88.58
91.35
94.11
96.88
99.65
102.4
105.2
108.0
110.7
113.5
116.3
119.0
121.8
124.6
127.3
130.1
132.9
135.6
138.4
141.2
143.9
146.7
149.5
152.2
155.0
157.8
160.5
163.3
166.1
168.8
171.6
174.4
177.2
179.9
182.7
185.5
188.2
191.0
193.8
196.5
199.3
202.1
204.8
207.6
210.4
215.9
221.4
227.0
232.5
238.0
243.6
249.1
254.7
260.2
265.7
271.3
276.8
304.5
332.2
359.8
387.5
406.9
415.2
442.9
470.6
498.2
525.9
553.6
581.3
609.0
636.7
664.3
692.0
2.036
2.240
2.443
2.647
2.850
3.054
3.258
3.461
3.665
3.686
4.072
4.276
4.479
4.683
4.886
5.090
5.294
5.497
5.701
5.904
6.108
6.312
6.515
6.719
6.922
7.126
7.330
7.535
7.737
7.940
8.144
8.348
8.551
8.775
8.958
9.162
9.366
9.569
9.773
9.976
10.18
10.38
10.59
10.79
10.99
11.20
11.40
11.60
11.81
12.01
12.22
12.42
12.62
12.83
13.03
13.23
13.44
13.64
13.84
14.05
14.25
14.46
14.66
14.86
15.07
15.27
15.47
15.88
16.29
16.70
17.10
17.51
17.92
18.32
18.73
19.14
19.54
19.95
20.36
22.40
24.43
26.47
28.50
29.93
30.54
32.58
34.61
36.65
36.68
40.72
42.76
44.79
46.83
48.86
50.90
703.1
773.4
843.7
914.0
984.3
1055
1125
1195
1266
1336
1406
1476
1547
1617
1687
1758
1828
1898
1969
2039
2109
2180
2250
2320
2390
2461
2531
2601
2672
2742
2812
2883
2953
3023
3094
2164
3234
3304
3375
3445
3515
3586
3656
3726
3797
3876
3973
4008
4078
4148
4218
4289
4359
4429
4500
4570
4640
4711
4781
4851
4922
4992
5062
5132
5203
5273
5343
5484
5625
5765
5906
6047
6187
6328
6468
6609
6750
6890
7031
7734
8437
9140
9843
10340
10550
11250
11950
12660
13360
14060
14770
15470
16170
16870
17580
.0703
.0773
.0844
.0914
.0984
.1055
.1125
.1195
.1266
.1336
.1406
.1476
.1547
.1617
.1687
.1758
.1828
.1898
.1968
.2039
.2109
.2180
.2250
.2320
.2390
.2461
.2531
.2601
.2672
.2742
.2812
.2883
.2953
.3023
.3094
.3164
.3234
.3304
.3375
.3445
.3515
.3586
.3656
.3726
.3797
.3867
.3937
.4007
.4078
.4148
.4218
.4289
.4359
.4429
.4500
.4570
.4640
.4710
.4781
.4851
.4921
.4992
.5062
.5132
.5203
.5273
.5343
.5484
.5625
.5765
.5906
.6046
.6187
.6328
.6468
.6609
.6749
.6890
.7031
.7734
.8437
.9140
.9843
1.033
1.055
1.125
1.195
1.265
1.336
1.406
1.476
1.547
1.617
1.687
1.758
51.75
56.89
62.06
67.23
72.40
77.57
82.74
87.92
93.09
98.26
103.4
108.6
113.8
118.9
124.1
129.3
134.5
139.6
144.8
150.0
155.1
160.3
165.5
170.7
175.8
181.0
186.2
191.3
196.5
201.7
206.9
212.0
217.2
222.4
227.5
232.7
237.9
243.1
248.2
253.4
258.6
263.7
268.9
274.1
279.3
284.4
289.6
294.8
299.9
305.1
310.3
315.5
320.6
325.8
331.0
336.1
341.3
346.5
351.7
356.8
362.0
367.2
372.3
377.5
382.7
387.9
393.0
403.4
413.7
424.1
434.4
444.7
455.1
465.4
475.8
486.1
496.5
506.8
517.1
568.9
620.6
672.3
724.0
760.2
775.7
827.4
879.1
930.9
982.6
1034
1086
1138
1189
1241
1293
bar
.0689
.0758
.0827
.0896
.0965
.1034
.1103
.1172
.1241
.1310
.1379
.1448
.1517
.1586
.1655
.1724
.1793
.1862
.1930
.1999
.2068
.2137
.2206
.2275
.2344
.2413
.2482
.2551
.2620
.2689
.2758
.2827
.2896
.2965
.3034
.3103
.3172
.3240
.3310
.3378
.3447
.3516
.3585
.3654
.3723
.3792
.3861
.3930
.3999
.4068
.4137
.4206
.4275
.4344
.4413
.4482
.4550
.4619
.4688
.4757
.4826
.4895
.4964
.5033
.5102
.5171
.5240
.5378
.5516
.5654
.5792
.5929
.6067
.6205
.6343
.6481
.6619
.6757
.6895
.7584
.8274
.8963
.9652
1.014
1.034
1.103
1.172
1.241
1.310
1.379
1.448
1.517
1.586
1.655
1.724
mbar
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.0
199.9
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.0
331.0
337.8
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.0
461.9
468.8
475.7
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
537.8
551.6
565.4
579.2
592.9
606.7
620.5
634.3
648.1
661.9
675.7
689.5
758.4
827.4
896.3
965.2
1014
1034
1103
1172
1241
1310
1379
1448
1517
1586
1655
1724
Pa
6895
7584
8274
8963
9652
10340
11030
11720
12410
13100
13790
14480
15170
15860
16550
17240
17930
18620
19300
19990
20680
21370
22060
22750
23440
24130
24820
25510
26200
26890
27580
28270
28960
29650
30338
31030
31720
32400
33100
33780
34470
35160
35850
36540
37230
37920
38610
39300
39990
40680
41370
42060
42750
43440
44130
44820
45500
46190
46880
47570
48260
48950
49640
50330
51020
51710
52400
53780
55160
56540
57920
59290
60670
62050
63430
64810
66190
67570
68950
75840
82740
98630
96520
101400
103400
110300
117200
124100
131000
137900
144800
151700
158600
165500
172400
kPa
6.895
7.584
8.274
8.963
9.652
10.34
11.03
11.72
12.41
13.10
13.79
14.48
15.17
15.86
16.55
17.24
17.93
18.62
19.30
19.99
20.68
21.37
22.06
22.75
23.44
24.13
24.82
25.51
26.20
26.89
27.58
28.27
28.96
29.65
30.34
31.03
31.72
32.40
33.10
33.78
34.47
35.16
35.85
36.54
37.23
37.92
38.61
39.30
39.99
40.68
41.37
42.06
42.75
43.44
44.13
44.82
45.50
46.19
46.88
47.57
48.26
48.95
49.64
50.33
51.02
51.71
52.40
53.78
55.16
56.54
57.92
59.29
60.67
62.05
63.43
64.81
66.19
67.57
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
101.4
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
CONVERSION
FACTORS
P.S.I. x 27.71 = in. H2O

P.S.I. x 2.036 = in. Hg
P.S.I. x .0689 = bar

P.S.I. x 68.95 = mbar
Note: Conversion
Factors Rounded
P.S.I. x 703.1 = mm/H2O

P.S.I. x 51.75 = mm/Hg
P.S.I. x .0703 = kg/cm2
P.S.I. x 6895 = Pa
P.S.I. x 6.895 = kPa
I_IntroManufacturing_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:39 PM Page I

Dwyer Instruments, Inc. produces a broad range of competitively priced precision instruments for measuring, transmitting and controlling
pressure, temperature, level and flow.
Many of these instruments are widely known by their individual brand names, such as Magnehelic and Spirahelic pressure gages,
Photohelic switch/gages, Rate-Master, Mini-Master and Visi-Float flowmeters, Slack Tube and Flex-Tube manometers, and Dwyer
pressure switches.
Other established Dwyer brands, including Flotect flow and level switches, Hi-Flow valves, Self-Tune temperature controllers and Iso
Verter signal converters/isolators, are the products of companies that are now divisions of Dwyer Instruments Mercoid, W. E. Anderson,
Proximity Controls and Love Controls.
Founded in 1931, Dwyer Instruments, Inc. moved its manufacturing and headquarters from Chicago, Illinois, in 1955, to newly constructed,
greatly-expanded facilities in Michigan City, Indiana. The company has since added three more Indiana facilities in Wakarusa, Kingsbury
and Wolcott as well as manufacturing facilities in Anaheim, California; Fergus Falls, Minnesota; and Kansas City, Missouri.
In addition to making and selling quality precision instruments, Dwyer Instruments, Inc. is committed to a standard of customer service,
including competitive prices and knowledgeable, courteous technical support, that generates and sustains long-term relationships.
MANUFACTURING EXPERTISE | AFFORDABLE & RELIABLE

At Dwyer it all starts with innovative products designed according to the needs of our customers. We strive to make products optimized
for ease of use, dependability and manufacturability. Through our over 80 years of manufacturing excellence, Dwyer has found the means
to manufacture products cost effectively to offer the best value to our customers. We supply the highest quality products and stand behind
them.Dwyer products are trusted in applications all over the world in almost every industry.
CONTACT US | U.S. 219/879-8000 | U.K. (+44) (0)1494-461707 | A.U. (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 | China +852-23181007
II_RightChoice_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:41 PM Page 1
RIGHT CHOICE
WE WANT TO BE YOUR FIRST CHOICE IN LOOKING FOR WHAT YOU NEED!
Dwyer provides you with a large variety of instrumentation and controls so that you can consolidate
orders and even vendors to decrease purchasing costs. We are continually expanding to offer you
more product selection both in more product categories and more product variety so that you get the
right product with the right features. We are always adding more related items and accessories so that
you can get everything you need for your installation and project all in one place.
RIGHT PRICE
WE WANT TO BE ASSURED THAT YOU ARE GETTING THE BEST PRICE!
Dwyer strives to give you the best value of price and features available. We continually work at keeping
our costs down to supply the best price we can. Our product selection gives you options for alternative
products at lower costs according to the features that you need. Contact us for distributor, integrator
and OEMpricing.
RIGHT NOW
WE WANT TO SAVE YOUR VALUABLE TIME!
Dwyer understands the value of your time. We want you to be able to find what you are looking for
quickly and get it promptly. Our catalog contains what you need to make a buying decision full product
specifications, product drawings, part numbers and more. Our website offers everything in the catalog
and more, including lead time indication. Order direct on the website for fast and easy product
selection, order placement and ship status with tracking numbers. Dwyer maintains over 5000 line
items in inventory. Orders for stock items placed by 2:00 PMU.S. Central Time ship the same day. Most
non-stock products have less than a 2-week lead time.
II
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com
III_CustServiceTech_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:44 PM Page I
CUSTOMERSERVICE | FRIENDLY&FAST
REALPEOPLE
Courteous and professional customer service representatives are available via phone and email to
process and provide assistance with your order. Dwyer provides industry leading response time to answer
your call quickly without making you wait.
PRICING
Contact us for formal quotes, Dwyer offers bids and project quotes. Discounts are available for particular
customer types based on quantities purchased.
PRODUCTDELIVERY | PROMPT &ACCURATE

LARGEINVENTORY LOCATEDCENTRALLYINTHEU.S.
Dwyer is committed to get you your order quickly with more than 5,000 line items in stock in our Michigan
City, Indiana headquarters and in most cases lead times less than two weeks for non-stock products.
FASTPROCESSINGANDPACKING
Our dedicated shipping staff packs and ships your order the same day on stock items ordered before 2:00
PMU.S. Central Time.
FLEXIBLESHIPPING
Dwyer offers blanket orders for OEMs to schedule out your product shipments to be when you need them.
Contact us for details.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT | KNOWLEDGEABLE & HELPFUL

All of our technical sales staff are degreed engineers trained to be product and industry experts. We listen
to your needs and get you the answers you want quickly.
WEHELPYOUFINDASOLUTION
Product Selection
Application Assistance
Regulatory and Agency Approval Compliance
Installation Guidance
Maintenance and Repair
Product Customization for OEMs
TOCONTACTATECHNICALSUPPORTENGINEER
PHONE
FAX
EMAIL
219/879-8000
219/872-9057
tech@dwyermail.com
III
IV_Web1_i_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:56 PM Page 1
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
ITS ALL THERE FOR YOU, ANYTIME YOU NEED IT!
DWYERDIGITALCATALOG
Browse the catalog on the web or download to your
computer to have access to it when offline
Search by any word or phrase in the catalog
Print or email pages
Add notes to any page
DWYERCATALOGAPP
Available on iOS and Google Play Markets
Designed for iPad, iPhone, and Android mobile devices
Download the catalog to your mobile device and view it
anytime when offline
Search by word or phrase
Thumbnail page navigation
PRODUCTINFORMATION
We offer more than what is in the Dwyer catalog more
products, more options and more technical details
Instruction manuals and catalog pages in PDFformat for
easy viewing and download
Product dimensions viewable in web browser
Product drawings in DWG format for downloading and
using in CAD software
Agency approval certificates CE, FM, UL, CSA and ATEX
Product price and lead time
Product country of origin
PRODUCTSEARCH
Search by model number, keyword or series
PRODUCTCONFIGURATOR
Create and order your own custom Dwyer product on the web
Easy to use graphic interface lets you see all available options
and select what you need for your application
Shows option rules so that you can see what options are not
compatible
VIDEOLIBRARY
A collection of informative and instructional videos that
are centered on a given product series
Search videos according to product category
Link to product page for further information
ANDMORE!
Product applications and technical guides

Download product brochures and catalogs in PDFformat
Frequently asked questions
Industry articles
Popular products
IV
V_Web2_SocialMedia_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:01 PM Page 1
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
SAVETIME&MONEY
WITH EASYTO USE FEATURES ON THE DWYER INSTRUMENTS WEBSITE!
SHOPPING CART & CHECKOUT

Shipping methods, shipping cost and taxes are shown during checkout to see total order cost
Discounted pricing and price structure are shown to take advantage of volume price breaks
MY ACCOUNT
Save multiple ship to addresses for easy drop shipments
Save and change account details and defaults
MY FAVORITES
Save favorite products with notes for organizing and ordering repeat order products
Save favorite Dwyer website pages for easy reference
MY QUOTES
Create quotes right on the website from the shopping cart
Quotes are saved on the website and can be directly converted to orders
Email and print quotes for reference or to share with others
MY PROJECTS
Save lists of products with your project name and notes
Projects are saved on the website and can be directly converted to orders
MY ORDERS
See your order history with ship status and tracking number All orders, not just web orders
Reorder directly from old orders
MY INVOICES
See your invoice history with balance due
Try it now at:WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
CHECK DWYER OUT ONLINE

SOCIALMEDIA
FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION DWYER HAS TO OFFER!
FINDUSON:
WWW.TWITTER.COM/DWYERINSTRUMENT
WWW.YOUTUBE.COM/DWYERINSTRUMENTS
WWW.LINKEDIN.COM/COMPANY/DWYER-INSTRUMENTS
WWW.FACEBOOK.COM/DWYERINSTRUMENTSINCORPORATED
WWW.SLIDESHARE.NET/DWYER_INSTRUMENTS
VI_Calibration_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:08 PM Page 1
CALIBRATION &CERTIFICATE SERVICES
CERTIFICATEOFCONFORMANCE
CERTIFICATEOFCALIBRATION
A standard Certificate of Conformance is available FREEof

charge at the time of order for most products. This document
certifies that the product was manufactured to conform to the
published specifications in Dwyer Instruments literature.
A standard Certificate of Calibration is available FREE of

charge at the time of order for most products. This document
certifies that the product was tested to conform to the published
accuracy specification published in the specifications in Dwyer
Instruments literature.
FACTORY CALIBRATIONCERTIFICATE
CERTIFICATE OFNISTCALIBRATION
A Factory Calibration Certificate gives you assurance that the

unit has been tested for performance at the time of
manufacture. The certificate includes testing points with
recorded test data. Factory Calibration Certificates are available
for many popular products. Pricing and availability varies by
product. Please consult the options listing for the product on the
catalog page or see the product on our website for availability.
A Certificate of NIST Calibration is available for most indicating

and transmitting instrumentation products at an additional
charge. This certificate is created in our testing lab to NIST
traceable test instruments and includes test points with
recorded data and the reference standard. Pricing and
availability varies by product. Please consult the options listing
for the product on the catalog page or see the product on our
website for availability. For some products customer specified
test points can be specified for an additional charge.
VI
VII_CreditCard_left tabs copy 7/9/14 11:00 AM Page I
SPECIAL MODELS FOR OEM REQUIREMENTS

CUSTOMIZEDFORYOU!
OFFERED IN A WIDE VARIETY OF DESIGNS, FEATURES AND SCALES
Special instrument designs can be supplied to meet a wide range of OEM requirements and specific application needs. Custom scales and
private brand identification can easily be furnished. These include: chrome or specially painted bezels, special membranes, special ranges
and calibrations, dual scales, reflective scales, special cleaning and OEM identification. For specific information please contact our customer
service department at 219-879-8000.
CONTACT US | U.S. 219/879-8000 | U.K. (+44) (0)1494-461707 | A.U. (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 | China +852-23181007 VII
VIII_Terms_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:10 PM Page 1
STANDARD TERMS &CONDITIONS OF SALE

Dwyer Instruments, Inc. - Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Prices and Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2. Shipping dates are approximate. They are dependent upon credit approval and subject to delays beyond our control.
3. Terms: Net 30 days to companies with established credit rating. In the event Buyer fails to fulfill previous terms of payment, or in case
Seller shall have any doubt at any time as to Buyer's financial responsibility, Seller may decline to make further deliveries except upon
receipt of cash in advance or other special arrangements.
4. Point and Title: All material is sold EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Title to all material sold shall pass to buyer upon delivery
by Seller to carrier at shipping point.
5. State and Local Taxes: Any taxes which the Seller may be required to pay or collect upon or with respect to the sale, purchase,
delivery, use or consumption of any of the material covered hereby shall be for the account of the Buyer and shall be added to the
purchase price.
6. Special tooling, dies, silk screens and molds acquired specially to produce goods for Buyer remain the property of Dwyer Instruments,
Inc., and may not be removed. They will be maintained in good condition for a minimum period of three years from the date of the
original purchase order.
7. Trade Compliance: Buyer acknowledges that the products, software, and technology, including technical information and documents
(collectively Items), of Dwyer Instruments, Inc., are subject to regulation by agencies of the U.S. government including, but not limited
to, the U.S. Department of Commerce. Buyer shall comply with the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and all applicable
U.S.laws and regulations regarding the sale, delivery and transfer of said Items. Buyer shall not, without first obtaining the required
licenses, authorizations or approvals from the appropriate U.S. government agency; (i) export, re-export, transfer or divert any Item
directly or indirectly to any country or national resident thereof, or any person, entity or country that has restrictions imposed upon
them by the U.S. government, (ii) engage in, or knowingly sell to any party engaged in activity related to the development, production,
use, testing, or maintenance of Weapons of Mass Destruction, including uses related to nuclear, missile, chemical or biological
warfare, or (iii) engage in, or knowingly sell to any party engaged in activity related to the development, production, use, or
maintenance of any safeguarded or unsafeguarded nuclear fuel facility or components for such facilities. Buyer shall fully cooperate
with Seller, without charge, in any official audit or inspection by an authorized agent, official, employee, or accredited representative
of the U.S. government. Buyer shall indemnify and hold Seller harmless from, or in connection with, any violation of this Section by
Buyer, its employees, consultants, agents, or customers. The obligations, requirements and claims described herein shall survive the
expiration of any business relationship with Dwyer Instruments, Inc., including its divisions, subsidiaries and affiliated companies.
8. Limited Warranty: The Seller warrants all Dwyer Instruments and equipment to be free from defects in workmanship or material under
normal use and service for a period of one year from date of shipment. Liability under this warranty is limited to repair or replacement
EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc. of any parts which prove to be defective within that time or repayment of the purchase price
at the Seller's option provided the instruments have been returned, transportation prepaid, within one year from date of purchase. All
technical advice, recommendations and services are based on technical data and information which the Seller believes to be reliable
and are intended for use by persons having skill and knowledge of the business, at their own discretion. In no case is Seller liable
beyond replacement of equipment EXW Ex Works Dwyer Instruments, Inc. or the full purchase price. This warranty does not apply if
the maximum ratings label is removed or if the instrument or equipment is abused, altered, used at ratings above the maximum
specified, or otherwise misused in any way.
THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY
ADVERTISEMENTS OR BY AGENTS AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, BOTH EXPRESS AND IMPLIED. THERE ARE NO IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR GOODS COVERED HEREUNDER.
9. Buyer's Remedies: THE BUYER'S EXCLUSIVE AND SOLE REMEDY ON ACCOUNT OF OR IN RESPECT TO THE FURNISHING
OF NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL SHALL BE TO SECURE REPLACEMENT THEREOF AS AFORESAID. THE
SELLER SHALL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF ANY LABOR EXPENDED ON ANY SUCH MATERIAL OR FOR
ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES TO ANYONE BY REASON OF THE FACT
THAT IT SHALL HAVE BEEN NON-CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE.
10. Acceptance: All orders shall be subject to the terms and conditions contained or referred to in the Seller's quotation, acknowledgment,
and to those listed here and to no others whatsoever. No waiver, alteration or modification of these terms and conditions shall be
binding unless in writing and signed by an executive officer of the Seller. All orders are subject to written acceptance by Dwyer
Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, Indiana, U.S.A.
VIII
IX_TableContents_table of contents 7/7/14 4:00 PM Page 1
106
Differential Pressure Gages, Manometers (Stationary), Differential Pressure Gages/Switches (Digital &Dial), Differential Pressure
Switches, Differential Pressure Transmitters (Air & Gas), Room Status Monitor, Differential Pressure Transmitters (Liquids & Gas), Single
Pressure Gages (Dial &Digital), Single Pressure Gages/Switches/Transmitters (Digital), Single Pressure Switches, Single Pressure
Data Loggers, Single Pressure Transmitters
AIRQUALITY
107
138
Flow Sensors, Fume Hood Monitors, Air Flow Switches, Air VelocityTransmitters, Humidity Switches, Humidity/Temperature
Transmitters, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Monitor, Carbon Dioxide Transmitters, Gas Sensing Transmitters, Occupancy Sensors,
Air Filters
FLOW
139
230
Flowmeters (Variable Area,In-Line, Dial, Orifice Plate, Venturi, Totalizers &Accessories), Flow Sensors (In-Line & Portable), Sight Flow
Indicators, Flow Switches (Paddle, Thermal, Shuttle/Piston), Flow Transmitters (In-Line, Turbine, Paddlewheel, Electromagnetic &
Ultrasonic), Watermeters, Mass Flowmeters/Controllers
TEMPERATURE
231
286
Thermometers (Dial, Glass &Digital Solar), Thermometers with Switch, Thermometers with Transmitter, Temperature/Process
Controllers, Panel Meters/Indicators, Temperature Switches (Limit, Digital & Mechanical), Thermostats, Temperature Transmitters,
Temperature Sensors, Temperature Data Loggers
LEVEL
287
338
Level Indicators, Water Leak Detectors, Level Switches (Float, Optical, Displacer, Conductivity, Capacitive, Tilt, Tuning Fork, Vibrating
Rod, Paddle & Diaphragm), LevelTransmitters (Submersible, Capacitive, Ultrasonic, Float, Mechanical), Level Data Loggers,
Level/Pump Controllers, PumpLeak Detectors, Bin Vibrators/Aerators
PROCESSCONTROL
339
392
Panel Meters/Indicators, Control Enclosures, Annunciators/Alarm Modules, Signal Conditioners/Isolating Transmitters, Relays, Current
Transformers/Switches, Signal Converters, Power Supplies, Power Supplies/Transformers, Fan Speed Controls, Intrinsically Safe
Barriers, Timers, TimerControllers, Time Delay Relays, Ground/Continuity Controls, Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag)
Transmitters/Sensors, Vibration Controls, Conveyor Controls, Data Loggers (Indicating, Miniature, Wireless &USB), Chart Recorders
TESTEQUIPMENT
393
458
Manometers (Portable &Air Velocity), Pitot Tubes, Air Flow Grids, Vane Anemometers, Wind Meters, Vane Thermo-Anemometers,
Thermo-Anemometers, Air Flow Hood, HVAC Balancing Instruments, Thermo-Hygrometers, Moisture Meters, Gas Analyzers/Kits, Leak
Detectors, Sound Meters, Light Meters, Backflow Test Kit, Thermometers (Thermocouple, Immersion & Infrared), Hand Held
Thermocouples, Thermal Imaging Camera, Multimeters, Clamp Multimeters, Pen Multimeters, Signal Generators/Multimeters,
Tachometers, Liquid Analyzers, Calibration Pumps, Pressure Calibrators
VALVES
459
530
Valves (Ball, Butterfly, Globe, Angle Seat, Solenoid, Diaphragm Pulse & Needle), Strainers, Manifolds, Position
Indicators/Switches/Transmitters, Pressure to Current Transducer, Valve Controllers (Digital), Current to Pressure Transducers,
Positioners, Volume Booster, Regulators
ACCESSORIES
531
Filters, Siphons/Cooling Extensions, Gage Gards/Pressure Snubbers, Strap Wrench, Fittings (Stainless Steel &Nylon), Pneumatic
(Valves & Fittings), Gage Tubing, Static Pressure Sensors, Miscellaneous Accessories
551
TECHGUIDE
552
Glossary, HVACMobile Application, Understanding Pressure Sensor Accuracy, Reference Tables, Trademark Acknowledgements
560
INDEX
561
Detailed Product Index by Series or Model Number and Category
576
CALL TO ORDER | 800/872-9141 IX
TABLEOFCONTENTS
PRESSURE
X_KeyProducts_Layout 1 7/21/14 7:55 AM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
SERIESRHP-E/N
WallMount Humidity/Temperature/Dew Point Transmitter
Humidity and temperature sensors are field replaceable to reduce service costs
The polymer capacitance humidity sensor is not affected by condensation, fog,
high humidity or contaminants
Remote display tool allows users to view the measurement on non-display
models without opening the enclosure
PAGE 125
SERIESCDTA
Communicating Carbon Dioxide Detector
Field selectable Modbus RTU and BACnet MS/TP Communications for
measuring CO2, humidity, temperature, temperature set point and override
For improved accuracy, patented Digital Intelligent Temperature Compensation
Algorithm (DITCA) corrects for self heating error found in most combination
transmitters
Single beam dual wavelength non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) sensor technology
PAGE 133
SERIESDFMT & DFMT2

Digital Paddlewheel Flow Transmitter
Simultaneous flow and total indication on large screen eliminates the need to
toggle between menus saving time
PVDFsensor and impeller allow for use even in corrosive process media
applications
IP65 rating keeps the unit protected in high moisture applications
PAGES 204 &205
MODELUFM
Compact Ultrasonic Flowmeter
Simple menu structure makes set up easy saving on installation time
Compact body is perfect for applications with limited space
Cost effective design saves on costs
PAGE 217
Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation, Inc.
XI_KeyProducts_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:13 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
MOBILE METER
Test Instrument App
Any Android phone or tablet can become your manometer, thermo-hygrometer,
or thermo-anemometer
Log measurements and email them directly from your phone or tablet
View the measurement as a digital meter or analog gage
PAGE 422
SERIESWDPM
Differential Pressure Modules
Wireless manometer allows the user to take measurements in the duct while
adjusting dampers on the other side of the room
Measures differential pressure, velocity, & flow
Measurements can be displayed on the UHH universal handheld or the Mobile
Meter App
PAGE 428
SERIESWE01
2-Piece NPT Stainless Steel Ball Valve
Capable of being configured to fit any application
Limit switches can be mounted to manual valves for remote monitoring
Electric or pneumatic actuators available
PAGES 462-463
SERIES ACT
Pneumatic and Electric Actuators
ISO5211 mounting configuration or easy installation
Pneumatic actuators offer corrosion resistance anodized finish
NAMUR mounting configuration on pneumatic actuators
Two-position electric actuators include auxiliary limit switches
Modulating electric actuators offer an output for position monitoring
PAGE 480-481
XI
XII_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:15 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
SERIES RHP-E/N
SERIES CDT
SERIES CDTA
Wall Mount Humidity/

Temperature/Dew
Point Transmitter
Carbon Dioxide/
Temperature
Transmitter
Communicating
Carbon Dioxide
Detector
Optional LCDDisplay,
Replaceable Sensors
NDIR CO2 Sensor,

Universal Outputs,
Optional Relay
Measures CO2,
Humidity,
Temperature,
Temperature Set
Point, and Override
PAGE 132
PAGE 125
SERIES CDTR
SERIESDFMT
SERIESDFMT2
Carbon Dioxide/RH/
Temperature
Transmitter
Digital Paddlewheel
Flow Transmitter
Digital Paddlewheel
Flow Transmitter
Flow and Total

Indication, Easy to
Read LCD Display, 4
to 20 mA or Pulse
Output
Flow and Total

Indication, Easy to
Read LCD Display
NDIR CO2 Sensor,

Universal CO2/RH
Outputs, Optional
Relay
PAGE 134
PAGE 204
XII
PAGE 205
SERIES MFS2
MODELUFM
MODELUTG
Magnetic Inductive
Flow Sensor
Compact Ultrasonic
Flowmeter
Ultrasonic Thickness
Gage
Lower Cost PVDF

Design, Frequency
Output, 1% Accuracy,
Maintenance-Free
Cost Effective,
Compact &Adjustable
Design, Non-Invasive
Ideal For Use with

Ultrasonic Flow
Transmitters,
Adjustable Sound
Velocity
PAGE 208
PAGE 222
PAGE 133
PAGE 217
PAGE 221
MODELRVM
SERIES BTT
SERIES TE-I
Portable Radar Wave

Velocity Meter
Temperature
Transmitter
Immersion
Temperature
Sensors
Non-Contact
Measurement,
Handheld Meter, Angle
Compensation
Current or Voltage
Output, NEMA 4X
Enclosures
PAGE 262
New Integral Mounting

Connection, Welded
Thermowells
PAGE 279
XIII_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:16 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
SERIESTE-E/N
SERIESWD3
MODELULSS
Wall Mount
Temperature Sensor
Water Leak Detector
Ultrasonic Level
Sensor
Battery or External
Powered, SPSTor
DPDTRelays
Discrete Wall Mount

Housing
PAGE 281
PAGE 294
PAGE 327
MODELULSM
MODELULSL
MODELDPMF
Ultrasonic Level
Sensor
Ultrasonic Level
Sensor
Flush Mount LCD

Digital Panel Meter
9.8 (3 m) Measuring
Range, Non-Contact
Transmitter, 4 SPST
Programmable Relays
18 (5.5 m) Measuring
Range, Non-Contact
Transmitter, 4 SPST
Programmable Relays
3-1/2 Digit LCD,

Surface Mount
PAGE 328
PAGE 329
PAGE 344
SERIESBGM
SERIESMCS
SERIESAPT
Bar Graph Meter
Miniature Current
Switch
ACPower
Transformers
Low Cost, Solid or No

Core, LED
Confirmation,
Adjustable Set Point
40 VA to 100 VA,
Single or Dual Hub,
Circuit Breaker, UL
Class 2
Clear Relative Position

&High Resolution In
One
PAGE 353
PAGE 362
PAGE 369
SERIES WTDL
SERIES DW-WIFI
MOBILE METER
Wireless
Temperature/
Humidity Data
Logger
Wireless Wi-Fi Data

Logger
Test Instrument App

Works with most
Android
Phones/Tablets;
Wireless Probes
Measures
Temperature/Humidity,
Integral LCD
Transmission up to
400 Feet, Text/Email
Alarm Updates
PAGE 388
4.1 (1.25 m)
Measuring Range,
Non-Contact
Transmitter, SPST
Programmable Relays
PAGE 389
PAGE 422
XIII
XIV_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:17 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
MODELUHH-BTG
MODELAP1
MODELRP1
Wireless Mobile
Gateway
Thermo-Anemometer
Probe
Thermo-Hygrometer
Probe
Converts UHHProbe
Wireless Signals to
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Wireless Technology
Wired, Measures
Velocity, Flow, &
Temperature
Wired, Measures
Humidity,
Temperature, Dew
Point, &Wet Bulb
Temperatures
PAGE 422
PAGE 426
PAGE 426
MODELVP1
MODELAP2
MODELRP2
100 mm Vane
Thermo-Anemometer
Probe
Thermo-Anemometer
Probe
Thermo-Hygrometer
Probe
Wireless, Measures
Velocity, Flow, &
Temperature
Wireless, Measures
Humidity,
Temperature, Dew
Point, & Wet Bulb
Temperatures
Wired, Measures
Velocity, Flow,
Humidity, &
Temperature
PAGE 426
PAGE 427
PAGE 427
MODELVP2
SERIES UHH-ACC
SERIES WDPM
100 mm Vane
Thermo-Anemometer
Probe
Universal Handheld
Accessories
Differential Pressure
Modules
Wireless, Measures
Differential Pressure,
Air Velocity, &Flow
Wireless, Measures
Velocity, Flow,
Humidity, &
Temperature
PAGE 427
XIV
PAGE 428
PAGE 428
XV_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:20 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
MODELDDM-01
MODELRLD2
MODELLUX-01
Laser Distance Meter
Refrigerant Leak
Detector
Digital Light Meter
Measures up to 70
Meters, Class II Laser
PAGE 437
PAGE 437
PAGE 439
MODEL SLR-01
SERIESTAC-L
SERIES BCHP
Handheld Solar
Power Meter
Portable Digital
Tachometer
Low Pressure Hand

Pump
Measures up to 1999
W/m2, Auto-Ranging
Contact or Photo NonContact Operation,

Backlit LCD
Vacuum or Pressure,
Generates up to 870
psi
PAGE 439
PAGE 452
PAGES 462-463
Silicon Photodiode
Sensor, Reads up to
200,000 Lux
Audio and Visual

Indication, 12Flexible
Gooseneck Design
PAGE 457
SERIESWE01
SERIESWE02
SERIESWE03
2-Piece NPT
Stainless Steel Ball
Valve
3-Piece NPT
Valve
3-Piece Tri-Clamp
Valve
Full Port, Vented Ball,

Electric or Pneumatic
Actuators

Actuators
Cavity Filled, Full Port,

Actuators
PAGES 464-465
PAGES 466-467
XV
XVI_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:20 PM Page 1
NEW! PRODUCTS
SERIESWE04
SERIESWE31
SERIESWE33
2-Piece Flanged
Valve
3-Way NPT Stainless

Steel Ball Valve
3-Way Tri-Clamp
Valve

Actuators
150# ANSIFlange,
Vented Ball, Electric or
Pneumatic Actuators
PAGES 468-469
PAGES 472-473
XVI
PAGES 474-475
SERIESWE34
SERIES ACT
SERIESSN
3-Way Flanged
Valve
Pneumatic and
Electric Actuators
NAMUR Mount
SolenoidValve
Actuators for Valve

and Damper
Automation
Manual Override,
100% Duty Rating
150# ANSIFlange,
Vented Ball, Electric or
Pneumatic Actuators
PAGES 476-477
Cavity Filled, Electric

and Pneumatic
Actuators
PAGE 480-481
PAGE 499
001_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:10 AM Page 1
Gages
pages 4-11, 15-17
Manometers,
Stationary
pages 12-14
Gages/Switches, Digital
pages 18-21
Gages/Switches, Dial
pages 22-28
Switches
pages 29-43
Transmitters, Air &Gas
pages 44-49, 51-60
Room Status Monitor

page 50
Transmitters,
Liquids &Gas
pages 60-65
Single Pressure Gages,

Dial
pages 66-74

Digital
pages 75-80
Single Pressure Gages/

Switches/Transmitters,
Digital
pages 81-84
Single Pressure
Switches
pages 85-94
Single Pressure
Data Loggers
page 95
Single Pressure
Transmitters
pages 96-106
PRESSURE | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 2-3
Typical Applications
PRESSURE
002_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:16 AM Page 2
Differential pressure gage assists operator in adjusting venturi

pressure drop in dust scrubber.
Gasoline vapor recovery system.
This scrubber design removes unwanted dust or particulate matter from air or gas
using an adjustable throat venturi. To adjust the pressure drop across the venturi, a
jack-screw-actuated sliding vane varies the slot width. A permanently mounted Dwyer
Magnehelic differential pressure gage indicates the venturi pressure drop while the
operator adjusts to the desired or design setting. Where water may possibly enter the
gage sensing lines, as in this application, drop legs with drain valves are needed to
permit draining the lines at their lowest point. Good engineering practice dictates that
the Magnehelic gage always be mounted above the sensing tap when possible to
prevent moisture accumulation in the lines and gage. At minimum, mount the gage
above the lowest point in the sensing lines.
Some area pollution control agencies require that 90% or more of gasoline vapor
vented at service stations when fuel is dispensed must be prevented from venting to
atmosphere. Using a dual hose dispenser, this vapor recovery system is a vacuum
assist, vapor burnoff type. The blower creates a low vacuum at the nozzle, routing
vapor from the automobile tank to underground storage tanks. As uncondensed vapor
pressure reaches 2 in to 3 in w.c. pressure, a Dwyer 1950 Series explosion-proof
differential pressure switch activates a rooftop burnoff unit, which ignites excess vapor.
The Magnehelic differential pressure gage mounted on the station wall monitors tank
pressure to verify system operation. The gage is calibrated in inches of gasoline, from
+6 to -2. This allows the operator to determine the necessary level correction due to
tank pressure prior to dipsticking the tanks through the fill pipe.
Dwyer gages indicate pressurization of special rooms.
Filling scuba divers air tanks.
A zero-center Dwyer Magnehelic differential pressure gage with an 0.25 in w.c.

range either side of zero makes an effective monitor for proper operation of room
pressurization systems. In the example, differential gage B has its high pressure port
open to room 2 and its low pressure port to room 1; gage A has its high pressure
port open to room 1 and its low pressure port open to the atmosphere. With the
makeup air supply damper adjusted properly, room 2 will be a higher pressure than
room 1 which is at higher than atmospheric pressure; both gages will read positive.
Should the air supply to room 2 be obstructed, gage B will read negative. If the air
supply fails entirely, both gages will read zero. For even better security, a Photohelic
switch/gage will provide automatic alarm or start-up of a backup system.
The Dwyer Series DPG with oxygen cleaning and 5000 psi range is used in gas
blending applications for filling scuba diver's air tanks. The DPG is the master mixing
gage in this manifold apparatus. Two or three gases may be blended with the manifold
to produce the appropriate blend of breathable gas depending on the diver and the
depths they will reach. With the flow adjustment knobs and the 0.25% full scale
accuracy DPG, precise tank charging rates are maintained.
003_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:17 AM Page 3
PRESSURE
Compact switch/gage monitors pressure, actuates alarm.
Zero-center switch/gage controls the inert atmosphere in glove box.
This portable pressure monitor alarm utilizes a Dwyer Mini-Photohelic differential

pressure switch/gage to monitor either positive pressure, as in a clean room, or
negative pressure, as in a fume or paint spray hood. It sounds an alarm, both audible
and visual, when pressure exceeds either a preset high or low limit. The unit can be
used temporarily to verify proper operation after initial installation. Or it can be
mounted permanently for continuous monitoring. In applications where a single fixed
alarm pressure level is sufficient, a differential pressure switch can be used instead.
A controlled inert atmosphere glove-box is used in the fields of physical chemistry

and metallurgy for handling and welding special or hazardous materials. A Dwyer
Photohelic differential pressure switch/gage serves as an automatic and readily
adjustable pressure control for the helium, argon or nitrogen gas used in the system.
The box is first evacuated, then pressurized with the required gas. Therefore, a zerocenter Photohelic switch/gage is used, permitting both pressure and vacuum to be
read and controlled by a single gage. Use of the low pressure gage connection (rear
chamber of gage) and a Buna-N diaphragm is suggested to minimize leaks from or
to the atmosphere.
Mercoid Series DA pressure switch maintains desired gas pressure

in tank.
Three-valve manifold simplifies installation of wet/wet differential

pressure transmitter.
Demand for compressed gas varies in this gas line. So a Mercoid Series DA
adjustable deadband pressure switch is included to turn the compressor on at low
pressure and off when the maximum pressure is reached.
When using differential pressure transmitters in fluid applications, it is essential to

periodically make sure that there is no air in the system, as this can cause erroneous
readings. Unfortunately, the necessary three-valve bleed system is often expensive
and large, making installation difficult and bulky. For this reason, Dwyer Instruments,
Inc. offers the 3V option on all 629 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters. This
compact, lightweight, and economical bleed manifold is shipped factory-installed on
the 629, eliminating the hassle of constructing a custom apparatus. The 629, when
combined with the three-valve option, makes for an ideal setup to monitor hydraulic
filter clogging or other fluid pressure sensing applications.
004_Layout 1 7/15/14 9:33 AM Page 4
PRESSURE
Series
2000
Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gages

Indicate Positive, Negative or Differential, Accurate within 2%
Differential Pressure Gages
RUBBER PRESSURE RELIEF PLUG

WILL UNSEAT ITSELF WHEN GAGE
IS OVERPRESSURIZED
.025 [.64] SPACE CREATED BY 3 SPACER
PADS WHEN SURFACE MOUNTED.
17/32
DO NOT OBSTRUCT. PROVIDES PATH
[13.49]
FOR RELIEF OF OVERPRESSURE.
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH
PRESSURE
1-1/4 [31.75]
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE
4-1/2
NPT LOW
[114.3]
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
4-3/4
15/32 [11.91]
[120.65]
1-11/16 [42.86]
7/16 [11.11]
1-1/4
[31.75]
17/32
[13.49]
5
[127]
4-47/64
[120.27]
4-1/2
[114.3]
Scan here
to watch
product video
5-1/2
[139.70]
MOUNTING RING
Select the Dwyer Magnehelic gage for high accuracy guaranteed within 2% of
full-scale and for the wide choice of 81 models available to suit your needs precisely. Using
Dwyer's simple, frictionless Magnehelic gage movement, it quickly indicates low air or
non-corrosive gas pressures either positive, negative (vacuum) or differential. The
design resists shock, vibration and over-pressures. No manometer fluid to evaporate,
freeze or cause toxic or leveling problems. It's inexpensive, too.
The Magnehelic gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blower pressures,
filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop across orifice plates, liquid
levels with bubbler systems and pressures in fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. It also
checks gas-air ratio controls and automatic valves, and monitors blood and respiratory
pressures in medical care equipment.
MOUNTING
A single case size is used for most models of Magnehelic gages. They can be
flush or surface mounted with standard hardware supplied. Although calibrated for
vertical position, many ranges above 1 may be used at any angle by simply rezeroing. However, for maximum accuracy, they must be calibrated in the same
position in which they are used. These characteristics make Magnehelic gages
ideal for both stationary and portable applications. A 4-9/16 hole is required for
flush panel mounting. Complete mounting and connection fittings, plus instructions,
are furnished with each instrument.
15/32
[11.91]
4-3/4 [120.65]
PANEL CUTOUT
2-17/32
[64.29]
3/16
[4.76]
RoHS
[3] 6-32 X 3/16 [4.76] DEEP

HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 4-1/8 [104.78] BOLT CIRCLE
FOR PANEL MOUNTING
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-3/4
[44.45]
1/2
[12.70]
11/16
[17.46]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW

PRESSURE CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-3/4
[44.45]
11/16
[17.46]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible,
compatible gases (natural gas option
available). Note: May be used with
hydrogen. Order a Buna-N diaphragm.
Pressures must be less than 35 psi.
Wetted Materials: Consult factory.
Housing: Die cast aluminum case and
bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish
is coated gray to withstand 168 hour
salt spray corrosion test.
Accuracy: 2% of FS (3% on - 0,
-100 Pa, -125 Pa, 10MM and 4% on
- 00, -60 Pa, -6MM ranges), throughout
range at 70F (21.1C).
Pressure Limits: -20 in Hg to 15 psig
(-0.677 to 1.034 bar); MP option: 35
psig (2.41 bar); HP option: 80 psig
(5.52 bar).
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at
approximately 25 psig (1.72 bar),
standard gages only.
1/2
[12.70]
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
Temperature Limits: 20 to 140F*
(-6.67 to 60C). -20F (-28C) with low
temperature option.
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in
vertical position. Consult factory for
other position orientations.
Process Connections: 1/8 female
NPT duplicate high and low pressure
taps - one pair side and one pair back.
Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2
lb 2 oz (963 g).
Standard Accessories: Two 1/8 NPT
plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two
1/8 pipe thread to rubber tubing
adapter, and three flush mounting
adapters with screws. (Mounting and
snap ring retainer substituted for three
adapters in MP & HP gage
accessories.)
Agency Approval: RoHS. Note:-SP
models not RoHS approved.
For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating, next higher
rating is recommended. See Medium and High pressure options.
ACCESSORIES
Model A-432 Portable Kit
Combine carrying case with any Magnehelic gage
of standard range, except high pressure
connection. Includes 9 ft (2.7 m) of 3/16 ID rubber
tubing, standhang bracket and terminal tube with
holder.
Model A-605 Air Filter Gage Accessory Kit
Adapts any standard Magnehelic gage for use as
an air filter gage. Includes aluminum surface
mounting bracket with screws, two 5 ft (1.5 m)
lengths of 1/4 aluminum tubing two static pressure
tips and two molded plastic vent valves, integral
compression fittings on both tips and valves.
A-605B Air Filter Gage Accessory Kit, Air filter kit with two plastic open/close
valves, two 4 steel static tips, plastic tubing and mounting flange
A-605C Air Filter Gage Accessory Kit, Air filter kit with two plastic open/close
valves, two plastic static tips, plastic tubing and mounting flange
Flush, Surface or Pipe Mounted
Enclosure Mounted
See page 7 (Magnehelic Gage Mounting Accessories)
Over Protection Note: See page 5 (Series 2000)
005_Layout 1 7/15/14 9:39 AM Page 5
Magnehelic Gage Models & Ranges
PRESSURE
Series
2000
O-ring seal for cover assures pressure integrity of case.
Clear plastic face is highly resistant to breakage. Provides

undistorted viewing of pointer and scale.
OVERPRESSUREPROTECTION
Blowout plug is comprised of a rubber plug on the rear which
functions as a relief valve by unseating and venting the gage
interior when over pressure reaches approximately 25 psig
(1.7 bar).To provide a free path for pressure relief, there are
four spacer pads which maintain 0.023 clearance when gage
is surface mounted. Do not obstruct the gap created by these
pads.
The blowout plug is not used on models above 180 of water
pressure, medium or high pressure models, or on gages
which require an elastomer other than silicone for the
diaphragm.
The blowout plug should not be used as a system
overpressure control. High supply pressures may still cause
the gage to fail due to over pressurization, resulting in
property damage or serious injury. Good engineering
practices should be utilized to prevent your system from
exceeding the ratings or any component.
Precision litho-printed scale is accurate and easy to read.

Calibrated range spring is flat spring steel. Small amplitude
of motion assures consistency and long life. It reacts to
pressure on diaphragm. Live length adjustable for calibration.
Red tipped pointer of heat treated aluminum tubing is easy
to see. It is rigidly mounted on the helix shaft.
Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent pointer over-travel
without damage.
Wishbone assembly provides mounting for helix, helix
bearings and pointer shaft.
Jeweled bearings are shock-resistant mounted; provide
virtually friction-free motion for helix. Motion damped with
high viscosity silicone fluid.
Die cast aluminum case is precision made and iridite-dipped

to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test. Exterior
finished in baked dark gray hammerloid. One case size is
used for all standard pressure options, and for both surface
and flush mounting.
Helix is precision made from an alloy of high magnetic

permeability. Mounted in jeweled bearings, it turns freely,
following the magnetic field to move the pointer across
the scale.
Silicone rubber diaphragm with integrally molded O-ring is

supported by front and rear plates. It is locked and sealed in
position with a sealing plate and retaining ring. Diaphragm
motion is restricted to prevent damage due to overpressures.
Zero adjustment screw is conveniently located in the plastic

cover, and is accessible without removing cover.
O-ring seal provides pressure tightness.
Samarium Cobalt magnet mounted at one end of range spring

rotates helix without mechanical linkages.
Range Inches
of Water
Model
.05-0-.2
2000-00N
0-.25
2000-00
0-.50
2000-0
0-1.0
2001
0-2.0
2002
0-3.0
2003
0-4.0
2004
0-5.0
2005
0-6.0
2006
0-8.0
2008
0-10
2010
0-12
2012
0-15
2015
0-20
2020
0-25
2025
0-30
2030
0-40
2040
0-50
2050
0-60
2060
0-80
2080
0-100
2100
0-120
2120
0-150
2150
0-160
2160
0-180
2180*
0-250
2250*
Zero Center Ranges
0.125-0-0.125
2300-00
.25-0-.25
2300-0
.5-0-.5
2301
1-0-1
2302
2-0-2
2304
5-0-5
2310
10-0-10
2320
15-0-15
2330
Range
PSI
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-30
Range,
CM of
Water
Model
0-15
2000-15CM
0-20
2000-20CM
0-25
2000-25CM
0-50
2000-50CM
0-80
2000-80CM
0-100
2000-100CM
0-150
2000-150CM
0-200
2000-200CM
0-250
2000-250CM
0-300
2000-300CM
Zero Center Ranges
2-0-2
2300-4CM
5-0-5
2300-10CM
15-0-15
2300-30CM
Model
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2210*
2215*
2220*
2230**
These ranges calibrated

for vertical scale position.
Accuracy +/-3%
Accuracy +/-4%
*MP option standard
**HP option standard
Range MM
Model
of Water
2000-6MM
0-6
2000-10MM
0-10
2000-15MM
0-15
2000-25MM
0-25
2000-30MM
0-30
2000-50MM
0-50
2000-80MM
0-80
2000-100MM
0-100
2000-125MM
0-125
2000-150MM
0-150
2000-200MM
0-200
2000-250MM
0-250
2000-300MM
0-300
Zero Center Ranges
3-0-3
2300-6MM
5-0-5
2300-10MM
10-0-10
2300-20MM
Range, Pa
Model
10-0-50
2000-60NPA
0-60
2000-60PA
0-100
2000-100PA
0-125
2000-125PA
0-250
2000-250PA
0-300
2000-300PA
0-500
2000-500PA
0-750
2000-750PA
0-1000
2000-1000PA
Zero Center Ranges
Range, Pa
Model
30-0-30
2300-60PA
50-0-50
2300-100PA
60-0-60
2300-120PA
100-0-100
2300-200PA
125-0-125
2300-250PA
150-0-150
2300-300PA
250-0-250
2300-500PA
500-0-500
2300-1000PA
VELOCITY AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW UNITS

Scales are available on the Magnehelic that read in velocity units (FPM, m/s) or
volumetric flow units (SCFM, m3/s, m3/h). Stocked velocity units with dual range
scales in inches w.c. and feet per minute are shown above. For other ranges contact
the factory.
When ordering volumetric flow scales please specify the maximum flow rate and its
corresponding pressure. Example:0.5 in w.c. = 16,000 CFM.
Range,
Dual Scale Air Velocity Units
kPa
Model
For use with pitot tube
0-0.5
2000-0.5KPA
Range in W.C./
0-1
2000-1KPA
Model
Velocity F.P.M.
0-1.5
2000-1.5KPA
2000-00AV 0-.25/300-2000
0-2
2000-2KPA
0-2.5
2000-2.5KPA
2000-0AV
0-.50/500-2800
0-3
2000-3KPA
0-4
2000-4KPA
2001AV
0-1.0/500-4000
0-5
2000-5KPA
0-8
2000-8KPA
2002AV
0-2.0/1000-5600
0-10
2000-10KPA
0-15
2000-15KPA
2005AV
0-5.0/2000-8800
0-20
2000-20KPA
0-25
2000-25KPA
2010AV
0-10/2000-12500
0-30
2000-30KPA
Zero Center Ranges
2300-1KPA
.5-0-.5
2300-2KPA
1-0-1
2300-2.5KPA
1.25-0-1.25
2300-3KPA
1.5-0-1.5
Dual Scale English/Metric Models
Range,
Range,
in w.c.
Model
Pa or kPa
0-.25
2000-00D
0-62 Pa
0-0.5
2000-0D
0-125 Pa
0-1.0
2001D
0-250 Pa
0-2.0
2002D
0-500 Pa
0-3.0
2003D
0-750 Pa
0-4.0
2004D
0-1.0 kPa
0-5.0
2005D
0-1.25 kPa
0-6.0
2006D
0-1.5 kPa
0-8.0
2008D
0-2.0 kPa
0-10
2010D
0-2.5 kPa
0-15
2015D
0-3.7 kPa
0-20
2020D
0-5 kPa
0-25
2025D
0-6.2 kPa
0-50
2050D
0-12.4 kPa
0-60
2060D
0-15 kPa
ACCESSORIES
A-321, Safety Relief Valve
A-448, 3-piece magnet kit for mounting Magnehelic gage directly to magnetic
surface
A-135, Rubber gasket for panel mounting
A-401, Plastic Carry Case
A-310A 3-Way Vent Valves
In applications where pressure is continuous and the
Magnehelic gage is connected by metal or plastic tubing
which cannot be easily removed, we suggest using Dwyer
A-310A vent valves to connect gage. Pressure can then be
removed to check or re-zero the gage.
Bezel provides flange for flush mounting in panel.
006_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:19 AM Page 6
PRESSURE
Magnehelic Gage Options
LEDSetpoint Indicator
Bright red LED on right scale shows when setpoint is reached. Field adjustable from
gage face, unit operates on 12-24 VDC. Setpoint indicator option comes with medium
pressure (MP)bezel.
Note: 4-13/16 hole for flush mounting.
To order add suffix -SP
Adjustable Signal Flag

Integral with plastic gage cover. Available for most models except those with medium
or high pressure construction. Can be ordered with gage or separate.
To order add suffix -ASF
Transparent Overlays
Furnished in red, yellow, or green to highlight and emphasize critical pressures.
To order add suffix -R (Red)
To order add suffix -Y (Yellow)
To order add suffix -G (Green)
Mirrored Scale Overlay

A Mirrored Scale Overlay is also available to assist in reducing parallax error.
To order add suffix -M
MODELS FOR HIGH STATE PRESSURE APPLICATIONS

Medium Pressure Option: for pressures to 35 psig.
To order add suffix -MP
High Pressure Option: for pressures to 80 psig.
To order add suffix -HP
OPTIONAL BEZELS
Stainless Steel Bezel Option:
304 Stainless Steel Electro polished Ra 16 finished bezel for the Magnehelic is now
available.
To order add suffix -SB
Chrome BezelOption:
A Chrome Plated Aluminum Bezel is now available on the Magnehelic gage for an
aesthetically pleasing finish when mounting on metal surfaces such as control panels.
To order add suffix -CB
OPTIONS To order, add suffix: I.E. 2001-ASF

LT, Low Temperatures to -20F (-28C)
NIST, NIST traceable calibration certificate
FC, factory calibration certificate
007_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:20 AM Page 7
The A-368 is a simple bracket for quickly surface mounting the Magnehelic gage.
After securing the Magnehelic to the A-368 bracket, mount the bracket on any flat
surface.
The A-369 allows the Magnehelic to be easily carried to locations where pressure
readings need to be taken. The A-369 can stand on its own or hang on a nail or hook.
MOUNTING. A single case size is used for most models of Magnehelic gages. They
can be flush or surface mounted with standard hardware supplied. Complete
mounting and connection fittings plus instructions are furnished with each instrument.
A 4-9/16 hole is required for flush panel mounting.
Flush mounting is easily accomplished with the new A-300 Flush Mounting bracket.
This bracket provides a solution to quickly and conveniently flush mount the
Magnehelic. The A-300 is ideal for mounting the Magnehelic on control panel doors.
PRESSURE
Magnehelic Gage Mounting Accessories
PIPE
A-610, Pipe Mounting Kit for installing on 1-1/4 to 2 horizontal or vertical pipe
PANEL
A-286, Magnehelic Gage Panel Mounting Flange
A-610
A-286
PORTABLE
A-369, Stand-Hang Bracket, aluminum, for Magnehelic gage
A-369
A-369
FLUSH
A-300, Flush Mounting Bracket
A-464, Flush Mount Kit for Magnehelic Gages
Pressure
Reference
Port
A-300
A-464
A-300
SURFACE
A-368, Surface Mounting Plate, aluminum, for Magnehelic gage
A-299, Mounting Bracket, flush mount for Magnehelic Gage. Bracket is then surface
mounted. Steel with gray hammerloid epoxy finish
A-371, Surface Mounting Bracket. Use with medium pressure (-MP) or high pressure
(-HP) models only
A-368
A-368
A-299
Series
A-320
A-371
Instrument Enclosure
Protects Various Instruments
Model A-320-A
Model A-320-A With Gage Installed
Series A-320 Instrument Enclosure protects instruments in all applications. The A-320-A
fits standard Magnehelic size instruments (4-9/16 diameter) and the A-320-B fits standard
3000MR Photohelic switch/gage size instruments (4-13/16 diameter). Both models include
silicone tubing, gage barbs and mounting hardware.
Model
A-320-A
A-320-B
Compatible Instruments
Series 2000 Magnehelic Gages, DM-1000 Digital Differential
Pressure Gages, DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter
3000MR Photohelic Switch/Gage, Series 605 Magnehelic
DifferentialPressure Transmitter, DH3 Digihelic Pressure
Controller, Series 2000 Magnehelic Gage with medium and
high pressure options
Model A-320-B
Model A-320-B With Gage Installed
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: ABS.
Process Connections: Anodized aluminum.
Enclosure Rating:NEMA 1 (IP10).
Note: Check instruments rating.
Weight:Model A-320-A:11.29 oz (320 g); A-320-B:16.23 oz (420 g).
Gage Size Opening: A-320-A: 4-9/16 in (115.89 mm); A-320-B: 4-13/16 in
(122.24 mm).
008_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:21 AM Page 8
PRESSURE
Series
AT2
2000
ATEX Approved Series 2000 Magnehelic

Differential Pressure Gage
Magnehelic Gage in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
1-31/32
[50.00]
19/32
[15.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
5-23/64
[136.00]
RANGECHART
Range
Model
in w.c.
2000-00N .05 to 0 to .2
2000-00 0 to .25
2000-0
0 to .50
2001
0 to 1.0
2002
0 to 2.0
2003
0 to 3.0
2004
0 to 4.0
2005
0 to 5.0
2006
0 to 6.0
2008
0 to 8.0
2010
0 to 10
2012
0 to 12
2015
0 to 15
2020
0 to 20
2025
0 to 25
2030
0 to 30
2040
0 to 40
2050
0 to 50
2060
0 to 60
2080
0 to 80
2100
0 to 100
2120
0 to 120
2150
0 to 150
2160
0 to 160
Example
Housing
Range
Pressure
Rating
Temperature
Rating
Housing
Material
Cover
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
AT2 2001 X
X A O 1X
AT2
2XXX
-X
-MP
-HP
X
LT
-A
T2
O
1
2
X
OPV
Tag
T2
.80
1.0
MAX. PRESSURE 15 PSIG
7-11/64
[182.00]
5/16
[8.00]
15/16
1/8
NPT [24.00]
Important notes for installation:

Cables must be fitted through 1/2 NPT cable gland or ATEX conduit (not supplied
with instrument).
Make sure after cabling to close tight cover and cable gland, in order to keep IP66
rating (IP65 with option OPV, overpressure relief valve).
Open cover only after de-energizing instrument.
Attention: Check local safety rules and warnings on unit and manual for a correct
use of the instrument in hazardous area.
.60
6-19/64
[160.00]
The popular Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage is now available in a flameproof ATEX enclosure with the new ATEX approved AT22000 Series. This gage can
indicate positive, negative or differential pressures and is accurate within 2%. The
Magnehelic gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blower pressures, filter
resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop across orifice plates, liquid levels with
bubbler systems and pressures in fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. Optional gage
construction is available for use to either 35 psig (2.42 bar) or 80 psig (5.51 bar). Flameproof ATEX enclosures are available in aluminum and include a glass window for viewing
process pressures status on gage face.
.40
5-9/32
[134.00]
8-5/64
[205.00]
INCHES OF WATER
.20
1-37/64
[40.00]
2-9/16
[65.00]
19/32
[15.00]
1/8
NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Magnehelic Housing: Die cast aluminum case & bezel with acrylic cover;
Exterior finish is coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
Housing Material: Aluminum.
Finishing: Texture epoxy coat RAL7038.
Accuracy: 2% of FS (3% on -0, -100 Pa, -125 Pa, -10 mm and 4% on -00, -60
Pa, -6 mm ranges), throughout range at 70F (21.1C).
Pressure Limits: -20 in Hg to 15 psig (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP option; 35 psig
(2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar).
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 bar), standard
gages only.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 140F (-6.67 to 60C); Low temperature option: -20F
(-28.8C); Case: -58 to 140F (-50 to 60C) (Note: Product temperature limits are
less than case limits).
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position.
Enclosure Rating: IP66. IP65 with option OPV, overpressure relief valve.
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT female brass (SS optional). In presence of
acetylene it is necessary to use SS.
Weight: 8.6 lb (3.9 kg).
ATEX Approved Product from Comhas with ECN: NEMKO 10ATEX1096.
Agency Approvals: CE 0470
II2 GD Ex d IIC Gb T6; -50C Ta +60C Ex tb
IIIC Db T 85C.
AT22001-XX-A01XT2
ATEX Approved Series 2000 Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage
Specify range by using Magnehelic model number. See Ranger Chart
Standard from -20 in Hg to 15 psig static pressure
Medium pressure-max. static 35 psig
High pressure-max. static 80 psig
Standard temperature limits -6.67 to 60C
Low temperature limit to -28.8C
Aluminum
Glass cover
1/8 NPT female brass ports
1/8 NPT female SS ports
Standard without overpressure relief valve
Overpressure relief valve
Material same as ports
SS information label
Over Protection Note: See page 5 (Series 2000)
009_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:21 AM Page 9
DigiMag Digital Differential Pressure and

Flow Gages
PRESSURE
Series
DM-1000
24 Volt or Battery Powered, Fits in Magnehelic Gage Cut-Out

5.00
WAKE
MENU
2.33
DigiMag
The Digi-Mag Series DM-1000 Digital Differential Pressure and Flow Gages
monitor the pressure of air and compatible gases, just as its famous analog predecessor
the Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage. All models are factory calibrated to specific
ranges as listed in the chart below. The 4-digit LCD can display readings in common
English and metric units so conversions are not necessary. The simplified four button
operation reduces set up time and simplifies calibration with its digital push button zero
and span.
The DigiMag Digital Gages are more versatile than analog gages with their ability to be
field-programmed to select pressure, air velocity or flow operation depending on model.
The DigiMag Digital Gages have an added feature for filter applications where a set point
can be input where the display will blink when the filter is dirty, alerting the user that a
maintenance action needs to occur.
Programming the Series DM-1000 is easy using the menu key to access 4 simplified menus
which provide access to depending on model: Security level; engineering units; K-factor
for use with various Pitot tubes and flow sensors, circular or rectangular duct size for
volumetric flow operation; filter set point; view peak and valley process readings; digital
damping for smoothing erratic process applications; display update to conserve battery
life; zero and span field calibration.
The Series DM-1000 DigiMag Digital Differential Pressure and Air Flow Gages possess
a full-scale accuracy of 1% on ranges down to 2 in w.c. and 2% accuracy down to the very
low ranges of 1 in to 0.25 in w.c. DigiMag Digital Differential Pressure Gages offer power
versatility by working with 9-24 VDC line power or simply 9V battery power. If using line
power and connecting the 9V battery, the battery will act as a back-up if line power is lost
or interrupted.
ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket
A-300, Flat Flush Mounting Bracket
A-286, 4-1/2 Gage Panel Mounting Flange
A-489, 4 Straight Static Pressure Tip with Flange
A-480, Plastic Static Pressure Tip
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Materials: Glass filled plastic.
Accuracy: 1% FS including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability; 2% FS for
ranges 1 in w.c. and below.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Long Term Stability: 1% FS per year.
Thermal Effect: 0.05% FS/F typ.; 0.10% FS/F for ranges 1 in w.c. and below.
Display: 4-digit LCD(digits:0.60H x 0.33W).
Display Update: Selectable for 1 second to 10 minutes or update only from button
push.
Pressure Limits: Normal and bi-directional ranges 5 in w.c. and lower = 2 psi
(13.7 kPa); Normal and bi-directional ranges 10 in w.c. and higher = 11 psi (75
KPa).
Selectable Engineering Units: in w.c., psi, kPa, Pa, mm w.c., mBar, in Hg, mm
Hg, FS(0-100%).
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, included, user replaceable or external
power supply 9-24 VDC.
Battery Service Life: Battery life depending on the display update setting: 150
hours (typical) if display update = 1 second; 9 month (typical) if display update =
10 minutes; 1.5 years (typical) if display update is disabled. Battery may last up to
four times longer when using lithium-based battery ULTRALIFE U9VL-J.
Current Consumption: 5 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Removable terminal block for 16 to 26 AWG.
Electrical Entry: Cable gland for 0.114 to 0.250 (2.9 to 6.4 mm)diameter cable.
Process Connections:1/8 (3 mm) ID tubing.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Weight: 1.18 lb(535 g).
Size: 5 (127 mm) OD front face.
Agency Approvals: CE.
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate, add suffix -NIST to model numbers.
Example: DM-1103-NIST.
Range
(in w.c.) psi
Model
kPa Pa
mbar mm w.c. in Hg mm Hg % of FS
DM-1102 0.250
0.062 62.20 0.622 6.35
0.467 100.0
DM-1103 0.500
0.124 124.5 1.245 12.70
0.934 100.0
DM-1104 1.000
0.249 249.1 2.492 25.40
1.868 100.0
DM-1105 2.000
0.498 498.2 4.982 50.80
3.736 100.0
100.0
DM-1107 5.000
0.181 1.245 1245 12.45 127.0
0.368 9.34
DM-1108 10.00
0.361 2.491 2491 24.91 254.0
0.736 18.68 100.0
DM-1109 15.00
0.543 3.738 3738 37.38 381.0
1.104 28.02 100.0
DM-1110 25.00
0.903 6.227 6227 62.27 635.0
1.839 46.71 100.0
DM-1111 50.00
1.806 12.45
124.5 1270
3.678 93.42 100.0
DM-1112 100.0
3.613 24.91
249.1 2540
7.355 186.8 100.0
Contact the factory for available bi-directional ranges from 0.25 to 10 in w.c.
Note: For air flow models change -11XX to -12XX.
Resolution
(in w.c.)
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.002
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.020
0.100
Process Tubing Options: See page 547 (Gage Tubing Accessories)
010_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:22 AM Page 10
PRESSURE
Series
2-5000
Minihelic II Differential Pressure Gages

Combining High Accuracy, Compactness, Dependability, and Low Cost
RoHS
LOW PRESSURE PORT

7/16 [11.11] HOLE IN
PANEL FOR SURFACE MOUNT

MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360 U.S.A.
2-19/32
[65.88] 3-1/16
[77.79]
1
[25.40]
1-7/16
[36.51]
9/32
[7.14]
Combining clean design, small size, and low cost with enough accuracy for all, but the
most demanding applications our Minihelic II gage offers the latest in design features for
a dial type differential pressure gage. It is our most compact gage, but is easy to read and
can safely operate at total pressures up to 30 psig. The Minihelic II is designed for panel
mounting in a single 2-5/8 diameter hole. Standard pressure connections are barbed
fittings for 3/16 ID tubing; optional 1/8 male NPT connections are also available. Overpressure protection is built into the Minihelic II gage by means of a blow-out membrane
molded in conjunction with the diaphragm. Accidental over-ranging up to the rated total
pressure will not damage the gage. With removable lens and rear housing, the gage may
be easily serviced at minimum cost.
With the housing molded from mineral and glass filled nylon and the lens molded from
acrylic, the gage will withstand rough use and exposure as well as high total pressure. The
5% accuracy and low cost of the Minihelic II gage make it well-suited for a wide variety of
OEM and user applications. OEM applications include cabinet air purging, medical
respiratory therapy equipment, air samplers, laminar flow hoods, and electronic air
cooling systems. As an air filter gage, the Minihelic II gage finds many end use
applications on large stationary engines, compressors, ventilators, and air handling units.
The Minihelic II gage is suitable for many of the same applications as the Magnehelic
gage where the greater accuracy, sensitivity, and higher and lower differential pressure
ranges of the Magnehelic gage are not required.
2-21/64 [59.18]
SURFACE
MOUNT HOLES
2-3/8
[60.33]
(2) 5/32 HOLES

IN PANEL FOR SURFACE
MOUNT
HIGH PRESSURE PORT
7/16 [11.11] HOLE IN
PANEL FOR SURFACE MOUNT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases.
Housing: Glass filled nylon; acrylic lens.
Accuracy: 5% of FS at 70F (21.1C).
Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar) continuous to either pressure
connection.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
Size: 2-1/16 (52.39 mm) diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other
position orientations.
Process Connections: Barbed, for 3/16 ID tubing (standard); 1/8 male NPT
(optional).
Weight: 6 oz (170.1 g).
Agency Approvals: RoHS.
CAUTION: For use only with air or compatible gases.
PRESSURECONNECTIONS
A. The standard Minihelic II gage is supplied with two
barbed pressure taps molded into the rear housing of the
gage. These connections allow easy, fast connection to the
gage using 3/16 ID rubber or plastic tubing.
B. For applications in systems having higher total operating
pressures, optional male 1/8 NPT pressure connections can
be supplied.
Note: The oblong over-pressure vent hole on the back of the
gage at the right of the connections. This vent is sealed by a
membrane molded in conjunction with the diaphragm and
will blow out at approximately 75 psi.
10
011_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:25 AM Page 11
Range spring calibration clamp fixes live length of

spring for proper gage calibration and is factory set
and sealed.
Housing is molded from strong mineral and glass

filled nylon.
Pointer stops of molded rubber prevent pointer
over-travel without damage.
Full view lens is removable and molded of acrylic.
Aluminum scale litho-printed black on white,
enhances readability.
Diaphragm support plates of lightweight aluminum

on each side of the diaphragm minimize position or
attitude sensitivity and help define pressure area.
Red tipped aluminum pointer, rigidly mounted to

helix is easy to see.
Flat leaf range spring reacts to pressure on the

diaphragm. Live length is adjustable for calibration.
Small amplitude of motion minimizes inaccuracies and
assures long life.
Wishbone assembly provides mounting for helix,

helix bearings, and pointer shaft.
Jewel bearings provide virtually friction-free helix
motion.
Low pressure tap connects to rear chamber.
Helix is free to rotate in jewel bearings. It aligns with

magnetic field of magnet to transmit pressure
indications to pointer.
Coil spring link provides a resilient connection

between the diaphragm and the range spring.
Ceramic magnet mounted on a molded bracket at the
end of the range spring rotates the helix without direct
mechanical linkage.
Zero adjustment screw, located behind the

removable lens, eliminates tampering.
High pressure tap connects with the front chamber

through passageway in the plastic case and a sealing
ring molded into the edge of the diaphragm.
SURFACEMOUNTING
Optional surface mounting with back mounting plate allows for quick installation to
any surface. Process connections are barbed and point downwards. Add -BB for
bottom barbed surface mount option.
Model
2-5000-0
2-5001
2-5002
2-5003
2-5005
2-5010
2-5020
2-5040
2-5060
2-5100
Range,
Inches of
Water
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-5.0
0-10
0-20
0-40
0-60
0-100
Model
2-5205
Range,
PSI
0-5
Model
2-5000-25MM
2-5000-50MM
2-5000-100MM
Model
2-5000-125PA
2-5000-250PA
2-5000-500PA
Model
2-5000-1KPA
2-5000-3KPA
Range,
MM of
Water
0-25
0-50
0-100
Range,
Pascals
0-125
0-250
0-500
Range,
kPa
0-1
0-3
PANELMOUNTING
OPTIONS
For optional 1/8 male NPT connections, add suffix -NPT to model numbers listed
above.
Example: 2-5001-NPT.
For optional bottom barbed surface mount, add suffix -BB to model numbers listed
above.
Example:2-5001-BB.
Example: 2-5001-NIST.
For factory calibration certificate, add suffix -FC to model numbers.
Example:2-5001-FC.
Mounting hardware is supplied with the Minihelic II gage for panel mounting through
a single hole, 2-5/8 (67 mm) in diameter. Panel thickness up to 1/2 (13 mm) can
be accommodated with the hardware supplied. If necessary, surface mounting of
the gage can be accomplished by means of two 4-40 screws into the tapped
mounting bracket stud holes in the rear of the gage. Surface mounting requires
clearance holes in the panel for the two pressure taps.
ACCESSORIES
A-302F-A, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 ID rubber or
plastic tubing. 4 insertion depth. Includes mounting screws
A-434, Portable Kit
A-497, Surface Mtg. Brkt
A-609, Air Filter Kit
11
Silicone rubber diaphragm allows accurate

response to a broad range of temperatures and at
extremely low pressure. Incorporates blow out area
for overpressure protection.
PRESSURE
Simplicity of Design Ensures Reliable Operation
012_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:26 AM Page 12
PRESSURE
Series
Mark II
Mark II Molded Plastic Manometers

3% Accuracy For Stationary And Portable Applications
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-7/16
[35.53]
5/8
[15.88]
3-11/16
[93.66]
7/32 [5.56] HOLE
5-29/32
[150.02]
Manometers, Stationary
4-25/32
[121.44]
25/32
[19.84]
Mark II Model No. 25 inclined-vertical manometer.

(shown with optional A-612 portable stand)
1-1/8
[28.58]
2-1/4
[57.15] MAX
4-23/32
[119.86]
25/32 [19.84]
7-13/32 [188.12]
7/32 X 13/32
[5.56 X 10.32]
MOUNTING SLOT
15/64 [5.95] MOUNTING HOLE

5-5/16
[134.95]
MAX
2-31/32
[75.41] 4-5/8
[117.48]
Mark II Model No. 40-1 inclined manometer

Dwyer Mark II series molded manometers are of the inclined and inclined-vertical types.
The curved inclined-vertical tube of the Model 25 gage provides higher ranges with more
easily read increments at low readings. The Model 25 is excellent for general purpose work.
The Model 40 inclined gage provides linear calibration and excellent resolution throughout
its range. The Model 40 is ideally suited for air velocity and air filter gage applications. Both
gage types are capable of pressure measurements above and below atmospheric as well as
differential pressure measurements.
CONSTRUCTION
Mark II manometers are economically priced, compact and available in both
stationary and portable configurations. Portable stand is standard on Model 40,
available as optional A-612 stand for Model 25. Construction is simple with virtually
indestructible molded white styrene-acrylonitrile housing, indicating tube and fluid
wells, molded ABS knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock mounted glass level vial
and leak proof O ring seals. Moderate overpressures are accommodated by an
overflow tank incorporated In the Model 25. Greater protection is provided by float
operated overflow traps in the Model 40. Scales are lithograph printed on aluminum
and epoxy coated.
INSTALLATION
Mark II manometers can be mounted on any vertical surface with the two mounting
screws provided. A built-in spirit level simplifies leveling before mounting screws are
tightened. Simply fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the tubing, and
the gage is ready for operation.
ACCESSORIES
Included with each Mark II manometer are two tubing connectors for 1/8 pipe or
sheet metal ducts, two mounting screws, 1 ounce bottle of indicating fluid, red and
green pointer flags and complete instructions.
The Model 25 also includes 8 of flexible double column plastic tubing. Portable
operation of the Model 25 is made possible by the use of the optional A-612 portable
stand. A short piece of tubing can be slipped over the Model 25 pressure connections
to contain the gage fluid in transit.
The Model 40 contains two 4-1/2 lengths of clear plastic tubing, a plastic swing-out
stand and leveling screw for portable operation. It also features convenient rapid
shutoff pressure connections and integral overpressure safety traps.
OEM SPECIALS
All Dwyer Mark II molded plastic manometers can be supplied in OEM quantities
with your name or special graphics and scales.
25/32
[19.84]
2-1/4 [57.15]
MAX
15/64 [5.95] x 13/32 [10.32]

MOUNTING SLOT
10-5/8 [269.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]
4 [101.60]
SPECIFICATIONS
INCLINED/VERTICAL
Accuracy: 3% FS.
Temperature Limits: 140F (60C).
PressureLimits:10 psi (70 kPa).
Weight:1.04 lb (472 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
INCLINED
Accuracy: 3% FS.
PressureLimits:15 psi (100 kPa).
Scale Length: Approx. 8-1/4 (21 centimeters).
Weight:1.23 lb (558 g).
ACCESSORIES
A-612, Portable Stand
A-606, Air Filter Kit
Model
Mark II 25
Mark II 26
Mark II 27*
Mark II MM-80
Mark II M-700PA
Range
0-3 in w.c
0-7 in w.c.
0-7000 fpm
0-80 mm w.c.
10-0-700 Pa
Fluid Used
Red fluid, .826 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
*Require Pitot tube at additional cost.

Model
Mark II 40-1
Mark II 40-25MM
Mark II 40-250PA
Mark II 41-60MM
Mark II 41-600PA
Range
.1-0-1.0 in w.c.
0-26 mm w.c.
10-0-250 Pa
0-60 mm w.c.
20-0-600 Pa
Fluid Used
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.
Blue oil, 1.91 s.g.

Pitot tube: See pages 107-138 (Air Quality section)
12
013_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:26 AM Page 13
PRESSURE
Inclined Manometer Air Filter Gages
Series
250-AF
Precision Machined, Solid Acrylic Plastic Gages, Accurate To 1% Of Full Scale
Model 452-AF
FEATURES
Highly accurate and easy to use yet almost indestructible, Dwyer Series 250-AF
Inclined Air Filter Gages are foolproof and dependable. There are no moving parts
no mechanical linkages nothing to wear out, jam or deteriorate from vibration.
They never need calibration.
The mirror polished inclined scale allows the operator to easily read minute
differences in differential pressure across the filter accurately without parallax error.
The only servicing required is occasional zeroing. If cleaning is necessary, it is easily
done with soap and water.
Economy Model 452-AF is similar to the 250 Series except they are not equipped
with over pressure traps. Two A-324 1/4 compression fittings are included with each
gage but not shown. Bodies are of 5/8 thick acrylic and scales are mirror polished,
epoxy coated aluminum.
Range:
Scale Length
Minor
Water
Inclined)
Model
Column Divisions (Inches)
250-AF .10-0-1.0 .02
5-1/2
250.5-AF .10-0-1.0 .01
8
251-AF .05-0-.50 .01
5-1/2
252-AF .20-0-2.0 .02
8
.02
260-AF 0-1.5
5-1/2
.02
452-AF 0-2
8
2 PSI Maximum Working Pressure
CONSTRUCTION
Dwyer DURABLOCK Series 250-AF Gages are precision machined 1 thick solid
acrylic plastic, virtually unbreakable and free of distortion. The fluid bore is precision
drilled to .0002 to assure life long accuracy. A glass spirit level is built into the body
and encapsulated to prevent damage or tampering. The scale is mirror polished
chrome plated brass to assure parallax free reading by alignment of the meniscus
with its reflection. Safety traps are incorporated in the body to prevent loss of fluid
due to pressure surges. Red and green signal flags indicate clearly when a filter
change is necessary. Gages are suitable for use in ambient temperatures of -20 to
150F. Connection fittings are positively sealed by O rings but easily removed for
zeroing or addition of fluid. Furnished complete with instructions.
Overall Size
(Inches)
8-1/2 x 4-1/8 x 1
11-3/8 x 4 x 1
8-1/4 x 3-3/8 x 1
11-1/8 x 6-1/2 x 1
8-3/8 x 5-7/8 x 1
11 x 4 x 5/8
ACCESSORIES
A-310B, 3-way vent valve, 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing, 10 psi rating
A-317, Gage connecter, 1/8 pipe thread opening, less ODthread, for slip fit in 3/4
diameter opening in Series 250-AF gages
Durablock Solid Plastic Stationary Gages
Series
200 & 300
Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150F.

Accuracy 2% of Full-Scale (1% on Models 215, 244, 246 Only)
1/2
[12.70]
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 6
PLACES
1
[25.40] TYP
1/2 [12.70]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 6 PLACES
D
F TYP
E TYP
1/2 [12.70] TYP

1 [25.40] TYP
E TYP
3
[76.20]
A
Model 310
1/2
[12.70]
TYP
9/16
[14.29]
.10 0
INCHES
.10 .20
OF
.30 .40 WATER
.50 .60
.70 .80
.90
C A
1
1-7/8
[47.63]
E
F
TYP TYP
Model
200.5
202.5
209
215
244
246
310
Dimensions, Inches
B
C
A
13
3-15/16
7
13
5-5/8
9
13
7
9
10
3-1/16
7
16-1/2 3-1/8
11
11
13-1/2 23
16
7
EF
G
D
11-3/8 2 4-1/2
2 4-1/2
12
11-1/4 2 4-1/2
9-1/2 2 3
15-5/8 4 8-1/2
4 15
22
44
15-1/4
9/16
[14.29]
F
TYP
1-7/8
[47.63]
Model 200.5
Dwyer solid plastic stationary gages or draft gages are offered in inclined and vertical
(well-type) styles for highly accurate laboratory or general industrial service, for measurement
of low range gas and air pressures, positive, negative or differential. To assure the accuracy
required in instruments of this type, all machining of bores and wells is to the highest
standards of precision backed by Dwyers years of experience in the fabrication of
acrylic instruments.
Over-Pressure Safety Traps Prevent Fluid Loss

Exclusive Dwyer over pressure safety traps assure that over range
pressures whether gradual or a sudden surge will not force the liquid
out of the gage. Over pressures simply raises the float, force the Oring over the opening and seal the fluid in the gage. When pressure
is reduced, float drops down releasing the O-ring safety trap opens
and the gage continues in operation.
Incline Type
Range Inches Minor Scale Scale
Weight
Model of Water
Divisions Length
Ibs-oz.
3-11
200.5 .10-0-1.0
.01
8-1/4
4-7
202.5 .20-0-2.0
.01
8-3/4
4-11
209 .20-0-3.0
.02
8-3/4
2-14
215 .05-0-.25
.005
6
9-11
244 0-4
.02
13-1/4
13-14
246 0-6
.02
20
Vertical or Well-Type
3-10
0-10
11-1/8
310
.10
Note: Model 200.5 replaces Model 200. Model 202.5 replaces model 202.
OPTION
Example: 244-NIST.
13
Model 250.5-AF
014_Layout 1 7/8/14 2:26 PM Page 14
PRESSURE
Series
424
Durablock Inclined-Vertical Manometers

Accuracy To 0.25%
B
C
37/64 DIA. MTG. HOLE
A
G
424-10 Inclined-Vertical Manometer.

F
1 X 1/4 MTG. SLOTS
Ranges And Dimensions Suitable for Total Pressure up to 100 psig, Temperatures up to 150F
Vertical
Inclined
Length Range
Length
Range
Inches Vertical of
Inches Inclined of
Minor Vertical Dimensions
Minor Inclined of
of
Model Water Div.
Scale
D E
Scale A
B
C
Water Div.
20
9
2.1-10 .10
.01
16-1/2 25-1/4 12-5/8 1 10-1/2
Single 424-10 0-2.0
6-1/2
4-5/8 9-7/8 9-5/8 4-7/8 5/8 6-1/2
1.1- 5 .10
.01
Column 421-5 0-1.0
421-10 0-1.0
6-1/2
10-1/8 15-1/2 9-5/8 4-7/8 5/8 6-1/2
1.1-10 .10
.01
6-1/2
.10
4-5/8 10-1/2 11-1/2 5-1/8 5/8 6-1/2
Double 422-5 0-1.0
1.1-5
.01
6-1/2
10-1/8 16-1/8 11-1/2 5-1/8 5/8 6-1/2
Column 422-10 0-1.0
1.1-10 .10
.01
*Single column metric-ranges and divisions in millimeters.
F
5-3/8
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
3-1/4
G
16
9-7/8
15-1/2
10-1/2
16-1/8
Weight
lb-oz
22-12
4-12
6-10
6-10
10-13
Dwyer Model 424 inclined-vertical manometers are extremely accurate instruments

designed and made especially for precision measurement of low differential pressures in
laboratory and test applications. The inclined range bore has a length of 20 to provide
ample multiplication of indicating fluid movement in this critical lower part of the range.
Series 420 Inclined-Vertical Manometers Accurate To 1%
Typical of Series 420 Inclined-Vertical Manometers is Model 42210 double column manometer with a total range of 0 to 10 of
water. Single column models are also furnished. Design features
are essentially the same as for the Series 424. They are accurate
to 1% and are particularly suited for use with pitot tubes and in
flow measurement or similar applications.
Series
1230 & 1235
Flex-Tube Well-Type Manometers

3/16
[4.76]
MOUNTING
HOLES TYP
2 PLACES
3-9/16
[90.49]
A
1-3/8
[34.93]
TYP
2-3/4
[69.85]
1235 Series
Panel Mounting
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Include two 1 oz bottles of .826 red gage fluid (1.91 blue gage oil for models 421-23
and 422-23), rapid shut-off type a connections, two 3 ft lengths of clear plastic tubing
and two 1/8 NPT tubing adapters two sets for double column models.
2-1/2
[63.50]
3/4
2-3/4
[69.85] [19.05]
1230 Series
Wall Mounting
1-1/2
[38.10]
Model
1230-8
1230-12
1230-16
1230-20
1230-36
Scale in
Inches of
Water or
Mercury
0-8
0-12
0-16
0-20
0-36
Dimensions
B
A
W/M
2-3/4 15-13/16
2-3/4 19-3/8
2-3/4 23-1/2
2-3/4 27-9/16
2-3/4 43-1/8
D
16-3/4
21-7/8
27
32-1/8
51-1/4
C
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
Scale in
Inches of Dimensions
Water or
B
Model Mercury A
C
D
W/M
1235-20 0-20
2-3/4 29-5/16 33-9/16 2-1/2
Mercury
Req'd
to Fill
(Wt.)
12 oz
14 oz
16 oz
18 oz
26 oz
Mercury
Req'd
to Fill
(Wt.)
18 oz
Dwyer Flex-Tube Well Type Manometers are designed to meet the need for a direct
reading single column instrument providing highly accurate pressure readings; positive,
negative or differential. Unlike other makes, Dwyer manometers have no hidden wells or
packing glands. These instruments are constructed of shatterproof clear plastic tubing
permanently bonded to well assemblies with leakproof glued joints. Well assemblies are
precisely machined from solid acrylic plastic. Overpressure safety traps assure protection
against loss of fluid. Heavy pure white acrylic plastic scales have sharp black silk screened
figures and graduations sealed with clear mylar coating. Scales are adjusted with quickacting positive mechanism. Heavy heat treated aluminum back plates have durable gray
hammerloid finish. These manometers are rated to 100 psig (6.89 bar). Not recommended
for vacuum service beyond 5 in. Hg (68 in w.c.).
STANDARDACCESSORIES
Include one set of type a connections, .826 sp. gr. red gage fluid for D style or
fluorescein green dye concentrate with wetting agent for W/M styles, two 3 ft
lengths of clear vinyl tubing and two 1/8 NPT tubing adapters.
14
OPTION
Example: 1222-8-W/M-NIST.
015_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:29 AM Page 15
Capsuhelic Differential Pressure Gages

Measures Pressure, Vacuum or Differential, Suitable for Internal Pressures to 500 psig
3/4 [19.05] TYP
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW

PRESSURE CONNECTION
[AIR OR GAS]
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH

PRESSURE CONNECTION
[AIR OR GAS]
35 TYP
4-45/64
[119.46]
Capsuhelic Pressure Gage has a large,

easy-to-read 4" (102 mm) dial.
[4] #6-32 X 3/8 [9.53] DP

HOLE ON A 4-11/32 [110.33]
BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
[LIQUID]
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
[LIQUID]
The Capsuhelic gage is designed to give fast, accurate indication of differential

pressures. The gage may be used as a readout device when measuring flowing fluids,
pressure drop across filters, liquid levels in storage tanks, and many other applications
involving pressure, vacuum or differential pressure.
Using the basic design of Dwyers time-proven Magnehelic gage, the Capsuhelic gage
contains a simple, frictionless movement that permits full-scale readings as low as 0.5 in
w.c. The pressure being measured is held within a capsule which is an integral part of the
gage. This containment of the pressure permits the use of the gage on system pressures
of up to 500 psig, even when differentials to be read are less than 0.1 in w.c.
The diaphragm-actuated Capsuhelic gage requires no filling liquid which might limit its
outdoor applications. Zero and range adjustments are made from outside the gage, and
there is no need to disassemble the gage in normal service.
Note: May be used with hydrogen where pressures are less than 35 psi. Order with
a Buna-N diaphragm.
Series 4000 Capsuhelic Gage
Scales reading directly in flow, heights, etc., are also available.
Model
*4005
*4006
*4010
*4015
*4020
*4025
*4030
*4040
*4050
*4060
*4080
*4100
*4200
Range,
Inches
of
Water
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-25
0-30
0-40
0-50
0-60
0-80
0-100
0-200
Model
4310
4330
Model
4205
4210
4215
4220
Range
Zero Center
Inches of
Water
5-0-5
15-0-15
Range
PSID
0-5
0-10
0-15
0-20
PRESSURE
Series
4000
13/32
[10.32] TYPE
2-19/32
[65.86]
1/2
[12.70]
5
[127.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Aluminum case: Air and compatible gases and oil based liquids;
Brass case: Air and compatible gases and water based liquids.
Housing: Die cast aluminum with impregnated hard coating, standard. Optional
forged brass housing is required for water or water based fluids. Special material
diaphragms available, contact factory.
Accuracy: 3% of FS at 70F (21.1C). (4% on 4200, 4210, 4215, 4220, 4300,
4400, and 4500).
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 psig (-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar).
Process Connections: 1/4 female NPT high and low pressure taps, duplicated one pair top for air and gas, and one pair bottom for liquids.
Weight: 3 lb, 3 oz (1.45 kg) aluminum case; 7 lb, 13 oz (3.54 kg) brass case.
Standard Accessories: Two 1/4 NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, four flush
mounting adapters with screws and four surface mounting screws.
ACCESSORIES
A-309, 3-way Manifold Valve
A-314, Bleed Fitting
A-370, Mounting Bracket
A-471, Portable Kit
A-496, Flush Mount Bracket
A-610, Pipe Mount Kit
OPTIONS
Add Options as Suffix, Example 4001-ASF
-ASF (Adjustable Signal Flag)
B (Brass Case)
Scale Overlays - Red, Green, Mirrored or combination. Specify Locations
-NIST, NIST traceable calibration certificate
*These ranges available for vertical scale position only.
15
016_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:29 AM Page 16
PRESSURE
Series
PTGD
Differential Pressure Piston-Type Gage

Excellent Accuracy and Over-Pressure Ratings
1-4
[6.50]
1-9/32
[32.20]
3-3/32 HIGH
3 [83.00]
[76.20]
1-31/32
[50.00]
2X 1/4 UNC
1/2 [12.60]
1 [25.20]
1-7/8
[47.60]
7/8 [22.00]
5-9/32 [133.97]
PANEL CUTOUT
Model
PTGD-AA01A
PTGD-AA02A
PTGD-AA03A
PTGD-AA04A
PTGD-AA05A
PTGD-AA06A
PTGD-AA07A
PTGD-AA08A
PTGD-AA09A
PTGD-AA10A
PTGD-AA11A
PTGD-AA12A
PTGD-SA01A
PTGD-SA02A
PTGD-SA03A
PTGD-SA04A
PTGD-SA05A
PTGD-SA06A
PTGD-SA07A
PTGD-SA08A
PTGD-SA09A
PTGD-SA10A
PTGD-SA11A
PTGD-SA12A
Description
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Aluminum
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
2.5 Stainless Steel
Range
0-5 psid (0.25 bar)
0-10 psid (0.75 bar)
0-15 psid (1 bar)
0-20 psid (1.6 bar)
0-25 psid (1.6 bar)
0-30 psid (2 bar)
0-40 psid (3 bar)
0-50 psid (3.5 bar)
0-60 psid (4 bar)
0-80 psid (5.5 bar)
0-100 psid (7 bar)
0-150 psid (10 bar)
0-5 psid (0.25 bar)
0-10 psid (0.75 bar)
0-15 psid (1 bar)
0-20 psid (1.6 bar)
0-25 psid (1.6 bar)
0-30 psid (2 bar)
0-40 psid (3 bar)
0-50 psid (3.5 bar)
0-60 psid (4 bar)
0-80 psid (5.5 bar)
0-100 psid (7 bar)
0-150 psid (10 bar)
Note: For 4.5 dial face, change AA to AC for Aluminum and SA to SC for
Stainless Steel
For back or bottom connections as well as female BSP threads, contact the factory.
16
1-13/16
[46.00]
3[76.00]
3-31/32
[101.00]
4X 3/16 [5.16]
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-1/2 [88.90] BOLT CIRCLE
3-1/32 [76.99]
PANEL CUTOUT
1/4 NPT
BOTH ENDS
6-7/32
[157.93]
4X 3/16 [5.16]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 5-5/8 [142.85]
BOLT CIRCLE
The SeriesPTGD Differential Pressure Piston-Type Gage can be used to measure

the pressure drop across filters, strainers, pump performance testing, and heat exchanger
pressure drop monitoring. Its simple, rugged design possesses weather and corrosion
resistant gage front with a shatter resistant lens. The Series PTGD contains a pistonsensing element which provides different differential pressure ranges with full-scale
accuracies of 2%. Constructed with aluminum or 316 SS and available with two 1/4 female
NPT end connections, the Series PTGD provides over-range protection rated to 3000 psig
(200 bar) or 6000 psig (400 bar) depending on model. Standard models come with in-line
connections. Back or bottom connections are also available.
LOW
5-1/4
[133.30]
1-31/32
[50.00]
7-9/32
[32.20]
1/2 [12.60]
1 [25.20]
2-1/8
[54.00]
HIGH
1-3/32 [28.10]
LOW
1-13/16
[46.00]
3 [76.00]
3-31/32
[101.00]
1/4 NPT
BOTH ENDS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Materials: Gage body: Aluminum or 316 SS; Piston: Aluminum or 316 SS;
Spring: 302 SS; Seals: Buna-N (standard); PTFE, Ceramic magnet; Dial case:
Nylon 6 30% glass filled gage case.
Window: Acrylic.
Accuracy: 2% FS ascending.
Temperature Limit: 176F (80C).
Pressure Limits: 3000 psi (206 bar) for aluminum body; 6000 psi (413 bar) for SS
body.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm) or 4.5 (115 mm).
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position.
Process Connections: 1/4 female NPT end connections standard; 1/4 female
NPT back or bottom connections available. All styles available with 1/4 BSP.
Weight: Aluminum: 2.5 0.88 lb (399 g); 4.5 1.35 lb (612 g); Stainless steel: 2.5
1.75 lb (794 g); 4.5 2.3 lb (1.04 kg).
OPTIONS
-V, FKM fluoroelastomer seals
-N, EPDM seals
-PY, Glycerine fill
-PF, Pointer follower
-RP, Reverse port
-SP1, 0.5A SPST with DIN plug
-SP2, 0.25A SPDT with DIN plug
For NIST traceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG1.
017_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:30 AM Page 17
Series
PFG2
PRESSURE
Process Filter Gage

Indicates Process Filter Status, In-Line or Bottom Connect Mounting
2-5/16
[58.74]
2-3/4
[69.85]
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
R
T
Y
2-1/2
[63.50]
LOW
PORT
HIGH
PORT
3/8
1-1/8
3/4
[9.37]
[28.58] 3 [19.05]
2X #10-32 UNF
[76.20]
MOUNTING HOLES
The Series PFG2 Process Filter Gage is designed for determining the state of an inline filter. The differential pressure indicator determines the pressure drop on either side
of a filter through its 1/8 female NPT pressure connections, and relates the value to one
of three zones: clean (green), change (yellow), or dirty (red). The Series PFG2 is perfectly
suited for filter applications, line loss, valve drop, and many other differential pressure
applications where a simple indicator is needed. The direction of process flow is indicated
on the dial, with the arrow pointing to the low pressure port. In order to change the high
and low pressure connections, simply remove the indicator from the mounting base and
rotate 180. The PFG2 can be connected in-line through the side process connections, but
can also be directly mounted through the outlet/inlet connections by removing the mounting
block.
Model
PFG2-02
PFG2-03
PFG2-06
Full Range
0 to 5 psid
0 to 10 psid
0 to 25 psid
Green Zone
0 to 2.5 psid
0 to 5 psid
0 to 11 psid
Yellow Zone
2.5 to 3.75 psid
5 to 7.5 psid
11 to 18.5 psid
Model
Digihelic
Links
Red Zone
3.75 to 5 psid
7.5 to 10 psid
18.5 to 25 psid
1-1/2
[38.10]
2X 1/8 NPT
CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids/gases compatible with SS, GFN, and fluoropolymer.
Wetted Materials: Aluminum, SS, glass filled nylon, and fluoropolymer.
Accuracy: 5% F.S.
Pressure Limit: 300 psig (20.7 bar).
Materials:
Body: Glass filled nylon;
Mounting Block: Aluminum;
Lens: Polyester;
Elastomers: Fluorocarbon.
Process Connection: 1/8 female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Any orientation with 10-32 threaded holes 3/4 apart.
Weight: 9.6 oz (272.2 g).
Data Acquisition and Logging Software

Designed for Communication with Series DH & DHII
Digihelic Differential Pressure Controllers
The Digihelic Links Communications Software is an easy to use Windows based

program. Data logging and graphing can be set up by the individual control with varying
logging periods. Event logging, live instrument status, remote calibration as well as
uploading pre-saved configuration files are some of the higher end capabilities the Digihelic
Links Communications Software provides. The Digihelic Links Communications
Software is compatible with all Series DH and DHII Digihelic Differential Pressure
Controllers.
FEATURES
Log and graph data up to 10 units simultaneously; view up to 40 units
Easy to use Windows based operator interface
Data logging at individually adjustable rates
On-screen graphing of process values
Upload and download saved control configuration profiles
Remote calibration of controls
Model Digihelic Links, Communications Software CD
ACCESSORY
MN-1, Mini-Node USB/RS-485 converter
Required Equipment Computer Requirements

The Digihelic Links Communications Software application will run on Windows
95/98 and Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows
2000 and Windows XP software. The hardware requirements for each of these
operating systems can be found in the documentation provided with that operating
system. One available RS-485 port is needed to communicate with the control(s). A
minimum of 4 MB of hard disk space is needed for the Digihelic Links
Communications Software application files, and additional hard disk space is needed
to store data log files. Log file size will vary depending on the duration and rate
selected for the controls and the number of controls on line.
Communication Requirements
To communicate with the Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller from a PCwith
an RS-232 Serial Communications Port, an RS-485 to RS-232 converter is required
to convert the signal from the Digihelic controller RS-485 format to the RS-232 input
of the PC. Recommended converters are the Models 351-9 RS-485 to RS-232
converter or Model MN-21 RS-485 to USB converter. For RS-485 systems a 120
resistor is also needed to terminate the last control on the control network. Shielded
twisted pair cable is recommended for wiring the controls together.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
17
3/4
[19.08]
018_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:30 AM Page 18
PRESSURE
Series
DHII
Digihelic II Differential Pressure Controller

NEMA 4 (IP66) Housing With Large, Bright LCD, Square Root Output for Flow
1-1/2
[38.35]
1-31/64
[37.62]
3-7/16
[87.12]
4-23/32
[120]
1-7/8
[47.5]
4-23/32
[120]
4X 3/16 [4.76]
CLEARANCE HOLES FOR
MOUNTING
1-45/64
[43.18]
2-23/64
[59.94]
1-5/16
[33]
45/64
[17.78]
1-17/32
[38.61]
1-1/16
[26.97]
1-45/64
[43.18]
MOUNTING HOLE 3-17/64

[83]
PATTERN
4-1/8
[105]
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Aluminum, glass.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability (after 1
hour warm-up).
Stability: < 1% per year.
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 in w.c. = 2 psi; 5: 5 psi; 10: 5 psi; 25: 5 psi; 50:
5 psi, 100: 9 psi.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Compensated Temperature
Limits: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Thermal Effects: 0.020%/F (0.036/C) from 77F (25C).
Power Requirements: High voltage power = 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 400 Hz or 132
to 240 VDC; Low voltage power = 24 VDC 20%.
Power Consumption: Low voltage power = 24 VDC - 130 mA max; High voltage
power = 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240 VDC - 7VA max.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC into 900 max.
Zero &Span Adjustments: Accessible via menus.
Response Time: 250 ms (dampening set to 1).
Display: 4 digit backlit LCD 0.6 height. LED indicators for setpoint and alarm
status.
Electrical Connections: Euro type removable terminal blocks with watertight
conduit fittings for 1/2 watertight conduit.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
Weight: 2 lb 10 oz (1.19 kg).
Serial Communications: Modbus RTU, RS485, 9600 baud.
Agency Approvals: CE, UL.
The Digihelic II Controller just got better with the New Series DHII Differential
Pressure Controller. The DHII takes all the fabulous features of the standard Digihelic
Pressure Controller and packages them in a robust NEMA 4 (IP66) housing.
The Digihelic II Pressure Controller combines the 2 SPDT control relays, 4-20 mA process
output and Modbus communications with a large, brightly backlit 4 digit LCD display that
can easily be seen from long distances. The electrical wiring has also been enhanced in
the DHII with its detachable terminal blocks. The removable terminals allow the installer
to easily wire the terminal block outside the housing and then attach to the circuit board,
reducing wiring difficulties and installation time in the process.
The Digihelic II Differential Pressure Control in the new NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure enables
this product to be the perfect choice when mounting pressure controls outdoors in such
applications as rooftop air handlers. This housing also makes it the ideal solution for surface
mounting in clean rooms or facilities where water or a cleaning solution is utilized in
maintaining plant cleanliness.
ACCESSORIES
A-301, Static Pressure Tip for 1/4 metal tubing connection
A-302, Static Pressure Tip for 3/16 and 1/8 I.D. plastic or rubber tubing
A-438, Surface Mounting Brackets
Digihelic Links, Communications Software
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: 2 SPDTrelays.
Electrical Rating: 8 amps at 240 VACresistive.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via keypad on face.
Available Pressure Engineering Units
in w.c. ft w.c. mm w.c.
Model
6.350
.2500
DHII-002
25.40
1.000
DHII-004
5.000 .4167 127.0
DHII-006
10.00 .8333 254.0
DHII-007
25.00 2.083 635.0
DHII-008
50.00 4.167 1270
DHII-009*
100.0 8.333 2540
DHII-010*
cm w.c.
0.635
2.540
12.70
25.40
63.50
127.0
254.0
psi
.1806
.3613
.9032
1.806
3.613
in Hg mm Hg
0.467
1.868
.3678 9.342
.7356 18.68
1.839 46.71
3.678 93.42
7.356 186.8
mbar
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
Pa
62.28
249.1
1245
2491
6227
kPa
0.249
1.245
2.491
6.227
12.45
24.91
hPa
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
oz/in2
0.144
0.578
2.890
5.780
14.45
28.90
57.80
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available:

DHII-012, Range: 0.25 to 0 - 0.25 in w.c.
DHII-016, Range:5 to 0 - 5 in w.c.
DHII-017, Range:10 to 0 - 10 in w.c.
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi-directional range units and models DHII-009 & DHII-010.
18
019_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:33 AM Page 19
Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller
PRESSURE
Series
DH
3-in-1 Instrument: Gage, Switch and Transmitter, Square Root Extractor for Air Flow
3-19/32
[91.28]
1-15/16
[49.21]
4-1/2
[114.30]
1-3/4
[44.45]
4-1/2
[114.30]
The Series DH Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller is a 3-in-1 instrument
possessing a digital display gage, control relay switches, and a transmitter with current
output. Combining these three features allows the reduction of several instruments with
one product, saving inventory, installation time and money. The Digihelic Controller is
the ideal instrument for pressure, velocity and flow applications, achieving a 0.5% full scale
accuracy on ranges from 5 to 100 in w.c.
The Digihelic Controller allows the selection of pressure, velocity or volumetric flow
operation in several commonly used engineering units. Two SPDT control relays with
adjustable deadbands are provided along with a scalable 4-20 mA process output. The
Series DH provides extreme flexibility in power usage by allowing 120/220 VAC and also
24 VDC power which is often used in control panels.
Programming is easy using the menu key to access five simplified menus which provide
access to: security level; selection of pressure, velocity or flow operation; selection of
engineering units; K-factor for use with flow sensors; rectangular or circular duct for
inputting area in flow applications; set point control or set point and alarm operation; alarm
operation as a high, low or high/low alarm; automatic or manual alarm reset; alarm delay;
view peak and valley process readings; digital damping for smoothing erratic process
applications; scaling the 4-20 mA process output to fit your applications range; Modbus
communications; and field calibration.
With all this packed into one product it is easy to see why the Digihelic Controller is the
only instrument you will need for all your pressure applications.
OPTIONS
Barbed fitting for 3/16 ID tubing -B
Example DH-004-NIST.
Example DH-004-FC.
ACCESSORIES
The Mini-Node converters are an easy solution for utilizing the Digihelic
Controllers RS-485 serial communication and connecting to virtually any PC.
A-266, Digihelic surface mounting bracket
A-203, 1/8 ID x 1/4 OD PVC tubing
Digihelic Links, Communication Software
Available Pressure Engineering Units

in w.c. ft w.c. mm w.c.
Model
.2500
6.350
DH-002
1.000
25.40
DH-004
5.000 .4167 127.0
DH-006
10.00 .8333 254.0
DH-007
25.00 2.083 635.0
DH-008
50.00 4.167 1270
DH-009*
100.0 8.333 2540
DH-010*
cm w.c.
0.635
2.540
12.70
25.40
63.50
127.0
254.0
psi
.1806
.3613
.9032
1.806
3.613
in Hg mm Hg
0.467
1.868
.3678 9.342
.7356 18.68
1.839 46.71
3.678 93.42
7.356 186.8
mbar
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
Pa
62.28
249.1
1245
2491
6227
1/2
[12.70]
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: ABSplastic, ULapproved 94-V-0.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability.
5 psi, 100: 9 psi.
Power Requirements: High voltage power = 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 400 Hz or 132
to 240 VDC. Low voltage power = 24 VDC 20%.
Power Consumption:
Low voltage power = 24 VDC - 130 mA max;
High voltage power = 100 to 240 VAC, 132 to 240 VDC - 7VA max.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC into 900 max.
Response Time: 250 ms.
Display: 4 digit LCD 0.4 height. LED indicators for set point and alarm status.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.
Process Connections: Compression fitting for use with 1/8 IDX 1/4 OD tubing
(3.175 mm ID x 6.35 mm OD). Optional barbed fitting for 3/16 IDtubing.
Enclosure Rating: Face designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in horizontal plane.
Size: 1/8 DIN.
Panel Cutout: 1.772 x 3.620 in (45 x 92 mm).
Weight: 14.4 oz (408 g).
Serial Communications: Modbus RTU, RS485, 9600 baud.
Electrical Rating: 8 amps at 240 VACresistive.
kPa
0.249
1.245
2.491
6.227
12.45
24.91
hPa
0.623
2.491
12.45
24.91
62.27
124.5
249.1
oz/in2
0.144
0.578
2.890
5.780
14.45
28.90
57.80
Bi-Directional* Ranges also available:

DH-012, Range: 0.25 - 0 - 0.25 in w.c.
DH-014, Range: 1.0 - 0 - 1.0 in w.c.
DH-015, Range: 2.5 - 0 - 2.5 in w.c.
DH-016, Range:5 - 0 - 5 in w.c.
DH-017, Range:10 - 0 - 10 in w.c.
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi-directional
range units and models DH-009 & DH-010.

19
3-25/32
[96.04]
020_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:33 AM Page 20
PRESSURE
Series
DH3
Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller
Digihelic Controller in Photohelic Gage, Square Root Output for Flow

1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/16
[52.39]
2
[50.80]
1/2
[12.70]
11/16
[17.46]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH

PRESSURE CONNECTION
30
SP1
1-1/4
[31.75]
[4] 6-32 HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
PANEL MOUNTING
SP2
ALLO
ALHI
1-3/4
[44.45]
1/2 [12.70]
1-9/32
[32.54]
4-47/64 5
[120.25][127.00]
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/2
[63.50]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
3/16
[4.76]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
11/16
[17.46]
[3] 3/16 [4.77] HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4-1/8 [104.78] B.C.
SURFACE MOUNTING
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series DH3 Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller is a 3 in 1 instrument
possessing a digital display gage, control relay switches, and a transmitter with current
output all packed in the popular Photohelic gage style housing. Combining these 3 features
allows the reduction of several instruments with one product, saving inventory, installation
time and money. The Digihelic controller is the ideal instrument for pressure, velocity and
flow applications, achieving a 1% full scale accuracy on ranges down to the extremely low
0.25 in w.c. to 2.5 in w.c. full scale. Ranges of 5 in w.c. and greater maintain 0.5% F.S.
accuracy. Bi-directional ranges are also available.
The Series DH3 Digihelic controller allows the selection of pressure, velocity or volumetric
flow operation in several commonly used engineering units. 2 SPDT control relays with
adjustable deadbands are provided along with a scalable 4-20 mA process output.
Programming is easy using the menu key to access 5 simplified menus which provide access
to: security level; selection of pressure, velocity or flow operation; selection of engineering
units; K-factor for use with flow sensors; rectangular or circular duct for inputting area in
flow applications; set point control or set point and alarm operation; alarm operation as a
high, low, or high/low alarm; automatic or manual alarm reset; alarm delay; view peak and
valley process reading; digital damping for smoothing erratic process applications; scaling
the 4-20 mA process output to fit your applications range and field calibration.
APPLICATIONS
SCFM flow in ducts
Filter status
Static pressures in ducts or buildings
Damper control
Fan control
Model
DH3-002
DH3-003
DH3-004
DH3-005
DH3-006
DH3-007
DH3-009
*DH3-010
*DH3-011
*DH3-013
*DH3-014
*DH3-015
*DH3-016
*DH3-017
*DH3-018
Ranges
0-0.25 in w.c.
0-0.5 in w.c.
0-1 in w.c.
0-2.5 in w.c.
0-5 in w.c.
0-10 in w.c.
0-25 in w.c.
0-50 in w.c.
0-100 in w.c.
0.25-0-0.25 in w.c.
0.5-0-0.5 in w.c.
1-0-1 in w.c.
2.5-0-2.5 in w.c.
5-0-5 in w.c.
10-0-10 in w.c.
*Velocity and volumetric flow not available on bi-directional range units and models
DH3-010 and DH3-011.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Die cast aluminum case and bezel.
Accuracy: 1.5% for 0.25 and 0.25 w.c. ranges. Ranges 0.5 to 5 w.c. and
corresponding bi-directional (except 2.5 w.c.) 1%; All other ranges:0.5% @
77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability (after 1 hour warm-up).
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 in w.c.: 25 psi; 2.5, 5 in w.c.: 5 psi; 10 in w.c.: 5
psi; 25 in w.c.: 5 psi; 50 in w.c.: 5 psi; 100 in w.c.: 9 psi.
Thermal Effects: 0.020%/F (0.036/C) from 77F (25C). For 0.25 and 0.25
w.c. ranges:0.03%/F (0.054%/C).
Power Requirements: 12-28 VDC, 12-28 VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
Power Consumption: 3 VA max.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC into 900 ohms max.
Response Time: 250 ms (damping set to 1).
Display: Backlit 4 digit LCD 0.4 height LED indicators for setpoint and alarm
status.
Electrical Connections: 15 pin male high density D-sub connection. 18 (46 cm)
cable with 10 conductors included. 4 and 10 cables available.
Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT. Side or back connections.
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in vertical plane.
Size: 5 (127 mm) OD x 3-1/8 (79.38 mm).
Weight: 1.75 lb (794 g).
Electrical Rating: 1 amp @ 30 VAC/VDC.
ACCESSORIES
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting
A-370, Mounting Bracket flush mount bracket. Bracket is then surface mounted. Steel
with gray hammertone epoxy finish
OPTIONS
Example DH3-004-NIST.
Example DH3-004-FC.
20
021_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:37 AM Page 21
ATEX Approved DH3 Differential Pressure

Controller
PRESSURE
Series
AT2DH3
Digihelic Pressure Control in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
19/32
[15.00]
SP1
6-19/64
[160.00]
SP2

with instrument).
Series
Range
AT2DH3
-002
-003
-004
-005
-006
-007
-009
-010
-011
-013
-014
-015
-016
-017
-018
Housing Material
Cover
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
DH3 Housing Material: Die cast
aluminum case and bezel.
Finishing: Texture epoxy coat
RAL7038.
Accuracy: < 5 in w.c. (except 2.5 in
w.c.): 1%; All other ranges: 0.5% at
77F (25C) including hysteresis and
repeatability (after 1 hour warm-up).
Pressure Limits: Ranges 2.5 in w.c.:
25 psi; 2.5, 5 in w.c.: 5 psi; 10 in w.c.:
5 psi; 25 in w.c.: 5 psi; 50 in w.c.: 5 psi;
100 in w.c.: 9 psi.
Temperature Limits: 32 to 140F (0 to
60C) Case: -58 to 140F (-50 to 60C)
(Note: Product temperature limits differ
from case).
Compensated Temperature Limits:
32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Thermal Effects: 0.020%/F
(0.036/C) from 77F (25C).
-A
B
O
1
2
X
OPV
T2
0 to 0.25 in w.c.
0 to 0.5 in w.c.
0 to 1 in w.c.
0 to 2.5 in w.c.
0 to 5 in w.c.
0 to 10 in w.c.
0 to 25 in w.c.
0 to 50 in w.c.
0 to 100 in w.c.
0.25 to 0 to 0.25 in w.c.
0.5 to 0 to 0.5 in w.c.
1 to 0 to 1 in w.c.
2.5 to 0 to 2.5 in w.c.
5 to 0 to 5 in w.c.
10 to 0 to 10 in w.c.
Aluminum
Blind
Glass top cover
1/8 NPT F brass ports
1/8 NPT F SS ports
Material same as port
8-17/64
[210.00]
8-5/64
[205.00]
7-11/64
[182.00]
ALHI
5/16
[8.00]
1/8 15/16
NPT [24.00]
The ATEX approved Series AT2DH3 Digihelic Differential Pressure Controller is

a 3 in 1 instrument possessing a digital display gage, control relay switches, and a
transmitter with current output. Combining these three features allows the reduction of
several instruments with one product, saving inventory, installation time and money. The
ATEX approved Digihelic controller is the ideal instrument for hazardous area pressure,
velocity and flow applications by allowing for the selection of pressure, velocity or
volumetric flow operation in several commonly used engineering units. Two SPDT control
relays with adjustable dead bands are provided along with a scalable 4 to 20 mA process
output. In velocity or flow modes, a square root output is provided on the 4 to 20 mA signal
to coincide with the actual flow curve.
Flame-proof ATEX enclosures are available in aluminum and can include a glass window
for viewing process information and set point status on digital display.
ALLO
1-37/64
[40.00]
2-9/16
[65.00]
1/8
NPT
19/32
[15.00]
Power Requirements: 12 to 28 VDC,

12 to 28 VAC 50 to 400 Hz.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC into 900
ohms max.
Zero & Span Adjustments:
Accessible via menus in safe zone
only.
Response Time: 250 ms (damping set
to 1).
Display: Backlit 4 digit LCD 0.4 height
LED indicators for set point and alarm
status.
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT
female brass (SS optional). In
presence of acetylene it is necessary
to use SS.
Electrical Connections: Two 1/2 NPT
female. Cable gland not included.
Electrical Wiring: Screw terminal.
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in
vertical plane.
Enclosure Rating: (IP66). IP65 with
option OPV, overpressure relief valve.
Dial Size: 5 (127 mm) OD x 3-1/8
(79.38 mm).
ATEXApproved Products from
Comhas with ECN: NEMKO
10ATEX1096.
II2
GD Ex d IIC Gb T6; -50C Ta
+60C Ex tb IIIC Db T 85C.
SWITCHSPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: 2 SPDT relays.
Electrical Rating: 1 amp @ 30
VAC/VDC.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable via
keypad on face in safe zone only.
21
1-31/32
[50.00]
8-17/64
[210.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
5-23/64
[136.00]
022_Layout 1 7/8/14 2:48 PM Page 22
PRESSURE
Series
A3000
Photohelic Pressure Switch/Gages

3-in-1 Indicating Gage, Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control
2-1/2 [63.50]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
2-1/16 [52.39]
PRESSURE CONNECTION
2 [50.80]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-7/8 SQ
[98.43]
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
Set points are instantly adjusted with front knobs.
4-3/8 [111.13]
HOUSING REMOVAL
1-1/4
[31.75]
(4) 6-32 HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
4-47/64
[120.25] 5
[127.00]
3-7/8 [98.43]
5-1/8 [130.18]
6-3/8 [161.93]
(7-5/8 [193.68])
5/8 [15.88]
5/8 [15.88] PANEL
MAX
3/16 [4.76]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70]
O.D.
MOUNTING
RING
Photohelic Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable pressure switches

combined with a precise pressure gage employing the time-proven Magnehelic gage design.
The Photohelic gage measures and controls positive, negative or differential pressures of
air and compatible gases. Standard models are rated to 25 psig (1.7 bar) with options to 35
(2.4) or 80 (5.5 bar) psig. Single pressure 36000S models measure to 6000 psig (413 bar)
with a 9000 psig (620 bar) rating.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high limit control. Easy
to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by knobs located on the gage face. Individual
setpoint deadband is one pointer width less than 1% of full-scale. Setpoints can be
interlocked to provide variable deadband ideal for control of fans, dampers, etc. Gage
reading is continuous and unaffected by switch operation, even during loss of electrical
power. Choose from full scale pressure ranges from a low 0-.25 in (0-6 mm) w.c. up to 30
psi (21 bar); single positive pressure to 6000 psig (413 bar).
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% of FS at 70F (21.1C). 3% on -0 and 4% on -00 models.
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 25 psig (-0.677 to 1.72 bar); MP option: 35 psig (2.41
bar); HP option: 80 psig (5.52 bar); A36003S 36010S: 150 psig (10.34 bar);
A36020S and higher: 1.2 x full-scale pressure.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C). Low temperature option
available.
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5 (127 mm) OD x 8-1/4 (209.55 mm).
Weight: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
Photohelic Sensing - How It Works

In typical applications, these Dwyer switch/gages control between high and low
pressure set points. When pressure changes, reaching either set point pressure, the
infrared light to the limiting phototransistor is cut off by the helix-driven light shutter.
The resulting phototransistor signal is electronically amplified to actuate its DPDT
slave relay and switching occurs. Deadband between make and break is 1% of full
scale or less just enough to assure positive, chatter-free operation.
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2 form C relays (DPDT).
Repeatability: 1% of FS.
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 28 VDC, 10A @ 120, 240 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminals. Use 167F (75C) copper conductors
only.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC power optional.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UL. Optional-EXPL explosion-proof enclosure does
not possess any agency approvals.
Relay - Transformer Features

A plastic housing protects all electronic components. Solid-state and integrated
circuit electronics are on glass-epoxy printed circuit boards and self-extinguishing
terminal boards.
APPLICATIONS - PHOTOHELIC SWITCH/GAGES
In both series of pressure switch/gages, you get the convenience of a visual
indication plus high-low limit switching. For both OEM and in-plant applications, the
Photohelic switch/gage is used to control pressures in air conditioning systems,
clean rooms, fluidic and pneumatic control systems, materials handling equipment,
alarm or control fume exhaust systems, control pressure in air structures, and
monitor respiratory and blood pressures.
StandardModel
Two phototransistor-actuated circuits and two DPDT relays permit both high and low
alarms or limit controls. Relays are de-energized when gage pointer is to the left of
respective set points; relays are energized as pointer passes to the right of set points.
Loss of electrical power or loss of pressure provide fail safe protection.
High andLow Latching Circuits
Dwyer Photohelic switch/gages can be wired for high-latching, low-latching, or
combination high-low latching circuits. That is, the equipment will hold in these
respective positions once activated and until manually reset. This can be particularly
useful for alarm and signal applications where control is accomplished by another
Photohelic switch/gage or other means. Complete wiring and operational
instructions are included. Where manual reset is required a dry circuit push button
such as Dwyer Part A-601 should be used.
22
OPTIONS
Single contact, right set point, for actuation on increasing or decreasing pressure.
OEM Model, less relay and transformer components and housing but including
infrared diodes and phototransistor(s), light shutter and set pointer(s). For single or
double contact.
Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may be mounted remotely from gage. Standard
length is 5 ft. For other lengths, specify cable length required.
Tamper-proof knobs, low temperature option, special scales, voltages and other
features and modifications are available.
Special Housings available include Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and Explosion-proof
(NEMA 7 C, D, 9 E, F, G; NEC Class I, DIV. 1 & 2, Groups C, D, Class II, Div. 1 & 2,
Groups E, F, G, Class III.) Contact Customer Service for detailed dimension drawings.
023_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:16 AM Page 23
Bezel and front cover (with set point

knobs and zero adjustment screw)
removed to expose Photohelic gage set
point mechanism. Cover is clear
polycarbonate plastic.
Plastic enclosure protects electronic

components and electrical connections.
Gage pointer and light shutter are

mounted on helix and balancing
counterweight. Shutter passes through
slot in optical limit switch to expose
phototransistors to integral infrared light
source or mask them depending on
applied pressure.
Glass-epoxy printed circuit boards for

durability and performance.
Polycarbonate connection or terminal

board is self-extinguishing.
Electronics are designed to operate on

50/60 Hz, 120 volt current with 10% over
or under voltage. Special units for other
voltages are available.
Switch set pointers show switch
settings at all times.
Optical limit switches are used for

reliability and long service life. Attached
directly to set pointers, they are
individually aligned to assure precise
switching accuracy.
Spring loaded friction clutch prevents

operator damage of set point
mechanism.
Semi-Flexible drive shaft connects to

set point knobs.
Zero adjustment screw connects to
screw in cover to adjust zero pressure
reading.
Models and Ranges - Series A3000 Photohelic Switch/Gages
Note: Special models can be built to OEM customers' specifications with scales reading in special pressure units like ounces per square inch,
inches of mercury, etc. Square Root Scales reading in FPM or SCFM are also available. Custom logos and special graduations can also be
included. Contact factory for minimum quantities and pricing.
Zero Center Ranges
Model
A3300-0
A3301
A3302
A3304
A3310
A3320
A3330
Model
A3000-00AV
A3000-0AV
A3001AV
A3002AV
A3010AV
Range,
in w.c.
.25-0-.25
.5-0-.5
1-0-1
2-0-2
5-0-5
10-0-10
15-0-15
Range in w.c.
/Air Velocity,
FPM
0-.25/300-2000
0-.50/500-2800
0-1.0/500-4000
0-2.0/1000-5600
0-10/2000-12500
Range,
Model
mm w.c.
A3000-6MM
0-6
A3000-10MM
0-10
A3000-25MM
0-25
A3000-50MM
0-50
A3000-80MM
0-80
A3000-100MM
0-100
Zero Center Ranges
A3300-20MM
10-0-10
15-0-15
A3300-30MM
Range,
Model
Pascals
A3000-60PA
0-60
A3000-125PA
0-125
A3000-250PA
0-250
A3000-500PA
0-500
A3000-750PA
0-750
Pitot tube required
Zero Center Ranges

Range,
Pa
125-0-125
250-0-250
Range,
kPa
Model
0-1
A3000-1KPA
0-1.5
A3000-1.5KPA
0-2
A3000-2KPA
0-3
A3000-3KPA
0-4
A3000-4KPA
0-5
A3000-5KPA
0-8
A3000-8KPA
0-10
A3000-10KPA
0-15
A3000-15KPA
0-20
A3000-20KPA
0-25
A3000-25KPA
0-30
A3000-30KPA
Zero Center Ranges
A3300-1KPA
.5-0- .5
A3300-3KPA
1.5-0-1.5
Model
A3300-250PA
A3300-500PA
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES - Add options as a suffix. Example: A3001-LT

-SRH, Single Relay Activates on Increase
-SRL, Single Relay Activates on Decrease
-OLS, OEM model
-RMR, Remote mounted relay
-TAMP, Tamper proof knobs
-MP, Medium pressure
-HP, High pressure
-LT, Low temperature (-20F)
A-601, Manual reset switch net
23
Load relays are DPDT with latching

feature for maximum application
versatility.
Light shield effectively protects

phototransistors from strong outside light
sources yet allows free pointer
movement. It also gives interior a clean
finished look.
Range,
Model
in w.c.
A3000-00
0-.25
A3000-0
0-.50
A3001
0-1.0
A3002
0-2.0
A3003
0-3.0
A3004
0-4.0
A3005
0-5.0
A3006
0-6.0
A3008
0-8.0
A3010
0-10
A3015
0-15
A3020
0-20
A3025
0-25
A3030
0-30
A3040
0-40
A3050
0-50
A3060
0-60
A3080
0-80
A3100
0-100
A3150
0-150
Bi-Directional Range
A3000-00N
.05-.20
PRESSURE
Check these features for dependable control
024_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:38 AM Page 24
PRESSURE
Series
AT3
A3000
ATEX Approved Photohelic Switch/Gages

with 120, 240 or 24 VAC Power
Photohelic Switch/Gages in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosures

9-29/64
[240.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
6-27/32
[174.00]
1-37/64
[40.00]
11-19/64
[287.00]
43/64
[17.00]
10-5/16
[262.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
9-19/64
[236.00]
1/8
NPT
1-1/32
[26.00]
25/64
[10.00]
Flame-proof ATEX approved Photohelic Switch/Gages, Series AT3A3000,

function as versatile, highly repeatable pressure switches combined with a precise
pressure gage employing the time-proven Magnehelic gage design. The Photohelic
switch/gage measures and controls positive, negative or differential pressures of air and
compatible gases. Standard models are rated to 25 psig (1.7 bar) with options to 35 psig
(2.4 bar) or 80 psig (5.5 bar). Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for
low/high limit control. Easy to adjust set point indicators are controlled by knobs located
on the gage face (accessible opening case after de-energizing instrument). Set points can
be interlocked to provide variable dead band ideal for control of fans, dampers, etc. Gage
reading is continuous and unaffected by switch operation, even during loss of electrical
power. Flame-proof ATEX enclosures are available in aluminum with glass window which
allows for viewing of set point needles and process pressure.
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Housing material: Aluminum.
RAL7038.
Accuracy: 2% of FS at 70F
(21.1C); 3% on -0 and 4% on -00
models.
(-0.677 to 1.72 bar). MP option; 35 psig
(2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52
bar).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F
(-6.67 to 48.9C) LT low temperature
option to -20F available; Case: -58 to
140F (-50 to 60C) (Note: Product
temperature limits differ from case).
Dial Size: 4 (101.6 mm).
vertical position.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable
knobs on Photohelic gage face behind
enclosure cover. Follow instructions
and safety warnings to open cover.

with instrument).
1/8 NPT
2-9/16
[65.00]
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2
Form C relays (DPDT).
Electrical Rating: 10 A @ 28 VDC, 10
A @ 120, 240 VAC.
Electrical Wiring: Screw terminals.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC,
50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC power
optional.
Enclosure Rating: IP66. IP65 with
to use SS.
Electrical Connections: Three 1/2
NPT female. Cable gland not included.
Weight: 28.4 lb (12.9 kg).
10ATEX1096.
II2
Range Chart
Model
A3000-00
A3000-0
A3001
A3002
A3003
A3004
A3005
A3006
A3008
A3010
A3015
A3020
A3025
A3030
A3040
A3050
A3060
A3080
A3100
A3150
Range,
in w.c.
0 to .25
0 to .50
0 to 1.0
0 to 2.0
0 to 3.0
0 to 4.0
0 to 5.0
0 to 6.0
0 to 8.0
0 to 10
0 to 15
0 to 20
0 to 25
0 to 30
0 to 40
0 to 50
0 to 60
0 to 80
0 to 100
0 to 150
Example
Housing
Range
Power
Pressure
Rating
Construction
Temperature
Rating
Housing
Material
Cover
AT3 A3001 120 VAC X

AT3
A3XXX
XX A B 1 X
-120 VAC
-240 VAC
-24 VAC
-X
-MP
-HP
X
X
LT
-A
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
24
T2
B
O
1
2
X
OPV
T2
AT3A3001-120VAC-XXX-AB1XT2
ATEX Approved Series A3000 Photohelic Switch/Gages
Specify range by wiring Photohelic model number.
See range chart
Power requirement 120 VAC
Standard -25 in Hg to 25 psig
Medium pressure max. static 35 psig
High pressure max. static 80 psig
Standard silicone construction
Standard temperature 20 to 120F
Low temperature to -20F
Aluminum
Blind
Glass cover
025_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:07 AM Page 25
Capsu-Photohelic Pressure Switch/Gages
PRESSURE
Series
43000
Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit Control, Aluminum or Brass Case Available

Set points are instantly adjusted with front knobs.
4-3/4
[120.65]
3-7/8 SQ
[98.43]
Series 43000
Capsu-Photohelic Switch/Gage.
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-3/8 [111.13]
HOUSING REMOVAL
3-7/8 [98.43]
5-1/8 [130.18]
7-5/16 [185.74]
8-9/16 [217.49]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
3/16 [4.76]
1/4 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION [AIR OR GAS]
3-1/16 [77.79] TYP
[4] 6-32 HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
1/4 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
[AIR OR GAS]
5
[127.00]
4-47/64
1/4 FEMALE
[120.25]
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
5/8 [15.88] [LIQUID]
1/4 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
[LIQUID]
3/4 [19.05] TYP
[101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
Series 43000
Capsu-Photohelic
Switch/Gage with Brass Body
Capsu-Photohelic Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable pressure
switches combined with a precise pressure gage employing the time-proven Magnehelic
gage design. The Capsu-Photohelic gage employs an encapsulated sensing element for
use with both liquids and gases at pressures to 500 psig (34 bar). Optional cast brass case
is available for water or water based liquids.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high limit control. Easy
to adjust setpoint indicators are controlled by knobs located on the gage face. Individual
setpoint deadband is one pointer width less than 1% of full-scale. Setpoints can be
interlocked to provide variable deadband ideal for control of pumps, etc.
ACCESSORY
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for Flush Mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases and liquids. Brass case option required for water
based liquids.
Accuracy: 3% of FS at 70F (21.1C). 4% on 43215, 43220 and 43500.
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 psig (-0.677 to 34.5 bar).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C). Low temperature option
available.
Weight: 5 lb, 8 oz (2.49 kg). Brass 11 lb, 2 oz (5.05 kg).
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2 form C relays (DPDT).
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120 VAC, 6A @ 240 VAC, 60 Hz res. 10A @ 28 VDC.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC power optional.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Model
43000-0
43001
43002
43003
43004
43005
43006
43008
43010
43015
43020
43025
43030
43040
43050
Range,
in w.c.
0-.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-25
0-30
0-40
0-50
Model
43060
43080
43100
43150
43200
43300
43400
43500
43302
43304
43310
43320
43330
Range,
in w.c.
0-60
0-80
0-100
0-150
0-200
0-300
0-400
0-500
1-0-1
2-0-2
5-0-5
10-0-10
15-0-15
OPTIONS
Single Contact, right set point, for actuation on increasing or decreasing
pressure.
Power Supply, 24 VAC or 220 VAC powered relay pack.
Remote-Mounted Relay, relay pack may be mounted remotely from gage.
Specify cable length required.
Tamper-proof Knobs, low temperature option, special scales, voltages and
other features and modifications are available.
Special Housings available include Weatherproof (NEMA 4) and Explosionproof (NEMA 7 C, D, 9 E, F, G; NEC Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D, Class II,
Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G, Class III. Contact Customer Service for detailed
dimension drawings.
Brass Body, for water based liquids order optional brass case by adding B to
the end of the model number.
Example: 43001B
NISTtraceable calibration certificate, add suffix -NIST to model numbers.
Example: 43001-NIST.
25
026_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:03 PM Page 26
PRESSURE
Series
3000MR
3000MRS
Photohelic Switch/Gages
Combines Differential Pressure Gage with Low/High Set-points
2-1/16
[52.39]
2
[50.80]
[4] 6-32 HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH

PRESSURE CONNECTION
1-1/4
[31.75]
4-47/64
[120.25]
5
[127.00]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW

PRESSURE CONNECTION
2-1/2
[63.50]
Using solid state technology, the Series 3000MR and 3000MRS Photohelic
switch/gages combine the functions of a precise, highly repeatable differential pressure
switch with a large easy-to-read analog pressure gage employing the durable, time-proven
Magnehelic gage design. Switch setting is easy to adjust with large external knobs on the
gage face. Gage reading is unaffected by switch operation will indicate accurately even
if power is interrupted. Solid state design now results in greatly reduced size and weight.
Units can be flush mounted in 4-13/16 (122 mm) hole or surface mounted with hardware
supplied. 3000MR models employ versatile electromechanical relays with gold over silver
contacts ideal for dry circuits. For applications requiring high cycle rates, choose
3000MRS models with SPST (N.O.) solid state relays. All models provide both low and high
limit control and include 18-inch (45 cm) cable assemblies for electrical connections.
Gage accuracy is 2% of full-scale and switch repeatability is 1%. Switch deadband is one
pointer width less than 1% of full-scale. Compatible with air and other non-combustible,
non-corrosive gases, they can be used in systems with pressures to 25 psig (1.725 bar).
Optional construction is available for use to either 35 psig (2.42 bar) or 80 psig (5.51 bar).
INCLUDEDACCESSORIES
Mounting ring, snap ring
18 (45 cm) cable assembly
(2) 3/16 tubing to 1/8 NPT adapters
(2) 1/8 NPT pipe plugs
(4) 6-32 x 1-1/4 RH machine screws

(panel mounting)
(3) 6-32 x 5/16 RH machine screws
(surface mounting)
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 2% of FS (3000-0 3% of
FS). (3000-00 4% of FS).
Pressure Limit: -20 Hg. to 25 psig
(-0.677 bar to 1.72 bar). MP option;
35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig
(5.52 bar).
(-6.67 to 48.9C).
NPT (duplicated side and back).
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face, 5
(127 mm) OD x 3-1/8 (79.38 mm).
Weight: 1.8 Ib (816 g).
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MR
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 1 form
C relays (SPDT).
Relay Contacts: (Resistive load) 1
form C rated 1.0A @ 30 VDC, 0.3A
@ 110 VDC or 0.5A @ 125 VAC.
Gold over clad silver - suitable for dry
circuits.
Electrical Connections: 18 (46 cm)
cable assembly with 8 conductors.
Optional lengths to 100 (30.5 m).
5/8
[15.88]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
3/16
[4.76]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70] O.D.
MOUNTING RING
Power Requirements: 24 VDC,

regulated 10%.
knobs on face.
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS 3000MRS
Switch Type: Each setpoint has a solid
state relay.
Switching Voltage: 20-280 VAC
(47-63 Hz).
Switching Current: 1.0 amp (AC)
max., 0.01 mA (AC) min., (2) SPST
NO.
Electrical Connections: 18 (46 cm)
cable assembly with 6 conductors,
optional lengths to 100 (30.5 m).
regulated 10%.
knobs on face.
Series 3000MR, 3000MRS Photohelic

Range, Minor
in w.c. Divs.
0-0.25
.005
0-0.5
.01
0-1.0
.02
0-2.0
.05
0-3.0
.10
0-5.0
.10
0-10
.20
0-15
.50
0-20
.50
0-30
1.0
0-50
1.0
0-100
2.0
Range, Minor
Model
Pascals Divs.
3000(MR)(MRS)-60PA* 0-60
2.0
3000(MR)(MRS)-125PA 0-125
5.0
3000(MR)(MRS)-250PA 0-250
5.0
3000(MR)(MRS)-500PA 0-500
10.0
*3% of full scale. ** 4% of full scale.
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)**-00
3000(MR)(MRS)*-0
3001(MR)(MRS)
3002(MR)(MRS)
3003(MR)(MRS)
3005(MR)(MRS)
3010(MR)(MRS)
3015(MR)(MRS)
3020(MR)(MRS)
3030(MR)(MRS)
3050(MR)(MRS)
3100(MR)(MRS)
26
Range,
kPa
0-1.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
Range,
Model
mm w.c.
3000(MR)(MRS)-6MM* 0-6
3000(MR)(MRS)-10MM 0-10
3000(MR)(MRS)-25MM 0-25
3000(MR)(MRS)-50MM 0-50
3000(MR)(MRS)-100MM 0-100
Range,
Model
cm w.c.
3000(MR)(MRS)-20CM 0-20
Model
3000(MR)(MRS)-1KPA
3000(MR)(MRS)-3KPA
3000(MR)(MRS)-4KPA
Minor
Divs.
.02
.10
.10
Minor
Divs.
.20
.50
.50
1.0
2.0
Minor
Divs
.50
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Tamper-proof Knobs, require spanner type key (supplied) to change setpoints.
Add suffix -TAMP
Low Temperature Option for use under 20F (-6.7C).
Add suffix -LT
Medium Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 35 psig (2.41 bar).
Add suffix -MP
High Pressure increases maximum rated pressure to 80 psig (5.5 bar).
Add suffix -HP
Weatherproof Housing Option.
Add Suffix -WP
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting 3000MR/MRS
A-370, Mounting Bracket flush mount 3000MR/MRS bracket. Bracket is then
surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-600, R/C Snubber recommended for inductive loads like a solenoid or contactor
NISTtraceable calibration certificate, add suffix -NIST to model numbers.
Example: 3001MR-NIST.
When ordering, select either MR or MRS

suffix to Series 3000 number.
Examples: 3001MR or 3001MRS
027_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:40 AM Page 27
ATEX Approved Photohelic Switch/Gages

with 24 VDC Power
PRESSURE
Series
AT2
3000MR
3000MR or 3000MRS Series in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosures

7-7/8
[200.00]
19/32
[15.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
5-23/64
[136.00]
7-11/64
[182.00]
5/16
[8.00]
1/8
NPT

with instrument).
Range Chart
Range, Minor
Range, Minor
Pa
Divs.
Divs. Model
Model in w.c.
3000-00 0 to 0.25 .005 3000-60 Pa 0 to 60 2.0
3000-125 Pa 0 to 125 5.0
3000-0 0 to 0.5 .01
3000-250 Pa 0 to 250 5.0
3001
0 to 1.0 .02
3000-500 Pa 0 to 500 10.0
3002
0 to 2.0 .05
AT2 3001 MR
AT2
Example
Housing
X X A B 1 X
T2
3XXX
Range
MR
MRS
Relay
-X
-MP
-HP
Pressure
Rating
Construction
Temperature
Rating
Housing
Material
Cover
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
X
X
LT
-A
B
O
1
2
X
OPV
T2
8-17/64
[210.00]
8-5/64
[205.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
Using solid state technology, the Series AT23000MR and AT23000MRS ATEX
Approved Photohelic Switch/Gages combine the functions of a precise, highly
repeatable differential pressure switch with a large easy-to-read analog pressure gage.
Gage reading is unaffected by switch operation and will indicate accurately even if power
is interrupted. AT23000MR series employ versatile electromechanical relays with low
amperage ratings-ideal for dry circuits. For applications requiring high cycle rates, choose
AT23000MRS models with SPST (NO) solid state relays. Easy to adjust set point
indicators are controlled by knobs located on the gage face (accessible opening case after
de-energizing instrument). All models provide both low and high limit control. Compatible
with air and other non-combustible, non-corrosive gases, they can be used in systems with
pressures to 25 psig (1.725 bar). Optional construction is available for use to either 35 psig
(2.42 bar) or 80 psig (5.51 bar). Flame-proof ATEX enclosures are available with glass
window which allows for viewing of set point needles and process pressure.
1-37/64
[40.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
15/16
1-31/32 [24.00]
[50.00]
2-9/16
[65.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
RAL7038.
Accuracy: 2% of FS at 70F
(21.1C). 3% on -0, -60 Pa and 4%
on -00 models.
(-0.677 bar to 1.72 bar). MP option; 35
psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig
(5.52 bar).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F.
(-6.67 to 48.9C). Option LT low
temperature to -20F (28.8C); Case:
-58 to 140F (-50 to 60C). (Note:
Product temperature limits differ from
case).
regulated 10%.
Electrical Wiring: Screw terminals.
vertical position.
AT23001MR-XXX-AB1XT2
ATEX Approved Series 3000 MR/MRS
Specify range by using Photohelic
model number. See range cart.
Electromechanical relay
Solid state relay
Standard -25 in Hg to 25 psig
Medium pressure max. static 35 psig
High pressure max. static 80 psig
Standard silicone construction
Standard temperature 20 to 120F
Low temperature to -20F
Aluminum
19/32
[15.00]
1/8
NPT

to use SS.
Dial Size: 4 (101.6 mm).
knobs on face behind enclosure cover.
Follow instructions and safety warnings
to open cover.
10ATEX1096.
II2
SWITCHSPECIFICATIONS (3000MR)
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 1
Form C relay (SPDT).
Relay Contacts: (resistive load) 1
Form C rated 1.0 A @ 30 VDC, 0.3 A
@ 110 VDC or 0.5 A @ 125 VAC. Gold
over clad silver - suitable for dry
circuits.
(3000MRS)
Switch Type: Each setpoint has a solid
state relay.
Switching Voltage: 20 to 280 VAC
(47 to 63 Hz).
Switching Current: 1.0 amp (AC)
max., 0.01 mA (AC) min., (2) SPST
NO.
Blind
Glass top cover
27
028_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:40 AM Page 28
PRESSURE
Series
MP
Mini-Photohelic Differential Pressure

Switch/Gage
Compact, Low Cost Switch Gage
LOW PRESSURE
PORT
2-19/32
[65.88]
1 [25.4]
HIGH PRESSURE
PORT
3-1/32 [77.00]
3-1/16
[77.79]
3-1/32 [77.00]
3-13/16 [96.84]
The Series MP Mini-Photohelic differential pressure switch/gage combines the time

proven Minihelic II differential pressure gage with two SPDT switching setpoints. The
Mini-Photohelic gage is designed to measure and control positive, negative, or differential
pressures consisting of non-combustible and non-corrosive gases. Gage reading is
independent of switch operation. Switching status is visible by LED indicators located on
the front and rear of the gage. Set points are adjusted with push buttons on back of unit.
This extremely compact switch/gage is ideal for fume hoods, dust collection, pneumatic
conveying and clean room applications.
Model
MP-000
MP-001
MP-002
MP-003
MP-005
MP-010
MP-020
Range,
Inches of
Water
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-5.0
0-10
0-20
Model
MP-125PA
MP-250PA
MP-500PA
Model
MP-1KPA
MP-3KPA
Range, Pa
0-125
0-250
0-500
Range, kPa
0-1
0-3
9/32
[7.134]
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 5% of FS @ 70F (21.1C). Gage face mounted in vertical position.
Pressure Limits: 30 psig (2.067 bar).
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 49C).
Process Connections: Barbed for 3/16 ID tubing (STD); 1/8 male NPT
(optional).
Size: 4-1/8 (104.78 mm) depth x 3-1/16 (77.79 mm) diameter.
Weight: 23 oz (652 g).
Switch Type: (2) SPDT relays.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 120/240 VAC resistive; 5A @ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal block. Accepts 22-12 AWG wire.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC / 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 4 watts.
Mounting Orientation: Gage face in vertical position.
Set Point Adjustment: Push buttons.
Standard Accessories: (2) mounting screws, (1) .050 hex allen wrench.
Agency Approvals: CE, cUL, UL.
OPTIONS
For optional 1/8 male NPT connections, add suffix -NPT to model numbers listed
above.
Example: MP-000-NPT. Allow additional lead time.
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, add suffix -NIST to model numbers.
Example: MP-005-NIST.
ACCESSORIES
28
029_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:42 AM Page 29
Compact Economic Differential Pressure Switch

Low Pressures down to 0.07 in w.c.
1-17/32 [38.89]
3-5/32
[80.17]
1-17/64[32.15]
9/64 [3.57]
2x 3/16
[4.76]
5/16 [7.94]
PDPS
Model
Pressure Range
Switch Direction
1 - 0.07 to 0.14 in w.c.
I - Activate on Increase
2 - 0.14 to 0.32 in w.c.
D - Activate on Decrease
3 - 0.32 to 0.64 in w.c.
4 - 0.64 to 1.0 in w.c. Factory Preset Set Point
Example: 007 for 0.07 in w.c.
or 100 for 1in w.c.
Series
BDPA
27/64
[10.72]
3/4
1-19/64
[19.05]
[32.94]
27/64 [10.72]
1-9/16
19/64 [7.54]
[39.69]
29/32
1-1/32
[23.02]
[26.19]
1-57/64 [48.02]
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: Conventional snap
action switch.
Wetted Materials: Polyphenylene
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 125/250
oxide-styrene housing, fluorosilicone
VAC.
diaphragm, stainless steel spring.
Process Connections: Multi-barb port
Temperature Limits: -40 to 185F (-40
connections for 1/4 and 3/8 ID tubing.
to 85C).
Mounting Orientation: Mount switch
Operating Pressure: 0.07 in w.c. to
with diaphragm in a vertical position
1.0 in w.c.
unless customer has specified
Repeatability: 0.02 in of w.c.
otherwise.
Burst Pressure: 3.5 psi (0.241 bar).
Set Point Adjustment: Set point
Proof Pressure: 1.0 psi (0.069 bar).
adjusted at factory.
Weight: 2.7 oz (76.5 g).
3x 1/4 [6.35]
The Series PDPSs large diameter diaphragm and snap action switch make it dependable
and ideal for OEM applications. The Series PDPS Pressure Switches are available for
pressure, vacuum, and differential applications and are factory preset for pressures from
0.07 in of w.c. to 1.0 in of w.c. with full-scale repeatability of 0.02 in of w.c. Other features
of the PDPS pressure switch include standard multi-barb port connections, inherent
mounting and quick disconnect terminals, which make the Series PDPS perfect for many
OEM applications.
1-39/64 2
[40.88] [50.8]
8x 1/8
[3.18]
Note: All purchases must be of 25 units or more.
Adjustable Differential Pressure Alarm

24 Volt or Battery Powered, Built-in Audible and Visual Alarm
11/64
[4.5]
LED
Audible
Buzzer
Test/Snooze Button
2-9/16 [65]
1-31/32
[50]
2-21/64
[59]
Contact
Output
51/64 [18]
[P2] [P1]
The Series BDPA Adjustable Differential Pressure Alarm with built-in audible and
visual set point indication is designed for overpressure, vacuum, and differential pressure
applications. The scaled adjustment knob allows changes to the switching pressure to be
made without a pressure gage. The BDPA is available with settings from 0.08 in w.c. (20
Pa) to 20 in w.c. (5000 Pa). The silicone diaphragm and PA 6.6 body make the Series BDPA
perfect for use with air and other noncombustible gases.
The Series BDPA Adjustable Differential Pressure Alarms offer a versatile range of
configurations allowing utilization of their many features. The BDPA can be powered by
battery or 24 VDC/VAC line power. If connecting line power, the battery can act as backup power in case of power outage. When set point threshold is reached, a local loud audible
buzzer and bright LED will indicate periodically notifying of set point activation. An SPDT
contact may also be wired to send a signal remotely to a DDC or building management
system. A snooze button located through an opening in the cover can be pressed by the
user to manually disengage the audible and visual indication until a maintenance operation
is performed. If the instrument is mounted where it is difficult to access, a remote contact
may be connected allowing the user to deactivate the buzzer and LED at the remote contact
location.
The Series BDPA Differential Pressure Alarms great functional versatility makes it
perfect for filter, fan, and ventilation applications or any retrofit job where installing
electrical wiring proves cost-prohibitive.
Set Point Range
inw.c. (Pa)
Model
BDPA-08-2-N 0.08 to 1.20
(20 to 300)
BDPA-04-2-N 0.12 to 1.60
(30 to 400)
BDPA-03-2-N 0.20 to 2.00
(50 to 500)
BDPA-05-2-N 0.80 to 4.00
(200 to 1000)
BDPA-06-2-N 2.00 to 10.00
(500 to 2500)
BDPA-07-2-N 4.00 to 20.00
(1000 to 5000)
7/8
[22]
21/64
[8.5]
Battery
Power
Input
RoHS
2-17/64
[57.5]
Approx. Dead
Band @ Min Set
Point inw.c. (Pa)
0.04 (10)
Approx. Dead
Band @ Max Set
Point inw.c. (Pa)
0.05 (12)
0.06 (15)
0.09 (23)
0.08 (20)
0.09 (23)
0.4 (100)
0.5 (130)
0.6 (150)
0.8 (200)
1.0 (250)
1.4 (350)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and noncombustible,
compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Diaphragm
material: Silicone; Housing material,
switch body: PA 6.6 and POM; Cover:
Polystyrene.
50C).
Pressure Limits: 40 in w.c. (10 kPa).
Electrical Rating:1.0 amp @ 30
VDC/VAC.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Alarm Indication: Red LED and
audible alarm.
Alarm Level: Approximately 90 db at
4 (10 cm).
Alarm Acknowledge: Button press.
19/64 [7.5]
15/64
[6]

18 to 30 VAC or 3.6 V LS14250 lithium
metal battery, installed functional, user
replaceable. Battery acts as back-up if
power is lost.
Battery Life: Approximately 1.5 years
with 3.6 V/1.2 Ah.
Repeatability: 15% FS.
Electrical Connections: Screw
terminals. M20x1.5 with cable strain
relief or optional 1/2 NPT connection.
Process Connections: 5/16 (7.94
mm) outside diameter tubing, 1/4 (6.0
mm) inside diameter tubing.
Enclosure Rating: IP21.
Mounting Orientation: Vertically, with
pressure connections pointing
downwards.
Weight: 6.1 oz (173 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS.
ACCESSORIES
A-288, L type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-289, S type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-468, Replacement battery for Series BDPA
A-480, Plastic static pressure tip
A-481, Installer kit. Includes 2 plastic static pressure tips and 7 ft (2.1 m) of PVC
tubing tip
A-489, 4 Straight static pressure tip with flange
29
Differential Pressure Switches
1-45/64
[43.26]
2 [50.8]
1-39/64
[40.88]
61/64
[24.21]
9/64
[3.57]
PRESSURE
Series
PDPS
030_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:42 AM Page 30
PRESSURE
Series
ADPS/
EDPS
H.V.A.C. Differential Pressure Switch

With Dual Scale Field Adjustable Set Point Knob
RoHS
2-9/16
[65]
1-31/32
[50]
2-17/64
[57.5] 7/8
[22]
11/64
[4.5]
21/64
[8.5]
2-21/64
[59]
ADPS
EDPS
51/64
[18]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series ADPS/EDPS Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch is designed for
pressure, vacuum, and differential pressures. The dual scaled adjustment knob in inches
water column and pascals allows changes to the switching pressure to be made without a
pressure gage. The ADPS/EDPS is available with settings from 0.08 in w.c. (20 Pa) up to
20 in w.c. (5000 Pa). The silicone diaphragm and PA 6.6 body make the series ADPS ideal
for use with air and other noncombustible gases. Series EDPS models meet UL508 and
are constructed of plenum rated plastics. The compact size, adjustment knob and low cost
make the ADPS/EDPS the perfect choice for HVAC applications.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring air filters and ventilators
Monitoring industrial cooling-air circuits
Overheating protection for fan heaters
Monitoring flows in ventilation ducts
Controlling air and fire-protection dampers
Frost protection for heat exchanges
ACCESSORIES
A-288, L type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-289, S type metal mounting bracket with screws
A-480, Plastic static pressure tip
A-481, Installer kit. Includes 2 plastic static pressure tips and 7 (2.1 m) of PVC tubing
19/64
[7.5]
+
[P2] [P1]
15/64
[6]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
ADPS: Diaphragm material: Silicone; Housing material: POM; Switch body: PA
6.6; Cover: Polystyrene;
EDPS: Diaphragm material:Silicone; Housing material:Switch body: PA 6.6;
Cover:Polystyrene; Materials UL94 V-0 rated.
Temperature Limits: Process and ambient temperature from -4 to 185F (-20 to
85C).
Pressure Limits: Max. operating pressure: 40 in w.c. (10 kPa) for all pressure
ranges.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: Max. 1.5 A res./0.4 A ind./250 VAC, 50/60 Hz; Max. switching
rate: 6 cycles/min.
Electrical Connections: Push-on screw terminals. M20x1.5 with cable strain relief
or optional 1/2 NPT connection.
Process Connections: 5/16 (7.94 mm) outside diameter tubing, 1/4 (6.0 mm)
inside diameter tubing.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 13 (IP54).
Mounting Orientation: Vertically, with pressure connections pointing downwards.
Mechanical Working Life: Over 106 switching operations.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, ETLapproved to UL508 and CSA C22.2#14 (EDPS
only), RoHS.
Bypass Damper version is available online

A-480
ADPS
Model
ADPS-08-2-N
ADPS-04-2-N
ADPS-03-2-N
ADPS-05-2-N
ADPS-06-2-N
ADPS-07-2-N
Set Point Range

inw.c. (Pa)
0.08 to 1.20 (20-300)
0.12 to 1.60 (30-400)
0.20 to 2.00 (50-500)
0.80 to 4.00 (200-1000)
2.00 to 10.00 (500-2500)
4.00 to 20.00 (1000-5000)
Approx. Dead Band @

Min Set Point inw.c. (Pa)
0.04 (10)
0.06 (15)
0.08 (20)
0.4 (100)
0.6 (150)
1.0 (250)
Approx. Deadband @
Max Set Point inw.c. (Pa)
0.05 (12)
0.09 (22)
0.09 (23)
0.5 (130)
0.8 (200)
1.4 (350)
Note: For optional 1/2 NPT conduit connection, change -2-N to1-N. Models that include installer kit add -C to the end of the model
number (-2-N cable gland models only). Installer kit includes two
static tips and 7 ft of PVCtubing. Order installer kit separately with
1/2 NPT conduit connection models.
See A-481 in the accessories list.
Set Point Range

in w.c. (Pa)
0.08 to 1.20 (20-300)
0.12 to 1.60 (30-400)
0.20 to 2.00 (50-500)
0.80 to 4.00 (200-1000)
2.00 to 10.00 (500-2500)
4.00 to 20.00 (1000-5000)
Approx. Dead Band @

Min Set Point in w.c. (Pa)
0.04 (10)
0.06 (15)
0.08 (20)
0.4 (100)
0.6 (150)
1.0 (250)
Approx. Dead Band @

Max Set Point in w.c. (Pa)
0.05 (12)
0.09 (23)
0.09 (23)
0.5 (130)
0.8 (200)
1.4 (350)
Note: For optional M20 cable gland connection, change -1-N to-2N.
EDPS
Model
EDPS-08-1-N
EDPS-04-1-N
EDPS-03-1-N
EDPS-05-1-N
EDPS-06-1-N
EDPS-07-1-N
30
031_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:43 AM Page 31
ATEX Approved ADPS Adjustable Differential

Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
AT1
ADPS
The ADPS in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure

7-3/32 [180.00]
5-33/64
[140.00]
4-17/32
[115.00]
1-32/64
[40.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
4-27/32
[123.00]
7-1/4
[184.00]
5-33/64
[140.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
4X 5/16
1/8 [8.00]
NPT
The ATEX approved Series AT1ADPS Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch is

designed for pressure, vacuum, and differential pressure applications in hazardous areas.
The dual scaled adjustment knob in inches water column and pascals allows changes to the
switching pressure to be made without a pressure gage. The switch is available with
settings from 0.08 in w.c. (20 Pa) up to 16 in w.c. (4000 Pa). The silicone diaphragm makes
this series ideal for use with air and other noncombustible gases. Flame-proof ATEX
enclosures are available in aluminum and can include a glass window for viewing set point
status on adjustment knob.
with instrument).
25/64
[10.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Diaphragm material: Silicone;
Housing material:
Switch body: PA 6.6 and POM;
Cover: Polystyrene;
Brass or SS depending on pressure connections chosen.
Temperature Limits: Process and ambient temperature from -4 to 185F (-20 to
85C); Case: -58 to 140F (-50 to 60C) (Note: Product temperature limits differ
from case).
Pressure Limits: 40 in w.c. (10 kPa).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: Standard: Max. 1.5 A @ 250 VAC, max. switching rate: 6
cycles/min.
Set Point Adjustment: Hand knob on pressure switch inside case. (De-energize
before opening case).
Mounting Orientation: Vertically, with pressure connections pointing downwards.
Mechanical WorkingLife: Over 106 switching operations.
Electrical Connections: Two 1/2 NPT female. Cable gland not included.
ATEXApproved Products from Comhas with ECN: NEMKO 10ATEX1096.
IIIC Db T 85C.
AT1ADPS
Series
Range
.08 to 1.2 in w.c. (20 to 300 Pa)

.12 to 1.6 in w.c. (30 to 400 Pa)
.2 to 2 in w.c. (50 to 500 Pa)
.8 to 4 in w.c. (200 to 1000 Pa)
2 to 10 in w.c. (500 to 2500 Pa)
4 to 20 in w.c. (1000 to 5000 Pa)
Internal cable gland
1.5 A @ 250 VAC
Aluminum
-08
-04
-03
-05
-06
-07
-2
-N
Switch
Housing
Material
Cover
-A
B
O
Process
Connections
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
2-9/16
[65.00]
1
2
X
OPV
T2
Blind
Glass top cover
31
032_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:05 PM Page 32
PRESSURE
Series
1800
Low Differential Pressure Switches

for General Industrial Service
Set Points from 0.07 in w.c. to 85 in w.c. Repetitive Accuracy within 2%
1-27/32
[46.83]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3-39/64
[91.68]
1823 shown with new zinc plated clear finish
2-3/32
[53.18]
2-1/8
3-27/32
[53.98]
[97.63]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
Scan here
to watch
product video
Essential for industrial environments, the Series 1800 combines small size and
low price with 2% repeatability for enough accuracy for all but the most demanding
applications. Set point adjustment inside the mounting stud permits mounting switch on
one side of a wall or panel with adjustment easily accessible on the opposite side. UL and
CSA listed, FM approved.

Series 1823 Switches
Operating Ranges &Deadbands
Approximate
Operating Deadband
Range,
At Min.
At Max.
Model in w.c.
Set Point
SetPoint
1823-00 0.07 to 0.22 0.05
0.05
1823-0 0.15 to 0.5 0.06
0.06
1823-1 0.3 to 1.0
0.08
0.08
1823-2 0.5 to 2.0
0.10
0.12
1823-5 1.5 to 5.0
0.14
0.28
1823-10 2.0 to10
0.18
0.45
1823-20 3 to 22
0.35
0.70
1823-40 5 to 44
0.56
1.10
1823-80 9 to 85
1.30
3.0
OPTION
MIL Environmental Construction Unlisted Model 1820 can be furnished with a
special sealed snap switch for protection against high humidity, fungus and/or
military applications. Similar to Model 1823 except deadband is slightly greater and
some lower setpoints may not be possible. To order, add suffix -MIL.
Example: 1820-2-MIL.
ACCESSORIES
A-389 Mounting Bracket is 16 ga. steel, zinc plated and dichromate dipped for
corrosion resistance. Provides rugged, permanent mounting and speeds installation
A-302F-B, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 rubber or
A-302F-C, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 rubber or
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3/4
[19.05]
3-1/8
[79.38]
4
[101.60]
1-1/8
[28.57]
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
MOUNTING SPUD
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Temperature Limits: -30 to 180F
(-34 to 82.2C). 1823-00, -20 to 180F
(-28.9 to 82.2C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa)
continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw
(SPDT).
Repeatability: 2%.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @125
VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. Derate to 10 A for operation at high cycle
rates.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type,

common, normally open and normally
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type
inside mounting spud.
Weight: 1 lb, 5 oz (595 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM, UL.
Optional-EXPL explosion-proof
enclosure does not possess any
agency approvals.
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
4 [101.60]
6 [152.40]TYP
SQ
1/2 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3
[76.20]
5/16 [7.94]
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 4
PLACES
1-1/2 [38.10]
1-1/4 [31.75]
3/32 [2.38]
1-1/2 [38.10] TYP

1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3/4 [19.05]
1-7/16 [36.53]
CLEARANCE
4-1/16
6-3/4
FOR COVER
[103.19]
[171.45] TYP
REMOVAL
7-1/2 [190.50]
Weatherproof Housing:
16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily
conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt spray test. Wt. 5-1/2 Ib (2.5 kg). Switch must
be factory installed. Change 1823 base number to 1824 and add -WP suffix.
Example: 1824-1-WP
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
5/16 [7.94]
TYP 4 PLACES
1/2 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
5-7/8
[149.23] 4-1/4
[107.95]
6-3/8 TYP
TYP
61.93]
4-1/4 [107.95] TYP
7/16
[11.11]
1-1/16
[26.99]
3-3/4
6-15/16
2-3/4
[95.25]
[70.61]
CLEARANCE [176.21]
FOR COVER REMOVAL
Explosion-Proof Housing:
Cast iron base with aluminum cover. Rated Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D; Class II,
Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7 CD, 9 EFG. Wt. 7-1/2 Ib (3.4kg).
Switch must be factory installed. Change base number to 1824 and add -EXPL
suffix. Example: 1824-1-EXPL
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
32
033_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:44 AM Page 33
ATEX Approved 1823 Differential

Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
AT2
1823
The 1823 in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
19/32
[15.00]
5-63/64
[152.00]
2-3/4
[70.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
1-37/64
[40.00]
7-11/64
[182.00]
5/16
[8.00]
1/8
NPT
Essential for industrial environments, the ATEX approved Series AT21823 combines
small size with 2% repeatability. Set point adjustment inside the switch allows for set point
settings across 9 ranges from the low of .07 in w.c. to a maximum 85 in w.c. differential
pressure. Series AT21823 flame-proof ATEX enclosures are available in aluminum and are
ideal for low pressure hazardous area applications. Various housing options such as an
overpressure relief valve or external setpoint adjustment knob are available. External
setpoint knob allows adjustment without opening the enclosure.
with instrument).
Series
Range
3-35/64
[90.00]
1/8 NPT
19/32
[15.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: -30 to 180F (-34 to 82.2C); 1823-00, -20 to 180F (-28.9 to
82.2C); Case: -58 to 140F ( -50 to 60C) (Note: Product temperature limits differ
from case).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 to 480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC,
1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. De-rate to 10 A for operation at high cycle rates.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type inside mounting spud internal to switch.
External setpoint adjustment knob optional.
Enclosure Rating: IP66. IP65 with option OPV, overpressure relief valve or
external setpoint adjustment knob.
ATEXApproved Products from Comhas with ECN: NEMKO 10ATEX1096.
IIIC Db T 85C.
AT21823
-00
-0
-1
-2
-5
-10
-20
-40
-80
Housing Material
Cover
Setpoint
Adjustment
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
15/16
[24.00]
8-5/64
[205.00]
-A
B
O
K1
K2
1
2
X
OPV
T2
.08 to .22 in w.c. (18 to 56 Pa)

.15 to .4 in w.c. (38 to 127 Pa)
.3 to 1 in w.c. (76 to 254 Pa)
5 to 2 in w.c. (127 to 508 Pa)
1.5 to 5 in w.c. (381 to 1270 Pa)
2 to 10 in w.c. (.5 to 2.5 kPa)
3 to 22 in w.c. (.76 to 5.6 kPa)
5 to 44 in w.c. (1.27 to 11.17 kPa)
9 to 85 in w.c. (2.28 to 21.6 kPa)
Aluminum
Blind
Glass top cover
Without external setpoint adjustment knob
With external setpoint adjustment knob
33
9-1/16
[230.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
5-23/64
[136.00]
034_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:44 AM Page 34
PRESSURE
Series
1900
Compact Low Differential Pressure Switches

Set Points from 0.07 in to 20 in w.c. Repetitive Accuracy within 3%
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESS. CONNECTION
60 TYP
(2) 3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
ON A 4-3/16 [106.36] B.C.
3
[76.20]
1-5/16
[33.32]
TYP
3-1/2
[88.90]
41/64
Series 1910 switch with conduit [16.27]
enclosure off. Shows electric
switch and set point adjustment
screw located on same side for
easy installation.
Scan here
to watch
product video
7/8 [22.23] 51/64

[20.24]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1-19/32
[40.48]
2-11/32
[59.53]
1-7/8
[47.63]
2-9/32
[57.94]
2-7/16
[61.90]
1-3/4 [44.45]
CLEARANCE
FOR COVER REMOVAL
The Dwyer-engineered force-motion amplifier increases the leverage of diaphragm

movement and results in a switch with excellent sensitivity and repeatability.
Our most popular series combines advanced design and precision construction to make
these switches able to perform many of the tasks of larger, costlier units. Designed for air
conditioning service, they also serve many fluidics, refrigeration, oven and dryer
applications. For air and non combustible compatible gases, Series 1900 switches have set
points from 0.07 to 20 in w.c. (1.8 to 508 mm). Set point adjustment is easy with range
screw located inside conduit enclosure. Internal location helps prevent tampering. UL,
CE, CSA listed, and FM approved.
Series 1910 Switches

Operating Ranges, Deadbands
Approximate
Operating Dead Band
Range,
AtMin.
Model in w.c.
Set Point
1910-00 0.07 to 0.15 0.04
1910-0 0.15 to 0.55 0.10
1910-1 0.40 to 1.6 0.15
1910-5 1.40 to 5.5 0.30
1910-10 3.0 to 11.75 0.40
1910-20 4.0 to 20.0 0.40
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
At Max.
Set Point
0.04
0.10
0.16
0.30
0.40
0.50
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
to 82.2C).
Pressure Limits: 45 in w.c. (11.2 kPa)
(SPDT).
Repeatability: 3%.
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @125
VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
Derate to 10 A for operation at high
cycle rates.
5 7/16 [138.1]
4 3/4 [120.7]
4
[101.6]
COMMON
NORMALLY
HI
LO
OPEN
P R
NORMALLY
CLOSED
P R
3
[76.20]
1 1/4
5/16 [7.938]
[31.75]
3/4
[19.05]
3/4 [19.05]
3/32 [2.381]
3 [76.20]
LOW PRESSURE
HIGH PRESSURE
3
1/8 [79.38]
CONNECTION 1/8 N.P.T.
CONNECTION 1/8 N.P.T.
Weatherproof Housing
16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed cover (NEMA 4, IP66) for wet or oily
conditions. Withstands 200 hour salt spray test. Wt. 5 Ib (2.3 kg). Switch must be
factory installed. Change 1910 base number to 1911 and add -WP suffix.
Example: 1911-1-WP.
6-1/2 [165.10]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER
REMOVAL
4X .281
[7.14]
2X 4-1/4
[107.95] 2X 6-1/8
[155.58]
Note: Manual Reset (MR) Option for use only in single positive pressure applications.
ACCESSORIES
A-399, Duct Pressure Monitor Kit For use with standard or manual reset model
switches. Includes mounting flange, tubing and adapters.
A-329, Street Ell Brass adapter for applications requiring right angle connections.
Two required for differential pressures.
WEATHERPROOF ELECTRIC CONNECTION HUB

SRU-TITE #ST-1-1/2 PIPE SIZE
1 1/8
[28.58]
7/8 [22.22]
2
[50.80]
OPTION
Manual reset Model 1900 MR includes special snap switch which latches on
pressure increase above the setpoint. Switch must be manually reset after pressure
drops below the setpoint. To order, change base model to 1900 and add MR suffix
after range number. Example: 1900-10-MR. Available on -1, -5,-10 or -20 ranges
only. Option is not UL, CSA or FM listed

closed.
NPT.
inside conduit enclosure.
Weight: 1lb, 4.5 oz (581 g).
Agency Approvals: CE , CSA, FM,
and UL. Optional-EXPL explosion-proof
enclosure does not possess any
agency approvals.
1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
6-5/8
[168.28]
1/2 NPT PROCESS

CONNECTION
3X 1-1/16
[26.99]
3 [76.20]
Explosion-Proof Housing
Cast iron base with brass cover. Rated Class I, Groups D; Class II, Div. 2, Groups
E, F, G; Class III and NEMA 7, 9 NEMA 3. (7 lb). Switch must be factory installed.
Change model to 1911 and add -EXPL suffix.
Example: 1911-1-EXPL
34
035_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:45 AM Page 35
Series
AT1
1910
PRESSURE
ATEX Approved 1910 Differential

Pressure Switch
Series 1910 in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
1-31/32
[50.00]
4-17/32
[115.00]
4-27/32
[123.00]
1-37/64
[40.00]
5-33/64
[140.00]

with instrument).
5/16
[8.00]
2-9/16
[65.00]
25/64
[10.00]
1/8
NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: -30 to 180F (-34 to 82.2C); Case: -58 to 140F (-50 to
60C) (Note: Product temperature limits differ from case).
Pressure Limits: 45 in w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous, 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 to 480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC,
1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. Derate to 10 A for operation at high cycle rates.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on pressure switch inside the enclosure
accessible by hole with plug on housing. Setpoint regulation must be done with
instrument de-energized. Follow instructions and safety warning to open cover.
ATEX Approved Products from Comhas with ECN: Nemko 10ATEX1096.
IIIC Db T 85C.
AT11910
Series
Range
.07 to .15 in w.c. (17.5 to 37 Pa)

.15 to .55 in w.c. (7.5 to 137 Pa)
.4 to 1.6 in w.c. (100 to 398 Pa)
1.4 to 5.5 in w.c. (348.5 to 1368 Pa)
3 to 11.75 in w.c. (747 to 2924 Pa)
4 to 20 in w.c. (996 to 4977 Pa)
Aluminum
-00
-0
-1
-5
-10
-20
Housing
Material
Cover
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
Tag
7-1/4
[184.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
1/8
NPT
Our most popular Differential Pressure Switch is now available in an flame-proof
ATEX approved package in the AT11910 Series. This pressure switch combines advanced
design and precision construction to make these switches able to perform many of the
tasks of larger, costlier units. For air and non-combustible compatible gases, the AT11910
Series switches have set points from 0.07 to 20 in w.c. (1.8 to 508 mm). Set point
adjustment is easy with range screw located inside the switch enclosure. Series AT11910
ATEX enclosures are available in aluminum enclosures and ideal for low pressure,
hazardous area applications.
7-3/32
[180.00]
5-33/64
[140.00]
-A
B
1
2
X
OPV
T2
Blind
35
036_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:45 AM Page 36
PRESSURE
Series
MDS
Miniature Pressure Switch

Shock and Vibration Resistant, Lightweight and Compact, Gold Contacts
25/64
[9.92]
2x 5/16
[7.94]
3/32 4
PLACES
[2.54]
3/8
[9.53]
2x 47/64
[18.65]
25/64
[9.92]
The Series MDSPressure Switch is designed with a double diaphragm to protect false
actuation due to shock and vibration. This low cost pressure switch has a minimum 20
million cycle life expectancy, and an extremely fast response time, making this an ideal
device for OEM orders.
Model
MDS-0
MDS-1
MDS-2
MDS-3
MDS-4
Set Point
0.5 in w.c.
1.0 in w.c.
1.5 in w.c.
2.0 in w.c.
3.0 in w.c.
Model
MDS-6
MDS-8
MDS-10
MDS-12
MDS-14
3/16
[4.52]
1/2
[12.7]
1 SQ
[25.4 SQ]
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: SPST normally open.
Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on high side.
Pressure Limits: Set point <3.0 in w.c.: 8 psi; Set point >3.0 in w.c.: 15 psi.
Current Rating: Gold contact switch providing maximum 40 mA resistive load
allowing for life in excess of 20 million cycles.
Electrical Connections: Brass tab-type for use with quick disconnections.
Pressure Connections: Two barbed ports for use with 1/8-3/16 IDtubing.
Housing: Polycarbonate.
Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
Operating Voltage: AC/DC - 30V or less with resistive load.
Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).
Agency Approval: cUL, UL.
Set Point
6.0 in w.c.
10.0 in w.c.
15.0 in w.c.
30.0 in w.c.
50.0 in w.c.
Series
MDA
Miniature Adjustable Pressure Switch

Adjustable Set Points from 0.1 to 100 in w.c.
5/16 TYP
[7.87]
1/8 4 PLACES
[3.18]
LOW
PRESSURE
PORT
5/32 TYP
[3.96]
High
7/32
[5.59]
HIGH
PRESSURE
PORT
25/32
[19.81]
23/32
[18.29]
Sense differential pressure with the Series MDA Miniature Adjustable Pressure
Switch. The switch features field adjustable set point and gold inlay contacts. Air or other
compatible fluids can be used on the high side. The lightweight and compact size make
the MDA ideal for any application with space constraints. Applications include industrial,
HVAC, pump and motor control, medical, automotive, pools and spas.
Model
MDA-011
MDA-111
MDA-211
MDA-311
MDA-411
Set Point in w.c. (mbar)

Minimum Maximum
0.1 (0.25) 0.5 (1.25)
0.5 (1.25) 2.0 (4.98)
2.0 (4.98) 15 (37.37)
15 (37.37) 60 (149.3)
60 (149.3) 100 (249.10)
1 SQ
[25.40]
13/64 TYP
[5.08]
31/64
[12.19]
23/32 TYP
[18.29]
23/32
[18.29]
Series MDA
Low
19/32
[15.24]
1 5/32
[29.21]
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Type: SPST normally open.
Switching Media: Air or compatible fluids on high side.
Pressure Limits: MDA-011: 8 psi; MDA-111: 8 psi; MDA-211: 8 psi; MDA-311: 15
psi. MDA-411: 25 psi.
Current Rating: 40 mA resistive for life in excess of 20 million cycles.
Contacts: 18K gold inlay.
Electrical Connections: Terminals - 0.187 x 0.20: spade (recessed) for use with
quick disconnects.
Pressure Connections: Smooth port 5/32 diameter for 1/8 ID tubing.
Diaphragm Material: Polyurethane.
Operating Voltage: AC/DC - 30V or less with resistive load.
Mounting: Use #4 screws through mounting lugs or #2 screws through eyelets.
Weight: Less than 0.353 oz (10 g).
Agency Approval:cUL, UL.
36
037_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:24 PM Page 37
DPDT Low Differential Pressure Switches
PRESSURE
Series
1831
Manual Reset, No Power Required

2X 9/64 [3.57]
1/8 FEMALE NPT

.875 [22.23]
HIGH PRESSURE
RESET LEVER OPENING
1/8 FEMALE NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-5/32 [54.76]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
2X 7/8
CONDUIT
OPENING
1-5/8
[41.28]
4-1/16
[103.19]
3/4
[19.05]
3-3/16 [80.98]
3-5/8
[92.08]
1-7/64
[28.17]
1-3/32
[27.76]
3X 2
[50.80]
Note: Shown with included

mounting bracket. Bracket
can rotate and be tightened
at any angle.
One of our most popular differential pressure switches is now available with a DPDT
switch and manual reset. The 1831 combines small size with 4% set point repeatability.
Absolutely no power is required to operate the DPDT switch. Set point adjustment on the
switch is easily accessible for modifying the set point.
The Series 1831 DPDT Low Differential Pressure Switches with Manual Reset eliminate
common problems associated with typical high duct static cutout installations. Since the
1831 requires absolutely no power to drive its outputs, a separate power loop and its
associated additional wiring and conduit is alleviated, reducing material and labor
installation costs. Both control contacts of the Series 1831 activate at the same time. The
potential of the lead switch shutting down the fan preventing the lag switch from sending
an alarming signal to the DDC is no longer a probable system liability. Potential costly
maintenance calls are diminished. Unlike typical switches that possess only a single conduit
entry for both control loops, the Series 1831 provides two conduit connections simplifying
wiring while eliminating additional conduit tees. The Series 1831s specifications and
features make it the superior choice for high duct static cutout applications.
Series
1640
2-5/16
[58.74]
A-389 Mounting Bracket
Scan here
to watch
product video
Description
Model
1831-1-RA-S Manual reset DPDT, activate on increase
1831-2-RA-S Manual reset DPDT, activate on increase
2-3/4
[69.86]
3-1/4
[82.55]
Range (in w.c.)

2.5 to 9
7.5 to 23
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
(-34 to 82.2C).
Switch Type: 2 SPDT.
Actuation Time Difference: 1
millisecond maximum actuation delay
between contacts
Repeatability: 4% max.
Electrical Rating: 4A @ 125/250 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type
terminal block.
NPT.
inside mounting spud.
Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (522 g).
ACCESSORIES
A-302F-B, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 rubber or
A-302F-C, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 rubber or
Floating Contact Null Switch for High and

Low Actuation
Visual Set Point Adjustment, Adjustable Null Zone
9/32 [7.14]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 4 PLACES
7-3/4
[196.85]
1-1/4 [31.75]
3-39/64
[91.68]
3-3/32
[78.58]
4
3 [76.20]
[101.60] TYP
1/2 [12.70] TYP
2 [50.80] TYP
3/4 [19.05]
3
[76.20]
The unique electric switch design in the 1640 is another Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
innovation. The Dwyer Model 1640 Differential Pressure Switch resembles the Series
1630 switches. However, the 1640 is equipped with a single pole, double throw floating
contact switch (not snap acting) so it functions as a null switch.
As the diaphragm moves in response to pressure changes, it moves the floating contact to
cause switching action at two preset points with no switching action between these points.
The high circuit will be closed when rising pressure differential reaches the preset level.
The low circuit will be closed when falling pressure differential reaches the preset level.
Model
1640-0
1640-1
1640-2
Ranges
in w.c.
.01 to 0.2
0.2 to 1.0
1.0 to 4.0
Adjustable Null Span

Min. Set Max. Set
.03
.01
.06
.02
.12
.03
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-1/2
[165.10]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
2-1/4 [57.15]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
(-34.4 to 43.3C).
(SPDT) floating contact (not snap
action).
Electrical Rating: Non-inductive
2.5 A @ 110 VAC; 1.5 A @ 220 VAC; 1
A @ 24 VDC; 0.5 A @ 110 VAC;
22.5
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
Inductive 1 A @ 110 VAC; 0.5 A @

220 VAC; 0.5 A @ 24 VDC (de-rate 7080% for very slow pressure changes).
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 4 Ib 13 oz (2.18 kg).
37
1/2 MALE NPT

MOUNTING
STUD
4-3/8
[111.13]
3-11/16
2X
[93.65]
3-1/16
[77.79]
038_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:35 PM Page 38
PRESSURE
Series
1620
Single and Dual Pressure Switches

High Reliability...Repetitive Accuracy within +1%
9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING

HOLE TYP 2 PLACES
1/2 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
5-7/8
[149.23]
3/4 [19.05]
1-5/16 [33.34]
3-1/16
[77.79] 4-11/16
[119.06]
Our old faithful switch design is still best where highest precision combined with
diaphragm sealed leak proof construction and mounting simplicity are required. Model
1626 and 1627 differential pressure switches are identical in design and construction except
that Model 1626 has a single electric switch and Model 1627 has dual electric switches.
Model 1627 can therefore provide dual control when required. It can be set to open or close
two independent electrical circuits, each preset for its own actuation pressure. Both units
have diaphragm sealed motion take outs providing maximum protection against leakage.
Model
(1626 shown,
1627 similar)
1626-1
1626-5
1626-10
1626-20
Operating Range
in w.c.
.15 to 1.5
.5 to 6.0
2.0 to 11
8.0 to 24
Approx.
Deadband
Min. Max.
.10 .20
.15 .35
.25 .65
.50 1.20
Adj. Diff. Between Set

Points (1627 Only)
0.5
1.2
2.3
5.0
Series
1630
8-7/8
[225.43]
1-1/2
[38.10]
8-1/4 [209.55]
7-3/4 [196.85]
45 TYP
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT 22.5 1/8 FEMALE NPT
3 LOW PRESSURE
HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION
[76.20] CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
( -34.4 to 54.4C).
Pressure Limits: Max. 50 in w.c.
(12.44 kPa) continuous, 2 psig (13.79
kPa) surge.
Switch Type: 1626, single-pole doublethrow (SPDT); 1627, two single-pole
double-throw (SPDT) .
Repeatability: 1%.
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive, 1/8 HP @ 125
VAC,1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.

closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw
adjustment.
Weight: Model 1626, 3 Ib, 9.8 oz (1.64
kg); Model 1627, 3 Ib, 11.8 oz (1.69
kg).
ACCESSORIES
Large Diaphragm Pressure Switches

Visual Set Point Adjustment in 5 Standard Ranges, 0.05 in to 12 in w.c.
Repetitive Accuracy within 1%
1-1/4
[31.75]
9/32 [7.14] MOUNTING

HOLE TYP 4 PLACES
4 3 [76.20]
[101.60] TYP
1/2 [12.70] TYP
2 [50.80] TYP
3/4 [19.05]
3 [76.20]
Our highest precision conventional large diaphragm pressure switch provides maximum
dependability. In addition, it incorporates a visible set point indicator for maximum
convenience. UL and CSA listed, FM approved for general service, these switches are suitable
for most applications in air conditioning and industrial service. Electrical capability of 15 amps
handles most small electrical loads.
OPTION
Environmental (MIL) Construction. Unlisted Model 1635 can be furnished with a
special snap switch sealed against the environment for high humidity, exposure to
fungus, and/or for military applications. Similar to Model 1638 except deadband is
slightly greater and some lower set points may not be available. Specify Model 1635
(Range No.) MIL and required set point in ordering.
Operating
Range,
Model in w.c.
1638-0 0.05 to 0.25
1638-1 0.20 to 1.0
1638-2 1.0 to 3.0
1638-5 2.0 to 6.0
1638-10 3.0 to 12
38
Approximate Dead Band

At Min.
At Max.
Set Point
Set Point
0.04
0.05
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.08
0.07
0.25
0.11
0.30
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-1/2
[165.10]
7-3/4
[196.85]
3-3/32
[78.58]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1/8 FEMALE NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
22.5
CONNECTION
SCREW TYPE ELECTRICAL
TERMINAL TYPE 3 PLACES
2-1/4 [57.15] CLEARANCE
FOR COVER REMOVAL
3-39/64
[91.68]
R 4-5/16 [109.54]
TYP 2 PLACES
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: -30 to 110F (-34.4 to 43.3C).
Pressure Limits: 10 psig (68.95 kPa) continuous, 25 psig (172.4 kPa) surge.
Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
Repeatability: 1%.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4
HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally
closed.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type with enclosed scale.
Weight: 4 Ib, 14 oz (2.21 kg).
Agency Approvals: CSA,FM, UL.
ACCESSORIES
039_Layout 1 7/11/14 9:13 AM Page 39
Gas Pressure Switches
PRESSURE
Series
1996
Compact, Low Cost, 4 in - 20 in w.c. Range

3-1/8
[79.38]
3-1/2
[88.90]
Reliable and convenient, the 1996-5 and the 1996-20 Gas Pressure Switches serve as a
compact, low cost switch for gas fired furnaces and equipment. Pressure ranges for both
models are ideal for high or low gas pressure interlock. Visible set point and on-off
indicators add convenience in servicing. Use either NO or NC contacts on SPDT switch.
Bottom connection has both 1/8 female and 1/4 male threads for pipe nipple or coupling.
Top connection vents diaphragm chamber to outside or to furnace combustion chamber.
Mount switch with diaphragm in a horizontal position and gas pressure connection at
bottom. Used with natural, manufactured or LP gas.
Model
1996-5
1996-20
Range
1.4 in - 5.5 in w.c.
4 in - 20 in w.c.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air, natural & manufactured
gas, LP gas.
43.3C). -30 to 110F (-34.4 to 43.3C)
for dry gas or dry air.
continuous; 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
(SPDT).
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120-480
VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 H.P. @ 125
VAC, 1/4 H.P. @ 250 VAC 60 Hz.

common, normally open, normally
closed.
NPT or 1/4 male NPT.
Vent Connection: 1/8 female NPT.
horizontal position. Consult factory for
with visible indicator, inside conduit
enclosure.
Weight: 1 lb 2.3 oz (349 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM, UL.

Explosion-Proof Alternative:See page 40 (Series 1950)
Explosion-Proof Alternative:See page 40 (Series 1950G)
Series
PG
Gas Pressure/Differential Pressure Switches

External Adjustment, Visible Dial, Hermetically Sealed Snap or Mercury Switch
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
(3) 13/64 [5.16]
6-1/64
MOUNTING
[152.78]
HOLES EQUALLY
7
SPACED ON
6-1/2 [165.10] B.C. [177.80]
8-1/4
1/8 FEMALE
[209.55]
NPT PRESS.
30
45
CONN.
1/4
7/8 [22.23] 1/2 MALE NPT X
3/4 [19.05]
[6.35]
1/8
FEMALE
NPT
CONDUIT
CLEARANCE
4
PROCESS
CONNECTION
FOR COVER
[101.6]
CONN.
REMOVAL
MERCOID
CONTROL
Scan here
to watch
product video
Large diaphragm sensitivity and time proven dependable design are combined in
model PG differential pressure switches. Visible dial reduces start up time and helps
prevent calibration errors. External adjustment allows set point change without removal
of cover. Unit is listed by UL, FM and CSA.
Range
1-30 in w.c.
(.25-7.47 kPa)
0.5-5 psid
PG-153-P2
(0.3-.345 bar)
1-30 in w.c.
PG-3-P1
(.25-7.47 kPa)
0.5-5 psid
PG-3-P2
(.03-.345 bar)
1-30 in w.c.
PG-7000-153-P1
(.25-7.45 kPa)
0.5-5 psid
PG-7000-153-P2
(.03-.345 bar)
PG-7000-153HS-P1 1-30 in w.c.
(.25-7.47 kPa)
PG-7000-153HG-P1 1-30 in w.c.
(.25-7.47 kPa)
Model
PG-153-P1
Maximum
Deadband
1.9 in w.c.
(0.47 kPa)
0.4 psid
(0.38 bar)
1.3 in w.c.
(0.32 kPa)
0.3 psid
(0.21 kPa)
4 in w.c.
(1.0 kPa)
.5 psid
(.035 bar)
4 in w.c.
(1.0 kPa)
4 in w.c.
(1.0 kPa)
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Mercury
SPST Mercury*
SPST Mercury*
SPDT Snap
SPDT Snap
SPDT Hermetically
Sealed Silver Snap
SPDT Hermetically
Sealed Gold Snap
*SPST switches shown are close on increase of pressure. For open on increase
of pressure replace 3 in middle of model number with 2. Example: PG-2-P1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Fairprene, brass,
steel, and aluminum.
to 82C).
Pressure Limit:
Single pressure use on high side:
Sustained pressure: 15 psig (1.0 bar);
Surge limit: 20 psig (1.4 bar).
Differential pressure use:
Sustained pressure, range P1: 2 psig
(.14 bar);
Sustained pressure, range P2: 10
psig (0.7 bar).
Enclosure Rating: General purpose.
Weatherproof and explosion-proof
optional.
Repeatability: 1% of full range.
Switch Type: SPST mercury switch,
SPDT mercury switch, SPDT snap
switch, or SPDT hermetically sealed
snap switch. Optional DPDT.
1-27/64
[36.12]
17/32
[13.49]
1-3/16
[30.16]
Electrical Rating: SPDT Mercury: 4A

@ 120 VAC/VDC, 2A @ 240 VAC/VDC.
SPST Mercury: 6A @ 120 VAC/VDC,
3A @ 240 VAC/VDC. SPDT Snap: 15A
@ 120 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @
120 VDC, 0.25A @ 240 VDC. SPDT
H.S. Silver Snap: 5A @ 125/250 VAC,
30 VDC resistive. SPDT H.S. Gold
Snap: 1A @ 125 VAC, 30 VDC
resistive.
Electrical Connections: Screw type.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 (22.23 mm)
hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm) conduit hub.
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT
and 1/8 female NPT used for single
positive pressure or high differential
pressure, 1/8 female NPT used for
single vacuum or low differential
pressure.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: External screw.
Weight: 4.5 lb (2 kg).
Deadband: See model chart.
Agency Approvals: FM, UL for
mercury switch models. UL only on
snap switch models.
39
Model 1996-20 gas-air

pressure switch. Connections,
dimensions and visible on-off
indicator are shown.
REMOVABLE CONDUIT
ENCLOSURE COVER
7/8 [22.23] OPENING FOR
1/2 CONDUIT CONNECTION
WINDOW AND VISIBLE
ON-OFF INDICATOR
VENT CONNECTION
ON OPPOSITE SIDE
1/4 NPT EXTERNAL THREAD
[ALTERNATE GAS CONNECTION]
1/8 [F] GAS
PRESSURE CONNECTION
040_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:45 PM Page 40
PRESSURE
Series
1950
Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switches

Compact, Low Cost, Explosion-proof and Weatherproof
1-15/32 [37.30]
3/8 [9.53]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION

EXTERNAL GROUND
CAPTIVE SCREW
27/32 [21.43]
[2] 17/64 [6.75] MOUNTING HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A 4-7/8 [123.83] B.C.
RANGE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

5-7/16
[138.13]
1/2 FEMALE NPT

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Model 1950 Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switch combines the best

features of the popular Dwyer Series 1900 Pressure Switch with an integral explosionproof and weatherproof housing, making it an exceptional value for either application. It is
CE, UL and CSA listed, FM approved for use in Class I, Div 1, Groups C and D, Class II
Groups E, F, and G and Class III hazardous atmospheres (NEMA 7 & 9), Raintight NEMA
3 (IP54). Weatherproof features include a drain plug and O-ring seal in cover. Electrical
connections are easily made by removing front cover. For convenience the set point
adjustment screw is located on the outside of the housing. Twelve models offer set points
from .03 to 20 in w.c. (7.5 to 5 kPa) and from .5 to 50 psi (0.035 to 3.5 bar). The unit is very
light and compact about half the weight and bulk of other explosion-proof or weatherproof switches with separate enclosures.
Series 1950 Switches - Operating Ranges and Dead Bands

Range, Approximate Dead Band at
Min. Set Point Max. Set Point
in w.c.
Model
.05
1950-02-2S .03 to .10 .025
.05
1950-00-2F .07 to .15 .04
.15
1950-0-2F .15 to .50 .10
.20
1950-1-2F .4 to 1.6 .15
.40
1950-5-2F 1.4 to 5.5 .30
.40
.50
1950-10-2F 3 to 11
.40
.60
1950-20-2F 4 to 20
Series
1950G
27/32
[21.43]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
3/8 [9.53]
VENT DRAIN
PLUG
3-1/2
[88.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
(-40 to 60C); 0 to 140F (-17.8 to
60C) for 1950P-8, 15, 25, and 50. -30
to 130F (-34.4 to 54.4C) for 1950-02.
Pressure Limits: Continuous: 1950s
- 45 in w.c. (0.11 bar); 1950Ps - 35 psi
(2.41 bar); 1950P-50 only - 70 psi (4.83
bar). Surge: 1950s - 10 psi (0.69 bar),
1950Ps - 50 psi (3.45 bar), 1950P-50
only - 90 psi (6.21 bar).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP54),
NEMA 7 & 9.
(SPDT).
1-23/32 [43.64]
Electrical Rating: 15 A @, 125, 250,

480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 1/8 HP @
125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz.
closed.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on
top of housing.
Weight: 3.25 Ib (1.5 kg); 1950-02
model, 4.4 lb (2 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM,
UL.
Range, Approximate Dead Band at

Model*
psid
Min. Set Point Max. Set Point
1950P-2-2F 0.5 to 2
.3
.3
1950P-8-2F 1.5 to 8 1.0
1.0
1950P-15-2F 3 to 15
.9
.9
1950P-25-2F 4 to 25
.7
.7
1950P-50-2F 15 to 50 1.0
1.5
Applications with hazardous atmospheres and a single positive
pressure may require special venting. *P=PSID range models
Explosion-proof Differential Pressure Switch

Explosion-proof, Weatherproof, Compatible with Natural Gases
1-15/32 [37.30]
3/8 [9.53]
1/8 FEMALE NPT LOW PRESSURE CONNECTION

EXTERNAL GROUND
CAPTIVE SCREW
27/32 [21.43]

RANGE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

5-7/16
[138.13]
1/2 FEMALE NPT

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
The Model 1950G Explosion-Proof Switch combines the best features of the popular
Dwyer Series 1950 Pressure Switch with the benefit of natural gas compatibility. Units
are rain-tight for outdoor installations, and are UL listed for use in Class I, Groups A, B, C,
& D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G and Class III atmospheres, Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
Compliant for
II 2G Exd IIB + H2 T6, CSA & FM approved for Class I, Div 1,
Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III atmospheres IECEx Exd IIB
+ H2 T6 (-40C < Ta < +60C). The 1950G is very compact, about half the weight and bulk
of equivalent conventional explosion-proof switches.
Easy access to the SPDT relay and power supply terminals is provided by removing the
top plate of the aluminum housing. A supply voltage of 24 VDC, 120 or 240 VAC is required.
A captive screw allows the cover to swing aside while remaining attached to the unit.
Adjustment to the set point of the switch can be made without disassembly of the housing.
UL, CSA, FM
Model
1950G-00-B-24-NA
1950G-0-B-24-NA
1950G-1-B-24-NA
1950G-5-B-24-NA
1950G-10-B-24-NA
1950G-20-B-24-NA
40
ATEX
Model
1950G-00-B-24
1950G-0-B-24
1950G-1-B-24
1950G-5-B-24
1950G-10-B-24
1950G-20-B-24
Range,
Inches w.c.
.07 to .15
.15 to .50
.4 to 1.6
1.4 to 5.5
3 to 11
4 to 20
Approximate Deadband at
Min.
Max.
Set Point
Set Point
.04
.06
.06
.11
.11
.29
.4
.9
.9
1.8
1.2
3.0
27/32
[21.43]
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION
3/8 [9.53]
VENT DRAIN
PLUG
3-1/2
[88.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible
combustible gases.
Wetted Materials: Contact factory.
(-17 to 60C).
Note: Set point drift may occur with
ambient temperature changes.
continuous; 10 psig (68.95 kPa) surge.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP54),
NEMA 7 & 9.
Switch Type: 1 Form C relay (SPDT).
Electrical Rating: 10A, 120/240 VAC,
28 VDC. Resistive 50 mA, 125 VDC.
1-23/32 [43.64]
Power Requirements: 24 VDC 10%.

120 or 240 VAC 10% optional.
Electrical Connections: Internal
terminal block.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type on
top of housing.
Weight: 2 lb, 15.7 oz (1.35 kg).
Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, CSA,
FM, IECEx, UL.
041_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:46 PM Page 41
Differential Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
A4
Adjustable Set Point, High Overpressure
1-1/2
[38.10]
1.000 HEX
[25.40]
1/4 NPT
3-3/4 95.25]
1-1/4
[31.75]
Rugged Series A4 Differential Pressure Switch offers field adjustments and can handle
system pressures up to 6000 psig. Piston design allows mounting in any orientation. The
switch is capable of carrying moderate shock and vibratory loads.
Model
A4-1
A4-2
A4-3
A4-4
A4-5
Repeatability
psi (bar)
2 (.14)
4 (.28)
8 (.55)
16 (1.1)
32 (2.2)
Set Point psid (bar)

Increasing
Decreasing
7-13 (.48-.89)
2-7 (.14-.48)
13-25 (.89-1.7)
5-16 (.34-1.1)
25-45 (1.7-3.1)
10-21 (.68-1.5)
35-160 (2.4-11.0) 20-80 (1.4-5.5)
120-250 (8.3-17.2) 35-120 (2.4-8.3)
Series
DP
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Body, piston, and fittings: anodized aluminum; spring: steel.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 225F (-54 to 107C).
Pressure Limits: 2000 psid (138 bar), 6000 psig (413 bar).
Repeatability: See table.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: AC: 3 VA, 0.25A @ 120 VAC; DC: 5 VA, 0.25A @ 175 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 24 AWG X 12 (30.5 cm) wire leads.
Mounting Orientation: Any.
Set Point Adjustment: See table.
Weight: 8.5 oz (241 g).
Double Bellows Differential Pressure Switches

Visible Setpoints, Adjustable or Fixed Deadband...High Pressure Ranges
13/64 [5.16] MOUNTING HOLES
1/8 FEMALE NPT HIGH

PRESSURE CONNECTION
7
[177.80]
1-7/32
[30.94]
Two opposing bellows combine maximum sensitivity and vibration resistance with
moderate cost in the Series DP differential pressure switches. Both set and reset points
are easily adjustable through non-interactive, externally accessible controls. Visible setpoint indicators simplify changes. SPDT snap action switch, 316 stainless steel or brass
bellows, flanged steel housing. Rated pressures to 600 psig.
Optional Enclosures
Weatherproof Enclosure to order add W suffix after DPA.
Example: D P A W 7033-153-61
Explosion-Proof Enclosure to order add E suffix after DPA.
Example: D P A E 7033-153-61
Bellows
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
316SS
316SS
316SS
Range
psid (bar)
0-10 (0-0.7)
0-20 (0-1.4)
0-30 (0-2.1)
0-20 (0-1.4)
0-30 (0-2.1)
0-80 (0-5.5)
Max. Press
psig (bar)
50 (3.5)
100 (6.9)
300 (20.7)
100 (6.9)
300 (20.7)
600 (41.4)
Adjustable Deadband
Snap Action Switch
SPDT,15A @ 120/240 VAC
Min.D.B.
Model
psid (bar)
DPA-7033-153-61
1.5 (.10)
DPA-7033-153-62
2.5 (.17)
DPA-7033-153-64
6.0 (.41)
DPA-7043-153-62E
3.0 (.21)
DPA-7043-153-64E
6.0 (.41)
DPA-7043-153-65E
20(1.4)
6
[152.40]
2-3/4
[69.85]
4-1/4
[107.95]
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT CONNECTION
3/4 [19.05] CLEARANCE
FOR COVER REMOVAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass on ranges 61,
62, 63 or 316 SS on ranges 62E, 64E,
65E.
(-23 to 82C).
Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of
the operating range.
Weatherproof or explosion-proof
optional.
Switch Type: Snap switch. (Contact
factory for mercury switch).
Electrical Rating: See model chart.
Fixed Deadband
Snap Action Switch
SPDT,15A @ 120/240 VAC
Fixed D.B.
Model
psid (bar)
DPS-7233-153-61
0.5 (.03)
DPS-7233-153-62
1.0 (.07)
DPS-7233-153-64
1.5 (.10)
DPS-7243-153-62E
1.5 (.10)
DPS-7243-153-64E
2.0 (.14)
DPS-7243-153-65E
6.0 (.41)
45
1/8 FEMALE
NPT LOW
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
OPERATING
ADJUSTMENT
OR RESET
Electrical Connection: Screw

terminal.
Conduit Connection: General
purpose: 1/2 hole for conduit hub;
Weatherproof: 1/2 conduit hub;
Explosion-proof: 3/4 female NPT.
Process Connection: General
purpose and weatherproof: 1/8 female
NPT, explosion-proof: 1/4 male NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Thumbscrew.
Weight: General purpose: 5 lb (2.3 kg),
weatherproof: 7 lb (3 kg), explosionproof: 25 lb (11 kg).
41
042_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:49 PM Page 42
PRESSURE
Series
H3
Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Switches

Setpoints from 10 in w.c. to 200 psid Rated 1500 psig, Weatherproof
COVER
SET SCREW
COVER
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
11/64 [4.37]
MOUNTING HOLES
IN MTG BRACKET
2-13/32
[61.12]
5-3/8
[136.53]
31/32
[24.61]
OPTIONAL DRAIN
PROCESS
CONNECTION
CENTERLINE
Scan here
to watch
product video
Explosion-proof, heavy duty, industrial unit has a unique new design which provides
sensitivity to differential pressures as low as 10 inches of water (254 mm w.c.), yet handles
total pressure of 1500 psi (103 bar). Unlike common differential pressure switches that use
a piston-type motion transfer, the Series H3 utilizes a rotary motion transfer shaft that
prevents a change in total pressure from causing a setpoint shift. Unit yields deadbands
approximately 5% of range, with zero setpoint shift due to variation in working pressures.
Friction is minimized and repeatability increased by allowing range spring to act directly
on diaphragm plate. Rolling diaphragm design maintains constant effective area to further
reduce friction. Diaphragm is allowed to seat, allowing application of full rated pressure,
up to 1500 psi (103 bar), on either high or low pressure port, without damage. Special
overtravel feature prevents overtightening of range adjust screw. Choose optional 316SS
chamber for water and water-based fluids or harsher applications.
1-25/32
[45.24]
3-9/16
[90.49] 4
[101.6]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: See pressure
chamber and diaphragm material in
model chart.
Temperature Limit: -4 to 220F
(-20 to 104C), ATEX: -20 to 90C
(-4 to 194F).
Pressure Limit: 1500 psig (103 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Standard meets
NEMA 4X(IP56), drain option meets
NEMA 3 (IP54). For hazardous use see
the hazardous location ratings chart.
Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap
switch.
Example
H3 S 2 S C MV
Construction H3
Hazardous Location Ratings
Directive 94/9/EC ATEX
UL
Model
CSA
Compliant
H3 _ _ _ C
0344
II 2 G EEx d IIB
-20C T amb 75C T6
EC-Type Certificate No.
KEMA 03ATEX 2584
CI. I, Gr.B, C & D CI. I, Gr.B, C & D
H3 _ _ _ L
CI. II, Gr.E, F & G CI. II, Gr.E, F & G

H3 _ _ _ T
H3 _ _ _ C-DRAIN
0344
II 2 G EEx d IIB
-20C T amb 75C T6
EC-Type Certificate No.
KEMA 03ATEX 2584
H3 _ _ _ L-DRAIN CI. I, Gr.B, C & D
CI. II, Gr.E, F & G

Internal terminal blocks for
conductors up to 18 gauge are
optional.
Optional NEMA 3 (lP 54) enclosure
includes explosion-proof drain.
Standard NEMA 4X (IP 56) version is
without drain.
Note: Shown without enclosure

and cover.
42
External Ground Connection

Standard Internal ground
connection also standard use
either one.
Pressure
Chamber &
Diaphragm
Material
(Wetted)
Adjustable
Operating
Range
A
S
3
[762]
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC,

30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: See model
chart.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female
NPT.
Process Connection: 1/8 female
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal screw.
Weight: 4 lb, 2 oz (2 kg).
Deadband: Approximately 5% of
range.
UL see ratings chart.
H3S-2SC-MV Differential Pressure Control;

316 SS pressure chamber and
Fluoroelastomer diaphragm; weatherproof
and ATEX; SPDT snap action switch with
gold contacts; fixed deadband, automatic
reset; adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
Series designator, weatherproof and
explosion-proof
Aluminum chamber with Nitrile diaphragm
316 SS chamber with Fluoroelastomer
diaphragm
L
T
C
ATEX approved internal terminal block
Electrical
Connection
Options
1/8 NPT
HIGH PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1-3/4
[44.45]
Adjustable range 10-180 in. w.c.

(2.48-44.78 kPa)
Adjustable range 0.5-15 psid
(0.03-1 bar)
Adjustable range 5-70 psid
(.34-4.8 bar)
Adjustable range 10-200 psid
(.7-13.8 bar)
SPDT snap action switch rated 5A
@ 125/250 VAC, 30 VDC
DPDT snap action switch rated 5A
@ 125/250 VAC, 30 VDC
18 AWG x 18 inch lead wires
UL, CSA approved internal terminal block
Circuit
(Switch)
Options
1/8 NPT
LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
17/32
[13.5]
S
D
DRAIN Enclosure with drain - allows condensate to

be drained from inside (meets NEMA 3
instead of 4X)
Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits
MV
rated 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive or 0.5 A
inductive @ 30 VDC
Fluoroelastomer diaphragm option where
VIT
not standard
043_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:49 AM Page 43
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
DX
NEMA 4X Enclosure, Low Differential Set Points

59/64 [23.50]
1-13/64
[45.85]
4-29/64
[113.03]
Adjustable Differential Fixed Deadband [psid (bar)]

Range (on increase)
At Low
At High
Model
[psid (bar)]
Set Point
Set Point
DXW-11-153-1 2.5 to 10 (0.17 to 0.69) 1.5 (0.10)
2.5 (0.17)
DXW-11-153-2 10 to 25 (0.69 to 1.72) 2.5 (0.17)
3.5 (0.24)
DXW-11-153-3 25 to 50 (1.72 to 3.45) 3.5 (0.24)
6.0 (0.41)
DXW-11-153-4 50 to 75 (3.46 to 5.17) 6.0 (0.41)
8.0 (0.55)
Note: Set points on decrease will be the range minus the deadband.
Series
HADP
2X
47/64
[18.54]
35/64 [13.97]
1-11/32
[34.04]
2-1/2
[63.50]
9/16
[14.10]
SPECIFICATIONS
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT
Service: Compatible gases and
female.
liquids.
Mounting Orientation: Ports on
Wetted Materials: Connection: Brass;
horizontal plane, 10.
Diaphragm: Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: 30 to 140F (-1
Housing Materials: Body: Aluminum;
to 60C).
Housing: Polycarbonate; Cover: 300
SS.
Continuous single side only pressure
Vibration and Shock: Set point
should not exceed 1.25 x full
repeats after 2.5 Gs, 5 to 500 Hz. Set
differential range.
point repeats after a 15 Gs, 10
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof UL
millisecond duration.
type 4X (IP65).
Altitude Limit: 6560 ft (2000 m).
Repeatability: 2% of full range.
Humidity Limit: 80% (nonSwitch Type: SPDT snap switch.
condensing).
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 125/250 VAC
Pollution Degree: 2.
(~), 5 A res. @ 30 VDC ( ).
Environment: Intended for indoor and
Electrical Connection: Removable
outdoor use.
terminal block.
Conduit Connection: 0.871 diameter
hole for 1/2 conduit fitting.
OPTION
For preset unit, add suffix -PRESET to model number.
Example: DXW-11-153-1-PRESET
High Accuracy Differential Pressure Transmitter

0.14% FS Accuracy, NIST Certificate Included
1-3/32 [27.78]
33/64 1/8-27 NPT PORT
2-3/32 [13.1]
[53.18]
1-1/16
[26.99]
1-1/16
[26.99]
5/8
[15.88]
3/16
[4.76]
5/16
[7.94]
Series HADP Differential Pressure Transmitter combines low ranges with exceptional
stability, reliability and an outstanding accuracy of 0.14% FS. All models come with NIST
certificates and are available in unidirectional and bi-directional ranges as low as 0 to 0.5
in w.c. and 0 to 5 psid. With minimal thermal effects and the ability to withstand high
overpressures, the Series HADP transmitters are extremely stable allowing for use in the
most demanding applications.
Max Pressure Max Pressure

Model
High Port
Low Port
Range
HADP-UC-00 0 to 0.5 in w.c. 5 psi
2.5 in w.c.
HADP-UC-01 0 to 1 in w.c.
7 psi
5 in w.c.
HADP-UC-02 0 to 2.5 in w.c. 10 psi
12.5 in w.c.
20 psi
25 in w.c.
50 psi
75 in w.c.
50 psi
150 in w.c.
HADP-BC-08 0 to 0.25 in w.c. 5 psi
2.5 in w.c.
5 in w.c.
HADP-BC-10 0 to 1 in w.c.
10 psi
12.5 in w.c.
25 in w.c.
75 in w.c.
HADP-BC-13 0 to 15 in w.c. 50 psi
150 in w.c.
HADP-UC-06 0 to 5 psid
75 psi
25 psi
HADP-UC-07 0 to 10 psid
100 psi
50 psi
HADP-BC-14 0 to 2.5 psid
75 psi
25 psi
HADP-BC-15 0 to 5 psid
100 psi
50 psi
Note: Current output models shown above. For voltage output
change HADP-XC-XXto HADP-XV-XX.
4x 6-32UNC-2B 7/64 [2.78] 4x 5/32 [3.97]

MIN FULL THRD
MOUNTING HOLES
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/2
[38.1]
1/8
[3.18]
2 [50.8]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible non-conducting
air/gas.
Wetted Parts: Consult factory.
Accuracy: < 0.14% FS.
Stability: < 0.1% FS over 6 months
@ 70F (21C).
Pressure Limits: See Model Chart.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 0 to
175F (-18 to 71C); Storage: -65 to
250F (-53 to 121C).
Compensated Temperature Range:
30 to 150F (-1 to 65C).
Thermal Effect: < 1.0% FS/100F.
Power Requirements: 17 to 42 VDC
for current models, 22 to 30 VDC for
voltage models.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA for current
models, 0 to 5 VDC for voltage models.
5/16
[7.94]
1/8
[3.18]
2-47/64
[69.45]
3 [76.2]
3-1/4 [82.55]
Zero and Span Output: Zero output:

Factory set to within 0.07 mA; Span
output: Factory set to within 0.07 mA.
Loop Resistance: Min. supply voltage
(VDC) = 17 + 0.02 x Resistance of
receiver plus line; Max. supply voltage
(VDC) = 42 + 0.004 x Resistance of
receiver plus line.
Zero and Span Adjustments: None.
Response Time: < 5 ms.
Current Consumption: < 30 mA.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft cable.
Process Connections: 1/8-27 NPT
internal (both positive and negative
ports).
Mounting Orientation: Pressure port
90 parallel to ground.
Thermal Effects: Max. zero: 1.0
(1.8); %FS/100F (100C) max.
Agency Approval: CE.
OPTIONS
To order option, add suffix to part number, i.e. HADP-UV-00-T1.
- T1 Expanded temp range -65 to 250F (-53 to 121C)
- A1 Improved accuracy 0.073% FS
43
The Series DX is a differential pressure switch that makes a contact output based on the
differential between two pressure sources. Wetted materials of brass and fluoroelastomer
are suitable for use with most gases and water based solutions. The switch can be used for
low differential pressure indication with set point on a decrease of pressure as low as 1
psid (0.07 bar). Differential set point ranges are available from 2.5 to 75 psid (0.17 to 5.17
bar) on increasing differential pressure and 1.0 to 67 psid (0.07 to 4.62 bar) on decreasing
differential pressure. Unit features a high static pressure rating of 200 psig (13.8 bar) for
higher static pressure applications. Standard is a weatherproof, UL type 4X, enclosure for
dust laden, outdoor, or wash-down installation environments. Series DX incorporates an
externally adjustable set point, integral mounting flange and a removeable electrical
terminal block for quick and easy installation. The DX uses opposing diaphragms to sense
the high and low pressure with a pivot mechanism that transfers the difference of the two
pressures to the SPDT switch.
15/64
[6.00]
1-13/32
[35.56]
13/64 [5.08]
3/4 1-13/16 47/64
[19.05] [46.05] [18.80]
Scan here
to watch
product video
2-55/64
[72.59]
1-27/64
[36.30]
044_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:36 AM Page 44
PRESSURE
Series
607
Low Range Differential Pressure Transmitter

0.25% or 0.5% Full Scale Accuracy, Ranges from 0-0.1 in w.c.
1-21/32 [42.06]
7/32 [5.556]
1-19/64
[32.94]
Differential Pressure Transmitters
1-53/64
[46.53]
3-13/32 3-7/8 4-3/8

[86.52] [98.43] [111.1]
3-5/16 [84.12]
3-59/64 [99.62]
4-9/16 [115.9]
Series 607 Differential Pressure Transmitter combines very low ranges with
exceptional stability, reliability and either 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy for the most
demanding applications. Ranges from 0-0.1 to 0-25 in w.c. Ultra thin glass clad silicon
diaphragm design resists shock and vibration, practically eliminates drift. Certification to
NIST standards is included with each unit. Tough stainless steel housing is NEMA-2 rated
to protect against moisture and dirt. Use with air and other compatible gases.
Model
607-0
607-01*
607-1
607-11*
607-2
607-21*
607-3
607-4
607-7
Range (in w.c.)

0-.10
0-.10
0-.25
0-.25
0-.50
0-.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-5.0
Model
607-71*
607-8
607-0B
607-1B
607-2B
607-9
607-3B
607-4B
607-7B
Range (in w.c.)

0-5.0
0-10
.10-0-.10
.25-0-.25
.50-0-.50
0-25
1.0-0-1.0
2.0-0-2.0
5.0-0-5.0
*Models have a 0.25% FS accuracy.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and nonconductive,
noncorrosive gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% or 0.25% FS.
Stability: 0.5% FSO/yr.
(-29 to 71C), 10 to 95% RH.
Compensated Temp. Range: 35 to
135F (2 to 57C).
Thermal Effects: 0.015% FS/F (zero
and span).
Power Requirements: 12-36 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Externally

accessible potentiometers, noninteractive, 10% FS adjustment.
Response Time: 250 msec max.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1045
Vmin=12V+[(.22A)(R L )].
Current Consumption: 3.6 mA (min).
terminals.
Process Connection: Barbed
stainless steel for 3/16 ID tubing.
Housing: 300 Series SS (NEMA 2,
IP11).
Weight: 1.04 lb (472 g).
ACCESSORY
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PT1.
Series
607D
DIN Rail Mount Differential Pressure Transmitter

Mounts on 35 mm DIN Rail, LED Status Indication, 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy
1-1/16
[27.00]
2-53/64 [71.70]
2-41/64
[67.00]
3-25/64
[86.00]
3-13/16
[96.79]
21/64
[8.50]
The Series 607D DIN Rail Mount Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the
pressure of air and compatible gases and sends a standard 4 to 20 mA output signal. The
607D housing is specifically designed to mount on a 35 mm DIN rail in a panel. This
mounting style allows for several units to be mounted closely together reducing required
space. A wide range of models are available factory calibrated to 0.25% full-scale accuracy
in ranges from the very low 0.1 in w.c. to 25 in w.c. The zero control is for field calibration.
Units also include red/green LED status of proper transmitter operation. Versatile circuit
design enables operation in 2-wire current loops.
Model
607D-01
607D-02
607D-03
607D-04
607D-05
607D-06
607D-07
Range (in w.c.)

0 to 0.1
0 to 0.25
0 to 0.5
0 to 1
0 to 2.5
0 to 5
0 to 10
Model
607D-08
607D-11
607D-12
607D-13
607D-14
607D-15
Range (in w.c.)

0 to 25
0 to 0.05
0 to 0.1
0 to 0.25
0 to 0.5
0 to 1
OPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-conductive, noncorrosive gases.
Wetted Materials: 302 SS, glass,
nickel, silicone rubber and brass.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS* at room
temperature. *RSS includes nonlinearity, hysteresis and nonrepeatability.
Stability: 1% FS/yr.
Temperature Limits:
Operating and compensated: 0 to
170F (-18 to 77C);
Storage: -65 to 185F (-54 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: 15 psi (100 kPa).
Thermal Effects: (Includes zero and
span) 0.01 FS/F, 20 to 170F (-7 to
77C).
23-32
[18.25]
15/16
[23.97]
Power Requirements: 16 to 32 VDC.

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Zero Adjustment: Potentiometer for
zero.
Response Time: Approximately 10
ms.
Max. Loop Resistance: DC: 0 to 800
.
Electrical Connections: Screw-type
removeable terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed fittings
for 1/8 (3.12 mm) ID rubber or vinyl
tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, on a
1.378 (35 mm) DIN rail.
Weight: 7.0 oz (198 g).
ACCESSORY
A-360, Aluminum DINRail 1 m
44
045_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:50 AM Page 45
Differential Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
616
Integral Pressure Connections, Accuracy 0.25% Full Scale

1-13/32
[35.74]
5/16
[7.95]
15/32
[11.91]
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1/2
[12.7]
7/16
[11.11]
1/2 [12.7]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2-1/4 [57.15]
Series 616 Transmitter features an exceptional 0.25% accuracy in several factory

calibrated ranges. Choose the one just right for your application. Span and Zero controls
included for fine tuning and minor re-calibration in the field.
Model
616-2
616-3
616-4
616-5
616-6
616-7
616-6B
616-10B
616-20B
Max. Press.
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
Range
0-6 in w.c.
0-10 in w.c.
0-20 in w.c.
0-40 in w.c.
0-100 in w.c.
0-200 in w.c.
3-0-3 in w.c.
5-0-5 in w.c.
10-0-10 in w.c.
OPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS.
(-17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limits: See chart.
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F
(0.012% FS/C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC
(2-wire).
7/8
[22.23]

Zero and Span Adjustments:
Potentiometers for zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0-1250 max.
Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA
max.
terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed, dual
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 mm and
4.76 mm) ID rubber or vinyl tubing.
Weight: 1.8 oz (51 g).
Series
616D
DIN Rail Differential Pressure Transmitter

Mounts on 35 mm DIN Rail, 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy
2-3/8
[60.33]
13/16
[20.64]
2-3/8
[60.33]
2-57/64
[73.42]
1-1/2
[38.10]
The Series 616D Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the pressure of air and
compatible gases and sends a standard 4 to 20 mA output signal. The 616D enclosure is
specifically designed to mount on a 35 mm DIN rail in a panel. This mounting style allows
for several units to be mounted closely together reducing required space. A wide range of
models are available factory calibrated to specific ranges as listed in the chart below. The
span and zero controls are for use when checking calibration. They are not intended for
re-ranging to a significantly different span. Versatile circuit design enables operation in 2wire current loops.
Model
616D-2
616D-3
616D-4
616D-5
616D-6
616D-7
Range
0-6 in w.c.
0-10 in w.c.
0-20 in w.c.
0-40 in w.c.
0-100 in w.c.
0-200 in w.c.
Max. Press.
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
ACCESSORY
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS at 70F.
(-6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.0012% FS/C).
(2-wire).
3/4
[19.05]
Loop Resistance: DC: 0 to 1250
max.
Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA
max.
terminal block.
NPT. Accessories included are 2
barbed fittings for 1/8 (3.12 mm) and
3/16 (4.77 mm) ID rubber or vinyl
tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, on a
1.378 (35 mm) DINrail.
Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
45
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
046_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:51 PM Page 46
PRESSURE
Series
648B
&
648C

Unidirectional and Bidirectional Ranges, Removable Terminal Block
BRASS
HOLE
BARBS
Differential PressureTransmitters
TERMINAL
BLOCK
1-9/16
[39.50]
LED
3-15/32
[88.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
nickel, silicon rubber, polyethylene,
acrylic, ABS and brass.
Accuracy: 648B: 0.8% FS* at room
temperature; 648C: 0.4% FS* at room
temperature. *RSS (Root SumSquare)
includes non-linearity, hysteresis and
non-repeatability.
170F (-18 to 77C); Storage: -65 to
185F (-54 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: 15 psi (100 kPa)
proof pressure; 30 psi (200 kPa) burst
pressure.
3-5/32
[80.00]
Thermal Effects: 648B: 0.025%

FS/F (0.045%/C); 648C: 0.020%
FS/F (0.036%/C).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Pushbutton for zero, potentiometer for span.
ms.
.
Electrical Connection: Detachable
euro-style terminal block.
Process Connections: 3/16 OD
barbed fitting for 1/8 ID push-on
tubing.
Housing: SS and PC+ABS alloy.
Weight: 3.8 oz (108 g).
OPTION
Note: To order unit with 0.4% FS* accuracy, change B to C in model number.
Ex. 648C-01
Series
677B
3/16
[4.80]
1-57/64
[48.00]
1
[25.40]
The Series 648B and 648C Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed to
be used with clean, dry air and other non-corrosive gases. Each unit features a pushactivated zero function and an associated LED light indicator. With the convenient pushbutton, zero calibration can be performed without any additional equipment, which
significantly reduces time and cost for users. The dual color LED indicates if the
transmitter is at normal operation, overpressure, or in the process of zero calibration.
The enclosure consists of a flame retardant plastic top cover and a stainless steel bottom
plate for ruggedness. The pressure ranges vary from 0.1 in w.c. to 25 in w.c. unidirectional
and 0.25 in w.c. to 5 in w.c. bidirectional. Series 648B comes standard with 0.8% FS*
accuracy, while 648C models are available in 0.4% FS* accuracy for more demanding
applications. Wiring time is reduced with the removeable terminal block. Each unit
features a 2-wire 4 to 20 mA output that is fully protected against short circuiting and
incorrect wiring.
Range (in w.c.) Model
Range (in w.c.)
Model
648B-01 0 to 0.1
648B-08 0 to 25
648B-02 0 to 0.25
648B-13 0 to 0.25
648B-03 0 to 0.5
648B-14 0 to 0.5
648B-04 0 to 1
648B-15 0 to 1
648B-05 0 to 2.5
648B-16 0 to 2.5
648B-06 0 to 5
648B-17 0 to 5
648B-07 0 to 10
3/16
[4.80]

NEMA 4 Enclosure with Integral Mounting Bracket
1-9/32 1-27/64
[32.50] [36.00]
19/32
[15.01]
4-17/32
[115.00]
49/64
[19.50]
5/16 [8.00]
2-9/16
1-3/16 [65.00]
[30.00]
4-3/64
[102.90]
1-25/64 17/64
[35.40] [6.90]
With Cover Removed

Series 677B Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed to measure pressures
as low as 0.1 in w.c. with 0.4% accuracy. Use Series 677B for building energy management
systems, environmental pollution control, oven pressurization, lab and fume hood control,
HVAC and VAV applications. The transmitter features 15 psid overpressure, reverse
polarity protection and EMI/RFI protection. Internal regulation permits use with
unregulated DC power supplies. The NEMA 4 housing allows for versatile mounting
locations and integral mounting tabs simplify installation.
Model
677B-01
677B-02
677B-03
677B-04
677B-05
677B-06
677B-07
Range (in w.c.)

0 to 0.1
0 to 0.25
0 to 0.5
0 to 1
0 to 2.5
0 to 5
0 to 10
Model
677B-08
677B-11
677B-12
677B-13
677B-14
677B-15
Range (in w.c.)

0 to 25
0 to 0.05
0 to 0.1
0 to 0.25
0 to 0.5
0 to 1
ACCESSORIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-conductive, noncorrosive gases.
nickel, silicone rubber and brass.
Accuracy: 0.4% FS* at room
temperature.
*RSS includes non-linearity, hysteresis
and non-repeatability.
Temperature Limits: Operating and
Compensated: 0 to 185F (-18 to
85C); Storage: -65 to 220F (-54 to
105C).
Pressure Limit: 15 psi (100 kPa).
5-1/2 [139.70]
3/16
[4.60]
5-1/8 [130.00]
Mounting Plate
Thermal Effects: (Includes zero and

span) <0.028% FS/F, 0 to 185F (-18
to 85C).
Power Requirement: 16 to 32 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire.
Internally accessible potentiometers,
noninteractive.
ms.
.
Process Connection: 3/16 OD
barbed brass pressure fitting.
EnclosureRating: NEMA 4 (IP65).
Weight: 11.5 oz (330 g).
OPTION
46
047_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:35 AM Page 47
Compact Differential Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
668
Ranges from 0 to 0.25 in w.c., Overpressure Protection to 10 psig, 1% Accuracy

5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
3/16 [4.76]
FITTING
2-3/4
[69.85]
1
[25.40]
3-5/32
[80.16]
LOW
_
COM
6-32 SCREW
W/TERMINAL WASHER
1-41/64
[41.67]
Our low cost Series 668 Differential Pressure Transmitter is capable of measuring
low pressures with a 1% accuracy ideally suited for proper building pressurization and
air flow control. Transmitters can withstand up to 10 psig overpressure with no damage to
the unit. Variable capacitance sensor design provides excellent sensitivity and long-term
stability. Compact, lightweight design makes installation simple and easy. Units also feature
reverse-polarity protection.
Bi-Directional
Model* Range
Model* Range
Model* Range
668-1 0 to 0.25 in w.c. 668-6 0 to 10 in w.c. 668-10 0 to 0.1 in w.c.
668-2 0 to 0.5 in w.c. 668-7 0 to 25 in w.c. 668-11 0 to 0.25 in w.c.
668-8 0 to 50 in w.c. 668-14 0 to 2.5 in w.c.
668-3 0 to 1 in w.c.
668-9 0 to 100 in w.c. 668-17 0 to 25 in w.c.
668-4 0 to 2.5 in w.c.
668-5 0 to 5.0 in w.c.
*Also available with optional conduit cover. To order add C to part number, i.e.
668C-1. Consult factory for additional information.
OPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-conductive
gases.
Accuracy: 1% of full-scale (RSS)
(includes non-linearity, hysteresis, and
non-repeatability).
Temperature Limits:
Operating: 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C);
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Pressure Limits:10 psig (0.69 bar).
Compensated Temperature
Range: 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C).
Thermal Effects: 0.033% FS/F
(0.018% FS/C).
+
EXC
OUT
3/8
[9.53]
1-7/8
[47.63]
Supply Voltage: 12-30 VDC.

Output: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire.
Zero and Span Adjust: 1 mA,
non-interactive.
Loop Resistance: 0-800 .
Electrical Connection: Terminal strip.
Pressure Connection: 3/16 OD
fitting for 1/4 ID tubing.
Housing: Fire retardant glass filled
polyester.
ACCESSORIES
Series
616C

Accuracy 1% Full Scale
1-13/32
[35.74]
5/16
[7.95]
15/32
[11.91]
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1/2
[12.7]
7/16
[11.11]
1/2 [12.7]
1-1/2
[38.1]
2-1/4 [57.15]
Series 616C Transmitter features an exceptional 1% accuracy in several factory
calibrated ranges. Choose the one just right for your application. Span and Zero controls
included for fine tuning and minor re-calibration in the field.
Model
616C-1
616C-2
616C-3
616C-4
616C-5
616C-3B
Range
0-3 in w.c.
0-6 in w.c.
0-10 in w.c.
0-20 in w.c.
0-40 in w.c.
1.5-0-1.5 in w.c.
Max. Press.
2 psig
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
2 psig
OPTION
Example: 616C-1-NIST.
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
(-17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.012% FS/C).
7/8
[22.23]
(2-wire).
max.
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 mm and
4.76 mm) ID rubber or vinyl tubing.
ACCESSORY
47
HIGH
3-1/2
[88.90]
048_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:51 AM Page 48
PRESSURE
Series
616KD
Digital Push-Button Calibration with One-Touch Transmitter Technology, DIN Mount Housing
OPTIONAL
TERMINAL COVER
5/8
[15.88]
RoHS
Optional
protective cap
One Touch Digital

Push Button sets
both zero &span
The Series 616KD Differential Pressure Transmitters with One-Touch

technology are designed for simplicity, making them the ideal choice for installers and
maintenance professionals.
The One-Touch Differential Pressure Transmitters are cost-effective, compact transmitters
that reduce up front costs as well as expenses over the life of the product. These
instruments not only alleviate cumbersome turn pots typically found in most transmitters,
but eliminate entirely the need to span the instrument during calibration. With a single
digital push button, both ZERO AND SPAN are calibrated properly, nothing else is
required. No additional reference pressure sources and separate calibration devices are
necessary; no need to remove from service and send to a lab. All that is required of the
installer or user is to let the unit sit at zero reference pressure, then push a button. That
is it! The transmitter is now ready for operation. Time savings are enormous over the life
of the product compared to traditional transmitters which require time to annually remove
the product from service plus the additional time to actually perform a complete full-span
calibration.
Mounting is simple with integral mounting holes on the 616KD that are inherent to the
molded housing. The 616KD has the expanded capability to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN
rail either via its side or back integral DIN rail clips. The Series 616KD has easy-to-wire
open screw terminals at the top of the housing. An optional protective cap snaps directly
to housing to cover terminals.
The One-Touch family of Differential Pressure Transmitters are ideal for building
automation applications such as air handlers, duct pressure, variable air volume and filter
monitoring. Available models include ranges from 1 in w.c. to 20 in w.c. depending on series.
ACCESSORIES
A-360, Aluminum DINRail, 1 m
A-618, Protective Terminal Cap
SCD-PS, 100 to 240 VAC/VDC to 24 VDC Power Supply
OPTION
Example: 616KD-01-NIST.
5/32 [3.97]
MOUNTING
HOLE
2 PLACES
2-1/4
[57.15]
2-13/32
[61.12]
5/16
[7.94]
3-21/64
[84.53]
2-13/32
[61.12]
1/2
[12.70]
1-1/2
[38.10]
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/32
[26.19]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% FS.
Stability: 1% FS/year.
Pressure Limits: 2 psi (13.8 kPa).
Thermal Effect on Span: 0.11% FS/F (0.19% FS/C) typ.
Thermal Effect on Zero: 616KD-X0: 0.6%/F (1%/C); 616KD-X1: 0.3%/F
(0.5%/C); 616KD-X2: 0.2%/F (0.33%/C); 616KD-X3: 0.12%/F (0.2%/C);
616KD-X4: 0.06%/F (0.1%/C) FS max.
Power Requirements: 16 to 35 VDC(2 or 3 wire), 20 to 28 VAC (3 wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or unit with field selectable 0 to 10 & 0 to 5 volt.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Push button.
Loop Resistance: DC=1000 max.; AC=1200 max.
Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed, dual size to fit 1/8 & 3/16 (3 mm & 5 mm) ID
rubber or vinyl tubing.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA1 (IP10).
Mounting Orientation: Position insensitive.
Agency Approval: CE, RoHS.
Model
616KD-00
616KD-01
616KD-02
616KD-03
616KD-04
616KD-05
616KD-06
616KD-07
616KD-10
616KD-11
616KD-12
616KD-13
616KD-14
Range
0 to 1 in w.c.
0 to 2 in w.c.
0 to 3 in w.c.
0 to 5 in w.c.
0 to 10 in w.c.
0 to 15 in w.c.
0 to 20 in w.c.
0 to 25 in w.c.
0 to 250 Pa
0 to 500 Pa
0 to 750 Pa
0 to 1250 Pa
0 to 2500 Pa
Note: For field selectable 0 to 10 / 0 to 5 volt output models, add -V to end of model.
Ex: 616KD-01-V.
48
049_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:52 AM Page 49
Precision Low Differential Pressure

Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
610
Ideal for Clean Rooms, Easy to Field Calibrate with Security Key
5-41/64
[143.27]
31/64 [12.3]
3/4 [19.05]
CALIBRATION
KEY
A-165
2-29/32
[73.82]
Base Mount Version
The Series 610 Low Differential Pressure Transmitters are capable of measuring
the pressures and flow of air or non-conducting gases at high resolutions. Designed
specifically for clean rooms, isolation rooms, and other critical environments, the Series
610 is ideal for situations when accurate and reliable pressure monitoring is essential. Easy
access pressure ports and electrical connections, removable process heads, and detachable
terminal blocks make for fast and easy installation. The Series 610 transmitters are
available for air pressure ranges as low as 0.1 in w.c. full-scale. The Series 610 transmitters
can be ordered as either 0.25% or 0.5% FS accuracy, base mount or din rail mount and
the option of a digital read out display. In addition, a calibration key can be ordered that
allows the user to set zero and span. One key will work on multiple transmitters.
FEATURES
Ranges down to 0.1 w.c. with 0.25% or 0.5% F.S. accuracy
Removeable process head for simplified installation
Secure operation ensured with calibration only possible via separate calibration key
Calibration certificate included with 0.25% accuracy models
0.5% Accuracy
With Display
Model
610-01D-BDE
610-25D-BDE
610-05D-BDE
610-01A-BDE
610-25A-BDE
610-05A-BDE
610-10A-BDE
610-01C-BDE
610-25C-BDE
Range
0-.1
0-.25
0-.5
0-1
0-2.5
0-5
0-10
.1
.25
Without Display
Model
610-01D-BNE
610-25D-BNE
610-05D-BNE
610-01A-BNE
610-25A-BNE
610-05A-BNE
610-10A-BNE
610-01C-BNE
610-25C-BNE
Range
0-.1
0-.25
0-.5
0-1
0-2.5
0-5
0-10
.1
.25
3/4 [19.05]
3-29/32
[99.22]
3-29/32
[99.22]
2-29/32 [73.82]
31/64 [12.3]
FOR 35MM
3-13/32 DIN RAIL
[86.52] MOUNTING
DINRail Mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or similar non-conducting gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% or 0.5% FS.
Stability: 0.5%/yr.
Pressure Limits: 2 psi (0.137 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.5% FS.
Power Requirements: 13.5 to 30 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Loop Resistance: 800 max.
Current Consumption: 25 mA.
Zero and Span Adjustments: External security key pendant.
Response Time: 0.02 to 0.04 seconds.
Electrical Connections: Detachable screw terminal connector.
Process Connections: 3/16 OD barbed brass fittings on removeable process
head.
Enclosure Rating: Fire retardant ABS.
ACCESSORIES
A-165, Security Key
A-616, Process Head without display
A-617, Process Head with LCD display
OPTION
Note:
For 0.25% accuracy models change last letter E to V.
For Din Rail Mount models change the letter B to D.

Static Fitting Options: See page 548 (Static Pressure Tips)
49
CALIBRATION
KEY
A-165
050_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:44 AM Page 50
PRESSURE
Series
RSM
Room Status Monitor

For Sensing Low Pressure Using High Accuracy
US
1-5/8
[41.66]
5-13/32
[137.16]
2-5/32
[55.12]
Room Status Monitor
8
[203.20]
4-5/8
[117.09]
TUBING HEADER PORT

Room Status Monitor
The Series RSM Room Status Monitor is designed for critical low differential
pressure applications that require stringent pressure monitoring and alarming. The Series
RSM can be configured to monitor positive or negative pressure in protected environments
and hospital isolation rooms per CDC guidelines. The RSM is a complete system that
includes a backlit RGB LCD display with a graphic user interface which enables access to
pressure, security, calibration, and alarm setup. The touch-screen displays menus that
guide the user through setup, as well as setting up password protection. Red and green
LED's and a local audible alarm (with time delay feature) alert personnel to system status.
The RSM has a NEMA 1 (IP20) rated fire retardant plastic for indoor applications. True
differential pressure is displayed with a resolution of 0.001 in w.c. The very low pressure
capacitance is dead ended and avoids the potential for cross contamination of the room and
reference space as well as eliminating drift that results from fouling of flow based sensors,
which by nature have a flow path connecting the protected and reference spaces.
Additionally, there are two levels of password protection available as well as optional
BACnet MSTP communication. A calibration certificate is provided with every unit.
APPLICATIONS
Hospital isolation wards
Pharmaceutical
Manufacturing
Clean rooms
Research labs
Animal facilities
Model
RSM-1-A
RSM-2-A
RSM-3-A
RSM-4-A
RSM-5-A
RSM-6-A
RSM-1-B
RSM-2-B
RSM-3-B
RSM-4-B
RSM-5-B
RSM-6-B
Operating Range
0.05 in w.c.
0.1 in w.c.
0.25 in w.c.
0.5 in w.c.
1 in w.c.
2.5 in w.c.
0.05 in w.c.
0.1 in w.c.
0.25 in w.c.
0.5 in w.c.
1 in w.c.
2.5 in w.c.
Excitation/Output
SPEAKER
LED
INDICATORS
ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGE
BUTTON
A-285
Remote Annunciator
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or nonconductive, nonexplosive gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS.
Humidity Limits: 5 to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).
Altitude: 6561 ft (2000 meters) max.
Thermal Effects: 0.03% FS/F ( 0.05% FS/C).
Pressure Limits: 15 in w.c. (3.7 kPa).
Supply Voltage:
Order code A (24 VAC): 18 to 32 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz;
Order code B (120 VAC): 85 to 265 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz;
Main supply voltage fluctuations up to 10%.
Power Requirements: 5 W.
Power Consumption (Voltage output): 5 W.
Output Signal: Selectable 4 to 20 mA (2-wire), 0 to 5 VDC (3-wire), or 0 to 10
VDC (3-wire).
Switch Type:SPST.
Loop Resistance (4 to 20 mA output): 0 to 510 .
Electrical Connection: Removable terminal block.
Process Connections: Barbed fittings for 3/16 ID tubing.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 1 (IP20) rated for indoor applications.
Housing: Fire retardant plastic.
Mounting: Mount to standard double gang metal electrical box using 4x4 plaster
ring adapter.
Dimensions: 8 H x 5.4 W x 1.8 D (20.3 H x 13.7 W x 4.1 D cm).
Weight: 1.5 lb (680 g).
Communications: BACnet MSTP ASC optional.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA (RSM only).
24 VAC/4 to 20 mA or
0 to 5 or 0 to 10 VDC
Note: For optional BACnet communication change end from -A to -C for 24 VAC
power or from -B to -D for 120 VAC power models.
120 VAC/4 to 20 mA or
0 to 5 or 0 to 10 VDC
ACCESSORY
A-285, Remote Alarm Annunciator with Visible/Audible Alarm and Acknowledge
Switch
50
051_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:53 AM Page 51
PRESSURE
Series
616W
NEMA 4X Enclosure, 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy

3-1/8
[79.38]
3/16 [4.76]
1-1/4 MOUNTING HOLES
[31.75]
TYP 4 PLACES
4-1/2
[114.30]
3-3/4
[95.25]
Positive, negative and differential pressures can be measured within a full span
accuracy of 0.25% with the Series 616W Differential Pressure Transmitter. Units are
enclosed in a polycarbonate case, rated NEMA 4X (IP66) and operate by sensing the
pressure of air and compatible gases, then sending a standard 4-20 mA output signal.
Design enables operation in 2-wire current loops. A wide range of models are available
factory calibrated to specific ranges. The span and zero controls are for use when checking
calibration. They are not intended for re-ranging to a significantly different span. The LCD
(as shown above) allows local indication of pressure.
Model
616W-2-LCD
616W-3-LCD
616W-4-LCD
616W-5-LCD
616W-6-LCD
616W-7-LCD
616W-20B-LCD
616W-3M-LCD
Range
0-6 in w.c.
0-10 in w.c.
0-20 in w.c.
0-40 in w.c.
0-100 in w.c.
0-200 in w.c.
10-0-10 in w.c.
0-2.5 kPa
Max. Press.
5 psig
5 psig
11 psig
11 psig
29 psig
29 psig
11 psig
34.5 kPa
1-3/16
[30.18]
2-1/8
[53.98]
1-5/16
[33.32] TYP
7/16 OR 5/8
[11.13 OR 15.88] TYP
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76] I.D. TUBING
3/4 [19.05] TYP
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS, display
accuracy 0.5%.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 140F (-17.8
to 60C).
20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.0012% FS/C).
(2-wire).
4-17/32
[115.09]
3-1/8
[79.38]

max.
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 and 4.76
mm) ID rubber or vinyl tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical,
consult factory for other position
orientations.
Weight: Without LCD 8.8 oz. (249 g);
with LCD 9.6 oz (272 g).
Note: Units with M in the model number are metric units.

OPTION
Example: 616W-3-LCD-NIST.
Series
616WL

Low Ranges Down to 0.25 in w.c. (60 Pa), NEMA 4X Housing (IP66)
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES TYP 4 PLCS
3-1/8
[79.38]
4-17/32
[115.09]
5-1/8
[130.18]
63/61 [25.00]
47/64
[18.65]
2-21/32 [67.47]
The Series 616WL Differential Pressure Transmitter senses very low pressures of air
and non-combustible, compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. All
models, including those featuring the 3 digit LCD digital read-out, are factory calibrated
to specific ranges as listed in the chart below.
Positive, negative, and differential pressures can be measured within a full span accuracy
of 0.50%. This weatherproof unit is enclosed in a polycarbonate case, designed to meet
(IP66/NEMA 4X). Internal digital push button zero and span allow for quick and simple
field calibration.
Model
616WL-2-LCD
616WL-4-LCD
616WL-12-LCD
616WL-14-LCD
616WL-22-LCD
616WL-32-LCD
616WL-25-LCD
616WL-35-LCD
Range
0-0.25 in w.c.
0-1 in w.c.
0.25-0-0.25 in w.c.
1-0-1 in w.c.
0-60 Pa
60-0-60 Pa
0-250 Pa
250-0-250 Pa
Max. Press.
2 psig
4 psig
2 psig
4 psig
2 psig
2 psig
4 psig
4 psig
3-45/64
[94.06]
3-1/8
FITTING TO
49/64 [79.38]
ACCOMODATE
[19.45]
CABLE DIAMETERS
2-37/64 1-1/8
OF .100 - .260
[65.48] [28.58]
1/8 AND 3/16
[3.18 AND 4.76] I.D. TUBING
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: 0.50% FS, display
accuracy 0.5%.
(-17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
(0.036% FS/C).
(2-wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Digital,

push button adj.
max.
terminal block.
size to fit 1/8 and 3/16 (3.12 and 4.76
mm) ID rubber or vinyl tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical,
consult factory for other position
orientations.
Weight: Without LCD 17 oz (482 g);
with LCD 18 oz (510 g).
OPTION
Example: 616WL-4-LCD-NIST.
51
5-1/8
[130.18]
052_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:53 AM Page 52
PRESSURE
Series
605
Magnehelic Differential Pressure

Indicating Transmitter
23/32
[18.26]
1
[25.40]
(3) #6-32 x 3/16 [4.76]

DP HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 4-1/8 [104.78] B.C.
FOR PANEL MOUNTING
Range
in w.c.
.05-0-.20
.25-0-.25
0-.50
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-6.0
0-10
0-20.0
0-30
0-50
Range
in Pa
605-60PA 0-60
605-125PA 0-125
605-250PA 0-250
605-500PA 0-500
Maximum
Pressure
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
11 psi (75.8 kPa)
11 psi (75.8 kPa)
11 psi (75.8 kPa)
Electrical
Accuracy %
2
2
2
2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Mechanical
Accuracy %
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
25 psi (1.7 bar)

25 psi (1.7 bar)
25 psi (1.7 bar)
2 psi (13.79 kPa)
2
2
2
0.5
4
3
2
2
1-3/4
[44.45]
30
2
[50.80]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-1/8
[28.58]
11/16
[17.46]
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/16
[52.39]
(4) 6-32 HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON
A 5-1/8 [130.18] B.C.
FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
4-47/64
[ 120.25]
5
[127.00]
1/2 [12.70]
The Series 605 Magnehelic Indicating Transmitter provides for both visual
monitoring and electronic control of very low differential pressure. The Series 605 is ideal
for control applications in building HVAC systems where local indication is desired during
routine maintenance checks or necessary when trouble shooting the system. The easily
read dial gage is complimented by the two-wire, 4-20 mA control signal utilizing the timeproven Dwyer Magnehelic gage mechanical design and Series 600 transmitter
technology. The 2-wire design with terminal strip on the rear simplifies connection in any
4-20 mA control loop powered by a 10-35 VDC supply.
Model
605-00N
605-11
605-0
605-1
605-2
605-3
605-6
605-10
605-20
605-30
605-50
1/8 FEMALE
NPT HIGH
PRESSURE
CONNECTION
2-1/2
[63.50]
5/8 [15.88]
PANEL MAX
3/16
[4.76]
4 [101.60]
FACE
5-1/2 [139.70]
O.D. MOUNTING
RING
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: See chart.
Weight: 1 lb, 12.6 oz (811 g).
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: See chart (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 120F (0 to 48.9C).
Thermal Effect: 0.025% FS/F (0.045% FS/C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2-wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Protected potentiometers.
Current Consumption: DC; 38 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block.
ACCESSORIES
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket - for flush mounting
A-370, Mounting Bracket - flush mount Series 605 Transmitter in bracket. Bracket is
then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
OPTION

52
053_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:54 AM Page 53
ATEX Approved 605 Differential Pressure

Indicating Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
AT2
605
Series 605 in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
6-19/64
[160.00]
1/8 NPT
The ATEX approved Series AT2605 Indicating Transmitter provides for both visual
monitoring and electronic control of very low differential pressure in hazardous locations.
The easily read dial gage is complimented by the two-wire, 4 to 20 mA control signal
utilizing the time-proven Dwyer Magnehelic gage mechanical design and Series 600
transmitter technology. The two-wire design simplifies any 4 to 20 mA control loop
powered by a 10 to 35 VDC supply. Flame-proof ATEX enclosures are available in
aluminum and can include a glass window for viewing process pressure on gage face.
with instrument).
.05 to 0 to .20 in w.c.

.25 to 0 to .25 in w.c.
0 to .50 in w.c.
0 to 1.0 in w.c.
0 to 2.0 in w.c.
0 to 3.0 in w.c.
0 to 6.0 in w.c.
0 to 10.0 in w.c.
0 to 20.0 in w.c.
0 to 30 in w.c.
0 to 50 in w.c.
0 to 60 Pa
0 to 125 Pa
0 to 250 Pa
0 to 500 Pa
Standard construction
Aluminum
-00N
-11
-0
-1
-2
-3
-6
-10
-20
-30
-50
-60 Pa
-125 Pa
-250 Pa
-500 Pa
Construction
Housing
-X
-A
B
O
Cover
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
1
2
X
OPV
Tag
T2
Blind
Glass top cover
Standard without
overpressure relief valve
1-37/64
[40.00]
8-17/64
[210.00]
8-5/64
7-11/64 [205.00]
[182.00]
5/16
[8.00]
15/16
[24.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
1/8 NPT
2-9/16
[65.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGESPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: See page reference
below.
Pressure Limits: See page reference
below.
(-6.67 to 48.9C); Case: -58 to 140F
(-50 to 60C) (Note: Product
temperature limits differ from case).
Size: 4 (101.6 mm) dial face.
AT2605
Series
Range
19/32
[15.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
8-7/64
[206.00]
6-19/64
[160.00]
5-23/64
[136.00]
19/32
[15.00]
Accuracy: See page reference
below. Includes linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability.
32 to 120F (0 to 48.9C).
(0.045% FS/C).
(2-wire).
Protected potentiometers on 605 face.
Can access those by opening case.
Allowed only in safe zone.
Loop Resistance: DC; 0 to 1250
max.
max.
terminal block.
vertical position.
RAL7038.
to use SS.
ATEX Approved Products from
10ATEX1096.
II2
605 Ordering Page: See page 52 (Series 605)
53
054_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:48 AM Page 54
PRESSURE
Series
MS2
Magnesense II Differential Pressure Transmitter
Monitors Pressure, Air Velocity & Air Flow, BACnet/Modbus Communications

21/32
[16.67]
3-7/16
[87.31]
2-41/64
[67.07]
1/2 NPT
21/32
29/32
[16.67] [23.02]
2-11/64
1/2 [55.17]
[12.70]
2-9/16
[65.09]
57/64
[22.62]
Wall Mount Bracket

3/8
[9.53]
(3) 3/16 [4.76] HOLES

EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4.115 [104.52] BC
7-3/4
[196.77]
Duct Mount Bracket

3-7/16
[87.31]
21/32
[16.67]
21/32
[16.67]
2-41/64
[67.24]
1/2 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
1-41/64
[41.71]
The Series MS2 Magnesense II Differential Pressure Transmitter combines the

proven stable Hall Effect sensing technology of our original Series MS with additional
features to reduce installation time and simplify ordering. In this second generation
transmitter, we have added additional field selectable pressure ranges so that each model
can have four selectable ranges along with four additional bidirectional ranges. When using
the pluggable integral display or the portable remote display tool, both Metric and English
engineering units can be selected via on board dip switches. Dual current and voltage
outputs allow users to simultaneously take either a current or voltage output to their
building controller and have a local test circuit for verification of the output reading. The
voltage output can be selected to be either 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC, while the current is
always 4 to 20 mA. Both the current and voltage output can also be inverted. The MS2
can also be ordered with either a BACnet or MODBUS Communications protocol output
that will allow the transmitters to be daisy-chained together.
Like the original Series MS, the second generation transmitter can be used as a linear
pressure output or a linear velocity output with the square root extraction done in the
transmitter. Additional parameters have been included to expand the square root capability
to include flow measurements.
BACnet and Modbus Communications protocol recommend limiting the number of nodes
in any segment to 32. Therefore, the transceiver may be rated at one unit load. Fractional
loads are also acceptable. The MS2 accounts as an eighth of a load on the MSTP network.
Pa
mm w.c.
kPa
25, 40 50,
2.5, 4, 6,
0.025, 0.04,
125
10
0.05, 0.125
25, 40, 50, 2.5, 4,
0.025, 0.04,
125
6, 10
0.05, 0.125
250, 500, 750, 25, 50, 75,
0.25, 0.5, 0.75,
1250
125
1.25
2500, 3500,
250, 350,
2.5, 3.5, 5.0,
MS2-W103* 10, 15, 25,
28
5000, 6975
500, 697.5
6.975
*Models can be changed in the field to have zero centered ranges at reduced
accuracy.
OPTIONS
Add -LCD to end of model numbers for units with display
Example: MS2-W101-LCD
Add -BC to end of model numbers for BACnet Communications
Example:MS2-W101-BC
Add -MC to end of model numbers for Modbus Communications
Example:MS2-W101-MC
Add -NIST to end of model numbers for NIST Traceable Certificate
Example: MS2-W101-NIST
Add -FC to end of model numbers for Factory Calibration Certificate
Example: MS2-W101-FC
Change W to D for Duct Mount Static Probe
Example: MS2-D101
Change W to N for DINRail Mounting
Example: MS2-N101
in w.c.
Model
MS2-W101 0.10, 0.15,
0.25, 0.50
MS2-W111 0.10, 0.15,
0.25, 0.5
MS2-W102 1, 2, 3, 5
54
25/64
[9.96]
2-11/64
29/32
[55.17]
[23.02] 1/2
[12.70]
57/64
[22.62]
DIN Mount Bracket
3-11/32
[84.84]
3-1/2
[88.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
Supported Baud Rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200.
Data Size: 8.
Parity: None.
Stop Bits: 1.
Typical Accuracy: 1% FS for 0.15 (40 Pa), 0.25 (50 Pa), 0.5 (100 Pa), 2 (500
Pa), 3 (750 Pa), 5 (1250 Pa), 10 (2 kPa), 15 (3 kPa), 25 (5 kPa), 28 (6.975
kPa); 2% FS for 0.1 (25 Pa), 1 (250 Pa), and all bi-directional ranges.
Stability: 1% / year FSO.
Pressure Limits: 1 psi max., operation; 10 psi burst.
Power Requirements: 10 to 35 VDC (2-wire), 17 to 36 VDC or isolated 21.6 to 33
VAC (3-wire).
Output Signals: 4 to 20 mA (2-wire), 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC (3-wire).
Response Time: Adjustable: 0.5 to 15 sec. time constant. Provides a 95%
response time of 1.5 to 45 seconds.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Digital push buttons.
Loop Resistance:
Current Output: 0 to 1250 max;
Voltage Output: Min. load resistance 1 k.
Display (Optional): 5 digit LCD.
Electrical Connections: 3-wire removable European style terminal block for 16 to
22 AWG.
Electrical Entry: 1/2 NPS thread.
Process Connection: 3/16 ID tubing (5 mm ID); Max. OD 9 mm.
Weight: 8.0 oz (230 g).
Agency Approvals: BTL, CE.
ACCESSORIES
A-151, Cable gland for 5 to 10 mm diameter cable
A-MS2-LCD, Field Upgradeable Display
A-435-A, Remote Display Tool
A-481, Installer kit. Includes 2 plastic static pressure tips and 7 ft (2.1 m) of PVC
tubing
A-489, 4 303 SS Straight Static Pressure Tip with Flange
A-302F-A, 4 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 ID rubber
or plastic tubing

055_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:55 AM Page 55
PRESSURE
One Unit for all your Building Pressure Applications

The Industry Standard for Building Automation
Field Selectable Ranges in metric

or English. Lowers stock and
inventory requirements. Youll
always have the right transmitter for
every job.
Large Integral LCD. Second

generation Magnesense has a
larger LCD that includes the
engineering units. Display also has
5 digits allowing measurements up
to 99,999 to be displayed directly.
Field Selectable Air Velocity and

Flow Modes for fan and blower
applications. Unit provides square
root output that accurately tracks
fpm or m/s for velocity
measurements. Now area can be
programmed to directly display cfm
or m3/hr for volumetric flow
measurements. No need for a smart
programmable indicator or PLC to
convert pressure to air flow.
Reduces components and
installation time lowering overall
costs.
Remote Display Tool reduces

instrument cost by eliminating need
for each transmitter to have its own
display. The buttons on the display
tool also provide a means to zero
and span the units without reaching
into the transmitter.
Removeable Terminal Block ease

installation by allowing for the wiring
to be done outside of the housing
where the installer has more room.
Simultaneous Current/Voltage
Output reduces inventory by
combining 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V and 4
to 20 mA models into one model.
Both outputs are always present
allowing field selection of which
signal to use and the other signal
can be used for local diagnostic
without interrupting system.
55
Digital Push Button Zero and

Span. Reduces calibration time
significantly over other transmitters
that utilize potentiometers. Lowers
maintenance time and costs.
Field Upgradable LCD. No need to

order two separate transmitters.
Simply stock a transmitter and
display and you can satisfy any
customers requests. Simply remove
cover and snap the LCD onto the
board.
056_Layout 1 7/15/14 11:36 AM Page 56
PRESSURE
Series
AT2
MS
ATEX Approved Magnesense Differential

Pressure Transmitter
Series MS in Flame-Proof ATEX Enclosure
2
[50.00]
1/2
[12.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
6-1/4
[160.00]
5-3/8
[136.00]
6-1/4
[160.00]
7-1/8
[182.00]
8-1/8
[205.00]
3/8
[8.00]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1/8
NPT
The ATEX Approved Series AT2MS Magnesense Differential Pressure

Transmitter is an extremely versatile transmitter for monitoring pressure and air velocity
in hazardous areas. This transmitter is loaded with features such as: field selectable
English or metric ranges, field upgradeable LCD display, adjustable dampening of output
signal and the ability to select a square root output for use with pitot tubes and other
similar flow sensors. Along with these features, the magnetic sensing technology provides
exceptional long term performance and enables the Magnesense transmitter to be the
solution for a myriad of pressure and flow applications. Flame-proof ATEX enclosures are
available in aluminum and can include a glass window for viewing process on the LCD.
with instrument).
Make sure after cabling to close tight the cover and cable gland, in order to keep
IP66 rating (IP65 with option OPV, overpressure relief valve).
-0
-1
-2
-3
-6
-7
-8
-9
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Range
Mounting
Display
Housing
Cover
-LCD
-A
B
O
Process
Connection
Overpressure
Plug
1
2
X
OPV
Tag
56
1
[24.00]
T2
Bidirectional, 4 to 20 mA
Positive range, 4 to 20 mA
Bidirectional, 0 to 10 VDC
Positive range, 0 to 10 VDC
Bidirectional, 0 to 5 VDC
Positive range, 0 to 5 VDC
Bidirectional, 0 to 5 VDC, 12 volt in
Positive range, 0 to 5 VDC, 12 volt in
1, 2, 5 in w.c. (200, 500, 1000 Pa)
.1, .25, .5 in w.c. (25, 50, 100 Pa)
10 in w.c. (2 kPa)
15 in w.c. (3 kPa)
25 in w.c. (5 kPa)
Wall
With LCD
Aluminum
Blind
Glass top cover
Standard without overpressure relief
valve
Overpressure relief valve Material
same as ports
2-1/2
[65.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
compatible gases.
Accuracy: MS-X21: 0.5 in w.c. & 0.25
in w.c.: 1%; 0.1 in w.c.: 2%; 100 Pa
& 50 Pa: 1%; 25 Pa: 2%. MS-X11: 5
in w.c. & 2 in w.c.: 1%; 1 in w.c.: 2%;
1250 Pa & 500 Pa: 1%; 250 Pa: 2%
(@ standard conditions).
to 66C); Case: -58 to 140F (-50 to
60C) (Note: Product temperature
limits differ from case).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi max.,
operation; 10 psi, burst.
(2-wire); 17 to 36 VDC or isolated 21.6
to 33 VAC (3-wire).
AT2MS
Series
Output
5-1/4
[134.00]
1-5/8
[40.00]
5/8
[15.00]
1/8
NPT
Output Signals: 4 to 20 mA (2-wire); 0

to 5 V, 0 to 10 V (3-wire).
Response Time: Field adjustable 0.5
to 15 s time constant. Provides a 95%
response time of 1.5 to 45 seconds.
Zero & Span Adjustments: Digital
push button. In safe zone only.
Loop Resistance: Current output: 0 to
1250 max.; Voltage output: min. load
resistance 1 k .
Display: 4 digit LCD.
Electrical Wiring: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire:
European style terminal block for 16 to
26 AWG. 0 to 10 V, 3-wire: European
style terminal block 16 to 22 AWG.
vertical position.
Enclosure Rating: 4X IP66, IP65 with
option OPV overpressure relief valve.
RAL7038.
presence of acetylene it is necessary to
use SS.
Weight: 11 lb (5 kg).
10ATEX1096.
II2
057_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:58 AM Page 57
PRESSURE
Series
DM-2000
Same Size as Standard Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage

HIGH PRESSURE PORT
1-1/4
[31.75]
Differential PressureTransmitters
LOW PRESSURE PORT

7/16
[11.11]
4-3/4
[120.65]
17/32
[13.50]
DM-2000-LCD
1-11/16
[42.86]
DM-2100-LCD
The Dwyer Series DM-2000 Differential Pressure Transmitter senses the pressure
of air and compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. The DM-2000
enclosure is specifically designed to mount in the same diameter cutout as a standard
Magnehelic gage. A wide range of models are available factory calibrated to specific
ranges.
Pressure connections are inherent to the glass filled plastic molded enclosure making
installation quick and easy. Digital push-button zero simplifies calibration over typical turnpotentiometers. An optional 3.5 digit LCD shows process and engineering units. A single
push button allows field selection of 4 to 6 engineering units depending on range.
APPLICATIONS
Differential pressure across filters
Fan control
Static pressures in ducts or buildings
Model
DM-2001-LCD
DM-2002-LCD
DM-2003-LCD
DM-2004-LCD
DM-2005-LCD
DM-2006-LCD
DM-2007-LCD
DM-2012-LCD
DM-2013-LCD
DM-2019-LCD
Range
Pa
.100 in w.c.
24.9
.250 in w.c.
62.2
.500 in w.c.
124.3
1.000 in w.c.
249
2.00 in w.c.
497
3.00 in w.c.
746
5.00 in w.c.
1243
.250-0-.250 in w.c. 62.2-0-62.2
.500-0-.500 in w.c. 124.3-0-124.3
-0.05-0-.200 in w.c. 49.8
mm wc
2.54
6.35
12.70
25.4
50.8
76.2
127-0
3.65-0-6.35
12.70-0-12.70
5.08
mBar
.249
.622
1.243
2.49
4.97
7.46
12.43
.622-0-.622
1.243-0-1.243
.498
kPa
.124
.249
.497
.746
1.243
5/32
[3.97]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1% FS at 70F.
Thermal Effect: 0.055% FS/F (0.099% F.S./C).
Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2 wire).
Zero and Span Adjustments: Digital push-button zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1250 maximum.
Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block.
Display: 3.5 digit LCD, 0.7 H.
Process Connections: 1/8 ID tubing.
Weight: 4.8 oz (136 g).
psi
.108
.180
OPTIONS
Example: DM-2002-LCD-NIST
Example:DM-2002-LCD-FC
For white overlay change -20 to -21.
Example: DM-2102-LCD
ACCESSORIES
A-299, Surface Mounting Bracket
A-302F-A, 303 SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange. For 3/16 ID rubber or plastic tubing. 4
insertion depth. Includes mounting screws
A-320-A, Instrument Enclosure
57
058_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:57 AM Page 58
PRESSURE
Series
ISDP
Intrinsically Safe Differential

For Hazardous Zone Pressure and Flow Applications
4-23/32
[120]
4-9/64
[105.17]
25/32
[21.18]
3-7/16
[87.12]
1-15/16
[48.97]
2-31/32
[75.39]
BRACKETS
ARE OPTIONAL
4-23/32
[120]
5-7/32
[132.54]
1-5/16
[33]
1-17/32
[38.61]
1-45/64
[43.18]
45/64
[17.78]
4X 3/16 [4.76] CLEARANCE

HOLES FOR MOUNTING
Shown with Optional A-438 Mounting Bracket
MOUNTING HOLE
PATTERN
1-5/32
[29.59]
The ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter provides a 4-20 mA process output, a

robust NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure, plus a large LCD display that can be programmed to
read in pressure, velocity or flow. The ISDP offers simplified programming via a Menu
key that enables the user to select: security level; English or Metric engineering units;
pressure, velocity or flow operation, K-factor for use with various Pitot tubes and flow
sensors, circular or rectangular duct size for volumetric flow operation, plus many more.
The Series ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter is powered on its two wire loop with
10-35 VDC via its integral M-12 four pin male connector. The ISDP provides a 0.5% fullscale accuracy on ranges from 0.25 in w.c. to 100 in w.c. as well as bi-directional models up
to 10 in w.c. These features make the Series ISDP Differential Pressure Transmitter the
ideal instrument for monitoring pressures or air flows in hazardous zones having a Class
I Div. I Groups A, B, C, D; Class II Div. I Groups E, F, G; Class III Div. I ratings.
Model
ISDP-002
ISDP-004
ISDP-006
ISDP-007
ISDP-008
ISDP-009
ISDP-010
ISDP-012
ISDP-014
ISDP-015
ISDP-016
ISDP-017
Range
0 - 0.25 inw.c.
0 - 1 inw.c.
0 - 5 inw.c.
0 - 10 inw.c.
0 - 25 inw.c.
0 - 50 inw.c.
0 - 100 inw.c.
-0.25 / +0.25 inw.c.
-1.0 / +1.0 inw.c.
-2.5 / +2.5 inw.c.
-5.0 / +5.0 inw.c.
-10 / +10 inw.c.
ACCESSORIES
A-231, 16 (5 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M-12 Connection
A-486, 4.9 (1 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M-12 Connection
A-487, 9.8 (3 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M-12 Connection
A-488, 33 (10 m) Shielded Cable with 4 Pin Female M-12 Connection
A-295, Female 4 Pin M-12 to Cable Gland Connector
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
A-438, Surface Mounting Brackets
3-17/64
[83]
4-1/8
[105]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-corrosive gases.
Wetted Materials: Ranges 5 and greater: glass, PVC, silicon, alumina ceramic,
epoxy, RTV, gold, aluminum, stainless steel and nickel; Ranges 1 and lower:
stainless steel, silicone, gold and ceramic.
Housing Materials: Aluminum, glass.
Accuracy: 0.5% at 77F (25C) including hysteresis and repeatability (after 1
hour warm-up).
5 psi; 100: 9 psi.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
Response Time: 250 ms (damping set to 1).
Display: 4 digit LCD 0.6 H.
Electrical Connections: M-12 4 PIN Connector.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount unit in vertical plane.
Agency Approvals: CE: CENELEC EN 61326/55024: 2003; IEC 61000-4-2/3/4/6:
2001/2006/2004/2005; CENELEC EN 55011: 2006; 2004/108/EC EMC Directive.
FM Intrinsically Safe CLI Div I GR: A, B,C, D; CLII Div I GR: E, F, G; CLIII Div I.
OPTION
Example: ISDP-004-NIST
Example:ISDP-004-FC
58
059_Layout 1 7/29/14 11:56 AM Page 59
Intrinsically Safe Differential Pressure

Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
608
Ranges Down to 0.1 in w.c., FM Approved, NEMA 4X
3-1/4
[82.55]
4-1/2
[107.95]
5-1/32
[127.79]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2 NPT
TYP 2
PLACES
2-11/16
[68.26]
3
[76.20]
The Series 608 Differential Pressure Transmitters convert positive, negative

(vacuum), or differential pressures of clean, dry air or other non-conductive, non-corrosive
gases into a standard two wire, 4-20 mA output signal. The use of an ultra thin silicon
diaphragm enables precision measurement of differential pressures as low as 0.1 in of w.c.
while withstanding high static working pressures up to 100 psig (6.89 bar). The Series 608
transmitters are FM approved intrinsically safe for use in the specified hazardous locations
when used with an approved intrinsic safety barrier. The rugged NEMA 4X (IP66),
stainless steel housing makes this transmitter ideal for use in industrial and process plant
environments.
APPLICATIONS
Lab fume hood control
Clean room applications
Flow measurements and control
Filter monitoring
Furnace draft measurement
Process control
Model
608-02
608-03
608-04
608-05
608-06
608-07
608-01B
608-13B*
608-04B
Range (in w.c.)

0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-5.0
0-10.0
0-25.0
0.25-0-0.25
1.0-0-1.0
2.0-0-2.0
*Models have a 0.25% F.S. accuracy.
1/4 NPT
TYP 2
PLACES
5/8
[15.88]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean/dry air and compatible, combustible gases. (see Agency Approvals
for FM ratings).
Accuracy: 0.5% or 0.25% full scale.
Stability: 0.5% FS/year.
Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.89 bar); 15 psid (1.03 bar).
Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 160F (-18 to 71C).
Thermal Effect: 0.5% Accuracy: 0.02% FS/F; 0.25% Accuracy: 0.01% FS/F.
Power Requirements: 12 to 36 VDC (2-wire).
Output Signal: 4-20 mA DC.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Potentiometers for zero and span.
Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1045 max.
Current Consumption: 4-20 mA.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal: Two 1/2 female NPT conduit.
Process Connections: Two 1/4 female NPT.
Agency Approvals: FM approved intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Div. 1,
Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1 when wired with
approved intrinsically safe barrier. Entity parameters: Vmax= 36 VDC; Imax= 250 mA;
CI=12 nF; LI=0 mH.
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, Intrinsically Safe Galvanic Isolator
MTL7706, Intrinsically Safe Zener Barrier
OPTION

59
1/4
[6.35]
060_Layout 1 7/15/14 11:29 AM Page 60
PRESSURE
Series
3100
Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Transmitter
HART , Push Button Configuration, Rangeability (100:1)
3-25/64
[86.00]
4-13/32
[112.00]
7-37/64
[192.50]
Scan here
to watch
product video
2-1/8
[54.00]
3100D
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
2X DRAIN
VALVE
1-21/32
[42.00]
1/4 NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
4X 7/16-20
UNF FOR MOUNTING
3100D
3-25/64
[86.00]
4-13/32
[112.00]
OPTIONAL
LCD SCREEN 7-31/32
[202.50]
1-5/8
[41.30]
PROCESS
CONNECTIONS
Scan here
to watch
product video
2-1/8
[54.00]
3100MP
The Mercoid Series 3100 Smart Pressure Transmitter is a microprocessor-based

high performance transmitter, which has flexible pressure calibration, push button
configuration, and programmable using HART Communication. The Series 3100 is capable
of being configured for differential pressure or level applications with the zero and span
buttons. A field calibrator is not required for configuration. The transmitter software
compensates for thermal effects, improving performance. EEPROM stores configuration
settings and stores sensor correction coefficients in the event of shutdowns or power loss.
The Series 3100 is FM or ATEX approved for use in hazardous (classified) locations. The
100:1 rangeability allows the smart transmitter to be configured to fit any application.
FEATURES
Configurable using zero/span buttons (no calibrator required)
Rangeability (100:1)
High accuracy (0.075%)
Automatic sensor temperature compensation
Fail-mode process function
Selectable engineering units
APPLICATIONS
Flow measurement
Level monitoring
Filter or pump differential pressure
Critical process monitoring
Model
Calibrated Span (Min. to Max.)
0.6 to 30 in w.c. 0.15 to 7.5 kPa
3100D-2-FM-1-1
1.5 to 150 in w.c. 0.373 to 37.3 kPa
3100D-3-FM-1-1
7.5 to 750 in w.c. 1.865 to 186.5 kPa
3100D-4-FM-1-1
1 to 100 psi
6.9 to 690 kPa
3100D-5-FM-1-1
3 to 300 psi
20.68 to 2068 kPa
3100D-6-FM-1-1
3100D-2-FM-1-1-LCD 0.6 to 30 in w.c. 0.15 to 7.5 kPa
6.9 to 690 kPa
3100D-5-FM-1-1-LCD 1 to 100 psi
20.68 to 2068 kPa
3100D-6-FM-1-1-LCD 3 to 300 psi
Consult factory for custom calibration.
Lower Range Limit

-30 in w.c. -7.5 kPa
-150 in w.c. -37.3 kPa
-750 in w.c. -186.5 kPa
-100 psi
-690 kPa
-300 psi
-2068 kPa
-30 in w.c. -7.5 kPa
-150 in w.c. -37.3 kPa
-750 in w.c. -186.5 kPa
-100 psi
-690 kPa
-300 psi
-2068 kPa
Model
Calibrated Span (Min. to Max.)
0.6 to 30 in w.c. 0.15 to 7.5 kPa
3100MP-2-FM-1-1
1.5 to 150 in w.c. 0.373 to 37.3 kPa
3100MP-3-FM-1-1
7.5 to 750 in w.c. 1.865 to 186.5 kPa
3100MP-4-FM-1-1
1 to 100 psi
3100MP-5-FM-1-1
6.9 to 690 kPa
3 to 300 psi
3100MP-6-FM-1-1
20.68 to 2068 kPa
3100MP-2-FM-1-1-LCD 0.6 to 30 in w.c. 0.15 to 7.5 kPa
3100MP-5-FM-1-1-LCD 1 to 100 psi
6.9 to 690 kPa
3100MP-6-FM-1-1-LCD 3 to 300 psi
20.68 to 2068 kPa
Consult factory for custom calibration.
Lower Range Limit

-30 in w.c. -7.5 kPa
-150 in w.c. -37.3 kPa
-750 in w.c. -186.5 kPa
-100 psi
-690 kPa
-300 psi
-2068 kPa
-30 in w.c. -7.5 kPa
-150 in w.c. -37.3 kPa
-750 in w.c. -186.5 kPa
-100 psi
-690 kPa
-300 psi
-2068 kPa
4x 7/16-20 UNF
FOR MOUNTING
3100MP
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, steam,
liquids or vapors.
Wetted Materials:316L SS.
Accuracy:0.075% FS (@ 20C).
Rangeability:100:1 turn down.
Stability:0.125% FSO/yr.
Temperature Limits:
Process:-40 to 248F (-40 to 120C);
Ambient: Without LCD:-40 to 185F
(-40 to 85C);
With LCD:-22 to 176F(-30 to 80C).
Pressure Limits: Max. pressure:
Range:-14.5 to 2000 psi; Burst
pressure:10000 psi.
Thermal Effect: 0.125% span/32C.
Power Requirements: 11.9 to 45
VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA / HART
Communication.
Upper Range Limit

30 in w.c. 7.5 kPa
150 in w.c. 37.3 kPa
750 in w.c. 186.5 kPa
100 psi
690 kPa
300 psi
2068 kPa
30 in w.c. 7.5 kPa
150 in w.c. 37.3 kPa
750 in w.c. 186.5 kPa
100 psi
690 kPa
300 psi
2068 kPa
Upper Range Limit
30 in w.c. 7.5 kPa
150 in w.c. 37.3 kPa
750 in w.c. 186.5 kPa
100 psi
690 kPa
300 psi
2068 kPa
30 in w.c. 7.5 kPa
150 in w.c. 37.3 kPa
750 in w.c. 186.5 kPa
100 psi
690 kPa
300 psi
2068 kPa
Response Time: 0.12 seconds.

Damping Time: 0.25 to 60 seconds.
Loop Resistance:
Operation:0 to 1500 ;
HART Communication:250 to 500
.
Electrical Connection: Two 1/2
female NPTconduit, screw terminal.
Process Connection: 1/4female
NPT.
Display:Optional 5 digit LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA4X (IP66)
and explosion-proof for Class I, Div I,
Groups A, B, C and D.
Agency Approvals: CE, FM, ATEX
option available (consult factory).
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HART is a registered trademark of Hart Communication Foundation.
60
061_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:57 AM Page 61
OrderingChart
3100D-2-FM-3-1-LECS2A105S2-05-10-LCD
3100D Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Transmitter
3100MP Multiplanar Explosion-Proof Differential Pressure Transmitter
0 to 6 in w.c.
0 to 30 in w.c.
0 to 150 in w.c.
0 to 750 in w.c.
0 to 100 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 1000 psi
FM approved
ATEXapproved
NEMA 4X (IP66) [Only available with 316 SS housing]
1/4 female NPT
Diaphragm seal
1/2 female NPT
2 extended diaphragm seals capillary type
1 extended diaphragm seal direct mount high side
1 extended diaphragm seal capillary type high side
1 extended diaphragm seal capillary type low side
2 flush diaphragm seals capillary type
1 flush diaphragm seal direct mount high side
1 flush diaphragm seal capillary type high side
1 flush diaphragm seal capillary type low side
2 (50 mm) 316L SS
3 (80 mm) 316L SS
ANSI class 150#
ANSI class 300#
DIN PN 10/16
DINPN 25/40
JIS 10 K
JIS 20 K
No extension [standard for flush mount]
2 extension
4 extension
6 extension
316L SS diaphragm
PTFE and 316L SS diaphragm
Hastelloy C-276 diaphragm
Tantallum diaphragm
Silicon oil (-40 to 400F)
0 to 20 feet
3100D 2 FM
3 1 LEC S2 A1 05 S 2 05 10 LCD
3100D
3100MP
Range
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Approval
FM
ATEX
WP
Process Connection
1
3
Electrical Connection
1
Diaphragm Seal Type
LEC
LED
LEH
LEL
LFC
LFD
LFH
LFL
MountingFlange
S2
S3
Mounting Flange
A1
Rating
A2
D1
D2
J1
J2
Extension Length
00
05
10
15
Diaphragm Material
S
P
H
T
Fill Fluid
2
Capillary Length
XX
HighSide
Capillary Length
XX
LowSide
Options
LCD
SSH
NIST
CC
PRESSURE
Example
Series
0 to 20 feet
5 digit LCD
316 SS housing (Only available with WP approval)
NIST calibration
Custom calibration
Custom Calibration Values

Primary Units
Upper Range Limit
Lower RangeLimit
Output
Damping Time
Display Mode
Display Units
Engineering Units*
in H20, ft H20, mm H20, in Hg, psig, g/cm2 , kg/cm2, MPa, Pa, kPa, bar, mbar, Torr, Atm, mm Hg
20 mA value
4 mA value
Linear or square root
0 to 60 seconds
Unit, %, mA, rotate
Primary unit or Engineering unit
Volumetric Flow Units
US gal/s, US gpm, US gal/hr, US gpd, imp gal/s, imp gpm, imp gal/hr, imp gpd, l/s, l/min, l/hour, ft/s, m/s, metric gal/day, metric l/day, ft3/s,
ft3/min, ft3/h, ft3/day, m3/s, m3/min, m3/hr, m3/day, normal l/hr, normal m3/hr, standard ft3/min, barrels/s, barrels/min, barrels/hr, barrels/day
Mass Flow Units
g/s, g/min, g/hr, kg/s, kg/min, kg/hr, kg/day, metric ton/min, metric ton/hour, metric ton/day, lb/s, lb/min, lb/hr, lb/day, short ton/min, short ton/hr,
short ton/day, long ton/hr, long ton/day
Volume Units
gallons, liters, imp gallons, m3, barrels, bushels, yd3, ft3, in3, bbl liq, normal cubic meter, normal liter, standard cubic feet, hectoliters
Engr. Upper Range Limit* Engr. upper value
Engr. Lower Range Limit* Engr. lower value
Engr Function*
Linear or square root
*Engineering Units, Engr. Upper Range Limit, Engr. Lower Range Limit and Engr. Function values are only required if engineering unit is selected.
ACCESSORIES
A-630, Stainless steel angle type bracket with SSbolts
A-631, Stainless steel flat type bracket with SSbolts
BBV-1F, Flanged 3-valve block manifold
BBV-22F, Flanged 5-valve block manifold
DevCom2000, HART Communication Protocol Software
61
062_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 62
PRESSURE
Series
636D
Fixed Range Differential Pressure Transmitter

Explosion-proof, 0.5% Accuracy
3/4-14 NPT FEMALE
CONDUIT THREAD
#22 AWG SHIELDED CABLE

24 INCHES LONG
1-1/4 HEX
1-1/8
[28.5]
1-3/4
[44.45]
SS TAG
1 HEX TYPICAL
4-5/32
[105.4]
1-5/16
[33.02]
4-1/8
[104.7]
1/2-14 NPT FEMALE

PROCESS CONNECTION
The Series 636D Differential Pressure Transmitter can be used for measuring
pressures of liquids, gases, and vapors. All available ranges have an excellent 0.5% F.S.
accuracy with a 4 to 20 mA output standard or optional 1 to 5 VDC output. The NEMA 4
(IP56) housing is an all 316 welded construction that is designed to withstand the harshest
environmental conditions. With all 316L wetted materials this transmitter is compatible
with most media. These units are CSA approved explosion-proof for use in the specified
hazardous locations and meet NACE standards for off-shore applications.
Model
4-20 mA Out
636D-0
636D-1
636D-2
636D-3
636D-4
636D-5
636D-6
636D-7
636D-8
Range
0-6 psid
0-15 psid
0-30 psid
0-60 psid
0-100 psid
0-150 psid
0-200 psid
0-300 psid
0-500 psid
Model
1-5 VDC Out
636D-0-LP
636D-1-LP
636D-2-LP
636D-3-LP
636D-4-LP
636D-5-LP
636D-6-LP
636D-7-LP
636D-8-LP
Range
0-6 psid
0-15 psid
0-30 psid
0-60 psid
0-100 psid
0-150 psid
0-200 psid
0-300 psid
0-500 psid
OPTION
Series
655A
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, liquids, or
vapors.
Wetted Materials: Types 316L SS.
Accuracy: BFSL: 0.5% FS (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Stability: 1.0 FS/yr.
Pressure Limits: 3 x full-scale
differential pressure; Burst: 2500 psig.
Temperature Limits: Ambient
operating: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process interface: -40 to 212F (-40 to
100C); Storage: -40 to 212F (-40 to
100C).
-20 to 160F (-29 to 71C).
Thermal Effect: 2% FS/50F
(reference to 77F).
for 4 to 20 mA outputs; 8 to 14 VDC for
1 to 5 VDC outputs, both with reverse
polarity protection.
1-3/4
[44.45]
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC or 1 to
5 VDC.
Zero and Span Adjustment: Fixed.
Loop Resistance: 900 max @ 30
VDC for current outputs. For voltage
outputs, minimum lead resistance 50k
ohms.
Current Consumption: 4 to 20 mA for
current output models; 3 mA for voltage
output models.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft, 22 AWG
cable; 3/4 female NPT conduit.
Process Connections: Two 1/2
female NPT.
Mounting Orientation: 0.05 psi/90
rotation from horizontal.
Agency Approvals: CSA approved
explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1,
Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Groups
E, F, and G; Class III.
316 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter

Ranges Down to 3 in w.c., 6-Point N.I.S.T. Certificate Included
4 WIRE CABLE
1/4 FEMALE
NPT
1-1/4
[31.75]
4-3/4
[120.65]
2
[50.80]
2-35/64
[64.77] 655A-XX-C MODELS
Series 655A Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for high static/low DP
applications designed especially for the End Users and OEMs where extreme overpressure
and high performance of 0.25% accuracy and stability are required at ranges down to 3 in
w.c. Each unit includes a 6-point NIST certificate of calibration which demonstrates the
units high level of performance.
Model
Range
Range
Model
655A-00-P
0 to 3 in w.c.
0 to 3 in w.c.
655A-00-C
655A-01-P
0 to 5 in w.c.
0 to 5 in w.c.
655A-01-C
655A-02-P
0 to 8 in w.c.
0 to 8 in w.c.
655A-02-C
655A-03-P
0 to 10 in w.c.
0 to 10 in w.c.
655A-03-C
655A-04-P
0 to 15 in w.c.
0 to 15 in w.c.
655A-04-C
655A-05-P
0 to 20 in w.c.
0 to 20 in w.c.
655A-05-C
655A-06-P
0 to 1 psid
0 to 1 psid
655A-06-C
655A-07-P
0 to 2 psid
0 to 2 psid
655A-07-C
Note: Change C to P for optional 6 pin male connection.
ACCESSORY
A-232, Connection with cable (3), For 6 pin connection models
62
A-232 CONNECTOR END

OPPOSITE END IS SIX WIRES
COLORS: RED, BLACK, GREEN,
WHITE, BLUE AND BROWN
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gasses or liquids.
Wetted Materials: 316L SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% BFSL, RSS
(combined effect of non-linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability).
(-29 to 93C).
0 to 170F (-17.8 to 76.7C).
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (68.95 bar)
continuous; 3000 psi (206.8 bar) burst.
Thermal Effects: 1.5% FS oven
comp. temperature range.
655A-XX-P MODELS
Static Pressure Effects: on zero:

0.25% FSO per 1000 psi; on span:
0.5% of reading per 1000 psi.
Response Time: < 10 mS.
Loop Resistance: 1500 .
Electrical Connections: Cable exit
with 24 cable; optional 6-pin
connector.
female.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Mount in
vertical position: zero shifts up to
1 in w.c. depending on orientation.
063_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 63
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
629
0.5% Accuracy, NEMA 4X (IP66) Enclosure

43/64 [17.07] 1-11/32
[34.13]
OPTIONAL LIQUID TIGHT FITTING

CORD DIAMETER RANGE:
.200 TO .350 [5.06 TO 8.89]
1/4 NPT
1-5/8
[41.28]
5-25/32 [146.84]
1/4 NPT FEMALE FITTING
6-59/64 [175.82]
OPTIONAL 1/4 NPT MALE FITTING
The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors differential pressure of

air and compatible gases and liquids with 0.5% accuracy. The design employs dual pressure
sensors converting pressure changes into a standard 4 to 20 mA output signal for two wire
circuits. Small internal volume and minimum moving parts result in exceptional response
and reliability. Terminal block, zero and span adjustments are easily accessed under the
top cover. The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA
4X (IP66) construction.
APPLICATIONS
Monitor differential pressures across:
Flow elements
Heat exchangers
Filters
Pumps
Coils
Chiller
Standard
Model
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1
Range
(psid)
10
25
50
100
Pressure Limits
Working*
Over
Pressure (psi) Pressure (psi)
20
100
50
250
100
250
200
500
*Pressures exceeding the working pressure limit may cause a

calibration shift of up to 3% of full scale.
3-Way Valve Manifold Assembly

Pressure Limits
Working*
Range Pressure Over
Pressure (psi)
Model
(psid) (psi)
20
100
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 10
50
100
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 25
100
100
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 50
100
100
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 100
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
Wetted Materials: Without valve: 316, 316L SS. Additional wetted parts with 3way valve option: Buna-N, silicone grease, PTFE, brass 360, copper, reinforced
acetal copolymer.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis & repeatability).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 0 to 175F (-18 to 79C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02%/F (0.036%/C) includes zero & span.
Power Requirements: 13 to 30 VDC (2-wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1300 maximum for current output. For voltage outputs,
minimum load resistance: 2000 .
Electrical Connections: Terminal block; 1/2 female NPT conduit.
Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Weight: 10.1 oz (286 g).
OPTIONS
-LED, 4.5 Digit LED Display
ACCESSORIES
A-131A, 3-way brass manifold valve
641-LED, Field-upgradeable LED
A-155, Cable gland with 1/2 NPTmale
BBV-1B, Mini SS 3-valve block manifold
A-228, 12 SS flex hose
3-way valve assembly with

integral bleed screws
629 shown with optional Red LED

and cable gland.
63
3-9/32
[83.34]
064_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:59 AM Page 64
PRESSURE
Series
647

Ranges from 0 to 1 in w.c., 1.0% Accuracy, NEMA 4 (IP56) Enclosure, 2-Wire
5 [127.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1-1/16 [26.97] TYP
1-17/64
[32.15]
1-1/8
2-15/16
[28.58] 2-7/8 [74.63]
[73.03]
3-5/16
[84.15]
5-9/16
[141.30]
1/8 FEMALE NPT

HIGH PRESSURE CONNECTION
Model
647-0
647-1
647-2
647-3
647-4
Range
0 to 1 in w.c.
0 to 3 in w.c.
0 to 25 in w.c.
0 to 5 in w.c.
0 to 10 in w.c.
OPTION
Series
645
1/8 FEMALE NPT

LOW PRESSURE
CONNECTION
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids on both pressure and reference sides.
Wetted Materials: Brass, vinyl, glass-filled polyester, silicon, and fluorosilicone.
Accuracy: 1.0% FS.
Stability: 1.5% FS output/year.
Pressure Limits: Ranges 1 in w.c. to 5 psi: 20 psi, 15 psi range: 45 psi, 30 psi
range: 60 psi.
Thermal Effects: Zero: 0.05% FS/F, Span: 0.05% rdg/F.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Adjustable, 10%.
Loop Resistance: 400 @ 18 VDC, 600 @ 24 VDC, 1000 @ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminals, reverse polarity protected.
Process Connections: Two 1/8 female NPT.
Housing: Gasketed steel epoxy painted, NEMA 4 (IP56).
Monitor differential pressure in air/liquid flow systems, HVAC automation, pneumatic

systems and process control with the Series 647 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter.
Units are temperature compensated and provide a 4 to 20 mA output signal which can be
interfaced with chart recorders, data loggers and computerized monitoring and control
systems.

0.25% Accuracy, Quick Response, 2-Wire Design
1-63/64
[50.50]
1-1/2
[38.16]
7/8 KNOCKOUT INTENDED FOR

A 1/2 I.D. CONDUIT CONNECTION
2 5/32
[54.61]
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. MICHIGAN CITY, IN. U.S.A.
[4] 1/4 [6.35] LONG X 7/32 [5.56]

WIDE MOUNTING HOLES
1-3/32
[27.98]
1-15/16
[49.35]
3-1/16
[77.59]
1 [25.44]
3 1/64 [76.45]
HIGH PRESSURE PORT
Optional 3-Valve Manifold Assembly

Series 645 Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for use with
compatible gases and liquids which can be applied to both the pressure and reference ports.
Quick response capacitance sensor delivers a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to
differential pressure with .25% accuracy. The Series 645 transmitters are ideal for process
control, filter condition monitoring, refrigeration equipment, pump speed control, HVAC
equipment, and liquid level measurement. For ease of installation and maintenance, order
optional 3-valve manifold assembly. Bleed ports allow for total elimination of air in the line
and pressure cavities.
Model
645-0
645-1
645-2
645-3
645-4
645-5
645-6
Range
0 to 1 psid
0 to 2 psid
0 to 5 psid
0 to 10 psid
0 to 25 psid
0 to 50 psid
0 to 100 psid
OPTION
64
2-7/16
[62.01]
LOW
PRESSURE PORT
BLEED
SCREWS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids
on both pressure and reference sides.
Wetted Materials: 17-4 PH stainless
steel, 300 Series stainless steel,
fluoroelastomer and silicone O-rings
and bleed screw seals.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (RSS).
175F (-22 to 80C); Storage: -65 to
260F (-54 to 126C).
Pressure Limits: (High side) 1 to 5
psi: 20 x FS, 10 to 25 psi: 10 x FS, 50
psi: 5 x FS, 100 psi: 2.5 x FS; (low
side) 2.5 x FS.
Thermal Effects: (includes zero and
span) 0.02% FS/F, 30 to 150F (-1 to
65C).
1/4 NPT
BOTH SIDES
1
[25.44]

Adjustable, 1 mA, non-interactive.
Response Time: 30 to 50 ms.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1000.
Electrical Connection: Barrier strip
terminal block with conduit enclosure
and .875 (22 mm) diameter conduit
opening.
Process Connection: 1/4-18 female
NPT.
Housing: Stainless steel/aluminum,
NEMA 4X (IP56).
Weight: 14.4 oz (0.4 kg).
3-Valve Manifold Assembly
Manifold: Brass.
Valve Type: 90 on/off.
Process Connection: 1/4-18 female
NPT.
065_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:03 PM Page 65
PRESSURE
Series
WWDP
Selectable Ranges of Uni-Directional or Bi-Directional, Selectable Outputs

6 [152.4]
5-9/16 [141.29]
5-11/64 [131.37]
R7/64
[R2.78]
61/64
[24.21]
1/2 CONDUIT
OPENING
4-39/64
[117.08]
1-15/64
[31.35]
The Series WWDP Wet-to-Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter offers everything

in one package by having 30 field selectable variations in just 3 models. The WWDP
provides field selectable unidirectional and bidirectional pressure ranges, configurable 0
to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC, and 4 to 20 mA output. It also provides an auto-zero capability.
The field selectable port swap feature eliminates costly replumbing if the unit is improperly
installed or if the transmitter is simply replaced. An optional LCD display is available for
on-sight indication of line and differential pressure. The all cast aluminum housing is rated
NEMA 4 (IP56). These features make the WWDP transmitter an ideal instrument for
measuring the flow of various liquids and gases, pressure drop across filters, measurement
of liquid level or pressurized vessels, and for use in energy management and process control
systems.
Model
WWDP-1
WWDP-2
WWDP-3
Description
Selectable 5, 10, 25, 50 psid
Selectable 10, 20, 50,100 psid
Selectable 25, 50,125, 250 psid
Model
WWDP-1-LCD
WWDP-2-LCD
WWDP-3-LCD
Description
Selectable 5, 10, 25, 50 psid
Selectable 10, 20, 50,100 psid
Selectable 25, 50,125, 250 psid
Max. Working
Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
250 psi
Max. Working
Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
250 psi
OPTION
Series
631B
4-53/64
4
[101.6] [122.63]
2
[50.8]
11/32
[8.73]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible
with 17-4 PH stainless steel.
Accuracy: All pressure ranges have
1% full-scale accuracy except the
lowest selectable range of each unit is
2% full-scale.
Stability: 0.5% per year.
Temperature Limits: Compensated
temperature range: 32 to 130F
(0 to 54C); Operating temperature
range: -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: Max working
pressure: WWDP-1: 50 psi; WWDP-2:
100 psi; WWDP-3: 250 psi; Proof
pressure: 2.2X of full-scale; Burst
pressure: 40X of full-scale.
Thermal Effect: 2% FS/100F (50C)
includes zero and span.
Power Requirements: 12 to 30
VDC/18 to 28 VAC (reverse excitation
protected). Note: 4-20 mA output
cannot be powered with AC voltage.
Output Signal: Selectable 0 to 5, 0 to
10 and 1 to 5 VDC; 4 to 20 mA.
1-43/64
[42.47]
Zero & Span: Digital re zero button

(should be used when changing
ranges). Span can be adjusted by
changing between field selectable
ranges.
Response Time: 1 to 5 sec
(selectable).
Current Consumption: VDC power: 0
to 5, 1 to 5 VDC output 4 mA (typ);
0 to 10 VDC output 5 mA (typ); 4 to 20
mA output 20 mA max. Current
consumption will equal the transmitter
output in current mode. VAC power: 0
to 5, 1 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC output 40 mA
(typ).
Electrical Connections: 1/2 conduit.
NPT internal.
NEMA 4 (IP56).
Mounting Orientation: Vertical; mount
the pressure ports down (keeps debris
from building up inside the pressure
port).
Weight: 1.5 lb (680.4 g).
Capsuhelic Wet/Wet Differential

Ranges Down to 0.5 in w.c. with 500 psi Static Pressure Rating
3/4 [19.05]
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION [AIR OR GAS]
35 TYP
4-45/64
[119.46]
13/32
[10.32] TYP
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360, USA.
3-13/32
[86.52]
3/16
[4.76]
The Series 631B Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors differential pressure

of air and compatible gases and liquids with accuracy. The design employs converting
pressure changes into a standard 4 to 20 mA output signal for two wire circuits. Digital
push-button, zero and span adjustments are easily accessed on the front cover. The Series
631B Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66) construction.
Robust housing offers 500 psi static pressure rating on ranges down to 0.5 in w.c.
Model
631B-0
631B-1
631B-2
631B-3
631B-5
Range
0-0.5 in w.c.
0-1 in w.c.
0-2 in w.c.
0-5 in w.c.
0-25 in w.c.
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, add
suffix -NIST to model numbers.
Example: 631B-2-NIST
ACCESSORY
A-164, 16.4 (5 m) cable with M-12 4-pin female connector
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW

PRESSURE CONNECTION
[AIR OR GAS]
5
[127.00]
[4] #6-32 X 3/8 (9.53) DP

HOLE ON A 4-11/32 [110.33]
BOLT CIRCLE
1/4 FEMALE NPT HIGH
PRESSURE CONNECTION [LIQUID]
1/4 FEMALE NPT LOW
PRESSURE CONNECTION [LIQUID]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, silicone, 300
SS.
Accuracy: Transmitter output:2% FS
(includes linearity, hysteresis and
repeatability). Gage:3% of full-scale
at 70F (21.1C).
(-6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 500 psig
(-0.677 bar to 34.4 bar).
Thermal Effect: 0.025%/F
(0.045%/C) includes zero & span.
DWYER INST. INC

MICH CITY, IND
46360 U.S.A.

Response Time: 50 msec.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1250 max.
Electrical Connections: M-12 circular
4 pin connector.
NPT high and low pressure taps,
duplicated - one pair top for air and
gas, and one pair bottom for liquids.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Weight: 8 lb, 4 oz (3.74 kg).
65
1-9/16
[39.69]
1/8 NPT
2
[50.5]
066_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:00 AM Page 66
PRESSURE
Series
UGI
Utility Gage
1.5 Dials with Back Connection; Dual PSI/Bar x100 kPa Scales
1/8 NPT
1-39/64
[41.00]

Dial
1-21/32
[42.00]
63/64
[25.00]
The Series UGI Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 2.5%
accuracy. The UGI gages are designed with black steel housings. Wetted parts include a
brass socket and phosphor bronze tube. A wide offering of ranges are available from full
vacuum to 300 psi. The center back mounting and compact size makes this gage the perfect
choice for pneumatic air regulators.
Model
UGI-B10141N
UGI-B10341N
UGI-B10441N
UGI-B10541N
UGI-B10641N
UGI-B10741N
UGI-B11041N
Range
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
Series
UGJ
5/8
[16.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connector, phosphor bronze tube.
Housing: Black painted steel.
Lens: Polycarbonate.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Pressure Limit: FS range.
Size: 1.5 (40 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8 male NPT center back.
Utility Gage
2 Dials with Dual PSI/Bar x100 kPa Scales
2-3/64
[52.00]
2-1/64
[51.00]
1-23/32
[43.50]
UGJ Bottom
UGJ Back
The Series UGJ Utility Gages possess dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 2.5%
accuracy. The 2 UGJ gages are designed with black steel housings. Wetted parts include
a brass socket and phosphor bronze tube. A wide offering of ranges are available from full
vacuum to 300 psi.
Model
UGJ-C10121N
UGJ-C10321N
UGJ-C10421N
UGJ-C10521N
UGJ-C10621N
UGJ-C10721N
UGJ-C11021N
Range
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
Note: For back connect gages, change ending 21N to 41N.
66
1/8 NPT
1-1/8
[28.50]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connection, phosphor bronze tube.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Size: 2 (50 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8 NPT.
Weight: 3.8 oz (108 g).
25/64
[10.00]
067_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:00 AM Page 67
2.5 Utility Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Series
UGK
1.5% FS Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts, Dual PSI/Bar x100 kPa Scales
1/4 NPT
2-7/16
[62.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/4 NPT
13/32
[10.50]
1-5/32 13/16
[29.50] [20.50]
1-5/32
[29.50]
UGKBack
UGKBottom
The Series UGK Gages have dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 1.5% accuracy.
The Series UGK gages are designed with brass and phosphor bronze wetted parts, and
can withstand ambient temperatures up to 140F (60C). A wide variety of ranges are
available in this economical gage in either bottom or back connection configurations.
Model
UGK-D10122N
UGK-D10322N
UGK-D10422N
UGK-D10522N
UGK-D10622N
UGK-D10722N
UGK-D11022N
2-15/32
[62.50]
2-1/2
[63.50]

Dial
2-1/64
[51.00]
Range
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connector, phosphor bronze tube.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Pressure Limit: FS value.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Process Connections: 1/4 male NPT.
Weight: 5.1 oz (145 g) bottom, 5.5 oz (155 g) back.
Note: For back connect gages change ending 22N to 42N
Series
SG1
1.5 Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage

PRESSURE
RELIEF VENT
1/8 NPT
PRESSURE
RELIEF VENT
1-7/16
[36.60]
SG1 Bottom
SG1 Back
The Series SG1 Gages are perfect for applications where resistance to corrosion is
necessary. The stainless steel case and ring offer excellent protection from harsh processes.
The SG1 gages are an economical choice where ambient corrosion and vibration are a
concern. Gages are suitable for all fluids that are compatible with brass and bronze, and
are available with bottom or back connections.
Model
SG1-B10121N
SG1-B10321N
SG1-B10421N
SG1-B10521N
SG1-B10621N
SG1-B10721N
SG1-B11021N
Range
0 to 30 Hg
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
1-27/32
[47.00]
1-39/64
[41.00]
1-27/32
[47.00]
1/8 NPT
23/64
[9.00]
1-1/32
[26.00]
1-39/64
[41.00]
41/64
[16.10]
53/64
[21.00]
1-1/32
[26.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connector, bronze tube.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Pressure Limit: FSrange.
Size: 1.5 (40 mm).
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT.
Note: Change ending 21N to 41N for back connection
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG1.
ACCESSORY
A-445B, U-Bracket Mounting Kit for 1.5 Gage
67
068_Layout 1 7/15/14 11:54 AM Page 68
PRESSURE
Series
SG3
2.5% FS Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts, Dual PSI/Bar x100 kPa Scales
PRESSURE
RELIEF VENT
1/8 NPT
PRESSURE
RELIEF VENT

Dial
1-7/16
[36.60]
SG3 Bottom
1/8 NPT
1-1/32
[26.00]
SG3 Back
The Series SG3 Gages have dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 2.5% full-scale
accuracy. The Series SG3 gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316 SS wetted
parts for excellent chemical compatibility. These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from
full vacuum to 300 psi. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 140F (60C).
Bottom or back 1/8 NPT connection options available.
Model
Range
Model
SG3-B10121N
30 Hg to 0
SG3-B10621N
SG3-B10321N
0 to 30 psi
SG3-B10721N
SG3-B10421N
0 to 60 psi
SG3-B11021N
SG3-B10521N
0 to 100 psi
Note: Change ending 21N to 41N for back connection
Range
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
OPTION
Series
SGY
1-27/32
[47.00]
1-39/64
[41.00]
1-27/32
[47.00]
1-39/64
[41.00]
53/64
[21.00]
1-1/32
[26.00]
23/64
[9.00]
41/64
[16.10]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS tube, 316 SS connector.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Size: 1.5 (40 mm).
ACCESSORY
A-445B, U-Bracket Mounting Kit for 1.5 Gage

1/4 NPT
2-41/64
[67.00]
2-7/16
[62.00]
2-1/16
[52.50]
SGY Bottom
SGYBack with Accessory Pointers
The Series SGY Gages have dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 1.5% full-scale
accuracy. The Series SGY gages are designed with 304 SS housings and brass wetted parts
for excellent chemical compatibility. These gages cover a wide variety of ranges from full
vacuum to 1,000 psi and are available in both bottom or back connections. Series SGY gages
employ an easy-open breather plug on top, which allows liquid filled units to breathe,
relieving any built up internal pressures. Plug easily pops open and does not need to be
entirely removed or cut like a typical gages rubber plug grommet.
APPLICATIONS
Vacuums in pneumatic conveying lines
Positive pressure in compressed air headers
Model
SGY-D10122N
SGY-D10322N
SGY-D10422N
SGY-D10522N
SGY-D10622N
Range
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 160 psi
Model
SGY-D10722N
SGY-D11022N
SGY-D11122N
SGY-D11222N
Range
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
0 to 1000 psi
Note: To order with glycerin fill add - GF to the end of the model
For back connect, change ending from 22N to 42N
OPTION
68
1/4 NPT
25/64
[10.00]
1-5/32
[29.50]
2-41/64
[67.00]
31/32
[24.50]
2-7/16
[62.00]
63/64
[25.00]
1-13/64
[30.50]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass connection, bronze tube.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Weight: 4.9 oz (139 g) bottom, 5.8 oz (164 g) back. Add 2.8 oz (78 g) for fill.
ACCESSORIES
A-445D, U-Bracket Mounting Kit for 2.5 Gage
A-499R, Red Sliding Color Pointer
A-499Y, Yellow Sliding Color Pointer
A-499G, Green Sliding Color Pointer
069_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:08 PM Page 69
PRESSURE
Series
SGZ
1.5% FS Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts, Dual PSI/Bar x100 kPa Scales
1/4 NPT
2-41/64
[67.00]
2-41/64
[67.00]
2-7/16
[62.00]
1/4 NPT
25/64
[10.00]
31/32
[24.50]
1-5/32
[29.50]
SGZ Bottom
Range
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
63/64
[25.00]
SGZ Back with Accessory Pointers
The Series SGZ Gages have dual psi and bar (x100 kPa) scales with 1.5% full-scale
accuracy. The Series SGZ gages are designed with 304 SS housings and 316 SS wetted
parts for excellent chemical compatibility. These gages cover a wide variety of ranges in
either bottom or back connection configurations. Series SGZ gages employ an easy-open
breather plug on top, which allows liquid filled units to breathe, relieving any built up
internal pressures. Plug easily pops open and does not need to be entirely removed or cut
like a typical gages rubber plug grommet.
Model
SGZ-D10122N
SGZ-D10322N
SGZ-D10422N
SGZ-D10522N
1-13/64
[30.50]
Model
SGZ-D10622N
SGZ-D10722N
SGZ-D11022N
SGZ-D11122N
SGZ-D11222N
Range
0 to 160 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
0 to 1000 psi
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS Tube, 316 SS connector.
Housing: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
Weight: 4.9 oz (141 g) bottom, 5.8 oz (164 g) back. Add 3.7 oz (104 g) for glycerin
fill.
Note: To order with glycerin fill add - GF to the end of the model
For back connect, change ending from 22N to 42N
ACCESSORY
A-445D, U-Bracket Mounting Kit for 2.5 Gage
A-499R, Red Sliding Color Pointer
A-499Y, Yellow Sliding Color Pointer
A-499G, Green Sliding Color Pointer
OPTION
Series
SG5
Contractor Gage
Large, Easy-to-Read Dial, Internal Surge Suppressor
15/32
[12.00]
4-59/64
[125.00]
3-13/32
[86.50]
1/4
MALE NPT
The Series SG5 Contractor Gages are ideally manufactured for contractors because
of their large dial and compact design. Since the gages are lightweight and slim, they are
easy to transport. The large 4.5 scale makes them simple to read. The Series SG5 gages
possess psi scales with 1% full-scale accuracy. The gages are made with a stainless steel
housing and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand temperatures of -4 to 140F (-20 to
60C). These qualities make the SG5 series perfect for contractors and industrial
applications. A wide offering of ranges are available from full vacuum to 300 psi.
Model
SG5-G0122N
SG5-G0322N
SG5-G0422N
SG5-G0522N
SG5-G0622N
SG5-G0722N
SG5-G0822N
Ranges
30 Hg to 0
0 to 30 PSI
0 to 60 PSI
0 to 100 PSI
0 to 160 PSI
0 to 200 PSI
0 to 300 PSI
49/64
[19.50]
4-55/64
[123.50]
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
1-15/64
[31.50]
SPECIFICATIONS:
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Plastic.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Pressure Limits: Full scale range.
Size: 4.5 (115 mm).
Weight: 10.4 oz (295 g).
OPTION
69

Dial
2-1/16
[52.50]
2-7/16
[62.00]
070_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:02 AM Page 70
PRESSURE
Series
SGP
4 Stainless Steel Low Pressure

Schaeffer Gage
1.6% Full-Scale Accuracy, 316 & 316L SS Wetted Parts
1-57/64
[48.02]
4-23/64 [102.79]

Dial
31/64
[12.30]
21/32
[16.67]
3-15/16
[100.01]
51/64
[20.24]
1-25/64
[35.32]
1/2 NPT
6-15/64 [158.35]
The Series SGP Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.6% full-scale accuracy.
The Series SGP gages are designed with 304 stainless steel housings, a 316L SS chamber
and a 316 SS diaphragm for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C). Ranges
of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 in w.c. are available. Included is a micrometer
adjustable pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field.
Model
SGP-F8024N
SGP-F8124N
SGP-F8224N
SGP-F8324N
SGP-F8424N
SGP-F8524N
SGP-F8624N
Range
0-10 in w.c. (0-250 mm)
0-15 in w.c. (0-400 mm)
0-25 in w.c. (0-600 mm)
0-40 in w.c. (0-1000 mm)
0-60 in w.c. (0-1600 mm)
0-80 in w.c. (0-2000 mm)
0-100 in w.c. (0-2500 mm)
Series
SGO
23/32
[18.26]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber with 316 SS diaphragm.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1.6% full-scale.
Pressure Limit: 130% full-scale.
Temperature Limit:
Ambient: -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C);
Process: 248F (120C).
Size: 4 (100 mm).
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT.
OPTION
4 Stainless Steel Schaeffer Gage

1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, 316L SS & PTFE Wetted Parts
1-57/64
[48.02]
31/64
[12.30]
3-15/16
21/32 [100.01]
[16.67]
23/32
[18.26]
1-3/8
[34.93]
1/2 NPT
The Series SGO Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.6% full-scale accuracy.
The Series SGO gages are designed with 304 SS housing, a 316L SS chamber and PTFE
coated diaphragm for excellent chemical compatibility. Units can withstand ambient
temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process temperatures up to 248F (120C). Ranges
are available from full vacuum, compound to 300 psi. Included is a micrometer adjustable
pointer which allows for re-zeroing the gage in the field.
Model
SGO-F0124N
SGO-F0224N
SGO-F0324N
SGO-F0424N
SGO-F0524N
SGO-F0624N
SGO-F0724N
70
Range
30 Hg-0 (-100-0 kPa)
0-15 psi (0-100 kPa)
0-30 psi (0-200 kPa)
0-60 psi (0-400 kPa)
0-100 psi (0-700 kPa)
0-150 psi (0-1000 kPa)
0-200 psi (0-1400 kPa)
3-55/64
[98.03]
23/32
[18.26]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS chamber with PTFE protected steel diaphragm.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Pressure Limit: 130% full-scale.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C);
Process: 248F (120C).
Size: 4 (100 mm).
OPTION
071_Layout 1 7/29/14 11:55 AM Page 71
2.5 Low Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Series
LPG5
3-2-3% Full Scale Accuracy in a 2.5 Gage

1-49/64
[44.96]
55/64
[22.00]
2-19/32
[66.04]
2-19/32
[66.04]
35/64
[13.97]
The Series LPG5 Low Pressure Gages offer top of the line performance for pressure
applications from 10 in. w.c. to 10 psi. The LPG5 gages possess dual scales with 3-2-3% fullscale accuracy on a 2.5 dial. Units are made with a chrome plated steel housing and brass
wetted parts. Units can withstand temperatures of -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C). This series is
meant for the measurement of low pressures of gases and liquids and is ideal for air flow
indication, liquid level and draft measurement. Series LPG5 gages are available with either
a bottom or back connection option.
Model
LPG5-D8022N
LPG5-D8122N
LPG5-D8222N
LPG5-D8422N
LPG5-D8622N
LPG5-D8822N
Model
LPG5-D9922N
LPG5-D0022N
Range in w.c./kPa
0 to 10 (0 to 2.5 kPa)
0 to 15 (0 to 3.75 kPa)
0 to 35 (0 to 8.75 kPa)
0 to 60 (0 to 15 kPa)
0 to 100 (0 to 25 kPa)
0 to 200 (0 to 50 kPa)
Range psi/kPa
0 to 5 (0 to 35 kPa)
0 to 10 (0 to 70 kPa)
MALE NPT
CONNECTION [BRASS]
29/32
[23.00]
35/64
[13.97]
MALE NPT
CONNECTION [BRASS]
SPECIFICATIONS:
Housing: Chrome plated steel.
Accuracy: 3-2-3% FS.
Pressure Limits: Full scale range.
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
OPTION
Note: Change ending 22N to 42N for back connection option.
Series
LPG4
2.5 Low Pressure Gage

1.5% Full-Scale Accuracy in a 2.5 Gage
1.500
[38]
2.625
[67.7]
.550 SQUARE
[14.0]
[1/4 - 18NPT]
BOTTOM CONNECTED
Our Series LPG4 gages offer top of the line performance and accuracy for pressure and
vacuum applications up to and including 160 in w.c. The LPG4 is constructed from a single
beryllium-copper diaphragm affixed to a precision-machined brass plate. This innovative
design, together with a high-precision, milled-teeth brass movement and nickel-silver pinion
and bearing surface, provide the user with a top of the line low pressure instrument.
Model
LPG4-D7122N
LPG4-D7222N
LPG4-D7322N
LPG4-D7422N
LPG4-D7522N
LPG4-D7622N
LPG4-D7722N
LPG4-D7822N
LPG4-D7922N
LPG4-D8022N
LPG4-D8122N
LPG4-D8222N
Range
-10 to 0 in w.c. (-2.5 to 0 kPa)
-15 to 0 in w.c. (-4 to 0 kPa)
-25 to 0 in w.c. (-6 to 0 kPa)
-40 to 0 in w.c. (-10 to 0 kPa)
-60 to 0 in w.c. (-15 to 0 kPa)
-80 to 0 in w.c. (-20 to 0 kPa)
-100 to 0 in w.c. (-25 to 0 kPa)
-160 to 0 in w.c. (-40 to 0 kPa)
-235 to 0 in w.c. (-60 to 0 kPa)
0 to 10 in w.c. (0 to 2.5 kPa)
0 to 15 in w.c. (0 to 3.75 kPa)
0 to 25 in w.c. (0 to 6 kPa)
Model
LPG4-D8322N
LPG4-D8422N
LPG4-D8522N
LPG4-D8622N
LPG4-D8722N
LPG4-D8922N
LPG4-D9022N
LPG4-D9122N
LPG4-D9222N
LPG4-D9322N
LPG4-D9422N
LPG4-D9522N
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass and beryllium
copper.
Housing: Drawn steel, black finish.
Lens: Polycarbonate (removable).
Range
0 to 40 in w.c. (0 to 10 kPa)
0 to 60 in w.c. (0 to 15 kPa)
0 to 80 in w.c. (0 to 20 kPa)
0 to 100 in w.c. (0 to 25 kPa)
0 to 160 in w.c. (0 to 40 kPa)
-4 to 0 to 6 in w.c. (-1 to 0 to 1.5 kPa)
-6 to 0 to 10 in w.c. (-1.5 to 0 to 2.5 kPa)
-8 to 0 to 16 in w.c. (-2 to 0 to 4 kPa)
-30 to 0 to 50 in w.c. (-7.5 to 0 to 12.5 kPa)
-40 to 0 to 60 in w.c. (-10 to 0 to 15.0 kPa)
.850 [21.6]
Pressure Limit: 100% of range scale.

Temperature Limits:
Process: -40 to 160F (-40 to 70C);
Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
OPTION
71

Dial
MALE NPT
CONNECTION
[BRASS]
072_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:03 AM Page 72
PRESSURE
Series
SGX
&
SGF
2.5 Stainless Steel Low Pressure Gages

Brass or 316 SS Wetted Parts
2-45/64 [68.66]
1-45/64 [43.26]
13/32 [10.32]

Dial
2-27/64
[61.52]
1/4 NPT
SGF
SGX
The Series SGX/SGF Gages have dual English/metric scales with 1.6% full-scale
accuracy. The Series SGX/SGF gages are designed with 304 SS housing and brass or 316
SS wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149F (65C) and process
temperatures up to 212F (100C). Ranges of vacuum, compound and pressures to 235 in
w.c. are available. Included on the dial is a convenient zero adjustment screw which allows
the user to easily re-zero the needle.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: SGX: Brass; SGF:
316/316L SS.
Housing: 304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1.6% full-scale on positive
pressure ranges 15 in w.c. and greater;
2.5% full scale on all other ranges.
Pressure Limit: Full-scale value.
APPLICATIONS
Pneumatic
Draft measurement
Filter monitoring
Liquid level
Brass Gages
Model
SGX-D7122N
SGX-D7322N
SGX-D7522N
SGX-D7722N
SGX-D8022N
SGX-D8122N
SGX-D8222N
SGX-D8322N
SGX-D8422N
SGX-D8722N
SGX-D8922N
SGX-D9122N
SGX-D9722N
Range
-10-0 in w.c. (-250-0 mm)
-25-0 in w.c. (-600-0 mm)
-60-0 in w.c. (-1600-0 mm)
-100-0 in w.c. (-2500-0 mm)
0-10 in w.c. (0-250 mm)
0-15 in w.c. (0-400 mm)
0-25 in w.c. (0-600 mm)
0-40 in w.c. (0-1000 mm)
0-60 in w.c. (0-1600 mm)
0-160 in w.c. (0-4000 mm)
-4-0-6 in w.c. (-100-0-150 mm)
-8-0-16 in w.c. (-200-0-400 mm)
-80-0-160 in w.c. (-2000-0-4000 mm)
Series
TRI2
316SS Gages
Model
SGF-D7122N
SGF-D7322N
SGF-D7522N
SGF-D7722N
SGF-D8022N
SGF-D8122N
SGF-D8222N
SGF-D8322N
SGF-D8422N
SGF-D8622N
SGF-D8722N
Range
-10-0 in w.c. (-250-0 mm)
-25-0 in w.c. (-600-0 mm)
-60-0 in w.c. (-1600-0 mm)
-100-0 in w.c. (-2500-0 mm)
0-10 in w.c. (0-250 mm)
0-15 in w.c. (0-400 mm)
0-25 in w.c. (0-600 mm)
0-40 in w.c. (0-1000 mm)
0-60 in w.c. (0-1600 mm)
0-100 in w.c. (0-2500 mm)
0-160 in w.c. (0-4000 mm)
13/32 [10.32]
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C);
Process: 212F max. (100C max.).
Size: 2.5 (63 mm).
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code
NISTCAL-PG1.
Tridicator Gage
Combination Pressure/Temperature Gage
3.300 3.060
A
C
B
C
1.250
Model
TRI2-60-25E
TRI2-100-25E
TRI2-200-25E
TRI2-60-50
TRI2-100-50
TRI2-200-50
TRI2-60-50L
TRI2-200-50L
A
4-1/2
[114.3]
C
B
1-21/64 1
[33.74] [25.4]
5-15/64 3
[132.95] [76.2]
2-39/64
[66.78]
6-43/64 2-13/16 2-3/8

[169.47] [71.44] [60.33]
The Series TRI2 combines the value of an individual pressure gage and thermometer in
one instrument. These tridicators simplify installation which reduces time and saves money.
The moveable dial with blue pressure markings and red temperature markings make the
instrument easy to read. Pressure is indicated in both psi and kPa, while temperature is
measured in both Fahrenheit and Celsius. Series TRI2 comes in three different connection
options including lower mount, center back mount, and center back mount with extension
shank.
Range
Model
Male NPT Connection
TRI2-60-25E 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
1/4 back mount with
ext. shank
TRI2-100-25E 0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
1/4 back mount with
ext. shank
TRI2-200-25E 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
1/4 back mount with
ext. shank
0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
TRI2-60-50
1/2 back mount
TRI2-100-50 0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
1/2 back mount
TRI2-200-50 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
1/2 back mount
TRI2-60-50L 0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
1/2 bottom mount
TRI2-200-50L 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
1/2 bottom mount
72
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Wetted Materials: Brass connection
and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube.
Housing: Drawn steel, black finish.
Accuracy: Pressure 3-2-3%;
Temperature 1 scale division.
Temperature Range: All models: 80 to
290F (30 to 140C).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to

250F (-40 to 120C); Process: 80 to
290F (30 to 140C).
Pressure Limits: FS range.
Size: 3 (76 mm).
Process Connections: 1/2 male NPT
back or bottom, 1/4 male NPT back
connection.
Weight: 12.35 oz (350 g) center back
mount and lower mount; 14.11 oz (400
g) center back mount with extension
shank.
OPTIONS
For NISTtraceable pressure calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG1.
For NISTtraceable temperature calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TG.
073_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:03 AM Page 73
Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Series
7000
Panel Mount, 4-1/2 & 8-1/2 Dials, ASME Grades 2A & 3A

GRADE 2AACCURACY
[3] 7/32 [5.56] MOUNTING

HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
5-3/8 [136.53] BOLT CIRCLE
23/64
[9.13]
2-5/32
[54.76]
120
4-4/64
[117.87]
1-9/32
[32.54]
5-7/8
[149.23]
Model 7112 (4-1/2 Dial)

EQUALLY SPACED ON A 9-5/8
[244.48] BOLT CIRCLE
23/64
[9.13]
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE

CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK
2-5/32
[54.76]
1-13/32
[35.71]
120
8-29/32
2-1/32 [226.22]
[51.59]
10-3/16 [258.76]
Model 7312 (8-1/2 Dial)
4-1/2 Dial,
Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of FS)
Range (psig)
Model
30
7112-G030
60
7112-G060
100
7112-G100
200
7112-G200
300
7112-G300
600
7112-G600
1000
7112-GC010
8-1/2 Dial,
Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of FS)
Model
Range (psig)
7312-G060
60
7312-G100
100
7312-G200
200
7312-G300
300
7312-G600
600
OPTION
Example: 7112-G060-NIST.
ACCESSORIES
A-341, Brass adapter, 1/4 male NPT to G 1/2 A (per ISO 228/1) parallel thread 21/2 length
Note: Additional ranges and accuracy requirements are available. Please consult the
factory for details.
1-9/32
[32.54]
1/4 FEMALE NPT PRESSURE

CONNECTION TYP 2 PLACES
1 [25.40] SQUARE
CONNECTION BLOCK
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Inconel X-750 alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS connection
block.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case and clear acrylic cover.
Accuracy: Grade 2A (0.5% FS).
Pressure Limit: 150% of full-scale. Gage will maintain its specifications for
overpressures up to 150% max. range. Normal operation should be between 25%
and 75% of full-scale.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 180F (-53.9 to 82.2C).
Sizes: 4-1/2 dial face (114.3 mm), 8-1/2 dial face (215.9 mm), design conforms to
ASME B40.1.
Process Connections: Two 1/4 female NPT field-selectable back or bottom
connection.
Weight: 4-1/2 dial face: 16.3 oz (462.1 g); 8-1/2 dial face: 27.3 oz (773.9 g).
Standard Accessory: One 1/4 male NPT stainless steel plug.
Precision design ensures maintenance-free performance.

Solid front case combined with
rear blowout plug provides
highest level of operator safety.
Direct drive movement

-no cams, gears, or linkages.
Provides longer operating
life than standard "C"
Bourdon gages.
Precision balanced pointer

with reduced friction produces
higher responsiveness than
standard gage.
High impact plastic case and

lens allows gages to last through
the most demanding applications.
Design of small diameter tubing

wound in spiral/helical coil acts like
a liquid filled gage without the fill.
Center post bearing carrier

supports pointer shaft and coil.
Rear blowout hole covered

with label. This safety
enhancement directs an
overpressure surge or
spike away from operators.
Case and shock protection ribs help

prevent damage to Bourdon tube in
the event of severe shock.
Filter plug protects Bourdon tube from particulate

damage and reduces pressure surges.
73

Dial
1-13/32 2-1/32
[35.71] [51.59]
074_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:51 AM Page 74
PRESSURE
Series
7000B
Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gage

4-1/2 Turret Mount Gage, ASME Grades A & 2A
[3] 7/32 [5.57] MOUNTING
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON A
3-3/8 [85.73] BOLT CIRCLE

Dial
120
3-7/64
[78.98]
5-7/8
[149.23]
Series 7000B Spirahelic Direct Drive Pressure Gages with turret mount housings
feature a triple coil spiral/helical wound Bourdon tube to provide dependable service.
Bourdon tube design eliminates gears, springs, linkages and complex movements which
can wear and cause inaccuracy or early failure. Series 7000B gages come standard with a
dual-size 1/2 male NPT and 1/4 female NPT process connection.
Grade 2A Accuracy (1/2% of F.S.)
Model
Ranges (psig)
7112B-G030
30
7112B-G060
60
7112B-G100
100
7112B-G160
160
7112B-G200
200
7112B-G600
600
7112B-GC010
1000
7112B-GC030
3000
7112B-GC060
6000
7112B-GC100
10000
Grade A Accuracy (2%-1%-2%)

Model
Ranges (psig)
7100B-G060
60
7100B-G100
100
7100B-G200
200
7100B-G300
300
7100B-G600
600
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Grade A accuracy:
Inconel X-750 alloy Bourdon tube,
nickel plated brass connection block.
Grade 2A accuracy: Inconel X-750
alloy Bourdon tube, type 316L SS
connection block.
Housing: Black polycarbonate case
and clear acrylic cover.
Accuracy: Grade A (2%-1%-2%);
Grade 2A (0.5% FS).
DUAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 MALE NPT
1/4 FEMALE NPT
Pressure Limit: 150% of full-scale.

Gage will maintain its specifications for
overpressures up to 150% maximum
range. Normal operation should be
between 25% and 75% of full-scale.
Temperature Limits: -65 to 180F (53.9 to 82.2C).
Size: 4-1/2 (114.3 mm) dial face
Design conforms to ASME B40.1.
Process Connections: Dual size 1/2
male NPT X 1/4 female NPT, bottom
connections.
Weight: 18.2 oz (516 g).
OPTION
Example: 7100B-G060-NIST.
Inconel is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation
Series
765
Process Gage with Dampened Movement

0.5% Accuracy, Safety Blow-Out Back
RoHS
3-13/32
[86.36]
35/64
[13.97]
FILL
PLUG
5-53/64
[148.21]
5-3/32
[129.54]
1-45/64
[43.17]
The Series 765 Process Gage with Dampened Movement minimizes effects of
vibration without liquid filling. With this dampened movement the 765 gages are ideal for
use in any application where high pulsation or vibration exists. The 765 gages offer dual
scale range (psi/kPa) with 0.5% full-scale accuracy. They are designed with a Phenolic
safety-case and have a solid front with a blow-out back. Excellent chemical compatibility
is insured with the 316L SS socket and Bourdon tube. A wide offering of ranges are
available from full vacuum to 20,000 psi. The 765 process gage comes standard with
bottom 1/4 or 1/2 male NPT connections.
Model
Range
765
-01
-02
-03
-04
-05
-06
-07
-08
-09
-10
-11
Process
2N
Connection
4N
Additional
-FMR
Options
-SG45
For additional ranges contact factory.
74
4.5 Process Gage

30 Hg-0 vac (0 to -100 kPa)
0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
0 to 100 psi (0 to 700 kPa)
0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa)
0 to 200 psi (0 to 1400 kPa)
0 to 300 psi (0 to 2000 kPa)
0 to 400 psi (0 to 2800 kPa)
0 to 500 psi (0 to 3400 kPa)
0 to 600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa)
0 to 1000 psi (0 to 7000 kPa)
1/4 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
Flush mounted ring
Safety glass lens
3X 15/64 [6.10]
ON A 5-25/64 [136.92]
BOLT CIRCLE
2-21/32
[67.31]
4-3/32
[104.14]
MAX.
316 L SST 1/4 OR 1/2 NPT
SURGE SUPPRESSOR
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316L SS socket and Bourdon tube.
Housing: Phenolic plastic with safety blow-out back.
Accuracy: 0.5% ANSI/ASME Grade 2A.
Pressure Limit: 125% FS < 1500 psi, 115% FS for 2000 to 5000 psi, 110% FS >
10,000 psi.
Size: 4-1/2 (114.3 mm) dial face.
Process Connections: 1/4 or 1/2 NPT male.
Enclosure Rating: IP65 (NEMA 4).
Weight: 37 oz (1040 g).
Agency Approval: RoHS.
OPTION
075_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:04 AM Page 75
Brass Digital Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Model
BDG
0.5% FS Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts

1-3/8
[34.75]
2-43/64
[67.87]
15/32
[11.91]
7/8
[22.15]
The Model BDG-01 Brass Digital Pressure Gage measures gas pressure with 0.5%
of full-scale accuracy at an affordable price. With brass wetted material, the series BDG is
designed for your specific applications of compatible gasses. Its design allows for easy
installation. User-selectable units of measure let one gage be used for various pressure
scales.
FEATURES
Brass wetted materials
Backlit display
User selectable units
Simple operation
Pressure Ranges
Model Range, psig Bar
mPa
BDG-01 0 to 150
10.342 1.034

to 60C).
Thermal Effect: 0.04% FS per C.
Size: 2.5 O.D.
Display: 4-digit LCD (1-1/4 x 5/8).
Power Requirements: 3 V CR123A
lithium metal battery, installed
functional, user replaceable.
Battery Life: 2 to 3 years typ.
Weight: 0.29 lb (0.13 kg).
OPTION
For NIST traceable pressure calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG2.
kg/cm2
10.545
Series
WDG
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass and silicone
sensor.
Housing Materials: ABS plastic.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS.
Long Term Stability: 0.05% FS per
year.
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range;
Burst pressure: 3X pressure range.
Weatherproof Digital Pressure Gage

0.5% FS Accuracy, Weatherproof, Economic Plastic Housing
3-9/64
[79.87]
17/32
[13.50]
1-21/32
[42.10]
2-45/64
[68.83]
3-23/32
[94.48]
7/8
[22.15]
The Series WDG Weatherproof Digital Pressure Gage measures gas and liquid
pressure with high accuracy at an affordable price. Its rugged weatherproof design stands
up to outdoor and industrial environments. The 4-digit backlit display with four selectable
units makes readings easily visible to prevent reading errors. The WDG comes with 304L
stainless steel wetted material for a wide range of compatible liquids and gases.
FEATURES
Rugged weatherproof enclosure
Backlit display
User selectable units
Simple operation
Model
WDG-01
WDG-02
WDG-03
WDG-04
WDG-05
WDG-06
Pressure Ranges
Range, psig Bar
0 to 50
3.45
0 to 100
6.89
0 to 300
20.68
0 to 500
34.47
0 to 1000
68.94
0 to 5000
344.74
mPa
0.34
0.69
2.07
3.45
6.89
34.47
kg/cm2
3.52
7.03
21.09
35.15
70.30
351.5
5/16
[8.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and gases.
Housing Materials: Fiberglass reinforced PP plastic.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS for ranges up to 1000 psig (68.94 bar); 1% FS for 5000 psig
(344.74 bar) range.
Long Term Stability: 0.05% FS/year.
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range; Burst pressure: 3X pressure range.
Thermal Effect: 0.04% FS/C.
Size: 2.5 OD.
Display: 4-digit LCD (1-1/4 x 5/8).
Power Requirements: 3 V Lithium metal battery, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: 2 to 3 years typ.
Weight: 0.34 lb (0.15 kg).
OPTION
For NIST traceable pressure calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG2.
75

Digital
3-39/64
[91.49]
076_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:18 PM Page 76
PRESSURE
Series
DPGA
&
DPGW
1% Digital Pressure Gage

Economic Gage With Selectable Engineering Units

Digital
3-11/16
[93.66]
2-43/64
[67.87]
DPGA
1/4 NPT
DPGW
The Series DPGA is the only economic digital pressure gage with selectable engineering
units on the market. With its 1% accuracy and digital push-button zero, the DPGA is the
perfect choice for digitally monitoring the pressures of air and compatible gases.
The Series DPGW is the only economic digital pressure gage for liquids with the ability
to select engineering units on the market. With its 1% accuracy and digital push-button
zero, the DPGW is the perfect choice for digitally monitoring the pressures of compatible
liquids and gases.
ACCESSORY
A-293, Protective Rubber Boot
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: DPGA:Air and compatible gases; DPGW: Liquids and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials:
DPGA:316L SS, silicone sensor;
DPGW: 316LSS.
Accuracy: 1.0% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max. pressure is 30 psig.
Thermal Effect: 0.05% FS/F.
Size: 2.62 OD x 1.52 deep.
Display: 4-digit LCD (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, included, user replaceable.
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut-off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
OPTION
Example: DPGA-04-NIST.
Model
DPGA-00
DPGA-04
DPGA-05
DPGA-06
DPGA-07
DPGA-08
DPGA-09
DPGA-10
DPGA-11
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
Pressure Ranges
psig kg/cm2 bar
-14.70 -1.033 -1.013
5.000 .3515 .3447
15.00 1.055 1.034
30.00 2.109 2.068
50.00 3.515 3.447
6.89
100.0 7.03
200.0 14.06 13.79
300.0 21.09 20.68
500.0 35.15 34.47
in Hg
-29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft w.c.
-33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
-101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in2
-235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in w.c.
-407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mbar
-1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm w.c.
-1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
mm Hg
-761
258.6
776
1551
2586
Model
DPGW-00
DPGW-04
DPGW-05
DPGW-06
DPGW-07
DPGW-08
DPGW-09
DPGW-10
DPGW-11
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
Pressure Ranges
psig kg/cm2 bar
-14.70 -1.033 -1.013
5.000 .3515 .3447
15.00 1.055 1.034
30.00 2.109 2.068
50.00 3.515 3.447
6.89
100.0 7.03
200.0 14.06 13.79
300.0 21.09 20.68
500.0 35.15 34.47
in Hg
-29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft w.c.
-33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
-101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
oz/in2
-235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in w.c.
-407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mbar
-1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm w.c.
-1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
mm Hg
-761
258.6
776
1551
2586
Compound range available: DPGW-12: 30 Hg-0-100 psi.
76
1-1/2 [38.10]
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
077_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:40 AM Page 77
0.5% Digital Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Series
DPGAB
&
DPGWB
Selectable Engineering Units, Rubber Boot

Digital
ON
OFF
ZERO
3-59/64
[99.62]
UNITS
1/4 NPT
3-3/32
[78.58]
DPGWB
DPGAB
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: DPGAB:Air and compatible gases; DPGWB: Liquids and compatible
gases.
Wetted Materials:
DPGAB: 316L SS, silicone sensor;
DPGWB: Type 316LSS.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limits: 2X pressure range. Vacuum range max. pressure is 30 psig.
Size: 2.62 OD x 1.52 deep.
Display: 4-digit LCD (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Auto Shut-off: 20 minute auto shut-off.
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
The Series DPGWB/DPGAB digital pressure gages offer 0.5% full-scale-accuracy in a

rugged, easy-to-use unit at prices comparable to mechanical gauges. The DPGWB stainless
steel wetted material makes it suitable for a wide variety of liquid or gases. The gages
feature user-selectable units of measure allowing one gage to be used for a variety of
pressure scales. The DPGWB/DPGAB come with a protective rubber boot to protect
against short drops and rough handling.
OPTION
Example: DPGAB-04-NIST.
Model
DPGAB-00
DPGAB-04
DPGAB-05
DPGAB-06
DPGAB-07
DPGAB-08
DPGAB-09
DPGAB-10
DPGAB-11
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
Pressure Ranges
psig kg/cm2 bar
-14.70 -1.033 -1.013
5.000 .3515 .3447
15.00 1.055 1.034
30.00 2.109 2.068
50.00 3.515 3.447
6.89
100.0 7.03
200.0 14.06 13.79
300.0 21.09 20.68
500.0 35.15 34.47
Model
DPGWB-00
DPGWB-04
DPGWB-05
DPGWB-06
DPGWB-07
DPGWB-08
DPGWB-09
DPGWB-10
DPGWB-11
Range
30 Hg to 0 (psi)
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 50 psi
0 to 100 psi
0 to 200 psi
0 to 300 psi
0 to 500 psi
Pressure Ranges
psig kg/cm2 bar
-14.70 -1.033 -1.013
5.000 .3515 .3447
15.00 1.055 1.034
30.00 2.109 2.068
50.00 3.515 3.447
6.89
100.0 7.03
200.0 14.06 13.79
300.0 21.09 20.68
500.0 35.15 34.47
in Hg
-29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
in Hg
-29.93
10.18
30.54
61.1
101.8
203.6
407.2
611
1018
ft w.c.
-33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
ft w.c.
-33.94
11.53
34.60
69.2
115.3
230.7
461.3
692
1153
kPa
-101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
kPa
-101.4
34.47
103.4
206.8
344.7
689
1379
2068
3447
1-25/32
[45.24]
oz/in2
-235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in w.c.
-407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mbar
-1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm w.c.
-1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
mm Hg
-761
258.6
776
1551
2586
oz/in2
-235.2
80.0
240.0
480.0
800
1600
3200
4800
in w.c.
-407.3
138.4
415.2
830
1384
2768
mbar
-1013
344.7
1034
2068
3447
cm w.c.
-1034
351.5
1055
2109
3515
mm Hg
-761
258.6
776
1551
2586
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
Resolution
psi
0.01
0.002
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
Compound range available: DPGWB-12: 30 Hg-0-100 psi
77
078_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:05 AM Page 78
PRESSURE
Series
DPG
Digital Pressure Gage

0.25% or 0.5% F.S. Accuracy, NEMA 4X (IP66) Aluminum Housing

Digital
3
[76.20]
1-5/8
[40.39]
3-5/8
[91.39]
DPG-000
DPG-100
1/4 NPT
Replace your outdated analog gages with the new Series DPG Digital Pressure Gage.
The Series DPG has a high 0.25% or 0.5% full-scale accuracy. The 4 digit digital display
will reduce the potential for errors in readings by eliminating parallax error commonly
produced with analog gages.
Series DPG is battery powered and has an auto-shut off to conserve battery life. Battery
life, on average, will last 2000 hours. A 4 button key pad allows easy access to features
without the need to work through complex menus or difficult key combinations. These
features include backlight, peak and valley, tare or auto zero and conversion of the pressure
units.
ACCESSORIES
A-183, Protective Rubber Boot
A-184, Carrying Case
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids and
combustible gases (for FM listing see
Agency Approvals below).
Wetted Materials: Type 316LSS.
Housing Materials: Polycarbonate
front & back cover, anodized aluminum
extruded housing with recessed
grooves, polycarbonate overlay, BunaN O-rings, 316L SS sensor
construction.
Accuracy: DPG-000: 0.5% full-scale;
DPG-100: 0.25% full-scale; 1 least
significant digit @ 70F (21C)
(includes linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for
models 1000 psi; 5000 psi for 3000
psi range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range.
NEMA 4/4X (IP66).
to 55C).
Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 130F

is 0.016%/F; Between 32 to 70F is
0.026%/F; Between 10 to 32F is
0.09%/F.
Size: 3.00 OD x 1.90 deep (max).
Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W
digits).
Power Requirements: (2) AAA
alkaline batteries, included, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: 2000 hours typical; Low
battery indicator.
Auto Shut-Off:
Gage: 60 minute auto shut off. Auto
shut-off may be disengaged;
Backlight: 2 minute auto shut-off.
Agency Approvals: DPG-000:CE;
DPG-100: CE, FM approved to be
intrinsically safe for Class I, Division I,
Groups A, B, C and D, for ranges 0-15
to 0-3000 psi.
OPTION
Example: DPG-002-NIST.
Protective Carrying Case
DPG-100 with Protective Rubber Boot

Pressure Ranges
Model
0.5%
DPG-000*
DPG-002*
DPG-003*
DPG-004*
DPG-005*
DPG-006*
DPG-007*
DPG-008*
DPG-009*
DPG-010*
DPG-011*
DPG-020*
DPG-021*
DPG-022*
DPG-023*
DPG-024*
Model
0.25%
DPG-102
DPG-103
DPG-104
DPG-105
DPG-106
DPG-107
DPG-108
DPG-109
DPG-110
DPG-111*
Range
psi
-14.70 to 0
15.00
30.00
50.00
100.00
200.00
300.00
500.00
1000
3000
5000
-14.70
to 15.00
-14.70
to 30.00
-14.70
to 45.00
-14.70
to 60.00
-14.70
to 100.0
kg/cm2
-1.033
1.055
2.109
3.515
7.03
14.06
21.09
35.15
70.3
210.9
351.5
-1.033
to 1.055
-1.033
to 2.109
-1.033
to 3.164
-1.033
to 4.218
-1.033
to 7.03
bar
-1.013
1.034
2.069
3.448
6.895
13.79
20.69
34.48
68.98
206.9
344.8
-1.013
to 1.034
-1.013
to 2.069
-1.013
to 3.103
-1.013
to 4.137
-1.013
to 6.895
in Hg
-29.93
30.54
61.08
101.8
203.6
407.2
610.8
1018
2036
6108
ft wc
-33.94
34.61
69.21
115.4
230.7
461.4
692.1
1154
2307
6921
kPa
-101.4
103.4
206.9
344.8
689.5
1379
2069
3448
6895
oz/in2
-235.2
240
480
800
1600
3200
4800
8000
in w.c.
-407.3
415.2
830.4
1384
2768
5536
8304
mbar
-1013
1034
2069
3448
6895
cm wc
-1034
1055
2109
3515
7031
mm Hg
-760.7
775.7
1551
2586
5172
-29.93
to 30.54
-29.93
to 61.08
-29.93
to 91.63
-29.93
to 122.2
-29.93
to 203.6
-33.94
to 34.61
-33.94
to 69.21
-33.94
to 103.8
-33.94
to 138.4
-33.94
to 230.7
-101.4
to 103.4
-101.4
to 206.9
-101.4
to 310.3
-101.4
to 413.7
-101.4
to 689.5
-235.2
to 240
-235.2
to 480
-235.2
to 720
-235.2
to 960
-235.2
to 1600
-407.3
to 415.2
-407.3
to 830.4
-407.3
to 1245
-407.3
to 1661
-407.3
to 2768
-1013
to 1034
-1013
to 2069
-1013
to 3102
-1013
to 4137
-1013
to 6895
-1034
to 1055
-1034
to 2109
-1034
to 3164
-1034
to 4218
-1034
to 7031
-760.7
to 775.7
-760.7
to 1551
-760.7
to 2327
-760.7
to 3103
-760.7
to 5172
*Model is not FMapproved.
78
079_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:02 PM Page 79
Digital Calibration Pressure Gage
PRESSURE
Series
DCGII
0.05% FS Accuracy, 316 SS Wetted Parts

DCGII-105
DIGITAL PRESSURE GAGE
3-5/8
[92.20]

Digital
4-3/8
[111.51]
POWER: DC9V (6LR61 ALKALINE BATTERY)
PEAK
UNITS
ZERO
(0 to XX PSIG)
2-5/8
[66.97]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1/2 NPT
The Series DCGII Digital Calibration Pressure Gage offers a complete pressure
gage with calibration capabilities. With a precise 0.05% full scale accuracy and large 5 digit
resolution, this gage can be used in critical industrial applications where precision is most
important. This versatile gage only requires one 9V battery or power adapter and can
operate up to 5,000 working hours. The Series DCGII 0.05% Digital Pressure Gage can
display percent of range, pressure swings or alarm set points. This pressure gage comes
complete with eleven selectable pressure units, backlight and zeroing capability.
FEATURES
Indicator can display percent of range, pressure swings or alarm set points
Minimum and maximum peak detection
Selectable 10, 20, or 30 second backlight
Temperature indication
Eleven selectable pressure units
Stainless steel 1/2 male NPT connection
APPLICATIONS
Field gage calibration, permanent installation, burst disc testing, torque data logging,
pressure regulator testing and hydrostatic leak testing.
Model
DCGII-100
DCGII-101
DCGII-102
DCGII-103
DCGII-104
DCGII-105
DCGII-106
DCGII-107
DCGII-108
DCGII-109
Range (psig)
-14.7 to 0
0 to 15
0 to 30
0 to 60
0 to 100
0 to 200
0 to 300
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 2000
kPa
-101.35
103.42
206.84
413.69
689.48
1379.0
2068.4
3447.4
6894.8
1379.0
MPa
-0.1013
0.1034
0.2067
0.4134
0.6890
1.3780
2.0670
3.4450
6.8900
13.780
kgf/cm2
-1.0335
1.0546
2.1092
4.2184
7.0307
14.061
21.092
35.153
70.307
140.61
in H2O
-406.90
415.20
830.40
1660.8
2768.0
5536.0
8304.0
1384.0
2768.0
5536.0
in Hg
-29.929
30.540
61.080
122.16
203.60
407.20
610.80
1018.0
2036.0
4072.0
mm Hg
-760.21
775.72
1551.4
3102.9
5171.5
1034.3
1551.4
2585.7
5171.5
psi
-14.700
15.000
30.000
60.000
100.00
200.00
300.00
500.00
1000.00
2000.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, non-combustible liquids and gases.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS.
Other Materials: Housing: Aluminum alloy; Display: Acrylic MR200; Buttons:
Silicon gel; Back plate: 304 SS; Back seal: Oil-proof latex.
Accuracy: 0.05% FS; 1 least significant digit.
Temperature Accuracy: 1C.
Pressure Limits: 120% FS.
Compensated Limits: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Display: 5-digit LCD with blue backlight.
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, included, user replaceable, or power
adapter accessory.
Battery Life: Up to 10,000 hours (600 working hours @ default 3 times/s).
Auto Shut-off: Backlight: On/off, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s.
Weight: 1.28 lb (0.58 kg).
mbar
1013.5
1034.2
2068.4
4136.9
6894.8
1379.0
2068.4
3447.4
6894.8
bar
-1.0135
1.0342
2.0684
4.1369
6.8948
13.790
20.684
34.474
68.948
137.90
ACCESSORIES
A-644, 9V DC power adapter
BBV-0N, 2-valve block manifold
PCHP-1, Pneumatic calibration pump
OPTION
For NISTtraceable pressure calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-PG2.
See page 456 (Series PCHP)
79
080_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:27 PM Page 80
PRESSURE
Model
HTG
Handheld Digital Tire Pressure Gage

1 psi Accuracy, Handheld Design
HTG-01

Digital
4-21/64
[110.07]
1-49/64
[44.97]
The Model HTG-01 Handheld Digital Tire Gage reads tire pressure quickly and
accurately to help improve fuel economy and increase tire life. Its lightweight, handheld
design makes it portable and user friendly with its one button operation. A backlit 1/4
LCD display and illuminated tip ensures easy visibility in low light. The Series HTG also
displays three different units of psi, bar and kPa with the push of a button.
FEATURES
Rubberized grip
Rugged design
One button operation
Reads pressure in psi, bar and kPa
Pressure Ranges
0.15 to 6.9
HTG-01 2 to 100
kPa
15 to 690
Model
DTG
31/32
[24.52]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: ABSplastic; Rubber o-ring; Silicon.
Housing Material: ABSplastic.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Pressure Range: 2 to 100 psi (0.15 to 6.90 bar).
Process Connection: Tire valve stem or equivalent.
Display: 3-1/2 digit, 1/4 backlit LCD.
Shutoff: 90 seconds.
Power Requirements: (4) 1.5 V LR44 alkaline batteries, installed functional, nonreplaceable.
Battery Life: 2000 hours.
Weight: 0.10 lb (0.05 kg).
Digital Tire Pressure Gage

1 psi Accuracy, Durable
2-19/64
[58.42]
3-47/64
[95.05]
1-21/64
[33.69]
The Model DTG-01 Digital Tire Gage reads tire pressure quickly and accurately to
help improve fuel economy and increase tire life. With 1% FS accuracy, the DTG reads
psi, bar and kPa with the ease of one-button operation. A protective rubber casing stands
up against rough handling and short drops.
PressureRanges
6.9
DTG-01 0 to 100
80
kPa
690
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nickel plated brass; Rubber o-ring; Silicon.
Housing Material: ABSplastic; Silicon rubber boot.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Pressure Range: 2 to 100 psi (0.15 to 6.90 bar).
Process Connection: Tire valve stem or equivalent.
Display: 3-1/2 digit, 1/4 LCD.
Shutoff: 90 seconds.
Power Requirements: (1) 3 V CR2032 Lithium metal battery, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Weight: 0.25 lb (0.11 kg).
081_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:29 PM Page 81
Digital Indicating Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
DSGT
0.25% Full-Scale Accuracy

3-5/16
[83.8]
5-3/8 B.C. [136.4]

5-13/16
[147.6]
2
5-3/16
[131.8]
5/8 [15.8]
ACROSS FLATS
1/2 NPT
The Series DSGT Digital Indicating Transmitter is a versatile multi-function process

gage that features an excellent 0.25% full-scale accuracy. This all-in-one digital gage package
is designed to reduce installation costs, instrument cost, and save space where an
application requires a gage, transmitter, and switches. The Series DSGT gage comes
standard with a loop-powered 4 to 20 mA transmitter.
The Series DSGT gage is enclosed in a durable fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic case
that is designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP56) requirements. The gage features a menu-driven
display for easy customization. User selectable features include 12 engineering units of
measure, password protected calibration and disable functions, as well as an adjustable bar
graph and update/dampening rates.
Model*
DSGT-101-C0S
DSGT-102-C0S
DSGT-104-C0S
DSGT-105-C0S
DSGT-106-C0S
DSGT-107-C0S
DSGT-108-C0S
Range
(psig)
30 Hg-0-15
30 Hg-0-30
0-30
0-60
0-100
0-160
0-200
Model*
DSGT-109-C0S
DSGT-110-C0S
DSGT-112-C0S
DSGT-116-C0S
DSGT-117-C0S
DSGT-118-C0S
Series
MDPC
Range
(psig)
0-300
0-600
0-1000
0-5000
0-8000
0-10000
2-19/32
[66]
3-29/32
[99]
37
SPECIFICATIONS
GAGESPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, non-combustible
liquids & gases.
Wetted Materials: 17 to 4 stainless
steel sensor, 316 SS socket.
Housing Materials: Fiberglass
reinforced thermoplastic case.
Accuracy: 0.25% full-scale (includes
linearity, hysteresis, repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2 x full-scale range.
Display: 5 digit (0.88 high).
1-1/2 [38.1]
1-13/32 [35.6]
TRANSMITTERSPECIFICATIONS
(loop powered).
Memory Back Up Supply: (2) C
alkaline batteries, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Output Signal: 4-20 mA.
to 60C).
Thermal Effects: 0.04% full-scale/F.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft flying
leads.
Set Point Adjustments: Adjustable
through menu selections.
Weight: 1.45 lb (.66 kg).
OPTION
Mini Digital Pressure Controller

Small, Lightweight, 6 Selectable Pressure Units
1.BROWN:12 to 24V
2.BLACK:OUT1
3.WHITE:OUT2
4.ORANG:ANALOG
5.BLUE:0V
MDPC-XXX
-14.5 TO XXX PSI
MDPC
1-3/16
[30.00]
OPEN TYPE
PROCESS CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
*
MDPC-XXX
1-1/64 [26.00]
1-45/64 [43.30]
1-3/16 [30.00]
The Series MDPC is a slim, gas pressure sensor that is small in size and light in weight.
This pressure controller supports many installation methods and features high
measurement accuracy. This small controller yields excellent stability, high shock and
vibration resistance. The MDPC also provides good over-load capacity and heat resistance.
It can be utilized in many industries such as: high-tech electronics, general processing, food
packaging and automatic assembly. The MDPC features 6 user selectable pressure units
and a large, LED 3-color display with selectable color options that allow for easy reading.
Changing units is simple, and by using the included unit stickers, the pressure unit
displayed becomes very clear. The fast parameter copy function makes copying parameters
to other MDPC pressure controllers effortless. The key lock mode also prevents any
unnecessary changes to the parameters, which can have an effect on the operation. Another
characteristic of this multi-talented pressure controller is its ability to detect both positive
and negative pressure. The MDPC is available in NPN, PNP, analog voltage or current
output control modes.
Model
MDPC-112
MDPC-122
MDPC-132
MDPC-142
MDPC-212
MDPC-222
MDPC-232
MDPC-242
Range psi (kPa)

-14.5 to 14.5 (-100 to 100)
-14.5 to 14.5 (-100 to 100)
-14.5 to 14.5 (-100 to 100)
-14.5 to 14.5 (-100 to 100)
-14.5 to 145 (-100 to 1000)
-14.5 to 145 (-100 to 1000)
-14.5 to 145 (-100 to 1000)
-14.5 to 145 (-100 to 1000)
SwitchOutput
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
NPN
NPN
PNP
PNP
Retransmission
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Non-corrosive gas.
Wetted Materials: Brass with nickel
plating.
Housing Materials: Polycarbonate,
polybutylene terephthalate.
Accuracy: 3% of full range.
Pressure Limits:
MDPC-1: 29 psi (200 kPa);
MDPC-2: 217.6 psi (1500 kPa).
Temperature Limits:
Operating: -40 to 185F (-40 to
85C);
Storage: -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C);
Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Display: 2-line LCD display, 4 digits for
measured value and 3.5 digits for
setup display.
10% no isolations.
Power Consumption: 40 mA max.;
Current output type 60 mA max.
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT, inner

connection M5, for 1/8 PT contact
factory.
Weight: 1.3 oz (36.85 g).
Agency Approvals: CE: MDPC-121,
MDPC-122, UL.
Switch Type: NPN or PNP.
Electrical Rating: 100 mA @ 30 VDC.
Response Time: Programmable to
2ms, 4ms, 10ms, 30ms, 50ms, 100ms,
250ms, 500ms, 1000ms or 5000ms.
Display Cycle: Programmable to
100ms, 250ms, 500ms or 1000ms.
Output Signal:
1 to 5 V: Minimum output load
resistance 1000 ;
4 to 20 mA: Maximum output load
resistance 400 .
Zero and Span Adjustments: Menu
scalable within the range.
Series MDPC, Mini Digital Pressure Controller

OPTION
ACCESSORIES
A-152, Bracket installation kit
A-153, Panel installation kit
81
Single Pressure Gages/Switches/

Transmitters, Digital
[3] 1/4 [6.3]
082_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:07 AM Page 82
PRESSURE
Series
DPG-200
Digital Pressure Gage

3-in-1: Gage, Transmitter & Switch
2-3/8
[60.45]

3
[76.20]
1-5/8
[40.39]
3-5/8
[91.39]
1/4 NPT
The Series DPG-200 Digital Pressure Gage has a precise 0.25% full scale accuracy.
The 4 digit digital display will reduce the potential for errors in readings by eliminating
parallax error commonly produced with analog gages. The DPG-200 is packaged in a
durable extruded aluminum case designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66). The unit is powered
by 12 to 24 VDC/VAC and contains two alarm set points along with a 4-20 mA process
output. A four-button keypad allows easy access to features. These features include
backlight, peak and valley, auto zero and conversion of the pressure units.
APPLICATIONS
Process control
Compressor control
SPECIFICATIONS
DIGITAL GAGE SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids and non-combustible compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Type 316L SS.
Enclosure: Black polycarbonate front & back cover, anodized aluminum extruded
enclosure with recessed grooves, polycarbonate overlay, Buna-N O-rings, 316L SS
sensor construction.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS 1 least significant digit (includes linearity, hysteresis,
repeatability).
Pressure Limit: 2x pressure range for models 1000 psi; 5000 psi for 3000 psi
range; 7500 psi for 5000 psi range.
Display: 4 digit (.425 H x .234 W digits).
Size: 3.00 OD x 1.90 deep (not including cables).
Weight: 8.84 oz (275 g).
Switch Type: 2 SPDT form C contacts.
Electrical Rating: 0.5A @ 125 VAC resistive, 1A @ 24 VDC.
Relay Differential: 1 least significant digit.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft (.91 m) cable.
Set Point Adjustment: Via menu.
Thermal Effect: Between 70 to 158F = 0.016%/F. Between 0 to 70F =
0.026%/F.
Power Requirements: 12 to 24 VAC 20% 50 to 400 HZ, 12 to 24 VDC 20%.
Power Consumption: 0.8 W max.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft (.91 m) cable.
Range Pressure Ranges

psig
Model
kg/cm2 bar
in Hg ft w.c. ft sw* kPa
DPG-200 -14.70-0 -1.033 -1.013 -29.93 -33.94 -33.06 -101.4
1.055 1.034 30.54 34.61 33.73 103.4
DPG-202 15.00
2.109 2.069 61.08 69.21 67.45 206.9
DPG-203 30.00
3.515 3.448 101.8 115.4 112.4 344.8
DPG-204 50.00
7.03
DPG-205 100.0
6.895 203.6 230.7 224.8 689.5
14.06 13.79 407.2 461.4 449.7 1379
DPG-206 200.0
21.09 20.69 610.8 692.1 674.5 2069
DPG-207 300.0
35.15 34.48 1018 1154 1124 3448
DPG-208 500.0
70.3
DPG-209 1000
68.98 2036 2307 2248 6895
210.9 206.9 6108 6921 6745
DPG-210 3000
351.5 344.8
DPG-211 5000
Compound ranges available: DPG-220 range:30 Hg-0-15 psi.
*feet of seawater @ 4C
82
oz/in2
-235.2
240
480
800
1600
3200
4800
8000
in w.c.
-407.3
415.2
830.4
1384
2768
5536
8304
mbar
-1013
1034
2069
3448
6895
cm w.c.
-1034
1055
2109
3515
7031
mm Hg
-760.7
775.7
1551
2586
5172
083_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:08 AM Page 83
Electronic Pressure Controller
PRESSURE
Series
EDA
2 Switches, Indicating Gauge, and Transmitter in One Package
1/4 MALE NPT

WITH 3/4 [19.05]
WRENCHING HEX
Scan here
to watch
product video
Series EDA Electronic Pressure Control is an extremely versatile compact package

that can replace a separate gauge, two switches, and a transmitter in a system saving
money, installation time, and panel space. The EDA incorporates two SPDT relays that
have the on and off points fully adjustable over the range for control or alarm use. Front
face has LED indicators for switch status and a large backlight two-line display showing
process value and indication units. Programming is easy with simple menu structure, twoline display, and external programming buttons. Weatherproof housing is ideal for a wide
variety of applications with panel mount, flush mount, or pipe mount ability. Features
include zero set, adjustable dampening, menu lock out, peak and valley indication,
removable terminal blocks, adjustable time delay, and scalable transmitter output.
FEATURES
Display Units: psi, kg/cm2, bar, in Hg, ft w.c., kPa, MPa, %FS, in w.c., mbar, cm
w.c., mm Hg, or oz/in2 (Choices depend on range).
Test Mode: Simulates input over the range without pressuring to easily test
switches and transmitter output function.
Failsafe: For sensor failure, over pressure, high temperature limit, low
temperature limit, or keypad short. User chooses if relay is de-energized,
energized, or no action. With transmitter option, user chooses an output of 3.6
mA, 22 mA, or no action.
Alternation: Selectable alternation of set points between the relays for even wear
on duplex pump applications.
Example
Series
Housing
Process
Connection
Electrical
Connection
Range
Transmitter
Output
Options
EDAW-N1E1-02T0-AT
Electronic Pressure
Controller
Weatherproof
1/4 NPT male bottom
EDA
EDA
W
-N1
E1
-02
-03
-04
-05
-06
-07
-08
-09
-10
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
-AT
-NIST
-23444
Two 1/2 female NPT

conduit connections
0 20 psi
0 60 psi
0 100 psi
0 150 psi
0 300 psi
0 600 psi
0 1000 psi
0 1500 psi
0 3000 psi
None
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
1 to 6 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
Aluminum Adhesive
Tag
NIST Certificate
Oxygen Cleaning
5
[127.00]
27/32
[21.42]
9/32
[7.14]
1-59/64
[48.82]
3X 1/8
[3.18] 1/2 FEMALE
2X 5/16 NPT
[7.93] CONDUIT
ENTRY
3-1/16
[77.86]
1
[25.42]
1-5/8
[41.45]
3-15/32
[88.16]
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: Glass filled plastic.
Accuracy: 1% of FS including linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability (indicator and
transmitter).
Stability: < 2% of FS per year.
Pressure Limits: 1.5 x range.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 20 to 140F (-6.6 to 60C); Process: 0 to 176F
(-18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.05% of FS/F.
Display: 4-digit backlit LCD (digits: 0.60H x 0.33 W).
Power Requirements: 12 to 30 VDC/AC.
Power Consumption: 2.5 watts.
Electrical Connections: Removable terminal blocks with two 1/2 female NPT
conduit connections.
Enclosure Rating: Meets NEMA 4X (IP66).
Warm Up Time: <10 seconds.
Mounting Orientation: Any position.
Weight: 1.18 lb (535 g).
Agency Approvals:CE, UL.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 120/240VAC, 1 A @ 30 VDC.
Repeatability: 1% of FS (switching only).
Set Points: Adjustable 0-100% of FS.
Switch Indication: External LED for each relay on the front panel.
Switch Reset: Manual or automatic.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 6 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC
(direct or reverse output selection).
Minimum Excitation: 14 VDC.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Menu scalable within the range.
83

4-17/32
[115.15]
5
[127.00]
084_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:22 PM Page 84
PRESSURE
Series
DPT
Digital Pressure Transmitter with Switches

Two Solid State Switches, LED Display
1-1/2
[38.00]

1-5/32
[29.50]
3-23/64
[85.40]
1-33/64
[38.60]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series DPT Digital Pressure Transmitter with Switches combines a large, 14segment LED display with two programmable solid state switches into one compact unit.
A unique, 3-way rotating design allows the DPT to meet specific installation requirements
without any retrofitting. The display and electrical connection can be rotated independently
to maximize visibility while still orienting the electrical connection in the best position for
the cable connector. Large, ergonomically designed push buttons allow for quick/easy
programming and thin-film piezoresistive sensor technology guarantees long-term
reliability and stability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, liquids or vapors.
Wetted Materials:
Pressure connection: 316 L SS;
Pressure sensor: 316 L SS (13-8 PH for ranges above 150 psi).
Housing: 316 L lower body, heat and chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced plastic
(PBT) plastic head, TPE-E keyboard, PC display window.
Accuracy: 1.0% F.S. (includes non-linearity, hysteresis, zero point).
Pressure Limit: See table.
Display: Red LED 4-digit (0.35 H digits).
Weight: 7 oz (0.2 kg).
FEATURES
Dual PNP solid state switches
14-segment red LED display
User-friendly, intuitive 3-key operation
Rotating design:
o
330 display rotation
o
180 display electronic rotation
Switch Type: PNP.
Electrical Rating: 250 mA.
Electrical Connections: M 12x1, 5-pin.
APPLICATIONS
Calibration
Hydraulics and pneumatics
Machine tools
Compressors and pumps
Machine building
Thermal Effect: 0.2% FS / 10k.
Output Signal: DPT-A: 4 to 20 mA; DPT-V: 0 to 10 VDC.
Loop Resistance: DPT-A: 0.5k; DPT-V: > 10k.
Power Consumption: 100 mA.
Electrical Connections: M 12x1, 5-pin.
ACCESSORY
A-195, 6 (2 m) shielded cable with 5 pin female M-12 connections
OPTION
Model
0 to 10 4 to 20 Range
(psig)
mA
VDC
DPT-V00 DPT-A00 -14.5 to 0
DPT-V01 DPT-A01 0 to 15
*feet of seawater @ 4C
84
Pressure Ranges
Maximum Pressure
(psig)
30
30
60
60
100
200
290
400
600
1000
1740
Burst Pressure
(psig)
75
75
150
150
250
500
500
1500
1500
2500
7975
bar
1.034
1.034
1.724
2.068
3.447
6.895
11.03
13.79
20.68
34.47
68.95
MPa
.1034
.1034
.1724
.2068
.3447
.6895
1.103
1.378
2.068
3.447
6.895
kPa
103.4
103.4
172.4
206.8
344.7
689.5
1103
1378
2068
3447
6895
kg/cm2
1.055
1.055
1.758
2.109
3.515
7.031
11.25
14.06
21.09
35.15
70.31
085_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:21 PM Page 85
Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches
PRESSURE
Series
SA1100
Visible Setpoint, Adjustable Deadband, Hermetically Sealed

Snap Switch, Weatherproof and Explosion-proof
SWITCH
COVER
3-31/32
[100.62]
3-3/8
[84.91]
COVER
SET SCREW
7-7/16
[188.25]
4-5/8
[116.89]
The Series SA1100 Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches are weatherproof

and explosion-proof in one economical enclosure. Extremely rugged construction assures
excellent reliability in chemical, petroleum and industrial plants. New design also provides
burst pressure protection to 3000 psi (206 bar). The rolling diaphragm design maintains a
constant effective area to minimize friction. This results in a minimum deadband as low as
5% of full-scale. Since many applications require higher deadbands, the SA1100 includes a
separate adjustment of this when necessary. A pump being used to control liquid level in a
tank would be a typical situation where this feature would be important. Both setpoint and
deadband adjustments are protected, yet clearly visible behind a clear polycarbonate
window and are fully isolated from the electrical components for additional safety. A 7/16
open-end wrench is the only tool required to change settings. Terminal blocks are provided
for switch wiring connections and both internal and external ground screws are included.
Standard housing is weatherproof to NEMA standards 1 through 4X and 13; explosionproof to NEMA 7, Class I, Groups B, C & D; NEMA 9, Class II, Groups E, F & G. Optional
construction adds drain to meet NEMA 3R IP54.
APPLICATIONS
Chemical, petroleum, food and drug processing industries
Used indoor, outdoor or in explosion-proof area
SA11 13 E
OPTIONAL
BREATHER
DRAIN
PROCESS
CONNECTION
1-13/16
[45.88]
SPECIFICATIONS
model chart.
*Temperature Limits: -30 to 180F
(-35 to 82C) standard; ATEX compliant
at Ambient Temperature: -4 to 167F
(-20 to 75C); Process Temperature: -4
to 167F (-20 to 75C).
*Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and
Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
CSA for Class I, Groups B, C and D;
Class II Groups E, F, and G. ATEX
Compliant
0344
II 2 G EEx d IIC
T6 Process Temperature 75C.
Weatherproof UL Rated Type 4. Meets
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Switch Deadband Chart

Adjustable
Operating
Range Range
Number psig
bar
11
10-150 0.7-10
12
20-250 1.4-17.2
13
30-500 2.0-34
Model
SA1111E-A4-K2
SA1111E-S5-K2
ADJUSTMENT
COVER
5-25/32
[147.07]
3-9/16
[91.19]
4 [102.04]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Series SA1100
Example
3/16 [4.8] DIA.

BRACKET MOUNTING
HOLES
2-1/4
[57.17]
Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT snap

switch.
terminal.
NPT.
NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Within 20 of
vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal 7/16
hex nuts.
Deadband: See deadband chart.
*Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, CSA,
UL.
Approximate
Minimum Deadband
High
Low
psig bar psig bar
4.0 0.28 7.5 0.52
5.0 0.35 12.5 0.86
12
0.83 45
3.1
Approximate
Maximum
Deadband
psig bar
75
5.2
150 10
300 21
SA1113E-A4-K2 Pressure Control; weatherproof, NEMA 4X,explosion proof NEMA 7&9; aluminum pressure chamber,
Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring; 1/2 inch female NPT process connection; adjustable deadband, automatic reset; SPDT
snap acting switch; adjustable range 30-500 psig.
Construction
SA11
Series Designator, weatherproof NEMA 4X, explosion-proof NEMA 7, 9.
Adjustable Pressure
11
Adjustable range 10-150 psig (0.7-10 bar)
Ranges
12
Adjustable range 20-250 psig (1.4-17.2 bar)
13
Adjustable range 30-500 psig (2.0-34.0 bar)
Circuit (Switch)
E
Snap action switch rated 15A @ 125/250/480 VAC, 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 1/2 A @ 125 VDC resistive,
Options
1/4 A @ 250 VDC resistive.
HS
Hermetically sealed snap action switch rated 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive @ 30 VDC*
HG
Hermetically sealed snap action switch with gold contacts rated 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive @ 30 VDC*
Pressure Chamber
A
Aluminum
Material (Wetted)
S
316 SS
Diaphragm Material
4
Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring
(Wetted)
5
Fluorocarbon diaphragm and O-ring
Circuit (Switch)
K
SPDT
Type
L
DPDT (not available with HS or HG switch options)
Process Connection
2
1/2 inch female NPT
*Options
AT
ATEX certified construction
DRAIN Housing with drain - allows condensate to be drained from inside enclosure (meets NEMA 3R instead of 4X)
A 4 K 2
*Options that do not have ATEX.
85
Single Pressure Switches
3-3/8
[84.58]
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
086_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:09 AM Page 86
PRESSURE
Series
DA/DS
Bourdon Tube Pressure Switches

Pressure Ranges to 8000 psi (551.6 bar)
2-1/4
[57.15]
6-1/64
[152.8]
1-5/8
[41.28]
MERCOID
CONTROL
1/2 CONDUIT HOLE

1/4 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
"L"
1/2
NPT
7-3/4 [196.9]
FEATURES
Visible calibrated dial
On/off indication (except hermetically sealed snap switch models)
Adjustable or fixed deadband
SPDT snap-action, hermetically sealed snap action or hermetically sealed
mercury switch
External switch setpoint adjustments
Minimum deadband is obtainable at any point in the range
Pressure ranges of full vacuum to 8000 psig
UL listed, CSA approved, many models FM approved
General purpose, weatherproof or explosion-proof enclosures
OPTIONS
Weatherproof Enclosure, Series DAW Add W to model number after DA or
DS and change 1 to 3.
Example: DAW-33-153-7
Explosion-Proof Enclosure, Series DAH Suitable for Class I, Groups C and D;
NEMA 7; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III NEMA 9 and 9A, Division 1. Add H to
model number after DA or DS.
Example: DAH-31-153-7
FM Approved: For general purpose and explosion-proof models see agency
approvals. Add F to model number after DA, DS, DAH or DSH.
Examples: DAF-31-153-7 or DAHF-31-153-7
Other Options (Consult Factory): DPDT switches or other switch types, fixed
deadband mercury switch units for low deadband applications, manual reset
operation, two-stage operation, acetal bushed movement for applications with high
amounts of vibration and/or pulsation, fungus proofing, siphon, diaphragm seals,
mounting flange and remote connection.
1-5/8
[41.91]
8
[201.79]
ADJUSTMENTS
3/4 PIPE THD.

CONDUIT HOLE
CONTROL
ADJUSTMENTS
DAH
2-7/8
[71.63]
7
[177.80]
"U"
Customers tell us that this is the best pressure switch made. The Mercoid D Series is
one of the worlds broadest lines of pressure switches.
The D Series has extremely high sensitivity and great repeatability. The DA Models are
equipped with two external adjustments, one for setting high pressure operating point, the
other for setting low pressure operating point. Deadband, the difference between high and
low setpoints, is adjustable over the full-scale. The DS Models are equipped with a single
external adjustment for setting operating point only. For mercury-free switches, choose
between the snap action switch or hermetically sealed snap action switch. Hermetically
sealed mercury switch also available.
86
3-5/8
[92.27]
[2] STD.
13/32
MOUNTING
HOLES
1-3/4
[44.45]
3/4
CONDUIT
TH'D
REAR MOUNTING
FLANGE [3] .203 [5.16]
2-3/4
DIA HOLES AT 120 ON
[69.08] 6-1/2 [165.1] DIA. BOLT CIRCLE
3-1/2
[88.90]
3-7/8
[98.43]
10
[253.92]
5/8
[15.88]
5-3/8
[134.97]
8 [203.20]
3-1/2
[88.90]
7/8
[22.23]
ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS
1/4
NPT
1-1/4
[30.40]
5/8
[15.82]
GASKET
GASKETED
COVER
1
[26.39]
1/2
CONDUIT
HUB
DAW
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, 403 SS, or 316 SS.
Pressure Limit: Maximum pressure of the operating range.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose, weatherproof or explosion-proof.
Repeatability: 1% of full operating range, 1.5% on DS-7300 models.
Switch Type: SPST mercury switch, SPDT mercury switch, SPDT snap switch, or
SPDT hermetically sealed snap switch. Other circuit types available.
Electrical Rating: See model charts.
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: General purpose: 1/2 hole for conduit hub; Weatherproof:
1/2 conduit hub; Explosion-proof: 3/4 female NPT.
Process Connection: General purpose and weatherproof: 1/4 male NPT, 1/2 male
NPT on ranges 15S and 16S; Explosion-proof: 1/2 male NPT and 1/4 female NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Thumbscrew.
Weight: General purpose: 4 lb (1.8 kg); Weatherproof: 6 lb (2.7 kg); Explosion-proof:
8 lb (3.5 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM, UL (mercury switch units are not CE approved)
(Consult factory for FM approved models).
087_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:41 PM Page 87
PRESSURE
Hermetically Sealed, Fixed Deadband

SPDT: 5A @ 120/240 VAC, 5A res. @ 30 VDC
Fixed
5 Hg
3
3.75
3
3
3
3
3.75
5.25
6.75
9
5.25
5.25
4.5
5.25
7.125
10.5
10.5
18
33
52.5
90
300
Model
DS-7331-153-2
DS-7331-153-3
DS-7331-153-27
DS-7331-153-1
DS-7331-153-3A
DS-7331-153-4
DS-7331-153-5
DS-7331-153-6
DS-7331-153-7
DS-7331-153-8
DS-7331-153-9
DS-7321-153-25S
DS-7321-153-26S
DS-7321-153-5S
DS-7321-153-6S
DS-7321-153-8S
DS-7321-153-9S
DS-7321-153-9AS
DS-7321-153-10S
DS-7321-153-11S
DS-7321-153-12S
DS-7321-153-13S
DS-7321-153-15S
5.25
6
5.25
6.75
12
18
37.5
52.5
112.5
DS-7341-153-26E
DS-7341-153-23E
DS-7341-153-6E
DS-7341-153-24E
DS-7341-153-9E
DS-7341-153-21E
DS-7341-153-22E
DS-7341-153-11E
DS-7341-153-13E
D Series Pressure Switch with Snap Action Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
Fixed Deadband
Adjustable Deadband
SPDT: 15A @ 120/240 AC
SPDT:10A @ 120/240 VAC
Bourdon Adjustable
Minimum
Tube
Operating
Deadband
Model
Material Range (psig)
Model
(psig)
Fixed
DA-7031-153-2
0-30 Hg VAC
DS-7231-153-2
13.5 Hg
3 Hg
DA-7031-153-3
Brass
10 Hg VAC - 12 6
DS-7231-153-3
1.5
DA-7031-153-27
25 Hg VAC - 50 12
DS-7231-153-27
2.5
DA-7031-153-1
1/8 15
DS-7231-153-1
6
1.5
DA-7031-153-3A
1/8 20
DS-7231-153-3A
6
1.5
DA-7031-153-4
1 35
DS-7231-153-4
7.5
1.5
DA-7031-153-5
2 60
DS-7231-153-5
9
2
DA-7031-153-6
5 100
DS-7231-153-6
13.5
2.5
DA-7031-153-7
5 150
DS-7231-153-7
24
3
DA-7031-153-8
10 200
DS-7231-153-8
24
4
DA-7031-153-9
10 300
DS-7231-153-9
37.5
5
DA-7021-153-25S
Stainless 30 Hg VAC 60 18
DS-7221-153-25S
3.5
DA-7021-153-26S
Steel
30 Hg VAC 75 22.5
DS-7221-153-26S
3.5
DA-7021-153-5S
2 60
13.5 13.5
DS-7221-153-5S
3
DA-7021-153-6S
5 100
19.5 19.5
DS-7221-153-6S
3.5
DA-7021-153-8S
10 200
22.5 22.5
DS-7221-153-8S
4
DA-7021-153-9S
10 300
28.5 28.5
DS-7221-153-9S
6
DA-7021-153-9AS
40 350
30
DS-7221-153-9AS
30
6
DA-7021-153-10S
25 600
67.5 67.5
DS-7221-153-10S
10
DA-7021-153-11S
50 1000 142.5 142.5
DS-7221-153-11S
20
DA-7021-153-12S
100 1500 195 195
DS-7221-153-12S
30
DA-7021-153-13S
300 2500 390 390
DS-7221-153-13S
60
DA-7021-153-15S
500 5000 1350 1350
DS-7221-153-15S
200
DA-7021-153-16S
800 8000 2250 2250
DS-7221-153-16S
500
DA-7041-153-26E
316
30 Hg VAC 75 15
DS-7241-153-26E
3.5
DA-7041-153-23E
Stainless 5 75
DS-7241-153-23E
12
4
DA-7041-153-6E
Steel
10 100
DS-7241-153-6E
15
3.5
DA-7041-153-24E
10 150
DS-7241-153-24E
16.5
4
DA-7041-153-9E
10 300
DS-7241-153-9E
42
8
DA-7041-153-21E
30 400
DS-7241-153-21E
78
10
DA-7041-153-22E
75 800
DS-7241-153-22E
180
25
DA-7041-153-11E
100 1000
DS-7241-153-11E
285
35
DA-7041-153-13E
200 - 2500
DS-7241-153-13E
600
75
D Series Pressure Switch with Mercury Switch and General Purpose Enclosure
Adjustable Deadband
Adjustable
Operating
Range
(psig)
30 0 Hg VAC
10 Hg VAC - 12
25 Hg VAC - 50
1/8 15
1/8 20
1 35
2 60
5 100
5 150
10 200
10 300
403
30 Hg VAC 60
Stainless 30 Hg VAC 75
Steel
2 60
5 100
10 200
10 300
40 350
25 600
50 1000
100 1500
300 2500
500 5000
800 8000
316
30 Hg VAC 75
Stainless 5 75
Steel
10 100
10 150
10 300
30 400
75 800
100 1000
200 - 2500
Bourdon
Tube
Material
Brass
Minimum
Deadband
(psig)
2 Hg
1
3.5
1
1
1.75
3
3.75
6
8
12
6
8
4
6
8
14
14
25
60
90
150
450
750
7
3
7
6
18
30
75
100
210
SPDT
4A @ 120 V
2A @ 240 V
AC/DC
DA-31-153-2
DA-31-153-3
DA-31-153-27
DA-31-153-1
DA-31-153-3A
DA-31-153-4
DA-31-153-5
DA-31-153-6
DA-31-153-7
DA-31-153-8
DA-31-153-9
DA-21-153-25S
DA-21-153-26S
DA-21-153-5S
DA-21-153-6S
DA-21-153-8S
DA-21-153-9S
DA-21-153-9AS
DA-21-153-10S
DA-21-153-11S
DA-21-153-12S
DA-21-153-13S
DA-21-153-15S
DA-21-153-16S
DA-41-153-26E
DA-41-153-23E
DA-41-153-6E
DA-41-153-24E
DA-41-153-9E
DA-41-153-21E
DA-41-153-22E
DA-41-153-11E
DA-41-153-13E
SPST
Open on
Increase
10A @ 120 V
5A @ 240 V
AC/DC
DA-31-2-2
DA-31-2-3
DA-31-2-27
DA-31-2-1
DA-31-2-3A
DA-31-2-4
DA-31-2-5
DA-31-2-6
DA-31-2-7
DA-31-2-8
DA-31-2-9
DA-21-2-25S
DA-21-2-26S
DA-21-2-5S
DA-21-2-6S
DA-21-2-8S
DA-21-2-9S
DA-21-2-9AS
DA-21-2-10S
DA-21-2-11S
DA-21-2-12S
DA-21-2-13S
DA-21-2-15S
DA-21-2-16S
DA-41-2-26E
DA-41-2-23E
DA-41-2-6E
DA-41-2-24E
DA-41-2-9E
DA-41-2-21E
DA-41-2-22E
DA-41-2-11E
DA-41-2-13E
SPST
Close on
Increase
10A @ 120 V
5A @ 240 V
AC/DC
DA-31-3-2
DA-31-3-3
DA-31-3-27
DA-31-3-1
DA-31-3-3A
DA-31-3-4
DA-31-3-5
DA-31-3-6
DA-31-3-7
DA-31-3-8
DA-31-3-9
DA-21-3-25S
DA-21-3-26S
DA-21-3-5S
DA-21-3-6S
DA-21-3-8S
DA-21-3-9S
DA-21-3-9AS
DA-21-3-10S
DA-21-3-11S
DA-21-3-12S
DA-21-3-13S
DA-21-3-15S
DA-21-3-16S
DA-41-3-26E
DA-41-3-23E
DA-41-3-6E
DA-41-3-24E
DA-41-3-9E
DA-41-3-21E
DA-41-3-22E
DA-41-3-11E
DA-41-3-13E
87
088_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:10 AM Page 88
PRESSURE
Series
1000W
Weatherproof Diaphragm Operated

Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi
1-3/4
[44.45]
3-3/32
[78.56]
2-1/4
[57.15]
5/8
[15.88]
3/4 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION
17/64 [6.75] MOUNTING
HOLES TYP 4 PLACES
7-17/64
3-3/4
[184.53] [95.25]
2-9/32
[57.94]
1-11/32
[34.13]
Extremely rugged construction provides excellent reliability in chemical, petroleum and

industrial plants. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control in any position and
helps prevent contact chatter. New design also provides high over-pressure protection.
Weatherproof housing is standard.
316 SS
Adjustable
Approx.*
Aluminum
Deadband
Press. Chamber Pressure Chamber Operating
FEP Diaphragm
Range
(Fixed) psig
Polyamide
Model
psig (bar)
(bar)
Diaph. Model
1003W-B3-D
5-40 (.48-2.8)
2 (.14)
1003W-A1-D
1004W-B3-D
10-70
(.69-4.8)
4 (.28)
1004W-A1-D
1005W-B3-D
25-200 (1.7-13.8)
8 (.55)
1005W-A1-D
1006W-B3-D
50-350 (3.5-24.1)
15 (1.0)
1006W-A1-D
1007W-B3-D
75-550 (5.2-37.9)
30 (2.1)
1007W-A1-D
1008W-B3-D
100-900
(6.9-62.1)
50 (3.5)
1008W-A1-D
1009W-B3-D
200-1400 (13.8-96.5) 75 (5.2)
1009W-A1-D
*Deadband 10-15% larger when using 316 SS diaphragm.
Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm and pressure chamber e.g. 1003WB2-D. Values shown are for mid-scale.
Series
1000E
2-21/32
[67.47]
1/4 FEMALE
NPT PRESSURE
CONNECTION
4-1/2
[114.30]
5 [127.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
model chart.
to 77C).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof,
meets NEMA 4X (IP66).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250
VAC resistive.
Electrical Connections: Screw type.

NPT.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal
thumbwheel.
Explosion-Proof Diaphragm Operated

Pressure Switches
Visible Setpoint, Fixed Deadband, Pressure Ranges to 1400 psi
18 [457.20] LONG
18 AWG LEAD WIRES
1/2 MALE NPT
CONDUITCONNECTION
2-23/64
[59.93]
4-5/32
[105.56]
17/64 [6.75] MOUNTING

HOLES TYP 2 PLACES
ADJUSTING WHEEL
1-15/32
[37.29]
Same rugged construction as used in Series 1000W plus explosion-proof design are
combined in this new unit. UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F &
G. Bellville spring movement permits mounting of control in any position and helps prevent
contact chatter. High over-pressure protection and vibration resistance are also featured.
Aluminum
Press. Chamber
Polyamide Diaph.
Model
1003E-A1-J
1004E-A1-J
1005E-A1-J
1006E-A1-J
1007E-A1-J
1008E-A1-J
1009E-A1-J
316 SS
Pressure Chamber
FEP Diaphragm
Model
1003E-B3-J
1004E-B3-J
1005E-B3-J
1006E-B3-J
1007E-B3-J
1008E-B3-J
1009E-B3-J
Adjustable
Operating
Range
psig (bar)
5-40 (.48-2.8)
10-70 (.69-4.8)
25-200 (1.7-13.8)
50-350 (3.5-24.1)
75-550 (5.2-37.9)
100-900 (6.9-62.1)
200-1400 (13.8-96.5)
Approx.*
Deadband
(Fixed) psig
(bar)
2.5 (.17)
5 (.34)
10 (.69)
18 (1.2)
36 (2.5)
60 (4.1)
90 (6.2)
*Deadband 10-15% larger when using 316 SS diaphragm.

Change A1 to B2 for 316 SS diaphragm and pressure chamber e.g. 1003E-B2J. Values shown are for mid-scale.
88
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-7/8
[47.63]
2-15/16
[74.63]
1/4 FEMALE NPT

PRESS. CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
model chart.
to 77C).
Enclosure Rating: Explosion-proof,
UL listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C
and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
Hermetically sealed optional.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 125/250/480
VAC res., 0.5A @ 125 VDC, 0.25A @
250 VDC.
4-3/8
[111.13]
3-3/4
[95.25]
Wiring Connections: 18 AWG, 18

(460 mm) color-coded leads:N.O.
(yellow), N.C. (black), and common
(red).
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal
thumbwheel.
089_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:37 PM Page 89
Dual-Action Explosion-Proof Pressure Switches

Explosion-proof and Weatherproof Enclosure
PRESSURE
Series
H2
3-3/8
[85.73]
2-5/8
[66.68]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1/4 NPT PRESSURE CONNECTION
Explosion-Proof, UL & CSA Listed for Class I, Groups B, C & D and Class II,
Groups E, F & G. The H2 is designed for sequencing two different actions as pressure of
a liquid or gas increases or decreases. The design consists of two concentric pistons
operated by a single diaphragm with one pressure chamber. Each piston actuates a separate
switch independent of the other. The switches may be adjusted to operate together, at
opposite ends of the range or at two intermediate set points. The threaded top is removed
to field adjust or service switches without disturbing electrical or pressure connections. The
Duotect switch is explosion-proof and weatherproof. It can be mounted in any position and
is not affected by vibration.
Model
H2S-1
H2S-2
H2S-3
Low Range psig (bar)

3-40 (0.21-2.76)
25-250 (1.72-17.2)
100-1000 (6.89-68.9)
2-15/16
[74.63]
High Range psig (bar)

5-75 (0.35-5.17)
30-400 (2.07-27.6)
150-1500 (10.3-103)
Series
A1F
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS chamber
with FEP diaphragm and Buna-N Oring standard. Fluoroelastomer or
EPDM O-ring optional.
CSA approved: -20 to 90C (-4 to
184F).
Enclosure Rating: UL listed
explosion-proof, Class I, Groups B, C,
and D. Class II Groups E, F, and G.
Meets NEMA4X (IP66). CSA optional.
Class I, Groups B, C & D. Class II,
Groups E, F, & G -20C Tamb 75C
T6 [optional -20C Tamb 40C T5]
Type 4.
Switch Type: Two SPDT snap

switches.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 125/250
VAC. 5 A res., 3 A ind. @ 30 VDC. Gold
contacts or 10 A switch optional.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18
(460 mm) long.
NPT.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: Internal nut.
Weight: 2 lb (.9 kg).
Deadband: Approximately 10% of
range.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UL.
Low Cost OEM Pressure Switch

Field Installable Weatherproof Enclosure
1-53/64
[46.43]
INSULATIVE BARRIER
[OPEN ON TOP]
[3] ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
SPDT SNAP
SWITCH
3-3/4
[95.25]
5-7/16
[138.11]
SET POINT
ADJUSTMENT
CAP
GROUND
SCREW
1/2 NPT
[MALE CONNECTION]
1/4 NPT
[FEMALE CONNECTION]
A1F
1-7/16
[36.51]
Low cost and precision made, the A1F Pressure Switch is ideal for OEM industrial
applications. Wetted materials of 316 SS and fluorocarbon ensure great chemical
compatibility with a wide range of process media. The open case style is perfect for panel
mounting applications like pump skids. Field-installable weatherproof enclosure is available
in polycarbonate offering a low cost weatherproof switch. Superior 15 A contact allows
direct control of motors or pumps without the use of external relays, a true cost savings.
Features include a convenient indicating scale for quick and easy field adjustment.
Model
A1F-O-SS-1-1
A1F-O-SS-1-2
A1F-O-SS-1-3
A1F-O-SS-1-4
Range
2 to 15 (0.14 to 1.03)
4 to 75 (0.28 to 5.17)
8 to 225 (0.55 to 15.5)
16 to 450 (1.1 to 31.0)
Deadband at
Min Range
2 (0.14)
4 (0.27)
8 (0.55)
15 (1.0)
4
[101.6]
Deadband at
Max Range
3 (0.21)
15 (1.0)
25 (1.7)
50 (3.5)
psig (bar)
ACCESSORY
A-447, Weatherproof enclosure; Easy field installation; Meets NEMA 4X,
polycarbonate cover with 1/2 NPT female conduit entry.
1-29/32 1-1/2
[48.41] [38.10]
4-11/16 [119.06]
1-17/32
[38.89]
3-1/16
[77.79]
A1F with A-447

SPECIFICATIONS
gases.
Wetted Materials: Pressure Chamber:
316 SS; Diaphragm: Fluorocarbon.
Temperature Limit: -40 to 175F (-40
to 80C).
Pressure Limits: 750 psig (51 bar).
Enclosure Rating: No rating for open
construction. Installed properly within
an optional A-447 enclosure meets
NEMA 4X (IP66) standards.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @
120/240/480 VAC; 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC;
1/4 HP @ 250 VAC.
terminals.
NPT and 1/2 male NPT.
vertical.
Set Point Adjustment: Knurled screw
cap with indicating scale.
Deadband: Fixed. See deadband
chart.
Weight: 10.5 oz (297 g).
OPTION
Weatherproof enclosure. Optional A-447 enclosure factory installed. To order change
O to PC.
Example: A1F-PC-SS-1-1
89
3/4 NPT ELECTRICAL

CONNECTION
5
[127.00]
090_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:11 AM Page 90
PRESSURE
Series
A1PS/
A1VS
Economical Pressure Switch

Vacuum and Compound Ranges Available, Adjustable Set Point
2.375
[60.33]
3.625
[92.08]
1/4 NPT
1.625
[41.28]
Series A1PS/A1VS Economical Pressure Switches are designed with a 15 Amp

SPDT switch for direct control of pumps and motors. Available in pressure, vacuum, or
compound ranges, the switches offer a field adjustable set point. Easily adjust the switch
by aligning the top of the self locking adjusting nut with the desired setting indicated on
the adjacent range scale. Connection is 1/4 male NPT for quick installation and can be
mounted in any position.
Model
A1PS-14
A1PS-24
A1PS-34
A1PS-44
Set Point Range

(kPa)
1.5-3.5 psi (10-24)
3-40 psi (21-276)
30-150 psi (207-1034)
100-500 psi (689-3445)
Repeatability (kPa)
0.15 psi (1)
1.0 psi (7)
5.0 psi (34)
20.0 psi (138)
Series
APS/
AVS
Deadband
Model
(approx.) (kPa)
A1VS-14
0.5-1.7 psi (3-11)
A1VS-24
2-5 psi (14-34)
5-30 psi (34-207)
30-120 psi (207-827)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids or gases.
Wetted Materials: Diaphragm: Buna-N;
Body with fitting: Zinc alloy, chromate
finish.
(-35 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: 600 psig.
Vacuum Limits: 29.9 Hg (vacuum and
compound models only).
Switch Type: SPDT snap action.
Electrical Ratings: 15 A (resistive) @

250 VAC, 1/2 HP @ 250 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Three screw
terminals.
Setpoint: Field adjustable via knurled
screw cap.
Cycling: Not to exceed 1 Hz.
Sensor Element: Diaphragm.
Weight: 7.4 oz (209 g).
Agency Approvals: UL.
Set Point
Repeatability (kPa)
Range (kPa)
1.2 Hg (-4)
6-28 Hg (-20 to -94)
28 Hg to 3.5 psig (-94 to 24) 0.15 psi (1)
Deadband
(approx.) (kPa)
3-14 Hg (-10 to -47)
0.5-1.7 psi (3-11)
Adjustable Pressure Switch

Vacuum and Pressure Ranges, 5 A Switch, Compact Size
.562 MAX
[14.27]
.750
[19.05]
2.590 MAX
[65.79]
1.090
[27.69]
Miniature Series APS/AVS Adjustable Switches offer reliable switching for

pressure/vacuum alarm, shutdown or control. The units are readily adjustable throughout
their range using the locking adjusting ring and indicating pointer. The body is constructed
of stainless steel for durability in harsh environments. Switches include 12 (30 cm) wire
leads sealed with epoxy for additional protection.
Model
APS-150
APS-250
APS-350
APS-450
APS-550
90
Repeatability
Set Point Range psi (bar)
Increasing
Decreasing
psi (bar)
0.8-28.5(.06-2.0) 1.6-30.0(.11-2.1) 0.6(.04)
2.0-48.0(.14-3.3) 3.0-50.0(.21-3.5) 1.0(0.7)
3.0-96.5(.21-6.7) 4.5-100(.31-6.9) 2.0(.14)
7.5-242(.52-16.7) 9.7-250(.67-17.2) 5.0(.35)
15.0-485(1.0-33.4) 20.0-500(1.4-34.5) 10.0(.69)
Deadband
psi (bar)
0.8-1.3(.06-.09)
1-1.7(.07-.12)
1.6-4(.11-.28)
2.5-9(.17-.62)
5-22(.35-1.5)
Model
AVS-150
AVS-250
AVS-350
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Capsule: 17-7 PH
SS; Fitting: 303 SS.
to 107C), a set point change of up to
2% when used below -10F (-23C) or
above 125F (52C).
Pressure/Vacuum Limits: 150% of
range.
Switch Type: SPDT snap action.
Set Point RangeHg (cm Hg) Vac
Increasing
Decreasing
1.6-27.1(4.1-68.6) 2.7-28.2(6.9-71.6)
4.0-24.8(10.2-63.0) 5.1-28.2(13.0-71.6)
6.0-21.5(15.2-54.6) 8.4-28.2(21.3-71.6)
1/8 NPT
Electrical Ratings: 5 A @ 250 VAC, 3

A @ 28 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 3-wire, 20
AWG insulated with PVC, 12 (30 cm)
length.
Setpoint: Field adjustable.
Cycling: Not to exceed 20 CPM.
Sensor Element: Capsule.
Agency Approval: UR.
Repeatability
Hg (cm Hg)
1.2(3.1)
2.0(5.1)
4.0(10.2)
Deadband
Hg (cm Hg)
1.3-2.7(3.3-6.9)
1.5-3.2(3.8-8.1)
2.6-7.3(6.6-18.5)
091_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:11 AM Page 91
Durable Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
A6
Designed for Extended Duty, Simple and Reliable

1-1/2 [38.1]
1/4 NPT
1-1/2
[38.1]
1.500
[38.1]
#8-32 SCREW
TERMINALS
A-439
A-439
A-440
Series A6 Durable Pressure Switches have been specifically designed to stand up to

extended duty applications. These switches are constructed with a polyamide film
diaphragm and are compatible with a variety of fluids. For ease of installation, the switches
come with a 1/4 male NPT process connection and can be mounted in any orientation.
The Series A6 pressure switches are compact and have great setpoint integrity, and feature
simple, easy set-point field adjustment.
Model
A6-153221
A6-253221
A6-353221
A6-453221
A6-553221
A6-653221
A6-753221
A6-853221
Set Point Range psi (bar)

NC
0.5 to 1 (0.03 to 0.07)
1.1 to 3 (0.08 to 0.21)
3.1 to 7 (0.21 to 0.48)
8 to 13 (0.55 to 0.90)
14 to 24 (0.97 to 1.66)
25 to 50 (1.73 to 3.45)
51 to 90 (3.52 to 6.21)
91 to 150 (6.28 to 10.35)
NO
1.1 to 3.1 (0.08-0.21)
2.27 to 6.05 (0.16-0.42)
4.22 to 10.75 (0.29 to 0.74)
12.3 to 17.5 (0.85 to 1.21)
18.6 to 31.8 (1.28 to 2.19)
33.1 to 61 (2.28 to 4.21)
65.6 to 112.3 (4.53 to 7.75)
114.7 to 198.3 (7.94 to 13.68)
ACCESSORIES
A-439, Weatherproof IP65 Cover
A-440, Weatherproof IP65 with Fly-wire holes
Series
A9
2-5/16
[58.74]
2
[50.8]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air, motor oils, transmission
oils, jet fuels, and similar hydrocarbon
media. (Not for water use).
Wetted Materials: Base: 304 SS;
Diaphragm: Polyamide film.
(-40 to 120C).
Pressure Limits:
Operating Pressure: 150 psi (10.3
bar) for 0.5-24 psi set point ranges,
250 psi (17.2 bar) for 25-150 psi
set-point ranges;
Proof Pressure: 500 psi (34.5 bar);
Burst Pressure: 750 psi (51.7 bar) for
0.5-24 psi set point ranges, 1250 psi
(86.2 bar) for 25-150 psi set-point
ranges.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose or
with cover:IP65 - weatherproof.
A-440
Repeatability: 10% of set-point.

Set Point Tolerance: 15% of range.
Switch Type: 1 SPST NO, 1 SPST
NC. NO and NC switch independent
from each other.
Electrical Ratings:
Resistive: 15 A @ 6 VDC, 8 A @ 12
VDC, 4 A @ 24 VDC;
Inductive:1 A @ 120 VAC, 0.5 A @
240 VAC.
Electrical Connections: #8-32 screw
terminals.
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT male.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be
installed in any position.
Set-point Adjustment: Screw.
Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg).
Agency Approval:CE.
Snap-Action Pressure Switch

High Current Capacity, High Temperature Rating
1-7/64
[28.18]
1-35/64
1-57/64 [39.29]
[48.02]
1/8 NPT
1-1/2
[38.10]
Series A9 Pressure Switches are designed for controlling pressure with higher current
capacity. These switches are used widely in steam cleaners, steam irons, and other pressure
control systems. It provides SPDT contact and Series A9 Pressure Switches utilize highquality miniature snap-action switches. The switch is diaphragm operated, boasting a high
temperature rating and compact size.
Model
A9-1
A9-2
A9-3
A9-4
A9-5
A9-6
Range psig (bar)

2.9-8.7 (0.2-0.6)
7.3-17.4 (0.5-1.5)
14.5-36.3 (1.2-2.5)
21.8-58 (1.5-4.0)
29-87 (3.0-7.0)
58-130.5 (5.0-9.0)
Deadband psig (bar)

2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
2.9 1.5 (0.2 0.1)
3.6 2.2 (0.25 0.1)
5.1 2.9 (0.35 0.2)
8.7 2.9 (0.6 0.2)
Max Pressure psig (bar)

43.5 (3.0)
58.0 (4.0)
72.5 (5.0)
87.0 (6.0)
116.0 (8.0)
145.0 (10.0)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Non-hazardous gas, liquid or
steam.
Wetted Materials: Connection:
Copper; Diaphragm: Silicone or SS
(see model chart).
Temperature Limits: See model chart.
Pressure Limit: See model chart.
Repeatability: 5%.
Temperature Limit
185F (85C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
257F (125C)
Switch Type: SPDT.

Electrical Ratings: 21 A @ 125/250
VAC.
Electrical Connections: 1/4 (6.35
mm) male quick connect.
Diaphragm Material
Silicone
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
91
2-7/16
[62]
092_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:12 AM Page 92
PRESSURE
Series
A2
Subminiature Pressure Switch

Field Adjustable
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
35/64
[13.89]
53/64
[21.03]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-61/64 [49.61]
Designed for OEM applications, the Series A2 is economical and is equipped with high
proof pressure capabilities for demanding applications. The A2 is available with either
spade terminals or flying leads. Switches with spade terminals can be easily adjusted in
the field.
Model
A2-2801
A2-28032*
A2-2811
A2-28132*
A2-3801
A2-38032*
A2-3811
A2-38132*
A2-4801
A2-48032*
A2-4811
A2-48132*
Range psi (bar)

5-25 (.48-1.72)
5-25 (.48-1.72)
5-25 (.48-1.72)
5-25 (.48-1.72)
20-60 (1.4-4.1)
20-60 (1.4-4.1)
20-60 (1.4-4.1)
20-60 (1.4-4.1)
50-150 (3.5-10.3)
50-150 (3.5-10.3)
50-150 (3.5-10.3)
50-150 (3.5-10.3)
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
Spade Terminals
Flying Leads
NO/NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
23/64
[9.13]
53/64
[21.03]
23/64
[9.13]
1-43/64
[42.47]
15/16
HEX
[23.81]
23/64
[9.13]
15/16
HEX
[23.81]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polyamide film and brass.
Pressure Limits: 500 psi (34 bar).
Enclosure Rating: IP66 (flying lead models only).
Repeatability: 5% of highest set point.
Switch Type: SPST, 100 VA, 42 V.
Electrical Connection: 1/4 (6.3 mm) spade terminals or flying leads.
Weight: 0.14 Ib (0.06 kg).
Deadband: 1 to 2 psi (0.07 to 0.14 bar).
*Flying lead models are not field adjustable. Set point must be given at time
of order. To order a flying lead model add a suffix -PRESET and indicate the
set point desired in psi units and whether the trip point is on an increase I
or decrease D. Example:A2-28032-PRESET 5 psi I. (Set point must be in
the set point range).
Series
CXA
Water Pump Pressure Switch

Simple, Reliable, Adjustable Set Point and Deadband
2-9/16 [65]
3-45/64 [94]
3-3/8
[85.5]
2-17/64[57.6]
The Series CXA Water Pump Pressure Switches have been proven reliable for
controlling automatic water systems. These switches are very popular for use on water
pumping systems. The set point and deadband are both easily adjustable via screws inside
the cover. For ease of installation, the switches come with a 1/4 female NPT process
connection and can be mounted in any orientation. The series CXAs simple design makes
it a great switch for an installer at any skill level.
Model
CXA-S1
CXA-S2
CXA-S3
CXA-R1
CXA-R2
CXA-R3
Switch
Type
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
Range
psig (bar)
15-80 (1.0-5.5)
30-100 (2.1-6.9)
35-150 (2.4-10.3)
15-80 (1.0-5.5)
30-100 (2.1-6.9)
35-150 (2.4-10.3)
Approx. Adjustable
Deadband psig (bar)
15-30 (1.0-2.1)
20-35 (1.4-2.4)
30-40 (2.1-2.8)
15-30 (1.0-2.1)
20-35 (1.4-2.4)
30-40 (2.1-2.8)
Max. Pressure
psig (bar)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Silicone, steel, and
SS.
Pressure Limits: See model chart.
Repeatability: 5 psig (0.3 bar).
Switch Type: SPST snap action (see
model chart).
Electrical Ratings: 20 A @ 120 VAC,
12 A @ 240 VAC, 9.6 A @ 240 VAC (3
phase), 8.6 A @ 32 VDC, 3.1 A @ 120
VDC, 1.6 A @ 240 VDC.

terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 hole for 1/2
conduit hub (2 places).
NPT.
Setpoint Adjustment: Internal screws.
Weight: 0.75 lb (0.34 kg).
FEATURES
Designed for electrically driven water pumps
Suitable for all types of pumps: jets, submersible, reciprocating, etc
Direct acting (NC) or reverse acting (NO) available depending on switch type and
model number
92
093_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:12 AM Page 93
Compressor Pressure Switch
PRESSURE
Series
CX
Adjustable Set Point and Deadband, 20 Amp Rating

.236
.250
[6.00] OR [6.35]
3-45/64
[94]
3-35/64
[90]
.236
.250
[6.00] OR [6.35]
3-35/64
[90]
3-45/64
[94]
3-45/64
[94]
1-27/64
[36]
2-17/64
[57.6]
CX-1
CX-4
CX-1
The Series CX Compressor Pressure Switches are designed with a 20 amp normally
closed SPST switch for direct control of pumps and motors. The set point and deadband
are both easily adjustable via screw terminals inside the cover. For ease of installation, the
switches come with a 1/4 female NPT process connection or the optional 4-port connection
block on the CX-4 models. Besides making installation easier, one of the other ports can be
used to install a pressure gage. Plus, these switches can be mounted in any orientation.
These units are perfect for regulating tank pressure on small air compressors. The CX
series switches come with an unloader valve, which prevents compressors from starting
under load. They also come with an auto/off disconnect lever for manually cutting off the
load. When the lever is in the off position, there is a test button inside the housing that can
be pushed to turn on the load.
Model
CX-11
CX-12
CX-13
CX-41
CX-42
CX-43
Number
of Ports
1
1
1
4
4
4
Range
psig (bar)
25-100 (1.7-6.9)
35-150 (2.4-10.3)
50-175 (3.4-12.1)
25-100 (1.7-6.9)
35-150 (2.4-10.3)
50-175 (3.4-12.1)
Approx. Adjustable
Deadband psig (bar)
20-30 (1.4-2.1)
30-40 (2.1-2.8)
35-55 (2.4-3.8)
20-30 (1.4-2.1)
30-40 (2.1-2.8)
35-55 (2.4-3.8)
Series
CS & CD
Max.Pressure
psig (bar)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
129 (8.9)
179 (12.3)
204 (14.1)
CX-4
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible
compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: NBR (NitrileButadiene) rubber diaphragm, steel
connection (CX-1), aluminum alloy
connection (CX-4).
Repeatability: 5 psig (0.3 bar).
Switch Type: 2 each SPST snap
action, normally closed (NC).
Electrical Ratings: 20 A @ 120 VAC,
12 A @ 240 VAC, 9.6 A @ 240 VAC (3
phase), 8.6 A @ 32 VDC, 3.1 A @ 120
VDC, 1.6 A @ 240 VDC. 1.5 HP @ 120
VAC, 2 HP @ 240 VAC, 3 HP @ 240
VAC (3 phase), 0.25 HP @ 32/120/240
VDC.
2-17/64
[57.5]

terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 hole for 1/2
conduit hub (2 places).
NPT (CX-4: 4 places).
Setpoint Adjustment: Internal screws.
Weight: CX-1:0.78 lb (0.35 kg); CX-4:
1.03 lb (0.47 kg).
Diaphragm Pressure Switches

Visible Set Points, Fixed or Adjustable Deadband
11/16
[17.46]
1/2 [12.7]
CONDUIT HOLE
1-1/16
[26.99]
3
[76.20]
3
[76.20]
3-3/4
[95.25]
3-3/4
[95.25]
1-5/16
[33.34]
3-3/16 [80.96]
Series CS and CD combine advanced design and precision construction in a small size.
Unit is ideal for instrument panels, small compressors and general industrial applications.
Visible set point and easy to wire SPDT snap switch reduce installation time. Operates in any
position and is vibration resistant.
Model
CS-1
CS-3
CS-10
CS-30
CS-150
CD-10
Adjustable Operating Range

1-30 Hg. Vac. (25.4-762 mm Hg)
1-100 in w.c. (.25-24.9 kPa)
1-10 psig (.07-.69 bar)
1-30 psig (.07-2.1 bar)
10-150 psig (.69-10.3 bar)
1-10 psig (.07-.69 bar)
CD-30
1-30 psig (.07-2.1 bar)
CD-150 10-150 psig (.69-10.3 bar)
Deadband
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Adjustable
Deadband Value
1.5 Hg. (38 mm Hg)
7 in w.c. (1.74 kPa)
0.4 psig (0.03 bar)
1.0 psig (0.07 bar)
5 psig (0.35 bar)
Min: 1.5 psig (.1 bar),
Max: 11.5 psig (.79 bar)
Adjustable Min: 2 psig (.14 bar),
Max: 12 psig (.83 bar)
Adjustable Min: 14 psig (.97 bar),
Max: 24 psig (1.7 bar)
1/4 NPT
2-3/16
[55.56]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced Buna-N and steel.
Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.1 bar) for ranges 1, 3, and 10; 50 psig (3.5 bar) for
range 30; 175 psig (12.1 bar) for range 150.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 VAC, 8 A @ 240 VAC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 hole for conduit hub.
Weight: .5 lb (0.23 kg).
93
3-3/8
[85.5]
094_Layout 1 7/11/14 9:17 AM Page 94
PRESSURE
Series
AP
Diaphragm Operated Pressure Switches

Visible Setpoint Adjustment, Compact
7/8 [22.23]
15/16 KNOCK-OUT HOLE
[23.81] 7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT HOLE
1-1/16
[26.99]
5-1/16 [128.69]
4-11/16 [119.36]
3-1/8
[79.71]
2-7/8
[73.03]
Reliable and convenient, Series AP pressure switch is a compact switch for instrument
air or other low pressure applications. Visible set point and external adjustment add
convenience. Used on air, noncorrosive gas or liquid service compatible with wetted parts.
Unit also available in weatherproof and explosion-proof housing.
Switch*
Type
Model
SPDT Ranges
AP-153-33
Mercury 10 in vac-50 in w.c.
(2.5-12.4 kPa)
AP-153-37
Mercury 1-30 psig
(.07-2.1 bar)
AP-153-39
Mercury 10-125 psig
(.69-8.6 bar)
AP-7021-153-33 Snap
10 in vac.-50 in w.c.
(2.5-12.4 kPa)
AP-7021-153-37 Snap
1-30 psig
(.07-2.1 bar)
AP-7021-153-39 Snap
10-125 psig
(.69-8.6 bar)
Switch Deadband
Low
High
5 in w.c. 6 in w.c.
(1.2 kPa) (1.49 kPa)
0.4 psig 0.75 psig
(0.03 bar) (0.05 bar)
2 psig
6 psig
(0.14 bar) (0.04 bar)
8 in w.c. 10 in w.c.
(2.0 kPa) (2.49 kPa)
0.75 psig 1.5 psig
(0.05 bar) (0.10 bar)
3 psig
7 psig
(0.21 bar) (0.48 bar)
Max.
Press.
psig
(bar)
15
(1.03)
60
(4.14)
160
(11.0)
15
(1.03)
60
(4.14)
160
(11.0)
2-13/32
4
[61.13] [2]1/4
[101.60]
[6.35]
MOUNTING
HOLE WITH
SEALING WIRE 1-13/16 1/4 NPT ADJUSTMENT
[46.05]
SCREW WITH
1-7/16
4-1/8 [104.78] SEALING WIRE
[36.52]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Nylon reinforced
Buna-N and steel. PTFE and 316 SS
optional.
to 66C).
Weatherproof and explosion-proof
optional.
Switch Type: SPDT mercury switch or
SPDT snap switch. Other switch types
available.
Electrical Rating: Mercury switch: 4 A
@ 120 VAC/DC, 2 A @ 240 VAC/DC;
Snap switch: 15 A @ 120 VAC, 8 A @
240 VAC, 0.5 A @ 120 VDC, 0.25 A @
240 VDC.

terminal.
NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical for
mercury switch models, any position for
snap switch models.
Weight: General purpose: 2 lb (0.9
kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, FM, UL. For
FM consult factory. (Mercury switch
units are not CE approved.)
*Mercury switch units are not CE approved.
Series
MVS
Miniature Vacuum Switch

SPDT N/O or N/C Switch, Adjustable Set Point, Ideal for OEMs
1 SQ.
[25.40]
23/32
[18.26
TYP.]
1-13/16
[46.04]
39/64
[15.48]
1/4 [6.35] OR
1/8 NPT
VACUUM PORT
1/64 [0.40]
MOUNTING
HOLE
TYP. 4 PLACES
3/16 [4.76]
TYP. 3 PLACES
Compact, lightweight, and adjustable, the Series MVS Miniature Vacuum Switch is
specially designed for OEM applications. This low cost switch has a minimum life
expectancy of 10 million cycles and has an extremely fast response time. Typical
applications for the MVS are HVAC, home appliance, dairy systems, medical, office
equipment, and pump control.
Set Point in H2O (mbar)

Model Minimum
Maximum
MVS-1 3 (8)
8 (20)
MVS-2 9 (21)
80 (199)
MVS-3 81 (200)
330 (822)
MVS-4* 3 (8)
8 (20)
MVS-5* 9 (21)
80 (199)
MVS-6* 81 (200)
330 (822)
*Models have 1/8 male NPT process connections
94
23/64
[9.13]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials:
Enclosure: Polycarbonate;
Diaphragm: Polyurethane.
66C).
Pressure Limits: Up to maximum
range.
Repeatability: 20%.
Switch Type: SPDT normally open or
normally closed.
Electrical Rating: Range 3 to 8 in w.c.:
3A, 125/250 VAC; Range 9 to 80 in
w.c.: 10A, 125/250 VAC; Range 81 to
330 in w.c.: 15A, 125/250 VAC.
COM
NO NC
1-21/32
[42.07]
Contacts: Silver with brass terminals.

Electrical Connections: Terminals
0.187 x 0.20 spade for use with quick
disconnects.
Process Connections: Models MVS 1
to MVS3: Smooth port 0.25 diameter;
Models MVS 4 to MVS 6: 1/8 male
NPT.
Mounting: Use #2 screws through
eyelets.
Weight: Less than 0.671 oz (19 g.)
Agency Approval: cUL, UL.
095_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:30 PM Page 95
LCD Pressure Data Logger
PRESSURE
Series
DLI2
1/4 NPT Fitting, Records 262,143 Readings, Front Keypad

5-3/32
[129.54]
3-19/32
[91.44]
1-51/64
[45.72]
The Series DLI2 accurately records pressure and gives instant remote readings. The
large, back-lit LCD and 8-button keypad provide convenient access to current data and
recorder setup as well as memory and battery levels. The Series DLI2 can be ordered for
absolute or gauge pressure measurements up to 5,000 psi. Using the keypad or software,
measurements can be read in psi, in. Hg, mm Hg, bar, atm, Torr, Pa, kPa, or MPa. The
large memory capacity allows over 260,000 readings to be stored. The easy to use DL700
software makes creating permanent records, performing data calculations, and graphing
of data simple. The DLI2 can easily be started and stopped from a PC or delayed to start
up to six months in advance. It can also stop recording at a specific time or after a certain
number of readings have been taken.
ACCESSORIES
DL700, Software, Manual and USB Interface Cable
DLI-120, 9 V Power Adapter (North America)
DLI-230, 9 V Power Adapter (Europe)
Model
DLI2-A08
DLI2-G08
DLI2-A10
DLI2-G10
DLI2-A13
Pressure Range
0 to 30 psia
0 to 30 psig
0 to 100 psia
0 to 100 psig
0 to 300 psia
Model
DLI2-G13
DLI2-A14
DLI2-G14
DLI2-A15
DLI2-A19
Series
DLP
Pressure Range
0 to 300 psig
0 to 500 psia
0 to 500 psig
0 to 1000 psia
0 to 5000 psia
1/4-18
NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: 0 to 30 psia (g), 0 to 100 psia (g), 0 to 300 psia (g), 0 to 500 psia (g), 0 to
1000 psia, and 0 to 5000 psia depending on the model.
Memory Size: 262,143 readings.
Accuracy: 2% FSR, 0.25% at 77F (25C) typical.
Resolution: 0.002 psi (30 psi), 0.005 psi (100 psi), 0.02 psi (300 psi), 0.05 psi
(500 and 1000 psi), and 0.2 psi (5000 psi) depending on model.
Sampling Method: Stop on memory full or continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 2 s to 12 hrs.
Computer Requirements: Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000,
Windows ME, Windows NT, or Windows XP operating system, and one free
USB port.
Power Requirements: (6) AA alkaline batteries, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: 1 yr (approx).
Interface: USB port (interface cable required).
Housing Material: Black anodized aluminum case.
Wetted Material: 316L SS.
Weight: 40 oz (1134 g).
Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Pressure/Temperature Data Logger

1/4 NPT Fitting, Up to 5000 PSIA
6-15/64
[158.43]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1
[25.40]
1/8 JACK FOR USB

INTERFACE CABLE
1/4 NPT CONNECTION

The Series DLP data logger can record pressure and temperature. The 1/4 NPT fitting
comes standard and allows the logger to be adapted to almost any pressure fitting. The
internal temperature sensor provides accurate temperature measurements without the
need of a separate temperature recorder, and many of the models provide a choice between
measuring pressure in PSIA or PSIG. The DLP can easily be started and stopped from a
PC or delayed to start up to six months in advance. The battery-powered data logger can
store over 16,000 measurements per channel, and the easy to use DL700 software makes
retrieving data simple.
ACCESSORIES
TL-2150, Replacement battery for Series DLP
Model
DLP-A08
DLP-G08
DLP-A10
DLP-G10
DLP-A13
DLP-G13
DLP-A14
DLP-G14
DLP-A15
DLP-A19
Description
0 to 30 psia Pressure and Temperature Recorder
0 to 30 psig Pressure and Temperature Recorder
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C); Pressure: 0 to 30 psia(g), 0 to
100 psia(g), 0 to 300 psia(g), 0 to 500 psia(g), 0 to 1000 psia, and 0 to 5000 psia
depending on the model.
Memory Size: 16,383 readings per channel.
Accuracy: Temperature: 0.9F (0.5C); Pressure: 2% FSR, 0.25% at 77F
(25C) typical.
Resolution: Temperature: 0.2F (0.1C); Pressure: 0.002 psia(g), 0.005 psia(g),
0.05 psia(g), 0.05 psia, and 0.2 psia depending on the model.
Sampling Method: Stop on memory full.
Computer Requirements: Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000,
Windows ME, Windows NT, and Windows XP operating system, one free USB
port.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V TL2150 lithium metal battery, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Interface: USB port (interface cable required).
Material: 303 SS.
95
Single Pressure
Data Loggers
7/8 HEX
4-9/64
[105.16]
096_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:13 AM Page 96
PRESSURE
Series
644
High Accuracy Pressure Transmitter

0.05% FS, <0.25% F.S. Total Error Band
3 FT CABLE
CONNECTION [-L]
Single Pressure Transmitters
1-5/16
[33.02]
BAYONET CONNECTOR
6-PIN [-B]
3-5/16
[83.44]
4-3/4
[120.42]
1 [25.63]
1/4-NPT [-P]
7/16-20 SAE MALE [-S]
The Series 644 High Accuracy Pressure Transmitter is a robust transmitter

designed for high accuracy pressure applications. Boasting an accuracy of 0.05% FS RSS
(<0.25% TEB), the 644 is intended for precise measurements in the critical applications
of calibration technology, hydraulic/pneumatic controls, and many more laboratory and
industrial settings. The Series 644 offers multiple measurement options with two output
choices (VDC or mA) and ten psig pressure ranges (optional 0 to 15 psia). The robust and
compact all stainless steel Series 644 is available with either a 1/4 male NPT, or 7/16-20
male SAE process connections. Each transmitter is provided with an 11 point NIST
traceable calibration certificate.
FEATURES
High accuracy: 0.05% F.S. RSS
15 to 1000 psig ranges (optional 0 to 15 psia)
Two output options
Low thermal error over wide temperature range
APPLICATIONS
Calibration equipment
Test benches
Pulp and paper mills
Hydraulic/pneumatic controls
Transportation
Power generation
ACCESSORY
A-495, 6-pin female bayonet mate connector
Model
644
Electrical
-L
Connection
-B
Signal
-V
Output
-C
Range
-00
-01
-02
-03
-04
-05
-06
-07
-08
-09
-10
-11
Process
-P
Connection
-S
Ex. 644-L-V-00-P
96
Industrial PressureTransmitter
3 ft cable
Male 6-pin bayonet
0 to 10 volt
4 to 20 mA
0 to -14.7 psig
0 to 15 psig
0 to 25 psig
0 to 50 psig
0 to 100 psig
0 to 150 psig
0 to 200 psig
0 to 300 psig
0 to 500 psig
0 to 750 psig
0 to 1000 psig
0 to 15 psia
1/4 male NPT
7/16-20 SAE male
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 17- 4 PH SS.
Accuracy: 0.05% FS RSS.
Total Error Band (Includes all thermal effects): <0.25% FS over entire
temperature compensated range.
Stability: < 0.15% FS/year.
Pressure Limits: Proof pressure and burst pressure: See pressure limits table
below.
Compensated Temperature Range: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Power Requirements:
9 to 30 VDC for current output;
15 to 30 VDC for voltage output.
Minimum Supply Voltage: Min. supply voltage (VDC) for current output = 9 +
0.02 x loop resistance (loop resistance = line resistance + receiver
resistance).
Output Signal:
0 to 10 VDC (4-wire);
4 to 20 mA (2-wire).
Response Time: < 10 ms (voltage output), < 80 ms (current output).
Max Current Consumption:
4 to 20 mA: 22 mA;
0 to 10 VDC: 20 mA.
Electrical Connections: 3 ft cable or 6-pin male bayonet connector.
Process Connection: 1/4 male NPT or 7/16-20 male SAE with O-Ring.
Range
Number
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Range
0 to -14.7 psig
0 to 15 psig
0 to 25 psig
0 to 50 psig
0 to 100 psig
0 to 150 psig
0 to 200 psig
0 to 300 psig
0 to 500 psig
0 to 750 psig
0 to 1000 psig
0 to 15 psia
Proof
Pressure
30 psig
30 psig
50 psig
100 psig
200 psig
300 psig
400 psig
600 psig
800 psig
1200 psig
1500 psig
30 psia
Burst
Pressure
3000 psig
3000 psig
3000 psig
8000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
10000 psig
3000 psia
097_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:27 AM Page 97
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
682
0.13% FS Accuracy, External Adjustments, 4 to 20 mA Output

1-31/32
[49.73]
1/4 NPT
The Series 682 Industrial Pressure Transmitter is designed to withstand
environmental effects such as shock, vibration, temperature, and EMI/RFI. The electronics
and capacitive sensor are packaged in a welded stainless steel housing and meets NEMA
4 (IP56) protection ratings. The transmitter features external zero and span adjustments
and reverse polarity protection. The Series 682 delivers high performance in tough
applications such as off road equipment, hydraulic systems, compressor control, industrial
engines, or industrial refrigeration.
Model* Range
Overpressure
682-1 0 to 50 psi
150 psi
682-2 0 to 100 psi
300 psi
682-3 0 to 250 psi
500 psi
682-4 0 to 500 psi
1000 psi
*Units calibrated in bar also available. Consult factory.
OPTION
Series
681
2
[50.8]
3/4
[19.05]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts: 17-4 PH SS.
Accuracy: .13% FS (includes non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability).
Temperature Limits: -40 to 260F (-40 to 125C) 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing.
Pressure Limit: See table.
Thermal Effect: Zero shift: 1.0% FS/100F span shift: 1.5% FS/100F.
Zero and Span Adjustment: 0.5 mA, non-interactive.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft (51 cm) multiconductor cable.
Shock: 200 g operating.
Vibration: 20 g 50-2000 Hz.
Sanitary Pressure Transmitter

No Liquid Fill Diaphragm, Sanitary Clamp Fitting
1/2 NPT
1.743
[44]
2.272
[58]
2.516
[64]
The Series 681 Sanitary Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet sanitary standards
for applications in food, dairy, beverage and pharmaceutical processing, liquid level control,
and sanitary pipelines. The unit is fully sealed to withstand high pressure washdown in
Clean-in-Place (CIP) and Sterilize-in-Place (SIP) installations. The Series 681 is designed
with a unique, no liquid fill diaphragm and a sanitary clamp pressure fitting for easy
installation with negligible clamping effect. A conduit fitting, shielded cable with vent tube
and sealed screws for zero and span adjustment combine to make the Series 681 completely
watertight.
Model
681-02
681-12
681-42
681-52
681-62
Range
0 to 1 psi
0 to 2 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
Overpressure
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
150 psi
180 psi
Sanitary Clamp
Connection
2
2
2
2
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts: 316L SS.
Accuracy: .20% FS (includes non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability).
Temperature Limits: -40 to 260F (-40 to 125C) 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing.
Pressure Limits: See table.
Thermal Effect: Zero and span shift: 2.0% FS/100F.
Zero and Span Adjustment: 0.5 mA, non-interactive.
Electrical Connections: 1/2 conduit fitting and strain relief with 15 ft (4.5 m)
cable.
Process Connection: 2 or 1-1/2 sanitary clamp fitting male NPT.
Clamping Effect: Zero and span shift: 0.15% FS for ranges up to 30 psi; 0.25%
FS for ranges >30 psi.
97
2
[50.8]
098_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:14 AM Page 98
Low Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE
Series
672
Single Pressure Connection, Ranges down to 10 w.c.

3-3/4 [95.48]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4 MALE NPT CONNECTION
The Series 672 Low Pressure Transducer is a perfect solution to any application
where a very accurate low pressure transducer is necessary. Using variable capacitance
technology, the Series 672 is designed to measure pressures as low as 10 in w.c. up to 400
in w.c., very low ranges for a single connection pressure transducer. The 672 also features
a 0.25% FS accuracy. Use the Series 672 in liquid level, flood warning, waste water, clean
room, and open channel flow applications.
Model
672-1-A
672-2-A
672-3-A
672-4-A
672-5-A
672-6-A
672-7-A
672-8-A
672-9-A
Operating Range
0-10 in w.c.
0-15 in w.c.
0-25 in w.c.
0-50 in w.c.
0-100 in w.c.
0-150 in w.c.
0-200 in w.c.
0-300 in w.c.
0-400 in w.c.
Output
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
4-20 mA, 2-wire
Note:For voltage output models change -A to -V.
Series
673
SPECIFICATIONS
Thermal Effects: Zero: 1.0%FS/100F
(2.0%FS/100C); Span: 1.0%FS/100F
gases.
(2.0%FS/100C).
Wetted Materials: 318 duplex SS,
Power Requirements: 4 to 20 mA: 9
ceramic, fluoroelastomer (FKM).
to 35 VDC; 0 to 5 VDC: 7.5 to 35 VDC.
Housing Material: 318 stainless steel.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA (2-wire) or
Accuracy: 0.25% F.S (RSS). Includes
0 to 5 VDC (3-wire).
non-linearity, hysteresis, and nonZero & Span Adjustment: 10% FS
repeatability.
each (by potentiometer).
Stability: 0.25% FS/1 year.
Max Loop Resistance: 1.325 k.
to 100C).
Electrical Connections: Large DIN
Compensated Temperature Limits: 43650 connector with mating plug.
5 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Process Connection: 1/4-18 NPT
Pressure Limits: 29 psi (2 bar) for up
male.
to 85 in w.c. (0.2 bar) ranges; 58 psi (4
bar) for 85 to 140 in w.c. (0.2 to 0.35
Weight: 11.6 oz (330 g).
bar); 73 psi (5 bar) for 141 to 400 in
w.c. (0.35 to 1 bar).
OPTION
0.25% Full Span Accuracy, 4-20 mA Signal, Ranges to 1000 psi
1-19/32 [40.48]
1/4-18 (22.3 MM)

CONDUIT KNOCKOUT
1-13/32 [35.72]
3-5/8
[92.08]
2-23/64
[59.93] 2
[50.8]
Cable Anchor
Conduit Version
The low cost Series 673 Pressure Transmitter is a fixed range transmitter designed
for harsh environments and suitable for high shock and vibration applications. Constructed
of stainless steel, the Series 673 provides a 4 to 20 mA output signal with 0.25% accuracy.
Use the Series 673 in industrial OEM equipment, hydraulic systems, HVAC equipment,
industrial engines and compressor control.
Model*
Model
Range psi
Range psi
673-1
673-1C
0-1
0-1
673-2
673-2C
0-2
0-2
673-3
673-3C
0-5
0-5
673-4
673-4C
0-10
0-10
673-5C
673-5
0-25
0-25
673-6
673-6C
0-50
0-50
673-7
673-7C
0-100
0-100
673-8
673-8C
0-200
0-200
673-9
673-9C
0-500
0-500
673-10
673-10C
0-1000
0-1000
673-14
673-14C
-14.7-100
-14.7-100
*The model numbers followed by a C represent the conduit
version, which is hand tightened to ensure proper electrical seal.
98
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
1/4 NPT
1-5/8
[41.28]
Cable Anchor
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, gas, or vapor.
Wetted Materials: 17-4 PH SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (RSS),
(includes non-linearity, hysteresis and
non-repeatability).
to 85C).
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Pressure Limits: 2 x max range.
Thermal Errors: Zero: 3.6%
FS/100F(100C); Span: 2.7%
FS/100F(100C).
1-11/16
[42.86]
1-5/8
[41.28]
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
1/4 NPT
Conduit Version
Output: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire.
Zero & Span Adjustment: Fixed.
Loop Resistance: 0 to 800.
Shock: 200 g.
Vibration: 20 g.
Electrical Connections: 2 ft (61 cm)
multiconductor cable.
Conduit Connection: 1/4-18 (22.3
mm) knockout.
Enclosure: Stainless steel and Valox.
OPTION
099_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:14 AM Page 99
Adjustable Range Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
634ES
0.5% Full Span Accuracy, Ranges to 5000 psi

(3) #10-32 x 1/4 [6.35] DP HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
2-1/2 [63.50]
2-1/2 [63.50] B.C.
TYP
1-11/16
[42.86]
1-9/16
[39.69]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Range
in psi (bar)
10 (0.69)
30 (2.07)
50 (3.45)
100 (6.9)
200 (13.8)
300 (20.7)
500 (34.5)
1000 (69)
2000 (138)
4000 (276)
Min. Range
in psi (bar)
10 (0.69)
20 (1.38)
40 (2.76)
60 (4.14)
100 (6.9)
250 (17.2)
350 (24.1)
600 (41.4)
1250 (86)
2500 (172)
25/32 [19.84]
1/16 [1.59]
1/4NPT
2-7/8 [73.03]
Series 634ES Transmitters sense a single pressure for air, compatible gas or liquid and
provide 4 to 20 mA output signal. Positive pressure can be measured within an accuracy of
0.5% of span. The Series 634ES uses an isolated piezoresistive pressure sensor to produce
a resistance change across a wheatstone bridge. Convenient 2-wire operation simplifies
installation. Zero and span adjustments are fully protected inside a rugged die cast
aluminum enclosure with durable gray polyurethane finish. Enclosure is designed to meet
NEMA 4X (IP66) requirements.
Model
634ES-0
634ES-1
634ES-2
634ES-3
634ES-4
634ES-5
634ES-6
634ES-7
634ES-8
634ES-9
1/2NPT
Max. Range
in psi (bar)
20 (1.38)
40 (2.76)
60 (4.14)
120 (8.3)
250 (17.2)
350 (24.1)
600 (41.4)
1250 (86)
2500 (172)
6000 (414)
Series
TPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, gases & liquids.
Wetted Materials: Types 316, 316L
SS.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS.
(-17.8 to 60C).
20 to 120F (-6.67 to 48.9C).
Pressure Limit: 1.5x maximum
pressure range.
(0.045% FS/C).
(2-wire).
Zero & Span Adjustments: Protected

potentiometers located in auxiliary
housing.
Loop Resistance: 1250 DC max.
Current Consumption: 38 mA DC
max.
Electrical Connections: Terminal
block.
Process Connection: 1/4 (6.35 mm)
female NPT x 1/2 (12.7 mm) male
NPT.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Not position
sensitive.
Weight: 1 lb 10.6 oz (754 g).
OPTION
Example: 634ES-2-NIST.

17-4PH SS Wetted Parts, Packard Electrical Connection
3-3/8 [85.88]
31/64
[12.15]
7/8
[22.23]
35/64
[13.72]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TPT Pressure Transmitter is the ideal choice for all types of industrial
pressure applications. Machined from a solid piece of 17-4PH SS, the TPT provides a leak
proof, all metal system without O-rings, welds, or organics exposed to the pressure media.
Its design allows for stable operation when subject to shock and vibration. Utilizing
piezoresistive technology with digital compensation and temperature correction, the TPT
gives high accuracy and stability under harsh environmental conditions. Available in
ratiometric and 4 to 20 mA outputs.
Model
TPT-R01
TPT-R02
TPT-R03
TPT-R04
TPT-R05
TPT-R06
TPT-C01
TPT-C02
TPT-C03
TPT-C04
TPT-C05
Range psi (bar)

100 (6.89)
250 (17.24)
500 (34.47)
1000 (68.95)
2500(172.37)
5000 (344.74)
100 (6.89)
250 (17.24)
500 (34.47)
1000 (68.95)
2500 (172.37)
Power Requirements (VDC)

4.75 to 5.25
4.75 to 5.25
4.75 to 5.25
4.75 to 5.25
4.75 to 5.25
4.75 to 5.25
9 to 30
9 to 30
9 to 30
9 to 30
9 to 30
Output Signal
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
0.5 to 4.5 VDC
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 17-4PH SS.
Accuracy: 1% FS (RMS).
Stability: < 0.25% FS per year.
(-20 to 85C).
-13 to 185F (-20 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: Proof pressure: 2 x
FS; Burst pressure: 3 x FS.
Thermal Effect:
Zero shift: 0.01% FS per 1C;
Span error: 0.02% FS per 1C.
Power Requirements: See table.
Output Signal: See table.
Loop Resistance: < 100 .
Electrical Connection: Packard
connector.
Process Connections: 1/4-18 male
NPT.
Shock: 20 g.
Vibration: 50 g @ 20 to 2000 Hz.
Weight: 0.20 lb (0.09 kg).
OPTION
ACCESSORY
A-960, 3 packard cable
99
3/4 NPT
3-3/8 [85.73]
5-5/16
[134.94]
100_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:15 AM Page 100
PRESSURE
Series
626 & 628
Complete Offering of Ranges, Connections and Outputs
General Purpose Housing (-GH)
626 with LED Display (CH housing only)

Scan here
to watch
product video
Conduit Housing (-CH)
*Please see our website for dimensional drawings.
The Series 626 Pressure Transmitters possess a highly precise 0.25% full scale
accuracy piezo-resistive sensor contained in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X (IP66) stainless
steel general purpose housing or cast aluminum conduit housing.
The Series 628 Pressure Transmitters are ideal for OEMs with 1% full scale accuracy
sensors. The transmitter is also available in the general purpose stainless steel housing
and the cast aluminum conduit housing.
The corrosion resistant 316L stainless steel wetted parts allow the Series 626 and 628
transmitters to measure the pressure in a multitude of processes from hydraulic oils to
chemicals. The Series 626 and 628 are available in absolute and pressure ranges with a
variety of optional outputs, process connections and electrical terminations to allow you to
select the right transmitter for your application.
APPLICATIONS
Compressors
Pumping systems
Irrigation equipment
Hydraulic
Industrial process monitoring
FEATURES
Metal conduit housing option
Robust 316 SS oil filled sensor
Compact design
100
General Purpose Housing (-GH) with DIN C
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Type 316LSS.
Accuracy:
626 : 0.25% F.S.;
: 0.20% RSS;
628 : 1.0% F.S.;
: 0.5% RSS;
626 Absolute Ranges : 0.5% F.S.;
: 0.30% RSS.
(Includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability.)
Temperature Limit: 0 to 200F (-18 to 93C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F (includes zero and span).
Power Requirements: 10-30 VDC(for 4-20 mA, 0-5, 1-5, 1-6 VDCoutputs); 13-30
VDC (for 0-10, 2-10 VDCoutputs); 5 VDC 0.5 VDC (for 0.5-4.5 VDC ratio-metric
output).
Output Signal: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC,1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 0.5-4.5 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 0-1000 Ohms max. R max = 50 (Vps-10) Ohms (4-20 mA
output), 5K Ohms (0-5, 1-5, 1-6, 0-10, 2-10, 0.5-4.5 VDCoutput).
Stability: 1.0% FS/year (Typ.).
Current Consumption: 38 mAmaximum (for 4-20 mA output); 10 mA maximum
(for 0-5, 1-5, 1-6, 0-10, 2-10, 0.5-4.5 VDC output); 140 mA maximum (for all
626/628/629-CH with optional LED).
Electrical Connections: Conduit Housing (-CH): terminal block, 1/2 female NPT
conduit; General Purpose Housing (-GH):cable DIN EN 175801-803-C.
Process Connection: 1/4 male or female NPT and BSPT.
101_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:34 AM Page 101
Maximum
Pressure (psig)
30
30
10
30
60
100
200
300
Over
Pressure (psig)
45
45
50
150
300
300
500
750
Range
Number
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
26
Pressure
Range (psig)
0-200
0-300
0-500
0-1000
0-1500
0-3000
0-5000
0-8000
Maximum
Pressure (psig)
400
600
1000
2000
3000
6000
7500
10000
PRESSURE
PressureLimits
Range Pressure
Number Range
0-15 psia
00
15-0 psia
30
0-5 psig
06
0-15 psig
07
0-30 psig
08
0-50 psig
09
0-100 psig
10
0-150
11
Over
Pressure (psig)
1000
1500
2500
5000
5000
7500
10000
12000
Ordering Chart
Accuracy
626
628
-00
-01
-02
-03
-04
-05
-06
-07
-08
-09
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-22
-15
-16
-18
-19
-26
-67
-71
-75
-81
Range
Housing
-CH
-GH
Process
Connection
-P1
-P2
-P3
-P5
-P9
Electrical
Connection
-E1
-E3
-E4
-E5
-E6
-E8
Signal Output
-S1
-S2
-S4
-S5
-S7
-AT
-NIST
-LED
Options

0-15 psia
0-30 psia
0-50 psia
0-100 psia
0-200 psia
0-300 psia
0-5 psi
0-15 psi
0-30 psi
0-50 psi
0-100 psi
0-150 psi
0-200 psi
0-300 psi
0-500 psi
0-600 psi
0-1000 psi
0-1500 psi
0-3000 psi
0-5000 psi
0-8000 psi
0-0.5 bar
0-2.5 bar
0-10 bar
0-40 bar
Conduit Housing
General Purpose Housing
1/4 male NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 male BSPT
1/4 female SAE with Refrigerant Valve Depressor 1
1/2 male NPT 1
Cable Gland with 3 of Prewired Cable
DIN EN 175801-803-C 1
1/2 female NPT Conduit 2
M-12 4 Pin Connector
Packard Connector
4-20 mA
1-5 VDC
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
0.5-4.5 VDC 1
Aluminum Tag
NIST Traceable Certificate
Bright Red LED display 23
1Available with -GHHousing only

2Available with -CH Housing only
3LED option is not NEMA 4X (IP66)
4Power Requirement: 5 VDC 10%
ACCESSORIES
A-164, 16.4 (5 m) cable with M-12 4-pin female connector
101
102_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:40 AM Page 102
PRESSURE
Series
628CR
OEM Pressure Transmitter, NEMA 4X (IP66)
55/64 [21.83]
7/8 [22.23]
HEX
2-27/64 [61.52]
3-13/64 [81.36]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series 628CR Pressure Transmitter, contains a low cost ceramic sensor enclosed
in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X (IP65) stainless steel body. Ideal for the budget conscious
OEMs that require high levels of performance, reliability and stability at an unbeatable
price. The 628CR enclosure is small and lightweight for optimum compatibility with OEM
systems. The design allows for a variety of pressure ranges from 30 to 500 psi and optional
electrical connections allowing you to select the right transmitter for your application.
APPLICATIONS
Pump monitoring
Compressors
Irrigation equipment
HVAC
Pneumatic systems
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Wetted Materials: Ceramic,
fluoroelastomer, 316LSS.
Accuracy: 1.0% FS (includes
linearity, hysteresis and repeatability).
to 85C).
0 to 175F (-18 to 79C).
PressureLimit:
Max pressure:2x range;
Burst pressure: 3x range.
Ordering Chart
628CR
Accuracy
Range
-08
-09
-10
-12
-13
-14
-71
-90
-91
-75
-92
-93
-81
-GH
Housing
Process
Connection
Electrical
Connection
-P1
-P3
-E1
-E3
-E4
Signal Output
Options
102
-S1
-AT
-NIST
1.0% Full Scale Accuracy

0-30 psi
0-50 psi
0-100 psi
0-200 psi
0-300 psi
0-500 psi
0-2.5 Bar
0-4 Bar
0-6 Bar
0-10 Bar
0-16 Bar
0-25 Bar
0-40 Bar
1/4 male NPT
1/4 male BSPT
DIN EN175801-803-C
4-20 mA
Aluminum Tag
NIST Traceable Certificate

Response Time: 3 ms typ.
Loop Resistance: 0-1200 max.
Electrical Connections: Cable or DIN
connector.
or 1/4 male BSPT.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any
position.
Weight: 4.0 oz.
103_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:53 AM Page 103
Flush Diaphragm Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
FDT
Non-liquid Filled, 0.5% F.S. Accuracy, SS Wetted Parts

FLUOROELASTOMER
[FKM] O-RING
1 HEX
7/16-20 UNF
FLUSH
DIAPHRAGM
1 HEX
BENDIX 4 PIN
CONNECTOR
DTIH-8-4PN
1
[25.40]
4-20 MA
3/8 [10.16]
3/8 [10.16]
3-3/4 [95.89]
2-1/4 [56.52]
FDT-V
The Series FDT Flush Diaphragm Transmitter is designed for highly cyclical
conditions. Flush sensor feature prevents any potential inaccuracies due to build-up or
blockage which is a typical problem found in most non-flush transmitter sensors. Units have
a non-oil filled sensor element that provides resistance to temperature fluctuations.
Manufactured from a solid piece of steel, the sensing diaphragm can withstand the most
abrasive/cyclical applications. Series FDT transmitters perform well in high cyclical
environments with the presence of water-hammering or spiking.
Flush feature greatly reduces chance of leakage. Tough materials allow the unit to
withstand harsh process conditions. Advanced manufacturing techniques, extreme
environmental burn-in, and thorough residual stress relieving procedures ensure unit will
maintain its high performance standard over time.
Series FDT
Diaphragm Transmitter
Output
-A
4 to 20 mA
-V
0 to 5 VDC
Range
-01
100 psi
-02
150 psi
-03
200 psi
-04
300 psi
-06
500 psi
-11
1000 psi
-12
2000 psi
-15
5000 psi
Option
-NPT
1/4 male NPT
-C08
0.25% FS accuracy
Note: Contact factory for additional range availability.
Series
636
2-1/2 [63.87]
3 [77.21]
1/2 [13.34]
1/2 [13.34]
FDT-A
SPECIFICATIONS
gases, adhesives, slurries, materials
that can harden, or where a pressure
cavity is not desired.
Wetted Materials: 316 & 15-5 SST.
Accuracy: 0.5% F.S. (includes nonlinearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Stability: 0.25% F.S. per year.
to 93C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 0
to 170F (-18 to 77C).
Pressure Limit: 150% FS; Burst:
200% FS.
Thermal Effect: 1.5% FSO over
compensated range.

Output Signal: FDT-A: 4 to 20 mADC;
FDT-V: 0 to 5 VDC.
Response Time: <1mS.
Loop Resistance: FDT-A: 0 to 1.5 ;
FDT-V: 100 .
Electrical Connections: 4-pin.
Process Connection: 7/16-20 UNF
male flush diaphragm. Optional 1/4
male NPT.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in any
position.
ACCESSORY
A-168, Mating connector for 4 pin M-12
OPTION
Fixed Range Pressure Transmitter

Stainless Steel, Explosion-proof, Accuracy 0.30%, 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC Signal
3/4 NPT
1-1/4 [31.75] HEX
#22 AWG LEADS 24 [609.60]

LEADS PLUS SHIELD/DRAIN
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-25/32
[45.24]
1 [25.40] HEX
4-1/16
[103.19]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/2 NPT
The Series 636 Pressure Transmitter is a low cost, fixed range, stainless steel
transmitter with 0.30% accuracy. It is designed to continuously measure pressure for
years in even the toughest environmental and media conditions. Select from 4 ranges to 0
to 300 psig (0 to 20 bar) with choice of 4 to 20 mA output (model 636) or 1 to 5 VDC output
(model 636LP). Transmitters are explosion-proof, (FM approved) and meet NACE
standards for offshore applications.
4 to 20 mA
OUT
636-0
636-1
636-2
636-3
1 to 5 VDC
OUT
636-0-LP
636-1-LP
636-2-LP
636-3-LP
Operating
Range, PSI
0-15
0-30
0-100
0-300
Operating
Range, Bar
0-1
0-2
0-7
0-20
OPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, gas or vapor.
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS.
Fill Fluid: DC 200 silicone (standard).
Accuracy: 0.30% of calibrated span.
Stability: 0.5% of upper range limit
for six months.
Temperature Limits: Electronics
(ambient): -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process interface: -40 to 212F (-40 to
100C).
Pressure Limits: 300% upper range
limit.
-20 to 180F (-29 to 82C).
Thermal Effect: (includes zero and
span). Between -20 and 180F (-29
and 82C). 2.0% per 50F (28C).
(636), 8 to 14 VDC (636LP), reverse
polarity protection.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, limited

to 30 mA DC (636), 1 to 5 VDC
(636LP).
Zero & Span Adjustments:
Null: 4.0 mA 2% span (636),1 VDC
1% span (636LP);
Span: 16.0 mA 1% span (636),
4 VDC 1% span (636LP).
Loop Resistance: 900 max @ 30 V.
Electrical Connection: 3/4 female
NPT 24 (61 cm), 22 AWG.
NPT.
Weight: 0.83 Ib (374 g).
Agency Approvals: CSA, FM.
FM and CSA approved explosion-proof
for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, &
D, Class II Groups E, F, & G Class III.
103
0-5 VDC
BENDIX 4 PIN FLUOROELASTOMER

[FKM] O-RING
CONNECTOR
DTIH-8-4PN
7/16-20 UNF
FLUSH
1
DIAPHRAGM
[25.40]
104_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:48 AM Page 104
PRESSURE
Series
3200G
Explosion-proof Pressure Transmitter
HART , Push Button Configuration, Rangeability (100:1)
4-1/4 [108]
2-3/4
[70]
3-1/2 [89]
1-1/2
[38]
6-1/4
[159]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1/2 NPT
The Mercoid Series 3200G Smart Pressure Transmitter is a microprocessor-based

high performance transmitter, which has flexible pressure calibration, push button
configuration, and programmable using HART Communication. The Series 3200G is
capable of being configured with the zero and span buttons, a field calibrator is not required
for configuration. The transmitter software compensates for thermal effects, improving
performance. EEPROM stores configuration settings and stores sensor correction
coefficients in the event of shutdowns or power loss. The Series 3200G is FM approved for
use in hazardous (Classified) locations. The 100:1 rangeability allows the smart transmitter
to be configured to fit any application.
FEATURES
Completely configurable using zero/span buttons (no calibrator required)
Rangeability (100:1)
High accuracy (0.075%)
Automatic sensor temperature compensation
Fail-mode process function
Model
3200G-1-FM-1-1
3200G-2-FM-1-1
3200G-3-FM-1-1
3200G-4-FM-1-1
3200G-1-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-2-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-3-FM-1-1-LCD
3200G-4-FM-1-1-LCD
Range
psi (kPa)
-14.5 to 21 (-100 to 150)
-14.5 to 217 (-100 to 1500)
0 to 725 (0 to 5000)
0 to 3600 (0 to 25000)
-14.5 to 21 (-100 to 150)
-14.5 to 217 (-100 to 1500)
0 to 725 (0 to 5000)
0 to 3600 (0 to 25000)
Calibrated Span
(Min. to Max.) psi (kPa)
0.22 to 21 (1.5 to 150)
2 to 217 (15 to 1500)
7.25 to 725 (50 to 5000)
36 to 3600 (250 to 25000)
0.22 to 21 (1.5 to 150)
2 to 217 (15 to 1500)
7.25 to 725 (50 to 5000)
36 to 3600 (250 to 25000)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, steam, liquids or vapors.
Accuracy: 0.075% FS (@ 20C).
Rangeability: 100:1 turn down.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C);
Ambient: Without LCD -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
With LCD -22 to 176F (-30 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.125% span/32C.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA / HART Communication.
Damping Time: 0.25 to 60 seconds.
Loop Resistance:
Operation: 0 to 1500 ;
HART Communication: 250 to 500 .
Electrical Connection: Two 1/2 female NPT conduit, screw terminal.
Display: Optional 5 digit LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and explosion proof for Class I,
Div I Groups A, B, C and D.
Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, FM.
Max. Pressure
psi (bar)
58 (4)
580 (40)
2000 (138)
10000 (690)
58 (4)
580 (40)
2000 (138)
10000 (690)
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Contact factory for custom calibration.

ACCESSORIES
A-630, Stainless steel angle type bracket with SSbolts
A-631, Stainless steel flat type bracket with SSbolts
BBV-0N, 2-valve block manifold
DevCom2000, HART Communication Protocol Software
104
105_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:57 AM Page 105
3200G-2-FM-3-1-LESS2A105S2-05-LCD
3200G Explosion-Proof Pressure Transmitter
-14.5 to 21 psig (factory set 0 to 21 psig)
-14.5 to 217 psig (factory set 0 to 217 psig)
0 to 725 psig
0 to 3600 psig
0 to 8500 psig
FM approved
ATEX approved
NEMA 4X (IP66) (Only available with 316 SS housing)
1/2 female NPT
Diaphragm seal
1/2 female NPT
1 extended diaphragm seal direct mount
1 extended diaphragm seal capillary type high
1 flush diaphragm seal direct mount
1 flush diaphragm seal capillary type
2 (50 mm) 316L SS
3 (80 mm) 316L SS
ANSI class 150#
ANSI class 300#
DIN PN 10/16
DINPN 25/40
JIS 10 K
JIS 20 K
No extension (standard for flush mount)
2 extension
4 extension
6 extension
316L SS diaphragm
PTFE and 316L SS diaphragm
Hastelloy C-276 diaphragm
Tantallum diaphragm
Silicon oil (-40 to 400F)
0 to 20 feet
5 digit LCD
316 SS housing (Only available with WP approval)
NIST calibration
Custom calibration
PRESSURE
3200G 2 FM
3 1 LES S2 A1 05 S 2 05 LCD
3200G
1
2
3
4
5
Approval
FM
ATEX
WP
Process Connection
1
3
1
Diaphragm Seal Type
LED
LES
LFD
LFS
MountingFlange
S2
S3
Mounting Flange
A1
Rating
A2
D1
D2
J1
J2
Extension Length
00
05
10
15
Diaphragm Material
S
P
H
T
Fill Fluid
2
Capillary Length
XX
Options
LCD
SSH
NIST
CC
Example
Series
Range
Custom Calibration Values

Primary Units
Upper Range Limit
Lower Range Limit
Damping Time
Display Mode
in H2O, ft H2O, mm H2O, in Hg, psig, g/cm2, kg/cm2, Pa, kPa, bar, mbar, Torr, Atm, mm Hg
20 mA value
4 mA value
0 to 60 seconds
Primary unit, %, mA, rotate
Model
DevCom2000
HART Communication Protocol Software

Includes USB HART Modem
DevCom2000 Software
HART Field Device
Windows-Based PC
The Model DevCom2000 HART Communicator Software turns your PC into a fullfeatured HART communicator. Now it is possible to configure transmitters and control
valves at the desktop or in the field. DevCom2000 uses device descriptions (DDs) to retrieve
data that is stored in the memory of smart field devices. This software is a simple, reliable
and secure method to add new measurement values to control systems without the need of
additional wires. This software eliminates the need to purchase and maintain a separate
handheld HART communicator.
FEATURES
Complete DD library
Includes USB HART modem
USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible
Self powered modem
Model DevCom2000, HART Communicator Software
SPECIFICATIONS
HART Communicator Software
DD Library: Included.
Generic DD: Included.
Operating System: Windows NT,
Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Vista (32/64), Windows 7
(32/64).
USB HART MODEM
Material: High strength ABS plastic.
Temperature Limits: 0 to 50C (32 to
122F).
Storage Temperature: -40 to 85C
(-40 to 185F).
Humidity: 0 to 99% (non-condensing).
HART Cable Length: 4 (1.2 m).
USB HART Modem
HART Cable Connectors: Minigrabber.

USB Cable Length: 18 (0.5 m).
USB Cable Connector: USB Type A.
USB: USB 1.1, USB 2.0.
Power: USB port provides power to
unit.
Current Draw: 20 mA.
Output: 600 mVpp.
Leakage: < 10 uA.
Isolation Voltage: 1500 VDC.
HART: HART 4, HART 5, HART 6,
HART 7, HART Physical Layer Spec
HCF_SPEC-54.
Windows, Windows Vista, Windows NT , Windows XP, are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
105
106_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:17 AM Page 106
Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
Series
IS626
For Use In Hazardous Locations
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
1 [25.40]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
MaleNPT/BSPTConnector with Cable Gland
Male NPT/BSPTConnector with Male M-12 Connector
1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
1 [25.40]
5-3/16 [131.75]
6-1/4 [158.75] MAX
5-1/16 [128.58]
5-21/32 [143.67]
1 [25.40]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
FEMALE
1-1/16 [26.99] HEX
1-1/16 [26.00] HEX
1 [25.40]
1/4 NPT OR
1/4 BSPT
FEMALE
5-1/16 [128.58]
5-21/32 [143.67]
Female NPT/BSPTConnector with Male M-12 Connector
5-3/16 [131.76]
5-1/4 [158.75]
FemaleNPT/BSPTConnector with Cable Gland
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series IS626 Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter converts pressure into a
standard 4 to 20 mA output signal. The Series IS626 can be used to accurately measure
compatible gases and liquids compatible with its 316/316L stainless steel wetted parts.
Series IS626 full-scale accuracy is 0.25%. Designed for industrial environments with a
NEMA 4X (IP66) housing, this transmitter resists most effects of shock and vibration.
Models are available with a 3 cable or M-12 4 pin connection.
The IS626 is UL listed for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. The protection method
is by Intrinsic Safety, ia. It was investigated by UL under UL Standard 913 Sixth Edition
and CSA Standard No. 157-92.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring pressure in hazardous environments
Model
IS626-00-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-07-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-08-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-09-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-10-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-11-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-12-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-13-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-14-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-15-GH-P1-E1-S1
IS626-16-GH-P1-E1-S1
Range
15 psia1
15 psig
30 psig
50 psig
100 psig
150 psig
200 psig
300 psig
500 psig
1000 psig
1500 psig
Maximum Pressure
(psig)
30
30
60
100
200
300
400
600
1000
2000
3000
Over Pressure
(psig)
150
150
300
300
500
750
1000
1500
2500
5000
5000
Note: 1Absolute pressure ranges are not UL approved.

2For optional M-12 4 pin electrical connection change E1 to E6.
ACCESSORIES
A-295, Female four pin M-12 to cable gland connector
A-231, 16 (5 m) shielded cable with 4 pin female M-12 connection
MTL5041, Intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, Intrinsically safe zener barrier
106
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Type 316, 316L SS.
Accuracy: 0.25% full-scale; Absolute range: 0.5% full-scale (includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability).
Temperature Limit: 0 to 176F (-18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% FS/F (includes zero and span).
Pressure Limits: See Pressure Range Table.
Loop Resistance: 0 - 900 max.
Current Consumption: 38 mA (max).
Electrical Connections: 3 ft cable or 4-pin M-12 connector.
Process Connection: 1/4 male or female NPT and BSPT.
Weight: 8.9 oz (252 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, cUL and UL Intrinsically Safe to UL Standard 913.
For use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
Class I Div. 1 Groups A,B,C,D
Class II Div. 1 Groups E,F,G
Class III Div. 1
Temperature Code: T4 @ 80C ambient
Install in accordance with control drawing 01-700797-00.
WARNING To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres,
disconnect power before servicing.
Use with approved safety barriers using entity evaluation.
OPTION
Example: IS626-00-GH-P1-E1-S1-NIST.
107_Layout 2 7/8/14 10:18 AM Page 107
Flow Sensors
pages 110-117
Fume Hood Monitors

page 118
Air Flow Switches

page 119
Air Velocity
Transmitters
pages 120-123
Humidity Switches
page 124
Humidity/Temperature
Transmitters
pages 125-130
Volatile Organic
Compound
(VOC) Monitor
page 130
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
pages 131-135
Gas Sensing
Transmitters
page 136
Occupancy Sensors
page 137
Air Filters
page 138
AIRQUALITY | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 108-109
107
AIRQUALITY
108_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:28 AM Page 108
Dwyer transmitter signals precise air velocity adjustments to

computer-controlled variable-speed fan motor.
In variable air volume (VAV) HVAC systems, a computerized control provides precise
adjustment of air volume to meet changing system needs with maximum energy
efficiency. The Dwyer Series 641 has an optional LED display for local indication of
air flow. The LED display provides a quick, visual acknowledgement of proper system
performance. The computer reacts to any change in velocity by signaling the motor
control to increase or decrease fan speed to maintain the required velocity. The
computer, taking inputs from other ambient condition sensors, will establish a new
required air velocity and signal an appropriate adjustment in fan speed.
Air velocity transmitter controls drying oven air flow.

The flow of heated air is held to a constant predetermined velocity in this carefully
controlled low temperature process drying oven. The constant temperature air supply
is modulated by a set of inlet louvers operated by a servo-driven actuator. A Dwyer
Series 641 Air Velocity Transmitter has an optional LED display for local indication of
air flow. The LED display provides a quick, visual acknowledgement of proper system
performance. The controller compares the Series 641s signal to the setpoint in the
controller and continuously signals appropriate louver adjustments to the actuator.
108
Either of two methods used to measure air velocity.

To measure air velocity, connect a Dwyer Magnehelic or Minihelic differential
pressure gage, or a Dwyer Durablock inclined manometer to a Pitot tube in the air
stream as shown. The alternative method at right requires only a static tap plus a
simple tube in center of duct to pick up total pressure. The differential pressure reading
on the gage or manometer is velocity pressure, which may be converted to air velocity
by calculation or reference to conversion chart. Where air density is known, the gage
manometer can also be calibrated directly in velocity units. If you need an alarm or
control function to maintain a preset air velocity limit, install a Photohelic switch/gage.
Dwyer stainless steel Pitot tubes are made in numerous lengths and configurations
to serve in the smallest to the largest duct size.
Eliminate the need for Pitot tubes, orifice plates, differential pressure
sensors and temperature sensors with a Series VTT.
Installing air velocity measurement systems can be a burdensome process
specifying Pitot tubes, static pressure tips, orifice plates, differential pressure
transmitters, etc. Dwyer offers the VTT Air Velocity/Temperature Transmitter to
consolidate these components into one convenient instrument. The VTT can be easily
installed into the duct or air stream to accurately measure air flow while providing
local indication as well as linear analog output for both velocity and temperature.
Microprocessor-based technology ensures accurate, repeatable results. The VTT
combines these features for simple, reliable airflow measurement without the
problems associated with complex, traditional systems.
109_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:29 AM Page 109
AIRQUALITY
Accurately measure and control the humidity and temperature in
office buildings.
The Dwyer Series WHT Humidity Transmitter and Series O-4 Temperature Sensors
are used to control the environmental conditions on hog and poultry farms. The
amount the animals eat is linked to how comfortable the environmental conditions
are. Thus the temperature, humidity, amount of light and other ambient conditions are
tightly controlled to insure optimal animal growth.
The Dwyer Series RHP-E/N wall mount humidity and temperature transmitter can
be combined with a DDC controller and a damper to provide comfortable working
conditions in an office building. The amount of air flow entering the room is varied
based on the temperature and humidity readings of the Series RHP-E/N. The compact
size and mounting configuration allow this transmitter to be discretely mounted in any
room.
Greatly reduce the time it takes to dry wood.
Conserving energy by conditioning occupied rooms.
The Dwyer Model RHP-2D11 monitors the humidity and temperature in the return
air ducts in wood dehumidification rooms. Large fans are used to circulate air across
the room. As dry conditioned air moves across the wood, it absorbs moisture from
the wood. The humidity level of the air in the return air duct is representative of how
much moisture is in the wood. When the humidity in the duct declines, it signifies that
less dry conditioned air is needed to be supplied to the room.
Since the number of people in a conference room or classroom varies throughout the
day, the amount of conditioned air needed to properly ventilate the room varies as
well. As the number of people in a room increase, the concentration of carbon dioxide
in the room will also increase. The Dwyer Series CDT, CDX and CDDcarbon dioxide
transmitters measures the amount of carbon dioxide that is emitted so that the VAV
control system can supply enough fresh air into the space to return the concentration
of carbon dioxide in the room to normal levels.
109
Temperature and humidity measurements used to optimize the

growth of hogs and poultry.
110_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:30 AM Page 110
Series
MAFS
Metal Averaging Flow Sensor

Blade Profile Provides Enhanced Performance and Minimal Flow Disruption
1
[25.40]
1/2 [12.70]
APPROX.
33/64
[12.95]
1-13/64
[30.44]
AIRQUALITY
1-35/64
[39.37]
Flow Sensors
1/4-20
THREADED 1-11/32
[34.25]
STUD
Model
MAFS-04
MAFS-06
MAFS-08
MAFS-10
MAFS-12
MAFS-14
MAFS-16
MAFS-18
MAFS-20
MAFS-22
Probe Length
(in inches)
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
Model
MAFS-24
MAFS-26
MAFS-28
MAFS-30
MAFS-32
MAFS-34
MAFS-36
MAFS-40
MAFS-48
Probe Length
(in inches)
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
40
48
Series
PAFS-1000
33/64
[12.95]
1-3/64
[26.43]
21/64
[8.46]
The Series MAFS is ideal for use with Dwyer Instruments, Inc. precision air velocity
gages, transmitters and switches. The Series MAFS uses evenly distributed total and static
pressure measuring points to deliver an accurate measurement of flows in a duct. The blade
profile provides enhanced performance with minimal flow disruption in the air stream. The
air flow measuring probe can be completely installed from the outside of round or circular
ducts, making it very quick to install. With its lightweight and durable construction, in
addition to its ease of installation, the MAFS flow sensor lends itself superbly to applications
in the HVAC industry.
4X 7/32
[5.54]
29/64
[11.41]
49/64
[19.43]
2
[50.80]
1-1/2
[38.10]
2
[50.80]
1/4
[6.35]
1/4
[6.35]
1-1/2
[38.10]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air.
Wetted Materials: Aluminum AA6063.
Accuracy: 400 to 9000 FPM (45.7 m/s); 2% FS, 3%FS for 6 and 48 length
models.
K-Factor: 0.81, 0.80 for 6 and 48 lengths, 4 length=0.82.
Max. Temperature: 400F (204C); Gasket: -31 to 230F (-35 to 110C).
Minimum Design Flow: 400 fpm (2 m/sec).
Maximum Design Flow: 12,000 fpm (60.91 m/sec).
Process Connections: Dual barb for 3/16 or 1/4 ID tubing.
Straight Run Requirements: 5 diameters or longest side dimensions.
Averaging Flow Sensor

Ideal for Sensing Fan Flow Rates
MOUNTING HOLES
2X3/16 [4.76]
FOAM GASKET
1/8 THK [6.35 THK]
PUSH-ON CONNECTIONS
FOR 3/8 POLY TUBING [9.53 OD]
3-1/2
[88.90]
2-3/4
[69.85]
7/16
[11.11]
1-1/4
[31.75]
The Series PAFS-1000 Averaging Flow Sensor is ideal for sensing differential
pressure in the inlet section of variable air volume terminal units and fan terminal units.
Units can also be used to sense differential pressure at other locations in the main or branch
duct systems.
The H port senses total pressure and the L port senses static pressure. The difference
between these signals is the differential, or velocity pressure.
For models PAFS-1002 to PAFS-1005, up to four sensing points and lengths of 3-5/32 to 929/32 (8.02 to 25.26 cm) to accommodate box size diameters of 4 to 16 (10.16 to 40.64
cm) are available. For models PAFS-1006 to PAFS -1011, up to 10 sensing points and lengths
from 12-1/2 to 23-29/32 (31.75 to 60.72 cm) are available to accommodate appropriately
sized duct dimensions.
APPLICATION
Zone control in HVAC systems
110
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: ABS/polycarbonate (UL94-5V).
Temperature Limits:
Operating: 40 to 120F (4 to 49C);
Storage: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Process Connection: 1/4 (6 mm) ID, 3/8 (10 mm) OD tubing.
Mounting Orientation: Integral flange with gasket.
Model
PAFS-1002
PAFS-1003
PAFS-1004
PAFS-1005
PAFS-1006
PAFS-1007
PAFS-1008
PAFS-1009
PAFS-1010
PAFS-1011
Length (Dimension A)
3-5/32 (8.02 cm)
5-13/32 (13.73 cm)
7-21/32 (19.55 cm)
9-29/32 (25.26 cm)
12-1/2 (31.75 cm)
14-3/4 (37.47 cm)
17-1/8 (43.50 cm)
19-13/32 (49.29 cm)
21-21/32 (55.01 cm)
23-29/32 (60.72 cm)
111_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:30 AM Page 111
Series
AFG
Averaging Flow Grid

Cost Effective Air Flow Station for Ducts up to 60
SECTION A-A
SCALE 2:1
1/64
[.396]
A
1-1/16 2
[27] [51]
A
B
AIRQUALITY
5/32
[2.38]
1-3/16
[30.16]
The Series AFG Flow Grid is an outstandingly simple yet accurate and cost effective
alternative to other duct mounted pressure sensors. Once installed and connected to a
suitable measuring instrument, the device will provide years of trouble free monitoring of
both air and gas flow. Installing the AFG Flow Grid is quick and easy, the AFG is supplied
in kit form to allow both workshop and on-site installation into a wide range of square and
circular ducts up to approximately 60.
The AFG Flow Grid is a fundamental pressure-sensing device designed to transmit a
continuous differential pressure signal. When this output is connected to a suitable
measuring instrument (i.e. manometer, pressure transducer, etc.) it may be used to
determine air velocity and volume flow rate.
How the AFG Flow Grid Works
The AFG Flow Grid consists of two tubes mounted diagonally across a square or
rectangular duct, or diametrically across a round duct. The tubes are drilled with a series
of equi-spaced holes.
The holes in one tube face directly upstream and sense total pressure, while the pairs of
holes in the second tube also face forward but at an included angle of 79 degrees, sensing
static pressure.
The total and (sub) static pressures are averaged along the length of each tube and provide
pressure signals at connectors outside the duct wall. The pressure differentials across
these connectors constitute the output signal.
Model Diameter Tube A

AFG-1 5/16 (8 mm)
AFG-2 5/8 (16 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Monitor air or compatible gas flow.
Wetted Materials: 304 SS, PVC, polyurethane, acetyl plastics, and neoprene rubber.
Accuracy: 5%.
Maximum Temperature: 176F (80C).
Velocity Range: 295.2 ft/min to 5904 ft/min (1.5 to 30 m/sec).
Diameter of Tubes: 5/16 (8 mm) or 5/8 (16 mm).
Max Duct Diagonal: 60.4 (153.4 cm).
Max Duct Diameter: 59.4 (150.9 cm).
Process Connections: 5/16 barbed.
Weight: AFG-1: 1 lb (454 g); AFG-2: 3 lb (1361 g).
APPLICATIONS
The AFG Flow Grids will give useful and reliable readings in a wide variety of in duct
locations often where other flow rate measuring devices are found to be
unsatisfactory.
The signal from an AFG Flow Grid can be used in a variety of ways, for example:
To display differential pressure, velocity or volume flow using a micro manometer,
gage or transmitter.
To give a warning of over or under flow rate using a pressure switch.
To control air supply in a system by connecting the grid to a pressure transmitter
with an electrical output which can be used to feed into a control system.
To display differential pressure on a simple fluid manometer to give visual indication
of changes in volume flow rate in the duct.
Length B
27 (688 mm)
59-4/5 (1518 mm)
111
Flow Sensors
1-11/16
[42.86]
112_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:30 AM Page 112
Series
FAFM
Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Probe

Lightweight, Durable, & Easy to Install
B
AIRQUALITY
FAFM-D-xxxx
7/8
[22.23]
LOW
HIGH
A
INLET FLOW VIEW
SECTION A-A
Application Diagram
1
[25.40]
12 [304.80]
B
INLET FLOW VIEW
4
[101.60]
1/16
[1.98]
L = Fan Inlet Dia.

L
HIGH
LOW
SECTION B-B
Application Diagram
1/16
[1.63]
L
Flow Sensors
R3/16
[4.76]
FAFM-S-xxxx
3-1/8
[79.38]
5/16
[7.70]
3-5/8
[92.20]
MOUNTING PLATES TO
BE BENT TO FIT INLET
Model FAFM-D
The Model FAFM Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Probes use evenly distributed total
and static pressure measuring points to deliver an accurate measurement of flow in a fan
inlet. The Air Flow Measuring Probes can be completely installed from outside of the fan
making it ideal for when proper duct locations are unavailable. With its lightweight and
durable construction in addition to its ease of installation, this product lends itself to being
used in the HVAC industry.
There are two versions of the model FAFM fan inlet air flow probes to choose from
depending on the depth of the fan inlet.
Please Note: A set of two fan inlet air flow measurement probes comes with
every model ordered. A set is necessary in order to ensure an accurate reading.
No more than two air flow measurement probes will be needed to obtain an accurate
reading.
MOUNTING PLATES TO
BE BENT TO FIT INLET
3/4
[19.05]
ModelFAFM-S
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.
Accuracy: 2% (Note: Field calibration may be required).
Minimum Design Flow: 400 fpm (2.03 m/sec).
Process Connections: 1/4 barb.
For fan inlets with depth less than 3-1/2 (8.89 cm): Please order a fan inlet probe
with an S suffix. This probe has a diameter of .375 (.95 cm). It employs one total flow
measuring tube and one static measuring tube. Each probe is covered with an extruded
aluminum anodized coat. Each measuring tube has multiple sensing points.
For fan inlets with depth greater than 3-1/2 (8.89 cm): Please order a fan inlet
probe with a D suffix. This probe has a diameter of 3-1/2 (8.89 cm). It employs extruded
aluminum anodized coated probes with both total and static sensors on each tube.
3/8
[9.53]
FAFM SD-
Fan inlet depth less than 3-1/2

Fan inlet depth greater than 3-1/2
Fan inlet diameter in inches where the

boxes represent the tens, ones, tenths,
and hundredths digits of the diameter
respectively.
i.e. __ __ . __ __ go to the
corresponding box in the sequence.
Example: For a fan inlet that is exactly 12 in diameter and has a depth of more than
3-1/2 the model number will be: FAFM-D-1200.
Example: For a fan inlet that is 23.89 in diameter and has a depth of less than 31/2 the model number will be: FAFM-S-2389.
Example: For a fan inlet that is 6.24 in diameter and has a depth of less than 3-1/2
the model number will be: FAFM-S-0624.
112
113_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:31 AM Page 113
Series
DAFM
Duct Air Flow Measuring Probe

Lightweight, Durable, & Easy to Install
AIRQUALITY
1
[25.40]
1/8
[3.18]
OUTER RADIUS TO MATCH

INNER RADIUS OF DUCT
1 INCH OUTER PERIMETER
1/8
[3.18]
1/8
[3.18]
1/4 BARB FITTINGS TO

BE CENTERED ON PLATE
1-7/16
[36.51]
L
1/2
[12.39]
1/2
[12.39]
1-1/16
[52.39]
1/4 4X
[6.35]
3/8
[9.52]
2
[50.80]
4
[101.60]
1-7/16
[36.51]
The Model DAFM Duct Air Flow Measuring Probe uses evenly distributed total and
static pressure measuring points to deliver an accurate measurement of flow in a duct.
The Air Flow Measuring Probe can be completely installed from outside of the duct making
it very easy to install. With its lightweight and durable construction in addition to its ease
of installation, this product lends itself to being used in the HVAC industry. These air flow
measuring probes may be ordered for either round or rectangular ducts.
In order to ensure accurate measurements you must determine the number of probes
needed for your size duct. If the duct is rectangular, then consult the chart to determine
appropriate quantity of probes.
If the duct is round, it is only necessary to purchase two probes for any size of duct and
mount them perpendicular to each other.
Short Duct Dimension <12 12 to 23 24 to 35 36 to 59 60 to 89 >89

Number of Probes
1
3
2
4
6
5
3/8
[9.52]
5
[127.00]
6
[152.40]
1/4
[6.35] 2X
1/2
[12.70]
HIGH
5
[127.00]
6
[152.40]
L = Smallest Duct Diameter

or Length
1/8
[3.18]
1/2
[12.70]
Flow Sensors
INNER RADIUS TO MATCH

OUTER RADIUS OF DUCT
4 INCH OUTER PERIMETER
1/2
[12.70]
1/2
[12.70]
2-1/16
[52.39]
1/4 2X
[6.35]
1/4 4X
[6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Aluminum with clear anodized finish.
Accuracy: 2% (Note: Field calibration may be required).
Minimum Design Flow: 400 fpm (2.03 m/sec).
Process Connections: 1/4 barb.
Straight Run Requirements: 5 diameters or longest side dimensions.
Model
DAFM-000
DAFM-001
DAFM-002
DAFM-003
DAFM-004
DAFM-005
DAFM-006
DAFM-007
DAFM-008
DAFM-009
DAFM-100
DAFM-101
DAFM-102
DAFM-103
DAFM-104
DAFM-105
DAFM-106
DAFM-107
DAFM-108
DAFM-109
Duct Shape
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Round
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Rectangular
Smallest Duct Diameter

or Length (L)
6 (15.24 cm)
8 (20.32 cm)
10 (25.4 cm)
12 (30.48 cm)
14 (35.56 cm)
16 (40.64 cm)
18 (45.72 cm)
20 (50.8 cm)
22 (55.88 cm)
24 (60.96 cm)
6 (15.24 cm)
8 (20.32 cm)
10 (25.4 cm)
12 (30.48 cm)
14 (35.56 cm)
16 (40.64 cm)
18 (45.72 cm)
20 (50.8 cm)
22 (55.88 cm)
24 (60.96 cm)
For larger sizes up to 96 (243.84 cm), please contact factory.
113
114_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:31 AM Page 114
Series
FLST
Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement Station

Rectangular, Oval or Circular Configurations
F
TOTAL PRESSURE TAKEOFF

1/4 COMPRESSION FITTING
AIRQUALITY
STATIC PRESSURE TAKEOFF

Dimensions
Circular Flange
Station
Flange
Size D Thickness
8 - 15
.064
16 - 44
.064
45 - 72
.188
73 & Over .188
Oval Flange
Station
Flange
Width W Thickness
Up to 48 .064
Over 48 .188
Rectangular Flange
Station Size
H or W
8 - 72
73 & Over
Circular Style
.25 RADIUS
BEADING EDGE [TYP]
TOTAL PRESSURE TAKEOFF 1/4

COMPRESSION FITTING
STATIC
PRESSURE
TAKEOFF 1/4
W
L + 2.5
Oval Style
[W]
TOTAL PRESSURE [T.P.] TAKEOFF

AIRFLOW
Flow Sensors
5 [F]
STATIC PRESSURE [S.P.] TAKEOFF

[H]
Flange
Size F
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
Casing
Length L
6
6
10
12
Flange
Size F
1-1/2
1-1/2
Casing
Length L
6
8
Flange
Size F
1-1/2
2
Rectangular Style
The Series FLST Airflow Measurement Station is easy to install simply connect
the tubing to the station fittings, then to a differential pressure manometer, gage,
transmitter or switch. Single or multiple airflow elements are factory mounted and prepiped in a casing designed for flanged connection to the ductwork. Standard materials
consist of a G90 galvanized casing and 6063-T5 anodized aluminum flow sensors, suitable
for most HVAC applications.
The Series FLST utilizes an airflow averaging element in a head-type device, generating a
differential (velocity) pressure signal similar to the orifice, venturi, and other head
producing primary elements. Strategically located sensing ports continually sample the
total and static pressures when inserted normal to flow.
Total pressures sensed by the upstream ports are continually averaged within the airflow
element in an isolated chamber. The static sensing ports are averaged in a second isolation
chamber. Multiple elements are joined together for connection to a differential
measurement device (gage, transmitter, etc.) for flow measurement and indication
purposes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Within 2% of actual flow when installed in accordance with published
recommendations.
K-Factor: 0.97.
Velocity Range:100 to 10,000 FPM (0.51-51 m/s).
Wetted Material: Elements: 6063-T5 anodized aluminum; Casings: 16 ga G90
galvanized steel.
Temperature Limits: Galvanized casings and aluminum elements 350F (177C)
continuous operation (in air) 400F (204C) intermittent operation (in air).
Humidity: All airflow stations 0 to 100% non condensing.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fittings.
How To Order:
Rectangular or Oval Models
FEATURES
Low signal-to-noise ratio
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the element
Factory mounted and pre-piped in a flanged duct section (casing)
2% accuracy throughout velocity ranges of 100 FPM and over
Standard construction includes galvanized casing and 6063-T5 anodized aluminum
flow sensors
Standard airflow stations can be operated (in air) continuously in
temperatures up to 350F or intermittently in temperatures up to 400F
All airflow stations can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to 100%
Standard airflow stations have good salt air resistance and are suitable for most
HVAC applications
FLSTR - Rectangular
O - Oval
Height (in) x Width (in)
Option
IM - Internal Pressure
Connections
F - Flange for Oval Mount Station
Circular Models
FLST-C
Diameter (in)
Note: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be
located on the longer of the two dimensions.
114
115_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:32 AM Page 115
Series FLST Rectangular or Oval

10
X
X
12
X
X
X
14
X
X
X
X
16
X
X
X
X
X
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
24
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
40
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
52
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
56
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
60
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
84
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
28
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
34
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
108
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flow Sensors
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
8
X
AIRQUALITY
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
OPTIONS
IM Internal Pressure Connections (Rectangular Stations Only)
F (Oval Stations Only)
SS1 316 SS Elements with 16 GA galvanized casing
SS2 316 SS Elements with 16 GA 304 SS casing
SS3 316 SSElements with 16 GA 316 SS casing
Series FLST Circular*

Size (in) 8
10
12
22
32
14
24
16
18
26
28
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Size (in) 44
54
84
108
60
90
66
72
96
102
78
48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Note: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located on the longer of the two dimensions
36
X
114
X
40
X
120
X
115
116_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:33 AM Page 116
Series
STRA
Duct Mounted Airflow Measurement Station

Integral Flow Straightener, Ideal for Turbulent Measuring Conditions
AIRQUALITY
Casing
Length L
8
8
10
12
STATIC PRESSURE
[S.P.] TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
AIRFLOW
Circular Flange Dimensions

Station
Flange
Flange
Size D
Thickness Size F
8 15
.064
1
16 44
.064
1-1/2
45 72
.188
1-1/2
73 &Over .188
2
[F]
[L]
TOTAL PRESSURE
[T.P.] TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
[D]
AIR
STRAIGHTENER
3.25
.25 RADIUS
BEADED EDGE [TYP]
TOTAL PRESSURE [T.P.] TAKEOFF

STATIC PRESSURE
[S.P.] TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
AIRFLOW
OvalFlange Dimensions (Optional)

Flange *Casing
Station
Flange
Length L
Width W Thickness Size
1-1/2 8
Up to 44 .064
1-1/2 10
Over 44 .188
[H]
Flow Sensors
*Note: All oval flow stations without flange

have a casing length of 8.
[L]
[L+2.5]
Station
Size H or W
8 72
73 &Over
Flange
Size F
1-1/2
2
TOTAL PRESSURE
[T.P.] TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
[F]
AIRFLOW
Rectangular Flange Dimensions
[W]
[W]
STATIC PRESSURE
[S.P.] TAKEOFF
1/4 COMPRESSION
FITTING
[H]
Selectable Sizes: 1. Oval or rectangular H or W dimensions in inches can be the following:8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56,
60, 66, 72, 78, 84, 90, 96, 102, 108, 114 or 120. 2. Circular D dimensionininches can be the following: 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 54,
60, 66, 72, 78, 84, 90, 96, 102, 108, 114 or 120
The Series STRA Airflow Measurement Station is easy to install simply connect
the tubing to the station fittings, then to a differential pressure manometer, gage,
transmitter or switch. Single or multiple airflow elements are factory mounted and prepiped in a casing designed for flanged connection to the ductwork. The Series STRA utilizes
an airflow averaging element in a head-type device, generating a differential (velocity)
pressure signal similar to the orifice, venturi, and other head producing primary elements.
It has been developed with a honeycomb airflow straightening section for use in duct
systems having highly turbulent conditions at the point of measurement. Strategically
located sensing ports continually sample the total and static pressures when inserted
normal to flow. Total pressures sensed by the upstream ports are continually averaged
within the airflow element in an isolated chamber. The static sensing ports are averaged
in a second isolation chamber. Multiple elements are joined together for connection to a
differential measurement device (gage, transmitter, etc.) for flow measurement and
indication purposes.
FEATURES
Low signal-to-noise ratio
Honeycomb airflow straightening section with 1/2 opening by 3 depth
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the element
Factory mounted and pre-piped in a flanged duct section (casing)
2% accuracy throughout velocity ranges of 100 fpm and over
Standard construction includes galvanized casing and 6063-T5 anodized
aluminum flow sensors
Standard airflow stations can be operated (in air) continuously in temperatures
up to 350F or intermittently in temperatures up to 400F
All airflow stations can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to 100%
Standard airflow stations have good salt air resistance and are suitable for most
HVAC applications
Great for use where turbulent conditions exist
116
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Within 2% of actual flow when installed in accordance with published
recommendations.
K Factor:0.97.
Velocity Range:100 to 10,000 FPM (0.51 to 51 m/s).
Wetted Materials: Elements: 6063-T5 anodized aluminum; Casings: 16 ga G90
galvanized steel, 3003 aluminum air flow straightener.
Temperature Limits: Galvanized casings and aluminum elements 350F (177C)
continuous operation (in air), 400F (204C) intermittent operation (in air).
Humidity Limits: All airflow stations 0 to 100% non condensing.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fittings.
Rectangular or Oval Models:

STRAR - Rectangular
O - Oval
Height (in) x Width (in)
Option
IM - Internal Pressure
Connections
F - Flange for Oval Mount Station
Circular Models:
STRA-C
Diameter (in)
When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located
on the longer of the two dimensions.
117_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:34 AM Page 117
Series STRA Rectangular or Oval

10
X
X
40
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12
X
X
X
48
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
14
X
X
X
X
52
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
X
X
X
X
X
56
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
18
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
60
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
24
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
28
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
26
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
78
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
84
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
34
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
108
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
114
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flow Sensors
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
8
X
AIRQUALITY
Size
(in)
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
OPTIONS
IM Internal Pressure Connections (Rectangular Stations Only)
F (Oval Stations Only)
Series STRA Circular*

Size (in)
Size (in)
8
X
44
X
10
X
48
X
12
X
54
X
14
X
60
X
16
X
66
X
18
X
72
X
20
X
78
X
22
X
84
X
24
X
90
X
26
X
96
X
28
X
102
X
32
X
108
X
36
X
114
X
40
X
120
X
Note: When ordering rectangular or oval flow stations, pressure taps will always be located on the longer of the two dimensions.
117
118_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:34 AM Page 118
Model
670
Fume Hood Monitor

Ensures Proper Fume Hood Performance
13/64
[5.08]
3-29/64 [87.88]
2-1/64 [51.05]
3-17/64 [83.06]
1-1/16
[27.10]
AIR VELOCITY MONITOR
4-9/16
[116.08]
AIRQUALITY
5-45/64
[145.03]
4-61/64
[125.98]
ALARM
SAFE
SET
ENTER
SERIES 670
Fume Hood Monitors
www.dwyer-inst.com
The Model 670 Fume Hood Monitor continuously senses air flow through the face of
the fume hood, ensuring safe levels of fresh air are exhausting potentially hazardous fumes
eliminating operator exposure. The 670 provides a highly accurate hot wire sensor to
detect very low flows common on fume hoods. This fume hood monitor provides several
key features such as simplified calibration and mounting, LED safe and alarm status
indicators, audible alarm with temporary or permanent horn silence, relay alarm output,
sash alarm input and an input for night set-back. The Model 670 comes with everything
required to quickly install the unit including a mounting bracket, 24 of tubing for
connecting to the inside of the hood wall and a 120 Volt AC power adapter.
FEATURES
Flexible surface or flush mounting
LED safe and alarm status indicators
Audible alarm
Temporary or permanent horn silence
Relay alarm output
Sash alarm input
Night set-back input
Model 670, Fume Hood Monitor
Model
660
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Fume hood face velocity air
flow.
Alarm Range: 30-400 FPM (0.15-2.0
m/s).
Alarm Indication: Red LED &audible
alarm.
Low Air Velocity Alarm Delay: Fixed
5 secs.
Visual LED Display: Red: Alarm;
Green: Normal.
Horn Silence:Yes-temporary and
permanent.
Accuracy:Face velocity 10%.
Temperature Limits:
Operating temperature: 55 to 86F
(13 to 30C);
Storage temperature:-40 to 150F
(-40 to 65C).
Power Requirement:15 VDC 500

mA; 120 VAC, 60 Hz power
transformer included.
Relay Output Low Air Flow Alarm: 5
amps @ 250 VAC.
Relay Input For Night Setback: 2
wire rated for 24 VDC usage.
Sash High Indication: Using a two
wire micro switch or 3 wire proximity
switch input, rated for 24 VDC usage.
Mounting: Semi flush, flush or surface
mounted when using included bracket.
Weight: 5.0 oz (141 g).
Air Velocity Monitor

Continuously Measures Fume Hood Airflow
4-1/2
[114.30]
01-3/32
[27.76]
CENTER OF HOLE 4 [101]

BELOW BOTTOM OF
FULL OPEN SASH
TUBING
SASH
OUTLET HOLE
4-10
[101-254]
2-53/64
[71.83]
AIR VELOCITY
MONITOR
SIDE WALL
SASH TRACK
5/8
[15.88]
1-13/64
[30.56]
3-13/64
[81.36]
7/32
[5.56]
Model 660 Air Velocity Monitors are a practical, affordable way to continuously monitor
for safe airflows through laboratory fume hoods. They are typically installed in the fume
hood side fascia and connected to the interior sidewall via 1-1/8" flexible tubing. As the
exhaust fan draws air through the device, a sensitive constant temperature thermistor
measures flow and lights a green (normal), yellow (high) or red (low) LED. An audible
alarm also warns of low flow and requires manual resetting. Mounting holes fit standard
single gang electrical box.
Model 660, Air Velocity Monitor. Includes 3 flexible tubing, pre-fittings and 90
elbow, 120 VAC to 24 VAC power transformer.
118
2-3/4
[69.85]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, noncorrosive gases.
High Setpoint Range: 0-275 FPM
(0-1.397 m/s).
Low Setpoint Range: 0-150 FPM
(0-.792 m/s).
Repeatability: 7% of full span, 0-50
and 150-275 FPM; 5% of full span,
50-150 FPM.
50 to 90F (10 to 32.2C).
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to

120F (0 to 48.9C).
Power Supply: 24 VAC, 3 watts
maximum.
Response Time: 6-10 seconds.
Warm-Up Time: 3-5 minutes (no flow).
Audible Alarm: 75 dB between 3-10
feet.
Mounting Hardware: (2) #6 x 1 sheet
metal screws, (2) 6-32 x 7/8"
machine screws.
119_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:35 AM Page 119
Model
AAFS
Adjustable Air Flow Paddle Switch

Ranges from 200 to 1800 FPM, Stainless Steel Vane, ABS Housing
4.02
2.56
[102.00] [65.00]
3.46
[88.00]
0.20
[5.00]
3.03
2.52
3.86
[64.00]
[98.00] [77.00]
2.56
[65.00]
Model
530
6.89
0.49
[12.50] [175.00]
3.15
[80.00]
Switch Type: SPDT.

Electrical Rating: 15(8) A @ 250 VAC.
terminal with M18 x 1.5 cable gland.
Process Connection: Flange.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal duct
flow.
Set Point: Internal screw.
Weight: 13.6 oz (380 g).
Air Flow Switch

Adjustable from 400-1600 FPM, Stainless Steel Vane
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
7/8 [22.23]
CONDUIT HOLE
1-7/8 2-7/16 3-7/16
[47.63] [61.91] [87.33]
1-5/8
[41.28]
25/32 [19.84]
2-3/4
[69.85]
1/2
[12.70]
3
[76.20]
2-7/32
[56.36]
The Model 530 air flow switch provides excellent sensitivity and reliability at a very
reasonable price. Quality features include a rugged die cast body, stainless steel vane and
SPDT snap switch. Unit is field adjustable from 400-1600 FPM. Mounting is fast and simple,
with only two screws needed. Vane fits 6 in. or larger ducts.
Model 530, Air Flow Switch

Range 400-1600 FPM mounted on top of horizontal duct.
CAUTION: For use only with air or non-combustible non-corrosive gases. Unit
is not sealed against dust.
2
[50.80]
7-9/16
[192.10]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible gas flow.
Vane: Stainless steel.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 125 VAC - 9.8 amp full load 58.8 amp locked rotor; 250 VAC 4.9 amp full load 29.4 amp locked rotor; Pilot rating: 470 VA at 125, 250 VAC;
Resistive: 15 amp at 125, 250, or 480 VAC.
Electrical Connections: Screw type terminal.
Conduit Connection: 7/8 conduit hole.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal duct flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Screw type.
Weight: 1 lb 1 oz (481.94 g)
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UL.
119
Air Flow Switches
Model AAFS, Adjustable Air Flow Paddle Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gas.
Wetted Materials:
Vane: SS;
Lever: Brass;
Base: Galvanized steel.
Housing: ABS.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -40 to 180F (-40 to 85C);
Process: -14 to 185F (-10 to 85C).
Humidity Limits: 10 to 90%, noncondensing.
1.02
[26.00]
AIRQUALITY
4.92
3.86 [125.00]
[98.00]
2.81
5.94 [71.50]
[151.00]
M18X1.5
PROCESS
CONNECTION
The Model AAFS Adjustable Air Flow Switch is capable of detecting a wide range of
air velocities with minimal user calibration. The adjustable screw changes the set point at
which the SPDT snap switch engages. Quality features include a stainless steel vane,
galvanized steel base, and ABS enclosure. The unit is field adjustable from 200 to 1800
FPM (1 to 9.2 m/sec).
2.81
[71.50]
4.15
[105.50]
120_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:35 AM Page 120
Series
AVFS
Air Flow Switch

Monitors Flow in Ducts with Contact Output and Local LED Indication
POTENTIOMETER
5-33/64 [140.00]
2 LED
Air Velocity Transmitters
AIRQUALITY
29/32
[23.00]
The new Series AVFS Adjustable Air Flow Switch complements the Dwyer
Instruments line of thermo-anemometer transmitters and handheld instruments. The
AVFS is specifically designed to monitor air flow in ducts and provides a 3A contact output
to indicate a change or loss of flow. Simply turn on the fan or air handling unit and adjust
the set-point via the potentiometer to show normal status. Then alter a damper or decrease
fan speed to activate the AVFS. The AVFS will signal a loss of flow and the N.O. SPST
output will indicate the detected decrease. For ease of installation and system troubleshooting, the Series AVFS possesses a red/green LED indication to provide local status if
the air flow is above (green) or below (red) the set-point. The AVFS provides a +/-5% setpoint repeatability across a full scale range of 1-10 m/s (197-1969 fpm) and includes a
mounting bracket for quick duct mounting. The AVFS Series Adjustable Air Flow Switches
come in a compact, rugged PBT enclosure that is rated IP65, making them ideal for any
ventilation system installation or similar BAS application.
APPLICATIONS
Fan monitoring
Filter monitoring
Damper feedback
Air handlers
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Range:197-1969 FPM
(1-10 m/s).
TemperatureLimits: 5 to 122F
(-10 to 50C).
Humidity Limits: 0-90% RH.
Wetted Materials: PBT body, titanium
sensor.
Pressure Limit: 14.7 psig (1 bar).
Housing:PBT.
Switch Type: N.O. SPST.
Electrical Rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC/250
VAC.
Response Time: 3-60 seconds. Varies

with flow and set point.
Power Requirement: AVFS-1: 80 to
250 AC/DC (47 to 63 Hz AC); AVFS-2:
24 VDC 25%.
Power Consumption:3 VA.
Electrical Connection:6.5 ft (2 m)
cable.
Enclosure Rating:IP65.
Display: 1 Red LED/1 Green LED.
Weight: 7.2 oz (203 g).
Model AVFS-1, 80-250 AC/DC Power Thermo Air Flow Switch

Model AVFS-2, 24 VDC Power Thermo Air Flow Switch
Series
AVU
Air Velocity Transmitter

Ideal for Building Automation Systems, 5% or 8% Full Scale Accuracy
3-11/32
[85.0]
3/4 [19.0]
51/64
[2.0]
8-55/64 [225.0]
9-29/64 [240.0]
The Series AVU Air Velocity Transmitter is ideal for a wide range of HVAC
measurement and control applications, particularly in complete building control and energy
management systems. The Series AVU is available with 5% or 8% accuracy at a surprisingly
low cost, with 9 models covering ranges from 0-785 FPM to 0-3150 FPM, with either 4-20
mA or 0-10 VDC output.
The Series AVU Transmitter operates by measuring the heat loss from one of the two
sensing elements in the air stream, then calculating the air velocity. Units are virtually
immune to drift due to the design of the sensing element, which makes the transmitter
accurate over the whole air velocity range.
FEATURES
4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V output versions
NEMA 6 (IP67) enclosure rating
AC or DC powered (loop version DC only)
5% or 8% accuracy
APPLICATIONS
Supply and exhaust fan tracking
Clean room systems
Air pollution studies and manufacturing
Process control systems
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-AV1.
120
2-1/4
[57.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible,
non-combustible gases.
Accuracy: AVU: 5% of full-scale;
AVUB: 8% of full-scale.
Response Time (90%): 5 sec (typical).
50C).
Humidity Limit: 0-90% RH, noncondensing.
Power Requirements: -A models 24
VDC +10% -15%; -V models 24 VDC
or 24 VAC +10% - 15%.
Output Signal: -A models 4 to 20 mA
current loop; -V models 0-10 VDC.
Loop Resistance: (-A models) 700 .
Current Consumption: 60 mA +
output current.
Max. Start Up Current: 85 mA; 10 V.
Output Current Limit: (-V models)
>10 mA.
terminal. Cable gland for 4-8 mm wire
(16 gauge wire).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 6 (IP67)
except sensing point.
Probe Dimensions: 9.45 x .75 (240 x
19 mm).
Mounting Orientation: Unit not
position sensitive. Probe must be
aligned with airflow.
Weight: 8.8 oz (250 g).
Model
AVU-1-A
AVU-2-A
AVU-3-A
AVU-1-V
AVU-2-V
AVU-3-V
AVUB-1-V
AVUB-2-V
AVUB-3-V
Output
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
Range
0 to 785 fpm (0 to 4 m/s)
0 to 1575 fpm (0 to 8 m/s)
0 to 3150 fpm (0 to 16 m/s)
0 to 785 fpm (0 to 4 m/s)
0 to 1575 fpm (0 to 8 m/s)
0 to 3150 fpm (0 to 16 m/s)
0 to 785 fpm (0 to 4 m/s)
0 to 1575 fpm (0 to 8 m/s)
0 to 3150 fpm (0 to 16 m/s)
Accuracy
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
8%
8%
8%
121_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:38 PM Page 121
Series
VTT
Hot-Wire Air Velocity/Temperature Transmitter

Configurable Air Velocity Ranges, Available with 5 Digit Display
1-21/32
[42.00]
REMOTE PROBE ASSEMBLY

[SHOWN IN 150 MM LENGTH]
33/64 [13.00]
3-15/16
[100.00]
5-29/32
[150.00]
3-17/64
[83.00]
3-17/64
[83.00]
MODELS VTT-X-N-X-X
[SHOWN WITH REMOTE PROBE MOUNTING]
MODELS VTT-X-D-X-X
[SHOWN WITH DUCT MOUNT PROBE]
Field-Selectable Velocity Ranges

Metric
0 to 5 m/s
0 to 10 m/s
0 to 15 m/s
0 to 20 m/s
0 to 30 m/s
Imperial
0 to 1000 FPM
0 to 2000 FPM
0 to 3000 FPM
0 to 4000 FPM
0 to 6000 FPM
Output
Display
Model
VTT-A-N-D-1 4-20 mA Output No Display
VTT-A-N-D-2
VTT-A-N-R-1
VTT-A-N-R-2
5 Digit Display
VTT-A-D-D-1
VTT-A-D-D-2
VTT-A-D-R-1
VTT-A-D-R-2
VTT-V-N-D-1 0-10 V Output No Display
VTT-V-N-D-2
VTT-V-N-R-1
VTT-V-N-R-2
5 Digit Display
VTT-V-D-D-1
VTT-V-D-D-2
VTT-V-D-R-1
VTT-V-D-R-2
Mounting
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Duct Mount
Remote Mount
Probe Length
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
150 mm (6)
300 mm (11.8)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
Accuracy: Air velocity: 3% of reading 60 FPM (0.3 m/s); Temperature:
0.5% of reading 0.6F (0.4C).
Temperature Limits: Ambient and process: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); Note
chart below for temperature effects on range. Storage: 14 to 158F (-10 to
70C).
Power Supply: 24 VAC/VDC (10%) 3-4 wires.
Current Consumption: 4 to 20 mA output: 80 mA maximum; 0 to 10 V
output: 40 mA.
Response Time: Air velocity: 2 seconds to 1/e (63%) of final value;
Temperature: 5 seconds to 1/e (63%) of final value.
Maximum Loop Resistance: 4 to 20 mA output: 500 ; 0 to 10 V output: 1
k.
Display: 5 digit; Resolution 1 FPM (0.1 m/s) 1.0F (0.1C). Alternates
between velocity and temperature.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminal block.
Cable Length (Remote Probe): 6.56 ft (2 m).
Enclosure Rating: ABS rated NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting: Can be mounted in any orientation. Probe must be aligned with
airflow. Mounting accessory included.
Weight: With display: 0.32 lb (145 g); Without display: 0.24 lb (110 g).
Air Velocity Range Capability vs. Temperature

air velocity
30 m/s
V
25 m/s
20 m/s
maximum possible
measurements
ranges based on
working temperatures
15 m/s
10 m/s
ax
.f
[T
5 m/s
temperature
0C
10C
20C
30C
40C
50C
OPTIONS
For NISTtraceable velocity calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-AV1.
For NISTtraceable temperature calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TT1.
121
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series VTT Hot-Wire Air Velocity and Temperature Transmitter provides a versatile
unit for air velocity and temperature needs. The VTT offers five field-selectable ranges as well as
operating in metric (m/s, C) or English (fpm, F) units. The VTT can measure up to 30 m/s (6000
FPM) and 50C (122F). The units are available with or without an LCD display which alternates
between velocity and temperature. Series VTT can be ordered in duct mount or remote mount
configurations with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10V outputs. The VTT is a useful transmitter for many
common HVAC applications.
AIRQUALITY
1-21/32
[42.00]
3-15/16 [100.00]
SHOWN IN 150 MM LENGTH
122_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:40 PM Page 122
Series
641

16 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
PHONE: 219-879-8000
e-mail: info@dwyer-inst.com
http://www.dwyer-inst.com
AIRQUALITY
B DIMENSION
A DIMENSION
3-1/4
[82.55]
1/2-14 NPT

102 INDIANA HWY 212
MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360
4-29/64
[113.11]
1/2 NPT
4-29/64
[113.11]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The new Series 641 Air Velocity Transmitter is the ideal instrument for monitoring
air flow. This transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor which allows for precise velocity
measurements at various flow rates and temperatures. The 641s 16 field-selectable ranges
provides it the versatility to be selected for several air flow applications. The optional LED
produces a complete, low-cost solution for local indication of air flow.
FEATURES
Ranges to 15,000 FPM or 75 MPS
Optional bright LED display
Easy push button set-up
Compact housing
4 to 20 mA output
Digital filter for signal damping
APPLICATIONS
Exhaust stack flow monitoring
Air control in drying processes
HVAC air velocity measurements
Fan supply and exhaust tracking
Model
Probe Length*
641-6
6 (152.4 mm)
641-6-LED
6 (152.4 mm)
641-12
12 (304.8 mm)
641-12-LED
12 (304.8 mm)
641-18
18 (457.2 mm)
641-18-LED
18 (457.2 mm)
641-24
24 (609.6 mm)
641-24-LED
24 (609.6 mm)
*Other probe lengths available contact factory.
OPTION
122
25/32
[19.84]
1/2-14 NPT

102 INDIANA HWY 212
MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360
PHONE: 219-879-8000
e-mail: info@dwyer-inst.com
http://www.dwyer-inst.com
B DIMENSION
A DIMENSION
2-23/32
[29.06]
13/16
[20.64]
1/2 NPT
641 AVT with Display Option

A Dimension B Dimension
7-63/64
9-13/16
[202.80]
[249.24]
13-63/64
15-13/16
[355.20]
[401.64]
19-63/64
21-13/16
[507.60]
[554.04]
26-63/64
28-13/16
[685.40]
[731.84]
32-63/64
34-13/16
[837.80]
[884.24]
37-63/64
39-13/16
[964.80]
[1011.24]
641 AVT without Display
Option
A Dimension B Dimension
7-7/16
9-9/32
[188.91]
[235.74]
13-7/16
15-9/32
[341.31]
[388.14]
19-7/16
21-9/32
[493.71]
[540.54]
26-7/16
28-9/32
[671.51]
[718.34]
29-7/16
34-9/32
[747.71]
[870.74]
37-7/16
39-9/32
[950.91]
[997.74]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible, non-combustible gases.
Accuracy: 3% FS process gas: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 4% FS process gas: -40
to 32F & 122 to 212F (-40 to 0C & 50 to 100C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to 95% of final value (output filter set to
minimum).
Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C); Ambient: 32 to 140F
(0 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar) maximum.
Humidity Limit: Non-condensing.
Power Requirements: 12 to 35 VDC, 10 to 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, isolated 24V source, 3 or 4-wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 15 (seconds).
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66) for non LED models only.
Mounting Orientation: Unit not position sensitive. Probe must be aligned with
airflow.
Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).
OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
Display: 4-1/2 digit 1/2 red LED.
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS (10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM ranges).
Weight: 13.3 oz (377 g).
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Universal Mounting Plate 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange Mounting Kit
A-159, Duct Mounting Gland
123_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:36 AM Page 123
Series
641RM
Air Velocity Transmitter with Cable

For Remotely Mounting Electronic Enclosure
1-5/8 [41.28] WITH LED
1-3/32 [27.78] WITHOUT LED
1/2 NPT
43/64
[17.07]
4-31/32 [126.21]
14-21/64 [53.07]
FOR A STANDARD 12 PROBE
AIRQUALITY
5/16 [7.94]
6 FT [152.40]
13/64 [5.16]
1-39/64
[40.88]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1-25/32
[45.24]
Model 641RM-12, Air Velocity Transmitter with 6 cable

Model 641RM-12-LED, same as above with LED display
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Universal Mounting Plate, 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange Mounting Kit
A-159, Duct Mounting Gland
OPTION
Example: 641RM-12-NIST.
Series
641B
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air and compatible,
non-combustible gases.
Accuracy: 3% FS process gas: 32 to
122F (0 to 50C); 4% FS process gas:
-40 to 32F & 122 to 212F (-40 to 0C
& 50 to 100C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to
95% of final value (output filter set to
minimum).
Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to
212F (-40 to 100C); Ambient: 32 to
140F (0 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.89 bar)
maximum.
10 to 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn
by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, isolated
24V source, 3 or 4-wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.515

(seconds).
terminal.
position sensitive. Probe must be
aligned with airflow.
Weight: 13.2 oz (374.26 g).
Cable Length: 6 ft (1.82 m).
Probe Length: 12 (30.48 cm)
standard.
Probe Diameter: 5/16 (0.79 cm).
OPTIONAL DISPLAY VERSION:
Display: 4-1/2 digit 1/2 red LED.
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.01 MPS
(10 FPM @ 10,000 and 15,000 FPM
ranges).
Weight: 13.9 oz (394.16 g).

8 Field Selectable Ranges in FPM or MPS
9-1/4 [235.0]
1/2 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series 641B Air Velocity Transmitter uses a heated mass flow sensor technology.
It has 4 user-selectable ranges from 250 FPM to 2000 FPM with corresponding metric
ranges of 1.25 MPS to 10 MPS. The 641B provides an isolated 4 to 20 mA output
proportional to the velocity.
The Series 641Bs steel sensor allows the unit to be used in dirty air environments. This
rugged sensor is ideally suited for quick field cleaning from a simple cloth to a pulse of air
from an air source. Proper sensor performance can be maintained in these polluted
environments by easily removing dust and debris from the sensor which is problematic for
pitot tubes and other flow sensing transmitters.
Model 641B-4, Air Velocity Transmitter
Model 641B-4-LED, same as above with LED display
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate with 1/2 female NPT
A-155, Mounting Gland with 1/2 male NPT fitting
*A brief current transient exceeding 300 mA may be seen on startup
4-31/32 [126.21]
1-23/32
[43.66]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible, noncombustible gases.
Accuracy: 5% FS process gas: 32 to
122F (0 to 50C). 6% FS process gas:
-40 to 32F & 122 to 176F (-40 to 0C
& 50 to 80C).
Response Time: Flow: 1.5 seconds to
95% of final value (output filter set to
minimum).
Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to
176F (-40 to 80C). Ambient: 32 to
140F (0 to 60C).
Power Requirements:12 to 35 VDC,
10 to 16 VAC. 1.5A rating required on
supply due to initial power surge drawn
by transmitter.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, isolated

24V source, 3- or 4-wire connection.
Output Filter: Selectable 0.5 15
(seconds).
Loop Resistance: 600 ohms max.
Current Consumption: 300 mA max*.
terminal.
NEMA 4X (IP66).
position sensitive.
Weight: 12.6 oz (357.2 g).
123
The Series 641RM is the ideal instrument for monitoring air flow. This transmitter uses
a heated mass flow sensor, which allows for precise velocity measurements at various flow
rates and temperatures. The 641RMs 16 field-selectable ranges from 0-250 to 15,000 FPM
(0-1.25 to 75 MPS) provide it the versatility to be selected for a multitude of applications.
The units 6 cable which connects the sensing probe with the electronic enclosure allows
the enclosure to be mounted where it can be more easily accessed. Longer cable lengths
are available for ducts that are at very high elevations from the plant floor. The optional
LED produces a complete, compact solution for local indication of air flow.
31/64
[12.30]
124_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:37 AM Page 124
Series
HS
Humidity Switch
Programmable, 8 Amp Relay, 3-Digit Display
1-7/64
[28]
1-11/32
[34]
Humidity Switches
AIRQUALITY
3
[76]
2-3/8
[60]
Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x1-9/64 (71 x 29 mm)

The microprocessor based Series HS Humidity Switch provides control for
humidifying or dehumidifying. Relative humidity, output status, and error messaging can
be viewed on the bright green LED. The switch features 9 user defined parameters
including setpoint, hysteresis, control type, cycle time, and probe adjustment. Access to
programming parameters can be locked for security purposes using the password
protection feature. The Series HS includes a fitting clip for panel mounting, gasket, rear
terminal cover, and instruction manual.
APPLICATIONS
HS Digital Humidity Switches are suitable for industrial chillers, environmental
chambers, walk-ins and freezers, heat sealers, beer and wine chillers, mug frosters,
coolers, display cases and cabinets, meat and produce storage, floral preservation,
refrigerated transportation, laboratories, food service equipment, ovens and dryers,
green houses, museums, and tobacco preservation. Monitors humidity in ducts.
Model
HS-311
HS-312
Supply Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range: 10 to 100% RH.
Input: 0 to 1 V, 0 to 3 V or 4 to 20 mA.
Accuracy: THC-P: 5% @ 20 to 80%; HS: 1% RH.
Display: 3-digit, green, 1/2 (12.7 mm) digits.
Resolution: 1 digit.
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C).
Output: 8 A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC or 230 VAC (depending on model).
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory.
Front Panel Rating: IP64.
Agency Approvals: CE, cUR, UR.
ACCESSORY
THC-P Humidity Probe, 0 to 3 V output, 4 ft (1.5 m) cable
Series
THC
Temperature/Humidity Switch
Independent Displays, 61 Programmable Parameters, 4 SPST Relays
4-3/32
[103.98]
5-9/32
[134.30]
Simultaneously measure and control temperature and humidity with the Series THC
Temperature/Humidity Switch. The unit offers a 3-digit red display for temperature
indication and a 3-digit green display indicating humidity. The Series THC is equipped
with four independent relays, two for temperature control and two relays for humidity
control.
The unit offers 61 programmable parameters for temperature and humidity control
including set point, differential, direct/reverse acting, cycle time, alarm clock time, and
decimal point adjustment. In the event of a probe error, the default operation of the relays
can be set to open or close. The THC features error or alarm messaging and password
protection.
The THC Temperature/Humidity Switch accepts up to two temperature probe inputs (sold
separately) and a humidity sensor. A humidity sensor with 01V, 03V (sold separately), or
4 to 20 mA output can be used with the Series THC.
Model
THC-10
THC-11
THC-20
THC-21
124
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
Unit
F
C
F
C
2-7/16
1-15/16 [61.84]
[49.21]
3-7/8
[98.43]
5 [127.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: Temperature:
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C); Humidity:
0 to 100% RH.
Input: Up to 2 thermistors and 1
humidity sensor.
Output: 4 SPST, 8A relays @ 250
VAC.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1/3 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF direction,
direct or reverse acting, neutral.
Power Requirements: 110 or 230
VAC (depending on model).
Accuracy: Temperature 0.5% of
probe range; Humidity:20 to 80%.
Display: Two 3-digit displays. 1/2

digits.
Resolution: 0.1.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32
to 158F (0 to 70C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 176F
(-20 to 80C).
Weight: 1.17 lb (530 g).
Panel Cutout: 5.15 x 3.97 (131 x 101
mm).
Front Panel Protection: IP64.
ACCESSORIES
THC-P, Humidity probe with 3V output & 4 ft (1.2 m) cable
TS-5, Temperature probe, PVC with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS-6, Temperature probe, metal with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable
TS-51, Temperature probe, PVC with 10 ft (3 m) cable
TS-61, Temperature probe, metal with 10 ft (3 m) cable
125_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:26 PM Page 125
Series
RHP-E/N
Wall Mount Humidity/Temperature/

Dew Point Transmitter
Optional LCD Display, Replaceable Sensors
1.10
[27.96]
.552
[14.02]
2x .176
[4.47]
3.000
[76.20]
AIRQUALITY
4.50
[114.30]
.573
[14.56]
2.80
[71.12]
1.08
[27.33]
3.65
[92.72]
European
North American
RHP 3 N 4 A LCD
RHP
Example
Series
Accuracy
2
3
5
Housing
E
N
Humidity/Dew
Point Output
Temperature
Output
4
0
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
Options
LCD
NIST
RHP-3N4A-LCD
Humidity/Temperature/
Dew Point Transmitter
2% Accuracy
3% Accuracy
5% Accuracy
European Wall Mount
North American Wall Mount
4-20mA/0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC
None
4-20mA/0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC
10K @ 25C Thermistor
Type III
Type II
3K @ 25C Thermistor
100 RTD DIN 385
1K RTD DIN 385
LCDDisplay
NIST traceable calibration
certificate
ACCESSORIES
A-449, Remote LCDDisplay allows remote indication of select
Dwyer Wall Mount Transmitters for validation or certification
purposes
.33
[8.38]
3x .37
[9.36]
1.16
[29.39]
3x .15
[3.87]
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range:0 to 100% RH.
Temperature Range:-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) for thermistor and RTD sensors.
-20 to 140F (-28.9 to 60C) for solid state band gap temperature sensors.
Dew Point Temperature Range:-20 to 140F(-28.9 to 60C); 0 to 100F
(-17.8 to 37.8C); 40 to 90F(4.4 to 32.3C); -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) fieldselectable ranges.
Accuracy:
RH:Model RHP-2XXX 2% 10-90%RH @ 25C; Model RHP-3XXX 3% 2080% RH@ 25C; Model RHP-5XXX 5% 20-80% RH @ 25C;
Thermistor temperature sensor:0.36F @ 77F (0.2C @ 25C);
RTD temperature sensor:DIN Class B; 0.54F @ 32F (0.3C @ 0C);
Solid state band gap temperature sensor:0.9F @ 77F (0.3C @ 25C).
Hysteresis:1%.
Repeatability:0.1% typical.
Temperature Limits:
Operating: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Storage:-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range:-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
4-20 mA Loop Powered Outputs:
Power requirements:10 to 35 VDC;
Output signal:4 to 20 mA, 2 channels for humidity/solid state temperature sensor
models (loop powered on RH). Switch selectable RH/dew point. Switch
selectable normal or reverse output.
0-5/10V Outputs:
Power requirements:15 to 35 VDC or 15 to 29 VAC;
Output load: 5 mA max., 2 channels for humidity/solid state temperature sensor
models. Switch selectable 0-10V/2-10V or 0-5V/1-5V output. Switch selectable
RH/dew point. Switch selectable normal or reverse output.
Solid State Band Gap Temperature Sensor Output Ranges:Switch selectable,
-20 to 140F(-28.9 to 60C); 0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C); 40 to 90F(4.4 to
32.3C); -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Response Time:15 seconds.
Electrical Connections:Screw terminal block.
Drift:<1% RH/year.
RHSensor:Capacitance polymer.
Enclosure Material:White polycarbonate (European); Warm gray polycarbonate
(North American).
Display:Optional LCD; Switch selectable %RH or dew point, F/C.
Display Resolution:RH:1%; Temperature:0.1F(0.1C); Dew Point:1F(1C).
Weight:4.4 oz (125 g).
Agency Approvals:CE.
SCD-PS, 100-240 VAC/VDC to 24 VDC Power Supply
LEED is a registered trademark of US Green Building Council.
125
Transmitters
The Series RHP-E/N Wall Mount Humidity/Temperature/Dew Point Transmitter

is the most versatile room transmitter on the market. The stylish housing is well vented to
provide air flow across the sensor to improve measurement accuracy. An optional LCD
display can be integral to the transmitter or a remote display can be ordered for building
balancing or LEED validation. The LCD display indicates the ambient temperature along
with the humidity or dew point. The transmitter has internal dip switches to select the
temperature engineering units and whether the transmitter outputs humidity or dew point.
The humidity and temperature sensors are field replaceable to reduce service cost and
inventory. The humidity and the dew point are measured using a capacitive polymer sensor
that completely recovers from 100% saturation. The humidity and dew point can have either
a current or voltage output, while the optional temperature output can be a current, voltage,
RTD or thermistor. For models with current or voltage for the temperature output, the
temperature range is field selectable.
3.56
[90.42]
1.18
[30]
126_Layout 1 7/14/14 9:15 AM Page 126
Series
RHP
Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Passive Temperature Outputs, Sintered Filter Options
Duct Mount
OSA (Outside Air)
Duct Sintered
5-1/8
4-17/32 [130.18]
[115.09]
2-15/64
[56.75]
3-1/8
[79.38]
AIRQUALITY
3-1/8
[79.38]
1-13/64
[30.56]
6-25/32
[172.09]
3/16
[4.76]
MOUNTING
HOLES
TYP 4 PLCS
2-11/64
[55.17]
Transmitters
4-17/32
[115.09]
1/2 NPT
2-41/64
[67.03]
2-9/64
[54.37]
8-61/64 [227.30]
35/64
[13.89]
3-7/16
[87.31]
55/64
[21.83]
Sintered Filter Version
5-1/8
[130.18]
RHP-XDXX
8-61/64 [227.30]
3-11/64
[80.57]
9-3/32 [231.13]
2-1/4
[57.15]
3-45/64
[94.06]
55/64
[21.83]
RHP-XFXX
6-25/32
[172.16]
RHP-XMXX
[3] 3/16 [4.76] HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED ON A
4.115 [104.52] BC
2-9/16
[64.96]
2-41/64
[67.07]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series RHP Temperature and Humidity Transmitter combine the voltage or
current humidity transmitter output with a passive temperature thermistor or RTD output.
The polymer capacitance humidity sensor is not affected by condensation, fog, high
humidity, or contaminants. The humidity sensors are available with 2%, 3% or 5% accuracies.
Duct mounted transmitters are available with an optional two-line alpha numeric LCD
display. The Series RHP is available with interchangeable filter options as well as
replaceable sensors.
Example
Series
RHP 2
RHP
D 1 A LCD
126
RHP-2D1A-LCD
RH/Passive Temperature
Sensor Transmitter
Accuracy
2
2% Accuracy
3
3% Accuracy
5
5% Accuracy
Housing
D
Duct Mount
Type
w/Membrane Filter
F
Duct Mount
w/Sintered Filter
O
OSA (Outside Air)
S
OSA w/Sintered Filter*
R
Radiation Shield
RH Output
1
4 to 20mA
2
0 to 10V
3
0 to 5 VDC
Temperature
0
None
Sensor
1
4 to 20mA
2
0 to 10 VDC
3
0 to 5 VDC
A
Type III
B
Type II
C
3K @ 25C Thermistor
D
100 RTD DIN 385
E
1K RTD DIN 385
F
Option
LCD Display
LCD
NISTtraceable calibration
NIST
certificate
*Model RHRS Radiation Shield is required for sintered filter OSAmodels.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Accuracy, RH:
RHP-2XXX 2% 10-90% RH @ 25C;
RHP-3XXX 3% 20-80% RH @ 25C;
RHP-5XXX 5% 20-80% RH @ 25C.
Accuracy, Thermistor Temp Sensor: 0.2C @ 25C (0.36F @ 77F).
Accuracy, RTD Temp Sensor: DIN Class B; 0.3C @ 0C (0.54F @ 32F).
Accuracy, Solid State Band Gap: 0.9F @ 77F (0.3C @ 25C).
Hysteresis: 1%.
Repeatability: 0.1% typical.
4 to 20 mA Loop Powered Models: Power requirements: 10 to 35 VDC; Output
signal: 4 to 20 mA.
0-5/10V Output Models: Power requirements: 15 to 35 VDC or 15 to 29 VAC;
Output signal: 0 to 10V @ 5 mA max.
Solid State Band Gap Temperature Sensor Output Ranges:Switch selectable,
-20 to 140F(-28.9 to 60C); 0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C); 40 to 90F(4.4 to
32.3C); -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Response Time: 15 seconds.
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal block.
Conduit Connection: Duct mount: 1/2 NPS; OSA:1/2 (22.3 mm).
Drift: <1% RH/year.
RH Sensor: Capacitance polymer.
Temperature Sensor: Types 1, 2, 3:Solid state band gap; Curves A, B, C:
Thermistor; Curves D, E: Platinum RTD DIN 385.
Enclosure: Duct mount: PBT; OSA: Polycarbonate.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) for OSA mount only.
Display: Duct mount only, optional 2-line alpha numeric, 8 characters/line.
Display Resolution: RH: 0.1%; 0.1F (0.1C).
Weight: Duct mount: .616 lb (.3 kg); OSA: 1 lb (.45 kg).
127_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:38 AM Page 127
Series
RHRS
Outside Air Humidity Radiation Shield

6 or 10 Plate Design, Integral Pipe Mounting Kit
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-47/64
[120.25]
AIRQUALITY
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-47/64
[120.25]
6-13/64
[157.65]
4-31/32
[126.21]
RHRS
Picture shown with Series RHP

8-43/64
Humidity Transmitter* (sold separately) [220.27]
10-37/64
[268.73]
RHRS-10
Transmitters
Scan here to watch product video

The Series RHRS Radiation Shield protects outside air humidity transmitters from
rain and radiated heat. With the curved shape and color of the plates, air flow is able to
move across the sensor to keep radiated temperatures from rooftops and surrounding
surfaces from affecting humidity readings. For ease of installation, the Series RHRS has
integral pipe mounting hardware which can be removed for surface mounting applications.
The brackets on the Series RHRS are specifically designed to be installed on the Dwyer
Series RHP outside air humidity transmitters with sintered filters. The pipe mounting
bracket fits 3/4 to 1-1/2 iron pipe.
Series
RH-R
Model RHRS, 6 Plate Radiation Shield

Model RHRS-10, 10 Plate Radiation Shield
*Only sintered filter OSA models of Series RHP are compatible with the shield.
Humidity/Temperature Transmitter
Remote Mount, Field Replaceable Sensor Filter, Up to 16 Cable
5-1/8
[130.18]
2-37/64
[65.48]
3-45/64
[94.06]
4-1/32
[102.39]
5/8
[15.88]
2-41/64
[67.07]
2-1/4
[57.15]
2-29/64
[11.51]
55/64
[21.83]
The Series RH-R Humidity Transmitter is the ideal transmitter for those applications
where space is limited. The compact sensor is protected by a removable filter. It can be
mounted up to 16 feet away from the weatherproof base. The Series RH-R is ideal for
environmental chambers, rubber bladder burst detection and air handler applications.
Model
RHU-R004
RHU-R008
RHU-R012
RHU-R016
RHT-R004
RHT-R008
RHT-R012
RHT-R016
Cable
Length
4
8
12
16
4
8
12
16
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Output
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Model
RHU-R104
RHU-R108
RHU-R112
RHU-R116
RHT-R104
RHT-R108
RHT-R112
RHT-R116
Cable
Length
4
8
12
16
4
8
12
16
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry clean air.
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
RH.
Temperature Range: -40 to 140F
(-40 to 60C).
Accuracy: 2% @ 10-90%.
(-40 to 60C).
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
Output
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage

(-40 to 80C).
-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA loop
powered or 0 to 10 VDC.
Response Time: Less than 15
seconds.
Electrical Connections: Terminal
block.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPSM.
Drift: Less than 1%/year.
RH Sensor: Capacitance polymer
Cable Length: Up to 16 ft.
Housing Material: Polycarbonate,
aluminum enclosure.
127
128_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:39 AM Page 128
Model
657-1
Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter

Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4 to 20 mA Output Signals
5/16
[7.925]
Transmitters
AIRQUALITY
2-13/32 2-23/32
[60.96] [68.88]
5/32
[3.81]
1-1/2
[38.10]
2-1/4 [57.15]
The Model 657-1 Transmitter provides two 4 to 20 mA channels to produce separate

output signals for both relative humidity and temperature. This inexpensive device delivers
2% accuracy for humidity and 1F for temperature measurements. The sensor employed
in the 657-1 features a state-of-the-art integrated polymer film humidity sensor and a thinfilm platinum temperature sensor to assure high reliability and rock-solid stability over
years of continuous service. Stainless steel probe measures 5/16 x 10 (0.8 x 24.4 cm) and
can be easily mounted to most ductwork using either of the two optional kits below.
Model 657-1, RH/Temperature Transmitter
Model
657C-1
7/8
[22.23]
1/2
[12.70]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 0 to 100%; Temperature: 32 to 212F (0 to 100C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 2% (10 to 90% RH), 3% (0 to 10% and 90 to
100% RH); Temperature: 1F (0.5C).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi (.07 bar).
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Output Signal: 2 channels each 4 to 20 mA. Loop powered on the RH channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
Probe: 5/16 x 10 (0.8 x 25.4 cm) stainless steel.
Weight: 5.5 oz (156 g).
Relative Humidity/Temperature Transmitter

Dual Channel Design for Simultaneous 4 to 20 mA Output Signals Conduit Housing
1-11/32
[34.15]
11-7/8 [302]
4-13/32
[112.0]
3-1/2
[88.90]
9-1/10 [231]
3-5/8
[92.4]
1-5/32
[29.35]
The Model 657C-1 Transmitter features the same circuit design as the 657-1 providing
two 4 to 20 mA channels to produce separate output signals for both relative humidity and
temperature. However, this model is housed in a tough die cast aluminum protective conduit
enclosure with gasketed cover. An internal terminal block is provided for electrical
connections. The sensor employed in the 657C-1 features a state-of-the-art integrated
polymer film humidity sensor and a thin-film platinum temperature sensor to assure high
reliability and rock-solid stability over years of continuous service. Stainless steel probe
measures 5/16 x 9-1/10 (0.8 x 23.1 cm) and can be easily mounted to most ductwork using
either of the two optional kits below.
Model 657C-1, RH/Temperature Transmitter
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate (Humidity), add suffix -NIST to model
numbers. Example: 657C-1-NIST.
128
1/2 NPT
2-15/32
[62.60]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity & temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 0 to 100%; Temperature: 32 to 212F (0 to 100C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 2% (10 to 90% RH), 3% (0 to 10% and 90 to
100% RH); Temperature: 1F (0.5C).
Pressure Limits: 1 psi (.07 bar).
Compensated Temperature Range: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Output Signal: 2 channels each 4 to 20 mA. Loop powered on the RH channel.
Electrical Connections: 4 screw type terminal.
Probe: 5/16 x 9-1/10 (0.8 x 23.1 cm) stainless steel.
129_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:39 AM Page 129
Series
HHT
Hazardous Area Humidity/Temperature

Transmitter
Intrinsically Safe or Explosion-Proof Models
AIRQUALITY
4-9/32
[108.74]
4-15/32
[113.51]
2-23/32
[69.06]
1/2 NPT
13-23/32
[347.98]
1/2 NPT
3-29/32
[99.22]
The Series HHT Hazardous Area Humidity/Temperature Transmitter takes

accurate measurements in the harshest of environments. The transmitter is offered in
explosion-proof and intrinsically-safe versions depending on the applications requirements.
The explosion-proof model is offered with 4 to 20 mA output for humidity only. The
intrinsically-safe version is offered with 4 to 20 mA output for humidity and temperature.
Both versions have an optional two line alphanumeric display to show the current humidity
and temperature.
The Series HHT humidity/temperature transmitter is excellent for offshore HVAC
applications, dust and grain applications. Intrinsically safe models require an intrinsically
safe barrier.
It is important to develop a routine schedule for replacing the RH/temperature sensor (part
number A-451). The sensor should be replaced annually or sooner depending on application
conditions.
Model
HHT-EU
HHT-IU
HHT-IT
HHT-EU-LCD
HHT-IT-LCD
Protection
Explosion-Proof
Intrinsically Safe
Intrinsically Safe
Explosion-Proof
Intrinsically Safe
Description
Humidity
Humidity
Humidity
ACCESSORIES
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55, Loop powered galvanic isolator
A-287, Mounting bracket for pipe or surface mounting
(Includes bracket and two 2 U-bolts)
A-450, Replacement sintered filter
A-451, Replacement 2% sensor
Display
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% 10 to 90% RH, 0.9F at 72F (0.3C at 25C).
Hysteresis: 1%.
Repeatability: 0.1% typical.
Compensated Temperature: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Power Requirements: For intrinsically safe models HHT-IX, 9.5 to 28 VDC. For
explosion-proof models HHT-EX, 16.5 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2 channels for humidity/temperature models (loop
power on RH).
Electrical Connections: Screw terminal block.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 female NPT.
Drift: <1% RH/year.
Temperature Sensor: Solid state band gap.
Display: Optional 2 line alpha numeric, 8 characters/line. Temperature
display is F/C selectable.
Display Resolution: RH: 0.1%: Temperature 0.1F (0.1C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66). Models HHT-EX: FM Explosion- Proof, Class
I Div. 1 Group B, C, D, Class II Div. 1 Group E, F, G, Class III Div. 1; Models HHTIX: FM Intrinsically Safe, Class I Div. 1 Group A, B, C, D, Class II Div. 1 Group E, F,
G, Class III Div. 1 T4.
Agency Approvals: CE, FM.
See page 370 (Model KFD0)
129
Transmitters
1/2 NPT
130_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:39 AM Page 130
Series
WHT
Weather-Resistant Humidity/Temperature
Transmitter
Compact Housing, Sintered Filter
2X 5/16 [7.94]
AIRQUALITY
1-27/64 1-31/64
[36.12] [37.70]
2-3/4
[69.85]
The Compact Series WHT Humidity/Temperature Transmitter is designed to

withstand the elements. A removable sintered filter protects the polymer capacitance
sensor from solid objects that may come in contact with the transmitter. The transmitter
is available with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output signals for both temperature and
humidity. This transmitter is ideal for measuring outside air temperature and humidity
levels for air handling economizer applications.
Transmitters
3-31/64
[88.5]
3
[76.2]
4
[101.6]
4-9/16
[115.89]
Model
WHT-310
WHT-311
WHT-320
WHT-322
WHT-330
WHT-333
WHT-31A
WHT-32A
Accuracy RH Output
3%
4 to 20 mA
3%
4 to 20 mA
3%
0 to 10 VDC
3%
0 to 10 VDC
3%
0 to 5 VDC
3%
0 to 5 VDC
3%
4 to 20 mA
3%
0 to 10 VDC
Temperature
None
4 to 20 mA
None
0 to 10 VDC
None
0 to 5 VDC
10K Type III
10K Type III
Note: For 2% accuracy, change the leading 3 to a 2.

(For example, WHT-210)
Model
AQS-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 100%
RH.
(-40 to 60C).
Accuracy, RH: 3% 20 to 80% RH,
4% @ 10-20%, 80 to 90%.
Accuracy, Temp Models with 4 to 20
mA Temp. Output: 0.9F @ 72F
(0.3C @ 25C).
Accuracy, Temp Models with
Passive Thermistor Temp Sensor:
0.36F @ 77F (0.2C @ 25C).
Hysteresis, RH: 1%.
Repeatability, RH: 0.1% typical.
(-40 to 60C).
(-40 to 80C).
Compensated Temperature Range,
RH: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
4 to 20 mA Loop Powered Models:
Power requirements: 10 to 35 VDC;
Output signal: 4 to 20 mA.
0 to 10 V Output Models:
Power requirements: 15 to 35 VDC
or 15 to 29 VAC;
Output signal: 0 to 10 V @ 5 mA
max.
0 to 5 V Output Models:
Power requirements: 10 to 35 VDC
or 10 to 29 VAC;
Output signal: 0 to 5 V @ 5 mA max.
Electrical Connections: Removable
screw terminal block.
Drift: <1% RH/year.
Temperature Sensor: 4 to 20 mA
output, solid state band gap. Passive
output: 10K @ 25C thermistor (Dwyer
curve A).
Enclosure: ABS.
NEMA 3S (IP54).
Weight: 0.3 oz (8.5 g).
AQStick Ambient Volatile Organic Compound

Monitor
Powered by USB Port, Local Indication
2-1/64
[51.31]
49/64
[19.64]
The AQStick Ambient Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Monitor monitors

ambient air quality by detecting the VOC content in the air. Some common sources of VOC
contamination are carpets, building materials, paints, cleaners, and tobacco smoke. Even
low concentrations of these compounds can affect building occupants comfort. A
computers USB port provides power for the sensor and the LED lights which change color
in accordance with the ambient air quality. In order to correspond with ASHRAEs
standards for air quality, the VOC reading from the monitor is converted from a percentage
contaminated to an equivalent PPM reading of CO2. The percentage contaminated
multiplied by 2000 PPM of CO2 gives the equivalent concentration of CO2. From the factory,
the LED is green under 1000 PPM CO2, yellow for 1000 to 1500 PPM CO2 and red above
1500 PPM CO2. These factory values can be changed using the free online software. When
using the free online software, the AQStick ambient VOC monitor can log and graph
how building conditions change over time.
3/8
[9.59]
2-15/64
[56.81]
SPECIFICATIONS
VOCs Detected: Alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, organic acids, aliphatic and aromatic
hydrocarbons.
Sensor: MEMS metal oxide semiconductor.
Power: Powered from PC USB port.
Humidity Limits: 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing).
Model AQS-1, Ambient Volatile Organic Compound Monitor

AQStickTM is a trademark of Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
130
131_Layout 1 7/14/14 9:20 AM Page 131
Series
CDX
Wall Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitter

Measures up to 2000 ppm, Adjustable Output
RoHS
5/32 x 4
[3.87]
3-13/64
[81.28]
4-37/64
[116.33]
1-1/16
[27.18]
5/32 x 3
[3.87]
3-13/32
[86.36]
3-13/64
[81.28]
North American
European
Model
CDX-2W10
CDX-2W20
CDX-2E10
CDX-2E20
Output
Current
Voltage
Current
Voltage
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 2000 PPM.
Accuracy: 30 PPM or 3% of reading,
whichever is higher. CO2 accuracy
statement excludes standard gas used
for calibration that has an accuracy of
2% and there is a potential digital to
analog error of up to 1%.
Temperature Dependence: 0.2% FS
per C ( 0.11% per F).
Stability: < 2% of FS over life of
sensor (15 years).
Pressure Dependence: .135% of
reading per mm of Hg.
Response Time: 5 s.
Warm Up Time: < 2 min (operational),
10 min (max. accuracy).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C).
Housing
North America
North America
Europe
Europe
ACCESSORIES
Model 1508, Duct Mount Enclosure
Model 1552, Outside Air MeasurementEnclosure
Series
CDD
European
North American
Humidity Limits: 0 to 95% relative

humidity, non-condensing.
Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VAC
RMS, 50/60 Hz, or 18 to 42 VDC,
polarity protected.
Power Consumption: .7 W @ nominal
voltage of 24 VAC RMS.
Sensor: Non-dispersive infrared
(NDIR) absorption.
Output: Analog, 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V
jumper selectable (100 output
impedance), 4 to 20 mA (RL maximum
500 ).
Housing: Flammability classification
UL94 5VA.
Weight: EuropeanHousing: 5.44 oz
(154 g); North American Housing: 6.24
oz (177 g).
Duct Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitter

NDIR Sensing Technology, 2000 PPM Range
8-1/8
[206.25]
8 STYLE PROBE
4-1/8
[104.78]
4-31/32
[126.21]
1-39/64
[40.88]
5-11/16
[144.46]
3-1/16
[77.79]
AIR FLOW
3-1/32
[77]
1-1/4
[31.7]
1-1/8
[28.58]
MODEL CDD
CO2 VENTILATION
TRANSMITTER
RED: 24V BROWN: VCUT

BLACK: GROUND
4 STYLE PROBE
2X 7/32
[2X 5.56]
AIR FLOW
4X KNOCKOUT 1/2 CONDUIT HOLE

The Model CDD Duct Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitter monitors the occupancy
in a room by detecting the concentration of carbon dioxide in the return air duct. The nondispersive infrared sensing technology automatically updates the calibration of the
transmitter using a proprietary logic feature which limits the amount of error due to drift.
The Model CDD can measure up to 2000 PPM in duct air flows less than 1500 FPM.
Model CDD, Carbon Dioxide Transmitter

Model CDD-LP, Carbon Dioxide Transmitter with 8 Probe
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 2000 PPM.
Accuracy: 40 PPM + 3% of reading
@ 22C.
Temperature Dependence: 0.2% FS
per C.
Stability: < 2% of FS over life of
sensor.
Non-Linearity: < 1% of FS.
Pressure Dependence: 0.13% of
Response Time: 3 minutes typical for
90% step change.
Duct Air Velocity Range: 0 to 1500
FPM (7.63 m/s).

to 122F (0 to 50C).
(-20 to 70C).
RMS 50/60 Hz or 18 to 42 VDC.
Power Consumption: 1.65 watts peak
(0.65 watts average at 42 VDC).
Outputs: 0 to 10 VDC.
Housing: Flammability classification
UL rated 94V-5VA.
131
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
The Series CDX Carbon Dioxide Transmitter is a low cost and high performing CO2
sensor. This product will provide immediate energy savings by functioning in conjunction
with building automation systems and allowing the user to effortlessly and effectively
control fresh air into preferred areas. On-Demand ventilation using CO2 sensors prevents
energy losses from over ventilation while maintaining indoor air quality. The potential for
the greatest energy saving occurs in areas where occupancy alters over the duration of the
day. The Series CDX Transmitters utilize the patented Automatic Background Calibration
(ABC) Logic self-calibration system. ABC Logic virtually eliminates the need for manual
calibration in applications where the indoor CO2 level drops to outside levels during
unoccupied periods. If the transmitter is being used in an application where a building is
continuously occupied 24 hours per day, then the user will permit that the ABC Logic
feature be turned off.
1-1/64
[25.65]
AIRQUALITY
Scan here
to watch
product video
132_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:32 PM Page 132
Series
CDT
Carbon Dioxide/Temperature Transmitter

NDIR CO2 Sensor, Universal Outputs, Optional Relay
1.10
[27.96]
1.08
[27.33]
AIRQUALITY
European
3.56
[90.42]
NorthAmerican
1/8
[3.175]
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
4.50
[114.30]
3.65
92.72]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Duct
Series CDT Carbon Dioxide and Temperature Transmitters accurately monitor

the CO2 concentration and temperature in schools, office buildings, and other indoor
environments to help achieve LEED certification. For increased sensor accuracy, a singlebeam dual-wavelength non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) sensor is used to automatically
correct the measurement in both occupied and unoccupied buildings against light source
aging effects. The single-beam dual-wavelength sensor technology provides the highest level
of accuracy compared to Automatic Baseline Correction methods which can unintentionally
shift the calibration based on CO2 levels and barometric pressure conditions. In order to
achieve a higher level of accuracy, the Series CDT includes digital barometric pressure
adjustment and the ability to field-calibrate the sensor.
Universal outputs for both carbon dioxide and temperature allow users to select the
transmitter output to be 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC to work with virtually any
building management controller. Additionally, a passive thermistor or RTD sensor can be
ordered for a temperature output. An optional relay with user adjustable set points can be
used to control exhaust fans, open actuated windows or dampers, or signal a light or horn.
For applications that require visual indication, the wall mount configurations of the Series
CDT can be ordered with an integral LCD display. When ordering a duct mount
configuration or a wall mount configuration without the display, the Model A-449 or A449A remote LCD display can plug into the miniature connector port on the transmitter.
The display can be configured to display temperature only, CO2 only, or CO2 and
temperature together. Push buttons are standard on all configurations of the transmitters
for access to the menu structure, but wall mount configurations can be ordered without
the buttons. To prevent tampering, the action of the buttons can be locked out using an
internal dip switch selection. Menu items that can be accessed via the push buttons include:
engineering units, relay output set points, display configuration, transmitter output scaling,
ambient barometric pressure, and field calibration of the transmitter.
Single beam dual-wavelength sensor advantages:
Automatically corrects for aging effects in occupied and unoccupied buildings*
o
Perfect for hospitals and manufacturing plants that are occupied 24 hours per
day
Measures actual unfiltered light intensity directly
o
Eliminates error from incorrect assumptions of gas concentration in theoretical
logic assumption methods
* For buildings occupied 24 hours per day, it is recommended that calibration be
verified every 6 to 12 months depending on application.
ACCESSORIES
A-449, Remote LCD Display allows remote indication of select
purposes
A-449A, Remote LCDDisplay with buttons allows remote
indication and calibration of select Dwyer Wall Mount
Transmitters for validation and certification purposes
132
4-25/32
[121.612]
4-9/32
[108.912]
2.80
[71.12]
1-15/64
[31.411]
11-49/64
[298.956]
2-13/16
[71.238]
3-5/16
[84.074]
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor: Single beam, dual-wavelength
NDIR.
Range:
CO2: 0 to 2000 or 0 to 5000 ppm
(depending on model);
Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to
50C).
Accuracy:
CO2: 40 ppm 3% of reading;
RH: 2% (10 to 90% RH);
Temperature: 1C @ 25C.
Temperature Dependence: 8
ppm/C at 1100 ppm.
Non-Linearity: 16 ppm.
Response Time: 2 min for 99% step
change.
CDT -2 N 4 4 -LCD
2
5
N
Configuration
E
D
4
CO2 Output
0
Temperature
4
Output
A
B
C
D
E
F
-FC
Options
-LCD
-RLY
-NBC
Series
Range
Duct Air Velocity Range: 0-4000 FPM

(20.32 m/s).
(0 to 50C).
Humidity Limits: 10 to 95% RH
(non-condensing).
or 19 to 28 VAC.
Power Consumption: Average: 2 w;
Peak: 3.75 w.
Output:
Current: 4 to 20 mA (max. 500 );
Voltage: 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC
(min. 500 );
Relay: SPST NO rated 2A @ 30
VDC.
Weight: 4.4 oz (125 g).
Example: CDT-2N44-LCD
0 to 2000 ppm CO2 range
North American Wall Mount
European Wall Mount
Duct Mount
4 to 20 mA / 0 to (5 or 10) VDC
None
4 to 20 mA / 0 to (5 or 10) VDC
10 K NTC thermistor type III
10 K NTC thermistor type II
3 K NTC thermistor
Pt100 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
20 K NTC thermistor
Factory Calibration Certificate
LCD display (wall only)
Relay
No buttons (wall only)
GCK-200CO-2000CO2, Calibration Gas Kit includes a 99.99% Nitrogen

gas cylinder for calibrating the zero point and a 200 PPM CO / 2000
PPM CO2 gas cylinder for calibrating the span point on Dwyers gas
sensing transmitters
LEED is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
133_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:39 PM Page 133
Series
CDTA
Communicating Carbon Dioxide Detector

Measures CO2, Humidity, Temperature, Temperature Set Point, and Override
RoHS
1.10
[27.96]
1.08
[27.33]
European
NorthAmerican
AIRQUALITY
4.50
[114.30]
3.65
[92.72]
3.56
[90.42]
2.80
[71.12]
FEATURES
Field selectable Modbus and BACnet communications
Single-beam dual-wavelength CO2 sensor
Replaceable humidity/temperature sensor
Physical hardware lockout
Optional remote display tool
ACCESSORIES
GCK-200CO-2000CO2, Calibration Gas Kit includes a 99.99%
Nitrogen gas cylinder for calibrating the zero point and a 200
PPM CO / 2000 PPM CO2 gas cylinder for calibrating the span
point on Dwyers gas sensing transmitters
A-449, Remote LCD Display allows remote indication of select
purposes
A-449A, Remote LCDDisplay with buttons allows remote
indication and calibration of select Dwyer Wall Mount
Transmitters for validation and certification purposes
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor (CO2): Single-beam, dual-wavelength NDIR;
Humidity: Capacitive polymer;
Temperature: 10K thermistor.
Range:
CO2: 0 to 2000 or 5000 PPM CO2 (depending on model);
Humidity: 0 to 100% RH;
Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy:
RH: 2% (10 to 90% RH);
Temperature: 1C @ 25C.
Temperature Dependence (CO2): 8 ppm / C at 1100 ppm.
Non-Linearity (CO2): 16 ppm.
Pressure Dependence (CO2): 0.13% of reading per mm of Hg.
Response Time (CO2): 2 minutes for 99% step change.
Power Requirements: 10 to 42 VDC / 10 to 30 VAC.
Power Consumption:
Average: 0.5 watts;
Peak: 1.2 watts.
Output: 2-wire RS-485, Modbus RTU or BACnet MS/TP communication protocol.
Weight: 4.4 oz (125 g).
Agency Approvals: BTL, CE, RoHS.
Model
CDTA-2N000
CDTA-2N000-LCD
CDTA-2E000
CDTA-2E000-LCD
CDTA-5N000
CDTA-5N000-LCD
CDTA-5E000
CDTA-5E000-LCD
CO2
Concentration
2000 PPM
2000 PPM
2000 PPM
2000 PPM
5000 PPM
5000 PPM
5000 PPM
5000 PPM
Housing
North American
North American
European
European
North American
North American
European
European
Display
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
OPTIONS
Example CDTA-2N000-FC
133
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
The Series CDTA Communicating Carbon Dioxide Detector combines the function
of three room sensors into a single, compact housing. Parameters include carbon dioxide,
humidity, temperature, and temperature set point with override. By having field selectable
Modbus and BACnet Communications, only four wires are needed for power and the
communication signal. The communicating detectors can be daisy-chained together to
further reduce installation cost. In order to reduce the set up time, the RS-485 MAC
address is set up using on board dip switches. A second set of dip switches are used to
select whether output is Modbus RTU or BACnet MS/TP communication protocols and
to limit access to the set up menu.
Like our Series CDT Carbon Dioxide Transmitter, the Series CDTA uses a Single Beam
Dual Wavelength Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR) sensor to measure the carbon dioxide
level. This technology can be used in installations that will be occupied 24 hours per day.
For improved accuracy, the transmitter can be field calibrated to the environmental
conditions of the installation. Also, the barometric pressure can be programmed to correct
for altitude. The humidity uses a capacitive polymer sensor and the temperature is
measured using a 10K thermistor sensor. The humidity sensor is field replaceable without
the need for additional calibration.
Optional local and remote displays are available to display any of the parameters. For
applications in which the building occupants arent familiar with CO2 concentrations, the
LCD can be programmed to display temperature, humidity, or temperature set point
instead.
134_Layout 1 7/29/14 1:33 PM Page 134
Series
CDTR
Carbon Dioxide/RH/Temperature Transmitter

NDIR CO2 Sensor, Universal CO2/RH Outputs, Optional Relay
1.10
[27.96]
1.08
[27.33]
AIRQUALITY
European
NorthAmerican
3.56
[90.42]
1/8
[3.175]
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
4.50
[114.30]
3.65
[92.72]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1-15/64
[31.411]
11-49/64
[298.956]
2-13/16
[71.238]
3-5/16
[84.074]
Duct
Series CDTR Carbon Dioxide, Relative Humidity and Temperature Transmitters

reduce the number of sensors mounted on a wall or in a duct. By combining CO2, RH, and
temperature in one device, system integrators are able to lower installation time of
mounting multiple housings, while lowering material cost at the same time. Even with the
three sensors combined into a single unit, replacement cost is not increased due to the
pluggable nature of the humidity sensor, which allows it or the temperature to be replaced
at a fraction of the cost of a new CO2 transmitter.
Like our popular Series CDT Carbon Dioxide Transmitter, a single-beam dual-wavelength
non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) sensor is used to automatically correct the measurement
in both occupied* and unoccupied buildings against light source aging effects. The singlebeam dual-wavelength sensor technology provides a higher level of accuracy compared to
Automatic Baseline Correction methods which can unintentionally shift the calibration
based on CO2 levels and barometric pressure conditions. In order to achieve the best
possible accuracy, the Series CDTR also includes digital barometric pressure adjustment
and the ability to field-calibrate the sensor.
Universal outputs for both carbon dioxide and relative humidity allow users to select the
transmitter output to be 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC to work with virtually any
building management controller. Additionally, passive thermistor or RTD sensor can be
ordered for a temperature output. An optional relay for the carbon dioxide measurement
can be used to control exhaust fans, open actuated windows or dampers, or signal a light
or horn.
For applications that require visual indication, the wall mount configurations of the Series
CDTR can be ordered with an integral LCD display. When ordering a duct mount
configuration or a wall mount configuration without the display, the Model A-449 or A449A remote LCD display can plug into the miniature connector port on the transmitter.
The display can be configured to display temperature only, relative humidity only, CO2
only, CO2 and humidity, or CO2 and temperature. Push buttons are standard on all
configurations of the transmitters for access to the menu structure, but wall mount
configurations can be ordered without the buttons. To prevent tampering, the action of the
buttons can be locked out using an internal jumper selection. Menu items that can be
accessed via the push buttons include: engineering units, relay output set points, display
configuration, transmitter output scaling, ambient barometric pressure, and field
calibration of the transmitter.
*For buildings occupied 24 hours per day, it is recommended that calibration be
verified every 6 to 12 months depending on application.
ACCESSORIES
A-449, Remote LCD Display allows remote indication of select Dwyer
Wall Mount Transmitters for validation or certification purposes
A-449A, Remote LCDDisplay with buttons, used when ordering the

-NBC option, allows remote indication and calibration of Dwyer
Wall Mount Transmitters for validation and certification purposes
134
4-25/32
[121.612]
4-9/32
[108.912]
2.80
[71.12]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
CO2: 0 to 2000 or 0 to 5000 ppm
(depending on model);
Relative Humidity: 0 to 100%;
Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: 40 ppm + 3% of reading
(CO2); 2% (RH).
Temperature Dependence: 8 ppm /
C at 1100 ppm.
Non-Linearity: 16 ppm.
Response Time: 2 minutes for 99%
step change.
50C).
CDTR- 2 N 4 A 4 -LCD
2
5
N
Configuration
E
D
4
CO2 Output
0
Temperature
A
Output
B
C
D
E
F
4
RHOutput
-FC
Options
-LCD
-RLY
-NBC
Series
Range
Humidity Limits: 10 to 95% RH (noncondensing).

Power Requirements: 16 to 35 VDC /
19 to 28 VAC.
Power Consumption: Average: 2
watts; Peak: 3.75 watts.
Sensor: Single-beam, dual-wavelength
NDIR.
Output:
Current: 4 to 20 mA (max 500 );
Voltage: 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC
(min 500 );
Relay: SPST NO 2A @ 30 VDC;
RTD or thermistor per r-t curves
(depending on model).
Weight: 5.6 oz (158.8 g).
Example: CDTR-2N4A4-LCD
NorthAmerican WallMount
European Wall Mount
Duct Mount
4 to 20 mA / 0 to (5 or 10) VDC
None
10 K NTC thermistor type III
10 K NTC thermistor type II
3 K NTC thermistor
Pt100 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
20 K NTC thermistor
4 to 20 mA / 0 to (5 or 10) VDC
LCD display (wall only)
Relay
No buttons (wall only)
GCK-200CO-2000CO2, Calibration Gas Kit includes a 99.99% Nitrogen

gas cylinder for calibrating the zero point and a 200 PPM CO / 2000 PPM
CO2 gas cylinder for calibrating the span point on Dwyers gas sensing
transmitters
135_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:43 AM Page 135
Series
CDW2
Carbon Dioxide Transmitters

Monitors CO2, Temperature and Humidity, Optional LCD Display
1-1/16
[27.11]
3-13/64
[81.40]
3-13/64
[81.40]
1-3/16
[30.10]
2-23/64
[60.06]
1-1/16
[27.11]
FOR MODELS
WITH LCD DISPLAY
3-1/4
[82.55]
3-13/32
[86.41]
1-3/16 2-23/64
[30.10] [60.06]
FOR MODELS
WITH LCD DISPLAY
BACK COVER
BACK COVER
COVER LOCKING HOLE
Shown withOptional LCD Display
ACCESSORIES
Model 1508, Duct Mount Enclosure
Model 1552, Outside Air Enclosure
Model
RH Output
Temperature Output
North American Housing
CDW2-2W4A0 10k Type III Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2W4A4 10k Type III Thermistor
Universal Current/Voltage Output
CDW2-2W4B0 10k Type II Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2W4B4 10k Type II Thermistor
CDW2-2W4C0 3k Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2W4C4 3k Thermistor
CDW2-2W4D0 Pt100 RTD
N/A
CDW2-2W4D4 Pt100 RTD
CDW2-2W4E0 Pt1000 RTD
N/A
CDW2-2W4E4 Pt1000 RTD
CDW2-2W4F0 20k Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2W4F4 20k Thermistor
European Housing
CDW2-2E4A0 10k Type III Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2E4A4 10k Type III Thermistor
CDW2-2E4B0 10k Type II Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2E4B4 10k Type II Thermistor
CDW2-2E4C0 3k Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2E4C4 3k Thermistor
CDW2-2E4D0 Pt100 RTD
N/A
CDW2-2E4D4 Pt100 RTD
CDW2-2E4E0 Pt1000 RTD
N/A
CDW2-2E4E4 Pt1000 RTD
CDW2-2E4F0 20k Thermistor
N/A
CDW2-2E4F4 20k Thermistor
For optional LCDdisplay, add -LCD to the end of the model number.
(Example: CDW2-2W4A0-LCD)
European
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
CO2: 0 to 2000 PPM;
Relative Humidity: 0 to 99%;
Active Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy:
CO2: 30 PPM or 3% of reading, whichever is greater;
RH: 2.5% (20 to 80% RH) / 3.5% (<20% and >80%);
Active Temperature: 1.5F @ 72F (0.8C @ 22C);
Thermistor: 1.9F @ 60 to 95F (1C @ 15 to 35C).
Temperature Dependence: 0.11% FS per F (0.2% per C).
Pressure Dependence: 0.135% of reading per mm Hg.
Response Time: Signal updates every 5 seconds.
Warm Up Time: < 2 min (operational), 10 min (max. accuracy).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C);
Storage: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C).
Power Requirements: 18 to 30 VAC RMS 50/60 Hz.
Sensor:
CO2: Non-dispersive infrared sensor (NDIR) with ABC logic;
RH: Capacitive polymer sensor;
Temperature: 10 k NTC thermistor.
Weight: 7.2 oz (204 g).
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
The Series CDW2 Wall Mount Carbon Dioxide Transmitters monitor ambient carbon
dioxide conditions for variable air volume (VAV) on demand ventilation systems. Universal
current/voltage temperature and humidity outputs are also available to reduce the number
of instruments mounted on the wall. The Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR) sensor
continuously updates the calibration through a proprietary logic feature which limits the
amount of error due to drift. A duct mount and a heated outside air enclosure are available
enabling the CDW2 to be used in different environments.
North American
COVER LOCKING HOLE
AIRQUALITY
4-37/64
[116.40]
RoHS
135
136_Layout 1 7/11/14 4:03 PM Page 136
Series
GSTA
Carbon Monoxide/Nitrogen Dioxide Gas

Transmitter
High Accuracy Electrochemical Sensor, Universal Output
Gas Sensing
Transmitters
AIRQUALITY
3-45/64
[94.06]
3-1/8
[107.95]
2-15/64
[56.75]
RoHS
4-17/32
[115.09]
5-7/64
[129.78]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series GSTA Carbon Monoxide/Nitrogen Dioxide Transmitters monitor the
gas concentration in underground parking garages and loading docks. Carbon monoxide is
commonly used to measure the exhaust of gasoline engines, while nitrogen dioxide is used
for diesel engines. Field selectable current and voltage outputs allow the transmitter to be
used with almost any building management controller. For carbon monoxide units, the user
can select the output range to be from 0 to 50 ppm up to 0 to 500 ppm. Nitrogen dioxide units
come with a standard 0 to 10 ppm range. The output can be inverted to read 20 to 4 mA or
10 (5) to 0 VDC using internal dip switches.
To maximize the accuracy of the Series GSTA, the sensor can be field-calibrated using the
A-449 remote LCD display. When the sensor reaches the end of its life, the display will
indicate that the sensor needs to be replaced.
ACCESSORIES
A-449, Remote LCD Display
A-505, COReplacement Sensor
A-506, NO2 Replacement Sensor
Model
CMT200
4-17/32
[115.09]
3-59/64
[100]
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor: Field replaceable
electrochemical, 4 years typical
lifespan. Recommend calibration every
6 months.
Range: CO: selectable 0-50 ppm up to
0-500 ppm; NO2: 10 ppm.
Output Drift: <5% per year in air.
Coverage Area: 5000 to 7500 sq ft
typical.
Accuracy: CO=2% of reading,
NO2=3% of reading at the time of
calibration.
Resolution: CO=1 ppm; NO2 = 0.1
ppm.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient:-4 to 122F (-20 to 50C);
Storage:For best sensor life, 32 to
68F (0 to 20C).
constant; 0 to 99% RH intermittent.
Response Time: <45 seconds to 90%
CO, <25 to 90% NO2.
Model
GSTA-C
GSTA-N
GSTA-C-D
GSTA-N-D
A-507, Calibration Adapter
Gas Sensed
CO
NO2
CO
NO2
3-23/64 [85]
2-55/64
[73]
2-15/64
[57]
4x 13/64 [5.16]
MOUNTING HOLES
3-1/8
[107.95]
Mounting
Wall
Wall
Duct
Duct
Span and Zero Adjustment: Via

pushbutton, using optional A-449
display.
Housing: UV resistant glass filled
polycarbonate.
Output: Switch selectable 4 to 20 mA
(loop powered), 0 to 5 V @ 5 mA, or 0
to 10 V@ 5 mA; Switch selectable 0 to
5 V / 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V / 2 to 10 V;
Switch selectable normal or reverse
output.
Power Supply: Current output=10 to
35 VDC; Voltage output=15 to 35 VDC
or 15 to 29 VAC.
terminal block, knocks out for conduit
fitting.
Calibration: Via pushbuttons using A449 auxiliary display.Span gas
concentration is field selectable.
Add optional integral LCD display
by adding -LCD to end of model
number (Example: GSTA-C-LCD)
Carbon Monoxide Transmitter

Current/Voltage Selectable Output, 200 PPM Range
RoHS
3-9/64
[79.78]
3-1/4
[82.71]
1-37/64
[39.89]
1-31/32
[50.20]
2-21/64
[59.07]
The Model CMT200 Carbon Monoxide Transmitter provides a field selectable

current or voltage output that is proportional to the gas concentration in underground
parking garages, vehicle maintenance facilities, or mechanical rooms. A field replaceable,
electrochemical sensor provides accurate readings for up to 4 years with proper calibration.
Field calibration can be done by using Model GCK-200CO-2000CO2 calibration gas, Model
A-507A calibration adapter, and the on board span and zero potentiometers.
Model CMT200, Carbon MonoxideTransmitter
ACCESSORIES
Model GCK-200CO-2000CO2, Calibration Gas
Model A-507A, Calibration Adapter
Model A-505A, Replacement CO Sensor
136
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor: Field replaceable
electrochemical, 4 year typical lifespan.
Range: 0 to 200 ppm.
Output Drift: <5% per year in air.
Coverage Area: 5000 to 7000 sq. ft.
typical.
Accuracy: 2% of reading at the time
of calibration.
to 50C).
Storage Temperature: For best sensor
life, 32 to 68F (0 to 20C).
constant; 0 to 99% RH intermittent.
Response Time: <45 seconds to 90%
of final value.
1-5/64
[27.32]
Calibration: 15 turn span and zero

adjustment potentiometers.
Housing: UV resistant polycarbonate.
Output: Jumper selectable 4 to 20 mA
(loop powered) or 2 to 10 V (load must
be >50 K).
Power Requirements:
Current Output: 18 to 28 VDC;
Voltage Output: 18 to 28 VDC/VAC,
reverse polarity protected.
terminal block, includes two PG11 and
one PG 16 knockouts for conduit fitting.
Weight: 0.28 lb (0.11 kg).
137_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:45 AM Page 137
Model
OSC-200
Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor

360 Detection Pattern, Energy Efficient
1-47/64
[44.05]
AIRQUALITY
4-11/32
[110.33]
The Model OSC-200 Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor automatically controls a
HVAC ventilation system. A spherical Fresnel lens provides a 360 detection zone with the
use of infrared technology. The integrated dual delay processor saves energy by eliminating
false activation due to short-term occupancies. The Model OSC-200 is designed to be ceiling
mounted.
Model
OSW-100
Occupancy Sensors
Model OSC-200, Omnidirectional Occupancy Sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Infrared Sensor: Dual element.
Range: 34.4 ft (10.5 m) Diameter at 13.8 ft (4.2 m) mount height.
Detectable Speed: 0.33 to 9.8 ft/s (0.1 to 3.0 m/s).
Control Output Rating: SPDT, 0.2A at 30 VDC.
Ambient Operating Temperature: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Power Consumption: Standby: 5 mA; Operating: 18 mA.
Mounting Height: 7.9 to 13.8 ft (2.4 to 4.2 m).
Power Requirements: 22 to 26 VAC/DC.
Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor

Wide Viewing Angle, Easy To Install
2-39/64
[66.28]
1-25/32
[45.24]
4-27/64
[112.32]
The Model OSW-100 Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor is an infrared sensor designed
to automatically control a HVAC ventilation system. A unique dual delay processor
eliminates false triggers due to short-term occupancies. The Model OSW-100 has a wide
110 viewing angle to capture movement up to 49.2 ft (15 m) away.
Model OSW-100, Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Infrared Sensor: Dual element.
Range: 49.2 ft (15 m).
Detectable Speed: 0.33 to 9.8 ft/s (0.1 to 3.0 m/s).
Control Output Rating: SPDT, 0.2A @ 30 VDC.
Power Consumption: Standby: 5 mA; Operating: 18 mA.
Mounting Height: 5.9 to 11.8 ft (1.8 to 3.6 m).
Weight: 3.2 oz (90.7 g).
137
138_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:45 AM Page 138
Series
DF
Pleated Filters
Moisture Resistant Frame and Synthetic Media
LENGTH
DEPTH
Air Filters
AIRQUALITY
WIDTH
DF8-LENGTH x WIDTH x DEPTH
Medium
Filter Velocity
Depth (FPM)
1
375
2
375
3
500
The Series DF Pleated Filters are ideal for nearly all commercial, industrial, and health
care applications where an efficient, long-life filter is desired. An automated construction
process provides the quality, consistency, and performance that other hand assembled
pleated filters simply cannot match. Utilizing premium, synthetic material and an advanced
design, the MERV 7 filters are able to withstand considerable abuse from shipping and
handling without damage. For applications requiring higher levels of air filtration, MERV
8, MERV 10, and MERV 13 filters protects HVAC equipment from dust/dirt or airborne
irritants in sensitive settings. These filters add an expanded metal grid on the air exiting
side and a die cast frame to provide exceptional strength during both installation and
operation. The thermally bonded synthetic media is not adversely affected by high humidity
applications, as is typically the case in conventional cotton blend/resin bonded pleat media.
The DF is suitable for a variety of environments ranging from dry to high humidity.
FEATURES
Low resistance improves air flow and can greatly reduce energy costs
100% recyclable moisture resistant paperboard frame
100% synthetic media inhibits biological growths
Initial resistances as low as 0.17 in w.c.
APPLICATIONS
Designed for the use in commercial buildings, hotels, industrial filtration, airports,
schools, and universities
Medium
Filter MERV Velocity
Depth Rating (FPM)
1
8
375
10
375
2
7
300
8
375
10
375
13
375
3
8
500
10
500
13
500
Initial Resistance
Medium Velocity
(in w.c.)
0.18
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.11
0.24
0.12
0.11
0.23
High
Velocity
(FPM)
500
500
500
500
500
500
625
625
625
Initial Resistance
High Velocity
(in w.c.)
0.38
0.30
0.28
0.19
0.17
0.38
0.18
0.17
0.34
Initial Resistance High

Medium Velocity Velocity
(in w.c.)
(FPM)
0.18
500
0.13
500
0.12
625
Initial Resistance
High Velocity
(in w.c.)
0.38
0.19
0.18
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air.
Filtration Efficiency: MERV 7, MERV 8, MERV 10, MERV 13 (depending on model).
Temperature Limits: 150F (65.6C) for MERV 7 and MERV 13; 200F (93.3C) for
MERV 8 and MERV 10.
Recommended Final Resistance: 1.0 in w.c.
Initial Resistance: See website for initial resistance graphs.
Series
DF 7 24 24 2 Example:DF7-24x24x2
Filtration
7
MERV 7
Efficiency
8
MERV 8
10
MERV 10
13
MERV 13
Length
8
8 in
10
10 in
12
12 in
14
14 in
15
15 in
16
16 in
18
18 in
20
20 in
24
24 in
25
25 in
28
28 in
10
Width
10 in
12
12 in
16
16 in
18
18 in
20
20 in
22
22 in
24
24 in
25
25 in
29
29 in
30
30 in
Depth
1 1 in
2 2 in
4 4 in
Note: Each model includes 6 filters.
Note: View website for complete listing of available models and air flow capacity
tables
138
139_Layout 2 7/8/14 10:47 AM Page 139
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
page 143
Flowmeters,
Variable Area
pages 144-157
Flowmeters,
In-Line
pages 158-164
Flowmeters,
Dial
pages 165-167
Flow Sensors,
In-Line
pages 168-169
Flowmeters,
Orifice Plate
pages 170-173
Flowmeters,
Venturi
page 174
Sight Flow
Indicators
pages 175-177
Flow Switches,
Paddle
pages 178-183
Flow Switches,
Thermal
pages 184-185
Flow Switches,
Shuttle/Piston
pages 186-188
Flow Transmitters,
In-Line
pages 189-190
Flow Transmitters,
Turbine
pages 191-193
Flow Transmitters,
Paddlewheel,
Adjustable Insertion
pages 194-196
Flow Transmitters,
Paddlewheel,
Fixed Insertion
pages 197-198
Watermeters
pages 199-200
Flow Transmitters,
Paddlewheel,
In-Line
pages 201-206
Flow Transmitters,
Electromagnetic,
In-Line
pages 207-210
Flow Transmitters,
Electromagnetic,
page 211
Flow Transmitters,
Electromagnetic,
Fixed Insertion
pages 212-213
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
pages 214-217, 221
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic,
Portable
pages 218-220
Flow Sensors,
Portable
page 222
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
pages 223-227
Flowmeters,
Totalizers
pages 228-229
Flowmeters,
Accessories
page 230
FLOW | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 140-142
139
Designers of a bio-medical incubator rely on a Dwyer flowmeter to

control CO2 flow.
Flowmeters and/or differential pressure switches monitor vital purge

gas flow to motors, switchgear, instruments.
This low temperature incubator with CO2 atmosphere is used in bio-medical

applications, such as short term blood work and long term tissue culture studies. CO2
is introduced at a high initial purge rate controlled by a timer. After the purge period,
a Dwyer Visi-Float flowmeter with a metering valve is utilized to adjust and monitor
the CO2 flow in cubic centimeters per minute. The Visi-Float flowmeter provides the
reliability and accuracy needed to complement the host of high performance features
designed into this incubator.
To purge motors, generators, switchgear, and industrial instrument cases, Dwyer

flowmeters are installed in the supply line to indicate a flow of air, manufactured inert
gas, or nitrogen to these devices. The flowmeters (with valves) allow maintenance
personnel to set the flow quickly and recheck anytime to make sure proper flow
continues. A Dwyer differential pressure switch can also be used to monitor proper
flow on a continuous basis and provide a signal or alarm if purge gas flow fails. Such
an optional switch is shown above, monitoring proper flow of purge gas to the
switchbox as a function of pressure drop across the flowmeter. The purging of
electrical equipment in hazardous areas may require more extensive control and
monitoring devices.
Metering valves on Dwyer flowmeters control air/gas intake on

permanent air pollution analyzers.
Operator uses Mini-Master flowmeter to verify air flow into portable

dust monitor.
Regulations regarding air pollution levels require continuous monitoring a source and
ambient pollutants in areas where noxious gases are generated. Ambient air quality
samplers utilize either Visi-Float or Rate-Master flowmeters to establish the proper
flow of sample or carrier gases into the analyzer. Top mounted metering valves are
recommended for flowmeters used in vacuum service to maintain specified accuracy.
The small size, accuracy, and low cost of the Dwyer Mini-Master Series flowmeter
lends itself perfectly to use in this portable, battery-operated dust monitor. Using a
light scattering electronic sampler, a small vacuum pump draws air through the
flowmeter into the sampling chamber, and the flowmeter verifies the proper volume
of sample air flow. Readout is digital and directly in dust weight per cubic meter of air.
FLOW
140_Layout 1 7/29/14 2:06 PM Page 140
140
141_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:50 AM Page 141
Brass body gage measures water flow rates.
Flotect flow switch ensures cooling water circulation before air

conditioning compressor motor starts.
When main pump fails, Flotect flow switch transfers to standby

pump to maintain vital fluid circulation.
W.E. Anderson Midwest Sight Flow Indicator reveals flow or

stoppage.
When proper fluid circulation in a system is critical, the W.E. Anderson Flotect flow
switch will automatically start a standby pump should the main pump fail. The flow in
the main path of the parallel system illustrated keeps the Flotect flow switch in an
open position. When the main pump fails, the flow will cease. The flow switch then
closes, starting the standby pump.
In this gravity feed system delivering liquid fertilizer to portable tanks, a Midwest Model
100 sight flow indicator was installed. The operator can see the rotating vanes to
check for adequate flow at any time.
Large air conditioning and refrigeration systems which include water cooled
condensers require that the water must circulate through the condenser and cooling
tower in sufficient volume before the compressor is started. Here the W.E. Anderson
Flotect flow switch is connected to the compressor control circuit to prevent starting
or to shut down the compressor control circuit if the flow of cooling water falls below
that required for proper operation. A dual Flotect switch (available as an option) will
also trigger a remote alarm to signal the operator of the shutdown as soon as it occurs.
FLOW
A Dwyer brass body Capsuhelic differential pressure gage, required for water
service to prevent corrosion damage to the gage, is used in conjunction with a Dwyer
Series DS-300 averaging Pitot tube. The Capsuhelic gage provides a basic method
of measuring water flow rates. As a guide in selecting the appropriate Capsuhelic
gage range, the designer can consult data provided with the DS-300 averaging Pitot
tube. This relates differential pressure in inches of water column to the water flow in
gallons per minute for the pipe size involved. The gage can be calibrated directly in
GPM if desired. Bleed fittings installed in the top ports of the gage are recommended
to facilitate removal of air from the system.
141
Flows of air and gases used in a special furnace are controlled by

Dwyer flowmeters.
Durable dual-column flowmeter adds value for physicians and oral

surgeons.
A total of eleven Dwyer Rate-Master flowmeters function in the design of this

sophisticated conveyor belt furnace used in manufacturing electronic devices. The
flowmeters provide precise adjustment and monitoring of the flows of air and gases
into the various portions of the furnace, which allow it to perform different operations,
such as decarburizing and oxidizing, metallic package sealing, glass package sealing,
and glass-to-metal sealing.
Physicians and oral surgeons who use anesthesia or analgesia in their offices on an
occasional basis require a system that is reliable but small and portable. One such
system employs special Dwyer dual-column Visi-Float flowmeters to meter and
monitor precise flows of nitrous oxide and oxygen to the patient. In addition to meeting
the performance level demanded by this application, the Visi-Float flowmeters are
durable and attractive complements to this important and visible medical device.
Salt corrosion test cabinet includes a Dwyer flowmeter for

adjustment of bubbler air flow.
Measuring air velocity with an orifice plate.
FLOW
142_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:50 AM Page 142
Prior to atomizing a heated salt solution to produce a fog inside this corrosion test
cabinet, compressed air is bubbled through a heated water column to properly heat
and humidify the air. A Dwyer Visi-Float VFA flowmeter, as part of the system,
provides precise adjustment of the bubbler air flow to meet test standards.
142
In this set-up, the Magnehelic gage measures higher air velocities as a function of
the pressure drop across a sharp-edged orifice plate in the pipe. The pressure drops
can be converted to air velocity using orifice plate data supplied by the manufacturer.
Details regarding available sizes, ranges, installation, and limitations are available
from orifice plate manufacturers and from standard handbooks. A Dwyer Durablock
inclined manometer or Photohelic differential pressure switch/gage can also be used.
In addition to the visual reading gage, the Photohelic switch/gage provides an alarm
signal or shutdown control function. Pressure sensing taps should be located on the
side or top of the pipe or duct to prevent condensation from draining into sensing lines
or gages.
143_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:51 AM Page 143
CONVERSION CURVES FOR GASES

10
GAS PRESSURE PSIG BELOW ATMOSPHERE

-14
-12
Scan here
to watch
product video
-8
-6
-10
-4
-2
6
8
10
15
20
6
30
40
60
80
100
4
3
2
GAS PRESSURE PSIG ABOVE ATMOSPHERE
OBSERVED FLOWMETER READING
10
4
5
6
7
ACTUAL GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR PRESSURE*
SPEClFIC GRAVITY OF GAS (REFERRED TO AIR)

2.2 2.0 1.81.6 1.4 1.2
1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
FLOW
10
0.3
0.2
OBSERVED FLOWMETER READING
Technical Information
8
7
0.1
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
EQUIVALENT GAS FLOW CORRECTED FOR SPECIFIC GRAVITY-STD. COND.*
If more convenient, approximate correction factors may be determined using the

following formulas:
A. Pressure: Q2 = Q1 X
P1 X T2
P2 X T1
Where: Q1= Actual or Observed Flowmeter Reading
Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Pressure and Temperature
P1 = Actual Pressure (14.7 psia + Gage Pressure)
P2 = Standard Pressure (14.7 psia, which is 0 psig)
T1 = Actual Temperature (460 R + Temp F)
T2 = Standard Temperature (530 R, which is 70F)
*Measured at discharge on all but TMV units. Inlet pressure on TMV models.
17
18
19
20
B. Specific Gravity: Q2 = Q1 X
1
S.G.
Where: Q1 = Observed Flowmeter Reading
Q2 = Standard Flow Corrected for Specific Gravity
1 = Specific Gravity of Air or Water
S.G.= Specific gravity of media being used in flowmeter originally calibrated
for air or water.
Note: The corrections shown in the curves and in the formulas are for variations in
specific gravity and internal pressure* only. Further correction may be necessary for
variations in viscosity and changes in type of flow from laminar to turbulent or vice
versa. This is particularly true in the case of extremely low flows of the lighter gases.
Nevertheless these charts and correction factors can be quite useful when dealing
with small changes in pressure* and specific gravity.
143
144_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:52 AM Page 144
Series
MM
Mini-Master Flowmeters
Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water
2-1/2 [63.50]
1-31/32
[50.01]
1-1/2 [38.10]
3-3/4
[95.25]
5/16
[7.94] TYP
3
[76.20]
3/8 [9.53]
3/4
[19.05]
1-3/8 [34.93]
1-29/32
[48.42]
2-27/64 [61.52]
1
[25.40]
A. Standard Model MMA

B. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, bottom mount
C. Standard Model MMA with field configurable valve, top mount
FLOW
1/4
[6.15]
O.D. TUBES
1/2
[12.70]
3/4
[20.19]
OUTLET
2-1/16
[52.37]
Flowmeters, Variable Area
2-5/8
[66.68]
INLET
Model MMF-50-PV
1-1/2 scale, with
metering valve, knob.
Model MMF-10 with

1-1/2 scale, no valve.
Model MMF-10-TMV with topmounted valve-for vacuum service.

Use screwdriver to adjust.
7/8
[22.23]
5/16
[7.92]
3/4
13/32
[10.36] [19.05]
15/16
[23.98]

Offering advanced features at low cost, the Series MM flowmeters are ideal for a wide
range of OEM and user applications in medical equipment, air samplers, gas analyzers,
pollution monitors, chemical injectors, cabinet purging, etc.
The standard Model MMA flowmeter is suitable for both gas and liquid applications. It can
be configured by the user with the parts provided to have non-removable top or bottom
front mounted metering valves or no valve at all. The transparent nylon material provides
high chemical resistance, low moisture absorption and is transparent to facilitate routine
inspection. Using the assembly key provided, the flowmeter can be disassembled anytime
for cleaning or reconfiguration. In OEM quantities, ultrasonically welded caps or
interchangeable mold cores enable production of the MMA flowmeter with a low profile or
flat front surface where no valve is required.
The MMA is practically unbreakable, mounts easily, and is easy to read. Two 5/16 OD
mounting connection tubes permit quick push-on connection of rubber or plastic tubing.
A bottom clip for stand up mounting is also provided.
Despite its compactness, the MMA flowmeter features a 2 scale which combined with
precision molding, enables highly repeatable readings to be made to within 4%
accuracy.
144
Where a compact flowmeter is required to measure small volume air flows, the Model MMF
is recommended. Easy to mount, they require a minimum of panel space. A white back on
the flow tube makes the ball float easy to see. The 1-1/2 scale is highly visible and easy to
read. Scale graduations are printed on aluminum alongside the flow tube (not on it), so the
position of ball float is instantly visible.
The Model MMFs bezel type mounting is modern, attractive and quickly installed from the
front of instrument panel. Two 1/4 OD mounting-connection tubes are integrally molded
with flowmeter body. They can be back connected to flexible rubber or plastic tubing and
held in place with two spring retainers which are furnished. If preferred, connections
may be made to metal or rigid plastic tubing with a double compression fitting or nylon
tube union such as Dwyer Part No. A-328.
Excellent repeatability and 10% accuracy make the MMF flowmeter an excellent value at
its low cost.
145_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:53 AM Page 145
Model MMA
Model MMF
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Nylon 12; O-rings: Buna-N (optional materials available);
Float: Black glass, K monel, stainless steel, tungsten carbide.
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar) with compression fitting. 50 psi (3.4 bar) with
tubing clamp.
Accuracy: 4% full-scale.
Process Connection: 5/16 OD for push on rubber or plastic tubing with provided
spring tubing clamp. Connect to rigid tubing with double compression fitting.
Weight: 1 oz (28.35 g).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Styrene acrylonitrile; Float: SS, black glass, nylon; Valve:
Polyurethane.
Pressure Limit: 50 psi (3.4 bar). Valve option: 10 psi (0.6 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 OD for push on rubber or plastic tubing. Connect to
rigid tubing with compression fittings.
Weight: 0.5 oz (14.17 g).
How To Order
MMA-Range No.
Example: MMA-4
Series MMA with .5-5 SCFH Air Range
How To Order
MMF-Range No.-Valve
Example: MMF-1-PV
Series MMF with .1-1 SCFH Air Range with Valve
Model MMA
A-327, 5/16 Union
MMA tubing connections secured by

clamp. Standup mounting clip shown.
Range
No.
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
Model MMF Mini-Master Ranges

Range SCFHAir Range Number
.1 to 1
1
.2 to 2
2
1 to 10
10
5 to 50
50
10 to 100
100
Range GPH
Water
1 to 8
1 to 16
4 to 40
5 to 60
CC/Min. Water
5 to 50
10 to 150
20 to 200
50 to 500
LPM Water
.1 to 1.1
.25 to 2.5
.3 to 3.5
FLOW
Model MMA Mini-Master Ranges

Range
Range
Range Range
LPMAir No.
SCFHAir No.
.2 to 1.2 20
.5 to 2.5 3
.25 to 2.5 21
.5 to 5
4
.5 to 5
1 to 10
22
5
1 to 10
2 to 20
23
6
2.5 to 25 24
5 to 50
7
5 to 50
10 to 100 8
25
10 to 100 26
20 to 200 9
15 to 150 27
30 to 300 10
Model MMF-X, Standard MMF

Model MMF-X-PV, MMF with bottom mount valve
Model MMF-X-TMV, MMF with top mount valve
A-328, 1/4 Union
OPTION
40
41
42
Spring retainers on connection tubes

secure
panel
mounted
MMA.
Compression union, P/N A-327 shown.
Model MMF mounts easily from front of

panel. Drill two 9/32 or 5/16 dia. holes
in panel on 2-1/16 centers. Insert
mounting connector spuds. From rear,
slide on the two spring retainers
(furnished) and push on rubber or
plastic tubing.
Model MMF connections. Connector at

top, installed in panel, has retainer and
flexible tubing in place. Connector at
bottom shows alternative connection
with metal or rigid plastic tubing, using
a double compression nylon tube union
(as Dwyer Part No. A-328).
145
146_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:54 AM Page 146
Series
RM
Rate-Master Flowmeters
Polycarbonate, Gas Flow from 0.05-1800 SCFH, Water Flows to 10 GPM
J
BACK
WIDTH
K
B
FLOW
E
D
I
FULL OPEN
Model RMC
10 scale, 15-3/8 high
Model RMB-SSV
5 scale, 8-3/4 high
Model RMA-TMV
2 scale, 4-13/16 high
Flowmeter Dimensions
Model RMB
Model RMA
A 4 -9/16 [115.90]
8-1/2 [215.90]
B 3 [76.20]
6-7/16 [163.50]
1/4 NPT CONN.
1/8 NPT CONN.
C 1-5/8 [41.28]
3-15/16 [100.00]
10-32 MTG. HOLES 1/4-20 MTG. HOLES
D 3/8 [9.525]
5/8 [15.88]
E 1-1/16 [26.99]
1-7/8 [47.63]
F 1-3/16 [30.16]
1-3/4 [44.45]
G 11/16 [17.46]
1 [25.40]
H 61/64 [24.21]
1-7/16 [36.51]
I 1-3/8 [34.92]
1-13/16 [46.04]
J 3/4 [19.05)
1-1/4 [31.75]
K 4-13/16 [122.20]
8-3/4 [222.30]
L 1 [25.40]
1-1/2 [38.10]
Model RMC
15 -1/8 [384.20]
12 -1/4 [311.20]
1/2 NPT CONN.
8-3/4 [222.30]
3/8-24 MTG. HOLES
1 [25.40]
2-3/4 [69.85]
2-1/2 [63.50]
1-7/16 [36.51]
1-31/32 [50.00]
2-1/2 [63.50]
2 [50.80]
15-3/8 [390.50]
2-1/4 [57.15]

The Rate-Master flowmeter line of direct reading precision flowmeters incorporates
many unique user features at moderate cost. These low cost flowmeters are ideal for
general use.
Easy to read design The direct reading scales eliminate troublesome conversions.
The scales are brushed aluminum, coated with epoxy and the graduations are on both
sides of the indicating tube. Special integral flow guides stabilize the float throughout the
range to keep it from hunting or wandering in the bore. The float is highly visible against
a white background.
Construction assures accuracy All Rate-Master flowmeter bodies are injection
molded of tough, clear, shatter-proof polycarbonate plastic around a precision tapered pin.
The result is accurate and repeatable readings. The single piece plastic body is mounted
to a stainless steel back bone into which pipe thread inserts are welded to absorb piping
torque. Precision metering valves of brass or stainless steel (specify BV or SSV on order)
are available as an optional extra and permit precise flow adjustments. For vacuum
applications, Model RMA units are available with top mounted valves (specify TMV). The
small Series RMA models are accurate within 4% of full-scale reading; Series RMB within
3%; large Series RMC within 2%.
146
Installation is simple The Rate-Master Flowmeter can be neatly panel mounted to

keep flow tube centers in the same plane as the panel surface or surface mounted on the
panel by means of tapped holes in the backbone. When through-panel mounted, the bezel
automatically positions the instrument at the correct depth in the panel cutout. Surface
mounted units can also be held in place by the piping. All mounting hardware plus
installation and operating instructions are included.
Easy-to-Interchange bodies Within a given Series Rate-Master flowmeter bodies
can be instantly interchanged. Simply unplug the body from backbone and replace it with
another. O-rings provide a tight seal on inlet and outlet. Piping remains undisturbed.
Interchangeability is useful where different scale ranges are sometimes required at the
same location in the laboratory or plant.
Cleaning is easy To release the plastic flowmeter body from the stainless steel
backbone, just remove four screws. Pipe thread flow connections remain undisturbed.
Remove the slide cover and the plug ball stop, clean the flow tube with soap and water and
reassemble. Its that simple.
147_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:55 AM Page 147
How To Order
Series-Range No.(X)-Valve-Option
Example: RMA-2-SSV
Series RMA with .1-1 SCFH Air Range & Stainless Steel Valve
RMA
Model
RMA-X
RMA-X-BV
RMA-X-SSV
RMA-X-TMV
Description
Standard RMA
RMA with Brass Valve
RMA with Stainless Steel Valve
RMA with Top Mounted Valve*
RMB
Model
RMB-X
RMB-X-BV
RMB-X-SSV
Description
Standard RMB
RMB with Brass Valve
RMB with Stainless Steel Valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Polycarbonate; O-ring: Neoprene and Buna-N; Metal
parts: SS (except for optional brass valve); Float: SS, black glass, aluminum, K
monel, tungsten carbide depending on range.
Pressure Limit: 100 psi (6.9 bar).
Accuracy: RMA: 4%; RMB: 3%; RMC: 2% of full-scale.
Process Connection: RMA: 1/8; RMB: 1/4; RMC: 1/2 female NPT.
Weight: RMA: 4 oz (113.4 g); RMB: 13 oz (368.5 g); RMC: 39 oz (1105.6 g).
CAUTION
Dwyer Rate-Master flowmeters are designed to provide satisfactory long term
service when used with air, water, or other compatible media. Refer to factory for
information on questionable gases or liquids. Caustic solutions, anti-freeze
(ethylene glycol) and aromatic solvents should definitely not be used.

RMC
Model
RMC-X
RMC-X-BV
RMC-X-SSV
Model RMA-X-APF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMA Series

Model RMB-X-BPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMB Series
Model RMC-X-CPF, Adjustable Pointer Flag for RMC Series
Regulator Kits Available as optional extras for

both Rate-Master Flowmeters and Visi-Float
Flowmeters models. This view shows Model VFA
Visi-Float flowmeter with integrally connected
constant
differential
pressure
regulator.
Recommended for use where inlet air pressure
fluctuates widely and constant flow is required.
The regulator maintains a constant pressure
differential of approximately 3 .15 psig. Supply
pressure must be at least 3 psig above the flowmeter
discharge to operate. The standard regulator may be
used with any Dwyer Series RM or VF flowmeter up
to 200 scfh. For higher flow rates consult the factory.
Model RKA, Regulator Kit for RMA Series

Model RK-RMB, Regulator Kit for RMB Series
OPTION
Specials Special ranges, scales, mounting arrangements, etc., are available on

special order, or in OEM quantities.
147
Popular Ranges
Model RMA-2 Scale Model RMB-5 Scale
Model RMC-10 Scale
Range
Range Range
Range Range
Range
SCFH Air
No.
SCFH Air
No.
SCFH Air No.
.05-.5
1
.5-5
49+
5-50
101
.1-1
2
1-10
50
10-100
102
.2-2
3
3-20
51
20-200
103
.5-5
4
4-50
52
40-400
104
1-10
5
10-100
53
60-600
105
2-20
6
20-200
54
100-1000 106
5-50
7
40-400
55
120-1200 107
10-100
8
50-500
56
200-1800 108
15-150
9
60-600
57
SCFM Air
20-200
10
Gal. Water
1-10
121
CC Air/min.
per hour
2-20
122
5-50
151* 1-12
82
4-30
123
10-100
150* 1-20
83
Gal. Water
30-240
11
4-40
84
per hour
50-500
12
10-100
85
2-20
134
100-1000
13
SCFH & LPM Air
8-90
135
200-2500
14
1.2-10/0.6-5
50D
Gal.Water
LPM Air
3-20/1.5-9.5
51D
per minute
.5-5
26
4-50/2-23
52D
.1-1
141
1-10
21
10-100/5-50
53D
.2-2.2
142
2-25
22
20-200/5-95
54D
.4-4
143
5-50
23
GPH & LPM Water
.8-7
144
5-70
24
1-12/0.06-0.76
1.2-10
145
10-100
25
1-20/0.065-1.25
82D
CC Water/min.
10-100/0.8-6.2
83D
5-50
32
85D
10-110
33
20-300
34
Gal.Water/hr
1-11
42
2-24
43
4-34
44
5-50
45
*Accuracy 8%
+Accuracy 5%
Valve is designed for flow adjustment only, not intended to be used as an
open/shut-off valve.
FLOW
Description
Standard RMC
RMC with Brass Valve
RMC with Stainless Steel Valve
*Top mounted metering valves provide same precision
construction but for vacuum applications.
RMAmodels only.
Adjustable pointer flags Red lined pointer flags

provide quick visual reference to a required flow level.
Of clear plastic, they snap into place inside bezel and
slide to desired level.
148_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:55 AM Page 148
Series
VF
Visi-Float Flowmeters
Used to Indicate or Manually Control Air or Water Flow

MICHIGAN CITY, IND.
FLOW
Model VFB
Model VFA-SSV
Flowmeter Dimensions
Model VFB
Model VFA
6-1/2 (165.1)
A 4 (101.6)
5-1/2 (139.7)
B 3 (76.20)
1/8 NPT CONN. 1/8 NPTCONN.
3-1/2 (88.90)
C 1-5/8 (41.28)
10-32 THD
10-32 THD
1/2 (12.70)
D 1/2 (12.70)
E 1-3/16 (30.16) 1-1/2 (38.10)
1-1/4 (31.75)
F 1-1/4 (31.75)
I 2-1/16 (52.39) 2-1/16 (52.39)
OPEN
OPEN
K 4-3/32 (104.0) 6-11/16 (169.9)
1-3/8 (34.93)
L 1 (25.40)
7/8 (22.23)
M 7/8 (22.23)
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
3/32 (2.381)
N 3/32 (2.381)
N
I
FULL OPEN

The VisiFloat flowmeter bodies are cut and precision machined from solid, clear
acrylic plastic blocks. This construction not only produces a handsome finished product,
but permits complete visual inspection. As a result, the Visi-Float flowmeters are
especially popular for medical and laboratory equipment applications.
Scales are easy to read The front scale location and white background provides
excellent visibility. The direct reading scales are hot stamped into the plastic and will not
wear off. Midrange calibration is established with a master flowmeter. Accuracy is 5%
of full-scale for VFA models, 3% for VFB. Scales average 2" long on the VFA models, 4
long on VFB.
Durable and attractive construction The machined acrylic bodies of the VisiFloat
flowmeters are practically unbreakable. Fabrication is backed by over 60 years of
experience in acrylic instrument machining. The tapered bore is precision machined to a
smooth surface that provides perfect visibility of the indicating float. The VFA and VFB
models are available with either brass or stainless steel inlet and outlet connections and
are tapped for 1/8 NPT thread. VFB models 85 and 86 have either 1/4 back or 3/8 end
connections. All standard models employ BunaN O-rings for leak proof operation and are
available with either back or end connections for horizontal or vertical piping. Precision
metering valves in brass or stainless steel are available for most VFA and VFB models.
Easy installation All VisiFloat flowmeters have metal mounting inserts on rear for
panel mounting. They can also be supported directly by system piping.
148
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Acrylic plastic;
O-ring: Buna-N (fluoroelastomer available);
Metal parts: Brass standard, SS optional;
Float: SS, black glass, aluminum, K monel depending on range.
Temperature & Pressure Limits:
Without Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 150F (65C); 150 psig (10 bar) @ 100F
(38C);
With Valve: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 120F (48C).
Accuracy: VFA = 5% of full-scale; VFB = 3% of full-scale.
Process Connection: 1/8 female NPT. VFB ranges 85 and 86 have 1/4 NPT
back connections or 3/8 NPT end connections. These ranges not available with
brass valves.
Scale Length: VFA 2 typical length; VFB 4 typical length.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in vertical position.
Weight: VFA: 4.0 to 4.8 oz (.11 to .14 kg); VFB: 7.2 to 8.8 oz (.20 to .25 kg).
149_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:55 AM Page 149
How To Order
SeriesRange No. (X)ValveOption
Example: VFA-9-BV
Series VFA with 20-200 SCFH Air Range & Brass Valve

Special Multi-Column Visi-Float Flowmeters
Perfect for OEM applications, Visi-Float flowmeters can be custom made
with up to 10 columns in a single block of acrylic plastic.
Available with or without valves. Consult factory for more information.
VFA
Model
VFA-X
VFA-X-SS*
VFA-X-BV
VFA-X-SSV
VFA-X-EC
VFA-X-EC-SS
Description
Standard VFA
VFA with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts
VFA with Brass Valve
VFA with Stainless Steel Valve
VFA with End Connections
VFA with End Connections and Stainless
Steel Metal Wetted Parts
VFB
Model
VFB-X*
VFB-X-SS
VFB-X-BV
VFB-X-SSV
VFB-X-EC
VFB-X-EC-SS
Description
Standard VFB
VFB with Stainless Metal Wetted Parts
VFB with Brass Valve
VFB with Stainless Steel Valve
VFB with End Connections
VFB with End Connections and Stainless
Steel Metal Wetted Parts
Popular Ranges
Model VFB 4 Scale

Range No. Range SCFH Air
50
.3-3
91+
1-10
+
51
2-20
52
4-40
53+
10-100
54+
10-150
+
55
20-200
SCFM Air
90
.3-3
CC/Min. Air
60
100-1000
Range No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Range LPM Air

.06-0.5
.15-1
.6-5
1-10
3-25
6-50
10-100
41
42
43
44
Gal. Water per hour

.6-5
2-10
3-20
8-40
OPTIONS
-PF, Red ABSPlastic Pointer Flag
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-rings
Range No.
65
66
67
68
69
82
80+
83+
84
81
85*
86*
Model RKA, Regulator Kit for VFA Series

Model RK-VFB, Regulator Kit for VFB Series
LPM Air
.2-4
1-10
1-20
3-30
4-40
CC/Min. Water
2-30
GPH Water
.5-12
1-20
6-40
6-60
GPM Water
.2-2
.6-5
For dual range models in English and Metric add D to end of Range No.
149
Model VFA 2 Scale

Range No. Range SCFH Air
.1-1
1
.2-2
2
.6-5
3
1-10
4
2-20
5
4-30
6
5-50
7
10-100
8
20-200
9
CC Water per min.
6-50
32
10-100
33
20-200
34
Regulator Kits Available as optional extras for

both Rate-Master Flowmeters and Visi-Float
Flowmeters models. This view shows Model VFA
Visi-Float flowmeter with integrally connected
constant
differential
pressure
regulator.
Recommended for use where inlet air pressure
fluctuates widely and constant flow is required.
The regulator maintains a constant pressure
differential of approximately 3 .15 psig. Supply
pressure must be at least 3 psig above the flowmeter
discharge to operate. The standard regulator may be
used with any Dwyer Series RM or VF flowmeter up
to 200 scfh. For higher flow rates consult the factory.
FLOW
*Shown model
Valve is designed for flow adjustment only, not intended to be
used as an open/shut-off valve.
OEMSpecials Special flowmeter designs can be supplied to meet a wide range

of requirements and specific applications. These include: on-off plunger and pushto-test valves, special gas or fluid calibration, special ranges, scales, name brand or
other identification. Pointer flags can be furnished for instant visual reference. For
specific information, please supply an outline of your requirements.
150_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:56 AM Page 150
Series
VFC
&
VFCII
Visi-Float Flowmeters
Used to Indicate Air or Water Flow
1-3/4
[44.45]
1-1/32
[26.19]
2 NOM
[50.80]
1-1/2 HEX
[38.10]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-1/8
[28.58]
11
[279.40]
WITH BACK
CONNECTIONS
1-1/8
10-1/2 [28.58]
[266.70]
4-1/2
[114.30]
8-1/2
[215.90]
1-1/2
[38.10]
FLOW
3
[76.20]
1-1/2
[38.10]
VFCII with 1 MNPT

End Connections
VFC with 1 FNPT

End Connections
VFC with 1 FNPT

Back Connections

The accurate and durable VFC Visi-Float flowmeter contains a stainless steel guide
rod and large diameter float for excellent stability and visibility in high flow rates. The
large 5 scale provides a 2% full-scale accuracy for precision measurement required in
medical or laboratory applications. The VFC models have PVC 1 female NPT connections.
VFC II units are equipped with acetal thermoplastic 1 male NPT fittings. VFC II fittings
also include hex wrench flats to prevent stripped threads. All models have metal mounting
inserts on the back for panel mounting. Units may also be supported directly by system
piping.
How To Order
SeriesRange No.Option
Example: VFC-123-EC
Series VFC with 10-100 SCFM Air Range and 1 female NPT
End Connections
VFC
Model
VFC-X
VFCII-X
VFC-X-EC
VFCII-X-EC
Thread Type
1 FNPT
1 MNPT
1 FNPT
1 MNPT
Process Connection
Back
Back
In-Line End
In-Line End
Popular Ranges
Model VFC 5 Scale
Range No. Range SCFM Air
4-25
121
5-50
122
10-100
123
LPM Air
131
100-700
132
200-1400
133
300-2800
150
Range No.
141
142
143
151
152
153
Range GPM Water

.5-5
1-10
2-20
LPM Water
2-20
4-40
10-75
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Acrylic plastic;
O-ring: Buna-N (fluoroelastomer available);
Metal parts: SS;
Float: SS.
Fittings: VFC:PVC; VFCII:Acetal thermoplastic.
Temperature & Pressure Limits: 100 psig (6.9 bar) @ 120F (48C).
Accuracy: 2% of full scale.
Process Connection: VFC: 1 female NPT back connections. End connections
optional; VFCII: 1 male NPT back connections. End connections optional.
Scale Length: 5 typical length.
Mounting Orientation: Mount in vertical position.
Weight: 24 to 25 oz (.68 to .71 kg).
OPTIONS
-VIT, Fluoroelastomer O-Rings
-FDA, 316 SS Float & Guide Rod (only available on VFCII with fluoroelastomer ORings)
151_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:57 AM Page 151
Series
UV
Ultra-View Polysulfone Flowmeter

Monitor Water Flow Rates from .25 to 40 GPM, Air Rates from 1 to 100 SCFM
18
16
4
14
12
[307.98]
12
3
15
[381.00]
10
8
6
4
2
2-1/2
[63.50]
17
[431.80]
1-7/16-18 UNEF
THREADS
1 NPT[M]
THREADS
IN-LINE
THREADS
1 NPT[F]
2-15/16
[74.51] 1-1/2
[38.10]
Shown with optional
Polycarbonate Shield
FLOW
Shown with optional

Polysulfone Fittings
Shown with optional

Polysulfone Fittings
APPLICATIONS
Monitor chill water flow
Reverse osmosis systems
Deionized water systems
Potable water systems
ACCESSORIES
A-801, Panel Mount Kit, Polysulfone Fittings
A-162, In-line Fitting Replacement Kit. Two 1 female NPT connection fittings
included in kit.
OPTIONS
UV-XXXX-SHD, Protective Polycarbonate Shield
UV-XX22, PVC 1 female NPT Fittings
UV-XXXX-NIST, NIST traceable calibration certificate
Model
UV-0112
UV-1112
UV-2112
UV-3112
UV-4112
UV-5112
Range (GPM water)

0.25-2.5 (1-9.5 LPM)
0.5-5.0 (2-19 LPM)
1.0-10.0 (4-38 LPM)
2.0-20.0 (8-76 LPM)
3.0-30.0 (12-112 LPM)
4.0-40.0 (20-150 LPM)
Model
UV-A112
UV-B112
UV-C112
UV-D112
Range (SCFM air)

1-13 (30-370 LPM)
2.5-28 (70-780 LPM)
5-50 (70-1400 LPM)
14-100 (400-2800 LPM)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polysulfone body and fittings, fluoroelastomer O-rings and
virgin PTFE float.
Temperature Limits: 35 to 212F (2 to 100C); 35 to 130F (2 to 54C) for PVC
fitting option.
Accuracy: 2% full scale @ 70F 2F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (in line connection
rating only).
Repeatability: 1% full scale @ 70F 2F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (in line
connection rating only).
Process Connections: 1 female NPT. Optional 90 polysulfone elbow 1 male
NPT.
Scale Length: 6 (152.40 mm) 7 (177.80 mm), depending on model.
Fitting Torque: Maximum 22 ft - lb.
Weight: 1 lb (457 g) for 20 GPM range.
CAUTION: Ball valves can have a water cannon effect on opening, creating
pressure that exceeds the warranty ratings will damage the flowmeter. Series
UV Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas without direct sunlight.
Polysulfone is adversely affected by ultraviolet light.
151
Setting a new standard in the industry, the Series UV Polysulfone Flowmeter is an

ultra pure, laboratory grade flowmeter (2% FS accuracy) that measures flow in GPM and
LPM of water, air and other compatible media. The Series UV is designed to withstand
high temperatures up to 212F (100C) and high pressures up to 150 psi (10.34 bar). Highly
corrosion-resistant, this instrument is an excellent choice for monitoring many corrosive
media. Easy to install and to clean, the Series UV offers optional panel mount polysulfone
fittings and a protective polycarbonate shield.
152_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:58 AM Page 152
Series
LFMA
&
LFMB
Polycarbonate Flowmeters
In-Line or Panel Mount Meters
1-63/64
[50.40]
1-21/32
[42.07]
3-15/16
[100.1]
6-45/64
[170.26]
8-55/64
[225.03]
6-5/16
[160.34]
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
FLOW
LFMA
LFMB
LFMB

The New LFM Series Flowmeters are made of injection molded, heat and chemically
resistant polycarbonate bodies and fittings. Series LFM flow meters have dual scales
measuring in both GPM and LPM with 5% accuracy. A textured background on the body
enhances scale readability. Standard in-line models come with 1/2 male NPT process
connections while panel mount installation is available with 90 elbow fittings that include
panel lock nuts. Various other fittings are available.
LFMA
Model
LFMA-01-A2
LFMA-02-A2
LFMA-03-A2
LFMB-04-A2
LFMB-05-A2
LFMB-06-A2
Range (GPM water)

0.1-1 (.5-4 LPM)
0.2-2 (1-7 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
0.1-1 (.5-4 LPM)
0.2-2 (1-7 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
ACCESSORIES
LFMA
A-560, 20 mm Metric Union Fittings-ABS
A-566, 1/2 male NPT Fittings-ABS
LFMB
A-575, 1/2 male NPT with 90 Elbow Fittings-PVC
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-FL1.
152
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Polycarbonate;
Flange nut: ABS;
Float stop: ABS;
O-rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Rod & float: 316 SS;
Connections: Metric union and male NPT fittings-ABS; 90 male NPT elbow
fittings-PVC.
Pressure Limit: 87 psi (6 bar) at 68F (20C); 90 elbow fittings 116 psi (8 bar) at
68F (20C).
Accuracy: 5%.
Process Connection: LFMA: 1/2 male NPT. Optional 20 mm metric union; LFMB:
1/2 male NPT. Optional 20mm metric union or 1/2 male NPT with 90 elbow.
Weight: LFMA: 2 oz (56.7 g); LFMB: 3 oz (85.0 g).
CAUTION: Series LFM Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas without
direct sunlight. Polycarbonate is adversely affected by ultraviolet light.
153_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:04 AM Page 153
Series
LFMC, LFMD,
LFME &LFMF
Polycarbonate Flowmeters
In-Line or Panel Mount Meters. New Adjustable Set Point Indicator
8-9/32
[210.34]
LFMC
LFMD
LFME
2-27/32
[72.23]
2-21/64
[59.13]
1-63/64
[50.40]
6-45/64
[170.26]
9-27/32
5-9/32 [250.03]
[134.14]
12-19/64
[312.34]
3-15/16
[100.01]
8-55/64
[225.03]
11-27/64
[290.12]
15-3/4
[400.05]
LFMF
1/2 NPT
LFMC
3/4 NPT
LFMD
2 NPT
1 NPT
LFME
LFMF
Range (GPM water)

0.25-2.5 (1-10 LPM)
0.5-5 (1.8-18 LPM)
0.8-8 (3-30 LPM)
0.8-8 (3-30 LPM)
1-10 (4-40 LPM)
1.2-12 (5-50 LPM)
2-20 (8-80 LPM)
2.5-25 (10-100 LPM)
2.5-25 (10-100 LPM)
5-45 (20-180 LPM)
7-70 (25-250 LPM)
Process Connection
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
3/4 male NPT
3/4 male NPT
1 male NPT
1 male NPT
1 male NPT
2 male NPT
2 male NPT
2 male NPT
ACCESSORIES
LFMC
LFMD
A-563, 32 mm Metric Union Fittings-PVC
A-569, 3/4 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-572, 3/4 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
LFME
A-564, 40 mm Metric Union Fittings-PVC
A-570, 1 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-573, 1 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-578, 1 male NPT with 90 Elbow Fittings-PVC
CAUTION: Series LFM Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas without
direct sunlight. Polycarbonate is adversely affected by ultraviolet light.
LFMF
A-571, 2 male NPT Fittings-Nylon
A-574, 2 female NPT Fittings-Nylon
OPTION
153
Model
LFMC-07-A2
LFMC-08-A2
LFMC-09-A2
LFMD-10-C2
LFMD-11-C2
LFME-12-F2
LFME-13-F2
LFME-14-F2
LFMF-15-I2
LFMF-16-I2
LFMF-17-I2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Polycarbonate;
Flange nut: ABS;
Float stop:
LFMC: ABS;
LFMD, LFME, LFMF: Polypropylene;
O-rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Rod & float: 316 SS;
Connections:
20 mm & 63 mm metric union fittings:ABS;
32 mm & 40 mm metric union fittings:PVC;
1/2 & 3/4 male NPT fittings for LFMC:ABS;
3/4 male and female NPT fittings for LFMD:PA66 nylon;
1 & 2 male NPT fittings:PA66 nylon.
Pressure Limit: 87 psi (6 bar) at 68F (20C); 90 elbow fitting 116 psi (8 bar) at
68F (20C).
Accuracy: 5%.
Process Connection:
LFMC: 1/2 male NPT. Optional 20 mm metric union, 3/4 male NPT, or 1/2 male
NPT with 90 elbow;
LFMD: 3/4 male NPT. Optional 32 mm metric union, 3/4 female NPT, or 3/4
male NPT with 90 elbow.
LFME: 1 male NPT. Optional 40 mm metric union, 1 female NPT, or 1 male
NPT with 90 elbow;
LFMF: 2 male NPT. Optional 63 mm metric union or 2 female NPT.
Weight:
LFMC: 4 oz (113.4 g);
LFMD: 10 oz (283.5 g);
LFME: 15 oz (425.2 g);
LFMF: 40 oz (1.1 kg).
FLOW
The New LFM Series Flowmeters are made of injection molded, heat and chemically
resistant polycarbonate bodies and fittings. Series LFM flow meters have dual scales
measuring in both GPM and LPM with 5% accuracy. A textured background on the body
enhances scale readability. Standard in-line models come with 1/2 male NPT connections
for LFMC, 3/4 male NPT connections for LFMD, 1 male NPT connections for LFME
and 2 male NPT connections for LFMF. Panel mount installation is available with 90
elbow fittings that includes panel lock nuts. Various other fittings are available.
154_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:59 AM Page 154
Variable Area Fluoropolymer Flowmeter
Series
VAT
In-Line, 5% Accuracy, Chemically Inert

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Constructed entirely of Fluoropolymers, the Series VAT Flowmeters are ideal for
high purity or corrosive liquid applications. Flowmeters feature a 0 to 10 scale for flow
indication. Each unit is individually leak tested to a leak integrity rating of 1 x 10-7 sccs
Helium or better. The Series VAT are designed for in-line mounting and include a removable
protective shield.
FLOW
Model
Low Range
Valve
VAT-311
VAT-312
VAT-313
VAT-314
VAT-315
VAT-316
VAT-317
VAT-318
VAT-319
Model
No Valve
VAT-301
VAT-302
VAT-303
VAT-304
VAT-305
VAT-306
VAT-307
VAT-308
VAT-309
Connections
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
3/8 female NPT
High Range
Valve
VAT-6110
VAT-6111
VAT-6112
VAT-6113
VAT-6114
No Valve
VAT-6010
VAT-6011
VAT-6012
VAT-6013
VAT-6014
Connections
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
Flow Rate
ml/min (gph)
125 (1.98)
250 (3.91)
400 (6.34)
500 (7.92)
1000 (15.85)
2000 (31.69)
2500 (39.62)
3000 (47.54)
5000 (79.23)
Dimensions
Connection
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
A
5-11/16 [144]
5-11/16 [144]
10-1/2 [267]
10-1/2 [267]
B
1-1/4 [31.8]
1-1/4 [31.8]
2 [50.8]
2 [50.8]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: PFA;
Float and end fittings: PTFE;
Guide rods:PCTFE.
Accuracy: 5% FS @ 70F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute).
Process Connections: See chart.
Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-7 sccs of helium.
Scale: 0 to 10 markings.
Mounting: Vertical, in-line.
OPTION
Flow Rate
L/min (gpm)
13 (3.43)
20 (5.28)
30 (7.93)
40 (10.57)
45 (11.89)
All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters
Series
TVA
75 mm and 125 mm, 10:1 Turndown, 5% FS Accuracy

G
I NPT (F) .750

TYP.
C TYP.
B
D
Series TVA All Fluoropolymer Flowmeters offer solutions for measuring flow rates of
highly corrosive or ultra-pure liquids. Flowmeters are designed with 0 to 10 scale graduations
denoting a discrete flow rate.
Model
Valve
TVA1113
TVA1115
TVA1317
TVA1319
Model
Valve
TVA22110
TVA24112
TVA24114
154
Low Range
No Valve
TVA1103
TVA1105
TVA1307
TVA1309
No Valve
TVA22010
TVA24012
TVA24014
Length Connections
75 mm 1/4 female NPT
High Range
Length
125 mm
125 mm
125 mm
Flow Rate (H2O)

gph (ml/min)
6.34 (400)
15.9 (1000)
39.6 (2500)
79.2 (5000)
Flow Rate (H2O)

Connections
GPM (LPM)
1/2 female NPT 3.43 (13)
3/4 female NPT 7.93 (30)
3/4 female NPT 11.9 (45)
Model
TVA11XX
TVA13XX
TVA22XX
TVA24XX
A
4.97 [126]
4.97 [126]
8.72 [221]
8.47 [215]
B
0.56 [14]
0.56 [14]
0.88 [22]
1.00 [25]
C
1.06 [27]
1.25 [32]
1.75 [44]
1.75 [44]
D
3.35 [85]
4.65 [118]
4.57 [116]
5.95 [151]
E
1.25 [32]
1.50 [38]
2.00 [51]
2.25 [57]
F
6.16 [156]
6.16 [156]
10.4 [264]
10.4 [264]
G
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
Panel Mounting: Drill two holes: 3/4 dia. at 4.97 apart for 1/4 NPT
models, 7/8 dia. at 4.97 apart for 3/8 NPT models, 1 dia. at 8.72 apart for
1/2 NPT models, and 1-1/4 dia. at 8.47 apart for 3/4 NPT models (centerto-center).
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: PFA;
Float and end fittings: PTFE;
Guide rods: PCTFE.
Accuracy: 5% FS @ 70F (21.1C)

and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute).
Repeatability: 0.25%.
Leak Integrity: 1 x 107 sccs of helium.
Scales: 0 to 10 markings, 75 mm or
125 mm lengths.
Turn-down Ratio: 10:1.
Mounting: Vertical.
OPTION
155_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:06 AM Page 155
Series
VA
Variable Area Glass Flowmeters

65 mm and 150 mm, 2% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes, PTFE Options
Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8 dia. holes at 4.5 apart for 65 mm models
and 8.812 apart for 150 mm models (center-to center).
1-1/4
[31.75]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
9-13/16
[249.24]
4-1/2
[114.3]
5-1/2
[139.7]
8-13/16
[223.84]
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT
Max. Flow
Max. Flow
Flow Rate (Air)

scfh (ml/min)
0.104 (49)
0.307 (145)
0.220 (104)
0.633 (299)
0.43 (202)
1.1 (522)
2.09 (986)
4.12 (1946)
2.65 (1249)
5.34 (2520)
4.32 (2040)
8.45 (3990)
13.4 (6318)
25.5 (12058)
27.9 (13153)
52.3 (24680)
49.1 (23169)
89.2 (42094)
Flow Rate (H2O)

gph (ml/min)
0.009 (0.55)
0.038 (2.38)
0.028 (1.8)
0.122 (7.7)
0.041 (2.6)
0.19 (12.0)
0.325 (20.5)
0.881 (55.6)
0.428 (27)
1.125 (71)
0.63 (40)
1.71 (108)
2.33 (147)
5.77 (364)
4.9 (309)
11.81 (745)
8.27 (522)
19.97 (1260)
SS
Fittings
VA1243
VA1244
VA1245
VA1246
VA1247
VA1248
VA1249
VA12410
VA12411
VA12412
VA12413
VA12414
VA12417
VA12418
VA12419
VA12420
VA12421
VA12422
Brass
Fittings
VA1343
VA1345
VA1347
VA1349
VA13411
VA13413
VA13417
VA13419
VA13421
-
Float
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Metal Models (150 mm Scale)

Aluminum
Fittings
VA20429
VA20430
VA20433
VA20434
VA20435
VA20436
VA20437
VA20438
VA20439
VA20440
SS
Fittings
VA22429
VA22430
VA22433
VA22434
VA22435
VA22436
VA22437
VA22438
VA22439
VA22440
Brass
Fittings
VA23429
VA23433
VA23435
VA23437
VA23439
-
Float
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Glass
SS
Max. Flow
Max. Flow
Flow Rate (Air)

scfh (ml/min)
0.792 (374)
1.725 (814)
4.9 (2313)
9.67 (4562)
8.07 (3807)
16.08 (7590)
18.38 (8678)
35.5 (16737)
49.9 (23564)
93.9 (44336)
Flow Rate (H2O)

gph (ml/min)
0.087 (5.5)
0.323 (20.4)
0.848 (54)
2.067 (130)
1.336 (84)
3.34 (217)
3.32 (210)
8.02 (506)
9.0 (568)
21.7 (1370)
PTFE Models (65 mm Scale)

With Valve
VA1545
VA1547
VA15411
VA15413
VA15417
VA15419
VA15421
Without Valve
VA1505
VA1507
VA15011
VA15013
VA15017
VA15019
VA15021
Float
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Flow Rate (Air)

scfh (ml/min)
0.220 (104)
0.428 (202)
2.646 (1249)
4.322 (2040)
13.39 (6318)
27.9 (13153)
49 (23169)
Flow Rate (H2O)

gph (ml/min)
0.028 (1.8)
0.047 (2.95)
0.428 (27)
0.630 (39.7)
2.33 (147)
4.9 (309)
8.27 (522)
OPTION
PTFE Models (150 mm Scale)

With Valve
VA25425
VA25429
VA25431
VA25435
VA25437
Without Valve
VA25025
VA25029
VA25031
VA25035
VA25037
Float
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Flow Rate (Air)

scfh (ml/min)
0.104 (49)
0.792 (374)
1.75 (825)
8.07 (3807)
18.39 (8678)
Flow Rate (H2O)

gph (ml/min)
0.01 (0.61)
0.087 (5.5)
0.262 (16.5)
1.34 (84.3)
3.32 (209)
ACCESSORIES
VA81, High precision valve, 316 SS, 0.42 scfh capacity
VA7, Acrylic tripod for single meter
155
Metal Models (65 mm Scale)

Aluminum
Fittings
VA1043
VA1044
VA1045
VA1046
VA1047
VA1048
VA1049
VA10410
VA10411
VA10412
VA10413
VA10414
VA10417
VA10418
VA10419
VA10420
VA10421
VA10422
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases or liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass;
Floats: Glass or SS (sapphire, Carboloy and tantalum are optional);
Float stops: PTFE;
End fittings: Anodized aluminum, 316 SS, brass or PTFE;
Packings: Fluoroelastomer;
O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and brass models, fluoroelastomer on
SS models, PTFE on VAX5XX models.
Temperature Limits: 250F (121C); VAX5XX: -15 to 150F (-26 to 65C).
Pressure Limits: 200 psig (13.8 bar); VAX5XX: 100 psig (6.7 bar).
Accuracy: 2% FS @ 70F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute); VA1042,
VA1243, VA1343, VA25425, VA25025: 5% FS @ 70F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia
(1 @ absolute).
Repeatability: 0.25% full-scale.
Leak Rate:1 x 10-7 sccs of helium.
Scales: Universal 65 mm or 150 mm with correlation charts.
Connections: Two 1/8 female NPT.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6-turn needle (standard), optional 16-turn high precision valve.
Valve Orifice: Acetal on aluminum models and brass models, PCTFE on stainless
steel models, PTFE on VAX5XX models.
FLOW
Accurately measure flow rates of air, water, and other commonly used gases with the
Series VA Variable Area Glass Flowmeters. Flowmeters are designed with an easy-to-read
universal mm scale and supplied with a correlation chart containing calibration data for air
and water. Correlation data for other gases and liquids are available. Permanently fused
ceramic scale with vertical locator line reduces parallax and eye fatigue. Thick polycarbonate
front shield protects tube from breakage and also serves as a magnifying lens to enhance
reading resolution.
Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering carrier gases, liquid and gas measurement in
pilot plants, laboratories, process flow and level indicating. Units are equipped with a standard
6-turn needle valve for flow rate control. High precision metering valves with non-rising
stems (sold separately) are available for high sensitivity control and resolution particularly
suited for very low flow rates.
Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and ready for panel mounting. Use an optional
acrylic tripod base to convert to self-standing bench mounting.
156_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:00 AM Page 156
Direct Reading Glass Flowmeters
Series
DR
65 mm and 150 mm, 5% FS Accuracy, Interchangeable Flowtubes

Panel Mounting: Drill two 5/8 dia. holes at 4.5 apart for 65mm models
and 8.812 apart for 150 mm models (center-to center).
1
[25.4]
1/8 FNPT
1
[25.4]
1
[25.4]
2X 1/2 HEX
9/16-18 THD
1/8
[3.18]
1/8
[3.30]
5-1/2
[139.7]
9-13/16
[249.24]
9-13/16
65 MM [249.24]
2X 7/8 HEX
SCALE
LOCKNUT
LENGTH
8-13/16
[223.84]
3-1/4
[82.55]
4-1/2
[114.3]
23/32
[18.29]
2X END
CAP
1/2
[12.7]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]
OPEN
1-1/4
[31.75]
5/8
[15.88]
FLOW
1
[25.4]
5-29/32
150 MM
SCALE
LENGTH
1/2
[12.7]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
1 [31.75]
OPEN
[25.4]
7-9/16
[192.07]
8-13/16
[223.84]
1/8
FNPT
5/8
[15.88]1/2
[12.7] 5/8
[15.88]
150 MM
SCALE
LENGTH
23/32
[18.29]
1-1/4
1 [31.75]
OPEN
[25.4]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]

Use Series DR Glass Flowmeters to accurately measure flow rates of air or water with
the convenience of a direct reading scale. Permanently fused ceramic scale has integral float
guides for optimum float performance. Reflective plastic background and 1.5 X magnification
lens reduces eye fatigue and allows for more accurate readings. Units include a safety blowout back panel for additional protection. Flowmeters are shipped completely assembled and
include standard panel mounting hardware for quick installation.
APPLICATIONS
Glass flowmeters are suitable for metering gases or liquids for film processing, paper
manufacturing, chemical processing, semiconductor industry, water and air pollution
analysis equipment, metals processing, industrial fuel and energy conservation,
cylinder gas metering, and general laboratory and industrial applications.
Add suffix M for metric scale.
*Denotes glass float.
Metric models use ccm as unit of measure for water and LPM for air.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetting Materials:
Float: 316 SS (black glass as indicated);
Float stops: PTFE;
End fittings: Anodized aluminum or 316 SS;
O-rings: Buna-N on aluminum models and fluoroelastomer on SS models.
Accuracy: 5% FS @ 70F (21.1C) and 14.7 psia (1 atm absolute).
Repeatability: 0.25% of scale reading.
Scales: Direct reading 65 mm or 150 mm scales for air or water.
Connection: 1/8 female NPT.
Mounting: Vertical.
Valve: 6-turn needle (standard on models with valve).
OPTION
Model (65 mm Scale)

Without Valve
Aluminum SS
With Valve
Aluminum SS
DR10010*
DR10022
DR10030*
DR10042
DR12010*
DR12022
DR12030*
DR12042
DR10410*
DR10422
DR10430*
DR10442
DR12410*
DR12422
DR12430*
DR12442
DR10062
DR10070*
DR10082
DR10090*
DR100102
DR12062
DR12070*
DR12082
DR12090*
DR120102
DR10462
DR10470*
DR10482
DR10490*
DR104102
DR12462
DR12470*
DR12482
DR12490*
DR124102
DR100120* DR120120*
DR100132 DR120132
DR100140* DR120140*
DR100152 DR120152
DR100172 DR120172
DR100180* DR120180*
DR100192 DR120192
DR100200* DR120200*
DR100212 DR120212
156
Max. Flow
Flow Rate
(Air)
scfh (sccm)
0.24 (130)
0.65 (300)
1.1 (500)
2.2 (1000)
scfh (LPM)
5.6 (2.1)
11 (5)
20 (9.5)
55 (24)
100 (50)
DR104120* DR124120*
DR104132 DR124132
DR104140* DR124140*
DR104152 DR124152
DR104172 DR124172
DR104180* DR124180*
DR104192 DR124192
DR104200* DR124200*
DR104212 DR124212
Flow Rate
(H2O)
gph (sccm)
0.02 (1.5)
0.1 (6.5)
0.13 (8)
0.36 (24)
0.9 (55)
2.2 (140)
4.4 (280)
10 (600)
24 (1500)
Model (150 mm Scale)

Without Valve
With Valve
Aluminum SS
Aluminum SS
Max. Flow
Flow Rate (Air) Flow Rate

(H2O)
scfh (sccm)
DR20032
DR22032 DR20432
DR22432 0.33 (160)
DR20082
DR22082 DR20482
DR22482 0.54 (270)
DR200132 DR220132 DR204132 DR224132 2 (840)

scfh (LPM)
DR200182 DR220182 DR204182 DR224182 3.8 (1.8)
DR200232 DR220232 DR204232 DR224232 10 (4.8)
DR200282 DR220282 DR204282 DR224282 16 (7.5)
DR200332 DR220332 DR204332 DR224332 35 (16)
DR200382 DR220382 DR204382 DR224382 90 (44)

gph (sccm)
DR200432 DR220432 DR204432 DR224432
0.05 (3.2)
DR200482 DR220482 DR204482 DR224482
0.075 (4.6)
DR200532 DR220532 DR204532 DR224532
0.34 (21)
DR200582 DR220582 DR204582 DR224582
0.75 (46)
DR200632 DR220632 DR204632 DR224632
2.2 (140)
DR200682** DR220682 DR204682** DR224682
3.6 (230)
DR200732 DR220732 DR204732 DR224732
7.5 (480)
DR200782 DR220782 DR204782 DR224782
21 (1300)
**Not available in metric scale.
157_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:01 AM Page 157
Series
IF
Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeter

Air/Water Direct Reading Scale, 304 SS Protective Shield, 3% Accuracy
Dimensions
Tube Female
Size
NPT
1 and 2 1/2
3 and 4 1
5 and 6 2
[B] [D]
[A]
Ideal for industrial applications, the Series IF Industrial Direct Reading Flowmeters
are fully enclosed in a brushed SS case. The flowmeters can directly measure flow rates
up to 116 GPM (439 lpm) for water and 250 SCFM (7080 lpm) for air service. The
detachable, clear 3/16 thick polycarbonate front shield provides protection at maximum
rated temperature and pressure. Each unit is designed with female NPT end fittings for
easy in-line installation.
OPTION
Maximum Flow Rate
Water
Air
GPM(LPM) SCFM(LPM)
0.25 (0.95) 1.2 (35)
0.36 (1.3) 1.7 (50)
0.76 (3.0) 3.3 (90)
1 (3.7)
4.2 (120)
1.5 (5.6)
6.5 (180)
2.2 (8.2)
8.5 (250)
3.8 (14)
16 (475)
5 (18)
21.5 (650)
6 (20)
25.5 (725)
7.4 (27.5) 30 (900)
9.6 (35)
40 (1200)
Tube
Size
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
Pressure Drop
(in H2O)
2
5
6
10
10
14
5
6
10
Series
RSF
Model
IF2711
IF2712
IF2713
IF2714
IF2715
IF2716
IF2717
IF2718
IF2719
IF2720
IF2721
B
9.54 [242]
13.69 [348]
15.59 [396]
C
2.25 [57.2]
3.75 [95.3]
5.25 [133]
D
8.04 [204]
10.50 [267]
11.55 [293]
[C]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids or gases.
Wetted Materials:
Flowtube: Borosilicate glass; float,
guide rods, float stops, end;
Fittings: 316 SS;
O-Rings: Fluoroelastomer.
Pressure Limit: 200 psi (13.8 bar);
125 psi for tube size 5 & 6.
Maximum Flow Rate

Air
Water
GPM(LPM) SCFM(LPM)
47.5 (1400)
11(40)
62 (1800)
14 (50)
90 (2600)
20 (75)
90 (2550)
22 (83)
26 (98)
160 (4531)
41 (155)
180 (5098)
44 (167)
245 (6938)
60 (227)
250 (7080)
61 (231)
86 (326)
116 (439)
Tube
Size
4
4
4
5
4
6
5
6
5
6
6
Accuracy: 3% of full-scale.
Repeatability: 0.5% of full-scale.
Turndown Ratio: 10:1.
Scale: Dual scale GPM and SCFM.
Process Connection: See table.
Mounting: Vertical.
Front Shield: Polycarbonate.
Side Panels: 304 SS.
Pressure Drop
(in H2O)
13
24
39
16
70
5
30
16
40
25
45
FLOW
Model
IF2700
IF2701
IF2702
IF2703
IF2704
IF2705
IF2706
IF2707
IF2708
IF2709
IF2710
A
2 [50.8]
3.5 [89]
5 [127]
Dual, Rotatable Direct Reading Scales for Air and Water

3/8-18 NPT TYP 2 PLACES
10-3/8
[263.53]
3/8-18 NPT TYP 2 PLACES
10-3/8
[263.53]
9-15/32
[240.51]
11-1/8
[282.58]
3/4
[19.05]
Series RSF Flowmeters are designed with unique rotatable scales of dual, air-water direct
reading graduations. Flow rate is indicated in SCFM and SLPM for air and GPM and LPM
for water. Graduations are marked on a rotating, polycarbonate tubeshield which also serves
to protect the borosilicate glass flowtube. Flowmeters include a reflective plastic background
and 1.5 X magnification lens to reduce eye fatigue and allow for more accurate readings. A
blow-out back panel provides additional protection in the event of breakage. Series RSF
Flowmeters are available in vertical in-line mounting or panel mounting. Units are shipped
completely assembled and include standard mounting hardware for quick installation.
Brass &SSVertical In-Line Meters
Without Valve
With Valve
SS
Brass
SS
Brass
RSF011
RSF012
RSF013
RSF014
RSF015
RSF111
RSF112
RSF113
RSF114
RSF115
RSF011V
RSF012V
RSF013V
RSF014V
RSF015V
RSF111V
RSF112V
RSF113V
RSF114V
RSF115V
Brass &SSPanel Mount Meters

Without Valve
With Valve
Brass
SS
SS
Brass
RSF021
RSF022
RSF023
RSF024
RSF025
RSF121
RSF122
RSF123
RSF124
RSF125
RSF021V
RSF022V
RSF023V
RSF024V
RSF025V
RSF121V
RSF122V
RSF123V
RSF124V
RSF125V
Max. Flow Rate

Air scfm Water GPM
(SLPM) (LPM)
5 (140) 1.2 (4)
10 (280) 2 (8)
15 (425) 3 (11.5)
20 (575) 4 (15)
30 (900) 5 (20)
Max. Flow Rate
Air scfm Water GPM
(SLPM) (LPM)
5 (140) 1.2 (4)
10 (280) 2 (8)
15 (425) 3 (11.5)
20 (575) 4 (15)
30 (900) 5 (20)
1-3/4
[44.45]
2
[50.80]
1-7/8 [47.63]
In-Line Meter
3/4
[19.05]
2
[50.80]
1-7/8
1-1/2
[47.63]
[38.10]
Panel Mount Meter
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE;
Float stops: Brass/SS models: 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE;
End fittings: Brass/SS models: Brass or 316 SS; PTFE models: PTFE;
O-rings: Brass/SS models: Fluoroelastomer; PTFE models: PTFE.
Temperature Limit: 250F (121C). PTFE models: 150F (65C).
Pressure Limit: 150 psig (10.34 bar) @ 200F (93C). PTFE models: 100 psig
(6.7 bar).
Accuracy: 7% FS.
Repeatability: 0.25% FS.
Scale: Direct Reading 127 mm scales for air and water.
Turn-Down Ratio: 10:1.
Connections: Two 3/8 female NPT.
Mounting: Vertical or panel mount.
Panel Cutout: Drill two 7/8 diameter holes 9.0 (229 mm) apart (for panel mount
meters only).
Valve: 6-turn needle (standard on models indicating with valve).
OPTION
Note: For PTFE models contact the factory.
157
Rotatable Scale Flowmeters
158_Layout 1 7/15/14 2:53 PM Page 158
Series
HFPC & HFPS
Plastic Flowmeters
5% FS Accuracy, Mount in any Position
2-7/16
[61.91]
The New HFPC & HFPS Series Flowmeters are made of injection molded, polycarbonate
and polysulfone bodies. Series HFPC and HFPS flowmeters have dual scales measuring in
both GPM and LPM with 5% full-scale accuracy. Models are available with 1/2, 3/4 or 1
male or female NPT connections. Female 1/2, 3/4 and 1 BSPP connections are also
available. Rugged construction allows these meters to handle maximum pressures of 325
psig and 200F. Units can be mounted in any position, even applications with downward flow.
Flowmeters, In-Line
CAUTION: Series HFPC & HFPS Flowmeters are for indoor use only or areas
without direct sunlight. Polycarbonate & polysulfone are adversely affected by
ultraviolet light.
Series
Wetted
Parts
HF
PC
PS
Connection
Range
Option
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-1
-2
-3
-4
-BC
Series HFPlastic Flow Meters

Polycarbonate Body, Polysulfone
Connections
Polysulfone Body, Polysulfone
Connections
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1/2 male NPT Brass Connections Only
3/4 male NPT Brass Connections Only
1 male NPT Brass Connections Only
1/2 female BSPP
3/4 female BSPP
1 female BSPP
.5-5 GPM (1-19 LPM)
1-10 GPM (3.8-38 LPM)
2-15 GPM(7.5-55 LPM)
3-30 GPM (11-113 LPM)
Brass Connections
DIM L
7-11/16 [195.26]
7-5/32 [181.76]
8-1/32 [204.00]
7-9/16 [192.09]
8-3/32 [205.58]
7-9/16 [192.09]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: HFPC: Polycarbonate body, Buna-N seals, SS spring,
Polysulfone connections; HFPS: Polysulfone body, Buna-N seals, SS spring,
polysulfone connections.
Temperature Limit: HFPC: 200F (93C); HFPS: 250F (121C).
Accuracy: 5% FS.
Pressure Loss: See chart.
Weight: Standard models 1 lb (453.6 g). Models with optional brass connections
2 lb (907 g).
TYPICAL PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL

25
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL: PSID
FLOW
Meter Size
1/2 male
1/2 female
3/4 male
3/4 female
1 male
1 female
20
15
10
0
0
10
20
30
FLOW RATE: GPM

OPTION
158
40
50
159_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:02 AM Page 159
Series
HF
In-Line Flow Monitors

For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, 2.5% Accuracy, Unrestricted Mounting
[A]

MICHIGAN CITY, IN
[C]
Connection
Size
1/4 to 1/2 NPT
3/4 to 1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
A
Reference
1-7/8 [48 mm]
2-3/8 [60 mm]
3-1/2 [89 mm]
3-1/2 [89 mm]
B
Wrench Flats
1-1/4 [32 mm]
1-3/4 [45 mm]
2-5/8 [67 mm]
2-5/8 [67 mm]
C
Reference
6-9/16 [167 mm]
7-1/8 [181 mm]
10-1/8 [257 mm]
12-5/8 [321 mm]
[B]
APPLICATIONS
HFFlow Monitors can be used to set flow rates, fluid motor and cylinder speeds.
Check pump high pressure performance, pressure relief valve settings, fluid handling
systems in agricultural, construction or industrial machinery, power tools and
equipment. Monitor petrochemical operations with brass or stainless steel models.
Industrial pneumatic systems air flow can be monitored with the HFA models which are
calibrated at 100 psig inlet pressure.
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam):

Connection Size
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1-1/2 female NPT
1-1/2 female NPT
2 female NPT
2 female NPT
Range, Water
GPM (LPM)
0.5-5.0 (1-19)
2-15 (7.5-55)
2-20 (7.5-75)
5-35 (19-130)
5-50(19-189)
10-100 (38-379)
8-75 (31-284)
20-150 (76-568)
Aluminum body for oil based fluids:

Connection
Range, GPM
Model
Size
(LPM) Oil
HFL-2-05 1/2 female NPT
0.5-5.0 (1-19)
HFL-4-25 1 female NPT
2-25 (7.5-95)
Flowmeters, In-Line
Model
HFB-2-05
HFB-3-15
HFB-3-20
HFB-4-35
HFB-5-50
HFB-5-100
HFB-6-75
HFB-6-150
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
HFA: Aluminum casing, Buna-N seals, PTFE coated Alnico magnet, SS disk;
HFB:Brass casing, Buna-N seals, PTFE coated Alnico magnet, SS disk;
HFS: 303 SS casing, FKM seals with PTFE backup, PTFE coated Alnico
magnet, SS disk;
Maximum Viscosity:500 SSU.
TemperatureLimits: 240F (116C).
Pressure Limits:
HFA, HFB, HFL and HFH models:600 psig (41 bar) for air and gas, 3500 psig
(241 bar) for liquids;
HFS model:1000 psig (70 bar) for air and gas, 6000 psig (413 bar) for liquids.
Accuracy: 4% FS over entire range; 2.5% over center third of the measuring
range.
Repeatability: 1% of full-scale.
Shipping Weight:
1/4 to 1/2 female NPTmodels; 2 lb (0.9 kg);
3/4 to 1 female NPT models: 3.5 lb (1.59 kg);
1-1/2 female NPT models: 11 lb (5 kg);
2 female NPT models: 13.5 lb (6.12 kg).
304 SS body for high-pressure fluids:

Range, Water
Connection
Model
GPM(LPM)
Size
HFS-2-02 1/2 female NPT
0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
HFS-2-10 1/2 female NPT
0.5-10 (1.9-38)
Aluminum, Brass, and Stainless Steel for air and other non-corrosive gases:
Connection
Aluminum
Brass
Stainless Steel
(NPT female, dry seal)
HFA-1-001
HFB-1-001
HFS-1-001
1/4
HFA-1-002
HFB-1-002
HFS-1-002
1/4
HFA-1-003
HFB-1-003
HFS-1-003
1/4
HFA-1-004
HFB-1-004
HFS-1-004
1/4
HFA-8-001
HFB-8-001
HFS-8-001
3/8
HFA-8-002
HFB-8-002
HFS-8-002
3/8
HFA-8-003
HFB-8-003
HFS-8-003
3/8
HFA-8-004
HFB-8-004
HFS-8-004
3/8
HFA-2-001
HFB-2-001
HFS-2-001
1/2
HFA-2-002
HFB-2-002
HFS-2-002
1/2
HFA-2-003
HFB-2-003
HFS-2-003
1/2
HFA-2-004
HFB-2-004
HFS-2-004
1/2
HFA-3-003
HFB-3-003
HFS-3-003
3/4
HFA-3-004
HFB-3-004
HFS-3-004
3/4
HFA-3-005
HFB-3-005
HFS-3-005
3/4
HFA-3-006
HFB-3-006
HFS-3-006
3/4
HFA-4-003
HFB-4-003
HFS-4-003
1
HFA-4-004
HFB-4-004
HFS-4-004
1
HFA-4-005
HFB-4-005
HFS-4-005
1
HFA-4-006
HFB-4-006
HFS-4-006
1
HFA-9-007
HFB-9-007
HFS-9-007
1-1/4
HFA-9-008
HFB-9-008
HFS-9-008
1-1/4
HFA-5-007
HFB-5-007
HFS-5-007
1-1/2
HFA-5-008
HFB-5-008
HFS-5-008
1-1/2
Range scfm (lps)

1.5-12 (0.5-5.5)
4-23 (2-10)
5-50 (2.5-25)
10-100 (5-45)
1.5-12 (.5-5.5)
4-23 (2-10)
5-50 (2.5-25)
10-100 (5-45)
1.5-12 (.5-5.5)
4-23 (2-10)
5-50 (2.5-25)
10-100 (5-45)
5-50 (3-23)
10-100 (4-48)
15-150 (8-56)
30-330 (20-150)
5-50 (3-23)
10-100 (4-48)
15-150 (8-56)
30-330 (20-150)
30-470 (15-220)
150-900 (75-425)
30-470 (15-220)
150-900 (75-425)
FLOW
Low cost, Series HF In-Line Flow Monitors have a design based on a floating sharpedged orifice disk and variable area flow measurement to yield accuracy of 2.5% over
center one-third of scale. This unique design allows accurate performance with fluid
viscosities up to 500 SSU. All internal wetted parts are contained inside a sealed metal
tubular casing assuring a virtually maintenance-free unit. Flowing media forces linear
motion of a spring loaded, sharp edge orifice disk and ring shaped transfer magnet which
both ride on a tapered center shaft. The transfer magnet drives a clearly visible magnet
follower located outside the flow tube, protected under the clear polycarbonate tube. A
ring on the magnet follower indicates flow rate on the direct reading scale. Rubber
bumpers are provided for external impact resistance.
Designed for single-direction flow, Series HF Monitors are recommended for use with system
filtration of at least 74 microns or a 200 mesh screen. Some applications may also require
magnetic filtration. These flowmeters do not require inlet or outlet straight plumbing and can
be mounted horizontally, vertically, or inverted.
159
160_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:02 AM Page 160
Series
PVF
&
CPF
PVC and CPVC Flowmeters

Perfect for Compatible Acids, Caustics and D.I. Water
G
REMOVAL CLEARANCE
A
L
NPT
OUT
I
HEX
CONNECTION NPT
PVF
FLOW
IN
J
Female NPT
Flange Version
G
REMOVAL CLEARANCE
2-1/2
[63.5]
2-1/2
[63.5]
5-23/32
[145.26]
5-23/32
[145.26]
Flowmeters, In-Line
L
NPT
F
E
C
D
Female NPT
Standard (NPT)
Range NPT A
00/10 3/4 11-1/32
29/40
[280.19]
11/17 1-1/2 16-15/16
41/51
[430.21]
18/22 3
24-11/32
52/56
[618.27]
23/28 4
26-43/64
57/62
[728.20]
B
3-25/64
[86.12]
4-1/4
[107.95]
7-29/32
[200.66]
9-13/16
[248.66]
C
2-53/64
[71.83]
4
[101.6]
7-29/32
[200.66]
9-13/16
[248.66]
Optional Flange
Option Range Flange
00/10 3/4
F1
29/40
11/17 1-1/2
F2
41/51
18/22 3
F3
52/56
23/28 4
F4
57/62
H
12-1/4
[311.65]
18-5/8
[473.19]
22-35/64
[572.64]
26-3/8
[669.86]
I
J
4-5/8
4-1/16
[117.6] [103.38]
5-15/16 5-11/16
[151.13] [144.78]
6-7/64 6-7/64
[155.18] [155.18]
7-1/2
7-1/2
[190.5] [190.5]
160
I
NPT
CPF
D
4-43/64
[118.67]
6-29/64
[163.91]
11-19/32
[294.63]
14-9/32
[362.96]
E
3-39/64
[91.68]
5-1/32
[127.79]
5-1/32
[127.79]
5-7/16
[138.17]
F
2-35/64
[64.69]
3-29/64
[87.71]
4-5/16
[109.22]
5-7/16
[138.17]
L
K
2-3/4 3-7/8
[69.85] [98.55]
3-7/8 5
[98.55] [127]
7-1/2
6
[152.4] [190.5]
7-1/2 9
[190.5] [228.6]
OUT
HEX
CONNECTION
G
3
[76.2]
5
[127]
5
[127]
5
[127]
# of Bolt Holes Flange Opening Diameter

(1-1/8)
4
4
(2)
(3-1/2)
(4-1/2)
IN
Flange Version
161_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:03 AM Page 161
The Series PVF & CPF Flowmeters are heavy bodied meters for corrosives and high
purity fluids. They are economically priced meters ideal for acids or de-ionized water
making them suited for water & wastewater treatment facilities. The flowmeters are
comprised of all plastic wetted components for maximum corrosion resistance. They have a
full-scale accuracy of 2% and can be disassembled quickly without the meter being
removed from the pipeline for easy cleaning. The flowmeters are available with 3/4, 1-1/2,
3, and 4 female NPT connections. Optional flange connections are also available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: PVF: PVC, fluoroelastomer O-rings; CPF: CPVC, Buna-N Orings.
Temperature Limits: See operating limits chart.
Pressure Limits: See operating limits chart.
Repeatability: 1/2% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4, 1-1/2, 3, and 4 female NPT.
Weight: 3 lb (1.4 kg) for 3/4, 9 lb (4.1 kg) for 1-1/2, 14 lb (6.4 kg) for 3, and 18 lb
(8.2) for 4.
Water Service
Range
Connection
(GPM Water) (female NPT)
Model
Model
0.025-0.54 3/4
PVF-00
CPF-00
0.04-0.80
3/4
PVF-01
CPF-01
0.06-1.20
3/4
PVF-02
CPF-02
0.08-1.64
3/4
PVF-03
CPF-03
0.10-2.60
3/4
PVF-04
CPF-04
0.15-3.80
3/4
PVF-05
CPF-05
0.20-5.40
3/4
PVF-06
CPF-06
0.20-7.00
3/4
PVF-07
CPF-07
0.20-10.00 3/4
PVF-08
CPF-08
0.60-15.00 3/4
PVF-09
CPF-09
0.50-20.0
3/4
PVF-10
CPF-10
0.50-11.0
1-1/2
PVF-11
CPF-11
0.70-15.0
1-1/2
PVF-12
CPF-12
1.00-25.0
1-1/2
PVF-13
CPF-13
0.50-35.0
1-1/2
PVF-14
CPF-14
1.00-50.0
1-1/2
PVF-15
CPF-15
2.00-70.0
1-1/2
PVF-16
CPF-16
4.00-120
1-1/2
PVF-17
CPF-17
2.00-50.0
3
PVF-18
CPF-18
4.00-100
3
PVF-19
CPF-19
7.00-150
3
PVF-20
CPF-20
10.0-200
3
PVF-21
CPF-21
15.0-300
3
PVF-22
CPF-22
4.00-100
4
PVF-23
CPF-23
7.00-150
4
PVF-24
CPF-24
10.0-200
4
PVF-25
CPF-25
15.0-300
4
PVF-26
CPF-26
15.0-400
4
PVF-27
CPF-27
20.0-500
4
PVF-28
CPF-28
Note: For optional flange connections contact the factory.
Air Service
Range
(SCFM Air)
0.30-7.40
0.50-10.2
0.70-14.0
1.00-20.0
1.00-26.0
1.00-35.0
2.00-50.0
3.00-70.0
4.00-85.0
6.00-125
6.00-160
4.00-260
2.0-40.0
3.00-70.0
4.00-100
5.00-140
5.00-175
6.00-250
2.0-310
7.50-390
10.0-510
35.0-750
20.0-1000
30.0-600
40.0-1000
70.0-1750
100.0-2300
150.0-3500
40.0-1000
70.0-1750
100.0-2300
150.0-3500
150.0-4000
200.0-5000
Model
CPF-29
CPF-30
CPF-31
CPF-32
CPF-33
CPF-34
CPF-35
CPF-36
CPF-37
CPF-38
CPF-39
CPF-40
CPF-41
CPF-42
CPF-43
CPF-44
CPF-45
CPF-46
CPF-47
CPF-48
CPF-49
CPF-50
CPF-51
CPF-52
CPF-53
CPF-54
CPF-55
CPF-56
CPF-57
CPF-58
CPF-59
CPF-60
CPF-61
CPF-62
Flowmeters, In-Line
Model
PVF-29
PVF-30
PVF-31
PVF-32
PVF-33
PVF-34
PVF-35
PVF-36
PVF-37
PVF-38
PVF-39
PVF-40
PVF-41
PVF-42
PVF-43
PVF-44
PVF-45
PVF-46
PVF-47
PVF-48
PVF-49
PVF-50
PVF-51
PVF-52
PVF-53
PVF-54
PVF-55
PVF-56
PVF-57
PVF-58
PVF-59
PVF-60
PVF-61
PVF-62
FLOW
Operating Limits For Series PVFFlowmeters

Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure, psig @ F (bar @ C)
70F (21C) 80F (26C) 100F (37C)
Body Size and Description
255 (15)
250 (17)
3/4 PVC-NPT connection
150 (10)
150 (10)
170 (11)
1-1/2 PVC-NPT connection
105 (7)
150 (10)
160 (11)
3 and 4 PVC-NPT connection
105 (7)
150 (10)
150 (10)
3/4 PVC-Flange connection
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
1-1/2 PVC-Flange connection
105 (7)
150 (10)
3 and 4 PVC-Flange connection 150 (10)
105 (7)
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
120F (48C) 140F (60C)

90 (6)
50 (3)
65 (4)
40 (2)
65 (4)
40 (2)
65 (4)
50 (3)
65 (4)
40 (2)
65 (4)
40 (2)
Operating Limits For Series CPFFlowmeters

Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure, psig @ F (bar @ C)
Body Size and Description
70F (21C) 80F (26C) 100F (37C) 120F (48C) 140F (60C)
3/4 CPVC-NPT connection
270 (19)
270 (19)
250 (17)
200 (10)
150 (10)
1-1/2 CPVC-NPT connection
180 (12)
180 (12)
170 (11)
145 (10)
115 (8)
3 and 4 CPVC-NPT connection 160 (11)
160 (11)
140 (10)
125 (9)
105 (7)
3/4 CPVC-Flange connection
150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
135 (9)
110 (8)
1-1/2 CPVC-Flange connection 150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
135 (9)
110 (8)
3 and 4 CPVC-Flange connection 150 (10)
150 (10)
150 (10)
135 (9)
110 (8)
160F (71C)
130 (9)
85 (6)
75 (5)
90 (6)
90 (6)
90 (6)
180F (82C)
80 (6)
50 (3)
50 (3)
70 (5)
70 (5)
70 (5)
210F (98C)
50 (3)
30 (2)
30 (2)
40 (2)
40 (2)
40 (2)
161
162_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:04 AM Page 162
Series
TVF
Total View Industrial Flowmeter

View Flow Rate from 360, Water or Air Ranges
REMOVAL
G CLEARANCE
OUT
FLOW
CONNECTIONS
IN
TVFS
E
F
Flowmeters, In-Line
A
B
C
Female NPT Material
D
E
F
G
SS
9.36 2.81 2.68 4.00 1.35 2.72 3.00 3/4
SS
15.22 4.53 3.71 5.70 2.48 3.95 5.00 1-1/2
The Series TVF Total View Industrial Flowmeters are economically priced, tough,
simple and accurate meters for water, oils, coolants, compressed gases and other industrial
applications. The flowmeters have a full-scale accuracy of 2% and can be disassembled
quickly without the meter being removed from the pipeline for easy cleaning. The TVFS is
constructed of T-316 SS and features a polysulphone sight tube. The Series Total View
Industrial Flowmeters are available with standard 3/4 and 1-1/2 female NPT connections.
The easy to read flowmeters provide 360 rotation of scale on plastic sight tube models.
Series
Range
Code
TVFS
-XX
T-316 Stainless Steel

See Range/ Connection Chart
(add Range code to Series
designator for model number)
*Contact factory for optional metric scales (liters/minute).
Available Ranges
Range
Code Range
0.025-0.545 GPM Water
-00
0.04-0.80 GPM Water
-01
0.06-1.20 GPM Water
-02
0.08-1.64 GPM Water
-03
0.10-2.60 GPM Water
-04
0.15-3.80 GPM Water
-05
0.20-5.40 GPM Water
-06
0.20-7.00 GPM Water
-07
0.20-10.0 GPM Water
-08
0.60-14.00 GPM Water
-09
-10
0.50-11.0 GPM Water
-11
0.70-15.0 GPM Water
-12
1.00-21.0 GPM Water
-13
0.50-35.0 GPM Water
-14
1.00-50.0 GPM Water
-15
2.00-70.0 GPM Water
-16
3.00-90.0 GPM Water
-17
-18
162
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
Range
Code
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
Range
0.16-3.20 SCFM Air
0.50-5.00 SCFM Air
0.30-7.40 SCFM Air
0.50-10.2 SCFM Air
0.60-14.0 SCFM Air
1.00-20.0 SCFM Air
1.00-26.0 SCFM Air
1.00-35.0 SCFM Air
2.00-50.0 SCFM Air
3.00-70.0 SCFM Air
4.00-85.0 SCFM Air
6.00-125.0 SCFM Air
6.0-160.0 SCFM Air
4.00-260.0 SCFM Air
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: SS; O-rings: Buna-N; Sight tube: Polysulfone.
Temperature Limits: seeOperating Limits table.
Pressure Limits: seeOperating Limits table.
Repeatability: 1/4% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 and 1-1/2 female NPT.
Scale Length: 3.2 (8 cm) for 3/4 NPT connection, 5.2 (13 cm) for
1-1/2 NPT connection.
Weight: 4 lb (1.8 kg) for 3/4, and 12 lb (5.5 kg) for 1-1/2.
Operating Limits
Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure psig @ F (bar @ C)
Connection 200F (93C) 250F (121C)
300F (148C)
3/4
300 (20.6)
250 (17.2)
115 (7.9)
1-1/2
180 (12.4)
145 (10.0)
70 (4.8)
Connection
(female NPT)
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
Range
Code
-33
-34
-35
-36
-37
-38
-39
-40
-41
-42
-43
-44
-45
Range
1.50-25.0 SCFM Air
1.00-31.0 SCFM Air
2.00-40.0 SCFM Air
3.0-70.0 SCFM Air
4.0-100.0 SCFM Air
5.0-140.0 SCFM Air
5.0-175.0 SCFM Air
6.00-250.0 SCFM Air
2.00-310.0 SCFM Air
7.50-390.0 SCFM Air
10.0-510.0 SCFM Air
35.0-750.0 SCFM Air
20.0-1000.0 SCFM Air
Connection
(female NPT)
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
163_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:04 AM Page 163
Series
SSM
All Metal Flowmeter

Available in Stainless Steel for Industrial Environments
15.640
[397]
10.780
[273]
4.026
[102]
2.680
[68]
3/4 Models
Range
0.2-5.4 GPM Water (0.75-21 LPM)
0.2-10 GPM Water (1-35 LPM)
0.5-23 GPM Water (0.5-90 LPM)
0.5-35 GPM Water (2-130 LPM)
1-50 GPM Water (8-200 LPM)
2-70 GPM Water (2-265 LPM)
4-120 GPM Water (15-450 LPM)
2-50 SCFM Air (4-85 M3/HR)
6-125 SCFM Air (10-210 M3/HR)
4-260 SCFM Air (10-440 M3/HR)
2-310 SCFM Air (10-530 M3/HR)
10-515 SCFM Air (20-880 M3/HR)
35-750 SCFM Air (40-1300 M3/HR)
20-1000 SCFM Air (40-1700 M3/HR)
Connection
3/4
3/4
3/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
Max. Pressure
Loss (in w.c.)
17.2
22.0
75.0
18.5
26.0
80.0
130.0
4.5
11.8
93.0
12.0
40.0
70.0
90.0
5.695
[145]
3.710
[94]
4.010
[101.8]
2.480
[63]
1-1/2 Models
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: T316 SS, Alnico magnet, FKM O-ring.
Pressure Limits: 3/4 models: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) @ 250F (121C), 1-1/2
models: 800 psig (55 bar) @ 250F (121C).
Repeatability: 0.5% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 or 1-1/2 female NPT.
Scale Length: 3/4 models: 3.2 (8 cm); 1-1/2 models: 5.2 (13 cm).
Weight: 3/4 models: 5 lb (2.3 kg); 1-1/2 models: 13 lb (5.9 kg).
Flowmeters, In-Line
316 SS
Body
SSM-00
SSM-01
SSM-02
SSM-03
SSM-04
SSM-05
SSM-06
SSM-07
SSM-08
SSM-09
SSM-10
SSM-11
SSM-12
SSM-13
1.350 [34.3]
2.754
[70]
1-1/2 NPT
FLOW
Series SSM 316 All Metal Flowmeters are ideal for dirty or opaque fluids, high temperature
and high pressure service and harsh environments. The direct reading scale provides 2%
accuracy on approximate 25 to 1 ranges, which are wider than typical variable area ball float
flow meters. The internal magnet carries the external flow indicator in a non-wetted enclosure.
Flowmeters can quickly be disassembled without removing the body from the pipeline for easy
cleaning. Pipe adaptors may be used to adapt to alternate size liner without altering accuracy.
4.503
[114]
3/4 NPT
124072
2.810
[71.4]
163
164_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:05 AM Page 164
Series
STFLO
Stainless Steel Flowmeters

Ideal for Steam Applications
15-21/32
[397.28]
10-21/32
[270.78]
OUT
2-13/16
[71.37]
OUT
2-11/16
[68.07]
4-1/32
[102.25]
4-1/2
[114.38]
3/4 NPT
1-11/32
[34.29]
2-3/4
[69.95]
IN
1-1/2 NPT
2-15/32
[62.99]
4
[101.85]
IN 3-23/32
[94.23]
5-11/16
[144.65]
1-1/2 NPT Connection
3/4 NPT Connection

3
[76.20]
2-1/8
[53.59]
FLOW
3
[76.20]
6-13/16
[172.97]
4-1/2
[114.30]
3-7/8
[98.55]
2-3/4
[69.85]
5
[127.00]
3-11/16
[93.73]
3-9/16
[90.43]
3-7/8
[98.55]
3/4 Flange Connection

Flowmeters, In-Line
3-1/2
[88.91]
The STFLO Series Stainless Steel Flowmeters are ideal for high temperature and
high pressure applications such as steam. The direct reading scale provides 2% accuracy.
These flowmeters can be quickly disassembled without removing the body from the pipeline
for easy cleaning.
Model
STFLO-00
STFLO-01
STFLO-02
STFLO-03
STFLO-04
STFLO-05
STFLO-06
STFLO-07
STFLO-08
STFLO-09
STFLO-10
STFLO-11
STFLO-12
STFLO-13
STFLO-14
Range
2.3-50 lb/Hr. Steam
5-100 lb/Hr. Steam
5-150 lb/Hr. Steam
9.5-240 lb/Hr. Steam
14-335 lb/Hr. Steam
7-100 lb/Hr. Steam
7-150 lb/Hr. Steam
24-800 lb/Hr. Steam
35-1825 lb/Hr. Steam
Connection
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
Note: For ranges calibrated for water or air contact the factory.
OPTIONS
If you wish to change 3/4 NPT to 3/4 Flanged Connection, add F1 to the end of the
model number. If you wish to change 1-1/2 NPT to 1-1/2 Flanged Connection, add
F2 to the end of the model number.
F1, 3/4 150 lb ANSI flange connection
F2, 1-1/2 150 lb ANSI flange connection
164
4-31/32
[125.98]
5
[127.00]
1-1/2 Flange Connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible with liquids and gases.
Wetted Material: T316 SS, Alnico magnet, geothermal PTFE O-ring.
Temperature Limits: See chart.
Repeatability: 0.5% of indicated flow rate.
Process Connections: 3/4 or 1-1/2 female NPT, optional flange connections.
Scale Length: 3/4 models: 3.2 (8 cm); 1-1/2 models: 5.2 (13 cm).
Weight: 3/4 NPT models: 5.75 lb (2.6 kg); 1-1/2 NPT models: 14 lb (6.4 kg). 3/4
Flange: 9.75 lb (4.4 kg); 1-1/2 Flange: 22 lb (10 kg).
Maximum Non-Shock Working Pressure, psig (bar)

70F 300F 350F 400F 450F 500F 600F
Meter Size 0F
& Material (-18C) (21C) (148C) (176C) (204C) (232C) (260C) (315C)
990
970
950
930
900
(3/4 NPT) 1000 1000 1000
(68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.2) (66.8) (65.5) (64.1) (62)
800
800
790
780
770
760
750
(1-1/2 NPT) 800
(55)
(55) (55)
(54.4) (53.7) (53)
(52.4) (51.7)
165_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:06 PM Page 165
Series
RMV
Rate-Master Dial-Type Flowmeters

Brass Body; Three Ranges to 20 GPM Water
54
45
4-13/16
[122.24]
HOLE IN
PANEL
INLET
21/64
55
[8.33]
OUTLET
54
WRENCH
GRIP
1-51/64
[45.64]
3-1/32
[78.58]
[4] 3/16 [4.76] HOLES IN

PANEL FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
ON A 4-5/16 [109.52] B.C.
Series RMV Rate-Master Flowmeters measure higher water flow rates with 2% of full
scale accuracy at affordable prices. Rugged forged brass housing is standard on all models for
great compatibility and the strength to withstand system pressures to 1000 psig (68.9 bar). Unlike
glass tube rotameters, these units wont shatter and they work fine with even dark and/or opaque
liquids. Stocked models are fitted with 1 female NPT inlet and outlet; 3/4 and 1/2 sizes are also
available. Install in line, supported by piping or flush panel mount with complete hardware
package included.
FLOW
Range, GPM Water

0-5
0-10
0-20
0-5
0-10
0-20
0-5
0-10
0-20
Connection Size
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
OPTION
Example: RMV-1-3-NIST.
Rate-Master Dial-Type Flowmeter
Flowmeters, Dial
Series
RMV II
1/2
[12.70]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass, copper, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite.
Pressure Drop: 0 to 5 GPM: 3.2 psid; 0 to 10 GPM: 5.3 psid; 0 to 20 GPM:
10.4 psid.
Size: Diameter dial face 4 (101.6 mm).
Maximum Flow: 1.5 x full-scale reading.
Weight: 9 Ib (4.08 kg).
APPLICATIONS
Monitor coolant flow through ingot heaters, high-amp switchgear, resistance welders,
heat exchangers, compressors, scrubbers; monitor water consumption to different
processes and operations for more efficient operation; calculate required fill or drain
times for tanks, water towers.
Model
RMV-1-3
RMV-2-3
RMV-3-3
RMV-1-2
RMV-2-2
RMV-3-2
RMV-1-1
RMV-2-1
RMV-3-1
5
[127.00]
For Panel Mounting, Three Ranges to 10 GPM Water

[3] 7/32 DIA [5.6]
HOLES ON 5-3/8 DIA
[136.5] BOLT CIRCLE
120
TYP.
1
[25.40]
11/32
[8.85]
2
[50.80]
4-5/8 DIA.
1-19/64 [117.98]
[33.02]
5-7/8 DIA.
[149.2]
1-1/4
[31.75]
3/4 NPT TYP.

BOTH ENDS
4-7/16
[112.78]
*FITS IN ANSI STANDARD 4.940 [125.5] PANEL CUTOUT
Series RMV II Rate-Master Flowmeters employ a target-type design combined with a

damage resistant magnetic linkage to drive a pointer over an easy-to-read litho scale. This
unique construction fully isolates flowing media from gage front for leakproof operation at
pressures to 3000 psig (206.7 bar) with 5% of full-scale accuracy. Solid machined brass meter
body is ideally suited for water flows. Body design fits standard 4 1/2 mounting hole layouts
per ANSI B40.1. Inlet and outlet threads are standard 3/4 female NPT.
Model
RMVII-1
RMVII-3
RMVII-6
RMVII-10
Range
GPMWater
0-3
0-5
0-10
Range
SCFM
0-10
Range
LPM Air
0-280
Model
RMVII-12
RMVII-14
RMVII-20
RMVII-21
RMVII-22
Range
GPMOil
0-2.2
0-4.0
0-8.5
Range Range
SCFM LPM Air
0-30 0-850
0-50 0-1400
Range
LPM Oil
0-8
0-15
0-32
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids & oils.
Wetted Materials: Brass, 302 SS, sintered barium ferrite, polyacetyl.
Pressure Drop: 0 to 5 GPM: 3.2 psid; 0 to 10 GPM: 5.3 psid; 0 to 20 GPM:
10.4 psid.
Size: Diameter dial face 4.5 (114.3 mm).
OPTION
Example: RMVII-1-NIST.
165
166_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:09 AM Page 166
Series
DTFW &
DTFO
Variable-Area Flowmeter for Liquids and Oil

In-Line Mounting, 2% FS Accuracy, Brass & 316 SS Body, 2% FS Accuracy
1
[25.40]
3-19/32
[91.44]
5-47/64
[145.54]
3/4
[19.05]
2-59/64
[74.17]
1/2 NPT
INLET & OUTLET
2-59/64
[74.17]
2
[50.80]
3
[76.20]
11/16
[17.53]
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT Connection
INLET & OUTLET
DTFW
1-1/2
[38.10]
FLOW
7
[177.80]
The Series DTFW Variable-Area Flowmeter for Liquids measures water flow rates
with 2% of full-scale accuracy at a competitive price. Durable metal construction ensures
great compatibility and the strength to withstand system pressures of up to 3000 psig (200
bar). 1/4, 1/2 and 1 connections are available, with construction choices of a high
quality brass or stainless steel. Comes pre-calibrated for horizontal in-line mounting.
Flowmeters, Dial
The Series DTFO Variable-Area Flowmeter for Liquids measures oil rates with 2%
of full-scale accuracy at an affordable price. Durable metal construction ensures great
reliability and the strength to withstand system pressures of up to 3000 psig (200 bar).
Available in 1/4, 1/2 and 1 connections for a wide variety of applications. Comes
calibrated for horizontal in line mounting.
Model
DTFW-1B-1W
DTFW-1B-2W
DTFW-1B-3W
DTFW-1B-4W
DTFW-1B-5W
DTFW-1S-1W
DTFW-1S-2W
DTFW-1S-3W
DTFW-1S-4W
DTFW-1S-5W
DTFW-2B-1W
DTFW-2B-2W
DTFW-2B-3W
DTFW-2B-4W
DTFW-2B-5W
Range,
GPM Water
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 5
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 5
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 5
Connection Body
1/4 NPT
Brass
1/4 NPT
Brass
1/4 NPT
Brass
1/4 NPT
Brass
1/4 NPT
Brass
1/4 NPT
SS
1/4 NPT
SS
1/4 NPT
SS
1/4 NPT
SS
1/4 NPT
SS
1/2 NPT
Brass
1/2 NPT
Brass
1/2 NPT
Brass
1/2 NPT
Brass
1/2 NPT
Brass
Metering Cone
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Model
DTFW-2B-8W
DTFW-2B-10W
DTFW-2S-1W
DTFW-2S-2W
DTFW-2S-3W
DTFW-2S-4W
DTFW-2S-5W
DTFW-2S-8W
DTFW-2S-10W
DTFW-3S-10W
DTFW-3S-15W
DTFW-3S-20W
DTFW-3S-25W
DTFW-3S-30W
*For oil compatible models, substitute all Ws for Os in model number.

Example: DTFW-1B-1W (0 to 1 GPM water). DTFO-1B-1O (0 to 1 GPM oil).
Not available in 1/4 or 1/2 SS.
166
11/16
[17.53]
1-1/2 1 NPT
[38.10] INLET & OUTLET
1-9/64
[28.96]
R1
[25.40] 2
[50.80] 2-59/64
[74.17]
3-5/32
[80.26]
DTFO
1/2 NPT Connection
1 NPT Connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:
DTFW: Compatible liquids;
DTFO:Compatible oils.
Wetted Materials:
Body: 316 SS or brass;
Spring: 302 SS;
Range spring: 302 SS;
Magnet: PTFE-coated;
Metering cone: Acetal or PTFE;
Seals: Buna.
to 93C).
Pressure Limit: DTFW-3S: 1500 psig
(100 bar); All other DTFW models:
3000 psig (200 bar); DTFO-1B and
DTFO-2B: 3000 psig (200 bar); DTFO3S:1500 psig (100 bar).
Range,
GPM Water
0 to 8
0 to 10
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 5
0 to 8
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 15
0 to 20
0 to 25
0 to 30
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
1 NPT
Body
Brass
Brass
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
3
[76.20]
3
[76.20]
Accuracy: 2% FS.
Size: Diameter dial face 2.5 (63.5
mm).
Process Connection: See model
chart.
Weight: DTFW-1B and 1S: 3 lb (1.36
kg); DTFW-2B and 2S: 5 lb (2.27 kg);
DTFW-3S: 10 lb (4.54 kg); DTFO-1B:3
lb (1.36 kg); DTFO-2B: 5 lb (2.27 kg);
DTFO-3S:10 lb (4.54 kg).
Metering Cone
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
Acetal
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
167_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:07 AM Page 167
Series
DTFA
Variable-Area Flowmeter for Gases

Economical, Aluminum Body, 5% FS Accuracy
5-47/64
[145.54]
1
[25.40]
3-19/32
[91.44]
1/2 NPT
INLET & OUTLET
3/4
[19.05]
2-59/64
[74.17]
2-59/64
[74.17]
2
[50.80]
11/16 1/4 NPT
[17.53] INLET & OUTLET
3
[76.20]
1/2 NPT Process Connection
The Series DTFA Variable-Area Flowmeter for Gases measures gas flow rates with
5% of full-scale accuracy at an affordable price. Rugged aluminum construction ensures
great compatibility and the strength to withstand system pressures of up to 3000 psig (200
bar). Available in either 1/4 or 1/2 NPT connections. Comes pre-calibrated for horizontal
in-line mounting.
Range, SCFM
1.5 to 10
2.0 to 15
3.0 to 20
3.0 to 25
3.0 to 30
4.0 to 40
4.0 to 50
5.0 to 75
10.0 to 100
Connection
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
Series
DTFF
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum;
Spring: PTFE-coated;
Metering cone: Acetal;
Seals: Buna.
Accuracy: 5% FS.
Size: Diameter dial face 2.5 (63.5 mm).
Process Connections: See model chart.
Weight: DTFA-1A: 3 lb (1.36 kg); DTFA-2A: 5 lb (2.27 kg).
FLOW
Model
DTFA-1A-10A
DTFA-1A-15A
DTFA-1A-20A
DTFA-1A-25A
DTFA-2A-30A
DTFA-2A-40A
DTFA-2A-50A
DTFA-2A-75A
DTFA-2A-100A
1/4 NPT Connection
Fixed-Orifice Flowmeter for Low Flow Rates

316 SS Body, Oil/Gas/Water Calibration
1-7/8
[47.75]
1-31/64
[37.59]
Model
DTFF-1S-4W
DTFF-1S-5W
DTFF-1S-8W
DTFF-1S-10W
DTFF-1S-15W
DTFF-1S-20W
DTFF-1S-25W
DTFF-1S-40W
Range
0 to 4 GPH
0 to 5 GPH
0 to 8 GPH
0 to 10 GPH
0 to 15 GPH
0 to 20 GPH
0 to 25 GPH
0 to 40 GPH
Calibration
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Water
Model
DTFF-1S-4O
DTFF-1S-5O
DTFF-1S-8O
DTFF-1S-10O
DTFF-1S-15O
DTFF-1S-20O
DTFF-1S-25O
DTFF-1S-40O
DTFF-1S-5A
Range
0 to 4 GPH
0 to 5 GPH
0 to 8 GPH
0 to 10 GPH
0 to 15 GPH
0 to 20 GPH
0 to 25 GPH
0 to 40 GPH
1.5 to 5 SCFM
3/4
[19.05]
2-59/64
[74.17]
1-1/2
[38.10]
The Series DTFF Fixed-Orifice Flowmeter for Low Flow Rates measures water,
oil, or air flow rates with great accuracy at a competitive price. Rugged stainless steel
construction ensures great compatibility and is an excellent choice for high line pressure
applications, with a maximum pressure of 3000 psig (200 bar). This is all without
sacrificing the sensitivity required for low flow measurements. Available in a wide range
of flow rates for each calibration, with stainless steel construction as standard. Comes pre
calibrated for horizontal in-line mounting.
1-1/2
[38.10]
2-11/32
[59.44]
2
[50.80]
11/16
[17.53]
1/4 NPT ProcessConnection
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases & liquids &
oils.
Wetted Materials:
Body: 316 SS;
Spring: 302 SS;
Orifice piston: Acetal;
Diaphragm: Fluoroelastomer.
Calibration
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil
Oil
Air
1
[25.40]
Temperature Limit: -22 to 200F (30

to 93C).
Accuracy: Liquid/oil calibration: 2%
FS; Air calibration: 5% FS.
Size: Diameter dial face 2.5 (63.5
mm).
NPT.
167
Flowmeters, Dial
1/4 NPT
INLET & OUTLET
168_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:07 AM Page 168
Series
DS
In-Line Flow Sensors
Use with the Dwyer Differential Pressure Gages or Transmitters

Valves Standard, brass with TFE
seat and Buna-N O-ring
1-15/16 [49.21]
Nameplate
Stainless steel
permanently attached
with split ring. Includes
complete size and
model information.
1-5/8 [41.28]
1-3/4 [44.45]
1-11/16 [42.86] APPROX

Head Machined stainless steel.
1/4 NPT
1-7/16 [36.53]
Packing gland Parker CPI brass

compression fitting.
5/16 [7.94]
Sensor tube 304 SS.
FLOW
Flow Sensors, In-Line
Series DS-300
Sensing ports Multiple upstream and

downstream ports sized and positioned
to provide effective accurate pressure
averaging, even at lower velocities.
In-Line Flow Sensors are averaging Pitot tubes that provide accurate and convenient
flow rate sensing for schedule 40 pipe. When purchased with a Dwyer Capsuhelic
differential pressure gage of appropriate range, the result is a flow indicating system
delivered off the shelf at an economical price.
Pitot tubes have been used in flow measurement for years. Conventional pitot tubes sense
velocity pressure at only one point in the flowing stream. Therefore, a series of
measurements must be taken across the stream to obtain a meaningful average flow rate.
The Dwyer flow sensor eliminates the need for traversing the flowing stream because
of its multiple sensing points and built-in averaging capability.
The Series DS-300 flow sensors are designed to be inserted in the pipeline through a
compression fitting. They are furnished with instrument shut-off valves on both pressure
connections. Valves are fitted with 1/8 female NPT connections. Accessories include
adapters with 1/4 SAE 45 flared ends compatible with hoses supplied with the Model A471 Portable Capsuhelic gage kit. Standard valves are rated at 200 psig (13.7 bar) and
200F (93.3C). Where valves are not required, they can be omitted at reduced cost. Series
DS-300 flow sensors are available for pipe sizes from 1 to 10.
DS-400 Averaging Flow Sensors are quality constructed from extra strong 3/4 dia.
stainless steel to resist increased forces encountered at higher flow rates with both air and
water. This extra strength also allows them to be made in longer insertion lengths up to
24 inches (61 cm). All models include convenient and quick-acting quarter-turn ball valves
to isolate the sensor for zeroing. Process connections to the valve assembly are 1/8 female
NPT. A pair of 1/8 NPT X 1/4 SAE 45 flared adapters are included, compatible with
hoses used in the Model A-471 Portable Capsuhelic Gage Kit. Supplied solid brass
mounting adapter has a 3/4 dia. compression fitting to lock in required insertion length
and a 3/4 male NPT thread for mounting in a Threaded Branch Connection.
Series DS-300
Model
DS-300-1
DS-300-1-1/4
DS-300-1-1/2
DS-300-2
DS-300-2-1/2
DS-300-3
DS-300-4
DS-300-6
DS-300-8
DS-300-10
Description
1 pipe size
1-1/4 pipe size
1-1/2 pipe size
2 pipe size
2-1/2 pipe size
3 pipe size
4 pipe size
6 pipe size
8 pipe size
10 pipe size
Series DS-400
Model
DS-400-6
DS-400-8
DS-400-10
DS-400-12
DS-400-14
DS-400-16
DS-400-18
DS-400-20
DS-400-24
Description
6 pipe size
8 pipe size
10 pipe size
12 pipe size
14 pipe size
16 pipe size
18 pipe size
20 pipe size
24 pipe size
OPTIONS &ACCESSORIES
DS-300 or DS-400 Less Valves. To order, add suffix -LV
A-160, ThreadedBranch Connection, 3/8 NPT, forged steel, 3000 psi
A-161, Brass Bushing, 1/4 x 3/8
168
169_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:08 AM Page 169
How To Order
Merely determine the pipe size into which the flow sensor will be mounted and
designate the size as a suffix to Model DS-300. For example, a flow sensor to be
mounted in a 2 pipe would be a Model No. DS-300-2.
For non-critical water and air flow monitoring applications, the chart below can be
utilized for ordering a stock Capsuhelic differential pressure gage for use with the
DS-300 flow sensor. Simply locate the maximum flow rate for the media being
measured under the appropriate pipe size and read the Capsuhelic gage range in
inches of water column to the left. The DS-300 sensor is supplied with installation
and operating instructions, Bulletin F-50. It also includes complete flow conversion
information for the three media conditions shown in the chart below. This information
enables the user to create a complete differential pressure to flow rate conversion
table for the sensor and differential pressure gage employed. Both the Dwyer
Capsuhelic gage and flow sensor feature excellent repeatability so, once the
desired flow rate is determined, deviation from that flow in quantitative measure can
be easily determined. You may wish to order the adjustable signal flag option for the
Capsuhelic gage to provide an easily identified reference point for the proper flow.
Capsuhelic gages with special ranges and/or direct reading scales in appropriate
flow units are available on special order for more critical applications. Customer
supplied data for the full scale flow (quantity and units) is required along with the
differential pressure reading at that full flow figure. Prior to ordering a special
Capsuhelic differential pressure gage for flow read-out, we recommend you request
Bulletin F-50 to obtain complete data on converting flow rates of various media to
the sensor differential pressure output. With this bulletin and after making a few
simple calculations, the exact range gage required can easily be determined.
Large 3/4 Inch Diameter for Extra Strength in Lengths to 24 Inches

2-1/16
[52.40]
1-5/8 [41.28] TYP.
LP
2-1/8 [53.98]
HP
3-5/8 [92.08] APPROX.
3/4 [19.05]
DIA.
1/16 [1.60]
GAP UP TO 12 PIPE
1/8 [3.175]
GAP 14 PIPE AND UP
72-700416-00
Series DS-400
8
350
1340
3600
560
2150
5700
800
3040
8100
1250
4860
13000
1800
6400
18500
10
560
2130
6000
890
3400
10000
1260
4860
15000
2000
7700
22000
Flow Sensors, In-Line
Full Range Flows by Pipe Size (Approximate)

1
1-1/4 1-1/2 2
2-1/2 3
4
6
4.8
8.3
11.5 20.5 30
49
86
205
19.0 33.0 42.0 65.0 113
183 330 760
50.0 90.5 120.0 210.0 325 510 920 2050
7.7
14.0 18.0 34.0 47
78
138 320
30.0 51.0 66.0 118.0 178 289 510 1200
83.0 142.0 190.0 340.0 610 820 1600 3300
11.0 19.0 25.5 45.5 67
110 195 450
41.0 72.0 93.0 163.0 250 410 725 1690
120.0 205.0 275.0 470.0 740 1100 2000 4600
18.0 32.0 40.5 72.0 108 173 310 720
63.0 112.0 155.0 255.0 390 640 1130 2630
185.0 325.0 430.0 760.0 1200 1800 3300 7200
25.0 44.0 57.5 100.0 152 247 435 1000
90.0 161.0 205.0 360.0 560 900 1600 3700
260.0 460.0 620.0 1050.0 1700 2600 4600 10000
36.5 62.0 82.0 142.0 220 350 620 1500
135.0 230.0 300.0 505.0 800 1290 2290 5000
370.0 660.0 870.0 1500.0 2300 3600 6500 15000
FLOW
Gage Range Media

(in w.c.)
@ 70F
2
Water (GPM)
Air @ 14.7 PSIA (SCFM)
Air @ 100 PSIG (SCFM)
5
Water (GPM)
10
Water (GPM)
25
Water (GPM)
50
Water (GPM)
100
Water (GPM)
Capsuhelic Gage Shown Installed In A-471 Portable Kit

Model A-471, Portable Kit
For portable operation, the A-471 Capsuhelic Portable Gage Kit is available
complete with tough polypropylene carrying case, mounting bracket, 3-way manifold
valve, two 10' high pressure hoses, and all necessary fittings.
Series 631B, Capsuhelic Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter

Low pressure transmitter for use with DS-300/400 flow sensors. Use Series 631B
Capsuhelic Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter.
See page 15 (Series 4000)

See page 65 (Series 631B)
169
170_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:08 AM Page 170
Series
OP
Orifice Plate Flowmeter

SS for Use with Liquids and Gases
1/4 NPT PRESSURE FITTING
A
CL
HI
PRESSURE
ORIFICE PLATE
1/8 [3.18]
THICK TYPICAL
OD
4-1/2
[114.3]
ID
FLOW
Flowmeters, Orifice Plate
FLOW
BODY
[CARRIER RING]
CL
LOW
PRESSURE
INCLUDES RING GASKET

ADHERED TO FACES
1-1/4
[31.75]

The Series OP Orifice Plate Flow Meter is a complete orifice plate flow metering
package. It incorporates a SS orifice plate with a unique holder or carrier ring containing
metering taps and integral gaskets. It was designed for use wherever there is an application
for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other primary differential
producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness. Installation is accomplished simply by slipping
the unit between standard flanges (orifice flanges are not required). The Series OP is
available in line sizes from 1/2 to 24 and can be used with compatible liquids and gases.
FEATURES
Mounted with standard flanges
Corner type metering taps
Corrosion free material
Simplified installation
Stainless steel wetted parts
Proven through a wide range of applications for energy efficiency
Assures long term reliability and accuracy
APPLICATION
Fluid flow rates in building water lines.
170
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: For metering compatible liquids and gases.
Wetted Material: 304 SS, Buna-N gaskets.
Accuracy: 0.6% of full scale flow. (Beta = .2-.6) 0.7% for Beta greater than .6.
Pressure Limits: Limited only by pipe and flange rating restrictions.
Head Loss: 1-Beta ratio2 eg: 1-0.72 = 1-0.49 = 51% of the d.p.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 24.
Installation: Standard flange, any rating (orifice flanges not required).
Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter upstream and 5 diameter
downstream of orifice plate.
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
171_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:09 AM Page 171
Series OP Orifice Plate Flowmeter

Material 304/304 L- dual certified- Gaskets Buna-N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
1.25 overall thickness
Orifice plate thickness is 0.125
Line
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
Bore
0.200
0.310
0.430
Water Capacity
in d.p. Flow in
GPM
Beta w.c.
0.62
0.32 20
3.44
0.50 100
13.00
0.69 320
OP-B-1 1.00
OP-B-2 1.00
OP-B-3 1.00
3/4
3/4
3/4
0.250
0.400
0.580
0.30
0.49
0.70
20
100
320
OP-C-1 2.00
OP-C-2 2.00
OP-C-3 2.00
1
1
1
0.300
0.520
0.720
0.29
0.49
0.69
OP-D-1 2.00
OP-D-2 2.00
OP-D-3 2.00
1.25 0.400
1.25 0.700
1.25 1.00
OP-E-1 2.00
OP-E-2 2.00
OP-E-3 2.00
1.5
1.5
1.5
OP-F-1 3.00
OP-F-2 3.00
OP-F-3 3.00
at 100 psig
6.61
36.37
107.47
0.97
5.69
23.82
20
100
200
3.65
20.21
59.92
5.66
32.44
102.91
10.3
60.26
197.2
20
100
320
1.38
9.63
36.15
20
100
200
5.24
34.2
91.28
8.11
54.92
156.51
14.8
102.09
300
0.29
0.51
0.72
20
100
320
2.46
17.48
71.77
20
100
200
9.31
62.09
180
14.41
99.75
309.97
26.3
185.5
595.2
0.500
0.800
1.100
0.31
0.50
0.68
20
100
320
3.85
22.73
83.95
20
100
200
14.57
80.82
212.18
22.55
129.68
363.93
41.16
241.5
697.39
2
2
2
0.600
1.000
1.450
0.29
0.48
0.70
20
100
320
5.52
35.34
147.74
20
100
200
20.92
125.74
372.09
32.38
202.03
639.87
59.13
375.8
1227.63
OP-G-1 4.00
OP-G-2 4.00
OP-G-3 4.00
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.750
1.250
1.750
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
8.63
55.54
216.30
20
100
200
32.71
197.54
543.99
50.64
317.58
936.56
92.48
590.91
1798.86
OP-H-1 5.00
OP-H-2 5.00
OP-H-3 5.00
3
3
3
0.920
1.500
2.150
0.30
0.49
0.70
20
100
320
12.97
79.94
324.16
20
100
200
49.17
282.9
816.7
76.13
454.77
1404.95
139.06
846.21
2696.28
OP-J-1
OP-J-2
OP-J-3
7.00
7.00
7.00
4
4
4
1.200
2.000
2.800
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
22.03
141.51
547.11
20
100
200
83.58
503.76
1380.03
129.44
810.06
2373.02
236.48
1507.64
4553.68
OP-K-1 8.00
OP-K-2 8.00
OP-K-3 8.00
5
5
5
1.500
2.500
3.500
0.30
0.50
0.69
20
100
320
34.39
220.80
853.09
20
100
200
130.48
786.23
2152.83
202.11
1264.42
3701.57
369.29
2353.51
7103.22
OP-L-1 10.00
OP-L-2 10.00
OP-L-3 10.00
6
6
6
1.800
3.000
4.200
0.30
0.49
0.69
20
100
320
20
49.46
317.74 100
1226.98 200
187.86
1331.63
3097.20
291
1820.05
5325.20
531.75
3387.93
10219.28
OP-M-1 14.00
OP-M-2 14.00
OP-M-3 14.00
8
8
8
2.400
4.000
5.600
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
20
87.95
565.77 100
2195.86 200
333.87
2014.95
5532.00
517.25
3241.45
9525.43
945.28
6034.85
18290.00
OP-N-1 20.00
OP-N-2 20.00
OP-N-3 20.00
10
10
10
3.000
5.000
7.000
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
137.35 20
883.04 100
3421.26 200
521.58
3145.50
8626.42
808
5060.38
14846.80
1476.77
9421.74
28506.17
OP-O-1 30.00
OP-O-2 30.00
OP-O-3 30.00
12
12
12
3.600
6.000
8.400
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
197.73 20
1271.62 100
4930.86 200
750.9
4530
12430.00
1163.44
7288.16
21397.00
2126.47
13570.33
41089.02
OP-P-1 40.00
OP-P-2 40.00
OP-P-3 40.00
14
14
14
4.000
6.600
9.300
0.30
0.50
0.70
20
100
320
244.14 20
1537.49 100
6052.57 200
927.14
6477.67
15251.50
1436.59
8812.87
28262.66
2625.81
16409.42
50427.78
OP-Q-1 48.00
OP-Q-2 48.00
OP-Q-3 48.00
16
16
16
4.500 0.30
7.600 0.50
10.700 0.70
20
100
320
308.76 20
2038.95 100
8007.74 200
1172.63
7264.58
20179.85
1817.05
11688.26
34749.32
3321.32
21764.08
66737.64
Air Capacity - Flow in SCFM

in d.p. at 14.7 psia
w.c.
(0 psig)
at 20 psig
20
2.35
3.63
100
12.21
19.58
200
32.77
56.15
FLOW
Weight
Model (lb)
OP-A-1 1.00
OP-A-2 1.00
OP-A-3 1.00
Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
171
172_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:09 AM Page 172
Series
PE & TE
Orifice Plate Flowmeters

PVC or PTFE Orifice Plates
1/4 NPT PRESSURE FITTING
A
CL
HI
PRESSURE
ORIFICE PLATE
1/8 [3.18]
THICK TYPICAL
4-1/2 OD
ID
[114.3]
FLOW
PE
TE
FLOW
BODY
[CARRIER RING]
CL
LOW
PRESSURE
INCLUDES RING GASKET

ADHERED TO FACES
1-1/4
[31.75]

The Series PE Orifice Plate Flow Meter offers one-piece PVC construction incorporating
a unique holder or carrier ring containing metering taps and integral gaskets. Unlike a
standard orifice plate, the Series PE is a true primary element including the various
components for differential pressure measurement. It was designed for use wherever there
is an application for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness. The Series PE is available
in line sizes from 1/2 to 24 and used for air and most gases. It meets or exceeds ASME,
AGA & ISO standards.
SERIESPE FEATURES
Mounted with standard flanges
Standard corner tap configuration
Corrosion free material
Simplified installation
Built in metering taps (1/4 female NPT STD)
Proven through a wide range of applications for accuracy and energy efficiency
Assures long term reliability and accuracy
The Series TE Orifice Plate Flowmeter offers one-piece PTFE construction similar
to the OP and PE Series orifice plates, which incorporate a unique holder or carrier ring
containing metering taps and integral gaskets. Available for line sizes from 1/2 to 24,
the Series TE orifice plate can be used with gases, liquids, corrosive, and high temperature
fluids. The Series TE can be easily installed by slipping the unit between standard flanges
(orifice flanges are not required). The Series TE was designed for use anywhere there is
an application for a conventional flow orifice plate. It can also be used in place of other
primary differential producers for efficiency and cost effectiveness.
SERIESTEFEATURES
Excellent chemical resistance
Weather resistant
Flame retardant (without factory gaskets)
Low friction (minimum wear)
Orifice plate thickness 1/4 offering greater stability
172
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: PE: Clean air and compatible gases; TE: Compatible gases and liquids.
Wetted Material: Monolithic (single piece) constructed entirely of gray PVC for PE
or white PTPE for TE, Buna-N gaskets.
Accuracy: 0.6% full scale flow. (Beta = .2-.6) 0.7% for Beta greater than .6.
Temperature Limits: PE: 140F max (60C max); TE: -40 to 200F (-40 to 93.3C).
Pressure Limits: 150 psi (10 bar) max.
Head Loss: 1-Beta ratio2 eg: 1 - 0.72 = 1 - 0.49 = 51% of the d.p.
Installation: Standard flange 125#/150# rating.
Pipe Requirements: General requirements 10 diameter upstream and 5 diameter
downstream.
Weight: Varies with line size. See chart.
173_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:10 AM Page 173
Series PE Orifice Plate Flowmeter Air Capacity Structure

Material PVC- Gaskets Buna-N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (Base Conditions)
Beta Value Based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
PE
Model
PE-A-1
PE-A-2
PE-A-3
PE
Weight
(lb)
1.00
1.00
1.00
TE
Model
TE-A-1
TE-A-2
TE-A-3
TE
Weight
(lb)
1.00
1.00
1.00
Series TE Orifice Plate Flowmeter Capacity Structure

Material PTFE - Gaskets Buna-N
Based on 70F, 14.7 psia (base conditions)
Beta value based on Std Sch pipe I.D.
Line
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
Bore
0.200
0.310
0.430
WaterCapacity (TE) Air Capacity - Flow in SCFM

Flow in
in d/p
at 14.7 psia
in d.p.
GPM
w.c.
Beta w.c.
(0 psig)
0.62
20
0.3
2.35
20
3.44
100
0.5
12.21
100
13.00
200
0.69 320
32.77
at 20 psig
3.63
19.58
56.15
at 100 psig
6.61
36.37
107.47
3/4
3/4
3/4
0.250
0.400
0.580
0.3
0.49
0.7
20
100
320
0.97
5.69
23.82
20
100
200
3.65
20.21
59.92
5.66
32.44
102.91
10.3
60.26
197.2
PE-C-1 1.00
PE-C-2 1.00
PE-C-3 1.00
TE-C-1 1.00
TE-C-2 1.00
TE-C-3 1.00
1
1
1
0.300
0.520
0.720
0.29
0.49
0.69
20
100
320
1.38
9.63
36.15
20
100
200
5.24
34.2
91.28
8.11
54.92
156.51
14.8
102.09
300
PE-D-1 1.00
PE-D-2 1.00
PE-D-3 1.00
TE-D-1 1.00
TE-D-2 1.00
TE-D-3 1.00
1.25 0.400
1.25 0.700
1.25 1.00
0.29
0.51
0.72
20
100
320
2.46
17.48
71.77
20
100
200
9.31
62.09
180
14.41
99.75
309.97
26.3
185.5
595.2
PE-E-1 2.00
PE-E-2 2.00
PE-E-3 2.00
TE-E-1 2.00
TE-E-2 2.00
TE-E-3 2.00
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.500
0.800
1.100
0.31
0.5
0.68
20
100
320
3.85
22.73
83.95
20
100
200
14.57
80.82
212.18
22.55
129.68
363.93
41.16
241.5
697.39
PE-F-1 2.00
PE-F-2 2.00
PE-F-3 2.00
TE-F-1 2.00
TE-F-2 2.00
TE-F-3 2.00
2
2
2
0.600
1.000
1.450
0.29
0.48
0.7
20
100
320
5.52
35.34
147.74
20
100
200
20.92
125.74
372.09
32.38
202.03
639.87
59.13
375.8
1227.63
PE-G-1 2.00
PE-G-2 2.00
PE-G-3 2.00
TE-G-1 2.00
TE-G-2 2.00
TE-G-3 2.00
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.750
1.250
1.750
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
8.63
55.54
216.30
20
100
200
32.71
197.54
543.99
50.64
317.58
936.56
92.48
590.91
1798.86
PE-H-1 2.00
PE-H-2 2.00
PE-H-3 2.00
TE-H-1 2.00
TE-H-2 2.00
TE-H-3 2.00
3
3
3
0.920
1.500
2.150
0.3
0.49
0.7
20
100
320
12.97
79.94
324.16
20
100
200
49.17
282.9
816.7
78.13
454.77
1404.95
139.06
846.21
2696.28
PE-J-1 3.00
PE-J-2 3.00
PE-J-3 3.00
TE-J-1 3.00
TE-J-2 3.00
TE-J-3 3.00
4
4
4
1.200
2.000
2.800
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
22.03
141.51
547.11
20
100
200
83.58
503.76
1380.03
129.44
810.06
2373.02
236.48
1507.64
4553.68
PE-K-1 3.00
PE-K-2 3.00
PE-K-3 3.00
TE-K-1 4.00
TE-K-2 4.00
TE-K-3 4.00
5
5
5
1.500
2.500
3.500
0.3
0.5
0.69
20
100
320
34.39
220.80
853.09
20
100
200
130.48
786.23
2152.83
202.11
1264.42
3701.57
369.29
2353.51
7103.22
PE-L-1 4.00
PE-L-2 4.00
PE-L-3 4.00
TE-L-1 4.00
TE-L-2 4.00
TE-L-3 4.00
6
6
6
1.800
3.000
4.200
0.3
0.49
0.69
20
100
320
49.46
317.74
1226.98
20
100
200
187.86
1331.63
3097.20
291
1820.05
5325.20
531.75
3387.93
10219.28
PE-M-1 5.00
PE-M-2 5.00
PE-M-3 5.00
TE-M-1 6.00
TE-M-2 6.00
TE-M-3 6.00
8
8
8
2.400
4.000
5.600
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
87.95
565.77
2195.86
20
100
200
333.87
2014.95
5532.00
517.25
3241.45
9525.43
945.28
6034.85
18290.00
PE-N-1 6.00
PE-N-2 6.00
PE-N-3 6.00
TE-N-1 8.00
TE-N-2 8.00
TE-N-3 8.00
10
10
10
3.000
5.000
7.000
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
137.35
883.04
3421.26
20
100
200
521.58
3145.50
8626.42
808
5060.38
14846.80
1476.77
9421.74
28506.17
PE-O-1 7.00
PE-O-2 7.00
PE-O-3 7.00
TE-O-1 10.00
TE-O-2 10.00
TE-O-3 10.00
12
12
12
3.600
6.000
8.400
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
197.73
1271.62
4930.86
20
100
200
750.9
4530
12430.00
1163.44
7288.16
21397.00
2126.47
13570.33
41089.02
PE-P-1 9.00
PE-P-2 9.00
PE-P-3 9.00
TE-P-1 15.00
TE-P-2 15.00
TE-P-3 15.00
14
14
14
4.000
6.600
9.300
0.3
0.5
0.7
20
100
320
244.14
1537.49
6052.57
20
100
200
927.14
5477.67
15251.50
1436.59
8812.87
28262.66
2625.81
16409.42
50437.78
PE-Q-1 10.00
PE-Q-2 10.00
PE-Q-3 10.00
TE-Q-1 18.00
TE-Q-2 18.00
TE-Q-3 18.00
16
16
16
4.500 0.3
7.600 0.5
10.700 0.7
20
100
320
308.76
2038.95
8007.74
20
100
200
1172.63
7264.58
20179.85
1817.05
11688.26
34749.32
3321.32
21764.08
66737.64
TE-B-1 1.00
TE-B-2 1.00
TE-B-3 1.00
FLOW
PE-B-1 1.00
PE-B-2 1.00
PE-B-3 1.00
Note: Differential pressure values should be less than 50% of the inlet absolute pressure.
173
174_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:11 AM Page 174
Venturi Flowmeter with Magnehelic Gage

2.5% Accuracy, Dual Scale in SCFM & in w.c.
GAGE ASSEMBLY IS SHOWN
TO ILLUSTRATE MOUNTING
ORIENTATION WITH THE
VF KIT.
[4.750]
[.687]
SIDE PORTS
PLUGGED
[.500]
[1.250]
[B]
FLOW
[C]
[D]
90 APPROX.
[G]
[H]
H
1.125
1.375
1.750
2.375
3.000
J
4.625
5.250
5.750
7
9.250
[E]
[F]
Flowmeters, Venturi
FLOW
[A]
VFLO Kit
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
The Venturi Flow Meter with Magnehelic Gage is fabricated from aluminum and
has a gradual Venturi profile to reduce pressure losses through the meter. Flexible
connections enable the meter to be used in vertical or horizontal applications. The
Magnehelic gage provides a large, clear and accurate display of your differential pressure
reading. Each meter is calibrated at standard atmospheric conditions. The dual scale reads
in SCFM and in w.c. The meter is supplied with easy to read reference charts for various
flow conditions. It is available in line sizes from 1 to 4 and can handle vacuum and
pressure applications.
Series 2000, Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage

To Create Venturi Model, add option from chart to end of 2000.
Ex: 2000-10VF1 for 10 in w.c. & 20 SCFM of Air Scale with 1 Venturi Flow Tube
ACCESSORIES
MVB-LM1, Mini brass ball valve with lever handle. 1/8 F X 1/8 MNPT
MVB-TM1, Mini brass valve with tee handle. 1/8 M X 1/8 FNPT
MVB-WM1, Mini brass ball valve with wedge handle. 1/8 M X 1/8 FNPT
Option
Number
2000-10VF1
2000-20VF1
2000-40VF1
2000-10VF2
2000-20VF2
2000-40VF2
2000-10VF3
2000-20VF3
2000-40VF3
2000-10VF4
2000-20VF4
2000-40VF4
2000-10VF5
2000-20VF5
2000-40VF5
Range
0-10 in w.c. & 0-20 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-30 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-40 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-50 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-70 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-100 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-85 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-120 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-160 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-200 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-290 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-395 SCFM air
0-10 in w.c. & 0-350 SCFM air
0-20 in w.c. & 0-500 SCFM air
0-40 in w.c. & 0-675 SCFM air
Line
Size
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Line Size
1 FNPT
1.5 FNPT
2 FNPT
3 FNPT
4 FNPT
A
4.500
6
7.750
11
14.500
B
2.687
2.562
2.562
2.734
2.734
C
2
2.500
3
4
5.000
D
2.015
2.625
3.312
4.625
5.172
E
2.125
2.375
2.875
4
5.000
F
3.125
3.375
3.875
5.500
6.500
G
1.359
2
2.703
4
5.328
K
6.375
7.125
7.875
9.625
11.500
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. (Natural gas option
available).
Wetted Materials: Aluminum, silicone, acrylic, polycarbonate, high
carbon steel, low carbon steel, brass, paper, acrylic paint, enamel paint, alkyd
coating, nickel plate, zinc plate, helsel FC, 300 series stainless steel, PTFE,
Loctite AV sealant, commercial black rubber, neoprene, samarium cobalt, nickel
alloy steel cover, beryllium copper.
Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish is
coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
Accuracy: 2.5% FS.
Pressure Limits: -20 Hg to 15 psig (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP option: 35 psig
(2.41 bar). For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating,
next higher rating is recommended.
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 kPa).
Process Connection: Female NPT of nominal line size. (See chart).
Weight: Gage only: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g); Venturi: see
chart.
Weight (Not Including Gage)

lb (kg)
3 (1.36)
3 (1.36)
3 (1.36)
4.5 (2.04)
4.5 (2.04)
4.5 (2.04)
6 (2.72)
6 (2.72)
6 (2.72)
11 (4.99)
11 (4.99)
11 (4.99)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
18 (8.16)
Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation
174
175_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:11 AM Page 175
Series
500
Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines; Tempered, Replaceable Glass Window
A NPT
B
C HEX
REPLACEABLE WINDOW!
Model
SFI-500-3/4
SFI-500-1
SFI-500-1-1/4
SFI-500-1-1/2
SFI-500-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Window: Tempered glass;
Body: Brass, carbon steel, or 316 SS;
Gasket: Buna-N on brass and carbon steel body, PTFE on 316 SS body.
Connections: 3/4 to 2 male NPT.
APPLICATIONS
Hydraulic tanks
Pressure vessels
Coolant tanks
Hydraulic lines
Oil reservoirs
Model
Brass
SFI-500B-3/4
SFI-500B-1
SFI-500B-1-1/4
SFI-500B-1-1/2
SFI-500B-2
Model
Carbon Steel
SFI-500CS-3/4
SFI-500CS-1
SFI-500CS-1-1/4
SFI-500CS-1-1/2
SFI-500CS-2
FLOW
Sight Window
Shows Level or Contents of Tanks, Pipelines; Fused Glass and Steel Construction
A NPT
B
C HEX
Model
SFI-550-1/4
SFI-550-3/8
SFI-550-1/2
SFI-550-3/4
SFI-550-1
SFI-550-1-1/4
SFI-550-1-1/2
SFI-550-2
Model
SFI-550-1/4
SFI-550-3/8
SFI-550-1/2
SFI-550-3/4
D
3/16 (4.76)
7/32 (5.56)
7/32 (5.56)
5/16 (7.94)
5/16 (7.94)
13/32 (10.32)
13/32 (10.32)
13/32 (10.32)
E
5/8 (15.95)
23/32 (18.26)
25/32 (19.84)
15/16 (23.81)
1-1/16 (26.99)
1-7/32 (30.96)
1-7/32 (30.96)
1-9/32 (32.54)
Fused glass style sight windows feature glass to metal bond for utmost reliability.
Plated steel bodies have convenient hex wrench surfaces. Connections are standard NPT
in sizes from 1/4 to 2. Windows are clear, ripple free, and flush with the front face, having
no recess on which dirt might collect.
APPLICATIONS
Hydraulic tanks
Pressure vessels
Coolant tanks
Hydraulic lines
Oil reservoirs
Dimensions Inches (mm)

A
B
C
1/4 11/32 (8.73) 5/8 (15.95)
3/8 7/16 (11.11) 3/4 (19.05)
1/2 9/16 (14.29) 15/16 (23.81)
3/4 3/4 (19.05)
1-1/16 (26.99)
1
15/16 (23.81) 1-3/8 (34.93)
1-1/4 1-3/16 (30.18) 1-3/4 (44.45)
1-1/2 1-7/16 (36.53) 2 (50.80)
2
1-7/8 (47.63) 2-1/2 (63.50)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Window: Glass;
Body: Plated steel.
Connections: 1/4 to 2 male NPT.
Model
SFI-550-1
SFI-550-1-1/4
SFI-550-1-1/2
SFI-550-2
175
Sight Flow Indicators
Series
550
E
1-3/8 (35)
1-3/8 (35)
1-9/16 (40)
1-9/16 (40)
1-21/32(42)
Tough, tempered glass window resists chemical attack and abrasion. Seamless
gasket assures perfect seal and is easily field replaceable. In addition to the standard
brass body, Model 500 Sight Windows are also available in carbon steel or 316 SS to suit
a wide range of chemical compatibility.
Model
316 SS
SFI-500SS-3/4
SFI-500SS-1
SFI-500SS-1-1/4
SFI-500SS-1-1/2
SFI-500SS-2
Dimensions Inches (mm)

A
B
C
D
3/4 3/4 (19)
1-3/8 (35) 45/64 (18)
1
15/16 (24) 1-3/8 (35) 45/64 (18)
1-1/4 1-1/4 (32) 2-1/8 (54) 27/32 (22)
1-1/2 1-27/64 (37) 2-1/8 (54) 27/32 (22)
2
1-1/4 (32) 2-1/2 (64) 15/32 (12)
176_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:14 AM Page 176
Series
SFI-100, SFI-300,
SFI-350, SFI-360,
SFI-400, SFI-700
MIDWEST Sight Flow Indicators

Inexpensive Protection for Expensive Equipment and Systems
Model 400
Model 100, 100MP
FLOW
Model 300, 300MP
Model 360F
Midwest Sight Flow Indicators are manufactured of quality materials and safety tested to
assure long, dependable service at economical prices. Available in window viewing style in the 100
and 300 Series and tube viewing style in the 400 and 700 Series with connection choices of female
NPT, BSPP, or BSPT threaded and flanged. Series 700 has impeller and internal wipers for
cleaning sight tube, which is perfect for fluids with suspended solids. Just rotate the glass tube
and restore full 360 visibility without disrupting the flow.
Sight Flow Indicator Dimensions and Weight
Model
100
Series
300
Series
700
Series
400
Series
400F
Series
300F
Series
Body
Length
Size
1/4, 3/8 3.000 (76)
1/2, 3/4 4.000 (102)
1, 1-1/4 4.375 (111)
1-1/2, 2 5.688 (144)
1/4, 3/8 3.063 (78)
1/2, 3/4 4.063 (103)
1, 1-1/4 4.375 (111)
1-1/2, 2 5.500 (140)
1/4, 3/8 2.750 (70)
1/2, 3/4 3.688 (94)
1, 1-1/4, 4.875 (124)
1-1/2
4.500 (144)
1/2
5.125 (130)
3/4
5.625 (143)
1
1-1/4 5.750 (146)
1-1/2 5.875 (149)
6.125 (156)
2
6.250 (159)
3
6.250 (159)
4
5.000 (127)
1
1-1/4 5.125 (130)
1-1/2 5.250 (133)
5.370 (137)
2
5.750 (146)
3
5.750 (146)
4
1-1/2 6.375 (162)
6.500 (165)
2
8.875 (225)
3
10.250 (260)
4
12.500 (318)
6
Depth
1.813 (46)
2.250 (57)
2.563 (65)
3.250 (83)
2.250 (57)
2.750 (70)
3.125 (79)
3.688 (93)
-
Flange
Height
Diameter
2.125 (54) 2.563 (65) 2.625 (67) 3.625 (83) 2.125 (54) 2.563 (65) 2.563 (65) 4.063 (103) 1.500 (38) 2.250 (57) 2.750 (70) (across flats) 3.500 (89)
3.875 (98)
4.250 (108)
4.625 (117)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.00 (229)
4.250 (108)
4.625 (117)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.000 (229)
5.000 (127)
6.000 (152)
7.500 (191)
9.000 (229)
11.000 (279)
Viewing
Weight
Area
Diameter lb (kg)
1.1 (0.5)
1.5 (0.7)
2.7 (1.2)
5.5 (2.5)
1.7 (0.8)
2.6 (1.2)
3.0 (1.4)
7.0 (3.2)
0.9 (0.4)
2.4 (1.1)
5.1 (2.3)
1.500 (38) 3.8 (1.7)
1.750 (44) 4.8 (2.2)
2.000 (51 ) 6.2 (2.8)
2.000 (51) 7.6 (3.5)
2.500 (64) 8.7 (4.0)
3.000 (76) 13 (6.0)
4.000 (102) 17 (7.7)
5.000 (127) 25 (11.0)
2.000 (51) 7 (3.2)
2.000 (51) 8 (3.6)
2.500 (64) 12 (5.5)
3.000 (76) 14 (6.4)
4.000 (102) 23 (10.4)
5.000 (127) 31 (14.1)
2.313 (58) 12 (5.5)
2.313 (58) 16 (7.5)
3.000 (76) 38 (17)
4.000 (102) 56 (25)
6.000 (152) 120 (55)
Dimensions are in inches (mm)
176
Model 700
Models
100 - Single window with impeller
300 - Double window with impeller
350 - Double window with no indicator
360 - Double window with flapper
400 - Tube type with no indicator
700 - Tube type with impeller and internal wipers to clean glass tube
177_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:27 AM Page 177
SFI-100 & SFI-300 SERIES

Window Style with Threaded Connections
SFI-700 SERIES
Tube Style with Threaded Connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass; Body: Bronze or 316 SS; Gasket:
Buna-N, fluoroelastomer or PTFE; Indicator: ABS or 316 SS impeller (100 and
300), 304 SS or 316 SS flapper (360).
Temperature Limit: 200F (93C); 120F (48C) on W2 option.
Pressure Limit: 125 psig (8.62 bar), 150 psig (10.34 bar) on MP models.
Connections: Threaded.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or vertical; 360: Horizontal only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Tube: Tempered borosilicate; Body: Brass or 316 SS; Gasket:
Fluoroelastomer; Indicator: Acetal.
Connections: Threaded.
Example
Example
G2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Window: Tempered glass; Body: Carbon steel or 316 SS;
Gasket: Buna-N, fluoroelastomer or PTFE; Indicator: 316 SS flapper (360).
Connections: Flanged.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or vertical; 360: Horizontal only.
Example
SFI 360FSS 1-1/2 G1 SFI-360FSS-1-1/2-G1 Sight Flow Indicator;

double window, tempered glass, PTFE
gasket, 316SS body, 304SS flapper, 1-1/2
inch raised face flange connections
Model
SFI
Sight flow indicator, double window, tempered
Designator
glass, Buna-N gaskets standard, raised face
flange connections
Body
350FCS
Carbon steel body, no moving indicator
Style
350FSS
316SS body, no moving 316SS indicator
360FCS
Carbon steel body, 316SS flapper
360FSS
316SS body, 316SS flapper
Body
1-1/2
1-1/2 inch raised face flange connection size
Size
2
2 inch raised face flange connection size
3
4
6
Options
G1 PTFE gasket
G2 Fluoroelastomer gasket
SFI-400 SERIES
Tube Style with Threaded or Flanged Connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Tube: Borosilicate; Body: Cast iron or 316 SS; Gasket: PTFE.
Connections: Threaded or flanged.
Example
SFI 400SS 1-1/2 SFI-400SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube

type, borosilicate tube, PTFE gaskets, 316SS
body, 1-1/2 inch female NPT connections
Model
SFI
Sight flow indicator, tube type, borosilicate tube,
Designator
PTFE gaskets
Body
400CI
Female NPT connections, cast iron body (only
Style
for 1 through 2 inch sizes)
400SS
Female NPT connections, 316SS body
400F
Raised face flange connection, 316SS body
(only for 1 inch and up sizes)
Body
1/2 1/2 inch connection size
Size
3/4 3/4 inch connection size
1
1 inch connection size
1-1/4 1-1/4 inch connection size
1-1/2 1-1/2 inch connection size
2
3
4
(Best for use in vertical pipelines where there are no mechanical strains)
177
SFI-300F SERIES
Window Style with Flanged Connections
SFI-700SS-1-1/2 Sight Flow Indicator; tube

type with 8 blade Acetal impeller and
integral wipers to clean tube interior,
tempered borosilicate tube,
Fluoroelastomer gaskets, 316SS body, 11/2 inch female NPT connections
Model
SFI
Sight flow indicator, tube type with 8 blade
Designator
Acetal impeller and integral wipers to clean
tube interior, tempered borosilicate tube,
Fluoroelastomer gaskets
Body
700
Brass body
Style
700SS
316SS body
Body
1/4
1/4 inch female NPT connection size
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 inch female NPT connection size
1-1/4
1-1/4 inch female NPT connection size
1-1/2
1-1/2 inch female NPT connection size
BSPT BSPT threads
Options
BSPP BSPP threads
SFI 700SS 1-1/2
FLOW
SFI-300SS-2-G2 Sight Flow Indicator;

double window, temper glass,
Fluoroelastomer gaskets, 316SS body, ABS
impeller, 2 inch female NPT connections.
Model
Sight flow indicator, tempered glass
SFI
Designator
standard, Buna-N gaskets standard, female
NPT connections standard.
Body
Single window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
100
Style
Double window, bronze body, ABS Impeller
300
Double window, bronze body, no moving
350
indicator
Double window, bronze body, 304SS flapper
360
Body
316SS body option for 300, 350, 360
SS
Options
150 psig maximum pressure option,
MP
includes Fluoroelastomer gaskets
Body
1/4 inch connection size
1/4
Size
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4 inch connection size
1-1/4
1-1/2 inch connection size
1-1/2
2
Options
Plexiglass window
W2
PTFE gasket
G1
Fluoroelastomer gasket
G2
316SS Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
S2
Monel Shaft (Not on 350 Model)
S3
ABS impeller with bronze bushing (Not on
I1
350, 360)
316SS impeller (Not on 350, 360)
I2
No impeller (100 only)
I3
316SS Flapper (360 only)
F1
BSPT BSPT threads
BSPP BSPP threads
(Maximum flow on impeller models: 5 FPS with liquids, 5000 FPM with gases)
SFI 300 SS 2
178_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:13 AM Page 178
Vane Operated Flow Switch
Series
V4
Field Adjustable Dependable Protection Against Flow Variation or

Stopping in Pipelines for Fluids, Gases and Flowing Solids
3-11/32
[84.93]
1-5/8 [41.28]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
6-3/4
[171.45]
4-11/16
8
[119.06]
[203.20]
1
[25.40]
FIVE LAYER VANE 316

STAINLESS STEEL DESIGNED
FOR 1-1/2 TO 8 PIPES
USABLE IN LARGER PIPE
SIZES.
Flow Switches, Paddle
FLOW
Scan here
to watch
product video
Rugged and reliable the Series V4 Flotect flow switch operates automatically to
protect equipment and pipeline systems against damage from reduction or loss of flow.
The V4 is time tested being installed in thousands of pipelines and processing plants around
the world. A unique magnetically actuated switching design gives superior performance.
There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, a free-swinging vane attracts a
magnet within the solid metal switch body, actuating a snap switch by means of a simple
lever arm.
FEATURES
Leak proof body machined from bar stock
Choice of custom vane calibrated for your application, Model V4, or field adjustable
multilayer vane, Model V4-2-U (see set point chart)
Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4
Explosion-proof (listing included in specifications)
Installs directly and easily into pipeline with a thredolet, tee, or flange (see
application drawings)
Can be used in pipes 1-1/2 and up
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from
installation so that the process does not have to be shut down
High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with the brass body and 2000 psig
(138 bar) with the 316 SS body
APPLICATIONS
Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no flow
Controls sequential operation of pumps
Automatically starts auxiliary pumps and engines
Stops liquid cooled engines, machines and processing when coolant flow is
interrupted
Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails
Controls dampers according to flow
Model
V4-2-U
V4-SS-2-U
V4-2-U-NH**
V4
V4-SS
V4-NH**
Description
Brass body, universal vane
316SS* body, universal vane
Brass body, universal vane, no housing
Brass body, custom vane
316SS* body, custom vane
Brass body, custom vane, no housing
Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for V4 installation. Thredolets,
bushings, and tees are available in a variety of sizes and materials.
For custom vane models, please supply factory with following information: pipe size,
flow direction (horizontal, up), mounting, pressure, temperature, specific gravity, flow
rates (maximum normal, actuation/deactuation), etc.
*316SS body with 430SS magnet keeper.
**No Housing Option (-NH) has no approvals.
When both values are supplied, note which is critical.
178
2-23/32
[69.06]
UL AND CSA TYPE
INCLUDES 16 GA LEADS,
6 [152.4] LONG.
ATEX VERSION INCLUDES
TERMINAL BLOCK
EXPLOSION-PROOF HOUSING
WITH 3/4 FEMALE NPT
CONDUIT CONNECTION
SWITCH BODY, SAE 72 BRASS
OR 316 STAINLESS STEEL
1-1/2 MALE NPT
PROCESS CONNECTION
MAGNET KEEPER,
430 STAINLESS STEEL
VANE BLOCK,
316 STAINLESS STEEL
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible
with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Vane: 316 SS;
Body: Brass or 316 SS standard;
Magnet Keeper: 430 SS standard,
316 SS optional;
Options: Other materials also
available, consult factory (e.g. PVC,
Hastelloy, Nickel, Monel, Titanium).
Temperature Limit: -4 to 275F (-20 to
135C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) [MT option not
UL, CSA, ATEX or IECEx] ATEX and
IECEx options, ambient temperature -4
to 163F (-20 to 73C); Process
temperature -4 to 163F (-20 to 73C).
Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig
(69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig (138
bar), optional 5000 psig (345 bar)
available with 316 SS body and SPDT
switch only.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and
Explosion-proof. **Listed with ULand
CSA for Class I, Groups C and D;
Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
ATEX
0344
II 2 G Ex d IIB T6
Gb -20CTamb73C.
-20CProcess Temp73C.
EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 03
ATEX 2383.
ATEX Standards:EN60079-0: 2009;
EN60079-1: 2007.
IECEx Certified:For Ex d IIB T6 Gb 20CTamb73C. -20CProcess

Temp73C.
IECEx Certificate of Conformity:IECEx
DEK 11.0071.
IECEx Standards:IEC 60079-0:2007;
IEC 60079-1: 2007.
Zone I. Also FM approved.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch
standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and
IECEx models 10A @ 125/250 VAC
(V~). CSA models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC
(V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ).
MV option: 1A @125 VAC (V~); 1A
res., .5A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MT
option: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). [MT
and MV option not UL, CSA, FM, ATEX
or IECEx].
Electrical Connections: UL and CSA
models: 16 AWG, 6 (152 mm) long.
ATEX and IECEx unit: Terminal block.
NPT.
Process Connection: 1-1/2 male
NPT.
vertical for proper operation. Units for
horizontal installation (vertical pipe with
up flow) available.
Set Point Adjustment: For universal
vane: five vane combinations.
FM, IECEx, UL**.
OPTIONS (add as a suffix to the model number):

-D, DPDT contacts
-MV, Gold Plated Contacts, options for dry circuits
(see electrical rating in specification, no listings or approvals)
-MT, High Temperature, option rated 400F (204C)
(see electrical rating in specifications, no listings or approvals)
-TRI (increasing flow), -TRD (decreasing flow), Time Delay Relay,
option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0-1 to 0-31 minutes.
(no listings or approvals)
-316, 316 SS Magnet Keeper, option to replace standard 430 SS
-V, Vertical Up Flow, option for upward flow in vertical pipe
-AT, ATEX compliant construction
-IEC, IECEx certified construction
179_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:51 AM Page 179
V4 Universal Vane Flow Charts

Values shown in both charts are nominal. If normal flows exceed actuation rates by less than 10%, custom vanes are recommended.
Figures are based on standard vertical installation in a 1-1/2" Threaded Branch Connection in a horizontal run of pipe.
Approximate Actuation/Deactuation Flow Rates for Cold Water.
Upper Figures in GPM. Lower Figures in LPM.
Vane
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
20
18
16
14
Layers
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
1
7-3
15-8
45-22
95-40
210-120 375-175 600-300 900-450 1200-600 1400-800 2000-1000 2400-1200
26.67-11.67 56.7-30 167-83.3 367-150 800-450 1417-667 2267-1133 3400-1700 4550-2267 5300-3033 7567-3783 9083-4550
1&2
7-4
23-14
50-35
130-90 230-150 450-250 650-350 900-500 1200-650 1450-800 1800-1000
26.7-15 86.7-53.3 190-132 500-333 867-567 1700-950 2467-1317 3400-1900 4550-2467 5483-3033 6817-3783
1,2,&3
11-7
27-19
80-60 160-115 300-180 450-275 600-350 750-450 1000-600 1200-700
41.7-26.7 102-71.7 300-233 600-433 1133-683 1700-1033 2267-1317 2750-2083 3783-2267 4550-2650
1,2,3,&4
17-12
60-45 120-90
230-150 310-200 430-280 550-360 700-450
850-550
65-45
233-167 450-333 867-567 1167-750 1633-1067 2083-1367 2650-1700 3217-2083
1,2,3,4,&5
40-30 80-65
135-100 200-140 290-200 360-250 460-325
575-400
152-113 300-250 517-383 750-533 1100-750 1367-950 1733-1233 2183-1517
Actuation rates are based on cold water at a specific gravity of 1.0.
For fluids of different specific gravity, actuation rates may be approximated by dividing the rate shown by the square root of the specific gravity.
Approximate Actuation/Deactuation Flow Rates for Cold Air.
Upper Figures in SCFM. Lower Figures in LPS.
Vane
Layers
1
1.5
Pipe
32-17
15-8
1&2
2
Pipe
65-32
30-20
23-13
10-6
1,2,&3
4
Pipe
400-200
190-90
195-140
90-70
135-100
60-50
65-50
30-20
1,2,3,4,&5
6
Pipe
950-475
450-220
550-375
260-180
375-265
180-130
260-200
120-90
130-100
60-50
8
Pipe
1550-850
730-400
1100-700
520-330
725-500
340-240
500-400
240-190
310-250
150-120
10
Pipe
2400-1300
1100-600
1850-1200
870-570
1200-850
570-400
875-700
410-330
650-525
310-250
12
Pipe
3450-1900
1600-900
2700-1750
1300-800
1850-1300
870-610
1250-1000
590-470
1000-800
470-380
16
Pipe
6400-3500
3000-1700
4800-3100
2300-1500
3350-2350
1600-1100
2500-2000
1200-900
2200-1750
1040-830
14
Pipe
4700-2600
2200-1200
3400-2200
1600-1000
2600-1800
1200-800
1900-1500
900-710
1600-1250
760-590
18
Pipe
8000-4400
3800-2100
6000-3900
2800-1800
4300-3000
2000-1400
3100-2500
1500-1200
2800-2250
1300-1100
20
Pipe
10000-5500
4700-2600
7400-4800
3500-2300
5300-3700
2500-1700
3900-3100
1800-1500
3550-2850
1700-1300
FLOW
1,2,3,&4
3
Pipe
210-105
100-50
120-70
60-30
60-48
30-20
Actuation rates are based on air at standard conditions.

For gases at other pressures, temperatures, or specific gravities, consult factory for equivalent flow approximations.
Application Drawings
For Flotect Automatic Flow Switches
3/4 NPT FOR CONDUIT

1-1/2 THREADED BRANCH
CONNECTION
CUT 1-15/16 MIN.
HOLE IN PIPE
REQUIRED FLOW HOLDS

SWITCH OPEN WHEN FLOW
SLOWS, VANE DROPS,
ACTUATION SWITCH
ALUMINUM ENCLOSURE
FOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
SWITCH BODY MACHINED
FROM BAR OF BRASS OR
STAINLESS STEEL
2-1/2 X
1-1/2 FACE
OR HEX
BUSHING
1-15/16
[49.21]
MINIMUM
HOLE IN
PIPE
1-1/2
THREDOLET
2-7/8
[73.03]
MINIMUM
HOLE IN
PIPE
2-1/2
THREDOLET
FLOW
1-1/2 x 1-1/2x 1-1/2

Tee Installation
FLOW
FLOW
FLOW
2-1/2 Threaded
Branch Connection
Standard Installation
Threaded Branch Connection Installation.

May also be installed using tee, flange or coupling.
1-1/2
3000 LB
COUPLING
ANSI RF
THREADED
REDUCING
FLANGE
2-1/16
[52.39]
BORE I.D.
ANSI RF
WELDING
NECK
FLANGE
1
[25.40]
FLOW
FLOW
*Flange face to pipe O.D.

specified by customer. Normally
should not exceed 5 (172)
Flange Installation
2 x 2 x 2
Tee Installation
FLOW
Pipe Size
2
3
4
Dim. A
2-5/8 (66.7)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-7/16 (61.9)
Not Recommended, Unless

Coupling is Bored Out to
2-1/16 (52.4) As Shown
179
THREADED COVER IS
EASILY REMOVED FOR
ACCESS TO SWITCH
180_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:16 AM Page 180
Series
V6
Mini-Size Flow Switches

Monitor flow in 1/2 to 2 pipe, Explosion-proof
6-5/16
[160.34]
LOCKING COLLAR
ASSEMBLY
3/4 NPT
UPPER HOUSING
SWITCH SUPPORTS
SPDT [OR DPDT]
SNAP SWITCH
MAGNET LEVER PIN
MAGNET LEVER
ASSEMBLY
18 GA. LEADS
18 [457.20] LONG
3/4 NPT
SWITCH HOUSING
300 SERIES STAINLESS
STEEL OR BRASS
PISTON 300
SERIES
STAINLESS
STEEL
OR BRASS
MAGNETS
V6 with Tee
LOWER HOUSING-BRASS
OR STAINLESS STEEL
VANE SPRING
VANE PIVOT PIN
VANE PIVOT BRACKET
SNAP RING
1/2
NPT
STAINLESS STEEL VANE
3-3/8
[85.73]
4-3/4
[120.65] SWITCH BODY
1-1/8 [28.58] SQ
300 SERIES
STAINLESS STEEL
OR BRASS
CERAMIC
MAGNET
OUTLET 1/2 NPT

INLET 1/2 NPT
V6 Low Flow
VALVE BODY MATERIAL

300 SERIES STAINLESS
STEEL OR BRASS
3-5/8
[92.08]
O-RING
BUNA-N
HARDWARE [SCREW,
SPRINGS & CHECK
VALVE] STAINLESS STEEL
FLOW
OVERALL LENGTH WITH

1-1/4 TEE CONNECTION
APPROXIMATELY 8

Surprisingly compact, the Series V6 Flotect Flow Switch is engineered to
specifically monitor liquid, gas, or airflows. Operation is simple and dependable with no
mechanical linkage as the flow switch is magnetically actuated. The lower body holds the
flow vane and one magnet, which controls the switch actuating magnet in the separate
upper housing. In most applications the switch is normally off with the pipeline flow forcing
the vane against the vane spring. As the flow decreases the vane spring pushes back the
vane, actuating the switch to signal an alarm or shutdown. Tees are available for installation
in pipelines from 1/2 to 2, with bushings added the unit is easily adapted to 1/4 and
3/8 piping.
FEATURES
Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock
Choice of models in a tee with calibrated vane or field adjustable trimmable vane
Weatherproof
Explosion-proof (listing included in specifications)
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from the
High pressure rating of 1000 psig (69 bar) with brass body and 2000 psig (138
bar) on the 316 SS body (see specifications)
Low flow model offers field adjustable set point
Easy installation, simply insert the tee in the pipeline and complete electrical
connections
APPLICATIONS
Protects pumps, motors and other equipment against low or no flow
Controls sequential operation of pumps
Automatically starts auxillary pumps and engines
Shuts down burner when air flow through heating coil fails
Controls dampers according to flow
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases or liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: Standard V6 Models: Vane: 301 SS; Lower Body: brass or 303
SS; Magnet: ceramic; Other: 301, 302 SS; Tee: brass, iron, forged steel, or 304
SS.
V6 Low Flow Models: Lower Body: brass or 303 SS; Tee: brass or 304 SS;
Magnet: ceramic; O-ring: Buna-N standard, Fluoroelastomer optional; Other: 301,
302 SS.
Temperature Limits: -4 to 220F (-20 to 105C) Standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) (MT not UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx or KC) ATEX Compliant AT,
IECEx IECOption and KC (KC Option), Ambient Temperature -4 to 167F (-20 to
75C) Process Temperature: -4 to 220F (-20 to 105C).
Pressure Limit: Brass lower body with no tee models 1000 psig (69 bar), 303 SS
lower body with no tee models 2000 psig (138 bar). Brass tee models 250 psi
(17.2 bar), iron tee models 1000 psi (69 bar), forged and stainless steel tee models
2000 psi (138 bar), low flow models 1450 psi (100 bar).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and CSA for
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G. (Group A on stainless
steel body models only).
ATEX
0344
II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 Gb Process Temp75C Alternate
Temperature Class T5 Process Temp90C, 115C (T4) Process Temp 105C
consult factory. EC-type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128.
ATEX Standards: EN 60079-0: 2009; EN 60079-1: 2007.
IECExCertified:For Ex d IICT6 Gb Process Temp75C Alternate Temperature
Class T5 Process Temp90C, 115C (T4) Process Temp105C consult factory.
IECExCertificate of Conformity: IECExDEK 11.0039;
IECExStandards: IEC 60079-0:2007; IEC 60079-1:2007;
Korean Certified (KC)for: Ex d IIC T6 Gb Process Temp75C;
KTLCertificate Number:2012-2454-75.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch standard, DPDT snap switch optional.
Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @125/250 VAC. CSA, ATEX and IECEx models:
5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV option: .1A @ 125
VAC (V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT option not UL, CSA, ATEX or
IECEx].
Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long. ATEX/CSA
/IECEx models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 stainless steel.
Conduit Connections: 3/4 male NPT standard, 3/4 female NPT on junction box
models.
Process Connection:1/2 male NPT on models without a tee.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the
actuation/deactuation flow rates in the charts are based on horizontal pipe runs
and are nominal values.
Set Point Adjustment: Standard V6 models none. Without tee models vane is
trimmable. Low flow models are field adjustable in the range shown. See set point
charts.
Weight: 2 to 6 lb (.9 to 2.7 kg) depending on construction.
Options not Shown: Custom calibration, bushings, PVC tee, reinforced vane,
DPDT relays.
Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, CSA, IECEx, KTL, UL.
Set Point Charts: See page 181 (Series V6)
180
181_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:16 AM Page 181
Example
V6EPB-B-S-2-B-MT flow switch; brass body, brass tee with 3/4 NPT connections, SPDT
snap switch, and high temperature option
Series
V6
Series V6 flow switch
Construction
EP
Explosion proof
Body
B-B
Brass
S-S
SS
Circuit
S
SPDT
(Switch)
D
DPDT
Tee Connection
1
1/2 NPT
Size
2
3/4 NPT
3
1 NPT
4
1-1/4 NPT
5
1-1/2 NPT
6
2 NPT
LF
Low Flow Model (1/2 NPT connections)
Tee
MI
Iron
Material
FS
Forged Steel
B
Brass
S
SS
0
No tee, field trimmable vane**
(For LF Model no tee material chosen, tee material matches body choice)
Options
CSA CSA approved construction with junction box*
AT ATEX compliant construction with junction box
IEC IECEx certified construction with junction box
MV Gold contacts on snap switch for dry circuits (see specifications for ratings)
MT High temperature option rated 400F (205C) (see specifications for ratings)*
VIT Fluoroelastomer O-rings in place of Buna-N on low flow models
V6 EP B-B S 2
B MT
*Options that do not have ATEX.

**Vane will be trimmed to the connection size. If full field trimmable vane is desired, must select with tee connection size 6.
FLOW
V6 Set Point Charts - Factory Installed Tee

Approximate ActuationDeactuation Flow Rates for
Cold Water. Upper figures are
GPM, Lower figures in LPM
Pipe Size Actuate Deactuate
1.50
1/2
1.00
5.667
3.83
2.00
3/4
1.25
7.5
4.67
1
3.00
1.75
11.33
6.67
1-1/4
4.00
3.00
15.17
11.3
1-1/2
6.00
5.00
22.67
18.9
2
10.00
8.50
37.83
32.2
V6 Low Flow Set Point Chart

Min-Max Flow Rates in 1/2 Pipe
Media
Actuate Deactuate
GPM-Water .04-0.75 .03-0.60
LPM-Water .15-2.84 .11-2.27
SCFM-Air .18-2.70 .15-2.0
LPS-Air
.09-1.3 .07-.95
Pressure drop (head loss) is a function of both set point and flow rate.
Typically, pressure drop at actuation flow rate listed will be 5-10 psid
(.34-.69 bar). Pressure drops at other flow rates will vary in proportion
to the (change in flow).
Model
V6EPB-B-S-1-B
V6EPB-B-S-2-B
V6EPB-B-S-3-B
V6EPB-B-S-4-B
V6EPB-B-S-5-B
V6EPB-B-S-6-B
V6EPB-B-S-1-MI
V6EPB-B-S-2-MI
V6EPB-B-S-3-MI
V6EPB-B-S-4-MI
V6EPB-B-S-5-MI
V6EPB-B-S-6-MI
V6EPS-S-S-1-FS
V6EPS-S-S-2-FS
V6EPS-S-S-3-FS
V6EPS-S-S-4-FS
V6EPS-S-S-5-FS
V6EPS-S-S-6-FS
V6EPS-S-S-1-S
V6EPS-S-S-2-S
V6EPS-S-S-3-S
V6EPS-S-S-4-S
V6EPS-S-S-5-S
V6EPS-S-S-6-S
V6EPB-B-S-6-0
V6EPS-S-S-6-0
V6EPB-B-S-LF
V6EPS-S-S-LF
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
No Tee
No Tee
1/2
1/2
Body
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
Brass
SS
Brass
SS
Tee
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
Iron
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
None
None
LF, Brass
LF, SS
Approximate ActuationDeactuation Flow Rates for

Air. Upper figures are SCFM,
Lower figures in LPM
Pipe Size Actuate Deactuate
6.50
1/2
5.00
180
120
10.0
3/4
8.00
300
240
1
14.0
12.0
420
360
1-1/4
21.0
18.0
600
540
1-1/2
33.0
30.0
960
840
2
43.0
36.0
1200
1020
181
182_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:17 AM Page 182
Series
V7
Magnetic Linkage
1 NPT
NORMALLY CLOSED
NORMALLY OPEN
COMMON GROUND
11/16
[17.46]
A
3/4
[19.05]
3.702
6-31/32 [177.00]
1-3/8 [34.93]
1/2 FEMALE
NPSM
.554
The Series V7 Flotect Flow Switch is an inexpensive switch for use with compatible
liquids to start or stop electronic operated equipment when flow or no-flow conditions
occur. Magnetic operation is simple and dependable with no mechanical linkages or seals
to wear or leak. Lower body is machined solid metal bar stock assuring no leak points, no
matter how long the unit is in service. Design is standard weatherproof, meeting NEMA
4X (IP66), for application versatility. Robust vane design is rigid and field trimmable for
set point adjustment.
FLOW
Approximate Actuation-Deactuation
Flow Rates for Cold Water GPM (LPM)
Deactuate
Pipe Size Actuate
6.8 (25.7)
7.5 (28.4)
1
7.6 (28.9)
8.1 (30.8)
1-1/4
11.7 (44.1) 10.9 (41.3)
1-1/2
16.9 (64.0) 15.6 (59.1)
2
19.6 (74.2) 18.1 (68.5)
2-1/2
29.6 (112)
31.6 (120)
3
52.0 (197)
58.0 (218)
4
Contact the factory for different actuation-deactuation rates.
Pipe Size
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
3
4
2-37/64
[65.48]
2X 47/64
[18.65]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with
wetted materials that are non-coating
and non-crystallizing.
Wetted Materials: Vane: 301 SS;
Process connection: Brass or 316 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic; Other: 301, 302 SS.
Upper Body Material: Die cast
aluminum.
to 121C).
Model
V7-WBS-30N
V7-WSS-30N
Body Material
Brass
316 SS
DIM A
1-17/64 [32.15]
1-19/32 [40.48]
1-53/64 [46.43]
2-11/64 [55.17]
2-11/64 [55.17]
2-11/64 [55.17]
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 125, 250,

480 VAC; 1/8 hp @ 125 VAC, 1/4 hp @
250 VAC.
closed.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPSM.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT.
Contact factory for optional tees.
Pipe Size: 1 to 4.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal or
vertical (actuation flow rates are based
on horizontal pipe runs in the vertical
position). Will not work in vertical pipe
with down flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is
trimmable, see set point chart.
Mini-Size Flow Switch
Series
V10
Proof of Flow or No Flow in 1/2 to 2 Pipe,

Low Cost, Leak Proof Body, Weatherproof
4 [101.6]
2-7/8 [73.07]
LOWER
BODY
7/8 HEX
18 AWG LEAD WIRES

19 [482.6] LONG
CABLE
1
[25.40]
2-7/8
[73.07]
1/4 [6.35] TRAVEL

TO NORMALLY
CLOSED POSITION
1/2 MALE
NPT
VANE
2-3/8
[61.11]
Normally Open Position

Designed to provide an inexpensive, reliable unit to monitor the presence or
absence of flow in a system. The V10 flow switch is used to monitor unattended equipment
and protect it from costly damage. The V10 flow switch utilizes a rugged, hermetically
sealed reed switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene switch housing that fits into a
standard heavy duty leak proof brass body or optional 303 SS body. The switch adjustment
allows the user to change the switch to Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) in
the field merely by loosening two screws. The switch housing is located outside the process
media, making switch change-over or maintenance easy without interruption of process
flow.
A full size, trimmable SS vane is provided with a removable laminated template. This
template is calibrated for brass or ductile iron reducing tees and forged steel straight
tee/bushing combinations. Allows for field installation in pipelines from 1/2 to 2 diameter.
A table with approximate actuation and deactivation values is provided below.
Cold Water Flow Rates
Approximate actuation/deactuation
GPM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Trim N.O.
N.C.
1/2
L
2.6/2.3
2.6/2.5
9.8/8.7
9.8/9.5
3/4
J
3.1/2.7
3.1/2.8
11.7/10.2 11.7/10.6
1
H
4.8/4.5
4.8/4.4
18.2/17
18.2/16.7
1-1/4 E
6.2/5.6
6.1/5.6
23.5/21.2 23.1/21.2
1-1/2 C
8.2/7.7
8.2/7.7
31/29.1
31/29.1
2
Full 9.5/9.1
9.5/9
36/34.4
36/34.1
182
Air Flow Rates

Approximate actuation/deactuation
SCFM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Trim N.O.
N.C.
1/2 L
10.3/8.8
10.2/9.2
291.7/250 288/260
3/4 J
13/11.6
12.9/11.6
368.3/328 365/328
1
H
19.2/17.6 18.9/17.6
543.3/498 535/498
1-1/4 E
24.8/22.2 24.5/22.5
701.7/628 693/637
1-1/2 C
33.4/31.2 33/30.6
946.7/883 935/867
2
Full 50.2/48.4 50.2/47.7
1422/1370 1422/1352
Normally Closed Position
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Vane: 301 SS;
Body: Brass or 303 SS;
Pin and spring: 301 SS, 302 SS and 316 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Pressure Limit: Brass body: 1000 psig (69 bar); 303 SS body: 2000 psig (138
bar).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, meets NEMA 4X (IP66).
Switch Type: SPST hermetically sealed reed switch. Field adjustable for normally
open or normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 0.5 A @ 120 VAC; 1.5 A @ 24 VDC res.; 0.001 A @ 200 VDC
res.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 19 (483 mm) long, PVC jacket. Rated 221F
(105C).
Process Connection: 1/2 male NPT standard. Contact factory for other options.
Mounting Orientation: Switch can be installed in any position but the
actuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal pipe runs and are nominal
values.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UR.
Switch Enclosure: Nylon.
Model Body Material
V10
Brass
V10SS 303SS
Switch Configuration
Normally Open or Closed
Normally Open or Closed
183_Layout 1 7/29/14 2:25 PM Page 183
Series
V8
Field Adjustable 1 to 6 Inch Pipe, Leak Proof Body
[3] 18 AWG LEAD WIRES,

18 [460] LONG
1.650 DIA. [42]
1/2 NPTM
3 1/16
[78]
SWITCH BODY
1 5/16 [34] OCTAGON
1/2 NPTM
3-1/16
[77.79]
1 NPTM
9 3/8
[238]
12-11/64
[309.17]
5 1/4
[134]
1-21/32
[41.31]
1-5/16 OCTAGON
[33.34]
1 NPTM
FIELD
TRIMMABLE VANE
5-1/4
[133.35]
FIELD TRIMMABLE
VANE
TRAVEL
FLOW
V8-WP2
V8
Cold Water Flow Rates

Approximate actuation/
deactuation
GPM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Size
1
10.8/9.1
40.9/34.6
1-1/4
9.8/8.3
37.2/31.4
1-1/2
8.6/6.8
32.4/25.7
2
10.9/8.8
41.2/33.4
3
12.9/8.9
48.8/33.5
4
21.1/13.8
79.7/52.2
6
45/33
170.2/124.7
Air Flow Rates

Approximate actuation/
deactuation
SCFM upper, LPM lower
Pipe Size
1
39/32.6
1105/923
1-1/4
37.5/32.2
1062/912
1-1/2
33.4/26.7
945/757
2
43/36.8
1218/1042
3
52.7/38.9
1493/1100
4
87.6/63.6
2482/1802
6
168.6/137.4
4775/3890
APPLICATIONS
Applications are chemical processing, air conditioning, refrigeration, heating systems,
cooling lines, machinery, liquid transfer systems, water treatment, food processing,
and machine tools. Also, other applications compatible with the materials of
construction.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Vane and body: Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS);
Pin and spring: 316 SS or Inconel;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose, WP/WP2 option is weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch, MV option: SPDT gold contact snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @ 30 VDC;
MV option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT, 1/2 female NPT on WP and WP2.
Mounting Orientation: Actuation/deactuation flow rates are based on horizontal
pipe runs and are nominal values. Unit cannot be used with vertical down flow.
Set Point Adjustment: Vane is trimmable.
Series V8, Flow Switch
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A resistive, 0.5A
inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix -MV.
Example: V8-MV
Inconel Alloy Option. Inconel Alloy replaces standard 316 SS wetted parts.
Wetted parts are Inconel Alloy, ceramic 8, and Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add
suffix -INC.
Example: V8-INC
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring.
To order add suffix -WP. (Not UL approved)
Example: V8-WP
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is aluminum and provides weatherproof
protection for electrical wiring.
To order add suffix -WP2. (Not UL approved)
Example: V8-WP2
183
V8 Flotect Flow Switch Protects Equipment: Operation is simple and dependable.

In most applications, the switch is normally off while there is sufficient flow of liquid or
air. When flow stops, the vane spring moves the vane, actuating a single pole double throw
switch rated 5A @ 120/250 VAC to start or stop motor, pump, engine, etc. Operate a damper
or valve; shut down a burner or actuate an alarm or signal, protecting unattended
equipment from damage or loss of production.
The V8 Flotect Flow Switch has a leak proof body and vane constructed of tough durable
polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent chemical resistance. The full size trimmable vane
is provided with molded-in graduations allowing for installation in a 1 to 6 pipe. Operating
pressures are up to 150 psig (10 bar) and temperatures to 212F (100C). The V8 flow
switch can be used in various chemical processes, industrial systems and similar
applications where process conditions are compatible with polyphenylene sulfide, ceramic
8 and 316SS. The V8 Flotect flow switch is UL recognized as an industrial motor controller
per UL standard 508, suitable for mounting in a protected environment.
184_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:18 AM Page 184
Series
FS-2
Vane Flow Switch

Low Cost, Field Adjustable Set Point and Paddle
2-13/32
[61.1]
5 [127]
4-17/64
[108.3]
3-1/32
[77]
5-49/64
[146.5]
x
5-1/8 [130.2]
The Series FS-2 Vane Flow Switch offers an economical flow proving solution. Custom
set points tailored for the application are enabled by field adjustable vane layers and a set
point adjustment screw. The FS-2 features an aluminum weatherproof housing for outdoor
installation. Paddles are adjustable to fit 1 to 8 size pipe. FS-2 is ideal for use in flow
or no flow applications in cold and hot water systems. Perfect for proving flow in boilers,
hot water heaters, and chillers.
Blade Vane
Pipe
Length
Diameter in (mm)
(inch)
Dim. X
1
1.34 (34)
1-1/4
1.34 (34)
1-1/2
2.24 (57)
2
2.24 (57)
2-1/2
3.46 (88)
3
3.46 (88)
4
3.46 (88)
5
6.57 (167)
6
6.57 (167)
8
6.57 (167)
Approximate Actuation and Deactuation Flow Rates

for Water
Maximum Setting
Minimum Setting
GPM (LPM)
GPM (LPM)
Actuate
Deactuate
Actuate
Deactuate
4.0 (15.0)
1.8 (6.7)
8.8 (33.3)
6.6 (25.0)
5.3 (20.0)
2.6 (10.0)
11.4 (43.3)
8.4 (31.7)
7.0 (26.7)
4.0 (15.0)
14.5 (55.0)
11.4 (43.3)
14.1 (53.3) 9.7 (36.7)
31.3 (118.3) 22.5 (85.0)
18.5 (70.0) 15.4 (58.3)
35.2 (133.3) 30.8 (116.7)
27.7 (105.0) 25.1 (95.0)
52.8 (200.0) 46.2 (175.0)
59.4 (225.0) 52.8 (200.0) 123.3 (466.7) 114.5 (433.3)
52.8 (200.0) 39.6 (150.0) 132.1 (500.0) 123.3 (466.7)
75.7 (286.7) 52.8 (200.0) 154.1 (583.3) 140.9 (533.3)
184.9 (700.0) 158.5 (600.0) 396.3 (1500.0) 374.2 (1416.7)
Series
TDFS
Flow Switches,
Thermal
FLOW
Flow Rate Chart
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Bellow: Tin-bronze;
Vane: SS;
Body: Forged brass.
Electrical Rating: 10A res, 3A ind @
250 VAC.
Shown with conduit connection option

Electrical Connection: Cable gland
with attached wire leads or optional
conduit connection.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT or
BSPT.
Mounting Orientation: Switch must be
installed vertically on horizontal pipe
runs.
Set Point Adjustment: Four vane
combinations and an adjustment screw.
Enclosure: Die-cast aluminum alloy.
Weight: 28.22 oz (0.8 kg).
Series FS-2, Paddle Flow Switch

OPTIONS
BSPT Process Connection,
To order add suffix -BSPT.
Example: FS-2-BSPT
Conduit Connection, 1 NPT female conduit connection with no wire leads.
To order add suffix -CND.
Example: FS-2-CND
Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch

Non-Mechanical, Low Pressure Drop
RoHS
CABLE
CABLE GLAND
4-9/32
[108.74]
STATUS
INDICATOR
1-1/8
HEX
SETPOINT
TARGET
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TDFS is a thermal flow switch that indicates whether the flow rate is above
or below a user set flow rate with NO and NC NPN outputs. Setpoint is easily field set, just
tap the included magnet on the setpoint target three times at the desired flow rate and its
done. Incorporated into the unit are two LED status indicators on opposite sides of the unit
providing visual switch indication, green when the flow is above set point, red when the
flow is below set point.
The TDFS uses an impulse thermal dispersion measurement technique to measure the flow
rate where the probe is heated above the process temperature and then is allowed to cool
down to the process temperature. Empty pipe is not a problem with the TDFS unlike some
competitor units that will overheat. Thermal flow switches can offer better long term
reliability and life expectancy than mechanical flow switches.
TDFS Advantages over Mechanical Flow Switches
No paddles or vanes to break off into the flow
No jams or material stopping the paddle movement
No seals on movement assembly to wear or leak
Low pressure drop, only needs to be 10% into the flow (e.g. 1/8 for 3/4 schedule
40 pipe)
TDFS-1-P-06, Thermal flow switch, 6 cable with cable gland*
*Consult factory for longer cable lengths
184
1-7/16
[36.51]
PROCESS CONNECTION
1/2 NPT
SENSOR
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible water-based
fluids.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS,
Polysulfone, and FKM.
Setpoint Range: 0.5 to 10 ft/s (0.15 to
3.0 m/s).
Repeatability: 0.07 ft/s +3% of
setpoint.
Typical Deadband: 0.1 ft/s +15% of
setpoint.
Temperature Limits: Process: 5 to
185F (-15 to 85C) (non-freezing);
Ambient: 5 to 167F (-15 to 75C),
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Pressure Limits: 300 psig (20.67 bar),
max. momentary surge: 500 psig
(34.47 bar).
Response Time: Approximately 8 s.
Switching Current: 400 mA, derate 5

mA/C above 23C.
Current Consumption: Average: 93
mA, Peak: 300 mA.
Electrical Connection: 4 conductor 22
AWG, 6 (1.83 m) long with cable
gland.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT male.
Housing Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS,
polycarbonate, neoprene, and
acrylated urethane.
Switch Type: 1 NO NPN, 1 NC NPN.
Input Power and Protection: 0.5A
fuse (resettable) reverse polarity
protected.
Switched Output Protection: 0.5A
fuse (resettable) reverse polarity
protected.
185_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:29 AM Page 185
Series
TSP
Liquid Flow Controller

NO or NC Relay Output, Adjustable Time Delay
2-13/16
[71.44]
3-5/16
[84.14]
3-29/32
[99.22]
C
B
A
2-13/16
[71.44]
3-5/16
[84.14]
3-29/32
[99.22]
Protect pumps and valves from dry running with the Series TSP Liquid Flow
Controller. The Series TSP combine a liquid flow switch with a failsafe relay controller to
detect a flow or no flow situation and provides switching for direct actuation of pumps and
valves. Controller features adjustable time delay, selectable NO or NC operation, and LED
indication of sensor, relay, and power status. Four models (TSP110S, TSP210S, TSP120S,
TSP220S) are designed with an integral flash alarm to provide immediate indication of
local alarm conditions.
Flash Alarm
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wetted Parts
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
PP
PVDF
Sensor Length
Short
Short
Long
Long
Short
Short
Long
Long
DIM B
in (cm)
1-5/16 (33.34)
1-5/16 (33.34)
2-13/16 (71.44)
2-13/16 (71.44)
1-9/64 (28.97)
1-9/64 (28.97)
2-13/16 (71.44)
2-13/16 (71.44)
DIM C
in (cm)
45/64 (17.86)
45/64 (17.86)
2-7/64 (53.58)
2-7/64 (53.58)
45/64 (17.86)
45/64 (17.86)
2-7/64 (53.58)
2-7/64 (53.58)
B
A
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene/PPS
or polyvinylidene fluoride.
Range: 0.04 to 3 fps (1.2X10-2 to .91
m/s).
(-40 to 70C).
Pressure Limits: 150 psi (10 bar) @
77F (25C), derated 1.67 psi (.113
bar) per C above 25C.
Relay Output: 1 SPDT form C,
isolated and sealed.
Relay Load: 250 VAC, 10 A resistive,
1/2 hp.
Switching Mode: Selectable NO or
NC.
Supply Voltage: 120/240 VAC, 50/60
Hz, selectable.
Current Consumption: .25 amps

maximum.
Sensor Voltage Supply: 13 VDC, 1
Watt max., nominal.
Sensor Trigger Point: Dry <10 mA,
wet >10 mA.
Time Delay: Adjustable, 0.15 to 60
seconds.
Flash Type: *Xenon tube.
Flash Frequency: *1 per second.
Brightness: *>50,000 CP.
Strobe Life: *10 M cycles.
Mounting Connection: 3/4 NPT.
Enclosure: Polypropylene, flame
retardant, probe NEMA 4X (IP65).
Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch
Flow Switches,
Thermal
Series
TDS
DIM A
in (cm)
6-1/2 (165.1)
6-1/2 (165.1)
7-29/32 (200.82)
7-29/32 (200.82)
8-5/16 (211.14)
8-5/16 (211.14)
9-13/16 (249.24)
9-13/16 (249.24)
Adjustable Switch Point, LED Indication

3/4 NPT
1-1/16
[26.99]
45/64
[17.86]
"B"
"A"
Dim. TDS112, TDS212 TDS122, TDS222
A
3.0 (7.6 cm)
4.5 (11.4 cm)
B
0.7 (1.8 cm)
2.1 (5.3 cm)
The Series TDS Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch offers solid state flow detection
of non-coating liquids for pump and process protection. SPDT output allows for interfacing
with remote PLC or relay control device. The adjustable switch point is factory calibrated
at 0.2 fps with LED indication of flow and calibration status. Units feature selectable NO
or NC operation and are not damaged by overranging flow velocities.
Model
TDS112
TDS212
TDS122
TDS222
Wetted Parts
PP/PPS
PVDF
PP/PPS
PVDF
Length
3.0 (7.6 cm)
3.0 (7.6 cm)
4.5 (11.4 cm)
4.5 (11.4 cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids.
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene /PPS
or polyvinylidene fluoride.
Range: 0.04 to 3 fps (1.2X10-2 to .91
m/s).
60C).
Pressure Limits: 150 psi (10 bar) @
25C, derated @ 1.667 psi (.113 bar)
per C above 25C.
Repeatability: 5% of setpoint.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 60 VAC/60 VDC @
1 A.
FLOW
Model
TSP110
TSP210
TSP120
TSP220
TSP110S
TSP210S
TSP120S
TSP220S
Model
TSP110
TSP210
TSP120
TSP220
TSP110S
TSP210S
TSP120S
TSP220S
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG 3wire, 10 ft (3 m) length.

Mounting Orientation: Any
orientation, for pipe sizes 3/4 to 1-1/2
use 3.0 (7.6 cm) length switch; for 2
to 16 pipe sizes use 4.5 (11.4 cm)
length switch.
Setpoint Drift: 0.5% of setpoint.
Response Time: 1-10 seconds.
Viscosity Range: 1 to 200 centipoise.
Supply Voltage: 12 to 36 VDC.
Consumption: 50 mA (nominal).
Indication: LED for flow status.
185
186_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:19 AM Page 186
Series
P2
Flow Switch
Ideal for Air and Post-Filtered Water Applications, Fixed Set Point, FDA Compliant
1
[25.40] 25/32
[19.84]
4-5/16
[109.54]
FLOW
The compact Series P2 Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design for both air and pure
water applications. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.05 to 1.0 GPM for
water and 25 CFH to 5 CFM for air. The piston design incorporates a hermetically sealed
SPST magnetic reed switch. The P2 is comprised of PPE and PS housing and piston and
316 SS spring and stop pin. All wetted parts are FDA compliant. Economical and superior
design make this an excellent switch for pure water equipment, filter life monitoring, heat
exchangers, and cooling applications.
Model
Media
P2-11
Liquids
GPM (LPM) P2-12
P2-13
P2-14
P2-15
Gases
CFM (LPM) P2-16
P2-17
@ 5 psi
P2-18
Actuation Set Point

.05 (.19)
.25 (.95)
.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
.42 (11.9)
1.0 (28.3)
2.5 (70.8)
5.0 (141.6)
Series
P3
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: PPE & PS (polyphenylene ether and polystyrene);
Piston: PPE & PS and epoxy; Spring and stop pin: 316 SS.
Pressure Limits: 150 psig (10.3 bar) @ 70F (21C); 50 psig (3.4 bar) @ 212F
(100C).
Switch Type: SPST, N.O.
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240
VDC.
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 18 (45.7 cm), PVC lead wires.
Mounting Orientation: Any position. Set points shown are based on vertical, inlet
down position.
Required Filtration: 50 microns or better.
Weight: 2 oz (.06 kg).
Polypropylene Flow Switch

Fixed Set Points from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM, 3/8 NPT or Quick Disconnect Adapters
11/16 HEX
[17.46]
Flow Switches,
Shuttle/Piston
1 [25.4]
FLOW
3/4 ACROSS FLATS

[19.05]
7/16
[11.11]
1 [25.4]
4-15/64
[107.55]
FLOW
11/16 HEX
[17.46]
3/8 NPT
TYP
4 [101.6]
3/4 ACROSS FLATS
[19.05]
Fit almost any piping requirements with the Series P3 Polypropylene Flow Switch.
The basic piston design consists of a hermetically sealed SPST normally open reed switch.
Choose the inlet and outlet port to be 3/8 male NPT or 1/4 male Quick Disconnect.
Select a quick disconnect acetal adapter for straight through flow or with a shut off valve.
The shut off valve will stop line flow when the adapter is removed from the switch. The
flow will resume when the adapter is reconnected. With many snap-on fittings to choose
from, any flow application can integrate the P3 Flow Switch into the existing piping.
Model
P3-31
P3-32
P3-33
P3-34
P3-35
P3-41
P3-42
P3-43
P3-44
P3-45
186
Connection
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
3/8 NPT
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Q Disconnect
Actuation Set Point

GPM (LPM)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing:
Polypropylene; Piston: PPS composite;
Spring: 316SS; O-ring: Fluorocarbon.
to 100C).
Pressure Limits: 125 psig (8.6 bar) @
70F (21C), 50 psig (3.4 bar) @ 212F
(100C).
Accuracy: 20% of set point.
Repeatability: 1%.
Switch Type: SPST, NO.
Electrical Rating: .08A @ 120 VAC.

Electrical Connection: 24 (60.96 cm),
polymeric wire leads, 22 AWG.
or 1/4 quick disconnect.
Set points shown are based on vertical,
inlet down position.
Required Filtration: 100 microns or
better.
Adapters (Price shown per unit, need two per switch)

Model
Connection
P3-801
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 NPT
P3-802
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 BSPT
P3-804
Quick disconnect straight through 3/8 BSPT
P3-807
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 ID tubing
P3-901
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 NPT w/shut-off valve
P3-902
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 BSPT w/shut-off valve
P3-907
Quick disconnect straight through 1/4 ID tubing w/shut-off valve
187_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:19 AM Page 187
Series
P5
PVC Shuttle Flow Switch

Low Cost Flow/No Flow Monitoring, Visual Flow Indication,
Broad Chemical Compatibility
1-5/8
[41.28]
3-13-16
[96.84]
OR 4-3/8
[111.13]
W/ 1/2 NPT
PORT ADAPTER
A
2 PLACES
B
DIM A DIM B
1/2 NPT (2-5/16)
[58.74]
3/4 IPS (2-1/16)
[52.39]
1 IPS
(1-15/16)
[49.21]
1-1/2 [38.1]
OR 2-1/16 [52.39]
W/ 1/2 NPT PORT ADAPTER
Model
P5-1
P5-2
P5-3
Actuation Set Point

GPM (LPM)
.5 (1.89)
.5 (1.89)
2.0 (7.57)
Process Connection
1/2NPT port adapter
3/4 IPS
1IPS
High Pressure Brass Flow Switch
Flow Switches,
Shuttle/Piston
Series
P8
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing, shuttle and bonnet: PVC; O-ring:Buna-N; Epoxy.
TemperatureLimits: 120F (49C).
Pressure Limit: 120 psig (8.2 bar)@ 70F (21C) to 100F (38C), 50 psig (3.45
bar) @ 101F (38.3C) to 120F (49C).
Repeatability: 1%.
VDC.
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG, 24 (61 cm), PVC lead wire.
Process Connection: 1/2 female NPT, 3/4IPS or 1 IPS.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, inlet facing down.
Up to 1500 psi, Fixed Setpoint, Up to 2.0 GPM, Rugged Brass Body
3/8 NPT TYP

1-9/64
[28.97]
3/4 HEX
[19.05]
3-29/64
[87.71]
High inline pressures are no problem for the Series P8 brass flow switch. The switch
integrates a one-piece magnetic PPS composite piston to handle pressure up to 1500 psi.
The P8 switches use 100 micron filtration and are less susceptible to clogging than other
high inline pressure switches. Setpoints range from 0.25 to 2.0 GPM for liquid flow. Use
the Series P8 in industrial cleaning equipment or high pressure lubrication systems.
Model
P8-11
P8-12
P8-13
P8-14
P8-15
Actuation Set Point

GPM (LPM)
0.25 (.95)
0.50 (1.89)
1.0 (3.79)
1.5 (5.68)
2.0 (7.57)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Brass; Piston: PPScomposite, epoxy; Spring: 316
SS; O-ring: Fluorocarbon.
VDC.
Electrical Connection: No. 22 AWG, 24 (61 cm), polymeric leads.
down position.
FLOW
The transparent Series P5 Shuttle Flow Switch features corrosion resistant, durable
PVC housing for visual confirmation in flow/no flow applications. The switches have preset
actuation points from 0.5 to 2.0 GPM for actuation on increasing flow. Switching is SPST
NO no flow. Choose from 1/2 NPT or 3/4 IPS (for 0.5 GPM) or 1 IPS (for 2.0 GPM) inlet
and outlet ports. The shuttle design has only one moving part for long life and minimum
maintenance. Remove the one-piece bonnet and shuttle assembly to quickly clean the unit
without disturbing the housing or piping. Rugged construction and excellent chemical
compatibility simplify flow / no flow detection.
187
188_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:20 AM Page 188
Series
P1
Brass Flow Switch

Fixed Setpoints, Flow Rates from 0.10 to 1.5 GPM
1/2
[12.7]
1/2 NPT
1
[25.4]
IN
1/2
[12.7]
1/4 NPT
2-3/8 [60.33]
1/4 NPT
1-3/4
[44.45]
[1/4 TYP]
[6.35 TYP]
2X [9/32]
[7.14]
OUT
1
[25.4]
1-1/4
27/32 [31.75]
[21.43]
4-1/8 [104.78]
FLOW
The Series P1 Brass Flow Switch utilizes a piston-type design for accurate detection
of excessive or insufficient flow rates. The piston magnetically actuates a hermetically
sealed SPDT reed switch. The switches have preset actuation points from 0.10 to 1.5 GPM
for liquid flow. The Series P1 is ideal for protecting against loss of fluid flow in hydraulic
systems or assuring proper coolant flow in semiconductor processing.
Actuation Set Point*
GPM (LPM)
Model
0.10 (.38)
P1-011
0.25 (.95)
P1-012
0.50 (1.89)
P1-013
0.75 (2.84)
P1-014
1.00 (3.79)
P1-015
1.50 (5.68)
P1-016
*Calibrated for water at standard conditions.
Flow Switches,
Shuttle/Piston
Series
AFS
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Brass; Piston: Polysulfone; Spring: 316SS; O-Ring:
Fluoroelastomer; Other: Epoxy.
Repeatability: 1%.
Switch Type: SPDT.
VDC.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG, 24 (60.96 cm), polymeric lead wires.
down position.
Weight: 0.66 Ib (301 g).
Adjustable Flow Switch

For Oils, Water and Gases, Infinite Adjustments
2
[50.80]
OUT
3/4
[19.05]
1-1/4
[31.75]
The Series AFS Adjustable Flow Switch is externally adjustable and is ideal for
protecting machine tools from coolant flow failure, protecting bearings from loss of
lubricant or assuring proper air flow. The Series AFS offers an infinite number of flow
settings from 0.5 to 20 GPM at pressures up to 1000 psig, with low pressure drop and
precise repeatability. The AFS is housed in either brass or SS and can be used with water,
compatible liquids, oils, and gases.
Model
AFS-131
AFS-141
AFS-151
AFS-231
AFS-251
AFS-132
AFS-142
AFS-152
AFS-232
AFS-252
188
Media
Oil
Water
Liquids
Gases
Gases
Oil
Water
Liquids
Gases
Gases
Electrical
Connection
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
Wire leads
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
1/2 NPT conduit
Piston
Brass
Polysulfone
316 SS
Brass
316 SS
Brass
Polysulfone
316 SS
Brass
316 SS
Housing
Brass
Brass
316 SS
Brass
316 SS
Brass
Brass
316 SS
Brass
316 SS
1/2 NPT
BOTH ENDS
MAX.
IN
MIN.
4-1/8 [104.78]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing and Piston: See model chart; Spring: 316SS; O-ring:
Fluoroelastomer; Other: Epoxy.
Temperature Limits: -20 to 300F (-29 to 149C), -20 to 225F (-29 to 107.2C)
with polysulfone piston.
Pressure Limit: 1000 psi (68 bar).
Accuracy: 10% of setpoint.
Repeatability: 1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 24 (61 cm), polymeric lead wires, optional 1/2
male NPT conduit connection.
Process Connection: 1/2 female NPT ports.
Setpoint Adjustment: Liquids: 0.5 to 20 GPM (1.9 to 75.7 LPM); Gases: 1.0 to 75
SCFM (28 to 2124 LPM) at 5 psig.
189_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:34 PM Page 189
Series
GVS
Globe Valve Switch

Adjustable Set Point, Rugged Bronze Construction, Straight Through Flow
1/2 NPT
3
[7.62]
1-25/32 HEX
[45]
1 NPT
3-1/4
[83]
The Series GVS offers accurate flow detection with 1% repeatability and external
adjustability over a broad range of flow settings. The durable construction delivers longlife reliability in either water or oil. Generous flow paths keep pressure drop low. The
GVS are ideal for detection of improper flow rates in high volume lubrication, cooling or
process systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Housing: Bronze;
Shuttle: TFE; Bonnet: Bronze; Spring:
316SS.; Other: Fluoroelastomer,
ceramic.
to 93C).
Pressure Limits: 400 psig (27 bar) @
100F (38C).
Accuracy: 10%.
Repeatability: 1% maximum deviation.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Actuation Set Point

Range GPM (LPM)
1.0 - 6.0 (3.8 - 22.7)
5.0 - 15.0(18.9 - 56.8)
2.0 - 8.0 (7.6 - 30.3)
Model
GVS-111
GVS-112
GVS-113
In-Line Flow Alarms

Latching Alarm Capabilities, For Air, Water or Caustic Fluids, Unrestricted Mounting
FLOW
Series
HFO
Electrical Rating: .17A @ 120 VAC,

.08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A
@ 240 VDC.
(61 cm), polymeric lead wires.
Process Connections: 1 female NPT.
Set points shown are based on
horizontal, lead wires up positional.
Required Filtration: 150 microns or
better.
7-1/8
[180.98]
The Series HFO Flow Alarm provides continuous monitoring and control of flow rate
levels. The flow alarm can be configured to open or close a contact for an increasing or
decreasing set point. The unit includes two 10A SPDT limit switches with field adjustable
alarm settings. Integral direct reading scale provides local indication of flow rate. The flow
alarm is designed to mount in any orientation and does not require inlet or outlet straight
plumbing. The Series HFO is constructed with a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X (IP66)
enclosure for installations outdoors or in harsh environments.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS;
Seals: Buna-N or fluoroelastomer;
Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico;
Other internal parts: 304 SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring flow in chemical processing, waste water processing, lubrication systems,
process control, solar systems, drain lines and pump testing.
Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases: 600 psig (41 bar)
Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
Model
ConnectionSize
Range, Air SCFM
HFO-21112 1/4 female NPT
1.5-12
4-23
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam): 3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
Range, Water GPM (LPM)
Model
ConnectionSize
0.5-5.0 (1-19)
1-15 (3.8-55)
2-20 (7.5-75)
4-40 (15-151)
HFO-22440 1 female NPT
5-50 (19-189)
HFO-22550 1-1/2 female NPT
304 SS body for high-pressure fluids: 6000 psig (413 bar)

Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
ConnectionSize
Model
0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
1-10 (3.8-38)
1/2
female
NPT
HFO-23210
Pressure Differential VS. Flow Rate
1/4 Female NPT
1.5
1.0
HFO-21112
0.5
0
0
20 25
5
15
10
Flow Rate: SCFM @ 100 PSIG
3/4, 1 & 1-1/2 Female NPT
1/2 Female NPT
HFO-22320
10
HFO-23210
8
6
4
HFO-22205
2
HFO-23202
0
0
8
6
4
Flow Rate: GPM
10
Pressure Differential PSID
HFO-21123
2.0
Accuracy: Measuring 4% FS over

entire range; 2.5% over center third of
the measuring range.
Switch Type: SPDT, 10A @ 250 VAC;
0.5A @ 125 VDC, (resistive).
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2 female
NPT models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1
female NPT models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 11/2 female NPT models: 12 lb (5.4 kg).
HFO-22315
12
HF0-22440
10
8
6
4
HFO-22550
2
0
0
10
20 30 40 50
Flow Rate: GPM
189
Flow Transmitters,
In-Line
4-1/2
[114.3]
2-15/16
[74.61]
190_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:21 AM Page 190
Series
CAM
Compressed Air Meter

Steady-State and Cumulative Totals PNP/4-20 mA Output
4-3/8
[111.13]
3-15/16
[100.01]
3-1/32 C
[76.99]
D
Dimensions
M12 x 1 Model A
CAM-10 10-53/64
[275.3]
C
CAM-20 8-9/32
[210.34]
CAM-30 14-49/64
[375.05]
C
B
18-45/64 2 NPT
[475.06]
11-13/16 1/2 NPT
[300.04]
18-45/64 1 NPT
[475.06]
D
2-1/64
[51.2]
41/64
[16.27]
1-5/64
[27.38]
A
B
The Series CAM Compressed Air Meter operates by the calorimetric measuring
principle to detect the standard volume flow of operating compressed air. It is designed
specifically to evaluate the current flow rate and the current consumed quantity in
compressed air systems. With an easily programmable digital display, this unit offers a
quick, accurate readout. The Series CAM is constructed of high-grade materials and is
virtually maintenance free.
Model CAM-10, 2 NPT, 1.4 - 412.0 SCFM
Model CAM-20, 1/2 NPT, 0.2 - 44.1 SCFM
Model CAM-30, 1 NPT, 1.0 - 132.4 SCFM
FLOW
ACCESSORY
A-283, 4-Wire Connector
Max. Oil Content
Oil
Content
Class mg/m3
0.01
1
0.1
2
1
3
5
4
25
5
Max. Residual Dust

Dust
Particle
Concentration Size
mg/m3
mg/m
0.1
0.1
1
1
5
5
8
15
10
40
Series
HFT
Max. Residual Water

Residual Pressure
Water
Dew Point
g/m3
C
0.003
-70
0.117
-40
0.880
-20
5.953
+3
7.732
+7
9.356
+10
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compressed air; Air quality (see chart).
Wetted Materials: SS (304S15), ceramics, glass passivated, PEEK, polyester,
fluoroelastomer, anodized aluminum.
Accuracy: Class 1.4.1: 3% of measured value +0.3% of full-scale value; Class
3.4.4: 6% of measured value + .6% of full-scale value.
Response Time: < 0.1 s.
Temperature Limit: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Humidity Limit: 90% RH.
Output Signal: Output 1: PNP open collector: VOUT(max)=30 VDC /
ISINK(max)=250mA; Output 2: 4-20 mA (scaleable) or PNP open collector.
Electrical Connections: 4 pin M12 (micro) cable connection.
Process Connections: 1/2, 1 and 2 NPT.
Display: 4-digit alpha numeric red LED.
Enclosure Rating: IP66 (NEMA 4X).
Mounting Orientation: Vertical, horizontal, side with pipe length facing left.
Weight: CAM-10: 12.5 lb; CAM-20: 2.35 lb; CAM-30: 4.16 lb.
In-Line Flow Transmitters
Flow Transmitters,
In-Line
Local Flow Indication, Unrestricted Mounting, 4-20 mA, 0-5 V, and 1-5 V Output
7-1/8
[180.98]
4-1/2
[114.3]
The Series HFT combines a direct reading HF flowmeter with electronics to provide a
proportional analog output of 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5, and 1 to 5 VDC. Use the output to drive
data acquisition devices, meters, or analog input cards. The entire assembly is housed in
a rugged cast aluminum NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure. The unit can be installed in outdoor
applications or harsh environments where liquid tight seals are required. The flow
transmitter does not require input or output straight plumbing, and can be mounted in any
orientation.
Aluminum body for air or other non-corrosive gases: 600 psig (41 bar)
Wetted Parts: Aluminum, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
Model
ConnectionSize
Range, Air SCFM
HFT-1112 1/4 female NPT
1.5-12
4-23
Brass body for water based fluids (non-steam): 3500 psig (240 bar)
Wetted Parts: Brass, PTFE coated Alnico, 304 SS and Buna-N
Model
ConnectionSize
0.5-5.0 (1-19)
1-15 (3.8-55)
2-20 (7.5-75)
4-40 (15-151)
HFT-2440 1 female NPT
5-50 (19-189)
HFT-2550 1-1/2 female NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Aluminum, brass or 304 SS; Seals: Buna-N or
Fluoroelastomer; Magnet: PTFE coated Alnico; Other internal parts: 304 SS.
Viscosity: 500 SSU.
Accuracy: 4% FS over entire range; 2.5% over center third of the measuring
range.
Response Time: < 100 msec.
Output Signal:4 to 20 mA; 0 to 5 V; 1 to 5 V.
Shipping Weight: 1/4 to 1/2 female NPT models: 3 lb (1.4 kg); 3/4 to 1 female
NPT models: 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); 1-1/2 female NPT models: 12 lb (5.4 kg).
304 SS body for high-pressure fluids: 6000 psig (413 bar)
Wetted Parts: 304 SS, Fluoroelastomer and PTFE
Model
ConnectionSize
0.2-2.0 (0.75-7.5)
1-10 (3.8-38)
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-FT1.
190
191_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:36 AM Page 191
Series
TFP-GV
Gas Turbine Flow Meter

PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output
15/16
[23.74]
2-21/64
[59.31] 33/64
1-35/64
A
[13.21] 2X 136 THRU [39.37]
TRIMPOT
1/4
ADJUSTMENT 2-1/32
[6.35]
[51.69]
OPENING
19/64
[7.62]
2x.136 THRU
ACETAL
FITTINGS
29/32
[22.99]
ACETAL
FITTINGS
3/5/16
[84.07]
4-61/64
[125.73]
1-41/64
[41.53]
1/2
[12.70]
29/32
[22.86]
High Flow Configuration
Series TFP-GV Gas Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
commercial, and laboratory flow applications. These meters utilize a turbine wheel and
electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a linear 0 to 5 VDC output signal for
recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series FIV Flow Totalizer for a remote
flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for
operation.
Connection
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
1/2 OD
1/2 OD
Range
.042 to .21 SCFH (.02 to .1 LPM)
.085 to .42 SCFH (.04 to .2 LPM)
.21 to 1.1 SCFH (.1 to .5 LPM)
.42 to 2.1 SCFH (.2 to 1 LPM)
.85 to 4.2 SCFH (.4 to 2 LPM)
2.1 to 11 SCFH (1 to 5 LPM)
4.2 to 21 SCFH (2 to 10 LPM)
8.5 to 42 SCFH (4 to 20 LPM)
21 to 110 SCFH (10 to 50 LPM)
42 to 210 SCFH (20 to 100 LPM)
85 to 420 SCFH (40 to 200 LPM)
A (in)
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-13/16
3-13/16
3-13/16
7-7/64
7-7/64
7-1/2
7-1/2
1-1/4 2-5/32
[31.75] [54.61]
Process Connection: Compression

fitting, see model table.
Power Requirements: 11.5 to 15
VDC.
Power Consumption: 35 mA @ 12
VDC.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum
2.5 k load.
Electrical Connections: Four-pin
power and signal connector. A power
adapter or mating cable required for
operation. See accessories table.
Weight: 0.16 lb (75 g).
FLOW
Model
TFP-GV03
TFP-GV04
TFP-GV05
TFP-GV06
TFP-GV07
TFP-GV08
TFP-GV09
TFP-GV10*
TFP-GV11*
TFP-GV12*
TFP-GV13*
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry gases compatible
Wetted Materials: PPS, acetal,
sapphire, glass, epoxy, and
fluoroelastomer.
Linearity: 3% of full-scale.
(5 to 55C); Storage: 32 to 158F (0 to
70C); Sensitivity: 0.2% of full-scale
per C.
3-3/64
[77.47]
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Description
115 VAC Power Adapter and Signal Cable
36 Mating Cable with Spliced Leads
*These modes come in high flow configuration
Gas Turbine Flow Meter

PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication
TRIMPOT ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
19/64
[7.62]
3-1/16
2-1/32 [77.72]
[51.69]
2x.136 THRU
Series TFP-GI Gas Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
recording and data logging. A 3-1/2 digit LCD informs the user of the actual flow rate. A
power adapter or mating cable assembly is required for operation.
Model
TFP-GI03
TFP-GI04
TFP-GI05
TFP-GI06
TFP-GI07
TFP-GI08
Range
.042 to .21 SCFH (.02 to .1 LPM)
.085 to .42 SCFH (.04 to .2 LPM)
.21 to 1.1 SCFH (.1 to .5 LPM)
.42 to 2.1 SCFH (.2 to 1 LPM)
.85 to 4.2 SCFH (.4 to 2 LPM)
2.1 to 11 SCFH (1 to 5 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
ACCESSORIES
Model
Description
A-454
A-455
A-456
CABLE
CONNECTION
ACETAL
FITTINGS
33/64
[13.21]
A (in)
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-27/64
3-13/16
3-13/16
BLACK
TRIM LCD
DISPLAY
1/4
[6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry gases compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: PPS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: 41 to 131F (5 to 55C); Storage: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C);
Sensitivity: 0.2% of full-scale per C.
Process Connection: Compression fitting, see model table.
Power Consumption: 35 mA @ 12 VDC.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load.
Electrical Connections: Four-pin power and signal connector. A power adapter or
mating cable required for operation. See accessories table.
Display: LCD, 0.39 (10 mm) digits (only in LPM).
Weight: 0.23 lb (101 g).
191
Flow Transmitters,
Turbine
Series
TFP-GI
192_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:23 AM Page 192
Series
TFM-LP
Liquid Turbine Flow Meter

316SS Body, 0 to 5 VDC and Pulse Outputs
29/64
[11.43]
TRIMPOT
51/64
ADJUSTMENT OPENING [20.32]
1-15/32
[37.21]
2X 17/32 2-1/32
[13.34] [51.69]
CABLE
CONNECTION
FLOW
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH(.013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH(.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH(.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH(0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH(.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH(.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
A (in)
3-27/64
3-53/64
3-53/64
3-53/64
3-53/64
4-1/8
4-1/8
ACCESSORIES
Description
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
Series
TFM-LI
STAINLESS
STEEL
FITTINGS
1-1/32
[26.04]
2X1/8 THRU
.3/16 1/8
Series TFM-LP Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of
industrial, commercial, and laboratory flow applications. These meters utilize a turbine
wheel and electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a linear 0 to 5 VDC output
signal for recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series TM2 Flow Totalizer
for a remote flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required
for operation.
Model
TFM-LP03
TFM-LP04
TFM-LP05
TFM-LP06
TFM-LP07
TFM-LP08
TFM-LP09
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load; Pulse: 7.5 VDC peak buffered
square wave.
Weight: 0.86 lb (390 g).
Flow Transmitters,
Turbine
316SS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication

TRIMPOT ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
1-47/64
[44.09]
BLACK STAINLESS
TRIM LCD STEEL
DISPLAY FITTINGS
2X 1 [25.40]
A
2X.125 THRU
.188 THRU
19/32
[15.17]
2-1/32
[51.69]
Series TFM-LI Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
Model
TFM-LI03
TFM-LI04
TFM-LI05
TFM-LI06
TFM-LI07
TFM-LI08
TFM-LI09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH(.013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH(.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH(.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH(.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH(.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH(1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
A (in)
3-9/16
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-27/32
3-27/32
ACCESSORIES
Description
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
192
29/64
[11.43]
19/64
[7.59]
2-63/64
[75.69]
2X 17/32
[13.46]
2-21/64
[59.28]
61/64
[24.10]
1-19/32
[40.64]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, acetal, sapphire, glass, epoxy, and fluoroelastomer.
Weight: 0.80 lb (380 g).
193_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:39 AM Page 193
Series
TFP-LP

PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC and Pulse Outputs
2-21/64
[59.31]
15/16
[23.74]
CABLE CONNECTION
19/64
[7.62]
Series TFP-LP Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of
industrial, commercial, and laboratory flow applications. These meters utilize a turbine
wheel and electro-optical detection to convert flow rates into a linear 0 to 5 VDC output
signal for recording and data logging. Couple this unit with a Series TM2 Flow Totalizer
for a remote flow monitoring display. A power adapter or mating cable assembly is required
for operation.
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH (.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
A (in)
3-9/16
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-41/64
3-27/32
3-27/32
ACCESSORIES
Description
Model
A-454
A-455
A-456
2X9/64 THRU
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Signal: 0 to 5 VDC: Minimum 2.5 k load; Pulse: 7.5 VDC peak buffered
square wave.
Weight: 0.19 lb (85 g).

PPS Body, 0 to 5 VDC Output, LCD Indication
BLACK TRIM
LCD DISPLAY
CABLE
CONNECTION
ACETAL
FITTINGS
33/64
[13.21]
19/64
[7.62]
3-1/16
2-1/32 [77.72]
[51.69]
2X.136 THRU
Series TFP-LI Liquid Turbine Flow Meters are suitable for a wide variety of industrial,
Model
TFP-LI03
TFP-LI04
TFP-LI05
TFP-LI06
TFP-LI07
TFP-LI08
TFP-LI09
Range
.21 to 1.6 GPH (.013 to .1 LPM)
.32 to 3.2 GPH (.02 to .2 LPM)
.79 to 7.9 GPH (.05 to .5 LPM)
1.6 to 16 GPH (0.1 to 1 LPM)
3.2 to 32 GPH (.2 to 2 LPM)
7.9 to 79 GPH(.5 to 5 LPM)
16 to 160 GPH (1 to 10 LPM)
Connection
1/8 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
1/4 OD
3/8 OD
3/8 OD
ACCESSORIES
Model
Description
A-454
A-455
A-456
A (in)
3-27/64
3-13/16
3-13/16
3-13/16
3-13/16
4-1/8
4-1/8
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING
1/4
[6.35]
A
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.27 lb (121 g).
193
Flow Transmitters,
Turbine
Series
TFP-LI
ACETAL
FITTINGS
FLOW
Model
TFP-LP03
TFP-LP04
TFP-LP05
TFP-LP06
TFP-LP07
TFP-LP08
TFP-LP09
1-35/64
[39.37]
TRIMPOT
ADJUSTMENT
OPENING 2-1/32
[51.69]
33/64
[13.21]
1/4
[6.35]
194_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:40 AM Page 194
Series
IPFS
Paddlewheel Flow Sensor

Hot-Tap Option, Field Adjustable Insertion, Wide Flow Range
4
[101.52]
4
[101.42]
2-3/4
[69.70]
PHONE
219-878-8000
FAX
210-872-9057
WEB
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
MADE IN XXXXXX
2-7/8
[73.06]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Flow Transmitters, Paddlewheel,

FLOW
The Series IPFS Insertion Paddlewheel Flow Sensor is available for pipe sizes
ranging from 3 to 40 and available in brass, PVC or stainless steel. The Series IPFS has
an available hot tap model with a bronze or stainless steel valve assembly. The bearings are
made from ruby jewel to reduce the coefficient of friction and maintain high accuracy. The
Series IPFS can be purchased with a variety of saddle fittings, Series SDF, that comes in
iron or brass. The Series IPFS is good for large pipe and clean water applications. It is
ideal for chemical proportioning applications or any applications with rapidly changing
fluid conductivity.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The IPFS uses the rotation of an impeller to measure flow. Liquid flow pushes the
rotor and the rotation is detected by a Hall-effect sensor. The output is a current
sinking pulse signal which can be connected to the Series RTI to display flow rate
and total or the Series BAT for a 4 to 20 mA signal conversion.
APPLICATIONS
Clean liquids
Large pipes
Aquariums, water parks
Water & wastewater monitoring
ACCESSORIES
Series BAT, Blind Analog Transmitter, converts pulse output to 4 to 20 mA analog
output. Unit is loop powered, fits on the enclosure of the meter, and is fields
spannable.
Series RTI, Rate Total Indicator, converts pulse output to 4 to 20 mA analog output
with local flow rate and totalization display. Unit is loop powered, can fit on the
enclosure of the meter, and provides a high/low flow alarm.
Series PWD, Pulse Divider, for use with pacing electronic metering pumps. Unit
divides the input frequency to any number from 1 to 9999 with the use of rotary
switches to suit a number of metering pump inputs.
Example IPFS 0SB BAF IPFS-0SS-BAF
Insertion Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
Series
IPFS
Hot-Tap
Size
Material
Size/
No Hot-Tap
3 to 12
Brass
Material
0SB
No Hot-Tap
3 to 12
PVC
0SP
No Hot-Tap
3 to 12
SS
0SS
No Hot-Tap
12 to 40
Brass
0LB
No Hot-Tap
12 to 40
PVC
0LP
No Hot-Tap
12 to 40
SS
0LS
Hot-Tap
3 to 12
Brass
1SB
Hot-Tap
3 to 12
PVC
1SP
Hot-Tap
3 to 12
SS*
1SS
Hot-Tap
12 to 40
Brass
1LB
Hot-Tap
12 to 40
PVC
1LP
Hot-Tap
12 to 40
SS*
1LS
Options
CRS Ceramic Shaft
BAF 2 Brass Adapter Fitting (IPFS-0XX only)
SAF 2 SS Adapter Fitting (IPFS-0XX only)
SVA 316 SS Valve Assembly (IPFS-1XX only)
NVA No Valve Assembly (deduct price) (IPFS-1XX only)
BPT 1-1/2 Brass BPT Adapter (2 piece) (IPFS-0XX only)
SPT 1-1/2 SS Adapter (2 piece) (IPFS-0XX only)
EXT 12 Extension (IPFS-XL only)
*SS is stem and fitting. For SS valve order SVAoption.
194
Hot-Tap Option
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible clean liquids.
Range: 0.3 to 30 ft/s (0.01 to 10 m/s).
Wetted Materials:
Shaft Body/Fitting: Brass, PVC, or 316 SS;
Rotor: PVDF;
Shaft: Nickel-bound tungsten carbide;
Bearings: Ruby jewel.
Valve
Assembly: IPFS-1XX:Bronze (SS optional) with bronze ball valve;
O-ring: EPDM.
Accuracy: +1.5% FS.
Temperature Limits: Brass/SS: 200F (93C); PVC: 130F (55C).
Pressure Limits: Brass/SS: 200 psi (13.8 bar); PVC: 150 psi (10 bar).
Process Connection: IPFS-0XX: 1-1/2 male NPT; IPFS-1XX: 2 male NPT.
Output: Current sinking, square wave pulse.
Power Requirements: 5 to 24 VDC @1.5 mA (3.5 to 16 VDC -LOP option).
Electrical Connection: #22 AWG, 3 conductor, 18 (5.5 m) cable length standard
(max. 2000).
Enclosure Material: Housing: Die-cast powder-coated aluminum.
Weight: IPFS-1XX: 4 lb (1814 g); IPFS-2XX: 6 lb (2721 g); IPFS-3XX: 13 lb
(5897 g); IPFS-4XX: 15 lb (6804 g).
Hot-Tap Option
(Shown installed on pipe)
195_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:05 PM Page 195
Series
PFT

Non-Magnetic Sensing, Insertion Style for 1-1/2 to 40 Pipe, Pulse or 4 to 20 mA
1/2 NPT
2-1/2
[63.50]
NEW!
4 to 20 mA Output Models
7-29/32
[200.94]
3-13/16
[96.84]
2-25/64
[60.72]
1-1/2 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
2 HEX
[50.80]
APPLICATIONS
Irrigation, ground water remediation, cooling systems, pump protection, leak
detection, filtration systems
Body Material Output

Model
4 to 20 mA
PFT-IAN-B111-S Brass
PFT-IAN-S111-S 316 SS
4 to 20 mA
PFT-IDN-B111-S Brass
Pulse
PFT-IDN-S111-S 316 SS
Pulse
Description
1-1/2 NPT connection, FKM seals,
tungsten-carbide shaft, PTFE bearing, 20 of cable
Consult factory for longer cable lengths, burial rated cable, 2 NPT connection, or other wetted materials.
Compatible Installation Fittings: See page 196 (Series SDF)
195

FEATURES
Bearings and shaft offer excellent wear protection even in applications with
particulate for long life
Weatherproof and submersible rated for irrigation applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water-based fluids.
Range: 1.2 to 25 ft/s (0.37 to 7.62 m/s).
Wetted Materials: Body and fitting:Brass or 316 SS; fitting O-ring:FKMstandard,
silicone or Buna-N optional; impeller:316 SS; shaft:Tungsten carbide standard or
316 SS optional; bearing:PTFE standard, carbon graphite optional.
Linearity: 1.0% of full range.
Repeatability: 0.5% of full range.
Pressure Limits: 400 psig (27.6 bar) @ 100F (37.8C), 325 psig (22.4 bar)@
212F (100C).
Process Connection: 1-1/2 NPT male standard, 2 NPT male optional.
Output:
Pulse:NPN open collector with square wave output, rated 60 V @ 50 mA max;
Frequency:3.2 to 200 Hz. Pulse Width:2.5 msec 25%;
4 to 20 mA:4 mA is 0 ft/s, 20 mA is 25 ft/s.
Power Consumption: 40 mA (max.).
Electrical Connection: 22 AWG shielded ULtype PTLC rated 105C, 20 (6.1 m)
long with cable gland. Can be extended up to 2000 (609 m) with similar cable.
Optional UL listed burial rated cable.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 6P (IP67).
Housing Materials: Brass or 316 SS.
Weight: 3 lb.
FLOW
The Series PFT is a paddlewheel flow sensor used to monitor liquid flow rates in pipes
from 1-1/2 to 40 with just one size adjustable sensor. Multiple wetted material choices
offer application versatility. The PFT is ideal for monitoring water flow rates in irrigation
systems and building automation cooling systems.
The PFT uses inductive sensing to sense the blades of the impeller as they rotate. Sensor
technology does not use magnets allowing low flow rate monitoring and no concerns with
magnetic material in the flow. Two output choices are available in the PFT, pulse or 4 to
20 mA. The pulse models are a square wave output signal with frequency proportional to
the flow velocity. The 4 to 20 mA models have a linear output of the velocity with 4 mA
equal to 0 ft/s and 20 mA equal to 25 ft/s. There are no external components needed to
have the 4 to 20 mA output unlike other competitor products. Paddlewheel, shaft and
bearings are easily field replaceable.
196_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:24 PM Page 196
Series
SDF
Saddle Fittings
Secures TBS, IPFS, IEFS Flow Sensors to 3 to 24 Pipe
PIPE DIAMETER
[SEE PIPE SIZE IN MODEL CODE]
Iron
SDF-I-XX
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: See model chart.
Temperature Limits: See flow meter dependent.
Pressure Limits: See flow meter dependent.
Pipe Sizes: 3 to 24.
Weight: Consult factory.

FLOW
The Series SDF Saddle Fittings are available for pipe sizes ranging from 3 to 24 and
securely attach Series TBS, IPFS and IEFS flow meters to process application. Offered in
ductile iron, the SDF can be used with almost any piping arrangement and is provided
with o-rings, simplifying installation.
Example SDF I 03 15
Series
SDF
I
Material
03
Pipe Size
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Thread
15
Size
20
196
SDF-I-03-15
Saddle Fittings for TBS, IPFS and IEFS Flow Sensors
Iron
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
For Series IEFS, IPFS, TBS non hot-tap models (1-1/2 male NPT)
For Series IEFS, IPFS, TBS hot-tap models (2 male NPT)
197_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:25 AM Page 197
Series
PDWS

Low Friction Bearings, Long Life
23/32
[18.43]
RETAINING SLOT
[FOR U-CLIP]
3-7/16
[87.45]
O-RING
Scan here
to watch
product video
Uses the rotation of an impeller to measure flow. Liquid flow pushes the rotor and
the rotation is detected by a Hall-effect sensor. The output is a current sinking pulse
signal that can be connected to the Series RTI to display flow rate and total, or to
the Series BAT for a 4 to 20 mA analog signal.
ACCESSORIES
spannable.
with local flow rate and totalization display. Unit is loop powered, can fit on the
Example PDWS 1B CRS

PDWS
Series
1B
Size/
1S
Material
1P
1Y
2B
2S
2P
2Y
CRS
Options
IMM
FOR
HPO
PDWS-1B-CRS
Insertion Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
1-1/2 to 3, Brass
1-1/2 to 3, 316 SS
1-1/2 to 3, PVC
1-1/2 to 3, Polypropylene
4 to 8, Brass
4 to 8, 316 SS
4 to 8, PVC
4 to 8, Polypropylene
Ceramic Shaft
Immersible (*Urethane Potted Electrical Connection)
Fluoroelastomer O-ring
High Pressure Options (Use withSSonly)
Note: Need to purchase with Series PWF fitting for proper installation.
Flaretek is a registered trademark of Entegris, Inc.

Process Connection:See page 198 (Series PWF)
197

Fixed Insertion
APPLICATIONS
Industrial water/wastewater treatment
Cooling water monitoring
Industrial fluid control
Chemical proportioning
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0.3 to 30 ft/s (0.09 to 9.14 m/s).
Wetted Materials:
Sensor: Brass, 316 SS, PVC, or Polypropylene;
Rotor: PVDF;
Shaft: Nickel-bonded tungsten carbide (ceramic optional);
Bearings: Ruby jewel;
O-Ring: EPDM (fluoroelastomer optional).
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Temperature Limits: Brass, 316 SS: 200F (93C); PVC, Polypropylene: 130F
(55C).
Pressure Limits: Brass: 200 psi (14 bar); 316 SS: 250 psi (17 bar); PVC,
Polypropylene: 175 psi (12 bar) @ 75F (24C); High Pressure Option: 400 psi (28
bar) (SS only).
Process Connection: See page reference below.
Output: Current sinking, square wave pulse, opto-isolated.
Power Requirements: 6 to 24 VDC, 2 mA (max. 20 mA).
Electrical Connection: #22 AWG, 3 conductor, 18 (5.5 m) cable (max. 2000
run).
Weight: 2 lb (907 g).
FLOW
The Series PDWS Insertion Paddlewheel Flow Sensor is designed for pipe size
ranges from 1/2 to 8 with available materials of brass, stainless steel, PVC, and
polypropylene. The bearings are made of high-quality ruby jewel to reduce the coefficient
of friction and maintain high accuracy. The Series PDWS has a wide variety of custom tee,
saddle, or welded fittings that come in bronze, PVC, and stainless steel. The Series PDWS
is ideal for chemical proportioning applications or any applications with rapidly changing
fluid conductivity.
1-19/32
[40.64]
198_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:08 PM Page 198
Series
PWF
Fittings and Tees

Saddles, Tees, and Weld/Braze Fittings for Series PDWS
1-5/8
[41.15]
2-29/64
[62.32]
PWF-S-BXX
PWF-B-PXX
PWF-T-SFT-SS
PWF-S-DXX

Fixed Insertion
FLOW
The Series PWF Fittings and Tees are used with the Series PDWS Insertion
Paddlewheel Flow Sensors. The Series PWF allow for sensor insertion in a wide range of
pipe sizes. Multiple end connections are available to allow for easy installation in many
applications. Series PWF is available in bronze, 304 stainless steel, 316 stainless steel, and
PVC, further expanding application prospects.
Model
PWF-T-BFS
PWF-T-BFT
PWF-T-PME
PWF-T-CFT
PWF-T-SFT
-SS
-HP
Model
PWF-S-DXX
PWF-S-PXX
PWF-S-BXX
-LPS
Model
PWF-W-BXX
PWF-W-CXX
PWF-W-SXX
-HP
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: See model chart.
Connections: 1/2 to 8.
Tee Fitting Description

Bronze/Female Sweat (For Copper Tubing)
Bronze/FemaleThread
PVC/MaleStubEnd
Carbon Steel/Female Thread
304 SS/Female Thread
All 316 SS Option
High Pressure Option (SS or CSOnly)
Saddle Fitting Description
Ductile Iron
PVC
Bronze
Installed on 16 Long Pipe Stub Option (PVCOnly)
Weld/Braze Fitting Description
Bronze
Carbon Steel
316 Stainless Steel
High Pressure Option (SS or CSOnly)
Example: PWF-T-CFT-0050-SS
To order an all 316 SS female thread 1/2 tee for Series PDWS-1XX Paddlewheel Flow Meter.
198
199_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:26 AM Page 199
Series
WM2
Multi-Jet Water Meter

Economical, Brass Body, Dry Dial
W
XX-XX
WM2-X-C-XX
Size
Spud NPSM
in (mm)
(BSPP)
5/8 x 1/2 (15) 3/4 (3/4)
5/8 x 3/4
1 (1)
3/4 (20)
1 (1)
1 (25)
1-1/4 (1-1/4)
1-1/4 (32)
1-1/2 (1-1/2)
1-1/2 (40)
2 (2)
2 (50)
2-1/2 (2-1/2)
FEATURES
Magnetic drive water is sealed from entering register
Dry dial wont discolor or fade hermetically sealed from the elements
Integral strainer that protects meters from particulate damage
Pointer-roller indicator
Frost resistant body
Includes two mounting adapters (couplings)
Size
5/8 x 1/2
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
Model
WM2-B-C-08
WM2-B-C-10
WM2-B-C-11
WM2-B-C-12
WM2-B-C-13
WM2-B-C-14
Size
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
Coupling
Size
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
Coupling
Size
1/2 BSPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1-1/4 BSPT
1-1/2 BSPT
2 BSPT
Max Flow Nominal Flow Range

GPM (Gallons Per Minute)
20
1 to 10
20
1 to 20
30
2 to 30
50
3 to 50
100
5 to 100
160
80 to 160
Max Flow
m3/h
3
5
7
12
20
30
Nominal Flow Range Transitional Flow

0.12 to 1.5
0.2 to 2.5
0.25 to 3.5
0.48 to 6
0.8 to 10
1.2 to 15
0.03
0.03
0.07
0.12
0.2
0.12
Weight
lb (kg)
3.75 (1.7)
3.97 (1.8)
4.9 (2.2)
6.4 (2.9)
8.2 (3.7)
13.52 (6.17)
18.74 (8.5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Brass, polyethylene;
Couplings: Brass;
Measuring Chamber: Polyethylene, ABSplastic, ferrite, acetal.
Flow Range: See model chart.
Accuracy: Transitional Flow: 5%; Nominal Flow: 2%.
Pressure Drop: See service manual.
Totalizing Display Maximum: See model chart.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal.
Weight: See dimension chart.
Transitional Flow
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.75
1.5
2
Height H
in (mm)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-5/8 (117.5)
4-5/8 (117.5)
5-9/16 (141.5)
6-31/32 (177)
Display Max
(Gallons)
9,999,999.99
9,999,999.99
99,999,999.9
99,999,999.9
99,999,999.9
99,999,999.9
Watermeters
Model
WM2-A-C-01
WM2-A-C-02
WM2-A-C-03
WM2-A-C-04
WM2-A-C-06
WM2-A-C-07
Width W
in (mm)
3-45/64 (94)
3-45/64 (94)
3-45/64 (94)
3-55/64 (98)
3-55/64 (98)
4-51/64 (122)
5-45/64 (145)
FLOW
The Series WM2 Multi-Jet Water Meter is ideal for commercial and industrial
applications. The multi-jet design allows for simplicity and accuracy with wide flow ranges,
even in low flow applications. The magnetically driven, hermetically sealed register will
not leak or fog and is completely separated from the water. These water meters are
designed for long service life and maintenance-free operation, even under harsh conditions.
Length L
in (mm)
6-1/2 (165)
7-1/2 (190)
7-1/2 (190)
10-1/4 (260)
10-1/4 (260)
11-13/16 (300)
11-13/16 (300)
Display Max
(m3)
99,999.9999
99,999.9999
99,999.9999
99,999.9999
999,999.9999
999,999.9999
199
200_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:26 AM Page 200
Series
WMT2
Multi-Jet Water Meter with Pulsed Output

Economical, Brass Body, Dry Dial
W
XX-XX
WMT2-X-C-XX-X
Watermeters
FLOW
Size
in (mm)
5/8 1/2 (15)
5/8 x 3/4
3/4 (20)
1 (25)
1-1/4 (32)
1-1/2 (40)
2 (50)
The Series WMT2 Multi-Jet Water Meter is ideal for commercial and industrial
applications. The multi-jet design allows simplicity and accuracy with wide flow ranges
even in low flow applications. The meter is designed for long service life and relatively
maintenance-free operation, even under adverse conditions. The magnetically driven,
hermetically sealed register will not leak or fog and is completely separated from the water.
The reed switch is activated by a magnet on the dial, which is directly proportional to the
flow rate. The output is perfect for remote monitoring of flow rate or flow totalization, and
can interface with PLC's, counters, data loggers, and SCADA systems.
FEATURES
Magnetic Drive water is sealed from entering register
Dry dial wont discolor or fade hermetically sealed from the elements
Integral strainer that protects meters from particulate damage
Pointer-roller indicator
Frost resistant body
Pulsed output
Includes two mounting adapters (couplings)
Model
WMT2-A-C-01
WMT2-A-C-02
WMT2-A-C-03
WMT2-A-C-04
WMT2-A-C-01-1
WMT2-A-C-02-1
WMT2-A-C-03-1
WMT2-A-C-04-1
WMT2-A-C-06-10
WMT2-A-C-07-10
WMT2-A-C-04-100
WMT2-A-C-07-100
Coupling
Size
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
1 NPT
2 NPT
Model
WMT2-B-C-08-1
WMT2-B-C-10-1
WMT2-B-C-11-1
WMT2-B-C-12-1
WMT2-B-C-08-10
WMT2-B-C-12-10
WMT2-B-C-14-10
WMT2-B-C-12-100
WMT2-B-C-14-100
Coupling
Size
1/2 BSPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1-1/4 BSPT
1/2 BSPT
1-1/4 BSPT
2 BSPT
1-1/4 BSPT
2 BSPT
200
Size
5/8 x 1/2
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
5/8 x 1/2
5/8 x 3/4
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
1
2
Size
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
15 mm
32 mm
50 mm
32 mm
50 mm
Length L
in (mm)
6-1/2 (165)
7-1/2 (190)
7-1/2 (190)
10-1/4 (260)
10-1/4 (260)
11-13/16 (300)
11-13/16 (300)
Width W
in (mm)
3-45/64 (94)
3-45/64 (94)
3-45/64 (94)
3-55/64 (98)
3-55/64 (98)
4-51/64 (122)
5-45/64 (145)
Pulse Rate
(Gal./Pulse)
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
1
1
10
10
100
100
Nominal Flow Range Transitional Flow Display Max

(m3)
99,999.9999
0.03
0.12 to 1.5
99,999.9999
0.05
0.2 to 2.5
99,999.9999
0.07
0.25 to 3.5
99,999.9999
0.12
0.48 to 6
99,999.9999
0.03
0.12 to 1.5
99,999.9999
0.12
0.48 to 6
999,999.9999
0.3
1.2 to 15
99,999.9999
0.12
0.48 to 6
999,999.9999
0.3
1.2 to 15
Pulse Rate
(L/Pulse)
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
100
100
Height H
in (mm)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-15/64 (107.5)
4-5/8 (117.5)
4-5/8 (117.5)
5-9/16 (141.5)
6-31/32 (177)
Weight
lb (kg)
3.75 (1.7)
3.97 (1.8)
4.9 (2.2)
6.4 (2.9)
8.2 (3.7)
13.52 (6.17)
18.74 (8.5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Brass, polyethylene;
Couplings: Brass;
Measuring Chamber: Polyethylene, ABSplastic, ferrite, acetal.
Flow Range: See model chart.
Accuracy: Transitional Flow: 5%; Nominal Flow: 2%.
Pressure Drop: See service manual.
Totalizing Display Maximum: See model chart.
Output Signal: Pulse output with frequency proportional to flow rate.
Pulse Options: 0.1 gal, 1 gal, 10 gal, 100 gal per pulse (1 L, 10 L, 100 L per
pulse).
Electrical Rating: 0.01 A @ 24 VAC/DC.
Electrical Connections: Color-coded lead wires, 4.5 (1.5 m) long.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal.
Weight: See dimension chart.
Transitional Flow Display Max

(Gallons)
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.75
99,999,999.9
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.25
9,999,999.99
0.75
99,999,999.9
1.5
99,999,999.9
2
99,999,999.9
0.75
99,999,999.9
2
99,999,999.9
Max Flow Nominal Flow Range

GPM (Gallons Per Minute)
20
1 to 10
20
1 to 20
30
2 to 30
50
3 to 50
20
1 to 10
20
1 to 20
30
2 to 30
50
3 to 50
100
5 to 100
160
80 to 160
50
3 to 50
160
80 to 160
Max Flow
m3/h
3
5
7
12
3
12
30
12
30
Spud NPSM
(BSPP)
3/4 (3/4)
1 (1)
1 (1)
1-1/4 (1-1/4)
1-1/2 (1-1/2)
2 (2)
2-1/2 (2-1/2)
201_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:27 AM Page 201
Series
SF
Sight Flow Transmitter

2% FS Accuracy, 4 to 20 mA Output, Pressure up to 500 psig (34 bar)
2
[50.80]
1/2 FEMALE NPT
Series SF Sight Flow Transmitter integrates tangential turbine technology with

hermetically sealed circuitry to provide accurate flow measurement and control in the
harshest environments. The 2-wire loop-powered design transmits a 4 to 20 mA signal
proportional to flow rate. Models can accurately measure flow in both directions and can
be mounted in any orientation. Model SF11 has a clear polycarbonate viewing cover for
visible indication of flow. Units feature LED power indication, adjustable zero and span,
polarity protection and over current limiting.
Model
SF10
SF11
Cover Material
316 SS
Clear Polycarbonate
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-FT1.
Series
SF2
2-29/64
[62.31]
1-9/64
[28.97]
3-45/64
[94.06]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS shaft and case, Iglide bearings, Buna-N seal and
acetal copolymer, (polycarbonate cover on Model SF11).
Flow Range: 0.5 to 15 GPM (2 to 60 LPM).
Accuracy: 2% FS.
Repeatability: 0.5% full scale.
Pressure Limits: 500 psig (34 bar) Model SF10; 200 psig (14 bar) Model SF11.
Response Time: 2 seconds to 90% (step change in flow rate).
Supply Voltage: 12 to 35 VDC.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Electrical Connection: Wire leads:
22 AWG x 9 (2.7 m).
Max. Particle Size: 100m.
Iglide is a registered trademark of Igus GMBH
FLOW
APPLICATIONS
Ideal for measuring flow rates in cooling and lubrication circuits, HVAC systems,
aggressive chemical metering, and batching systems.
2-5/8
[66.68]
Sight Flow Meters

SPDT or Pulse Output, Visual Flow Confirmation, Brass Body
SF2-2
SF2-1
41/64
[16.27]
Series SF2 Sight Flow Meters combine visual confirmation of flow with a relay or pulse
output. The brass, unibody construction, one piece composite rotor, and ceramic shaft
delivers durability with broader chemical, temperature, and pressure capabilities. For
specific flow setpoint switching, select SF2-1 meters with a SPDT relay output. Setpoints
are fully adjustable over the specified flow range. The dynamic operation of the rotor
guards against jamming and false actuation. For flow rate monitoring or metering
applications, select SF2-2 meters with a pulse output proportional to the rate of flow. The
4.5 to 24 VDC pulse output is compatible with most digital logic families.
SPDT Relay Output
Model Range (GPM)
SF2-104 0.5 to 5.0
SF2-101 0.5 to 5.0
SF2-114 4.0 to 20.0
SF2-111 4.0 to 20.0
SF2-124 5.0 to 30.0
SF2-121 5.0 to 30.0
SF2-134 8.0 to 60.0
SF2-131 8.0 to 60.0
Pulsed Output
Model Range (GPM)
SF2-204 0.5 to 5.0
SF2-214 4.0 to 20.0
SF2-224 5.0 to 30.0
SF2-234 8.0 to 60.0
Power
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
Connection
1/4 female NPT
1/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
1 female NPT
Power
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
4.5 to 24 VDC
Connection
1/4 female NPT
1/2 female NPT
3/4 female NPT
1 female NPT
Flow Transmitters,
Paddlewheel, In-Line
A
2-1/2
[63.5]
Side View VACSwitch Models
Side View VDCSwitch and

Transmitter Models
Dimensions in [mm]
Model
SF2-104
SF2-101
SF2-114
SF2-111
SF2-124
SF2-121
SF2-134
SF2-131
SF2-204
SF2-214
SF2-224
SF2-234
B
C
4-1/2 [114.3]
3-1/64 [76.6]
7/8 [22.23]
4-1/2 [114.3]
4-49/64 [121.05]
3-61/64 [100.41]
1-1/16 [26.99]
4-49/64 [121.05]
3-1/64 [76.6]
3-61/64 [100.41]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with
wetted parts.
Wetted Materials: Brass body,
ceramic pin, PPS rotor, Polysulfone
lens and fluoroelastomer O-ring.
Accuracy: Relay output: 5%; Pulsed
output: 7% for ranges up to 5.0 GPM,
15% for ranges up to 60.0 GPM.
to 100C).
Pressure Limit: 200 psig (13.8 bar) @
70F.
Power Requirements: See table.
D
2-21/64 [59.13]
2-21/64 [59.13]
2-61/64 [75]
2-61/64 [75]
13/16 [20.64] 2-21/64 [59.13]

1-1/16 [26.99] 2-61/64 [75]
Output: SPDT: 1 Amp, 24 VDC
resistive; 0.3 Amp, 110 VAC or 4.5
VDC to 24 VDC pulse depending on
model.
Electrical Connections: Relay output
models: 20AWG PVC-jacketed, 24
cable; Pulsed output models: 22AWG
PVC-jacketed, 24 cable.
Process Connections: See table.
Setpoint Differential: 15% max for
relay output models.
Maximum Viscosity: 200 SSU.
201
202_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:28 AM Page 202
Series
SFI-800
Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter

Low Cost, Optional Output for Flow Rate and Totalization UV Stabilized
Polycarbonate Model
1-15/32
17/32 [37.30]
[13.50]
SFI-801
SFI-800
2-15/16
[74.61]
[4] 1/4 DIA [6.35]

HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5]
BOLT CIRCLE
REMOVAL
1-3/32 CLEARANCE
[27.78] 2-1/4 [57.15]
2-1/32
[51.59]
PANEL MOUNT
[4] 13/64 DIA [5.16]
CUTOUT
HOLE ON 2-1/2 DIA [63.5]
BOLT CIRCLE
2-1/2
[63.50]
2-13/16
[71.44]
SFI with
A-711 Option
1/2 OR
3/4 NPT
2 [50.80]
2-5/16
[58.74]
SFI Model Only
Flow Transmitters,
FLOW
SFI with A-711 Option
The Series SFI-800 Sight Flow Indicator is a low cost, durable rotor style flow
indicator with optional Hall effect magnetic output packages for remote flow monitoring.
Both SFI-800 and 801 models are constructed of clear plastic enabling 360 viewing of the
spinning rotor for easy flow indication. SFI-800 models are constructed of polysulfone with
excellent chemical compatibility, high pressure and temperature ratings, and all wetted
materials are FDA/NSF ratable for potable water applications. SFI-801 models are
constructed of UV stabilized polycarbonate making them ideal for outdoor applications
(materials do not meet FDA/NSF). The SFI-801 models also feature an easy view bright
red impeller.
Body and Sensors Attached:
To order A-711 attached to flow indicator body add suffix -A711 to the body part
number.
Example: SFI-800-1/2-A711
number.
number.
Sensor Only
Model
Description
A-711
Pulsed Output
A-712
1 to 10 VDC
A-713
Two Open Collectors
*Sensor only, not attached to the flow indicator body.
BodyOnly
Description
Model
Polysulfone Body
Indicator Only
SFI-800-1/2
Indicator Only
SFI-800-3/4
SFI-800-1/2-LF Indicator Only
Polycarbonate Body
Indicator Only
SFI-801-1/2
Indicator Only
SFI-801-3/4
SFI-801-1/2-LF Indicator Only
202
Range GPM (LPM)
Connection
Female NPT
2-20 (7.6-75.5)
3-35 (11.4-132.5)
0.5-6.5 (1.9-24.6)
1/2
3/4
1/2
2-20 (7.6-75.5)
3-35 (11.4-132.5)
0.5-6.5 (1.9-24.6)
1/2
3/4
1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible fluids.
Wetted Materials
Body: SFI-800: Polysulfone; SFI-801: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Window: SFI-800: Polysulfone; SFI-801: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Rotor: SFI-800: White polysulfone; SFI-801: Red UV stabilized PBT;
Rotor Pin: 316 SS;
Thrust washers: 300 Series SS;
O-ring: SFI-800: Fluoroelastomer (NSF grade); SFI-801: Buna-N.
Temperature Limits: SFI-800: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C); SFI-801: -20 to 130F
(-29 to 55C).
Pressure Limits: SFI-800: 150 psi (10.34 bar); SFI-801: 125 psi (8.62 bar).
Viscosity Max: 200 SSU.
Weight: SFI-800: 3.35 oz (95 g); SFI-800-A711: 5.0 oz (142 g).
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-711 Option Only)
Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC; Green lead: 8 to 28 VDC equal to supply
voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate proportional to flow rate.
Accuracy: 5% of FS.
Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Electrical Connections: Black lead - ground; White lead: 5 VDC out pulse; Green
lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC supply.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (for A-712 option only)
Output Signal: White lead: 1 to 10 VDC.
Accuracy: 5% of FS.
Electrical Termination: Black lead: Ground; Red lead: 15 to 28 VDC input; White
lead: 1 to 10 VDC output.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ( for A-713 option only)
Output Signal: White lead: Normally open switch; Green lead: Normally closed
switch. Both open collector, 100 mA max, 28 VDC max.
Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead: Normally open; Green
lead: Normally closed; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC.
203_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:29 AM Page 203
Series
SFI-100T
Sight Flow Indicator/Transmitter

Output for Flow Rate and Totalization
4 [101.60]
2 [50.80]
3
[76.20]
1-3/8
[34.93]
The SFI-100T is a low cost and durable flow transmitter that combines our popular
100 Series Sight Flow indicator with our A-711T output sensor. The SFI-100T sight flow
indicator is constructed of a robust, solid brass body and a tempered glass window. A bright
red impeller is featured for great visual indication of flow through the window. The front
window can be easily unscrewed to clean out the sight flow indicator. Ideal for outdoor
applications, the flow transmitter is weatherproof and unaffected by UV light.
The A-711T output sensor has a VDC output with pulsing for flow totalization and a
proportional frequency change for flow rate. For added versatility there are two output
choices of 5 VDC or a VDC equal to the input power supplied. The output is compatible
with digital rate meters/totalizers and other electronic systems. Great for use in monitoring
water flow especially in chillers.
Range GPM
(LPM)
2-20
(7.6-75.5)
3-35
(11.4-132.5)
3/4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Output Signal: White lead: 5 VDC. Green lead:8 to 28 VDC equal to supply
voltage. Pulsed output with frequency rate proportional to flow rate.
Accuracy: 5% of FS.
Frequency Output Range: 0 to 100 Hz.
Electrical Connections: Black lead: Ground; White lead: 5 VDC out pulse; Green
lead: 8 to 28 VDC out pulse; Red lead: 8 to 28 VDC supply.
Electronic Totalizing Meter
Flow Transmitters,
Series
TTM
Connection
Female NPT
1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body: Brass; Window: Tempered glass; Rotor: Red UV
stabilized PBT; Rotor pin: 316 SS; Thrust washers: 300 series SS; Gasket: Buna-N.
Viscosity Max: 200 SSU.
Weight: SFI only: 1.5 lb (0.7 kg); with A-711T: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg).
Batch or Cumulative Totals, Easy-to-Read LCD Display, 5% Accuracy

2-1/2 [63.50]
4-1/8 [104.7]
FOR WATER
ONLY
ELECTRONIC
TOTALIZING METER
2-9/64
[54.37]
DISPLAY

MICHIGAN CITY, INDIANA 46360 USA
1 NPT
Measure batch and cumulative totals in liquid transfer systems with the Series TTM
Electronic Totalizing Meter. The meter is designed for any pump, pressure, or gravity feed
system with a 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100 LPM) flow range. View batch and cumulative totals
on the large 4-digit LCD display. Batch totals can be reset to measure flow during a single
use. The cumulative total will automatically reset to zero when a maximum reading of 9999
is obtained. Models designed for use in water applications are constructed of nylon and
rated to 150 psig (10.3 bar). Aluminum models are calibrated for fuels and rated to 300
psig (20.7 bar).
Model
TTM10
TTM11
TTM20
TTM21
Application
Water*
Water*
Fuels
Fuels
Body Material
Nylon
Nylon
Aluminum
Aluminum
Units
Gallons
Liters
Gallons
Liters
*Calibrated for use with water

Calibrated for use with gasoline, diesel fuel and kerosene
FLOW
Description
Model
SFI-100T-1/2-A711T Brass Indicator
with A-711T Sensor
SFI-100T-3/4-A711T Brass Indicator
withA-711T Sensor
A-711T
Output Sensor Package
3/4 NPT
2 PLCS
SPECIFICATIONS
Flow Range: 3 to 30 GPM (10 to 100
LPM).
Wetted Materials: Bearings: Ceramic;
Shaft: Tungsten carbide; Rotor: Nylon
6-6; Rings:316 SS; Body:TTM10, 11:
Nylon 6-6, TTM20, 21: Aluminum;
Other: TTM20, 21: Ceramic magnet.
Accuracy: 5%.
Batch Total Maximum: 9999.
Cumulative Total Maximum: 9999.
to 54C).
Pressure Limits: Nylon models: 150
psig (10 bar); Aluminum models: 300
psig (20 bar).
Pressure Drop: 2 psi (0.14 bar) @ 30

GPM (100 LPM).
Maximum Particulate Size: 350
microns.
Display: 4-digit LCD, 5/8 H.
Auto Shut-off: After 1 minute.
Connections: 1 female NPT.
alkaline batteries, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Battery Life: Approx. 9000 hours.
Weight: Nylon models: 0.4 lb
(190 g); Aluminum models: 0.7 lb
(340 g).
203
204_Layout 1 7/14/14 8:10 AM Page 204
Series
DFMT

Flow and Total Indication, Easy to Read LCD Display, 4 to 20 mA or Pulse Output
2-3/4
[68]
3-7/8
[100]
A
3-7/8
[100]
Connection
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
A
6 152 mm
6 152 mm
6-1/4 158 mm
6-1/4 158 mm
6-5/8 168 mm
7-1/4 184 mm
B
4-3/4 121 mm
5-1/8 130 mm
5-5/8 142 mm
5-1/2 141 mm
6-7/8 175 mm
6-7/8 175 mm
3-5/8
[93]
B
Flow Transmitters,
FLOW
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series DFMT Digital Paddlewheel Flow Transmitter provides instantaneous,
as well as totalizing flow monitoring, making it ideal for commercial and industrial systems.
The large backlit LCD display makes navigating through the menu structure simple. The
Series DFMT uses high accuracy paddlewheel technology, offers a user selectable 4 to 20
mA or pulse output, and has a corrosion resistant PVDF sensor giving it a long operation
life. Users can reset the totalizer at any time and set a security password protecting the
setting from unauthorized changes.
Model
DFMT-10A
DFMT-15A
DFMT-20A
DFMT-25A
DFMT-40A
DFMT-50A
204
Range
GPM (m3/h)
0.44 to 7.93 (0.1 to 1.8)
0.88 to 17.61 (0.2 to 4)
1.32 to 26.42 (0.3 to 6)
2.20 to 52.83 (0.5 to 12)
6.61 to 105.67 (1.5 to 24)
8.81 to 176.11 (2 to 40)
Connection
3/8 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
Weight
lb (kg)
1.06 (0.48)
1.10 (0.5)
1.15 (0.52)
1.23 (0.56)
1.46 (0.66)
1.68 (0.76)
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: See model chart.
Wetted Materials:
Sensor and Impeller: PVDF;
Shaft: Ceramic;
O-Rings: Fluoroelastomer.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Output:
Analog: 4 to 20 mA (750 max. loop resistance);
Pulse: NPNsquare wave output; Frequency: 0 to 2 kHz (adjustable); Pulse width:
0 to 1000 ms (adjustable).
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -4 to 194F (-20 to 90C);
Ambient: -4 to 149F(-20 to 65C).
Pressure Limit: 145 psi (1.0 MPa).
Power Consumption: 2 W.
Display: 2.38 x 1.25 (60.33 x 31.75 mm) LCD.
Totalizing Display Maximum: 9,999,999,999.
Process Connection: See model chart.
Enclosure Material: ABSplastic.
Weight: See model chart.
205_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:18 PM Page 205
Series
DFMT2

Flow and Total Indication, Easy to Read LCD Display, Remote Indication
4-9/16
[115.89]
1-13/32
[35.72]
3-7/8
[100]
3-7/8 [100]
Connection
3/8 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
Weight
lb (kg)
1.76 (0.8)
1.81 (0.82)
1.85 (0.84)
1.94 (0.88)
2.20 (1.0)
2.43 (1.1)
Press.
(MPa)
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
A
4-3/4 (121 mm)
5-1/8 (130 mm)
5-5/8 (142 mm)
5-1/2 (141 mm)
6-7/8 (175 mm)
6-7/8 (175 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Sensor and Impeller: PVDF;
Shaft: Ceramic;
O-Rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Accuracy: 1.5% FS.
Output:
Analog: 4 to 20 mA (750 max. loop resistance);
Pulse: NPN square wave output;
Frequency: 0 to 2 kHz (adjustable);
Pulse width: 0 to 1000 ms (adjustable).
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -4 to 194F (-20 to 90C);
Ambient: -4 to 149F(-20 to 65C).
Pressure Limit: 145 psi (1.0 MPa).
Display: 2.38 x 1.25" (60.33 x 31.75 mm) LCD.
Totalizing Display Maximum: 9,999,999,999.
Enclosure Material: ABS plastic.
Flow Transmitters,
Range
GPM (m3/h)
0.44 to 7.93 (0.1 to 1.8)
0.88 to 17.61 (0.2 to 4)
1.32 to 26.42 (0.3 to 6)
2.20 to 52.83 (0.5 to 12)
6.61 to 105.67 (1.5 to 24)
8.81 to 176.11 (2 to 40)
Male
NPT
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
FLOW
The Series DFMT2 Remote Digital Paddlewheel Flow Transmitter is a two piece
digital flow transmitter that provides instantaneous, as well as totalizing flow monitoring.
The two piece design allows the user to separate the control panel from the application,
making it ideal for industrial use in reverse osmosis water purifying systems and any other
applications where space is limited. The large backlit display makes navigating through
the menu structure simple. The Series DFMT2 uses high accuracy, industry proven
paddlewheel technology, offers a user selectable 4 to 20 mA or pulse output, and has a
corrosion resistant PVDF sensor giving it a long operation life. Users can reset the totalizer
at any time and set a security password protecting the system settings from unauthorized
changes.
Model
DFMT2-10A
DFMT2-15A
DFMT2-20A
DFMT2-25A
DFMT2-40A
DFMT2-50A
31/32
[24.61]
Remote Mounting Bracket
(Stainless Steel)
Range
(m3/h)
0.1-2
0.2-4.09
0.3-5.91
0.5-11.36
1.5-23.85
2-40.88
Scan here
to watch
product video
CABLE LENGTH
197 [5 m]
4-1/2
[114.30]
205
206_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:20 PM Page 206
Digital Paddlewheel
Series
DPW
1% FS, Flow and Optional Temperature Readings, Programmable Output

2-1/16
[52.37]
2
[50.80]
4-1/2
[114.30]
15/32
[11.99]
1-19/32
[40.39]
CABLE
CONNECTION
DPW
4-13/32
[111.76]
FLOW
DIGITAL LIQUID
FLOW METER
PADDLEWHEEL BEHIND ACRYLIC,

O-RING SEALED, COVER
Flow Transmitters,
FLOW
The Series DPW Digital Paddlewheel is an economical choice for applications where
liquid flow measurement is desired. The user-friendly interface allows for easy
manipulation of the paddlewheels many different programmable features including
high/low flow and temperature alarms, totalizer and flow pulse outputs. Rugged, chemical
resistant lower block material ensures high reliability and longevity for use in harsh
environments. Supports up to 29 Engineering Units, including user defined ones, making
the DPW suitable for any application. Flow meter parameters and functions can be
programmed remotely via the RS-232/RS-485 interface or locally via optional LCD/ key
pad.
FEATURES
Jewel bearings allow for very low minimum flow rates.
Multiparameter: flow and optional temperature measurements.
Polypropylene and chemically resistant PVDF models.
Supports up to 29 engineering units.
Two programmable totalizers and flow pulse output.
Programmable high/low flow and optional temperature alarms with preset action
delay interval.
Two sets of user-programmable optically isolated outputs.
User-selectable (via jumpers) analog 0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA flow and optional
temperature outputs.
RS-232 or RS-485 Digital Interface with multi-drop capability of up to 256 units
(RS- 485 option).
Local key pad and 2x16 characters LCD display with adjustable back light
(optional).
Enclosure weather tight to IP65 standards.
Free communication software with temperature and flow data log-in capability.
Example
DPW 05 P
Series
DPW
05
Orifice Size
10
(Max. Flow Range)
17
35
P
Material Lower
T
Block
Seals
Display/Keypad
A 2
E
T
B
V
N
L
RTD Option
N
R
Output Signal
Digital Interface
A
B
2
5
206
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
DPW-XP: Polypropylene; Seals (see options in model chart), PVDF and nickel
tungsten carbide paddlewheel, acrylic lid; Bearings: PVDF sapphire;
DPW-XT: PVDF; Seals (see options in model chart), PVDF and zirconia ceramic
paddlewheel, PVDF lid; Bearings: PVDF sapphire.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Response Time: 1 second above 10% of FS, 2 seconds below 10% of FS.
Output Signal: Linear 0 to 5 VDC (3000 min. load impedance); 4 to 20 mA (500
max. loop resistance) for flow and temperature option; Pulse output: 3.3 VDC, 3K
min. load impedance.
Electrical Connection: 12 pin cable.
Digital Interface: RS-232; RS-485.
Pressure Limit: 10 bar (150 psig).
Display: 2 row, 16 character LCD with backlight (optional).
Process Connections:
DPW-05: 3/8 FNPT;
DPW-10: 1/2 FNPT;
DPW-17: 3/4 FNPT;
DPW-35: 1 FNPT.
Weight: 1.60 lb (0.73 kg).
DPW-05-P-E-L-N-A-2
Flow Transmitter
0.04 to 5 gal/min (0.15 to 18.9 L/min)
0.08 to 10 gal/min (0.3 to 37.6 L/min)
0.15 to 17 gal/min (0.6 to 64.4 L/min)
0.35 to 35 gal/min (1.3 to 132.5 L/min)
Polypropylene
PVDF
EPDM
PTFE
Buna-N
Fluoroelastomer
No Display/No Keypad
LCD/Keypad
No RTD
RTD
0 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mA
RS-232
RS-485
ACCESSORY
A-CBL12, 12 Pin Stripped End Cable, 10 ft
2X PROCESS CONNECTIONS
207_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:31 AM Page 207
Series
MFS
Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor

No Moving Parts, Frequency and 4 to 20 mA Output, Maintenance-Free
1-1/8
[28.96]
1-1/32
[25.91]
19/32
[15.27]
1-5/32
[29.64]
1 NPT
LED
1-7/32
[31.04]
15/32
[11.99]
31/32
[24.89]
LED
15/32
[11.99]
3-1/32
[77.22]
1-3/8
[34.80]
3-7/32 [81.53]
-11/16
[17.60]
2-1/4
[56.90]
MFS-31 &MFS-32
FEATURES
No moving parts
No mechanical wear
Maintenance-free
Model
MFS-11
MFS-21
MFS-31
MFS-12
MFS-22
MFS-32
Range GPM (LPM)

0.25 to 5.3 (1 to 20)
0.5 to 10.5 (2 to 40)
2.5 to 52.8 (10 to 200)
0.25 to 5.3 (1 to 20)
0.5 to 10.5 (2 to 40)
2.5 to 52.8 (10 to 200)
Minimum Output
Signal GPM (LPM)
0.13 (0.5)
0.25 (1)
1.3 (5)
0.13 (0.5)
0.25 (1)
1.3 (5)
Process
Connection
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1 NPT
3/8
[9.91]
MFS-11 &MFS-12
MFS-21 & MFS-22
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water and other conductive liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Electrodes: 316 TI SS;
Process Connections: 316 TI SS;
Measuring Pipe: PEEK-GF30;
Gasket: EPDM.
Accuracy: 2% of reading.
Repeatability: 1%.
Temperature Limits:
Process: 32 to 194F (0 to 90C);
Output: Frequency: Square-wave, NPN; Analog: 4 to 20 mA.
Current Consumption: Max 80 mA.
Minimum Conductivity of Medium: 50 S/cm.
Flow Indication: LED green, flow proportional blinking.
Electrical Connection: Plug connector M12x1.
Weight:
MFS-1X: 1.5 lb (0.68 kg);
MFS-2X: 1.7 lb (0.77 kg);
MFS-3X: 1.9 lb (0.87 kg).
Flow Transmitters,
Electromagnetic, In-Line
PRINCIPLESOFOPERATION
The measuring pipe is in a magnetic field. If an electrically conductive medium with
a certain flow passes through the pipe, it passes at a right-angle to the magnetic
field, creating a voltage which is proportional to the average flow velocity and picked
up by two electrodes within the MFS. A frequency output signal is obtained that is
proportional to the flow (analog output option available).
3-7/32 [81.53]
5-1/16 [128.81]
FLOW
Series MFS Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor is a compact, low cost alternative to
paddle wheel sensors. Unlike sensors with moving parts, the MFS can be applied in
applications dealing with contaminated media. This series provides a reliable measuring
technique, an obstruction free pipe cross-section, as well as a quick response time, making
this series ideal for interference free operation. Any change in temperature, density,
viscosity, concentration or electrical conductivity of the liquid, does not affect the output
signal of this Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor. This, in addition to its long-life cycle, makes
this series perfect for accurate reversible gauging of volume flow of conductive liquids in
closed piping.
1/2 NPT
2-1/4
[56.90]
1-7/32
[30.99]
3-1/32
[77.22]
5-19/32 [141.99]
9/16
[13.95]
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency & Analog
Frequency & Analog
Frequency & Analog
ACCESSORIES
MFS-C3, 4 Pin Cable Socket M12x1 Connect, 9.8 ft (3 m)
207
208_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:32 AM Page 208
Series
MFS2
Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor

Lower Cost PVDF Design, Frequency Output, 1% Accuracy, Maintenance-Free
4-PIN PLUG
CONNECTOR
1-3/16
[30.02]
17/64
[6.76]
M12 X 1
2 x L2
1-9/32
[32.52]
2-23/64
[60.05]
2-13/32
[61.05]
2 X D1
2 X D2
(HOLE DIA.)
MFS2-6
1-9/64
[29.02]
17/64
[6.76]
2 x L2
L1
Flow Transmitters,
FLOW
MFS2-1/5
The Series MFS2 Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor is a compact, lower cost plastic
alternative to the Series MFS. Unlike sensors with moving parts, the MFS2 can be used
in applications dealing with contaminated media. This series provides a reliable measuring
technique, an obstruction free pipe cross-section, as well as a quick response time, making
this series ideal for interference free operation. Any change in temperature, density,
viscosity, concentration or electrical conductivity of the liquid, does not affect the output
signal of this Magnetic Inductive Flow Sensor. This, in addition to its longlife cycle and
PVDF process connection, makes this series perfect for accurate reversible gauging of
volume flow of conductive liquids in closed piping.
Principles of Operation
The measuring pipe is in a magnetic field. If an electrically conductive medium with
a certain flow passes through the pipe, it passes at a right-angle to the magnetic
field, creating a voltage that is proportional to the average flow velocity and picked
up by two electrodes within the MFS2. A frequency output signal is obtained that is
proportional to the flow (analog output option available).
FEATURES
No moving parts
No mechanical wear
Maintenance-free
Model
MFS2-1
MFS2-2
MFS2-3
MFS2-4
MFS2-5
MFS2-6
Range GPM(LPM)
0.07 to 1.3 (0.25 to 5)
0.26 to 5.3 (1.0 to 20)
0.66 to 13.2 (2.5 to 50)
1.3 to 26.4 (5.0 to 100)
2.6 to 52.8 (10 to 200)
3.3 to 66.0 (12.5 to 250)
Process Connection
1/2 male NPT
1/2 male NPT
3/4 male NPT
1 male NPT
1 male NPT
1-1/4 male NPT
ACCESSORIES
MFS-C3, 4-Pin Cable Socket M12x1 Connect, 9.8 ft (3 m)
208
L1
4
4
4.02
4.41
4.41
4.81
L2
0.86
0.86
0.86
1.04
1.04
1.13
1-3/4
[44.53]
M12 X 1
2 X D1
45/64
[18.01]
Model
MFS2-1
MFS2-2
MFS2-3
MFS2-4
MFS2-5
MFS2-6
2 X D2
(HOLE DIA.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible, non-coating, conductive liquids.
Wetted Materials:
Grounding Rings and Electrodes: 316 SS;
Process Connections: PVDF;
O-rings: EPDM.
Accuracy: 1% of reading.
Repeatability: 1%.
Temperature Limits:
Process: 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C);
Pressure Limits:
145 psi (10 bar) @ 68F (20C);
116 psi (8 bar) @ 104F (40C);
87 psi (6 bar) @ 140F (60C).
Power Consumption: 0.6 W.
Output: Frequency: Square-wave, NPN or PNP.
Flow Indication: LED green, flow proportional blinking.
Enclosure Material: ABS plastic.
Electrical Connection: Plug connector M12x1.
Conductivity: > 20 S/cm min.
Weight:
MFS2-1, -2, -3, -4, -5: 8 oz (226.8 g);
MFS2-6: 1 lb (0.45 kg).
D1
1/2-14 NPT
1/2-14 NPT
3/4-14 NPT
1-11.5 NPT
1-11.5 NPT
1-1/4-11.5 NPT
D2
0.31
0.31
0.55
0.71
0.71
0.98
209_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:32 AM Page 209
Series
LOFM
Low-Flow Electromagnetic Flow Sensor

HDPE Plastic Body, Pulse, Frequency and Analog Output
3-1/2
[88.90]
2-51/64
[71.12]
8-PIN CIRCULAR
BULKHEAD CONNECTOR
FEATURES
Low cut off flow rate
No metal parts
No moving parts
No straight pipe requirements
4-13/64
[106.68]
2-3/32
[53.34]
LOFM-1-44C-1E-1TN-1FT
Low-Flow Magmeter (Comes standard with
FlareTek fittings, NPT adapters available)
1
3/4
Size
2
3/8
44C
3/4 PVC NPT Adapter (LOFM-1 only)*
NPTAdapters
44F
3/4 PVDF NPT Adapter (LOFM-1 only)*
(Optional Replace
42C
1/2 PVCNPT Adapter (LOFM-1 only)*
FlareTek Fittings)
42F
1/2 PVDFNPT Adapter (LOFM-1 only)*
88C
88F
3/8 PVDFNPT Adapter (LOFM-2 only)*
84C
84F
1/4'' PVDF NPT Adapter (LOFM-2 only)*
000
No MNPT Adapter
1E
3/4 EPDM (LOFM-1 only)*
O-Ring
1F
3/4 Fluoroelastomer (LOFM-1 only)*
(Only required
2E
3/8 EPDM (LOFM-2 only)*
with NPTadapters)
2F
3/8 Fluoroelastomer (LOFM-2 only)*
00
No O-ring
1TN
3/4 FlareTek Tubing Nut (LOFM-1 only)
FlareTek Tubing Nut
3/8 FlareTek Tubing Nut (LOFM-2 only)
2TN
(Only required with
No FlareTex Tubing Nut
000
FlareTek fittings)
FlareTek, Flare Tool, 3/8 Fitting (LOFM-1 only)
1FT
Flare Tool (Only
FlareTek, Flare Tool, 3/8 Fitting (LOFM-2 only)
2FT
required with
No FlareTek, Flare Tool
000
FlareTek fittings)
*The prices for the NPT adapters and O-rings are for the two required.
Example
Construction
LOFM 1 44C 1E 1TN 1FT

LOFM
Flaretek is a registered trademark of Entegris, Inc.
209
Flow Transmitters,
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible clean or dirty non-coating, conductive liquids.
Range: LOFM-1: 0.2 to 20 GPM (0.01 to 1.3 l/s); LOFM-2: 0.03 to 3 GPM (0.002
to 0.2 l/s).
Wetted Materials:
Body: PVDF; Electrodes: PVDF carbon-fiber filled; Ground: PVDF carbon-fiber
filled; Fittings: PVDF; Adapters: PVC or PVDF; O-rings: EPDM or Fluoroelastomer
(for NPT fitting only).
Accuracy:
LOFM-1: +1% of reading, +0.005 GPM; LOFM-2: +1% of reading, +0.002 GPM.
Temperature Limits: Process: 32 to 200F (0 to 93C); Ambient: 0 to 130F (-18
to 54C).
Process Connections: Flaretek fittings standard in 3/4 or 3/8 flowbody (NPT
threaded adapters also available).
Output: Current sinking, square wave pulse, opto-isolated, 30 VDC @ 5 mA max.
and 4 to 20 mA;
LOFM-1: 1892 pulses/gal (500 pulses/L);
LOFM-2: 3785 pulses/gal (1000 pulses/L).
Power Requirements: 10 to 15 VDC, 150 mA (linear power supply
recommended).
Conductivity: > 20 microSiemens.
Enclosure Material: HDPE with glass fiber.
Weight: 2.20 lb (1.00 kg).
FLOW
The Series LOFM Low-Flow Magmeter is a liquid electromagnetic flow sensor that
uses the conductivity of fluids to measure flow. Liquid flow through its magnetic field
produces a voltage which is measured and translated into a pulse output signal. The LOFM
can be combined with the Series RTI for flow rate and total display. This meter comes with
a variety of factory-installed adapters and O-rings. The LOFM comes in either 3/4 or 3/8
pipe.
The Series LOFM can accurately measure flow rates as low as 0.03 gallons per minute.
The meter is housed in a splash proof HDPE plastic, making it good for chemical injection
applications. With no metal parts, the LOFM is corrosion-resistant and compatible with a
wide range of chemicals. With no moving parts, the meter can handle dirty water
applications where moving parts might cause jamming or clogging. The LOFM comes
standard with Flaretek fittings, but NPT adapters are available.
FLARETEK FITTINGS
ARE STANDARD
210_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:33 AM Page 210
Series
FLMG
Flanged Electromagnetic Flow Sensor

No Moving Parts, Minimal Straight Pipe Requirement, Unobstructed Flow
3-61/64
[100.46]
B
Flow Transmitters,
FLOW
Dimension
FLMG-04-XX-XXX-X
FLMG-06-XX-XXX-X
FLMG-08-XX-XXX-X
FLMG-10-XX-XXX-X
The Series FLMG Flanged Electromagnetic FlowSensor is a flanged
electromagnetic flowmeter designed for use in 4 to 10 pipes in municipal or industrial
water and wastewater applications. The FLMG has no moving parts and requires less
frequent maintenance in applications where debris or sand is in the flow. Its specially
designed with electrodes that discourage fouling and requires little space between the
meter and a pipe elbow. Rate and total indication are standard for both models. The
included 20-foot power cable provides pulse output for use with a variety of displays and
controllers for remote reading, data logging, pulse-to-analog conversion, and telemetry
applications. This series also features backup battery power to provide auxiliary power
during power failures.
ACCESSORIES
output. Unit is loop powered, fits on the enclosure of the meter, and is field
spannable.
Series RTI, Rate Total Indicator, converts pulse output to 4 to 20mA analog output
with local flow rate and totalization display. Unit is loop powered, fits on the
FLMG 04 GM GAL H 15
FLMG
04
06
08
10
GM
Rate/
LM
Measurement
LS
FM
MH
GD
LD
GAL
Total
GLX
Measurement
LIT
LTX
MLT
CMT
CMX
CFT
CFX
H
Pulse Rate
1
2
4
15
Options
30
45
60
DL
Example
Series
Power/Size
B
9 (229 mm)
11 (279 mm)
13.5 (330 mm)
16 (406 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible non-coating
conductive liquids.
Range: See chart.
Wetted Materials:
Liner: Dual durometer rubber;
Electrodes: 316 SS.
Accuracy: 1% (10% to 100% of FS
max. flow), 2% (min. to 10% FS).
Temperature Limits: Process: 10 to
130F (-12 to 54C); Ambient: -40 to
158F (-40 to 70C).
MountingOrientation: Horizontal or
vertical.
Process Connection: 150# drilling
ANSI flange.
Display: Rate: 5 digits; Total: 8 digits
LCD.
Output: Current sinking square wave
pulse, opto-isolated.
FLMG-04-GM-GAL-H-15
Flanged Electromagnetic Flow Sensor
DCPowered 4 Pipe
DCPowered 6 Pipe
DCPowered 8 Pipe
DCPowered 10 Pipe
Gallon/Minute
Liter/Minute
Liter/Second
Cubic Foot/Minute
Cubic Meter/Day
Million Gallon/Day
Mega Liter/Day
Gallon
Gallon x 1000
Liter
Liter x 1000
Mega Liter
Cubic Meter
Cubic Meter x 1000
Cubic Feet
Cubic Feet x 1000
High Frequency* Required with use with Series BAT
10 Units*/Pulse
100 Units*/Pulse
1000 Units*/Pulse
Factory-Installed Power/Output Cable, 15 m (50 ft)**
Internal Data Logger
4
6
8
10
Gal/Min Liter/Sec Gal/Min Liter/Sec Gal/Min Liter/Sec Gal/Min Liter/Sec
Minimum 12
32
60
95
.75
2
3.8
6
Maximum 500
1200
2200
3500
31.5
75.7
138.8
220.8
210
A
3.12 ( 79 mm)
5.05 ( 128 mm)
6.44 ( 164 mm)
8.61 ( 219 mm)
D
C
7 (178 mm)
8.1 (206 mm)
9.1 (231 mm)
10.1 (257 mm)
D
10.24 (260 mm)
12.27 (312 mm)
14.24 (362 mm)
18.18 (462 mm)
Power Requirements: 7 to 32 VDC @

30 mA and (2) 3.6 V AA lithium metal
batteries, installed and functional, user
replaceable for backup power.
Battery Life: 2 months with power
failure; 10 years with power.
Electrical Connection: #22 AWG, 3
conductor length (18(5.5 m )
(2000max.).
Conductivity: 20 microSiemens.
Empty Pipe Detection:
Hardware/software, conductivity-based.
Enclosure Materials:
Body: Epoxy-coated welded steel;
Housing: Powder-coated diecast
aluminum;
Weight:
4: 32 lb (14515 g);
6: 47 lb (21319 g);
8: 69 lb (31298 g);
10: 125 lb (56699 g).
*Units: Gal or Liter depending on (rate/total unit) selection

rate measurement
**20-foot (6 m) cable standard
211_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:25 PM Page 211
Series
IEFS
Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Sensor

No Moving Parts, Hot-Tap Option, 3 to 48 Field Adjustable Insertion
4
[101.52]
PHONE
219-879-8000
FAX
219-872-9057
WEB
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
2-3/4
[69.70]
4
[101.42]
MADE IN XXXXXX
2-7/8
[73.06]
1/2 CABLE
GLAND
Scan here
to watch
product video
Hot-Tap Option
The Series IEFS Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Sensor comes in brass or stainless steel
allowing it to handle a wide range of pressures and temperatures, as well as a variety of available saddle
fittings, Series SDF, to fit pipe sizes 3 to 24. The IEFS-1XX has an isolation valve which allows hottap installation. Additional options for this flow meter include adapter fittings and a reverse flow output.
The Series IEFS is great for dirty water applications or any application where moving parts may be
an issue.
ACCESSORIES
Series BAT, Blind Analog Transmitter, converts pulse output to 4 to 20 mA analog output. Unit
is loop powered, fits on the enclosure of the meter, and is field spannable.
Series RTI, Rate Total Indicator, converts pulse output to 4 to 20 mA analog output with local
flow rate and totalization display. Unit is loop powered, can fit on the enclosure of the meter,
and provides a high/low flow alarm.
Series PWD, Pulse Divider, for use with pacing electronic metering pumps. Unit divides the
input frequency to any number from 1 to 9999 with the use of rotary switches to suit a number
of metering pump inputs.
Example IEFS 0SB BAF IEFS-DSB-BAT
Series IEFS
Size/
Size
Hot-Tap
Material
Material
0SB
3 to 10
No Hot-Tap
Brass
0SS
3 to 10
No Hot-Tap
SS
0LB
10 to 48
No Hot-Tap
Brass
0LS
10 to 48
No Hot-Tap
SS
1SB
3 to 10
Hot-Tap
Brass
1SS
3 to 10
Hot-Tap
SS*
1LB
10 to 48
Hot-Tap
Brass
1LS
10 to 48
Hot-Tap
SS*
BAF 2 Brass Adapter Fittings (IEFS-0XX only)
Options
SAF 2 SS Adapter Fittings (IEFS-0XX only)
SVA 316 SS Valve Assembly (IEFS-1XX only)
NVA No Valve Assembly (deduct price) (IEFS-1XX only)
RFO Reverse Flow Output
BPT 1-1/2 Brass BPT Adapter (2 piece) (IEFS-0XX only)
SPT 1-1/2 SS BPT Adapter (2 piece) (IEFS-0XX only)
IMM Immersible (Urethane potted electrical components)
LOP Low Power (12 to 25 VDC @ 40 mA)
EXT 12 Extension (IEFS-XLX only)
*SS is stem and fitting. For SS valve order SVAoption.
Stocked
Model
Description
IEFS-0SB Adjustable Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Sensor
IEFS-0SS Adjustable Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Sensor
Pipe
Size
3 to 10
3 to 10
Material
Brass
SS
Hot-Tap Option
(Shown installed on pipe)
Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Hanes International
211
Flow Transmitters, Electromagnetic,

APPLICATIONS
Conductive liquids
Municipal
Industrial
Irrigation
FLOW
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The IEFS is a liquid flow meter that uses a magnetic field to measure flow. As conductive fluids
flow through the magnetic field, a voltage is generated which is measured and translated into
a pulse frequency output signal. This signal can then be used with the Series BAT to produce
a 4 to 20 mA analog signal, or the Series RTI to display rate and total.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0.28 to 20 ft/s (0.08 to 6.09 m/s).
Wetted Materials:
Body Shaft/Fitting: 316 SS or brass;
Electrodes: Hastelloy;
Electrode Cap: PVDF;
Valve Assembly: (IEFS-1XX) Bronze (SS optional) with bronze ball valve;
O-ring: EPDM.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 0 to 160F (-17 to 72C).
Process Connection:
IEFS-0XX: 1-1/2 male NPT;
IEFS-1XX: 2 male NPT.
Output: Current sinking, square wave pulse, opto-isolated, 550 Hz @ 20
ft/s, 30 VDC @ 6 mA max.
Power Requirements: 12 to 25 VDC @ 250 mA; Low Power: 12 to 25
VDC @ 40 mA.
Electrical Connection: Terminal block.
Conductivity: 20 microSiemens/cm.
Weight:
IEFS-0SX: 6 lb (2721 g);
IEFS-0LB: 12 lb (5443 g);
IEFS-1XX: 15 lb (6804 g).
212_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:34 AM Page 212
Series
EFS2

No Moving Parts, Durable, Easy Installation & Maintenance
3-9/32
[83.45]
SENSOR BODY
[STAINLESS STEEL, BRASS OR PVC]
3/32 THICK
GASKET
MODEL: EFS2-XX-XXX
SN: XXXXXXXXXX
1-37/64
[40.13]
O-RING
ELECTRODES
Scan here
to watch
product video

Fixed Insertion
FLOW
The Series EFS2 Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Sensor is designed for pipe sizes
from 1 to 12 and comes in three different materials (stainless steel, brass and PVC).
There are a variety of custom fittings to choose from to ensure accurate fitting in the pipe.
The Series EFS2 is useful for any applications where moving parts would be a problem,
such as dirty liquids. It can handle applications where there are rapid changes in viscosity
and flow. Other applications include small pipes and chemical metering pumps.
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The EFS2 is a liquid flow meter that uses the conductivity of fluids to measure flow
rate. Liquid flow through its magnetic field produces a voltage that is measured and
translated into an output signal. It has a pulse frequency output which can be used
with the Series RTI to indicate flow rate and total, as well as the Series BAT signal
converter which provides an analog signal.
APPLICATIONS
Industrial process
Chemical metering pumps
Fertigation
ACCESSORIES
spannable.
with local flow rate and totalization display. Unit is loop powered, fits on the
Example EFS2 1P RFO
EFS2
Series
1P
Size/
1B
Material
1S
2P
2B
2S
3P
3B
3S
RFO
Options
IMM
FOR
LOP
4-15/16 [125.30]
4
[101.42]
2-3/4
[69.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0.28 to 20 ft/s (0.08 to 6.09 m/s).
Wetted Materials:
Sensor: 316 SS, brass or PVC;
Electrodes: Hastelloy, metal;
Electrode Cap: PVDF;
O-ring: EPDM (fluoroelastomer optional).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Temperature Limits:
Process: Brass/SS: 32 to 200F (0 to
93C); PVC: 32 to 130F (0 to 55C);
Pressure Limits:
Brass/SS: 200 psi (13.8 bar);
PVC: 150 psi (10 bar).
Process Connection: See page reference below.
Output: Current sinking, square wave pulse, opto-isolated, 550 Hz @ 20 ft/s.
Power Requirements: 12 to 25 VDC @ 250 mA; (12 to 25 VDC @ 40 mA (max.
250 mA) - LOP option).
Conductivity: 20 microSiemens/cm.
EFS2-1P-RFO
1 to 3 Pipe, PVC
1 to 3 Pipe, Brass
1 to 3 Pipe, 316 SS
4 to 10 Pipe, PVC
4 to 10 Pipe, Brass
4 to 10 Pipe, 316 SS
12 Pipe, PVC
12 Pipe, Brass
12 Pipe, 316 SS
Reverse Flow Output
Immersible (*Urethane Potted Electrical Connection)
Fluoroelastomer O-ring
Low Power (12 to 25 VDC @ 40 mA) (max 250 mA)
Note: Need to purchase with Series EFF fittings for proper installation.
Stocked
Model
EFS2-1P
EFS2-1B
EFS2-1S
EFS2-2B
EFS2-3B
212
Description
Pipe
Size
1 to 3
1 to 3
1 to 3
4 to 10
12
Material
PVC
Brass
SS
Brass
Brass
Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Hanes International

Process Connection: See page 213 (Series EFF)
213_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:34 PM Page 213
Series
EFF
Fittings and Tees

Saddles, Tees & Weld/Braze Fittings for Series EFS2
1-5/8
[41.15]
2-9/16
[65.11]
EFF-S-BXX
EFF-S-PXX
EFF-T-SFT-SS
EFF-S-DXX
The Series EFF Fittings and Tees are used with the Series EFS2 Insertion
Electromagnetic Flow Sensors. The Series EFF allows for sensor insertion in a wide range
of pipe sizes. Multiple end connections are available to allow for easy installation in many
applications. Series EFF is available in bronze, 304 stainless steel, 316 stainless steel, and
PVC, further expanding application prospects.
FLOW
Tee Fitting Description

Bronze/FemaleThread
Bronze/Female Sweat (For Copper Tubing)
PVC/MaleStubEnd
Carbon Steel/Female Thread
304 SS/Female Thread
All 316 SS Option
Saddle Fitting Description
Ductile Iron
PVC(See Note 2)
Bronze
Installed on 16 Long Pipe Stub Option (PVCOnly)
Weld/Braze Fitting Description
Bronze
Carbon Steel
316 SS

Fixed Insertion
Model
EFF-T-BFT
EFF-T-BFS
EFF-T-PME
EFF-T-CFT
EFF-T-SFT
-SS
Model
EFF-S-DXX
EFF-S-PXX
EFF-S-BXX
-LPS
Model
EFF-W-BXX
EFF-W-CXX
EFF-W-SXX
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: Flow meter dependent.
Pressure Limits: Flow meter dependent.
Example: EFF-T-CFT-0100-SS
To order an all 316 SS female thread 1 tee for Series EFS2-1XX Electromagnetic Flow Sensor.
213
214_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:35 AM Page 214
Series
UXF3
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converter

Excellent Performance and Easy Operation
5-19/32 [142.00]
2-61/64
[75.00]
2-53/64
[72.00]
3/32
[2.50]
25/64
[10.00]
LCD DISPLAY
7-7/8
[200.00] 6-11/16
[170.00]
LED
2-23/32
[69.24]
9-11/64
[233.00]
CABLE GLAND
WITH 3/8
OPENING
CABLE GLAND
WITH 1/4
OPENING
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
FLOW
EARTH TERMINAL
The Series UXF3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converters are paired with Series SX1 or
SX2 sensors in order to utilize the transit-time measure method. Thanks to microprocessorbased electronics, the flowmeter can easily be configured from the front keypad to specific
applications. The flowmeter is suitable for liquid flow measurements for pipes from 1/2
inch to 19.5 feet diameter. The accuracy of this flowmeter falls within 1% of the flow rate.
The UXF3 also provides excellent resistance against aerated flow such as sludge, raw
sewage, and bubble contained flow. The multilingual display supports a variety of language
choices. The combination of the easy to read LCD screen and front panel buttons along
with the variety of language selections makes this flowmeter very user friendly. This
flowmeter incorporates the latest electronics and high-speed digital signal processing
technologies (32 bit MPU), realizing high performance and easy operation. See bulletin F107-UXF3 for more details.
FEATURES
High accuracy
Excellent resistance against aerated flow
Quick response with high-speed microprocessor
Multilingual display (English, Japanese, German, French, and Spanish)
Large type graphic LCD
Front keypad
Model
UXF3-A0
UXF3-B0
UXF3-A1
UXF3-B1
Power
Supply
100-240 VAC 50/60Hz
20-30 VDC
100-240 VAC 50/60Hz
20-30 VDC
Serial
Communications
N/A
N/A
RS485
RS485
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-FU.
214
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid flow through which ultrasonic signal can be transmitted (water, sea
water, oil, and fluid of unknown velocity).
Inputs: Sensor cable radio frequency coaxial cable RG-58A/U2.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to 32 m/s) (bi-directional flow).
Display: LCD with backlight, 16 letters 2 lines.
Accuracy: 1.0% of rate.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz, or 20 to 30 VDC.
Power Consumption: AC: 15 VA; DC: 6W.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 4 to 131F (-20 to 55C).
Output: Analog: 4 to 20 mA DC current output; Digital: One mechanical relay
output, 240 VAC, 30 VDC, 1 A. Two transistor outputs available, Open collector
output: 30 VDC, 0.1A.
Serial Communications (option): RS485.
Material: Aluminum alloy.
Mounting: Wall or pipe mount.
215_Layout 1 7/15/14 4:00 PM Page 215
Series
SX3
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector

Quick and Easy Mounting
FRAME
FRAME
BNC
CONNECTOR
SENSOR
SPACING
ADJUSTABLE
EVERY 7/64 [3]
16-5/32
[410.16]
2-1/8
[54.00]
SENSOR
LOCK CLIP
15-3/4
[400.00]
1-15/32
[37.00]
SPACING: 0-10-5/8
[270.00]
WIRE ROPE
1-27/32
[46.99]
1-11/32
[34]
1-7/64
[28]
NAME PLATE
SENSOR
NAME PLATE
1-13/16
[46.00]
H
1-21/32
[50]
SX3 and SX3-B
SX3-D
3/16 [5.08]
L
8-31/32
[288]
13-45/64
[348]
H
1-7/32
[31]
1-3/16
[30]
Spacing
53/64~4-47/64
[21~120]
53/64~9-29/64
[21~240]
Units
inches
[mm]
inches
[mm]
1-31/32
[50.00]
1-5/16 [33.00]
FLOW
Type Pipe Size

SX3-A 3/4~3-1/2
[25~100]
SX3-B 2~8
[50-225]
CHAIN
MOUNTING SPRING
1-13/16
[46.00]
FRAME
GUIDE
5/16
[8.00]
SX3-C
Series SX3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors:

Helps ensure pumping efficiency
Provides accurate leak detection
Not influenced by fluids temperature or pressure
Model
SX3-A0
SX3-B0
SX3-C0
SX3-D0
Kind of
Detector
Small Standard
Small
Medium
Large
Flow Pipe
Size in (mm)
0.98 to 3.94 (25 to 100)
1.97 to 8.86 (50 to 225)
1.97 to 11.81 (50 to 300)
11.81 to 23.62 (300 to 600)
Acoustic
Coupler
None
None
None
None
ACCESSORIES
Model
Description
A-186
Silicone-based grease acoustic couplant, 3 oz tube
A-187
Silicone RTV acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube
A-188
Silicone-free acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube
Description
Model
SX3C-1A Heat Resistant Cable with waterproof BNC connector for SX3-A and SX3-B
SX3C-1B Heat Resistant Cable with waterproof BNC connector for SX3-A and SX3-B
SX3C-2A Heat Resistant Cable for SX3-C and SX3-D
SX3C-2B Heat Resistant Cable for SX3-C and SX3-D
Option: Consult factory for other cable lengths.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean liquids that pass
ultrasound and do not contain air
bubbles (such as pure water and
chemical solution).
Turbidity: 10000 deg (mg/L) or less.
Type of Flow: Well-developed
turbulent or laminar flow in a fluid-filled
pipe.
Permissible Air Volume Rate: Up to
2% at 1 m/s (inversely proportional to
velocity).
Range: 0 to 32.8 FPS (0 to 10 m/s).
Flow Pipe Sizes: SX3A: 0.98 to 3.94
in (25 to 100 mm) for plastic piping
1.97 to 3.94 in (50 to 100 mm) for
metal piping; SX3B: 1.97 to 8.86 in (50
to 225 mm); SX3C: 1.97 to 11.81 in (50
to 300 mm); SX3D: 11.81 to 23.62 in
(300 to 600 mm).
Accuracy: 1.5 to 2% of rate.
Response Time: System cycle: 0.2 s;
Dead time: 0.2 s or less; Time
constant: 0.1 s.
Temperature Limits: Ambient -4 to

140F (-20 to 60C); Fluid
Temperature: SX3A/SX3B: -4 to 212F
(-20 to 100C); SX3C/SX3D w/ silicone
rubber for acoustic couplant: -4 to
176F (-20 to 80C), w/ silicone free
grease for acoustic couplant: 32 to
140F (0 to 60C).
Enclosure Rating: SX3A and SX3B:
IP65 (jetproof) when using waterproof
BNC connector; SX3C and SX3D: IP67
(immersion-proof) when the terminal
block is filled with silicone rubber after
wiring.
Materials: For SX3A and SX3B:
Plastic PBT for sensor housing, 304SS
for guide frame; For SX3C and SX3D:
Plastic PBT for sensor housing, 304SS
for sensor cover, 304SS and PBT for
guide rail.
Electrical Connection: Coaxial cable
up to 98.4 ft (30 m) and thermal
stability of 212F (100C).
Mounting: Clamped on pipe surface.
Weight: SX3A: 10.6 oz (0.3 kg); SX3B:
14.1 oz (0.4 kg); SX3C: 2.2 lb (1 kg);
SX3D: 14.1 oz (0.4 kg).
Cable Length ft (m)

16.4 (5)
32.8 (10)
16.4 (5)
32.8 (10)
215
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
Series SX3 Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series UXF2 converters
and employ a clamp-on type design for permanent use based on transit time measuring
method. These detectors are ideal for clean liquids containing no air bubbles such as pure
water. The easy-to-use compact and lightweight design is intended for integration into
mechanical devices. It is applicable for small to medium size pipes of diameter range from
1 to 23 in (25 to 600 mm) and provides superior cost performance.
216_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:36 AM Page 216
Series
UFB &
UFC
Ultrasonic Flowmeter Set

Excellent Performance, Easy Operation and Data Logging Option
9-5/16 [236.49]
9-5/16 [236.49]
[DISPLAY]
[DISPLAY]
Liters
UFB
UFC
Gallons
9
m3
Velocity
4-20 mA
Delete
Options
Liters
Gallons
Velocity
9
m3
6
3
4-20 mA
Delete
Options
7-13/16 [198.30]
Pulse
Pulse
UFB
UFC
4-1/2
[114.30]
7-7/32 [183.36]
4-11/16
[119.02]
FLOW

The Series UFB & UFC Ultrasonic Flowmeter Sets utilize the transit-time difference
for measuring flow rates in pipes non-invasively. These are permanent models, allowing
the user to mount the converters on a surface or pipe. The easy-to-use compact and
lightweight designs are intended for mechanical devices using ideally homogeneous liquids
that contain no air pockets. They feature a sturdy IP65 rating, protecting them from dust
and direct water contact. The Series UFB has 4 to 20 mA and pulse output capabilities.
The UFC has data logging capability via USB with a 4 to 20 mA and pulse output.
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Two sensors are placed on the exterior of the pipe, and each transmits an ultrasonic
pulse through the pipe and fluid to the other. The velocity of the liquid flowing through
the pipes causes the pulse to accelerate or decelerate. The difference in the transit
times of the two pulses is used to calculate the flow rate. The use of transit time
allows the flowmeter to be unaffected by pressure or temperature changes.
APPLICATIONS
Treated water
River water
Sea water
Potable water
Demineralized water
Glycol/water mix
Hydraulic system
Diesel oil
Kit Includes:
Converter
Set of transducers
Ruled guide rail
Steel banding
Banding clips
Set of transducer cables
Set of hightemperature interface cables
Ultrasonic coupling grease
Type A to Type B USB communications cable (UFC only)
StandardVersion
Model
Pipe SizeRange
UFB-122 0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
UFB-123 2 to 79 (50 to 2000 mm)
UFB-222 0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
UFB-223 2 to 79 (50 to 2000 mm)
Power Supply
86 to 264 VAC
86 to 264 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Data Logging Version

Model
Pipe SizeRange
UFC-122 0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
UFC-123 2 to 79 (50 to 2000 mm)
UFC-222 0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
UFC-223 2 to 79 (50 to 2000 mm)
Power Supply
86 to 264 VAC
86 to 264 VAC
24 VDC/VAC
24 VDC/VAC
OPTION
216
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogeneous liquids that do not contain more than 3% of air bubbles or
particulate and capable of ultrasonic wave propagation.
Inputs: TNC cable from sensors.
Range: 0.33 to 33 ft/s (0.1 to 10 m/s).
Display: 240 x 64 pixel graphic display, high contrast black on white with backlight;
Languages: English, French, German, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,
Russian, Norwegian, and Dutch; 5 W x 1.3 H (5 x 33.02 mm).
Accuracy: 0.5 to 2% of flow reading of flow rate > 0.03 ft/s (0.01 m/s) and pipe
OD > 3.0 in (75 mm); 3% of flow reading for flow rate > 0.03 ft/s (0.01 m/s) and
pipe OD 0.5 to 3 in (13 to 75 mm); 6% of flow reading for flow rate < 0.03 ft/s (0.01
m/s).
Power Requirements: 86 to 264 VAC (50 to 60 Hz) or 24 VAC/VDC (1 A max).
Temperature Limits: Transducer: -4 to 275F (-20 to 135C); Controller: -4 to
122F (-20 to 50C).
Outputs:
Analog:
1 opto-isolated output: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 16 mA or 0 to 20 mA (selectable);
Error current: 0 to 26 mA (selectable);
Load resistance: 620 max;
Alarm:
2 opto-isolated MOSFET NO relays, 48 V at 500 mA, maximum 200 Hz;
Pulsed:
1 opto-isolated MOSFET relay, 48 V at 500 mA, 1 to 250 pps;
Pulse width: 2 to 500 ms (selectable).
Serial Communications:USB (UFConly).
Enclosure Rating: IP65 when using TNC connector; Transducers IP54.
Materials: Plastic ABS and aluminum.
Repeatability: 0.5 % of measured value or 0.03 ft/s (0.01 m/s).
Electrical Connections: Removeable screw-in type terminal block.
Mounting: Wall mounted using 3 type M4 screws.
Turbidity: < 3 % by volume of particulate content.
Permissible Air Content: < 3% by volume.
Weight:
Unit not including accessories: 2.80 lb (1.26 kg);
Unit including accessories: 9.92 lb (4.5 kg).
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Applicable Pipe Material: Carbon steel, SS, copper, UPVC/PVDF, concrete, mild
steel, glass, brass.
Applicable Pipe Lining: Rubber, glass, concrete, epoxy, steel, other*.
Pipe Wall Thickness: 0.04 to 3 (1 to 75 mm).
Pipe Lining Thickness: < 1 (< 25 mm).
*Selectable option for special material with known propagation rate of lining material.
217_Layout 1 7/14/14 8:05 AM Page 217
Model
UFM
Compact Ultrasonic Flowmeter

Cost Effective, Compact & Adjustable Design, Non-Invasive
4-55/64
15/32[123.46] 2-7/16
[61.73]
[12.00]
G F E D C B A
FEMALE SMB
COAXIAL
CONNECTORS
59/64
[23.33] RED
16.4
BLACK
29/64
[5 M]
GREEN
[11.67]
WHITE
BLUE
BROWN SHIELD
2X 1/2
[12.75]
1-7/64
[28.05]
4-7/64
[104.50]
59/64
[23.40]
4-20mA
PULSE
45/64
[17.70]
59/64
[23.50]
4-5/32
[105.59]
1-1/64
[25.70]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Two sensors located in the guiderail are placed on the exterior of the pipe, and each
transmits an ultrasonic pulse through the pipe and fluid to the other. The velocity of
the liquid flowing through the pipes causes the pulse to accelerate or decelerate.
The difference in the transit times of the two pulses is used to calculate the flow rate.
The use of transit time allows the flowmeter to be unaffected by pressure or
temperature changes.
Kit Includes:
Converter w/ adjustable guiderail
Set of 1.81 to 2.75 (46 to 70 mm) clamps
Set of 2 to 5 (51 to 127 mm) clamps
Set of small pipe adaptor circle clamps
Set of small pipe adaptor V clamps
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean water with <3% by volume of particulate content.
Range: 0.33 to 32.8 ft/s (0.1 to 10 m/s).
Display: Backlit: 3.27 H x 0.74 W (83.1 mm x 18.8 mm), 2 line x 16 characters.
Accuracy: 3% of flow reading for > 0.98 ft/s (> 0.3 m/s).
Power Requirements: 12 to 24 VDC or VAC.
Power Consumption: 7 W max.
Temperature Limits:
Outputs:
Analog: 1 opto-isolated: 4 to 20 mA;
Error current: 3.5 mA;
Pulse: 1 opto-isolated MOSFET relay, 500 mA max, 166 pps max, 200 Hz max.
Enclosure Material: Plastic polycarbonate.
Repeatability: 0.5% of measured value.
Electrical Connections: 16.4 (5 m) cable.
Response Time: < 1 s.
Weight: 2.9 lb (1.315 kg).
ADDITIONALSPECIFICATIONS
Applicable Pipe Material: Steel, copper, or plastic.
Pipe Outside Diameter: 0.98 to 4.62 (24.89 to 117.35 mm).
Applicable Pipe Lining: None.
Pipe Wall Thickness: 0.02 to 0.39 (0.5 to 10 mm).
Model UFM-1, Compact Ultrasonic Flowmeter
OPTION
217
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
APPLICATIONS
Flow measurement for heat metering
Chilled water metering and monitoring
Potable water metering and monitoring
Process water metering and monitoring
3/4
[18.95]
FLOW
Model UFM Compact Ultrasonic Flowmeter is a low cost clamp-on, ultrasonic

flowmeter. The Model UFM implements the transit-time difference to measure flow rates
in pipes non-invasively. It is a compact and lightweight design, featuring an easily installed,
all in one clamp-on unit. This unit can measure velocity and flow in pipes with outside
diameters ranging from 0.98 to 4.62 (24.89 to 117.35 mm). The screen offers easy to read
text with a convenient backlight for visual comfort. This model comes with a volume pulse
and 4 to 20 mA flow rate output.
31/32
[24.45]
218_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:58 PM Page 218
Series
PUX2
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converter

Data Logging and BTU Capability
PUX2 Without Printer
2-9/16
[65.00]
4-23/32
[120.00]
4X M4X5
DOWNSTREAM
SENSOR
UPSTREAM
SENSOR
8-17/64
[210.00]
ANALOG
INPUT/OUTPUT
DC POWER
INPUT
12-19/32
[320.00]
REMOVABLE COVER
VIEW UNDER REMOVABLE COVER
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic, Portable
FLOW
SD SLOT USB PORT LCD

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
PUX2-PR With Printer

The Series PUX2 Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Converters are paired with
Series PSX2 sensors in order to utilize the transit-time difference for measuring flow rates
in pipes from the outside. It is a compact and lightweight instrument incorporating the
latest electronics and digital signal processing technologies, realizing high performance
and easy operation. This device is designed for high accuracy and high-speed response.
This portable unit is capable of 12 hours of continuous operation with its built-in battery,
which requires only 3 hours to recharge. The rugged NEMA 3X (IP54) enclosure allows
the PUX2 to be exposed to rain, while the efficient layout of the function keys aid the user
with easy page selection and setting changes. The built in USB port allows for easy
connection to a personal computer.
FEATURES
SD memory card slot for recording data
USB port for easy PC connection
High accuracy
Large type color graphic LCD
Flow rate, flow velocity, and flow totalization functions
Thermal flow rate (BTU) function with two temperature inputs perfect for energy
audits
Portable Ultrasonic
Model
Flowmeter Converter
PUX2
Converter
PUX2-PR
Converter with Printer
Unit includes 5 m coaxial cable for use with PSX2-A, -B sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogenous liquids (water, sea water, oil, and fluid of unknown velocity)
capable of ultrasonic wave propagation.
Inputs: BNC connector, coaxial cable from flow sensor. Two 4-20 mA DC, or one
4-20 mA DC and one 1 to 5 VDC.
Range: 1 to 105 fps (0.3 to 32 m/s).
Display: LCD 240 x 320 dot (with back light).
Accuracy: 1.0 % of rate.
Power Requirements: 3 V BR2330 lithium metal battery, internal, factory
replaceable and TK7N6384 lithium ion battery (continuous operations time: 12
hours without printer and back light off; recharging time: 3 hours, power adapter
used) installed functional, user replaceable.
Power Consumption: 3W.
Power Adapter: Special type power adapter 90 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Power Failure Backup: Memory backup with lithium battery (effective term, 10
years).
Temperature Limits: Ambient 131F (55C) without printer; 113F (45C) with
printer.
Output: 4 to 20 mA DC, 1 point (load resistance, 0 to 600 ).
Serial Communications: RS-485, 1 point.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3X (IP54) (without printer).
Material: Plastic case.
Weight: 2.2 lb (1 kg) without printer; 2.65 lb (1.2 kg) with printer.
OPTION
For More Details:See Bulletin F-9-PUX2
218
219_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:46 AM Page 219
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detector
Series
PSX2
Compact and Lightweight

SADDLE
SADDLE
SCALE
(MM)
SCALE
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
TWO
ELEMENTS
SCALE
[MM]
SCALE
CONNECTOR
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT
HOLDER
BNC
CONNECTOR
12-19/32
[320]
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
TWO
ELEMENTS
1-7/16
[36]
3-35/64 MAX
[90 MAX]
CURSOR
PSX2-B Small
2-1/16
[52.5] Diameter Sensor
3-1/16
[78]
SADDLE
SPACING
0 13
[0 330]
20-7/8
[530]
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT
HOLDER
LOCK NUT
ELEMENT
HOLDER
CURSOR
1-5/16
[33]
1-1/32
[26]
1-27/64
[36]
3-35/64 MAX
[90 MAX]
2-1/16
[52.5]
1-5/16
[33]
CONNECTOR
21-1/4
[540]
CURSOR
3-5/8
[92]
SCALE
SCALE
[MM]
1-19/64
[33]
3-35/64
[90 MAX]
PSX2-HTHigh
Temperature Sensor
PSX2-A Small Sensor

(Standard)
CABLE
[L=5 METERS]
8-5/64
[205 MAX]
WIRE ROPE
FLOW
2-3/64
[52]
BNC CONNECTOR
2-5/8
[67]
PSX2-D Large Sensor
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-186
A-187
A-188
Model
PSX2-A
PSX2-B
PSX2-D
PSX2-HT
Description
Silicone-based grease acoustic couplant, 3 oz tube
Silicone RTV acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube
Silicone-free acoustic couplant, 4 oz tube
Description
Small Sensor (2 MHz), General Use Structure
Small Diameter Sensor, General Use Structure
Large Sensor, General Use Structure, 5 m Coaxial Cable
High-Temperature Sensor, General Use Structure, 5 m Coaxial Cable
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogenous liquids (water,
sea water, oil, and fluid of unknown
velocity) capable of ultrasonic wave
propagation; Turbidity: 10000 deg.
(mg/L) or less; State of flow: Axissymmetric flow in pipe filled with fluid.
Range: 0 to 105 fps (0 to +32 m/s).
Accuracy: 1.0% of rate, except
PSX2-B: 1.5% of rate.
Response Time: 1 s or less.
Temperature Limits: Ambient 140F
(60C); Fluid Temperature: PSX2-A and
PSX2-B: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
PSX2-D: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C)
PSX2-HT: -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C).
Enclosure Rating: Drip-proof, IP52

(NEMA 5); Large sensor, immersion
proof, IP67 (NEMA 6).
Materials: PSX2-E, PSX2-B, and
PSX2-D: Plastic case, and aluminum
alloy and plastic mounting bracket;
PSX2-HT: 304SS case, and aluminum
alloy and 304SS mounting bracket.
Electrical Connection: Terminal
screws.
Mounting: PSX2-E and PSX2-B:
Plastic cloth belt; PSX2-D:SS wire;
PSX2-HT: SS belt.
Weight: PSX2-E: 1.32 lb (0.6 kg);
PSX2-B: 1.76 lb (0.8 kg); PSX2-D: 3.1
lb (1.4 kg); PSX2-HT: 3.75 lb (1.6 kg).
Flow Pipe Sizes

1.97 to 15.75 in (50 to 400 mm)
0.51 to 3.94 in (13 to 100 mm)
7.87 to 236.22 in (200 to 6000 mm)
1.97 to 15.75 in (50 to 400 mm)
219
Flow Transmitters,
Series PSX2 Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Detectors are paired with Series PUX
and PUX2 converters in order to utilize the transit-time difference for measuring flow rates
in pipes from the outside. It is a compact and lightweight instrument incorporating the
latest electronics and digital signal processing technologies, realizing high performance
and easy operation. Series PSX2 Detectors are non-intrusive clamp-on sensors and are
easy to install, require simple maintenance, and are free from pressure-loss, choking,
corrosion, and leaking.
220_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:30 AM Page 220
Series
PUB &
PUF
Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Kit

Portable, Non-Invasive and Data Logging Option
PUB
10-25/64 [264.00]
1-31/32
[50.00]
6-39/64
[168.00]
FLOW
PUF
Flow Transmitters,

The Series PUB & PUF Portable Ultrasonic Flowmeter Kits utilize the transit-time
difference for measuring flow rates in pipes non-invasively. They are compact and
lightweight instruments incorporating the latest electronics and signal processing
technologies, realizing high performance and easy operation. These devices are perfect for
on-the-go flow monitoring, capable of 20 hours continuous operation with built-in,
rechargeable battery. The PUB comes with a rugged carrying case with molded foam
inserts while the PUF boasts an IP67 rated case to hold and protect all equipment
conveniently. Their screens offer easy to read text with convenient backlight for visual
comfort. The efficient layout of the function keys adds to these units easy to use
programming. These series offer analog as well as a pulsed outputs.
Two sensors are placed on the exterior of the pipe, and each transmits an ultrasonic
pulse through the pipe and fluid to the other. The velocity of the liquid flowing through
the pipes causes the pulse to accelerate or decelerate. The difference in the transit
times of the two pulses is used to calculate the flow rate. The use of transit time
allows the flowmeter to be unaffected by pressure or temperature changes.
APPLICATIONS
Treated water
River water
Sea water
Potable water
Demineralized water
Glycol/water mix
Hydraulic system
Diesel oil
Kit Includes:
Converter
Set of transducers
Transducer holders
Set transducer cables (6.56 ft (2 m))
4 to 20 mA communication cables
12 VDC power supply
Set of chains
Ruled guide rail
Test block
Carrying case
Standard Version
Pipe DiameterRange
Model
0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
PUB-10
2 to 78 (50 to 2000 mm)
PUB-20
Data Logging Version
Pipe SizeRange
Model
0.5 to 78 (13 to 2000 mm)
PUF-1001
0.5 to 4.5 (13 to 115 mm)
PUF-1002
2 to 78 (50 to 2000 mm)
PUF-1003
220
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Homogeneous liquids that do not contain air bubbles capable of ultrasonic
wave propagation.
Inputs: Lemo connector cable from sensors.
Range: 0.33 to 65.62 ft/s (0.1 to 20 m/s).
Display: 240 x 64 pixel graphic display, high contrast black on white with backlight;
Languages: English, French, German, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,
Russian, Norwegian, and Dutch; 5.2 W x 1.5 H.
Accuracy:
0.5 to 2% of flow reading for flow rate > 0.66 ft/s (0.2 m/s) and pipe ID > 2.95 in
(75 mm);
3% of flow reading for flow rate > 0.66 ft/s (0.2 m/s) and pipe ID in range 0.512 to
2.95 (13 to 75 mm);
6% of flow reading for flow rate < 0.66 ft/s (0.2 m/s).
Power Requirements: 9 to 24 VDC, (1) 5-Cell NiMH battery, internal, factory
replaceable (continuous operation time: 20 hours with back-light and output off)
(recharging time: 6.5 hours, power adapter used).
Power Adapter: 110/240 VAC adapter. UK,US, European adapters included.
Outputs:
Analog:
1 opto-isolated output: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 16 mA or 0 to 20 mA (selectable);
Error current: 0 to 26 mA (selectable);
Pulse:
1 opto-isolated MOSFET relay, 150 mA max, 500 pps max, 200 Hz max.
Serial Communications:USB; RS-232 (PUF only).
Enclosure Rating: Converter: IP54; Transducers: IP51.
Materials: Flame retardant injection molded ABS plastic.
Repeatability: 0.5 % of measured value or 0.066 ft/s (0.02 m/s).
Electrical Connections: Multi-pin Lemo plugs.
Turbidity: < 3% by volume of particulate content.
Permissible Air Content: < 3% by volume.
Weight:
Unit without accessories: 2.3 lb (1.06 kg);
Unit with accessories in carrying case: 13.23 lb (6.0 kg).
Applicable Pipe Material: Carbon steel, SS, copper, UPVC/PVDF, concrete,
galvanized steel, mild steel, glass, brass.
Applicable Pipe Lining: Rubber, glass, concrete, epoxy, steel, other*.
Pipe Wall Thickness: 0.04 to 3 (1 to 75 mm).
Pipe Lining Thickness: < 1 (< 25 mm).
*Selectable option for special material with known propagation rate of the lining
material.
OPTION
221_Layout 1 7/24/14 11:52 AM Page 221
Model
UTG
Ultrasonic Thickness Gage

Ideal For Use with Ultrasonic Flow Transmitters, Adjustable Sound Velocity
CAL.
2-7/16
[62.00]
SELECT
mm
inch
VEL.
2-23/64
[60.00]
UTC
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS GAUGE
4-23/32
[120.00]
1-3/16
[30.00]
The compact Model UTG Ultrasonic Thickness Gage can measure the thickness of a
variety of materials. The UTG has a wide range of applications including industrial,
automotive, HVAC, and plumbing. The UTG reads in inches or millimeters and features
an adjustable sound velocity to allow for an array of materials to be measured. The UTG is
useful when using any pipe-mount ultrasonic transmitter. The UTG allows the user to find
the wall thickness of the pipe when programming an ultrasonic transmitter without cutting
or removing a section of the pipe to measure it. The UTG is also great for monitoring
corrosion in closed vessels such as boilers and chemical tanks.
Model UTG, Ultrasonic Thickness Gage
Sound Velocity: 1118 to 20132 mph

(500 to 9000 m/s).
50C).
Humidity Limit: < 80%.
Display: 4 digits, 0.394 (10 mm) LCD.
Power Requirement: (4) 1.5 V AAA
alkaline batteries, not included, user
replaceable.
Weight: 5.78 oz (164 g).
Ultrasonic Flow Transmitter
FLOW
Series
ULF
SPECIFICATIONS:
Service: Steel, cast iron, aluminum, red
copper, brass, zinc, quartz glass,
polyethylene, PVC, gray cast iron,
nodular cast iron, other. Selectable
option for special materials with known
sound propagation rate.
Range: 0.047 to 7.874 (1.2 to 200
mm).
Accuracy: 0.5%.
Resolution: 0.001 / 0.1 mm.
Integrated LCD Display, Non-Contact Level Sensing for Open Channel Flow
4-7/32
[107.0]
1-15/32
[37.0]
1-3/16
[30.0]
35
1/2 NPT CONDUIT OPENING

[ULF-XX-XXN]
Flow Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
7-5/8
[194.0]
13/32
[10.0]
PG9 CABLE GLAND

[ULF-XX-XXL]
2 NPT
OR 2 BSP
2-9/16
[65.0]
3-3/4
[95.0]
1 [25.1]
2-5/32
[55.0]
The Series ULF is an ultrasonic continuous flow measurement transmitter perfect for
maintenance free, non-contact measurement of open channels. This series operates on
ultrasonic technology and offers dependable, highly accurate measurements. The ULF
features easy programming with a 4 digit LCD screen and a simple menu format. It is
perfect for direct installation over flumes and weirs and compensates for virtually all
environmental conditions such as vapors, gases, temperature variations, and wind. The
weatherproof NEMA 4 body makes this unit ideal for any flow measurement situation.
FEATURES
High accuracy (0.25% of max. range)
Automatic ambient temperature compensation
ABS & UV resistant body
Programmed with standard weir and flume sizes
Model
Description
ULF-01-KFN Ultrasonic FlowTransmitter Short Range
ULF-02-KFN Ultrasonic Flow Transmitter Standard Range
Max. Range
16.4 ft (5 m)
49.2 ft (15 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Sensor: Polypropylene;
Acoustic window: ECTFE.
Ranges:
ULF-X1-XXX: 0.82 to 16.4 ft
(0.25 to 5 m).
ULF-X2-XXX: 1.96 to 49.2 ft
(0.6 to 15 m).
Accuracy: 0.25% of max. range (at
20C).
Resolution: 0.04 (1 mm).
Blind Zone:
ULF-X1-XXX: 0.8 ft (.25 m);
ULF-X2-XXX: 1.96 ft (0.6 m).
Beam Angle: 5 @ 3 db point.
to 70C).
Temperature Compensation:
Automatic.
Pressure Limits: 13.5 to 30 psi (0.9 to
2 bar).

Loop Resistance: Max. 727 @ 28
VDC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT, cable
gland (optional).
Process Connection: 2 NPT, 1/2
BSP (optional).
Enclosure: Plastic enclosure: ABS &
UV resistant body.
Failsafe: 3 min delay before
transmission of an error signal.
Memory: Non-volatile.
Units: ft, m (optional).
Programming: 4 button.
221
222_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:39 AM Page 222
Model
RVM
Portable Radar Wave Velocity Meter

Non-Contact Measurement, Handheld Meter, Angle Compensation
3
[76.3]
SEL
MENU
RCL
PWR
MODE
10
[250.8]
FLOW
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model RVM Portable Radar Wave Velocity Meter uses Doppler Radar
technology to accurately measure surface velocity of open channel flow. The point-andshoot design along with automatic vertical angle compensation provides easy to use
operation. Model RVM also has user-adjustable horizontal angle compensation of 5
increments to further reduce measurement error. Flow velocity can be measured bidirectionally with user-selectable directional modes (flows away, towards, or in both
directions). Model RVM features a backlit LCD that indicates flow velocity in feet per
second or meters per second. Model RVM includes the meter, rechargeable batteries, 12
VDC car charger, and a rugged case.
Flow Sensors,
Portable
FEATURES
High accuracy
Doppler radar technology
Works with shallow flow depths
Field rechargeable
APPLICATIONS
Sewer systems
Water systems
Rivers
Streams
Hydrologic systems
Model RVM, PortableRadar Wave Velocity Meter
ACCESSORY
A-RVM-CC, RS-232 Communication Cable
222
3-3/4
[95.0]
2-1/4
[59.0]
SPECIFICATIONS:
Service: Water.
Range: 0.1 to 43 fps (0.3 to 13 m/s).
Display: Single-line, 5-digit, backlit LCD.
Accuracy: 5%.
Power Requirements: 6.1 to 8 VDC, (6) 1.2 V AA NiMH batteries, installed
functional, user replaceable (12 VDC lighter plug power cable included).
Power Consumption: 0.18 A max.
Serial Communications: RS232 (with purchase of A-RVM-CC).
Humidity Limit: 90% RH @ 98.6F (37C).
Enclosure Material: ABS polycarbonate blend.
Angle Compensation: Vertical: automatic via tilt sensor; Horizontal: adjustable
from 0 to 45 in 5 increments for cosine angle error.
Weight: 2.1 lb (907 g).
223_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:40 AM Page 223
Series
DMF
Digital Mass Flow Controllers

Programmable, RS485 Interface, Up To 500 psig, 1% Accuracy
6-5/8
[167.13]
1 7/8
[47.75]
3/4
[17.53]
5 1/4
[133.86]
3/4
[17.53]
2 7/8
[74.42]
6-32
FOR FLOW 15 L/M
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean gases compatible with wetted parts.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS, fluoroelastomer O-rings.
Accuracy: 1% FS including linearity between 59 to 77F (15 to 25C) and 10 to
60 psia (0.7 to 4 bar); 2% FS from 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) and 5 to 150 psia
(0.3 to 10 bar).
Response Time: 0.6 to 1.0 second to within 2% of setpoint over 20% to 100%
FS.
Output: Linear 0-5 VDC (2000 min. load impedance); 0-10 VDC (4000 min.
load impedance).
Maximum Particulate Size: 100 microns.
Power Supply: 15 VDC; 13.5 watts maximum.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fitting for flow rates 50 L/m; 3/8 for
flows 60 L/m.
Computer Interface: RS-485.
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
Model*
Range
Model*
Range
DMF-41401 0 to 10 sccm DMF-41408 0 to 2 L/min
DMF-41407 0 to 1 L/min
*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of
nitrogen at 70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
2 3/4
6-32
[68.33]
*FOR FLOW 50 L/M
1 1/2
[38.10]
ACCESSORIES
Model DMF-110P, 110V power supply with 25-pin connector
Model DMF-220PE, 220V power supply with 25-pin connector
Model DMF-CBL1, 6 cable with branch to separate power supply
Model DMF-CBL2, 6 cable with branch to computer port
FLOW
Program, record, analyze, and control flow rates of various gases with Series DMF
Digital Mass Flow Controller. Controllers are designed with straight tube sensors with
restrictor flow elements to ensure laminar gas flow for accurate and repeatable results.
Series DMF are unaffected by temperature and pressure variations.
Controllers can be programmed for various control functions including flow set point,
totalizer, stop totalizer, totalize from preset flow, stop and preset total, auto zero, and more.
Auto zero feature utilizes an automatic balancing circuit that virtually eliminates drift of
zero and span. In addition, Series DMF controllers have two dry contact closures to operate
pumps, valves, or other process equipment.
The Series DMF features an auto tune function to optimize control response for a specific
gas under actual process conditions. Self diagnostic tests are run at power up to ensure
the controller is in optimum working condition. Calibration information for up to 10 gases
and conversion factors for up to 256 different gases are stored in memory. High and low
gas flow alarm limits are programmed via RS-485 interface. Software supports
programmable flow modes, allowing execution of custom programming of up to ten steps.
5 5/8 or 5 7/8*
[143.51]
6 1/4
[157.23]
223
224_Layout 1 7/16/14 11:28 AM Page 224
Series
GFM2
Gas Mass Flow Meter

1% FS, Programmable Relays
1-1/8
[28.70]
3-5/32 [80.16]
[DISPLAY]
4-29/64
[112.97]
MASS FLOW METER

SERIES GFM2A
FLOW
PROCESS CONNECTION
[COMPRESSION FITTINGS ATTACHED]
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
FLOW
5-5/16 [134.88]
The Series GFM2 Gas Mass Flow Meter is an ideal choice for the
measurement of flow rates of a wide variety of gases. GFM2 utilizes a straight
tube sensor with a restrictor flow element to provide a high 1% FS accuracy
and 0.25% FS repeatability.
Gas flow can be displayed in 23 different engineering units on an optional
2x16 character LCD display. Digital RS-232 or RS-485 interfaces allow for
easy communication and for multi-drop capability of up to 256 units (RS-485
only). Additionally, this user-friendly interface allows for the programming
of high and low gas flow alarms, along with two electromechanical SPDT
relays with latch options. Stores calibration information for up to 10 different
gases, internal or user-specific K-factors. Comes standard with support
software for programming the various parameters of the GFM2. With self
diagnostics run at start up and a pressure limit of up to 500 psi (34.5 bar),
the GFM2 is the optimal choice for many flow measurement application. The
GFM2 includes a NIST traceable certificate.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: GFM2-X-X-A: Anodized aluminum, brass, 316 SS
fluoroelastomer O-rings; GFM2-X-X-S: 316 SS, and fluoroelastomer
O-rings; Buna-N, EPR and PTFE O-rings optional.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Response Time: 2 seconds to within 2% of actual flow.
Output Signal: Linear 0 to 5 VDC (3000 min. load impedance) and
4 to 20 mA (500 max. loop resistance).
Relay Rating: 1 amp @ 24 VDC.
Max. Particulate Size: 5 microns.
Power Supply: 11 to 26 VDC.
Process Connections: 1/8 compression fitting for flow rates 10
L/min; 1/4 for 50 L/min; 3/8 for 100 L/min.
Display: 2 x 16 character LCD (optional).
Leak Integrity: 1 x 10-9 smL/sec of helium.
Weight: 1.05 lb (0.48 kg).
FEATURES
Programmable totalizer indicates total gas quantity.
High and low gas flow alarm limits with preset delay interval.
Two sets of user-programmable electromechanical SPDT relays
with latch option.
User-selectable analog 0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA outputs.
Internal conversion factors for up to 32 gases.
Digital interface (RS-232 / RS-485, Profibus DP available).
Automatic sensor zero offset adjustment (via digital interface or
local push button).
Self-diagnostic tests.
ACCESSORY
A-110NA12, 110 VAC Power Supply, 12 VDC with Communication
Interface Branch
224
Example GFM2 AIR 010 A V A N A 2

Series
GFM2
Specialty
AIR
Gas &
AR
K-Factor
C2H2
C3H8
C4H10
CH4
CO
CO2
HF
HE
H2
N2
NH3
O2
SO2
Body
010
Size
050
100
Body
A
Material
S
Seal
Material
Fittings
Display
V
B
E
T
A
B
D
N
L
Output
Signal
Digital
Interface
Specify flow range

at time of order:
Flow Ranges
ml/min l/min
10
2
20
5
50
10
100
20
200
30
500
40
1000
50
60
80
100
A
B
2
5
9
GFM2-AIR-010-A-V-A-N-A-2
Gas Mass Flow Meter
Air 1.0000
Argon 1.4573
Acetylene 0.5829
Propane 0.3500
Butane 0.2631
Methane 0.7175
Carbon Monoxide 1.0000
Carbon Dioxide 0.7382
Hydrogen Fluoride 0.9998
Helium 1.4540
Hydrogen 1.0106
Nitrogen 1.0000
Ammonia 0.7310
Oxygen 0.9926
Sulfur Dioxide 0.6900
Low Flow
Medium Flow
High Flow
Aluminum
Stainless Steel: Body Size = 010
Body Size = 050
Body Size = 100
Fluoroelastomer
Buna-N
EPR
PTFE
1/8 Compression (Low)
1/4 Compression (Medium)
3/8 Compression (High)
No Display
LED Display
0 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mA
RS232
RS485
PROFIBUS
Maximum flow range per body size for the

given gases:
Body Max Flow Range (l/min)
Size AIR AR C2H2 C3H8 C4H10 CH4 CO
2
2
5
010 10 10 5
10
5
30 50
050 50 50 20 10
20
60 100
100 100 100 50 30
Body
Size
010
050
100
Max Flow Range (l/min)

CO2 HE H2
N2
NH3
5
10
5
10 10
30 50 50
50
30
60 100 100 100 60
O2
10
50
80
SO2
5
30
60
225_Layout 1 7/16/14 11:40 AM Page 225
Series
GFM3
Gas Mass Flow Meter

Flow Monitoring, Push-Button Configuration
1-21/32
[42.16]
4-1/4 [107.87]
GFM3
5-1/4
[133.60]
PROCESS CONNECTIONS
WITH COMPRESSION
FITTINGS ATTACHED
FLOW
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
FLOW
3/4
[19.30]
1-11/32
[34.29]
1-1/2
[38.10]
FEATURES
Multi-drop capability of up to 256 units (for RS-485 option).
Programmable 12 digit totalizer indicates total gas volume.
Four button keypad and large 128x64 graphical LCD with backlight.
Automatic zero adjustment.
Self diagnostic tests.
Free communication software available for download at
www.dwyer-inst.com
B 2
A
B
G
2
5
9
GFM3-AIR-010-5-E-B-L-B-2
Gas Mass Flow Meter
Air 1.0000
Argon 1.4573
Acetylene 0.5829
Propane 0.3500
Butane 0.2631
Methane 0.7175
Helium 1.4540
Hydrogen 1.0106
Nitrogen 1.0000
Ammonia 0.7310
Oxygen 0.9926
Low Flow
Medium Flow
High Flow
15 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
Fluoroelastomer
Buna-N
EPR
PTFE
No Display
LED Display
0 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 VDC
RS232
RS485
PROFIBUS
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS; Fluoroelastomer, Buna-N, EPR or
PTFE O-rings.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Response Time: 0.6 to 1.0 s to within 2% of setpoint over 20 to 100% FS.
Output Signal: Linear 0 to 5 VDC (3000 min. load impedance); 0 to 10
VDC (6000 min. load impedance); 4 to 20 mA (500 max. loop
resistance).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); Dry Gases: 14 to
122F (-10 to 50C).
Power Supply: 12 VDC; 15 VDC; 24 VDC.
Process Connections: 1/8 compression fitting for flow rates
10 L/min; 1/4 for 50 L/min; 3/8 for 100 L/min.
Pressure Limits: 500 psia (35 bar).
Display: 128 x 64 graphic LCD with backlight.
Example GFM3 AIR 010 5 E B L

Series
GFM3
Specialty
AIR
Gas &
AR
K-Factor
C2H2
C3H8
C4H10
CH4
CO
CO2
HF
HE
H2
N2
NH3
O2
SO2
Body
010
Size
050
100
Power
5
Supply
2
4
Seal
V
Material
B
E
T
Fittings
A
B
D
Display
N
L
Flow
Output
Signal
Digital
Interface
2
[51.05]
FLOW
measurement of flow rates of a wide variety of gases. This digital flow meter
features a 12-digit totalizer for total gas volume indication, and is available in the
choice of 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signals. Standard LCD
and four button keypad allows easy access to the many features of the GFM3. Digital
interface operates through available RS-485 or RS-232, providing access to internal
data parameters and multi-drop capability of up to 255 units (RS-485 only). Set
alarms remotely via digital interface for flow to alert user of high or low thresholds
being exceeded. With a high 1% FS accuracy and 0.25% FS repeatability, the
GFM3 is the optimal choice in gas flow metering and monitoring. The GFM3 comes
with a NIST traceable certificate.
5-1/4 [133.10]
6-3/4 [171.70]
Note: Specify flow range at time of order
ACCESSORIES
A-110N12, 110 VAC Power Supply, 12 VDC Standard Interface
A-110NA15, 110 VAC Power Supply, 15 VDC Standard Interface
Flow Range Chart: See page 224 (Series GFM2)

Max Flow RangeChart(per body size for the given gases): See page 224 (Series GFM2)
225
226_Layout 1 7/16/14 11:38 AM Page 226
Series
GFM4
Gas Mass Flow Meter

Pressure, Temperature and Flow Monitoring
1-21/32
[42.16]
GFM4
5-1/4
[133.60]
2X PROCESS CONNECTIONS
WITH COMPRESSION
FITTINGS ATTACHED
FLOW
FLOW
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
3/4
[19.30]
1-11/32
[34.29]
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
FLOW
1-1/2
[38.10]
measurement of flow rates of a wide variety of gases. This multi parameter flow
meter supports various functions such as flow totalizer, flow, temperature, and
pressure alarms, and is available in a choice of 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, or 4 to
20 mA output signals. Standard LCD and four button keypad allows easy access
to the many features of the GFM4. Digital interface operates through available
RS-485 or RS-232, providing access to internal data parameters and multi-drop
capability of up to 255 units (RS-485 only). Set alarms remotely via digital
interface for flow, pressure, and temperature to alert user of high or low
thresholds being exceeded. With a high 1% FS accuracy and 0.25% FS
repeatability, the GFM4 is the optimal choice in gas flow metering and
monitoring. The GFM4 comes with a NIST traceable certificate.
GFM4 AIR 010 5 V A N A C 2

GFM4
AIR
AR
C2H2
C3H8
C4H10
CH4
CO
CO2
HF
HE
H2
N2
NH3
O2
SO2
Body
010
Size
050
100
Power
5
Supply
2
4
Seal
V
Material
B
E
T
A
Fittings
B
D
Display
N
L
Flow Output
A
Signal
B
G
Temperature
A
& Pressure
B
Output
C
Signal
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Digital
2
Interface
5
9
Example
Series
Specialty
Gas &
K-Factor
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 416 SS; Fluoroelastomer, Buna-N, EPR or
PTFE O-rings.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Response Time: 0.6 to 1.0 s to within 2% of setpoint over 20 to 100%
FS.
Output Signal: Linear 0 to 5 VDC (3000 min. load impedance); 0 to 10
VDC (6000 min. load impedance); 4 to 20 mA (500 max loop
resistance).
Max Particulate Size: 5 microns.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); Dry Gases: 14 to
122F (-10 to 50C).
Power Supply: 12 VDC; 15 VDC; 24 VDC.
Process Connections: 1/8 compression fitting for flow rates 10 L/min;
1/4 for 50 L/min; 3/8 for 100 L/min.
Pressure Limits: 200 psia (13.79 barA).
Display: 128 x 64 graphic LCD with backlight.
FEATURES
Multi-drop capability of up to 256 units (for RS-485 option).
Programmable 12 digit totalizer indicates total gas volume.
Flow alarm limits for high and low gas flow with relay output.
Pressure alarm limits for high and low gas pressure with relay output.
Four button keypad and large 128x64 graphical LCD with backlight.
Automatic zero adjustment.
Self diagnostic tests.
Free communication software available at www.dwyer-inst.com.
ACCESSORIES
A-110NA15, 110 VAC Power Supply, 15 VDC Standard Interface
5-1/4 [133.10]
6-3/4 [171.70]
2
[51.05]
GFM4-AIR-010-5-V-A-N-A-C-2
Gas Mass Flow Meter
Air 1.0000
Argon 1.4573
Acetylene 0.5829
Propane 0.3500
Butane 0.2631
Methane 0.7175
Helium 1.4540
Hydrogen 1.0106
Nitrogen 1.0000
Ammonia 0.7310
Oxygen 0.9926
Low Flow
Medium Flow
High Flow
15 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
Fluoroelastomer
Buna-N
EPR
PTFE
No Display
LED Display
0 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 VDC
N.A/N.A
0 to 5 VDC/0 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA/0 to 5 VDC
4 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA/0 to 10 VDC
0 to 10 VDC/4 to 20 mA
RS232
RS485
PROFIBUS
Note: Specify flow range at time of order
Flow Range Chart: See page 224 (Series GFM2)

Max Flow RangeChart(per body size for the given gases): See page 224 (Series GFM2)
226
227_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:43 AM Page 227
Series
GFC
Gas Mass Flow Controllers

Flow Range Up to 1000 L/min, Pressures Up to 500 psi, NIST Traceable
3
[76.20]
5-37/64
[141.86]
MASS
FLOW CONTROLLER
SERIES GFC
FLOW
1-3/4
[44.55]
1-1/8
[28.58]
3-9/16
[90.42]
5-31/32
[151.77]
Model GFC-1101 Thru GFC-1111

& GFC-2101 Thru GFC-2111
7 21/64 [186.18]
6-32 2-11/16
[68.33]
3
3-11/64
[76.20]1.437
[80.65]
Process Connector
Flow Range Aluminum SS
Compression Fitting
0-10 mL/m
GFC-1101* GFC-2101* 1/4
0-20 mL/m
GFC-1102* GFC-2102* 1/4
0-50 mL/m
GFC-1103* GFC-2103* 1/4
0-100 mL/m
GFC-1104* GFC-2104* 1/4
0-200 mL/m
GFC-1105* GFC-2105* 1/4
0-500 mL/m
GFC-1106* GFC-2106* 1/4
0-1000 mL/m GFC-1107* GFC-2107* 1/4

0-2 L/min
GFC-1108* GFC-2108* 1/4
0-5 L/min
GFC-1109* GFC-2109* 1/4
0-15 L/min
GFC-1111*
0-30 L/min
GFC-1131* GFC-2131* 1/4
0-50 L/min
GFC-1133* GFC-2133* 1/4
0-100 L/min
GFC-1142* GFC-2142* 3/8
0-200 L/min
GFC-1143* GFC-2143* 3/8
0-500 L/min
GFC-1144* GFC-2144* 1/2
MASS
FLOW CONTROLLER
SERIES GFC
FLOW
1-17/64
[32.00]
7-19/64
[185.42]
3-1/8
[79.38]
1-17/64
[32.00]

SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
GFC-1XXX: Anodized aluminum, brass, 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O-rings;
GFC-2XXX: 316 SS and fluoroelastomer O-rings.
Accuracy: 1.5% FS including linearity over 59 to 77F (5 to 25C) and 5 to 60
psia (0.35 to 4 bar).
Response Time: 2 s to within 2% of actual flow.
Output: Linear 0 to 5 VDC and 4 to 20 mA.
Power Supply: 12 VDC.
Process Connections: 1/4 compression fitting for flow rates 50 L/m; 3/8 for
100 and 200 L/m; 1/2 for 500 L/min; 3/4 for 1000 L/min.
Display: 90 tiltable, 3-1/2 digit.
ACCESSORIES
For Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers
Model GFC-110P, 110V Power Supply
Model GFC-220PE, 220V Power Supply
Model GFC-CBL1, 8 cable with 15-pin connector
Model GFC-CBL3, 3 extension cable for LCD readout
GFC-2111* 1/4
0-1000 L/min GFC-1145* GFC-2145* 3/4

*Specified flow ranges are for an equivalent flow of nitrogen at
70F (21C) @ 760 mm Hg.
227
Mass Flowmeters/
Controllers
Model
Model GFC-1140 Thru

GFC-1142 & GFC-2140
Thru GFC-2142
FLOW
Series GFC Gas Mass Flow Controllers combine a straight tube sensor with a
restrictor flow element to provide high accuracy and repeatability. Gas mass flow
controllers utilize an electromagnetic valve and PID electronics to maintain continuous
control by comparing measured sensor signal set to flow rates. Setpoints can be adjusted
with local potentiometers or remotely via 0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA analog signal. Flow
rates are virtually unaffected by temperature and pressure variations. Actual gas flow is
displayed in engineering units on a 3-digit, 90 tiltable LCD readout.Units can be used with
Series GFT Flow Totalizer for applications requiring totalization. Series GFC includes a
NIST traceable certificate.
1-1/4
[31.75]
11/16
[17.53]
2 11/16
[68.33]
1-1/8
1-3/4 [28.58]
1-1/2
[44.55]
[38.10]
4-35/64
[115.57]
4
[101.60]
1-1/8
[28.58]
7 21/64 [186.18]
11/16
[17.53]
6-32
4
[101.60]
3-15/16
[99.95]
MASS
FLOW CONTROLLER
SERIES GFC
FLOW
1
[25.40]
6-19/64
[159.77]
1-3/4
[44.55]
3
[76.20]
228_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:43 AM Page 228
Model
TM2
Flow Totalizer
Pulse Input, 8-digit LCD Display
1-1/4
[28.58]
2-61/64
[75.18]
1-1/2
[38.89]
1-9/16
[40.09]
TR
RST
Recommended Panel Cutout: 2-43/64 [67.87] x 1-19/64 [32.94]

Monitor flow rate or total flow with Model TM2 Flow Totalizer. Unit features a four
digit flow rate display and an eight digit totalizing display with a programmable, five
position decimal point. Easily toggle between rate and total with front-panel push-button.
Use scaling factor to define flow rate in engineering units such as ml/min, l/min, or gal/hr.
Model TM2
FLOW
ACCESSORY
TM25, Replacement battery for Series TM2
Series
GFT2
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 7.5 VDC max. pulse.
Accuracy: 0.2%.
Input Impedance: 27 k at 3 VDC.
Totalizer Type: Up count.
Rate Indication Type: Frequency.
Count Input Speed: 10 kHz @ 50% duty cycle.
Totalizing Range: 0.0001 to 100.0000 (five position decimal point).
Rate Indication Range: 0.001 to 9999 (five position decimal point).
Update Time: 0.7 s.
Display: 8-digit LCD, 7/16 H.
Housing Material: ABS X-17.
Power Requirements: 3 V lithium metal battery, installed non-functional, user
replaceable.
Average Battery Life: Approximately 5 years.
Weight: 1 Ib (0.5 kg).
Flow Totalizer
Graphic LCD, Digital RS-232 or RS-485 Interface
Flowmeters,
Totalizers
GFT2
FLOW TOTALIZER
INPUT/OUTPUT
STATUS
3-13/32
[86.36]
9-PIN FEMALE
I/O PORT
47/64
[18.8]
The Series GFT2 Flow Totalizer is a microcontroller driven device designed to linearize
the flow meter and controller flow curve plus display the instantaneous flow rate, total,
and accumulated total. The totalizer is intended to be used with analog flow meters and
controllers with analog 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA interface. RS-232 or RS485 digital interface is available.
FEATURES
Up to 47 different volumetric and mass flow engineering units (including userdefined)
User adjustable LCD back light and contrast level
Compact design for unit mount, panel mount, wall mount, or field mount
applications
Low and high flow alarms with programmable action delay
Free configuration and mounting utility software
0.51 (13 mm) LCD digits for flow rate, and 0.21 (5.5 mm) digits for total
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Analog Range: 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA.
Accuracy: 0.1% FS.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C).
Power Supply: 12 to 26 VDC.
Weight: 0.3 lb (125 g).
Model
GFT2-05-RS232
GFT2-10-RS232
GFT2-15-RS232
GFT2-05-RS485
GFT2-10-RS485
GFT2-15-RS485
Model
GFT2-20C
A-645
A-646
228
3
[76.2]
Input
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
4 to 20 mA
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
4 to 20 mA
Serial
Communication
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
Description
Flow controller mounting kit, power supply
Flow controller mounting kit, no cables
Flow meter mounting kit, no cables
229_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:44 AM Page 229
Series
RTI
Rate/Total Indicator
Loop Powered, Converts Pulse Frequency to 4 to 20 mA, High/Low Flow Alarm
4-57/64 [124.31]
3-15/16
[99.93]
3-5/8
[92.08]
5
[126.92]
RTI-W
RTI-M
Shown installed on Series EFS2
*Meter sold separately
The Series RTI Rate/Total Indicator is an indicator/transmitter that takes the pulse
output signal from compatible flow meters, displays flow rate and total, and provides
output signals. It is compatible with the Series EFS2, IEFS, PDWS, TBS and FLMG. The
Series RTI can be mounted on either a wall or meter and has an additional panel mount
option. The RTI offers accessory mounting kits making it easy to change the mounting
orientation. It also features high environmental protection with semi-flexible urethane
potted electrical components.
RTI is powered by an external DC voltage and has a pulse and 4 to 20 mA output signal.
Additional options are temper-evidence, non-resettable total, dual relay output, and more.
The RTI is useful anywhere a compatible flow meter is used and flow rate and total are
desired.
APPLICATIONS
Water treatment
Water utility
Industrial chemical handling
RTI-M-DPS
Rate/Total Indicator, Loop-powered
Meter-mounted
Wall-mounted
Panel-mounted
Built-in 115 VAC/12-24 Dual Power Supply
(RTI-W only)
TEV
Tamper-Evident
NRT
Non-resettable Total
VPS
Built-in 115 VAC Power Supply (RTI-W only)
DRO
Dual Relay Output
HDC
Hinged Display Cover (not with DPS or VPS)
The RTI is a Rate/Total Indicator that uses the pulse output from the following
Dwyer flow meters series* and displays flow rate and total.
*Compatible Series: EFS2, IEFS, PDWS, PFT, TBS and FLMG.
2-5/32
[54.92]
3 [76.19]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 5 V pulse or contact closure; 1.0 to 1500 pulses/s.
Output:
Current Sinking Square Wave Pulse:
Scaled pulse output (0.1 s duration
6.1 Hz max. or high alarm output or
low alarm output), sensor passthrough pulse output (un-scaled);
Pulse Output Range: 0.1 to
9999999.9 units/pulse;
Analog: 4 to 20 mA, 24 to 30 VDC.
Power Requirements: 12 to 30 VDC @ 4 mA (4 to 20 mA when loop-powered).
Display: Rate: 6 digits, 1/2 H LCD; Total: 8 digits, 5/16 character height.
K-Factor Range: 0.001 to 99999.999.
Flow Alarm Output Range: 0.01 to 999999.99.
Enclosure MaterialHousing: Die-cast powder-coated aluminum; Faceplate
#HP92W Lexan.
Electrical Connection: Terminal blocks, #22 AWG, 3 conductor 18 (5.5 m) cable
(2000 max.).
Mounting: See model chart.
Stocked Model
RTI-W
Description
Wall-mounted, rate/total indicator, loop powered
MMK, Meter Mounting Kit

WMK, Wall Mounting Kit
Flowmeters,
Totalizers
Blind Analog Transmitter

Converts Pulse Frequency to 4 to 20 mA, Loop Powered
4-15/16 [125.44]
3-5/8
[92.08]
5
[126.92]
BAT-M shown installed on Series

EFS2 meter. Meter sold separately.
BAT-W
The Series BAT Blind Analog Transmitter is a non-indicating, 4 to 20 mA transmitter

for use with the Series EFS2, IEFS, PDWS, TBS and FLMG. The BAT is easy to set up
and can be either wall or meter mounted. It takes a pulse frequency output from the
compatible flow meters and converts it into a continuous 4 to 20 mA analog output signal.
The frequency for the flowmeter output signal can be adjusted using four rotary switches
on the back of the transmitter and a microcontroller automatically scales all other values
accordingly. The microcontroller is also able to average inputs for more stable reading
outputs. The rate for averaging is adjustable and ranges from 2 to 16 seconds. Power for
the BAT is supplied by a current loop, making only 2 wires necessary. This unit features
high environmental protection with semi-flexible urethane potted electrical components.
APPLICATIONS
Telemetry
Data logging
Distributed control systems
Programmable controller
Chart recording
Model
Description
BAT-M
Blind Analog Transmitter, Meter-Mounted*
BAT-W
Blind Analog Transmitter, Wall-Mounted
*Compatible Series:EFS2, IEFS, PDWS, TBS and FLMG.
FLOW
Example RTI M DPS

RTI
Series
M
Mounting
W
P
DPS
Options
Series
BAT
3-15/16
[99.82]
RTI-P
3-15/16
[100.02]
3 [76.19]
PHONE
219-878-8000
FAX
219-872-99057
WEB
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
MADE IN XXXXXX
3-7/8 [98.57]
2-5/32
[54.92]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Open-collector solid state sensor. Averaging: 2, 4, 8, 16 s (DIP switch
selectable); Pulse Frequency: Min. 10 Hz @ 20 mA; Max. 999.9 Hz (rotary DIP
switch selectable).
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Power Requirements: 24 to 36 VDC @ 4 to 20 mA when loop powered.
Response Time: 2 to 60 s; 90% FS (depends on input averaging).
Loop Resistance: 0 to 1300 max.
Enclosure Material: Die-cast powder-coated aluminum.
Electrical Connections: Terminal block.
Mounting: See model chart.
MMK, Meter Mounting Kit
WMK, Wall Mounting Kit
Loop Resistance:See Bulletin F-BAT
229
230_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:46 AM Page 230
Series
FPCA
Flow Power/Controls Accessories

Power Supplies & Mounting Options for Series BAT, RTI, PWD, IPFS, TBS, FLMG,
PDWS, EFS2, IEFS, IPFS
4-15/16 [125.23]
1-15/16
[49.02]
2-13/64
[55.88]
PWC1
PWC2
4-15/16
[125.22]
3-15/64
[82.04]
2-59/64
[74.17]
3/4
[18.93]
2X 1-1/4
[31.69]
Description
Wall to Meter Mounting Kit
Meter to Wall Mounting Kit
Power Converter, Plug-in, 115 VAC, 24 VDC
Dual Power Supply, Plug-in, 115 VAC, 12/24 VDC
Model
SPK
FLOW
Flowmeters,
Accessories
PWC2
MMK
The Series FPCA Flow Power Control Accessories include mounting kits, power
converters, and power supplies for compatible flow meters. These accessories simplify
installation by offering meter and wall mounting options. Furthermore, power input and
supply are no longer an issue with the power converter and dual power supply. The WMK
can be used to mount Series BAT, RTI, or PWD on Series PDWS. The MMK can be used
to mount either Series BAT or RTI to a wall with the use of Series EFS2, IEFS, PDWS,
IPFS, TBS, or FLMG. Model PWC1 can be used with Series PDW, EFS2, or IEFS to
convert 115 VAC to 25 VDC. Model PWC2 can be used with Series EFS2, IEFS, PDWS,
IPFS, and TBS to convert 115 VAC to 12/24 VDC and provide dual power output for use
with Series BAT and RTI.
Model
WMK
MMK
PWC1
PWC2
FAX
219-872-9057
MADE IN: XXXXX
PWC1
WMK
PHONE
219-878-8000
WEB
WWW.DWYER-INST.COM
SPECIFICATIONS
WMK/MMK
Enclosure Material: Die-cast powder-coated aluminum.
Weight:
WMK: 1.25 lb (567 g);
MMK: 1.75 lb (794 g).
PWC1/PWC2
Output: 24 VDC @ 500 mA.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 19 W.
Electrical Connection: 22-18 AWG screw terminal.
Weight: Contact factory.
Solar Panel Kit

Reliable 5 Watt Solar Panel for Remote Applications or Back-Up Power
1
13-7/8
8-7/8
The Model SPK Solar Panel makes it possible to use Dwyer flowmeters in remote
applications where a reliable source of electricity is not available or practical. The SPK is
intended for use with a standard 12 V, 22 to 33 amp-hour sealed lead acid battery (not
included). It comes standard with a charge controller and corrosion-resistant mounting
hardware. The SPK can also be used to provide up to a 40-day back-up power supply for
periods of darkness.
APPLICATIONS
Remote metering applications where electricity is unavailable.
Back-up power supply for uninterrupted operation.
Model SPK, Solar Panel Kit
230
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: 17 V @ 290 mA.
Change Controller: High efficiency PWM regulator with temperature
compensation and built-in lightning protection.
Mounting: Bracket, band clamps and mounting hardware for 1-1/2 to 2 vertical
pipe included.
231_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:47 AM Page 231
Thermometers,
Dial
pages 234-238
Thermometers,
Glass
page 239
Thermometers,
Digital Solar
page 240
Thermometers
with Switch
page 241
Thermometers
with Transmitter
page 242
Temperature/Process
Controllers
pages 243-250
Panel Meters/
Indicators
page 251
Temperature Switches,
Limit
page 252
Digital
pages 253-258
Thermostats
pages 259-260
Mechanical
page 261
Temperature
Transmitters
pages 262-266
Temperature
Sensors
pages 267-285
Temperature
Data Loggers
page 286
TEMPERATURE | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 232-233
231
232_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:47 AM Page 232
Dwyer controllers used within heater controllers.
Environmental chambers have traditionally used separate controls to handle the

temperature and relative humidity control tasks. The Love Controls 32DZ dual zone
control with Love 5000 Series RTD and Dwyer RH Humidity transmitter controls both
parameters in a single small format (1/32 DIN) control to handle both zones,
simplifying wiring and reducing panel costs.
The 32DZ can switch small resistive loads directly or, when used with Dwyer Series
62 solid state relays (not shown), can switch larger loads.
In bioscience laboratories, the preferred methods of temperature control for

experiments are heated water baths. There are experiments where water cannot be
used, so the next feasible option is to send temperature controlled air to the
experiment site. In order to use temperature controlled air, an air heater is needed.
Within this product, a Love Controls temperature controller is used for accurate and
responsive temperature control. The Love Controls controller can adapt to a different
environment through different operating modes such as SELF-TUNE or manual PID
adjustments, or preset PID responses.
Love Controls controllers involved in insulation removal.
Series TS Digital Temperature Switches regulate temperature in

refrigerated and display cases.
TEMPERATURE
Environmental chamber control simplified with dual zone control.
For most wires, removing the insulation is easy, but for magnetic and enamel wires,
removing the insulation is very difficult. One way to easily remove the insulation of
the magnetic or enamel wire is to dip them in a solution of molten fused salts. The
salts are heated to a temperature high enough to melt the salts into a liquid, but not
deteriorate them. This process uses a Love Controls feedback temperature controller.
The Love Controls controller allows the operator to input a desired temperature and
maintain that temperature accurately. The Love Controls controller will also retain the
input temperature after the power is disconnected.
232
When storing food or other perishables in chillers or display cases, temperature must
be carefully regulated to ensure the products remain fresh. If the storage area rises
above the critical preservation temperature, products can have their shelf life
dramatically shortened or be spoiled altogether. A Dwyer Series TSX3 Digital
Temperature Switch will prevent these scenarios by monitoring temperature and
activating refrigeration and defrost cycles to ensure the storage temperature stays
within safe limits.
233_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:48 AM Page 233
Love Controls controllers used in the packaging of condiments.
Form, fill and seal machines traditionally have used separate controls to handle the
temperature control requirement for the side and top/bottom seal bars. The Love
Controls 32DZ with Love 5000 Series thermocouples allows for a single small
format (1/32 DIN) control to handle both zones, simplifying wiring and reducing panel
costs.
The 32DZ can switch small resistive loads directly or, when used with the Love 62
Series solid state relays (not shown), can switch larger loads.
Packaging of condiments require the sealing bars to be heated to a temperature hot

enough to seal the packages, but not destroy the packaging material. The heat on
the sealing bars needs to be controlled to ensure the heat does not become
excessive. Love Controls controllers are used in this process to accurately control
the heat on the sealing bars. The sensors from the Love Controls controllers are
placed on the sealing bars to ensure accurate temperature readings. Should the heat
become excessive, an alarm light on the controller notifies the operator of the
impending conditions.
Resin transfer molding.
Controlling water temperature in outdoor wood furnace.
Accurate control of temperature and epoxy resin flow is important during resin transfer
molding. For the epoxy resin to have an even and thorough flow, the resin must be at
a temperature high enough to allow it to flow, yet not burn the resin. With the help of
a Love Controls controller, the temperature of the resin is accurately controlled under
different conditions through the different PID operating modes. Another Love Controls
controller, with a flow transducer, is used in this process to control the flow of the
epoxy resin. The Love Controls controller provides information on the temperature
and flow rate to the computer through an RS-485 serial communication option.
The Series TSWB is the ideal control for monitoring water temperature and water
level in outdoor wood furnaces. The Series TSWB controls the damper and/or the fan
that provides oxygen to the flame in the fire box. Usually an external light will also be
controlled by the Series TSWB to inform the user that the furnace is out of wood or
that the water level is low. The TSWB accepts thermistor inputs for temperature and
conductivity probe, Dwyer CLP-1, inputs for monitoring water level.
TEMPERATURE
Form, fill and seal machine control simplified with dual zone control.
233
234_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:49 PM Page 234
Series
BT
Bimetal Thermometers
2, 3 or 5 Dial, Dual Scale, 1% FS Accuracy, External Reset
100
150
60
40
1/2 NPT
80
20
50
STEM
LENGTH
100
0
-20
0
120
200
1/2 NPT
250
STEM
LENGTH
HEAD SIZE
Scan here
to watch
product video
Back Connection
Series BT Bimetal Thermometers offer accurate, reliable service even in the toughest
environments. These corrosion resistant units are constructed from stainless steel and are
hermetically sealed to prevent crystal fogging. The bimetal element directly drives pointer,
eliminating gears and linkage. An external reset screw allows field calibration and easy-toread aluminum dial minimizes parallax error. Choose back connection, lower connection or
adjustable angle for easy viewing and installation. Adjustable models can be rotated a full
360 and tilted over a 180 arc. NOTE: When using in pressurized applications, use a
suitable thermowell. Bimetal thermometers are commonly used to measure water
temperature on chillers and boilers.
Temperature
Dial Size,
Model
Stem Length Range, F(C)
BackConnection
BTB22551* 2, 2-1/2
0 to 250
BTB2405D 2, 4
0 to 250 (-20 to 120)
BTB2409D 2, 4
200 to 1000 (100 to 550)
BTB32510D 3, 2-1/2
0 to 200 (-20 to 100)
BTB3255D 3, 2-1/2
0 to 250 (-20 to 120)
BTB3257D 3, 2-1/2
50 to 550 (10 to 290)
BTB34010D 3, 4
0 to 200 (-20 to100)
BTB3405D 3, 4
0 to 250 (-20 to 120)
BTB3407D 3, 4
50 to 550 (10 to 290)
BTB3605D 3, 6
0 to 250 (-20 to 120)
TEMPERATURE
Series
GBT
Degree
Div., F(C)
2
2 (2)
10 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
Adjustable Angle
Connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Series 300 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits: Head: 200F (93C); Stem: Not to exceed 50% over-range or
1000F (538C) or 800F (427C) continuously.
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT on 2 dial size; 1/2 NPT on 3 or 5 dial size.
Stem Diameter: 1/4 OD.
Immersion Depth: Minimum 2 in liquids, 4 in gas.
Dial Size,
Temperature
Model
Stem Length Range, F(C)
Adjustable Angle Connection
BTA54010D 5, 4
0/200 (-20/100)
BTA5405D 5, 4
0/250 (-20/120)
BTA5407D 5, 4
50/550 (10/290)
BTA56010D 5, 6
0/200 (-20/100)
BTA5605D 5, 6
0/250 (-20/120)
BTA5607D 5, 6
50/550 (10/290)
Lower Connection
BTC3255D 3, 2.5
0/250(-20/120)
Degree
Div., F(C)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
2 (2)
2 (2)
5 (5)
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration
certificate, use order code
NISTCAL-TG.
2 (2)
*Model offered in Fahrenheit
scale only.
Glow-in-the-Dark Bimetal Thermometer

Scale Background Glows, Scratch-Resistant Glass Lens
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPT
5-9/32
[134.14]
DIAL
SIZE
1/2 NPT
1
[25.4]
Thermometers,
Dial
Scan here
to watch
product video
13/16
[20.64]
Back Connection
The Series GBT Glow-in-the-Dark Bimetal Thermometer offers accurate and

reliable measurements, even in dimly-lit areas. The bimetal element directly drives the
pointer, eliminating gears and linkages. The scale background glows brightly when
mounted in dark areas for ease of reading. The glass lens can easily be cleaned and resists
scratches for better viewing of the scale. Series GBT thermometers can be ordered in
various stem lengths, connections, and ranges to fit most applications.
Model
GBTB525151
GBTB525161
GBTB52571
GBTB540151
GBTB540161
GBTB54071
GBTB560151
GBTB560161
GBTB56071
GBTB590151
GBTB590161
GBTB59071
Dial Size Connection

5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
5
Back
Range*
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
6
6
6
9
9
9
234
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C).
Dial Size: 5.
Resolution: 2.
Weight: 12.7 oz (360 g).
Model
Dial Size Connection
GBTA525151 5
Adjustable
GBTA525161 5
Adjustable
GBTA52571 5
Adjustable
GBTA540151 5
Adjustable
GBTA540161 5
Adjustable
GBTA54071 5
Adjustable
GBTA560151 5
Adjustable
GBTA560161 5
Adjustable
GBTA56071 5
Adjustable
GBTA590151 5
Adjustable
GBTA590161 5
Adjustable
GBTA59071 5
Adjustable
*Dual scale units available by changing last digit to D. (Example: GBTB5255D)
Adjustable Angle
Connection
Range*
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
0 to 300F
0 to 500F
50 to 550F
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
6
6
6
9
9
9
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate,
use order code NISTCAL-TG.
235_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:49 AM Page 235
Series
BTL
Side Reading Bimetal Thermometer

Horizontally Mounts to Tank
1-11/16
[42.85]
5/16
[7.94]
6-3/16 [157.15]
13/16
[20.64]
1/2-14 NPT
2.750
[69.85]
3
[76.2]
BTLS
1/4
[6.35]
21/64
[12.29]
3 Left-Side Mount VersionShown
13/16
[20.64]
6-3/16 [157.15]
1/2-14 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
BTLR
13/16
[20.64]
HEX
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
4
6
6
2.750
[69.85]
21/64
[12.29]
3 Right-Side Mount VersionShown
Series BTL Side Reading Bimetal Thermometers are a great fit for tight, compact
areas. Series BTL thermometers are constructed from 304 SS and have a scratch resistant
glass lens for easy viewing. These horizontally mounted thermometers face upright to
allow quick and easy measurements. With an accuracy of 1%, the durable Series BTL
thermometers are built to last for many years of great service.
Connection
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
Left-side
1-11/16
[42.85]
5/16
[7.94]
3
[76.2]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Model
BTLS32541
BTLS32571
BTLS3255D
BTLS34041
BTLS34071
BTLS3405D
BTLS36041
BTLS36071
BTLS3605D
13/16
[20.64]
HEX
Range*
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
Model
Connection Stem
BTLR32541 Right-side 2-1/2
BTLR32571 Right-side 2-1/2
BTLR3255D Right-side 2-1/2
BTLR34041 Right-side 4
BTLR3405D Right-side 4
BTLR3605D Right-side 6
Range*
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
-40 to 160F
50 to 500F
0 to 250F/-20 to 120C
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution:Less than 2% of scale.
Weight: 9.2 oz (260 g).
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate,
use order code NISTCAL-TG.
*Dual scale available by changing last

digit to D. (Example:BTLS3254D)
Clip-On Bimetal Thermometer
TEMPERATURE
Series
CBT
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
392F (-40 to 200C).
Fits Any Size Pot, Adjustable Set Point Pointer

CLIP
1-3/4
[45.72]
1/8
[3.81]
1-5/8
[41.56]
1-1/2
[39.37]
STEM LENGTH
The Series CBT Clip-on Thermometers are designed to monitor the temperatures of
products while they are cooking. The Series CBT thermometers give accurate readings by
clipping onto the side of a pot in order to keep the temperature probe away from the bottom
and sides. These thermometers are conveniently available in 11 ranges and two stem
lengths to fit various sized pots or kettles. The Series CBT Clip-on Thermometers are
constructed of durable SS for years of reliable service. The Series CBT can be used when
preparing candies, soups, and deep fried foods.
Model
CBT175041
CBT175051
CBT175061
CBT175071
CBT175052
CBT178041
CBT178051
CBT178061
CBT178071
CBT178052
CBT25041
CBT25051
Dial Size Range*

1-3/4
-40 to 160F
1-3/4
0 to 250F
1-3/4
50 to 300F
1-3/4
50 to 500F
1-3/4
-10 to 110C
1-3/4
-40 to 160F
1-3/4
0 to 250F
1-3/4
50 to 300F
1-3/4
50 to 500F
1-3/4
-10 to 110C
2
-40 to 160F
2
0 to 250F
1/2
[12.70]
3/8
[8.89]
Stem
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
Model
CBT25061
CBT25071
CBT25052
CBT28041
CBT28051
CBT28061
CBT28071
CBT28052
CBT38041
CBT38051
CBT38071
CBT38052
Dial Size Range*

2
50 to 300F
2
50 to 500F
2
-10 to 110C
2
-40 to 160F
2
0 to 250F
2
50 to 300F
2
50 to 500F
2
-10 to 110C
3
-40 to 160F
3
0 to 250F
3
50 to 500F
3
-10 to 110C
Thermometers,
Dial
Scan here
to watch
product video
Clip
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Series 300SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 15 to 300F (-10 to 150C).
Dial Size: 1-3/4, 2, and 3.
Resolution: 2.
Stem
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
*Dual scales available by changing last digit to D.

(Example: CBT17504D)
235
236_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:50 AM Page 236
Series
BTLRN
Long Reach Bimetal Thermometer

Extra-long Stems Reach Remote Areas, Gripping Handle Available
3/4
[19.05]
7/8 HEX
[22.23 HEX]
5-61/64 [151.21]
13/32
[10.32]
3-5/16
[84.14]
2-5/8
[66.68]
1/2 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
9/32
[7.14]
The Series BTLRN Long Reach Bimetal Thermometer reaches areas that other
thermometers cant. The long reach thermometers have available stem lengths from 12
to 72. The large digits on the 3 dial are easy to read. A gripping handle is available as an
accessory to comfortably hold the thermometer during temporary installations. The
Series BTLRN is ideal for large containers and air ducts.
Stem Length
Model
BTLRN312101 12
BTLRN318101 18
BTLRN324101 24
BTLRN336101 36
BTLRN348101 48
BTLRN360101 60
BTLRN372101 72
Range*
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
0 to 200F
Series
BTM3
1-27/64
[36.12]
STEM LENGTH
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Materials: Series 300 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
392F (-40 to 200C).
1/2 NPT
CONNECTION
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution:2F (1C).
ACCESSORY
BTLR-GH, Gripping Handle
*Dual scale units available by
changing last digit to D.
(Example: BTLRN31210D)
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TG.
Maximum/Minimum Bimetal Thermometer

Scratch-Resistant Glass Lens, Max/Min Temperature Pointer
TEMPERATURE
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPT
3-9/32 DIAL
[83.34] SIZE
1
[25.4]
Thermometers,
Dial
Scan here
to watch
product video
13/16
[20.64]
The Series BTM3 Bimetal Thermometer with Maximum/Minimum Temperature

Pointer accurately measures the current temperature along with a maximum read or
minimum read temperatures. Series BTM3 thermometers are conveniently available in
multiple temperature ranges and stem lengths ranging from 2-1/2 to 12. These heavy
duty back-connected thermometers are ideal for any industrial applications such as boilers,
ovens, or refrigerated cabinets.
Model
BTM3254D
BTM32511D
BTM32510D
BTM3256D
BTM3258D
BTM3404D
BTM34011D
BTM34010D
BTM3406D
BTM3408D
BTM3604D
BTM36011D
BTM36010D
Connection Range
Back
-40 to 160F (-40 to 71.1C)
Back
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C)
Back
0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C)
Back
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
Back
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
Back
-40 to 160F (-40 to 71.1C)
Back
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C)
Back
0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C)
Back
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
Back
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
Back
-40 to 160F (-40 to 71.1C)
Back
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C)
Back
0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C)
Stem
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
Model
BTM3606D
BTM3608D
BTM3904D
BTM39011D
BTM39010D
BTM3906D
BTM3908D
BTM3124D
BTM31211D
BTM31210D
BTM3126D
BTM3128D
OPTION
236
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Scratch resistant glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Temperature Limits: Ambient:15 to
300F (-10 to 150C).
Connection Range
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
Back
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
Back
-40 to 160F (-40 to 71.1C)
Back
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C)
Back
0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C)
Back
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
Back
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
Back
-40 to 160F (-40 to 71.1C)
Back
0 to 140F (-17.8 to 60C)
Back
0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C)
Back
50 to 300F (10 to 148.9C)
Back
150 to 750F (65.5 to 398.9C)
Back
Dial Size: 3.
Resolution: 2.
Weight: 7.4 oz (210 g).
Stem
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
237_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:51 AM Page 237
Series
BTPM
Panel Mount Bimetal Stem Thermometer

Front Flange with Back Connection for Easy Mounting
3-21/64
[84.53]
1/4 NPT
1/4
[6.35]
2-1/2
[63.5]
STEM LENGTH
Scan here
to watch
product video
21/32
[16.67]
Series BTPM Panel Mount Bimetal Thermometers are designed to easily mount in
most instrument panels. The front flange has three 5/32 diameter holes to quickly attach
the thermometer to the panel. The Series BTPM thermometer has a 3 dial with a scratch
resistant glass lens. The Series BTPM Panel Mount thermometers are ideal for HVAC,
automotive, and food industry applications, chemical operations, and more.
Model
Range*
Stem Length
BTPM24041 -40 to 160F
4
BTPM240101 0 to 200F
4
BTPM26041 -40 to 160F
6
BTPM260101 0 to 200F
6
BTPM29041 -40 to 160F
9
BTPM290101 0 to 200F
9
*Dual scales available by changing last digit to D.
(Example: BTPM2404D)
Series
BTP
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 1%.
Dial Size: 2-1/2.
Resolution: Less than 2% of scale.
Weight: 9.2 oz (260 g).
Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometer

2-1/32
[51.59]
1-1/16
[26.99]
TEMPERATURE
3 Spring Sizes, Fits Pipe Sizes from 3/4 to 6

33/64
[13.1]
1-3/8
[34.93]
Thermometers,
Dial
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series BTP Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometers are designed to
accurately measure the surface temperature of 3/4 to 6 pipe sizes. The BTP series
includes three spring sizes to securely mount the pipes surface. Pipe Mount thermometers
are perfect for temporary installation and applications that require non-intrusive
temperature measurement.
Model
BTP251
BTP241
BTP261
BTP271
BTP252
BTP262
BTP272
BTP242
Range
-50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
-40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
-18 to 66C
Spring Size
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
3/4 to 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material:Steel.
Lens: Glass.
Accuracy: 2%.
Dial Size: 2.
Mounting: Spring.
Resolution: Less than 4% of scale.
237
238_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:51 AM Page 238
Series
STC
Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometer

Fits Pipe Sizes from 3/4 to 2-3/8, Clip-on Mount
7/64
[2.67]
27/32
[21.44]
1
[25.4]
2
[50.8]
Clip Size
3/4 to 7/8
1 to 1-5/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
Scan here
to watch
product video
Dim. A
1-5/8 [41.28]
1-7/8 [47.63]
2-1/2 [63.5]
TEMPERATURE
The Series STC Pipe-Mount Bimetal Surface Thermometers are designed to

accurately measure the surface temperature of 3/4 to 2-3/8 pipe sizes. The STC series is
available in three different clip sizes and feature a bimetal spiral spring sensing element
that provides quick temperature readings. Pipe mount thermometers are perfect for
temporary installations and applications that require non-intrusive temperature
measurements.
Model
STC151
STC141
STC161
STC152
STC162
STC172
STC351
STC341
STC361
STC371
STC372
STC451
STC441
STC461
STC462
STC472
Range
-50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
-40 to 120C
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
-50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
70 to 500F
20 to 260C
-50 to 250F
0 to 150F
70 to 370F
20 to 180C
20 to 260C
Pipe Size
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
3/4 to 7/8
1 to 1-5/8
1 to 1-5/8
1 to 1-5/8
1 to 1-5/8
1 to 1-5/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
1-5/8 to 2-3/8
Series
ST
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: Steel.
Lens:Glass.
Accuracy: 2%.
Resolution:Less than 4% of scale.
Dial Size: 2.
Mounting: Clip.
Surface Mount Thermometer

2 Dual Scale Dial, 2% Full Scale Accuracy
Thermometers,
Dial
2
[50.80]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Measure the temperature of boilers, air ducts, motors, bearings, furnaces or other
surfaces with Series ST Surface Mount Thermometers. Dual magnet design allows easy
mounting on any ferrous surface. Bi-metallic thermal sensing coil provides quick
temperature measurement with 2% full-scale accuracy.
APPLICATIONS
Manifolds, platens, boilers, air ducts, furnaces, engines, motors, bearings,
enclosures, cabinets, drums, plumbing, piping, refrigerators, and other ferrous
surfaces.
Model
ST250
ST500
ST750
238
Range
0 to 250F (-20 to 120C)
0 to 500F (-20 to 260C)
50 to 750F (10 to 400C)
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing Element: Bimetal coil.
Dial Size: 2 (5.08 cm).
Response Time: Approximately one minute.
Mounting: Two Alnico magnets on back.
Height: 1/2 (1.27 cm).
Weight: 2 oz (56.7 g).
1/2
[12.70]
239_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:52 AM Page 239
Series
IT
Industrial Thermometer
9 Scale, Adjustable Angle Stem
2-3/8
[60.33]
1-1/32
[26.19]
8-3/4
[222.25]
10-5/16
[261.94]
17/32
[13.49]
1-13/32
[35.72]
3-1/8
[79.38]
19/32
[15.08]
1-1/4 [31.75] HEX

1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD
3-1/2 OR 6
[88.9] OR [152.4]
The Series IT Industrial Thermometer allows users to easily take accurate

temperature measurements in any environment. The case of the IT series is made of die
cast aluminum for extra durability in industrial environments. The glass lens is easily
cleaned and resists scratches for better viewing of the scale. The stem can be adjusted 180
in order to achieve the best viewing angle. The blue organic fill is non-toxic and allows users
to better see the temperature reading. The scales can be ordered with dual units, F, or C.
Range
-40 to 110F (-40 to 40C)
0 to 120F (-15 to 50C)
0 to 160F (-15 to 70C)
30 to 180F(0 to 80C)
30 to 240F (0 to 115C)
30 to 300F (0 to 150C)
50 to 400F (10 to 205C)
100 to 550F (40 to 300C)
Series
IT-W
6 Stem
Model
ITA9601D
ITA9602D
ITA9603D
ITA9604D
ITA9605D
ITA9606D
Range
-40 to 110F (-40 to 40C)
0 to 120F (-15 to 50C)
0 to 160F (-15 to 70C)
30 to 180F(0 to 80C)
30 to 240F (0 to 115C)
30 to 300F (0 to 150C)
Accuracy: 1% accuracy.
Scales: Aluminum painted white with
black markings.
Process Connection: 1-1/4-18 NEF
thread.
Liquid Filling: Organic blue liquid
filled tube.
Mounting: Adjustable stem: Vertical
plane 180 horizontal plane 360.
OPTION
TEMPERATURE
3-1/2 Stem
Model
ITA9351D
ITA9352D
ITA9353D
ITA9354D
ITA9355D
ITA9356D
ITA9357D
ITA9358D
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: Tapered cast
aluminum with graphite fill.
Housing Material: 9 (228 mm)
aluminum.
Lens: Glass.
Industrial Thermometer Thermowells

Fits IT Thermometers with 3-1/2 and 6 Stem Lengths
3/4
[19.05]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD
3/4
[19.05]
3/4-14 NPT
1
[25.4]
Standard Type Thermowell
2-1/2
[63.5]
1
[25.4]
2-1/2
[63.5]
Thermometers,
Glass
1-1/2 [38.1]
HEX
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4-18 NEF
THREAD
1-1/2 [38.1]
HEX
The Series IT-W Thermowells reduce installation cost and time by eliminating the need
to drain the system when servicing industrial thermometers. The thermowells protect
industrial thermometers from high pressure, flow and corrosive media. Series IT-W
Thermowells are available with 2-1/2 and 5 insertion lengths and with the option of a 21/2 lagging extension. These cost efficient brass, 304 stainless steel, and 316 stainless
steel thermowells with 3/4 NPT threads are compatible with Series IT for most
applications.
Model
IT-W01
IT-W11
IT-W21
IT-W04
IT-W14
IT-W24
IT-W07
IT-W17
IT-W27
Materials
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
Brass
304 SS
316 SS
3/4-14 NPT
6 [152.4] STEM LENGTH
Lagging ExtensionType Thermowell
Insertion Length
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
5
5
5
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
Lag
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
239
240_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:52 AM Page 240
Series
DBT
Digital Solar-Powered Bimetal Thermometer

LCD Display, Adjustable Angle Stem
3-13/16
[97.00]
3-1/4
[82.55]
1/2 NPT
STEM
LENGTH
TEMPERATURE
The Series DBTDigital Solar-Powered Bimetal Thermometer takes the

guesswork out of temperature measurement. The 3-1/2 digit LED display is easy to read
and provides resolution to 0.1F. The adjustable angle can be mounted in virtually any
position. The engineering units can be selected in the field by removing the back cover.
Model
DBTA3251
DBTA3252
DBTA3401
DBTA3402
DBTA3601
DBTA3602
DBTA3901
DBTA3902
DBTA3121
DBTA3122
DBTA3151
DBTA3152
DBTA3181
DBTA3182
DBTA3241
DBTA3242
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
4
4
6
6
9
9
12
12
15
15
18
18
24
24
Range
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
-58 to 302F (-50 to 150C)
-58 to 158F (-50 to 70C)
Thermometers,
Digital Solar
OPTION
240
1/4
[6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Lens: Acrylic.
Accuracy: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C): 1% FS.
Dial Size: 3.
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT-adjustable angle.
Display: 3-1/2 digit LCD.
Power Requirements: 3 V LR44 solar cell (min. 35 LUX required) alkaline battery,
installed functional, user replaceable.
241_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:52 AM Page 241
Series
DRFT
Digital Solar-Powered Thermometer

LCD Display, Remote Probe, Compact Size
5/8
[15.24]
4-1/2 [114.30]
1-1/8
[28.56]
DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC

MICHIGAN CITY, IN USA
3-3/4 [96.52]
4-1/8 [105.41]
The Series DRFT Solar Digital Refrigerator and Freezer Thermometer makes
monitoring cold environments effortless. This thermometer can instantly show exact
temperatures of your refrigerator or freezer in F or C with the flip of a switch. The Series
DRFT digital thermometer helps monitor appliance temperature fluctuations to preserve
and prevent spoilage of food, medications, wines, and much more. Series DRFT
thermometers are powered by solar panels that make the unit environmentally attractive,
efficient and cost-saving.
Model DRFT-10, White Digital Solar-Powered Thermometer

Model DRFT-10-BLACK, Black Digital Solar-Powered Thermometer
Response Time: 10 s.
Sensor: Thermistor.
Power Requirements: 1.5 V AAA
alkaline battery, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Case: ABS.
Capillary Length: 3.2 (1 m).
OPTION
Remote Reading Thermometer with Switch
TEMPERATURE
Series
RRT3
SPECIFICATIONS
(-40 to 70C).
Ambient Temperature Range: 41 to
140F (5 to 60C).
Accuracy: 0 to 50C: 1C; -40 to 0C
and 51 to 70C: 1.5C.
Display: LCD.
Dimensions: 4.5 x 1.1 x 0.6.
SPDT Relay, Liquid Actuated Bulb and Capillary

7/16
[11.00]
3-1/32 [77.00]
3-5/32
[80.00]
3-33/64
[89.50]
3-23/64 [85.51]
The Series RRT3 Remote Reading Thermometer with Switch combines an easy to
read 3-1/4 dual scale dial thermometer and a SPDT relay. Color coordinated pointers
display the current process temperature and set point. In order to change the set point, a
front adjustment knob controls the red set point pointer. The design of the internal
mechanical switch movement prevents the set point pointer from sticking to the process
indicating pointer. A 10.5 ft (3.2 m) stainless steel flex hose capillary prevents kinking and
leaking of the measuring fluid when bending the capillary. For quick installation, electrical
connections can be made to male quick connects or to the finger-safe screw terminals.
Thermometer includes a u-clamp mounting bracket for panel mounting.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Brass.
Accuracy: 3% FS.
Housing Material: 304 SS.
70C).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical Ratings: 3 A @ 250 VAC, .2
A @ 250 VDC.
Model
RRT3120U
RRT3250U
RRT3300U
OPTION
Temperature Ranges
-40 to 120F (-40 to 50C)
32 to 248F (0 to 120C)
0 to 300F (-18 to 149C)

terminal.
Process Connection: 1/2 (12.7 mm)
male NPT.
Dial Size: 3-1/2 (90 mm).
Capillary Length: 10.5 (3.2 m).
Bulb Length: 3 (76 mm).
241
Thermometers
with Switch
3-1/8 [79.24]
242_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:53 PM Page 242
Series
BTO
Bimetal Thermometer with Transmitter Output

Bimetal Stem with 4-20 mA Output, 3 or 5 Dial
3-1/4 [82.55]
OR
5-1/4 [133.35]
7-1/8
[180.98]
3-1/16
[77.79]
3-5/16
[84.14]
1/2 NPT
STEM
LENGTH
Thermometers
with Transmitter
TEMPERATURE
The Series BTO Bimetal Thermometer with Transmitter Output eliminates the
need for a separate thermometer and transmitter. By only needing one connection, the
BTO series reduces installation cost and saves space. The head-mount transmitter is
located in a weatherproof thermal head located on the side of the stem. The BTO series is
ideal for use on power generating boilers, skid mounted compressors, and thermal
oxidation systems.
Model
BTO325101
BTO32551
BTO32561
BTO325121
BTO32571
BTO340101
BTO34051
BTO34061
BTO340121
BTO34071
BTO360101
BTO36051
BTO36061
BTO360121
BTO36071
BTO390101
BTO39051
BTO39061
BTO390121
BTO39071
BTO312101
BTO31251
BTO312061
BTO312121
BTO31271
Dial Size
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
Range
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
Model
BTO525101
BTO52551
BTO52561
BTO525121
BTO52571
BTO540101
BTO54051
BTO54061
BTO540121
BTO54071
BTO560101
BTO56051
BTO56061
BTO560121
BTO56071
BTO590101
BTO59051
BTO59061
BTO590121
BTO59071
BTO512101
BTO51251
BTO512061
BTO512121
BTO51271
Dial Size
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TT1.
242
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3-3/16
[80.96]
1/4
[6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Thermometer Specifications
Wetted Materials:304 SS.
Lens: Glass.
Temperature Limits:Ambient: -58 to 185F(-50 to 85C).
Dial Size:3 or 5.
Resolution:2F (5F for 400F and 550F models).
Weight: 1.95 lb.
Transmitter Specifications
Temperature Limits:Ambient: -58 to 185F(-50 to 85C).
Loop Resistance: 1045.
Power Consumption: 38 mA.
Stem Length
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
12
Range
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
0 to 200F
0 to 250F
50 to 300F
50 to 400F
50 to 550F
2-15/16
[71.61]
243_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:53 AM Page 243
Series
32B
1/32 DIN Temperature/Process Controller

Universal Input, Dual Temperature Output Control, RS-485 Communication
RoHS
1-49/64 [44.75]
15/16
[24.00]
1-57/64 [48.00]
55/64
[21.85]
9/64
[3.40]
Model
32B-23
32B-33
32B-53
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Add -LV to end of model number for 24 VDC supply power.
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 to 50 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA*
4 to 20 mA*
Range
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-148 to 2192F (-100 to 1200C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
-328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
Temperature/Process
Controllers
ACCESSORIES
SCD-SW, Configuration Software
A-277, 250 Precision Resistor
A-600, R/C snubber
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltages or DCcurrent.
Display:Two 4-digit, 7 segment .25 H (6.35 mm) LEDs. PV: red; SV: green.
Accuracy: 0.25% span, 1 least significant digit.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC (depending on model).
Operating Temperature:32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Control Output Ratings:
Relay: SPST, 3A @ 250 VACresistive;
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max. 40 mA);
Current: 4 to 20 mA.
Communication: RS-485 Modbus A-5-11/RTU communication protocol.
Weight:4 oz (114 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUL, UL.
TEMPERATURE
The compact Series 32B Temperature/Process Controller offers advanced control

features for the most demanding temperature or process applications. Enclosed in a 1/32
DIN housing, the Series 32B is designed with dual, 4-digit LED displays for local indication
of process value and setpoint. Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune, and
manual tune. PID control is supported with 64 temperature and time (ramp/soak) control
actions. The dual loop output control allows simultaneous heating and cooling control. The
second output can be configured as an alarm mode using one of the thirteen built-in alarm
functions.
RS-485 communication is standard on the Series 32B. Up to 247 communication addresses
are available with transmission speeds of 2400 to 38,400 bps. The controller also features
universal input, selectable temperature units (F/C), selectable resolution, quick sampling
rate and security protection.
3-59/64 [99.80]
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor.
243
244_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:53 AM Page 244
Series
16B

Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Universal Inputs
LOVE CONTROLS
RoHS
SERIES 16B
PV
C
F
SV
AT
OUT1
OUT2
ALM
1-57/64
[48.00]
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
ACCESSORIES
A-277, 250 Precision Resistor
A-600, R/C snubber
Temperature/Process
Controllers
TEMPERATURE
Monitor and control temperature or process applications with precision using the
Series 16B controllers. The units offer two separate outputs for dual loop control in direct
or reverse acting. Select relay, voltage, or current output combined with a second relay
output.
The Series 16B provides dual LED displays for local indication of process value and
setpoint value. Output status, engineering scale, auto tuning and alarm status is also
indicated on the front panel.
Control methods include ON/OFF, PID, self-tune and manual tune. PID control is
supported with 64 ramp/soak control actions. Two additional alarm outputs are standard
on the Series 16B. The alarm outputs can be quickly configured by using the thirteen builtin alarm functions.
The controller easily communicates with other external devices such as PCs and PLCs
for data search and system integration using the built-in RS-485 interface. Up to 247
communication addresses are available with transmission speeds of 2400 to 38,400 bps.
The Series 16B also features universal input, selectable F/C, selectable resolution and
security functions.
Model
16B-23
16B-33
16B-53
1-49/64
[44.75]
1-57/64
[48.00]
3/8
[9.50]
3-5/32
[80.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment .25 H (6.35 mm) LEDs. PV: red; SV: green.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 to 50 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA*
4 to 20 mA*
Range
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-148 to 2192F (-100 to 1200C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
-328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
*Requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
244
245_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:54 AM Page 245
Series
16C
1/16 DIN Temperature Controller

PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Dual Display, RS-485 Communication
LOVE CONTROLS
RoHS
SERIES 16C
PV
C
F
SV
AT
OUT
ALM1 ALM2
1-57/64
[48.00]
The compact Series 16C Temperature Controller offers accurate temperature

measurement and control in a 1/16 DIN package. Designed for direct or reverse acting
(cooling or heating) control, the Series 16C can be programmed for simple ON/OFF or
more complex PID control functions. PID control is supported with manual or auto-tuning.
Select relay, voltage or current output for control methods.
The Series 16C accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs. Process value and
setpoint value are displayed simultaneously on the large dual LED. Auto-tuning,
engineering units (F or C), and alarm status is also indicated on the faceplate. Two alarm
outputs are included on the unit with 12 preprogrammed alarm functions.
Model
16C-2
16C-3
16C-5
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
3/8
[9.50]
3-5/32
[80.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, see chart.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Voltage pulse: 14V, 10% to -20% (max 40 mA);
Communication: RS-485 Modbus communication protocol.
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X(IP66).
Input Types Range

Pt100 RTD 32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
-4 to 932F (-20 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
T/C type B 212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
T/C type S 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type R 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
T/C type T -4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
T/C type J -4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
-148 to 1562F (-100 to 850C)
T/C type K -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type L -328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type U -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C)
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES
A-600, R/C snubber
1-49/64
[44.75]
1-57/64
[48.00]
Temperature/Process
Controllers
245
246_Layout 1 7/15/14 4:40 PM Page 246
Series
4B

Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication, Auto-Tuning
RoHS
PV
SV
3-25/32
[96.00]
AT OUT 1 O U T 2 AL M 1 AL M 2 AL M 3 F
LOVE CONTROLS
SERIES 4B
3-25/32
[96.00]
Model
4B-23
4B-33
4B-53
4B-63
4B-33-986/U
Output 1
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
Linear Voltage
Relay
Output 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
5/8
[15.80]
3-1/8
[79.2]
SPECIFICATIONS
Display:Two 4-digit, 7 segment. PV: 3/4 H (19 mm) red; SV: 1/2 H (12.7 mm)
green.
Operating Temperature:32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Relay: SPDT, 5A @ 250 VACresistive;
Current: 4 to 20 mA;
Linear voltage: 0 to 10V.
ACCESSORIES
A-277, 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
A-600, R/C snubber
A-900, Weatherproof Front Mount Enclosure
A-901, Weatherproof Internal Mount Enclosure with Window
Temperature/Process
Controllers
TEMPERATURE
The Series 4B 1/4 DIN Temperature/Process Controller is designed to accept

thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage input and provide dual outputs for control.
Available outputs include relay/relay, voltage pulse/relay, current/relay, or linear
voltage/relay.
The units can be programmed for ON/OFF, PID, auto-tuning, or manual tuning control
methods. The PID control is supported by 64 ramp/soak actions. The Series 4B also
includes two additional alarm outputs. The second relay output can be reconfigured as a
third alarm output. The alarm type can be selected from 13 different preprogrammed
alarm functions. The controller features dual LED displays for local indication of process
and setpoint values.
3-9/16
[90.81]
3-27/32
[97.63]
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 to 50 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA*
4 to 20 mA*
Range
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-148 to 2192F (-100 to 1200C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
-328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
Portable Housing Model 4B-33-986/U
246
247_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:55 AM Page 247
Series
4C

PID Control, Auto-Tuning, Large Dual Display, RS 485 Communication
RoHS
PV
SV
AT
OUT ALM1 ALM2
LOVE CONTROLS
3-25/32
[96.00]
The Series 4C 1/4 DIN Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use programming

menus designed for quick installation. Control functions include ON/OFF, PID, autotuning or manual tuning. The Series 4C is available with relay, voltage or current output
with two additional alarm outputs. The alarm outputs can be configured from 12 different
preprogrammed settings. The Series 4C accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD
inputs. Process value and setpoint value are simultaneously displayed with the process
value in red and setpoint in green.
Model
4C-2
4C-3
4C-5
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
3-9/15
[90.80]
SERIES 4C
5/8
[15.80]
3-1/8
[79.2]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD, see chart.
Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment. LEDs. PV: red .75 H (19 mm); SV: green .5
(12.7 mm).
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X(IP66).
Input Types Range

Pt100 RTD 32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
-4 to 932F (-20 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
T/C type B 212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
T/C type S 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type R 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
T/C type T -4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
T/C type J
-4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
-148 to 1562F (-100 to 850C)
T/C type K -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type L -328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type U -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C)
Temperature/Process
Controllers
A-900
3-27/32
[97.60]
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES
MN-1, Mini-Node USB/RS-485 Converter
A-600, R/C snubber
A-900, Weatherproof Front Mount Enclosure
A-901, Weatherproof Internal Mount Enclosure with Window
3-25/32
[96.00]
A-901
247
248_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:55 AM Page 248
Series
8B

Vertical Mount, Dual Control Output, RS-485 Communication
RoHS
1-3/4
[44.00]
PV
3-7/8
[98.20]
SV
OUT1 OUT2
AT
SERIES 8B
1-7/8
[47.80]
Temperature/Process
Controllers
TEMPERATURE
The Series 8B 1/8 DIN Temperature/Process Controller offers versatility and

reliability for temperature and process monitoring applications. Designed as a vertical
mount 1/8 DIN controller, the Series 8B features dual outputs, universal input, and up to
three additional alarm outputs. The second output can be configured as a third alarm
output. Select the alarm type from 13 different preprogrammed alarm functions. Control
methods include ON/OFF, PID, auto-tune or manual tune. PID control is supported with
64 ramp/soak control actions. RS-485 communication is standard on the Series 8B with up
to 247 available addresses.
Model Output 1
Output 2
8B-23 Voltage Pulse
Relay
8B-33 Relay
Relay
8B-53 Current
Relay
8B-63 Linear Voltage
Relay
ACCESSORIES
A-600, R/C snubber
3-49/64
[95.70]
ALM1 ALM2 LMA3
LOVE CONTROLS
3-37/64
[91.00]
1/2
[12.80]
3-1/8
[79.20]
SPECIFICATIONS
Linear voltage: 0 to 10V.
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0 to 50 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA*
4 to 20 mA*
Range
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-148 to 2192F (-100 to 1200C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
-328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
248
249_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:55 AM Page 249
Series
8C

ON/OFF or PID Control, Auto-Tuning, RS-485 Communication
RoHS
1-3/4
[44.00]
PV
3-7/8
[98.20]
SV
3-37/64
[91.00]
F
AT
OUT ALM1 ALM2
3-49/64
[95.70]
LOVE CONTROLS
SERIES 8C
1-7/8
[47.80]
Model
8C-2
8C-3
8C-5
Output
Voltage Pulse
Relay
Current
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple & RTD (see chart).
Display:Two 4-digit, 7 segment .38 H (9.53 mm) LEDs. PV: red; SV: green.
Front Panel Rating:NEMA 4X(IP66).
Input Types Range

Pt100 RTD 32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
-4 to 932F (-20 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
T/C type B 212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
T/C type S 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type R 32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
T/C type N -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
T/C type E 32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
T/C type T -4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
-4 to 752F (-20 to 400C)
T/C type J
-148 to 1562F (-100 to 850C)
T/C type K -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type L -328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
T/C type U -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C)
Temperature/Process
Controllers
ACCESSORIES
A-600, R/C snubber
3-1/8
[79.20]
TEMPERATURE
The Series 8C Temperature Controller offers easy-to-use programming menus

designed for quick installation. The unit is designed for direct or reverse acting (cooling or
heating) control. The Series 8C can be programmed for simple ON/OFF or more complex
PID control functions. PID control is supported with manual or auto-tuning. Select relay,
voltage pulse, or current output control methods. The controller also includes two
additional alarm outputs. The alarm outputs can be configured from 12 different
preprogrammed settings.
The temperature controller accepts a variety of thermocouple and RTD inputs. The
process value and setpoint value are displayed simultaneously on the large dual LED. Autotuning, engineering units (F or C) and alarm status is also indicated on the faceplate.
1/2
[12.80]
249
250_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:56 AM Page 250
Series
SCD
DIN Rail Temperature/ Process Controller
Universal Inputs, Up to 8 PID Loops, Modbus Communications
RoHS
2-1/4
[57.15]
MASTER
EXTENSION
PORT
3-13/16
[96.84]
3-35/64
[90.09]
Master Controller
Slave Controller
The DIN Rail Mount Series SCD offers multiple PID loops in a compact size. Each SCD1000 master controller can be combined with up to seven SCD-2000 slave controllers
without any wires. Each controller has one universal input, one relay output and one user
selected output. The outputs can be used for a dual loop to control heating and cooling or
a single loop with an alarm. These controllers support up to 64 ramp/soak actions. The
SCD series controllers are programmed using an user-friendly software program via the
RS-485 Modbus communications.
Controller Output 1
Output 2
Model
Relay
SCD-1023 Master
Voltage Pulse
Relay
SCD-1033 Master
Relay
Relay
SCD-1053 Master
Current
Relay
SCD-1063 Master
Linear Voltage
Relay
SCD-2023 Slave
Voltage Pulse
Relay
SCD-2033 Slave
Relay
Relay
SCD-2053 Slave
Current
Relay
SCD-2063 Slave
Linear Voltage
*DC current input requires 250 Ohm Precision Resistor
SLAVE
EXTENSION
PORT
1
[25.4]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC linear
voltage, and DC currents.*
Supply Voltage: 24 VDC.
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F
(0 to 50C).
Memory Backup: Non-volatile.
Control Output Ratings: Relay: 3A @

250 VACresistive; Voltage pulse: 12
VDC, max. output current: 40 mA;
Current: 4 to 20 mA output; Linear
voltage: 0 to 10 VDC.
Communication: RS-485 Modbus A5-11/RTU communication protocol.
Weight: 2.7 oz (76.5 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUL,
UL.
ACCESSORIES
A-600, R/C snubber
TEMPERATURE
Model
LoveLinkIII
Configuration Monitoring & Logging Software

Designed for Love Temperature Controls
Temperature/Process
Controllers
Computer Requirements
The LoveLinkIII software application will run on Windows 2000 and Windows XP
Software. One available RS-232 or RS-485 port is needed to communicate with the
temperature control(s). A minimum of 4 MB of hard disk space is needed for the
LoveLinkIII software application files, and additional hard disk space is needed to
store temperature log files. Log file size will vary depending on the Duration and Rate
selected for the controls and the number of controls on line.
Control Requirements
The temperature controls supported by LoveLinkIII software are the Love 4B, 4C,
2600, 8B, 8C, 8600, 16A, 16B, 16C, 16L, 32A, 32B, 32DZ, SCD and SCZ Series.
LoveLinkIII Configuration, Monitoring and Logging Software is an easy to use program

allowing connection of up to 40 controls on a single computer port. Data logging can be set
up by individual control with varying logging parameters. LoveLinkIII Software is
compatible with all Love 4B, 4C, 2600, 8B, 8C, 8600, 16A, 16B, 16C, 16L, 32A, 32B, 32DZ,
SCD and SCZ Series controls.
FEATURES
Address and store data for up to 40 controls
Data logging at individually adjustable rates
On-screen graphing for up to 10 zones
Upload and download control configuration profiles
Save and retrieve control configuration profiles
Easy to use operator interface
Low cost
250
Other Requirements
Love temperature control product series can be ordered with either RS-485 or RS232 communication options. To connect temperature controls using RS-485
communication, one of the following converters can be used:
Love Model MN-1 Mini-Node Communication Signal Converter,
USBto RS-485
Love Model 351-9 Mother Node Communication Signal Converter,
RS-232 to RS-485

Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
251_Layout 1 7/14/14 10:54 AM Page 251
Series
TID
Temperature/Process Indicator
Low Cost, 3-Digit Display, 1% Accuracy
1-11/32
[34.13]
1-7/64
[28.18]
2-3/8
[60.38]
3
[76.2]
The affordable Series TID allows user to monitor temperature or a process value.
Temperature ranges are available from -58 to 302F using one of our PTC or NTC
thermistors. Process values can be displayed from -999 to 999 counts using a 4 to 20 mA
from one of our various transmitters. The process indicator has an adjustable span and
zero.
Model
TID-1110
TID-1120
TID-1410
TID-3100
TID-3200
TID-3400
Input
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
24 VAC/DC
115 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/DC
Unit
F
C
F
None
None
None
Series
LTI
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: -58 to 302F (thermistor); -999
to 999 counts (4 to 20 mA).
Input: PTC/NTC thermistor or 4 to 20
mA.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 230
VAC, 24 VAC/DC.
Accuracy: Better than 1%.

Display: 3-digits; red, green or blue
display.
Resolution: 1 or 0.1 count.
Front Panel Rating: IP64 (NEMA 3R).
ACCESSORIES
TS-5, PTCthermistor probe PVC(5 cable)
TS-51, PTCthermistor probe PVC(10 cable)
TS-6, PTCthermistor probe metal(5 cable)
TS-61, PTCthermistor probe metal(10 cable)
Temperature Panel Meter

1/8 DIN, Large Dual-Line Display
RoHS
1-49/64 [45.0]
3-5/8
[92.0]
5-3/64
[128.0]
4-49/64
[121.0]
The Series LTI Temperature Panel Meters can be configured in a variety of

configurations to provide visual indication and control of a process temperature. Field
pluggable modules are available to add additional relay outputs, digital I/O ports, and serial
communications. Utilizing an easy-to-read, dual 6-digit display, more descriptive
programming parameters are displayed to simplify initial setup. A set of parameters can
be copied from one panel meter to another for applications that require multiple panel
meters programmed with the same parameters. The industry standard 1/8 DIN housing
can be panel mounted or mounted in one of the NEMA 4X panel meter enclosures. All of
the Series LTI panel meters come with universal thermocouple and RTD inputs.
Description
85 to 265 VAC, no relays, no transmitter
85 to 265 VAC, no relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
85 to 265 VAC, 2 relays, no transmitter
85 to 265 VAC, 2 relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
85 to 265 VAC, 4 relays, no transmitter
85 to 265 VAC, 4 relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, no relays, no transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, no relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, 2 relays, no transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, 2 relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, 4 relays, no transmitter
12 to 24 VDC, 4 relays, 4 to 20 mA transmitter
Input Range and Accuracy

Type Range (F) Range (C)
J
-200 to 2000 -129 to 1093
K
-200 to 2400 -129 to 1316
T
-200 to 752 -129 to 400
E
-200 to 1800 -129 to 982
R
-50 to 3000 -46 to 1649
S
-50 to 3000 -46 to 1649
B
752 to 3300 400 to 1816
Accuracy
1C
1C
1C
1C
2C
2C
2C
Type
N
C
10
100
120
1000
Range (F)
-100 to 2300
32 to 4100
-328 to 500
-328 to 1562
-110 to 500
-328 to 900
Range (C)
-73 to 1260
0 to 2260
-200 to 260
-200 to 850
-79 to 260
-200 to 482
4-11/16 [119.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N, C; RTD 100 platinum, 10 copper,
120 nickel, 1000 platinum.
Input Impedance: Greater than 100 k.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Power Requirements: 85 to 265 VAC 50/60 Hz, 90 to 265 VDC or jumper
selectable 12 to 24 VDC 10%.
Power Consumption:
90 to 265 VAC models: 20 W max;
12 to 24 VDC models: 15 W max.
Switch Rating: 2 or 4 SPDT (Form C) internal and/or 4 SPST (Form A) external;
Rated 3A @ 30 VDC and 125/250 VACresistive load, 1/14 HP @ 125/250 VAC for
inductive loads.
Display: Dual-line, 6-digit display.
Resolution: 1 (up to four digits) or 0.1 (up to five digits).
Temperature Limits:
Operating:-4 to 149F (-20 to 65C);
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Humidity Limits: 0 to 90% (non-condensing).
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X, IP65.
Weight: 9.5 oz (269 g).
Accuracy
2C
2C
0.1C
0.4C
0.1C
0.4C
Accessories: See page 349 (Series PMA)

Enclosures: See page 350 (Series PME)
251
Panel Meters/
Indicators
Model
LTI-100
LTI-101
LTI-120
LTI-121
LTI-140
LTI-141
LTI-200
LTI-201
LTI-220
LTI-221
LTI-240
LTI-241
19/32 [15.0]
TEMPERATURE
2-7/16
[62.0]
4-11/64
[106.0]
252_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:57 AM Page 252
Series
TSF
Thermocouple Limit Control

FM Approved High Limit Switch
1-1/8
[27.94]
1-3/8
[33.99]
3
2-3/8
[76.20]
[60.33]
The Series TSF Thermocouple FM Approved Limit Control provides audible alarm
status along with a robust 16 amp relay output. Unit allows the user to easily select
automatic or manual reset along with 10 other parameters. The TSF series has a built in
reset button on the front panel or can accept an external reset.
Model
TSF-4010
TSF-4011
TSF-4021
TSF-4040
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Unit
F
C
C
F
ACCESSORIES
TCS-J, J type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TS2-K, Configuration Key
Series
TSF-DF
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 32 to 999F (0 to 700C) for Type J thermocouple; 32 to 999F (0 to
999C) for type K or S thermocouples.
Input: Type J, K or S thermocouple.
Output: SPDT relay rated 16A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1 HP.
Control Type: ON/OFF; manual/automatic reset.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
Power Consumption: 4 VA.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm) digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 150F (0 to 65C); Storage: -4 to 176F (-20
to 80C).
Front Panel Rating: IP64 (NEMA 3R).
Agency Approvals: CE, FM, cUR, UR.
Thermocouple Limit Alarm
TEMPERATURE
UL Approved Temperature Limit Control

1-1/8
[27.94]
1-3/8
[33.99]
3
[76.20]
2-3/8
[60.33]
Limit

The Series TSF-DF Digital Thermocouple Limit Alarm is a UL approved
temperature limit control that provides visual alarm status along with a 16 amp SPST relay
output. The Series TSF-DF controls have a built in reset button on the front panel or can
accept an external reset signal.
Program settings on model TSF-DF controls cannot be changed through the buttons on the
device. It is necessary to purchase a model TSF-MDF and a model TS2-K in addition to the
model TSF-DF. Desired program parameters are entered on a TSF-MDF programming
control. Using the TS2-K configuration key, the parameters can be easily copied from the
TSF-MDF and transferred to the TSF-DF Limit Alarms.
Model
TSF-4010-DF
TSF-4011-DF
TSF-4021-DF
TSF-4040-DF
TSF-4010-MDF
TSF-4011-MDF
TSF-4021-MDF
TSF-4040-MDF
Control
Limit Alarm
Limit Alarm
Limit Alarm
Limit Alarm
Programming Control
Programming Control
Programming Control
Programming Control
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
Unit
F
F
C
F
F
F
C
F
ACCESSORIES
TCS-J, J Type Thermocouple, 4 Probe, 48 Extension
TCS-K, K Type Thermocouple, 4 Probe, 48 Extension
252
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 32 to 999F (0 to 700C) for thermocouple J type; 32 to 999F (0 to
999C) for thermocouple K or S type.
Input: Type J, K, or S thermocouple.
Output: NO SPSTrelay rated 16A @ 240 VACresistive.
Control Type: ON/OFF; manual/automatic reset.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
Power Consumption: 4 VA @ 230 VAC.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm) digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Agency Approvals:
DF Models: CE, cUR, UR;
MDF Models:None.
253_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:57 AM Page 253
Series
16L
Limit Controls
FM Approved, Large Dual Display, Universal Input
1/2
[11.16]
1/4
[6.35]
PANEL MAX.
SPRING LOOP
1-7/8
[47.75] SQ.
1-3/4
[44.74] SQ.
5-1/4
[133.05] SQ.
MOUNTING COLLAR
[SHOWN IN POSITION]
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES [MILLIMETERS].

PANEL CUT OUT IS 1.77+0.02 [45+0.6] SQUARE.
The 16L Series Temperature/Process FM Approved Limit Controls set a new

standard in 1/16 DIN limit controls. The 16L offers universal input (10 thermocouple types,
4 RTD types, voltage, and current), single set point or dual set point. Standard features
include remote reset capability, peak/valley indication, open sensor protection, input rate
of change protection, and much more.
Unit offers 1500 VAC resolution, selectable high or low input, programmable sensor break
protection and adjustable differential.
Outputs include normally open (form A) and normally closed (form B) relays. Form A and
form B relays can be setup one for each set point output and logically linked to emulate a
form C output.
Designed and built in the USA, the 16L family of controls offers the highest levels of
features, function, and quality available today.
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Inputs: 10 thermocouple, 4
RTD, DC voltage, or DC current
selectable.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.3
(7.62 mm) high LEDs.
Accuracy: 0.25% of span, 1 least
significant digit.
VAC, nominal, +10 -15%, 50 to 400 Hz.
single phase; 132 to 240 VDC,
nominal, +10 -20%.
OPTIONS (Add as a suffix to model number)

-934, Process Signal Output, Isolated 0 to 20 mADC
-936, Process Signal Output, Isolated 0 to 10 VDC
-992, RS-RS-485 Serial Communications
-993, RS-RS-232 Serial Communications
Model Output A
16L2030 N.O. Relays
16L2034 N.O. Relays
Series
TSCC
Power Consumption: 5 VA maximum.

to 55C).
No batteries required.
Output: Relay: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC
resistive; 1.5A @ 240 VAC inductive.
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Agency Approvals: FM, cUL, UL.
Output B
None
N.C. Relays
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber
Digital Dispensing Temperature Control

3
[76.20]
TEMPERATURE
Controls Product Temperature and Dispensing Flow Rates

2-21/32
[67.39]
1-11/32
[34.04]
Panel Cutout
2-51/64 x 1-9/64 (71 x 29 mm)
ACCESSORIES
See page reference below.
Model
TSCC-010
TSCC-011
TSCC-020
TSCC-021
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
Unit
F
C
F
C
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C);
NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to 110C).
Input: 2 free voltage contact input:
PTC (1000 @ 25C); NTC (10K @
25C).
Output:
1 each relay SPDT 16 A @ 240 VAC
resistive, 5 A inductive;
2 each relay SPST 5 A @ 240 VAC
resistive.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC
10%; 230 VAC 10% (depending on
model).

Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit and sign, 1/2 red LED
digits.
Resolution: 1.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C).
Weight: 8.8 oz (250 g).
Digital Temperature Switch Probes and Accessories: See page 258 (Series TS-Probes)
253
Digital
The Series TSCC Digital Dispensing Temperature Control is used to monitor and
control product temperature and dispensing rate in the production of melted cheese, chili,
or other heated food products. One selectable PTC or NTC thermistor is used to monitor
the product temperature while a SPDT relay is used to control the temperature. Two
SPST relays are used for controlling two dispensing rates for either different size
containers or different products. A three digit, easy-to-read display is included on the
controller. The buttons on the face of the controller enable the user to program the desired
parameters into the controller itself. Parameters can be copied from one device to another
using our TS2-K configuration key. Security protection is offered using a password code.
Includes TS-6 temperature probe.
1-7/64
[28.19]
254_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:57 AM Page 254
Series
40T/
40M
Digital Temperature Switch

3-1/2 Digit Display, Programming Configuration Key
2-31/64 [63.22]
3 [76.20]
1-3/32
[27.94]
1-11/32
[33.99]
2-3/8 [60.33]
3-3/16 [80.92]
2-3/16 [55.52]
The Series 40 Digital Temperature Switch accepts a variety of inputs to allow

temperature measurements and set points up to 1999F (1300C). Observing the current
status of the control is made easier with the 3-1/2 digit, multi-color LED display that has
alarm, defrost and output symbols. For added versatility, the temperature units can be field
selected for F or C. For cooling applications, manual defrost mode can be initiated by
pushing a single button. A flashing alarm informs users when the current temperature
exceeds preset limits. When programming multiple units, a programming key is available
to reduce set up time.
ACCESSORIES
40X-K, Configuration key
TCS-J, J type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K type thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TS-1, Brass PTC Thermistor Probe
TS-2, Stainless Steel PTC Thermistor Probe
TS-5, PVCPTC Thermistor Probe
TS-6, Polyamide Resin Coated Brass PTCThermistor Probe
TS-7, Bead Type NPT Thermistor Probe
TEMPERATURE
Series
TCS
7/16
[10.92]
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
K T/C:-140 to 1999F(-100 to
1300C);
J T/C: -140 to 1450F(-100 to
800C);
RTD:-320 to 1200F(-200 to 650C);
PTC: -58 to 300F (-50 to 150C);
NTC: -40 to 230F (-40 to 110C);
N. RTD: -110 to 570F (-80 to 300C).
Output:16A @ 250 VACSPDT relay
(max current allowed is 10A).
Control Type:On/off.
Thermocouple/RTD Input Models
Model
Supply Power
40T-10
115 VAC
40T-20
230 VAC
40T-40
12-24 VAC/VDC
Power Requirements:12 to 24
VAC/VDC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC
depending on model.
Accuracy:1% FS.
Display: 3-1/2 digit red display.
Resolution:0.1C.
Memory Backup:Non-volatile
memory.
Ambient Temperature:32 to 131F(0
to 55C).
Front Panel Rating:IP65.
Agency Approvals:CE, cUL, UL.
Universal Input Models

Model
Supply Power
40M-10
115 VAC
40M-20
230 VAC
40M-40
12-24 VAC/VDC
Thermocouple Temperature Switch

Heating and Cooling Control, 16 Amp Rating, Two Alarms
Digital
1-11/32
[34]
3 [76]
1-7/64
[28]
2-3/8 [60]
Monitor and control temperature in heating and cooling applications with the Series
TCS Thermocouple Switch. The Series TCS offers a wide temperature range, two
selectable alarm sets, and an internal buzzer indicating alarm condition or error. The user
can define set point, heating/cooling regulation, cycle time, alarm configuration, load status,
and ambient probe adjustment. The thermocouple switch features password protection and
error/alarm messaging. Temperature and output status is indicated on the bright red LED
display. Use the configuration key (sold separately) to quickly program multiple units. The
Series TCS includes a fitting clip for panel mounting, gasket, rear terminal cover and
instruction manual.
Model
TCS-4010
TCS-4011
TCS-4020
TCS-4021
TCS-4030
TCS-4031
TCS-4040
254
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Unit
F
C
F
C
F
C
F
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: 32 to 999F (0 to
700C) for Type J thermocouple; 32 to
999F (0 to 999C) for Type K or S
thermocouples.
Input: Type J, K or S thermocouple.
Output: SPDT relay rated 16A @ 240
VAC resistive.
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2 (12.7 mm)
digits, plus sign.
Resolution: 1.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to
158F (0 to 70C); Storage: - 4 to
176F (-20 to 80C).
ACCESSORIES
TCS-J, J Type Thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
TCS-K, K Type Thermocouple, 4 probe, 48 extension
255_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:58 AM Page 255
Series
TS3

Field Selectable Engineering Units, Real Time Clock
3 [76.20]
2-5/8 [66.74]
2-7/16 [61.98]
1-3/8
[35.08]
1-3/64
[26.67]
The Series TS3 Digital Temperature Switch is the ideal control for on/off heating or
cooling applications. This generation of controls has field-selectable engineering units and
temperature probe types in order to reduce the combination of parts that need to be
stocked. A built-in real time clock is used for HACCP logging of temperature alarms caused
by temperatures outside of their set limits or loss of power. For refrigeration applications,
the defrost cycle can be initiated based on time or using the front panel keys. For
programming multiple units, the model TS2-K configuration key can be used to quickly
download parameter settings.
ACCESSORIES
Supply Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Model
TS3-50010
TS3-50020
TS3-50030
TS3-50040
2-3/4 [69.85]
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C);
NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to 110C).
Input: PTC (1000 @ 25C); NTC
(10K @ 25C).
Output: R1 SPDTrelay resistive load
16A, inductive load 10 FLA, 60 LRA @
240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP @ 240 VAC.
Control Type: On/off.
Power Requirement: 115 VAC, 230
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC, 24 VAC/DC (10%)
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3.6VA

(115/230/24 V), 1.5VA (12V).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3 digits plus sign.
Resolution: 0.1.
Memory Backup: Non-volatile
memory.
Ambient Temperature: 32 to 131F
(0 to 55C).
Agency Approvals:CE, cUR, UR.
Series
TSX3
Digital Refrigeration Temperature Switch

Intelligent Defrost, HACCP Alarm Logging
1-3/8
[35.08]
Supply Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
# of Outputs
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Display Color
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range:
PTC: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C);
NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to 110C).
Input: PTC (1000 @ 25C); NTC (10K @ 25C); Digital input contact.
Output: All models SPST NO relay resistive load 16A, inductive load 5A, 10 FLA,
60 LRA @ 240 VAC; dual output models also include 8A resistive, 3A inductive
SPDT @ 240 VAC; three output models also include 8A resistive SPSTNO@ 240
VAC, 5A resistive SPSTNO @ 240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP @ 240 VAC.
Power Requirement: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC, 24 VAC/DC (10%)
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3.6VA (115/230/24 V), 1.5VA (12V).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Resolution: 0.1.
Memory Backup: Non-volatile memory.
Ambient Temperature: 32 to 131F (0 to 55C).
Front Panel Rating: IP65 (NEMA 4X).
Agency Approvals:CE, cUR, UR.
255
Digital
Model
TSX3-520122
TSX3-520222
TSX3-520322
TSX3-520422
TSX3-520132
TSX3-520232
TSX3-520332
TSX3-520432
2-3/4 [69.85]
1-3/64
[26.67]
The Series TSX3 Digital Temperature Switch was designed to control the compressor,
fan, and defrost in refrigeration applications. This generation of controls has field-selectable
engineering units and temperature probe types in order to reduce the combination of parts
that need to be stocked. A built-in real time clock is used for HACCP logging of temperature
alarms caused by temperatures out of their set limits or loss of power. The Intelligent
Defrost parameters manage the defrost cycle in order to save energy cost. The digital input
can be used to remotely trigger a defrost cycle, monitor cooler door status, or act as an
external alarm. For programming multiple units, the model TS2-K configuration key can
be used to quickly download parameter settings.
ACCESSORIES
2-5/8 [66.74]
2-7/16 [61.98]
TEMPERATURE
3 [76.20]
256_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:58 AM Page 256
Series
TS2

Easy Multi-Unit Programming, 16A SPDT Relay Output
1-11/32
[34.13]
3 [76.2]
Scan here
to watch
product video
ACCESSORIES
Supply Power
115 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC
Unit
F
C
F
F
F
C
TEMPERATURE
Series
TSS2
2-3/8 [60.38]
Monitor and control temperature for heating and cooling applications with the
Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switch. The Series TS2 offers twelve programmable
functions to customize the unit to fit application requirements. Use the 16 (5) Amp SPDT
relay output to drive a motor, compressor, or fan. Designed with the OEM in mind, the
TS2 offers the ability to configure multiple units with the touch of a button.
Programming multiple units is quick and easy. Simply program one switch with the desired
parameter settings and connect the configuration key (sold separately) to the back of the
unit. Press the button on the configuration key and download the parameter settings.
Connect the key to the other switches to upload the stored settings with the push of a
button.
The TS2 features set point adjustments, static defrost timing, compressor mean time,
hysteresis, and ambient probe adjustment. Security protection is offered using a password
code. The Series TS2 Digital Temperature Switches are designed to operate with PTC
(1000 @ 25C) probes sold separately.
Model
TS2-010
TS2-011
TS2-020
TS2-030
TS2-040
TS2-041
1-7/64
[28.18]
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: -58 to 302F (-50 to 150C).
Input: PTC (1000 @ 25C).
Output: 16A SPDT relay @ 250 VAC resistive, 5A inductive.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit, red, 1/2 digits.
Resolution: 1.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Dual Stage Temperature Switch

Two Independent Relay Outputs, Heating or Cooling Control
1-9/64
[28.97]
Digital
1-27/64
[36.12]
3 [76.2]
2-7/16 [61.91]
Panel Cutout 2-51/64 x1-9/64 (71 x 29)
Regulate temperatures for heating or cooling control with the Series TSS2 Dual
Stage Temperature Switch. The Series TSS2 is designed to accept two inputs with
independent relays output for dual stage temperature control.
The Series TSS2 offers 34 programmable parameters to customize control functions.
Access to all parameters, except setpoint, can be secured with a password code.
ACCESSORIES
Supply Power
Model
TSS2-2100 115 VAC
TSS2-2110 115 VAC
TSS2-2210 230 VAC
TSS2-2300 12 VAC/DC
TSS2-2400 24 VAC/DC
Unit
F
C
C
F
F
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: PTC: - 58 to 302F (-50
to 150C); NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to
110C).
(10K @ 25C).
Outputs: OUT1=SPDT relay rated 16A
@ 240 VAC resistive; OUT2=SPDT
relay rated 8A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Horsepower Rating (HP): 1 HP
(OUT1).
VAC, 12 VAC/VDC or 24 VAC/VDC
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 3-digit and sign, red LED.
Resolution: 0.1 (< 100); 1 ( 100).
TemperatureLimit: Ambient: 32 to
158F (0 to 70C).
(-20 to 80C).
Dimensions: 3 x 1-27/64 x 2-7/16 in.
Agency Approvals: CE, cURus.
256
257_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:07 PM Page 257
Series
TSW
Weather Proof Digital Temperature Switch

NEMA 4X Housing, Single or Dual Stage, 20A Contact Rating
3-5/8
[92.08]
2-19/32
[65.53]
6-21/32
[168.91]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TSWDigital Temperature Switch combines the trusted, reliable TS family
of temperature controls and an installation friendly weatherproof enclosure. By using the
same programming parameters as our Series TS2 and Series TSS2, set up can be quickly
completed using the front keypad or by using the TS2-K configuration key. In order to
prevent tampering from unauthorized users, a parameter lock physical jumper and software
passcode security are standard in the unit. The bright, easy-to-read LED display shows the
current output status and the temperature measurement.
The multiple conduit knockouts on the Series TSW give flexibility to the installer to
determine the best location for the conduit entry. Another installation friendly feature of
the Series TSW is the ability to quickly jumper the line voltage to the common of the output
relay using fast tabs.
In order to reduce time in selecting models, the Series TSW has universal high and low
power supply models and field selectable engineering units. The Series TSW includes one
TS-1 PTC thermistor probe.
Model
TSW-150
TSW-160
TSW-250
TSW-260
Description
Single Stage
Single Stage
Dual Stage
Dual Stage
Power Requirements:90 to 255 VAC

or 12 to 24 VAC/VDC (10%)
depending on model.
Power Consumption: 3.6VA.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Resolution: 0.1 < 100; 1 100.
Memory Backup: Non-volatile
memory.
Ambient Temperature: 32 to 104F (0
to 40C).
Weight: 1.2 lbs (544 g).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X(IP66).
ACCESSORIES
CC1-N, Temperature Sensor Clip, Natural
CC1-B, Temperature Sensor Clip, Beige
CC1-GY, Temperature Sensor Clip, Grey
Supply Power
90 to 255 VAC
12 to 24 VAC/VDC
90 to 255 VAC
12 to 24 VAC/VDC
TEMPERATURE
Series
TSWB
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: PTC: -58 to 302F (-50
to 150C); NTC: -58 to 230F (-50 to
110C).
(10K @ 25C).
Output: R1 SPDTrelay resistive load:
20A @ 240 VAC; R2 SPDT relay
resistive load: 8A @ 240 VAC; Inductive
load: 3A @ 240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating:R1 2HP @ 240
VAC.
Digital Temperature/Water Level Switch

Two Temperature Set Points, Low Water Level Alarm
2-63/64 [75.69]
7/32
[5.33]
2-29/64 [62.23]
1-21/64
[33.73]
ACCESSORIES
Model
Supply Power
TSWB-010 115 VAC
TSWB-011 115 VAC
Unit
F
C
SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Range: PTC: -58 to 302F (-50
to 150C); NTC: -58 to 230F(-50 to
110C).
Probe Temperature Input: PTC
(1000 @ 25C); NTC (10K @
25C).
Probe Level Input: Conductivity
probe: Max voltage 12 VAC. Sensitivity
established from factory at 100K.
Output:
R1 SPST NO relay resistive load 5A
@ 250 VAC;
R2 SPST NC relay resistive load 5A
@ 250 VAC;
R3 SPDT relay resistive load 16A @
240 VAC.
Horsepower Rating: 1HP -- 10FLA,
60LRA 250 VAC.
ControlType: On/off.
Power Requirements: 115 VAC
10%, 230 VAC 10%, 24 VAC/DC
10%, 12 VAC/DC 10%.
Power Consumption: 4VA
(230V/115V), 1.5VA (24V/12V).
Accuracy: Better than 1% of full-scale.
Display: 3-digit, red 1/2 digits.
Resolution: 1 (3 digits).
to 158F (-30 to 70C).
(-30 to 80C).
Weight: 3.5 oz.
Front Protection: IP64.
257
Digital
The Series TSWB Digital Temperature Switch has a high and a low set point for
controlling the water temperature. The low set point can either be manually or
automatically reset. This control also has a conductivity probe input. This input supplies
12 VAC to the conductivity probe to check for low water condition. There are three relay
outputs which can be assigned in the field to the high temperature set point, low
temperature set point or the low water level input. The Model TS2-K configuration key can
make configuring multiple controls quick and easy.
1-7/64
[28.19]
258_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:59 AM Page 258
Series
TS-Probes
Digital Temperature Switch Probes

& Accessories
Probes to Be Used with TS2, TSS2, TSWB, TSW, TS3, TSX3, and 40M
LENGTH
1/4
[6.35]
1-9/16
[39.69]
TS-1 OR TS-11
1/4
[6.35]
1-9/16
[39.69]
TS-2 OR TS-21
1/4
[6.35]
1
[25.4]
TS-5 OR TS-51
1/4
[6.60]
1-9/16
[39.69]
A-TS-AP
5/8
[15.79]
TS-6 OR TS-61
4 [101.60]
TS-7 OR TS-71
TS-W
2-13/64
[55.88]
TEMPERATURE
TS2-K
Scan here
to watch
product video
Model
TS-1
TS-11
TS-2
TS-21
TS-5
TS-51
TS-6
TS-61
TS-7
TS-71
Sensor
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
PTC
NTC
NTC
Cap Material
Brass
Brass
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
PVC
PVC
Polyamide Resin Coated Brass
Polyamide Resin Coated Brass
None
None
Model
TS485
Length
ft (m)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
10 (3)
7/8
[22.22]
HEX
1-7/16
[36.39]
2 [50.80]
1-57/64 [48.01]
13/32
[10.29]
1-27/64
[36.07]
4
[101.60]
1-9/64
[28.98]
2-3/4 [70.03]
15/32
[11.79]
35/64
[13.97]
17/64
[6.63]
15/64
25/32
[5.84]
[19.81]
4X
3/16
1/2 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor: PTC or NTC (depending on model).
Operating Temperature: -58 to 221F (-50 to 105C).
Accuracy: 2C at 25C.
Response Time: 15 seconds (in air).
Cable: PVC.
Protection: IP67 (NEMA 6).
ACCESSORIES
A-TS-AP, 1/4 DIN Adapter Plate
TS-W, Brass Thermowell (for use with TS-1, TS-11, TS-2, TS-21)
RS-485 Serial Communications Module
Digital
Connects to Configuration Key Port
1-11/16
[42.86]
IN+
IN- OUT+ OUT-
RS485
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
05
08 09 10 11
TS485
1-39/64
[40.89]
The Model TS485 Serial Communications Module allows users to read the current
temperature and parameter settings of the Love Controls family of temperature switches.
The configuration key port on the temperature switch provides the data signal and power
for the RS-485 module. For applications with multiple temperature switches, the modules
can be daisy chained together so that only two wires need to be brought to the PC. The
Model TS485 is compatible with Series TS3, TSX3, TCS, TS2, TSS2 and TSW.
Model TS485, Serial Communications Module
258
11 12
VER.
1
5/8
[15.79]
1-1/16
[26.99]
21/32
[16.67]
SPECIFICATIONS
Compatible Devices: TS3, TSX3, TCS, TS2, TSS2 and TSW.
Communication Type: RS-485 full duplex.
Electrical Isolation: 2500 VAC.
5/16
[8.05]
5/16
[8.05]
259_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:59 AM Page 259
Series
LVT
Digital Programmable Indoor Thermostat with

Heat Pump Control
4 Event - 2 Day Program Schedule, Filter Use Indicator
1-7/32
[30.63]
5-5/32 [130.60]
3-15/32
[87.78]
Model
LVT1
LVT2
FrontAccess Panel
No
Yes
5-19/32 [142.24]
1-15/64
[31.37]
3-35/64
[90.17]
LVT2
LVT1
The Series LVT Digital Programmable Indoor Thermostats withHeat Pump

controls the ambient temperature inside of commercial and residential buildings. For energy
conservation, the thermostats have separate programming for weekdays and weekends,
along with four programmable events per day to allow building owners to have different
settings for occupied and unoccupied times of the day. Set points are stored for both heating
and cooling stages to eliminate the need to reprogram when the seasons change. Internal
jumpers allow for the selection of the engineering units, time delay between compressor
starts and fan controlled heating type. A system and filter usage timer can be used as a
maintenance tool to schedule filter replacement. A filter icon will display when the filter
needs to be changed. For protection against frozen pipes, if the temperature falls below
40F (5C), the heater will be turned on regardless of the set point.
RoHS
LVT2
LVT1
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Measurement: 32 to 99F (0 to 40C); Adjustable: 40 to 95F (5 to 35C).
Accuracy: 1F (0.5C).
Sensor Type: NTCthermistor.
Resolution: 1F (0.5C).
Power Requirements: 24 VAC 50/60 Hz or (2) AA alkaline batteries, not included.
Output: 1 A @ 24 VAC (inductive).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Weight: 4.9 oz (138.9 g).
ACCESSORIES
TG-1, Large Thermostat Cover
TG-2, Small Thermostat Cover
Model
PLVT1
5 Control Modes, Large LCD Display
RoHS
4-33/64 [114.85]
TEMPERATURE
Compact Digital Thermostat with

Heat Pump Control
3-21/64
[84.65]
15/16
[23.88]
Model PLVT1, Compact Digital Thermostat with Heat Pump
ACCESSORIES
TG-1, Large Thermostat Cover
TG-2, Small Thermostat Cover
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
Measurement: 32 to 99F (0 to 40C);
Adjustment:
Heat/Cool Mode:
Heat/Cool Setting: 40 to 95F (5 to 35C);
Auto Mode:
Heat Setting: 40 to 85F (5 to 30C);
Cool Setting: 50 to 95F (10 to 35C).
Sensor Type: NTC thermistor.
Power Requirements: 24 VAC 10% or (2) AAA alkaline batteries, not included.
Output: 1 A @ 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 23 to 122F (-5 to 50C).
Weight: 4.5 oz (127.6 g).
259
Thermostats
The Model PLVT1 Compact Digital Thermostat with Heat Pump directly controls
the furnace, small boiler, air conditioner, circulator fan, and heat pump in commercial or
residential buildings. A large easy to read LCD display shows the current temperature and
the operating mode. In case of a power outage, the thermostat can be operated off batteries.
In order to reduce the need to switch modes for different seasons, the thermostat can be
set to automatically switch between heating and cooling.
260_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:00 PM Page 260
Model
TLVT1
Digital Touch Screen Programmable

Thermostat with Heat Pump Control
5 Control Modes, Large LCD Display
RoHS
1-5/32
[29.48]
6-11/32 [161.20]
4-17/32
[114.99]
The Model TLVT1 Digital Touch Screen Programmable Thermostat with Heat
Pump simplifies controlling indoor temperatures in commercial and residential buildings.
A large easy to read LCD display shows the current temperature, set point, as well as time
and day of the week. By touching the icons on the display, building occupants can
temporarily change the set point, edit the weekly program, or select the control mode. For
larger offices or homes, a single thermostat can control up to two heating and two cooling
units. For Heat pump applications, the thermostat can control a two stage compressor. To
make programming the time easier, there is a daylight savings time function that will
automatically change the time based on the US time change dates. To prevent tampering,
the Model TLVT1 has a security code feature that can lock out the programming. For
additional energy savings, the filter, UV and energy usage timers tracks the number of
hours the fan, heater/cooler, and thermostat is powered on. Additional energy savings can
be achieved by programming the thermostat for up to 4 temperature events for each day of
the week.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
Measurement: 32 to 99F (0 to 40C);
Adjustment: 41 to 95F (5 to 35C).
Sensor Type: NTC thermistor.
Power Requirements: 24 VAC 50/60 Hz or (2) AA alkaline batteries, not included.
Output: 1 A @ 24 VAC 50/60 Hz.
Temperature Limits:
Weight: 10 oz (283.5 g).
Model TLVT1, LCDTouch Screen Programmable Thermostat
ACCESSORIES
Model TG-1, Large Thermostat Cover
Model TG-2, Small Thermostat Cover
TEMPERATURE
Model
862E
Explosion-Proof, Heavy-Duty Thermostat

Line or Low Voltage, Heating or Cooling
4-25/64 FEED THRU
[111.52]
2-13/64
[55.96]
Thermostats
2x 5/16
[7.94]
5-1/4 [133.35]
5-59/64 [150.42]
Explosion-proof, heavy duty, the Model 862E Thermostat is designed for
hazardous-location temperature control. It is the most dependable, smallest, lightest and
most durable thermostat available. The 862E is designed to control heating, cooling, or
ventilation systems and features an adjustable set point knob for easy and convenient
setpoint adjustment. The thermostat incorporates reliable snap action switch operation in
SPDT configuration rated to 480 VAC max.
APPLICATIONS
Oil refineries, petrochemical plants, pulp and paper mills, coal mines, grain elevators,
hazardous waste water storage facilities, other hazardous locations where specific
explosive gases or dusts are present.
Model 862E, Explosion-Proof, Heavy-Duty Thermostat
260
SPECIFICATIONS
(-45 to 80C).
Enclosure Rating:Explosion-proof
NEMA 7 & 9, Class I, Divisions 1 & 2,
Groups C & D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G; Class II, Division 2,
Groups F & G; Class III; Class I, Zones
1 & 2, Groups IIA & IIB.
Switch Type: SPDT snap action
switch.
Electrical Rating: 22 A @ 480 VAC

(res.), 1/2 HP @ 125 VAC, 1 HP @ 250
VAC.
terminal.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: External knob.
Adjustable Range: 36 to 82F (2 to
28C).
Deadband: 2.5F (1.5C).
Approval: CSA, UL.
261_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:00 PM Page 261
Series
DFS
Low Limit Freeze Protection Switch

Manual and Auto Reset, DPDT Output
5-33/64 [140.00]
2-41/64
[67.00]
3/32
CAPILLARY
[2.38]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated, 10 or 20.
Housing Material: Plated steel case, painted steel cover, plastic set point window.
Temperature Limit:
Sensing element: 300F (149C) max.
Switch Type: DPDT snap acting.
Electrical Ratings:
Inductive: 14 FLA, 84 LRA, 3/4 hp @ 120VAC; 12 FLA, 72 LRA, 2 hp @ 240 VAC.
Pilot Duty: 720 VA max. @ 120 to 600 VAC; 144 VA max. @ 24 VAC.
Reset Action: Manual or automatic.
Adjustable Range: 34 to 70F (1 to 21C).
Deadband: 4.5F (2.5C), fixed.
Agency Approvals: cUL, UL.
The Series DFS Low Limit Freeze Protection Switch protects cooling coils in air
handler systems by preventing frost build up on the coils. By sensing the lowest
temperature along any 1 section of capillary, the DPDT manual or automatic reset relays
signal the building management system, as well as cut off the fan. Set points can be
adjusted as low as 34F (1 C) utilizing the visual set point indicator and set point screw.
The Series DFS includes mounting clips for easy installation.
Model
DFS-DM20
DFS-DA20
DFS-DM10
DFS-DA10
Reset Action
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Capillary Length
20 (609 cm)
20 (609 cm)
10 (305 cm)
10 (305 cm)
ACCESSORIES
CC1-N, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Natural
CC1-B, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Beige
CC1-GY, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Grey
Series
DA-7035N
Temperature Switches
Bulb and Capillary, Inert Gas Fill
5/8
[15.88]

FOR COVER REMOVAL
2-1/4
[57.15]
1/2 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
2
SEE
[50.80] VIEW #1
VIEW #1
17/64 [6.75]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 2 PLACES
Model
DA-7035-153-1N
DA-7035-153-3N
DA-7035-153-4N
DA-7035-153-5N
DA-7035-153-7N
DA-7035-153-8N
DA-7035-153-9N
DA-7035-153-10N
DA-7035-153-11N
Max.
Temp.
F (C)
150 (65)
Min.
Deadband
F (C)
23 (13)
Min. Insertion
Depth
E in. (mm)
2-7/8 (73)
240 (115) 25 (14)
2-7/8 (73)
250 (120) 25 (14)
2-7/8 (73)
300 (150) 25 (14)
2-7/8 (73)
500 (260) 41 (23)
2-7/8 (73)
550 (290) 42 (23)
2-7/8 (73)
600 (315) 50 (28)
4-7/8 (124)
500 (260) 50 (28)
2-7/8 (73)
600 (315) 100 (56)
2-7/8 (73)
Insertion depth can be increased through use of bulb supports or wells. Consult factory.
ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS
1/4 MALE NPT CONNECTION

3/4 MALE NPT
BULB CONNECTION
3-5/16
[84.14]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Bulb and
connection: 304 SS.
Temperature Limit: Process: See
model chart; Ambient: 180F (82C).
Optional weatherproof and explosionproof.
Optional DPDT snap and a variety of
mercury switches.
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 120/240/480
VAC.
terminal.
FEATURES
Adjustable deadband
Snap action switch standard
Inert gas activated Bourdon tube
No cross ambient temperature effects
No bulb elevation correction required
Visible dial calibrated in both F and C
Visible on/off indication
6-1/64
[152.80]
7/8
[22.23]

Other sizes available.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical and
level.
Set Point Adjustment: External knobs
for set point and reset point.
Deadband: Adjustable from minimum
in model chart to full range. Optional
low fixed deadband.
Capillary: 6 ft (1.8 m) standard.
Ranges 1N to 7N, and 10N: copper.
Ranges 8N, 9N, 11N: 304 SS.
Set Point Scale: Indication in F and
C.
Options: See switch type, see
enclosures, fixed deadband, longer or
shorter capillary, armored capillary,
wells, two stage, 1/2 or 1 connection
sizes, manual reset, and other bulb
styles.
261
Mechanical
Series DA-7035N temperature switches include the same time-proven switching

mechanism used in our Series DA pressure switches. Bourdon tube assures high sensitivity
and long life. Fully adjustable deadband makes units suitable for a wide range of control
applications. Visible, calibrated dial and external adjustments make changing setpoints
simple and fast.
Range
F (C)
-60 to +30
(-50 to 0)
0 to 100
(-18 to 40)
50 to 150
(10 to 65)
100 to 200
(40 to 95)
140 to 300
(60 to 150)
250 to 415
(120 to 215)
350 to 550
(175 to 290)
100 to 300
(40 to 150)
100 to 500
(40 to 260)
MERCOID
CONTROL
TEMPERATURE
1-5/8
[41.28]
262_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:43 AM Page 262
Series
BTT
Temperature Transmitter
Current or Voltage Output, NEMA 4X Enclosures
BALL CHAIN
2X .325 x .2000
CONNECTOR
MOUNTING
4X
SLOTS 3.295
.875
PROBE
LENGTH
+ .336
+ .0625/-.000
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-47/64
[120.25]
4-31/32
[126.21]
4.788
4.163
.125
GASKET
2.216 GENERAL PURPOSE
[2.813 WEATHERPROOF]
8-43/64
[220.27]
2-1/4
[57.15]
BALL CHAIN
2X
CONNECTOR
0.875
3.310
DuctMount
8-51/64
[223.30]
Outside Air with

Radiation Shield
0.125
GASKET
3-45/64
[93.98]
5-1/8
4-17/32 [130.18]
[115.09]
2-15/64
[56.75]
4-17/32
[115.09]
3-1/8
[79.38]
5-1/8
[130.05]
3-1/8
1-13/64 [79.38]
[30.56]
ImmersionMount
3/16
[4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 4 PLCS
Temperature
Transmitters
TEMPERATURE
Outside Air without

Radiation Shield
The Series BTT Temperature Transmitter can be used for the following applications:
monitoring the temperature inside air ducts for HVAC, transmitting temperature inside
water lines for chillers, or measuring the outside air temperature of any new or existing
facility. Mounting configurations include duct, immersion, and outside air. For duct and
immersion models, probes can be ordered from 2.5 up to 18 in length. The OSA models
can be ordered with an optional radiation shield that allows the sensor to be mounted in
direct sunlight.
BTT -D 04 -1
Example
BTT
Series
D
Mounting
I
Configuration
O
R
00
Probe
25
Length
04
06
08
12
18
1
Output
2
Blank
Options
FC
NIST
262
BTT-D04-1
Duct Mount
Immersion Mount
Outside Air
Outside Air with Radiation Shield
Outside Air/Probe
2.5
4
6
8
12
18
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
None
NIST Calibration Certificate
6-25/32
[172.09]
55/64
[21.83]
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Sensor: Pt1000 RTD.
Range: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Accuracy:
Voltage: 0 to 60C: 0.5C; -40 to 0: 1.0C;
Current: -20 to 50C: 0.5C; -40 to -20C and 50 to 60C: 0.75C.
Wetted Materials: 304 SS (probe), polycarbonate (housing), neoprene (gasket).
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT (immersion models only).
Probe Lengths: 2.5 to 18 (depending on configuration).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC (depending on model).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) (immersions models require thermowell).
Weight: 5.11 oz, 145 g (duct/immersion); 8.4 oz (238 g) (OSA without radiation
shield); 1 lb 7.4 oz (663.4 g) (OSA with radiation shield) .
Thermowells
Model
TE-TNS-N253N-00
TE-TNS-N043N-00
TE-TNS-N063N-00
TE-TNS-N083N-00
TE-TNS-N123N-00
TE-TNS-N183N-00
Material
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
Insertion
Length
2.5
4
6
8
12
18
263_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:01 PM Page 263
Series
TTW
Weatherproof Immersion Temperature

Transmitter
Pt100 RTD, PC Programmable Transmitter
[PROBE LENGTH]
+3/8 [9.52]
3-15/64
[82.15]
3-3/4
[95.25]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TTW Immersion Temperature Transmitter combines three popular
products into a single package. Our TBU series head mounted temperature transmitter is
factory mounted into our A-709 enclosure. A Pt100 RTD version of our TE series is wired
to the transmitter, giving insertion lengths up to 18. Each transmitter is factory
programmed and calibrated to output a 4 to 20 mA signal proportional to the 32 to 212F
(0 to 100C) temperature range.
Model
TTW-104
TTW-106
TTW-108
TTW-112
TTW-118
Probe Length
4
6
8
12
18
2-15/64
[56.75]
5 [127]
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Limits: Operating: -40 to
302F (-40 to 150C).
Sensor Curves: Pt100 RTD (TE
Series Curve D).
Input Range: -328 to 986F (-200 to
530C).
Output: Two-wire 4 to 20 mA.
Output Impedance: 600 @ 24 VDC.

Accuracy: 0.2% FS.
(-40 to 85C).
Response Time: <100 msec.
Enclosure
(-40 to 100C).
Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65).
Material: Painted aluminum housing.
ACCESSORY
TBU-90, Programming Cable and Software
Series
650
1/8 [3.18]
1-53/64
[46.43]
TEMPERATURE
4 to 20 mA Signal, Two Wire Operation, Temperatures from -55 to 180C

13/64
[5.16]
45/64
[17.86]
1-5/16
[33.34]
19/32
[15.08]
5/16 [7.94]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Low Range Limits Span Limits

Range
Max.
Min.
Min Max.
Model As Stocked
-14C 24C 48C
650-1 -23 to +10C -32C
+6C
-12C
37C 150C
650-2 -7 to +49C
650-3 0 to +100C
Consult factory for special ranges calibrated within the limits of -55C and +180C.
OPTION
For NIST traceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TT1.
13/64 [5.16]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Silicone-junction transistor.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.
Power Requirements: 12 to 35 volts DC.
Accuracy: 0.3% FS @ 20C (68F).
Linearity: Within 0.25% of span.
Thermal Drift: Less than 0.5% of span over ambient temperature range of 0 to
50C (32 to 122F).
Probe Construction: 6 long, 0.25 OD Type 304 SS.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 0 to 70C (32 to 158F).
Temperature Limits: (Probe): 204C (400F).
Probe Cable Length: 7 ft (2.1 m).
Voltage Stability: Output error less than 0.01% of span over the specified supply
voltage range.
ACCESSORY
A-325, Duct Mounting Kit with flange, fitting and hardware
263
Temperature
Transmitters
The Series 650 Temperature Transmitter combines low cost with small size making
it ideal for a wide variety of HVAC, industrial and commercial multi-point temperature
monitoring applications. Non-polarized terminals simplify connection to any 12 to 35 VDC
power supply. Capable of operation with long cable runs, Series 650 Transmitters are well
suited for monitoring air or water temperatures at remote locations. Three models are
stocked in popular ranges factory calibrated within 0.3% of span. All are linear within 0.25%
of span and may be recalibrated within low range and span limits shown in chart. Low
range is temperature corresponding to 4 mA output. Span is temperature difference
between Low and High Ranges corresponding to 4 to 20 mA output signal.
3/16 [4.76]
7/32 [5.56]
2-5/8 [66.68]
264_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:01 PM Page 264
Series
659
Push-Button Temperature Transmitter

Programmable, RTD, Thermistor or Thermocouple Input, In-Head Mounting
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLE
TYP 2 PLACES
1-41/64 1-5/16
[41.67] [33.32]
29/32
[23.02]
Series 659 Push-Button Temperature Transmitters accept thermocouple (J, K, T),
RTD (Pt100) or thermistor input and provide a linearized 4 to 20 mA output. The
transmitter is quickly ranged and calibrated by using a single on-board switch. An LED
provides visual indication of sensor fault and programming mode. Models feature reverse
polarity protection. Thermocouple models are also galvanically isolated and cold junction
compensated.
The compact transmitter can be mounted directly within any standard thermal head for
connection to the sensor. The Series 659 Transmitters are ideal for temperature
measurement in boilers, burners, ducts, furnaces, refrigeration systems, food processing,
tanks, chemical processing, steam generators or any other process application.
Model
659TC-1
659RTD-1
659TH-1
Input
Thermocouple (Type J, K, T)
3-wire (RTD Pt100)
Thermistor (2252)
Series
651
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Range: Type J T/C: -328 to 2192F (-200 to 1200C); Type K T/C: -328 to
2498F (-200 to 1370C); Type T T/C: -328 to 752F (-200 to 400C); Pt100
RTD: -328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C); Thermistor: -13 to 257F.
Accuracy: T/C models: 0.04% FS., 0.04% of reading or 0.5C whichever is
greater; RTD: 0.2C 0.1% of rdg; Thermistor:0.25F (0.1C).
Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire loop powered.
Sample Rate: 500 ms.
Loop Resistance: T/C: 700 @ 24 VDC; RTD: 800 @ 24 VDC; Thermistor: 24
VDC.
Output Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.2A/C; Span: 0.5A/C.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C), 80% RH max.
Ambient Storage Temperature: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C), 95% RH max.
Burnout: Upscale 22 mA.
Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
TEMPERATURE
RTD or Thermocouple Input, Zero and Span Adjust, Linearized 4 to 20 mA Signal

0.16 [4.1] DIA. CENTER HOLE
FOR SENSOR WIRE ENTRY
MAX. LOAD RESISTANCE
Linearized output for precise temperature monitoring or control is combined with small
size and quick, easy mounting. Rugged Series 651 transmitters are designed for use with
2 or 3 wire Pt100 RTDs (to DIN standard 43760 or BS1904) or ungrounded Type K
thermocouples. Thermocouple models 651TC are cold junction compensated, automatic
32 to 160F (0 to 70C) with upscale burnout. These economical devices provide the
accuracy and reliability you need at the lowest possible cost.
Model
651A-10
651A-20
651A-40
651TC-01
651TC-02
651TC-04
651TC-06
Input Type
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Type K Thermocouple
Range,F (C)
32-212 (0-100)
32-392 (0-200)
32-752 (0-400)
32-212 (0-100)
32-392 (0-200)
32-752 (0-400)
32-1112 (0-600)
ACCESSORY
A-709, Optional enclosure for Series 651 Transmitters. NEMA 1 protective housing
is 3 x 2 1/8 (76 x 54 mm). Supplied with mounting hardware, strain relief fitting and
assembly instructions
264
4-20 mA TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER

MODEL 651TCDWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360, U.S.A.
1-1/4
[33.32]
S Z
1000
7/32 DIA.
[5.53] MOUNTING HOLES
Temperature
Transmitters
1200
29/32
[23.02]
800
1-21/32
[42.07]
600
400
200
0
10
14 18 22 26 30
POWER SUPPLY (VDC)
34
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 2 or 3-wire Pt100 RTD (models 651A), or ungrounded Type K thermocouple
(models 651TC).
Output: 4 to 20 mA DC, linearized.
Transmitter Type: 2-wire.
Power Requirements: 10 to 32 VDC, reverse connection protected.
Accuracy: 0.2C plus 0.2% reading (models 651A), 0.1% FS plus cold junction
errors (models 651TC).
Temperature Drift: ZERO drift typical 0.02%/C (0.09F); SPAN typical 0.005%/C
(0.0036F).
TemperatureLimits: Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Maximum Storage Temperature: 160F (70C).
Response Time: 10 to 90% in 200 ms (models 651A), 70% in 2 ms (models
651TC).
See page 265 (Model A-709)
265_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:02 PM Page 265
Model
A-709
Temperature Transmitter Enclosure

Fits Series 651 and 659 Transmitters
2-27/32
[72.23]
1/2 NPT
3-5/32
[80.12]
1-21/32
[42.07]
1-5/8
[41.28]
TheModel A-709 Temperature Enclosure can be used to mount our Series 651 and
659 transmitters to any of our 1/4 diameter temperature sensors. The screw on enclosure
core can be quickly removed and has a chain to prevent it from getting lost. The Model A709 comes with the necessary adapters and fittings for attaching the temperature sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Rating: NEMA 4X.
Materials: Aluminum housing.
Model A-709, Temperature Transmitter Enclosure
Model
652-0
Programmable Transmitter
RTD, Thermocouple, Voltage or Potentiometer Input, Galvanically Isolated
1-5/8
[41.86]
Model 652-0 Programmable Transmitter accepts any commonly used temperature

sensor, slidewire transducer or millivolt signal and produces a 4 to 20 mA output signal.
Input type and range are easily programmed using a PC and the simple Windows based
software program model 652-C sold separately. The user can completely reconfigure units
of measure, high/low range, filtering factor, offset, and transmitter reference details. The
model 652-0 features 500V input to output isolation to remove ground loop effects and four
filter settings to remove incoming signal noise. Outstanding versatility and compact size
make this unit ideal for any temperature application.
ACCESSORY
652-C, Configuration Kit (includes power adapter, configuration module, software
and carrying case).
3 [76.2]
3 FOOT [1M]
CONNECTING
CABLE
SPECIFICATIONS
Input/Output Isolation: 500 VAC RMS.
Thermocouple Input Range:
J: -328 to 2192F (-200 to 1200C);
K: -328 to 2498F(-200 to 1370C);
T: -328 to 752F (-200 to 400C);
R and S: -14 to 3200F (-10 to 1760C);
E: -328 to 1832F (-200 to 1000C);
F: -148 to 1112F (-100 to 600C);
N: -292 to 2372F (-180 to 1300C).
RTD Input Range: (Pt100): -328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C).
Output: Linearized 4 to 20 mA.
Power Requirements: 10 to 35V.
Accuracy: T/C: 0.04% full range input, 0.04% rdg.; RTD; 0.01 full range input,
0.05% of rdg.; Voltage: 10V, 0.07% rdg.; Potentiometer: 0.1% full range input.
Thermal Drift: Zero: 0.1V/C (RTD zero drift is 0.008F/F); Span: 100ppm/C.
Temperature Limit: Ambient: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Response Time: < 1 second.
Update Time: 250 msec max.
Filtering: Off, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, or adaptive.
Cold Junction Error: 29F (0.5C).
Computer Interface: RS232 via configurator 652-C, IBM compatible 386 or above
with 4mB Ram and serial port.
Housing: PPE & PS.
Weight: 0.92 oz (26 g).
Max. Output Load: 700 @ 24 VDC.
265
Temperature
Transmitters
Model 652-0, Programmable Transmitter
3 FOOT [1M] LEAD
TEMPERATURE
7/8
[22.86]
2-3/8
[60.96]
266_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:02 PM Page 266
Series
TTE
Explosion-Proof RTD Temperature Transmitter

User Selectable Ranges, Optional LCD Display
4-9/32
[108.74]
10-23/64
[263.13]
1/2 NPT
4-15/32
[113.51]
2-23/32
[69.06]
1/2 NPT
3-29/32
[99.22]
1/4
[6.35]
*Shown with optional LCDdisplay

Temperature
Transmitters
TEMPERATURE
The Series TTE Explosion-Proof RTD Temperature Transmitter is the ideal

product for hazardous temperature measurement applications. The TTE series has seven
pre-programmed temperature ranges that are selectable via an internal dip switch. For
those applications that need a custom range, the transmitter can be easily configured for
any range between -30 to 250F with a minimum span of 40F. The span and zero can be
quickly adjusted with a simple push button design. The compact housing allows for the
transmitter to be mounted in virtually any application.
Model
TTE-104-W
TTE-106-W
TTE-109-W
TTE-112-W
TTE-115-W
TTE-118-W
TTE-104-W-LCD
TTE-106-W-LCD
TTE-109-W-LCD
TTE-112-W-LCD
TTE-115-W-LCD
TTE-118-W-LCD
Stem Length
4
6
9
12
15
18
4
6
9
12
15
18
LCD Display
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORY
A-287, Mounting bracket for pipe or surface mounting
(Includes bracket and two 2 U-bolts)
266
1/2 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Sensor: Pt1000, 0.00385 DIN.
Output Temperature Ranges: User selectable any range between -30 to 250F
with a minimum span of 40F.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 0 to 158F (-18 to 70C); Process: -30 to 250F
(-34.4 to 121.1C).
Accuracy: Transmitter 0.1% FS; Probe 0.3% FS.
Thermal Drift Effects: 0.02%/C max.
Probe Length: 2 to 18 (depending on model).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA (two wire loop powered).
Optional Display: 2 lines X 8 character LCD.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and explosion-proof for Class I, Groups B, C,
D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III.
Field-Selectable Ranges
40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C)
-20 to 140F (-28.9 to 60C)
0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C)
30 to 240F (-1.1 to 115.6C)
32 to 212F (0 to 100C)
32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
-30 to 65C (-1.1 to 18.3C)
Custom range between -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C)
267_Layout 1 7/14/14 7:41 AM Page 267
Temperature Sensors
Ordering Sensors
Sensors are constructed with various types of protection/mounting hardware, extensions,
and wire terminations. The sensor types and their temperature ranges are shown in the
table. See Temperature Limits for maximum service temperatures applicable to the
protection tube, mounting hardware, wire extensions, etc.
This section shows only a limited selection of the available sensors. The sensors are
organized by hardware type. Most hardware can house any type thermocouple or RTD.
Terminations are usually either lug type or standard plugs, but many other types are
available. Various head enclosures are also available. Dimensions can be custom designed
to meet your specifications.
Temperature Limits
Sensor selection depends on two separate temperatures: process temperature and
connector temperature. Make sure the local temperature at each component does not exceed
the maximum rated service temperature for that component. Note that extension wire must
withstand the process temperature.
Service Temperatures
304/316 SS Tubing/Protection/Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1600F
Inconel 600 Tubing/Protection/Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2100F
Alumina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3400F
Mullite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2700F
Fiberglass insulated extension wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .842F
FEP insulated extension wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392F
Junction Box (BX) connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400F
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400F
Scan here
to watch
product video
Exposed to
process temperature
Measuring
junction
or element
Exposed to
connector temperature
Protection tube &

mounting hardware
Thermocouple Types
J
K
E
T
R
S
RTD Types
Low Range Thin Film
Medium Range Thin Film
High Range Wire Wound
Wire Type
Iron/Constantan
Chromel/Alumel
Chromel/Constantan
Copper/Constantan
Plat. 13% /Rhod. Plat.
Plat. 10% Rhod./Plat.
Extension
Terminal
Temperature
Range (F)
32 to 1400
32 to 2300
-300 to 1600
-300 to 700
32 to 2700
32 to 2700
Temperature
Range (C)
0 to 760
0 to 1200
-184 to 871
-184 to 371
0 to 1482
0 to 1482
-50 to 200
-50 to 480
-200 to 600
-58 to 392
-58 to 896
-328 to 1112
Hardware Type
Plain Sheath
Bayonet Mount, Adjustable

(w/ SS Overbraid Extension)
Bayonet Mount, Adjustable

(w/ SS Flex Hose)
Bayonet Mount, Fixed
Terminals
TEMPERATURE
T/C
RTD
Mini Plug Type 6
Stripped-Ends Type 0
Screw Cover Head Type E, F, G
T/C
RTD
Mini Plug Type 7
Lugs Type 1
Temperature Sensors
Snap Cover Head Type H
Fast Tabs Type 8
Lugs w/BXConnector Type 2

Fast Tabs w/ BX Type 9
Screw Cover Head Type I, J, K,M, N, P

T/C
RTD
Standard Plug Type 3
Hex Nipple Type A, B
T/C
RTD
Standard Jack Type 4
Hex Bushing Type C, D
Snap Cover Head Type L, Q
Inconel is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.
267
268_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:03 PM Page 268
Thermocouples & RTDs

Scan here
to watch
product video
General Purpose
Basic Model
3/16 OD
STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
FIBERGLASS
INSULATED WIRE
#6 SPADE
TRMINAL
-
Model
122095-84
122095-01
122095-04
Sensor Type
J
K
(3-wire) 100 RTD
Model
122095-96
122095-07
122095-08
122095-14
122095-00
122095-10
Sensor Type
J
J
J
100RTD
J
J
A Length
12
18
24
24
12
18
Terminal
Open
Open
Open
Open
Plug
Plug
Model
122087-00
122087-01
122087-02
Sensor Type
100RTD
100RTD
100RTD
A Length
6
12
18
Terminal
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
Model
122095-06
122095-15
122095-17
122095-16
122095-20
Sensor Type
J
J
100 RTD
J
100 RTD
Bend
0
0
0
90
90
Terminal
#6 spade
Plug
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
Model
122095-19
122095-21
122095-22
122095-25
Sensor Type
J
J
J
100 RTD
Bend
0
0
90
0
Terminal
#6 spade
Plug
#6 spade
#6 spade
Model
122095-24
122095-31
122095-32
Sensor Type
J
J
J
Ring Terminal ID
13/32
13/32
13/64
Model
122095-58
122095-57
122095-60
122095-59
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
Tip
Flush
Flush
1/8
1/8
Terminal
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
48
Rigid Extension Model
STANDARD
PLUG
OPEN
TERMINALS
3/16 OD
STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
A
FEP Insulation Extension
1/4 OD STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
#6 SPADE
TERMINAL
FEP INSULATED
WIRE WITH
SEALED TIP
36
Flex Hose Extension Model
FIBERGLASS INSULATED
WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL FLEX HOSE
3/16 OD
STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
#6 SPADE
TERMINAL
+
TEMPERATURE
1/2 BX CONNECTOR
48
Stainless Steel Overbraid Extension Model

1/2 BX
CONNECTOR
#6 SPADE
TERMINAL
WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL OVERBRAID
3/16 OD
STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
Temperature Sensors
48
Special Purpose
Surface Thermocouple (900F Max.)
1/2 BX
CONNECTOR
RING
TERMINAL WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL OVERBRAID
#6 SPADE
TERMINAL
Terminal
#6 spade
Plug
#6 spade
48
Bolt Style
1/2-20
UNF-2A
268
WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL FLEX HOSE
STANDARD
PLUG
A Length
0
4
0
4
Terminal
Plug
Plug
Plug
Plug
269_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:03 PM Page 269

Special Purpose
Web Style
TERMINAL STRIP
IRON STRIP
CONSTANTAN
STRIP
A
Model
122095-35
122095-86
122095-34
122095-85
A Length
4
2.75
4
2.75
Terminal
No
No
Yes
Yes
Model
122095-75
122095-26
122095-77
122095-76
122095-27
122095-78
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
J
J
A Length
36
48
60
36
48
60
Model
122095-79
122095-81
122095-82
122095-80
122095-29
122095-83
Sensor Type
J
J
J
J
J
J
A Length
36
48
60
36
48
60
Bayonet Mount
Adjustable Length Spring Type
3/16 OD STAINLESS
WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
BAYONET STEEL OVERBRAID
CAP
#6 SPADE
12 LONG
COMPRESSION
1/2 BX TERMINAL
SPRING
CONNECTOR
+
1/2
Terminal
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
Plug
Plug
Plug
Adjustable Length Flex Hose Type
3/16 OD
STAINLESS
STEEL TUBE
WIRE WITH STAINLESS
STEEL FLEX HOSE
#6 SPADE
1/2 BX TERMINAL
BAYONET
CONNECTOR
CAP
-
1/2
Terminal
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
Plug
Plug
Plug
TEMPERATURE
Mineral Insulated
#6 SPADE TERMINAL
3/8 OD 304 STAINLESS STEEL
B
36
Sensor Type
100RTD
100RTD
100RTD
A Length
6
12
6
B Diameter
1/4
1/4
1/8
Terminal
#6 spade
#6 spade
#6 spade
Temperature Sensors
Model
122088-00
122088-01
122086-00
FIBERGLASS INSULATED WIRE

WITH SEALED TIP
269
270_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:04 PM Page 270
Series
R&8
Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTDs
Mineral Insulated Thermocouples and RTDs are known for their excellent mechanical durability and resistance to electrical breakdown. Mineral Insulated Thermocouples can be bent to
most any angle without special equipment
Due to the varying size of connection wire and cable, a transition fitting is used between the cold end of the sheath and the connecting wires. This fitting measures 1-1/4 long by 1/4 OD for
1/8 or smaller sheaths, and 1-1/2 long by 3/8 OD for 3/16 and 1/4 sheaths. Larger sheaths and sheaths terminating in connectors other than wire or cable do not require transition
fittings.
A
MINERAL INSULATED TRANSITIONS
Basic Sheath Configuration
Sheath and Transition Fitting (when made with Flex Hose)
Sheath and Transition Fitting (when made with SS Overbraid Wire)
Sheath and Transition Fitting (when made with Fiberglass Wire)
Scan here
to watch
product video
RTD
TYPE
2 2-Wire; Class B
3 3-Wire; Class B
4 4-Wire; Class B
5 2-Wire; Class A
6 3-Wire; Class A
7 4-Wire; Class A
SENSOR
TYPE
6 100 RTD: 0.00385/C
Z 1000 RTD: 0.00385/C
4 100 RTD: 0.00392/C
A
IN 1/10 INCH
AA
IN 1/10 INCH
B
IN INCHES
C
IN INCHES
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
Temperature Sensors
TEMPERATURE
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the probe of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros 0.
HARDWARE
TYPE
1 Plain Sheath (304SS)
3 Inconel 600 Sheath
EXTENSION
TYPE
1 Fiberglass Insulation
2 Fiberglass Insulation w/ SS Flex Hose
3 Fiberglass Insulation w/ SS Overbraid
HEAD ASSEMBLY OPTIONS (3/4 NPT Conduit Connection)

E Screw Cover Head, AL w/ No Process Connection
F Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ No Process Connection
G Screw Cover Head, SS w/ No Process Connection
H Snap Cover Head, AL w/ No Process Connection
I Screw Cover Head, AL w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
J Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
K Screw Cover Head, SS w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
L Snap Cover Head, AL w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
M Screw Cover Head, AL w/ 3/4 NPT Process Connection
N Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ 3/4 Process Connection
P Screw Cover Head, SS w/ 3/4 Process Connection
Q Snap Cover Head, AL w/ 3/4 Process Connection
ELEMENTS JUNCTION
SENSOR
1 Single
TYPE
TERMINALS
1 Grounded
0 Stripped Ends 2 Dual
2 Ungrounded
1 Leads With #6
3 Exposed Tip
Spade Lugs
2 Leads With #6
Spade Lugs & 1/2 BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
8 Leads With 1/4 Fastabs
9 Leads With 1/4 Fastabs 1/2 BX
A 1/2 NPT Hex Nipple (316SS)
B 3/4 NPT Hex Nipple (316SS)
C 1/2 NPT Hex Bushing (316SS)
D 3/4 NPT Hex Bushing (316SS)
See table for HEAD ASSEMBLY OPTIONS
SENSOR
O.D.
1 1/16
2 1/8
3 3/16
4 1/4
5 3/8
BEND
1 None
2 45
3 90
270
271_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:05 PM Page 271
Series
4&5
General Purpose and Bayonet Type

General Purpose Type RTD and Thermocouple tip temperatures can be as high as 842F (450C) for fiberglass insulated wire, and 392F (200C) for FEP insulated wire. Models can be
specified with lead wires or head assembly construction. For higher temperatures see the Series R & 8 Mineral Insulated Probes.
General Purpose
Bayonet
AA
AA
AA
AA
90 BEND
45 BEND
45 BEND
90 BEND
A
A
AA
Fixed
Adjustable
Model Coding
A
IN 1/10 INCH
AA
IN 1/10 INCH
B
IN INCHES
C
IN INCHES
HARDWARE
TYPE
2 Plain Sheath w/ FEP Coating
4 Back Filled Sheath*
5 Back Filled Sheath w/ FEP Coating*
6 Bayonet Mount Adjustable Length
7 Bayonet Mount Fixed Length
EXTENSION
TYPE
1 Fiberglass Insulation 842F/450C
4 FEP Insulation 392F/200C
5 FEP Insulation w/ SS Overbraid
6 FEP Insulation w/ FEP Coated Flex Hose
HEAD ASSEMBLY OPTIONS* (3/4 NPT Conduit Connection)

E Screw Cover Head, AL w/ No Process Connection
F Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ No Process Connection
G Screw Cover Head, SS w/ No Process Connection
H Snap Cover Head, AL w/ No Process Connection
I Screw Cover Head, AL w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
J Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
K Screw Cover Head, SS w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
L Snap Cover Head, AL w/ 1/2 NPT Process Connection
M Screw Cover Head, AL w/ 3/4 NPT Process Connection
N Screw Cover Head, Plastic w/ 3/4 Process Connection
P Screw Cover Head, SS w/ 3/4 Process Connection
Q Snap Cover Head, AL w/ 3/4 Process Connection
ELEMENTS JUNCTION
SENSOR
1 Single
TYPE
TERMINALS
1 Grounded
0 Stripped Ends 2 Dual
2 Ungrounded
1 Leads With #6
3 Exposed Tip
Spade Lugs
2 Leads With #6
Spade Lugs 1/2 BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
8 Leads With 1/4 Fastabs
9 Leads With 1/4 Fastabs 1/2 BX
A 1/2 NPT Hex Nipple (316SS)*
B 3/4 NPT Hex Nipple (316SS)*
C 1/2 NPT Hex Bushing (316SS)*
D 3/4 NPT Hex Bushing (316SS)*
See list for HEAD ASSEMBLY OPTIONS*
SENSOR
O.D.
2 1/8
3 3/16
4 1/4
5 3/8
BEND
1 None
2 45
3 90
*Options only available on Series 4 RTDs
See page 270 (Series R & 8)
271
Temperature Sensors
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
TEMPERATURE
RTD
TYPE
2 2-Wire; Class B
3 3-Wire; Class B
5 2-Wire; Class A
6 3-Wire; Class A
SENSOR
TYPE
6 100 RTD: 0.00385/C
Z 1000 RTD: 0.00385/C
4 100 RTD: 0.00392/C
272_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:06 PM Page 272
Series
9&P
Special Application Thermocouples and RTDs
Special Application Thermocouples and RTDs cover a wide variety of types and configurations. This section covers FEP covered thermocouples and RTDs, ring type thermocouples and
RTDs for surface measurement, web type thermocouples for surface measurement of moving objects such as rollers, and penetration thermocouples and RTDs with sharp tips for measurement
of viscous liquids and semisolids such as plastic compounds, rubber and slightly frozen food products.
SERIES 9 SPECIALTY SENSOR STYLES
B
Web Type Surface Thermocouples

B
Web Type Surface Thermocouple
Replacement Element
Ring Type Surface Thermocouples and RTDs
Flexible FEP Covered Bead Junction
Web Type Surface Thermocouple

Assembly

SERIES P PENETRATION PROBE STYLES
2. Straight Handle
1. Transition Fitting
A
POINTED
CLOSURE
3. Saber Handle
2-1/2 1-1/2
STRAIN RELIEF
TRANSITION FITTING TUBING
1-3/4 2-3/8 1-1/2
6&7. Euro Style Handle (FEPor SS)
4. Flanged Handle
2-1/2 1-1/2
2-1/2
EURO STYLE
FLANGED HANDLE
Temperature Sensors
TEMPERATURE
Model Coding
B
C
IN INCHES
IN INCHES
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
6 RTD DIN
4 RTD NIST
Z RTD DIN 1K
HARDWARE
TYPE
5 Bead Junction w/ FEP Coating
6 Ring #10 (0.196 ID)
7 Ring #8 (0.144 ID)
8 Ring 3/8 (0.390 ID)
9 Web
EXTENSION
TYPE
0 None
1 Fiberglass Insulation 842F/450C
4 FEP Insulation 392F/200C
5 FEP Insulation w/ SS Overbraid
6 FEP Insulation w/ FEP Coated Flex Hose
A*
IN 1/10 INCH
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
T T/C
6 RTD DIN
4 RTD NIST
Z RTD DIN 1K
272
PROBE
STYLE
1 Transition Fitting, SS
2 Straight Handle, SS
3 Saber Handle, SS
4 Flanged Handle, SS
6 Euro Style, FEP
7 Euro Style, SS
EXTENSION
TYPE
4 FEP Insulation
6 FEP Over SS
Flex Hose
B
IN INCHES
SENSOR
TERMINALS
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs With BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
SABER HANDLE
STRAIGHT HANDLE
SENSOR
TERMINALS
0 None
1 Lugs
2 Lugs With BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
8 Fastabs
9 Fastabs With BX
JUNCTION
TYPE
1 T/C
2 2-Wire RTD; Class B
3 3-Wire RTD; Class B
6 2-Wire RTD; Class A
7 3-Wire RTD; Class A
C
IN INCHES
JUNCTION
TYPE
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
SENSOR
O.D.
7 0.134 O.D. Hypodermic
8 0.180 O.D. Hypodermic
*A Dimension maximum length is 12 (30 cm)
273_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:06 PM Page 273
Series
D
Sensors for Sanitary Applications

STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE
SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD
STAINLESS STEEL
CONNECTION
HEAD
1.00
.840 SST SUPPORT TUBE

A
1/2
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
2.25
SANITARY WELD
3/4
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
WHITE POLY
SCREW COVER
CONNECTION
HEAD
2.00
SANITARY CAP
MINIATURE ALUMINUM CONNECTION HEAD
PG9 CABLE GLAND
SANITARY CAP
3 NOM.
STANDARD WHITE POLYPROPYLENE

SNAP-COVER CONNECTION HEAD
A
CHEMICAL RESISTANT STRAIN RELIEF

A
FEP JACKETED CABLE

1
SANITARY WELD
SANITARY WELD
C
SANITARY CAP
3 NOM.
3 NOM.
SANITARY CAP
16A BEVEL SEAT
16 AMP CLAMP CAP
O.D.
1.00
1.98
1.98
2.51
3.03
3.57
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Thickness
.188
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
O.D.
1.31
1.84
2.37
2.90
3.43
Model Coding:
SHEATH
1 Straight
3 Stepped Tip
CAP
STYLE
2 16A Without Nut
3 16A With Nut
4 16AI-14I
5 16 Amp
6 16 APV Without
Nut
7 16 APV With
Nut
CAP
SIZE
1 1/2
2 3/4
3 1-1/2
4 2
5 2-1/2
6 3
O.D.
1.38
1.88
2.38
2.88
3.38
B
IN INCHES
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Thickness
.29
.42
.46
.47
.50
O.D.
2
2
2.65
3.12
3.87
Thickness
.50
.50
.56
.56
.75
C
IN INCHES
Temperature Sensors
A
IN 1/10 INCH
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
6 RTD DIN
4 RTD NIST
Size
Tube O.D.
1
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Thickness
.46
.56
.62
.66
.71
ELEMENTS
TERMINATION
0 No Termination
1 Single
2 White Screw Cover
2 Dual
PP Head (3/4 Conduit)
3 Screw Cover 316SS
Head (1/2 Conduit)
4 Split Leads
5 Split Leads With Lugs
6 Split Leads With BX & Lugs
7 STD Plug
8 STD Jack
9 Miniature Aluminum Snap
Cover Head
JUNCTION
TYPE
1 Grounded
2 Ungrounded
TEMPERATURE
Size
Tube O.D.
1/2 or 3/4
1
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
16 AI-14I I-LINE
16APV APC
SENSOR O.D.
NOMINAL / REDUCED
1 5/32 / NA
2 1/4 / 1/8
3 3/8 / 3/16
6 1/4 / NA
7 1/2 / NA
273
274_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:07 PM Page 274
Series
T
Temperature Sensor Assemblies with

Thermowells
Series T Sensor Assemblies are available in a variety of head styles and thermowell materials. All elements are spring loaded to ensure positive contact in the thermowell. Thermowells are
non-lagging. The sensor sheath material is constructed of 316 SS regardless of the well material specified.
HEX
EXTENSION
THERMOWELL
NIPPLE
EXTENSION
THERMOWELL
CONNECTION HEAD
CONNECTION HEAD
THERMOWELL
UNION
EXTENSION
TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION HEAD
Model Coding - Sensor Assemblies with Thermowells

A
IN INCHES
Temperature Sensors
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
6 100 RTD:
3-Wire 0.00385/C
Z 1000 RTD:
3-Wire 0.00385/C
4 100 RTD:
3-Wire 0.00392/C
WELL
MATERIAL
0 None
1 304 SS
2 316 SS
3 Brass
4 Carbon Steel
TAPER/BORE
0 None
1 Step/0.260
2 Straight/0.385
3 Taper/0.260
4 Taper/0.385
5 Straight/0.260
EXTENSION
1 Steel
1/2 NPT 1 in hex
4 Steel
1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
7 Steel
1/2 NPT 4 in union
K 316 SS
1/2 NPT 1 in hex
N 316 SS
1/2 NPT 4 in nipple
S 316 SS
1/2 NPT 4 in union
ELEMENTS
1 Single
(Ungrounded/RTD)
2 Dual
(Ungrounded/RTD)
3 Single
(Grounded)
4 Dual
(Grounded)
HEAD
0 Aluminum
Screw Cover
1 Aluminum
Snap Cover
2 Polypropylene
Snap Cover
3 Polypropylene
Screw Cover
5 304 SS
Screw Cover
PROCESS CONNECTION
(NOMINAL/REDUCED O.D.)
0 None*
1 1/2 NPT (5/8 to 1/2 Step)
4 3/4 NPT (3/4 to 1/2 Step)
6 1 NPT (7/8 to 1/2 Step)
7 3/4 NPT (7/8 to 5/8 Taper)
8 1 NPT (1-1/16 to 5/8 Taper)
9 3/4 NPT (7/8 to 49/64 Taper)
A 1 NPT (1-1/16 to 49/64 Taper)
B 1/2 NPT (5/8 Straight)
E 3/4 NPT (3/4 Straight)
D 1 NPT (7/8 Straight)
*For replacement sensors,

specify 0 for well material,
taper and bore, and process
connections
274
275_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:07 PM Page 275
Series
W
Thermowells
Select bore as 0.260 for 1/4 diameter elements and 0.390 for 3/8 diameter elements. Specify heavy duty mounting for tapered sheaths.
Straight Stem
1/4
[6.35]
A
PROCESS CONNECTION
.260
[6.60]
BORE
Tapered Flanged
A
1/2
[12.70]
.260/.390
WELD
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
SHEATH
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4
[19.05]
1.000
[25.40]
STRAIGHT STEM
1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY
1/4
[6.35]
5/8
[15.88]
49/64
[19.45]
1-1/4
[31.75]
Tapered Stem
A
0.260/0.390
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
TAPERED STEM
1/4
[5.35]
1/2 NPT
5/8
[15.88]
49/64
[19.45]
2-1/4
[57.15]
Straight Flanged
A
TAPERED STEM
1/4
[6.35]
1.000
3/4
[19.05] [25.40]
Stepped Stem
WELD
1/2 NPT
A
.260
[6.60]
BORE
1/4
[6.35]
SHEATH
.260/.390
[6.60]/[9.91]
BORE
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/2
[12.70]
STRAIGHT STEM
1/2 NPT
3/4
[19.05]
2-1/4
[57.15]
STEPPED STEM
1/4 IN ELEMENTS ONLY
1.000
[25.40]
TEMPERATURE

Model Coding - Thermowells
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the thermowell of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros 0.
A
IN 1/10 INCH
TAPER/BORE
0 Straight/0.260
1 Step/0.260
2 Straight/0.390
3 Taper/0.260
4 Taper/0.390
INSIDE THREAD
1 1/2 Female NPT
PROCESS
CONNECTION
1 1/2 NPT
2 3/4 NPT
3 1 NPT
4 1 150# Flange
5 1-1/2 150# Flange
6 2 150# Flange
7 1 300# Flange
8 1-1/2 300# Flange
9 2 300# Flange
A 1 600# Flange
B 1-1/2 600# Flange
C 2 600# Flange
MOUNTING
1 Threaded
2 Heavy Duty
Threaded
3 Heavy Duty
Flanged
4 Flanged
LAG
0 None
2 2
3 3
Temperature Sensors
HARDWARE
TYPE
1 304 SS Sheath
2 316 SS Sheath
3 Brass
4 Carbon Steel
SHEATH O.D.
BASE / TAPER
1 5/8 / 1/2 Step
4 3/4 / 1/2 Step
6 7/8 / 1/2 Step
7 7/8 / 5/8 Taper
8 1-1/16 / 5/8 Taper
9 7/8 / 49/64 Taper
A 1-1/16 / 49/64 Taper
B 1/2 Straight
C 49/64 Straight
D 7/8 Straight
E 3/4 Straight
275
276_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:33 AM Page 276
Series
7
Protection Tube Assemblies and Replacement

Thermocouple Elements
Protection tube assembly type thermocouples are designed for high temperature applications such as ovens, kilns, or other processes. Metal protection tubes can be used in applications
ranging from 1200F to 2100F. Ceramic tubes can be used in applications from 1200F to 3400F.
Metal Tube Assemblies
Ceramic Tube Assemblies
B
A
No Mounting
Hex Fitting/Flange Mounting
Hex Fitting Mounting
AA
B
A
Bend Options
Pipe Nipple Mounting

Replacement Sensor Elements
Replacement sensor elements are available as separate parts. All rules regarding lengths and fittings apply. Use the standard Order Code, using a 0 for the hardware type, 0
for mounting, 0 for sensor terminals, and 0 for tube O.D. See example below.
To order use Order Chart below. Specify 0 for Tube Type.
(e.g. - Type K 8 ga. insulated element 12 long is 7K000-110-121-12-00-15)
C
To order use Order Chart below. Specify 0 for Tube Type.
(e.g. - Type K 14 ga. bare element 12 long is 7K000-110-311-12-00-15)
Temperature Sensors
TEMPERATURE
Model Coding
A
AA/B
C
IN INCHES
IN INCHES
IN INCHES
*
**
***
15 1.5
00 Head Assembly
SENSOR
TYPE
0 None
J T/C
K T/C
R T/C
S T/C
HARDWARE
TYPE
0 None
1 304 SS
2 316 SS
4 Inconel 601
5 Mullite+
6 Alumina+
B Carbon Steel
MOUNTING
TYPE
0 None
1 Flange
2 1/2 NPT Hex Fitting (CS)
3 3/4 NPT Hex Fitting (CS)
4 1 NPT Hex Fitting (CS)
5 1-1/4 NPT Hex Fitting (CS)
6 1/2 NPT Hex Fitting (316SS)
7 3/4 NPT Hex Fitting (316SS)
8 1 NPT Hex Fitting (316SS)
9 1-1/4 NPT Hex Fitting (316SS)
A 1/2 NPT Pipe Nipple (CS)
B 3/4 NPT Pipe Nipple (CS)
C 1 NPT Pipe Nipple (CS)
D 1-1/4 Pipe Nipple (CS)
E 1/2 NPT Pipe Nipple (316SS)
F 3/4 NPT Pipe Nipple (316SS)
G 1 NPT Pipe Nipple (316SS)
H 1-1/4 NPT Pipe Nipple (316SS)
SENSOR
TERMINALS
0 None (Stripped Ends)
H Snap Cover Head
AL w/ 3/4 NPT Conduit
E Screw Cover Head
AL w/ 3/4 NPT Conduit
G Screw Cover Head
SS w/ 3/4 NPT Conduit
ELEMENTS
0 None
1 Single
2 Dual
*WIRE GAUGE
0 None
1 8 AWG
2 11 AWG
3 14 AWG
4 20 AWG
5 24 AWG (Type R or S only)
6 26 AWG (Type R or S only)
BEND
1 Straight
2 45
3 90
TUBE O.D.
0 None
1 1/4 Pipe
2 1/2 Pipe
3 3/4 Pipe
4 1 Pipe
A 0.375 O.D.
B 0.687 O.D.
C 0.750 O.D.
D 1.000 O.D.
E 1.125 O.D.
**INSULATORS
0 N/A (For Assemblies Only)
1 None
2 Oval
3 Round
4 Without Collar (Type R or S Only)
5 With Collar
***JUNCTION
1 Standard/TigWeld
2 Isolated
3 Twist Weld
276
277_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:08 PM Page 277
Thermocouple Accessories
Extension Cables, Plugs, Jacks, Fittings, Adaptors
Scan here
to watch
product video
Extension Cables
B
C [4 STD]
Model Coding
Fill in the appropriate numbers or letters to specify the extension cable of your choice. Fill in all boxes. If an item or dimension does not apply, fill those boxes with zeros 0.
B
IN FEET
EC
SENSOR
TYPE
J T/C
K T/C
E T/C
T T/C
2 RTD 2-Wire
3 RTD 3-Wire
C (TERM. #1)
IN INCHES
EXTENSION
TYPE
0 No Extension
1 Fiberglass Insulation
3 Stainless Steel Overbraid
4 FEP Insulation
5 Stainless Steel Flex Hose
6 FEP Over SS Flex Hose
TERMINAL #1
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs With BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs With BX
Compression Fittings
Standard Size Single Plugs (male)

Type
Model
J
481-0001
K
481-0002
T
481-0003
Cu11 (2-Wire)
481-0004
E
481-0015
Cu (2-Wire)
481-0022
Cu (3-Wire)
481-0134
Model
144-0012
144-0020
144-0009
144-0022
144-0014
144-0024
144-0037
Miniature Size Single Plugs (male)

Model
481-0093
481-0095
481-0094
481-0098
481-0097
481-0096
481-0099
481-0175
Type
J
K
T
R
S
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Thread Size
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
1/8-27 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
TERMINAL #2
0 Stripped Ends
1 Lugs
2 Lugs With BX
3 Standard Plug
4 Standard Jack
6 Mini Plug
7 Mini Jack
9 Fastabs
A Fastabs With BX
ELEMENTS
1 Single
2 Dual
Material
Brass
Stainless Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
Brass
Stainless Steel
FEP
Pipe Adapters
Model
1568-0007
1568-0008
1568-0009
1568-0011
1568-0012
1568-0013
1568-0020
1568-0021
Fits Pipe
Diameters
1/2 to 7/8
7/8 to 1-1/2
1-5/16 to 2-1/4
2-1/4 to 3-5/16
3-5/8 to 4-1/4
4-5/16 to 5-1/4
6-1/4 to 6-3/4
7-3/4 to 8-1/4
Model
1568-0022
1568-0023
1568-0024
1568-0025
1568-0027
1568-0028
1568-0029
Fits Pipe
Diameters
9-3/4 to 10-1/4
11-3/4 to 12-1/4
15-3/4 to 16-1/4
17-3/4 to 18-1/4
19-3/4 to 20-1/4
23-3/4 to 24-1/4
29-3/4 to 30-1/4
1-3/4 x 7/16 OD
Temperature Sensors
Standard Size Single Jacks (female)

Type
Model
J
481-0006
K
481-0007
T
481-0008
Cu11 (2-Wire)
481-0009
E
481-0016
Cu (2-Wire)
481-0023
Cu (3-Wire)
481-0135
Type OD
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
.260 - .275
TEMPERATURE
Plugs and Jacks
C (TERM. #2)
IN INCHES
Bayonet Adapters
Model
1568-0001
1568-0002
1568-0003
1568-0004
1568-0005
1568-0006
1568-0016
L
7/8
7/8
1-3/8
1-3/8
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
Thread Size
1/8-27 UNF
3/8-24 UNF
1/8-27 UNF
3/8-24 UNF
1/8-27 UNF
3/8-24 UNF
10 x 1.5 mm
7/16
3/8
Miniature Size Single Jacks (female)

Model
481-0100
481-0102
481-0101
481-0105
481-0104
481-0103
481-0106
481-0174
Type
J
K
T
R
S
E
Cu (2-Wire)
Cu (3-Wire)
Transition Adapter
These adapters convert the miniature plug on the end of the coiled cable on the Master
Probe Handle to a standard lug. Simply plug the cord into the adapter.
Type K, 481-0127
Type J, 481-0126
Type T, 481-0128
1.5
7/16
277
278_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:35 AM Page 278
Duct and Immersion Building Automation

Temperature Sensors
Series
TE
Available up to 18 Probe Length, Thermistor or RTD Outputs

PROBE LENGTH
+ .75 +.0625/ -.000
TE-I
BALL CHAIN
CONNECTOR
4.00 .050
PROBE LENGTH
+ .366 +.0625/ -.000
PROBE LENGTH
+ .75 +.0625/ -.000
TE-IBG
8 FOOT
PLENUM
CABLE

PROBE LENGTH + .55

+ .0625/-.000
TE-D
.125
GASKET
3.295
4X
.875
BALL CHAIN
CONNECTOR
4.00 .050
PROBE 4X
LENGTH .875
+ .336
+ .0625/-.000
2X .325 x .2000
MOUNTING
SLOTS
3.295
PROBE LENGTH + .55

+ .0625/-.000
.235
TE-DFG
1.000
TEMPERATURE
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TE Duct and Immersion Temperature Sensor can be used to monitor
air or water temperature throughout a building management system or an air handler unit.
Flanged duct sensors monitor the supply or return air and provide a thermistor or RTD
output to the digital controller. Immersion sensors which are supplied with compression
fittings are typically used to monitor the hot or chilled water lines throughout a building.
Thermowells are recommended, but not required on the immersion sensors.
For variable air volume applications, the Series TE can be configured to have 8 plenum
rated cable with flying leads. Standard units come with 4 leads with an integral terminal
block to eliminate carrying extra wire nuts. For housing models, multiple knockouts provide
easy conduit access to any side of the housing. The 1/4 turn lid comes with a chain to prevent
it from being lost during installation.
Temperature Sensors
Example
Series
Mounting
Configuration
TE -DFN -A 04 4 8 -00
TE
DFN
DFG
DFW
IBN
IBG
IBW
Sensor Type
A
B
C
D
E
F
Q
Probe Length
25
04
06
08
12
18
Probe Diameter
4
Termination
4
8
00
Fittings
12
14
278
.125
GASKET
4.163
.125 GASKET
4.788
2X 218
1.500 MOUNTING
HOLES
2.000
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor temperature sensor:0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temperaturesensor:DINclass A: 0.15C @ 0C (0.28F @ 32F).
Temperature Limits:Operating:-40 to 302F (-40 to 150C).
Sensor Curves:See page reference below.
Cable Rating:Plenum option includes UL listed plenum cable.
Housing Material: Meets UL, 94 V-O polycarbonate plastic.
Housing Rating: NEMA 4X(IP66) (DFW, IBWonly).
Weight:5.3 oz (150.3 g).
TE-DFN-A0448-00
TemperatureSensor
Duct Mount Probe Only
Duct Mount Probe in General Purpose Housing
Duct Mount Probe in NEMA 4XHousing
Immersion Probe Only
Immersion Probe in General Purpose Housing
Immersion Probe in NEMA 4XHousing
10K Ohm Type III Thermistor
10K Ohm Type II Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
Pt100 Ohm RTD
Pt1000 Ohm RTD
20K Ohm Thermistor
10K Ohm Type III with 11K Ohm shunt
2.5
4
6
8
12
18 (DFN/DFG Only)
1/4
4 leads
8 Plenum Rated Cable
None (Probeonly)
1/2 NPT Compression Fitting
1/4 NPT Compression Fitting
8 FOOT
PLENUM
CABLE
Thermowells (Machined)
Model
TE-TNS-N044N-14
TE-TNS-N044N-12
TE-TNS-N064N-14
TE-TNS-N064N-12
TE-TNS-N094N-14
TE-TNS-N094N-12
TE-TNS-N124N-14
TE-TNS-N124N-12
Length
4
4
6
6
9
9
12
12
Connection
(Internal/
External) (NPT)
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
1/4 / 1/2
1/2 / 3/4
For Straight Thermowell Dimensions:See page 275 (Series W)

Resistance vs. Temperature Table: See page 280
(Series TE-OND/RND/OSA)
279_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:36 AM Page 279
Series
TE-I
Immersion Temperature Sensors

New Integral Mounting Connection, Welded Thermowells
BALL CHAIN CONNECTOR
2X
0.875
3.310
1/2 NPT
PROCESS THREAD
TE-ITG
1/2 NPSM
TE-ITG
TE-ITW
.375
0.125
GASKET
BALL CHAIN
CONNECTOR
3.310
1.780
2X
0.875
L
1.125
TE-TNS
TE-ITW
The Series TE-I Immersion Style Temperature Sensors accurately measure water
temperature inside chilled and hot water loops in HVAC systems. Sensors can be ordered
either with a general purpose or weatherproof enclosure and have an integral 1/2 NPT
threaded connection so that the housing mounts flush against the thermowell. All models
come standard with a terminal block that ensure a better electrical connection to the
sensor. Both housing configurations include a chain that prevents the lid from being lost
during installation. Electrical knockouts on the housing can adapt to either a cable gland or
conduit. Thermowells are required to protect the electrical connection from the process
water and to allow replacement of the sensors without draining the system.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor temperature sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temperature sensor DIN Class A: 0.15C @ 0C (0.28F @ 32F).
Temperature Limits: Operating: -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C).
Sensor Curves: See page reference below.
Housing Material: Meets UL, 94 V-O polycarbonate plastic.
Thermowell Material: 304 SS.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150.3 g).
Model TE-ITG-A2544-00 Immersion Probe, 10K Type III Thermistor, 2.5

probe length, 1/4 probe diameter, 4 flying leads, with 1/2 NPT connection
Duct and Immersion Building Automation Temperature Sensor
Immersion in General Purpose Housing
Immersion in NEMA 4X Housing
10K Type III Thermistor
10K Type II Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
PT100 Ohm RTD
PT1000 Ohm RTD
20K Thermistor
10K Ohm Type IIIw/ 11 K Ohm shunt
2.5
4
6
8
12
18
1/4
4 Flying Leads Terminal Block
None (Integral)
Temperature Sensors
TE ITG A 25 4 4 00
TE
ITG
ITW
A
B
C
D
E
F
Q
Probe Length
25
04
06
08
12
18
Probe Diameter
4
Termination
4
Fittings
00
TE-TNS
TEMPERATURE
Example
Series
Mounting
Configuration
Sensor Type
0.125
GASKET
Thermowells (Welded)
Model
TE-TNS-N253N-00
TE-TNS-N043N-00
TE-TNS-N063N-00
TE-TNS-N083N-00
TE-TNS-N123N-00
TE-TNS-N183N-00
Material
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
304 SS
Insertion
Length
2.5
4
6
8
12
18
Resistance vs. Temperature Table: See page 280 (Series TE-OND/RND/OSA)
279
280_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:39 AM Page 280
Outdoor Temperature Sensors
Series
TE-OND/
TE-RND/
TE-OSA
Protection Against Radiated Heat, NEMA 4X (IP65) Enclosure
2-15/64
[56.75]
4-17/32
[115.09]
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-47/64
[120.25]
5-1/8
[130.18]
4-17/32
[115.09]
4-31/32
[126.21]
3-1/8
1-13/64 [79.38]
[30.56]
3-1/8
[79.38]
3-45/64
[93.98]
6-25/32
[172.09]
3/16 [4.76]
MOUNTING HOLES
TYP 4 PLCS
2-1/4
[57.15]
55/64
[21.83]
TE-OND
4-25/32
[121.61]
4-9/32
[108.91]
2X 1/8
[3.18]
3-11/32
[84.86]
1 5/32
[29.21]
Scan here
to watch
product video
280
TEMPERATURE
Temperature Sensors
2-13/64
[55.91]
5-1/8
[130.05]
TE-RND
4-5/8
[117.31]
3/4
[19.05]
TE-OSA
The Series TE-OND/TE-RND Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors are offered in two
different configurations to increase measurement accuracy by reducing radiated heat
effects. For applications where the north side of the building is accessible, the TE-OND can
be used to protect against low levels of radiated heat. If the sensor must be mounted in
direct sunlight or a more precise measurement is required, our six plate radiation shield
mounts over the temperature probe. The TE-RND radiation shield models can be surface
or pipe mounted. All models include removeable terminal blocks to simply wire.
Resistance vs Temperature Table
Temperature Resistance Curves ()
A
B
C
Green/
Red/
Black/
C
F
Green
Green
Black
-55
-67.0 607800.00 963849.00 289154.70
-50
-58.0 441200.00 670166.00 201049.80
-45
-49.0 323600.00 471985.00 141595.50
-40
-40.0 239700.00 336479.00 100943.70
-35
-31.0 179200.00 242681.00 72804.30
-30
-22.0 135200.00 176974.00 53092.20
-25
-13.0 102900.00 130421.00 39126.30
-20
-4.0 78910.00 97081.00 29124.30
-15
5.0 61020.00 72957.00 21887.10
-10
14.0 47540.00 55329.00 16598.70
-5
23.0 37310.00 42327.00 12698.10
0
32.0 29490.00 32650.00
9795.00
5
41.0 23460.00 25392.00
7617.60
10
50.0 18780.00 19901.00
5970.30
15
59.0 15130.00 15712.00
4713.60
20
68.0 12260.00 12493.00
3747.90
25
77.0 10000.00 10000.00
3000.00
30
86.0
8194.00
8057.00
2417.10
35
95.0
6752.00
6531.00
1959.30
40
104.0
5592.00
5326.00
1597.80
45
113.0
4655.00
4368.00
1310.40
50
122.0
3893.00
3602.00
1080.60
55
131.0
3271.00
2986.00
895.80
60
140.0
2760.00
2488.00
746.40
65
149.0
2339.00
2083.00
624.90
70
158.0
1990.00
1752.00
525.60
75
167.0
1700.00
1480.00
444.00
80
176.0
1458.00
1255.00
376.50
85
185.0
1255.00
1070.00
321.00
90
194.0
1084.00
915.50
274.65
95
203.0
939.30
786.60
235.98
100
212.0
816.80
678.60
203.58
105
221.0
712.60
587.60
176.28
110
230.0
623.60
510.60
153.18
115
239.0
547.30
445.30
133.59
120
248.0
481.80
389.60
116.88
125
257.0
425.30
341.90
102.57
130
266.0
376.40
301.00
90.30
135
275.0
334.00
265.80
79.74
140
284.0
297.20
235.30
70.59
145
293.0
265.10
208.90
62.67
150
302.0
237.00
186.10
55.83
8-51/64
[223.30]
8-43/64
[220.27]
D
Yellow/
Yellow
78.32
80.31
82.29
84.27
86.25
88.22
90.19
92.16
94.12
96.09
98.04
100.00
101.95
103.90
105.85
107.79
109.74
111.67
113.61
115.54
117.47
119.40
121.32
123.24
125.16
127.08
128.99
130.90
132.80
134.71
136.61
138.51
140.40
142.29
144.18
146.07
147.95
149.83
151.71
153.58
155.46
157.33
E
Red/
Red
783.2
803.1
822.9
842.7
862.5
882.2
901.9
921.6
941.2
960.9
980.4
1000.0
1019.5
1039.0
1058.5
1077.9
1097.4
1116.7
1136.1
1155.4
1174.7
1194.0
1213.2
1232.4
1251.6
1270.8
1289.9
1309.0
1328.0
1347.1
1366.1
1385.1
1404.0
1422.9
1441.8
1460.7
1479.5
1498.3
1517.1
1535.8
1554.6
1573.3
F
Green/
Blue
2394000.00
1646200.00
1145800.00
806800.00
574400.00
413400.00
300400.00
220600.00
163500.00
122280.00
92240.00
70160.00
53780.00
41560.00
32340.00
25360.00
20000.00
15892.00
12704.00
10216.00
8264.00
6722.00
5498.00
4520.00
3734.00
3100.00
2586.00
2166.00
1822.60
1540.00
1306.40
1112.60
951.00
815.80
702.20
606.40
525.60
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
RTD temperaturesensor:DIN class A: 0.15C @ 0C (0.28F @ 32F).
Temperature Limits:Operating: -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C).
Sensor Curves:See Resistance vs. Temperature Table.
HousingMaterial: Polycarbonate.
Weight: 0.65 lb (295 g).
Model
TE-OND-A
TE-OND-B
TE-OND-C
TE-OND-D
TE-OND-E
TE-OND-F
TE-OND-Q
TE-RND-A
TE-RND-B
TE-RND-C
TE-RND-D
TE-RND-E
TE-RND-F
TE-RND-Q
TE-OSA-A
TE-OSA-B
TE-OSA-C
TE-OSA-D
TE-OSA-E
TE-OSA-F
TE-OSA-Q
Sensor Type
10K type III thermistor
10K type II thermistor
3K thermistor
PT100 RTD
PT1000 RTD
20K thermistor
10K type III thermistor with 11K shunt
3K thermistor
PT100 RTD
PT1000 RTD
20K thermistor
3K thermistor
PT100 RTD
PT1000 RTD
20K thermistor
281_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:40 AM Page 281
Series
TE-E/N
Wall Mount Temperature Sensor

Discrete Wall Mount Housing
1-1/16
[27.05]
3X-3/8
[9.36]
3-9/16
[90.42]
European
1-3/32
[27.69]
The Series TE-E/N Wall Mount Temperature Sensor provides a low cost temperature
input for any building management system. With large vents in the housing for proper air
flow, the sensor accurately measures the ambient temperature in hotel rooms or office
buildings. Multiple mounting holes on the wall plate allow for mounting to numerous
surfaces.
North American
Model
Sensor Type
TE-NND-A
10K Type IIIThermistor
TE-NND-B
TE-NND-C
3K Thermistor
TE-NND-D
Pt100 RTD
TE-NND-E
Pt1000 RTD
TE-NND-F
20K Thermistor
European
Model
TE-END-A
TE-END-B
TE-END-C
TE-END-D
TE-END-E
TE-END-F
2-51/64
[71.12]
3-1/64
[76.56]
31/64
[12.32]
North American
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor temp sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temp sensor: DINclass B; 0.3C @ 0C (54F @ 32F).
Housing Material:ABS plastic.
Weight: 0.3 lb (136 g).
Sensor Type
10K Type IIIThermistor
3K Thermistor
Pt100 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
20K Thermistor
Stainless Steel Wall Plate Temperature Sensor

Screw Terminal Connection, Suitable for Wash Down Applications
2-3/4
[69.86]
1-3/8
[34.93]
3/16
[4.70]
The Series TE-WSS Stainless Steel Wall Plate Temperature Sensor measures the
ambient air temperature in classrooms and industrial environments. By having a flush
mount design, the temperature sensor can withstand a wash down. A foam gasket prevents
ambient temperature from behind the wall plate from skewing the temperature
measurements. The discrete stainless steel wall plate sensor also hides the sensor to
prevent tampering. Each sensor comes with a terminal block and two mounting screws for
quick installation.
Model
TE-WSS-A
TE-WSS-B
TE-WSS-C
TE-WSS-D
TE-WSS-E
TE-WSS-F
Sensor Type
3K Thermistor
PT100 RTD
PT1000 RTD
20K Thermistor
4-31/64
[113.89]
Temperature Sensors
3-9/32
[83.31]
Scan here
to watch
product video
TEMPERATURE
Series
TE-WSS
35/64
[14.02]
2X-11/64
[4.47]
4-1/2
[114.30]
North American
3X-5/32
[3.87]
21/64
[8.38]
3-21/32
[92.96]
European
1-5/32
[29.39]
1-3/16
[30.00]
7 IN
[177.8 MM]
LEAD
(2) .215 X THRU

DIMPLE FOR 6-32 OVAL
COUNTERSUNK SCREW
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor: 0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD: DIN Class B 0.3C @ 0C.
Temperature Limits: Operating -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Housing Material: 304 SS wall plate.
281
282_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:41 AM Page 282
Series
TE-A
Averaging Temperature Sensors

Available in 6, 12 and 24 Lengths
AVAILABLE
LENGTHS:
6 FT, 12 FT,
24 FT
2X .875
2X .742
3.295
.375
2X .325 X .2000
MOUNTING SLOTS
4.163
Scan here
to watch
product video
.125
GASKET
The Series TE-A Averaging Temperature Sensors are used to measure the
temperature in large ducts and air handler units. Bendable aluminum capillaries are
available in 6, 12, and 24foot lengths. These capillaries consist of four thermistor or
RTD sensors which are internally averaged to give a single output signal. Series CC1
mounting brackets are available to mount the capillary to the wall of the duct or air handler
without kinking the sensor wires inside the probe. For faster installation, the enclosure has
multiple knockouts, wide mounting ears, and a screw-off captured lid.
TEMPERATURE
Model
TE-AAG-A0634-00
TE-AAG-A1234-00
TE-AAG-A2434-00
TE-AAG-B0634-00
TE-AAG-B1234-00
TE-AAG-B2434-00
TE-AAG-C0634-00
TE-AAG-C1234-00
TE-AAG-C2434-00
Capillary
Length
6
12
24
6
12
24
6
12
24
Sensor Type
10K Type III NTC Thermistor
10K Type II NTC Thermistor
3K NTC Thermistor
3K NTC Thermistor
3K NTC Thermistor
Model
TE-AAG-D0634-00
TE-AAG-D1234-00
TE-AAG-D2434-00
TE-AAG-E0634-00
TE-AAG-E1234-00
TE-AAG-E2434-00
TE-AAG-F0634-00
TE-AAG-F1234-00
TE-AAG-F2434-00
4.788
2.201
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
RTD temperature sensor: DIN class B: 0.3C @ 0C (0.54F @ 32F).
Capillary Lengths: 6, 12 or 24 (depending on model).
Cable Length: 4.
Probe Material: Bendable aluminum probe.
Housing Material: Meets UL, 94 V-0 polycarbonate plastic.
Sensor Type
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Pt100 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
20K NTC Thermistor
20K NTC Thermistor
20K NTC Thermistor
Capillary
Length
6
12
24
6
12
24
6
12
24
ACCESSORIES
CC1-N, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Natural
CC1-B, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Beige
CC1-GY, Averaging Temperature Sensor Clip, Grey
Series
CC1
Averaging Temperature Sensor Clips

Grey, Natural or Beige
Temperature Sensors
1-63/64
[50.29]
1-3/32
[27.94]
1/4
[6.35]
2-15/32
[62.66]
1/2
[12.65]
The Series CC1 Averaging Temperature Sensor Clips are used to mount the
capillary of the AVG series temperature sensor to the wall of the duct or air handler. The
clips are available in grey, beige or a natural color. The clip can hold 1/8, 1/4 or 3/8
capillary diameters. The top of the mounting clip can also be used to hold a single 1/4
diameter temperature probes in place. Slots are provided for using nylon zip ties to hold
the tubing in place, if needed.
282
Model
Color
CC1-N
Natural
CC1-B
Beige
CC1-GY
Grey
(sold individually)
283_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:08 PM Page 283
Series
O-4
Outside Air Temperature Sensors

NEMA 4X, Removable Terminal Block
2X
.375
2X .250
2X .188
3-31/64
[88.5]
3
[76.2]
6-3/8
[161.48]
4
[101.6]
1-27/64
[36.12] 1-31/64
[37.70]
2x 5/16
[7.94]
The Series O-4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors are great for monitoring ambient
air temperatures in outdoor applications. The temperature sensors are mounted in a
NEMA 4X enclosure with integral mounting tabs. The mounting tabs can be used to
surface or suspension mount the temperature sensors. The removable terminal block makes
installation easy. The Series O-4 can be used to measure outside air temperatures in
building automation systems or room temperatures inside agricultural ventilation houses.
Model
O-4A
O-4B
O-4C
O-4D
O-4E
O-4F
Sensor Type
10K Ohm Type IIIThermistor
10K Ohm Type II Thermistor
3K Ohm Thermistor
Pt100 Ohm RTD
Pt1000 Ohm RTD
20K Ohm Thermistor
Series
S2-1
2-3/4
[69.85]
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Thermistor temperature sensor:0.22C @ 25C (0.4F @ 77F);
RTD temperaturesensor:DINclass B: 0.3C @ 0C (0.54F @ 32F).
Operating Temperature: -40 to 250F.
Probe Diameter: 0.235 (5.97 mm).
Probe Length: 3.5.
Probe Material: 304 SS.
Mounting: Suspension or surface.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA4X (IP66).
Surface Mount Temperature Sensor

RTD and Thermistor, 304 SS Probe, Waterproof
.250
STRIPPING LENGTH
1.000 x 0.250
WIRES 22AWG 7/30
BULLET PROBE STRANDED ETCHED TEFLON
TEMPERATURE
23.000
.650
S2-1X No Housing
Temperature Sensors

The Series S2-1 Surface Mount Temperature Sensors provide a cost effective and
reliable solution for surface contact temperature measurement of conditioned water pipes,
low pressure steam or refrigerant lines. The sensors are ideal for applications where
immersion wells are not practical to install. Models are constructed with a 1 (25 mm) 304
SS probe and a 23 stranded etched Teflon leads.
Model
S2-11
S2-12
S2-13
S2-14
S2-15
S2-16
S2-17
S2-18
S2-19
S2-1A
S2-1B
Sensor Type
Pt 100 RTD
Pt 1000 RTD
Ni 1000 RTD
1000 Balco RTD
10 k Type II Thermistor
3 k NTC Thermistor
5 k NTC Thermistor
100 k NTC Thermistor
20 k NTC Thermistor
2252 NTC Thermistor
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Platinum RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C), alpha 385 per DIN 43760;
Nickel RTD: 0.5F @ 70F (21.1C);
Balco: 0.5F @ 70F (21.1C);
Thermistor: 0.2C interchangeable @ 77F (25C).
Operating Temperature: -40 to 250F (-40 to 125C).
Probe Diameter: 1/4 (6.3 mm).
Probe Length: 1 (25 mm).
Balco is a registered trademark of CRS Holdings, Inc.

Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont De Nemours and Company
283
284_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:43 AM Page 284
Series
TE-SNW
Weather Resistant Surface

Temperature Sensor
Strap On Design, Twist Off Cover, 2 to 6 Pipe Sizes
3-1/4
[82.38]
3-3/8
[84.86]
1 [25.97]
1-1/2
[38.10]
FITS 2
TO 6 PIPE
2 X PG11
KNOCKOUTS
2 X PG16
KNOCKOUTS

The Series TE-SNW Surface Temperature Sensor non-intrusively measures the
process temperature in hot and cold water loops in buildings. An adjustable metal strap
can tightly fit around 2 through 6 pipe sizes, allowing the surface area of the copper plate
on the sensor to make good contact with the pipe surface. In order to work with most
common building controllers, the output of the sensor can be chosen from 6 different RTD
and Thermistor curves. Additional features include a quarter turn twist off cap that is
chained to the housing to prevent it from getting lost, and multiple knockout locations and
sizes to reduce installation time.
Model
TE-SNW-A
TE-SNW-B
TE-SNW-C
TE-SNW-D
TE-SNW-E
TE-SNW-F
Sensor Type
3K Thermistor
Pt100 RTD
Pt1000 RTD
20K Thermistor
Series
I2-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:
Thermistor Temperature Sensor: 0.22C @ 25C (-0.4F @ 77F);
RTD Temperature Sensor: DIN Class A 0.15C @ 0C (0.28F @ 32F).
Temperature Limits: Operating: -32 to 240F (-35.5 to 115.5C).
Housing Material: Meets UL 94 V-0 polycarbonate plastic, NEMA 3R.
Immersion Temperature Probes
TEMPERATURE
RTD & Thermistor Outputs, 304 SS Probes

1/2 INTERNAL NPT
1-1/8 [28.19]
1-27/32
[46.99]
1/2 EXTERNAL NPT
3/8 [9.53]
L
1W2-2X2 Thermowell
1-5/16
[33.31]
1/2 NPT
31/32 [24.87]
1/4 [6.37]
Temperature Sensors
The Series I2-1 Immersion Temperature Probes are designed to monitor the hot and
chilled water lines throughout a buildings water distribution loop. The multiple
temperature sensor outputs allow these sensors to connect to virtually any digital building
controller. The Series IW2 SS thermowells allow the temperature sensors to be replaced
without draining the water line. The temperature sensors are available in 4 and 6
insertion lengths.
Note:A Series IW2 Thermowell must be used on pressurized air and water lines to
prevent leakage around the probe.
Sensor Type
Pt 100 RTD
PT 1000 RTD
Ni 1000 RTD
Balco 1000 RTD
10K Type 2 Thermistor
3K Thermistor
5K Thermistor
100K Thermistor
20K Thermistor
2252 Thermistor
Thermowells
Model Material
IW2-262 304 SS
IW2-242 304 SS
284
Insertion Length
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
L = 7.000 FOR 6 THERMOWELL

L = 5.000 FOR 4 THERMOWELL
L
12-1X0X2 Sensor
Model
I2-11062
I2-12062
I2-13062
I2-14062
I2-15062
I2-16062
I2-17062
I2-18062
I2-19062
I2-1A062
I2-1B062
6 THERMOWELL: L = 6.250
4 THERMOWELL: L = 4.000
Model
I2-11042
I2-12042
I2-13042
I2-14042
I2-15042
I2-16042
I2-17042
I2-18042
I2-19042
I2-1A042
I2-1B042
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy:Platinum RTD:0.6% @ 32F (0C); Nickel RTD: 0.5F @ 32F (0C);
Balco RTD: 0.1% @ 32F (0C); Thermistors:0.36F from 32 to 158F (0 to
70C).
Operating Temperature: -32 to 240F (-35.5 to 115.5C).
Probe Diameter: 1/4 (6.3 mm).
Cable Length: 6 (1.8 m).
Mounting: 1/2 threaded connection to fit Series IW2 thermowell.
Sensor Type
Pt 100 RTD
PT 1000 RTD
Ni 1000 RTD
Balco 1000 RTD
3K Thermistor
5K Thermistor
100K Thermistor
20K Thermistor
2252 Thermistor
Insertion Length
6
4
Insertion Length
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
285_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:08 PM Page 285
Series
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector

High Temperature, Mineral Insulated, 316 SS Sheath
#8 SPADE TERMINAL
TYP 3 PLACES
.250 [6.35] OD
304 STAINLESS STEEL
POTTING ADAPTOR
RED LEAD "-"
.125 [3.175] OD
304 STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH
6.000
[152.4]
WHITE
LEAD "+"
4.000
[101.6]
36.000
[914.4]

Precision RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) offers excellent accuracy and stability
over a wide temperature range. Industry standard 3-wire 100 (DIN) probes are available
in 6 (15 cm), 12 (30.5 cm), or 18 (46 cm) sheath lengths with 30 (76 cm) extension
cable and spade lug terminals.
Model
RTD-686
RTD-6812
RTD-6818
RTD-646
RTD-6412
RTD-6418
Length
6 (15 cm)
12 (30.5 cm)
18 (46 cm)
6 (15 cm)
12 (30.5 cm)
18 (46 cm)
Diameter
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4
Series
ILA
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor Type: Wire wound, 100 .
Extension Length: 30 (76 cm).
Standard: DIN .00385 (class B, 0.12%).
APPLICATIONS
Typical applications are: air ducts, bearing temperature, oil temperature indicator,
soldering equipment, ovens, environmental test chambers, pharmaceutical mfg., food
processing, plastic molding, petroleum & chemical processing, electric generating
plants, etc.
In-Line IR Sensor
15:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio, 32 to 932F
3 FT CABLE
[1000]
15/32
[12]
4-1/16
[103]
23/32
[18]
23/32
[18]
TEMPERATURE
M16 ULTRA FINE

1.0 MM PITCH
M16 ULTRA FINE

1.00 MM PITCH
45/64
[18]
5/16
[8.0]
Nut
Temperature Sensors

The Series ILA Non-Contact Sensors, measure temperatures from 32 to 932F (0 to
500C) and provide a linear 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mV VDC or thermocouple output. The 2wire signal is compatible with almost any indicator, controller, recorder, data logger, etc.,
without the need for special interfacing or signal conditioning. They are suitable for most
materials such as food, paper, textiles, plastics, leather, tobacco, pharmaceuticals,
chemicals, rubber, coal, and asphalt.
Model
ILA10
ILA20
Output
J Thermocouple
4-20 mA
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 32 to 932F (0 to 500C ).
Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1C whichever is greater.
Emissivity: 0.95 (fixed).
Distance to Target Size Ratio: 15:1.
Power Requirement: 24 VDC.
Repeatability: 0.5% of reading or 0.5C whichever is greater.
Outputs: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 50 mV, J type thermocouple.
Cable Length: 3.3 ft (1 m).
Spectral Response: 8 to 14 microns.
Housing: SS.
Weight: 3.35 oz (95 g).
285
286_Layout 1 7/9/14 11:06 AM Page 286
Series
HTDL-20/30
High Temperature Data Logger

Submersible, Continuous Recording, User Replaceable Battery
SILICONE O-RING
316 STAINLESS STEEL
BATTERY
PEEK THERMOPLASTIC
1-37/64
[40.13]
31/32
[24.64]
DIM A
3/16
[4.83]
HTDL-XX
Front
The Model HTDL-20/30 is a high temperature data logger that can measure temperatures
up to 500F (260C). This submersible and portable data logger can record up to 32,700
measurements and has an external probe to ensure fast and accurate temperature readings.
The HTDL-20 contains non-volatile solid state relay memory that will retain data even if the
battery becomes discharged. The HTDL-20 can easily be started and stopped from a PC or
delayed to start up to 18 months after initialization.
Model HTDL-20, High Temperature Data Logger with 2 Rigid Probe
Model HTDL-30, High Temperature Data Logger with 24 Flexible Probe
ACCESSORIES
Model HTDL-DS, DockingStation, Software, Manual and USB Interface
ER1425S-HT, Replacement Battery
Right
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: -328 to 500F (-200 to 260C).
Accuracy: 0.18F (0.1C) @ 68 to
284F (20 to 140C); 0.54F (0.3C) @
-4 to 67.98F (-20 to 19.99C).
Resolution: 0.02F (0.01C).
to 140C).
Sampling Method: Stop on memory
full or continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 1 sec
to 24 hrs.
Computer Requirements: Windows

Xp Sp3, Windows Vista, Windows 7
operating systems.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V 1/2 AA
ER14250SM lithium metal battery,
installed functional, user replaceable.
Battery Life: 1 year (approx).
Interface: Docking station and USB
cable.
Weight: 4.2 oz (120 g).
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
TEMPERATURE
Model
DW-USB-1-HT
High Temperature USB Data Logger

316 SS Construction, Up To 32,510 Readings
RoHS
Temperature
Data Loggers
4-3/8
[111.13]
25/32 [19.84]
Model DW-USB-1-HT High Temperature USB Data Logger allows users to monitor
temperatures up to 257F (125C). The rigid, stainless steel enclosure protects the sensor
against corrosion, impact, and water ingress. With the easy to install Windows based
software, parameters can be configured to work in many applications. Data can be
downloaded by plugging the data logger directly into a PCs USB port, with no cable
required. Downloaded data can then be graphed, printed, or exported to other spreadsheet
applications.
Model DW-USB-1-HT, High Temperature USB Data Logger
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: -40 to 257F (-40 to 125C).
Sampling Mode: Continuous or stop
on memory full.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 1 s. to
12 hours.
2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista,
and Windows 7; 32 or 64-bit operating
systems.

lithium metal battery, included, user
replaceable.
BatteryLife: Approximately 1 to 3
years.
Housing: 316 SS.
Enclosure Rating: IP67/NEMA 4X.
Alarms: Programmable high/low.
Interface: USB port.
Weight: 4.6 oz (130.4 g).
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
286
287_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:07 PM Page 287
Level Indicators
pages 290-293
Water Leak
Detectors
page 294
Level Switches,
Float
pages 295-305
Level Switches,
Optical
page 306
Level Switches,
Displacer
page 306
Level Switches,
Conductivity
page 307
Level Switches,
Capacitive
pages 308-309
Level Switches,
Tilt
page 310
Level Switches,
Tuning Fork
pages 311-312
Level Switches,
Vibrating Rod
page 313
Level Switches,
Paddle
pages 314-315
Level Switches,
Diaphragm
pages 316-317
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
pages 318-321
Level Transmitters,
Capacitive
page 322
Level Data
Loggers
page 323
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
pages 323-329
Level Transmitters,
Float
page 330
Level Transmitters,
Mechanical
page 331
Level/Pump
Controllers
pages 332-334
Pump Leak Detectors

page 334
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
pages 335-338
LEVEL | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 288-289
287
LEVEL
288_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:06 PM Page 288
Proximity Series PLS is used to indicate level status in pneumatic

conveying systems.
Mercoid pump controller with level transmitter control pumps in

wastewater lift stations.
Pneumatic conveying systems use air to transport powder and dry bulk solids through
conveying lines. The air is pressurized by positive pressure or vacuum to move the
product through the lines into and out of silos, transporters, and receivers. Typical
applications have high and low level indication in the storage bins to control the flow
of product in or out. The PLS is perfect for level use in these storage bins. It has a
rotating paddle that is inserted into the bin. As the product level builds up in the bin it
stops the paddle from rotating and triggers the level output. The PLS is great for this
application as it not affected by pressure changes in the bin.
Lift stations are used to transmit wastewater to the treatment facility. Wastewater is
transmitted by gravity feed so it has to be continually elevated to provide height to
generate the flow. Lift stations are pits located at points in the wastewater system to
collect the wastewater that usually have two submersible pumps. Wastewater in the
lift station is pumped out to a higher level from where it can flow on to the next lift
station or to the treatment facility. The Mercoid Series MPC pump controller is used
with the Series PBLT level transmitter to control the level in the lift station. The PBLT
is a level transmitter that is submersed in the tank and sends a linear output of the
height of wastewater above it. The MPC takes the height input and controls the pumps
according to how it has been programmed.
Grain hopper level controlled by Series PLS Paddle Level Switch.
Custom level sensing devices are built to meet each customers

specific requirements, providing visual indication, continuous
measurement, and point level control.
The supply of grain pneumatically conveyed to this dispensing hopper is controlled

by two Proximity Series PLS paddle level switches. When the grain level falls to the
low limit switch, the supply is turned on until the hopper fills to the level of the high
limit switch which turns off the supply. Since grain dust is explosive, the explosionproof Series PLS provides the required safety protection. The PLS is a paddle level
switch and is not affected by the varying pressure in the hopper due to the cycling of
the pneumatic conveying system.
288
To meet various tank level measuring needs, Dwyer Instruments, Inc. offers customconfigured products built to customer specifications that provide visual indication,
continuous level measurement, and multiple point level measurement. Series VR or
MVR View-Rite Level Indicators are a safe way to keep the process isolated while
providing true visible indication. Unlike sight glasses, which can crack or break, ViewRite Indicators contain liquids entirely within their stainless steel enclosure. For
continuous level measurement needs, the Series CLT uses reed switch technology
to offer a more economical solution than expensive ultrasonic, submersible or RT
transmitters. Lastly, the Series F7-MQ can be used in virtually any tank to indicate
high and low alarms or to control pumps and valves.
289_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:05 PM Page 289
Industrial sumps and other underground tanks are ideal applications for top-mounted
Mercoid displacer type level controls. Easily installed, these controls use porcelain
displacers that do not float on the surface of liquids, but are suspended on a coil
spring and cable. As the liquid in the tank reaches the level of the upper displacers,
their weight decreases by an amount equal to the liquid displaced, allowing the spring
to move the cable upward, actuating the switch and the pump is turned on. As the
liquid level falls below the upper displacers they move only a small amount, staying
within the switch deadband until the liquid level falls to the center of the bottom
displacer. At this point the switch is deactivated stopping the pump. The pump will
remain deactivated until the water level rises to the upper displacers, repeating the
cycle. The displacers are not affected by turbulence, pressure or chemicals and are
excellent for tanks with viscous or dirty liquids. The level differential is easily adjusted
by repositioning of the displacers on the 316SS cable.
Standard float switches require at least an inch of liquid to attain enough buoyancy
to switch. This can be a problem in applications where low level sensing is required.
The hat-shaped design of W.E. Andersons F7-LL provides necessary buoyancy for
switching in only 5/8 of water. This is essential for air conditioner drip pans, low level
sumps, and drains. The F7-LL is also ideal for low alarms, where running the process
dry can result in catastrophic failure.
Mercoid Model 123 level controls provide high and low alarm on
large de-aerator tank.
W.E. Anderson Series OLS indicates level in heavy equipment

radiator.
Liquid level in the external piping equals level in the tank. When level rises to high
limit, float in upper Model 123 is lifted, actuating switch to sound high level alarm.
When level drops to low limit, lower Model 123 sounds low level alarm.
Many types of heavy industrial equipment use a liquid cooling system for the motor.
A vibratory trench roller is a machine that compacts sub-bases for roads, parking lots,
etc., and is an example of the type of equipment that would utilize this system. This
machine incorporates a radiator cooling system. In the system, cooling liquid
circulates through the engine preventing it from over heating. As the engine is cooled
the cooling fluid heats up. The fluid returns to the radiator to cool down before being
circulated through again. If there is not enough cooling fluid in the system the engine
will not be cooled enough and damage will occur. A W. E. Anderson Series OLS
optical level switch is installed as a low level alarm. The level alarm is signaled by the
OLS before the cooling fluid gets to a critical low level, warning the operator of the
problem. The OLS uses an optical detection system superior for this application as
float controls may trip from machine vibration. Also the compact insertion length is
ideal for a small radiator.
289
Low level float switch enables sensing in air conditioner drip pans
and other shallow level applications.
LEVEL
Mercoid displacer type level control is ideal for controlling industrial

sump pumps.
290_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:04 PM Page 290
Series
VR
View-Rite Level Indicator

Customized to Fit Any Application, Durable, 316 SS Housing and Float
Top & Bottom
Side & Side
L1
C to C
L1 & C to C
Typical Measurements
C to C = L1 + 10.25 (260.35 mm) C to C = L1
Customize level indicators to meet application requirements. View-Rite level

indicators are low maintenance, environmentally friendly, durable, and require no
external power. Specify any indication length up to 96 (244 cm). View-Rite level indicators
incorporate a pressure tight housing with internal float that magnetically activates
external level indication flags, switches, or transmitter. Consult factory for pressure rating
up to 700 psi (48 bar) or temperature rating to 750F (339C).
OPTIONALSWITCHMODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC,
.13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
VR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300F (148.9C). Polysulfone with 1/4 female
NPT conduit connection.
VR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). 316 SS with 1/2 male NPT
conduit connection.
VR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). Explosion-proof terminal box
with 1/2 female NPT conduit connection.
Models are built to your specifications
VR S SS 1 TP D 0.8 150 090 080 P

VR
S
TB
SS
1
Process
2
Connection
4
5
6
7
Float Access
TP
BM
TB
N
Drain
D
and Vent
V
B
0.0
Spec. Gravity
000
Operating Pressure
000
Operating Temp.
Indicating Length, L1
000
P
Indicating Flags
A
Visual
Indicating
Scale
Output Options
Level Indicators
LEVEL
Example
Construction
Wetted Materials
Configuration
290
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, low-viscosity liquids.
Pressure Limits: 275 psi (18.9 bar), 225 psi (15.5 bar) @ 100F (37.8C), 215 psi
(14.8 bar) @ 300F (148.9C), 195 psi (13.4 bar) @ 400F (204.4C).
Tube Diameter: 2-1/2 (64 mm).
1 I VR-SSS1-TPD-0.8-150-090-080P1-I
View-Rite Level Indicator
316 L SS, Fluoroelastomer O-ring
Top/Bottom Connections
Side/Side Connections
1/2 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1 150# RF Flange
2 150# RF Flange
1 300# RF Flange
2 300# RFFlange
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
None
Drain, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Vent, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Drain and Vent (Only with SS Configuration)
Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 275 psi (18.9 bar)
Operating Temperature of the fluid, in F. Maximum is 400F (204C)
Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 240 (6.1 m); Minimum of 6 (15.25 cm)
Plastic, white and orange [300F (149C) maximum]
Aluminum, silver and black
N
None
1
Feet and Inches
2
Inches Only
I 4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300F (149) maximum]
V 0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level
291_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:04 PM Page 291
Series
MVR
Mini View-Rite Level Indicator

Customized, Visual Level Indication, Compact Size
Top & Bottom
Side & Side
L1
C to C
L1 & C to C
Typical Measurements
C to C = L1 + 7.72 (196.09 mm) C to C = L1
Miniature custom level indicators are ideal for high-visibility level indication in tight
spaces. All SS housing provides rugged durability with a diameter of only 1-1/4 (32 mm).
Select the mounting type that will best fit your application and an indication length of up
to 96 (244 cm). View-Rite level indicators incorporate a pressure tight housing with
internal float that magnetically activates external level indication flags, switches, or
transmitter.
Example
MVR S SS 1 TP
Construction
MVR
S
Wetted Materials
TB
Configuration
SS
Process
1
Connection
3
Float
TP
Access
BM
TB
Drain
and
Vent
N
D
V
B
0.0
000
000
OPTIONAL SWITCHMODULES
Clamp onto the level indicator. SPST, rated .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC,
.13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC.
MVR-S1, Maximum temperature is 300F (148.9C). Polysulfone with 1/4
female NPT conduit connection.
MVR-S2, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). 316 SS with 1/2 male NPT
conduit connection.
MVR-S3, Maximum temperature is 750F (399C). Explosion-proof terminal box
with 1/2 female NPT conduit connection.
MVR-SSS1-TPD-0.8-150-090-080P1-I
Mini View-Rite Level Indicator
316 L SS Housing, 316 L SS Float, Fluoroelastomer O-ring
Top/Bottom Connections
Side/Side Connections
1/2 NPT (Female on TB, and Male on SS Configuration)
1/2 150# RF Flange
Top
Bottom
Top and Bottom (Only with SS Configuration)
None
Drain, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Vent, 1/2 female NPT (Only with SS Configuration)
Drain and Vent (Only with SSConfiguration)
Specific Gravity of fluid, minimum 0.8
Operating Pressure, in psi. Maximum is 400 psi (27.6 bar)
LEVEL
Operating Temperature of the fluid, in F. Maximum is 400F (204C)

000
Length of level indicator, in whole inches. Maximum of 240 (6.1 m); Minimum of 6 (15.25 cm)
P
A
N
1
2
I
V
Plastic, white and orange [300F (149C) maximum]

Aluminum, silver and black
None
Feet and Inches
Inches Only
4 to 20 mA transmitter of level [300F (149C) maximum]
0 to 5 VDC transmitter of level
Level Indicators
Spec. Gravity
Operating
Pressure
Operating
Temperature
Indicating
Length, L1
Indicating
Flags
Visual
Indicating
Scale
Output
Options
D 0.8 150 090 080 P
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, low-viscosity liquids.
Pressure Limits: 300F, 400 psi (27.6 bar); 300F, 373 psi (25.7 bar).
Tube Diameter: 1-1/4 (32 mm).
291
292_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:03 PM Page 292
Series
DTM
Dip Tape Level Indicator Metal

Customizable, Lightweight, No Electricity Needed
PVC CAP
1/2 NPT
2 [50.80]
FLOAT
DIMENSIONS
3/4 MIN.
[19.05]
1-7/8
[47.63]
2-1/16
[52.39]
F1 Float
BUNA N
FLOAT
6 HOLES [.750]
EQUALLY SPACED
ON A [6.000 B.C.]
PVC CAP
1/2 NPT
1/8
[3.18]
1-7/8
[47.63]
3/4 MIN.
[19.05]
The Series DTM is a manual, no electricity required indicator that is compact, providing
uninterrupted liquid level indication for use in storage tanks or vessels. With a sturdy,
lightweight design, the DTM is ideal for 30 or 55 gallon tanks. Stem and mounting fixtures
are available in 316 SS or brass. Strong brass or stainless steel units are perfect for the
use in water and oils offering the best temperature and pressure capabilities. The float
and stem are the only parts of the DTM that make contact with the liquid, so the indication
tape is always clean and easy to read. It is simple to customize the DTM level indicator in
order to meet a particular application requirement. A custom configurable DTM is available
in lengths ranging from 6 in (15.2 cm) up to 6 ft (182.9 cm). This level indicator is ideal for
quick readouts taken periodically. The DTM is accurate to 1/16 of an inch or 1 mm, and is
especially useful in remote areas where power is unavailable, or undesirable.
Type 1
LEVEL
Float Type
Level Indicators
Description
Brass, Buna N float, 2 NPT, 30 gallon horizontal drum, 17.5
Brass, Buna N float, 2 NPT, 55 gallon horizontal drum, 22
Brass, Buna N float, 2 NPT, 30 gallon vertical drum, 26.5
Brass, Buna N float, 2 NPT, 55 gallon vertical drum, 33
316 SS, 2 NPT, 30 gallon horizontal drum, 17.5
316 SS, 2 NPT, 55 gallon horizontal drum, 22
316 SS, 2 NPT, 30 gallon vertical drum, 26.5
316 SS, 2 NPT, 55 gallon vertical drum, 33
DTM B 1 F1 N
Example
DTM
Series
B
Stem &
S
Connection
C
Material
1
Connection
2
Type
F1
F2
N
Indication
C
Markings
Length
*Order length must be in inches.
292
6.00
DTM-B1F1N-6.00
Dip Tape Metal
Brass (not available with conn. type 2)
316 SS
316 SS with carbon steel flange (not available with conn. type 1)
2 NPT
3 150 # ANSI flange
Material
Min. s.g. Max. Pressure
Buna N
300 psi (21 bar)
0.45
316 SS
750 psi (52 bar), 2 NPT
0.67
150 psi (10 bar), 3 150 # ANSI flange
Inches, 1/16 in increments
Centimeters, 1 mm increments
00.00 6 to 72 (15.2 to 182.9 cm)*
7-1/2 [190.49]
Type 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits:
Buna N: -40 to 230F (-40 to 110C) for oil, up to 180F (82.2C) for water;
316 SS: -40 to 300F (-40 to 148.8C).
Mounting Orientation: Vertically in either vertical or horizontal tanks.
Indication Markings: 1/16 in or 1 mm increments.
The float located on the DTM is equipped with a magnet that moves with the liquid
level, vertically, along the stem, inside the storage vessel. Level reading is acquired
by simply removing the protective cap located on the top of the unit and lifting the
calibrated measuring tape until the magnetic interlock with the float causes a slight
pull. The indicator tape remains at this point while the level is read where the
calibration aligns with the top of the mounting. The indicator tape can then be
lowered back inside the unit stem for storage and protection.
Model
DTM-B1F1N-17.50
DTM-B1F1N-22.00
DTM-B1F1N-26.50
DTM-B1F1N-33.00
DTM-S1F2N-17.50
DTM-S1F2N-22.00
DTM-S1F2N-26.50
DTM-S1F2N-33.00
11/16
[17.48]
2 NPT
1-13/16
[46.04]
1-1/4
[31.75]
Liquid Measurement
Detail
(Inches Tape Shown)
F2 Float
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
INCHES OF
INDICATION
2-3/32
[53.18]
1-13/16
[46.04]
2 NPT
TAKE READING
AT THIS POINT
293_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:02 PM Page 293
Series
DTP
Dip Tape Level Indicator Plastic

PVC CAP
1/2 NPT
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
FLOAT
DIMENSIONS
3 NPT
15/16
23.8]
INCHES OF
NDICATION
PVC CAP
3
[76.20]
1/2 NPT
3 150 LB
FLANGE
1/2 NPT
3 NPT
2-3/8
[60.33]
PVC
FLOAT
2-3/8
[60.33]
6 HOLES [.750] EQUALLY

SPACED ON A [6.000 B.C.]
TAKE
READING AT
THIS
POINT
HIGHEST
LEVEL
INDICATED
27/32
[21.34]
15/16
[23.8]
Liquid Measurement
Detail
(Inches Tape Shown)
15/16
[23.8]
7-1/2
[190.49]
Type 1
Type 2
3
[76.20]
The Series DTP is a manual, no electricity required indicator that is compact, providing
lightweight design, the DTP is ideal for 30 or 55 gallon tanks. Stem and mounting fixtures
are available in PVC, PVDF, or polypropylene. With a choice of three highly resistive,
engineered plastic materials, and large floats, the DTP provides rugged durability in almost
any chemical tank. The float and stem are the only parts of the DTP that make contact
with the liquid, so the indication tape is always clean and easy to read. It is simple to
customize the DTP level indicator in order to meet a particular application requirement. A
custom configurable DTP is available in lengths ranging from 6 in (15.2 cm) up to 6 ft (182.9
cm). This level indicator is ideal for quick readouts taken periodically. The DTP is accurate
to 1/16 of an inch or 1 mm, and is especially useful in remote areas where power is
unavailable, or undesirable.
The float located on the DTP is equipped with a magnet that moves with the liquid
Series
DTV
SPECIFICATIONS
Mounting Orientation: Vertically in
either vertical or horizontal tanks.
Temperature Limits: 40 to 140F (4.4
Indication Markings: 1/16 in or 1 mm
to 60C).
increments.
DTP P 1 F1 N 6.00 DTP-P1F1N-6.00
Example
DTP
Dip Tape Plastic
Series
P
PVC (only available with F1)
Stem &
L
Polypropylene (only available with F2)
Connection
F
PVDF (only available with F3)
Material
1
3 NPT
Connection
2
3 150 # ANSI flange
Type
Material
Min. s.g. Max. Pressure
F1
Float Type
50 psi (3.4 bar)
PVC
0.65
F2
50 psi (3.4 bar)
Polypropylene 0.46
F3
50 psi (3.4 bar)
PVDF
0.83
N
Indication
C
Markings
00.00 6 to 72 (15.2 to 182.9 cm)*
Length
Dip Tape Level Indicator PVC

PVC CAP
1/2 NPT
1/4 MIN.
[6.35]
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS
FLOAT
DIMENSIONS
2 NPT
35/64
[13.72]
1-5/8
[41.28]
INCHES OF
INDICATION
1/2 NPT
1-1/2
[38.10]
2 NPT
7-1/2
[190.49]
Liquid Measurement
Detail
(Inches Tape Shown)
Type 1
Type 2
The Series DTV is a manual, no electricity required indicator that is compact, providing
lightweight design, the DTV is ideal for 30 or 55 gallon tanks. Stem and mounting consists
of PVC. Ideal for chemical storage tanks, our PVC indicator offers one of our best values
for liquid level monitoring. This light duty version is recommended for use in calm liquids
and ambient temperature and pressure levels. The float and stem are the only parts of the
DTV that make contact with the liquid, so the indication tape is always clean and easy to
read. It is simple to customize the DTV level indicator in order to meet a particular
application requirement promptly and affordably. A custom configurable DTV is available
in lengths ranging from 6 in (15.2 cm) up to 6 ft (182.9 cm). This level indicator is ideal for
quick readouts taken periodically. The DTV is accurate to 1/16 of an inch or 1 mm, and is
especially useful in remote areas where power is unavailable, or undesirable.
SPECIFICATIONS
Mounting Orientation: Vertically in
either vertical or horizontal tanks.
Indication Markings: 1/16 in or 1 mm
to 60C).
increments.
Model
Description
DTV-1N-17.50
PVC, 2 NPT, 30 gallon horizontal drum, 17.5
DTV-1N-22.00
PVC, 2 NPT, 55 gallon horizontal drum, 22
DTV-1N-26.50
PVC, 2 NPT, 30 gallon vertical drum, 26.5
DTV-1N-33.00
PVC, 2 NPT, 55 gallon vertical drum, 33
The float located on the DTV is equipped with a magnet that moves with the liquid
DTV-1N-6.00
Dip Tape PVC
Float Material Min. s.g. Max. Pressure
0.65
15 psi (1 bar)
PVC
1
2 NPT
Connection
2
3 150 # lb ANSI flange
Type
N
Indication
C
Markings
00.00 6 to 72 (15.2 to 182.9 cm)*
Length
*Order length must be in inches.
DTV 1
DTV
6.00
Level Indicators
Example
Series
LEVEL
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2 NPT
3 150 LB
FLANGE
PVC CAP
1/4 MIN.
[6.35]
PVC
FLOAT
1-5/8
[41.28]
6 HOLES [.750] EQUALLY

SPACED ON A [6.000 B.C.]
TAKE
READING
AT THIS
POINT
293
294_Layout 1 7/14/14 8:29 AM Page 294
Series
WD3
Water Leak Detector

Battery or External Powered, SPST or DPDT Relays
RoHS
3-5/8
[91.70]
3
[76.68]
1-3/16
[30.12]
5/16
[7.52]
1-5/16
[33.15]
5/8
[16.58]
4-1/8
[105.23]
WD3-BP
Scan here
to watch
product video
Output
SPST NOSSR
DPDTRelay
DPDTRelay
5/8
[16.18]
Bracket
WD3
The Series WD3 Water Leak Detector protects equipment from water damage by
detecting the presence of water in drip pans in air handler units, under raised floors in
data centers, or on floors around sump pumps and drains. Water is detected once it
reaches a level that bridges the two conductive strips on the bottom of the housing.
Depending on the model ordered, audible and visual alerts provide local indication of the
alarm condition and an internal switch will give remote indication or control to prevent
further build up of water.
For applications where power is not available, the Model WD3-BP-D1-A is battery powered.
Otherwise, either AC or DC supply voltages can be used to power the water detector. The
sensing height can be adjusted to as low as 1/32 using the included adjustable mounting
bracket. The mounting bracket can attach to any flat surface by either using the attached
adhesive strips or mounting screws.
Model
WD3-BP-D1-A
WD3-LP-D2
WD3-LP-D2-A
1/8
[2.50]
2
[50.66]
WD3-LP
Power
Battery
11 to 27 VAC/DC
11 to 27 VAC/DC
Audible Alarm
Yes
No
Yes
ACCESSORY
A-WD3-BRK, Replacement Mounting Bracket
Model
WD
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Water or conductive fluids.
Minimum Sensing Gap: 1/32.
Switch Type: Battery Powered
Models: SPST NO SSR; External
Powered Models: DPDT relay.
Electrical Ratings:
Battery Powered Model: Pilot duty
rating 250 mA @ 24 VDC;
External Powered Models: 1A @ 24
VAC/DC.
Audible Alarm: At least 85 dB @ 1
foot distance (depends on model).
Visual Alarm: Red LED for water level;
Yellow LED for low battery (battery
powered models only); Green LED for
power condition (external powered
models only).
50C).
Power Requirements:
Battery Powered Model: 3V CR2450
functional, user replaceable;
External Powered Models: 11 to 27
VAC/DC.
Power Consumption:
Battery Powered Model: 0.9 mA
steady state / 3.0 mA during alarm
condition;
External Powered Models: 30 mA
steady state / 85 mA during alarm
condition.
Battery Life: 5 years steady state / 48
hours during alarm condition.
Electrical Connections: 4.9 (1.5 m),
22 AWG, PVC, UL plenum rated cable.
Enclosure Material: ABS and
polycarbonate with flammability
classification UL 94 V-0.
Enclosure Rating:
Audible Alarm Models: Water-tight up
to 3/4 of the body height;
Non-Audible Alarm Models: NEMA 6P
(IP 68) submersible.
Weight: 4.85 oz (137.5 g).
Water Detector and Sensor Tape

Detects Low Levels Of Conductive Liquids
1/4
[6.35]
LEVEL
1/2 CONDUIT OR FLEX

CONNECTOR
7/8
[22.23]
1/4
4-1/4 [6.35]
[107.32]
4-3/4
AMBER LED
[120.02]
LIGHT
WD
WATER DETECTOR
PUSH
BUTTON
ALARM
TEST
POWER
15 PIN CABLE
CONNECTION
Water Leak Detectors
1-1/2
[38.10]
The small and discreet Model WD Water Detector is designed for dependable
detection of low levels of conductive liquids. The module features a sturdy and reliable
aluminum enclosure and is powered by 24 VAC or 24 to 30 VDC. Water sensing tape
attaches to module and if any liquid comes in contact with the tape the resistance is
changed and the alarm will be triggered. The tape is hydrophobic so it does not absorb any
of the liquid it is detecting which makes for a faster drying time and faster return to service
after a water leak.
The sensing tape is 1 wide and can be bought in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 25. Multiple
tapes can be connected together to extend the coverage area which makes it ideal for
domestic as well as commercial applications. Features include power and alarm LEDs,
alarm test switch, continuous tape integrity self check and extendable tape sensor.
294
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Conductive liquid.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Electrical Rating:1 A @ 24 VAC/VDC.
Power Requirements: 24 VAC, 24 to
30 VDC.
Power Consumption: 35 mA
maximum.
Model
WD
TP05
TP10
TP15
TP25
Description
Water Module
5 (1.52 m) Tape
10 (3.05 m) Tape
15 (4.57 m) Tape
25 (7.62 m) Tape
3
[76.38]
GREEN LED
LIGHT
1/8
[2.10]
1-3/4
[44.17]

terminals.
Conduit Connections: Hole for 1/2
conduit.
Enclosure: Extruded aluminum.
SensorTape: 1 (25.4 mm) wide and
5, 10, 15 or 25 long.
295_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:03 AM Page 295
Series
L4
Float Switch
Magnetically Operated Switch, Leak Proof Body, Explosion-Proof
SWITCH BODY OF
BRASS OR 316 SS EXPLOSION PROOF
HOUSING WITH 3/4
FLOAT ARM DEFLECTION
CONDUIT CONNECTION
FLOAT OF 316 SS
AND
BLOCK
STOP
(STANDARD)
1-1/2
16 GA. LEADS,
316 SS OR BRASS
NPT
6 [152.4] LONG
HINGE
PIN
2-1/2
1-5/8
[63.5] 3-11/32
[41.28]
[84.93]
LOCK MAGNET
HEX FLOAT
3-15/16
NUT
KEEPER
CONNECTION
[100.01]
430 SS
5
6
5-31/32 [151.61]
[127]
[152.4]
8-5/32 [207.17]
19-5/32 [486.57]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Rugged and reliable the Series L4 Flotect Level switch operates automatically to
indicate tank level. Perfect for starting or stopping pumps, opening or closing valves, or
actuate level alarm signals. A unique magnetically actuated switching design gives
superior performance. There are no bellows, springs, or seals to fail. Instead, the freeswinging float attracts a magnet within the solid metal switch body, actuating a snap
switch by means of a simple lever arm. Float arm hinge design limits the arm angle to
prevent vertical hangup.
FEATURES
Leak proof body machined from bar stock
Choice of floats dependent on maximum pressure and specific gravity
Weatherproof, designed to meet NEMA 4 (IP56)
Explosion-proof (listings included in specifications)
Installs directly and easily into tank with a thredolet or flange (see application
drawings)
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from the
Horizontal installation or optional top mount vertical installation
APPLICATIONS
Direct pump control for maintaining level
Automatic tank dump operations
Control levels or provide alarms in sumps, scrubber systems, hydro-pneumatic
tanks, low pressure boilers, and various waste water/sewage treatment processes
Model
L4
L4-NH**
L4-SS
L4-SS-NH**
Description
Brass body, side wall mounting
Brass body, side wall mounting, no housing
316SS* body, sidewall mounting
316SS* body, sidewall mounting, no housing
Application Drawings For Flotect Float Switches
1-1/2 THREADED
BRANCH
CONNECTION
ANSI RF THREADED
REDUCING FLANGE
CUT HOLE
1-15/16 [49] DIA.
Standard Installation
2-1/2
THREADED BRANCH
CUT HOLE
CONNECTION
2-7/8 [73] DIA.
Horizontal, Flange Installation

3/4 NPT
ANSI RF THREADED
REDUCING FLANGE
Horizontal, 2-1/2 Threaded Branch

Connection Installation with Optional
2-1/2 [64] Spherical Float
*FLANGE FACE TO CENTERLINE OF FLOAT

SPECIFIED BY CUSTOMER. NORMALLY
SHOULD NOT EXCEED 20 [508 mm].
Vertical, Flange Installation
*316SS body and float with 430SS magnet keeper (wetted part).
**No Housing Option (-NH) has no approvals.
Consult factory for price and availability of fittings for L4 installation. ThreadedBranch
Connection, bushings, and flanges are available in a variety of sizes and materials.
295
Level Switches,
Float
2-1/2 X 1-1/2
FACE BUSHING
OPTIONS FOR L4 SWITCHESABOVE Add suffixes to model numbers

DPDT contacts, add suffix -D
Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits, add suffix -MV
High Temperature option rated 400F (204C), add suffix -MT
Time Delay Relay option with 2 SPDT contacts, adjustable from 0-1 to 0-31 minutes
add suffix -TRI (increasing flow) or
-TRD (decreasing flow) (no listings or approvals)
*316 SS Magnet Keeper option to replace standard 430 SS, add suffix -316
ATEX compliant construction, add suffix -AT
IECEx certified construction, add suffix -IEC
Top Mounted option for vertical flange installation [distance from flange face to
centerline of float to be specified, 20 (508 mm) max], add suffix -TOP
Optional Floats (all 2-1/2 spherical):
304 SS rated 50 psig (3.5 bar) and 0.5 min. s.g., add suffix -50
LEVEL
11-3/4
[298.5]
3/4 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Float and Rod: 316 SS; Body: Brass or 316 SS standard;
Magnet Keeper: 430 SS standard, 316 SS or nickel optional.
Temperature Limits: 4 to 275F (-20 to 135C) standard, MT high temperature
option 400F (205C) [MT option not UL, CSA, ATEX or IECEx]. ATEX and IECEx
options: Ambient temperature -4 to 163F (-20 to 73C); Process temperature -4 to
163F (-20 to 73C).
Pressure Limit: Brass body 1000 psig (69 bar), 316 SS body 2000 psig (138 bar).
Standard float rated 100 psig (6.9 bar). For other floats, see options.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. **Listed with UL and CSA
for Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
ATEX
0344
II 2 G Ex d IIB T6 Gb -20CTamb73C.
-20CProcess Temp73C.
EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 03 ATEX 2383.
ATEXStandards:EN60079-0:2009; EN60079-1:2007.
IECEx Certified:For Ex d IIB T6 Gb -20CTamb73C. -20CProcess
Temp73C.
IECEx Certificate of Conformity:IECEx DEK11.0071.
IECEx Standards: IEC60079-0: 2007; IEC 60079-1:2007.
Electrical Rating: UL, FM, ATEX and IECEx models: 10A @ 125/250 VAC (V~).
CSA models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MV
option:1A @ 125 VAC (V~); 1A res., .5A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ). MT option: 5A @
125/250 VAC (V~). [MT and MV option not UL, CSA, FM, ATEX or IECEx].
Electrical Connections: UL and CSA models: 16 AWG, 6 (152 mm) long. ATEX
and IECEx unit: terminal block.
Process Connection: 1-1/2 male NPT standard, 2-1/2 male NPT standard
optional floats.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal installation standard, optional vertical top
mount.
Dead Band: 3/4 (19 mm) for standard float.
Specific Gravity: 0.7 minimum with standard float. For other floats see model
chart.
Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, CSA, FM, IECEx, UL**.
296_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:37 PM Page 296
Series
L6
Liquid Level Switch

Easy In-wall or External Installation, Up to 2000 psig (138 bar)
Model L6 with External Float Chamber
1 FEMALE
NPT TYP 2 PLACES
3/4 MALE NPT

CONDUIT
CONNECTION
Model L6 with Spherical Float
1 [25.40]
1 MALE NPT
3/4 MALE NPT

1-1/16
CONDUIT
[26.99] CONNECTION
3-5/64
[78.18]
1-9/64
[28.97]
2 [50.80]
HEX
1-1/16
[26.99]
8-9/16 [217.49]
1-3/4
[44.45]
6
[152.40]
3/4
[19.05]
Model L6 with Cylindrical Float
3/4 MALE NPT

CONDUIT CONNECTION
1 [25.40] x 2 [50.80]
LONG FLOAT
1-1/16
1 MALE NPT
[26.99]
6-1/2
2-7/8
[165.10]
[73.03] 1-1/16 [26.99]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Level Switches,
Float
LEVEL
Surprisingly compact, the Series L6 Flotect Level switch is designed and built for years of
trouble-free service in a wide variety of process liquid level applications. Operation is simple and
dependable with no mechanical linkage as the level switch is magnetically actuated. The float lever
pivoted within the body moves when the process liquid displaces the float. A magnet on the
opposite end of the float lever controls a second magnet on the switch actuating lever located in the
switch housing.
FEATURES
Leak proof lower body machined from bar stock
Choice of models for direct side wall mounting or mounted in a tee to act as an external
float chamber
Weatherproof
Explosion-proof (listings included in specifications)
Electrical assembly can be easily replaced without removing the unit from the installation
so that the process does not have to be shut down
Sensitive to level changes of less than 1/2 (12 mm)
Max.
Min.
Pressure
Sp.
Float
psig
Model
Gr.
Body Installation
Material
(bar)
L6EPB-B-S-3-O Brass Side Wall Mounting
0.9
Polypropylene 1000 (69)
Spherical
L6EPB-B-S-3-A Brass Side Wall Mounting
0.5
304 SS
200 (13.8)
Cylindrical
L6EPB-B-S-3-C Brass Side Wall Mounting
0.7
304 SS
350 (24.1)
Spherical
L6EPB-B-S-3-B Brass Brass External Float Polypropylene 250 (17.2)
0.9
Chamber (Tee)
Spherical
L6EPB-B-S-3-H Brass Brass External Float 304 SS
0.7
250 (17.2)
Chamber (Tee)
Spherical
L6EPS-S-S-3-O 303 SS Side Wall Mounting
0.9
Polypropylene 2000 (138)
Spherical
L6EPS-S-S-3-A 303 SS Side Wall Mounting
0.5
304 SS
200 (13.8)
Cylindrical
L6EPS-S-S-3-C 303 SS Side Wall Mounting
0.7
304 SS
350 (24.1)
Spherical
L6EPS-S-S-3-S 303 SS 304 SS External Float Polypropylene 2000 (138)
0.9
Chamber (Tee)
Spherical
L6EPS-S-S-3-L 303 SS 304 SS External Float 304 SS
0.7
350 (24.1)
Chamber (Tee)
Spherical
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts option for dry circuits, add suffix -MV (see electrical rating in
specifications)
High Temperature option rated 400F (204C), add suffix -MT (see electrical rating in
specifications, no listings or approvals, only available on models with stainless steel floats)
CSA and UL approved construction, includes weatherproof and explosion-proof junction
box, add suffix -CSA
ATEX compliant construction includes, weatherproof and explosion-proof, junction box, add
suffix -AT
IECEx certified construction, add suffix -IEC
DPDT contacts, change seventh character in model number to D.
Example: L6EPB-B-D-3-O
Options Not Shown:1-1/2 and 2 male NPT process connection, 2 female NPT
connection tee, and top mount.
296
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: Solid polypropylene or 304 SS.
Lower Body: Brass or 303 SS.
Magnet: Ceramic.
External Float Chamber (Tee): Matches lower body choice of brass or
303 SS.
Other: Lever Arm, Spring, Pin, etc.: 301 SS.
Temperature Limit: -4 to 220F (-20 to 105C) Standard, MT high
temperature option 400F (205C)(MT not UL, CSA, ATEX, IECEx and KC).
ATEX compliant AT, IECEx IEC and KC option ambient temperature -4 to
167F (-20 to 75C) process temperature: -4 to 220F (-20 to 105C).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof and Explosion-proof. Listed with UL and
CSA for Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
(Group A on stainless steel body models only).
ATEX
0344
II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 Gb Process Temp75C.
EC-Type Certificate No.: KEMA 04ATEX2128.
ATEX Standards:EN 60079-0: 2009; EN60079-1:2007.
IECEx Certified:For Ex d IICT6 Gb Process Temp 75C.
IECEx Certificate of Conformity:IECEx DEK II.0039.
IECEx Standards:IEC 60079-00:2007; IEC 60079-1:2007.
Korean Certified (KC)for Ex d IIC T6 Gb Process Temp75C.
KTLCertificate Number:2012-2454-75.
Electrical Rating: UL models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~). CSA, ATEX and
IECEx models: 5A @ 125/250 VAC (V~); 5A res., 3A ind. @ 30 VDC (V ).
MV option: .1A @ 125 VAC (V~). MT option: 5A @125/250 VAC (V~). [MT
option not UL, CSA, ATEX or IECEx].
Electrical Connections: UL models: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long.
ATEX/CSA/IECEx models: terminal block.
Upper Body: Brass or 303 SS.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 male NPT standard, 3/4 female NPT on
junction box models.
Process Connection: 1 male NPT on models without external float
chamber, 1 female NPT on models with external float chamber.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
Weight: Approximately 1 lb (.5 kg) without external float chamber, 1.75 lb
(.8 kg) with external float chamber.
Specific Gravity: See chart.
Agency Approvals: ATEX, CE, CSA, IECEx, KTL, UL.
297_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:00 PM Page 297
Series
L8
Liquid Level Switch

Low Cost, Leak Proof Body, Excellent Chemical Resistance
L8
(3) 18 AWG
LEAD WIRES
18 [457.2] LONG
1-21/32
[42.07]
4-17/32
[115.09]
L8-WP2
1-5/16 [33.32] OCTAGON

8-5/16
[211.12]
3-1/16
[77.79]
1/2 NPT(M)
1 NPT(M)
FLOAT
SWITCH
BODY
11-13/64
[284.56]
4-5/16
[109.52]
3-1/16
[77.79]
1-21/32
[42.07]
4-5/16
[109.52]
1 NPTM
1/2 NPTM
1-5/16 OCTAGON
[33.32]
2-17/32
[64.29]
4-17/32
[115.09]
2-17/32
[64.29]
1-1/8
[28.58 ]
1-1/8
[28.58]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Model L8 Flotect Liquid Level Switch features a leak proof body and float
constructed from tough, durable polyphenylene sulfide which has excellent chemical
resistance. Because the liquid level snap switch is magnetically actuated, there is no direct
mechanical linkage to leak or fail, assuring longer life and decreased maintenance costs.
This inexpensive unit is ideal for liquid level alarm, indication or control. Installation is
quick and easy simply install in a horizontal position with the index arrow pointing down.
The L8 Flotect Liquid Level Switch is UL recognized as an industrial motor controller per
UL standard 508, suitable for mounting in a protected environment. This lightweight
switch can be used in numerous chemical processes, industrial systems and similar
applications where process conditions are compatible with polyphenylene sulfide, ceramic
8 and 316 SS. This liquid level switch provides accurate setpoint control of liquids with
specific gravities as low as 0.6. This compact and reliable control is designed to handle
temperatures up to 212F (100C) and pressures to 150 psig (10 bar).
APPLICATIONS
The Model L8 Flotect Liquid Level Switch is ideal for predetermined liquid levels in
tanks through pump control or solenoid valve control. It provides excellent liquid
level alarm or indication when combined with the Series AN14 Indicating
Annunciator.
Environmental control
Chemical/Petroleum processing
Waste water
Plating and washing tanks
Scrubber systems
Sewage treatment
Holding tanks
Car washes
Cooling towers
Remediation systems
Series L8, Level Switch
297
Level Switches,
Float
OPTIONS
Gold Plated Contacts, for dry circuits. Rated 1A @ 125 VAC; 1A resistive, 0.5A
inductive @ 30 VDC. To order add suffix -MV.
Example: L8-MV
Inconel Alloy Option. Inconel Alloy replaces standard 316 SS wetted parts.
Wetted parts are Inconel Alloy, ceramic 8, and Polyphenylene Sulfide. To order add
suffix -INC.
Example: L8-INC
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is phenylpolioxide and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring. To order add suffix -WP. (Not UL
approved)
Example: L8-WP
Weatherproof Enclosure. Optional housing is aluminum and provides
weatherproof protection for electrical wiring. To order add suffix -WP2. (Not UL
approved)
Example: L8-WP2
LEVEL
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float and body: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS);
Pin and spring: 316 SS or Inconel;
Magnet: Ceramic 8.
Enclosure Rating: General purpose. WP/WP2 option is weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. MV option is a SPDT gold contact snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 125/250 VAC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive @ 30 VDC. MV
option: 1A @ 125 VAC, 1A resistive, 0.5A inductive @ 30 VDC.
Electrical Connections: 18 AWG, 18 (460 mm) long.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 male NPT, 1/2 female NPT on WP and WP2.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with index arrow pointing down.
Specific Gravity: 0.6 minimum.
298_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:00 PM Page 298
Series
L10
Mini-Size Level Switch

Easy In-wall or External Installation, Specific Gravities as Low as 0.5
Spherical Float
3/4
[19.05]
1
[25.40]
1-3/4
[44.45]
3-1/4
[82.55]
Cylindrical Float
1/4 [6.35]
TRAVEL TO NORMALLY
CLOSED POSITION
2-7/8
[73.07]
1 NPT
1 [25.40]
4 [101.6]
18 AWG
LEAD WIRE
19 [482.6]
CABLE
1/4 [6.35] TRAVEL

TO NORMALLY CLOSED POSITION
2-7/8
1
3-1/2
[73.03]
[25.40]
[88.90]
1-1/16
[26.99]
2-7/8
[73.07]
19
1 [25.40] X
2 [50.80] LONG 1 NPT [482.6]
CABLE
4 [101.6]
18 AWG
LEAD WIRE
The Mini-Size Series L10 Flotect Level Switches combine low cost with top quality
materials and construction for great value and years of reliable liquid level control. Wide
media compatibility is assured with a choice of brass or SS bodies and external tees;
polypropylene or SS floats. Two basic configurations are offered; with 1" male NPT
threads for direct side mounting through a half coupling or with factory installed tee for
external mounting.
All Series L10 switches feature a hermetically sealed, magnetically actuated SPST reed
switch which is encapsulated in a polypropylene housing. Units are quickly and easily
adjusted for your choice of normally open or normally closed operation thanks to a unique
design. Just loosen two screws and instantly slide the switch assembly to the action
required. NO and NC markings are clearly visible. This feature also speeds switch
replacement if damage occurs.
Three types of floats are offered to accommodate liquids with specific gravities as low as
0.5; max pressures to 2000 psig (137.8 bar). These controls are UL recognized and CSA
listed.
Model
L10-B-3-O
L10-B-3-A
L10-B-3-C
L10-B-3-B
L10-B-3-H
L10-S-3-O
L10-S-3-A
L10-S-3-C
L10-S-3-S
L10-S-3-L
Body Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
303 SS
Installation/Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Brass Tee
Brass Tee
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
Side Wall Mounting
304 SS Tee
304 SS Tee
Model
F7-MLK
External Float Chamber
Float Material
Polypropylene Spherical
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Cylindrical
304 SS Spherical
304 SS Spherical
1
[25.40]
5-7/16 [138.13]
2-3/8
[60.33]
3
[76.20]
Min. S.G.
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.7
1/4 [6.35]
TRAVEL TO
NORMALLY
CLOSED
POSITION
2-7/8
[73.07]
19
[482.6]
CABLE
1 NPT
4 [101.6]
18 AWG
LEAD WIRE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Float: Solid polypropylene or 304 SS;
Body: Brass or 303 SS;
Magnet: Ceramic;
External float chamber (tee): None,
brass, or 304 SS;
Other: Lever arm, pin, spring, etc.:
301 SS, 302 SS, 316 SS.
Pressure Limit: See chart.
Max. Press. psig (bar)

1000 (69)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
250 (17.2)
250 (17.2)
2000 (137.8)
200 (13.8)
350 (24.1)
2000 (137.8)
350 (24.1)
1
[25.40]
Switch Type: SPST hermetically

sealed reed switch. Field adjustable for
normally open or normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 1.5 A @ 24 VDC
res., 0.001 A @ 200 VDC res., 0.5A @
125 VAC.
(483 mm) long, PVC jacket. Rated
221F (105C).
Process Connection: 1 male NPT
standard on models without external
float chamber. Change 3 in model
number to 4 for 1-1/4, to 5 for 1-1/2,
or 6 for 2. 1 female NPT on models
with external float chamber.
Mounting Orientation: Horizontal with
index arrow pointing down.
Weight: Approximately 10 oz (0.283
kg) without external float chamber, 2.32
lb (1.05 kg) with external float chamber.
Specific Gravity: See chart.
Agency Approvals: CSA, UR.
Switch Enclosure: Nylon.
Multi-Level Switch Kit

One or Two Station Level Switch, Vertically Mount
1/2
[12.70]
2 NPT
TUBE
CONNECTOR
4
[101.60]
LEVEL
FLOAT TUBE
AND SWITCH
STATION
TUBE
UNION
TUBE
UNION
FLOAT TUBE
AND SWITCH
STATION
2-1/2
[63.50]
1/2
NPT
1 FITTING
ASSEMBLY
2 NPT
PIPE
MOUNTING
Level Switches,
Float
TUBE END
FITTINGS
1/2
[12.70]
Customize a level system to suit your application requirements. The F7-MLK MultiLevel Switch Kit contains all the components necessary for the design and fabrication of a
1 or 2 station level switch for pipe plug mounting. User can customize stem length (maximum
36), actuation point, distance between floats, and lead wire lengths. The switch kit is ideal
for general purpose, low specific gravity, gas and oil applications. Model F7-MLK includes
two level stations (switch, tube, and Buna-N float), two brass extension tubes 12 length,
four brass tube unions, one end fitting, and one mounting plug.
Model F7-MLK, Multi-Level Switch Kit
298
7/8 [22.23]
2 SWITCHES
1/2
[12.70]
10-29/32
[276.99]
9-7/32
12
8 [234.19]
[304.80]
[202.97]
2
EXTENSION
TUBES
1/2 [12.70]
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials (Float/Stem): BunaN/Brass.
Switch Type: SPST, normally open or
normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 60 Watts: 0.4A @
220 VAC, 0.5A @ 110 VAC,
0.2A @ 120 VDC, 0.5A @ 24 VDC.
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/8 [28.64]
7/8
[22.23]
4 TUBE
UNIONS
1-31/32
[49.91]
1-1/4
[31.75]
2 BUNA-N
FLOATS
1-29/32
[48.67]
1 TUBE
END FITTING
Electrical Connections: 22 AWG x

72 (183 cm) leads.
Process Connection: 2 male NPT
pipe plug.
Mounting Orientation: Up to 30
angle from vertical.
Stem Length: 36 (91 cm) maximum.
Tube/Fitting Size: 1/2 OD.
Minimum Specific Gravity: 0.45.
299_Layout 1 7/14/14 11:55 AM Page 299
Series
F6 & F7
Level Switches - Horizontal/Specialty

Low Cost, Hermetically Sealed Contacts
Horizontal
F6-HPS-11
13/64 [5.16]
F6-MHS
M16 X 2
33/64
[13.1]
11-13/16
[300] 51/64
[20.24]
F6-MHS2
11/64
[17.46]
16-9/64
[420.69]
1/4
[6.35]
1-23/32 [43.66]
9/32 [7.14]
Specialty
F7-SS6
21/64 [8.33]
15/16 [23.81]
33/64
[13.1] 2X 3/4
[19.05]
21/64
[8.33]
3/8-24 UNF-2A
3/4 HEX
[19.05 HEX]
1-3/4 [44.45]
F7-EB
JUNCTION BOX
F7-EBX ONLY
2-3/4 [70]
7 [178]
43/64
[17.02]
11/64
[4.31]
13/16 MIN
1-7/32 MAX [31.0] [20.6]
3/32
[2.54]
4-5/8 MAX
[116.8]
1-5/32 MAX [29.2]
APPROXIMATE ACTUATION LEVEL
3/4
[19.05]
F7-LL
1/2-14 NPT
1/8 NPT
2-3/32
[53]
1-15/32
[37] 15/16 1/4
[24] [6.4]
3-1/4
[82.55]
5/16
[7.94]
1/2 NPT
FEMALE
5/16
[8.00]
1-19/32
[40.61]
FITTING CENTERLINE
F7-HSS
1
[25.4]
1-1/2
[38.1]
43/64
[17.07]
3-17/64 [83.10]
2X 11/16
[17.28]
11/16
[17.46]
1/2 NPT
15
[381]
3/8 [9.56]
1/2 NPT
1-13/32 [35.72]
3/4
21/64 [19.05]
[8.33]
3/4
[19.05]
F6-HPS-31
4-1/4
[107.95]
11-13/16
[300]
3-7/8
[98.43]
2-11/64 [55.17]
2-11/64 [8.33]
1/2 NPT
33/64
[13.1]
19/32
[15.03]
3/4 [19.05]
13/64 [5.16]
F6-HPS-21
M16 X 2
21/64 [8.33] 1-27/64 [36.12]

45/64 [17.86]
1/2 [12.7] HEX
5/16
[8]
1-7/8 [47]
F7-WBB
3-1/2
[89]
1-3/4 [44.5]
1-5/16
[33]
4-1/4 [108]
2-5/8 [67]
Electrical
Rating
20 VA: 0.08A @
220 VAC N.O. operation
20 VA:0.08A @
220 VAC N.C. operation
20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
20 VA: 0.08A @
240 VAC
Wire
Leads
22 AWG,
24 (61 cm)
22 AWG,
24 (61 cm)
18 AWG,
24 (61 cm)
22 AWG,
72 (182 cm)
22 AWG,
25 (7.6 m)
Mtg
3/8-24
UNF-2A
3/8-24
UNF-2A
3/4 NPT
female
1/8 NPT
male
Weight
oz (g)
2 (58)
2 (58)
5 lb 5 oz
(2.4 kg)
2 (58)
Level Switches,
Float
Style/
Material
Temperature Pressure
Min.
Applications
Float/Stem
Limits
Limits
S.G.
Bent stem/
316 SS/316 SS 300F (149C) 100 psig (7 bar)
0.70
Liquids with metal particles
316 SS/316 SS 300F (149C) 100 psig (7 bar)
0.70
F7-SS6B Bent stem/
Liquids with metal particles
Brass/316 SS 300F (149C) 500 psig (34 bar)
0.75
F7-EB** Non-intrusive bottle type/
Outside tank mounting
(Brass housing)
Vertical/
Polysulfone/
180F (82C) 50 psig (3 bar)
F7-LL
Detect levels as low as 5/8 Buna-N
25 cable, slosh shield/
Brass/Buna-N 180F (82C) 150 psig (10 bar)
0.45
F7-WBB
Sumps, stand pipes
F7-HSS is rated explosion-proof for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III.
Explosion proof model available with DPDT switch. Specify F7-EBX
**Model available with Normally Closed Switch. Specify F7-EBNC
Model
F7-SS6
LEVEL
1-7/16 [37]
2-1/8 [54]
Series F6 & F7 Horizontal Mount Level Switches are designed to mount through the
Series F6 & F7 Specialty Level Switches are designed for unique applications. Model
walls of tanks and other vessels. Internally mounted models F6-HPS-11, F6-MHS and F7F7-SS6 can be used with viscous liquids or liquids with suspended metal particles. Use
SS6 are secured to the wall of the tank or vessel from the inside while model F6-HPS-21 is
model F7-LL for low level detection (5/8). The non-intrusive bottle style F7-EB mounts
mounted from the outside (externally). Models F7-HSS and F6-MHS2 can be installed
completely outside the tank at the actuation level. Suspend model F7-WBB in stand pipes
internally or externally.
or sumps for leak detection or drop into wells for ground-water monitoring.
Weight
Material
Temperature Pressure
Min. Electrical
Wire
Limits
oz (g)
Applications
Model
Float/Stem
Limits
S.G. Rating
Leads
Mtg
1.23 (38)
F6-HPS-11 Water, Oils, Chemicals
Polypropylene/ 176F (80C) 116 psig (8 bar)
0.60 20 VA: 0.08A @
20 AWG,
M16 x 2
Polypropylene
240 VAC
11.8 (30 cm)
1.23 (38)
0.60 20 VA: 0.08A @
20 AWG,
1/2 NPT
Polypropylene
240 VAC
11.8 (30 cm)
1.41 (40)
0.60 20 VA: 0.08A @
20 AWG,
1/2 NPT
Polypropylene
240 VAC
11.8 (30 cm)
3.35 (95)
F6-MHS
Corrosives
304 SS/304 SS 257F (125C) 218 psig (15 bar)
0.85 20 VA: 0.08A @
22 AWG,
M16 x 2
240 VAC
11.8 (30 cm)
4.8 (136)
F6-MHS2 Water, Oils, Chemicals
304 SS/304 SS 257F (125C) 363 psig (25 bar)
0.85 70 VA: 0.7A @
22 AWG,
1/2 NPT
250VAC
11.8(30 cm)
3 (94)
F7-HSS High temp/pressure,
316 SS/316 SS 392F(200C) 300 psig (20.7 bar) 0.60 30 VA: 0.14A @
22 AWG,
1/2 NPT
corrosive, Expl.
220 VAC
24 (61 cm) (int/ext)
10.8 (310)
299
300_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:59 AM Page 300
Series
F6 & F7
Level Switches - Vertical

Low Cost, Reliable and Compact, Hermetically Sealed Contacts
1/8 NPT
F7-SB
F7-ST713
D
C
Series F6 & F7 compact level switches combine low cost and reliability with fast,
simple installation. Hermetically sealed reed switches are actuated by magnets
permanently bonded inside the float and can be easily adapted to open or close a circuit on
rising or falling levels. Vertical mount models are shipped with normally open switch
contacts which close as the float rises toward the mounting threads. Reverse switch action
by removing the float, rotating it end-for-end and replacing it on the stem. Vertical models
mount internally, oriented within 30 of vertical, or select optional fittings for external
mounting. Switch ratings are suitable for many solid state control systems and monitors
or alarms. Simple relay interfaces can be used for higher current applications.
Material
Float/Stem
Buna-N & Epoxy/
316 SS
High temp/pressure, 316 SS (CYC)/
F7-SS2
corrosives
316 SS
Corrosives
316 SS/
F6-SS
316 SS
Broad chemical
Polypropylene/
F7-MPP**
compatibility
Polypropylene
Polypropylene/
F7-MPP-NO** Broad chemical
compatibility
Polypropylene
Broad chemical
F7-PP
Polypropylene &
compatibility
Epoxy/Polypropylene
Oils & Fuels
F7-BT
Buna-N & Epoxy/
PBT*
Food/beverage,
F7-K
PVDF/
corrosives
PVDF
General purpose
F7-C11
Buna-N/
Brass
Oils &water,
F7-C21
Buna-N/
general purpose
316 SS
High viscosity liquids Buna-N/
F7-BB
Brass
Water-based liquids, Polysulfone/
F7-PS
complies with FDA
Polysulfone
Chemical &plating
F7-PVC
CPVC/
CPVC
Viscous, sticky or
F7-T1
PTFE/
corrosive liquids
TFE
F7-ST713
Oils, water &
316 SS/
chemicals
316 SS
Level Switches,
Float
LEVEL
Model
F7-SB
Applications
General purpose
Temp.
Limits
220F
(105C)
300F
(149C)
257F
(125C)
180F
(82C)
176F
(80C)
220F
(105C)
220F
(105C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
180F
(82C)
225F
(107C)
180F
(82C)
300F
(149C)
300F
(149C)
Press.
Limits
150 psig
10 bar
450 psig
31 bar
218 psig
15 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
150 psig
10 bar
100 psig
6.89 bar
150 psig
10 bar
150 psig
10 bar
150 psig
10 bar
50 psig
3 bar
15 psig
1 bar
30 psig
2 bar
750 psig
52 bar
300
Model
F7-SB
F7-SS2
F6-SS
F7-MPP
F7-PP
F7-BT
F7-K
F7-C11
F7-C21
F7-BB
F7-PS
F7-PVC
F7-T1
F7-ST713
F7-ST714
(A) Stem
Length
2.75 (70)
2.06 (52)
2.17 (55)
1.63 (41)
2.18 (55)
2.18 (55)
2.13 (54)
2.06 (52)
2.06 (24)
3.19(81)
3.38 (86)
3.44 (87)
3.47 (88)
3.38 (86)
3.38 (86)
Min. Electrical
S.G. Rating
0.60 25 VA:1A @
220 VAC
0.75 25 VA: 1A @
200 VAC
0.65 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.90 10 VA:0.1A @
100 VAC
0.90 50 VA:0.2A @
240 VAC
0.60 30 VA:0.14A @
220 VAC
0.45 30 VA:0.14A @
220 VAC
1.00 50 VA:0.25A @
150 VAC
0.45 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.45 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.55 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.55 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.85 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.80 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
0.80 20 VA:0.08A @
240 VAC
Distance between hex and liquid (S.G. = 1.0) level at actuation point will vary with
specific gravity changes.
*PBT - Polybutylene Terephthalate.
Incudes 316 SS clip.
Spherical floats.
** F7-MPP is normally closed/F7-MPP-NO is normally open
UL Listed
Dimensions in Inches (mm)

(B) Float
Diameter
1.38 (35)
1.0 (25)
1.11 (28)
0.63 (16)
1.18 (30)
1.18 (30)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.88 (48)
1.88 (48)
1.5 (38)
2.13 (54)
2.06 (52)
2.06 (52)
(C) Float
Height
1.13 (29)
1.0 (25)
1.11 (28)
0.63 (16)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.0 (25)
1.81 (46)
1.88 (48)
1.81 (46)
1.94 (49)
2.06 (52)
2.06 (52)
(D) Actuation
from Hex
1.2 (31)
0.73 (19)
0.47 (12)
0.69 (18)
0.69 (18)
0.65 (17)
0.56 (14)
0.56 (14)
1.19 (30)
1.25 (32)
0.75 (19)
0.92 (22)
1.09 (28)
1.09(28)
Wire
Leads
22 AWG 18 (45 cm)
Mtg
NPT (M)
1/8
Weight
oz (g)
2 (58)
22 AWG 18 (45 cm)
1/8
1.2 (34)
20 AWG 11.8 (30 cm) 1/8
1.59 (45)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
0.8 (23)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
0.8 (23)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
0.8 (23)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
0.7 (20)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
1.5 (43)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
1.5 (43)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/8
1.5 (43)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/4
5 (140)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/4
4 (110)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/4
5 (140)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/4
6 (170)
22 AWG 24 (61 cm)
1/4
6 (170)
OPTIONALFITTINGS For external mounting of vertical models

A-347, 1/8 x 1-1/4 NPT carbon steel adapter
A-347-SS, 1/8 x 1-1/4 NPT 316 SS adapter
A-348, 1/8 x 1-1/2 NPT carbon steel adapter
301_Layout 1 7/9/14 11:22 AM Page 301
Series
F7-MQ
Quick-Ship Multi-Station Level Switch

Fast Delivery, Customized, Up to Four Actuation Levels
Float Dimensions
L4
A
1-3/4
[44.45]
L3
1-1/4
[31.75]
LO
L2
F1
1-13/16
[46.02]
2-3/32
[53.16]
1-7/8
[47.62]
2-1/16
[52.37]
F2
F3
L1
D
A
B
D
1-1/2
3
2
(38.10 mm) (76.20 mm) (50.80 mm)
Actuation Levels
Each switching point requires one float.
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting.
B = Minimum distance between actuation levels.
D = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point.
Customize level switches to meet application requirements quickly and affordably.
Switches can be configured with up to four different control points and stem lengths up to
72 (1.82 m). Stems and floats are available in 316 SS or brass.
Example
Construction
Stem & Connection
Material
Connection Type
Set Point Distance
Overall Length
Options
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Type 1
Type 2
1/2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ
[31.75]
2 NPT
Type 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits: F1 and F2 with water: 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C); Oil: -40 to
230F (-40 to 110C); F3: -40 to 300F (-40 to 149C).
Electrical Connections: 24 (61 cm) free leads; #22 AWG TFE and #18 AWG
polymeric.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical 30.
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
LEVEL
Switch Type
1/2 NPT
1.000 SQ
[25.40]
1-1/4 NPT
1/2 NPT
J F7-MQB1-4F33-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-24.00-J
Multi-station level, 1 to 4 switch points
Brass with Beryllium copper stops
316SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
1/2 NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
1-1/4 NPT (Float F1 only)
2 NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
Put 1 to 4 for the number of switch points desired
Buna-N, min. s.g. 0.75, 150 psi (10.3 bar) max. pres.
316SS, min. s.g. 0.75, 750 psi (51.7 bar) max. pres.
SPST, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
SPDT, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
NO switch is standard. For NC place an * after the corresponding set point distance in the model number.
In inches referenced from bottom of connection
F7-MQ B 1 4 F3 3
F7-MQ
B
S
1
2
3
#
F1
F2
F3
1
3
Switch Points
Float Type
Mounting Dimensions
Repeat for each switch point with dashes in between.

No numbers needed beyond the number of switches specified. In inches for example 12.25 would be
12.25 from the bottom of the process connection.
Minimum length is L1+D. Maximum length with Connection Length is 72 (1.82 m)
00.00
J Junction box for wire leads, NEMA 4 (Not available with Connection Type 1)
Level Switches,
Float
301
302_Layout 1 7/9/14 11:49 AM Page 302
Series
F7-MM
Miniature Multi-Station Level Switch

Custom, Lightweight, Low Cost, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Float Dimensions
L5
15/16
[23.80]
A
1.000
[25.40]
L4
F1
L3
LO
1-3/32
[27.79]
29/32
[22.86]
F3
1-7/32
[30.99]
1-1/32
[26.16]
F6
F4, F5
L2
1-1/2
[38.10]
F2
1-19/32
[40.49]
29/32
[22.61]
1
[25.40]
1-1/4
[31.75]
29/32
[22.86]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1-9/64
[29.79]
F7
F8
Mounting Dimensions
L1
A (in.)
7/8
3/4
3/4
13/16
9/16
15/16
13/16
3/4
B (in.)
1-3/4
1-7/8
1-13/16
2-7/16
2-7/16
1-7/8
2
1-7/8
D (in.)
3/4
1-1/16
15/16
1-7/16
1-3/4
7/8 (NO); 1-3/16 (NC)
1-1/8
1-1/16
Actuation Levels
LEVEL
Example
Construction
Stem & Connection
Material
Connection Type
Switch Points
Float Type
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Switch Type
Level Switches,
Float
F7-MM B 1 5 F1 1
F7-MM
B
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
1
2
Set Point Distance L5

L4
L3
L2
L1
Overall Length
L0
302
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
1 NPT
Type 2
Type 1
3-5/8
[92.08]
1/8 NPT
6 HOLES
5/16
[7.95]
EQUALLY
SPACED
ON A
3.000 B.C.
[76.20]
Type 3
1-1/2 HEX
[38.10]
3/8-24
THREAD
1-5/16-12
THREAD
3/16
[4.78]
Miniature custom level switches with a sturdy, lightweight design are ideal for tanks
less than four feet (1.2 m) deep. Control up to five different level points across a maximum
length of 48 (121 cm). Stems and mounting fixtures are available in 316 SS or brass.
1-5/16 HEX
[33.32]
3/4 NPT
1/2 HEX
[12.7]
D
Float Type
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
1-1/16 HEX
[26.97]
1/8 NPT
[.125]
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
Temperature Limits: F1 and F2: Water, 180F (82.2C); Oil, -40 to 250F
(-40 to 121.1C). All other floats: -40 to 300F (-40 to 148.9C).
Electrical Connection: 24 (61 cm) free leads #22 AWG, TFE jacketed.
F7-MMB1-5F11-03.00-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-25.00
1/8 NPT
3/4 NPT (Cannot be used with float F1, F3, F7 and F8)
1 NPT (Cannot be used with float F3)
3-5/8 Flange [Maximum pressure is 50 psi (3.45 bar)]
1-5/16-12UNF-2A (Cannot be used with float F3)
3/8-24
Material Min. s.g. Max. Pres. psi (bar)
Buna-N .45
300 (20.68)
Buna-N .60
250 (17.24)
316SS
.70
100 (6.89)
316SS
.85
150 (10.34)
316SS
1.1
400 (27.58)
PTFE
.65
1000 (68.95)
316SS
.85
275 (18.96)
316SS
.90
600 (41.37)
SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC
In inches referenced from bottom of connection
00.00 Maximum overall length of 48 inches (121 cm). Minimum length is L1 + D.
303_Layout 1 7/9/14 11:45 AM Page 303
Series
F7-MS
Multi-Station Level Switch

Customize To Fit Application, Up to Six 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Float Dimensions
L6 A
L5
1-1/4
[31.75]
L4
1-7/8
[47.62]
F2
F1
Mounting Dimensions
1/2 NPT
L2
Type 1
L1
1/2
NPT
D
1-1/4
NPT
A
B
D
1-1/2
3
2
(38.10 mm) (76.20 mm) (50.80 mm)
Customize level switches to meet application requirements. These switches can be

configured with up to six different control points and stem lengths up to 140 (3.56 m).
Stems and floats are available in 316 SS or brass.
Set Point Distance
Overall Length
Options
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
1
[25.40]
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ
[31.75]
2 NPT
Type 3
Type 4, 5
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Stem, connection, and float.
Temperature Limits: Buna-N floats: 180F (82.2C) in water, -40 to 230F (-40 to
110C) in oil; SS floats: -40 to 300F (-40 to 148.9C).
Wire Leads: 24 (61 cm) free leads; #22 AWG, TFE jacketed, and #18 AWG
polymeric.
J F7-MSB1-5F31-04.00-07.00-11.00-15.00-20.00-24.00-J
1/2 NPT (Float F2, F3 only)
2 NPT
3 150# Flange Carbon Steel (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only)[Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
3 150# Flange 316SS (Conn. material S only, float F2, F3 only) [Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
316SS, min. s.g. 0.75, 750 psi (51.7 bar) [units >72: 300 psi (20.7) bar] max. pres.
SPST, .8A @ 120 VAC, .4A @ 240 VAC
SPDT, .17A @ 120 VAC, .08A @ 240 VAC, .13A @ 120 VDC, .06A @ 240 VDC
In inches referenced from bottom of connection.
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
00.00
LEVEL
F7-MS B 1 5 F3 1
F7-MS
B
S
1
2
3
4
5
#
F1
F2
F3
1
2
3
Switch Type
7-1/2
[190.5]
1.000 SQ
[25.40]
Type 2
Actuation Levels
Switch Points
Float Type
F3
6 HOLES
3/4 [19.05]
EQUALLY
SPACED
ON A
6.000 B.C.
[152.4]
LO
L3
Example
Construction
Stem & Connection
Material
Connection Type
2-3/32
[53.16]
2-1/16
[52.37]
1-13/16
[46.02]
1-3/4
[44.45]

00.00
Minimum length is L1+D. Maximum length with Connection Type 1: 36 (91.4 cm),
Type 2: 60 (152.4 cm), and Types 3, 4, 5: 140 (355.6 cm).
J Junction box for wire leads, NEMA 4 (Not available with Connection Type 1)
Level Switches,
Float
303
304_Layout 1 7/9/14 11:54 AM Page 304
Series
123
Boiler Water Level Control

Heavy Duty, Cast Iron Chamber
1 NPT
1-1/8
[28.58] 3-9/16
[90.50]
5-3/4
[146.05]
1/2 PIPE PLUG

TYP 2 PLACES
5-3/8
[136.53]
5-1/2
7 [139.70]
[177.80]
A special snap action mechanism eliminates frequent operation due to surging water level.
Visible operation adds convenience in servicing. SS trim and hand reset are available if
required. Options include DPDT switch, two stage, and weatherproof housing.
APPLICATIONS
Boiler low water cut-off
Boiler feed-water control
Condensate tanks
Deaerators
Model
123-153
123-7000-153
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
Series
102
7-1/8
[180.98]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron
is not for use with lethal or flammable
substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron;
Float: 304 SS; Trim and packing gland:
Brass; Packing: Carbon; Body gasket:
Carbon.
Optional weatherproof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch or
mercury switch. Optional DPDT or two
stage.
3-9/16
[90.50]
4-3/4
[120.65]
2-7/16
[61.91]
Electrical Rating: Snap switch: 15A @

120/240/480 VAC, 0.5A @ 120 VDC
resistive, 0.25A @ 240 VDC resistive;
Mercury switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A
@ 240 VAC/DC.
terminal.
hole for 1/2 (12.7 mm) conduit.
Agency Approvals: CSA, UL. (Snap
switch is not rated).
Deadband: Approximately 1-1/2
(38.1 mm).
Specific Gravity: 0.88 min.
Options: Manual reset.
Flanged Chamber Type Level Control

Operating Pressures to 300 PSIG
6-3/4
[171.45]
5-3/4
[146.05]
3/4 NPT CONDUIT

CONNECTION. CAN
BE ROTATED 360.
1 NPT
17-1/2
[444.5]
SP. GR. A
1.0
5-1/16
(129 mm)
0.6
5-13/16
(148 mm)
8-1/4
[209.55]
A
LEVEL
1-5/8
[41.28]
Flanged inspection plate allows periodic inspection and clean-out of Model 102 float
chamber, making this unit ideal for use in refineries, chemical plants, and other areas with
potentially dirty liquids. Low cost cast iron chamber is standard. Carbon steel and SS
chambers are available on special order. SS float is standard.
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap
Level Switches,
Float
Model
102-WT-4810-C-60
102-WT-7810-C-60
102-WT-7810HM-C-60
304
3-1/4 4-7/8
[82.55][123.83]
B
3/4
(19 mm)
1
(25.4 mm)
6-1/8
[155.58]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids. Cast iron
is not for use with lethal or flammable
substances either liquid or gaseous.
Wetted Materials: Body: Cast iron.
Optional cast steel or 316 SS; Float
and trim: 303 SS, 304 SS, 316 SS, and
430 SS. Option of all 316 SS; Body
gasket: Carbon.
Optional rating to 400 psig (27.6 bar).
Optional general purpose or explosionproof.
Repeatability: 1/4 (6.4 mm).
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch,
hermetically sealed snap switch, or
stage.

120 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125
VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250 VDC
resistive; Hermetically sealed snap
switch: 5A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 240
VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC resistive; Mercury
switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240
VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings
available for the mercury switch.
terminal.
NPT.
Set Point Adjustment: 1 (25.4 mm).
Specific Gravity: 0.6 min.
305_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:54 AM Page 305
Series
CFS2
Cable Float Switch

Mercury-Free, UL/CSA Approved Options
1-41/64 [41.50]
5-5/32
[131.00]
3-3/16 [81.00]
6-15/64
[158.50]
4-9/64
[105.00]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series CFS2 Cable Float Switch is a mechanically actuated floating switch
intended to activate electrical components, usually pumps, to start and stop automatically.
The CFS2 is perfect for simple level control of liquids for filling or draining reservoirs and
tanks. Float switches such as the CFS2 are the most universally used for pump automation,
due to their high reliability, economical pricing, and easy installation. Counterweights and
cable hangers are available to suit a variety of mounting applications. Optional cables
available include those with UL/CSA approval, higher chemical compatibility, high
temperature durability, oil resistance, and drinking water suitability. Contact factory for
piggyback plug option, gold contact switch option and cable length options ranging from
10 to 70 ft (3.04 to 21.34 m).
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Enclosure:
Polypropylene; Cable: See model
chart.
50C).
Pressure Limits: 14.5 psi (1 bar).
Switch Type: See model chart.
Electrical Rating:
CFS2-XXBXX-XX:
10 (8) A @ 250 VAC;
CFS2-XXDXX-XX:
1 HP @ 125 VAC 16 FLA;
2 HP @ 250 VAC 12 FLA.
Shipping Weight:
Enclosure: 5.43 oz (154 g);
Cable: 0.77 oz (21.27 g) per ft.
Agency Approvals: See model chart.
ACCESSORIES
A-457, 7.76 oz (220 g) counterweight
A-459, Cable hanger
Model
CFS2-ONBPN-20
CFS2-ONBPN-30
CFS2-ONBPN-40
CFS2-ONBPN-50
CFS2-CNBPN-20
CFS2-CNBPN-30
CFS2-CNBPN-40
CFS2-CNBPN-50
CFS2-DNBPN-7
CFS2-DNBPN-10
CFS2-DNBPN-15
CFS2-DNBPN-20
CFS2-DNBPN-30
Cable Type
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Approvals
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
Series
FSW2
Switch Type
SPST NO
SPST NO
SPST NO
SPST NO
SPST NC
SPST NC
SPST NC
SPST NC
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
Cable Length
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
7 ft (2.13 m)
10 ft (3.05 m)
15 ft (4.57 m)
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
Model
CFS2-DNBPN-40
CFS2-DNBPN-50
CFS2-DNBPN-60
CFS2-DNBPN-80
CFS2-DNBPN-100
CFS2-OGDSN-20
CFS2-OGDSN-30
CFS2-OGDSN-40
CFS2-OGDSN-50
CFS2-CGDSN-20
CFS2-CGDSN-30
CFS2-CGDSN-40
CFS2-CGDSN-50
Cable Type
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
SJOW
Approvals Switch Type

CE
SPDT
CE
SPDT
CE
SPDT
CE
SPDT
CE
SPDT
UL/CSA
SPST NO
UL/CSA
SPST NO
UL/CSA
SPST NO
UL/CSA
SPST NO
UL/CSA
SPST NC
UL/CSA
SPST NC
UL/CSA
SPST NC
UL/CSA
SPST NC
Cable Length
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
60 ft (19.29 m)
80 ft (24.38 m)
100 ft (30.48 m)
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
Free-Floating Level Switch

Designed for Industrial Applications, Mercury-Free, Self Counter-Weighted
8-23/64
[212.50]
5/8
[16.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids, slurries.
Wetted Materials: Enclosure:
Polypropylene; Cable: PVC.
(0 to 50C).
Cable Length
10 ft (3.05 m)
15 ft (4.57 m)
20 ft (6.10 m)
30 ft (9.14 m)
40 ft (12.19 m)
50 ft (15.24 m)
60 ft (18.29 m)
80 ft (24.38 m)
100 ft (30.48 m)
4-23/64
[110.83]

Electrical Rating: 10 (8) A @ 250
VAC.
Shipping Weight:
Enclosure: 2.4 lb (1100 g);
Cable: 0.77 oz (21.27 g) per ft.
Level Switches,
Float
The Series FSW2 Free-Floating Level Switch is a mercury-free self counterweighted floating switch designed for the automation of pumps, specifically filling and
draining of tanks, wells, and reservoirs. The FSW2 body is free of any irregularities
making it ideal for use in sewage water applications. The polypropylene body consists of a
double airtight chamber with high-pressure melted polypropylene re-injection sealing to
ensure a perfect seal against infiltration. Cable hangers are available to suit a variety of
mounting applications. Featuring CE approval and optional cables available that include
higher chemical compatibility, high temperature durability, oil resistance, and drinking
water suitability. Contact factory for piggyback plug option, and cable length options
ranging from 10 to 70 ft (3.04 to 21.34 m).
Model
Model
Switch Type
Switch Type
Cable Length
FSW2-ONPN-20 SPST NO
FSW2-DNPN-10 SPDT
20 ft (6.10 m)
FSW2-DNPN-15 SPDT
30 ft (9.14 m)
FSW2-DNPN-20 SPDT
40 ft (12.19 m)
FSW2-DNPN-30 SPDT
50 ft (15.24 m)
FSW2-CNPN-20 SPST NC
FSW2-DNPN-40 SPDT
20 ft (6.10 m)
FSW2-DNPN-50 SPDT
30 ft (9.14 m)
FSW2-DNPN-60 SPDT
40 ft (12.19 m)
FSW2-DNPN-80 SPDT
50 ft (15.24 m)
FSW2-DNPN-100 SPDT
LEVEL
4-45/64
[119.50]
ACCESSORY
A-459, Cable hanger
305
306_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:10 PM Page 306
Series
OLS
Optical Level Switch

Low Cost, Compact, LED Indication, No Moving Parts
1/2 NPT
7/8 HEX
[22.23 HEX]
OLS-10
OLS-11
1/16
[1.59]
1-3/4
[44.45]
OLS-12
Low cost, rugged optical level switch provides rapid response while employing no
moving parts for stable process control. The bright red and green LEDs indicate the
presence or absence of liquid for true, local indication. Three optional materials, 316 SS,
polysulfone and PFA provide application flexibility. Compact switch can be quickly mounted
horizontally or vertically for each installation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Noncoating compatible
liquids.
Temperature Limit: Process: OLS-10,
11: 200F (93.3C), OLS-12: 120F
(48.9C); Ambient: OLS-10, 11: 175F
(79.4C), OLS-12: 120F (48.9C).
Pressure Limit: OLS-11, 12: 200 psig
(13.8 bar); OLS-10: 1000 psig (69 bar).
Repeatability: 0.02 (0.5 mm).
Switch Type: NPN open collector.
Principles of Operation
The optical level switch employs an LED, which transmits infrared light. This light is sent
through a prism and reflected back to a photo-transistor utilizing two 90 light reflections.
With the prism surrounded by a gas, the light source is cast back to the photo transistor.
When a translucent liquid is introduced to the prism at or above the point where the light
source makes contract with the prism, the light is reflected into the liquid, not allowing
the photo-transistor to energize.
Model
OLS-10
OLS-11
OLS-12
APPLICATIONS
Food and beverage systems
Liquid holding tanks
Hydraulic reservoirs
Sumps
Pharmaceutical systems
Air conditioning systems
Series
B-190
HIGH
RED,
LOW
BLK, GNO
WHT, CONTROL
15/64
[5.95]

Output Signal: Vout (max) = 28 VDC,
Isink (max) = 100 mA.
Current Consumption: 35 mA
maximum.
Electrical Connections: 38 (965.2
mm) 3 conductor cable, 22 AWG wire.
Mounting Orientation: Can be
mounted in any position.
Specific Gravity: No minimum.
Wetted Materials
316 SS/Polysulfone
Polysulfone
PFA
Liquid Level Switches-Controls

Top Mounted Displacer Type, Adjustable Setpoints,
Magnetic Operation, Optional Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch
6-3/4 [171.45]
5-3/4[146.05]
3/4
NPT
9-13/16
[249.24]
3 [76.20]
Dimensions for 1.0 s.g. @ 100F (38C)

A
TB
C
Max.
Min.
Max. Min.
Max.
116-1/2 6-1/2
114 6-3/4
2-1/2
(2.66m) (165mm) (2.9m) (172mm) (64mm)
A
B
OPERATES
ON LEVEL
RISE
C
LEVEL
TB
One of our most versatile level controls, the model B-l90 can be used on all types of
tank or sump level control applications. Three porcelain displacers provide deadband
adjustment. Unit can start a sump pump (for example) when liquid reaches the high set
point and turn the pump off when the level drops to the low set point. Unit works equally
well in pressurized tanks. Two stage units also available.
Switch Type
SPDT Mercury
SPDT Snap
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap
Level Switches
Optical/Displacer
Model
B190-WT-4810-P-A-1.0-2
B190-WT-7810-P-A-1.0-2
B190-WT-7810HM-P-A-1.0-2
306
B
Min.
122-1/4
(3.1m)
OPERATES
ON LEVEL
DROP
TO BOTTOM

SPECIFICATIONS
terminal.
Wetted Materials: Cable, spring and
NPT.
stops: 316 SS. Optional Inconel
spring; Displacers: Porcelain. Optional
Process Connections: 4 125 cast
304 SS, 316 SS, or carbon graphite.
iron flange. Other material, size, and
rating flanges are available.
93.3C). Higher ratings available.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable by
Higher ratings available.
moving displacers see dimension chart
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X. Optional
for minimum and maximum values.
general purpose or explosion-proof.
Switch Type: SPDT snap switch,
Agency Approvals: UL (None on HM
hermetically sealed snap switch, or
switch).
Deadband: Adjustable by moving
stage.
displacers see dimension chart for
minimum and maximum values.
120 VAC, 5A @ 240 VAC, 0.5A @ 125
Specific Gravity: Standard is 1.0.
VDC resistive, 0.25A @ 250 VDC
Specify when ordering by replacing 1.0
resistive; Hermetically sealed snap
in model number with specific gravity
switch: 5A @ 120 VAC, 5A @ 240
setting desired. Settable range is 0.5 to
VAC, 5A @ 30 VDC resistive; Mercury
1.2.
switch: 4A @ 120 VAC/DC, 2A @ 240
Cable Length: 10 (3 m) standard.
VAC/DC. Higher contact ratings
Optional up to 100 (30.5 m).
available for the mercury switch.
Inconel is a registered trademark of Huntington Alloys Corporation.
307_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:49 PM Page 307
Model
CLP
Conductivity Level Probe

Low Cost, Compact Design
3/8
[9.53]
7/16
[11.11]
1/2 NPT
1/8
[3.18]
23/64
[9.92]
19/32
[15.03]
1/4
[6.35]
51/64
[20.24]
2-13/32
[61.12]
3-35/64
[90.09]
1/4
[6.35]
9/16
[14.29]
6-19/32
[167.48]
Series CLP Conductivity Level Probes are used to determine the presence of a
conductive liquid at a set level by sensing conductivity. The Series CLP is coupled with the
Series TSWB Temperature Level Controller for a complete level control system. These
probes allow for the measurement of conductivity between the probe fitting and end, which
is isolated by a ceramic insulator, or between the probe ends of two probes. The CLP can
be mounted in any orientation in a tank, tee fitting, or any compatible threaded port. The
probe end is solid stainless steel allowing substantial resistance to heat and corrosion.
Model
CLP-1
Description
Conductivity Level Probe, 1/2 NPT
Model
DPL110
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Conductive liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Probe end: 430SS;
Insulator: Ceramic;
Fitting: Nickel-plated iron;
Seal: Silicone.
Electrical Connections: Snap-type post.
Mounting: Threaded port, any orientation.
Dual Point Level Switch

Tank High/Low Control, Conductivity Technology, Up to 72 Probes
3-1/8
2-17/64 [78.99]
[57.40]
1-13/32
[35.43]
2-25/64
[60.58]
43/64
[16.89]
27-1/16
[687.39]
1 INCH NPT
24
[609.6]
1/8
[3.18]
Model DPL110, Dual Point Level Switch
59/64
[23.40]
3-47/64
[94.77]
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrodes: 1/8 dia, 24 (609.6 mm) L, standard.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, polypropylene.
Mounting, Sensor Head: 1 male NPT.
Probe Enclosure: NEMA 6 (IP67).
Maximum Probe Length: 72 (1.8 m) with optional extensions.
Connecting Cable, Probe to Controller: 10 (3.0 m).
Sensing Voltage: 12 VAC.
Power Supply: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz.
Output: SPDT, 5 A @ 240 VAC.
Mounting, Controller: Standard octal socket or 35 mm DIN rail.
Weight, Probe Assembly: 1.5 lb (0.68 kg).
Weight, Controller: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg).
Level Switches,
Conductivity
ACCESSORY
Model DPL5, Electrode Extensions includes three 24 (610 mm) electrode extensions
and mounting hardware
1-47/64 2-13/16
[43.94] [71.37]
LEVEL
Maintain liquid level high and low limits with the Model DPL Dual Point Level
Switch. Units can be used for single or dual point level control in semi-solid liquids,
industrial slurries or heavy-bodied liquids like wastewater. Standard 24 inch electrodes
can be cut by the end-user to a shorter length or lengthened by adding up to two 24
extensions (sold separately) to reach the max recommended length of 72. Model DPL
contains no moving parts to get stuck or wear out. Controller features adjustable
sensitivity and DIN rail-mountable socket mount.
CONTROLLER
2-15/64
[56.64]
307
308_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:53 AM Page 308
Series
CLS2
Capacitive Level Switch

Powder, Bulk, or Liquids, Auto-Calibration
4-3/16
[106.36]
3/8
[9.53]
4-1/8
[104.78]
2-19/64
[58.34]
22-21/64
[567.14]
19
[482.60]
3-19/32
[91.28]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The CLS2 is a capacitive technology level switch that does not have any moving parts
- no jams, no wear, nothing to break, and no maintenance. State of the art sensing
technology in the CLS2, using impulse RF admittance measurement combined with an
active guard, provides excellent level measurement and stability while being insensitive to
material buildup. This technology also provides immunity to external RF sources like
walkie-talkies and cell phones as well as minimal interference with radio communication
or other electronic systems.
Capacitive level technology can be used for liquids, powders, and bulk materials and is great
for difficult applications such as slurries, coating products, and liquids with solids. The
CLS2 is ideal for level indication in silos, receivers, and transporters in pneumatic conveying
systems. The CLS2 can also be used for liquid interface applications to detect the level of
two immiscible liquids that have different dielectric constants such as oil and water. Wetted
materials of PVDF and 316 SS assure great chemical compatibility and meet food grade
requirements.
FEATURES
Automatic Calibration: No need to turn calibration pots, just push the
calibration button. The CLS2 even has an external magnet to activate the
calibration without having to open the enclosure.
Universal Power Supply: One model works from 12 to 240 VAC/DC without
any jumpers or settings.
Coat Guard: Unit is not affected by sticky, dusty, or clingy materials that coat or
build up on the probe, preventing false alarms.
Failsafe Setting: Output switches can be set for NO or NC condition on loss of
power.
Status Indication: Ultra high brightness external red LED switch status
indicator, and internal indicators for power, sensor, and switch status that can be
seen externally with window cap option (external LED on weatherproof model
only).
Time Delay: Prevent false alarms from material splashing, agitation, etc.
Removable Terminals: Removable terminal block snaps in and out enabling
easy wiring outside of the enclosure.
4-5/32
[105.57]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids, powder, and bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C), -4 to 185F (-20 to
85C) with under 24 VAC/DC power supply; Process: -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C).
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66).
Switch Type: DPDT (two form C).
Electrical Rating: 8A @ 120/240 VAC res., 30 VDC. 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC and 1/4
hp @ 240 VAC ind.
Power Consumption: 2.8 watts max.
Electrical Connection: 1/2 NPT conduit opening, screw termination with
removable terminal block.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.
Set Point Adjustment: Trips when product touches probe. Cut or extend probe to
length of desired trip point. Can be cut as short as 1 and can be extended by
welding on to probe. (Minimum length will be effected by material being sensed.)
Time Delay: Adjustable, 0 to 60 seconds.
Spark/Static Protection: 10 M dissipation resistance with spark gap. Surge
current to 100A max.
Sensitivity: 8 Selectable settings, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14, 20 pF (at 30 pF nominal
free capacitance).
Example
Series
Enclosure
Switch
LEVEL
Power
Supply
Probe Type
CLS2 W 1 1 R K 1 019 M20 CLS2-W11RK1-019-M20

CLS2
Capacitive Level Switch
W
Weatherproof
1
DPDT rated 8A @ 12/240 VAC, 30

VDC res.
12-240 VAC/DC
1
R
T
Standard Rod: 316 SS, .375 diameter

Threaded Rod: 316 SS (can attach
field extensions.)
Cable: 316 SS with weight
PVDF
C
Insulator
Material
Process
Connection
Level Switches,
Capacitive
Probe
Length
Options
308
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
3/4 male NPT

1 male NPT
1-1/2 male NPT
3/4 BSPT
1 BSPT
1-1/2 BSPT
1-1/2 sanitary clamp
2 sanitary clamp
XXX
Insertion length in inches. Example
019 is 19 length. (Minimum length
is 6, with 3/4 sensing tip)
M20 M20 conduit connection with cable
gland
WC Window Cap
309_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:53 AM Page 309
Model
FCLS
Flush Capacitance Level Switch

Maintenance Free, Flush Mounting
4-3/8
[110.95]
4-9/32
[108.83]
7-11/32
[186.34]
5-57/64
[149.43]
1/2 NPT
3-25/32
[96.16]
6-3/32
[154.94]
The Model FCLS Flush Capacitance Level Switch is ideal for level measurement of
liquids and bulk solids to trigger an alarm or close a filler inlet. No probe design allows for
installation where space is constrained or where material flow or material build up would
damage a probe. With no moving parts, this level switch assures no jams, no wear, nothing
to break, and no maintenance. Comes standard with IP65 housing with a maximum
pressure limit of 285 psi (19.7 bar).
Model FCLS-01, Flush Capacitance Level Switch
Model
CLS1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids, powder, and bulk
materials compatible with wetted
materials.
Insulated Materials: PTFE.
140F (-20 to 60C); Process: -4 to
176F (-20 to 80C).
Power Requirements: 110 or 220
VAC.
Enclosure:Aluminum, painted.
Switch Type: SPDT.

Electrical Rating: 3 A @ 250 VAC.
terminals.
Conduit Connection: 2 x 1/2 female
NPT.
Process Connection: 2.5 - x 5 kg/cm2
JIS flange.
Mounting Orientation: Side mount.
Fail Safe: Selectable fail high or fail
low.
Adjustable Sensitivity: 1 to 20 pF.
Time Delay: 0 to 6 s.
Capacitance Level Switch

For Solids, Liquids or Slurries, Fail-Safe Protection, <1 pF Sensitivity
1-11/16
[42.88]
7/8
[22.23]
1/2 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
6-3/16
[157.15]
21/32
[16.67]
1 MALE NPS
PROCESS
CONNECTION
1-13/16
[46.05]
8-5/8
[219.08]
3-13/16
[96.84]
1-7/64
[28.18]
APPLICATIONS
High or low level detection in bins, silos, tanks, hoppers, chutes and other vessels
where liquids, solids or slurries are stored.
309
Level Switches,
Capacitive
Model CLS1, Capacitance Level Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Solids, liquids, or slurries.
Wetted Material: CPVC.
Temperature Limits: Process: -40 to 240F (-40 to 116C); Ambient: -40 to 185F
(-40 to 85C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66), PVC, dust tight, water resistant.
SwitchType: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 5A @ 250 VAC.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 1.5VA.
Process Connection: 1 male NPS.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.
Sensitivity: Adjustable to <1 pF.
Fail-Safe: Switch selectable, high/Low.
Time Delay: Adjustable 1 to 30 seconds.
LEVEL
Model CLS1 Capacitance Level Switch provides reliable point level measurement of
solids, liquids and slurries in metallic or non-metallic tanks and vessels. Model CLS1
detects the presence or absence of material in contact with the probe by sensing a change
in the capacitance. Electronics provide highly sensitive measurement detection (requires
less than a 1 picofarad shift from ambient). State of the art technology ignores material
build-up on the vessel sidewall or along the probe assembly. One time calibration is simple
with a single multi-turn potentiometer. Red LED on housing indicates sensor status. Unit
features an adjustable 1-30 second time delay and a 5 amp, SPDT fail-safe relay output.
Model CLS1 can be mounted vertically or horizontally.
310_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:52 AM Page 310
Series
LTS
Tilt Switch Probe

Non-Mercury Probes
Probe
Type
Standard
Compact
A
in (cm)
9 (22.86)
6 (15.24)
B
in (cm)
1-7/8 (47.63)
1-7/16 (36.51)
The Series LTS Tilt Switch Probes are able to sense either the presence or absence
of material when other sensors wont work due to bin vibration, or actual walls arent
available for mounting other types of measuring units. The probes are designed for use
where the bulk material to be sensed is exposed or open. Typical applications include high
or low level detection in large hoppers, silos, crushers, or trippers, high level control under
stackers, and detection of plugged conditions at conveyor transfer points. Series LTS
probes can also be used to detect the presence or absence of bulk material on belt
conveyors, on chutes to indicate product flow, and to aid in loading rail cars or trucks.
All probe models are airtight, dust tight, and waterproof. The compact probe should be
used for applications involving small bins and hoppers where space is limited, while the
heavy duty probe should be used for applications where a heavy duty abrasion-resistant
probe is necessary.
Model
LTS-N11G-025
LTS-N21G-025
LTS-N12G-025
LTS-N22G-025
Size
Standard
Compact
Standard
Compact
Probe Material
Steel
Steel
SS
SS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Powder and bulk.
Temperature Limit: -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C).
Switch Type: SPST, normally closed.
Electrical Rating: 0.25 A max, 60 V max, 3 VA max.
Electrical Connection: 16-3 type SO connection cable.
Cable Length: 25 (7.6 m).
Probe Length: Standard: 9 (23 cm); Compact: 6 (15 cm).
Signal Voltage: 15 VDC (when used with LTC controller).
Actuation Angle: 25 from vertical.
Material: Steel or SS.
Switch Surrounding: Epoxy encapsulated.
Weight: Standard: 4.75 lb (2.15 kg); Compact: 2.5 lb (1.13 kg).
Features: Fittings for hangers.
Enclosure Rating: Meets NEMA 4 (IP56).
Consult factory for custom cable lengths.
Series
LTC
Tilt Switch Control Unit

Adjustable Time Delay
1-9/32
[32.54]
4
[101.6]
1-21/32
[42.06]
RED LENS
8-1/4
[209.55]
9-1/2
[241.3]
6-3/64
[153.59]
LEVEL
8-3/4
[222.25]
GREEN LENS
4-7/8
[123.83]
3-29/32
[99.16]
Level Switches,
Tilt
The Series LTC Tilt Probe Control Units feature an adjustable time delay and a logic
selector switch. The logic selector switch determines when the output relay actuates and
de-actuates, thus while in position one, the relay is energized when the probe is in the
vertical position and de-energizes when the probe is in the titled position, and while in
position two, the actions are opposite. In addition, an adjustable time-delay feature may be
assigned to either the vertical or the tilt position to prevent false signals. The relay assumes
the de-energized position upon reaching the end of the delay period as well as upon failure
of power to the controller.
Model
LTC2
LTC3
310
Enclosure
NEMA 4
No-enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 115 VAC @ 50/60 Hz.
Power Consumption: 10W.
Switch Type: DPDT.
Enclosure: None or carbon steel housing with polyester coating.
Enclosure Rating: None or NEMA 4 (IP56).
Conduit Connection: None.
Indicator Lights: Green (when relay is energized and probe vertical), Red (when
relay is de-energized and probe tilted).
Indication Light Power Required: 18 VDC.
Time Delay: 1 to 10 sec. Adjustment will delay output relay action.
311_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:52 AM Page 311
Series
TFLS
Tuning Fork Level Switch

Perfect for Sensing Low Bulk Density or Low Dielectric Materials
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
1-1/2 NPT
SERIES
TFLS TUNING FORK LEVEL SWITCH
7/8
[22.23]
MOD TFLSSERIAL:
4-7/16
[112.73]
4-7/8
[123.83]
3-5/8 [92.08]
COVER REMOVAL
Series TFLS tuning fork level switch is ideal for level control of powders and fine
grained solids, especially those with a low bulk density. The TFLS incorporates a
piezoelectric crystal that vibrates the fork at its natural frequency. When the fork comes
in contact with material the vibration is dampened and the switch changes state. As the
fork becomes free of material the switch changes back to its normal state. Featured in the
TFLS is user-selectable fail-safe operation of the contacts. Unit is not affected by vibration
from conveying systems, motors, or the movement of material. It can be mounted in any
position and is available with factory built extensions for mounting on the top of the storage
vessel.
Series TFLS is easy to use with no calibration required and with no mechanical moving
parts there is no routine maintenance required. The TFLS is unaffected by the dielectric
constant of the sensed material making it superior to a capacitance level switch for
applications where the dielectric constant is too low, where there is more than one material
being used in one vessel, and when material moisture content can change. The level switch
is also good for applications when the bulk density is too low for a rotating paddle level
switch. It can also detect granular material submerged in liquids of low viscosity, for
example sand, gravel, or polyester chips in water.
FEATURES
No calibration required
Vibrating fork design: Great for low bulk density and low dielectric constant
products. Will detect products down to 1.8 lb/ft3 (30 g/l)
Universal power supply: One model works with 90 to 265 VAC and 24 VDC
Adjustable sensitivity: Can be set to ignore lighter bulk density products and only
detect heavier products, such as sand in water
Status indication: External LED switch indicator, and internal indicators for
normal and alarm status
Failsafe setting: Output switch can be set for NO or NC condition on loss of
power
Time delay: Prevent false alarms from material surges
4-7/32
[107.14]
7-5/8
[193.68]
8-5/8
[219.08]
Extension
Length
None
6 in
12 in
18 in
24 in
36 in
48 in
DIM
A
9-1/4(234.95)
15-7/8 (403.23)
21-7/8 (555.63)
27-7/8 (708.03)
33-7/8 (860.43)
45-7/8 (1165.23)
57-7/8 (1470.03)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder or bulk materials compatible with wetted materials. Can
detect bulk materials submerged in liquid.
Sensitivity: Minimum bulk density of 1.8 lb/ft3 (30 g/l), max particle size 0.4 (10
mm).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C); Process: -4 to 176F (-20
to 80C).
Power Requirement: 90 to 265 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC.
Enclosure: Aluminum, powder coated.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66).
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electric Connections: Screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1-1/2 male NPT.
Indication Lights: External: Red LED; Internal: Green and red LEDs.
Sensing Delay: (Max) covered probe: 2 seconds; Uncovered probe: 3 to 7
seconds.
Time Delay: Separate settings for covering and uncovering the probe. Adjustable
from 2 to 20 s.
Series TFLS-W11SR1
Contact factory for fork extension options in carbon steel or stainless steel.
LEVEL
APPLICATIONS
Lime, styrofoam, tobacco, dry cereals, sugar, animal feed, milk powder, flour,
insulation, cement, paper shavings, plastic granules, sawdust, carbon black, light
fibers, detergent powders, dyes, chalk, silica, sand, wood chips.
Level Switches,
Tuning Fork
311
312_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:13 AM Page 312
Model
TFLS2
Compact Tuning Fork Level Switch

Compact, Cost Effective, For Bulk Solids
3-5/16
[84.00]
1 NPT
4-9/64 25/32
[105.00] [19.99]
Scan here
to watch
product video
63/64
[25.06]
The Model TFLS2 Compact Tuning Fork Level Switch is an ideal choice for level
control for powders. The TFLS2 incorporates a piezoelectric crystal that vibrates the fork
at its natural frequency. When the fork comes in contact with a material, the vibration is
dampened and the switch changes state. As the material is removed from the fork, the
switch changes back to its normal state. Featured in the TFLS2 is user selectable fail-safe
operation of the contacts. The unit is not affected by vibration from conveying systems,
motors, or the movement of material. Its compact size allows for mounting in places a
larger tuning fork level switch may not fit, providing great versatility.
The Model TFLS2 is easy to use with adjustable calibration, and no mechanical moving
parts means no routine maintenance. The TFLS2 is not affected by the dielectric constant
of the sensed material, making it superior to a comparable capacitance level switch for
applications where the dielectric constant is low, more than one material is being used in
the single vessel, and when material moisture content can change. The level switch is also
great for applications when the bulk density is too low for a rotating paddle level switch,
making it the ideal choice for low density bulk solids and liquids.
Model
CTF
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder compatible with
wetted materials.
Sensitivity: Min. bulk solid density: 4.4
lb/ft3 (70 g/l); Max. particle size: 0.4
(10 mm).
Wetted Materials: 316 L SS.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process: -40 to 266F (-40 to 130C).
Power Requirement: 20 to 250 VAC,
50/60 Hz.
Enclosure: Aluminum, painted.

Switch Type: SPDT.
Electric Connections: Screw
terminals.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 female NPT
x 2.
Process Connections: 1 male NPT.
Indication Lights: Internal: Green and
red LEDs.
Sensing Delay: 0 to 6 s.
Model TFLS2-01, Compact Tuning Fork Level Switch
Mini Tuning Fork Level Switch

Compact, Cost Effective, DIN Connection
1 NPT
1-3/16
[30.00]
4-9/64
[105.00]
3-15/16
[100.00]
1-1/2
[38.00]
Level Switches,
Tuning Fork
LEVEL
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model CTF Mini Tuning Fork Level Switch is an ideal choice for level control for
powders. The CTF incorporates a piezoelectric crystal that vibrates the fork at its natural
frequency. When the fork comes in contact with a material, the vibration is dampened and
the switch changes state. As the material is removed from the fork, the switch changes
back to its normal state. The unit is not affected by vibration from conveying systems,
motors, or the movement of material. Its compact size and DIN connection allow for
application in places a larger tuning fork level switch may not be suitable, providing great
versatility.
The Model CTF is easy to use with no calibration required, and no mechanical moving parts
mean no routine maintenance. The CTF is not affected by the dielectric constant of the
sensed material, making it superior to a comparable capacitance level switch for
applications where the dielectric constant is low, more than one material is being used in
the single vessel, and when material moisture content can change. The level switch is also
great for applications when the bulk density is too low for a rotating paddle level switch,
making it the ideal choice for low density bulk solids and liquids. Comes standard with a
user friendly PNP/NPN configurable output.
APPLICATIONS
fibers, detergent powders, dyes, chalk, silica, sand, wood chips.
312
HEX1/5
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder compatible with
wetted materials.
Sensitivity: Min. bulk solid density: 4.4
lb/ft3 (70 g/l).
Wetted Materials: 304 SS and 316L
SS.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C).
Power Consumption: 10 mA @ 12 to
24 VDC; 0.5 W (max.).

Switch Type: 3-wire PNP/NPN output.
Electrical Rating: 350 mA (max) @ 12
to 55 VDC.
Conduit Connection: Valve plug DIN
43650.
Process Connections: 1 male NPT.
Indication Lights: External red LED.
Sensing Delay: Max. covered probe: 1
to 3 s.; Uncovered probe: 1 to 3 s.
Model CTF-01, Mini Tuning Fork Level Switch
313_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:02 PM Page 313
Model
VRLS
Vibrating Rod Level Switch

Economical, No Material Build Up, For Powder or Bulk Solids
4-29/64
[113.03]
4-9/32
[108.83]
51/64
[20.19]
1 NPT
10-27/32
[275.35]
Scan here
to watch
product video
3/4
[18.87]
The Model VRLS Vibrating Rod Level Switch is an economical choice in level
detection of powders and bulk solids. The VRLS utilizes a piezoelectric crystal that
vibrates the rod at a natural frequency. Once the rod comes in contact with the material,
the vibration will be dampened and the switch will change state. Once the rod is uncovered
by the material, the switch will revert to its normal state. Perfect for silo or hopper
applications, its probe design allows for self-cleaning, ensuring no build-up or bridging of
material and accurate detection. Sensitivity is adjustable for detection ranging from large
granular material to small powders with low bulk densities. The failsafe mode can be set
for failure on high level or failure on low level using a selector switch in the enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry powder or bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Sensitivity: Min. bulk density of 20 lb/ft3 (320 kg/m3).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Power Requirement: 20 to 250 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 female NPT x 2.
Indication Lights: Internal: green and red LED.
Sensing Delay: 0 to 6 s.
APPLICATIONS
fibers, detergent powders, dyes, chalk, silica, and wood chips.
Model VRLS-01, Vibrating Rod Level Switch
Model
DBLM
Mini-Bin Dry Bulk Level Monitor

Compact, 4-Vane Paddle
1-27/32
[46.83]
2-9/16
[65.09]
11/32 [8.7] DIA. HOLE

6-PLACES
6-25/32
[172.2]
1-37/64 [40.08]
1-7/32 [30.94]
8 [203.2]
DIA.
3-5/32
[80.02]
Range F1 with
Half Coupling Side Mount
The Mini-Bin provides reliable level sensing for dry bulk solids where mounting
space is limited. This compact, side mount control reports high, intermediate, and low level
conditions, eliminating overflows, choking, clogs or empty vessels. Model DBLM Mini-Bin
operates by using a 1 rpm synchronous motor to rotate a four vane, plastic paddle. When
material surrounds paddle and impedes rotation, the motor is de-energized and triggers a
SPDT snap switch. Mount the Mini-Bin with optional 1-1/4" to 3/4" reducer to replace
standard size units.
Power Supply
110 VAC
220 VAC
F1, 8 x 1-1/4 NPT flexible carbon steel mounting flange

A-335, 1-1/4 to 3/4 reducer
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry bulk solids.
Wetted Materials: Polycarbonate paddle, SS shaft, PTFE washer.
Enclosure Rating: Polycarbonate, NEMA 1 (IP10).
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 220 VAC optional, consult factory.
Power Consumption: 1.5 Watts.
Electrical Connections 18 AWG, 12 leads wrapped in conduit.
Process Connection: 3/4 male NPT, optional flange and 1-1/4 to 3/4 reducer.
Mounting Orientation: Side mount.
Weight: 0.77 Ib (350 g).
313
Level Switches
Vibrating Rod
Model
DBLM3040
DBLM3140
15/32
[11.9]
LEVEL
3/4 NPT
7 [177.8]
DIA.
BOLT
CIRCLE
314_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:03 PM Page 314
Series
PLS2
Paddle Level Switch

3 Sensitivity Settings, Top or Side Mounting
4-59/64
[125.00]
4-23/32
[120.00]
3-15/16
[100.00]
1-29/64
[37.00]
5-1/8
[130.00]
2X 3/4
NPT
3-15/16
[100.00]
PLS2-PL1
5-29/32
[150.00]
25/64
[10.00]
1-1/4
NPT
1-3/8
[35.00]
3-15/61
[100.00]
7-7/8
[200.06]
3-5/8
[92.00]
PLS2-PL2
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series PLS2 is an electromechanical level switch designed for level monitoring of
bulk materials. The rotating measuring vane is driven by a brushless synchronous motor
at one revolution per minute. As product builds up, the paddle rotation is impeded and the
resulting motor torque activates the output switch and stops the motor. A spring
mechanism reactivates the motor and returns the switch to normal state when the material
no longer impedes the paddle rotation. A torque adjusting mechanism eliminates the need
for different sized paddles. The PLS2 is designed with the industry standard 1-1/4 male
NPT connection and unit can be side or top mounted.
FEATURES
3 sensitivity settings
Top or side mountable
Brushless synchronous motor: Assures long term reliability and efficiency
Motor shuts off when paddle stalls
Screw cover: For easy access with no worries about losing bolts or screws
APPLICATION
Level monitoring of bulk materials
Model
PLS2-E-1-1
PLS2-E-1-2
PLS2-E-1-3
Description
Explosion-proof paddle level switch, 115 VAC power supply
Explosion-proof paddle level switch, 230 VAC power supply
Explosion-proof paddle level switch, 24 VDC power supply
ACCESSORIES
PLS2-PL1, Single Sided Spring Paddle
PLS2-PL2, Double Sided Spring Paddle
PLS2-EX1, 8.5 Shaft Extension
Level Switches,
Paddle
LEVEL
Models include single sided non-spring paddle.
314
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Paddle: 304 SS;
Exposed shaft: 303 SS;
Shaft seal: NBR;
Process connection: Aluminum.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -13 to 176F (-25 to 80C);
Ambient: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 11.6 psi (0.8 bar).
Power Requirement: Select by model number: 115 VAC, 230 VAC or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: AC versions: 4 VA; DC version: 2.5 watt.
Enclosure Rating:
NEMA 4 (IP66);
Rated for Class II & III, Div. 1, Group E, F, G.
Switch Type: SPDT micro switch.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 250 VAC, 3 A @ 30 VDC.
Mounting Orientation: Side or top mounting.
Sensitivity: Min. material density of 6 lb/ft3 (96 kg/m3).
Permitted Mechanical Loading:
Standard shaft: 67 lbf (300 N) max;
Optional extension: 22 lbf (100 N) max.
315_Layout 1 7/9/14 3:59 PM Page 315
Series
PLS
Paddle Level Switch

Economical Rotary Paddle Level Control, Top or Side Mounting for Dry Bulk Materials
3/4 CONDUIT
CONNECTION
4-11/32
[110.31]
4-1/2
[113.69]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
Incorporated in the design of the PLS is a magnetic drive that is time proven by
decades of use in our Mark Series valve position indicator product line. A 1 rpm
synchronous motor rotates the paddle utilizing a magnetic drive. As product builds up the
paddle is impeded from moving and the resulting motor torque activates the output
switches and stops the motor. A spring mechanism reactivates the motor and returns the
switches to normal state when the product no longer impedes the paddle rotation.
Standard construction is weatherproof with explosion-proof optional, and the unit can be
side or top mounted. The PLS is designed with the industry standard 1-1/4 male NPT
connection and mounting flanges.
FEATURES
Magnetic drive that isolates and completely seals the control head from the process
and environment preventing material or dust from entering the control head
Motor shuts-off when paddle stalls increasing motor life, preventing motor burnout,
and decreasing power usage
Slip clutch design enabled by the magnetic drive that prevents damage to motor
and drive mechanism from sudden or excessive loading on the paddle.
Status indication light on weatherproof models
Screw cover on the enclosure for easy access with no worries about losing bolts
or screws
Modular design to allow field installation of any paddle, flanges, shaft extensions,
or shaft guards
PLS-W-S-1-2-CSH-0-0
Flanges
FLG-CSH
FLG-CSF
FLG-SSH
FLG-SSF
PDL-4. Minimum bulk

density of 70 lb/ft3 (1122
kg/m3). Fits through 1-1/4
coupling eliminating the
need for a mounting
flange.
Description
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch,
120 VAC power supply. Order paddles and
flanges separately.
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120
VAC power supply, includes PDL-3 paddle.
Weatherproof construction, SPDT switch, 120
VAC power supply, includes PDL-1 paddle and
FLG-CSH flange.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: Min material density of 5 lb/ft3 (80 kg/m3), max of 200 lb/ft3 (3200
kg/m3).
Wetted Materials:
Paddles: 316 SS; Exposed shaft: 316 SS; Shaft seal: PTFE;
Mounting boss: Aluminum; Flexible coupling: 316 SS;
Mounting flanges: Carbon steel or 316 SS
Shaft extension and shaft guards: Galvanized steel or 316 SS.
Temperature Limits:
Standard construction: Process: -40 to 300F (-40 to 148.9C);
Ambient: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
High temperature option: Process: -40 to 500F (-40 to 260C);
Ambient: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Pressure Limit: 30 psig (2.07 bar) max for .5 micron or larger material.
Power Requirement: Select by part number: 110 to 120 VAC, 230 VAC, 24 VAC,
48 VAC, 12 VDC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: Weatherproof models: 5 watts; Explosion-proof models: 3
watts.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof (W, WH construction): NEMA 4X (IP66);
Explosion- proof (E, EH construction): NEMA 4X (IP66) and rated for Class I, Div. 1
& 2, Groups C & D, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, & G.
Switch Type: SPDT or optional DPDT snap switch.
Electrical Rating: 15A @ 120/230 VAC, 5A @ 24 VDC.
Process Connection: 1-1/4 male NPT. Optional flange.
Weight: Control head only: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
Indication Light: Red LED that activates when switch is made or when switch is
not made with RL option (Not available on explosion-proof models).
Options: Time delay relay, high temperature construction, top mount, shaft
extensions, shaft shields, flexible couplings, other power voltages, reversed light.
Agency Approvals: cUL approved as an auxiliary device or as an auxiliary device
for hazardous locations.
Description
Carbon Steel with Half Coupling
Carbon Steel with Full Coupling
316 SS with Half Coupling
316 SS with Full Coupling
Level Switches,
Paddle
Paddles
PDL-1
PDL-2
PDL-3
PDL-4
PDL-3. Minimum bulk

kg/m3). Fits through a 11/4 coupling eliminating
the need for a mounting
flange.
LEVEL
PLS-W-S-1-3-0-0-0
PDL-2. Minimum bulk

kg/m3).
4-31/32
[126.19]
6-3/8
[162.05]
8-33/64
[216.26]
10-5/16
[261.92]
SideMount
Scan here
to watch
product video
Control
Assemblies
PLS-W-S-1-0-0-0-0
PDL-1. Minimum bulk

kg/m3).
315
316_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:05 PM Page 316
Explosion-Proof Ultra Mag Level Switches

For Powder & Bulk Solids
SUSPENSION HUB 1 NPT
SEALED
JUNCTION BOX
DRIVING
MAGNET
DRIVEN
MAGNET
EPOXY SEAL
SEALED
SWITCH CAVITY
DIAPHRAGM
DIAMETER 5-7/8
7-1/2
3-3/8
Suspension Mounting
Flange Adapter Ring
CONDUIT ENTRANCE 1/2 NPT

(6) 5/16
DIA. HOLES ON
8-3/8 B.C.
7-1/4
DIAPHRAGM
DIAMETER 5-7/8
9-1/8
Flange Mounting
3/8
3-1/8
Scan here
to watch
product video
A unique Magnetic Linkage isolates the electrical compartment from controlled product,
reducing maintenance and improving sensitivity. The sealed switch compartment and
sealed leads yield the utmost in reliable operation. A wide selection of diaphragms and
switches are available with choices of flange or suspension mounting to fit your specific
application. The dry level Ultra-Mag Level Switch is extremely sensitive and very economical.
The magnetic linkage makes this simple explosion-proof diaphragm switch the most rugged
and reliable level control for a variety of products (see cut-away above).
Mounting Selection: A choice of either suspension or flange mounting is available to
match your application. Flange mounting is the best choice for control of low or
intermediate level in vessels containing granular product that does not bridge, rathole,
or otherwise build up on vessel walls. Choose suspension mounting for high level in vessels
and for better operation with bridging product.
Diaphragm Selection: A wide variety of diaphragms are available to match product bulk
density, flowability, abrasiveness and temperature requirements while providing maximum
sensitivity. The best choice for vessels subject to pressure or vacuum is breathable fabric
(P Series), requiring no venting. Non-porous elastomer (G Series) type diaphragms are
the best choice for more abrasive product and broader temperature range applications.
Venting is always required with the G series and if used in pressurized vessels, venting to
the tank atmosphere is required to allow pressure equalization. A slide rule Diaphragm
Selector is available from the factory to help you choose the diaphragm best suited to your
application.
Level Switches,
Diaphragm
LEVEL
Note: The mounting configuration is represented by the letter S for suspension or

F for flange which is the second digit in the part number.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible powder or bulk solids.
Wetted Materials:
Mounting Flange: See model chart. Aluminum or 304 SS;
Diaphragm: See model chart. Urethane, Buna-N, PTFE, silicone rubber,
polyester, fluoroelastomers, white Buna-N (food grade), or EPDM.
Temperature Limits: Depends on diaphragm material, see model chart.
Standard switch: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
High temperature switch: -40 to 350F (-40 to 176C).
Enclosure Rating: General purpose or weatherproof and explosion-proof. See
model chart.
Electrical Connections: 18 gage solid core, 600 volt TEW 105C, style 1015.
Epoxy sealed at conduit entrance. 12 (304.8 mm) long.
Process Connection: For flanged models standard is 8-3/8 (212.725 mm)
diameter bolt hole circle.
Mounting Orientation: Flange mount or suspend depending on model.
Options: Suspension kits and flange adapter rings.
Agency Approvals: CSA and UL.
Suspension and Flange Mounting Kits: See page 317 (Ultra Mag)
Part Number: See page 317 (Ultra Mag)
316
317_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:52 PM Page 317
Proximity Ultra Mag Level Switch

Diaphragm Selection Guide
Complete Model Chart
Suggested
Suggested
Product
Diaphragm* Product
Diaphragm*
Abrasive
3D Polypropylene Powder
7A
Aggregate
3D Polypropylene Resin
17
Alumina
3D Polystyrene Beads
3D
Ash, Dry
3D Pot Ash
3D
Baking Powder
7B Powdered Metal
3D
Baking Soda
7B Powdered Ore
3D
Barite
3D PVC Powder
7A
Bark, Ground
6G PVC Resin
17
Barley, Ground or Meal 17 Rice
17
Barley, Whole
4B Rye
3D
Beans, Edible
4B Salt
3D
Bentonite
3D Sand, Dry
3D
Bond, Foundry
17 Sand, Dry Silica
3D
Carbon Black
7A Sand, Foundry Prepared
5A
Cement, Klinker
8A Sand, Shake Out
3D
Cement, Portland
4B Sawdust, Dry
6G
Chips, Hogged Fuel
6G Sea Coal
3D
Coal
3D Sesame Seed
3D
Compost
5A Shale, Crushed
3D
Core Sand, Foundry
3D Silica, Flour
3D
Corn, Shelled
8A Sludge, Sewage Dried
1A
Diatomaceous Earth
7A Sludge, Sewage, Ground
1A
Drill Mud
3D Soda Ash
3D
Flour
7B Soybeans, Cracked
3D
Fly Ash
3D Soybean, Flake
7A
Glass Batch
3D Soybean, Flour
7A
Gravel
3D Soybean Meal
3D
Iron Ore, Crushed
3D Soybean, Whole
3D
Kaolin Clay
3D Sugar Beets, Whole
6H
Lime, Hydrated
5A Sugar Refined
7B
Lime, Stone
3D Sunflower Seed
7A
Oats
4B Taconite Pellets
3D
Peanuts in Shell
7A Talcum Powder
3D
Peanuts, Shelled
3D Walnut Shells, Crushed
3D
Perlite
7A Wheat
8A
Phosphate, Rock
3D Wheat, Wet
5A
Polyethylene Powder
7A Wood, Chips
6G
Polyethylene Resin
17 Wood, Dust
6G
Polypropylene Fluff
7A
*Diaphragm codes become 4th and 5th characters in model
number.
PREFIX - Certification
E X = Explosion-proof (UL & CSA) Class I, Div I & II, Groups C & D; Class II, Div I & II, Groups E, F, & G.
X = Explosion-proof (CSA) Class II, Div I & II, Groups F & G.
= General Purpose (No Code)
* GS - G series suspended controls require suspension vent fittings. (**) Non-UL/CSA listed
Note: The EX prefix must he added to the 6-digit model number for explosion-proof standard.
General purpose units do not require the EX or other prefix.
Model
Tank OD Model
126-016
126-009 15
126-017
126-010 30
126-018
126-011 36
126-019
126-012 42
126-020
126-013 48
126-021
126-014 60
126-015 72
Note: OD = Outside Diameter
Tank OD
84
96
10
12
14
24
P and GSeries Suspension Assembly Kits

Model
901-409
901-412
Description
P Series Suspension Assembly includes 1/2 pipe (56 Std length), 1 pipe (48
Std length), 1 pipe coupling, 1-1/2 NPT strain relief on 1 pipe. Galvanized mild
steel pipe, explosion proof, standard.
G Series Suspension Assembly includes 1/2 pipe (56 Std length), watertight
strain relief and 1 coupling, upper 1 pipe (28 Std length), lower 1 pipe (20
Std length), strain relief with 1-1/2 NPT, 1x1x1 Tee, 1 Street Ell and 1 pipe4 long Stilling Pot. Galvanized steel pipe, explosion proof, standard.
Specials include aluminum or stainless steel assemblies. Flange port and cover assemblies are sold
separately. CONSULTFACTORY for details.
317
Level Switches,
Diaphragm
Suspension Assembly Kits: Pre-assembled kits are available

from the factory, or you can build your own kits using standard pipe
fittings shown in our Proximity Bill of Materials (Form No. 101).
Pipes and fittings are normally galvanized steel, but aluminum and
SS pipes and fittings are available. Units are secured to a steel cover
plate that rests on a rectangular steel flange welded into the top of
the vessel. Aluminum and stainless coverplates and flanges are also
available. Standard 48 L x 1 pipe provides working depth (WD) up
to 48. Longer pipe (to provide greater WD) is available. GS Series
switches have upper (L1 = 28 standard) and lower (L2 = 20
standard) 1 pipes, with a tee (for stilling pot) in between. A stilling
pot is required to equalize pressure and keep dirt from building up
behind the diaphragm. PS series require a 1/2 conduit in 1
suspension pipe for explosion-proof applications. The 1/2 conduit
(56 standard length) is a standard part of the GS series assembly.
6TH DIGIT - Switch Type

A = Standard, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
T = High temp, SPDT, 5A @ 125, 250 VAC; 24 VDC(**)
V = High vibration, SPDT, 15A @ 125, 250 VAC
G = Gold contacts, SPDT, 1A @ 125 VAC, 1/2 A @ 24 VDC
SUFFIX-SPECIAL CONTROLS
-A2 = Wood Chip Control (with 6G diaphragm only)
-A3 = High sensitivity actuator (for very light product)
E X G S D 3 D A = EXAMPLE MODEL NUMBER*A
LEVEL
Suspension Mounting is normally

used for high level monitoring in vessels.
For product over 20 lb/ft3, the level switch
(diaphragm face) should be located about
1/3 of the distance from the vessel wall to
1/3
the point of entry of the product. For
1/2
3
product less than 20 lb/ft , the unit should
be located closer to the point of entry of
the product, about 1/2 the distance from
the vessel wall to the point of entry.
Pressure required to depress the diaphragm and trip the switch is
in the range of 5 to 15 oz in the horizontal direction (perpendicular
to the diaphragm). Suspension mounting provides the easiest
vertical adjustment capability, greatest sensitivity and best
maintenance conditions.
1ST DIGIT - Basic Magnetic Pressure Sensing Series

G = Elastomeric Diaphragm-Venting required*. (Diaphragms 1A - 8A)
P = Breathable Fabric Diaphragm-No venting required. (Diaphragms 16 & 17 only)
2ND DIGIT - Mounting (Top = Suspension/Side = Flanged)
S = Suspended (G series require suspension vent fittings)*
Subtract 10 lbs./cu. ft.-greater sensitivity.
F = Flanged, Aluminum standard
T = Flanged, 304 SS
3RD DIGIT - Housing Material
D = Aluminum
A = Aluminum, Anodized
E = Aluminum, Epoxy Coated
4TH & 5TH DIGITS - Diaphragm Material (Temperature) (Bulk Density)
3 D = Urethane, .031 thick, (10 to 150F), (> 30 lb/ft3)
G
3 E = Urethane, orange, .062 thick, (10 to 150F), (> 90 lb/ft3)
G
4 B = Buna-N, black, .020 thick, (-20 to 212F), (20 to 90 lb/ft3)
G
5 A = PTFE/Glass on Sil Rubber, .024 thick, (-40 to 350F), (> 35 lb/ft3)
G
6 D = Silicone Rubber, gray, .062 thick, (-40 to 350F), (15 to 30 lb/ft3)
G
6 E = Silicone Rubber on Glass, red, .032 thick, (-40 to 350F), (> 90 lb/ft3)
G
6 G = 6C w/Urethane overlay, (-40 to 350F), (wood chips diaphragm with A2)
G
7 A = Silicone Rubber on Glass (White), .015 thick, (-40 to 350F), (5 to 40 lb/ft3)
G
7 B = Buna-N (Food Applications-white), .060 thick, (-20 to 212F), (30 to 90 lb/ft3)
G
8 A = EPDM, black, .036 thick, (-40 to 275F), (40 to 90 lb/ft3)
G
1 6 = Polyester Filter Fabric, white, 150 micron permeability, (-30 to 275F),
P
(30 to 90 lb/ft3)
1 7 = Polyester Nitex, white, 15 micron permeability (-30 to 275F), (30 to 90 lb/ft3)
P
318_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:47 AM Page 318
Series
SBLT2
&
SBLTX
Submersible Level Transmitters

Perfect for Ground Water and Wells, Lightning Protected
6-45/64
[170.26]
1/2 NPT
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
SBLT2
1
[25.40]
BREATHER
TUBE
6-15/16
[176.21]
1/2 NPT
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
SBLTX
1
[25.40]
Scan here
to watch
product video
BREATHER TUBE
SBLT2 and SBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured for years of
trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the height of liquid above
the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The transmitters consist of
a piezoresistive sensing element, encased in a 316 SS housing. Bullet nose design protects
the diaphragm from damage.
The SBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology,
grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and lightning ground strike
transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is not covered by warranty). The SBLTX
is UL approved intrinsically safe for use in hazardous locations when used with proper
barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented cable.
Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospheric
pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance free filter eliminating
particulate or water droplets from entering the transducers.
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
LEVEL
FEATURES
Excellent chemical compatibility
Lightning and surge protection on SBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on SBLTX models
Slim design for tight applications
APPLICATIONS
Well monitoring; Ground water monitoring; Environmental remediation; Surface
water monitoring; Down hole; Water tanks.
Model
SBLT2-5-40-ETFE
SBLT2-10-40-ETFE
SBLT2-15-60-ETFE
SBLT2-20-60-ETFE
SBLT2-5-40
SBLT2-10-40
SBLT2-15-60
SBLT2-20-60
SBLT2-3.5M-5M
SBLT2-5M-10M
SBLT2-10M-18M
Range psi
(ft w.c.) [m w.c.]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
4.97 (11.48) [3.5]
14.21 (32.81) [10]
25.58 (59.06) [18]
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
16.40 (5)
32.81 (10)
59.06 (18)
Cable Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval - Change model number from SBLT2 to SBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths- Contact the factory
318
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS,
epoxy; Cable: Polyurethane or ETFE;
Bullet nose: PVC.
Accuracy: 0.25% of full-scale.
Temperature Limit: SBLT2: 0 to 150F
(-18 to 66C); SBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18
to 80C).
SBLT2: 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C);
SBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18 to 80C).
Thermal Effect: 0.02% full-scale/F.
Pressure Limit: 2X full-scale.
Power Requirement: SBLT2: 13 to 30
VDC; SBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire.

Max. Loop Resistance: 900 at 30
VDC.
Electrical Connections: Wire pigtail.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in
tank below level being measured.
Electrical Protection: SBLT2:
Lightning and surge protection; SBLTX:
None.
Agency Approvals: SBLT2: None;
SBLTX: CE, cUL intrinsically safe for
ClassI, Div. 1, GroupsA, B, C, D;
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class
III Div. 1. (According to control drawing
01-700797-00).
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, intrinsically safe zener barrier
A-297, Dessicant Filter for vent tube. Removes humidity for protection
of the sensor. Changes color to show saturation
A-625, 316 SS Cable Hanger use with NPT option for attaching chain
for easy pulling out of application
319_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:55 PM Page 319
Series
MBLT
Miniature Submersible Level Transmitter

Only 0.63 in Diameter, Perfect for Wells and Boreholes, Up to 0.10% Accuracy
6-1/4
[158.30]
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
5/8
[15.87]
BREATHER
TUBE
Scan here
to watch
product video
The MBLT Miniature Submersible Level Transmitter is only 0.63 in diameter
making it ideal for level monitoring in well and borehole applications. Constructed for
years of trouble free service, the MBLT has a welded 316 SS body and 316 SS nose cap.
Body top is also 316 SS and tapered to prevent damage or snares when pulling the unit out
of the installation. Featured in the MBLT is a precision 0.10% or 0.25% of full scale
accuracy output, better than BFSL or BSL rated outputs used by most competitors.
Lightning and surge protection (not guaranteed or covered by standard warranty) is
included standard to stand up in harsh applications. MBLT comes with a choice of polyether
polyurethane or ETFE cable materials and all are vented for barometric pressure
compensation. Vent is covered with a maintenance-free filter preventing particulate or
water droplets from entering the transmitter.
APPLICATIONS
Ballast tanks, ground water monitoring, surface water monitoring, dewatering, down
hole, remediation and other environmental monitoring applications.
Model 0.25%*
MBLT-2SC-IVPP-5-40
MBLT-2SC-IVPF-15-40
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-5-12.2
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-60-66
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-100-106
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-10-30*
MBLT-2SC-IVPF-20-40
MBLT-2SC-IVPF-30-50
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-10-15.2
MBLT-2SC-IVPF-50-70
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-20-26
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-30-36
MBLT-2SC-IVPF-100-120
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-40-46
MBLT-2SC-IVPM-60-66
*4.3 to 4.9 psi (10 to 11.54 in w.c.) configured ranges 0.30% FS accuracy
Cable Length
40 ft
40 ft
12.2 m
66 m
106 m
206 m
9.14 m
40 ft
50 ft
15.2 m
70 ft
26 m
36 m
120 ft
46 m
170 ft
66 m
220 ft
370 ft
106 m
206 m
710 ft
Cable Type
Polyether polyurethane
ACCESSORY
A-297, Dessicant Filter for vent tube. Removes humidity for

protection of the sensor. Changes color to show saturation
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
OPTIONS
Example:MBLT-2SB-IVPF-20-40-FC
Range psi
( w.c.) [m w.c.]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
2.82 (15) [4.57]
7.10 (16.40) [5]
14.21 (196.85) [60]
25.58 (328.08) [100]
25.58 (656.17) [200]
4.33 (10) [3.05]
8.66 (20) [6.10]
12.99 (30) [9.14]
14.21 (32.81) [10]
21.65 (50) [15.24]
28.42 (65.62) [20]
42.63 (98.43) [30]
43.31 (100) [30.48]
56.83 (131.23) [40]
64.96 (150) [45.72]
85.25 (196.85) [60]
86.62 (200) [60.96]
151.58 (350) [3.52]
142.09 (328.08) [100]
284.18 (656.17) [200]
298.83 (690) [210.31]
Pressure Limit: 2 x FS.

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC 2-wire.
Max Loop Resistance: 1000 @ 30
VDC.
Mounting Connection: Suspended
below point being monitored.
Electrical Protection: Surge/lightning
protected per EN61000-4-5, Class 5.
Weight:
Body: 0.235 lb (0.107 kg);
Cable: 0.037 lb (0.009 kg) per foot.
LEVEL
Model 0.10%
MBLT-2SB-IVPF-20-40
MBLT-2SB-IVPF-30-50
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-10-15.2
MBLT-2SB-IVPF-50-70
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-20-26
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-30-36
MBLT-2SB-IVPF-100-120
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-40-46
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-60-66
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-100-106
MBLT-2SB-IVPM-200-206
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body and nose: 316 SS;
Cable: Polyether polyurethane or
ETFE;
Seals: Fluoroelastomer;
Label: Polyethylene polyamid.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (10 w.c. range
is 0.30%FS) or 0.10% FS.
to 80C).
0.25%: (0 to 70C); 0.10% (0 to 60C).
Thermal Effect: 0.25%: 0.45% FS
TEB; 0.10%: 0.30% FSTEB.
319
320_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:46 AM Page 320
Series
PBLT2
&
PBLTX
Submersible Level Transmitters

Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected
8-3/32
[205.58]
1/2 NPT
1 [25.40]
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLTX
3-7/16
[87.31]
1/4 [6.35] x THRU

ON A 1-39/64 [40.88] B.C.
2-3/16
[55.56]
BREATHER TUBE
1/4 x THRU
[6.35 x THRU]
7-63/64
[202.80]
1-1/2 1/2 NPT
[38.10]
60
TYP
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
PBLT2
2-3/16
[55.56]
Scan here
to watch
product video
BREATHER TUBE
PBLT2 and PBLTX Submersible Level Transmitters are manufactured for years of
trouble free service in the harshest applications. Both measure the height of liquid above
the position in the tank referenced to atmospheric pressure. The transmitters consist of a
piezoresistive sensing element, encased in a 316 SS housing. Perfect for wastewater and
slurry applications with features to protect the unit from these demanding applications.
Large diameter 316 SS diaphragm seal is non-clogging and damage resistant to floating
solids.
The PBLT2 incorporates lightning and surge protection utilizing dual arrestor technology,
grounded to case, eliminating both power supply surges and lightning ground strike
transients (surge protection is not guaranteed and is not covered by warranty). The PBLTX
is UL approved intrinsically safe for use in hazardous locations when used with proper
barrier.
Units come equipped with a 270-pound tensile strength shielded and vented cable.
Ventilation tube in the cable automatically compensates for changes in atmospheric
pressure above the tank. The vent is protected with a maintenance free filter eliminating
particulate or water droplets from entering the transducers.
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
LEVEL
FEATURES
Excellent chemical compatibility with 316 construction and ETFE cable
Lightning and surge protection on PBLT2 models
Maintenance free vent filter
UL approved intrinsically safe on PBLTX models
Large diameter, non-clogging, damage resistant, 316 SS diaphragm seal
APPLICATIONS
Wastewater: Sludge pits, clarifiers, digesters; Alum tanks; Chemical storage tanks;
Oil tanks; Lime slurry; Sumps; Reservoirs.
Model
PBLT2-5-40
PBLT2-10-40
PBLT2-15-60
PBLT2-20-60
PBLT2-5-40-PU
PBLT2-10-40-PU
PBLT2-15-60-PU
PBLT2-20-60-PU
PBLT2-3.5M-5M-PU
PBLT2-5M-10M-PU
PBLT2-10M-18M-PU
320
Range psi
(ft w.c.) [m w.c.]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
10 (23.09) [7.04]
15 ( 34.63) [10.56]
20 (46.18) [14.08]
4.97 (11.48) [3.5]
14.21 (32.81) [10]
25.58 (59.06) [18]
Cable Length
ft (m)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
40 (12.2)
40 (12.2)
60 (18.3)
60 (18.3)
16.40 (5)
32.81 (10)
59.06 (18)
Cable Type
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: 316 SS, 316L SS,
epoxy, cable: ETFE or polyurethane.
Accuracy: 0.25% full-scale (includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).
Temperature Limit: PBLT2: 0 to 200F
(-18 to 93C); PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18
to 80C).
PBLT2: 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C);
PBLTX: 0 to 176F (-18 to 80C).
Pressure Limit: 2X full-scale.
Power Requirement: PBLT2: 13 to 30
VDC, PBLTX: 10 to 28 VDC.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, two

wire.
Electrical Connection: Wire pigtail.
Mounting Orientation: Suspended in
tank below level being measured.
Electrical Protection: PBLT2:
Lightning and surge protection, PBLTX:
none.
Agency Approvals: PBLT2: None,
PBLTX: CE,cUL intrinsically safe for
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class
III,Div. 1. (According to control drawing
01-700797-00).
OPTIONS
Intrinsically Safe Approval - Change model number from PBLT2 to PBLTX
Custom ranges or Cable Lengths - Contact the factory
ACCESSORIES
MTL5041, intrinsically safe galvanic isolator
MTL7706, intrinsically safe zener barrier

A-625, 316 SS Cable Hanger use with NPT option for attaching
chain for easy pulling out of application
321_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:27 AM Page 321
Series
FBLT
Flush Tip Submersible Level Transmitter

Perfect for Sludge and Slurries, Lightning Protected, 0.25% Accuracy
5-15/16
[150.83]
SUBMERSIBLE CABLE
5/8
[15.87]
1-3/16
[30.16]
5-15/16
[150.83]
BREATHER TUBE
1-7/8
[47.63]
1/2
[12.69]
15/16 HEX
1/2 NPT
1-3/16
[30.16]
SUBMERSIBLE
CABLE
5/8
[15.87]
FBLT
1-1/8
[29.33]
BREATHER TUBE
FBLT with NPT Option
NPT Option
The Series FBLT Submersible Level Transmitter is designed with a flush
diaphragm tip that will not clog in harsh applications such as sewage lift stations.
Narrow body design allows the FBLT to fit into stilling wells and narrow installations.
The FBLT features a robust FKM fluoroelastomer diaphragm that is PTFE coated
for a stick resistant surface that will hold up in aggressive fluids. The diaphragm
cavity is filled with a gel that will not leak out versus oil or grease that our competitors
use. Body is constructed of 316 SS and the cable is either polyurethane or ETFE
for more corrosive applications.
The unit measures the height of liquid above the position that it is mounted in a tank
or pit in reference to atmospheric pressure. Ventilation tube in the cable automatically
compensates for changes in atmospheric pressure above the fluid. The vent is
protected with a maintenance free filter, eliminating particulate or water droplets from
entering the transmitter. For extra protection against humidity, we offer the A-297
desiccant filter that can be attached to the vent tube.
The FBLT incorporates lighting and surge protection (not guaranteed or covered by
warrantee) to stand up in harsh applications. Optional NPT connection allows the
unit to be rigidly installed in a pipe/conduit, or to attach our A-625 hanging loop for
attaching a chain for pulling out of the installation.
APPLICATIONS
Sewage lift stations, industrial slurries, industrial sumps, landfill leachate, reservoirs,
sludge pits, oil tanks, etc.
Range psi
( w.c.) [m w.c.]
4.33 (10) [3.05]
4.33 (10) [3.05]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
4.33 (10) [3.05]
6.50 (15) [4.57]
8.66 (20) [6.10]
12.99 (30) [9.14]
5 (11.54) [3.52]
2.82 (15) [4.57]
8.66 (20) [6.10]
12.99 (30) [9.14]
10 (32.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
10 (32.09) [7.04]
10 (32.09) [7.04]
15 (34.63) [10.56]
15.16 (35) [10.67]
20 (196.85) [60]
Cable
Length
20
30
40
40
40
40
50
40
40
40
50
40
60
40
60
60
60
60
Cable
Type
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
ETFE
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
ACCESSORIES

LEVEL
Model
FBLT-2SC-IVPF-10-20*
FBLT-2SC-IVPP-5-40
FBLT-2SC-IVPF-15-40
FBLT-2SC-IVPF-20-40
FBLT-2SC-IVPF-30-50
FBLT-2SC-IVEP-5-40
FBLT-2SC-IVEF-15-40
FBLT-2SC-IVEF-20-40
FBLT-2SC-IVEF-30-50
FBLT-2SC-IVEP-10-40
FBLT-2SC-IVEP-15-60
FBLT-2SC-IVPP-10-40
FBLT-2SC-IVPP-10-60
FBLT-2SC-IVPP-15-60
FBLT-2SC-IVPF-35-60
FBLT-2SC-IVPP-20-60
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: 316 SS;
Cable: Polyether polyurethane or ETFE;
Diaphragm: PTFE coated FKM fluoroelastomer;
Label: Polyethylene polyamid.
Accuracy: 0.25% FS (10 w.c. range is 0.30% FS).
Thermal Effect: 0.0075%/F (0.0135%/C).
Pressure Limit: 2x range.
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC 2-wire.
Max Loop Resistance: 1000 @ 30 VDC.
Mounting Connection: Suspended below point being monitored.
Electrical Protection: Surge/lightning protected per EN61000-4-5, Class 5.
Weight:
Body: 0.3 lb (0.136 kg);
Cable: 0.037 lb (0.009 kg) per foot.
A-625, 316 SS Cable Hanger use with NPT option for attaching chain
for easy pulling out of application
*4.3 to 4.9 psi (10 to 11.54 in w.c.) configured ranges 0.30% FS accuracy
Level Transmitters,
Submersible
OPTIONS
Cables can be ordered shorter or longer in polyurethane or ETFE.
Other ranges are available and can be ordered in psi, ft w.c., or m w.c.
NPT connection. Add suffix -NPT, for a 1/2 NPT connection to connect conduit,
piping, or cable hanger. All 316 SS
Example:FBLT-2SC-IVPF-20-40-FC
321
322_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:45 AM Page 322
Series
CRF2
Capacitive Level Transmitter

Powder, Bulk or Liquids
2X 1/2 FEMALE
NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
3-19/32
[91.28]
9/16
[14.29]
2X 1/2 FEMALE NPT

CONDUIT CONNECTION
6
[152.4]
3-5/32
[80.2]
CONTINUOUS LEVEL TRANSMITTER
4-7/16
[112.7]
4-1/2
[114.30]
MOD CRF2
SERIAL:
A DIVISION OF
MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360, U.S.A.
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
MOUNTING
BRACKET
2-3/8
[60.3]
3/4 MALE
NPT PROCESS
CONNECTION
4-3/16
[106.36]
1-3/8
[34.9]
3/4 MALE NPT

PROCESS CONNECTION
2-3/4
[70.0]
3-1/4
[82.6]
2X 3/4 [19.05]
CLEARANCE FOR
COVER REMOVAL
Remote Mount Housing
The Series CRF2 is a level transmitter providing a two-wire 4 to 20 mA output to indicate
level of liquids, powders and bulk materials. State of the art sensing technology in the
CRF2, using impulse RF admittance measurement provides excellent accuracy and
stability. The CRF2 senses capacitance changes resulting from the height of the material
in the tank between the probe and the tank wall. In non-metallic tanks or tanks that do not
have the wall parallel to the probe a ground reference must be used.
The CRF2 comes with either a rigid or flexible probe depending on application installation
need and probe length required. Featured in the CRF2 is easy push button calibration of
zero and span. Custom order the CRF2 to any length probe that you need for your
application. FEP covered probe is ideal for use with corrosive media. This technology also
provides immunity to external RF sources like walkie-talkies and cell phones as well as
minimal interference with radio communication or other electronic systems.
The CRF2 is perfect for level indication in bins, hoppers, or small silos of powder and bulk
materials.
Example Models:
CRF2-WR01T-072
CRF2-WR01T-096
CRF2 W R 0 1T 048 M20 CRF2-WR01T-048-M20

CRF2
Capacitive Level Transmitter
W
Weatherproof
R
Remote Mount Weatherproof Housing
Probe Type
R
Rod
C
Cable
Ground
0
None Included
A
Attached ground rod (3 or 4 flange process connection types only)
U
Unattached ground rod
Process
1T
3/4 NPTmale
Connection
2T
1 NPT male
3T
1-1/2 NPT male
1B
3/4 BSPT
2B
1 BSPT
3B
1-1/2 BSPT
1S
1 sanitary clamp
2S
1-1/2 sanitary clamp
3S
2 sanitary clamp
1F
2 150# flange, 316 SS
2F
2 150# flange, PVC
3F
3 150# flange, 316 SS
4F
3 150# flange, PVC
5F
4 150# flange, 316 SS
6F
4 150# flange, PVC
Probe Length
XXX
Insertion length in inches. Example 048 is 48 L.
Rod Type:min:24, max:144
Cable Type: min: 24, max: 360
M20 M20 conduit connection with cable gland
Options
LEVEL
Example
Series
Enclosure
Level Transmitters,
Capacitive
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids, powders, and bulk
materials compatible with wetted
materials.
Wetted Materials: Standard:
Rod/cable: FEP, Connection: 316 SS;
Ground option: Rod/cable and
connection: 316 SS; Cable spacers:
PVC; Flange option: Material of flange.
Capacitance Range: 0 to 2000 pF.
Sensitivity: 0.15 pF.
Minimum Span: 8 pF.
Accuracy: 0.5 pF or 0.25% of span,
whichever is greater.
Repeatability: 0.25 pF or 0.1% of
span, whichever is greater.
185F (-40 to 85C); Process: -40 to
250F (-40 to 121C).
322

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or 20 to 4
mA, 2 wire.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT
female.
Process Connection: Standard: 3/4
NPT male; Optional: See model chart.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66)
weather-tight/corrosion resistant.
Spark/Static Protection: 106
dissipation resistance with spark gap.
Surge current to 100A max.
Calibration: Zero, span, 4 mA, 20 mA.
Weight: 6 ft rod type: 3.6 lb(1.63 kg).
323_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:45 AM Page 323
Model
LDL2-030
Vented Water Level Data Logger

SS, Automatically Compensates for Atmospheric Pressure
1-1/4
[31.75]
7-1/32
[178.44]
8-53/61
[224.41]
1 [25.40]
Sensor End
6-53/64
[173.33]
CONNECTED TO
SENSOR END BY
30 FOOT CABLE
The Model LDL2-030 Vented Water Level Data Logger has a vented cable and end
cap to allow it to automatically compensate for atmospheric pressure fluctuations. The data
logger measures water level up to 30 ft (9.14 m) and has an internal temperature sensor
that accurately records temperatures between -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). The innovative
design makes it ideal for use in wastewater treatment facilities as well as monitoring well
and ground water levels. The battery-powered data logger can store over 16,000
measurements per channel, and the software allows for user selectable sampling rates. The
easy to use DL700 software allows the LDL2-030 to be easily started and stopped from a
PC or delayed to start up to six months in advance.
Model LDL2-030, Vented Water Level Data Logger

ACCESSORIES
TL-2150, Replacement battery for Series LDL2-030
CONNECTED TO
RECEIVER END BY
30 FOOT CABLE
4-19/32
[116.84]
Receiver End
95, Windows 98, Windows 2000,
Windows ME, Windows NT, and
Windows XP operating systems, one
free USB port.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V TL2150
Interface: USB port (interface cable
required).
Wetted Materials: 303 SS; Cable:
Polyurethane.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: Temperature: -40 to 176F (-40
to 80C); Water level: 0 to 30 (0 to
9.14 m).
Memory Size: 16,383 readings per
channel.
Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C), 0.3%
FSR @ 77F (25C).
Resolution: Temperature: 0.2F
(0.1C); Water level: 0.02 (0.051 cm).
full.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 2 s to
12 hrs.
Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Series
ULB
&
ULL
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter

Integrated LCD Display, Automatic Temperature Compensation, Non-Contact Level Sensing
4-7/32
[107.0]
1-15/32
[37.0]
1-3/16
[30.0]
7-5/8 35
[194.0]
1/2 NPT
13/32
[10.0]
2 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
FEATURES
Direct installation
Integral LCD display
High accuracy (0.25% of max. range)
Automatic ambient temperature compensation
Description
Bulk Solids
Bulk Solids
Liquids
Liquids
Max. Range
11.5 ft (3.5 m)
28 ft (8.5 m)
16.4 ft (5 m)
49.2 ft (15 m)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: ULB: Bulk solids; ULL:
Compatible liquids.
Wetted Materials: Sensor:
Polypropylene; Acoustic window:
ECTFE.
Ranges: ULB-11: .82 to 11.5 ft (0.25 to
3.5 m); ULB-12: 1.96 to 28 ft (0.6 to 8.5
m); ULL-1XXX: 0.82 to 16.4 ft (0.25 to
5 m); ULL-2XXX: 1.96 to 49.2 ft (0.6 to
15 m).
Accuracy: 0.25% of max. range (at
20C).
Blind Zone: ULB-11: 0.8 (.25 m);
ULB-12: 1.96 (0.6 m); ULL-1XXX: 0.8
(0.25 m).
to 70C); ULL-2XXX: 1.96 (0.6 m).
Automatic.
Pressure Limits: 13.5 to 30 psi (0.9 to

2 bar).
Loop Resistance: Max. 727 @ 28
VDC.
terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT, cable
gland (optional).
Process Connection: 2 NPT, 2 BSP
(optional).
Enclosure: Plastic enclosure: ABS &
UV resistant body.
Failsafe: 3 min delay before
transmission of an error signal.
Units: ft, m (optional).
323
Level Data Loggers
Model
ULB-11
ULB-12
ULL-1KFN
ULL-2KFN
2-5/32
[55.0]
LEVEL
The Series ULB is a direct-install level transmitter designed for non-contact measurement
of solid levels. The ULB utilizes ultrasonic technology paired with automatic temperature
compensation to provide reliable and accurate measurements in virtually all conditions.
Sophisticated algorithms are used to overcome acoustic interferences and false echoes. An
integrated LCD screen and four push buttons allow for quick and easy programming on a
simple menu structure. Diagnostic capabilities and a failsafe output signal make the ULB
an essential choice in critical applications.
3-3/4
[95.0]
2-9/16 1 [25.1]
[65.0]
324_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:44 AM Page 324
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
Series
ULT
Explosion-proof, Mapping Software

3 29/32
[99.21]
4 9/32
[108.74]
2X 1/2 NPT
3 21/64
[84.53]
8 1/16
[204.79]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Series ULT Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides reliable, accurate, noncontact
measurement of liquid levels. Ultrasonic non-contact technology offers no moving parts to
wear, jam, corrode, or get coated like contact technologies. Mapping software makes
effective measuring surface only a 3 diameter column. No concerns with ladders, pipes,
or other tank intrusions in the remaining sound cone. Unit is FM approved explosion-proof
making it ideal for use in hazardous locations. The ULT features easy programming with
6 digit LCD display and simple menu structure. Output range is adjustable with choices of
inputting tank dimensions or just fill and empty the tank while calibrating and it
automatically scales to levels it senses. Window cover allows early viewing of display.
Failsafe output options and diagnostic capabilities makes the ULT a good choice for critical
applications.
Model
ULT-11
ULT-21
Range
24.6 (7.5 m)
32.8 (10 m)
TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE DERATING
LEVEL
OPERATING PRESSURE PSI
40
UNACCEPTABLE
RANGE
30
20
ACCEPTABLE
RANGE
10
0
-40
-20
20
40
60
80
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
TEMPERATURE C
324
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible fluids. Not for use with powder and bulk solids.
Wetted Materials:
Sensor: PVDF;
Process connection: 303 SS;
O-ring: fluoroelastomer.
Ranges: 24.6 (7.5 m), 32.8 (10 m).
Accuracy: 0.2% of max range.
Blind Zone: Under 8 (20 cm).
Beam Width: 3 (7.6 cm) diameter.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C);
Process: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Temperature Compensation: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C).
Pressure Limits: 30 psi (2 bar) up to 25C (77C). Above 25C (77F), rating
decreases 1.667 psi per 1C increase. See chart.
Power Requirement: 18 to 28 VDC (Two-wire).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA or 20 to 4 mA (Two-wire).
Max. Loop Resistance: 250 at 24 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT female (two) or optional M20.
Process Connection: 2 NPT male or optional BSPT.
Enclosure Rating: Weather-proof meets NEMA 4X (IP66), explosion-proof rated
Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Failsafe: On lost echo after 30 seconds, user selectable to 4, 20, 21, 22 mA or last
signal.
Display: 6 character LCD.
Units: In, cm, ft, m, percent.
325_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:58 PM Page 325
Series
UTC
Ultrasonic Liquid Transmitter & Controller

No Moving Parts, 5 Independent SPDT Relays, Liquid Level & Flow In One
3-9/32
[83.34]
6-5/32
[156.37]
3-5/16
[84.14]
3-11/64
[80.57]
2-7/8
[73.03]
7-17/32
[191.29]
6-7/64
[155.18]
9-11/16
[246.06]
2-1/64
[51.20]
7-51/64
[198.04]
Series UTC Ultrasonic Liquid Transmitter Controller provides reliable, accurate,

non-contact measurement of liquid level and open channel flow even under extremely harsh
conditions. Overcoming vapors, agitators or light foam, with no moving parts to wear or
jam. It supports a full range of process monitoring and storage level measurement
applications, such as high process tanks and large storage vessels. The UTC has a 6-digit
LCD display and a simple menu structure with multiple indications, making programming
simple. Its dual part system allows for the control unit to be located up to 656 ft (200 m)
away from sensor (model UTS purchased separately), and installation is simple with
included mounting bracket. In addition, this series also supports the Modbus RTU*
communication protocol, and offers RS-232 and 4 to 20 mA communications. Featuring
five independent SPDT relays and embedded firmware for volume and flow totalization,
this series is perfect for liquid level and open channel flow applications.
*Controller only, Series UTSsensor must be purchased in conjuction.
Controller UTC-1XX-XXXX-X compatible with sensor UTS-1XX-XXXX-X only;
Controller UTC-2XX-XXXX-X compatible with sensor UTS-2XX-XXXX-X only.
*UTC-1XX-XXX-X modbus read only
Model
UTC-111-111-1
UTC-111-211-1
Description
18 to 30 VDC Power Requirement, RS-232
100 to 240 VAC Power Requirement, RS-232
Model
UTS
3-5/32
[80.17]
2-19/64
[58.34]
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: (Series UTS Sensor Dependent) 2 to 82 ft (0.6 to 25 m).
Accuracy: 0.25% of max. range.
Temperature Limits: UTC-XXX-1XX-X: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C); UTC-XXX2XX-X: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Temperature Compensation: Automatic.
Power Requirement: UTC-XXX-1XX-X: 18 to 30 VDC 6 W; UTC-XXX-2XX-X: 100
to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz.
Max. Loop Resistance: 750 @ 24 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 female NPT, M20 x 2.5 (optional).
Enclosure Material: ECTFE.
Display: LCD (6 digit).
Units: m, in, ft, m3/hr, GPM interchangeable.
Weight: (3.5 lb) 1.6 kg.
Ultrasonic Liquid Transmitter Sensor

Compatible with Series UTC, 25 kHz Sensor
2 NPT OR BSP
1 NPT OR BSP
LEVEL
2-3/16
[55.56]
4-21/64
[109.93]
Model UTS Ultrasonic Level Transmitter Sensor is a series of sensors made to

accompany Dwyer Instrument, Inc.s Series UTC Ultrasonic Level Controllers. This series
has two different transducer frequencies, and a variety of measuring lengths and materials.
Description
25 kHz Sensor, Polypropylene, Standard Range,
2 NPT Connection, 50 ft (15 m) Cable
Automatic.
Pressure Limits: Atmospheric.
Transducer Frequency: 25 kHz.
Process Connection: 2 male NPT, 2
male BSP (optional).
Electrical Connection: 16.4 (5 m) 5
conductor 0.75 mm2 cable.
Weight: (3.5 lb) 1.6 kg.
325
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
Model
UTS-121-1102-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polypropylene.
Range: 2 to 82 ft (0.6 to 25 m).
Blind Zone: 2 ft (0.6 m).
Beam Width: 3 (7.6 cm) diameter.
to 80C).
326_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:43 AM Page 326
Model
ULTM
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter - Mobile

SMS Capability, Can Be Externally Battery Powered
2 X 1/2 NPT
CABLE GLANDS
4-1/8
[104.75]
Series ULTM
Ultrasonic Level Transmitter Mobile
Model: ULTM-H
Temperature rating: -2 to 70C (-4 to 158F)
Power Supply: 8-33 VDC
Serial No: X XX XX X
Made in: ISRAEL
DC: WW/YYYY
10-61/64
[278.27]
Enclosure Rating: IP68
5-13/32
[137.45]
1-1/2 NPT
2-59/64
[74.04]
Model ULTM is a level transmitter with embedded cellular communications. This product
is fit for any site where SMS is available and features flexibility for customized alerts and
reports. It features a cellular (GSM) link for transmission of measured data, supporting
SMS and GPRS, as well as a USB for quick set up and local monitoring. The Model ULTM
provides periodic reports on the hour, and SMS reports to assigned personnel on demand.
There are no on-going fees for this models control software due to complete data
ownership. It houses an embedded, as well as an optional external temperature sensor,
making it ideal for situations where rapid temperature variations may occur. The Model
ULTM is a cost-effective solution perfect for remote monitoring in applications such as fuel
theft detection and river flood alerts.
APPLICATIONS
Model ULTM is ideal for managing fuel tanks at remote sites for various uses such
as fuel theft and leakage detection, inaccurate refueling, and continuous inventory
with the use of the programmable switch tracking. Due to its low power option with
the use of external battery, it features a long battery life based operation. The Model
ULTM can be useful for wastewater monitoring, 24/7 monitoring of sewer junctions,
and identification of overflow or blockage. The Model ULTM requires no road digging
and is fit for harsh weather conditions, making installation simple in a variety of
locations.
Note:
Does not include SIM card or any cellular package.
Works withAT&T and T-Mobile SIM cards in the U.S. Please make sure it will work
will your cellular carrier before purchasing.
Must be a mini-SIM card.
Model ULTM-00, Level Transmitter
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
LEVEL
ACCESSORIES*
ULTM-EXT, External Thermistor, NTC 10K 5%
ULTM-PTS, Programmable Timer Switch
*ULTM-00 only supports one accessory at a time. External battery not included.
326
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible solids and liquids.
Wetted Materials: PVDF.
Range:
Liquids: 26.25 (8 m);
Solids: 19.69 (6 m).
Accuracy: 0.5 cm (0.2) or 0.2% of max. range.
Repeatability: 0.2% of measured range.
Blind Zone: 5.91 (15 cm).
CurrentConsumption:
Continuous: 10 mA @ 24 VDC;
SMS Transmission: 40 mA @ 24 VDC;
Switch Output: 160 mA @ 24 VDC.
Process Tracking Rate (max.): 0.55 ft/s (10 m/min).
Conduit Connections: 1/2 female NPT.
Process Connections: 1-1/2 male NPT, 1-1/2 BSP optional.
Enclosure Material: Plastic PC/ABS+UV.
EnclosureRating: IP65/IP67, IP68 (96 hours at 5.91 (1.8 m) water depth).
Display: 64 x 128 graphic LCD.
Units: m, m/min, F or C (selectable).
Programming: 4-button.
Weight: 1.95 lb (884.51 g).
CELLULAR MODEM
Band: Quad band 850/900/1800/1900 mHz.
Output Power: Class 4 (33 dBm) for EGSM850/EGSM900; Class 1 (30 dBm) for
GSM180/GSM1900.
SMS: Point-to-point MO and MT.
GPRS: Multi-slot class 10.
Reports Display: Level, volume, temperature.
SMSResolution: 0.04 (1 mm).
Report Type: Empty, full, theft alert, refilling alert and periodic report.
Accuracy:
0.5 to 2 (0.15 to 0.6 m): 0.6 (1.5 mm);
2 to 16.5 (0.6 to 5 m): 0.3% of measured range;
16.5 to 26.25 (5 to 8 m): 0.2% of max. range.
327_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:09 PM Page 327
Model
ULSS
Ultrasonic Level Sensor

4.1(1.25 m) Measuring Range, Non-Contact Transmitter,
SPST Programmable Relays
RoHS
4
[1.2 m]
3-1/4
[82.55]
ULSS-10: 1 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model ULSS Ultrasonic Level Sensor provides non-contact, continuous ultrasonic
level measurement of fluids for short range applications. Ultrasonic technology paired with
automatic temperature compensation provides accurate and reliable measurements in
almost all conditions. The Model ULSS has failsafe logic that is easily configured to custom
applications via free software removing the need for target calibration. Using the free
software, the Model ULSS can be programmed to transmit an output signal as well as set
the four relays for control applications. This rugged design comes with a NEMA 6P
submersible enclosure rating to ensure a long lasting unit.
FEATURES
Selectable deadband
Fail-safe logic for control applications
Four programmable relays
Narrow beam width and short dead band
Automatic temperature compensation
APPLICATIONS
Dirty, corrosive, or sticky fluids
Bulk containers
Sump and process tanks
Small tanks
Model
ULSS-10*
Range
4.1 ft (1.25 m)
*USB adapter necessary for calibration. One adapter can program multiple units.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Sensor: PVDF; O-ring: FKM.
Ranges: 4.1 (1.25 m).
Accuracy: 0.125 (3 mm).
Resolution: 0.019 (0.5 mm).
Blind Zone: 2 (5 cm).
Beam Width: 2 (5 cm).
Temperature Limits:
Process: 20 to 140F (-7 to 60C);
Ambient: -31 to 140F (-35 to 60C).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire;
Invert: 4 to 20 mA or 20 to 4 mA;
Fail-safe: 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA, or hold last.
Electrical Connections: 4 (1.2 m) 9 conductor shielded cable.
Contact Type: 4 SPST relays.
Contact Rating: 1 A max @ 28 VDC max.
Deadband: Selectable (no hysteresis, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 1/2 cm, 1 cm, 2 cm, 5 cm or
not available).
Process Connection: 1 NPT, 1 BSPP (optional).
Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate; Gland: TPE.
Failsafe:
Contact: Power loss: Holds Last contact;
Power on: Open, close, or last contact.
Programming: Free PC software download (USB adapter required).
LEVEL
ACCESSORIES
ULS-ACC-USB, USB Adapter for Calibration
ULS-ACC-121, 1 x 1 NPT Reducer Bushing Fitting (Sch. 40), PVC
ULS-ACC-221, 2 Socket x 1 NPT Reducer Bushing Fitting (Sch. 40), PVC
ULS-ACC-510, 1 NPT Polypropylene Side Mount Bracket
2
[50.85]
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
327
328_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:10 PM Page 328
Model
ULSM

9.8(3 m) Measuring Range, Non-Contact Transmitter,
4 SPST Programmable Relays
RoHS
4
[1.2 m]
2-45/64
[68.66]
ULSM-10: 1 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model ULSM Ultrasonic Level Sensor provides non-contact, continuous
ultrasonic level measurement of fluids for medium range applications. Ultrasonic
technology paired with automatic temperature compensation provides accurate and reliable
measurements in almost all conditions. The Model ULSM has failsafe logic that is easily
configured to custom applications via free software removing the need for target
calibration. Using the free software, the Model ULSM can be programmed to transmit an
output signal as well as set the four relays for control applications. This rugged design
comes with a NEMA 6P submersible enclosure rating to ensure a long lasting unit.
FEATURES
Selectable deadband
APPLICATIONS
Bulk containers
Model
ULSM-10*
Range
9.8 ft (3 m)
ACCESSORIES
ULS-ACC-USB, USB Adapter for Calibration
ULS-ACC-510, 1 NPT Polypropylene Side Mount Bracket
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
LEVEL
*USB Adapter necessary for calibration. One adapter can program multiple units.
328
1-11/64
[29.90]
3-5/64
[78.18]
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: 9.8 (3 m).
Accuracy: 0.2% of range.
Beam Width: 2 (5 cm).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -31 to 140F (-35 to 60C).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire;
not available).
Failsafe:
Contact: Power loss: Hold last contact;
329_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:42 AM Page 329
Model
ULSL

18(5.5 m) Measuring Range, Non-Contact Transmitter,
4 SPST Programmable Relays
1-5/64
[27.30]
RoHS
4
[1.2 m]
1-1/16
[27.10]
2-43/64
[68.05]
ULSL-10: 2 NPT
2-45/64
[68.67]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model ULSL Ultrasonic Level Sensor provides non-contact, continuous ultrasonic
level measurement of fluids for short range applications. Ultrasonic technology paired with
automatic temperature compensation provides accurate and reliable measurements in
almost all conditions. The Model ULSL has failsafe logic that is easily configured to custom
applications via free software removing the need for target calibration. Using the free
software, the Model ULSL can be programmed to transmit an output signal as well as set
the four relays for control applications. This rugged design comes with a NEMA 6P
submersible enclosure rating to ensure a long lasting unit.
FEATURES
Selectable deadband
APPLICATIONS
Bulk containers
Model
ULSL-10*
Range
18 ft (5.5 m)
*USB adapter necessary for calibration. One adapter can program multiple units.
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: 18 (5.5 m).
Accuracy: 0.2% of range.
Beam Width: 3 (7.62 cm).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -31 to 140F (-35 to 60C).
not available).
Failsafe:
Contact: Power loss: Hold last contact;
LEVEL
ACCESSORIES
ULS-ACC-USB, USB Adapter for Calibration, PVC
ULS-ACC-520, 2 NPT Polypropylene Side MountBracket
3-5/64
[78.18]
Level Transmitters,
Ultrasonic
329
330_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:17 PM Page 330
Series
CLT
Continuous Level Transmitter

Customize To Fit Application, 316 SS or Buna-N Floats
Float Dimensions
1-7/8
[47.6]
2-1/16
[52.4]
1-1/4
[31.8]
JUNCTION BOX
[CURRENT OUTPUT ONLY]
4-9/16
[115.9]
5/16
[7.9]
1-5/16
[33.3]
TYP.
1-13/16
[46.0]
TYP.
5/16
[8]
F2
F1
2 NPT
Mounting Dimensions
INCHES
OF
INDICATION
Type 1
1/2 NPT
1-1/4 SQ
[31.75]
2 NPT
1/2 NPT
1.000 SQ
[25.40]
1-1/4 NPT
Type 2
Type 3
Continuous Output Level Transmitters provide up to the minute tank level
monitoring. Customize level transmitters to meet application requirements. Transmitters
can be configured for 4 to 20 mA or proportional voltage output, stainless steel or BunaN floats, and lengths up to 72 (183 cm).
LEVEL
7-1/2
[190.5]
1/2 NPT
1
[25.40]
Type 4, 5
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Compatible liquids.
Resolution: 1/4.
Temperature Limits: Buna-N floats: 180F (82C) in water, -40 to 230F
(-40 to 110C) in oil; SS floats: -40 to 230F (-40 to 110C).
Pressure Limits: Buna-N floats: 150 psig (10 bar); SS floats: 300 psig
(21 bar).
Power Requirements: Proportional voltage output models: 10 to 30 VDC;
4-20 mA output models: 10 to 40 VDC.
Loop Resistance: 1.4 k max.
Electrical Connections: Proportional voltage output: 24 (61 cm) free leads #22
AWG, TFE jacketed; 4-20 mA output: Junction box.
Enclosure Rating: 4-20 mA models, NEMA 4 (IP56) junction box.
CLT V S 5 F3 20.25 02.00 25.75 CLT-VS5F3-20.25-02.00-25.75

Continuous Level Transmitter
CLT
Voltage, proportional signal of 0 to supply voltage
V
4 to 20 mA (Junction box provided)
C
B
Stem & Connection
316 SS with SS ARMCO PH-15-7MO stops
S
Material
1
1/2 NPT (Output Type V only)
Connection Type
2
3
2 NPT
3 150# Flange, Carbon Steel (Connection material S only)
4
[Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
5
3 150# Flange, 316 SS (Connection material S only)
[Max. pres. 150 psi (10.3 bar)]
Material
Min s.g.
Max Pres. psi (bar)
Float Factor in (mm)
Float Type
Buna N
0.55
150 (10.3)
2.0 (50.8)
F1
Buna N
0.55
150 (10.3)
2.5 (63.5)
F2
316 SS
0.75
300 (20.7)
3.5 (52.4)
F3
Length that the unit sends an output for level. Maximum is 68 (173 cm).
00.00
Indication Length
Distance from bottom of mounting connection to upper float stop.
00.00
Top Float StopC
Minimum is 1/4 (6.4 mm)
Dimension Overall
00.00 To calculate overall length, addIndication Length, Top Float
Length B
Stop Dimension C, and Float Factor. Maximum length is 72 (1.82 m)
Example
Construction
Output
Level Transmitters,
Float
F3
1/2 NPT
LOWEST
LEVEL
330
5/16 [8]
6 HOLES 3/4 [19.05]

EQUALLY SPACED
ON A 6.000 B.C.
[152.4]
C
HIGHEST
LEVEL
2-3/4
[69.8]
TYP.
331_Layout 1 7/21/14 2:01 PM Page 331
Series
DBOB
Continuous Level Measuring System

Simple Installation, Tangle Free Tape-Based System
7-9/32
[185.00]
5-45/64
[145.00]
8-21/32
[220.00]
5-45/64
[145.00]
10-1/32
[255.00]
2-3/4
[70.00]
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
OPENING
1-1/2
NPT
3-15/16
[100.00]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1-37/64
[40.00]
The Series DBOB is a low maintenance, electromechanical device designed for the
continuous measurement of level or volumes in silos, tanks, or hoppers. The DBOB utilizes
an internal motor that drives a weight suspended by a firm stainless steel tape down to
the bulk material level. Upon reaching the material, the unit reverses and the weight is
drawn back into the upper stop position. The distance the weight descends is electronically
measured based on the internal rotations of the unwinding tape. The DBOB is userprogrammable to output either a height signal or a volumetric signal based on the vessel
geometry. The units two programmable relays offer even more customization.
The 1-1/2 NPT process connection allows for simple installation on horizontal surfaces
and an optional aiming flange is available for inclines. The integrated tape cleaner keeps
the internal process protected from difficult material and the tough cast housing protects
the unit from its surroundings. With an easy to understand measurement principle and
inherent low maintenance qualities, the Series DBOB is perfect for your level measuring
needs.
FEATURES
Measurement range up to 100 ft (30 m)
Optional aiming flange for versatile mounting
Accurate measurement
Independent of bulk material properties
Tangle free tape-based system
Model
DBOB-1-1
Description
Continuous level measuringsystem,
115 VAC power supply
ACCESSORIES
DBOB-AF, Aiming Flange
DBOB-PC, WeatherProtection Cover
DBOB-W1, PVCWeight
DBOB-W2, PVC Weight with Pin
DBOB-W3, SS Weight
DBOB-W4, SS Weight with Pin
DBOB-W5, SS Spider Weight
1-1/2
NPT
7-3/32
[180.00]
8-35/64
[217.00]
DBOB-PC
10-13/64
[259.00]
9-29/64
[240.00]
3-3/16
[81.00]
DBOB-W1
6-19/64
[160.00]
1-21/32
[42.00]
DBOB-W3
25/32
[20.00]
23-5/8
[600.00]
LevelTransmitters,
Mechanical
DBOB-AF
2-61/64
[75.00]
9-13/32
[239.00]
11-17/64
[286.00]
7-3/32
[180.00]
4-23/32
[120.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Powder and bulk materials compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Mounting Thread: Aluminum;
Aiming flange: Aluminum and 304 SS;
Tape: 301 SS;
Sensor weight: PVC or 303 SS;
Fixing elements between tape and sensor weight: Aluminum and 303 SS.
Other Material: Housing: Powder-coated aluminum.
Temperature Limits:
Process temperature: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C);
Ambienttemperature: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C)
(Relative humidity: 0 to 100%).
Pressure Limit: -3.0 to 3.0 psi (-0.2 to 0.2 bar).
Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Accuracy of Output Requirement: 1% of measured length.
Power Consumption: AC model: 150 VA.
Electrical Connection: One 3/4 NPT and two 1/2 NPT conduit opening, screw
termination with removable terminal block.
Connection Terminals: AWG 26 to 14 (0.14 to 2.5 mm2).
Deviation of Vertical Mounting: Max. 2.
Set Point Adjustment: Trips when weight reaches product.
Sensitivity: Min. powder density: 18 lb/ft3 (300 g/l).
Measuring Range: 100 ft (30 m).
Measuring Speed: Average 0.6 ft/sec (0.2 m/s).
Maximum Permitted Tractive Force: 180 lbf (800 N).
Maximum Altitude: 6562 ft (2000 m) for CE approval.
Display: LCD.
Indication Light: LED: Power on, relay, failure.
Memory: Non-volatile: >10 years data retention (no backup battery required).
Weight: 20 lb (9 kg).
Approvals: CE, FM Class. II, III Div. 1 Gr. E-G.
LEVEL
7-3/4
[197.00]
4-1/64
[102.00]
2 X 1/2 NPT
CONDUIT OPENING
DBOB-W5
Warning: Do not use the DBOB-PC Weather Protection Cover in hazardous locations.
331
332_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:40 AM Page 332
Series
MPC
Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation,
Over Temperature Protection and Seal Failure Monitoring
4-1/2
[114.3]
3-19/32
[91.3]
3-25/32
[95.9]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 3.620 X 3.620 IN, +0.032/-0.000

(92 X 92 MM, +0.8/-0.0).
ALLOW FOR 0.5 IN (13 MM) CLEARANCE
AT THE REAR OF THE INSTRUMENT.
LEVEL
The Mercoid MPC Pump Controller provides versatile level control in a standard 1/4
DIN package. Designed for use with almost any style level transmitter the unit displays
the present level and main set point value. Incorporated in the MPC is programmable level
differential for on/off control of one or two pumps, valves, or other devices through two
SPDT relays. Also featured are two additional programmable alarm contacts with front
alarm light indication.
The MPC is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly programming menu. The front face
meets NEMA 4X (IP66) for outdoor panel mounting. So many features are combined into
the MPC that it eliminates many components in a pump control system.
FEATURES
Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to minimize pump wear.
With alternation on a seal failure or over temperature condition will force the
non-failed pump to lead status and stop alternation.
When used with a submersible pump including a moisture sensor th MPC has
alarm light indication of seal failure.
When used with a pump including a thermostat the MPC has alarm light
indication of pump over temperature and removes the pump from service. The
pump can be brought back into service automatically or by manual reset when
the pump has cooled down.
Alarms can be programmed for output indication of pump seal failure or over
temperature.
Selectable time delay, for pump two, on power up to prevent both pumps from
starting at the same time. If power is lost, upon regaining power a time delay of
up to 60 seconds can be selected to prevent too large of a current draw.
Integral 24 VDC power supply for level transmitter.
Displays pump run time from a front panel button.
Test system function that simulates the process input to ensure the pumps are
operating or to test programming.
User selectable security lock-out of programming and/or set points.
Process input retransmission as a current (4 to 20 mA) or voltage (2 to 10 VDC)
analog signal*.
*Standard model MPC is set for current retransmission. For voltage retransmission
add suffix -RV.
3-25/32
[95.9]
17/32
[13.5]
MEETS IP66 (UL TYPE 4X)

MAX. PANEL
THICKNESS 0.25 [6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
Input Impedance: Current = 10 ; Voltage = 100 K .
Output Ratings:
Control relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res., 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC, 1/3 hp @
240 VAC;
Alarm relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC.
Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in) acting.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%,
50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10%-15%.
Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
Accuracy: 0.25% of span, 1 least significant digit.
Display: Two 4 digit, 7 segment 0.56 high LEDs.
Display Resolution: 1 count.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
Serial Communications: Optional RS-232 or RS-485 with Modbus
protocol.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131F (-10 to 55C)/0 to 90% up to
104F (40C) non-condensing, 10 to 50% at 131F (55C) non-condensing.
Weight: 16 oz. (454 g).
Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
Seal Failure (Moisture Sensor):
Power: 2.5 VDC;
Search Current: 3 micro amps;
Resolution: 10K to 500K in 10K steps.
Series MPC, Pump Controller
OPTIONS
RS-232 Modbus-RTU Serial Communications.
Add suffix 232
RS-485 Modbus-RTU Serial Communications.
Add suffix 485
ACCESSORY
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X (IP66).
Level/Pump
Controllers

Compatible Level Transmitters: See page 318 (Series SBLT2)
See page 320(Series PBLT2)
Additional Digital Control Panel Meters: See page 346 (Series APM)
See page 347(Series MPM)
See page 348 (Series PPM)
See page 351 (Series A-900 &A-901)
A-901
332
333_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:40 AM Page 333
Series
MPC Jr.
Pump Controller
One or Two Pump Control with Built-In Alternation
4-1/2
[114.3]
3-19/32
[91.3]
3-25/32
[95.9]
PANEL CUT-OUT: 3.620 X 3.620 IN, +0.032/-0.000

(92 X 92 MM, +0.8/-0.0).
ALLOW FOR 0.5 IN (13 MM) CLEARANCE
AT THE REAR OF THE INSTRUMENT.
The Mercoid MPC Junior Pump Controller provides versatile level control in a
standard 1/4 DIN package. Designed for use with almost any style level transmitter the
unit displays the present level and main set point value. Incorporated in the MPC Jr. is
programmable level differential for on/off control of one or two pumps, valves, or other
devices through two SPDT relays. Also featured are two additional programmable alarm
contacts with front alarm light indication.
The MPC Jr. is flexible and incorporates a user-friendly programming menu. The front
face meets NEMA 4X (IP66) for outdoor panel mounting.
FEATURES
Selectable pump alternation when used with two pumps to minimize pump wear.
Integral 24 VDC power supply for transmitter.
User selectable security lock-out of programming and/or set points.
Optional process input retransmission as a current (4 to 20 mA) or voltage (2 to
10 VDC) analog signal.
Analog output of pump on condition for activation of separate pump run time
meters.
3-25/32
[95.9]
17/32
[13.5]
MEETS IP66 (UL TYPE 4X)

MAX. PANEL
THICKNESS 0.25 [6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 4 (or 0) to 20 mA DC or 2 (or 0) to 10 VDC selectable.
Input Impedance: Current = 10 ; Voltage = 5 K .
Output Ratings:
Control relays: SPDT, rated 10A @ 240 VAC res.,1/4 hp @ 120 VAC, 1/3 hp @
240 VAC;
Alarm relays: SPST, 3A @ 240 VAC res., 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC;
Others: 15 VDC @ 20 mA for output one and output two.
Control Type: On/off, reverse (pump out) or direct (pump in) acting.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC nominal, +10%-15%,
50 to 400 Hz, single phase; 132 to 240 VDC nominal, +10%-15%.
Power Consumption: 7.5 VA maximum.
Accuracy: 0.25% of span, 1 least significant digit.
Display: Two 4-digit, 7 segment 0.56 high LEDs.
Display Resolution: 1 count.
Memory Backup: Nonvolatile memory (no batteries required).
Serial Communications: Optional RS-232 or RS-485 with Modbus protocol.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 14 to 131F (-10 to 55C)/0 to 90% up to
104F (40C) non-condensing, 10 to 50%
at 131F (55C) non-condensing.
Front Panel Rating: Meets UL Type 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (isolated): 24 VDC @ 50 mA, regulated.
Series MPCJR, Pump Controller
LEVEL
ACCESSORY
Weatherproof Enclosures, NEMA 4X (IP66).
OPTIONS
Retransmission of input, 4 to 20 mA,
Add suffix RC
Retransmission of input, 0 to 10 VDC,
Add suffix RV
RS-232 Modbus-RTU Serial Communications
Add suffix 232
RS-485 Modbus-RTU Serial Communications
Add suffix 485
A-901
333
Level/Pump
Controllers
Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation.

Compatible Level Transmitters: See page 318 (Series SBLT2)
See page 320(Series PBLT2)
See page 351 (Series A-900 &A-901)
334_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:40 AM Page 334
Panel Meters and Pump Controllers

Open Channel Flow, Rate and Total, Multi-Pump Control
APM
MPM
The Series APM Analog Panel Meter is a 1/8 DIN digital panel meter perfect for
displaying flow rate and total simultaneously from several analog inputs such as a 4 to 20
mA or 0 to 10 V from any flow transmitter. When utilized with an ultrasonic level
transmitter, such as the Mercoid Series ULT, this series provides an economical way to
measure open channel flow. The dual line display can be configured to read flow rate, total,
grand total, as well as engineering units.
PPM
The Series PPM Pulse Panel Meter is a 1/8 DIN digital panel meter specifically designed
for a variety of pulse inputs. This series is particularly well-suited for flow applications with
its large six-digit, dual-line display that can display flow rate and total simultaneously with
up to 4 programmable relay options and 4 to 20 mA output. This series features latching,
non-latching, sampling, and fail-safe action in addition to its pump alternation function.
The Series MPM Multi Pump Meter is also a 1/8 DIN digital panel meter but for multipump alternation control. This series features, non-latching, sampling, and fail-safe action
in addition to its ability to alternate up to four pumps. This series is also capable of
linearizing nonlinear inputs with a variety of pre-programmed math functions. This is
helpful in applications where volume is monitored in odd shaped tanks as well as open
channel flow monitoring. It accepts 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V
standard.
Series
DLD
For more information on these products:See page 346 (APM)

See page 347 (MPM)
See page 348 (PPM)
Dual Channel Leak Detection Relay

Shaft Seal Leak Protection
19/64
[7.54]
2-3/8
[60.32]
LEVEL
3
[76.20]
Series DLD Dual Channel Leak Detection Relay is used to monitor the shaft seals
of two submersible pumps to detect a leak before pump failure. A leak is detected by
sensing the status of a float or conductivity switch installed in the seal cavity. When this
resistance drops below the set sensitivity, the output relay energizes and the corresponding
LED indicator illuminates. The DLD offers normally open relay contacts to energize an
alarm or de-energize the pump in the event of a leak. When the seal failure condition clears,
the relay automatically resets.
Sensitivity
10 K to 25 K adjustable
4.7 K to 100 K adjustable
Pump Leak Detectors
Model
DLD-ACY
DLD-ACZ
334
1-3/4
[44.45]
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirement: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Power Consumption:2 VA (approximate).
Isolation Voltage: 2500 V.
Temperature Limits:
Storage:-40 to 185F(-40 to 85C).
Switch Type:(2) N.O. SPST.
Switch Voltage9 VDC.
Electrical Rating:5 A @ 120 VAC resistive, 345 VA inductive.
Response Times:
Energize:6 ms (approximate);
Release: 2.5 ms(approximate).
Indicators:Respective red LEDilluminates when leak is detected.
Enclosure: Polycarbonate dust cover.
Mounting: 8-pin octal.
Agency Approvals: cUR, UR.
335_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:39 AM Page 335
Bin Aerator Pad
Series
BAP
Inexpensive, Quiet Operation

1/8 FEMALE NPT
FOR TANK NIPPLE
11/16
[17.46]
7-1/2
[190.50]
RUBBER
GASKET
5/32
[3.81]
2X
WASHERS
3-3/4
[95.25]
BAPAerator
Series BAP Bin Aerator Pad provides positive flow of dry, finely ground materials from
any bin using the proven principle of aeration. Low pressure air is introduced into the
product, restoring its natural ability to flow. In this way congestion, bridging and rat-holing
are overcome without resorting to brute force. Series BAP is non-clogging and provides
equal distribution and consumption of air. The aerator pads feature simple and quick
installation, are inexpensive, and adapt to any bin configuration. Aeration gives the best
results on materials with a 60 mesh size or smaller and with a 3% or less moisture content.
Model
BAP-C
BAP-SSC
BAP-F
BAP-SSF
BAP-K
Mounting Hardware
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit:
BAP-C and BAP-SSC: 180F (82C);
BAP-F and BAP-SSF: 600F (316C).
Supply Pressure: 3 to 5 psi (0.2 to 0.3 bar).
Air Consumption: See chart.
Air Connection: 1/8 NPT male.
Materials: See model chart.
Air Consumption Guide
Air Pressure, psi (bar) CFM (lpm)
1 (0.07)
4.2 (118.9)
2 (0.14)
5.7 (161.4)
3 (0.21)*
6.5 (184.1)
4 (0.28)
7.1 (201.0)
5 (0.34)
7.6 (215.2)
Description
Zinc Plated Steel with Gal. Steel Mesh & Cotton Diffuser
316SS with 316SS Mesh & Cotton Diffuser
Zinc Plated Steel with Gal. Steel Mesh & Fiberglass Diffuser
316SS with 316SS Mesh & Fiberglass Diffuser
Optional External Mounting Kit
*Recommended for most applications
Models
FD-1/
MFD-1
3/4 NUT
1/8 NPT X 2
TANK NIPPLE
BAP-K Optional External Mounting Kit
Fluidizer Disks
Self-Cleaning, Abrasion-Resistant, Easy to Install
2-11/64
[55.0]
4-3/32 [104.0]
1-19/64
[33.0]
2-1/8
[54.0]
4-19/64
[109.0]
1/4 BSP
1/2 BSP
FD-1
MFD-1
COMPRESSION
FITTING
3/8 BSP
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Connection:
FD-1: 3/8 female BSP and 1/2 male BSP;
MFD-1: 1/4 male BSP and 1/4 IDcompression fitting.
Air Supply: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Consumption: See chart.
Material: Consult factory.
Weight:
FD-1: 7.9 oz (0.23 kg);
MFD-1: 2.5 oz (0.07 kg).
Silo cutaway showing in use.
Model
FD-1
MFD-1
87 psi (6 bar)
LPM
CFM
120
4.23
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
Air Consumption
29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar)
LPM
CFM
LPM
CFM
70
2.47
90
3.17
LEVEL
The Model FD-1 &MFD-1 Fluidizer Disks combine aeration and vibration to solve the
most difficult bulk solid flow applications. Made from FDA approved materials, the special
design creates a vibration as the air flows between the disk boot and bin wall. This provides
a very effective flow aid for all types of dry products. The MFD is half the size of the FD,
making it capable of fitting into tight locations. Your pneumatic system pressure can range
from 29 to 87 psi.
Description
Fluidizer Disk
Micro Fluidizer Disk
335
336_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:38 AM Page 336
Series
BPV
Pneumatic Ball Vibrator

Small Size and Light Weight
IN
OUT
STEEL
RING
SOLENOID
VALVE
BALL
C
B
Model
BPV-1
BPV-2 & BPV-3
BPV-4 & BPV-5
BPV-6
A
2-1/32 [51.59]
2-41/64 [67.07]
3-9/32 [83.34]
4-1/16 [103.19]
B
3-27/64 [86.92]
4-29/64 [113.11]
5-3/64 [128.19]
6-5/16 [160.34]
Series BPV Pneumatic Ball Vibrators are the best choice for bridge-break in thin
walls and small tanks. This model can be used in vibrating separators, vibrating conveyors,
and against electroplating build-up. It can also be used on material compacted while packing
or sand compacted while molding. The aluminum body is equipped with a steel ring and
ball inside that is tightly closed by plastic side covers. Vibration is caused when the internal
ball, pushed by compressed air, runs in a rotary motion to produce centrifugal force.
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
Model 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
BPV-1 22500
34000
28000
BPV-2 15000
22500
18500
BPV-3 13000
19500
17000
BPV-4 10500
16500
14500
BPV-5 9200
14000
12200
BPV-6 7800
12500
9700
V.P.M. = vibrations per minute
Series
PRV
Force lbf (N)

Pressure Input
106 (470)
56 (250)
124 (550)
72 (320)
180 (800)
101(450)
274 (1220)
162 (720)
353 (1570)
209 (930)
555 (2470)
339 (1510)
C
2-11/16 [68.26]
3-35/64 [90.09]
4-7/64 [104.38]
5-1/8 [130.18]
D
31/64 [12.30]
41/64 [16.27]
41/64 [16.27]
51/64 [20.24]
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level: 75 to 95 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6
bar).
Air Consumption: See model chart.
E
51/64 [20.24]
61/64 [24.21]
1-15/16 [33.34]
1-47/64 [44.05]
H
9/32 [7.14]
23/64 [9.13]
23/64 [9.13]
7/16 [11.11]
IN/OUT
1/4 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
3/8 BSPT
Air Connections: 1/4 BSPT female

with 1/4 OD push to connect adapter on
BPV-1, BPV-2, BPV-3, BPV-4 and BPV5; 3/8 BSPT female with 3/8 OD push
to connect on BPV-6. Also includes
muffler for exhaust port.
Air Consumption cfm (l/min)

Pressure Input
87 psi (6 bar) 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
160 (710)
3.25 (92)
7.06 (200)
5.30 (150)
195 (870)
3.32 (94)
7.95 (225)
5.58 (158)
247 (1100)
4.31 (122)
9.89 (280)
7.06 (200)
387 (1720)
4.59 (130)
12.01 (340)
8.12 (230)
461 (2050)
5.65 (160)
15.01 (425)
10.24 (290)
722 (3210)
7.59 (215)
20.13 (570)
13.24 (375)
Weight
lb (kg)
.31 (0.14)
.57 (.26)
.66 (.30)
1.2 (.53)
1.4 (.63)
2.54 (1.15)
Pneumatic Roller Vibrator

Prevent Material Jams
IN
RING
T
SOLENOID
VALVE
ROLLER
D
C
LEVEL
Model
PRV-1
PRV-2
PRV-3
PRV-4
A
2-1/32 [51.59]
2-41/64 [67.07]
3-9/32 [83.34]
4-1/16 [103.19]
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
Series PRV Pneumatic Roller Vibrators have a high vibration frequency feature that
can prevent material jams in pipe delivery. It can also be applied for bridge-break or
concrete injection operation conditions. The special aluminum body is equipped with a
roller and ring with multi-nozzles. It is tightly closed by plastic side covers. Vibration is
caused when the roller pushed by compressed air runs in a rotary motion to produce
centrifugal force.
Model
PRV-1
PRV-2
PRV-3
PRV-4
Frequency (V.P.M.)
Pressure Input
35000
25000
21000
19000
18500
15500
14000
11000
C
2-11/16 [68.26]
3-35/64 [90.09]
4-7/64 [104.38]
5-1/8 [130.18]
D
31/64 [12.30]
41/64 [16.27]
41/64 [16.27]
51/64 [20.24]
E
1-5/32 [29.37]
1-15/32 [37.31]
1-11/16 [42.86]
2-1/16 [52.39]
H
9/32 [7.14]
23/64 [9.13]
23/64 [9.13]
7/16 [11.11]
IN
1/8 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
3/8 BSPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: 75-100 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 1/8 BSPT female with 1/4 OD push to connect adapter on PRV1; 1/4 BSPT female with 1/4 ODpush to connect adapter on PRV-2 and PRV-3;
3/8 BSPT female with 3/8 OD push to connect adapter on PRV-4.
Force lbf (N)

Pressure Input
87 psi (6 bar) 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
36000
656 (2920)
241 (1070)
948 (4200)
26000
1086 (4830) 1376 (6120)
614 (2730)
19000
1369 (6090) 1675 (7450)
674 (3000)
16000
1517 (6750) 2001 (8900)
843 (3750)
336
B
3-27/64 [86.92]
4-29/64 [113.11]
5-3/64 [128.19]
6-5/16 [160.34]
Air Consumption cfm (l/min)

Pressure Input
29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
3.53 (100)
5.12 (145)
6.89 (195)
7.06 (200)
10.59 (300)
14.13 (400)
0.24 (290)
15.19 (430)
20.13 (570)
13.07 (370) 19.42 (550)
25.78 (730)
Weight
lb (kg)
.53 (0.24)
1.19 (0.54)
2.1 (0.95)
3.97 (1.8)
337_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:37 AM Page 337
Series
PTV
Pneumatic Turbine Vibrator

Low Noise, High Vibration Frequency
IN
OUT
SOLENOID
VALVE
HOLE
H
Cu
C
B
Model
PTV-1
PTV-2 & PTV-3
PTV-4 & PTV-5
PTV-6
A
2-1/32 [51.59]
2-41/64 [67.07]
3-9/32 [83.34]
4-1/16 [103.19]
B
C
3-27/64 [86.92] 2-11/16 [68.26]
4-29/64 [113.11] 3-35/64 [90.09]
5-3/64 [128.19] 4-7/64 [104.38]
6-5/16 [160.34] 5-1/8 [130.18]
D
31/64 [12.30]
41/64 [16.27]
41/64 [16.27]
51/64 [20.24]
E
1-5/16 [33.34]
1-21/32 [42.07]
2-7/32 [56.36]
2-7/8 [73.03]
H
9/32 [7.14]
23/64 [9.13]
23/64 [9.13]
7/16 [11.11]
IN/OUT
1/8 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
3/8 BSPT
Air Connection: 1/8 BSPTfemale with

1/4 ODpush to connect adapter on
PTV-1. 1/4 BSPTfemale with 1/4 OD
push to connect adapter on PTV-2, PTV3, PTV-4, and PTV-5. 3/8 BSPT female
with 3/8 ODpush to connect adapter on
PTV-6. Also includes muffler for exhaust
port.
Frequency (V.P.M.) Pressure Input
Force lbf (N) Pressure Input
Air Consumption cfm (l/min) Pressure Input
Weight
lb (kg)
Model 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar) 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar) 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
.56 (0.26)
4.0 (112)
PTV-1 27500
35000
37500
189 (840)
312 (1390)
540 (2400)
1.62 (46)
2.83 (80)
1.25 (0.57)
10.2 (290)
PTV-2 26000
30000
33000
315 (1400)
549 (2440)
839 (3730)
4.24 (120)
7.06 (200)
1.28 (0.58)
10.2 (290)
PTV-3 17000
21500
24000
274 (1220)
470 (2090)
710 (3160)
4.24 (120)
7.06 (200)
2.4 (1.1)
16.1 (455)
PTV-4 17000
20000
23000
488 (2170)
908 (4040)
1241 (5520) 6.53 (185)
11.5 (325)
2.4 (1.1)
16.1 (455)
PTV-5 12000
15500
17000
477 (2120)
789 (3510)
1140 (5070) 6.53 (185)
11.5 (325)
4.8 (2.2)
PTV-6 13000
14000
16000
760 (3380)
1221 (5430) 1695 (7540) 11.65 (330)
18.71 (530) 26.3 (745)
Series PTV Pneumatic Turbine Vibrators are the best choice of high vibration
frequency types for a low noise environment. It is usually installed on a vibrating separator,
conveyor, automatic arrangement machine, packing machine, or filling machine. The
vibration is produced by centrifugal force which arises from the imbalance of movement
when compressed air impacts the tangent of the turbine to make it move. The operation
noise is low because of ball bearing supports on the running turbine.
Series
APV
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit: : 212F (100C).
Noise Level: 60 to 75 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6
bar).
Piston Vibrator
Air Cushioned or Piston Vibrators
IN
OUT
Model
APV-X1
APV-X2
APV-X3
A
5-7/16 [138.11]
6-35/64 [166.69]
8-13/64 [208.36]
B
3-5/32 [80.17]
3-15/16 [100.01]
5-33/64 [140.10]
C
2-3/8 [60.33]
2-61/64 [75.01]
4-9/64 [105.17]
D
31/64 [12.30]
41/64 [16.27]
41/64 [16.27]
H
23/64 [9.13]
7/16 [11.11]
19/32 [15.08]
IN/OUT
1/8 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
1/4 BSPT
D
H
C
B
Series APV-C Piston Vibrators are air cushioned to provide low noise. This makes it
suitable for quiet area applications. It is a good solution to prevent clogs on tank walls and
material delivery problems. It can also be applied on vibrating separators and conveyors.
LEVEL
Series APV-I Impact Version Piston Vibrators can help to get rid of dust or material
accumulated inside of pipes or tanks. It allows direct impact on the tank with low specific
gravity and high moisture materials inside. It also helps prevent material build-up, pipe
clogs, and rust.
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: APV-C: 60-75 dBA; APV-I: 80-115 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 29 to 87 psi (2 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 1/8 BSPT female with 1/4 OD push to connect adapter on APVC1 and APV-I1; 1/4 BSPT female with 1/4 ODpush to connect adapter on APVC2, APV-C3, APV-I2 and APV-I3. Also includes muffler for exhaust port.
How They Operate

There are air-breathing tubes located in both ends of the cylinder. Compressed air
pushes the piston from one side to the other. Vibration power arises when the piston
moves back and forth in the body. In APV-C air cushion at both ends produced by
the to-and-fro motion will keep the piston from striking the body. Therefore, the piston
will not produce much noise. In APV-I, air cushion at the top end is produced by the
to-and-fro compression. This will keep the piston from striking onto the body top.
The piston will strike directly on the bottom side of the body to produce a strong
impact.
Force lbf (N) Pressure Input
29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
44 (195)
85 (380)
126 (560)
62 (275)
119 (531)
161 (715)
91 (404)
175 (780)
231 (1030)
1818 (8086) 3044 (13542) 3996 (17776)
3245 (14443) 4934 (21948) 6048 (26904)
3470 (15434) 7799 (34692) 8276 (36816)
Air Consumption
cfm (l/min)
8.12 (230)
8.79 (249)
9.50 (269)
8.8 (250)
9.5 (270)
10.6 (300)
Weight
lb (kg)
1.98 (0.9)
4.19 (1.9)
9.92 (4.5)
2.2 (1.0)
4.6 (2.1)
10.6 (4.8)
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
Frequency (V.P.M.) Pressure Input

Model 29 psi (2 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) 87 psi (6 bar)
APV-C1 1765
2308
2857
APV-C2 1333
1677
1875
APV-C3 1000
1200
1340
APV-I1 1973
2885
3571
APV-I2 1744
2459
3000
APV-I3 1277
1875
1973
337
338_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:36 AM Page 338
Series
IPV
Air Hammer
Single Impacting Type
IN
Model
IPV-1
IPV-2
IPV-3
IPV-3
A
5-7/16 [138.11]
6-35/64 [166.69]
8-13/64 [208.36]
10-19/32 [269.08]
B
3-5/32 [80.17]
3-15/16 [100.01]
5-33/64 [140.10]
6-25/32 [172.24]
C
2-3/8 [60.33]
2-61/64 [75.01]
4-9/64 [105.17]
5-33/64 [140.10]
D
31/64 [12.30]
41/64 [16.27]
41/64 [16.27]
61/64 [24.21]
H
23/64 [9.13]
7/16 [11.11]
19/32 [15.08]
3/4 [19.05]
Series IPV Air Hammer (single impact model) focuses on a limited target. Other
equipment of the target is minimally affected by it. It is often applied onto a pipe or clean
elbow in a tank filled with humidity or low specific gravity material.
FEATURES
One impact wave caused by one shot
High strength aluminum structure
Impact force and interval timing can be set based on needs
Magnetic hammer stores magnetic strength to increase the pistons impact power
Model
IPV-1
IPV-2
IPV-3
IPV-4
Impulse
lbfs (NS)
.225 (1.0)
.630 (2.8)
1.66 (7.4)
2.81 (12.5)
Weight
lb (kg)
2.43 (1.1)
3.97 (1.8)
8.82 (4.0)
18.52 (8.4)
Air Consumption
in3 (l) per stroke
1.71 (0.028)
5.0 (0.082)
14.0 (0.228)
27.8 (0.455)
IN
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
3/8 NPT
OUT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
3/8 NPT
OUT
D
H
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Level Range: 60 to 75 dBA.
Supply Pressure: 43.5 to 87 psi (3 to 6 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 BSPT female with 1/4 OD push to connect adapter on IPV-1,
IPV-2 and IPV-3; 3/8 BSPT female with 3/8 OD push to connect adapter on IPV-4.
Also includes muffler for exhaust port.
How It Operates
The IPV series air hammer contains a powerful magnet inside the hammer. The
hammer and magnet are tightly closed before activation. As the inlet air pressure
gets higher than the force, this tightens the hammer and magnet. The hammer and
magnet will separate and cause more strength for impact power. The spring will bring
the hammer back to the initial position automatically after the impact. By doing this,
the air pressure will be released and the strength of the air pressure will be delivered
to the target impact container. It will help to smooth the flow and prevent accumulation
inside the container.
Electric Bin Vibrator
Series
EBV
Adjustable Vibration Intensity
LEVEL
Dimensions-Inches (mm)
Model A
B
EBV-1 5-1/8 (130) 5-23/64 (136)
EBV-2 5-1/8 (130) 5-23/64 (136)
EBV-3 5-1/8 (130) 6-17/64 (159)
EBV-4 6-7/64 (155) 6-23/32 (170)
C
8-5/16 (211)
8-5/16 (211)
9-3/32 (231)
10-23/64 (263)
D
4-11/64 (106)
4-11/64 (106)
4-11/64 (106)
4-7/16 (113)
E
2-43/64 (68)
2-43/64 (68)
2-43/64 (68)
5-1/8 (130)
Bin Vibrators/
Aerators
The Series EBV Electric Bin Vibrator incorporates adjustable force features without
creating irritating noise. The low amperage draw at 120V reduces power consumption and
makes the vibrators useable in any application. The EBV eliminates drawbacks associated
with non-adjustable constant force units. The conventional fix force units are sized with
narrow operating limits and may not move material from bins or pack material in
containers if the moisture content changes. The adjustable force feature increases
application flexibility; reducing equipment downtime and labor expense. The EBV is
capable of running continuously at 100% force output without overheating or mechanical
damage.
Model
EBV-1
EBV-2
EBV-3
EBV-4
338
Max Power
Kw
Hp
0.09 0.12
0.11 0.15
0.21 0.28
0.28 0.38
Centrifugal Force
Kg
Lb
71
156.5
95
209.4
189
416.7
323
712.1
Current
Max Amps
1.03
1.3
2.62
3.43
Weight
Lb
9.3
10.1
15.4
21.6
C
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: 120 VAC.
Power Consumption: See model
chart.
to 40C).
Enclosure: Aluminum.

Noise Level: 20 dB.
Electrical Connection: Electrical
junction box.
Rotational Speed: 3600 RPM.
Approvals: CE.
FEATURES
Continuous operation at 100% force output
NEMA 4X (IP66)
Robust aluminum body
Silent operation (20 dB)
Adjustable centrifugal force
339_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:36 AM Page 339
Panel Meters/
Indicators
pages 342-349, 352-353
Control Enclosures
pages 350-351
Annunciators/
Alarm Modules
page 354
Signal Conditioners/
Isolating Transmitters
page 355
Relays
pages 356-361
Current Transformers/
Switches
pages 362-365
Signal Converters
page 366
Power Supplies
pages 367-368
Power Supplies/
Transformers
page 369
Fan Speed
Controls
page 370
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
pages 371-372
Timers
page 373
Timer Controllers
pages 374-377
Time Delay Relays

page 378
Ground/Continuity
Controls
page 379
Particulate (Dust or
Broken Bag)
Transmitters/Sensors
pages 380-382
Vibration Controls
page 383
Conveyor Controls
page 384
Data Loggers,
Indicating
pages 385-386
Data Loggers,
Miniature
page 387
Data Loggers,
Wireless
pages 388-389
Data Loggers,
USB
pages 390-391
Chart Recorders
page 392
PROCESSCONTROL | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 340-341
339
PROCESS CONTROL
340_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:35 AM Page 340
Monitor the test environment for accurate laboratory tests.

The Love Controls Model LCR20 dual pen circular chart recorder can be used to
monitor the humidity and temperature in an environmental chamber. The 10 chart
size makes it easy to see the blue and red pen markings on the chart paper. The
recorder takes in most common thermocouples and process inputs for both channels.
It is recommended that the LCR20 be used with a Dwyer RHP series humidity /
temperature transmitter for best results.
Dust Collector Timer Controller shows filter condition in dust

collector.
This portable dust collector can be rolled from job to job in an industrial building. An
operator places the large diameter collection hose where it is needed and dust is
collected by filters located inside the access doors on the units side. The top mounted
blower draws air through the filters. To monitor the pressure drop across the filters,
the manufacturer supplies a Magnehelic differential pressure gage. When the
pressure drop due to dust build up on the filter indicates that cleaning is necessary,
the DCT500A Dust Collector Timer Controller is manually activated to initiate a
cleaning cycle which involves solenoid valves releasing pulses of air. This process
removes the dust from the filters where it drops into a storage bin. A Dwyer Minihelic
differential pressure gage can be used instead of the Magnehelic gage, and, if
automatic cleaning is required, a Photohelic differential pressure switch/gage can
provide the electrical contact to actuate the cleaning cycle when the pressure drop
reaches the preset limit.
Button Datalogger monitors food and beverage temperature in

refrigerated transport vehicles.
Bag house cleaning system uses Dust Collector Timer Controller to

initiate optimum cleaning cycle.
When transporting temperature-sensitive products such as meat, produce, beer and

wine over long distances, it is necessary to verify that the storage compartment has
not exceeded the critical preservation temperature at any time. Dwyer BDL Button
Dataloggers offer a low cost way to measure and record storage temperatures
throughout transport. By placing several buttons throughout the storage
compartment and setting an appropriate measurement interval, transportation
services can retrieve data at the completion of delivery to assure their customers of
adequate preservation temperatures.
A Dwyer DCT1000 Dust Collector Timer Controller with attachable DCP pressure
sensing module monitors and controls the dust levels and corresponding pressure
drop across the filter bags. The DCT1000/DCP control automatically activates the
cleaning cycle when the DCT1000's pre-programmed set points have been exceeded.
This on-demand control system alleviates excessive air compressor usage by
preventing unnecessary cleaning which lowers energy and maintenance costs.
340
341_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:34 AM Page 341
PROCESS CONTROL
Detect broken filters in dust collectors.
Monitoring belt conveyor for proper operation.
The Dwyer Series DPM Particulate Monitor and PMS Particulate Sensor combine
to make a particulate monitoring system for the exhaust stream of dust collectors.
The amount of particulate leaking out of the dust collector is measured using low
maintenance induction technology and shown on a display for easy viewing. The DPM
has programmable thresholds of leakage for switch output indication of dust collector
problems such as broken or leaking filters. Proper use of the system will allow the
user to catch breaking filters early. Advantages of the system are maintaining
regulatory compliance, maximizing product recovery, optimizing filtration efficiency,
preventing fines and plant shutdowns, and reducing the amount of pollutants
released.
A Proximity Series NSS Speed Switch is used to monitor the speed of a product
belt conveyor indicating proper operation. Common applications include grain, feed,
aggregate, mining, and textiles. Belt slippage or a slowdown in belt speed indicates
problems that could lead to product waste or could generate sparks leading to a fire
or explosion. The belts speed is monitored via the rotational speed of the shaft at the
end of the belt. The NSS is a non-contact magnetic actuated system allowing easy
installation and long operational life. A magnetic disc is installed on the rotating shaft
and the sensor is mounted across from it. The sensor picks up the rotation of the disc
to detect the rotational speed of the belt. Inside the sensor is a programmable switch
that can be set for any speed. In this application as the speed decreases and hits the
set point the switch is activated for indication of a problem. Proper usage of an NSS
can help with predictive maintenance and decrease down-time.
Providing remote indication of pressure, humidity or temperature.
Monitor the status of your fan or pump.
The Series DPML, DPMP and DPMW Digital LCDPanel Meters provide remote
indication in the designated engineering units for pressure, humidity and temperature
measurements. The panel meters can take in a voltage or current input signal from
transmitters such as the Dwyer Series TTE, Series 626 or Series RHP.The jumper
selection allows the user to choose the appropriate engineering units.
The Dwyer Series SCS Current Switches monitor the input current into a fan or pump
motor starter in order to monitor the status of the equipment. As the current passes
through the core of the switches, it generates enough energy to power up the switch
eliminating the need for extra power wires. The solid core models are typically used
on new installations, while the split core models are able to mount on existing or new
installations.
341
PROCESS CONTROL
342_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:33 AM Page 342
Series
SPPM
Smart Programmable Panel Meter

Fully Field Configurable, 16-Bit Color Touch Screen Display
RoHS
1/2 [12.45]
3 [76.45]
2-3/8
[60.44]
1-29/32
[48.26]
SMART PROGRAMMABLE PANEL METER
15/16
[23.62]
(COUNTRY OF ORIGIN)
DATE CODE
9/32
[7.11]
1/16
[1.52]
21/32
[16.51]
23/32
[18.29]
Panel Meters/
Indicators
1-11/16
[42.55]
SPPM-24 and SPPM-24-C

3-17/32
[89.51]
3-1/2
[89.10]
2-9/32
[57.60]
1/4
[6.71]
29/32 [23.40]
19/32
[15.20]
1-11/16
[43.22]
2-1/4
[56.80]
3/16
[5.07]
3/4
[19.06]
9/16
1-3/8
[14.00]
5/16 [35.12]
[7.70]
3-5/16
[84.10]
3-3/32
[78.50]
29/32
[23.30]
The Series SPPM Smart Programmable Panel Meter is a configurable, full-color

touch-screen display that can be used in a variety of applications. Utilizing a USB
connection, the panel meter can be configured with downloadable software, using any
computer running Windows based software. Available with either a 2.4, 2.8 or 3.5
screen that features remarkable graphics that can easily be customized to read and/or
graph pressure, temperature, humidity, gas concentration, or many other parameters. Up
to two transmitters or transducers can feed the panel meters user scalable inputs (voltage
models only).
Input
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Current
Current
Current
ACCESSORIES
A-SPPM-TC, Thermocouple Input Board
SPPM-CA, Mini USB to full USB cable
SPPM-HSG24, 2.4 Display Housing
SPPM-HSG28, 2.8 Display Housing
Additional configurations available via online software.
Sample Programmable Display Configurations
11/16
[17.80]
1/16
[1.90]
35
27/32
[21.26]
2-5/32
[55.01]
Scan here
to watch
product video
2-1/8
[53.81]
5/8
[16.16]
SPPM-HSG
3-1/2
[88.85]
5/32 [3.90]
3/8 [9.80]
3-25/32
[96.00]
Description
Model
SPPM-24 Smart Programmable Panel Meter with 2.4 display
SPPM-24-C Smart Programmable Panel Meter with 2.4 display
19/32 [15.19]
SPPM SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Current: 0 to 50 mA, scalable
(factory set from 4 to 20 mA); Voltage:
0 to 40 VDC, scalable (factory set from
0 to 10 V).
Accuracy: 0.1%.
Resolution: 0.3 to 9.8 mV (depending
on input range).
Power Supply: 4 to 30 VDC max or
via USB.
Display: 2.4, 2.8 or 3.5 TFT full color
touch screen.
Display Resolution: 320 x 240 pixels.
Sampling Rate: 3 samples/s.
40C).
Warm Up: 30 s.
Mounting: Panel mount.
terminals, pin connection, or USB.
Software Requirements: Compatible
with Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows 7 and Windows Vista.
Weight: 2.8 oz (79.4 g).
Approvals: CE, RoHS.
31/32
[24.81]
3/32
[2.70] 23/32
[17.95]
SPPM-HSG SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Material: Painted aluminum or glass.
A-SPPM-TC SPECIFICATIONS
Probe Measurement Range:>K-type:
-328 to 2462F (-200 to 1350C); Jtype:-328 to 2174F (-200 to 1190C);
T-type:-328 to 734F(-200 to 390C).
to 40C).
Resolution: 1.0F(0.5C).
Power Requirements: Powered by
USBport through SPPM panel meter.
Accuracy: 2.0F(1.0C).
Weight: 0.9 oz (25.5 g).
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
342
343_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:33 AM Page 343
LCD Digital Panel Meters

1/8 DIN, Loop Powered, Large 3-1/2 Digit Display
RoHS
P Models
V
A
KW
PF
3-25/32
[96]
F
C
PSI
%
1-1/8
[28.5]
13/64
[5]
Model
DPMA-401
DPMA-402
DPMA-404
DPMA-501
DPMA-502
DPMA-504
DPMA-401P
DPMA-402P
DPMA-404P
DPMA-501P
DPMA-502P
DPMA-504P
Input
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Segments
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Amber Segments
Red Segments
Green Segments
Engineering Units
F, C, %, PSI
5/64
[1.9]
MOUNTING BRACKET
OUTLINE REAR VIEW
4-29/64
[113]
(R.010 MAX)
4 PLCS [.25 mm]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: DPMA-4XX(P): 4 to 20 mA;
DPMA-5XX(P): 0 to 200 mVDC, 0 to 5
VDC or 0 to 10 VDC.
Input Impedance: DPMA-4XX(P):
300 nominal; DPMA-5XX(P): 390K
nominal.
Accuracy: (0.05% FS + 1 count).
Power Supply: DPMA-4XX(P):
Powered by control loop; DPMA5XX(P): 12 VDCor 24 VDC.
BacklightPower Supply: 24 VDC @
35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable. (1999
counts).
Display: 3-1/2 digits, 7 segments,
1 (25.4 mm) H.
Decimal Points: 3-position, user

selectable.
Engineering Units: DPMA-XXX: F,
C, %, psi; DPMA-XXXP: V, A, KW, PF.
Polarity: Automatic, - displayed.
(0 to 50C).
(-20 to 70C).
Mounting: Snap-in panel mount or
clamp (gasket included).
Connection: Screw terminals.
Conversion Rate: 3 per second.
Warm-Up: 10 minutes typical.
Weight: 4 oz (113.4 g).
V, A, KW, PF
APPLICATIONS
Used to display process values from pressure, humidity, temperature, voltage,
current, watt, or power factor transmitters.
ACCESSORIES
DPM-12P, Regulated 120 VAC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Series
DPMW

3-1/2 Digits, Window Mount
17/64
[6.9]
RoHS
P Models
V
A
KW
PF
2-3/8
[60.5]
F
C
PSI
%
[.140]
[3.6 mm]
2 PLCS
The Series DPMW LCD Digital Panel Meter is designed with a 3-1/2 digit, highcontrast LCD display. The colored segments are available in red, amber, or green - ideal
for viewing at a distance. The Series DPMW features user selectable engineering units,
selectable decimal point position and adjustable span and zero. The meter accepts a 4 to
20 mA input signal from pressure, level, flow, temperature, voltage, current, watt, or power
factor transmitters. A 24 VDC power supply is required to illuminate the colored segments.
The Series DPMW can be quickly installed in a window cutout.
Model
DPMW-401
DPMW-402
DPMW-403
DPMW-401P
DPMW-402P
DPMW-403P
Segments
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments
Amber Segments
Green Segments
Red Segments
1-59/64
[49]
Engineering Units
F, C, %, PSI
V, A, KW, PF
ACCESSORY
1/8
[3]
2-5/16
[58.7]
PANEL CUTOUT FOR
WINDOW MOUNTING
13/32
[10.2]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 4 to 20 mA.
Input Impedance: 300 nominal.
Power Supply: Powered by control
loop.
Backlight Power Supply: 24 VDC@
35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable. ( 1999).
Display: 3-1/2 digits, 7 segments,
0.45 (11.4 mm) H.
selectable.
Engineering Units: DPMW-XXX: F,
C, %, psi; DPMW-XXXP: V, A, KW,
PF.
1/8
[3]
63/64
[25.1]
29/32
[23.1]
1-9/16
[39.7]

(0 to 50C).
(-20 to 70C).
Mounting: Window mount.
343
Panel Meters/
Indicators
Series DPMA Adjustable LCD Digital Panel Meter offers a 3-1/2 digit display for
easy viewing in a standard 1/8 DIN package. Unit accepts 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to
10 VDC inputs with a wide bipolar span and zero adjustment. Standard features include
field selectable engineering units and decimal point positions. Choose from red, amber, or
green segments for easy viewing at a distance. A 24 VDC power supply is required for the
operation of the backlight.
1-59/64
[49]
63/64
[25]
1-49/64
PANEL CUTOUT
[45]
FOR SNAP IN MOUNTING
3-5/8
[92]
15/32
[12]
1-57/64
[48]
3-15/32
[88] REAR HOUSING
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DPMA
PROCESS CONTROL
344_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:25 PM Page 344
Series
DPMP
& DPML
3-1/2 & 4-1/2 Digit LCD, User Selectable Engineering Units, Panel Mount
P Models
V
A
KW
PF
DPMP
2-35/64
[64.5]
DPMP
F
C
PSI
%
Panel Meters/
Indicators
1/8
[3]
2-13/32
[61]
1-9/64
[29]
P Models
V
A
KW
PF
2.390 [60.6]
REAR HOUSING
2-35/64
[64.5]
DPML
RoHS
PANEL CUTOUT FOR

WINDOW MOUNTING
63/64
[25.1]
1
[25.4]
1-5/8
[41.1]
DPML
F
C
PSI
%
1-9/64
[29]
2.390 [60.6]
REAR HOUSING
The Series DPMP &DPML LCD Digital Panel Meters provide easy viewing on the 31/2 or 4-1/2 digit LCD display. The display segments are available in a choice of amber,
black, red or green. The meter features user-selectable engineering units, adjustable span
and zero and field-selectable decimal point position. The snap-in bezel mount eliminates
mounting hardware for quick installation. A 24 VDC power supply is required for the
operation of the backlight.
APPLICATIONS
Used to display process values from pressure, humidity, temperature, voltage,
current, watt, or power factor transmitters.
Model
DPMP-401
DPMP-402
DPMP-403
DPMP-501
DPMP-502
DPMP-503
DPMP-401P
DPMP-402P
DPMP-403P
DPMP-501P
DPMP-502P
DPMP-503P
Input
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Current
Current
Current
Voltage
Voltage
Voltage
Segments
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Engineering
Units
F, C, %, PSI
F, C, %, PSI
F, C, %, PSI
F, C, %, PSI
F, C, %, PSI
F, C, %, PSI
V, A, KW, PF
V, A, KW, PF
V, A, KW, PF
V, A, KW, PF
V, A, KW, PF
V, A, KW, PF
Digit*
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: DPMX-4XX(P): 4 to 20 mA;
DPMX-5XX(P): 0 to 200 mVDC, 0 to 5
VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC.
Input Impedance: DPMX-4XX(P):
300 nominal; DPMX-5XX(P): 390
nominal.
Power Supply: DPMX-4XX(P):
Powered by control loop; DPMX5XX(P): 12 VDC or 24 VDC.
Backlight Power Supply: 24 VDC @
35 mA typical.
Span and Zero: Adjustable (1999
Counts).
Display: DPMP: 3-1/2 digits, 7
segments, 0.45 (11.4 mm) H; DPML:
4-1/2 digits, 7 segments, 0.45 (11.4
mm) H.
Decimal Points: DPMP: 3-position,

user selectable; DPML:4-position, user
selectable.
Engineering Units: DPMX-XXX: F,
C, %, psi; DPMX-XXXP: V, A, KW, PF.
(0 to 50C).
(-20 to 70C).
Mounting: Snap-in bezel mount.
ACCESSORIES
*Note: For 4-1/2 digit display change P to L.

Example: DPML-401
Model
DPMF
Flush Mount LCD Digital Panel Meter

3-1/2 Digit LCD, Surface Mount
RoHS
2-3/8
[59.94]
1-1/8
[29.03]
1
[25.40]
2-3/16
[55.56]
The Model DPMF Flush Mount LCD Digital Panel Meter offers high performance
and low cost in a compact package. This meter is designed with a 3-1/2 digit, high contrast
LCD display. The unit is powered by a 4 to 20 mA DC control loop input. Standard features
include adjustable span and zero, and field-selectable decimal point position. The flat pack
of the panel meter allows for the instrument to be mounted to any flat surface.
Model DPMF, Flush Mount LCDDigital Panel Meter
344
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 4 to 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance: 300 nominal.
Power Supply: Powered by control
loop.
Span and Zero: Adjustable (1999
counts).
Display: 3-1/2 digits, 7 segments, 0.5
(12 mm) H.
selectable.
1/8
[2.5]

(0 to 50C).
Storage Temperature: -4 to 158F (-20
to 70C).
Mounting: Surface mount.
Weight: 1.2 oz (34.5 g).
345_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:31 AM Page 345
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DPMX
Extra Large Digital Panel Meter

3-1/2 Digit LED Display, 2.3 Segment Height, Process Inputs
1-31/32 [50.04]
10-19/32 [269.24]
10-19/32 [261.11]
4
[101.60] 4-5/32
[105.66]
2-43/64
3-7/64 [67.87]
[78.99]
29/32
[22.86]
FEATURES
Large display
Inputs for most processes
Protective metal casing
Model
DPMX-1
DPMX-2
DPMX-3
DPMX-1-LV
DPMX-2-LV
DPMX-3-LV
Segments
Blue
Green
Red
Blue
Green
Red
Power Supply
90 to 250 VAC
90 to 250 VAC
90 to 250 VAC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
Series
LCI132
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs:
Set voltage: 200 mVDC, 2 VDC, 20 VDC;
Adjustable voltage: 200 mVDC, 5 VDC, 10 VDC;
Adjustable current: 0(4) to 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance:
Set voltage: >1 M (>10 M on 200 mV range);
Adjustable voltage: 392 k;
Adjustable current: 300 nominal.
Accuracy: (1% F.S. + 1 count).
Power Supply: 90 to 250 VAC @ 12 VA or 10.5 to 30 VAC/DC @ 6VA (depending
on model).
Display: 3-1/2 digits, 2.3 H, 7 segment LED.
Sampling Rate: 3 readings per second.
Operating Temperature: 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C).
Storage Range: -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C).
Warm Up: 10 minutes.
Mounting: 180 gimbal mounting with 30 stops or bezel mount.
Process Indicator
1/32 DIN, Fully Programmable
2-49/64
[70.25]
Program
Keys
1-57/64
[48.2]
7/16
[11.11]
61/64
[24.2]
53/64
[21.03]
1/4 [6.35] MAXIMUM
PANEL THICKNESS
Process Display
The LCI132 Series process indicators offer flexibility, and value in a low cost,
compact 1/32 DIN package. This family of indicators offers input availability for most types
of process measurement.
The LCI132 has a 7.62 mm (0.3 inch) high display. The shallow depth of these full size panel
meters allows installation in panels only 70 mm (2.76) deep with room to spare.
Inputs are available for Process (0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA), AC Volts, AC Amps, DC Volts, and
DC Amps.
SPECIFICATIONS
LCI132-0X
Range:
Input Volts (DC): 200 V, 20 V, 10 V;
Input Amperes: 100 mV, 20 mA;
Resolution: Input Volts (DC):0.1 V, 0.01 V, 1 mV;
Input Amperes: 0.1 mV, 0.01 mA;
Input Impedance:Volts: 1 M , mV: 100 M , mA: 12.1 .
FEATURES
Large display
Easy to program
Inputs for most processes
IP65 (NEMA 4X) front
LCI132-1X
Range AC: Input Volts: 600.0, 100.0;
Input Amperes: 5.000, 1.000;
Range DC: Input Volts: -199.9, 600.0, 100.0;
Input Amperes: -1.999, +5.000, 1.000;
Resolution: Input Volts:0.1 V;
Input Amperes: 1 mA
Input Impedance:Volts: 3 M (106), Amps:12 m (10-3).
Model
LCI132-00
LCI132-01
LCI132-10
LCI132-11
Input
100 VDC; 20 VDC
10 VDC; 200 VDC; 20 mA DC
100 VAC; 600 VAC; 5A (DC) 1A (AC)
-199.9 to +600 VDC;
100 VDC -1.999 to 5A (DC)
1A (DC)
Supply Voltage
120/240 VAC
24/48 VAC
120/240 VAC
24/48 VAC
Accuracy at 23C 5C
100/600 VDC 1/5 A DC; 600V/5A AC: (0.2% reading + 3 digits). 100 V / 1A AC:
(0.4% reading + 4 digits).
Temperature Coefficient: 100 ppm/C.
Warm Up: 5 minutes.
Power Supply and Fuses (DIN 41661) (Not supplied):
LCI132-X0: 85265 VAC 50/60 Hz and 100-300 VDC: Fuse: 0.1A/ 250V.
LCI132-X1: 21-53 VAC 50/60Hz and 10.5-70 VDC: Fuse 0.5A/ 250V.
Display
Range: -1999 to 9999 (DC) 0 to 9999 (AC).
Type: 4 red digits 10 mm.
Reading Rate: 4/s.
Overflow Indication: OVR.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: -10 to 60C.
Storage Temperature: -25 to 85C.
Relative Humidity (non condensed): < 95% @ 40C.
Panel Sealing: NEMA 4X (IP66).
345
Panel Meters/
Indicators
The Series DPMX Digital Panel Meter can easily be viewed from across a room or in
dark areas. The 2.3 LED segments are available in red, green, or blue. These panel meters
come equipped with a universal power supply and user selectable process inputs to fit most
applications. The Series DPMX includes a mounting bracket that can be adjusted up to
180.
PROCESS CONTROL
346_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:31 AM Page 346
Series
APM
Analog Panel Meter

Multi-Pump Alternation Control, Open-Channel Flow, Rate and Totalizer
RoHS
1-49/64
[45.0]
3-5/8
[92.0]
NO NC
C NO NC
Panel Meters/
Indicators
5-3/64
[128.0]
4-49/64
[121.0]
4-11/64
[106.0]
2-7/16
[62.0]
The Series APM has a unique, rugged, NEMA 4X front panel design that makes it nearly
impenetrable in typical applications. The weatherproof, UV resistant, large, dual line
display allows for more information making it easier to read and even simpler to program.
The intensity of the display can be adjusted allowing this meter to be utilized in dark rooms
as well as outdoors, due to its sunlight readable display. It features up to eight visual alarm
set points to trigger certain events and three function keys which can be programmed to
provide direct menu access. With up to four relays available, the APM features latching,
non-latching, sampling, pump alteration control, and a failsafe action. Offering
programmable delay time, this meter prevents recognition of false maximum or minimum
reading which may be caused by the start-up or unusual process events. The APM provides
three security passwords that restrict modification of programmed settings. This unit has
the ability to obtain non-linear input signals and linearize them with simple to use math
functions such as square-root extractor, weirs and flumes exponential linearizer, horizontal
round tank linearizer or general purpose 32-point linearizer. Unit accepts 0 to 20 mA, 4 to
20 mA, 0 to 5V, or 10V inputs and requires 85-265 VAC or 12/24 VDC power supply.
Choose from RS-232, RS-422/485 serial communication options or any available expansion
modules, accessories, and enclosures.
The APM is a 1/8 DIN digital panel meter specifically designed for displaying flow rate
and total from a flow meter with an analog output such as 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10V. The
APM is particularly well-suited for flow applications and can be programmed for a wide
variety of display configurations. The upper line can display either flow rate, total or grand
total, and the lower line can display either flow rate, total, grand total, or engineering units.
It is possible to display flow rate and total at the same time, a very unique feature on a 1/8
DIN digital panel meters.
FEATURES
Three levels of password protection
Math functions for flow & round horizontal tanks
32-point linearization, square root or programmable exponent
Multi-pump alternation control
Rate displayed as units per second, minute, hour, or day
Total, grand total or non-resettable grand total
Two or four relays & isolated 4 to 20 mA output options
External 4-relay & digital I/O expansion modules
RS-232, RS-422/485 serial communication options
OPEN CHANNEL FLOW CAPABILITY
Series APM when utilized with an ultrasonic level transmitter, such as the Mercoid
Series ULT, provides an economical way to measure open channel flow.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW
The APM can display flow rate and total by extracting the square root from the 4 to
20 mA signal from a differential pressure transmitter, such as the Dwyer 629, that is
being used with a flow element such as Dwyer orifice plate Series OP or TE. The
user-selectable, low-flow cut-off feature gives a reading of zero when the rate is
below a user selectable value.
PUMP CONTROL
With the two or four contact output option the APM can be used as a programmable
pump controller when used with a Dwyer level transmitter. The unit also has
programmable on and off points for up to four pumps, quadraplex pumping systems
with alternation capability. When using the 4-relay model with the four external relay
accessory, the APM can do 8 contacts for any combination of pump control and 8
programmable alarms.
346
1-9/32
[15.0]
4-11/16
[119.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5V, or 10V inputs; A 85-265 VAC or 12/24
VDC.
Input Impedance: 50 to 100 .
Accuracy: 0.03% of calibrated span 1 count, square root & programmable
exponent accuracy range: 10-100% of calibrated span.
Power Requirements: 85 to 265 VAC 50/60 Hz, 90 to 265 VDC, 20 W max or 12
to 24 VDC 10%, 15 W max.
Display: Dual-line 6-digit display, 0.60 in and 0.46 in.
Decimal Points: Five positions, user selectable.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X, IP65 front.
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal blocks accept 12 to 22 AWG
wire, RJ45 for external relays, digital I/O, and serial communication adapters.
Power Consumption:
85 to 265 VAC models: 200 mA @ 24 VDC;
12 to 24 VDC models: 100 mA @ 24 VDC;
Second supply with output 2 models: 40 mA @ 24 VDC.
rated 3A @ 30 VDC and 125/250 VAC resistive load; 1/14 HP @ 125/250 VAC for
inductive loads.
Time Delay: 0 to 999.9 seconds, on & off relay time delays; programmable and
independent for each relay.
Shipping Weight: 9.5 oz (269 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, UL.
Model
APM-100
APM-101
APM-120
APM-121
APM-140
APM-141
APM-200
APM-201
APM-220
APM-221
APM-240
APM-241
Power
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
Output 1
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
Output 2
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA

347_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:41 PM Page 347
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
MPM
Multi Panel Meter

1/8 DIN, Dual-Line 6-Digit Display, Multi-Pump Alternation Control
RoHS
1-49/64
[45.0]
3-5/8
[92.0]
NO NC
Panel Meters/
Indicators
C NO NC
5-3/64
[128.0]
4-49/64
[121.0]
4-11/64
[106.0]
2-7/16
[62.0]
The Series MPM has a unique, rugged, NEMA 4X front panel design that makes it nearly
display allows for more information, making it easier to read and simpler to program. The
intensity of the display can be adjusted allowing this meter to be utilized in dark rooms as
well as outdoors, due to its sunlight readable display. It features up to eight visual alarm
set points to trigger certain events and three function keys, which can be programmed to
provide direct menu access. With up to four relays available, the MPM features latching,
non-latching, sampling, pump alteration control, and a fail-safe action. Offering
reading which may be caused by the start-up or unusual process events. The MPM provides
three security passwords that restrict modification of programmed settings. The MPM has
the ability to obtain non-linear input signals and linearize them with simple to use math
functions such as square-root extractor, weirs and flumes exponential linearizer, horizontal
round tank linearizer or general purpose 32-point linearizer. Unit accepts 0 to 20 mA, 4 to
20 mA, 0 to 5V, or 10V inputs and requires 85 to 265 VAC or 12/24 VDC power supply.
Choose from RS-232, RS-422/485 serial communication options or any available expansion
modules, accessories and enclosures.
FEATURES
Math functions for flow & round horizontal tanks
32-point, square root or exponential linearization
Multi-pump alternation control
PUMP CONTROL
Providing two or four contact output options, the MPM can be used as a
programmable pump controller when used with any Dwyer level transmitter. The
relay capabilities of this meter expand its usefulness beyond simple indication to
provide the user with alarm and pump control.
1-9/32
[15.0]
4-11/16
[119.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V or 10 V.
Accuracy: 0.03% of calibrated span 1 count, square root & programmable
exponent accuracy range: 10 to 100% of calibrated span.
to 24 VDC 10%, 15 W max.
Display: Dual-line 6-digit display, 0.60 & 0.46.
Decimal Points: 5-position, user selectable.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
wire; RJ45 for external relays, digital I/O, and serial communication adapters.
inductive loads.
Power Consumption:
Time Delay: 0 to 999.9 seconds, on & off relay time delays programmable and
Model
MPM-100
MPM-101
MPM-120
MPM-121
MPM-140
MPM-141
MPM-200
MPM-201
MPM-220
MPM-221
MPM-240
MPM-241
Power
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
Output 1
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
Output 2
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA

347
PROCESS CONTROL
348_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:29 AM Page 348
Series
PPM
Pulse Panel Meter

1/8 DIN, Dual-Line 6-Digit Display, Flow Rate and Totalizer
RoHS
1-49/64
[45.0]
3-5/8
[92.0]
NO NC
C NO NC
Panel Meters/
Indicators
5-3/64
[128.0]
4-49/64
[121.0]
4-11/64
[106.0]
2-7/16
[62.0]
The Series PPM has a unique, rugged, NEMA 4X front panel design that makes it nearly
display allows for more information, making it easier to read and simpler to program. The
intensity of the display can be adjusted allowing this meter to be utilized in dark rooms as
well as outdoors, due to its sunlight readable display. It features up to eight visual alarm
set points to trigger certain events and three function keys which can be programmed to
provide direct menu access. With up to four relays available, the PPM features latching,
non-latching, sampling, pump alteration control, and a failsafe action. Offering
reading which may be caused by the start-up or unusual process events. The PPM provides
three security passwords that restrict modification of programmed settings. This unit has
the ability to obtain non-linear input signals and linearize them with a general purpose 32point linearizer. Choose from RS-232, RS-422/485 serial communication options or any
available expansion modules, accessories, and enclosures.
The PPM displays flow rate and total simultaneously, with a programmable relay and 4 to
20 mA option for flow rate or flow total. The PPM is a 1/8 DIN digital panel meter
specifically designed for displaying flow rate and total from a pulsed input provided by
open collector, NPN, PNP, TTL, switch contact, sine wave, or square wave.
FEATURES
Gate function for rate display of slow pulse rates
Rate displayed as units per second, minute, hour, or day
K-factor calibration or scale with up to 32-point linearization
Total, grand total or non-re-settable grand total
FLOW RATE
The PPM is particularly well-suited for flow applications because its six-digit, dualline display can be programmed for a wide variety of display configurations. For
instance, the upper line can display either flow rate, total or grand total, and the
lower line can display flow rate, total, grand total, or engineering units. Among other
things, this makes it possible to display either flow rate and total, or total and grand
total at the same time, a very unique feature on 1/8 DIN digital panel meters.
1-9/32
[15.0]
4-11/16
[119.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: Field selectable: Pulse or square wave 0 to 5V, 0 to 12V, or 0 to 24V @ 30
kHz; TTL; open collector 4.7 k pull-up to 5V @ 30 kHz; NPN or PNP transistor,
switch contract 4.7 k pull-up to 5V @ 40 Hz.
Accuracy: 0.03% of calibrated span 1 count.
to 24 VDC 10%, 15 W max.
Display: Dual-line 6-digit display, 0.60 and 0.46.
Decimal Points: 5-positions, user selectable.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C).
wire, RJ45 for external relays, digital I/O, and serial communication adapters.
inductive loads.
Power Consumption:
Time Delay: 0 to 999.9 seconds, on & off relay time delays programmable and
Model
PPM-100
PPM-101
PPM-120
PPM-121
PPM-140
PPM-141
PPM-200
PPM-201
PPM-220
PPM-221
PPM-240
PPM-241
Power
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
85 to 265 VAC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
Output 1
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
None
None
2 relays
2 relays
4 relays
4 relays
Output 2
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA
None
4 to 20 mA

348
349_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:29 AM Page 349
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
PMA
Panel Meter Accessories

For PPM, APM, MPM, and LTI Series Panel Meters
PMA-01 RS-232 Serial Adapter
PMA-02 Meter Copy Cable
SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility: EIA-232.
Connectors: PC compatible 9-pin D subminiature
connector (DB9) and RJ11 (adapter to meter).
Cable: 3 ft (0.9 m) standard CAT5e cable provided
with adapter.
Distance: Adapter to panel meter: 6 ft (1.8 m) max;
Adapter to computer: 50 ft (15 m) max; Serial interface
cable not provided.
Power: Powered by panel meter M-LINK connection.
Status Indication: Separate LEDs for power (P),
transmit (TX), and receive (RX).
PMA-02
PMA-03 RS-422/485 Serial Adapter

SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility: EIA-422 and EIA-485.
Connectors: Removable screw terminal connector
and RJ11 (adapter to meter).
Cable: 3 ft (0.9 m) standard CAT5e cable provided
with adapter.
Distance: Adapter to panel meter: 6 ft (1.8 m) max;
Adapter to computer: 3937 ft (1200 m) max.
Power: Powered by panel meter M-LINK
connection.
Status Indication: Separate LEDs for power (P),
transmit (TX), and receive (RX).
PMA-03
PMA-06 USB to RS-232 Non-Isolated Converter
PMA-04, PMA-05 RS-232 to RS-422/485 Converters

SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility: EIA-232, EIA-422, and EIA-485.
Connectors: Screw terminal connector and DB9.
Distance: RS-232 connection: 50 ft (15 m) max; RS422/485 connection: 3937 ft (1200 m) max.
Number of Units: Up to 31 RS-485 compatible devices.
Power: 9 to 12 VDC; 115 VAC/12 VDC adapter included.
Isolation: PMA-04: 1500 VAC between data lines; 700
VDC input/output-to-power; PMA-05: 1500 VAC between
data lines only.
PMA-04, Isolated
PMA-05, Non-Isolated
PMA-07, PMA-08 USB to RS-422/485 Converters
SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility: USB 1.1, USB 2.0, EIA-422, and EIA-485.
Connectors: Screw terminal connector and USB Type B.
Drivers: Windows 98/2000/ME/XP operating systems,
Linux 2.4 & greater.
Distance: USB connection: 10 ft (3 m) max; RS-422/485
connection: 3937 ft (1200 m) max.
Number of Units: Up to 31 RS-485 compatible devices.
Power: USB port.
Isolation: PMA-07: 1500 VAC between data lines, 700
VDC input/output-to-power; PMA-08: 1500 VAC between
data lines only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility: USB 1.1, USB 2.0, EIA-232.
Connectors: PC compatible 9-pin D subminiature
connector (DB9) and USB type A.
Drivers: Windows 98/2000/Me/XP operating systems.
Distance: USB connection: 10 ft (3 m) max;
RS-232 connection: 50 ft (15 m) max.
Power: USB port.
PMA-07, Isolated
PMA-08, Non-Isolated
PMA-06
PMA-09 Snubber
PMA-10 DIN Rail Mounting Kit for Two Expansion Modules

SPECIFICATIONS
Rail: 6 in (15.24 cm) long.
Mounting Clips: 4 plastic mounting clips with adhesive
strips.
Total Capacity: 2 expansion modules.
SPECIFICATIONS
Capacitance Value: 0.01 F.
Resistor Value: 470 .
Voltage: 250V.
PMA-10
PMA-09
PMA-11 4 Relay Expansion Module
PMA-12 4 Digital Inputs and 4 Digital Outputs Module
SPECIFICATIONS
Relays: Four form A (SPST); Rated 3 A @ 30 VDC
and 125/250 VAC for resistive loads 1/14 HP @
125/250 VAC for inductive loads.
Cable: Standard CAT5e cable; provided with module.
Connectors: RJ45.
Tightening Torque: Screw terminal connectors: 5 lb-in
(0.56 Nm).
Enclosure: ABS-94HB material, UL94HB.
Overall Dimensions: 2.286 in x .924 in x 3.624 in
(58.06 mm x 23.47 mm x 92.05 mm) (w x h x d).
Power: Panel meter M-LINK connection.
PMA-11
Panel Meters/
Indicators
PMA-01
SPECIFICATIONS
Cable: 3 ft (0.9 m) standard modular cable.
SPECIFICATIONS
System: Up to 2 modules for a total of 8 inputs, outputs.
Digital Input Logic: High: 3 to 5 VDC; Low: 0 to 1.25
VDC.
Digital Output Logic: High: 4.75 to 5 VDC; Low: 0 to 0.4
VDC.
Current: Source: 10 mA max.; Sink: 1.5 mA min..
Cable: Standard CAT5e cable; Provided with module.
Connectors: RJ45.
Tightening Torque: Screw terminal connectors: 5 lb-in
(0.56 Nm).
Enclosure: ABS-94HB material, UL94HB.
Power: Panel meter M-LINK connection.
PMA-12
349
PROCESS CONTROL
350_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:28 AM Page 350
Series
PME
Panel Meter Enclosures

For 1/8 DIN Meters
Low-Cost Plastic Enclosure
Low-Cost Plastic Enclosure

SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoplastic polyester.
Ratings: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Dimensions: 5.9 in x 7.9 in x 6.3 in (150 mm x
200 mm x 160 mm).
Weight: 1.75 lb (0.79 kg).
Control Enclosures
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoplastic polyester.
200 mm x 160 mm).
Weight: 1.75 lb (0.79 kg).
PME-01, For 1 Meter
PME-02, For 2 Meter
Plastic Enclosures
Plastic Enclosures
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoset polyester.
Dimensions: PME-11: 8.8 in x 6.7 in x 4.3 in (224
mm x 170 mm x 110 mm); PME-12, -13: 11.8 in x
7.9 in x 7.0 in (300 mm x 201 mm x 178 mm).
Weight: PME-11: 1.45 lb (0.66 kg); PME-12, -13:
3.15 lb (1.43 kg).
PME-11, For 1 Meter

PME-12, For 2 Meters
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoset polyester.
300 mm x 178 mm).
Weight: 5.50 lb (2.49 kg).
PME-14, For 4 Meter

Plastic Enclosures
Plastic Enclosures
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoplastic.
mm x 163 mm x 130 mm); PME-22: 9.7 in x 6.4 in x
5.1 in (246 mm x 163 mm x 130 mm); PME-23: 11.7
in x 8.4 in x 5.1 in (297 mm x 213 mm x 130 mm).
Weight: PME-21: 1.60 lb (0.70 kg); PME-22: 2.20 lb
(1.00 kg); PME-23: 3.00 lb (1.40 kg).
PME-21, For 1 Meter

SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Thermoplastic.
315 mm x 181 mm).
Weight: 5.00 lb (2.30 kg).
PME-24, For 4 Meter

Stainless Steel Enclosures
Stainless Steel Enclosures

SPECIFICATIONS
Material: 304 SS.
329 mm x 152 mm).
Weight: 13.90 lb (6.30 kg).
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: 304 SS.
3.5 in (241 mm x 176 mm x 89 mm); PME-33: 11.5 in
x 8.9 in x 4.0 in (292 mm x 227 mm x 102 mm).
(2.30 kg); PME-33: 7.90 lb (3.60 kg).
PME-31, For 1 Meter
PME-34, For 4 Meter

Steel Enclosures
Steel Enclosures
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Steel.
3.5 in (241 mm x 176 mm x 89 mm); PME-43: 11.5 in
x 8.9 in x 4.0 in (292 mm x 227 mm x 102 mm).
(2.30 kg); PME-43: 7.90 lb (3.60 kg).
PME-41, For 1 Meter
Note: Make sure panel meter dimensions fit enclosure size.
350
SPECIFICATIONS
Material: Steel.
329 mm x 152 mm).
Weight: 13.90 lb (6.30 kg).
PME-44, For 4 Meter

351_Layout 1 7/21/14 2:02 PM Page 351
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
A-900
&
A-901
1/4 DIN Control Enclosures

Weatherproof, Durable, Pre-Cut Mounting Hole
4-1/4
[107.95]
10-32 UNF-2B
TYP 8 PLCS
3-39/64
[91.68]
A-900
Control Enclosures
7-3/4
3-39/64 4-1/4
[91.68] [107.95] [195.33]
5
[127.51]
5
[127.51]
7-3/4
[195.33]
Top View
Bottom View
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-3/4
[44.45]
4-1/8
[106.17]
A-901 UNIT
(4-1/2 [114.30] STANDOFFS)
4 PLCS
Side View
A-901
Models A-900 and A-901 are the perfect instrument housing for indoor or outdoor
applications. Protects controls from dirt, dust, oil and water. Unit is rated weatherproof
type NEMA 4X (IP66) and has a fully gasketed cover. Standard features include a lockable
latch to prevent tampering and flush mounting hardware.
The Model A-900 comes standard with a 1/4 DIN cut out in the front cover. Controller will
mount with front face exposed for easy access to the programming buttons. Love and
Mercoid controllers feature weatherproof NEMA 4X (IP66) rated front panels and gaskets
enabling the control to be weatherproof protected when installed in the A-900 even though
the front face is exposed. Wiring an installed control is easy due to the hinged cover and
spacious clearance for the control to swing out with front cover. The lockable latch prevents
unauthorized removal of the control from the enclosure.
The Model A-901 comes standard with a clear plastic front window and mounting hardware
to install the control inside the box. Controller mounts just behind the window assuring
easy viewing. Mounting the control inside the enclosure protects the control face from
corrosive atmospheres or from being covered in oil, dirt and dust. The lockable latch
prevents unauthorized removal of the control and removes access to the control
programming buttons. The Mounting hardware is attached to the rear of the enclosure
and includes a bracket with a 1/4 DIN cutout and standoffs long enough for Love and
Mercoid controls to fit. Control programming buttons are easily accessible by just opening
the front cover.
FEATURES
UV stabilized for outdoor use
Snap latch with lockable hasp
Continuous cover hinge
Fiberglass material is easily punched or drilled for conduit connections
Includes feet and screws for flush mounting to a wall
Compatible with Love 2500, 2600, 4B, 4C, MPCJR and MPC
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Indoor or outdoor.
Rating: NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13.
Materials:
Body: UV stabilized fiberglass reinforced polyester;
Snap latch: 304 SS;
Hinge: SS;
Mounting feet and screws: 304 SS;
Window: UV stabilized polycarbonate;
Cover gasket: Neoprene.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X(IP66).
Control Temperature Limits:
When using the enclosures with controls that have 10A relay outputs the extra heat
generation decreases the maximum ambient temperature value that the control can
be used at inside the enclosure. Other outputs on our controls are not a concern.
For Models: 25XX3, 26XX3, 26X3X, 26X33, MPC, MPCJR

Ambient
Temperature
77F (25C)
104F (40C)
131F (55C)
Model
A-900
A-901
ACCESSORY
A-600, R/C snubber
Maximum Current
A-901
A-900
10 Amps 10 Amps
10 Amps 9 Amps
7.5 Amps 6 Amps
Description
Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X.
Control direct panel mounts in the front of the enclosure.
Weatherproof enclosure, Type 4X.
Clear plastic window with rear panel for mounting the
control inside the enclosure.
351
PROCESS CONTROL
352_Layout 1 7/21/14 2:01 PM Page 352
Model
LPI
Loop Powered Indicators

Square Root Function and User Defined Curves 4-Digit LED
1/2 NPT
9/16
[14.2]
Panel Meters/
Indicators
2-15/64
[56.7]
Bottom of Cover
The micropressure based Model LPI Loop Powered Indicator accepts a 4 to 20

mA input signal and displays the associated process variable such as pressure, level, flow,
temperature or relative humidity. Local or remote indication of process variable can be
viewed on the bright red four-digit LED. The user can quickly modify the instrument
configuration via three push buttons. Program input/output scaling, engineering units,
offset, decimal point position, and password protection. The Series LPI contains several
linearizations which can be applied to the display including straight linear, square root, x
3/2, x 5/2, or a user defined 19 segment linearization curve. The indicator is housed in a
NEMA 4X (IP66) polycarbonate enclosure with a 1/2 female NPT side port.
Model LPI-111, Loop Powered Indicator with plastic enclosure
Series
BPI
1-11/64
[29.7]
3-11/32
[84.9]
SPECIFICATIONS @ 68F (20C)

Input: 4 to 20 mA.
Maximum Input Current: 100 mA for 1 minute.
Accuracy: 0.02% of full scale.
Stability: Zero: 0.002%/C; Span: 100 ppm/C.
Power Requirements: 2-wire 4 to 20 mA loop powered.
Display: 4-digit, 7.6 mm (high) red LED.
Maximum Display Range: -1999 to 9999.
Storage Temperatures: -58 to 185F (-50 to 85C).
Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Battery Powered Temperature Indicator

RTD or T/C Input, 4-Digit Display, Selectable F or C
9/16
[14.2]
1/2 NPT
1-11/64
[29.7]
3-11/32
[84.9]
2-15/64
[56.7]
The Series BPI Battery Powered Indicator accepts RTD or Thermocouple input and
provides local or remote display of temperature measurements. Quickly navigate the menu
system to customize for each application. Three push buttons allow the user to select input
type, engineering units (F or C), offset temperature, decimal point position, and password
protection. The indicator is housed in a polycarbonate NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure for
additional protection from the environment.
Measuring Ranges
Sensor Range F (C)
K
-328 to 2498 (-200 to 1370)
J
-148 to 2192 (-100 to 1200)
T
-346 to 752 (-210 to 400)
N
-292 to 2372 (-180 to 1300)
R
14 to 3200 (-10 to 1760)
S
14 to 3200 (-10 to 1760)
E
-328 to 1832 (-200 to 1000)
F
-148 to 1112 (-100 to 600)
Pt100 -148 to 1472 (-100 to 800)
Ni120
-148 to 1472 (-100 to 800)
352
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Thermocouple or RTD depending on model.
Accuracy: Thermocouple input: 0.1% of FS, 0.5C (plus sensor); RTD: 0.2C
0.1% of reading (plus sensor error).
Power Requirements: 3.6 V AA lithium metal battery, included, user replaceable.
Battery Life: > 2 years.
Display: 4-digit LCD.
Resolution: 0.1C.
Ambient Operating Temperature: 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C).
Weight: 6.0 oz (170 g).
Front Panel Protection: NEMA 4X (IP66).
Model
BPI-101
BPI-102
Input
3-wire Pt100 or Ni120
K, J, T, N, R, S, E, or F thermocouples
353_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:23 PM Page 353
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
BGM
Bar Graph Meter

Clear Relative Position & High Resolution In One
3-51/64
[96.39]
25/32
[19.81]
1-13/32
[35.56]
XXXX
XX.X
55/64
[21.72]
21/64
[8.33]
17/64
[6.92]
55/64
[21.84]
TARE
XX.X
MENU
XX.X
XX.X
5-45/64
[144.78]
51/64
[20.07]
PEAK
XX.X
19/32
[14.99]
Horizontal
XX.X
Vertical
BGM H 0 0 N W D AE AO
BGM
H
V
Enclosure
0
Rating
4
0
Relays
2
N
Voltage
E
Retransmission
W
Power Supply
S
D
D
Signal
A
Input
B
AE
Scale Label*
AF
AH
AI
AM
AZ
Scale Range*
AO
AQ
AT
AV
AW
AX
AZ
BA
Example
Series
Orientation
L1
L2
SETPT/
RESET
Vertical
The Series BGM Digital Bar Graph Meter is extremely durable and can replace a wide
range of analog meters. The 4-digit display will significantly reduce the potential for
human error in reading by eliminating errors commonly produced by the viewing angle
when reading analog meters. This series has a key pad that allows for easy access of
features without complex menu structures. With the combined ability to create a wide
range of custom faceplate and the optional NEMA 4X bezel, the Series BGM can be used
in a variety of applications. The LED bar graph adds a visual indicator of the measured
value so that it can be visually analyzed, preventing accidents or system failures from
happening.
BGM-H00-NWD-AE-AO
Bar Graph Meter
Horizontal
Vertical
None
NEMA 4X
None
2 Relay Outputs
None
Voltage Retransmission
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
5 to 12 VDC
10 to 30 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
4 to 20 mA
0 to 5 VDC
Feet
FPM
Inches w.c.
Inch/sec
Level
Tank Level
0 to 5
0 to 10
0 to 20
0 to 30
0 to 40
0 to 50
0 to 75
0 to 100
Panel Meters/
Indicators
VALLEY
>
21/64
[8.33]
21/32
[16.51]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA.
Accuracy: 0.05% FS.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, 5 to 12 VDC, or 10 to 30 VDC model
dependent.
Power Consumption:
120 VAC: 2.4 W @ 20 mA max;
5 to 12 VDC: 1.2 W @ 100 mA max;
10 to 30 VDC: 1.5 W @ 50 mA max.
Display:
LEDDisplay: 4 red colored digits, 0.3 height;
LED Graph: 31 element bar, 0.2 W x 3.1 L (5.08 mm W x 78.74 mm L).
Decimal Point: 3 positions, user selectable.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -67 to 176F (-55 to 80C).
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 1 or NEMA 4X, model dependent IP65 front.
Electrical Connections: Removable screw terminal blocks.
Outputs: 2 SPST relay outputs (optional).
Switch Rating: 1 A @ 200 V.
Enclosure Material:
Bezel: Black epoxy enameled steel;
Window: Acrylic;
Case and Mounting Bracket: 304 SS.
Time Delay: 0.5 sec.
ACCESSORY
A-BGM-RPM, Remote Programmer Module
*Note: Contact factory for additional options.

NEMA4Xoption requires A-BGM-RPMfor programming.
353
Annunciator/Alarm Modules
PROCESS CONTROL
354_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:25 AM Page 354
Series
SC1
Process/Temperature Alarm Switch Module

Two Form C (SPDT) Switches, Small Size, Mounts Easily on 35 mm DIN Rail
0.886
[22.5]
3.88
[98.5]
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS)

DIN EN 50022-35
(NOT SUPPLIED)
1.40
[35.3]
2.95
[75]
ADAPTOR
BRACKET
FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING
(OPTIONAL)
3.88
[98.5]
The Series SC1090 Limit/Alarm Switch Modules are on-off or limit switches with field
selectable inputs. Input type can be either a process signal, thermocouple, or RTD based on
the model. Input type, scale range, and output type selection are made through easily accessible
switches without the need to open the product. Each unit has two form C (SPDT) relays
which can operate independently, or be logically connected to operate as a DPDT output. A
two color LED indicator indicates the status of each output relay. These units mount easily
on a standard 35 mm DIN rail. Low Voltage (SCLXXXX) units are also available.
Model
SC1090
SC1290
Input
4 to 20 mA, 10 to 50 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 mV
Thermocouple Type J, K, R, S, T, E
SC1490
RTD Pt1000 Ni100, Ni120, Cu10,

Ni-Fe1000, N-Fe2000
SCL1090 4 to 20 mA, 10 to 50 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 mV
SCL1290 Thermocouple Type J, K, R, S, T, E
SCL1490 RTD Pt1000 Ni100, Ni120, Cu10,
Ni-Fe1000, N-Fe2000
Power
Supply
85 to 265
VDC/VAC
85 to 265
VDC/VAC
85 to 265
VDC/VAC
12 to 24
VDC/VAC
12 to 24
VDC/VAC
12 to 24
VDC/VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: See table.
Power Supply:
SCmodels:85 to 265 VDC/VAC, 50
to 400 Hz;
SCL models:12 to 24 VDC/VAC, 50
to 400 Hz.
Isolation: 1500V rms between outputs,
input, and power.
Set Points: Adjustable 0 to 100% of
span.
Deadband: Adjustable 0.25% to 100%
of span.
Drift: 0.02%/C typical 0.05%/C
maximum.
Ambient Temperature Range:
Storage: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Excitation Current: (SC1490) Cu10
= 5 mA; Plt 100, Ni 100, Ni 120 =
500A; Plt 500, NiFe 1000 = 100
A; Plt 1000 = 50 A.
Lead Compensation Error: (SC1490)

0.02%/.
Open Lead Protection: (SC1490)
upscale only.
Input Impedance:
SC1090:Voltage input = 1 M,
current input = 10;
SC1290:3 M.
Sensor Burnout Protection:
Selectable.
Relay Output: Form C, SPDT, one per
set point, 5A @ 250 VAC, resistive.
Latch Circuit Reset: Automatic at
power up. Manual with reset switch on
front of module.
Indicators: One dual color LED per set
point. Red = relay on, green = relay off.
Wiring Terminals: Screw driven
compression type.
ACCESSORY
Series
AN2
Indicating Alarm Annunciator

Up to 8 Inputs, Integral Power Supply
37/64 [14.68]
3-29/32
[99.22]
4-5/32
[105.57]
3-9/16
[90.49]
3-1/2
[88.9]
4-7/32
[107.16]
1-31/32
[50]
2-7/32
[56.36]
The Series AN2 Indicating Alarm Annunciator provides visible and audible alarms
for up to eight inputs. The annunciator also has two SPDT relay outputs that can be used
to initiate external alarms, buzzers, or paging devices. The Integral 24 VDC power supply
can power most level, temperature, pressure, and flow switches. Audible alarm conditions
can be acknowledged, reset, or silenced either via the front panel push buttons or the rear
terminal block. The Series AN2 can be set to any common ISA sequences including FirstOut.
Number of
Model
Outputs
Power Supply
AN24-1 4
85 to 265 VAC
AN24-2 4
12 to 36 VDC
AN28-1 8
85 to 265 VAC
AN28-2 8
12 to 36 VDC
354
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: NO or NCswitches, open
collector transistor (open circuit voltage
= 3.3 VDC); Logic levels: LO = 0 to 0.9
VDC, HI = 2.4 to 28 VDC (100 K
input impedance).
Outputs: Two SPDT relay (3 A @ 250
VAC or 30 VDC, resistive; 1/14 HP @
125/250 VAC, inductive).
to 65C).
50/60 Hz, 90 to 265 VDC; 12 to 36
VDC, 12 to 24 VAC(depending on
model).
4
[101.6]
4-13/16
[22.24]
Power Consumption: 20 W (6 W on
low voltage models).
Mounting: 1/8 DIN.
Housing Material: ULrated 94V-0
high impact plastic.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66)
front panel.
Weight: 9.6 oz (272 g).
355_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:25 AM Page 355
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
SC4
Iso Verter II Signal Conditioning Modules

Accepts Virtually All Standard Process Signals
0.886
[22.5]
1.400
[35.5]
3.880 [98.5]
Linearized and isolated RTD and Thermocouple transmitters are part of the Series
SC4000 Iso Verter II Signal Conditioning Modules. These modules completely isolate the
input from the output and from ground. Compatible with industry standard 35 mm DIN
Rail mount transmitters and isolators, these modules are easily applied in new or existing
installations.
The SC4380 Process Signal Converter/Isolator accepts virtually all standard
process signals as an input, and isolates and retransmits the signal in either the same units
or virtually any other standard process signal. The SC4380 can be field programmed for
reverse or direct action and can receive and transmit single sided or bipolar* signals. Low
Voltage units (SCL) are also available.
The SC4151 RTD Transmitters each offer a fixed scale range input (selected when
ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selectable 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output.
Output is selected by simple switch settings. Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available.
The SC4130 Thermocouple Transmitter offers a fixed scale range input (selected
when ordered) and a linearized, isolated, field selectable 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output.
Output is selected by simple switch settings.
Low Voltage units (SCL) are also available.
Note: The term bipolar refers to an input or output that crosses zero volts. Certain
devices have ranges that run from minus to plus voltages (eg. -1 to +5 VDC, -10 to
+10 VDC, etc.). The SC4380 Iso Verter II can be set up to accept a bipolar signal
input or provide a bipolar output.
ACCESSORY
SPECIFICATIONS
Isolation: 1500 VAC RMS.
Linearity: 0.1% of full-scale.
Drift: 0.02%/C typical, 0.05%/ C maximum.
Power Supply: SC: 85 to 265 VDC/VAC 50 to 400 Hz; SCL: 12 to 24 VDC/VAC 50
to 400 Hz.
Output Loads: Current: 600 max voltage: 500 min (20 mA maximum).
Input Characteristics: SC4380: Voltage: 1 M impedance; Current: 10 ;
SC4151: RTD Search current < 500 A; SC4130: 3 M impedance.
Case Size: 0.866 W (22.5 mm) x 2.950 H (75.0 mm) 3 3.880 D (98.5 mm).
Mounting: Mounts on industry standard 35 mm DIN Rail (DIN EN50022-35).
To Order Use Range Code as Suffix:
SC4130 & SCL4130
Model SC4130 Range Codes Model SCL4130 Range Codes
A = J, -100 to 200C
A = J, -100 to 200C
C = J, 0 to 100C
C = J, 0 to 100C
D = J, 0 to 500F
D = J, 0 to 500F
E = J, 0 to 250C
E = J, 0 to 250C
F = J, 0 to 750C
F = J, 0 to 750C
G = J, 0 to 1000F
G = J, 0 to 1000F
H = K, -150 to 350F
H = K, -150 to 350F
J = K, -100 to 200C
J = K, -100 to 200C
K = K, 0 to 500F
K = K, 0 to 500F
L = K, 0 to 250C
L = K, 0 to 250C
M = K, 0 to 1000F
M = K, 0 to 1000F
N = K, 0 to 500C
N = K, 0 to 500C
P = K, 0 to 2000F
P = K, 0 to 2000F
R = K, 0 to 1000C
R = K, 0 to 1000C
S = T, -300 to 250F
S = T, -300 to 250F
T = T, -200 to 200C
T = T, -200 to 200C
SC4151 & SCL4151
Model SC4151 Range Codes
A = DIN, -100 to 200C
B = DIN, 0 to 100C
C = DIN, 0 to 150C
D = DIN, 0 to 200F
E = DIN, 0 to 200C
F = DIN, 0 to 400F
G = DIN, 0 to 250C
H = DIN, 0 to 500F
J = DIN, 0 to 500C
K = DIN, 0 to 1000F
Model SCL4151 Range Codes

A = DIN, -100 to 200C
B = DIN, 0 to 100C
C = DIN, 0 to 150C
D = DIN, 0 to 200F
E = DIN, 0 to 200C
F = DIN, 0 to 400F
G = DIN, 0 to 250C
H = DIN, 0 to 500F
J = DIN, 0 to 500C
K = DIN, 0 to 1000F
SC4380 & SCL4380 Operating Ranges

Inputs
Current
0 to 5 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
0 to 50 mA
0 to 100 mA
1 to 5 mA
4 to 20 mA
10 to 50 mA
Voltage
0 to 100 mV
0 to 200 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 1 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
2 to 10 V
Outputs
Current
0 to 1 mA
0 to 5 mA
0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 mA
4 to 20 mA
Voltage
0 to 1 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
2 to 10 V
355
Signal Conditioners/
Isolating Transmitters
2.950
[75]
PROCESS CONTROL
356_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:24 AM Page 356
Series
861SSR
DIN/Panel Mountable Solid State Relay

10 Amp, SPST-NO Operation, Internal Heat Sink
RoHS
45/64
[17.78]
19/32
[15.24]
19/64
[7.62]
13/64
[5.08] 3-1/2
[88.90]
GREEN
LED
3-19/32
[91.44]
1-51/64
[45.72]
1-13/32
[35.56]
Relays
2-19/32
[66.04]
3/32
[2.54]
13/64
[5.08]
19/32
[15.24]
Series 861SSR DIN/Panel Mountable Solid State Relay features an internal heat
sink, bistable clips for DIN rail or panel mounting and an LED indicator light. It is a
completely solid state relay - it has NO moving parts. The DSSR provides reliable switching
and long-life operation in applications where high inrush currents or induced currents can
affect mechanical state relay operation. The compact housing also minimizes panel space.
AC Operated
Model
861SSR210-AC-1
DC Operated
Model
861SSR210-DC-1
Input Voltage Range

90 to 280 VAC
Rated Current Load

10 amp
Input Voltage Range

3 to 32 VDC
Rated Current Load

10 amp
ACCESSORY
Series
62
45/64
[17.78] 1-13/32
[35.56] 2-37/64
[65.53]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range:
24 to 280 VAC.
Sensor Current: 10 amps max.
terminals.
Switching Operation: SPST normally
open.
Switching Type: Zero cross.
3/32
[2.54]

(-30 to 80C).
Voltage Loss: 1.6 VAC max.
Output Leakage Current: 10 mA max.
Housing: Lexan 943.
Weight: 4.1 oz.
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUL,
UL.
FEATURES
Internal heat sink
No contact bounce
No mechanical delay
DIN and panel mountable
17 mm wide modular design
Hockey Puck Solid State Relay

10 or 25 Amp, SPST-NO Operation
RoHS
1-3/32
[27.94]
LED
OUTPUT
SOLID STATE RELAY

HSSR-XXA-XX
4
INPUT
(INPUT VOLTAGE)
1-45/64
[43.18]
1
[25.40]
DATE CODE
1-51/64
[45.72]
Series 62 Hockey Puck Style Solid State Relay features a terminal cover and LED
status indicator. The optically coupled circuitry isolates the input terminals from the output
terminals to give the relay 100% pure solid state performance.
AC Operated
Model
6210AXXSZS-AC90
6225AXXSZS-AC90
DC Operated
Model
6210AXXSZS-DC3
6225AXXSZS-DC3
356
Input Voltage Range

90 to 280 VAC
90 to 280 VAC
Rated Current Load

10 amp
25 amp
Input Voltage Range

3 to 32 VDC
3 to 32 VDC
Rated Current Load

10 amp
25 amp
SPECIFICATIONS
24 to 280 VAC.
Electrical Connection: Spade lug.
Switching Operation: SPST normally
open.
Switching Type: Zero cross.
FEATURES
Hockey puck design
Finger-safe cover
LED status indicator
Optically coupled circuitry
1-13/32
1 [35.56]
[25.40]
2-19/64
[58.42]
(-40 to 80C).
Voltage Loss: 1.6 VAC max.
Output Leakage Current: 10 mA max.
Housing: Polyamide 6.
Weight: 3.5 oz.
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUR,
UR.
357_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:24 AM Page 357
Electromechanical Relay
30 Amp, SPDT and DPDT Operation
1-5/8
[41.40]
19/64
[7.62] 1-15/64
1-1/16
[31.50]
[26.92]
R 5/64
[R 1.80]
5/64
[2.03]
SPDT
FEATURES
Compact size
30 amp rating
Quick-connect terminals
Flange mounting
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
DC Operated Model
9AS5D5224
92S11D22D12
92S11D22D24
Input Voltage
24 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
1-3/32
[27.94]
2-3/64
[51.85]
2-11/16
[68.07]
2-11/32
[59.44]
SPDT
The 9 Electromechanical Relay is small in size, features Class F insulation for a max
coil temperature of 155C, quick-connect terminals for simple connection, and is panel
mountable. The relays are compact and impervious to shock and vibration. The EMR is
perfect for motor control, power supplies, lighting, and compressor loads.
AC Operated Model
9AS5A5224
9AS5A52120
92S11A22D24
92S11A22D120
1
[25.25]
0.25 X 0.033 [6.35 X 0.84] QUICK CONNECT

TEMINALS WITH SOLDER HOLE
3/32
FOR
#8
SCREWS
[2.29]
1-39/64
1-11/32 3/16
1-3/16 [40.89]
[34.29] [4.83]
[29.97]
Coil
Resistance
500
3000
250
1600
Coil
Resistance
576
86
1600
Series
725
DPDT
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 12-277 VAC; 5-110 VDC.
Electrical Connection: Quick-connect tab terminals. SPDT 0.187 coil
terminal/0.25 contact terminal; DPDT 0.25 coil terminal/0.25 contact terminal.
Switching Operation: SPDT or DPDT.
Electrical Rating: SPDT: NO 30 A @ 240 VAC / 28 VDC; NC 10 A @ 240 VAC /
28 VDC; DPDT: 30 A @ 240 VAC 20 A @ 28 VDC.
Temperature Limits: Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C); Operation: -40 to 131F
(-40 to 55C).
Voltage Loss: 2.5 VA (VAC); 1W (VDC).
Cycle Life: 100,000 cycles (electrical); 10,000,000 cycles (mechanical).
Housing: Polyester resin.
Weight: 1.16 oz (45 g) (SPDT); 3 oz (85 g) (DPDT).
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUL, UL, (EMR-XXXX-DPDT), cUR, UR (EMRXXXX-SPDT).
ACCESSORIES
16-9ADIN1, Din Adaptor
Power Relay
SPST-NO Operation, 30 Amp or DPST-NO Operation, 25 Amp
RoHS
3/16
[4.90] 5/16
[8.00]
1-19/64
[33.10]
1/4
[6.30]
2-3/32
[53.20]
The Series 725 Power Relays are designed to switch high current loads in the most
demanding of applications. By having a high dielectric strength from the coils to the
contacts, the relay is able to withstand severe voltage surges and spikes as commonly seen
in inductive loads. Flag and LED indicators show the relay status and if there is power to
the coil. A push-to-test button allows for manual testing of the relay operation without
providing an electrical trigger. Integral mounting ears allows the relay to be panel
mounted or DIN rail mounted without the need for an external socket. For quicker wiring
installation, the Series 725 is available with quick connect tabs or screw terminals.
ACOperated Model
725AXXBC3ML-24A
725AXXBC3ML-120A
725AXXBC3ML-240A
725AXXSC3ML-120A
725AXXSC3ML-240A
725BXXBC3ML-24A
725BXXBC3ML-120A
725BXXBC3ML-240A
725BXXSC3ML-24A
725BXXSC3ML-120A
725BXXSC3ML-240A
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
DC Operated Model
725AXXBC3ML-24D
725AXXSC3ML-24D
725BXXBC3ML-24D
725BXXSC3ML-24D
Input Voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Rated
Current Load
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
Rated
CurrentLoad
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
Electrical
Connections
Quick connect
Quick connect
Quick connect
Screw
Screw
Quick connect
Quick connect
Quick connect
Screw
Screw
Screw
Electrical
Connections
Quick connect
Screw
Quick connect
Screw
1-31/32
[50.00]
2-21/64
[59.10]
2-43/64
[67.70]
1-19/64
[33.10]
1-15/16
[49.40]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC.
Operating Range (% of Nominal): 75 to 110%.
Electrical Connection: Silver alloy quick-connect terminals/screw terminals.
Switching Operation: SPST-NO or DPST-NO.
Electrical Rating: SPST-NO: 30 A @ 277 VAC 50/60Hz or 30 VDC; DPST-NO: 25
A @ 277 VAC 50/60Hz or 30 VDC.
(-50 to 100C).
Power Consumption: 2.5 VA or 1.9 W.
Housing: Plastic polycarbonate.
Weight: 4.2 oz (120 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, RoHS, cUR, UR.
357
Relays
DPDT
1-61/64
[49.53]
RoHS
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
9
PROCESS CONTROL
358_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:39 PM Page 358
Series
199
Open Style Power Relays

DPDT, 40 Amp Rating (AC or DC)
RoHS
2-5/16
[58.80]
2-1/2
[63.50]
Relays
3-1/8
[79.40]
The Series 199 Open Style Power Relays are designed for high AC and DC current
applications up to 40 Amps. These mercury-free DPDT relays are available in a variety of
trigger voltages and coil resistances to fit most common applications. The riveted housing
construction increases the durability and reduces the effects of vibration on the relay.
ACOperated Model
W199AX-13
W199AX-14
W199AX-15
DC Operated Model
W199X-13
Input Voltage
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Series
750H
Coil Resistance
12
290
1200
Coil Resistance
290
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24 to 240 VAC, 24 VDC.
Operating Range (% of Nominal): 85 to 110% (AC operated); 80 to 110% (DC
operated).
Electrical Connection: AgSnO screw terminals.
Switching Operation: DPDT.
Electrical Rating: 40 A @ 300 VAC/28 VDC; 5 A @ 480/600 VAC.
Temperature Limits: Storage: -67 to 212F (-55 to 100C); Operation: -67 to
131F (-55 to 55C).
Power Consumption: 10 VA, 4 W.
Housing: Plastic phenolic.
Weight: 8 to 11 oz (227 to 312 g).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, RoHS, cUL, UL, cUR, UR.
Hermetically Sealed Relay

12 Amp, DPDT Operation (8-pin) or 3PDT Operation (11-pin)
RoHS
1-29/64
[37.00]
1-1/2
[38.00]
1-3/32 [27.94]
2-63/64
[76.00]
1-39/64
[40.89]
1-7/16
[36.58]
1-63/64
[50.30]
3-5/32
[80.00]
1-37/64
[40.00]
5/32
[3.81]
1-11/32
[34.20]
The Series 750H Hermetically Sealed Electromechanical Relay is designed to be

used in Class I Division 2 hazardous area locations. Gold flashed contacts provide
protection against oxidation in low current / voltage applications. 8-pin and 11-pin sockets
are available to allow quick and easy installation for both surface and DIN rail mounting.
ACOperated
Model
750XBXH-24A
750XBXH-120A
750XCXH-24A
750XCXH-120A
Input
Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Coil
Resistance
72
1700
72
1700
Number of Pins
8-pin
8-pin
11-pin
11-pin
ACCESSORIES
70-750DL11-1, Socket for 750H series relay (11-pin)
70-750DL8-1, Socket for 750H series relay (8-pin)
70-ASMM-24, Protection modules, MOV suppressor, 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-120, Protection modules, MOV suppressor, 24 VAC/VDC
16-750/788CBJ-1, Coil bus jumpers
358
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24 to 120 VAC.
Operating Range (% of Nominal): 85 to 110% (AC operated); 80 to 110% (DC
operated).
Electrical Connection: Silver alloy plug-in contacts.
Switching Operation: DPDT (8-pin models) or 3PDT (11-pin models).
Electrical Rating: 12 A @ 120/240 VAC (50/60 Hz) or 28 VDC.
(-40 to 55C).
Power Consumption: 1.2 VA; 0.9 W.
Housing: Metal.
Weight: 4.6 oz (130 g).
Enclosure Rating: Class 1 Div. 2.
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS, cUL*, UL*, cUR, UR.
*When used with listed sockets.
359_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:22 AM Page 359
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
782H
Hermetically Sealed Ice Cube Relays

5 Amp, 4PDT Operation, Class 1 Div II Rated
RoHS
1-9/32
[32.54]
CHINA
T-CODE T4A
BOTTOM VIEW
Relays
1/64
[0.51]
QUALIFIED FOR CLASS 1

DIVISION 2. GROUPS A, B, C, D
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
WHEN USED WITH APPROVED
SOCKETS. USE HOLD DOWN
CLIP WHEN SOCKET MOUNTED
1-5/32
[29.36]
31BN
WARNING: DO NOT DISCONNECT

WHEN CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS
782XDXH21XXX VXC
D932ADL
1/4
[6.35]
CONTACTS
5 AMP 120/240 VAC, 30 VDC
IND. CONT. EQ.
FOR USE IN
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
29/32
[23.10]
Picture shown with socket accessory

(sold separately)
The Series 782H Hermetically Sealed Ice Cube Relay is suitable for switching up
to four circuits in a hazardous environment. It features a hermetically sealed housing and
a safety seal to withstand a wash-down. The plug-in socket is easy to mount and remove
from crowded DIN rails.
Coil Resistance
4430
Coil Resistance
650
ACCESSORY
70-782D14-1, Socket for 782H Series Relay
Hazardous Rated Solid State Relays

15 Amp Rating, SPST-NO, Internal Heat Sink
2-9/16 [65.00]
1-23/64
[34.60]
9/64
[3.40]
11/16
[17.60]
5/8
[16.00]
INPUT
Caution!
High Temperature
24-280 VAC
OUTPUT
861HSSRXXX-XX-X
INPUT: (VOLTAGE)
10A
1-25/32
[45.30]
2-5/8
[66.80]
(VOLTAGE)
3-41/64
[92.40]
3-35/64
[90.00]
861HSSRXXX-XX-X
Patent Pending
CERTIFIED FOR
CLASS 1
DIVISION 2
HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
GROUPS 1, B, C, & D
Derating
1-13/32
[35.60]
RoHS
Derating
Series
861H
DIN RAIL
Input Voltage
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
#14 AWG COPPER WIRE MAXIMUM

RATED AT 75C
7.1 lb-in TORQUE MAXIMUM
ACOperated Model
782XDXH21-120A
DCOperated Model
782XDXH21-24D
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 120 VAC, 24 VDC.
Switching Operation: 4PDT.
Electrical Rating: 5 A @ 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 30 VDC.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
Operation: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C).
Housing: Metal.
9/16
[14.30]
The Series 861H Hazardous Rated Solid State Relay provides reliable switching
and long life operation in some of the most demanding applications, such as medical
equipment, mining, oil and gas. It integrates an internal heat sink and internal snubber
into a compact housing to save space in the panel. In order to reduce installation time,
integral tabs can be used to snap the relay onto a DIN rail or surface mount to a wall inside
the panel. LED indicator lights give the user quick visual indication of the switch status.
The 861H is intrinsically safe rated for Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D.
Model
861HSSR210-AC-1
861HSSR210-DC-1
861HSSR115-DD
Input Voltage
90 to 280 VAC
3 to 32 VDC
3.5 to 32 VDC
Load Voltage
24 to 280 VAC
24 to 280 VAC
3 to 50 VDC
Rated Current
10 amp
10 amp
15 amp
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Connection: Screw terminals.
Switching Operation: SPST normally open.
Switching Type: AC/DC: Zero cross; DD: DC switching.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C);
Voltage Loss: AC/DC: 1.6 VAC max; DD: 0.5 VDC max.
Output Leakage Current: AC/DC: 10 mA max; DD: 0.25 mA max.
Hazardous Classification: Class 1 Division 2; Hazardous Locations: Groups A, B,
C and D.
Weight: 4.1 oz (127.1 g).
Agency Approvals: RoHS, cUR, UR.
359
SPDT Ice Cube Relays

20 Amp, SPDT Operation
RoHS
1-19/32
[40.60]
1-3/32
[27.09]
(VOLTAGE)
RoHS
WIRING DIAGRAM
NEMA - IEC
OBSERVE POLARITY
DC COILS VIEWED
FROM PIN END
Relays
35/64
[14.00]
When used with socket

Current limited 10
Reading at relay or
Socket whichever is less
Series
781
COIL: XXX VXC

20A, 277 VAC 50/60Hz, 28 VDC
CSA 1DA, 277 VAC, RES
1/2HP. 110-120 V 50/60Hz
1HP. 220-250VAC 50/60Hz
8300 PILOT DUTY
PROCESS CONTROL
360_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:22 AM Page 360

(sold separately)
The Series 781 Electromechanical Ice Cube Relay is a full-featured SPDT relay
that can be used to handle loads up to 20 amps for AC or DC circuits. It features a flag
status indicator and a LED status lamp to let the user know when the relay is activated. In
order to differentiate between AC and DC actuated models, the push-to-test button is colorcoded. For testing the operation, a removable lock-down lever holds the test button in place.
The clear plastic housing gives a view of the contacts, and there is a removable I.D tag for
labeling the circuit.
ACOperated Model
781XAXM4L-24A
781XAXM4L-120A
781XAXM4L-240A
DCOperated Model
781XAXM4L-24D
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Coil Resistance
180
4430
15720
Coil Resistance
750
Series
782
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24 to 240 VAC; 24 VDC.
Switching Operation: SPDT.
Electrical Rating: 20 A @ 120 / 277 VAC (50/60Hz) or 28 VDC.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
Power Consumption: 0.9 VA; 0.7W.
Weight: 1.02 oz (29 g).
ACCESSORY
70-781D5-1A, Socket for 781 Series Relay
DPDT Ice Cube Relays

15 Amp, DPDT Operation
RoHS
53/64
[21.00]
19/64
[7.37]
IND. CONT. EQ.
ALTERNATE NEMA OR
IEC NUMBERS,
VIEWED FROM PIN
SIDE
When used with socket 70-458-1,

70-7820-1 or 70-78208-1
Current limited to reading of
relay or socket whichever is less
1-3/32
[27.90]
15A, 120 VAC 50/60Hz RES

12A, 277 VAC 50/60Hz RES
10A 277 VAC RES. (CSA)
12A, 28 VDC
1/2 HP 120 VAC
1 HP 250 VAC
8300 PILOT DUTY
1/64
[0.50]
1-17/32
[39.10]
3/16
[4.75]

(sold separately)
The Series 782 Electromechanical Ice Cube Relay is a full-featured DPDT relay
that can be used to switch two different devices with a single trigger. With a rating of 15
amps, the relay can be used to stop and start small fans, motors, and pumps directly. It
features a flag status indicator and a LED status lamp to let the user know when the relay
is activated. In order to differentiate between AC and DC actuated models, the push-totest button is color-coded. For testing the operation, a removable lock-down lever holds the
test button in place. The clear plastic housing gives a view of the contacts, and there is a
removable I.D tag for labeling the circuit.
ACOperated Model
782XBXM4L-24A
782XBXM4L-120A
782XBXM4L-240A
DCOperated Model
782XBXM4L-24D
360
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Coil Resistance
180
4430
15720
Coil Resistance
650
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24 to 240 VAC; 24 VDC.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120 VAC 50/60Hz; 12 A @ 277 VAC 50/60 Hz or 28
VDC (UL); 10 A @ 277 VAC 50/60 Hz (CSA).
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C);
Power Consumption: 1.2 VA; 0.9W.
ACCESSORY
361_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:21 AM Page 361
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
783
3PDT Ice Cube Relays

15 Amp, 3PDT Operation
3/16
[4.75]
RoHS
1-37/64
[40.00]
1-7/32
[30.80]
1/64
[0.51]
LISTED 367C
IND. CONT. ED.
When used with socket 70-78301

Current limited to rating at relay
or socket whichever is less
1-3/32
[27.90]
(VOLTAGE)
Relays
17/64
[6.57]
(sold separately)
The Series 783 Electromechanical Ice Cube Relay is a full featured 3PDT relay
that can control up to 3 devices with a single trigger. It features a flag status indicator and
a LED status lamp to let the user know when the relay is activated. In order to differentiate
between AC and DC actuated models, the push-to-test button is color-coded. For testing
the operation, a removable lock-down lever holds the test button in place. The clear plastic
housing gives a view of the contacts, and there is a removable I.D tag for labeling the circuit.
The Series 783 can handle loads up to 15 amps.
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Coil Resistance
103
2770
Coil Resistance
400
Series
784
Temperature Limits: Storage: -40 to

185F (-40 to 85C); Operation: -40 to
131F (-40 to 55C).
Cycle Life: 200,000 cycles (electrical);
10,000,000 cycles (mechanical).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, RoHS,
cUL, UL, cUR, UR.
ACCESSORIES
70-ASMM-24, Protection Modules, MOV Suppressor, 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-120, Protection Modules, MOV Suppressor,120 VAC/VDC
70-ASMD-250, Protection Modules, Protection Diode, 6 to 250 VDC
16-750/788CBJ-1, Coil Bus Jumpers
4PDT Ice Cube Relays

15 Amp, 4PDT Operation
RoHS
1-3/32
[27.90]
17/64
[6.60]
1/64
[0.50]
When used with socket 70-78401.

Current limited to rating of relay
or socket whichever is less.
1-19/32
[40.60]
784XDXM4L
COIL: XXX VXC
367G IND. CONT. EQ.
ACOperated Model
783XCXM4L-24A
783XCXM4L-120A
DCOperated Model
783XCXM4L-24D
SPECIFICATIONS
24 to 120 VAC; 24 VDC.
Electrical Connection: Silver alloy
plug-in contacts.
50/60 Hz; 12 A @ 277 VAC 50/60 Hz or
28 VDC.
RoHS
(VOLTAGE)
1-17/32
[39.10]
3/16
[4.75]
15A, 120 V 50/60 Hz (30A MAX) 1

12A, 28 VDC
12A, 277 V 50/60 Hz (20A MAX) 1
1/2 HP 120 VAC, 3/4 HP 250 VAC 1
8300 PILOT DUTY

(sold separately)
The Series 784 Electromechanical Ice Cube Relay is a full featured 4PDT relay
that can be used to handle loads up to 15 amps for AC or DC circuits. Utilizing the same
trigger, this relay can be used in underground parking garage applications to signal audible
and visual alarms for high levels of carbon monoxide, while opening the dampers and
starting the exhaust fans. It features a flag status indicator and a LED status lamp to let
the user know when the relay is activated. In order to differentiate between AC and DC
actuated models, the push-to-test button is color-coded. For testing the operation, a
removable lock-down lever holds the test button in place. The clear plastic housing gives a
view of the contacts and there is a removable I.D tag for labeling the circuit.
SPECIFICATIONS
24 to 120 VAC; 24 VDC.
Electrical Connection: Silver alloy
plug-in contacts.
50/60Hz; 12 A @ 277 VAC 50/60 Hz or
28 VDC.
ACOperated Model
784XDXM4L-24A
784XDXM4L-120A
DCOperated Model
784XDXM4L-24D
ACCESSORIES
70-784D14-1, Socket for 784 Series Relay
70-ASMM-24, Protection Modules, MOV Suppressor, 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-120, Protection Modules, MOV Suppressor,120 VAC/VDC
70-ASMD-250, Protection Modules, Protection Diode, 6 to 250 VDC
Input Voltage
24 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Coil Resistance
84.5
2220
Coil Resistance
388
Temperature Limits: Storage: -40 to

185F (-40 to 85C); Operation: -40 to
131F (-40 to 55C).
Cycle Life: 200,000 cycles (electrical);
10,000,000 cycles (mechanical).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, RoHS,
cUL, UL, cUR, UR.
361
PROCESS CONTROL
362_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:55 PM Page 362
Series
MCS
Miniature Current Switch

Low Cost, Solid or No Core, LED Confirmation, Adjustable Set Point
RoHS
63/64
[25.15]
CurrentTransformers,
Switches
5/32
[3.94]
1-21/32
[42.25]
1/8
[3.18]
2-1/32
[51.73]
2-31/64
[63.03]
SolidCore
NoCore
The Series MCS Miniature Current Switches are ideal for monitoring the current
usage in fuse boxes and small control panels. Both models have adjustable set points and
LED indication to show there is power to the unit and when the switch activates. Set points
can be adjusted using the potentiometer next to the LEDs.
Due to the size of the switch, it is only offered in solid core and no core versions. The no
core version has terminal blocks which can accept currents up to 1A directly into the unit.
Minimum
Set Point Set Point
Case
Model
Adjustable 0.50
MCS-111050 Solid Core
Adjustable 0.01
MCS-111001 No Core
(Terminal Connection)
Series
CCS
LED
Red/Green
Red/Green
SolidCore
NoCore
SPECIFICATIONS
Amperage Range:
MCS-111050: 0.5 to 50A continuous;
MCS-111001: 0.01 to 1A continuous.
Output Rating: Isolated, N.O. 0.3 A @ 130 V DC/AC.
Power Requirements: None, self-powered.
Hysteresis: 1%.
Response Time: <200 ms.
Enclosure Rating: UL 94V-0 flammability rated ABS, insulation class 600 V.
Weight: 0.5 oz (14.5 g).
Current Switches
Solid or Split Core, LED Visual Confirmation, Fixed or Adjustable Set Point
2-29/32
[74.00]
63/64
[25.00]
33/64
[13.00]
1-9/64
[29.00]
55/64
[22.00]
2-31/64
[63.00]
3/4
[19.00]
3-1/2
[89.00]
Solid Models
The Series CCS Current Switches are ideal for monitoring the operating status of
fans, pumps, and motors. These self-powered switches can be hung or tied directly to cables
or wires. For use on existing installations, split core models can be installed without
disconnecting cables. LED indicators provide a visual confirmation that the current is
flowing through the core. Both fixed and adjustable set points are available. The adjustable
models utilize a potentiometer to easily adjust the set point.
Set Point
Fixed
Adjustable
Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Minimum
Set Point
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.50
1.00
1.50
Dry Contact
Output
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Model
CCS-121050
CCS-111100
CCS-221100
CCS-211150
CCS-131100
CCS-231150
Case
Solid core
Solid core
Split core
Split core
Solid core
Split core
362
LED
Red
Red/Green
Red
Red/Green
Red/Green
Red/Green
3-1/2
[89.00]
2X 13/64
[5.00]
1-17/64
45/64
[32.00]
[18.00]
33/64
[13.00]
2-7/16
[62.00]
2X
13/64
[5.00]
43/64
[17.00]
2-3/4
[70.00]
19/32
[15.00]
2-33/64
[64.00]
55/64
[22.00]
55/64
[22.00]
Split Models
4-1/64
[102.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Amperage Range: 0 to 200 A AC.
Maximum Switch Rating:
For dry contact models: 0.3 A @ 135 VAC/DC;
For non-dry contact models: 1 A @ 240 VAC.
Frequency: 40 to 400 Hz.
Enclosure Rating: UL, 94 V-O flammability rated, ABS plastic housing.
Approvals: CE, cUL, UL.
363_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:20 AM Page 363
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
SCS
Current Switches
Optional Relay Output, Solid or Split Core Case
1-27/32
[47.0]
RoHS
63/64
[24.9]
1-9/16
[39.6]
2-9/16
[65.0]
2-35/64
[64.5]
2-45/64
[68.6]
Switches
1-5/64
[27.4]
Models
SCS-111100 AND SCS-120025
2-9/16
1-1/16
[65.0]
[26.9]
2-35/64
[64.5]
1-5/64
[27.4]
Model
SCS-111100-R
1-1/16
2-9/16
[26.9]
[65.0]
2-45/64
[68.6]
Models
Models
SCS-220015, SCS-220150, AND SCS-211125 SCS-220150-R AND SCS-211125-R
The Series SCS Low Cost Current Switches are ideal for monitoring whether fans,
pumps, or motors are operating. The current flowing through the core of the device powers
the circuit without an external power supply. All models have a built in solid state output
and are easy to install. Optional LEDs and 10 Amp relay modules are available. The Series
SCS is available in both split and solid core configurations.
Model
SCS-120025
SCS-111100
SCS-111100-R
SCS-220015
SCS-220150
SCS-211125
SCS-220150-R
SCS-211125-R
Case
Solid
Solid
Solid
Split
Split
Split
Split
Split
Amperage
Range
.25 to 200 A
1 to 135 A
1 to 135 A
.15 to 200 A
1.5 to 200 A
1.25 to 135 A
1.5 to 200 A
1.25 to 135 A
Set Point
0.25 Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
0.15 Fixed
1.5 Fixed
Adjustable
1.5 Fixed
Adjustable
Switch
Mode
Under
Over/Under
Over/Under
Under
Under
Over/Under
Under
Over/Under
Snap-on
Relay
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
Output: Isolated, 1A @30 VAC/DC max, NO.
External Relay: SPST N.O., 10A at 260 VAC (5A at 30 VDC).
Isolation Voltage: 600 VAC RMS.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
363
PROCESS CONTROL
364_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:52 PM Page 364
Series
CCT40/50
Current Transformers
Solid or Split Core, Field Selectable Range
2-29/32
[74.00]
63/64
[25.00]
Switches
33/64
[13.00]
1-9/64
[29.00]
55/64
[22.00]
2-31/64
[63.00]
3/4
[19.00]
3-1/2
[89.00]
2X 13/64
[5.00]
45/64
[18.00]
33/64
[13.00]
2-7/16
[62.00]
19/32
[15.00]
Power Requirements
Self Powered
Self Powered
Self Powered
Self Powered
Self Powered
Self Powered
15 to 42 VDC,
Loop Powered
CCT50-200 100/150/200 A 4 to 20 mA 15 to 42 VDC,
Loop Powered
4 to 20 mA 15 to 42 VDC,
CCT40-100 10/20/50 A
Loop Powered
CCT50-100 100/150/200 A 4 to 20 mA 15 to 42 VDC,
Loop Powered
Output
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
Series
CCT60/70
Case
Solid core
Solid core
Split core
Split core
Solid core
Solid core
Solid core
2-33/64
[64.00]
55/64
[22.00]
4-1/64
[102.00]
Solid Models
Range
Model
CCT40-202 10/20/50 A
CCT50-202 100/150/200 A
CCT40-102 10/20/50 A
CCT50-102 100/150/200 A
CCT40-203 10/20/50 A
CCT50-203 100/150/200 A
CCT40-200 10/20/50 A
43/64
[17.00]
2-3/4
[70.00]
55/64
[22.00]
3-1/2
[89.00]
The Series CCT40/50 Current Transformers are a low cost alternative for measuring
power and monitoring the operation of fans, pumps, or other equipment. For use on existing
installations, split core models can be installed without disconnecting cables. Each model
offers three jumper selectable ranges and a choice of three different outputs.
2X
13/64
[5.00]
1-17/64
[32.00]
Split Models
SPECIFICATIONS
Amperage Range: Field selectable; up to 200 A (depending on model).
Output: 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA (depending on model).
Power Requirements: Self powered or 15 to 42 VDC loop powered (depending on
model).
Accuracy: 1%.
Response Time: 250 ms to 90%.
Solid core
Split core
Split core
True RMS Current Transformers

Solid or Split Core, Field Selectable Range
2-29/32
[74.00]
63/64
[25.00]
33/64
[13.00]
1-9/64
[29.00]
55/64
[22.00]
2-31/64
[63.00]
3/4
[19.00]
3-1/2
[89.00]
Solid Models
The Series CCT60/70 True RMS Current Transformers are a low cost alternative
for providing true RMS outputs on distorted AC waveforms. True RMS outputs are ideal
for nonlinear loads or noisy circuits. For existing installations, split core models can be
installed without disconnecting cables. Each model offers three jumper selectable ranges
to reduce the risk of ordering the wrong model.
Model
CCT60-200
CCT70-200
CCT60-100
CCT70-100
364
Range
10/20/50 A
100/150/200 A
10/20/50 A
100/150/200 A
Case
Solid core
Solid core
Split core
Split core
3-1/2
[89.00]
2X 13/64
[5.00]
45/64
[18.00]
33/64
[13.00]
2-7/16
[62.00]
2X
13/64
[5.00]
1-17/64
[32.00]
19/32
[15.00]
43/64
[17.00]
2-3/4
[70.00]
2-33/64
[64.00]
55/64
[22.00]
55/64
[22.00]
4-1/64
[102.00]
Split Models
SPECIFICATIONS
Amperage Range: Up to 200 A (depending on model).
Output: 4 to 20 mA, true RMS.
Power Requirements: 24 VDC nominal.
Accuracy: 1%.
Response Time: 250 ms to 90%.
365_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:43 PM Page 365
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
LTT
SSR Monitors
Monitors SSRs for Loss of Line, Open Load, Shorted SSR, Loss of DC Power
2.500
Switches
1.550
Love Controls LTT Series SSR Monitors allow easy monitoring of the operation of
your SSR switches. This handy device compares the input status with the output status.
An alarm operates a relay contact to tell you if the load circuit has opened or if the SSR
has shorted. The LTT mounts easily on most SSRs with no additional hardware. Protect
your system today.
Model
LTT12-0
LTT24-0
LTT24-1
FEATURES
Monitors SSRs for loss of line, open load, shorted SSR, loss of DC power
Mounts on standard SSRs over the connection terminals
Designed to fit under finger safe cover
LED status indicator
Normally closed dry relay contact 200 VDC @ 0.5A max.
Series
LTTJ
Description
Solid State Relay Monitor, 10 to 19 VDC Trigger,
100 to 660 VAC Load
100 to 660 VAC Load
100 to 660 VAC Load with Driver Circuit Test
0 to 10 VDC Analog Output, Fully Adjustable Output, Over Voltage Protection
.500
1.650
1.150
1.600
Love Controls Series LTTJ Current Transformers allow easy monitoring of the
current flowing to your load. This easy to use device provides a 0 to 10 VDC signal into
both low and high impedance circuits, and is easily scalable to your needs.
Available in a number of different ranges, the Series LTTJ can be easily mounted on most
Series LTP Solid State Relays for convenient wiring. Some models feature an LED for
visual confirmation that current is flowing through the device.
FEATURES
0 to 10 VDC analog output
Impedance matching for high or low impedance inputs
Fully adjustable output
Over voltage protection
Model
LTTJ-010
LTTJ-020
LTTJ-030
LTTJ-040
LTTJ-050
LTTJ-060
LTTJ-070
LTTJ-080
LTTJ-090
LTTJ-100
LTTJ-103
LTTJ-305
LTTJ-305I
LTTJ-103S
LTTJ-305S
1.550
Description
Current Transformer Calibrated to 10 VDC at 10 Amps
Current Transformer Adjustable from 10 to 30 Amps,
5-10 VDC Output
5-10 VDC Output
LED Output
NPN Transistor Output
NPN Transistor Output
365
PROCESS CONTROL
366_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:01 PM Page 366
Series
SCT
Current Transformer
Optional Auxillary, Relay Output, Split Core
1-1/16
[26.9]
2-9/16
[65.0]
3/8
[9.6]
3BYE
IND. CONT. CO.
Class 2
C223444
(800) 872-9141
www.dwyer-inst.com
Isolation 600 VAC (UL)

300 VAC (CE)
Read instructions
before installing
Model SCT10-100
Analog Current Transducer
2-45/64
[68.6]
Signal Converters
RoHS
2-9/16
[65.0]
2-45/64
[68.6]
13/64
[5.3]
3-1/4
[82.4]
Mounting Bracket
43/64
[17]
Snap On Relay
The Series SCT Current Transformers continuously measure the current consumption
of pumps, fans, boilers, solar panels and chillers for use in energy monitoring. Current or
voltage outputs can be scaled using a slider switch to select between three factory set ranges.
Split core configuration allows the current transformer to be installed on new and existing
installations. Snap-on mounting bracket allows for quick installation of replacement
transformers. An optional 10 A command relay can snap onto the current switch, which
eliminates the need to mount an additional relay.
Model
SCT10-100
SCT10-102
SCT20-103
Range
30/60/120 A
30/60/120 A
20/100/150 A
Output
4 to 20 mA
0 to 5 VDC
0 to 10 VDC
Power
Requirements
24 VDC
Self-powered
Self-powered
Max. Continuous
Operating Current
120 A
120 A
150 A
SPECIFICATIONS
Amperage Range: 30/60/120 A or 20/100/150 A (depending on model).
Continuous Operating Current: 120 A or 150 A (depending on model).
Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC (depending on model). Optional
relay NO SPST; 10 A @ 260 VAC, 5 A @ 30 VDC.
Power Requirements: Self-powered or 24 VDC (depending on model).
Accuracy: 2% from 10 to 100% of selected range.
Humidity Limits: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
Response Time: 2 s.
Isolation Voltage: 600 VAC RMS.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Enclosure Rating: UL, V-O flammability rated, type 66 nylon.
ACCESSORIES
SCT-RLY-12, 12 VAC Trigger Voltage Relay Module
SCT-RLY-24, 24 VAC Trigger Voltage Relay Module
Model
MN-1
Mini-Node Communication Signal Converter

Converts RS-485 to USB, Integral USB Connector, No External Power
GREEN LED
YELLOW LED
27/32
[21.43]
3-13/64
[81.36]
57/64
[22.62]
The Model MN-1 Mini-Node Communication Signal Converter is a low cost device
that converts half duplex RS-485 serial communications signals into a signal that can be
read by any computer with a USB port. The integral USB connector and RJ-45 connector
reduces set up time by eliminating extra wiring. The Model MN-1 is powered via the USB
connection which eliminates the need for an external power source. The compact size is
great for field installation, control panels, and lab testing.
Model MN-1, Mini-Node USB to RS-485 Converter
366
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements: No external power required.
Isolated Voltage: 3000 VDC.
Input Impedance: 96 k.
USB Connector: B-type (female).
RS-485 Connector: RJ-45.
Baud Rate: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
and 115200 bps.
Compatibility: Full compliance with USB V.2.0 specification.
367_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:18 AM Page 367
Power Supply
Economical and reliable power supply is suitable for powering all Dwyer pressure,
temperature or air velocity transmitters. Inexpensive, open-frame design allows
convenient access to input/output solder terminals. Auxiliary inputs are selectable for
operation from power sources found worldwide. Compact size eases enclosure
installations.
Model
A-699
Model A-700, (0.5 Amp)

Model A-700-2, (2 Amp)
Model A-700-4, (4.8 Amp)
Control Transformer
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
AC Output: 24 VAC.
Maximum Current output: 400 mA (typically). 10 VA max.
Electrical Connections: Primary, 6-1/2 leads; Secondary, 6 to 32 screw
terminals. (Manufactured for Dwyer Instruments, Inc.)
Weight: 1 lb, 4 oz.
UL and CSA listed Class 2 step down transformer is mounted on a 4-1/4 square
plate stand-off for direct installation in standard 4 x 4 x 1-1/2 junction boxes. The A-699
is suitable for powering all Dwyer 4-wire transmitters and Model 660 Air Velocity Monitor.
Model
KF-CC-304
Model A-699, Control Transformer
USB Dual Power

Charge Two USB Devices at Once!
2-5/16
[58.93]
DC
POWER
PLUG
2 X USB PORTS
1-47/64
[44.01]
FLIP-OUT
STANDARD
AC PLUG
1-37/64
[40.22]
4-11/16
[119.17]
The USB Dual Power charger keeps you plugged-in and powered-up at home and on the
road. Featuring a robust charging capacity of 1.5 amps, two USB ports for the simultaneous
charging of two devices, and a pocket-friendly 2-in-1 design for both wall charging and auto
charging, the USB Dual Power is the ultimate charging accessory for USB-powered portable
electronics!
FEATURES
Provides 1.5 amps of charging power
Charge two USB devices at once
Use at home or in the car
Built-in safety fuse to protect your devices
Sleek, pocket-friendly design
LEDlight indicates ready power source
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 0.15 A 12 to 24 VDC.
Output: Terminal Voltage Current:
USBport 1: 5.0 V = 1.5 A;
USB port 2: 5.0 V = 1.5 A;
USB port 1 + 2: 5.0 V = 750 + 750 mA.
KF-CC-304, USB Dual Power
367
Power Supplies
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input: 100/120/220/230-240 VAC 10%, 47-63 Hz.
DC Output: 24 to 28 VDC regulated.
Maximum Current Output: A-700: 0.5 A @ 60 Hz, 0.45 A @ 50 Hz; A-700-2: 2 A
@ 60 Hz, 1.8 A @ 50 Hz; A-700-3: 4.8 A @ 60 Hz, 4.5 A @ 50 Hz.
External Fuse Required: 0.5 Amp for 100 to 120 VAC, 0.25 Amp for 220 to 240
VAC.
Dimensions: 4-7/8H x 4W x 1-5/8D
Weight: 2 lb.
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
A-700
PROCESS CONTROL
368_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:17 AM Page 368
Model
BPS-005
Low Cost DC Power Supply

Regulated 0.5 A, 1 A Fuse Protection
RoHS
Power Supplies
3
[76.20]
2-13/32
[61.19]
2-1/16
[52.28]
SNAPTRACK
The Model BPS-005 Low Cost DC Power Supply is a regulated .5 A power supply
that accepts 24 VAC input and provides an adjustable 1.5 to 29 VDC output. Output voltage
adjustments are made using the on-board potentiometer while measuring the output with
a multimeter. A compact snap track design allows the power supply to be surface mounted
within a panel.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz.
Output: 24 VDC (full wave rectified and regulated) adjustable 1.5 to 29 VDC, 0.5 A
max.
Maximum Current Output: 0.5 A.
Over-Current Protection: 1 A fuse.
Humidity Limits: 95% (non-condensing).
Weight: 0.4 lb.
AgencyApproval: RoHS.
Model BPS-005, Low Cost DCPower Supply
Model
BPS-015
19/32
[14.97]
Low Cost DC Power Supply

1.5A, Fuse Protection
1-15/16
[49.02]
11/16
[17.27]
4-1/16
[103.12]
2-19/64
[58.17]
SNAPTRACK
The Model BPS Building Automation Power Supply is used to convert 24 VAC to a
regulated DC power source for transmitters with 4 to 20 mA outputs. The output voltage
can be field adjusted from 1.5V to 27V using a potentiometer. The 3A fuse protects the
power supply from over-current conditions. The snap-on bracket can be quickly surface
mounted to any flat surface.
Model BPS-015, Power Supply
368
SPECIFICATIONS
Input: 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz.
Output: 24 VDC (full wave rectified and regulated) adjustable 1.5 to 27 VDC.
Maximum Current Output: 1.5A (de-rated to 400 mA for non-isolated circuits).
TemperatureLimits: 32 to 130F (0 to 55C).
Humidity Limits: 95% (non-condensing).
Weight: 0.4 lb.
369_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:16 AM Page 369
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
APT
AC Power Transformers
40 VA to 100 VA, Single or Dual Hub, Circuit Breaker, UL Class 2
RoHS
Power Supplies/
Transformers
Model
APT-40-0SN
APT-40-1SN
APT-40-1DN
APT-50-1SN
APT-50-1SB
APT-50-1DB
APT-75-1SB
APT-75-1DB
APT-100-1SB
APT-100-1DB
1/2 NPT Male
The Series APT AC Power Transformers provide isolated step-down to 24 VAC with
models offering VA ratings of 40, 50, 75, or 96 VAs. These low-cost transformers are
offered in single or dual 1/2 NPT threaded hub mounts with 8-1/2 18 AWG wire leads,
to meet the installation requirements of a variety of building automation and control panel
applications. All models are UL Class 2 listed.
Model
APT-40-0SN
APT-40-1SN
APT-40-1DN
APT-50-1SN
APT-50-1SB
APT-50-1DB
APT-75-1SB
APT-75-1DB
APT-100-1SB
APT-100-1DB
Rating
40 VA
40 VA
40 VA
50 VA
50 VA
50 VA
75 VA
75 VA
96 VA
96 VA
Input Voltage
24 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
Mounting
Foot Mount with Single Hub
Foot Mount withDual Hub
A in (mm)
1-61/64 (49.5)
1-61/64 (49.5)
1-61/64 (49.5)
1-13/16 (46.0)
1-13/16 (46.0)
1-13/16 (46.0)
2-13/64 (56.0)
2-13/64 (56.0)
2-13/32 (61.0)
2-13/32 (61.0)
Current Protection
Inherent
Inherent
Inherent
Internal Fuse
Button Circuit Breaker
D in (mm)
2-43/64 (68.0)
2-43/64 (68.0)
2-43/64 (68.0)
2-61/64 (75.0)
3-31/64 (88.5)
3-31/64 (88.5)
3-7/8 (98.5)
3-7/8 (98.5)
4-5/64 (103.5)
4-5/64 (103.5)
E in (mm)
2-7/8 (73.0)
2-7/8 (73.0)
2-7/8 (73.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
3-1/32 (77.0)
Wiring
Diagram B
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Diagram A
Weight
1.96 lb (0.89 kg)
1.98 lb (0.90 kg)
2.03 lb (0.92 kg)
2.43 lb (1.10 kg)
2.77 lb (1.26 kg)
2.77 lb (1.26 kg)
3.53 lb (1.60 kg)
3.57 lb (1.62 kg)
3.97 lb (1.80 kg)
4.01 lb (1.82 kg)
Diagram B
RED
BROWN
120VAC
24VAC
BLACK
C in (mm)
2-11/64 (55.0)
2-11/64 (55.0)
2-11/64 (55.0)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-1/2 (63.5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage: See model chart.
Input Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Output Voltage: 24 VAC.
Output VA Rating: 40, 50, 75, or 96 VA.
Mounting: Slotted foot mount with single, or dual 1/2 NPT hub.
Current Protection: See model chart.
Electrical Connections: 8.5 (210 mm) 18 AWG leads.
Diagram A
WHITE
B in (mm)
1-25/32 (45.2)
1-25/32 (45.2)
1-25/32 (45.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
1-31/32 (50.2)
BLUE
BROWN
24VAC
24VAC
RED
BLUE
369
PROCESS CONTROL
370_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:41 PM Page 370
Model
FC-1000
Electronic Fan Speed Control

Low Cost, 0-10 VDC Input, Selectable Hard Start
1-3/8
[34.93]
13/16
[20.64]
3/16
[4.76]
4
[101.6]
4X 1/4
[6.35]
3/4 [19.05] 2X 7/16

[11.11]
Fan Speed Controls
2X 7/8
[22.23]
4-3/8
[111.13]
5-1/4
[133.35]
5-1/8
[130.18]
2X 4-1/4
[107.95]
2X 1/2 [12.7]
2-7/8
[73.03]
The Model FC-1000 Electronic Fan Speed Control provides precise speed
modulation of small AC motors. Popular 0 to 10 VDC input works with most process
controllers, eliminating the need for more expensive dampers, damper actuators and
linkages while improving overall energy efficiency of the system. This inexpensive unit
enables variable control of ventilation fans, condenser fans and interfacing with VAV box
controllers.
Model FC-1000, Electronic Fan Speed Control
Model
KFD0
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Voltage Range: 120 to 277 VAC,
60 Hz.
Input Signal Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC.
Low Voltage Input: 24 VAC, class 2.
Input Signal Impedance: 10K .
Full Load Amp Rating: 9.8 @120
VAC, 9.3 @ 208 VAC, 8.0 @ 240 VAC,
6.9 @ 277 VAC.
Locked Rotor Amp Rating: 24.0.
(-40 to 55C).
1/2
[12.7]
Electrical Connections: Line voltage:

10-32 screw terminals. Signal and low
voltage input: 1/4 quick connects.
Transient Protection: 320 V surge
suppression. Exceeds IEEE C62.41
standards.
Housing Materials: Cold rolled steel.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 1.
Mounting: Vertical only; four holes
provided for #10 screws.
Weight: 1 Ib, 11 oz (.77 kg).
Agency Approval: UR.
Galvanic Barrier
Loop Powered, Intrinsically Safe Isolators
4-37/64 [116.46]
25/32 [20.00]
4-3/8 [111.20]
The Model KFD0 Loop Powered, Galvanic Barrier provides complete isolation for
communication with Dwyer intrinsically-safe transmitters approved for use in hazardous
areas. Galvanic barrier eliminates the need for a high integrity earth ground required
when using shunt type diode type safety barriers. Unlike most other isolators, the Model
KFD0 does not require external power and has a low current draw. The housing is designed
to easily mount on most standard DIN rails.
Model
Dwyer Series
Approval
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55 FM for Class I, Zone 1,
HHT-IX
Groups IIC, IIB, IIA; Class I, II, III, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G
Model
Vo (V)
KFD0-SCS-EX1.55 23.1
Io (mA)
38.2
Group
IIC (A, B)
IIB (C)
IIA (D, F, G)
F
0.042
0.267
0.267
mH
0.5
2.5
2.5
SPECIFICATIONS
Hazardous Area Input:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA (linear transmission 1 to 22 mA);
Available transmitter voltage: 16 V for supply voltage > 21 V.
Safe Area Output:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA;
Transmitter voltage: 30 VDC.
Response Time: 20 s at 0, and 600 s at 800 load.
Maximum Power Dissipation:150 mW @ 20 mA and V <24 V.
Temperature Drift: 0.5 A/C.
Weight: 4.2 oz (120 g).
Model KFD0-SCS-EX1.55, Loop powered galvanic barrier
ACCESSORY
370
371_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:46 AM Page 371
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
MTL5041/
5045
Galvanic Barrier
Intrinsically Safe Isolators for Hazardous Locations
41/64
[16.27]
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
4-11/32
[110.33]
HAZARDOUS
AREA TERMINAL
4-3/32
[103.98]
SAFE AREA
TERMINAL
MTL5041
The MTL5041/5045 Galvanic Barrier provide total intrinsically safe isolation for
communication with Dwyer pressure transmitters approved for location in hazardous
areas. Galvanic barrier eliminates the need for a high integrity earth ground required
when using shunt diode type safety barriers. DIN rail mounting and plug-in signal and
power connectors simplify installation and maintenance
Compatible Models: 637, 638, 608, 2700, 2800, 2900, SBLTX, PBLTX, IS626
MTL5041/5045
Galvanic
Approval
Barrier
MTL5041 FM for Class I, II, II; Div. 1 Groups C, D, F,G
MTL5041 UL for Class I; Div. 1 Groups A, B, C, D
Class II Div. 1 Groups E, F, G ClassIII Div 1
MTL5041 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B, C, D, E, F, G
MTL5041 FMfor Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A, B,C, D, E,F,G
MTL5045 FMfor Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups C, D, E,F,G
MTL5045 FMfor Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups C, D, E,F,G
Dwyer
Series
638
IS626, SBLTX,
PBLTX
637
608
2900
2700/2800
FM
F
mH
Group
0.13
4.2
A &B
0.30
12.6
C
1.04
33.6
D
BASEEFA (ATEX)
Group F
mH H/
IIC
0.083 3.05 55
IIB
0.85
9.15 210
IIA
2.15
244 444
Region
(Authority)
Standard
USA (FM) (UL) 3600,
3610 entity
3611, 3810
UL913
UL1604
Canada (CSA) CAN/CSA
E60070,
IEC60079,
C22.2
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50014,
EN 50020
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50039
Systems
Approved For
AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFGSCI-942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
[I/0] AEx[ia]IIC-SCI-942
Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140F (60C)
Class I,Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D;
Ex nA [iA] IIC T4
Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
T4
EEx ia IIC
EEx ia IIC
Certificate/
File no.
3010737
SPECIFICATIONS
Hazardous Area Input:
Signal range: 0 to 24 mA (including over-range);
Transmitter voltage:16.5 V at 20 mA.
Safe Area Output:
Signal range: 4 to 20 mA;
Safe-area load resistance: 0 to 1k;
Safe-area output resistance:> 2 M.
Power Requirement:20 to 35 VDC.
Response Time:Settles to within 10% of final value within 250 s.
Current Consumption (20 mA signal):
70 mA at 24 VDC;
85 mA at 20 VDC;
55 mA at 35 VDC.
Maximum Power Dissipation(20 mA signal):1.2 W at 24 VDC.
Isolation: 250 V rms between input, output and power supply terminals.
Transfer Accuracy at 68F (20C): Better than 20 A(typically 5 A).
LED Indicator: Green:Power indication.
Temperature Limits:
Storage:-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Temperature Drift:<1 A/C.
Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
Mounting: 1.4 (35 mm) top hat rail to:
EN 50022-35 x 7.5;
BS 5584;
35 x 27 x 7.3 DIN46277.
Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm2 stranded or single-core.
Safety Description:28 V, 300, 93 mA; Um=250 rms or dc.
Weight: 3.9 oz (110 g).
Agency Approvals: See table.
1345550
BAS01ATEX7217
Ex01E2219
ACCESSORY
371
PROCESS CONTROL
372_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:15 AM Page 372
Zener Barrier
Series
MTL7706/
7787
Intrinsically Safe Barriers for Hazardous Locations

SAFE AREA
TERMINAL
HAZARDOUS
AREA TERMINALS
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
1/2
[12.70]
3-35/64
[90.09]
4-5/32
[105.57]
MTL7787
The MTL7706/7787 is an intrinsically safe (IS) shunt-diode barrier that can be used to
communicate with and provide isolations for certain Dwyer transmitters approved for use
in hazardous areas. These barriers limit the amount of energy allowed to pass into the
hazardous area, which inhibit ignition in flammable atmospheres.
Compatible Models:637, 608, SBLTX, PBLTX, IS626

Zener
Approval
Barrier
MTL7706 ULfor Class I; Div. 1 Groups A, B, C, D
CL II; Div. 1 Groups E, F, G; CL III Div. 1
FM
Group F
mH
A &B 0.083 4.2
BASEEFA (ATEX)
Group F
mH
IIC
0.083 4.2
Region
(Authority)
Standard
USA (FM) (UL) 3600,
3610 entity
3611, 3810
UL698,
UL913
UL1604
Canada (CSA) CAN/CSA
E60070,
IEC60079,
C22.2
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50014,
EN 50020
UK (BASEEFA) EN 50039
Systems
372
MTL7787
MTL7706
MTL7706 FMfor Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups B,

C, D, E,F,G
MTL7706 FM for Class I, II, III; Div. 1 Groups A,
B, C, D, E, F, G
Dwyer
Series
IS626
SBLTX
PBLTX
637
608
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmitter Voltage: 16.2 V at 20 mA with 250 load (negative w.r.t. earth); 11.0 V
at 20 mA with 500 load (negative w.r.t. earth).
Safe Area Output:4 to 20 mA.
Load Resistance: 0 to 500 .
Power Requirement:20 to 35 VDC w.r.t. earth.
Accuracy:2 A under all conditions.
LED Indicator: Green:Power indication.
Temperature Limits:
Storage:-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
Humidity: 5 to 95% RH.
Terminals: Accommodate up to 2.5 mm2 stranded or single-core.
Safety Description:28 V, 300, 93 mA.
Weight: 4.9 oz (140 g).
Agency Approvals: See table.
FM
Group F
mH
A &B 0.083 3.05
BASEEFA (ATEX)
Group F
mH
IIC
0.083 3.05
Certificate/
Approved For
File no.
AIS/I,II,III/1/Entity ABCDEFG- 3010737
SCI-942; NI/I/@/ABCD/T4
[I/0] AEx[ia]IIC-SCI-942
Entity; NI/1/2/IIC/T4;
Ta=140F (60C)
Class I,Div.2, Gps A, B, C, D; 1345550
Ex nA [iA] IIC T4
Class I, Xone 2, Aex nA IIC
T4
EEx ia IIC
BAS01ATEX7217
EEx ia IIC
Ex01E2219
ACCESSORY
373_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:13 AM Page 373
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
LCT216
Digital Timer/Tachometer/Counter
3 Controls in 1 Device, DIP Switch Configuration
3-23/64
[85.22]
1-7/8
[47.63]
DIP SWITCH
3-1/8
[79.50]
1-7/8
[47.63]
Model
LCT216-100
LCT216-110
Output Type
Transistor
Relay
Series
LCT316
Timers
The Series LCT216 combines a versatile timer, counter, and tachometer in one device.
The bright, easy-to-read display shows both the desired set point and the current process
value as well as the operating mode that the control is functioning in. The fourteen preprogrammed timer functions are easy to set up and cover most applications. The counting
functions include one stage or two stage counting along with batch, total, or dual counting
modes. The Series LCT216 can also be used as a tachometer to measure rotational speeds.
For quick set up, many of the programming parameters can be set with external dip
switches located on the side of the unit.
1-3/4
[44.45]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Humidity Conditions: 35 to 85%RH (non-condensing).
Control Output Ratings: (Out 1) Relay: SPST 5A at 250 VAC; Transistor: NPN
open collector 100 mA / 30 VDC residual voltage = 1.5 VDC max; (Out 2) Relay:
SPST 5A at 250 VAC, Transistor: NPN open collector 100 mA / 30 VDC residual
voltage = 1.5 VDC max.
Reset Time: 0.001 seconds minimum.
Inputs: Dry contact, PNP, or NPN.
Timing Functions: 14 pre-programmed timing functions.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC 50 / 60 Hz.
Power Consumption: Less than 10 VA.
Internal Power Supply: 12 VDC 10%, 100 mA.
Display: Two-line 6 digit negative transmissive LCD display.
Low Cost Digital Timer

Quick Installation, Digital Input, Audible Alarm
1-1/8
[28.57]
1-11/32
[33.99]
3
[76.20]
The Series LCT316 Low Cost Digital Timer provides accurate countdown timing for
a variety of applications. The timer can be triggered remotely using the digital input
terminals or locally via the set button. Time intervals can be set up to 999 minutes or
seconds. The Series LCT316 has an internal buzzer to alert when the time interval has
expired.
Model
LCT316-100
LCT316-200
LCT316-300
LCT316-400
Supply Power
115 VAC
230 VAC
12 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
2-7/16
[61.91]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C).
Control Output Ratings: Relay, SPST NO, 16A at 250 VAC resistive.
Weight: 5.6 oz (158.8 g).
Status Light: LED shows time and operation.
Inputs: Digital input for start and reset.
Supply Voltage: 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 12 VAC/DC, 24 VAC/DC depending on
model.
373
PROCESS CONTROL
374_Layout 1 7/21/14 1:36 PM Page 374
Series
DCT500A
Low Cost Timer Controller

Compact, Easy to Use; 4, 6 or 10 Channels
75
100
25
200
150
R31
175
CONNECT JUMPER TO LAST

CHANNEL USED
TIME ON
350
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
400
150
R29
100
1 SEC 200
HIGH
LIMIT
300
250
125
50
50
mSEC
450
DWYER INSTRUMENTS
MICHIGAN CITY, IN
TIME OFF
500
COM
LOW
LIMIT
POWER
ON
Timer Controllers
05-443179-00
VER 0
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

LINE INPUT RATING 120 VAC +10%-15%
50/60 HZ SINGLE PHASE. THIS UNIT MUST BE
ENCLOSED. USE NEC CLASS 1 WIRING RATED
60C/75C. USE 14-22 GA COPPER ONLY FOR LINE
AND LOAD CONNECTIONS. TORQUE TERMINALS
TO 5 IN. LB. REPLACE FUSE WITH TYPE 3AG FAST
ACTING 3 AMP 250V ONLY. FAILURE TO COMPLY
WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS WILL VOID
MANUFACTURES WARRANTEE.
FVN 1.0.0
D16
4-1/4
[107.95]
4-7/8
[123.8]
WIRE STRIP GAUGE

0.250 IN. MAX
DO NOT USE SLOW BLOW FUSES

LINE VOLTAGE
102 VAC TO 132 VAC MAX
50-60 HZ
L1 L2 SOL 1
COM
2 3
6-1/4 [158.75]
Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500A Low Cost Timer
Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand cleaning for receivers and pulse
jet systems. Available in either 4, 6 or 10 channels, each unit is the same size, minimizing
enclosure space and reducing overall system installation cost.
The DCT500A is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off settings are selected using
two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Limit control inputs are provided for use with
on demand systems. The new enhanced board circuitry of the DCT500A synchronizes the
on-time pulse to the power line to achieve a pulse stability of 1 msec.
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are isolated from the
line voltage.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclosure is available. For
on demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Photohelic gage or Series 1800 Pressure
Switch may be used with the DCT500A.
Model
DCT504A
DCT506A
DCT510A
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
No. of Channels
4
6
10
Series
DCT500ADC
5 6
1/16
[1.59]
9 10
OUTPUTS (300 VA MAX)
1/2
[12.70]
6-3/4 [171.45]
SPECIFICATIONS*
Output Channels: 4, 6, & 10
channels.
VAC 50 or 60 Hz.
Solenoid Supply: 3 A max per
channel.
Fuse: Type 3 AG, 3 A @ 250 VAC.
(-40 to 60C).
1-21/64
[33.73]
Storage Temperature Limits:

-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time: 50 ms to 500 ms.
On Time Accuracy: 10 ms.
On Time Stability: 1 ms.
Off Time: 1 second to 180 seconds.
Off Time Accuracy: 5% of setting.
Agency Approval: CE, cUL, UL.
*Additional specifications on IOM.
OPTIONS
L, Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
8-1/4 x 6-1/4 (209.55 mm x 158.75 mm
WP, Weatherproof Housing:
Standard Models
Models with Option -L Mounting Bracket
Low Cost Timer Controller

For Low Voltage Applications
TIME ON
TIME OFF
SEC
mSEC
4-1/4
[107.95]
4-7/8
[123.83]
F1
1/16
[1.59]
6-1/4 [158.75]
6-3/4 [171.45]
Ideal for pneumatic conveying systems, the Series DCT500ADC Low Cost Timer
Controller is designed to provide continuous or on-demand cleaning for 10-35 volt powered
receivers and pulse jet systems. Available in either 4, 6 or 10 channels, each unit is the
same size, minimizing enclosure space and reducing overall system installation cost.
The DCT500ADC is simple and easy to use. Time-On and Time-Off settings are selected
using two potentiometers. High Limit and Low Limit control inputs are provided for use
with on demand systems.
For added safety, the control circuitry including the control inputs are isolated from the
line voltage.
To meet your system requirements, an optional weatherproof enclosure is available. For
on demand systems, a Dwyer Series A3000 Photohelic gage or Series 1800 Pressure
Switch may be used with the DCT500ADC.
Model
DCT504ADC
DCT506ADC
DCT510ADC
374
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
No. of Channels
4
6
10
SPECIFICATIONS*
channels.
channel.
(-40 to 60C).
1/2
[12.70]
1-3/16
[30.16]

-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time Stability: < 1 ms.
Off Time: 1 s to 180 s.
OPTIONS
L, Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits:
8-1/4 x 6-1/4 (209.55 mm x 158.75 mm)
WP, Weatherproof Housing:
Standard Models
Models with Option -L Mounting Bracket
375_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:59 PM Page 375
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DCT600
Timer Controller
With Universal Power For Both 120 and 220 VAC
4-1/4
[107.95]
4 thru 10 channel boards
6-1/4 [158.75]
Timer Controllers
4-7/8
[123.8]
1/16
[1.59]
6-3/4 [171.45]
1/2
[12.7] 1-23/64
[34.53]
6-1/4
[158.75]
6-7/8
[174.62]
8-1/4 [209.55]
8-3/4 [222.25]
1-3/16
[30.16]
22 and 32 channel board

The Series DCT600 Timer Controller is a timing system for pulse-jet type dust
collectors or pneumatic conveying systems in either continuous or on-demand cleaning
applications. It provides either 4, 6, 10, 22 or 32 channels. The DCT600 was designed for
ease of installation in your dust collector system. For installations requiring fewer channels
than available on the board, a shorting plug (DCT604 & DCT610) or dip switches (DCT622
& DCT632) allows selection of the last used channel. Time-on and time-off settings are
selected using two potentiometers. High-limit and low-limit control inputs are provided for
use with on-demand systems. Units can also work in continuous clean mode. The new
enhanced board circuitry of the DCT600 synchronizes the on-time pulse to the power line
to achieve a pulse stability of 1 msec. For safety, the control circuitry including the control
inputs and the last channel jumper is isolated from the power line.
Model
DCT604
DCT606
DCT610
DCT622
DCT632
Description
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
Timer Controller
No. of Channels
4
6
10
22
32
1/16
[1.59]
1/2
[12.7]
SPECIFICATIONS*
Output Channels: 4, 6, 10, 22 and 32 channels available.
Power Requirements: 85 to 270 VAC.
Solenoid Supply: 300 VA.
Storage Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time Accuracy: 5% of setting.
On Time Stability: 1 ms.
Off Time:1 s to 180 s.
OPTIONS
WP, Weatherproof Housing
4 thru 10 channel only
22 & 32 channels
L, Mounting Bracket for Field Retrofits (4, 6 or 10 channel boards only): 8-1/4 x 61/4 (209.55 mm x 158.75 mm)
Note: L mounting bracket available with 4, 6, or 10 channel models only.
375
PROCESS CONTROL
376_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:28 PM Page 376
Series
DCT1000
Dust Collector Timer Controller

Modular Design, User Friendly, Up to 22 Channels
2-3/4
[69.85]
Timer Controllers
6-1/4
[158.75]
6-7/8
[174.62]
8-1/4
[209.55]
Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the Series DCT1000 Dust
Collector Timer Controller. Relying on one timer board for on demand and continuous
cleaning applications, the DCT1000 eliminates external devices such as pressure switches,
relays and timers.
Offering a universal power supply, the DCT1000 accepts 85-270 VAC/VDC at either 50 or
60 Hz for both domestic and overseas requirements. The units modular design allows for
use as a continuous cleaning control or on-demand cleaning control using the optional plugin pressure module. A 4 to 20 mA process output is integral to the plug-in pressure module,
eliminating the need to purchase an expensive process transmitter. Mounting holes are
standard to other dust collector controllers used in the industry, allowing you to use the
DCT1000 for existing installations.
In addition, the DCT1000 is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 channels. One board size allows
the standardization on one enclosure. Latching relays and jumper wires are eliminated for
large installations requiring channel expanders. Each channel expander connected is
automatically detected.
1-13/16
[46.04]
8-3/4
[222.25]
SPECIFICATIONS
DCT1000 Timer Controller:
channels. Expandable to 255 channels
using DCT1122 & DCT1110 channel
expander boards.
Power Requirements: 85 to 270 VAC,
50 or 60 Hz.
channel.
Fuse: 3 A @ 250 VAC. Low voltage
control circuitry is isolated from the line
voltage for system safety.
to 60C).
Storage Temperature Limits: -40 to
176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time: 10 ms to 600 ms, 10 ms
steps.
Off Time: 1 s to 255 s, 1 s steps.
1/16
[1.59]
Off Time Accuracy: 1% of the value

or 50 ms, whichever is greater.
Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).
Agency Approvals: cUL, UL.
DCP Pressure Module:
Pressure Ranges: 10 in w.c. or 20 in
w.c.
to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95 kPa).
Pressure Limit (differential): 10 psi
(68.95 kPa).
Accuracy: 1.5% FS @ 73F (22.8C).
Alarm Contacts: 1.5 A inductive load,
3 A resistive load @ 30 VAC or 40
VDC.
Process Connections: Two barbed
connections for use with 1/8 (3.18
mm) or 3/16 (4.76 mm) ID tubing.
Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).
OPTIONS
WP, Weatherproof Housing Only
WPP, Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports
WPPS, Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports, Three Position Rotary Switch
Installed
EXPL, Explosion-proof Housing
Multiple Boards, Stacked in enclosure
ACCESSORIES
DCA, Channel expander cable available in 1 ft, 2 ft, and 4 ft lengths
DPMA-402, Process Indicator
Model
DCT1022
DCT1010
DCT1006
DCT1122
DCT1110
DCP200A
DCP100A
376
Description
Master Controller
Master Controller
Master Controller
Channel Expander
Channel Expander
PressureModule
PressureModule
No. of Channels
22
10
6
22
10
D.P. Range
20 in w.c.
10 in w.c.
DCT in optional NEMA

4/4X weatherproof
enclosure.
DCT in optional
Explosion-proof
Enclosure.
Master Board
Stacked with
Channel Expander.
Model DCAC02
Cable Connection:
For connecting
multiple boards.
377_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:22 PM Page 377
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DCT1000DC
Dust Collector Timer Controller

For Low Voltage Applications
2-3/4
[69.85]
PROCESS (IN H2O)
LAST OUTPUT
TIME OFF (SEC)
TIME ON (M SEC)
SETUP STATUS
UP
RUN
ALARM
RESET
DOWN
HIGH LIMIT
LOW LIMIT
HIGH ALARM
LOW ALARM
CYCLE DELAY (MIN)
MANUAL
SELECT
OVERRIDE
DOWN TIME CYCLES

(MIN)
AUTO ALARM RESET

(SEC)
6-1/4
[158.75]
Timer Controllers
6-7/8
[174.62]
1/16
[1.59]
8-1/4
[209.55] 8-3/4
[222.25]
Simplify your on-demand cleaning requirements with the Series DCT1000DC Dust
Collector Timer Controller. Relying on one timer board for on demand and continuous
cleaning applications, the DCT1000DC eliminates external devices such as pressure
switches, relays and timers.
The DCT1000DC accepts 10 to 30 VDC power. The units modular design allows for use as
a continuous cleaning control or on-demand cleaning control using the optional DCP plugin pressure module. A 4 to 20 mA process output is integral to the DCP pressure module,
eliminating the need to purchase an expensive process transmitter. A solenoid fault light
on the DCT1000DC notifies the operator when a solenoid valve fails to activate properly.
The DCT1000DC is the same size for 6, 10 and 22 channels. One board size allows the
standardization on one enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS
DCT1000DC Timer Controller:
channels.
Power Requirements: 10 - 30 VDC.
Solenoid Supply: 3 A maximum per
channel.
Fuse: 3 A @ 250 VAC.
to 60C).
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).
On Time: 10 ms to 600 ms, 10 ms
steps.
Off Time: 1 s to 255 s, 1 s steps.
Off Time Accuracy: 1% of the value
or 50 ms, whichever is greater.
Weight: 1 lb 3.0 oz (538.6 g).
DCP Pressure Module:

Pressure Ranges: 10 in w.c. or 20 in
w.c.
to 60C).
Pressure Limit: 10 psi (68.95 kPa).
Pressure Limit (differential): 10 psi
(68.95 kPa).
Accuracy: 1.5% FS @ 73F (22.8C).
Alarm Contacts: 1.5 A inductive load, 3
A resistive load @ 30 VAC or 40 VDC.
connections for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm)
or 3/16 (4.76 mm) ID tubing.
Weight: 5.5 oz (155.9 g).
DCT in optional NEMA 4/4X

weatherproof enclosure.
DCT in optional
explosion-proof enclosure.
OPTIONS
WP, Weatherproof Housing Only
WPP, Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports
WPPS, Weatherproof Housing with Pressure Ports, Three Position Rotary Switch
Installed
EXPL, Explosion-proof Housing
ACCESSORY
DPMA-402, Process Indicator
Model
DCT1022DC
DCT1010DC
DCT1006DC
DCP200A
DCP100A
Description
Master Controller
Master Controller
Master Controller
Pressure Module
Pressure Module
No. of Channels
22
10
6
D.P. Range
20 in w.c.
10 in w.c.
377
PROCESS CONTROL
378_Layout 1 7/15/14 3:02 PM Page 378
Series
SVT
Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer

Compact Size, NEMA 4X Enclosure
9-55/64
[250.49]
Time Delay Relays
5-3/16
[131.80]
2-7/16
[61.77]
9-5/8
[244.48]

The Series SVT Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer is a compact, reliable and
economic package designed for small to medium filtration systems. It combines a timer board
and solenoid valve enclosure into one package, eliminating the need for separate enclosures
and wiring. The SVT is available with 2, 4 or 6 valves. For larger systems expansion modules
can be daisy chained to the SVT for a max of 60 outputs. The SVT is available in either 90 to
240 VAC or 240 VDC/VAC supply voltages allowing it to be used in low or high voltage
applications. On-demand cleaning or down time cleaning functions can be selected with a simple
dip-switch. Time-on and time-off settings are selected using two potentiometers.
Number of
Supply
Description
Solenoids
Model
Voltage
Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer 2
SVT-2
90 to 240 VAC
SVT-3
90 to 240 VAC
SVT-4
90 to 240 VAC
SVT-6
90 to 240 VAC
SVT-2-DC Solenoid Valve Enclosure with Timer 2
24 VDC/VAC
24 VDC/VAC
24 VDC/VAC
24 VDC/VAC
Expansion Module
3
SVTE-3
Any
ExpansionModule
4
SVTE-4
Any
Expansion Module
6
SVTE-6
Any
Note: SVTE modules are powered from the main enclosure and can be used with either
the 90 to 240 VAC or the 24 VDC/VAC Model SVTs.
Series
820
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
Wetted Materials: Pilot body: Brass; Spring: 302 SS; O-ring: NBR.
Power Requirements: 90 to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz or 24 VAC/VDC 10%.
Fuse: 0.5 A delayed.
Electrical Connection: 2 DIN A 43652 connectors.
Enclosure Material: Polyamide with carbon fiber, polycarbonate, TPE rubber.
Process Connection: 1/4 OD push to connect.
On-Time: 150 ms to 700 ms.
Off-Time: 4 s to 210 s.
DIN Rail Mountable Time Delay Relay

15 Amp, SPDT/DPDT Operation
RoHS
11/16
[17.60]
2-9/16
[65.00] 1-11/32
[34.20]
5/8
[16.00]
2-21/32
[67.50]
1-25/32
[45.30]
The Series 820 DIN Rail Mountable Time Delay Relays can be configured in accordance
with 10 different timing functions. Bright red and green LEDs indicate whether the input has
been triggered and if the output is active. For greater accuracy, there are 10 time scales and a
fine adjustment potentiometer that allows adjustment down to 0.1 seconds. Integral mounting
ears allow the Series 820 to mount directly to a DIN rail.
Model
821TD10H-UNI
822TD10H-UNI
378
Contact Configuration
SPDT
DPDT
3-35/64
[90.00]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 12 to 240 VAC / VDC.
Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 240 VAC, 24 VDC.
Timing Rating:
Functions available: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J (10 for total);
Time ranges: 0.1 sec to 10 days.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminals.
Switching Operation: SPDT or DPDT.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C);
Power Consumption: 3 VA (AC) or 1.7 W (DC).
379_Layout 1 7/21/14 8:55 AM Page 379
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
TDRSOX/
SRX
Time Delay Relay

12 Amp, DPDT Operation
RoHS
Digital Switch Position

II
III
IV
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
CONTACTS:
1/3HP 120VAC
1/2HP 240VAC
12A, 120-24DVAC/30VDC
TDRSOXP-XXXV
N DELAY/INTERVAL
XXXVAC/VDC
TIMING RANGE
0.1 SEC TO 10 HRS
ON
TDRSXXP-XXXV
OUTPUT
INPUT
On Delay
Interval
Digital Switch Position

I
OFF
ON
1-47/64
[44.00]
Off
On
I
II
III
IV
Function
Time
Time
Time
3-25/64 [86.00]
2-9/16
[65.00]
TIME DELAY RELAY
8-PIN SHOWN
11-PIN AVAILABLE
The Series TDRSOX/SRX Time Delay Relay combines the functionality of a timer
and a relay in a compact socket mount enclosure. For quick set up, the timer features DIP
switches that allow the user to choose between two function modes and eight timing scale
ranges. TDRSOX models offer On Delay and Interval function modes, and TDRSRX models
offer Off Delay and Retriggerable One Shot function modes. The timing scale ranges can
be set from .1 seconds to 10 hours. The dual LEDs allow the user to know when power is
present at the coil and when the output is energized.
Model
TDRSOXP-24V
TDRSOXP-120V
TDRSRXP-24V
TDRSRXP-120V
Input Voltage
24 VDC / VAC
120 VDC / VAC
24 VDC / VAC
120 VDC / VAC
Timing Range
0.1 s to 10 h
0.1 s to 10 h
0.1 s to 10 h
0.1 s to 10 h
ACCESSORIES
70-750DL8-1, Socket for 750H and TDRSOX/SRX Series Relay
70-ASMM-24, Protection Modules, MOV Supressor, 24 VAC/VDC
70-ASMM-120, Protection Modules, MOV Supressor, 120 VAC/VDC
Series
TR-7
MADE IN CHINA
ON DELAY
43/64
[17.00]
IN
OUT
INTERVAL
IN
OUT
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating and Load Voltage Range: 24, 120 VDC/VAC.
Electrical Rating: 12 A, 120 to 240 VAC/30 VDC.
Switching Voltage: 120 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 30 VDC; 1/3 HP @ 120 VAC; 1/2 HP
@ 240 VAC; B300 pilot duty.
FunctionsAvailable:
A, C (On delay, interval);
D, E (Off delay, one shot).
Timing Rating: Time Ranges: 0.1 sec to 10 hr.
Electrical Connection: Silver alloy contacts.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -22 to 185F (-20 to 85C);
Power Consumption: 5 VA; 2.5 W.
Weight: 3 oz (85g).
Agency Approvals: RoHS, cUL, UL, cUR, UR.
SAFE-T-GROUND
Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Ground Continuity Control
8-1/16 [204.77]
5-25/32
[146.91] 4-31/64 7/16
[113.79] [11.11]
6-5/8 [168.28]
TR-7L
Model TR-7 Safe-T-Ground provides continuous monitoring of a trucks ground
connection throughout loading operations. Static electricity is often brought in by tank
trucks entering the loading area. The Safe-T-Ground Model TR-7 instantly stops loading
operations if a tank truck loses its ground.
To safeguard loading operations, the Safe-T-Ground circuit can be wired into your pump
control and to an audible alarm or signal light.
Example
TR-7 B
L TR-7-BL, Ground continuity control, 120 VAC, 36

coiled cable, alligator clamp, with indicating lights
Explosion-proof and intrinsically safe
120 VAC(standard)
220/240 VAC
Construction TR-7
Power
Supply
U
Option
Cable
B
Connection
Cable
X
Length
L
Options
Stud (standard)
Battery (alligator) clamp
36 coiled, extends to 16 (standard)
72 coiled, extends to 32
Red and green indicating lights
3/4 NPT CONDUIT

OPENING (TYP.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing: 356-T6 cast aluminum alloy
(copper-free), explosion-proof Class
I, Group D.
Size: 6-5/8 W x 10-3/8 H x 5-5/8 D.
Power Requirements: 105-125 VAC,
60 Hz. 7.75 watts - with light, 1.75
watts - without lights. Optional 220-240
VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Electrical Rating, Relay: DPDT, 10
amps, 125 VAC, 60 Hz contact rating.
Wiring: Terminal strip.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 NPT
Installation: 7/16 mounting lugs,
integrally cast.
Contactor: (Grounding clamp) molded

polyethylene with beryllium copper
contact clips. 16-2 type SO coiled
cable; retracts to 3 , extends to 16 .
Grounding Studs: 2 supplied. Order a
pair for each truck.
Shipping Weight: 20 lb with contactor
and cord.
Agency Approvals:UL.
Options: Integral pilot lights; 30 coiled
cable; Temporary contactor
assemblies, clamp connectors, and
other supply voltages.
Model TR-7
Model TR-7-L (Integral Pilot Lights)
379
Ground/Continuity Controls
SELECTING FUNCTION
Function
When used with socket 70-750DL8-1 or

70-750E8-1 or 70-464-1
Current limited to rating at relay or socket
whichever is less.
1-27/64
[36.00]
SELECTING TIME RANGE

Time Range
0.1sec-1sec
1sec-10sec
10sec-100sec
0.1min-1min
1min-10min
10min-100min
0.1hr-1hr
1hr-10hr
PROCESS CONTROL
380_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:10 AM Page 380
Series
DPM
Particulate Monitor & Control

Real-Time Leak Gage, Adjustable Alarm Points
6-5/16
[160.34]
Broken Bag) Sensors
4-3/8
[11.13]
Together the DPM Particle Monitor and the PMS Particle Sensor:
Prevent false readings from:
- Moist and conductive dusts
- Corrosive gases and condensate
- Dust buildup
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones
Protect downstream blowers, oxidizers, HEPAs, etc.
Keep a clean workplace and be a good neighbor
Model
DPM-A111
DPM-A112
DPM-A113
DPM-A121
DPM-A122
DPM-A123
DPM-AHZ111
DPM-AHZ112
DPM-AHZ113
DPM-AHZ121
DPM-AHZ122
DPM-AHZ123
System Rating
Weatherproof/NEMA 4X (IP66)
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Intrinsically Safe*
Range
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA
*DPM models listed intrinsically safe are to be used with corresponding intrinsically safe PMS models
making an intrinsically safe control loop. The PMS model can then be installed in a hazardous location
according to approval ratings listed. The DPM itself is not intrinsically safe and must be installed outside
the hazardous location.
380
4-3/8
[111.13]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: From PMS sensor.
Output Ratings:
Alarm relays: 2 form A (SPST) rated 5 A@ 240 V res. (must provide an 8 A
(max) fuse in series with relay load);
Analog: 4 to 20 mA (option RC).
Power Requirements: 115 VAC 50/60 Hz, 230 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: 6 watts max.
Accuracy: Standard: 5% of range, Optional: 1% of range.
Display: LCD.
Display Resolution: Standard: 5 pA; Optional: 0.5 pA.
Memory Backup: For set point storage only.
Enclosure: Cast aluminum, weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66).
Loop Power Supply (Isolated): 17 VDC loop supply provided by DPM control unit
for PMS sensor.
Agency Approvals: CE &CSA.*
Input Power
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
230 VAC 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
OPTION
Analog Output (4-20 mA), add -RC to the end of the model number
6-19/64
[159.94]
4-11/32
[110.33]
MOUNTING
6-19/64
[159.94]
The DPMParticle Monitor and PMS Particulate Sensor combine to provide a basic
baghouse and cartridge filter leak detector designed for general maintenance planning
and process protection. It is easy to use and reliable. Leakage is gauged in real-time, onthe-spot, without prior baseline data and without signal tuning. Simply apply power and
the general condition of the filter is quickly determined. An alarm point is set by simply
moving an indicator up and down the gage with the convenient, lockable key pad. For more
precise alarm setup the large display provides both a logarithmic analog bar graph and an
absolute digital readout. The log scale enables the user to observe both the baseline bleed
through and the high peaks that are caused by filter cleaning cycles and developing leaks.
Observation of both baseline and peaks is essential to setting proper alarms. The digital
readout in absolute units ensures correct interpretation of the readings and provides
accurate historical comparisons.
The DPM Particle Monitor is housed in a rugged cast aluminum enclosure. An LCD
displays particulate levels in bar-graph and digital forms. A lockable membrane keypad is
provided for setup and adjustment.
4-11/32
[110.33]
MOUNTING
381_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:09 AM Page 381
PROCESS CONTROL
Particulate Sensor
Series
PMS
Reliable Operation, Minimal Maintenance

6-3/32
[154.78]
FLANGE
2-15/16
[74.61]
CONDUIT ENTRY
NPT MOUNT
PMS Particulate Sensor

More effective control thanbroken bag detectors.
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones.
Repeatable in all applications (conductive and moist dusts).
How To Order:
Determine model number from model chart using example as a guide.
Select desired length of Particulate Sensor cable from cable model chart.
Process Connection
Maximum Process
Temperature
Maximum Process
Pressure
Insertion Length
(Recommended at Least 1/2
Duct Diameter)
1
2
3
4
T1
T2
T3
T4
P1
P2
Model
Description
Model
CAB-30
10 foot sensor cable
CAB-10
CAB-40
CAB-20
Consult factory for custom cable lengths up to 300 feet.
L1.5
L03
L05
L10
L15
L20
L30
L36
L48
L60
L72
3
[76.2]
MOUNT
3
[76.2]
MOUNT
QUICK CLAMP
1 MALE NPT
FlangeMount
The PMS Particulate Sensor employs a field-proven combination of passive-induction

and protected-probe technologies. As particles flow near and around the probe, minute
currents are dynamically induced into the probe by flowing particulate. A DSP processes
the signal into an absolute output that is reasonably linear to mass. Protective layers over
the probe work in combination with induction-sensing to ensure reliable operation with all
types of particulate including moist powders and highly conductive dusts. Maintenance is
minimal and there is no need for an air purge. For durability, the sensors are passive and
free of electronics. The PMS Particulate Sensor is designed to be used with the DPM
Particle Monitor in order to be intrinsically safe.
PMS A1
1 T1 P1 L1.5
PMS
A1
AHZ1
2-15/16
[74.61]
OPTIONAL HIGH
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
SEALING GLAND
DO NOT LOOSEN
NPTMount
INSERTION
LENGTH
3-29/32
[99.22]
INSERTION
LENGTH
2-15/16
[74.61]
Example
Series Designator
Enclosure Rating
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
INSERTION
LENGTH
Quick ClampMount
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases, any type particulate.
Wetted Materials: T1 and T2: 316SS and PFA; T3 and T4:316SS and ceramic.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: Maximum -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C) (max must be calculated for each
application);
Process: See model chart.
Pressure Limits:
Standard: Full vacuum to 10 psi (0.69 bar);
Optional: 100 psi (6.89 bar).
Output Signal: pA.
Electrical Connection: Low noise coaxial.
Enclosure:
Standard: Painted cast aluminum, weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66);
Optional: Intrinsically safe, CSA (must use with proper DPM model).
Weight: Varies depending on length of probe and type of mount.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA
PMS-A11T1P1-L1.5:PMS Particulate Sensor, Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66),

1/2 NPT Connection, 250F Max Temp., 10 psi Max Pressure, 1.5 Probe.
PMS Particulate Sensor
Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP66)
Intrinsically Safe, CSA & CEA Approvals, Class I, II, and III. Division I & II, All
Groups, NEMA 4X (requires Quick Clamp connection or flange mount)
1/2 NPT
1 NPT with 1.5 Quick Clamp Connection
2 150# ANSIFlange
2 150# ANSI Flange with Process Mating Flange and Installation Kit
250F (121C)
450F (232C)
800F (426C) - requires flange mount
1200F (649C) - requires flange mount
10 psi
100 psi - requires flange mount
1.5 Probe
3 Probe
5 Probe
10 Probe
15 Probe
20 Probe
30 Probe
36 Probe
48 Probe
60 Probe
72 Probe
Description
381
Broken Bag) Sensors
5-3/64
[128.19]
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
PROCESS CONTROL
382_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:09 AM Page 382
Series
PMT
Particulate Transmitter
Broken Bag) Transmitters
2-Wire Loop Powered
5-3/64
[128.19]
6-3/32
[154.78]
INSERTION
LENGTH
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE
FLANGE
2-15/16
[74.61]
INSERTION
LENGTH
2-15/16
[74.61]
CONDUIT ENTRY
OPTIONAL HIGH
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
SEALING GLAND
DO NOT LOOSEN
3-29/32
[99.22]
3-13/16
[96.84]
NIPPLE INSERTION
LENGTH
2-15/16
[74.61]
3 [76.2]
MOUNT
3 [76.2]
MOUNT
QUICK CLAMP
1 MALE NPT
NPTMount
The Series PMT Particulate Transmitter is a reliable dust collector emissions monitor
and leak detector. The loop powered design is ideal for direct connection to existing PLCs
or other baghouse diagnostic control systems. Adjustable linear or logarithmic output
scaling enables trending both the baseline emissions and the high peak emissions that are
caused by filter cleaning cycles and developing leaks. Observation of both baseline and
peaks is essential to setting proper alarms. The PMT Particulate Transmitter employs a
field-proven combination of induction and protected-probe technologies. As particles flow
near and around the probe, minute currents are dynamically induced into the probe. The
signal is processed into an absolute output relative to the amount of particulate and thus
leakage. Protective-layers over the probe work in combination with induction-sensing to
ensure reliable operation with all types of particulate including moist powders and highly
conductive dusts. Maintenance is minimal and there is no need for an air purge
The Series PMT Particulate Transmitter:
For baghouses, cartridge filters, bin vents, and cyclones
Simple, low cost 2-wire installation for PLCs
Prevent false readings from:
- Moist and conductive dusts
- Corrosive gases and condensate
- Dust buildup
Repeatable in all applications (conductive and moist ducts)
Example
Series Designator
Enclosure Rating
PMT A1
1 T1 P1 1
PMT
A1
AHZ2
Process Connection
1
2
3
4
Maximum Process
T1
Temperature
T2
Maximum Process
P1
Pressure
Range
1
2
3
Insertion Length
(Recommended
at Least
1/2 Duct Diameter)
382
L1.5
L1.5
L03
L05
L10
L15
L20
L30
L36
FlangeMount
Quick ClampMount
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases, any type particulate conductive or nonconductive.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and PFA.
Air Velocity Range: 300 ft/min and higher.
Minimum Detection: Standard: 10.0 pA; Optional: 5.0 pA and 0.5 pA.
TemperatureLimits:
Ambient: -15 to 160F (-25 to 70C);
Process: Standard: -40 to 250F (-40 to 120C);
Optional: -40 to 450F (-40 to 232C).
Power Requirement: 18 to 28 VDC (24V nominal).
Current Consumption: Powered from 4 to 20 mA loop.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof, NEMA 4X (IP 66).
Weight: Varies with length of probe and type of mount.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA.
PMT-A11T1P11-L1.5:PMT Particulate Transmitter, Weatherproof/NEMA 4X (IP66), 1/2 NPT

Connection, 250F Max Temp., 10.0 psi Max Pressure, 10.0 pA -1.5 Probe.
PMT Particulate Transmitter (1-piece configuration, Sensor included in price)
Ordinary/General Purpose Locations, CE Approval, NEMA 4X (IP66), CSA
Hazardous Location, CSA Approval, Class I, Division II, Groups A-D. Class II, Groups F, G
1/2 NPT
1 NPT with 1.5 Quick Clamp Connection
2 150# ANSIFlange
2 150# ANSI Flange with Process Mating Flange and Installation Kit
250F (120C)
450F (232C)
10 psi
10.0 pA - 5000 pA
5.0 pA - 5000 pA
0.5 pA - 5000 pA (required for low levels or EPA leak detection)
1.5 Probe
3 Probe
5 Probe
10 Probe
15 Probe
20 Probe
30 Probe
36 Probe
383_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:27 PM Page 383
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
VBS
Vibration Switch
Adjustable Switch and Delay Settings, Continuous 4 to 20 mA Output
M12X1
4 PIN CONNECTION
Analog
Out
4...
20
mA
1-1/16
[26.87]
mm/s
RMS Set
inch/s
2-7/8
[73.05]
18...
32
VDC
sec
Delay Set
sec
pnp
500 mA
CKING
10
15
POWER
VBS-X
Scan here
to watch
product video
M8 CONNECTION
[316 SS]
The Series VBS Vibration Switch is small, compact, and uses two easy set up dials that
adjust the maximum RMS velocity set point and false trip time delay. The Series VBS is
intended to continuously monitor the changes in a machines vibration level. The VBS
takes real-time RMS vibration input and provides an analog output of velocity as well as a
switching output when an alarm value is exceeded.
FEATURES
Easy set-up and operating concept
4 to 20 mA output
No software required
Adjustable switch and delay set point
1-1/32
[25.91]
APPLICATIONS
Vibration monitoring for:
Motors
Pumps
Fans
Engines
Compressors
Centrifuges
Generators
Turbo chargers
Gear boxes
Conveyors
Model
VBT-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Material: PBT, PC, FPM, and
316 SS.
105C).
Accuracy: < 3%.
Measuring Range: 0 to 50 mm/s.
Connections: M12 connector.
Electrical Rating: 18 to 32 VDC.
Mounting Orientation: All.
Nonlinearity: < 0.25% of span.

Switch Output Range:
VBS-1: 0 to 25 mm/s Vrms;
VBS-2: 0 to 50 mm/s Vrms.
Analog Output Range: 10 to 1000 Hz.
Switch Type: PNP NO (500 mA max).
Switch Time Delay: 1 to 60 s.
Repeatability: < 0.5%.
Weight: 0.25 lb (0.114 kg).
Model VBS-1, Vibration Switch 0 to 25 mm/s Vrms Range

Model VBS-2, Vibration Switch 0 to 50 mm/s Vrms Range
Vibration Transmitter
Continuous 4 to 20 mA Output Signal
M12 CONNECTOR
7/8
[22.00]
2-1/2
[63.25]
Scan here
to watch
product video
1/4-28 UNF
The Model VBT-1 Vibration Transmitter continuously detects the vibration in a

system and monitors for unusual operating conditions and potential failure. The vibration
is converted into an analog signal at the current output. The VBT requires no setup, and
there is no software required for configuration. The 2-wire loop power operation, combined
with standard M12 micro cable connector and interchangeable mounting studs (1/4-28
UNF/M8 (2) or the 1/4-28 UNF), makes for a fast and reliable installation.
FEATURES
Easy set-up and operating concept
4 to 20 mA output
No software required
Stainless steel housing
7/8
[22.23]
APPLICATIONS
Vibration monitoring for:
Motors
Pumps
Fans
Engines
Compressors
Centrifuges
Generators
Turbo chargers
Gear boxes
Conveyors
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: < 3%.
Connections: M12 connector.
Electrical Rating: 9.6 to 32 VDC.
Nonlinearity: < 0.25% of span.
Frequency Range: 10 to 1000 Hz.
Repeatability: < 0.5%.
Weight: 0.28 lb (0.125 kg).
Model VBT-1, Vibration Transmitter
383
Vibration Controls
2-1/2
[63.67]
PROCESS CONTROL
384_Layout 1 7/15/14 2:45 PM Page 384
Model
CBAS
Belt Alignment Switch

Adjustable Activation Angles, Two Micro Switches
2-3/8
[60.33]
TOUCH
PULLEY
Conveyor Controls
5-9/16
[141.29]
75
2-9/16
[65.09]
2-9/16
[65.09]
3-11/32
[84.93]
5-21/64
[135.33]
5-49/64
[70.25]
2X 3/4 NPT
3/16 [4.76]
1/4 [6.35]
51/64 [20.24]
1-15/32 [37.31]
The Model CBAS Belt Alignment Switch is a rugged and reliable conveyor belt
alignment switch. The compact die cast aluminum enclosure is designed for easy
installation. The switch cover allows for simple access to wiring terminals and CAM
adjustments. Belt alignment switches are typically used in pairs with one switch on each
side of the conveyor belt mounted near the first and/or last pulley of a conveyor. Each CBAS
is equipped with two micro switches, allowing one actuation angle for small belt deviations
and a second actuation angle for extreme belt deviations. The actuation angles are factory
set at 20 degrees and 35 degrees, each actuation angle can be easily adjusted in the field
to fit any application.
Model CBAS-1, Conveyor Belt Alignment Switch
Model
CPS
10-9/16
[268.29]
3-43/64
[93.27]
9/32
[7.14]
29/32 [25.02]
1-63/64
2X 13/32
[50.4]
[10.32]
MOUNTING
HOLES
SPECIFICATIONS
to 60C).
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum.
Electrical Rating: 10 amp @ 125/250
VAC; 1/2 amp @ 125 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 3 screw type,
common, NO, NC.
2X 1-1/2
[38.1]
5-1/8
[130.18]
2X 2-11/64
[55.17]
Electrical Conduit: Two 3/4 female

NPT.
Activation Angles: 20 and 35
(adjustable).
Activation Force: 0.8 to 1.2 lb. (0.36
to 0.54 kg).
Control Type: Automatic reset.
Cable Pull Switch

For Emergency or Normal Shut-Off
63/64
[25]
5-1/8
[130.18]
8-7/16
[214.31]
3-7/16
[87.31]
2X 3/4
NPT
3-15/16
[100.01]
2-9/16
[65.09]
RESETTING
LEVER
Model CPS-1, Cable Pull Switch
384
LOCK POSITION
OPERATING
DIRECTION
31/64
[12.3]
2-49/64
[70.25]
29/32 9/32
[23.02] [7.14]
2X 1-1/2
[38.1]
1-31/32
51/64 [50]
[20.24]
6-1/16
[153.99]
The Model CPS Cable Pull Switch is designed to provide a switching system to isolate
the power to the conveyor system or other similar process equipment in event of a shutdown condition. A steel wire is placed along the side of the conveyor and attached to the
cable pull switch. When the cable is pulled at any point along the conveyor it will trip the
cable pull switch causing the conveyor to shut down. To restart the conveyor the CPS must
be manually reset. The CPS has a universal design for bi-directional activation and utilizes
a highly visible red flag to indicate the switch status. The compact design makes it ideal
for easy installation.
30
1-31/32 [50]
2-21/64
[59.13]
1/8 [3.18]
2-15/64 [5.95]
61/64
[24.21]
3-23/64
[85.33]
3-15/16
[100.01]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1/4
19/32 [6.35]
[15.03]
SPECIFICATIONS
to 60C).
Enclosure: Die cast aluminum.
Electrical Rating: 10 amp @ 125/250
VAC; 1/2 amp @ 125 VDC.
Electrical Connection: 3 screw type,
common, NO, NC.
1-37/64
[40.08]
5-1/8
[130.18]
2-9/16
[65.09]
2X 2-11/64
[55.17]
13/32
[10.32]
MOUNTING
HOLES
Electrical Conduit: Two 3/4 female

NPT.
Activation Angles: 30 degrees.
Activation Force: 11 2.25 lb. (5 1
kg).
Control Type: Manual reset.
385_Layout 1 7/15/14 2:42 PM Page 385
Universal Input Data Logger

Internal Temperature Sensor, Optional Internal Humidity Sensor
and Display, Universal Inputs
RoHS
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
UDL
3-1/16
[77.79]
2-5/8
[66.68]
The Series UDL Universal Input Data Loggers are available with 0, 2, or 4 universal
inputs. Each universal input can be individually configured to accept a thermocouple, RTD,
thermistor, voltage, or current input. All Series UDL data loggers have an internal
temperature sensor and a digital input which can be used as a trigger to start logging or as
a pulse counter for interfacing with flowmeters or other sensors with a pulse output. Optional
features include an internal humidity sensor, an LCD display, and an external humidity and
temperature sensor. The Series UDL loggers interface to the USB port of a PC. The unit
includes software, USB connection cable and installed battery.
Model
UDL-000
UDL-100
UDL-010
UDL-110
UDL-002
UDL-102
UDL-012
UDL-112
UDL-004
UDL-104
UDL-014
UDL-114
Sensors Included
Internal temperature sensor
Internal temperature sensor w/ display
Internal temperature/RH sensor
Internal temperature/RH sensor w/ display
Internal temperature sensor, 2 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor, 2 universal inputs w/ display
Internal temperature sensor/RH, 2 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor/RH, 2 universal inputs w/ display
Internal temperature sensor, 4 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor, 4 universal inputs w/ display
Internal temperature sensor/RH, 4 universal inputs
Internal temperature sensor/RH, 4 universal inputs w/ display
Data Loggers, Indicating
4-13/16
[122.24]
4-1/4
[107.95]
1-1/4
[31.75]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: RTD, thermocouple, thermistor, current, voltage, slidewire.
Range: Internal temperature: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C); Internal RH: 0 to 100%;
External temperature: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C); External RH: 0 to 100%.
Accuracy: Internal temperature: 1F ( 0.5C); External temperature: 1F
(0.5C) over 30 to 122F (0 to 50C), 2F (1C) over -30 to 32F (-30 to 0C)
and 122 to 158F (50 to 70C); Internal/external RH: 2.0% RH over 10% to 90%,
4.0% RH over 0 to 10% and 90 to 100% RH.
Memory Size: 0 or 2 universal inputs: 62,000 readings; 4 universal inputs:
128,000 readings.
Resolution: All universal inputs: 16 Bit; Internal & external temperature: 12 Bit;
Internal & external RH: 8 Bit.
Sampling Method: Stop when full or continuous logging (wrap when full).
Computer Requirements: Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows ME,
Windows NT, Windows XP, and Windows Vista operating system with 16 MB
RAM, one free USB port.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V AA lithium metal battery, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: 6 years (approx.).
Interface: USB port (cable included).
Housing Material: ABS plastic.
Weight: 5.8 oz (165 g).
ACCESSORIES
DL500-LITE*, Lite Version Windows Operating System Software
DL500**, Full Version Windows Operating System Software Key
UDL-RH, Remote Humidity Probe
UDL-PS, Power Supply
*Free download from website
**Need lite version also
Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation.
385
PROCESS CONTROL
386_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:07 AM Page 386
Model
GDL
Graphical Display Data Logger

Measure Temperature, Humidity and Dew Point, Instant Display
Data Loggers, Indicating
3-1/16
[77.79]
4
[101.6]
The Model GDLGraphical Display Data Logger can record and instantly display
trends for temperature, humidity and dew point. The display can show measurement trends
in text or graphic format. Other features include a logging summary which details the sample
rate and memory status. Recording starts immediately with the push of a button or at a
user specified date and time. With the Windows based software, the user can select the
sampling interval, high/low alarm settings, logging channels and recording start time. Over
40,000 data points can be downloaded by way of a PCs USB port. Measured data stays
secure with a recording session counter and password-protected calibration. The Model
GDL comes with batteries, software and a USB cable.
Model GDL, Graphical Display Data Logger
1-1/2
[38.1]
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Size: 43,344 temperature;
21,672 temperature, RH and dew
point.
Temperature Range:15 to 150F (-10
to 65C).
Temperature Accuracy: 1F
(0.5C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.01F
(0.01C).
Humidity Range: 0 to 99% RH.
Humidity Accuracy: 2% RH, from 10
to 90% RH.
Humidity Resolution: 0.01% RH.

Sampling Rate: 1 s to 18 hrs, 1 s
increments.
98 and above (software included).
Power Requirements: (3) AA alkaline
batteries, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Model
GDL-T

3 External Temperature Sensors, 1 Internal Temperature Sensor
1-1/2
[38.08]
3-7/8
[98.30]
GDL-T
3
[76.06]
TEMP 1
TEMP 2
TEMP 3
DISPLAY
The Model GDL-T Four Temperature Graphical Display Data Logger provides
local, real time data and graphical trends on a large LCD. Front panel buttons allow users
to see all four temperatures, graph display, logging summary, sample rates, memory used
and memory left. This device can record up to 87,000 data points and download them to
your PC for further analysis. Applications include refrigeration/freezers, medical storage
facilities, greenhouses/florists, wine storage, and many more. Software, USB cable, digital
manual, and batteries are included with this product.
Model GDL-T, Four Temperature View Data Logger
UNITS
START
VIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Size: 21,760 points for 4
temperatures, 29,010 points for 3
temperatures, 43,520 points for 2
temperatures, 87,040 for single
temperature.
Internal Temperature Range: 15 to
150F (-10 to 65C).
External Probe Temperature Range:
-40 to 160F (-40 to 70C).
Temperature Accuracy: 1F (0.5C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.1F/C.
(-10 to 65C).
Time Accuracy: 100 ppm @ 75F.
Sampling Rate: User selectable 1
second to 18 hours.
98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista, and
Windows 7 operating systems.
Compatible with 32 and 64 bit systems.
System Requirements: 5 MB of free

space, 800 x 600 screen resolution, 1
USB port.
Power Requirements: (3) AA alkaline
replaceable.
Battery Life: 1 year continuous use, 2
years average use. Automatically
powers off in 1 hour if not logging data.
Alarms: Visual over and under alarm
indicator for all 4 channels.
Interface: USB port. USB cable is
included.
Weight: 7.0 oz (200 g).
386
387_Layout 1 7/21/14 12:09 PM Page 387
Button Data Logger

Self-Powered, Compact Size, USB Interface
The Series BDL Button Data Logger records temperatures and humidity in applications
where size and cost effectiveness are key. The BDL is housed in a SS case and is water
resistant, making it durable in hostile environments where excessive moisture is present.
The BDL is self-powered and features a USB interface. Sample rate and high/low alarms
are user selectable through the Windows-based application. The included software displays
downloaded data graphically with trace and zoom functions. The logger is very small which
enables it to be inserted into small items and packages. The Series BDL-K Logger Kit
includes 2 buttons, 2 magnets, an interface cable, and a plastic button holder.
Model
BDL-1
BDL-2
BDL-K1
BDL-K2
Input Type
Temperature
Temperature/Humidity
Temperature
Temperature/Humidity
Kit
No
No
Yes
Yes
ACCESSORIES
DL500-LITE*, Lite Version Windows Operating System Software
DL500**, Full Version Windows Operating System Software Key
BDL-SIL, Weatherproof Silicone Housing (5 pk)
BDL-WALL, Wall Mounting Bracket (5 pk)
BDL-CLIP, Plastic Button Holder (5 pk)
*Free download from website
**Must also have lite version
Series
MTL
20/30
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: BDL-1: -40 to 185F
(-40 to 85C); BDL-2: -4 to 185F
(-20 to 85C), 0 to 100% RH.
Memory Size: BDL-1: 2048 readings;
BDL-2: 4096 temperature and 4096
humidity readings (low resolution),
2048 temperature and 2048 humidity
readings (high resolution).
Accuracy: BDL-1: 1.5F (1C) from
-22 to 158F (-30 to 70C); BDL-2:
0.9F (0.5C) from 14 to 158F
(-10 to 70C), 5% RH.
Resolution: BDL-1: 8 bit; BDL-2: 8 or
11 bit.
1/4
[6.35]
Sampling Rate: BDL-1: Selectable

from 1 to 255 min; BDL-2: Selectable
from 1 s to 24 hrs.
98, Windows 2000, Windows ME,
Windows NT, Windows XP, and
Windows Vista operating system with
16 MB RAM, one free USB port.
Power Requirements: 3 V lithium
metal battery, internal, nonreplaceable.
Battery Life: BDL-1: 10 years
(approx); BDL-2: 5 years (approx).
Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Miniature USB Data Logger

Measure Temperature, Humidity, and Dew Point
3
[76.2]
1-39/64
[30.88]
The Series MTL Miniature USB Data Logger measures and records accurate readings
for temperature or temperature/humidity/dew point in a wide range of applications.
Sampling intervals and high/low alarm settings are user selectable through the included
easy to use Windows based software. On models ordered with an integral display, the
temperature and humidity readings alternate on the display. The series MTL can be
software configured to begin measuring based on a time delayed-start or by push-button.
The logger can store up to 43,344 readings and can be set to stop on memory full or for
continuous recording. Stored data is downloaded by plugging the unit into a PCs USB
port (cable included). The loggers provide measurements for many environment conditions,
which make them ideal for refrigeration systems, laboratories, and medical storage
facilities.
Model
MTL-20
MTL-30
MTL-20-LCD
MTL-30-LCD
Input Type
Temperature
Temperature/Humidity/Dew Point
Temperature
Display
No
No
Yes
Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: MTL20: -40 to
185F (-40 to 85C); MTL30: -40 to
160F (-40 to 70C), 0% to 99% RH
(non condensing).
Accuracy: MTL20: 1F (0.5C);
MTL30: 1F (0.5C), 2% RH from
10% to 90% RH.
Resolution:
Non-LCD models: 0.01F (0.01C),
0.01% RH;
LCD models: 0.1F (0.1C), 0.1%
RH.
21,672 each temperature and RH.
39/64
[15.48]
Sampling Mode: Stop on memory full

or memory rollover for continuous
recording.
Sampling Rate: 1 s to 18 hrs.
based application software included.
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032
387
Data Loggers, Miniature
43/64
[17.07]
RoHS
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
BDL
PROCESS CONTROL
388_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:06 AM Page 388
Series
WTDL
Wireless Temperature/Humidity Data Logger

Transmission up to 400 Feet, Text/Email Alarm Updates
1-17/64
[32.00]
WHITE
BODY
PROBE
ATTACHMENT
4-61/64
[125.72]
1 2 3 4
Data Loggers, Wireless
ON 13
3/8
[9.40]
180 HORIZONTAL
ROTATION
90 VERTICAL
ROTATION
27/64
[10.67]
WTDL-30
WTDL-10/20
.300
.137 X 2
2.753
.760
.600
2.753
3.575
5.296
.120
3.780
Wireless Transceiver
The Series WTDL Temperature/Humidity Data Logger is perfect for applications
which require real time monitoring or areas that are not as accessible to periodically retrieve
the data. The data loggers can transmit up to 500 feet indoors and up to 2000 feet outdoors.
The distance can be increased by using additional receivers. Wireless data is transmitted
on a 2.4 GHz frequency allowing it to be used anywhere in the world. A network of data
loggers can be separated into a smaller subnet. These subnets can all be controlled by a
single PC. The Series WTDL data loggers also feature a user programmable alarm. This
alarm can be configured to show an on screen alarm, send a text message (standard SMS
rates apply) or an email if an alarm condition is met.
Model
WTDL-10
WTDL-20
WTDL-30
Description
Temperature data logger
Temperature data logger with humidity output
Temperature data logger with probe attachment
ACCESSORIES
Model WTDL-RX, Wireless transceiver, USB cable, software CD, software
manual, A/C adapter
TLH-5903, Replacement Battery
3.580
MINI USB
PORT
1.570
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: WTDL-10/WTDL-20: -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C); WTDL-30:
-328 to 500F (-200C TO 260C) for probe.
Humidity Range: WTDL-20: 0 to 95% RH.
Temperature Accuracy: WTDL-10/WTDL-20: 0.9F (0.5C) from 32 to 122F (0 to
50C); WTDL-30: 0.18F (0.1C) from -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C), 0.9F (0.5C)
outside of specified range.
Humidity Accuracy: WTDL-20: 3.0% RH, 2% typical at 77F (25C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.018F (0.01C).
Humidity Resolution: WTDL-20 only: 0.1% RH.
RF Carrier Frequency: 2.45 GHz.
Band: ISM band 2.405-2.48 GHz.
Maximum Power Output: +0 dBm typical.
Wireless Transmission Range: 2000 (610 m) outdoors, line of sight; 500 (152
m) indoors.
Receiver Sensitivity: -95 dBm typical.
Memory Size: WTDL-10/WTDL-30: 30,000 Readings; WTDL-20: 15,000 readings
per channel, software configurable memory wrap.
Sampling Method: Stop on memory full or continuous recording.
Sampling Rate: 2 sec to 24 hrs.
TemperatureLimits: -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C).
Humidity Limits: 0 to 95% RH.
Computer Requirements: Windows Xp Sp3, Windows Vista, Windows 7.
Computer Interface: WTDL-RX.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V TL-5104 lithium metal battery, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Battery Life: 2 years (approx.).
Weight: 0.25 lb (113.4 g).
FCC Approval: FCC ID# OA3MRF24J40MA.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
388
389_Layout 1 7/9/14 8:49 AM Page 389
Wireless Wi-Fi Data Logger

Measures Temperature/Humidity, Integral LCD
RoHS
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DW-WIFI
3-7/8
[97.30]
Data Loggers, Wireless
1
[26.36]
2-3/4
[71.30]
The Series DW-WIFI Wireless Wi-Fi Data Logger measures and records up to 1,000,000
temperature and / or humidity readings and shares the data with any PC or server on the
same Wi-Fi network. Software settings allow the user to set the high and low alarms, the
sampling rate, and the temperature scale. If the Wi-Fi connection is lost, the sensor will
continue to store any records until it can regain communication with the network. Stored
data can be viewed at any time after the communications have been restored. Each data
logger includes a wall bracket that allows the data logger to be mounted to any wall or flat
surface. Configuration and logging software available for download on our website.
Model
DW-WIFI-T
DW-WIFI-TH
Input
Range
InternalTemperature
-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C)
Internal Temperature/Humidity -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C),
0 to 100%RH
DW-WIFI-TP
Remote TemperatureProbe
-40 to 257F (-40 to 125C)
DW-WIFI-TC
Remote Thermocouple
-454 to 2372F (-270 to 1300C)
(probe dependent)
DW-WIFI-T-HA Internal Temperature
-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C)
DW-WIFI-TH-HA Internal Temperature/Humidity -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C),
0 to 100%RH
DW-WIFI-TP-HA Remote TemperatureProbe
-40 to 257F (-40 to 125C)
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Size: 1,000,000 readings; 500,000 each for DW-WIFI-TH(-HA).
Sampling Mode: Continuous recording.
Transmission Rate: Selectable from 1 min to 24 hrs.
Power Requirements: 3.7 V lithium ion battery, installed functional, factory
replaceable (cable for charging included).
Interface: Wi-Fi connection.
Probe Length:
DW-WIFI-TP: 11.8 (30 cm);
DW-WIFI-TC: 59 (150 cm).
Weight: 7.2 oz (204 g).
Accuracy (typ.)
1.0F (0.5C) @ 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C)
0.6F (0.3C) @ 41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
2.5% RH @ 20 to 80%RH
1.2F (0.6C) @ 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C)
3.0F (1.5C)
Display Resolution
0.1F (0.1C)
0.5F (0.5C)
1.0%RH
0.1F (0.1C)
0.1F (0.1C)
0.2F (0.1C) @ 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C)

0.4F (0.2C) @ 41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
2.5%RH @ 10 to 90% RH
0.2F (0.1C) @ 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C)
0.1F (0.01C)
0.5F (0.5C)
1.0%RH
0.01F (0.01C)
389
PROCESS CONTROL
390_Layout 1 7/8/14 2:20 PM Page 390
Series
DW-USB
Compact USB Data Logger
RoHS
Measure Temperature, Humidity, Dew Point, Current, Voltage, or Carbon Monoxide

LED
1-3/64
[26.59]
Y
4-51/64
[121.73]
1-1/16
[26.99]
Data Loggers, USB
X
1-3/32
[27.76]
ModelDW-USB-CASE
ModelDW-USB-X
Model
DW-USB-1
DW-USB-2, -2-HA
DW-USB-3
DW-USB-4
DW-USB-5, -5-LR
DW-USB-6
The compact design of the DW-USB Series data loggers allows the user to monitor
temperature, humidity, dew point, voltage, current, or carbon monoxide almost anywhere.
The user can select the sampling rate, start time, high/low alarm settings, and temperature
unit parameters with easy to install Windows-based application. Stored data is downloaded
by simply plugging the module into a PCs USB port with no cable required. Alarm status
and low battery is indicated via built-in flashing LEDs. When the protective cap is fitted,
the data logger resists moisture to IP67 standards. These features make the data logger
ideal for calibration labs, pharmaceutical plants, environmental chambers, and storage
warehouses.
ACCESSORY
Model DW-USB-CASE, Waterproof case for DW-USB-1
Model
DW-USB-1
DW-USB-2
DW-USB-2-HA
DW-USB-3
DW-USB-4
DW-USB-5
DW-USB-5-LR
DW-USB-6
Input Type
Temperature
High Accuracy Temperature/Humidity/Dew Point
Voltage
Current
Carbon Monoxide
Low Range Carbon Monoxide
Thermocouple
Overall
Length (X)
3-55/64
4-1/16
4-27/64
4-27/64
4-59/64
4-21/32
Overall
Length (Y)
3-55/64
4-1/16
4-27/64
4-27/64
4-59/64
4-21/32
Body/Clip
Standard
Vented
Standard
Standard
Vented
Standard
SPECIFICATIONS
16,382 each temperature and RH;
32,764 readings for voltage, current,
and thermocouple; and 32,510 for
carbon monoxide.
Sampling Mode: Stop on memory full.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 10 s
to 12 hrs (DW-USB-1, DW-USB-2, DWUSB-2-HA), 1 s to 12 hrs (DW-USB-3,
DW-USB-4, DW-USB-5, DW-USB-5LR:) and 10 s to 5 min (DW-USB-6).
Range
-31 to 176F (-35 to 80C)
-31 to 176F (-35 to 80C), 0 to 100% RH
-31 to 176F (-35 to 80C), 0 to 100% RH
0 to 30 VDC
4 to 20 mA
0 to 1000 ppm
0 to 300 ppm
J-type: -202 to 1652F (-130 to 900C);
K-type: -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C);
T-type: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C)
Accuracy
2F (1C)
1F (0.5C), 3% RH
0.6F (0.3C), 2% RH
1%
1%
6%
4%
1.5F (1C)
Cap
Standard
Standard
Black Tip Term Block
Blue Tip Term Block
Red Tip CO Sensor
Standard
LED
Clear/Red
Clear/Clear
Red/Green
Red/Green
Red/Green
Red/Green

98, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows NT, Windows 7 or Windows
Vista 32-bit or 64-bit operating
systems.
lithium metal battery, included, user
replaceable.
Housing: ABS plastic blend.
Resolution
1F (0.5C)
1F (0.5C), 0.5% RH
1F (0.5C), 0.5% RH
50 mVDC
0.05 mA
0.5 ppm
0.5 ppm
0.9F (0.5C)
Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista

are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Model
DW-USB-LITE
Mini Temperature Data Logger

Single Channel, USB Interface
32/32
[18.26]
2-11/16
[69.26]
The Model DW-USB-LITE Data Logger is a low cost temperature data logger that
measures and stores up to 4080 temperature readings over a measurement range 14 to
122F. The stand-alone device has a fixed 30-min sample rate and a battery life of 1 month
with continuous use. High/low alarm settings are user programmable through easy to
install Windows based software (included). The DW-USB-LITE features a visual LED
alarm indicator. Stored data is downloaded by directly plugging the data logger into a PCs
USB port and running the software, no cable required. Downloaded data can then be
graphed, printed and exported to other applications.
Model DW-USB-LITE, Mini Temperature Data Logger
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range: 14 to 122F
(-10 to 50C).
Temperature Accuracy: 4.5F
(2.5C).
Temperature Resolution: 2F (1C).
Memory Size: 4080 readings.
Sampling Mode: Continuous.
Sampling Rate: 30 min (fixed).
3/8
[22.23]

98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Vista (software included).
Power Requirements: 3 V CR1620
lithium metal battery, installed nonfunctional, user replaceable.
Interface: USB.
Windows, Windows NT and Windows Vista

are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
390
391_Layout 1 7/9/14 8:47 AM Page 391
Compact USB Data Logger With Display

Integral LCD Display, LED Status Indication
RoHS
LCD
SCREEN
Y
1-1/16
[26.99]
1-3/64
[26.59]
LED
Overall Length (X)

4-31/32
4-31/32
5-19/64
The Portable Series DW-USB-LCD USB Data Loggers displays and records
temperature, humidity and dew point. The easy-to-read LCD display shows the current
temperature or humidity along with the minimum and maximum reading since last reset.
For applications that require more accuracy, a high accuracy temperature and humidity
model is available. Thermocouple models can accept any J, K, or T type thermocouple with
a mini-plug connector. Series DW-USB-LCD data loggers include a Windows based software
which allows selection of the sampling rate, start time, high/low alarm settings, and
temperature unit application. For quick downloading of data, the data logger can be plugged
directly into a PCs USB port with no cable required. Downloaded data can then be graphed,
printed, or exported to other spreadsheet applications.
Model DW-USB-2-LCD, Temperature, humidity, and dew point USB data logger with
display
Model DW-USB-2-HA-LCD, High accuracy temperature, humidity, and dew point
USB data logger with display
Model DW-USB-6-LCD, Thermocouple USB data logger with display
ACCESSORIES
1818-0074, Immersion temperature probe
1818-0078, Penetration temperature probe
1818-0082, Surface temperature probe
1818-0085, Air duct temperature probe
1718-0077, Remote temperature probe handle
Model
DW-DATAPAD
LED
FUNCTION
BUTTON
Data Loggers, USB
Model DW-USB-X
Model
DW-USB-2-LCD
DW-USB-2-HA-LCD
DW-USB-6-LCD
PROCESS CONTROL
Series
DW-USBLCD
Model DW-USB-X-LCD
Base Length (Y)

4-57/64
4-57/64
5-15/64
Body/Clip
Cap
Vented
No clip Transparent
Vented
No clip Transparent
Plug in bottom No clip Transparent
LED
Red/Green
Red/Green
Red/Green
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: DW-USB-2-LCD: Temperature: -31 to 176 F (-35 to 80C), Humidity: 0 to
100% RH; DW-USB-2-HA-LCD: Temperature: -31 to 176 F (-35 to 80C);
Humidity: 0 to 100% RH; DW-USB-6-LCD: K-type: -328 to 2372F (-200 to
1300C), J-type: -202 to 1652F (-130 to 900C), T-type: -328 to 662F (-200 to
350C).
Accuracy: DW-USB-2-LCD:Temperature 1F (0.5C), Humidity 3.0%; DWUSB-2-HA-LCD:Temperature 0.6F (0.3C), Humidity 2.0%; DW-USB-6-LCD:
2F (1C).
Resolution: Temperature: 1F (0.5C), Humidity: 0.5% RH.
Memory Size: Thermocouple models: 32510 readings; Temperature/humidity
models: 16382 readings.
Sampling Mode: Continuous with data rollover.
Sampling Rate: Selectable from 10 seconds to 12 hours for temperature/humidity
models; 1 second to 12 hours for thermocouple models.
Display: 2.5 digit LCD.
Computer Requirements: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows
VISTA 32-bit or 64-bit operating systems.
Power Requirements: 3.6 V 1/2 AA lithium metal battery, included, user
replaceable.
Housing: ABS plastic blend.
Weight: Temperature/humidity models 1.6 oz (45.4 g); Thermocouple models 1.8
oz (51 g).
Handheld Portable Data Viewer

Works With DW-USB Data Logger
RoHS
3/4 [19.00]
4-7/32 [107.00]
2-11/16 [68.00]
The Model DW-DATAPAD Handheld Portable Data Viewer configures and reads
data from up to 500 DW-USB data loggers. A 2.8 full color TFT touch screen display is
easy to read and simplifies navigation through the configuration menus. Data that has been
downloaded to the viewer can be displayed as a trend graph or a statistical summary. Stored
data can also be transferred to a computer using the provided micro-USB cable and the
included Windows based software. A rechargeable lithium battery is provided that has
an average life of 5 to 8 hours under constant use.
The DW-DATAPAD is compatible with the following DW-USB data loggers: DW-USB-1,
DW-USB-1-HT, DW-USB-1-LCD, DW-USB-2, DW-USB-2-HA, DW-USB-2-HA-LCD, DW-USB2-LCD, DW-USB-6, DW-USB-6-LCD, and DW-USB-LITE.
Model DW-DATAPAD, Handheld Portable Data Viewer for Dwyer USB Data Loggers
SPECIFICATIONS
Data Recording Capacity: Internal flash memory, greater than 8.5 million
readings.
Battery life: 5 to 8 hours (constant use).
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Power Requirements: CA374170 lithium ion battery, installed functional, factory
replaceable.
Display: 2.8 full color TFT touch screen LCD display.
Resolution: 240 X 320.
Interface: Touch screen and single front-panel push-button power switch.
Connections: 1 USB type A socket (top of unit) for data logger connection. 1
micro-USB (bottom of unit) for connection of unit to PC via supplied USB cable.
Compatible Data Loggers: DW-USB-1, DW-USB-1-HT, DW-USB-1-LCD, DWUSB-2, DW-USB-2-HA, DW-USB-2-HA-LCD, DW-USB-2-LCD, DW-USB-6, DWUSB-6-LCD, and DW-USB-LITE.
Weight: 3.9 oz (111 kg).
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
391
PROCESS CONTROL
392_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:04 AM Page 392
Series
LCR10
Circular Chart Recorder

Single Pen, Clockwise or Counter-clockwise Rotation
11-29/32
[302.41]
12-5/8
[320.68]
3-35/64
[90.10]
Chart Recorders
14
[355.60]
13-3/16
[334.95]
The Series LCR10 Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide range of features in an easy
to use package. The large 10 (254 mm) Circular chart allows easy reading of your data.
Available in clockwise and counter clockwise rotation, the LCR10 is compatible with
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR10 can be easily programmed for any of
six different thermocouple types, 100 platinum DIN RTDs, or process inputs (0 to 5
VDC or 4 to 20 mA). Inputs may be scaled to a min of 100 units (or degrees) to a max of
the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999.
Model
LCR10-101
LCR10-111
LCR10-201
LCR10-211
Rotation
Counter Clockwise
Counter Clockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Output
No
Yes
No
Yes
ACCESSORIES
LCR200, Chart paper, 0 to 200F, 24 hour, CCW
LCR2007, Chart paper, 0 to 200F, 7 day, CCW
LCR110C, Chart paper, 0 to 110C, 24 hour, CCW
LCR-R, Red chart pens, package of 6
LCR-B, Blue chart pens, package of 6
Series
LCR20
12-5/8
[320.68]
14
[355.60]
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: Thermocouple:Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 platinum DINcurve
(0.00385 per per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 impedance, 4 to 20 mA
across 250 .
Chart Size: 10 (254 mm).
Accuracy: 0.5% of span (100 division span).
Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), 1A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Chart Speed: Programmable 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rotation (168 hours=7
days).
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C); 0-90% RH
(non-condensing).
Power Requirements: 110/220 VAC 10%.
Battery Backup: 9 V alkaline battery, installed functional, user replaceable.
Housing Material: Fire retardant polyphenylene ether and polystyrene PPE & PS
with acrylic window.
Mounting: 20 degrees of vertical, 10 degrees of horizontal.
Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder

Dual Pen, Adjustable Rotation Speeds, Selectable Recording Times
11-29/32
[302.41]
12-5/8
[320.68]
3-35/64
[90.10]
14
[355.60]
13-3/16
[334.95]
The LCR20 Dual Pen Circular Chart Recorder offers a wide range of features in an
easy to use package. The large 10 (254 mm) circular chart allows easy reading of your
data. Available in clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation, the LCR20 is compatible with
Honeywell and Partlow circular charts. The LCR20 has one pen input that can be easily
programmed for any of six different thermocouple types, 100 ohm platinum DIN RTDs,
or process inputs (0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA). Inputs may be scaled to a min of 100 units
(or degrees) to a max of the sensor scale or -1999 to +9999.
Model
LCR20-101
LCR20-111
LCR20-201
LCR20-211
Rotation
Counter Clockwise
Counter Clockwise
Clockwise
Clockwise
Output
No
Yes
No
Yes
ACCESSORIES
LCR200, Chart paper, 0 to 200F, 24 hour, CCW
LCR2007, Chart paper, 0 to 200F, 7 day, CCW
LCR110C, Chart paper, 0 to 110C, 24 hour, CCW
LCR-R, Red chart pens, package of 6
LCR-B, Blue chart pens, package of 6
392
12-5/8
[320.68]
14
[355.60]
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges Input 1: Thermocouple:Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 platinum DIN
curve (0.00385 ohms per per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 impedance, 4 to
20 mA across 250 .
Ranges Input 2: Thermocouple:Type J, K, T, R, S, B; RTD: 100 platinum DIN
curve (0.00385 ohms per per C); Process: 0 to 5 VDC, 250 impedance, 4 to
20 mA across 250 .
Chart Size: 10 (254 mm).
Accuracy: 0.5% of span (100 division span).
Output Relay: Form C (DPDT), 1A @ 240 VAC resistive.
Chart Speed: Programmable 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, 72, 168 hour rotation (168 hours = 7
days).
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C); 0 to 90% RH
(non-condensing).
Power Requirements: 110/220 VAC 10%.
Battery Backup: 9 V alkaline battery, installed functional, user replaceable.
Housing Material: Fire retardant polyphenylene ether and polystyrene PPE & PS
with acrylic window.
Mounting: 20 degrees of vertical, 10 degrees of horizontal.
393_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:22 AM Page 393
HVAC MEASUREMENT
GUIDE
pages 396-399
HVAC Mobile
Application
page 394
Manometers,
Portable
pages 400-408
Manometers,
Air Velocity
pages 409-411
Pitot Tubes
pages 412-414
Air Flow Grids

page 415
Vane Anemometers
page 416
Wind Meters
page 417
Vane
Thermo-Anemometers
pages 418-419
Thermo-Anemometers
page 420
Air Flow Hood

page 421
HVAC Balancing
Instruments
pages 422-429
Thermo-Hygrometers
pages 430-431
Moisture Meters
page 432
Gas Analyzers/Kits
pages 433-435
Leak Detectors
pages 436-437
Sound Meters
page 438
Light Meters
page 439
Backflow TestKit
page 440
Thermometers,
Thermocouple
page 441
Hand Held
Thermocouples
page 442
Thermometers,
Immersion
page 443
Thermometers,
Infrared
pages 444-445
Thermal Imaging
Camera
page 446
Multimeters
pages 447-448
Clamp Multimeters
pages 448-449
Pen Multimeters
page 450
Signal Generators/
Multimeters
page 451
Tachometers
page 452
Liquid Analyzers
pages 453-454
Calibration Pumps
pages 455-457
Pressure
Calibrators
page 458
TESTEQUIPMENT | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
pages 394-395
393
TEST EQUIPMENT
394_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:02 AM Page 394
Current/voltage signal generator used to calibrate panelmeters.

The Model CSG Digital Signal Generator is perfect for generating or simulating input
signals to panel meters and process controllers. The signal generator is capable of
sourcing up to 10 VDC or 20 mA in 1 VDC or 1 mA steps. The backlit digital display
allows users to quickly compare the reading on the Model CSG to that of the panel
meter or process controller. The signal from the Model CSG can be used to set up
the upper and lower limits of the process range. It can also be used to insure that set
point and alarm functions are working properly on the panel meter or process
controller.
Combustion analyzer maximize boiler efficiency while monitoring

harmful products of combustion.
There are several critical factors in attaining efficient combustion for boilers and other
combustors. Monitoring the temperature of combustion and minimizing the amount
of excess air in the system are undoubtedly essential steps. A Dwyer 1207-NOX Flue
Gas Analyzer can break down the products of combustion, giving an accurate
volumetric composition of harmful NOX compounds, O2, CO2, and CO. Additionally,
the 1207-NOX will monitor differential temperature, excess air and poison index.
Results can be easily viewed on screen or uploaded to a PC via the user-friendly
software.
FREEDOWNLOAD!
Download the phone App or use the Web version
of our Air Velocity and Flow Calculator on our
website at: www.dwyer-inst.com/flowcalc.
Scan here
to watch
product video
HVACmobile application
Field calibrate and certify pressure gauges.
For those customers in the HVAC or Building Automation Systems Industry, Dwyer
offers the Air Velocity and Flow Calculator App available on the iOS and Google
Play Markets. One can easily convert velocity pressure to air velocity or air velocity
to air volume. Converting velocity pressure to air volume is advantageous for
effortlessly changing the pressure on your Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage
or manometer to velocity. Moreover, this Calculator also includes air density factors
from humidity levels. By utilizing the air velocity to air volume functionality, one can
simplistically convert the air velocity to air flow rates from duct dimensions, with just
the tap of a button.
Using the series PHP-1 with a DPG-100, a technician can calibrate or certify process
pressure gauges up to 1% accurate. The PHP-1 hand pump can easily supply
pressures up to 600 PSI by squeezing the handle and adjusting the volume control
valve. The pump has two connections to be connected with a test gauge, such as the
Dwyer Model DPG-100, and a process gauge, such as the Dwyer SGL series.
394
395_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:01 AM Page 395
TEST EQUIPMENT
Digital Manometers used to check gas pressure to a heating burner.
Determine air velocity and temperature levels in ducts or air supply

grills.
The Dwyer Series 471B Digital Thermo-Anemometer is the ideal portable product
for determining air velocity and temperature levels in ducts or air supply grills. With a
push of a button, FPM and Fahrenheit readings are converted to MPS and Celsius.
Readings may be stored and retrieved which allows the user greater efficiency with
HVAC balancing at various locations in a building.
Handheld anemometer enables measuring duct flow measurements.
Quickly measure humidity and temperature levels in ambient air.
Handheld anemometers are an excellent, portable tool for performing tests on HVAC
system performance; however, large rotating vanes can prevent easy access to ducts.
Dwyer introduces the MVA Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer to eliminate this problem.
Additionally, simple keypad programming enables the user to view volumetric flow
rates in CFM or CMM.
The Dwyer THI-10 Handheld Digital Hygrometer is a simple, portable device for
quickly measuring humidity and temperature levels in ambient air. The dew point and
wet-bulb temperature readings are derived from relative humidity and temperature
measurements. The THI-10 is often used in agricultural applications where proper
humidity and temperature levels are critical in plant or animal well being.
395
Checking the gas pressure to a heating unit on the burner side of the regulator is a
standard installation and service routine. The Dwyer Series 475 Handheld Digital
Manometer is a low-cost, durable device that is easily transportable in a pocket or
briefcase. Units are highly accurate with 0.5% full scale accuracy. Some servicemen
prefer our portable Dwyer Magnehelic differential pressure gage with dial type scale
for field use.
396_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:57 PM Page 396
Air Velocity Measurement
HVAC Measurement Guide
TEST EQUIPMENT
Introduction
In air conditioning, heating and ventilating work, it is helpful to understand the
techniques used to determine air velocity. In this field, air velocity (distance traveled per
unit of time) is usually expressed in feet per minute (FPM). By multiplying air velocity by
the cross section area of a duct, you can determine the air volume flowing past a point in
the duct per unit of time. Volume flow is usually measured in cubic feet per minute (CFM).
Velocity or volume measurements can often be used with engineering handbook or
design information to reveal proper or improper performance of an airflow system.
The same principles used to determine velocity are also valuable in working with
pneumatic conveying, flue gas flow and process gas systems. However, in these fields
the common units of velocity and volume are sometimes different from those used in air
conditioning work.
To move air, fans or blowers are usually used. They work by imparting motion and pressure
to the air with either a screw propeller or paddle wheel action. When force or pressure from
the fan blades causes the air to move, the moving air acquires a force or pressure component
in its direction of motion due to its weight and inertia. Because of this, a flag or streamer will
stand out in the air stream. This force is called velocity pressure. It is measured in inches of
water column (w.c.) or water gage (w.g.). In operating duct systems, a second pressure is
always present. It is independent of air velocity or movement. Known as static pressure, it
acts equally in all directions. In air conditioning work, this pressure is also measured in
inches w.c.
In pressure or supply systems, static pressure will be positive on the discharge side of the
fan. In exhaust systems, a negative static pressure will exist on the inlet side of the fan.
When a fan is installed midway between the inlet and discharge of a duct system, it is
normal to have a negative static pressure at the fan inlet and positive static pressure at its
discharge.
Total pressure is the combination of static and velocity pressures, and is expressed in the
same units. It is an important and useful concept to use because it is easy to determine
and, although velocity pressure is not easy to measure directly, it can be determined easily
by subtracting static pressure from total pressure. This subtraction need not be done
mathematically. It can be done automatically with the instrument hook-up.
Sensing Static Pressure
For most industrial and scientific applications, the only air measurements needed are
those of static pressure, total pressure and temperature. With these, air velocity and
volume can be quickly calculated.
To sense static pressure, six types of devices are commonly used. These are connected with
tubing to a pressure indicating instrument. Fig. 1-A shows a simple thru-wall static
pressure tap. This is a sharp, burr-free opening through a duct wall provided with a tubing
connection of some sort on the outside. The axis of the tap or opening must be
perpendicular to the direction of flow. This type of tap or sensor is used where air flow is
relatively slow, smooth and without turbulence. If turbulence exists, impingement,
aspiration or unequal distribution of moving air at the opening can reduce the accuracy of
readings significantly.
396
WALL TYPES
INSERTED TUBE
FLOW
STATIC TIP
LOW
RESISTANCE
Figure 1 - Types of Static Pressure Devices

Fig. 1-B shows the Dwyer No. A-308 Static Pressure Fitting. Designed for simplified
installation, it is easy to install, inexpensive, and provides accurate static pressure sensing
in smooth air at velocities up to 1500 FPM.
Fig. 1-C shows a simple tube through the wall. Limitations of this type are similar to wall
type Fig. 1-A.
Fig. 1-D shows a static pressure tip which is ideal for applications such as sensing the static
pressure drop across industrial air filters and refrigerant coils. Here the probability of
air turbulence requires that the pressure sensing openings be located away from the duct
walls to minimize impingement and aspiration and thus insure accurate readings. For a
permanent installation of this type, the Dwyer No. A-301 or A-302 Static Pressure Tip is
used. It senses static pressure through radially-drilled holes near the tip and can be used in
air flow velocities up to 12,000 FPM.
Fig. 1-E shows a Dwyer No. A-305 low resistance Static Pressure Tip. It is designed for
use in dust-laden air and for rapid response applications. It is recommended where a very
low actuation pressure is required for a pressure switch or indicating gage or where
response time is critical.
Measuring Total Pressure and Velocity Pressure
In sensing static pressure we make every effort to eliminate the effect of air movement. To
determine velocity pressure, it is necessary to determine these effects fully and accurately.
This is usually done with an impact tube which faces directly into the air stream. This type of
sensor is frequently called a total pressure pick-up since it receives the effects of both static
pressure and velocity pressure.
397_Layout 1 7/8/14 11:00 AM Page 397
STATIC
PRESSURE
TUBE
How to Take Traverse Readings
TOTAL
PRESSURE
TUBE
Pv
Pt
FLOW
Ps
FLOW
Ps=
STATIC
PRESSURE
Pt=
TOTAL
PRESSURE
Scan here
to watch
product video
Ps Pt
FLOW
Pt - Ps = Pv
TOTAL PRESS. - STATIC PRESS. = VEL. PRESS.
SHOWS SEPARATE STATIC AND TOTAL PRESSURE
TUBES FOR MEASURING VELOCITY PRESSURE.
In Figure 2, note that separate static connections (A) and total pressure connections (B)
can be connected simultaneously across a manometer (C). Since the static pressure is
applied to both sides of the manometer, its effect is cancelled out and the manometer
indicates only the velocity pressure.
To obtain the average total velocity in ducts of 4" diameter or larger, a series of velocity
pressure readings must be taken at points of equal area. A formal pattern of sensing points
across the duct cross section is recommended. These are known as traverse readings.
Figure 4 shows recommended Pitot tube locations for traversing round and rectangular
ducts.
EQUAL CONCENTRIC
AREAS
PITOT TUBE STATION INDICATED BY
To translate velocity pressure into actual velocity requires either mathematical calculation,
reference to charts or curves, or prior calibration of the manometer to directly show
velocity. In practice this type of measurement is usually made with a Pitot tube which
incorporates both static and total pressure sensors in a single unit.
A
R
B
D
CENTERS OF
AREAS
Round Duct
16.64 EQUAL
RECTANGULAR AREAS
.316 R
CENTERS OF
AREAS
Rectangular Duct
.548 R
.707 R
.837 R
.949 R
Figure 4 - Traverse on Round and Rectangular Duct Areas

Pt
Ps
FLOW
PITOT TUBE (SECTION

ENLARGED TO SHOW
DETAIL)
Figure 3 - Pitot Tube Senses Total and Static Pressures.

Manometer Measures Velocity Pressure
(Difference Between Total and Static Pressures).
Since the Pitot tube is a primary standard device used to calibrate all other air velocity
measuring devices, it is important that great care be taken in its design and fabrication. In
modern Pitot tubes, proper nose or tip design along with sufficient distance between
nose, static pressure taps and stem will minimize turbulence and interference. This
allows use without correction or calibration factors. All Dwyer Pitot tubes are built to
AMCA and ASHRAE standards and have unity calibration factors to assure accuracy.
In round ducts, velocity pressure readings should be taken at centers of equal concentric
areas. At least 20 readings should be taken along two diameters. In rectangular ducts, a
minimum of 16 and a maximum of 64 readings are taken at centers of equal rectangular
areas. Actual velocities for each area are calculated from individual velocity pressure
readings. This allows the readings and velocities to be inspected for errors or
inconsistencies. The velocities are then averaged.
By taking Pitot tube readings with extreme care, air velocity can be determined within an
accuracy of 2%. For maximum accuracy, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Duct diameter should be at least 30 times dia. of Pitot tube.
2. Locate the Pitot tube in a duct section providing 8-1/2 or more duct diameters upstream
and 1-1/2 or more diameters down stream of Pitot tube free of elbows, size changes
or obstructions.
3. Provide an egg-crate type of flow straightener 5 duct diameters upstream of Pitot tube.
4. Make a complete, accurate traverse.
To insure accurate velocity pressure readings, the Pitot tube tip must be pointed directly
into (parallel with) the air stream. As the Pitot tube tip is parallel with the static pressure
outlet tube, the latter can be used as a pointer to align the tip properly. When the Pitot tube
is correctly aligned, the pressure indication will be maximum.
In small ducts or where traverse operations are otherwise impossible, an accuracy of 5%

can frequently be achieved by placing Pitot tube in center of duct. Determine velocity from
the reading, then multiply by 0.9 for an approximate average.
Because accurate readings cannot be taken in a turbulent air stream, the Pitot tube should
be inserted at least 8-1/2 duct diameters downstream from elbows, bends or other
obstructions which cause turbulence. To ensure the most precise measurements,
straightening vanes should be located 5 duct diameters upstream from the Pitot tube.
397
Essentially, a Pitot tube consists of an impact tube (which receives total pressure input)
fastened concentrically inside a second tube of slightly larger diameter which receives
static pressure input from radial sensing holes around the tip. The air space between the
inner and outer tubes permits transfer of pressure from the sensing holes to the static
pressure connection at the opposite end of the Pitot tube and then, through connecting
tubing, to the low or negative pressure side of a manometer. When the total pressure tube
is connected to the high pressure side of the manometer, velocity pressure is indicated
directly. See Figure 3.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Figure 2 - Types of Pressure Measurements
In practical situations, the velocity of the air stream is not uniform across the cross section
of a duct. Friction slows the air moving close to the walls, so the velocity is greater in the
center of the duct.
398_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:59 AM Page 398
FILTER
OR OTHER
RESTRICTION
TEST EQUIPMENT
Scan here
to watch
product video
STATIC
TIPS
.50
.40
PRESSURE
DROP OR
DIFFERENTIAL
INCLINED
TUBE GAGE
.30
.25
.20
.15
.10
1000
Most manometer scales are calibrated in inches of water. Using readings from such an
instrument, the air velocity may be calculated using the basic formula:
1500
2000
AIR FLOW (CFM)
2500
Figure 5 - Differential Measurement Across Duct Restriction
.80
.60
FLOW
Manometers for use with a Pitot tube are offered in a choice of two scale types. Some are
made specifically for air velocity measurement and are calibrated directly in feet per
minute. They are correct for standard air conditions: i.e. air density of .075 lb per ft3
corresponds to dry air at 70F, barometric pressure of 29.92 inches Hg. To correct the
velocity reading for other than standard air conditions, the actual air density must be
known. It may be calculated if relative humidity, temperature and barometric pressure are
known.
V=1096.7
1.00
RESISTANCE (IN W.C.)
Calculating air velocity from velocity pressure
hv =4004.4 hv for .075 lb/ft3 dry air

d @ 70F, 29.92 in. Hg Baro.
For example, assuming a manufacturers specification for a filter, coil, etc:

V = Velocity in feet per minute.
hv = Velocity pressure in inches of water.
d = Density of air in pounds per cubic foot.
To determine dry air density, use the formula:
Where:
Given Flow Q (ft3/min.) = at differential h

(inches w.c.)
To determine flow at other differentials the formula is:
P
B
d=1.325 T
Where:
Qn (other flows) = Q
d = Air density in pounds per cubic foot.
Barometric (or absolute) static pressure
in inches of mercury.
T = Absolute temperature (indicated temperature in
F plus 460).
P =
B
With dry air at 29.9 inches mercury, air velocity can be read directly from curves on the
following page. For partially or fully saturated air a further correction is required. To save
time when converting velocity pressure into air velocity, the Dwyer Air Velocity
Calculator may be used. A simple slide rule, it provides for all the factors needed to
calculate air velocity quickly and accurately. It is included as an accessory with each
Dwyer Pitot tube.
To use the Dwyer Calculator:
1. Set relative humidity on scale provided. On scale opposite known dry bulb
temperature, read correction factor.
2. Set temperature under barometric pressure scale. Read density of air over
correction factor established in 1 (above) .
3. On the other side of calculator, set air density reading just obtained on the
scale provided.
4. Under Pitot tube reading (velocity pressure, inches of water) read air
velocity, feet per minute.
Determining Volume Flow
Once the average air velocity is known, the air flow rate in cubic feet per minute is easily
computed using the formula:
Q= AV
Where: Q= Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute.
A=Cross sectional area of duct in square feet.
V=Average velocity in feet per minute.
hn
h
Where: Q = Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute

h= differential in inches water column
hn = differential (other flow conditions)
Other Devices for Measuring Air Velocity

A wide variety of devices are commercially available for measuring air velocities. These
include hot wire anemometers for low air velocities, rotating and swinging vane
anemometers and variable area flowmeters.
The Dwyer No. 460 Air Meter is one of the most popular and economical variable area
flowmeter type anemometers. Quick and easy to use, it is a portable instrument calibrated
to provide a direct reading of air velocity.
A second scale is provided on the other side of the meter to read static pressure in inches
w.c. The 460 Air Meter is widely used to determine air velocity and flow in ducts, and from
supply and return grilles and diffusers. Two scale ranges are provided (high and low) with
calibrations in both f.p.m. and in w.c.
To Check Accuracy
Use only devices of certified accuracy. All anemometers and to a lesser extent portable
manometers should be checked regularly against a primary standard such as a hook gage
or high quality micromanometer. If in doubt return your Dwyer instrument to the factory
for a complete calibration check at no charge.
HVAC Mobile Application
Easily converts velocity pressure to air velocity or air velocity to air volume.
Determining Air Volume by Calibrated Resistance

Manufacturers of air filters, cooling and condenser coils and similar equipment often
publish data from which approximate air flow can be determined. It is characteristic of such
equipment to cause a pressure drop which varies proportionately to the square of the flow
rate. Figure 5 shows a typical filter and a curve for air flow versus resistance. Since it is
plotted on logarithmic paper, it appears as a straight line. On this curve, a clean filter which
causes a pressure drop of .50 in w.c. would indicate a flow of 2,000 c.f.m.
See page 554 (HVACMobile Application)
398
399_Layout 1 7/29/14 3:59 PM Page 399
AIR VELOCITY FLOW CHARTS

2600
1400F
1200F
2400
1000F
2200
800F
2000
600F
400F
300F
1600
200F
100F
70F
40F
1400
1200
1000
AIR VELOCITY IN FEET PER MINUTE
TEST EQUIPMENT
1800
800
600
400
200
0
0
.01
.02
.03
.04
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.8
4.0
GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER
13000
1400F
12000
1200F
11000
1000F
800F
10000
600F
AIR VELOCITY IN FEET PER MINUTE
9000
400F
8000
300F
7000
200F
100F
70F
40F
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
.2
.4
.6
.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
GAGE READING WITH PITOT TUBE (VELOCITY PRESSURE) IN INCHES OF WATER
399
400_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:57 AM Page 400
Series
476A
&
478A
476A Single Pressure Digital Manometer &

478A Digital Manometer
Electronic Zeroing, 1.5% Accuracy
2-13/16
[71.58]
TEST EQUIPMENT
2-13/16
[71.58]
6-17/32
[165.82]
6-17/32
[165.82]
5-57/64
[149.68]
5-57/64
[149.68]
Manometers,
Portable
SERIES 476A
DIGITAL MANOMETER
SERIES 478A
DIGITAL MANOMETER
29/32
[22.99]
Ideal for field or laboratory use, the Model 476A Single Pressure Digital Manometer
measures low pressures from -20 to 20 in w.c. with 1.5% full scale accuracy. Designed
especially for the HVAC contractor, the Model 476A can be used to set supply pressures, verify
pressure switch operation, adjust regulators, check pneumatic systems and computer
peripherals. The rugged, handheld unit is constructed with an extruded aluminum case for
exceptional durability.
The Series 478A manometer can be used to measure positive, negative, or differential
pressures. The unit features selectable units, auto zero, hold and a Min/Max function. Press
the Hold key to freeze the current pressure measurement on the display. The 478A
manometer includes a zeroing button to null out any minor pressure differences.
FEATURES
One-button auto-zero function
Auto power off.
Large, easy-to-read display.
Extruded aluminum case.
Instant selection from up to eight english/metric units.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 1.5% full-scale at 72F (22.2C). Includes linearity and repeatability.
Pressure Hysteresis: 0.1% of full-scale.
Pressure Limits: 5 psig (.74 bar).
Display: 4 digit LCD (.425H x .234W digits).
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, installed non-functional, user
replaceable.
Process Connections: For use with 3/16 or 1/4 ID tubing.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Model 476A-0, Digital Manometer, -20 to 20 in w.c.

Model 478A-0, Digital Differential Manometer, -4-0-4 in w.c.
Model 478A-1, Digital Differential Manometer, -60-0-60 in w.c.
ACCESSORIES
A-402A, Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch protects any
Series 476A/478A Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy
access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
OPTION
Example: 478A-1-NIST.
7-1/2H x 3W x 2-1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)

UHH-C1, Soft carrying case
Available Pressure Units

Range
Resolution Maximum
Model in w.c.
bar psi
in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. in w.c.
Pressure
0.02
476A-0 -20.0 to 20.0 .0498 0.723 1.471 4.98 20.00 37.4
49.8 508
5 psig
Resolution
Range
Model in w.c.
bar psi
in Hg kPa in w.c. mm Hg mbar mm w.c. Pa in w.c.
478A-0 -4.00 to 4.00
996 0.01
.1445 .294 0.996 4.00
7.47
9.96 101.6
0.1
478A-1 -60.0 to 60.0 .1495 2.168 4.41 14.95 60.0
112.1
149.5 1524
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
400
401_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:56 AM Page 401
Series
475
Mk III Handheld Digital Manometer

Ranges from 1 in. w.c. to 150 psid, 0.5% Accuracy
5/8 [15.88]
1-1/16
[26.98]
BARBED FOR 1/8 OR 3/16

I.D. TUBING 475-7 & 475-8 ONLY;
1/8 I.D. X 3/16 O.D. TUBING
TEST EQUIPMENT
5-7/8
[149.23]
The Dwyer Series 475-FM Mark III Handheld Digital Manometer is ideal for field
calibration, monitoring or trouble shooting HVAC systems, clean rooms, or a wide range
of other low pressure pneumatic systems. This handy instrument measures positive,
negative or differential pressures of air and natural gases in ranges from 1 in w.c. (0.249
kPa) to 150 psid (10.34 bar). The Series 475-FM is approved and is intrinsically safe for
hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4. Its simple operation and easy to
read digital display make it an indispensable test instrument for the plant engineer,
industrial hygienist and HVAC technician. When used with a Dwyer Pitot tube (), the
Series 475-FM Mark III can also be used as an air velocity gage. See the complete 475-1FM-AV kit.
The Series 475-FM Mark III is housed in a durable extruded aluminum case with its solid
state circuitry mounted on a tough fiberglass epoxy circuit board. To meet the most
demanding applications and to provide stability of instrument reading, the 1 in w.c. range is
compensated for position sensitivity through the use of a unique patented dual sensor system.
A standard 9 V battery provides up to 100 hours of operation. Dual push pads on the front
panel control on-off, auto zero, and pressure unit selection. No set-up or leveling. The large
0.42 LCD display is easy to read, minimizing data collection errors. Units include a low
battery indicator. The pressure sensor used is a highly stable silicon piezoresistive device.
Standard connections are dual sized for 1/8 or 3/16 ID vinyl or rubber tubing. Complete
instructions are conveniently printed on rear of housing.
FEATURES
New low range option 0-1.000 in w.c.
Measures positive, negative and differential pressures
Rugged, extruded aluminum case
Lightweight, fast and easy to use
Selectable english/metric units
FM approved
Model
475-000-FM
475-00-FM
475-0-FM
475-1-FM
475-2-FM
475-3-FM
475-4-FM
475-5-FM
475-6-FM
475-7-FM
475-8-FM
English
Range
0-1.000 in w.c.
0-4.000 in w.c.
0-10.00 in w.c.
0-20.00 in w.c.
0-40.00 in w.c.
0-200.0 in w.c.
0-10.00 psi
0-20.00 psi
0-30.00 psi
0-100.0 psi
0-150.0 psi
Metric
Range
.2491 kPa
0.996 kPa
2.491 kPa
4.982 kPa
9.96 kPa
49.82 kPa
.6895 bar
1.379 bar
2.069 bar
6.895 bar
10.34 bar
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
5 psig
10 psig
10 psig
30 psig
30 psig
60 psig
60 psig
150 psig
200 psig
OPTION
Example: 475-1-FM-NIST.
2-13/16
[71.44]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible combustible gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% full-scale, 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% full-scale from 32
to 60F and 78 to 104F (0 to 15.6C and 25.6 to 40C).
Display: 0.42 (10.6 mm) 4 digit LCD.
Resolution: See chart.
replaceable.
Weight: 10.8 oz (306 g).
Process Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) or
3/16 (4.76 mm) ID tubing. Two compression fittings for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) ID
x 1/4 (6.35 mm) OD tubing for 475-7-FM & 475-8-FM only.
475-AV, Air Velocity Kit Includes the Series 475-FM

Manometer, two A-303 static pressure tips two 9 lengths
3/16 ID rubber tubing, no. 166-6-CF Pitot tube, A-397 step
drill, A-532 air velocity slide chart and instruction bulletin H11, all packed in a tough, molded plastic carrying case with
die cut foam liner. To order, add AV suffix to any standard
475 model no.
Example: 475-1-FM-AV
475-000-FM-AV
ACCESSORIES
Series 475 Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy access.
With belt loop that snaps closed.
7-1/2H x 3W x 2-1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
Pitot tube:See pages 107-138 (Air Quality section)

401
Manometers,
Portable
29/32
[23.02]
402_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:34 AM Page 402
Series
477
Handheld Digital Manometer

Selectable Pressure Units, 0.5% Accuracy, FM Approved Intrinsically
Safe for Hazardous Locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4
5/8 [15.88]
1-1/16
[26.98]
TEST EQUIPMENT
BARBED FOR 1/8 OR

3/16 I.D. TUBING
Manometers,
Portable
5-7/8
[149.23]
29/32
[23.02]
Series 477 Handheld Digital Manometers are packed with features you need to make
pressure measurement and recording faster, easier and more accurate than ever. First, you
can instantly select from up to nine of the most widely used pressure units without having
to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious conversions. Next, a non-volatile memory
function enables storage of up to 40 readings perfect for HVAC technicians making Pitot
tube traverses of airflow readings across a duct. The FM approved models are intrinsically
safe for hazardous locations, Class 1, Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, T4.
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy backlight feature. It
automatically shuts itself off after 20 minutes to minimize battery drain. Electronic zeroing
means you simply touch a single key to perfectly null out any minor pressure differences.
A display HOLD key freezes the current pressure for those all-too-common situations
where readings fluctuate. We even included an audible alarm to warn you of overpressure
plus a visual alarm warning in case ambient noise levels are too high to hear the alarm.
Audible alarm also confirms a value has been stored, eliminating the need to observe
display during a duct traverse.
FEATURES
New low pressure ranges
Instant selection from up to nine english/metric units
Stores 40 readings in memory for later reference
Measure positive, negative or differential pressures
Large easy-to-read 0.4 LCD display includes switchable backlight for
great visibility anywhere
Both audible and visual overpressure alarms
Includes + and - indicators plus low battery warning
Operates up to 100 Hours on a single 9 V battery
Model*
477-000-FM
477-00-FM
477-0-FM
477-1-FM
477-2-FM
477-3-FM
477-4-FM
477-5-FM
477-6-FM
477-7-FM
477-8-FM
Range
0-1.000 in w.c.
0-4.000 in w.c.
0-10.00 in w.c.
0-20.00 in w.c.
0-40.00 in w.c.
0-200.0 in w.c.
0-10.00 psi
0-20.00 psi
0-30.00 psi
0-100.0 psi
0-150.0 psi

bar
psi
in Hg kPa
.0736 .2491
.1445 .2942 0.996
.3613 .7355 2.491
.0498 .7225 1.471 4.982
.0996 1.445 2.942 9.96
.4982 7.225 14.71 49.82
.6895 10.00 20.36 68.95
1.379 20.00 40.72 137.9
2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9
6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5
10.34 150.0 305.4 1034
in w.c.
1.000
4.000
10.00
20.00
40.00
200.0
276.8
553.6
830.4
2768
4152
mm Hg
1.868
7.473
18.68
37.36
74.73
373.6
517.1
1034
1551
5171
7757
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and compatible gases. FM
models air and compatible combustible
gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% full-scale, 60 to 78F
(15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% full-scale from
32 to 60F and 78 to 104F (0 to
15.6C and 25.6 to 40C).
Pressure Hysteresis: 0.1% of fullscale.
to 60C).
32 to 104F (0 to 40C).
2-13/16
[71.44]

176F (-20 to 80C).
Response Time: 1 s.
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline
battery, installed non-functional, user
replaceable.
Weight: 10.2 oz (289 g).
connections for use with 1/8 (3.18
mm) or 3/16 (4.76 mm) ID tubing. Two
compression fittings for use with 1/8
(3.18 mm) ID x 1/4 (6.35 mm) OD
tubing for 477-7-FM & 477-8-FM only.
ACCESSORIES
A-402A, Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch protects any Series
477 Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy access. With belt
loop that snaps closed.
7-1/2H x 3W x 2-1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
OPTION
Example: 477-1-FM-NIST.
mbar
2.491
9.96
24.91
49.82
99.6
498.2
689.5
1379
2069
6895
mm w.c.
25.40
101.6
254.0
508.0
1016
5080
7031
Pa
249.1
996
2491
4982
9964
Maximum
Pressure
5 psig
5 psig
5 psig
10 psig
10 psig
30 psig
30 psig
60 psig
60 psig
150 psig
200 psig
402
403_Layout 1 7/15/14 2:19 PM Page 403
Series
477A

Precise Air Pressure Measurement, 0.1% F.S. Accuracy
1-1/16
[27.13]
5/8
[16.21]
LOW
PRESSURE
TEST EQUIPMENT
HIGH
PRESSURE
SERIES 477A
DIGITAL MANOMETER
5-7/8
[149.69]
The Popular Model 477 is now available with 0.1% full-scale accuracy in the new Series
477A. The 477A contains a highly accurate differential pressure sensor that offers a 0.1% fullscale accuracy on air ranges from 20 in w.c. to 100 psid. Series 477A Handheld Digital
Manometers are packed with features needed to make pressure measurement and recording
faster, easier and more accurate than ever. Instantly select from up to nine of the most
widely used pressure units without having to waste time and risk mistakes with tedious
conversions. A non-volatile memory function enables storage of up to 40 readings perfect
for HVAC technicians making Pitot tube traverses of airflow readings across a duct. The
477A is also ideal for maintenance personnel or technicians that require a highly accurate
standard to check their instrumentation or equipment to ensure proper performance.
When working in poorly lighted areas, just switch on the handy backlight feature. The
manometer automatically shuts itself off after 20 minutes to minimize battery drain.
Electronic zeroing means you simply touch a single key to perfectly null out any minor
pressure differences. A display HOLD key freezes the current pressure for those all-toocommon situations where readings fluctuate. Included is an audible alarm to warn of
overpressure plus a visual alarm warning in case ambient noise levels are too high to hear
the alarm. Audible alarm also confirms a value has been stored, eliminating the need to
observe display during a duct traverse.
Clear, concise operating instructions for all functions are printed on the rear of the rugged
extruded aluminum case for quick reference. One-piece front membrane fully protects all
keys from dust and moisture; wipes clean in seconds. Detailed written instructions, a wrist
strap and 9 V alkaline battery are included.
FEATURES
Measure positive, negative, or differential pressures
Instant selection from up to nine english/metric units
Stores 40 readings in memory for later reference
Both audible and visual overpressure alarms
Operates up to 100 hours on a single 9 volt battery
New adjustable damping feature for averaging fluctuating reading
Model
477A-1
477A-2
477A-3
477A-4
477A-5
477A-6
477A-7
Range
0-20.00 in w.c.
0-40.00 in w.c.
0-200.0 in w.c.
0-10.00 psi
0-30.00 psi
0-50.00 psi
0-100.0 psi

bar psi
in Hg kPa in w.c.
.0498 .7225 1.471 4.982 20.00
.0996 1.445 2.942 9.96 40.00
.4982 7.225 14.71 49.82 200.0
.6895 10.00 20.36 68.95 276.8
2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9 830.4
3.447 50.00 101.8 344.7 1384
6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5 2768
mm Hg
37.36
74.73
373.6
517.1
1551
2585
5171
2-13/16
[71.58]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible compatible gases.
Wetted Parts: Consult factory.
Accuracy: 0.10% of full-scale from 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1% of full scale
from 32 to 60 and 78 to 104F (0-15.6 and 25.6-40C).
replaceable.
Weight: 10.2 oz. (289 g).
Process Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) or
3/16 (4.76 mm) ID tubing for 477A-1, 477A-2, 477A-3, 477A-4 and 477A-5 only.
Two compression fittings for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) ID x 1/4 (6.35 mm) OD
tubing for 477A-6 and 477A-7 only.
ACCESSORIES
Series 477A Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy access.
With belt loop that snaps closed.
7-1/2H x 3W x 2-1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
OPTION
Example: 477A-1-NIST.
mbar
49.82
99.6
498.2
689.5
2069
3447
6895
FTWC
1.667
3.333
16.67
23.07
69.20
115.3
230.7
mm w.c. Pa
508.0
4982
1016
9964
5080
7031
Maximum
Pressure
3 psig
3 psig
15 psig
30 psig
60 psig
100 psig
200 psig
403
Manometers,
Portable
29/32
[22.99]
404_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:54 AM Page 404
Series
HM35
Precision Digital Pressure Manometer

Up to 0.05% Accuracy, Graphical Display, Data Logging Capability
Manometers,
Portable
TEST EQUIPMENT
3-11/16
[93.66]
1-9/16
[39.69]
7-7/8
[200.03]
The High Precision Series HM35 Digital Manometer is designed to reliably measure
and log pressure measurements for critical applications. This family of manometer can
measure absolute pressure, differential pressure or gage pressure with up to 0.05%
accuracy. The data logging function can store up to 10,742 readings and transmit the
readings to a PC through an IR serial port. The large display can graphically display trends
in the data as well as peaks and valleys. The series HM35 comes standard with a calibration
certificate so that the instrument can be used as a secondary calibration standard when
testing other pressure instrumentation. This manometer is ideal for laboratories,
calibration facilities, and other critical pressure applications.
ACCESSORIES
HM28-0, 1/8 NPT Adapter (1Piece)
HM35-1, Communication software
HM35-2, Infrared RS-232 Serial Adapter. Required to download stored data to a PC
HM35-3, External Power Converter with U.S. plug adapter. Input 100 to 240 VAC,
50/60 Hz
Error Limit 0.2% FS for gauge, vacuum, and differential pressure

Model
Range
OverPressure
HM3531DLB300 0-10 in w.c. (0-2.5 kPa)
50 in w.c.
HM3531DLC300 0-28 in w.c. (0-7 kPa)
140 in w.c.
HM3531DLE300 0-80 in w.c. (0-20 kPa)
600 in w.c.
HM3531DLF300 0-120 in w.c. (0-30 kPa)
600 in w.c.
HM3531DLG300 0-200 in w.c. (0-50 kPa)
58 psi
HM3531DLH300 0-14.5 psi (0-100 kPa)
58 psi
For higher accuracy models change the 10th digit from a 3 to a 1 (0.05%
FS), 2 (0.1% FS), or 6 (0.1% of reading). For example, 0 to 28 in of w.c.
with 0.05% accuracy would be model number HM3531DLC100. Higher
accuracies are only available on 0 to 28 in of w.c. range or higher.
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-MD.
404
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Air and compatible gases.
Wetted Materials:18/8 stainless steel.
Accuracy: (Includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability): Depending on model.
0.20% full-scale 1 digit;
0.10% full-scale 1 digit;
0.05% full-scale 1 digit.
Humidity: Maximum 95% RHnon-condensing.
Display: Graphical backlit LCD. 128 x 64 points.
Power Requirements: (3) 1.5 VAA alkaline batteries, installed functional, user
replaceable. Can operate on 6 to 9 VDC external power.
Current Consumption: 25 mA without back lit display, IR, or buzzer.
Memory: 10,742 readings. Recording intervals adjustable from 1 s to 24 hrs or
manual.
Case Protection: IP54 (NEMA 3).
Weight: 10.5 oz (300 g).
Process Connections: Hose 4/6 mm or 1/8 NPT.
405_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:01 AM Page 405
Series
HM28

High Accuracy (0.2%, 0.1% or 0.05%), Differential, Gage or Absolute
DIGITAL MANOMETER
5-61/64
[151.21]
1-5/16
[33.34]
3-1/4
[82.55]
The Series HM28 Digital Hand-Held Manometer is a precision instrument designed
to measure a wide range of pressures to a very high accuracy. The unit incorporates a
variety of features in an easy to use format that makes it useful in a wide variety of
applications. Features include: measurement in all common pressure ranges, display
resolution to 0.001, differential or relative measurement, two line liquid crystal display, and
adjustable auto power off to conserve battery.
We are so proud of the accuracy of the HM28 that we provide a certificate of calibration
with the unit at no additional cost. Depending on your application, the HM28 can be used
as a secondary calibration standard for your other pressure instrumentation.
ACCESSORIES
HM28-0, 1/8 NPT Adaptor 1 piece
HM28-1, Communication Software & Cable
HM28-2, Universal Power Adaptor
Series
490

Memory: 964 measured values.
Recording intervals adjustable from
manual, 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2,
3, 5, 10, 30, 60 minutes.
Case Protection: IP54 (NEMA 3).
Case Dimensions: 6 x 3.27 x 1.34
(152 x 83 x 34 mm).
Weight: 9.5 oz (270 g).
Process Connections: Hose; 4/6 mm
or 1/8 NPT.
Maximum Measurement Rates:
Stand alone: 2-1/2 readings/s (0.1%
and 0.05% ratings), 5 readings/s (0.2%
rating). Output to RS-232: 20
measurements/s (0.2% rating). 10
measurements/s (0.1% and 0.05%
ratings).
RS-232 Baud Rate: Adjustable, 1200,
2400, 4800, or 9600 baud.
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-MD.
Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer

Liquid & Gas Pressure Measurement, 0.5% FS Accuracy
.927
2.821
6.191
Series 490 Digital Manometers are versatile, hand-held, battery operated manometers
available in several basic ranges for positive or positive differential pressure measurement
and can tolerate most liquid media compatible with 316LSS.
A memory function allows storage of up to 40 readings for later recall and a backlight
provides auxiliary lighting for hard-to-see locations.
Standard are a hold feature and both visual and audible overpressure alarms. A new feature
added to the Series 490 is a field adjustable damping. This allows the user to choose the
level of display averaging rate corresponding to the fluctuation level common in many
applications. A 9 V alkaline battery is included that provides up to 100 hours of operation.
Model
490-1
490-2
490-3
490-4
490-5
490-6
Range
(psi)
0-15.00
0-30.00
0-50.00
0-100.0
0-500.0
0-200.0

bar psi in Hg kPa FTWC in w.c. mm Hg
1.034 15.00 30.54 103.4 34.60 415.2 775.7
2.069 30.00 61.08 206.9 69.20 830.4 1551
3.447 50.00 101.8 344.7 115.3 1384 2585
6.895 100.0 203.6 689.5 230.7 2768 5171
34.47 500.0 1018 3447 1153
13.79 200.0 407.2 1379 461.3 5536
mbar
1034
2069
3447
6895
Maximum
Pressure
30 psig
60 psig
100 psig
200 psig
1000 psig
400 psig
A-402A, Carrying Case Tough gray nylon pouch protects any Series 490
Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer. Double zippered for quick and easy
access. With belt loop that snaps closed.
7-1/2H x 3W x 2-1/4D (191 x 76 x 57 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Without valve: 316L
SS; Additional wetted parts with 3-way
valve option: Buna-N, silicone grease,
PTFE, brass 360, copper, reinforced
acetal copolymer.
Accuracy: 0.5% full-scale, 60 to 78F
(15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% full-scale from
32 to 60F and 78 to 104F (0 to
15.6C and 25.6 to 40C).
Pressure Hysteresis: 0.1% of full
scale.

(0 to 60C).
176F (-20 to 80C).
battery, installed non-functional, user
replaceable.
Weight: 14.1 oz (400 g).
Process Connections: Two 1/8 (3.18
mm) female NPT.
OPTION
Example:490-1-NIST.
405
Manometers,
Portable
Features
Part Number
Error limit 0.2% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
0-10 in w.c. (2.5 kPa)
HM28D3B10000
0-28 in w.c. (7 kPa)
HM28D3C10000
0-120 in w.c. (30 kPa)
HM28D3F10000
Error limit 0.05% F.S. for gage, underpressure and differential pressure
0-28 in w.c. (7 kPa)
HM28D3C30000
0-120 in w.c. (30 kPa)
HM28D3F30000
0-100 psi (700 kPa)
HM28D3K30000
For Absolute pressure
0-15.9 psia (0.2% F.S. (110 kPa abs)
HM28A3I10000
Consult factory for 0.10% models.
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Air and compatible gases.
Accuracy: (Includes linearity,
hysteresis, and repeatability): per order
code.
0.20% full-scale 1 digit
0.10% full-scale 1 digit
0.05% full-scale 1 digit.
Wetted Materials: 18/8 stainless steel.
(-5 to 50C).
(-20 to 60C).
Humidity: 30 to 95% rH, noncondensing.
Display: 2 line, 16 character, dot
matrix LCD, with switchable display
sizes.
battery, installed functional, user
replaceable. Can operate from external
power supply of 7 to 14 VDC.
TEST EQUIPMENT
LOVE CONTROLS
406_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:53 AM Page 406
Series
1221
1222
1223
Flex-Tube U-Tube Manometers

Series 1221 2 plastic carrying plugs; 2 flexible plastic tubing connectors for
attachment of 3/16 rubber or plastic tubing without kinking. 1 ounce bottle .826
sp. gr. red gage fluid furnished for D style manometers. Fluorescein green dye
concentrate furnished with W/M style manometers.
Manometers,
Portable
TEST EQUIPMENT
Series 1222 2 magnetic mounting clips; tube clamp; 2 plastic carrying plugs
and 2 flexible plastic tubing connectors for attachment of 3/16 rubber or plastic
tubing without kinking. 1 ounce bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage fluid furnished for D
style manometers. Fluorescein green dye concentrate furnished with W/M style
manometers.
Series 1223 Magnetic mounting clips; tube clamp and Type a connections
consisting of two rapid shut off molded nylon tubing connectors; two 1/8 pipe
thread to tube adapters; two 3-foot lengths of Tygon plastic tubing, 1 ounce bottle
.826 sp. gr. red gage fluid is furnished for D style manometers; fluorescein green
dye concentrate with W/M style.
1221
1222
1223
Hg Required
1221, 2 & 3
to Fill
Scale LengthA
Millimeters H2O Grams Ounces W/M
D
M200 (100-0-100) 178.5 6.3
12-1/4
14
M300 (150-0-150) 225.5 7.9
16-1/4
18-7/8
M400 (200-0-200) 269
20-3/8
23-5/8
9.5
314.5 11.1
24-1/4
28-1/2
M600 (300-0-300) 353.1 12.4
27-7/8
32-7/8
379.7 13.4
24 (12-0-12)
28-1/4
33-3/8
491.1 17.3
36 (18-0-18)
40-1/4
47-7/8
M1000 (500-500) 526.6 18.5
43-5/8
52
Not recommended for vacuum service above 5 in. Hg (68 in w.c.).
Range
Inches H2O
8 (4-0-4)
12 (6-0-6)
16 (8-0-8)
20 (10-0-10)
1221 & 2
O.A. Length B
W/M
D
15-1/4 17
19-1/4 21-3/4
23-1/4 26-1/2
27-1/4 31-1/2
30-3/4 35-3/4
31-1/2 36-1/4
43-1/4 50-3/4
46-1/2 55
These inexpensive manometers measure positive, negative and differential pressures.

Dwyer Flex-Tube U-Tube Manometers combine the inherent accuracy of the simple U
Tube with the durability of tough, long-lasting plastic construction. Columns are of .375
OD flexible and shatter proof clear butyrate tubing. They are easily accessible for cleaning.
Indicating tube is backed by white scale channel to provide maximum color contrast. Scales
are extruded high impact polystyrene plastic, formed to hold columns in perfect alignment.
Stark white scales have graduations and numbers silkscreen-printed in black for maximum
legibility.
You can choose from numerous models and features including over-pressure safety traps,
in full-scale ranges from 8 to 36 of water or mercury. All are suitable for total pressures
to 100 psi for determining velocity and static pressures, leakage, fan and blower efficiency,
filter resistance, and gas pressures. Ideal wherever a portable, direct reading manometer
is needed. Standard ranges and markings as shown, or special ranges, colors, logos and
brand names for OEM quantity orders are available.
Minor Divisions of 1/10 in w.c. (or 2 mm w.c. on metric units) are silkscreened in jet
black on stark white scale for positive definition. Easy to read, even at a distance,
they are acrylic coated for permanence. All models are furnished with one 1 ounce
bottle of fluorescein green color concentrate with special wetting agent for W/M
models, or 1 ounce bottle of red gage fluid for D units.
1221
1222
1223
Model
Model
Model
1221-8-W/M
1222-8-W/M
1223-8-W/M
1221-12-W/M
1222-12-W/M
1223-12-W/M
1222-16-W/M
1221-16-W/M
1223-16-W/M
1221-20-W/M
1222-20-W/M
1223-20-W/M
1221-24-W/M
1222-24-W/M
1223-24-W/M
1221-36-W/M
1222-36-W/M
1223-36-W/M
1221-M200-W/M
1222-M200-W/M
1223-M200-W/M
1222-M300-W/M
1221-M300-W/M
1223-M300-W/M
1221-M400-W/M
1222-M400-W/M
1223-M400-W/M
1222-M600-W/M
1221-M600-W/M
1223-M600-W/M
1221-M1000-W/M
1222-M1000-W/M
1223-M1000-W/M
Note:To order models with red gage fluid change -W/M to -D.
406
1-3/4
[44.45]
1223 O.A.
2-1/6 1-1/8
[52.39] [28.58]
Length B
W/M D
18-1/2 19-7/8
21-1/8 24-5/8
26-1/8 30-3/8
30-1/8 34-3/8 B
33-5/8 38-5/8 A
33-3/8 39-1/8
3/4
[19.05] 46-1/8 53-5/8
49-3/8 57-7/8
Series 1221 Manometer, Our simplest, lowest cost basic U-gage. A dependable Utube manometer that withstands hard use and provides accurate, high visibility
readings. For use with water, mercury or red gage fluid. For mercury filled
manometers, a scale clamp bar, Dwyer Part No. A-363 (available as an extra for
Series 1221 and standard on Series 1222) is recommended. One pair of carrying
plugs and a pair of non-kink vinyl tube connectors are included with each manometer.
Series 1222 Manometer, All the features of the 1221 plus magnetic clips for
mounting to any vertical steel surface, and clamp bar to insure against U-tube
slipping. (Especially recommended for manometers used with mercury.) Both
magnets are easily removed and replaced at the users convenience.
Series 1223 Manometer, Our finest U-gage for either portable or stationary use.
Safety traps prevent loss of indicating fluid in case of accidental over-pressure.
Tubing is permanently bonded to a molded, high impact acrylic plastic top that
contains safety traps. Large magnetic clips and clamp bar are provided. Standard
type a connections include two rapid shut-off type molded nylon tubing connections,
two 3-foot lengths of flexible Tygon plastic tubing, and two 1/8 pipe thread to tube
adapters.
Ranges
8 (4-0-4) in w.c.
12 (6-0-6) in w.c.
16 (8-0-8) in w.c.
20 (10-0-10) in w.c.
24 (12-0-12) in w.c.
36 (18-0-18) in w.c.
M200 (100-0-100) mm w.c.
M300 (150-0-150) mm w.c.
M400 (200-0-200) mm w.c.
M600 (300-0-300) mm w.c.
M1000 (500-0-500) mm w.c.
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, add suffix -NIST
to model numbers. Example:1230-8-W/M-NIST.
Tygon is a registered trademark of Saint-Gobain Performance Corporation
407_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:53 AM Page 407
Series
1211
Slack Tube Manometers
Model 1212
Gas Pressure Kit
Model 1212, Gas Pressure Kit
STANDARDACCESSORIES
Plastic case, magnetic mounting clips, two rapid shutoff type molded nylon rubber
tubing connectors and one bottle of fluorescein green color concentrate with wetting
agent.
Series
1227
A handy, complete kit containing a 16" Slack Tube Manometer, necessary tubing and
connection fittings for checking gas pressures in virtually all gas appliances such as water
heaters, furnaces, stoves and dryers. Different range manometers may be specified at
corresponding prices. Compared to the cost of purchasing items separately the assembly of
component parts into kit form represents substantial savings.
What the kit consists of:
1 #1211-16 Slack Tube Manometer, reads pressure to 16 water.*
1 Carrying case, plastic, 8-1/2 x 7 x 3-1/8
1 1 oz. bottle Fluorescein green color concentrate with wetting agent
2 1/8 pipe thread rubber tubing adapters
1 1/8 to 1/4 pipe thread bushing
1 3 L 3/16 rubber tubing
1 Rubber tubing adapter to fit standard 7/16 dia. spud.
*Other ranges available.
Model
1211-8
1211-12
1211-16
1211-24
1211-30
1211-36
1211-48
1211-60
1211-72
1211-120
Range, In.
4-0-4
6-0-6
8-0-8
12-0-12
15-0-15
18-0-18
24-0-24
30-0-30
36-0-36
60-0-60
Hg Reqd
(oz.)
6
7
9
12-1/2
15
17-1/2
22-1/2
27
32
57
Metric
1211-50
1211-100
1211-200
Range, CM
25-0-25
50-0-50
100-0-100
Hg Req'd
(oz.)
11
18-1/2
35
Dual Range Flex-Tube U-Inclined Manometers

1-3/4
[44.45]
5
[127]
3/4 [19.05]
Model 1227
Dual Range
Model 1227
Mounted in incline position
Use Series 1227 as a regular U-tube manometer to read high-range pressure on the
right leg (shown to the right), or as an inclined manometer (shown below) to read low-range
pressure on the bottom leg. Simply incline manometer until fluid levels read zero. No spirit
level required. Magnetic clips hold the gage in position on a steel duct surface.
Series 1227 Manometer - Most versatile and useful low cost manometer we know of.
Designed for installation and servicemen. A sturdy, clear plastic manometer, it offers single,
direct readings in two ranges: As a U-tube, it reads from 0 to 16 of water; as an inclined
gage, it reads from -.20 to 0 to 2.6 of water. Model 1227M (Metric) is 0 400mm water
column as a U-tube and -5 to 0 to 70mm water column as an inclined gage. How-to-use
instructions are printed directly on the scale.
Two plastic carrying plugs with retainers for use when manometer is not in service.
Two magnetic clips to hold instrument to metal surface. Flexible red vinyl plastic
tubing connectors. Brass terminal tube 1/4 diameter x 8 long. One terminal tube
holder. Brass adapter, 1/8 pipe thread to plastic tubing. One 4-1/2 length of Tygon
plastic tubing. One 1 ounce bottle .826 sp. gr. red gage fluid. Vinyl carrying case.
As Vertical U-Tube Manometer

0-16 water with 1 major
divisions, .2 minor divisions
Model 1227M (metric)
is 0-400 mm water column
26
[660.40]
As Inclined Manometer
Scale is 17 long, reading .20-0-2.6
water with .02 minor divisions
Model 1227M (metric) is
-5 to 0 to 70 mm water column
Indicating Tube - Clear .400 OD, tough, shatterproof butyrate. Pressure connection end
is bent to provide over pressure protection when used as an inclined gage. One 4-1/2' x 3/8
Tygon tube included for pressure source connection.
Scale - Stark white high-impact styrene, 21 long. Adjustable for precise zeroing.
Markings - 1 major, .2 minor graduations on high range; .02 graduations on low range
(50 mm major, 10 mm minor graduations on high range, 10 mm major, 1 mm minor
graduations on low range for metric model). Silkscreened in black on stark white for positive
definition. Acrylic-coated for permanence.
Series 1227 & 1227M
1227 (English Units)
1227M (Metric Units)
407
Manometers,
Portable
Dwyer Slack Tube Manometers are as accurate as the finest laboratory U gages
yet they are made to roll up compactly for easy carrying and to withstand rough usage.
Simply unroll the Dwyer Slack-Tube Manometer and set up to read static pressure,
vacuum, or differential pressure. Magnetic clips hold it firmly to any steel surface or hang
it on a nail. Turn connectors one revolution to open. When the pressure is imposed, add the
number of inches one column travels up to the number of inches the other column travels
down. When reading is completed turn connectors to seal columns, roll up manometer into
compact coil and tuck it away in its plastic case or a tool box. No fluid lost. No loose caps or
inserts to lose.
Dwyer Slack Tube Manometers cover a wide range of pressure readings from 4-0-4
inches up to 60-0-60 inches. Use them in determining velocity and static pressures, for
leakage, fan and blower tests, calibrating control devices, checking gas pressure and many
other applications. All models have flexible vinyl-plastic columns and flexible spring steel
scale calibrated in inches of water using water, and inches of mercury using mercury. Scale
is center-mounted between columns to eliminate parallax error and has a full 2 sliding
zero adjustment.
Slack Tube Manometers are suitable for intermittent total pressure to 50 psi and vacuum
not exceeding 20 in Hg. Avoid temperatures above 130F and continuous high total
pressure. Not for use with red gage fluid; use only water or mercury.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Slack Tube Manometer

rolled up for easy
handling and storage.
408_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:31 AM Page 408
Series
1213
Gas Pressure Manometer

1/2
[12.70]
1
[25.40]
INCHES
OF
WATER
The Tube in a Tube Direct Reading Manometer
TEST EQUIPMENT
3/4 DIA
[19.05]
1/8-27 NPT
Provide visual indication of pressure with the Series 1213 Gas Pressure Manometer.
Designed for use with natural gas, the manometer can also be used to monitor any
compatible gases up to 15 inches of water column. Tap water is used as the sensing media
and a magnetic clip provides temporary or permanent mounting. Economically priced and
made of durable plastic for years of trouble-free service. Includes 3 of vinyl tubing and
1/8 nylon male NPT to barb fitting.
Manometers,
Portable
*1213-15 SHOWN.
1213-7 IS
11 INCHES LONG
OVERALL
*17
[431.80]
1/4 ID x 3/8 OD
x 3 FT LONG
VINYL TUBING
[6.35 ID x 9.53 OD
x 914.40]
Model
1213-15
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limit: 140F (60C) maximum.
Pressure Limits: 15 in. w.c. (381 mm).
Piping Connections: 1/8 male NPT connector provided.
Wetted Materials: Vinyl, PVC and nylon.
Length (mm)
7 (177.8)
Series
100
Durablock Solid Plastic Portable Gages

Suitable for Total Pressures Up to 100 psig, Temperatures Up to 150F,
Accuracy 2% of Full Scale (1% on Model 115 Only)
1.000
3.000
.05
500
INCHES
.05
OF WAT
ER
.10
.15
1000
B
.20
.25
1500
2000
A
1 NOM [25.40]
Dwyer solid plastic portable manometers are precision instruments in inclined and
vertical (well-type) styles for the measurement of static pressure, vacuum or differential
pressure.
To assure the accuracy required in instruments of this type, all machining of bores and
wells is to the highest standards of precision backed by Dwyers years of experience in the
fabrication of acrylic instruments.
Inclined Type
Range Minor
Carrying
Weight
Inches Scale
Scale Case
Model of Water Divisions Length Type Dimensions
Ib-oz.
100.5 .10-0-1.0 .01
5-1
8-1/4 Plastic 13-1/2 x 10 x 2-3/8
101
3-5
.05-0-.50 .01
5
Plastic 12-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 1-3/4
102.5 .20-0-2.0 .01
5-10
8-3/4 Plastic 13-1/2 x 10 x 2-3/8
109
6
.20-0-3.0 .02
8-3/4 Plastic 13-1/2 x 10 x 2-3/8
115
3-10
.05-0-.25 .005
6
Plastic 12-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 1-3/4
170
1-7
0-.50
.02
2-1/2 Plastic 7 x 9
171
1-6
0-.25
.01
2-1/2 Plastic 7 x 9
Vertical Type
104
3-0
0-4
.10
4-1/2 Plastic 12-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 1-3/4
104-6 0-6
4-8
.10
7-3/4 Plastic 13-1/2 x 10 x 2-3/8
104-8 0-8
4-12
.10
9
Metal 18-1/2 x 4-3/8 x 2-1/4
104-10 0-10
4-15
.10
11-1/8 Metal 18-1/2 x 4-3/8 x 2-1/4
Note: Model 100.5 replaces model 100. Model 102.5 replaces model 102.
408
Model Dimensions
B
A
100.5 11-11/16 2-15/16
101
2-5/16
8-1/2
102.5 12
4-1/2
109
5-11/16
11-1/2
115
3-1/16
9-1/2
170
2-7/16
5-3/4
171
1-7/8
5-3/4
D
C
104
3-11/16 8-1/4
104-6 4-3/16 10-7/8
104-8 4-5/8
13-1/16
104-10 5-5/16 15-1/4
Plastic or steel carrying case (plastic pouch for 170, 171 and 172), two magnetic
mounting clips, two rapid shut-off nylon tubing connections, one 9 length rubber
tubing, terminal tube and extra bottle .826 red gage fluid.
100.5, solid plastic portable gage with .10-0-1.0 in

w.c. range. Shown with carrying case and standard
accessories.
104, solid plastic portable vertical manometer

shown attached to inside of carrying case cover.
Gage may also be removed from case and used in
standing position or attached to any vertical steel
surface with magnetic clips provided.
409_Layout 1 7/15/14 2:02 PM Page 409
Series
100 AV
Durablock Air Velocity Gage Kits

Suitable for Total Pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar), Temperatures to 150F (65.6C)
.05
0
.05
INCHES
OF WAT
ER
.10
.15
.20
500
.25
1000
1500
2000
Model 102-AV
Model 115-AV
Design and service features:

Plastic Body, A 1 thick solid acrylic block, virtually unbreakable. It is stable and
free of the danger of distortion.
Drilled Bore, Permanently free of bends, never requires recalibration due to
distortion.
Reflective Chrome Finish Scales, Easily eliminate parallax errors in reading.
Adjustable, with thumbscrew locking for easy zeroing. (Model 125 AV uses screw
plunger to adjust zero setting).
Leveling Adjustment, Screw allows quick, accurate leveling. Integral ground glass
bubble level provides ready reference.
Series
Mark II
Velocity,
Feet per
Minute
400-5500
400-2000
Minor
Scale
Divisions
.02
.005
Scale
Length
8-1/4
6
Dimensions,
In Inches
A
B
11-1/2 4-5/16
9-1/2 3-1/16
Pitot Tube
ModelLength
166-12 12
166-12 12
Carrying Case
Dimensions
13-1/2 X10 X 2-1/2
13-1/2 X10 X 2-1/2
Model
102-AV
115-AV
Complete Air Velocity Kits include:

Dwyer Inclined Manometer described above,
stainless steel Pitot tube (12 with Models 102AV & 115-AV), two 9 lengths of rubber tubing
with connectors, extra red gage fluid,
instruction card H-7, Bulletin H-11, magnetic
mounting clips, air velocity calculator slide rule
and carrying case.
Manometers,
Air Velocity
Red Gage Fluid, .826 specific gravity. Forms a well-shaped, easy-to-read meniscus,
the result of high wettability.
Range,
Inches of
Model Water
102-AV .20-0-2.0
115-AV .05-0-.25
Molded Plastic Air Velocity Meters

Low in Cost, Direct Reading Scales Offer 3% Accuracy,
For Portable or Stationary Applications
1-7/16
[35.53]
5/8
[15.88]
1-1/4
[31.75]
3-11/16
[93.66]
7/32 [5.56] HOLE
5-29/32
[150.02]
4-23/32
[119.86]
4-25/32
[121.44]
25/32
[19.84]
Model 27
1-1/8
[28.58]
25/32 [19.84]
2-1/4
7-13/32 [188.12]
[57.15] MAX
15/64 [5.95] MOUNTING HOLE
7/32 X 13/32
[5.56 X 10.32]
MOUNTING SLOT
5-5/16
[134.95]
MAX
2-31/32
[75.41]
4-5/8
[117.48]
Model 40-AV Shown with standard swing-out

stand and leveling screw installed.
Construction and installation features:
Construction is simple with virtually indestructible molded white styrene-acrylonitrile
housing, indicating tube and fluid wells, molded ABS knobs and zero adjust plunger, shock
mounted glass level vial and leak proof O-ring seals. Scales are lithograph printed on
aluminum and epoxy coated.
For stationary applications, the Mark II air velocity meters can be easily mounted on any
vertical surface with the two screws provided. A built in spirit level simplifies leveling.
Just fill the reservoir, adjust fluid level to zero, connect the pitot tube, and it is ready for
operation. For portable applications, the Model A-612 portable stand is available for Models
27 and 28.
A molded plastic swing-out stand and leveling screw for user-installation are provided with
the Model 40-AV which also features rapid shutoff tubing connectors and built in over
pressure traps.
Additional standard accessories include plastic connection tubing, mounting screws, 1 oz.
bottle of indicating fluid and instructions. Metric ranges are also available.
15/64 [5.95] x 13/32 [10.32]

MOUNTING SLOT
10-5/8 [269.88]
Model
Mark II 27
Mark II 28
Mark II 40-250 Pa-AV
TEST EQUIPMENT
Designed to measure air velocity, static pressure, vacuum or differential pressure, where
the additional range of the 400 Series gages is not required. Series 100 Gages offer superb
accuracy combined with portability. In Dwyers Durablock precision machined solid
acrylic plastic construction, the wells and inclined bore are machined to tolerances of
.0002.
25/32
[19.84]
2-1/4 [57.15]
MAX
1-1/4
[31.75]
4 [101.60]
Range
0-7,000 FPM
0-10,500 FPM
0-21 MPS
Pitot tube not included with models above.
ACCESSORY
A-612, Portable Stand (for models 27, 28)
OEM Specials All models of the Dwyer Mark II molded plastic air velocity meters
can be supplied with your logo or special scale in OEM quantities. Consult factory
for details. See also our Digital Manometers and Pitot tubes.
409
410_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:27 AM Page 410
Air Velocity Meters
TEST EQUIPMENT
Series
400
Complete Kit, Model 400-10

Size* 11 1/2H x 20 1/4W x 1 1/2D
Only 13 1/4 lb with equipment
Contact factory for extra long steel cases for use with longer Pitot tubes
Manometers,
Air Velocity
Our most popular precision air velocity instrument, the Series 400 is used to balance air
conditioning systems, measure pressure drop across filters, and test fan and blower
discharge and inlet pressures, as well as air velocity in ducts. It offers the convenience of a
dual purpose instrument plus high accuracy on easy-to-read scales. The Series 400
includes leveling adjustment and glass bubble level, which makes it a versatile all around
manometer for the air conditioning and balancing contractor or industrial plant.
Series 400 Air Velocity Meters with Combination Inclined/Vertical Scales

Rated for total pressures to 100 psig (6.89 bar); temperatures to 150F (65C)
Minor Div.; Range, in w.c.
Inclined
Pitot
Range Velocity
Vertical
Model
Scale
Tube
in w.c. FPM
Scale
400-10-Kit
18 in
0-10
.10, 1-10
400-12,600 .01, 0-1.0
400-10-Gage 0-10
None
.10, 1-10
400-12,600 .01, 0-1.0
FEATURES
Measure both pressure and air velocity
Read the red figures directly in FPM of velocity (from 400 to 10,000 FPM)
No conversion tables needed for air at standard conditions.
Read the black figures in inches of water column air pressure (from 0 to 10 in w.c.)
Model
460
Air Meter
A Low-Cost, Direct Reading Instrument Used for Air Velocity & Static Pressure Tests
1-11/16
[42.88]
6
[152.40]
7/16
[11.11]
5/16
[7.95]
1-1/8
[28.72]
Simple and quick, the 460 Air Meter is popular for servicing air conditioning, heating and
ventilating equipment. Direct reading velocity and static pressure scales both low and
high ranges show supply and return grille velocities, furnace draft, pressure drop across
filters, etc. The 460 gives consistent, accurate results with no tedious calibration. Rugged
plastic for rough daily use. Dual velocity ranges read 260-1200 and 1000-4000 FPM;
pressure ranges from .005-.09 and .05 -1.0 in w.c.
A Complete Pocket-Size Kit

Includes air meter, return and supply grille probes, angle connector, cleaning
materials, instruction card, air velocity calculator and carrying case.
Furnace
draft (left)
Model 460, Air Meter, complete kit

ACCESSORIES
A-378, Tube of 3 replacement floats
A-379, Supply grille probe
A-380, Return grille probe
A-381, Cleaning kit including 1 anti-static chemically treated pipe stem cleaner and
nylon high range orifice cleaner
410
Grille
velocities
(right)
411_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:51 AM Page 411
Series
475
&
477
Air Velocity Kits

Digital Manometer and Pitot Tube for Balancing System Air Flows
Model
475-00-FM-AV
475-0-FM-AV
475-1-FM-AV
475-2-FM-AV
Range
0-4.000 in w.c.
0-10.00 in w.c.
0-20.00 in w.c.
0-40.00 in w.c.
Model
475-00T-FM-AV
475-0T-FM-AV
475-1T-FM-AV
Range
0-4.000 in w.c.
0-10.00 in w.c.
0-20.00 in w.c.
Convenient all-in-one kit is small, light and easy to use. No set-up or leveling needed.
Digital manometer reads from 0-20 in w.c. with 0.5% FS accuracy. The Series 477 stores up
to 40 readings in memory for later reference, instantly selecting up to nine English/Metric
pressure units that are visible on a large, backlit 0.4 LCD readout. Both audible and visual
overpressure alarms and a low battery warning are standard features.
Each kit includes convenient telescoping Pitot tube, Model 166T which is fully adjustable
from 11.5 to 36 (29.2 to 91.4 cm). In addition, two static pressure tips with magnetic
mountings measure pressure drop across filters, condenser coils, etc.
Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9 V battery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and
custom fitted carrying case. An indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC
technician that must balance system air flows at start-up.
Model
477-000T-FM-AV
477-00T-FM-AV
477-0T-FM-AV
477-1T-FM-AV
Range
0-1.000 in w.c.
0-4.000 in w.c.
0-10.00 in w.c.
0-20.00 in w.c.
Manometers,
Air Velocity
Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in w.c. with 0.5% FS accuracy and minor divisions to
0.01. Large 1/2 LCD readout is easy to see in poorly lighted areas and has low battery
warning. Kit includes convenient telescoping Pitot tube, Model 166T, fully adjustable from
11.5 to 36 (29.2 to 91.4 cm). Also, two static pressure tips with magnetic mounting measure
pressure drop across filters, condenser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with rubber tubing, 9
V battery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An
indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC technician that must balance system
air flows at start-up.
Complete Kit Includes:

Series 475 Digital Manometer, range
0-19.99 in w.c.
Model 166-6-CF, 6 Pitot Tube with
Compression Fitting
Two No. A-303 Static Pressure Tips
with Magnetic Mounting
Two 9 Lengths 3/16 ID Rubber
Tubing
No. A-397 Step Drill for 3/16-1/2
Holes in 1/16 Increments
No. A-532 AV Slide Chart
9 V Battery
Fitted Polyethylene Case
TEST EQUIPMENT
Digital manometer reads from 0-19.99 in w.c. with 0.5% FS accuracy and minor divisions
to 0.01. Large 1/2 LCD readout is easy to see in poorly lighted areas and has low battery
warning. Included is a 6 SS Pitot tube with integral compression fitting to hold it securely
when taking readings. Also, two static pressure tips with magnetic mounting measure
pressure drop across filters, condenser coils, etc. Kit comes complete with rubber tubing,
9 V battery, step drill, AV calculator slide rule, and custom fitted carrying case. An
indispensable test kit for the plant engineer, and HVAC technician that must balance
system air flows at start-up.

0-19.99 in w.c.
Model 166T, 36 Telescoping SS Pitot
Tube
Two 4-1/2 L 3/16 ID Rubber Tubing
9 V Alkaline Battery

0-20 in w.c.
Model 166T, 36 Telescoping SS
Pitot Tube
Two 4-1/2 L 3/16 ID Rubber Tubing
9 V Alkaline Battery
411
412_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:03 PM Page 412
Series
160
Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
TEST EQUIPMENT
ASME Design Meets AMCA and ASHRAE Codes

1/2
INSERTION LENGTH
13/16 [20.62]
[12.70]
1/2 [12.70] SQ
TOTAL
PRESSURE
CONNECTION 1/4
2-5/8
[6.35] [66.68]
1/4
(8) .040 [1.02]
STATIC
[6.35]
STATIC PRESSURE
PRESSURE
HOLES EQUALLY
CONNECTION
SPACED
2-41/64 [67.07]
5/16
[7.94]
160 Series
Standard Model 160 Pitot Tube

1
[25.40]
5
[127.00]
Pitot Tubes
5 [127.00]
2-35/64
[64.69]
96
1/2 [12.70]
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3-5/8
[92.08]
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .040 [1.02]
HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED
1/4 [6.350]
1/4 [6.35]
STATIC PRESSURE
CONNECTION
TOTAL PRESSURE
1/8 [3.18] HOLE
160 Series
96 and longer with stiffener
Ideal for use with our precision manometers and air velocity gages, Dwyer Pitot Tubes
are constructed from corrosion resistant stainless steel for a lifetime of service. ASME
design meets AMCA and ASHRAE specifications for maximum accuracy over a wide
variety of flow conditions. No correction factors required as ASHRAE tip design yields a
calibration factor of 1. ASHRAE design needs no calibration! Permanent, stamped
insertion depth graduations on sides of 160 series facilitate accurate positioning. Static
pressure port is parallel to sensing tube allowing quick, easy alignment of tube with air
flow. Low sensitivity to misalignment gives accurate reading even when tube is misaligned
up to 15 degrees. Various standard sizes are available for use in ducts as small as 4 dia,
or as large as 36 ft dia. A universal model fits user supplied 3/4 schedule 40 (standard)
pipe in any length. Several convenient mounting options are available for permanent
installations.
FEATURES
No calibration needed
Precisely located, burr-free static pressure holes
Hemispherical tip design, best for accuracy if imperfectly aligned and nearly
impossible to damage
Long lasting 304 SS construction
Silver soldered connections for leak-proof operation
Coefficient of 1
5/16 models rated to 1500F
Extended static connection helps guide tip within recommended 15 of air flow
direction
Inch graduations on sides of 160 series to quickly determine exact insertion depth
Dwyer Air Velocity Calculator, direct reading flow charts and instructions included
Use 1/8 models in ducts as small as 4, 5/16 models in ducts 10 or larger
Optional mounting gland or split flange make permanent installation fast and
simple
Series 160 is designed to meet:
ASME Fluid Meters 6th Ed.
ANSI/AMCA 210-99
ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1999
British Standard 1042
6-1/2 OR 12-1/2
MODEL 166
2 [50.8]
MODEL 167
1 [25.4]
MODEL 166
1 [25.4]
MODEL 167
1/2 [12.7]
1/8
[3.18]
1/2
[12.70]
1/4
[6.35]
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .020 [.51]
HOLES EQUALLY
1/8 [3/18]
SPACED
1/4 [6.35]
TOTAL PRESSURE STATIC PRESSURE
CONNECTION
3/64 [1.19] HOLE
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/2 1/8
[12.70][3.18]
2-1/2
1/2 [63.50]
[12.70]
Longer Length w/ Stiffener

Model
Insertion Length
160-96
96
Pocket Size 1/8 Diameter
Insertion Length
Model
6
166-6
12
166-12
6
167-6
12
167-12
ACCESSORIES &OPTIONS
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange Mounting
Can be added to any Dwyer No. 160 Standard Pitot Tube.
Cadmium plated steel. Gasket is pattern for mounting holes.
Secure flange loosely to tube, adjust tube depth and tighten
screws. Gasket of 1/16 Neoprene fits tightly around tube
and against duct for leak-proof seal. Nuts, washers included.
A-159, Mounting Gland
Versatile adapter slips on any Series 160, 5/16 standard
Pitot tube made after Dec. 1990. Two-part stainless steel
fitting slides over tube and provides permanent, secure
mounting. Where duct interior is accessible, use the
washers and jam nut supplied. For blind applications or in
thicker materials, use model A-156 flange mounting plate.
Once tube is adjusted to proper depth and angle, tighten
smaller hex bushing to lock position. Graphite bushing inside
assures leak-proof seal even at higher temperatures. TFE
bushing also available.Note: For full insertion with this fitting,
order next longer Pitot tube.
A-159 Mounting Gland is used for both duct mounting and
flange mounting. To flange mount, the A-159 must be used
with the A-156 flange mounting plate.
A-397, Step Drill
For fast, convenient installation of Pitot tubes in sheet metal
ducts. No center punch needed; automatic de-burring. Drills
six sizes from 3/16-1/2 in 1/16 increments.
1/8 male NPT compression fitting, mounting option for
Series 166/167. Add -CF suffix (166-6-CF).
412
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
166/167 Series
Standard 5/16 Diameter

Model
Insertion Length
160-8
8-5/8
160-12
12-5/8
160-18
18-5/8
160-24
24-5/8
160-36
36-5/8
160-48
48-5/8
160-60
60-5/8
1/8 [3.18]
TOTAL
PRESSURE
413_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:50 AM Page 413
Series
160S
S Type Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes

Large, Open Tip Design Resists Fouling; Optional Permanent Mount Models
1-1/8
[28.58]
2-7/8
[73.03]
160S-18
160S-18PM
Scan here
to watch
product video
Series 160S Pitot Tubes are designed specifically for flow measurement of dirty,
particulate laden air or gas streams typical in smoke stack and other environmental testing.
Large 5/16 dia. stainless steel tubing resists plugging under harsh, sooty conditions which
quickly block conventional flow sensors. Total and static pressure tubes are precisely
aligned and welded together every six inches for maximum accuracy, strength, and long
term durability. Versatile 1/8 female NPT connections easily adapt to any type of pipe or
tubing. A pair of 1/8 NPT to 3/16 ID tubing adapters is included plus a handy molded
vinyl cap to protect tip when not in use. Supplied with complete instructions.
Model
166T
Insertion
In Inches
18
24
36
48
60
72
1/8 NPT
TYP 2 PLACES
Insertion
In Inches
18
24
36
Perm. Mtg.
Model
160S-18PM
160S-24PM
160S-36PM
Permanent Mounting (PM) models include 1 inch dia. welded

stainless steel sleeve and adjustable compression fitting with 1 inch
male NPT mounting treads. Adjust depth, lock in place.
Pitot Tubes
FEATURES
Meets EPA specification 40 CFR (ch. 1)
Long lasting, welded stainless steel construction
1/8 female NPT connections, permanently welded
Rated to 1500F (815C)
Rated to 100 psig (6.89 bar)
0.84 flow coefficient
Model
160S-18
160S-24
160S-36
160S-48
160S-60
160S-72
DimA
18 [457.20]
24 [609.60]
36 [914.40]
48 [1219.20]
60 [1524.00]
2-23/32
[69.06]
TYP
Telescoping Stainless Steel Pitot Tube

Adjustable Design Extends Insertion Length to 36 Inches
S
7/16 [11.11]
11-15/32 [291.31] UNEXTENDED

40-7/16 [1027.13] EXTENDED
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model 166T Telescoping Pitot tube is a unique air flow sensor which can quickly
and easily be adjusted for any duct insertion length from 11.5 to 36 inches (29.2 to 91.4
cm). Now, this single compact unit can replace up to five conventional fixed length Pitot
tubes. For even greater convenience, it is securely protected by a custom fitted polyethylene
carrying case. Telescoping sections lock in place as they are extended, enabling use of the
handle grip to gauge proper alignment of the tip within the airstream. Stainless steel
construction resists corrosion. Hemispherical tip has 1.0 flow coefficient, is 1/8 dia. (3.2
mm). Largest section is 3/8 (9.5 mm). Weight (with case) 1 lb, 9 oz (709 g). Case: 12.5 x
6.25 x 1.75 in.
Model 166T
TEST EQUIPMENT
Model
160S-18
160S-24
160S-36
160S-48
160S-60
5/16 [7.94]
TYP 2 PLACES
413
414_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:05 PM Page 414
Series
160E
Ellipsoidal Tip Pitot Tube

Designed to Meet British Standard 1042
STATIC PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/2 [12.70]
1/4 [6.35]
Pitot Tubes
TEST EQUIPMENT
5
[127.00]
2-1/2
[63.50]
Scan here
to watch
product video
5/16
[7.94]
15/32
[11.91]
1-13/16
[46.04]
DEPTH
INDICATOR
TOTAL PRESSURE
CONNECTION
1/4 [6.350]
3/16 [4.78]
ALIGNMENT
ARM
STATIC PRESSURE
(8) .040 [1.02]
HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
TOTAL PRESSURE
1/16 [1.59] HOLE
Series 160E Pitot Tubes are widely used in the U.K. and Europe for applications
demanding high accuracy when measuring the flow of air or other compatible gases.
Precision crafted tip configuration allows air to pass smoothly with minimum turbulence
for consistent, reliable readings. Exterior indicator arm is aligned parallel to the 5 in. (13
cm) sensing tip so you always know that unit is properly positioned inside duct. Sliding
depth indicators grip firmly to ensure uniform insertion critical when making multiple
measurements as part of a complete traverse; the best way to determine average velocity.
Total and static pressure taps are 1/4 (6 mm), permanently silver soldered to the
connection block, leak-proof and durable.
FEATURES
Ellipsoidal tip design for improved accuracy, 1.0 coefficient
304 SS construction adds strength, resists corrosion
Adjustable depth indicators for fast, consistent traverses
Alignment indicator helps keep tip parallel to flow
Model
160F
Model
160E-00
160E-01
160E-02
160E-03
160E-04
160E-05
160E-06
Handy A-532 Slide Chart speeds air velocity

calculations. All plastic, stays clean for
years. Included with each Pitot tube.
Straight Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes
Sensing Profile
Series 160F Pitot Tubes are ideal for use with our precision air velocity gages,
transmitters and digital test instruments. The Series 160F Pitot Tubes are constructed
from corrosion resistant stainless steel for a lifetime of service. Permanent, stamped
insertion depth graduations on sides of the 160F Pitot facilitate accurate positioning. Static
pressure port is parallel to sensing tube allowing quick, easy alignment of tube with the
air flow. Straight design allows for easy insertion into ducts through grills and pressure
taps as well as aids in positioning in hard to reach locations where a hook style Pitot tube
may not allow access.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: 304 SS.
Accuracy: 2% FS, 0 to 9000 FPM (45 M/s).
K-Factor: 0.81.
Insertion Length: 18 (44 cm).
Process Connections:1/4 OD.
Weight: 4.3 oz (122 g).
Model 160F, Straight Stainless Steel Pitot Tube
ACCESSORIES
A-156, Flange Mounting Plate 1/2 female NPT
A-158, Split Flange
A-159, Mounting Gland
A-397, Step Drill
DimA
7-7/8 [200.03]
11-7/8 [301.63]
18-7/8 [479.43]
31-1/2 [800.10]
39-1/2 [1003.30]
48 [1219.20]
59-7/8 [1520.83]
Insertion
in Meters
0.2
0.3
0.48
0.8
1.0
1.22
1.52
Scan here
to watch
product video
414
Model
160E-00
160E-01
160E-02
160E-03
160E-04
160E-05
160E-06
415_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:50 AM Page 415
Model
160G
Averaging Air Flow Grid

Extends Over 50 to Aid in Air Flow Output Checks
RoHS
4-1/4
4
[107.95]
[101.60]
16-15/32
[418.34]
4-7/8
[123.95]
TYP.
TEST EQUIPMENT
5-27/32
[148.34]
TYP.
7
[177.79]
13
[330.20]
16-15/32
[418.34]
Model 160G, Averaging Air Flow Grid

ACCESSORY
UHH-C2, Protective Hard Case
Model
ANE-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air or compatible gases.
Wetted Materials:
Grid: Black polycarbonate;
Swivel: Carbon steel;
Handle: SS;
Bolts: SS;
Wing Nut: SS;
Standoffs: Aluminum with rubber bumpers, two sets: 1.25 (31.7 mm) and 2
(50.8 mm), 1/8 ID / 1/4 OD;
Tubing: Two 10 (3 m) lengths of silicone rubber.
Accuracy: 2% FS.
K Factor: 0.84.
Range: 1000 to 5000 FPM (5 to 25 m/s).
Process Connection: 1/8 to 1/4 ID tubing.
Weight: 3.5 lb (1.587 kg).
Air Flow Grids
The Model 160G Averaging Air Flow Grid is a precision sensing instrument used to
measure face air velocity on grills, diffusers, registers, exhaust hoods, coils, filters, dampers
and similar restrictions. With its 16 sensing points, the 160G Air Flow Grid provides an
average flow sensing area across its 16.5 length and width. Included color coded tubing
connects to the integral barbed fittings, providing a differential pressure signal to a gage
or manometer where the readings can be converted into a velocity or flow reading. The
160G comes standard with an 18 handle and two 17 extensions offering a maximum reach
of approximately 52. The uniquely designed swivel and tightening nut allows the user to
position the sensing grid at any angle for ease of use in hard to reach locations. Store in
the separate UHH-C2 hard carrying case with foam cut-outs perfectly sized for the 160G,
as well as various other instruments in the AQTI Air Quality Test Instruments line.
Differential Pressure Anemometer

Bi-Directional Anemometer, No Sensing Electronics
MALE M10
CONNECTION
4-9/64
[105.00]
63/64
[25.00]
Handle
The Model ANE-1 Differential Pressure Anemometer is a robust and durable bidirectional anemometer with no moving parts or sensing electronics. With the installed
tubing, the ANE-1 connects easily to any manometer or applicable pressure sensing device
and is capable of measuring a wide velocity range. The air velocity range and accuracy is
dependent on the installed manometer, and the ANE-1 retains the accuracy as long as it is
dust free. The ANE-1 is made from high quality ABS plastic, comes with a convenient
handle, and includes 5 of blue and 5of red silicone tubing (2 mm ID x 4.5 mm OD) with
removeable adapter sized 2 mm OD to 3/16 OD that has two removeable 5 clear silicone
3/16 ID x 3/8 OD tubing versatile process options.
Model ANE-1, Differential Pressure Anemometer
4-23/64
[110.90]
HOLES FOR
AIR INTAKE
2-1/8
[54.05]
6-1/4
[158.79]
10-25/64
[263.79]
2
[50.80]
TUBING HOLE
FEMALE M10
CONNECTION
FOR HANDLE
Tubing Adapter
1-37/64
[39.97]
11/16
[17.50]
4-23/64
[110.90]
SPECIFICATIONS:
Service: Clean air only.
Wetted Materials:
Anemometer: ABS;
Tubing: Silicone;
Handle: Phenolic.
Dimensions:
Tubing: 2 mm ID x 4.5 mm OD;
Adapter: 2 mm OD to 3/16 OD connections.
K-Factor: 0.843.
Process Connections: 2 removeable 5 (12.7 cm) tubing 3/16 ID.
Weight: 7.7 oz (220 g).
415
416_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:51 PM Page 416
Model
480
Vaneometer Swing Vane Anemometer

Use This Sensitive Dwyer Unit to Measure Low Air Velocities at Low Cost *
25/32 [19/86]
11/32
[8.71]
TEST EQUIPMENT
1-37/64
[40.08]
3-7/8
[98.43]
3/32
[2.36]
2-45/64
[68.66]
27/32
[21.44]
Vane Anemometers
61/64
[24.13]
3-3/32
[78.64]
3-13/16
[96.82]
1-21/64
[33.73]
27/32
[21.44]
The 480 Vaneometer Swing Vane Anemometer is a durable low-priced instrument

specifically designed to simplify the measurement of low air velocities from 25 to 400 FPM.
OSHA, EPA and other safety ventilation requirements for spray booths and at fume,
smoke and dust exhaust hoods can now be quickly checked, even by untrained personnel.
Its small size and light weight only four ounces make it ideal to carry from one work
station to another. A versatile steel mounting bracket for continuous monitoring is also
included. The Vaneometer Swing Anemometer is accurate to 5% of full-scale to 100
FPM and 10% from 100 FPM to top of scale. It has a spirit level to ensure accurate
readings and the large scales are easy to read and visible from both sides. The housing is
molded from tough ABS plastic and easy to clean with soap and water. The polyester vane
can be cleaned with lacquer thinner. A spare vane is provided.
Model
480
M480
A-390
A-406
A-407
Description
25 to 400 FPM
0 to 2.0 m/s
Extra vanes, pkg. of 2
Molded carrying case
Plastic carrying pouch
Use a VaneometerTM Swing Vane Anemometer to measure velocity

of air flow into laboratory fume hoods and at paint spray booths to
determine when to change filters. Or wherever needed to meet
OSHA standards of ventilation for smoke, dust or fume removal.
Mark II Wind Speed Indicator

7-1/4
[184.15]
13-3/32
[332.58]
7-31/64
[190.07]
6
[152.25]
15-51/64
[401.32]
Includes ABS plastic vane,

50 tubing, mounting
hardware and gage fluid.
9-1/2
[241.30]
2
[50.80]
Perfect for your living room, den, workshop or office. Instruments are accurate, low-cost
and practical. Standard model indicates wind speed directly on liquid filled scale reading
in both Miles per Hour (0 to 80) and Beaufort scale (1 to 12). Also available is metric model,
same as above but reading 0 to 130 kilometers per hour. To order, specify Mk II Wind
Speed Indicator, MPH or Mk II Wind Speed Indicator, KPH.
416
Mark II WSI, mph scale

Mark II WSI Metric, kph scale
Note: Standard discounts do not apply to the Wind Speed Indicator. Sporting goods
dealers and distributors: Contact factory for quantity discounts.
417_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:32 PM Page 417
Model
MW-1
Pocket Wind Meter

Measures Wind Speed and Temperature, Wide Range
1-37/64
[40.08]
Measure wind speed and temperature with the Series MW Pocket Wind Meter.
Easily view readings on the four digit 2 (51 mm) high LCD display with wind speed bar
graph. Selectable air velocity ranges include m/s, ft/min, km/h, mph, and knots. Ambient
temperature recorded in F or C. The MW also features automatic shut-off, detailed
instruction manual and protective plastic water resistant housing that floats. Accessories
include a lanyard.
ACCESSORY
A-166, Replacement vane for MW-1
Model
89088
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Range: 0 to 30 m/s, 0 to
5860 ft/min, 0 to 90 km/h, 0 to 65 mph,
0 to 55 knots.
Temperature/Wind-chill Ranges: 14
to 113F (-10 to 45C).
Temperature Resolution: 0.36F
(0.2C).
Accuracy: Wind speed: 5% of
reading. Temperature: 3.6F (2C).
Resolution: 0.1 m/s, 19 ft/min, 0.3
km/h, 0.2 mph, 0.2 knots.
SET
Sample Time: 1 reading per second.

Water-resistant: Up to 3 (1 meter).
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 or
BR1225 lithium metal battery, installed
Auto-off: 14 minutes after last key is
pressed.
Impeller: Plastic, replaceable.
Case: Plastic.
Display: 2.32 x 2 (59 x 51 mm).
Weight: 1.84 oz (52.1 g).
Pocket Wind Meter

Measures Wind Speed, Wind Chill and Temperature
1-3/4
[44.45]
5/8
[15.88]
5-7/64
[129.79]
The Model 89088 measures wind speed, temperature and wind chill accurately with its
rotating vane and thermo-anemometer sensor. The body and rotating vane are constructed
of light weight, sturdy ABS plastic. The ABS impeller spins on a high precision jewel
bearing allowing for max performance. Wind speed, max wind speed, temperature and
wind chill can quickly be viewed on the LCD display in user selectable measuring units of
degrees F or C, m/s, ft/min, knots, mph, k/hr and beauforts. The 89088 also features a data
hold button and a 5 minute automatic shut-off to conserve battery life. Accessories include
a battery and a cloth carrying pouch.
Units vs. Range as shown on display
Range
Unit
Resolution
1.1 to 20.0 0.1
M/S
FT/MIN 60 to 3937 0.1
0.4 to 38.8 0.1
KNT
0.8 to 72.0 0.1
KMH
0.5 to 44.7 0.1
M/H
1 to 8
BF
1
SPECIFICATIONS
Air Velocity Range: 1.1-20.0 m/s, 60-3937 ft/min, 0.4-38.8 knots,
0.8-72.0 k/hr, 0.5-44.7 mph, 1-8 beaufort.
Wind Speed Limits: 0.5-44.7 mph (60-3937) ft/min.
Temperature/Wind Chill Limits: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F).
Accuracy: Velocity: 5% or last significant digit (whichever is greater);
Temperature: 1C (2F).
Resolution: Temperature: 0.1; Air velocity: See chart.
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 lithium metal battery, included, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: 48 hour life under continuous usage. Auto-off: After 5 minutes.
Materials: Impeller:ABS; Case:ABS.
Display: 28 (L) x 16 (W) mm.
Weight:50 g (1.76 oz).
Model 89088, Pocket Wind Meter
417
Wind Meters
Model MW-1, Hand-held, Mini-vane Thermo-Anemometer
MODE
TEST EQUIPMENT
4-1/8
[104.78]
418_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:48 AM Page 418
Portable Wind Meter
Vane Thermo-Anemometers
TEST EQUIPMENT
21/32 [16.67]
6-3/4
[171.48]
Hold this way

for low scale reading.
For high scale reading, finger

covers hole.
Ideal for yachtsmen, outdoorsmen, farmers, etc. A welcome gift. Use anywhere. Direct
reading, no calculations. Hold meter at eye level, back of unit to wind. White ball in tube
indicates wind speed. Meter has two scales for max accuracy and easy reading low, 2 to
10 and high, 4 to 66 mph range. For high range, cover hole with finger. Pocket size, sturdy
plastic, has case.
Note: Standard discounts do not apply to the Windmeter. Sporting goods dealers
and distributors: Contact factory for quantity discounts.
Model
8901
Dimensions: 5/8 W X 6-3/4 H X 17/32 D.

Wind Meter-MPH, mph scale
Wind Meter-KNOT, knots scale
Wind Meter-KPH, kph scale
Wind Meter-MPS, mps scale
A-376, Replacement floats for windmeter, tube of 3
Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Measures Air Volume, Air Velocity, and Temperature
2-51/64
[71.0]
1-3/16
[30.0]
3-1/64
[76.5]
Master
7-5/32
[181.8]
ON/OFF
MODE
MN/MX
8901
VELOCITY
FREE AREA,
VOLUME
REC
SINGLE-P
HOLD
SET/SAVE
SEL/AVG
NXT DGT
MULTI-P
SEL/AVG + ON/OFF : Select unit

HOLD - C,M/S ; SEL/AVG - F,FPM
MN/MX HOLD : To save
MODE HOLD : Set area value
SEL/AVG : Change to next digit
HOLD + ON/OFF Disable auto power off
2-3/4
[70.0]
2-1/32
[51.7]
Model 8901 Vane Thermo-Anemometer is ideal for balancing air conditioning and
heating ducts or checking the operation of fans and blowers. Model 8901 measures air volume
in cubic feet per minute and cubic centimeters per second, as well as air velocity in ft/min, m/s,
knots, km/hr and mph with 2% accuracy. The multifunction LCD can simultaneously display
air velocity and temperature or air flow and temperature in selectable units. Built-in
temperature sensor provides measurements with an accuracy of 2 with the capability to
display the results in F/C. Model 8901 can either store measurements or transfer the data to
a PC via RS-232 communication. Additional features include data hold, as well as the ability to
record minimum, maximum and average readings. These units also feature a detachable probe
for easy replacement, if necessary. Model 8901 includes battery, carrying case and instruction
manual.
Model 8901, Vane Thermo-Anemometer
ACCESSORIES
A-550, Replacement Probe with Vane
A-552, USB Cable and RS-232 Software
418
15/16
[24.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR VELOCITY
Range: 80 to 6900 ft/min (0.4 to 35
m/s).
Accuracy: 2% of reading or last
significant digit (whichever is greater).
Resolution: 1 ft/min (0.01 m/s).
Response Time: 1 second.
AIRVOLUME
Range: 9999 (CFM, m3/s).
Resolution: 0.1 (0 to 999.9) or 1 (1000
to 9999).
TEMPERATURE
Range: 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
METER
LCD Size: 1-1/4 x 1-5/8 (37 x 42 mm).
Serial Communications: 2400 bps, 8
data bits.
battery, included, user replaceable.
Battery Life: 100 hours (approx.).
Vane Diameter: 2-7/8 (70 mm).
419_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:09 PM Page 419
Model
8912
Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Measures Air Velocity, Air Volume, Temperature, Humidity, and BTU
3-1/64
1-19/64 [76.5]
[33.0]
2-49/64
[70.4]
8912
BTUPSYCHROMETER
ENTER
HOLD
2-13/32
[61.1]
DC
9V
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR VELOCITY
Range: 188 to 6299 ft/min (0.6 to 32
m/s).
Resolution: 0.1 ft/min (0.1 m/s).
TEMPERATURE
Range: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Range: 0 to 100%.
Accuracy: 3% @ 25C from 10 to
90% RH. Outside this range: 5%.
Resolution: 0.10%.

ACCESSORIES
A-549, Replacement Probe withVane
Model
9671
1-1/8
[28.8]
AIR VOLUME
Range: 0 to 99999 (CFM or m3/s).
Resolution: 0.1 (0 to 9999.9) or 1
(10000 to 99999).
WET BULB
Range: -7.6 to 158F (-22 to 70C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
METER
Display: 1 x 1.8 (26 x 45 mm).
data bits, no parity.
replaceable.
Vane Diameter: 3 (77 mm).
Multi-Function Vane Thermo-Anemometer

Measures Air Velocity, Air Volume, Temperature, Humidity, and BTU; Built-In Datalogging
1-9/16
[39.5]
DATALOGGING
AIR FLOW / RH / TEMP.
3-1/64
[76.5]
TELESCOPING
L
9671
6-47/64
[171.0]
PS/2 PLUG
2-3/4
[70.0]
Measure air velocity, air volume, temperature, humidity, and BTU with the Model
9671 Multi-function Anemometer. The large 1.8 (45 mm) display allows users to easily view
readings. User-selectable wind speed units include ft/min, m/s, knots, mph and km/hr. In
addition to these functions, the 9671 is capable of measuring relative humidity, wet bulb
temperature, dew point and BTU capacity. A built-in sensor records ambient temperature in
F or C. Model 9671 features include data hold, along with the ability to record minimum,
maximum and average readings on a single point. Additional features include an RS-232
interface setting that allows the unit to download data, as well as upload up to 99
measurements through pre-edited PC files. The 9671 also has a detachable probe for easy
replacement, if necessary, or to attach a miniature vane probe. Each unit includes hard
carrying case, batteries, software CD, cable and instruction manual.

ACCESSORIES
A-551, Replacement Probe with Vane
A-VT-300P, Replacement Probe with Miniature Vane
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR VELOCITY
Range: 118 to 6299 ft/min (0.6 to 32
m/s).
Resolution: 0.1 ft/min (0.1 m/s).
TEMPERATURE
Range: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Range: 0 to 100%.
Accuracy: 3% @ 25C from 10 to
90% RH. Outside this range: 5%.
Resolution: 0.10%.
AIR VOLUME
Range: 0 to 99999 (CFM or m3/s).
Resolution: 0.1 (0 to 9999.9) or 1
(10000 to 99999).
WET BULB
Range: -7.6 to 158F (-22 to 70C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
METER
Display: 1 x 1.8 (26 x 45 mm).
data bits, no parity.
replaceable.
Vane Diameter: 3 (77 mm).
419
Measure air velocity, air volume, temperature, humidity, and BTU with the Model
8912 Vane Thermo-Anemometer. The large 1.7 (44 mm) display allows users to easily view
readings. User-selectable wind speed units include ft/min, m/s, knots, mph, and km/hr. In
addition to these functions, the 8912 is capable of measuring relative humidity, wet bulb
temperature, dew point, and BTU capacity. A built-in sensor records ambient temperature in
F or C. Model 8912 features include data hold, the ability to record minimum, maximum, and
average readings on a single point, and an RS-232 interface setting. The Model 8912 also
features a detachable probe for easy replacement, if necessary. The units can record and
average up to 2 hours of data while displaying the continuous running average. Each unit
includes hard carrying case, batteries, calibration data tag and instruction manual. This
versatile meter is perfect for HVAC inspection, energy audits and balancing applications.
6-45/64
[170.3]
TEST EQUIPMENT
REC
START
RS
232
Mx/Mn
MODE
420_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:47 AM Page 420
Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Model
8904
Large 1.3 Dual Display, One Hand Operation

1-25/32 [45.4]
Thermo-Anemometers
TEST EQUIPMENT
3-1/64 [76.5]
AGENCY
APPROVAL
LABEL
SERIAL
NUMBER
LABEL
BLACK
BUTTONS
BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
7-7/32
[183.4]
APPLICATIONS
This meter is most ideal for measuring heat, ventilation, air conditioning, refrigerating
wind flow and temperature.
Model 8904, Integral Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Model
471B
ON-OFF/RESET
DFM
8904
AVERAGE
MULTI-POINT
SEL:-MIL/H
-KNOT
HOLD
MIN/MAX REC
SINGLE-POINT
S/N:XXXXXXX
MADE IN CHINA
P.R.O.C.
Anemo-thermometer
2-19/32
[66.0]
Simultaneously measure air velocity and temperature with the Model 8904 Integral
Vane Thermo-Anemometer. The large 1.3 (34 mm) display allows users to easily view
readings. User-selectable wind speed units include ft/min, m/sec, knots, mph and km/hr.
Additionally, a built-in sensor records ambient temperature in F or C. Model 8904 features
include data hold, the ability to record minimum, maximum and average readings on a single
point and an RS-232 interface setting. The units can also record and average up to 2 hours of
data while displaying the continuous running average. Model 8904 includes hard carrying case,
battery and instruction manual. This compact meter is ideal for HVAC inspection, energy
audits and balancing applications.
BLACK FAN
7/8
[22.4]
1-1/2
[38.1]
SPECIFICATIONS
AIR VELOCITY
Range: 80 to 5900 ft/min (0.4 to 30
m/s).
Resolution: 1 ft/min (0.01 m/s).
TEMPERATURE
Range: 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
ACCESSORY
DISPLAY
METER
Display: 1.3 x 1.6 (34 x 40 mm).
data bits.
Vane Diameter: 2-7/8 (70 mm).
Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g).
Thermo-Anemometer Test Instrument

Measures Air Velocity or Air Volume and Temperature Simultaneously
11/32
[8.74]
PS/2 INPUT
29/32
[23.00]
6-11/64
[156.92]
The Model 471B Digital Thermo Anemometers are versatile dual function
instruments that quickly and easily measure air velocity or volumetric flow plus air
temperature in imperial or metric units. High contrast LCD display shows both selected
readings simultaneously. Convenient backlight provides perfect visibility in low light
conditions. Light automatically shuts off after 2-1/2 minutes to prolong battery life. Low
battery warning is included. Stainless steel probe with comfortable hand grip is etched with
insertion depth marks from 0 to 8 inches and 0 to 20 cm. Extruded aluminum housing fully
protects electronics, yet is lightweight and comfortable to hold even when taking multiple
readings as part of duct traverses. Up to 99 readings may be stored for later retrieval. An
integral sliding cover protects sensors when not in use. Items included with the 471B are 9
volt alkaline battery, sensing probe, wrist strap and custom carrying case.
PS/2 CONNECTOR
16-11/64
[410.61]
2-13/16
[71.59]
New Six Button Operation

Provides Quick Access
to Enhanced Features
SLIDING
COVER
1-5/32
[29.36]
PROBE CABLE
APPROX. 2 LG COILED
APPROX. 6 LG EXTENDED
6-9/64
[155.82] 6-31/32
[177.13]
AP1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air velocity and temperature of clean, dry air.
Temperature Limits:
Process Air Velocity: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C);
Process Temperature: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C);
Resolution: 0.1%, 0.1 F/C.
Range Air Velocity: 0 to 6000 FPM (0 to 30 m/s).
Accuracy Air Velocity: 3% FS within temperature range of 40 to 90F (4 to
32C).
Range Volumetric AirFlow: 19,999 in selected flow units.
Range Temperature: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C).
Accuracy Temperature: 0.5F (0.28C) from 32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 1.5F
(0.83C) from -40 to 32F (-40 to 0C) & 122 to 212F (50 to 100C).
Probe Length: 8 (203 mm) insertion.
Cable Length: 28 (71 cm) retracted, 6 ft (183 cm) extended.
replaceable.
Model 471B-1, Digital Thermo Anemometer includes 9V battery, sensing probe, wrist
strap, soft carrying case and instructions
Replaceable Probe with

Secure 6 PinAdapter
420
Soft Carrying Case

Included withEvery Unit
ADDITIONAL PARTS
AP1, Thermo anemometer air velocity & temperature probe with coiled cable
421_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:47 AM Page 421
Model
AFH2
Air Flow Hood

Measures Volumetric Flow Rate with Highly Accurate Digital Manometer
24 SQ. [609.60]
TEST EQUIPMENT
38
[965.20]
8
[203.20]
MOUNTING
PLATE
18-1/2 [469.90]
Hood Frame Assembly
Standard AFH2
Model AFH2, Air Flow Hood with 2 x 2 hood

ACCESSORIES
A-174, Low Flow Hood Adapter Kit
A-175, Hood Adapter Kit
(Required for use with below alternative hoods)
A-176, 1 x 4 canvas hood
A-190, Software and cable
AFH2 with A-174 Low Flow Adapter
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air.
Volume Flow Rate Units: CFM, l/s, m3/hr.
Volume Flow Ranges:
Supply: CFM: 41 to 1176; l/s: 19 to 555; m3/hr: 69 to 2000;
Exhaust: CFM: 45 to 1176; l/s: 21 to 555; m3/hr: 76 to 2000.
Volume Flow Ranges with Low Flow Kit:
Supply: CFM: 25 to 1176; l/s: 12 to 555; m3/hr: 43 to 2000;
Exhaust: CFM: 29 to 1176; l/s: 14 to 555; m3/hr: 49 to 2000.
Accuracy @ 20C (68F):
Supply: 3% of reading 9 CFM (4 l/s, 14 m3/hr);
Exhaust: 3% of reading 9 CFM (4 l/s, 14 m3/hr).
Span Stability v. Temperature: Better than 0.1% of range in use per 2F (1C).
Zero System Accuracy: 1 count (0.05 Pascal typical; 0.0002 in w.c.).
Temperature Limits:
Operating:32 to 122F (0 to 50C);
Thermal Effect: 0.1% of range in use per 2F (1C).
Zero Drift: Negligible due to auto zero system. When auto zero set at 30 second
intervals (2 minute warm up).
Orientation Effect: Any 45 degree change 0.0004 in w.c. (0.1 pascal)
typical.
System Air Leak: 0.366 in3/hr (0.1 ml/min) @ 20 in w.c. (5 kPa) typical.
Maximum Differential Pressure: 60 in w.c. (15 kPa).
Auto Ranging Display: 0.375 high digits.
Resolution: 1 CFM, 1 l/s, 1 m3/hr.
Output: RS-232 serial interface (baud rate 9600).
Memory Capability: 2500 readings in any engineering unit.
PowerRequirements: 8.4 V NiMH battery, installed functional, user replaceable
(optional 9 V alkaline battery may be used in place of rechargeable).
Dimensions: 30 x 24 x 24 (965 x 610 x 610 mm). Hood only:2 x 2 (600 mm x
600 mm).
AFH2 Travel Case
421
Air Flow Hood
The Model AFH2 Air Flow Hood is designed to measure volumetric air flow from
diffusers, grilles and registers. The AFH2 Air Flow Hood maintains a running average of
measurements in the desired units, and provides the ability to manually record
measurements with the manometer over a given time period. The highly accurate digital
manometer has an auto-zero feature and will auto-zero at user-defined intervals. The digital
manometer easily mounts to the flow hood with its magnet back-plate. Break down is very
quick and easy as tools are not required. In addition to these features, the unit will alert
you when its battery is running low in order to avoid recording inaccurate measurements.
This lightweight flow hood is durable and easily stores into an included travel case. New
low flow adapter kit allows easy conversion of any AFH2 into a low flow hood. All kits fit
easily into the AFH2s travel case. The AFH2 comes with a calibration certificate for both
hood and manometer.
422_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:04 AM Page 422
Mobile Meter Test Instrument App

Works With Most Android Phones/Tablets; Wireless Probes
HVAC BalancingInstruments
TEST EQUIPMENT
Touch to access
parameters
Touch to toggle
between meter
and gauge view
Connection
status
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Mobile Meter Test Instrument Mobile App converts Android based phones
and tablets into a multi-function test instrument. The app is available for download in the
Google app market or by scanning the QR code below. Wireless probes connect to the
phone or tablet using our mobile gateway, Model UHH-BTG, that utilizes wireless
technology from Bluetooth SIG Inc. Parameters from multiple probes can be displayed
simultaneously, or a single probes parameters can be displayed as a meter or analog gauge.
Measurements from a single probe can be saved to log files for future use. Log files can be
viewed directly on the phone or emailed to another device or computer. The Mobile Meter
Mobile App does the conversions for engineering units and calculations for flow or air
velocity conversions.
Model
UHH-BTG
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Systems: Android firmware version 3.X or later.
Wireless Protocol: Conforms to Bluetooth SIG, Inc. low energy wireless
technology.
Wireless Distance: 50 (15 m) or greater.
Response Time: 1 s.
Scan here to download for FREE
from the Google Play Store
http://www.dwyer-inst.com/m/mobilemeterapp
Wireless Mobile Gateway
RoHS
Converts UHH Probe Wireless Signals to Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Wireless Technology
2-7/16
[61.98]
2-13/16
[71.50]
1-3/16
[29.86] 1-17/32
[39.15]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model UHH-BTG Wireless Mobile Wireless Gateway transforms the wireless
signal from any Dwyer Instruments, Inc. universal handheld probe or module into a
Bluetooth SIG, Inc, Wireless Technology. Using this gateway, any iOS Firmware version
5.X or later or Android Firmware version 3.X or later smartphone or tablet can become
the base instrument for measuring or logging. Once the gateway is paired with a phone or
tablet, our Mobile Meter app or any other Dwyer Instruments, Inc. approved apps can
detect available probes or modules. Wireless gateways can detect probes or modules that
are 50 feet away or even greater distances depending on the environment. The wireless
signal from the gateway to the mobile device adds at least another 25 feet of sensing
distance. Model UHH-BTG is compact in size and clips on to most standard belts. The
rechargeable battery can be charged using the same mini-USB cable and charger as the
probes or modules. LED lights indicate the battery status and whether the gateway is
communicating properly.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wireless Protocol: Conforms to Bluetooth SIG, Inc. low energy wireless
technology.
Wireless Distances: 50 (15 m) or greater.
Response Time: 1 s.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 5 to 125F (-15 to 51C);
Battery Charging: 32 to 113F (0 to 45C).
Power Requirements: 3.7 V YT562447 lithium ion battery, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Weight: 2.5 oz (70.87 g).
Agency Approvals: CE with CE approved charger, RoHS, FCC.
Model UHH-BTG, Wireless Mobile Gateway

UHH-ICHRG, Dual USB Charger (Not Included)
Converts these wireless probes for use with our Mobile Meter app.
Model
AP2
RP2
VP2
WDPM-002
WDPM-005
WDPM-010
WDPM-020
WDPM-030
WDPM-100
WDPM-200
WDPM-350
Description
Wireless Thermo-Hygrometer Probe
Wireless Thermo-Anemometer Probe
Wireless 100 mm Vane Thermo-Anemometer Probe
Wireless Differential Pressure Probe 2 in w.c.
Note: See Wireless Probe catalog page for full specifications.
422
RP2
AP2
VP2
WDPM
Google Inc. is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.

iOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.
Google is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
Google Play is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
Wireless Probes: See page 427 (Models RP2, AP2 & VP2)
423_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:46 PM Page 423
Series
AQTI
Air Quality Test Instrument Kits

AQTI Combines the UHH Universal Handheld with Compatible Probes
Scan here
to watch
product video
TEST EQUIPMENT
AQTI-VP1/VP2: UHH + 100 mm Vane

Thermo-Anemometer Probe
The Series AQTI Air Quality Test Instruments combine the

versatile Model UHH handheld base with various compatible
probes and modules. This versatile combination provides a line
of instruments capable of streamlining a technicians everyday
testing by combining all into one product. All compatible probes
and modules can be field adapted at any moment and are
instantly recognized by any UHH handheld base instrument. The
plug and play probes allow a user to run through various tests,
eliminating the need to switch instruments and recall how to
navigate all the various equipment from multiple vendors,
reducing time and simplifying operation. Series AQTI Air
Quality Test Instruments come prepackaged in differential
pressure, thermo-anemometer, or thermo-hygrometer probe kits.
Additional wired and wireless probes may be ordered separately
to create any customized test package to suit your needs.
Model
AQTIWDPM-002
AQTIWDPM-005
AQTIWDPM-010
AQTIWDPM-020
AQTIWDPM-030
AQTIWDPM-100
AQTIWDPM-200
AQTIWDPM-350
AQTIAP1
AQTIRP1
AQTIVP1
Parameters
Pressure
AQTI-RP1/RP2: UHH +
Thermo-Hygrometer Probe
WDPM: Wireless
Differential Pressure Module
Range
2 in wc; Pa
Engineering Units Available

in w.c., ft w.c., in Hg, psi, oz/in2; mm
w.c., cm w.c., mBar, Pa, hPa, kPa
Pressure
0 to 5 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 10 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 20 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 30 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 100 in w.c. in w.c., ft w.c., in Hg, psi, oz/in2; mm
Pressure
Pressure
Velocity/
0 to 6000 FPM; Velocity: fpm, mph, knots, m/s, m/h,
k/h, fps; Temperature: F, C
Temperature
-20 to 212F
Humidity/
0 to 100% RH; Humidity: %RH; D.P. / W.B.: F, C;
Humidity: %RH; D.P./W.B.: F, C
Temperature
-20 to 140F
Velocity/Humidity/ 40 to 5000 FPM; Velocity: fpm, mph, knots, m/s, m/h,
Temperature
0 to 100% RH; k/h, fps; Temperature: F, C
-4 to 140F
Connection
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wired
Wired
Wired
AQTI Series supplied with: UHH, sensing probe with coiled cable, soft carrying case (UHH-C1), hand strap
(UHH-STRAP), dual USB charger with international power adapters (UHH-ICHRG), charger cable (UHH-CBL).
Model
AQTIPWDPM-002
AQTIPWDPM-005
AQTIPWDPM-010
AQTIPWDPM-020
AQTIPWDPM-030
AQTIPWDPM-100
AQTIPWDPM-200
AQTIPWDPM-350
AQTIPAP2
AQTIPRP2
AQTIPVP2
Parameters
Pressure
Range
0 to 2 in w.c.
Engineering Units Available

Pressure
0 to 5 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 10 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 20 in w.c.
Pressure
0 to 30 in w.c.
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Velocity/
0 to 6000 FPM; Velocity: fpm, mph, knots, m/s, m/h,
k/h, fps; Temperature: F, C
Temperature
-20 to 212F
Humidity/
0 to 100% RH; Humidity: %RH; D.P. / W.B.: F, C;
Humidity: %RH; D.P./W.B.: F, C
Temperature
-20 to 140F
Velocity/Humidity/ 40 to 5000 FPM; Velocity: fpm, mph, knots, m/s, m/h,
Temperature
0 to 100% RH; k/h, fps; Temperature: F, C
-4 to 140F
Connection
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
AQTIP Series supplied with: UHH, wireless sensing probe, soft carrying case (UHH-C1), hand strap (UHHSTRAP), dual USB charger with international power adapters (UHH-ICHRG), charger cable (UHH-CBL), 2 GB
SD card (UHH-SD), heavy duty hard case with pre-cut foam inserts for additional sensors (UHH-C2), NIST
Calibration Certificate.
Additional probes, modules &accessories: See pages 426-428
423
HVAC Balancing Instruments
AQTI-AP1/AP2: UHH +
424_Layout 1 7/14/14 9:24 AM Page 424
Model
UHH
Universal Handheld Test Instrument

Versatile Base Can Combine with Multiple Probes and Modules
TEST EQUIPMENT
3.038
[77.17 mm]
2.169
[55.09 mm]
8.508
[216.11 mm]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Model UHH Universal Handheld Test Instrument is a highly versatile
instrument that offers the utmost flexibility and ease of user operation by having the
capacity to work with a variety of Dwyer Instruments, Inc. compatible sensing modules
and probes. Additional wired and wireless probes or modules are instantly recognized by
the UHH without any user reprogramming or alteration, allowing seemless sensor addition,
upgrade or replacement. The Universal Handheld offers a slew of features that enable a
technician to quickly set up and intuitively navigate through their daily activities. Data is
stored via the internal memory or separate SD card in various auto or manual logging
operations. Logged files can be quickly transferred to a device through a USB cable or by
a portable SD card. The display can operate in standard numerical meter mode, gage mode
with analog needle, gage mode with additional pass/fail operation zones, and strip chart
mode which enables a simplified visual tracking of the process. The four directional buttons,
combined with the three soft key buttons aligning to corresponding screen functions, allow
for quick navigation through the four main operation menus. The rugged plastic case with
protective thermo-plastic over-mold, along with the dust-shielding rubber caps, permit the
unit to handle abuse and properly withstand dusty environments. The base UHH includes
an integral molded compartment that securely holds wireless modules. The storage
compartment offers convenient transportation of a module with the base instrument during
testing. A flexible hand strap included with every UHH provides means for the base
handheld to be safely connected to a belt, pipe, ladder or similar structure freeing the user's
hands to focus on the sampling test. A 6-pin connector enables one wired probe at a time
to be plugged in to the base instrument without worry of becoming disconnected during
sampling. The rechargeable battery via the included USB cable provides long term
operation to last through several days work. At just under 10 oz, the compact UHH base is
lightweight. Included with the UHH is a soft carrying case which secures the provided
accessories and added test probe.
UHHINCLUDEDACCESSORIES
UHH-STRAP: Hand strap.
UHH-ICHRG: Dual USB wall or auto charger with international adapters.
UHH-CBL: 3.2 ft (1 m) USB cable.
UHH-C1: Soft carrying case.
UHH-C1
Soft Carrying Case
424
UHH-ICHRG
Dual USB Charger
UHH-STRAP
Hand Strap
SPECIFICATIONS
Languages: English, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish.
Display: OLED, color 240 x 320.
Temperature Limits: 5 to 125F (-15 to 51C);
Note: When using wireless function: 20 to 125F (-6 to 51C).
Battery Charging Limits: 32 to 113F (0 to 45C).
Resolution: 1 FPM, 0.1 MPS, 0.1 CFM & M3/HR; 0.1F & C; RH 0.1%.
Units Air Velocity: FPM, MPH, KN, M/H, M/S K/H, FPS.
Units Flow: CFM, M3/HR, M3/S, GPM, GPH, GPD, LPS, LPM, LPH.
Units Temperature: F, C.
Housing: Thermoplastic elastomer over polycarbonate.
Power Requirements: 3 V BR1225 lithium metal battery, installed functional, nonreplaceable and 3.7 V lithium ion battery, installed functional, non-replaceable.
(Note: Intended to be operated with power cables less than 3 m in length).
Maximum Wireless Distance: 50 (15 m).
Agency Approval: CE (not while charging), FCCcompliant.
UHHFEATURES
UHH base quickly recognizes various wired or wireless probes and modules eliminates need to have many test instruments on hand, reducing time to complete
job.
Easy navigation through 4 menus via directional arrow buttons and 3 soft keys.
Large color display can operate in 4 process reading modes.
Inherent rubber overmold housing combed with protective caps enable units to
withstand abuse in dusty environments.
Integral strap clips allow units to be secured during testing with included hand strap
to a belt, pipe, ladder, etc. providing hands free operation.
LED status light transmits visual feedback when units long lasting lithium battery is
being charged by the USBconnection. Also indicates when a data point is stored.
Manual or automatic data logging modes include several adjustable parameters that
enable the user to obtain readings in a multitude of potential test scenarios.
Internal memory or expanded memory with portable SD card provides ample data
logging capacity. Data is transferable via the USB connection or by removing the
SD card and inserting into compatible SD card device.
Flexible ordering allows customization to fulfill personal needs by ordering UHH and
additional probes a-la-carte or by pre-set test kits.
Available sensors: See pages 426-428

Views of each mode: See page 425 (Series UHH)
Pre-set test kits:See page 423 (Series AQTI)
425_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:07 AM Page 425
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
PROTECTIVE RUBBER CAPS

INDUSTRIAL 6-PIN
PROBE CONNECTION
SD MEMORY CARD
SLOT
SENSOR AND
LOGGING ICON
LOCATION
HAND STRAP TOP CLIPS

BATTERY INDICATOR
MAIN MENUS
LARGE BACKLIT
COLOR OLED
3 SOFT KEYS
CORRESPOND TO
APPLICABLE ON-SCREEN
FUNCTIONS
LEDINDICATES
CHARGING STATUS
AND DATA STORAGE
HAND STRAP BOTTOM CLIP
User Selectable Display Operation

Meter Mode
Standard numerical values.

Peak/Valley, Average and
(depending on sensor) Total
values easily selectable
with soft key.
Model
UHH
AP1
RP1
AP2
RP2
VP1
VP2
USB CONNECTION FOR DATA

TRANSFER OR RECHARGING
WITH INTEGRAL PROTECTIVE
RUBBER CAP
Gage Mode
Range Mode
Strip Chart Mode
Analog Gage displays the

pointers reading location on
the full-scale dial plus the
actual numerical value.
Similar to Gage mode with

additional programmable
green band for quick visual
of test pass or fail status.
Strip chart shows the

process over selectable
period of time. The charts yaxis also can be adjusted.
Description
Base model with hand strap, charger/cable in soft carrying case
Thermo anemometer air velocity & temperature probe with
coiled cable
Thermo hygrometer humidity & temperature probe with coiled
cable
Wireless thermo-anemometer air velocity & temperature probe
Wireless thermo-hygrometer humidity & temperature probe
100 mm vane thermo-anemometer air velocity, temperature and
humidity probe with coiled cable
Wireless 100 mm vane thermo-anemometer air velocity,
temperature and humidity probe
ACCESSORIES
UHH-STRAP, UHHhand strap
UHH-ICHRG, UHHdual USB charger with international adapters (1.0 A) (Not CE
approved)
UHH-CBL, USB cable
UHH-SD, 2 GB SD card
KF-CC-304, Dual USB CHARGER with North American adapter (1.5 A)
UHH-C2, Heavy duty hard case with pre-cut foam inserts for additional sensors
Note:For available sensors, see page reference below.
Available sensors: See pages 426-428
425
4 DIRECTIONAL
ARROWS WITH
ON/OFF/ENTER
BUTTON ALLOW
QUICK NAVIGATION
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODULE STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
426_Layout 1 7/9/14 4:03 PM Page 426
Model
RP1
RoHS
Model RP1, Wired Thermo-Hygrometer Probe for the Model UHH
HVACBalancing Instruments
TEST EQUIPMENT
Wired, Measures Humidity, Temperature, Dew Point, & Wet Bulb Temperatures
Model
AP1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -40 to 176F (-40 to 100C);
Range:
RH: 0 to 100% (non-condensing);
Temperature: -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C).
Accuracy:
RH: 2% @ 25C (10 to 90% RH); 4% (0 to 10, 90 to 100% RH);
Temperature: 0.54 @ 77F (0.3 @ 25C).
Response Time: 1.5 s.
Weight: 12.8 oz (362 g).
Agency Approvals: CE,RoHS.
Wired, Measures Velocity, Flow, & Temperature
RoHS
Model AP1, Wired Thermo-Anemometer Probe for the Model UHH
Model
VP1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Dry, clean air.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C);
Range:
Air Velocity: 0 to 6000 FPM (0 to 30 m/s);
Volumetric Air: 999,999 in selected flow units;
Accuracy:
Air Velocity: 3% FS within temperature range of 40 to 90F (4 to 32C);
Temperature: 0.5F (0.28C).
Response Time: 1 s.
Weight: 12.8 oz (362 g).
100 mm Vane Thermo-Anemometer Probe

Wired, Measures Velocity, Flow, Humidity, & Temperature
RoHS
Model VP1, Wired 100 mm Vane Thermo-Anemometer Probe

for the Model UHH
426
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits:
Process: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C);
Range:
Air Velocity: 0 to 6000 FPM (0 to 30 m/s);
Volumetric Air: 999,999 in selected flow units;
Accuracy:
Air Velocity: 3% FS within temperature range of 40 to 90F (4 to 32C);
Response Time: 1 s.
Weight: 15.2 oz (431 g).
427_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:08 AM Page 427
Model
RP2
RoHS
Wireless, Measures Humidity, Temperature, Dew Point, & Wet Bulb Temperatures
Wireless, Measures Velocity, Flow, & Temperature
RoHS
Model AP2, Wireless Thermo-Anemometer Probe for use with the Model UHH
handheld meter and the Mobile Meter test instrument mobile app
Model
VP2
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits:
Process: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C);
Range:
Air Velocity: 0 to 6000 FPM
(0 to 30 m/s);
Volumetric Air: 999,999 in selected
flow units;
Temperature: -20 to 212F
(-29 to 100C).
Accuracy:
Air Velocity: 3% FS within
temperature range of 40 to 90F
(4 to 32C);
Response Time: 1 s.

Battery Charging Limits: 32 to 113F
(0 to 45C). (Wireless Only).
Power Requirements: 3.7 V
YT562447 Lithium ion battery, installed
functional, user replaceable. (Note:
Intended to be operated with power
cables less than 3 m in length).
(Wireless Only).
Maximum Wireless Distance: 50
(15 m). (Wireless Only).
Handle Enclosure: Thermoplastic
elastomer over polycarbonate.
Supplied With: Wrist strap.
Weight: 11.2 oz (317 g).
Agency Approvals: CE (not while
charging), RoHS, FCC compliant.
100 mm Vane Thermo-Anemometer Probe

Wireless, Measures Velocity, Flow, Humidity, & Temperature
RoHS
Model VP2, Wireless 100 mm Vane Thermo-Anemometer Probe for use with the
Model UHH handheld meter and the Mobile Meter test instrument mobile app
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits:
Process: -20 to 212F (-29 to 100C);
Range:
Air Velocity: 0 to 6000 FPM
(0 to 30 m/s);
Volumetric Air: 999,999 in selected
flow units;
Temperature: -20 to 212F
(-29 to 100C).
Accuracy:
Air Velocity: 3% FS within
temperature range of 40 to 90F
(4 to 32C);
Response Time: 1 s.

Battery Charging Limits: 32 to 113F
(0 to 45C). (Wireless Only).
(Wireless Only).
Maximum Wireless Distance: 50
(15 m). (Wireless Only).
Supplied With: Wrist strap.
Weight: 13.6 oz (385 g).
427
Model
AP2

(Wireless Only).
Maximum Wireless Distance: 50 (15
m).
Supplied With:Wrist strap.
Weight: 11.2 oz (331.22 g).
TEST EQUIPMENT
Model RP2, Wireless Thermo-Hygrometer Probe for use with the Model UHH
handheld meter and the Mobile Meter test instrument mobile app
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean air.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C);
Ambient: 5 to 125F (-15 to 51C);
Battery Charging: 32 to 113F (0 to
45C).
Range:
RH: 0 to 100% (non-condensing);
Temperature: -22 to 140F (-30 to
60C).
Accuracy:
RH: 2% @ 25C (10 to 90% RH);
4% (0 to 10, 90 to 100% RH);
Temperature: 0.54F @ 77F
(0.3C @ 25C).
428_Layout 1 7/14/14 9:33 AM Page 428
Series
WDPM
Differential Pressure Modules

Wireless, Measures Differential Pressure, Air Velocity, & Flow
HVACBalancing Instruments
TEST EQUIPMENT
RoHS
Scan here
to watch
product video
Wireless differential pressure modules for use with the Model UHH handheld
meter and the Mobile Meter test instrument mobile app.
Model
WDPM-002
WDPM-005
WDPM-010
WDPM-020
WDPM-030
WDPM-100
WDPM-200
WDPM-350
Range
2 in w.c.
5 in w.c.
10 in w.c.
20 in w.c.
30 in w.c.
100 in w.c.
200 in w.c.
350 in w.c.
Maximum Pressure
10 psi
10 psi
10 psi
20 psi
20 psi
15 psi
45 psi
45 psi
Series
UHH-ACC
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Non-corrosive dry gases.
Accuracy: 0.5% FS span @ 25C (includes non linearity, hysteresis, and non
repeatability).
Pressure Limits: See Table 1.
Engineering Units:
Pressure: in w.c., ft w.c., in Hg, psi, OzSl, mm w.c., cm w.c., mBar, Pa, hPa, and
kPa;
Velocity: fpm, mph, kn, m/s, m/h, k/h, and fps;
Flow: cfm, gpm, gph, gpd, m3/s, m3/h, lps, lpm, and lph.
Temperature Limits:
Compensated: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C);
Process/Ambient: 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C).
ThermalEffects: 0.01% FS/F (0.02% FS/C).
Battery Charging Limits: 32 to 113F (0 to 45C).
Power Requirements: 3.7 V YT562447 lithium ion battery, installed functionally,
user replaceable.
Wireless Distance: At least 50 (15 m).
Connections: Two barbed connections for use with 1/8 (3.18 mm) or 3/16 (4.76
mm) ID tubing.
Weight: 2.5 oz (70.87 g).
Agency Approvals: CE with CE approved charger, RoHS, FCC.
Universal Handheld Accessories

ACCESSORIES
UHH-STRAP, UHHhand strap
UHH-ICHRG, UHHdual USB charger with international adapters (1.0 A) (Not CE
approved)
UHH-CBL, USB cable
UHH-SD, 2 GB SD card
KF-CC-304, Dual USB CHARGER with North American adapter (1.5 A)
UHH-C2, Heavy duty hard case with pre-cut foam inserts for additional sensors
UHH-C1
Soft Carrying
Case
428
UHH-ICHRG
Dual USB Charger
UHH-STRAP
Hand Strap
UHH-C2
Hard Carrying
Case
429_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:35 PM Page 429
Series
MVA
Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer
Capable of Measuring Air Volume, Air Velocity, Temperature, Humidity
and Barometric Pressure
1-57/64
[48.0]
Sensor Input
PROBE INPUT
1-1/2
[38.0]
2-13/64
[56.0]
5-1/8
[130.0]
BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
15/16
[24.0]
Mini Vane Probe w/Cable
35.4 (90 cm) long
SPECIFICATIONS
RANGES
Air Velocity: 79 to 4921 fpm, 0.4 to 25
m/s; 1.5 to 90 km/hr; 0.9 to 55 mph; 0.8
to 48 knots; 1 to 10 Beaufort.
Air Volume: 0 to 9999 CFM & CMM.
60C).
Humidity: 0 to 100%.
Barometric Pressure: 10.3 to 32 in
Hg; 350 to 1100 hPa; 263 to 825 mm
Hg.
Model MVA-02, Mini Vane Anemometer

Model MVA-03, Mini Vane Anemometer with Humidity Sensor
Model MVA-04, Mini Vane Anemometer with Humidity and Barometric Sensors
ACCURACY
Air Velocity: 2% FS (+0.2% of
reading m/s; +0.8% of reading km/hr;
+0.4% of reading mph and knots;
+40% of reading fpm).
Relative Humidity: 20 to 80%: 3.5%; 0
to 20% and 80 to 100%: 5%.
Temperature: 1.8F; 1C.
Barometric Pressure: 0.1 in Hg; 3
hPa; 1.5 mm Hg.
Model
EMMA
RESOLUTION
Air Velocity: 0.1 (1 for ft/min and
Beaufort).
Air Volume: 1.
Temperature: 0.1C.
Humidity: 0.1%.
Barometric Pressure: 0.1.
RESPONSE TIME
Air Velocity: 2 seconds.
Air Volume: 2 seconds.
Temperature: 1 second.
Humidity: 5 minutes to stabilize.
Barometric Pressure: 1 minute.
LCD Size: 1.65 x 1.30 (42 x 33 mm).
Battery Life: 50 hours continuous use.
Vane Diameter: 1.18 (30 mm).
Cable Length: 35.4 (90 cm).
Weight: 9.2 oz (260 g).
Digital Multifunction Environmental Meter

Monitor Humidity, Temperature, Air Velocity and More
3-5/16
[84.1]
15/16
[23.8]
1 3/16
[30.2]
11-1/4
[285.7]
1-1/4 [31.8]
APPROX 6-1/8
WITH LEGS
4-1/8
STRAIGHT
[104.8]
8-1/4
[209.5]
APPROX 5-1/4
WITH LEGS OUT
8
[203.2]
Tripod
Monitoring the environmental conditions is more convenient with the Model EMMA
multifunction meter. Humidity, temperature, air velocity, air flow, sound and light
measurements are combined in one easy to use instrument. The large, dual-line 4-digit LCD
display shows both the current and average reading. For reading measurements in dimly
lit areas, the display has a built-in back light. Besides measuring the current and average
reading, the Model EMMA allows the user to read the minimum, maximum and differential
measurement for each of the parameters. Included with the meter is the carrying case,
rubber boot, battery and tri-pod.
Model EMMA, Multifunction Environmental Meter
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
Temperature: 14 to 140F (-10 to
60C);
Relative humidity: 0 to 100% RH;
Sound level: 30 to 130 dB(A), 35 to
130 dB(C);
Illumination: 0 to 50,000 lux;
Wind speed: 96 to 5913 fpm;
Air flow: 0 to 999,900 cfm (0.5 30 30
m/s).
Accuracy:
Temperature: 2.7F (1.5C);
Relative humidity: 3% RH (20 to
80% @ 25C);
Sound level: 1.5 dB;
Illumination: 5% of reading + 10;
Wind speed: 3% of reading + 10;
Air flow: 3% of reading + 10.
Display: Dual line, 4-1/2 digit LCD

display.
(-10 to 60C).
Resolution:
Temperature: 0.1F/C;
Relative humidity: 0.1%;
Sound level: 0.1 dB;
Illumination: 1 up to 2,000 lux; 10 up
to 20,000 lux; 100 up to 50,000 lux.
Weight: 15.5 oz (430 g).
429
The Series MVA Mini-Vane Thermo-Anemometer has the ability, depending on the
model, to measure air velocity, volume flow, temperature, relative humidity, and barometric
pressure. With its 1.18 diameter (30 mm) vane, the Series MVA is ideal for spot
measurements at air outlets. The MVA-02 is capable of detecting air flows up to 4921 ft/min
(25 m/s) and temperatures up to 140F (60C). The MVA-03 additionally detects humidity
from 0 to 100% with high accuracy. The MVA-04 can do all three of the above functions,
plus adds the feature of measuring absolute pressure from 10.3 to 32 Hg (350 to 1100
hPa). The Series MVA anemometers include a wide variety of user selectable units. These
units feature a 4-digit LCD display, data hold, ability to record maximum and minimum,
storage up to 99 air velocity records, and an auto-shutoff to prolong life. The Series MVA
also has a detachable probe for convenient replacing, if necessary. The unit includes a 6
blade mini-vane probe, nylon case, and a battery.
ACCESSORIES
A-553, Spare attachable vane for MVA-02
A-554, Spare attachable vane for MVA-03 & -04
TEST EQUIPMENT
THREADED
MOUNTING
HOLE
7-43/64
[195.0]
430_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:35 AM Page 430
Model
485B
Thermo-Hygrometer
TEST EQUIPMENT
Measures % RH, Temperature, Dew Point and Wet Bulb
Model 485B Digital Thermo-Hygrometer is a versatile, compact, hand-held instrument

for measuring percentage of relative humidity and temperature in F or C. Dew point and
wet bulb temperature is derived from relative humidity and temperature measurements
and displayed on the LCD. Hold key freezes the current temperature and relative humidity
readings for situations where readings fluctuate. Store up to 99 readings with the nonvolatile memory function ideal for technicians needing to take multiple readings for later
analysis.
Thermo-Hygrometers
Model 485B-1, Digital Thermo-Hygrometer includes 9V battery, sensing probe, wrist

strap, soft carrying case and instructions
Model
THI-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity, temperature, wet bulb and dew point temperature detection in
clean air.
Temperature Limits:
Process: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C);
Range Relative Humidity: 0 to 100% (non-condensing).
Accuracy Relative Humidity: 2% FS over 10 to 90% @ 77F (25C).
Range Temperature: -20 to 140F (-28 to 60C).
Accuracy Temperature: 0.54F @ 72F (0.3C @ 25C).
Resolution: 0.1%, 0.1 F/C.
ADDITIONAL PARTS
RP1, Thermo-hygrometer % RH and temperature probe with coiled cable
Digital Thermo-Hygrometer
Large Memory, Dew Point and Wet Bulb Temperature Functions
The Model THI-10 Digital Thermohygrometer accurately measures relative humidity

and ambient temperature. Up to 99 readings can be stored in non-volatile memory allowing
the HVAC technician to record the data after returning to the office. This compact
thermohygrometer also features user selectable engineering units, max/min functions, dew
point and wet bulb temperature measurements. The Model THI-10 includes a soft carrying
case with a belt loop for easy transportation.
Model
A-525
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity and temperature detection in air.
Range: Relative humidity: 1 to 99% (non-condensing); Temperature: -4 to 140F
(-20 to 60C).
Accuracy: Relative humidity: 3%; Temperature: 1.5F (0.8C).
Display: Dual LCD display (4 digit upper display / 3 digit lower display).
Resolution: Relative humidity: 0.1%; Temperature: 0.1.
Battery Life: 200 hours (approx.).
Weight: 5.6 oz (160 g).
Model THI-10, Digital Thermohygrometer
Pocket Sling Psychrometer

Replaceable Wick, Psychrometric Slide Chart Included
Model A-525, Pocket type sling Psychrometer. Furnished complete with
Psychrometric charts. Psychrometric slide chart, and carrying case
ACCESSORIES
A-527, Replacement Wick for Psychrometer
A-530, Psychrometric Slide Chart
A-527
A-530
The Model A-525 Sling Psychrometer can be used to measure relative humidity by
measuring the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures. Wet bulb temperatures are measured
by wetting a wick with distilled water on one of the thermometer legs of the psychrometer.
On the other leg, the dry bulb temperature is measured. An included slide chart eliminates
the need to use of graphs to determine the humidity. Replacement wicks are available as
an accessory. Each sling psychrometer includes psychrometric graphs, psychormetric slide
chart, and a carrying case.
430
431_Layout 1 7/21/14 11:20 AM Page 431
Model
THI2-10
Digital Thermo-Hygrometer
Remote Probe, Push Button Calibration
1-19/64
[33.05]
2-49/64
[70.43]
8-5/8
[219.00]
2-13/32
[61.07]
THI2-10, Thermohygrometer with Remote Probe

ACCESSORY
TH-CAL, 33% and 75% Salt Bath Calibration Standards
Model
TH2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Humidity and temperature
detection in air.
Range:
Relative humidity measurement
range: 0 to 100%;
Temperature range: 14 to 140F
(-10 to 60C);
Dew point temperature range: -100 to
139.8F (-73.4 to 59.9C);
Wet bulb temperature range: 7.88 to
139.8F (-13.4 to 59.9C).
Accuracy:
Relative humidity accuracy: 3% from
10 to 90% (at calibration
temperature); 5% for others;
Temperature accuracy: 1F (.6C).
1-1/8
[28.77]
Display: Dual LCD display for

temperature and humidity.
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50 C);
Storage: 68 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
Resolution:
Temperature resolution: 0.1C/F;
Humidity resolution: 0.1% RH.
replaceable.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g).
Thermo-Hygrometer Pen
Measures Temperature, Humidity, Dew Point, Heat Index and Wet Bulb
1-3/8
[35.05]
5-9/16
[141.38]
45/64
[18.01]
Thermo-Hygrometer
S/N: xxxxxxxx
Battery:
AAA (UM-4)
CR2032
gVoltage
(HI. WBGT TH2-10)
Made in xxxxxx
Power
BATTERY COMPARTMENT
Mode
TH2-10
2-5/8
[65.34]
2
[52.32]
Hold
75%RH Mgcl
Sat. salt solution
Temp. Mgcl
15C xxxxxxx
20C xxxxxxx
25C xxxxxxx
30C xxxxxxx
35C xxxxxxx
Made in xxxx
75% Salt Solution
2-5/8
[65.34]
2
[52.32]
33%RH Mgcl
Sat. salt solution
Temp. Mgcl
15C
20C
25C
30C
35C
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx
Made in xxxx
33% Salt Solution
Salt Solution Kit TH2-CAL

The Model TH2-10 Thermo-Hygrometer Pen is a compact handheld device that
measures temperature, humidity, dew point, wet bulb, and heat index. The TH2-10 has many
applications including HVAC, home inspection for examining heating or cooling conditions,
outdoor weather monitoring, and construction or industrial inspection. This product offers
fahrenheit and celsius units, data hold function, and 0.1F/C resolution. Batteries are
included.
Model TH2-10, Thermo-Hygrometer Pen
ACCESSORY
TH2-CAL, 33% and 75% RHSalt Bath Calibration Standards
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: RH: 0 to 99.99%; Temperature: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C).
Accuracy: 3% @ 25C/10 to 90% RH (5% @ 0 to 10%, 90 to 100%) 1F
(0.6C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 Lithium metal battery included, user
replaceable.
431
Thermo-Hygrometers
The THI2-10 Digital Remote Sensing Thermohygrometer accurately takes humidity,

temperature, dew point and wet bulb temperatures inside of ducts and hard to reach areas.
English and metric engineering units as well as the type of measurement displayed can be
easily selected using the push buttons. The push buttons also allow the user to freeze the
current reading or retrieve the minimum and maximum readings. A large backlit LCD digital
dual display allows the user to see both the temperature and humidity simultaneously and a
low battery indicator shows the user when to change batteries. For hands free operation, the
thermohygrometer can be mounted on a tripod. All units include batteries and a hard carrying
case for safe transport.
TEST EQUIPMENT
6-45/64
[170.31]
432_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:34 AM Page 432
Model
MST-01
Digital Moisture Meter

Measures Moisture from 2 to 70% with High Accuracy (1.5%)
2-29/64
[62.49]
1-17/64
[32.31]
TEST EQUIPMENT
4 METAL
PROBES
5-3/64
[128.01]
MST-01
MOISTURE METER
MOISTURE METER
BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
The Series MST-01 Digital Moisture Meter is a high accuracy instrument used for
determining the moisture content in wood, gypsum, bamboo, paper and other various
materials. This unit features a durable and rugged enclosure which ensures a long life span.
The large digital LCD makes measurements easy to read, while the hold function makes
them easy to record. The MST-01 includes a nylon carrying case, protective cap, two
replacement pins and battery.
Moisture Meters
MST-01
Model MST-01, Digital Moisture Meter
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 2 to 70% moisture content.
Accuracy: 1.5% moisture content.
Humidity Limits: 0 to 70%.
Resolution: 0.5%.
Weight: 4.1 oz (116 g).
ACCESSORY
MST-RP, Replacement Pins
Model
MST2-01
Digital Moisture Meter

Measures Moisture, Temperature and Relative Humidity
2X METAL
PROBES
RoHS
5
[127.10]
5/8
[16.00]
5-3/4
[145.86]
3/4
[19.17]
1-3/16
[30.11]
MOISTURE METER
(WITH TEMP. & %RH)
PWR
The Model MST2-01 Digital Moisture Meter is a high-accuracy instrument used for
determining the moisture content in wood, gypsum, bamboo, paper and other various
materials. This unit also has the ability to measure ambient temperature and relative
humidity. The large digital LCD makes measurements easy to read, while the hold function
makes them easy to record. The MST2-01 includes a protective cap, two replacement pins,
and one battery.
Model MST2-01, Digital Moisture Meter
ACCESSORY
MST2-RP, Replacement Pins
432
SPECIFICATIONS:
Range:
Moisture: 2 to 70%;
50C);
Relative Humidity: 10 to 90% RH.
Accuracy:
Moisture: 1%;
Temperature: 2F (1C);
Relative Humidity: 5% RH.
Resolution:
Moisture: 0.5%;
Temperature: 0.1F/C;
Relative Humidity: 0.1% RH.
MODE
SET
MST2-01

40C).
Humidity Limits: 0 to 70%.
Size: 5.75 x 1.5 x 0.75 (147 mm x 36
mm x 18 mm).
Power Requirements: 3V CR2032
433_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:34 AM Page 433
Model
AQH-20
Handheld Indoor Air Quality Meter

Measures CO2, Temperature and Humidity
1-5/16
[33.36]
DC
9V
6-3/4
[171.34]
TEST EQUIPMENT
SET
MODE
RS
232
8-1/4
[209.44]
2-11/64
[55.07]
CAL
Esc
HOLD
Model CO2 Range

Humidity Range
AQH-20 0 to 2000 ppm 0.0 to 99.9%
Temperature Range
14 to 140F (-10 to 60C)
ACCESSORY
TH-CAL, 33% and 75% Salt Bath Calibration Standards
Model
450A-1
M NX/AV
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges:
CO2: 0 to 2000;
60C);
Relative Humidity: 0.0 to 99.9% RH.
Accuracy:
Humidity: 3% RH (10 to 90%), 5%
(0.0 to 9.9% or 90 to 99.9%).
Resolution:
CO2: 1 ppm;
Humidity: 0.1% RH.
Response Time:
CO2: < 30 seconds;
Temperature: < 2 minutes;
Humidity: <10 minutes.
Display: 4 digits for temperature/CO2
and 3 digits for humidity.
CO2 Sensor: Non-dispersive infrared.
50C).
Humidity Limits (Non-Condensing):
0 to 95% RH.
Power Requirements: (4) 1.5 V AA
replaceable.
Warm Up Time: 30 seconds.
Weight: 6.76 oz (200 g).
Digital Pocket Size Carbon Monoxide Meter

Measures Up To 999 ppm, Audible Alarm
1-3/32
[27.94]
1-45/64
[43.26]
Range: 0-999ppm 450A-1
6-45/64
[170.43]
6-33/64
[165.48]
The Model 450A-1 Digital Pocket Size Carbon Monoxide Meter measures the
ambient concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) in the environment and displays the
measurement on the two line digital LCD screen. Besides the measurement, the maximum
recorded CO value since the last reset is shown. An audible carbon monoxide alarm gives
warning of CO levels above 25 ppm. For viewing in poorly lit environments, the built-in
backlight brightens the display. Model 450A includes soft carrying case with belt loop, wrist
strap, and batteries.
Model 450A-1, Digital Pocket Size Carbon Monoxide Meter
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 999 ppm.
Accuracy (at 20 5C, 50 20% RH): 20% @ 0 to 100 ppm; 15% @ 100 to 500
ppm.
Resolution: 1 ppm.
Display: Dual digital LCD display.
Response Time: Less than 60 seconds.
Sensor: Electrochemical carbon monoxide sensor.
TemperatureLimits: -10 to 60C (14 to 140F).
Humidity Limits (Non-Condensing): 5 to 99% RH.
Power Requirements: (3) 1.5 V AAA alkaline batteries, included, user replaceable.
Battery Life: 250 hours with backlight off; 35 hours with backlight on.
Weight: 4.23 oz (120 g).
Alarms: Audible, preset at 25 ppm.
433
Gas Analyzers/Kits
The Model AQH-20 Indoor Air Quality Meter reduces the number of instruments a
contractor has to carry by measuring the carbon dioxide concentration, air temperature,
and humidity percentage in one device. A large backlit LCD display shows all three
parameters simultaneously. The Model AQH-20 can display dew point or wet bulb
temperatures in place of the ambient temperature. Minimum, maximum, and average
readings are easily accessible through the function buttons. By pressing the hold key, the
current values are held so that they can be recorded. An audible alarm warns the user that
the current ambient conditions are becoming hazardous. The Model AQH-20 includes a
hard carrying case and batteries.
DP/WBT
434_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:32 AM Page 434
Model
1205B
Handheld CO/CO2 Gas Analyzer

Measures Indoor Air Quality, Includes Sampling Probe with Hose
1-8-3/4
[476.25]
3-3/4
[95.25]
3-11/32
[85.09]
102 HIGHWAY 212
MICHIGAN CITY
IN 46360
Gas Analyzers/Kits
TEST EQUIPMENT
Battery
4 x 'AA' Type MN1500, or equiv.
or 4 x NiCd
Serial No.
Made in the U.K.
8
[203.20]
Gas 1
7-35/64
[191.77]
Gas 2
Date
Count
Menu
Time
1-21/32
[41.91]
1205B
The Model 1205B Gas Analyzer accurately measures the concentration of carbon
monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2) in a duct or space. The Gas Analyzer displays the
measurement on a two line digital LCD display with backlight. The units memory stores
up to 255 sets of readings that are logged manually or auto-logged with 1 to 10 minute
intervals. Besides measurement recording, Model 1205B can provide a summary of average
and maximum levels reached during recording. Results then can be printed via an optional
infrared printer. Model 1205B includes batteries, 120V power supply, protective rubber boot
with integral magnet, sampling probe, and a canvas carrying case.
Model 1205B-0, Gas Analyzer and Logger for CO and CO2
ACCESSORIES
Model 1205B-US, 120 VAC Power Adapter for 1205B
Model 1205B-EU, 240 VAC Power Adapter for 1205B
Model 1205B-PR, Replacement probe for 1205B
Model
1207A
SPECIFICATIONS
Ranges: CO: 0 to 1000 ppm, overflow
2000 ppm; CO2: 200 to 4000 ppm,
overflow 9999 ppm.
Accuracy:
CO: 5 ppm<100 ppm;
5%>100 ppm;
10%>1000 ppm;
CO2:20 ppm<400 ppm;
5%<4000 ppm;
10%>4000 ppm.
Resolution:
CO: 1 ppm;
CO2:1 ppm.
Display: Dual LCD display.

(0 to 45C).
Humidity Limits (Non-Condensing):
10 to 90% RH.
VAC, 50 to 60 Hz or (5) AA NiMH
batteries, internal, factory replaceable.
Battery Life: 6 hours with full charge
and pump on.
Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer

Rotary Dial Selection, Display 4 Parameters Simultaneously
7-7/8 [200.00]
1/4
[6.35]
3-11/32
[85.09]
3-3/4
[95.25]
8
[203.20]
7-35/64
[191.77]
10 [3000]
LONG
NEOPRENE
HOSE
1-21/32
[41.91]
The versatile Model 1207A Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer makes
adjusting boilers for optimum efficiency quicker and easier. With the large LCD display,
users can monitor four parameters simultaneously and change the parameters shown using
the rotary dial selection switch. For extra protection, the analyzer comes standard with a
protective boot and magnetic back. In order to track the measurements, the 1207A can
store up to 255 time stamped test sets in memory and can output measurements to a serial
printer. The 1207A comes preprogrammed for natural gas, light oil, propane, butane, LPG,
and wood pellets. Along with analyzing combustion measurements, the analyzer can be
used as a CO/CO2 indicator, pressure manometer, or thermocouple thermometer.
Model 1207A, Handheld Flue Gas Combustion Analyzer
ACCESSORIES
1207A-US, 120 VACPower Adapter
1207A-EU, 230 VACPower Adapter
1207A-SP, Serial Printer
1207A-PP, Printer Paper for 1207A-SP
1207A-RF, Replacement Filter
434
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: O2: 0 to 21%; CO: 0 to 2000
PPM (4000 PPM max for 15 minutes);
CO2: 0 to 30%; Temp. (flue and net): 32
to 1112F (0 to 600C); Efficiency:
0 to 99.9%; Excess air:0 to 250%.
Accuracy:O2:0.2%; CO: 10 PPM
< 100 PPM else 5% of reading; CO2:
0.3% reading; Temp. (flue and net):
2C 0.3% reading; Efficiency:1%
reading; Excess air: 0.2%.
Resolution: O2:0.1%; CO:1 PPM;
CO2:0.1%; Temp. (flue and net):
0.1F/C; Efficiency: 0.1%; Excess air:
0.1%.

to 104F (0 to 40C).
Power Requirements:(8) AA alkaline
replaceable, (4) AANiMHbatteries,
included, user replaceable (charger
included) or optional power adapter.
Pre-Programmed Fuels: Natural gas,
light oil, propane, butane,LPG, and
wood pellets.
Probe: 11.8 (300 mm) length x 0.25
(6 mm) diameter with 7.8 (200 mm)
stainless steel shaft.
Hose: 10 ft (3 m).
435_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:36 PM Page 435
Series
LPTK
Gas Pressure Test Kit

Convenient Kit Perfect For Testing LP and Natural Gas Controls
6-9/64
[156]
4-1/64
[102]
2-17/32
[64.5]
12-31/64
[317]
PLACE OF
GAGE
8-17/64
[210]
Closed
Open
2-5/8
[66.7]
35/64 SQUARE
[13.8 SQUARE]
Gage &Hose
Range
Model
0 to 15 in w.c. & 0 to 8.6 oz/in2
LPTK-01
0 to 32 in w.c. & 0 to 18.5 oz/in2
LPTK-02
0 to 4 kPa & 0 to 40 mbar
LPTK-03
0 to 8 kPa & 0 to 80 mbar
LPTK-04
*Consult factory for other range options.
Model
920
PLACE OF
ADAPTOR
H33/64
[H13]
1-9/16
[39.6]
Adaptor
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Gage: brass, hose: rubber.
Housing Materials: Steel with black finish.
Pressure Limit: 110% of range.
Size: 2-1/2 (63 mm).
Process Connections: 1/8 NPT, brass hose barb.
Case: ABS plastic.
Hose: Rubber, 36 (91.4 cm).
Tube Nipple: Rubber.
Gas Analyzers/Kits
The Model LPTK Gas Pressure Test Kit is ideal for testing LP and natural gas lines
and controls. The kits gage shows if proper pressure is present or if a leak exists. The
LPTK Gas Pressure Test Kit is available in two different gage ranges, and each gage is 3%
full-scale accurate with an easy to use calibration screw on the back of the gage. It is easier
to use than a manometer, and includes a sturdy case for added durability and safe handling.
TEST EQUIPMENT
9-29/64
[240]
Smoke Gage Kit

Complete Kit, Includes 10 Components
10
9
8
1
4
2
7
6
Easy-to-Use Smoke Gage Kit enables you to quickly balance maximum CO2 with
minimum smoke for clean, efficient combustion. Simply take an actual sample of the smoke
being tested and compare it to the standards on the smoke chart included. Just 10 full
strokes of the pump produces an accurate test sample. Complete testing instructions are
included.
Popular with professional heating engineers, the Model 920 Smoke Gage Kit includes
these quality components:
(1) Dwyer Smoke Gage Pump
Fast working; the first known unit to conform with ASTM D-2156-XX standards
for testing smoke density in flue gases from burning distillate fuels. Filter paper
clamps instantly into pump inlet.
(2) Hole Plugs
Packet of 20 to fill awl holes.
(3) Smoke Chart
For easy comparison with samples taken. Laminated plastic, wipes clean.
(4) Awl
Pierces smoke pipe for thermometer and sampling tubes. Large, comfortable
plastic handle.
(5) Smoke Gage Filter Paper
An exclusive, time-saving Dwyer development. Roll of filter paper is contained in
dispenser box, kept clean and convenient.
(6) Metal Terminal Tube
8-1/2 long, heavy gauge brass.
(7) How-to-Use Instructions
Simple with step-by-step illustrations.
(8) Rubber Tubing
Flexible, long-lived.
(9) Spring Holders
A superior design for holding thermometer and sampling tubes.
(10) Kit Case
Tough, durable, one piece high density polyethylene with living hinge and clasp.
Foam liner protects contents.
Model 920, Smoke Gage Kit
435
436_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:31 AM Page 436
Model
CLD20
Combustible Leak Detector

Adjustable Tick Rate, < 1 Second Response
GOOSENECK LENGTH
[15.750]
1-23/64
[34.53]
1/2 MAX.
[12.7 MAX]
COMBUSTIBLE GAS LEAK DETECTOR
TIC
LOW BAT
PWR
SENSOR
CLD20
Leak Detectors
TEST EQUIPMENT
ON/OFF
TIC ADJ
7-1/4
[184.15]
AUDIBLE
ALARM
DWYER INSTRUMENTS,INC
MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360 U.S.A.
SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
2-3/4
[69.85]
3-1/4
[82.55]
Quickly locate leaks of combustible gases with the Model CLD20 Combustible Leak
Detector. Unit provides accurate detection of Methane, Butane, Ammonia, Ethylene Oxide,
Alcohols, Industrial Solvents and other combustible or toxic gases. Adjustable tick rate
accelerates as the sensor tip approaches a leak and can be re-zeroed to pinpoint the exact
location of the leak. The Model CLD20 offers visual LED indication of leak level and
automatically recalibrates when turned off and on. Flexible gooseneck and small sensor
head allows use in tight, difficult to reach areas.
Model CLD20, Combustible Leak Detector
Model
RLD1
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: 50 ppm.
Response Time: Less than 1 s.
Sensor: Solid state semiconductor.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH:
32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH
(non-condensing).
replaceable.
Battery Life: Approximately 10 hours
of continuous usage.
Warm-up Time: 10 s.
Pre-programmed fuels: (partial

listing) Methane, Natural gas,
Ammonia, Hydrogen, Butane, Propane,
Acetone, Ethylene Oxide, Halon,
Hydrogen Sulphide, Alcohol, Jet Fuel.
Lacquer, and Thinners.
Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable tick
rate 75dB @ 1 (30 cm), Visual:
flashing LED.
Probe: 16 (40 cm) L, flexible
gooseneck.
Dimensions: 7.3H x 3.4W x 1.4D
(18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
Refrigerant Leak Detector

Audio and Visual Indication, Flexible Gooseneck Design
GOOSENECK
LENGTH
15-3/4 [400.05]
1-23/64
[34.53]
[1/2 MAX]
[12.7 MAX]
SENSOR
7-1/4
[184.15]
AUDIBLE
ALARM
2-3/4
[69.85]
3-1/4
[82.55]
Detect and pinpoint even small leaks of refrigerant gases using the Model RLD1
Refrigerant Leak Detector. The RLD1 is effective in detecting existing refrigerants
including HFC, HCFC, CFC, SF6, R134a, and R123. Unit features thumbwheel operation
to increase sensitivity and audio and visual indication. An increasing tick rate sounds as a
leak is pinpointed and the red indication light flashes more rapidly. The flexible gooseneck
probe is ideal for hard to reach areas. Use the model RLD1 in domestic and commercial
refrigeration systems, automotive, air conditioning, and quality control testing
environments.
Model RLD1, Refrigerant Leak Detector
436
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity: 0.4 oz/year (11 gm/year)
R134a.
Response Time: Less than 1 second.
Sensor: Advanced ionization
detection.
Ambient Operating Temperature/RH:
32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH
(non-condensing).
replaceable.
Battery Life: Approximately 16 hours.
Warm-up Time: 10 s.
POWER SWITCH
AND SENSITIVITY
CONTROL
Pre-programmed gases: (partial

listing) CFCs: R11, R12, R13, HCFCs:
R22, R502, R500, HFCs: R134a,
R123, R125, R23, and other halogen
based compounds.
Alarm Settings: Audio: adjustable tick
rate, Visual: flashing LED.
Probe: 15-3/4 (40 cm) length, flexible
gooseneck.
Dimensions: 7.3H x 3.4W x 1.4D
(18.5 x 8.5 x 3.4 cm).
437_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:30 AM Page 437
Model
RLD2
Refrigerant Leak Detector

Audio and Visual Indication, 12 Flexible Gooseneck Design
RoHS
6-3/4
[171.29]
/O
ON FF
RES
.
NS
ET
SE
TEST EQUIPMENT
1-33/64
[38.4]
1-21/64
[33.7]
2-1/4
[57.2]
1-31/64
[37.6]
6-19/64
[159.9]
Leak Detector
Model RLD2, Refrigerant Leak Detector
Model
DDM-01
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensor Type: Negative corona.
Sensitivity: 3g/yr.
Sensitivity Levels: 5.
Response Time: Less than 1 s (pump
driven).
52C).
replaceable.
Warm Up Time: 5 s.
Pre-programmed gases: Detects

gases that contain chlorine, fluorine,
bromine, ethylene oxide and SF-6, as
well as: CFCs: R11, R12, R500, R503,
etc.; HCFCs:R22,R123,R124,R502,
etc.; HFCs:R134A,R404A,R125, etc.;
Mixtures such as: AZ-50, HP62, MP39
etc.
Alarm Setting: Audio: Variable tick;
Visual: Flashing LED.
Probe Length: 12 (30.48 cm).
Duty Cycle: Continuous.
Weight: 5.2 oz (147.4 g).
Laser Distance Meter

Measures up to 70 Meters, Class II Laser
RoHS
Laser
distance meter
DDM-01
+/U
4-5/8
[116.69]
LED /-
MEAS
2
[51.75]
The Model DDM-01 Laser Distance Meter offers quick measurement of distances up
to 229.7 feet (70 meters) with the click of a button. It is also able to easily make area and
space calculations and volume measurements from what it records. Another feature of the
Model DDM-01 is that it is able to use the Pythagorean Theorem to indirectly calculate the
height of an object. The meter can read out in feet, inches, or meters and includes a
backlight for use in dark areas.
APPLICATIONS
HVAC
Construction/architecture
Factory planning
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0.16 to 229.7 feet (0.05 to 70
m).
Accuracy: 0.005 feet (1.5 mm).
Display: Three line LCD (top two with
4 digits/bottom with 5 digits).
Resolution: 0.001 feet (0.001 m).
Laser Type: 650 nm, class 2, <1 mW.
Beam Size: 25 mm at 30 m.
1-1/4
[31.88]
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C).
carbon zinc batteries, included, user
replaceable.
Weight: 21.6 oz (612.35 g).
Model DDM-01, Laser Distance Meter
437
Leak Detectors
The Model RLD2 is the most dependable negative corona refrigerant leak detector. The
responsive elements have a wide sensitivity range. This unit utilizes a five level alarm
system to detect excessive refrigerant in areas where there could be a potential leak. The
dual-color LED indicator lights provide visual indication of the refrigerant gas
concentration, various audio pitches facilitate detection, and its portable design is
convenient for the user. The refrigerant leak detector can be utilized in residential and
commercial refrigeration systems, automotive, air conditioning, and quality control testing
environments.
438_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:34 PM Page 438
Model
SM-100
Digital Sound Meter

Measures Noise Levels From 30 to 130 dB
1-1/2
[38.1]
Sound Meters
TEST EQUIPMENT
33/64
[13.1]
Sound
Level
Meter
S/N:
IEC 61672-1 Class2
7-55/64
[199.7]
SM-100 (30-130dB)
TM
9V BATTERY NEDA 1604

IEC 6F22 JIS 006P
Auto Ranging
OPEN
1-21/32
[42.0]
2-9/64
[54.4]
Model SM-100 Digital Sound Meter is ideal for measuring noise levels from 30 to 130 dB
with accuracy of 1.5 dB. Model SM-100 has a frequency of 31.5 Hz to 8 kHz, three different
dB ranges, and a 1/2 condenser microphone. The SM-100 has two frequency weightings: the
A weighting ranges from 30 to 130 dB, while the C weighting ranges from 35 to 130 dB.
The four digit LCD backlit display has the ability to update in 0.5 seconds when the unit is set
to fast response. Model SM-100 features data hold, ability to record maximum/minimum, auto
ranging, auto power-off, and a dynamic range of 50 dB. The compact size of the SM-100 makes
it very easy to operate and store. Each unit includes battery, carrying case, black foam cover
to protect the sensor, and instruction manual. The SM-100 is ideal for technicians measuring
and recording sound levels in zones or rooms of buildings, musical halls, theaters and near
equipment or machinery on the plant floor.
Model SM-100, Handheld Digital Sound Meter
Model
SMC-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Dynamic Range: 50 dB.
Measuring Level Range:
A weighting: 30 to 130 dB;
C weighting: 35 to 130 dB.
Accuracy: 1.5 dB (at 94 dB @ 1
kHz).
Frequency Range: 31.5 Hz to 8 kHz.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C).
Humidity Limits:
Operating:Below 80% RH;
Storage: Store below 70% RH.
Elevation Limit: Maximum 6562 ft

(2000 m) above sea level.
Display: 4 digit LCD with 0.5 second
update when set to fast response.
Resolution: 0.1 dB.
Battery Life: 50 hours with alkaline
battery (approx.) .
Size: 7.8 L x 2.1 W x 1.5 H (200 L x
55 W x 38 H mm).
Sound Calibrator
Set Standard Noise Levels at Either 94 or 114 dB
1-7/8
[48]
1-31/64
[38]
RED
POWER LED
SWITCH
TM
SOUND CALIBRATOR
SMC-1
POWER
94 114 OFF
dB at 1khz
4-59/64
[125]
IEC 942 1988 CLASS 2
(SERIAL NUMBER)
(COUNTRY OF ORIGIN)
Model SMC-1 Sound Calibrator is ideal for setting standard noise levels at 94 dB and 114
dB. The SMC-1 has an output frequency of 1 kHz, 4%. This unit functions best when
environment conditions have a temperature of 68F (20C), relative humidity of 65%, and an
atmospheric pressure of 29.9 Hg (1013 mbar). The SMC-1 features a measuring accuracy of
0.5 dB, a low battery indicator, and a 1/2 microphone adapter. This calibrator has a compact
design that allows the user to conveniently operate and store the product. At 10 oz (283 g)
including the battery, the SMC-1 is also extremely lightweight. Each unit includes carrying
case, battery, and instruction manual. This calibrator is ideal for calibrating sound meters such
as the Dwyer Series SM-100.
Model SMC-1, Sound Calibrator
438
SPECIFICATIONS
Selectable Sound Output Level: 94
dB or 114 dB.
Output Frequency: 1 kHz 4%.
Accuracy: 0.5 dB.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C).
Humidity Limits:
Operating:10 to 70% RH;
Storage: 10 to 90% RH.
Elevation Limit: Maximum 6562 ft

(2000 m) above sea level.
Battery Life: 20 hours with alkaline
battery (approx.).
Size: 1.89 diameter x 4.92 length (48
mm diameter x 125 mm length).
Standards: ANSI S1.40-1984 and IEC
942 1988 Class 2.
439_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:39 PM Page 439
Model
LUX-01
Digital Light Meter

Silicon Photodiode Sensor, Reads up to 200,000 Lux
RoHS
1-5/8
[40.08]
1-3/8
[36.12]
2-1/8
[54.88]
TEST EQUIPMENT
Light/Lux Meter
LUX-01
LU
X/F
C
7-7/8
[198.72]
LD
HO
AUTO
MA
MEN
ZERO
Model LUX-01, Digital Light Meter
Model
SLR-01
SPECIFICATIONS:
Range: Up to 200,000 lux; up to
20,000 foot-candles.
Accuracy: 3% of reading (Calibrated
to standard incandescent lamp 4681F
(2583C)) or 6% other visible light
source.
Resolution: 1.0 lux; 1.0 foot-candle.
Sensor: Silicon photodiode and filter.
Angle Deviation from Cosine
Characteristics: 10 0.5%, 30 2%,

50 3%, 60 6%, 80 25%.
TemperatureLimits:
Storage: 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C).
Power Requirements: 9 V carbon zinc
Weight: 22.4 oz (635 g).
Handheld Solar Power Meter

Measures up to 1999 W/m2, Auto-Ranging
RoHS
2-1/8
[54.88]
1-3/8
[36.12]
Solar Power Meter

SLR-01
6-1/4
[158.75]
Model SLR-01 Handheld Solar Power Meter measures the solar energy to determine
the appropriate position or location for solar panels. It can be used to test the performance
of solar receivers and solar window treatments. Using the end-mount light sensor, the
meter is able to read and display in units of W/m2 and BTU/(ft2*h). The large numbers and
high contrast of the LCD make it easy to read the measurement, even in bright areas.
Applications include solar farms, office buildings that utilize energy harvesting sensors,
and telemetry systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 1999 W/m2; 0 to 634
BTU/(ft2*h).
Accuracy: 10 W/m2; 3 BTU/(ft2*h) or
5%, whichever is greater; Additional
temperature induced error above 77F
(25C) 0.38 W/m2, 0.12 BTU/(ft2*h)
per C.
Resolution: 0.1 W/m2; 0.1 BTU/(ft2*h).

Temperature Limits:
Storage: 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C).
Power Requirements: 9 V carbon zinc
Battery Life: Approx. 100 hr.
Model SLR-01, Handheld Solar Power Meter
439
Light Meters
Model LUX-01 Digital Light Meter is able to measure the intensity of fluorescent, metal
halide, high-pressure sodium, and incandescent light sources. This meter shows readings
on a 3-1/2 digit LCD and can record measurement up to 200,000 lux and up to 20,000 footcandles. The silicon photodiode sensor allows for use in high temperatures and has a strong
angular correction for a highly accurate reading. Model LUX-01 also includes a protective
cap for the sensor, ensuring that the meter is always zero calibrated. Applications include
HVAC, medical facilities, photography, and cinematography.
440_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:28 AM Page 440
Model
BTK2
Backflow Prevention Test Kit

Test Flow in Hydronic Systems
5-31/64
[139.46]
7-7/16
[189.07]
3 HOSE WITH FEMALE COUPLINGS

[SHOWN UNATTACHED]
The Model BTK2 Backflow Prevention Test Kit is capable of testing hydronic systems
with test procedures recommended by ASSE, AWWA, CSA, FCCC, HR-USV, and
NEWWA. The BTK2 is comprised of three valves and is specially designed for testing
backflow prevention assemblies. The tests can be completed in almost any area by mounting
the unit with the included high performance elastic cord. PTFE-lined brass ball valves
simplify the adjustment procedure. The large, easy-to-grip needle valve allows for quick
adjustment. The kit includes a 4.5 diameter diaphragm differential pressure gage (0 to
15 psid), a 1.5 diameter in-line pressure gage (0 to 200 psig), three 3 long hoses (colorcoded), three sets of brass adapter fittings for hookups to all standard size test cocks, an
elastic cord for hanging/mounting, and a durable polyethylene carrying case.
Model BTK2, Backflow Prevention Test Kit
Includes: 3 valve assembly, 4.5 differential pressure gage (attached), 1.5 in-line
pressure gage (attached), three 3 hoses, three sets of brass adapter fittings, bungee
cord, plumbers tape, polyethylene carrying case.
Model
472A-1
9-39/64
[244.27]
4-25/32
[121.36]
1-41/64
[41.66]
3
[76.12]
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 4.5 gage: 0 to 15 psid (0 to 1 bar); 1.5 gage: 0 to 200 psi (0 to 14 bar).
Accuracy: 4.5 gage: 2% FS; 1.5 gage: 3-2-3% FS.
Wetted Parts:
4.5 Gage: Anodized aluminum;
4.5 Gage Diaphragm: Buna-N;
1.5 Gage: Brass;
Ball Valves: PTFE lined brass;
Needle Valve: Brass;
Hose Couplings: Brass;
Adaptors: Brass;
Hose: Rubber.
Size: Case: 9 H x 16 W x 9 D (228 mm H x 406 mm W x 228 mm D).
Dual Input Thermocouple Thermometer

Accepts J, K, T Thermocouples, Differential Temperature Indication
2-13/16
[71.56]
7-1/16
179.32
RS
232
1-5/16
[33.52]
REC
REL
HOLD
DC
9V
Backflow Test Kit
TEST EQUIPMENT
2
[50.80]
C/F
CHANNEL
REL
HOLD
REC
REC
=Disable SLEEP MODE

C/F
SELECT TYPE
SAVE SELECTED TYPE.
2-19/32
[65.79]
The Model 472A-1 Dual Input ThermocoupleThermometer precisely measures up

to two temperature measurements simultaneously. The large LCD display shows both
temperature inputs or one temperature input and the differential temperature. Any J, K,
or T type thermocouple with a mini-jack connector can be used as an input. For viewing in
poorly lit environments, the built-in back light brightens the display. A hold button allows
the user to freeze temperature data displayed. Minimum and maximum readings can be
recorded over a set time period. Model 472A-1 includes a hard carrying case, battery, and
one K type thermocouple.
Model 472A-1, Digital Input Thermocouple Thermometer
ACCESSORIES
472A-B, Rubber boot
1818-0074, Immersion probe
1818-0078, Penetration probe
1818-0082, Surface probe
1818-0085, Air duct probe
1718-0077, Remote probe handler
440
1-9/64
[29.08]
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: Type J, K, T thermocouples.
replaceable.
Ranges:
J-type: -328 to 1400F (-200 to 760C);
K-type: -328 to 2498F (-200 to 1370C);
T-type: -328 to 734F (-200 to 390C).
Accuracy: 0.1% reading + 1.4F (0.7C).
Humidity Limits (Non-Condensing): 0 to 85% relative humidity.
Display: Triple LCD display.
Resolution: 0.1C up to 500C.
Weight: 23.6 oz.
OPTION
For NISTtraceable calibration certificate, use order code NISTCAL-TG.
441_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:12 AM Page 441
Model
DKT-1
Pocket-Size Thermocouple Thermometer

Selectable F/C, Accepts Mini-Plug Input
51/64
[20.24]
1-45/64
[43.26]
The Model DKT-1 Pocket-Size Thermocouple Thermometer accurately monitors

temperatures in a variety of applications. The wide measurement range and
selectable engineering units allow users to easily view readings in either F or C.
The automatic power down feature conserves battery life. This compact thermometer
accepts any K-type thermocouple sensors (sold separately) with mini-plug
connectors.
Model DKT-1, Thermocouple Thermometer
OPTION
Series
TP2
Thermocouple Thermometer
J/K/T Type Thermocouple Inputs; Ambient Temperature and RH
5
[127.00]
45/64
[18.01]
1-27/64
[36.30]
15/16
[23.91]
The Series TP2 Thermocouple Thermometers can accurately measure a large

temperature range for a wide range of applications including food, safety inspection, lab
testing, and HVAC. This hand-held thermometer offers three models that measure the probe
temperature, ambient temperature, and relative humidity. Additional features include a
data hold function, high/low audible alarm, and auto power off. Device includes a K type
probe and battery.
Model
TP2-10
TP2-20
TP2-30
Thermocouple
Input
J/K/T
J/K/T
K
Ambient Temperature/Relative Humidity

None
Ambient Temperature
AmbientTemperature and Relative Humidity
ACCESSORIES
1818-0074, Immersion probe
1818-0078, Penetration probe
1818-0082, Surface probe
1818-0085, Air duct probe
1718-0077, Remote probe handler
SPECIFICATIONS
Range:
K: -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C);
J: -202 to 1652F (-130 to 900C);
T: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C).
Accuracy:
K: 0.3% of reading + 1C;
J/T: 0.1% of reading + 0.7C.
Resolution:
K: 0.1F/C: -328 to 1202F (-200 to 650C); 2F/1C (others);
Over 1000C 1F/C.
J: 0.1F/C: -202 to 932F (-130 to 500C); 2F/1C (others);
T: 0.1F/C: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C).
Temperature Limits: Ambient -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C).
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 Lithium metal battery included, user
replaceable.
441
Thermometers,
Thermocouple
ACCESSORIES
1818-0074, Immersion Probe
1818-0078, Penetration Probe
1818-0082, Surface Probe
1818-0085, Air Duct Probe
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: -83.2 to 1999F (-64 to 1400C).
Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1.8F (1.0C).
Probe Connection: K type mini-jack.
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 lithium metal battery, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: Estimated 100 hours continuous use.
Weight: 1.42 oz (40.15 g).
TEST EQUIPMENT
3-5/64
[78.18]
442_Layout 1 7/15/14 1:30 PM Page 442
Hand Held
Thermocouples
TEST EQUIPMENT
Hand Held Thermocouples

Model
T/C
Type
1718-0076
1718-0077
J
K
1818-0073
1818-0074
J
K
Penetration Probe
Used for penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or other semi-soft materials. 1818-0077
1818-0078
Includes mini plug.
J
K
Surface Probe
For flat or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small gage spring contoured 1818-0081
1818-0082
tip allows fast response. Includes mini plug.
J
K
Description
Master Probe Handle
Probes plug into the master probe handle. The handle has a mini-jack at one end
and a coiled cable with mini-plug on the other. Individual probes may be connected
to allow easy reach to your process.
Immersion Probe
This general purpose probe can be used in liquids and gases. Includes mini plug.
Air Duct Probe

Measures temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases, environmental chambers,
ovens, rooms, etc. Perforated shield has good air flow and prevents heating by
radiation. Includes mini plug.
Exposed Junction Probe
Small gauge tip allows high sensitivity and quick response. The thermocouple
junction is exposed for readings in air or compatible gases. Includes mini plug.
1818-0084
1818-0085
J
K
Needle Probe
Small diameter penetrating probe gives fast response in soft materials and liquids. 1818-0092
1818-0093
Made with mineral insulated sheath for extra durability. Includes mini plug.
J
K
Bare Tip Probe

This probe consists of 10 of 24 gauge wire with fiberglass braided cable and a bare 1558-0030
1558-0013
wired junction. Shipped with a spool for easy storage. Includes mini plug.
J
K
Model
Description
General Purpose Probe
Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this general purpose probe 1718-0001
1718-0002
can be used in liquids and air compatible gases. For use to 800F.
1/8 [3.18]
4
[101.60]
1/8 [3.18]
8
[203.20]
1/16
[1.59]
10
[3048.00]
T/C
Type
3/16
[4.76]
J
K
12 [304.80]
3/16
[4.76]
J
K
J
K
Angled Surface Probe

Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this probe is used for flat 1718-0011
or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small gauge spring contoured tip 1718-0012
allows fast response.
J
K
Round Surface Probe

Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this probe measures 1718-0022
temperature in ducts for rollers, convex surfaces. Spring stainless steel replaceable 1718-0023
band stretched across C-shaped bow.
J
K
Air Duct Probe

Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this probe measures 1718-0018
temperature in ducts for air or compatible gases, environmental chambers, ovens, 1718-0019
rooms, etc. Perforated shield allows good air flow and prevents heating by radiation.
J
K
12 [304.80]
1/8
[3.18]
J
K
Straight Surface Probe

Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this probe is used for flat 1718-0008
or semi-flat surfaces of metal, paper or plastic. Small gauge spring contoured tip 1718-0009
allows fast response.
1/16
[1.59]
4
[101.60]
5-1/4 [133.35]
442
1-5/8 [41.28]
4
[101.60]
5-1/4 [133.35]
Penetration Probe
Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this probe is used for 1718-0014
1718-0015
penetrating meat, plastic, rubber, asphalt, or other semi-soft materials.
7/16 [11.11]
9/16 [14.29]
1/8 [3.18]
5-1/4 [133.35]
High Temperature General Purpose Probe
Featuring a built-in handle with coiled cord and mini-plug, this general purpose probe 1718-0005
1718-0006
can be used in liquids and air compatible gases. For use to 1600F.
1/2
[12.70]
8
[203.20]
J
K
1818-0088
1818-0089
1/8
[3.18]
8
[203.20]
4-1/2
[114.3]
5/16 [7.94]
5-1/4 [133.35]
5-1/4 [133.35]
8 [203.20]
8 [203.20]
5/16
[7.94] 110
1-5/8
[41.28]
5/16
[7.94]
5-1/4 [133.35]
8 [203.20]
3-5/8
[92.08]
1/8 [3.18] 7/16 [11.11]
5-1/4 [133.35]
9/16
8 [203.20]
[14.29]
1-5/8 [41.28]
443_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:22 AM Page 443
Model
WT-10
Waterproof Thermometer
Stainless Steel Stem, Selectable F or C, Max/Min Recall, Auto Off
WT-10
13/16
[20.32]
TEST EQUIPMENT
45/64
[17.78]
5-57/64
[149.86]
Model WT-10, Waterproof Thermometer

OPTION
Model
WT2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2F (1C) from -14 to 212F (-26 to 100C); all other temperature
ranges 3F (2C).
Resolution: 0.1F/C.
Response Time: 1 s.
Power Requirements: 1.5 V LR44 alkaline battery, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Battery Life: Approximately 1 year.
Construction: 2.75 (70 mm) SS pointed stem and ABS waterproof housing.
Retractable Needle Thermometer

Folding Stainless Steel Probe, Ambient Temperature, 0.1 C/F
45/64
[18.01]
5-55/64 [148.87]
NEEDLE THERMOMETER
WT2-10
1-31/32
[50.02]
MX/MI/AT
HOLD
MODE
3/16
[4.80]
3-15/16
[100.00]
The Model WT2-10 Stainless Steel Needle Thermometer provides accurate

measurements for testing internal temperatures during food safety inspections. A
retractable penetration probe automatically shuts off the meter when closed, as well as
protects the user from the sharp tip while not in use. Additional features include minimum
and maximum readings, audible and visual alarms, and a measurement hold function.
Besides the probe temperature, the Model WT2-10 also measures the ambient air
temperature.
Model WT2-10, Retractable Needle Thermometer
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C).
Accuracy: 1F @ -4 to 248F (1C @ -19.99 to 119.9C); 2F/C (others).
Resolution: 0.1 F/C.
Power Requirements: 3 V CR2032 Lithium metal battery, included, user
replaceable.
Sensor: Thermistor.
Probe Diameter: 0.19 (4.8 mm).
443
Thermometers,
Immersion
Completely submersible, the pocket size Model WT-10 Waterproof Thermometer is

designed with a waterproof housing and a 2.75 (70 mm) SS stem. The unit offers dual
scale temperature measurements up to 392F (200C) on the 3-digit LCD display. The WT10 comes complete with protective cover to store the unit while not in use. The features
include MAX/MIN recall of high and low temperatures, hold, switchable F or C and auto
shut off. Ideal applications include laboratory, food and beverage, HVAC and scientific
markets.
444_Layout 1 7/9/14 12:38 PM Page 444
Model
MIT
Miniature Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer

6:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio with Laser Sighting
13/16
[20.64]
TEST EQUIPMENT
2
[50.8]
4-3/32
[103.99]
Thermometers,
Infrared
The Model MIT Miniature Infrared Temperature Thermometer is the ultimate

portable infrared solution. This unit has features such as MIN and MAX temperature,
adjustable emissivity, battery life indicator, and laser sighting. This affordable
thermometer also has a 6 to 1 distance to target ratio in key chain size housing.
Model MIT, Miniature Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer
Model
PIT
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: -67 to 482F (-55 to 250C).
Operating Range: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: 2% of reading or 4F (2C), whichever is greater.
Resolution: 0.1F/0.1C (switchable).
Response Time: 1 s.
Distance To Target: 6:1 optics ratio.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 default adjustable 0.05 to 1.00 emissivity.
Power Requirements: (3) 3 V CR2032 lithium metal batteries, (2) installed
functional, (1) included, user replaceable.
Battery Life: Typical 40 hours of continuous use (auto power off after 15
seconds).
Weight: 2.29 oz (65 g) including batteries.
Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer

1:1 Distance to Target Ratio, Pocket Clip
3-27/64
[86.92]
19/32
[15.03]

The Model PIT Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer is the most portable infrared
thermometer on the market. The sturdy mounting clip can be attached to any pant or shirt
pocket. The Model PIT can be field selected to read in F or C. The compact size and
single button operation allow users to take quick accurate temperature readings.
Model PIT, Pocket Size Infrared Thermometer
444
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2%.
Resolution: 0.1F or C.
Distance to Target Ratio: 1:1.
Emissivity: Fixed at 0.95.
Power Requirements: (2) 1.5 V button cell alkaline batteries, installed functional,
user replaceable.
Weight: 4 oz (113.4 g).
445_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:44 PM Page 445
Model
IR2
Infrared Non-Contact Thermometer

12:1 Distance-to-Target Ratio, Laser Sighting
1-35/64
[39.29]
TEST EQUIPMENT
5-7/8
[149.23]
6-15/16
[176.21]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Model IR2, Infrared Temperature Thermometer
Model
IR3
&
IR4
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: 2% of reading or 4F (2C), whichever is greater.
Resolution: 0.1F/0.1C.
Response Time: 1 s.
Distance to Target: 12:1.
Emissivity: 0.95 fixed.
Power Requirements: (2) AAA alkaline batteries, included, user replaceable.
Battery Life: 180 hours continuous use (auto power off after 15 sec).
Weight: 3.61 oz (102 g).
Thermometers,
Infrared
The Model IR2 Infrared Temperature Thermometer allows users to economically

take accurate measurements in hard to reach areas. Measurements can be taken at a safe
distance with a 12:1 Distance to Target Ratio. The IR2 easily takes measurements within
2% accuracy using a built-in laser sighting. The fixed emissivity of 0.95 is perfect for
measuring surface temperatures of concrete, asphalt, rubber or oxidized metals. Besides
reading the process temperature, the back lit display also reads the maximum temperature
seen. Excellent for monitoring surface temperatures of air ducts, boilers, engines or light
fixtures.
Infrared Temperature Thermometer

Up to 20:1 Distance-to-Target Size Ratio, Thermocouple Input
1-35/64
[39.29]
5-7/8
[149.23]
Scan here
to watch
product video
IR3
IR4
The Model IR3 and IR4 Infrared Thermometers utilize infrared technology for
precise, non-contact temperature measurement. For standard applications, the 12:1
distance to target ratio on the IR3 provides accurate measurements within 2% of reading.
When measuring smaller objects or at greater distances, the 20:1 distance to target ratio
of the IR4 can provide measurements within 1% of reading. Both models have single point
laser sighting for aligning the beam to the target. In addition, both models can display
maximum, minimum, differential and average temperature measurements. Adjustable
emissivity allows the thermometers to measure the temperature of most surfaces without
any external calculations. A K-type thermocouple can plug into the handle of the
thermometers in order to take surface and internal temperatures simultaneously. Audible
alarms can be used to for safety checks.

6-15/16
[176.21]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Range: Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Accuracy: IR3: 2% of reading or 4F (2C); IR4: 1% of reading or 1.8F (1C),
whichever is greater.
Resolution: 0.1F/0.1C.
Response Time: 1 s.
Distance to Target: IR3: 12:1; IR4: 20:1.
Emissivity Range: 0.95 adjustable; 0.5 to 1.0.
Additional Input: Type K.
Battery Life: 180 hours (without laser or LCD backlight).
Weight: 6.3 oz (179 g) with batteries.
445
446_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:20 AM Page 446
Series
IR6/IR7
Dual Laser Extended Range Infrared

Thermometer
Up to 50:1 Distance to Target Ratio
TEST EQUIPMENT
1-13/16
[46.04]
9-1/8
[231.78]
Thermal Imaging
Camera
Scan here
to watch
product video
5-59/64
[150.42]
The Series IR6/IR7 Dual Laser Extended Range Infrared Thermometer is ideal
for accurately measuring surface temperatures from long distances. This feature packed
handheld device allows the user to read the max/min, average, and differential readings.
The high and low alarms give audible and visual indication of the process temperature.
When taking measurements in dark areas, a built-in white light can be used to illuminate
the measurement area. For long term measurements, the unit includes a dual magnetic
base attachment that allows hands-free measurements.
Model
IR6
IR7
IR6-NIST
IR7-NIST
NIST
No
No
Yes
Yes
Distance to Target Ratio

30:1
50:1
30:1
50:1
Series
TIC
SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Range: IR6: -76 to 1600F (-60 to 900C); IR7: -76 to 1832F (-60
to 1000C).
Accuracy: 2% of readings or 4F (2C) whichever is greater.
Response Time: 1 s.
Distance to Target: IR6: 30:1; IR7: 50:1.
Emissivity: 0.95 default adjustable 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps.
Battery Life: 180 hours continuous use.
Units: User selectable F or C.
Weight: 13.62 oz (386.1 g).
Thermal Imaging Camera

160 x 120 Resolution, Visual Light/Thermal Blended View
3-7/8
[97.61]
7-7/8
[199.39]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series TIC Thermal Imaging Camera allows users to see heat contrasts to prevent
plant equipment failures, detect air leaks in buildings, and many more applications. Infrared
radiation is given off by objects according to how warm they are, and the camera translates
the measured levels into visual light on the bright 2.5 160 x 120 resolution LCD. For
increased differentiation among temperatures, the camera can automatically adjust the
color band for a narrower range of temperatures throughout the 4 to 482F ( -20 to 250C)
temperature range of the camera. Besides taking spot measurements, the camera can also
be set for isothermal, area, or profile analysis. All cameras include a Li-Ion battery, battery
charger, docking station, SD memory card, SD memory card reader, sun shield, lens cap,
video cable, standard reporting software, and a calibration report. A Bluetooth earphone
and USB cable are also included in TIC-30 units for making voice annotations and real time
recording.
Up to 9 movable temperature spots can be selected to get specific temperature
measurements of objects on the display. On the TIC-20 and TIC-30, there are flash, visual
light camera, and a laser pointer to help identify the objects in the picture better. The visual
image can be blended with the thermal image for better illustration of where the hot or
cold spots are in the image.
Model
TIC-10
TIC-20
TIC-30
Analysis Tools
# of Auto Hot/
Spots Cold Spot
Yes
1
Yes
4
Yes
9
T
Yes
Yes
Yes
Isotherm
No
Yes
Yes
2-5/8
[65.43]
1-1/2
[38.86]
Area
No
No
Yes
Profile
No
No
Yes
Visual
Camera
No
Yes
Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: -4 to 482F ( -20 to 250C).
Accuracy: 2 C or 2% of reading
(whichever is greater).
Detector Type: Focal Plane Array
(FPA), uncooled microbolometer.
IR Resolution: 160 x 120.
Visual Light Resolution: 640 x 480
full color (TIC-20/TIC-30).
Display: 2.5 TFT LCD.
Spectral Range: 8 14 m.
Field of View: 20 x 15 (minimum 0.1
m).
I.F.O.V.: 2.2 MRAD.
Thermal Sensitivity: 0.1C @ 30C.
Temperature Limits: Ambient: 5 to

122F (-15 to 50C); Storage: -40 to
158F ( -40 to 70C).
Humidity Limits: 95% @ 77 to 104 F
(non-condensing).
Power Requirements: 7.2 V SON.
FA-70 lithium ion battery, included,
user replaceable or AC adapter.
Laser Pointer: 1 mW / 635 nm red
(TIC-20 / TIC-30 only).
Memory: Up to 16 GB SD Card.
Shock/Vibration Rating: 25 G/2 G.
Housing Rating: IP54.
Weight: 500 g.
ACCESSORIES
A-TIC-CC, Hard carrying case
A-TIC-AC, AC power adapter
A-TIC-PC, Car charger
A-TIC-BA, Replacement battery for Series TIC
A-TIC-BC, Replacement battery charger
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG
446
447_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:20 AM Page 447
Model
MM-1
Digital Auto-Range Multimeter

Measures DC/AC Voltage, DC/AC Current, Resistance, Frequency, Capacitance
3-15/32
[88.00]
TEST EQUIPMENT
6-27/64
[163.00]
RED
BLACK
TEST LEADS
Model MM-1, Digital Auto-Range Multimeter
Model
MM-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Overvoltage Category: CAT IV 600 V,
CAT III 1000 V.
DCVoltage: 0.1 mV to 600 V (0.8%
+ 2 digit).
ACVoltage: 0.001 V to 600 V (0.8%
+ 3 digit).
DCCurrent: 0.01 A to 10 A (1.2% + 3
digit).
AC Current: 0.01 A to 10 A (1.2% + 3
digit).
Resistance: 400, 4K, 40K, 400K, 4M,
40M (1.0% + 2 digit).
Protection: 600 Vrms.
Continuity Test: Audible buzzer.

Frequency: 0.01 Hz to 99.99 kHz.
Duty Cycle: 20 to 80% (1.0% + 5
digit).
Capacitance: 5n, 50n, 500n, 5u, 50u,
100uF (3% + 5 digit).
Display: Backlit, 4000 counts plus
decimal point.
Sampling Rate: 2.5 x per s.
replaceable.
Weight: 23.5 oz (666 g).
Digital Multimeter with True RMS

Measures DC/AC Voltage, DC/AC Current Resistance, 4000 Count Digital Display
3-15/32
[88.00]
6-27/64
[163.00]
THERMISTOR
ADAPTER
RED
BLACK
TEST LEADS
Our compact, low cost Model MM-2 Digital Multimeter withTrue RMS is ideal for
general electrical testing and troubleshooting. This full function multimeter measures DC
voltage to 1000 V and AC voltage to 750 V, DC and AC current to 10 A and resistance to
400 . In addition to volts, amps and ohms, this meter includes audible continuity, diode,
LED and transistor hFE tests. The rotary switch allows you to select from any of the
functions quickly and easily. The 4 digit backlit LCD features value, mode, and low battery
indication. The rugged, high impact case is double injected for excellent strength and
durability. The Model MM-2 is furnished with black and red test leads, battery, thermistor
with input adapter, and carrying case with belt loop.
Model MM-2, Digital Multimeter withTrue RMS
SPECIFICATIONS
Overvoltage Category: CAT IV 600 V,
CAT III 1000 V.
DCVoltage: 0.1 mV to 1000 V (0.5%
+ 2 digit).
ACVoltage: 0.1 mV to 750 V (1.3%
+ 5 digit).
DCCurrent: 0.1 uA to 10 A (1.0% + 3
digit).
AC Current: 0.1 uA to 10 A (1.5% + 5
digit).
Resistance: 400, 4K, 40K, 400K, 4M,
40M (1.0% + 2 digit).
Protection: 1000 Vrms.

Frequency: 1 Hz to 40 MHz.
Capacitance: 4n, 40n, 400n, 4u, 40u,
400u, 4m, 40mF (1% + 5 digit).
800C).
Display: Backlit with bar graph. 4000
counts plus decimal point.
Sampling Rate: 2.5 x per s.
Weight: 23.5 oz (666 g).
447
Multimeters
Our compact, low cost Model MM-1 Digital Auto-Range Multimeter is ideal for general
electrical testing and troubleshooting. This full function multimeter measures DC and AC
voltage to 600 V, DC and AC current to 10 A and resistance to 400 . In addition to volts,
amps and ohms, this meter includes audible continuity, diode, LED and transistor hFE
tests. The rotary switch allows you to select from any of the functions quickly and easily.
The 4 digit backlit LCD features value, mode, and low battery indication. The rugged, high
impact case is double injected for excellent strength and durability. The Model MM-1 is
furnished with black and red test leads, batteries and carrying case with belt loop.
448_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:20 AM Page 448
Model
MM10
Digital Multimeter
Measures DC /AC Voltage, DC Current and Resistance, Overload Protection
2-3/4
[69.85]
Multimeters
TEST EQUIPMENT
5
[127]
1
[25.4]
Our compact, low cost Model MM10 Digital Multimeter is ideal for general electrical
testing and troubleshooting. This full function multimeter measures DC and AC voltage to
600 V, DC current to 10 A and resistance to 20 M. In addition to volts, amps and ohms,
this meter includes audible continuity, diode, LED and transistor hFE tests. The 3-1/2 digit
LCD features automatic polarity correction, low battery and overload indication. Rugged,
high impact case comes equipped with built-in tilt-stand for versatile, hands-free operation.
Overload protected to 600 VAC/600 VDC for voltage ranges and to 500 VAC/500 VDC for
resistance, diode and continuity test ranges. Current ranges are protected by 0.5A/250V,
replaceable fuse. Multimeter is furnished with 22 test leads, 9 V battery and instruction
manual.
Model MM10, Digital Multimeter
Model
CM-3
SPECIFICATIONS
DC VOLTAGE
Ranges: 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 600 V.
Resolution: 1 mV, 10 mV, 100 mV, 1 V.
Accuracy: 2V: (0.5% + 1 digit); 20 to
600V: (1.5% + 1 digit).
AC VOLTAGE
Ranges: 200 V, 600 V.
Resolution: 100 mV, 1V.
Accuracy: 200V: (2% + 3 digits);
600V: (2.5% + 3 digits).
RESISTANCE
Ranges: 200 , 2 k, 20 k, 200 k,
2 M, 20 M.
Accuracy: 200 : (2% + 2 digits); 2
k to 2 M: (1.5% + 2 digits); 20 M:
(2.5% + 2 digits).
DC CURRENT
Ranges: 2 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 10 A.
Resolution: 1 A, 10 A, 100 A, 10
mA.
Accuracy: 2 to 200 mA: (1.5% + 1
digit); 10A: (2% + 1 digit).
CONTINUITY TEST
Range: < 30 . Resolution: 0.1 .
DIODE TEST
Resolution: 1 mV.
Test Current: 1 mA.
TRANSISTOR (hFE) TEST
Type: NPN, PNP.
Range: 0-1000.
LED TEST
Test Voltage: < 3 V.
Range: 1.5 - 3 V.
GENERAL
Display: 3-1/2 digit LCD with a
maximum reading of 1999.
Sampling Rate: 2.5 times per second.
to 104F (0 to 40C), 0 to 80% RH.
Storage Temperature:14 to 140F
(-10 to 60C), 0 to 80% RH.
replaceable.
Battery Life: 150 hrs. approx.
Weight: 5.2 oz (150 g).
Digital Clamp Meter with True RMS,

Peak Hold and Min/Max
Measures DC/AC Voltage, DC/AC Current, Energy, Resistance
2-3/4
[70.00]
7-61/64
[202.00]
RED
BLACK
TEST LEADS
ALLIGATOR CLIPS
Our compact, low cost Model CM-3 Digital Clamp Meter is ideal for general electrical
testing and troubleshooting. A few applications include HVAC, automotive, electrical/power,
and environmental monitoring uses. The CM-3 measures DC and AC voltage to 600 V, AC
current to 400 A, and resistance to 2000 . The digital clamp meter features data/range
hold and auto range buttons to prevent the screen from updating when gathering values,
as well as a zero function. Additional features include single and three phase energy
measurement, MIN/MAX and average. The 3-3/4 digit backlit LCD features automatic
polarity, overload, low battery indication and a bar graph. The Model CM-3 is furnished
with red and black test leads, batteries and a carrying case with belt loop.
Model CM-3, Digital Clamp Meter with True RMS, Peak Hold and Min/Max
448
SPECIFICATIONS
Over Voltage Category: CAT III 600 V.
ACVoltage: 0.1 V to 600 V (1.0% +
3 digit).
DCVoltage: 0.1 V to 600 V (1.0% +
3 digit).
AC Current: 0.1 A to 400 A (1.0% + 3
digit).
Resistance: 0.1 to 2000 (1.0% + 5
digit).
Max Conductor Size: 1.18 diameter

(30 mm).
Frequency: 40 Hz to 400 Hz (0.5%
+ 1).
Active Power Range: 0 to 1000 kW
(3.5% + 3).
Display: Backlit with bar graph. 10,000
counts plus decimal point.
replaceable.
Weight: 9.88 oz (280 g).
449_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:19 AM Page 449
Model
CM-1
Digital Clamp Meter

Measures DC/AC Voltage, AC Current, Resistance, Frequency
2-23/32
[69.00]
TEST EQUIPMENT
7-41/64
[194.00]
RED
BLACK
TEST LEADS
RUBBER TEST LEAD HOLDER
Model CM-1, Digital Clamp Meter
Model
CM-2
SPECIFICATIONS
ACVoltage: 0.1 V to 600 V (1.0% + 5 digit).
DCVoltage: 0.1 V to 600 V (1.0% + 3 digit).
AC Current: 0.1 A to 400 A (2.0% + 10 digit).
Resistance: 0.1 to 400 (1.0% + 5 digit).
Max. Conductor Size: 1.18 diameter (30 mm).
Frequency: 1 Hz to 400 Hz (0.8% + 3).
Display: 4000 counts plus decimal point.
Sampling Rate: 2 x per s.
Weight: 9.88 oz (280 g).
Clamp Multimeters
The compact, low cost Model CM-1 Digital Clamp Meter is ideal for general electrical
and environmental monitoring uses. The digital clamp meter measures DC and AC voltage
to 600 V, AC current to 400 A, and resistance to 400 . In addition to volts, amps and ohms,
this meter includes a frequency test to 400 Hz. The CM-1 also features data/range hold and
auto range buttons to keep the screen from updating when gathering values. The 3-3/4
digit LCD features automatic polarity, overload and low battery indication. The Model CM1 is furnished with red and black test leads, batteries and carrying case with belt loop.
Digital Clamp Meter with True RMS

Measures DC/AC Voltage, DC/AC Current, Resistance
2-23/32
[69.00]
7-41/64
[194.00]
RED
BLACK
TEST LEADS
Our compact, low cost Model CM-2 Digital Clamp Meter withTrue RMS is ideal for
general electrical testing and troubleshooting. A few applications include HVAC,
automotive, electrical/power, and environmental monitoring uses. The Model CM-2
measures DC and AC voltage to 600 V, DC and AC current to 400 A, and resistance to 40
M. The digital clamp meter features data/range hold and auto range buttons to prevent
the screen from updating when gathering values, as well as a zero function. The 3-3/4 digit
LCD features automatic polarity, overload and low battery indication. The Model CM-2 is
furnished with red and black test leads, batteries and a carrying case with belt loop.
Model CM-2, Digital Clamp Meter with True RMS
SPECIFICATIONS
ACVoltage: 0.1 mV to 600 V (1.0% + 3 digit).
DCVoltage: 0.1 mV to 600 V (0.8% + 2 digit).
AC Current: 10 mA to 400 A (2.0% + 10 digit).
DC Current: 10 mA to 400 A (2.0% + 10 digit).
Resistance: 0.1 to 40 M (1.0% + 3 digit).
Max. Conductor Size: 1.18 diameter (30 mm).
Sampling Rate: 2 x per s.
Weight: 8.64 oz (245 g).
449
450_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:16 AM Page 450
Model
PM-1
Digital Pen Meter

Measures DC/AC Voltage, Resistance, Continuity, Diode, Frequency
TEST EQUIPMENT
2-1/8
[54.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
BLACK WIRED TEST LEAD
Pen Multimeters
RED PEN TEST LEAD

Our compact, low cost Model PM-1 Digital Pen Meter is ideal for general electrical
and environmental monitoring uses. This meter measures DC and AC voltage to 600 V and
resistance to 40 M. In addition to volts and ohms, the digital pen meter includes continuity,
diode, and frequency tests to 10 kHz. This meter features data hold, REL (relative value),
and auto range buttons. The 4 digit LCD displays value, mode, and low battery indication.
The Model PM-1 is furnished with red and black test leads, batteries and carrying case
with belt clip.
Model PM-1, Digital Pen Meter
Model
PM-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Over Voltage Category: CAT IV 600 V.
ACVoltage: 1 mV to 600 V (1.0% + 3 digit).
DCVoltage: 0.1 mV to 600 V (0.8% + 2 digit).
Resistance: 0.1 to 40M (1.0% + 3 digit).
Continuity: Audible buzzer.
Diode Test: 1.5 VDC.
Frequency: 0.001 Hz to 10 KHz (0.8% + 2 digit).
Power Requirements: (2) AA alkaline batteries, included, user replaceable.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g).
Digital Pen Meter with Phase Rotation

Measures DC/AC Voltage, Resistance, Continuity, Frequency and Phase Rotation
2-1/8
[54.00]
7-7/8
[200.00]
BLACK WIRED TEST LEAD
RED PEN TEST LEAD

Our compact, low cost Model PM-2 Digital Pen Meter is ideal for general electrical
and environmental monitoring uses. This meter measures DC and AC voltage to 600 V and
resistance to 1499 . In addition to volts and ohms, this meter includes continuity, diode,
and frequency tests to 69.9 Hz. Along with the mentioned functions, the PM-2 has the ability
to perform a phase test from 100 to 600 V. This meter features data hold, display (to show
voltage and frequency during AC tests), and clear screen buttons. The 4 digit LCD features
value, mode, and low battery indication. The Model PM-2 is furnished with red and black
test leads, batteries and carrying case with belt clip.
Model PM-2, Digital Pen Meter with Phase Rotation
450
SPECIFICATIONS
Over Voltage Category: CAT IV 600 V.
ACVoltage: 1.5 V to 600 V (1.5% rdg + 5 dgt).
DCVoltage: 1.5 V to 600 V (0.8% rdg + 1 dgt).
Resistance: 1 to 1499 ohm (1.0% + 5 dgt).
Continuity: Audible buzzer.
Phase Test: 100 to 600 V.
Frequency: 0.1 Hz to 69.9 Hz (1.0% + 2 dgt).
Power Requirements: (2) AA alkaline batteries, included, user replaceable.
Weight: 5.3 oz (150 g).
451_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:15 AM Page 451
Model
CSG
Current/Voltage Signal Generator

Ramp Function, Large Numeric LCD Display
2-1/2
[63.5]
1-13/32
[35.72]
TEST EQUIPMENT
5-1/2
[139.7]
FEATURES
Large backlit display
Timed ramp function
Auto power off
SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance: Voltage: 1000 min. Current: 300 max.
Output: 0 to 20 mA (1 mA increments); 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments).
Resolution: 1 mA (current); 1 VDC (voltage).
Ramping Time Intervals: 1 to 20 s (1 s increments).
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, included, user replaceable or 120
VAC (provided).
Auto Power Off: 1 to 20 min.
Electrical Connections: 6 (1.8 m) with alligator clips.
Signal Generators/
Multimeters
The pocket size CSG Current and Voltage Signal Generator is an ideal tool for
troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, motors, and actuators. The unit generates a 0
to 10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0 to 20 mA signal in increments of 1 mA. The
Model CSG features a large LCD display with a blue backlight for use in dimly lit areas.
The Model CSG continuously ramps the output using user selected minimum, maximum,
and ramp interval timing parameters. Units are furnished with a battery, 120 VAC plug-in
power supply, test leads with alligator clips, carrying case, and instruction manual.
Model CSG, Current Voltage Signal Generator
Model
ASG
Analog Signal Generator

Ramp Function, Bar Graph LED, Selectable Auto Shut Off
4-45/64
[119.4]
55/64
[21.6]
The pocket size model ASG Analog Signal Generator is an ideal tool for
troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, motors and actuators. The unit generates a 0
to 10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 4 to 20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA. An
LED bar graph visually indicates analog signal level. The model ASG will also continuously
ramp to user defined max and min values with user defined ramp interval timing. Units
are furnished with 6 (1.8 m) leads with alligator clips, 120 VAC plug in adapter protective
carrying case and instruction manual.
Model ASG, Analog Signal Generator
2-13/32
[61.0]
SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance: Voltage: 1000 min. Current: 300 max.
Output: 0 to 20 mA (2 mA increments); 0 to 10 VDC (1 VDC increments).
Resolution: 2 mA (current). 1 VDC (voltage).
Ramping Time Intervals: 2 to 20 sec (2 sec increments).
Power Requirements: 9 V alkaline battery, installed functional, user replaceable
or 120 VAC (provided).
Auto Shutoff Times: 2 to 20 min. (2 min. increments) (6 minute default).
Electrical Connections: 6 (1.8 m) with alligator clips.
Weight: 3.2 oz (without battery).
451
452_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:45 PM Page 452
Series
TAC3
TM
Pocket Tachometer
Multi-Function, NIST Certified
2-1/4
[57.15]
1-19/32
[40.64]
1
[25.40]
19/64
[7.62]
1-29/32
[48.26]
7/8
[22.35]
1-21/32
[41.91]
TM
57/64
[22.72]
6-5/16
[160.41]
TEST EQUIPMENT
Tachometers
1-31/32
[49.97]
6-19/64
[160.02]
5/16
[7.87]
1/2
[12.70]
23/32
[18.41]
4-45/64
[119.38]
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-13/32
[60.95]
The Series TAC3 Pocket Tachometer measures and displays rotational speed of saw
blades, grinders, engines, motors, and conveyor belts. The unique ergonomic design
provides direct line-of-sight viewing of display and target. Easy-to-read 5-digit alphanumeric
dual LCD also displays on-target, continuous measurement, laser and low batter indication.
Measurements of up to 999,999 can be viewed with the on-screen multiplier.
The Model TAC3 is a 32 function tachometer/ratemeter, totalizer/counter, and timer. It is
programmable to read in English or Metric units. An input socket accepts remote sensing
devices and an output socket allows for pulse output to external indicating devices. The
Model TAC3 can be tripod mounted and Locked-On for accurate and continuous
operation. This tachometer also stores min, max, and last measurement in memory.
Model TAC3-K Kit comes with tachometer, plastic case, remote contact assembly, concave
and convex contact tips, 3.9 (10 cm) circumference contact wheel, N.I.S.T. certification,
and 5 (1.5 m) of reflective tape. Optional TAC3-91 Remote Optical Sensor allows this unit
to measure rps, rpm, or rph in hard to reach locations.
Model TAC3, Pocket tachometer includes 12 of reflective tape and N.I.S.T.
certification
Model TAC3-K, Pocket tachometer plus kit
ACCESSORIES
TAC2K-91, Remote optical sensor includes mounting bracket and 8 (2.5 m) cable
(optional 100)
TAC-5, Reflective tape, 5 (1.5 m) roll, 1/2 (13 mm) wide
TAC3-1, Remote contact assembly for TAC3 includes 6 (1.8 m) cable, convex and
concave tips and 10 cm contact wheel
Model
TAC-L
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy: Non-contact: 0.01% of
reading; Contact: 0.05% of reading;
Timer: 0.2 s.
Display: Dual LCD display (5 digit
upper display / scrolling 5 digit
alphanumeric lower display).
Resolution: User-selectable from
0.001 to 1 (10 above 99,999); Timer:
0.1 sec.
Max. Measuring Distance: 25 and up

to 70 from perpendicular.
to 105F (5 to 40C).
Power Requirements: (2) 1.5 V
replaceable.
Measurement Ranges
Model TAC3
Speed Ranges
Model TAC3K
5 - 200,000 rpm
Optical*
5 - 200,000 rpm
N/A
Contact Tips*
0.5 - 20,000 rpm
10 cm/12 Wheel* N/A
0.5 - 12,000 rpm
Linear Menu
Linear Menu
12
10 cm
N/A
Inches/Min*
1.969 - 78,740 6.000 - 144,000
N/A
Feet/Min*
0.164 - 6,561.7 0.500 - 12,000
N/A
Yards/Min*
0.055 - 2,187.2 0.167 - 4,000.0
N/A
Miles/Hour
0.002 - 74.564 0.006 - 136.36
N/A
Centimeters/Min*
5.000 - 200,000 15.240 - 365,760
N/A
Meters/Min*
0.050 - 2,000.0 0.153 - 3,657.0
Totalizer/Counter 0 - 999,999 counts
0 - 999,999 revolutions**
Timer (Stopwatch) 99 min, 59 sec, 0.9 sec 99 min, 59 sec, 0.9 sec
*Also reads units per second and per hour.
**Also totalizes inches, feet, yards, centimeters, and meters.
Portable Digital Tachometer

Contact or Photo Non-Contact Operation, Backlit LCD
RoHS
SURFACE SPEED
RING ATTACHMENT
RPM ADAPTER FITTING
[ATTACHED TO UNIT]
7-3/8
[187.91]
TAC-L
m/min contact
rpm contact
rpm photo
MEM
6-1/4
[159.96]
SMALL POINTED CONTACT

ROTATIONAL FITTING
DIGITAL TACHOMETER
2-7/8
[73.89]
Model TAC-L Portable Digital Tachometer measures rotational speed either by

contacting a rotatable head to the shaft of the object, or using photo sensor to detect the
reflections from the laser. The laser target can record from a distance of up to 20 inches
and gives a more accurate measurement than LED targeting. Model TAC-L includes a
large LCD with a backlight for use in dark areas. This tachometer is made of a strong,
lightweight ABS plastic housing, which is designed to comfortably fit in the hand of the
user. Supplied with this model are 3 contact rotational heads, a contact surface wheel, and
a protective carrying case.
Model TAC-L, Contact/Non-Contact Digital Tachometer
ACCESSORY
TAC-5, Reflective tape, 5 (1.5 m) roll, 1/2 (13 mm) wide
452
CYLINDRICAL CONTACT
ROTATIONAL FITTING
1-3/8
[34.05]
SPECIFICATIONS:
Accuracy: (0.05% + 1 digit).
Display: Backlit LCD; 5 digits, 7
segments, 0.7 (1.8 cm) H.
Range: Non-contact (RPM): 2.5 to
99,999 RPM; Contact (RPM): 0.5 to
19,999 RPM; Surface Speed (m/min):
0.05 to 1999.9 m/min.
Resolution: Non-contact (RPM): 0.1
RPM (2.5 to 999.9 RPM), 1 RPM (1000
to 99,999 RPM); Contact (RPM): 0.1
RPM (0.5 to 999.9 RPM), 1 RPM (1000
to 19,999 RPM); Surface Speed
(m/min): 0.01 m/min (0.05 to 99.99
m/min), 0.1 m/min (100.0 to 1999.9
m/min).
LARGE POINTED CONTACT

ROTATIONAL FITTINGS
[ATTACHED TO UNIT]
Non-contact Measuring Distance
Range: 2 to 20 (5 to 50 cm).
Sampling Time: 0.8 s.
50C).
replaceable.
Weight: 1.37 lb (.620 kg).
453_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:49 PM Page 453
Series
WPH2
Waterproof pH Testing Pen

pH and Temperature, Waterproof Large Display
1-17/32
[39.00]
Model
pH Ranges pH Accuracy
WPH2-10 0 to 14
.2
WPH2-20 0 to 14
.05
pH Resolution
.1
.01
ACCESSORY
WPH2-RS, Replaceable Single Junction Sensor
Model
TDS2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: pH: 0 to 14; Temperature: 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C).
Accuracy: WPH2-10: 0.2 pH, 1C, WHP2-20: 0.05 pH, 0.5C.
Display: 30 mm H x 18 mm W LCD dual display.
Resolution: WPH2-10: 0.1 pH, 0.1C/F, WPH2-20: 0.01 pH, 0.1C/F.
Operating Temperature Limits: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Storage: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Humidity Storage Limits: <90%.
Power Requirements: (4) 1.5 V LR44 alkaline batteries, included, user
replaceable.
Calibration: One touch auto-calibration up to 3 points.
Electrode: Detachable single junction, KCl filled glass.
Weight: 3.9 oz (110 g).
Liquid Analyzers
The Series WPH2 pH Testing Pen accurately monitors pH and temperature levels in
a variety of applications. This pocket-sized tester is ideal for pH level measurements in lab
environments, industrial plants, or field environmental testing. It features an easy to
replace electrode and automatically recognizes up to 3 calibration buffer solution ranges.
Both pH and temperature, in both English and Metric units, appear on the large dual
display. Both the electrode and battery compartment caps are sealed to provide an IP65
weatherproof rating.
TEST EQUIPMENT
6-59/64
[176.00]
Waterproof Conductivity/TDS Testing Pen

Conductivity and TDS; 1% FS Accuracy
1-31/64
[37.80]
6-11/32
[161.21]
The Model TDS2-10 Conductivity/TDS Testing Pen monitors both conductivity and
total dissolved solids in streams, rivers, or any other body of water. It picks up impurities
and dissolved solids while checking the conductivity at the same time. This pocket sized
tester is constructed of a durable ABS plastic waterproof housing and 316 SS electrodes
to protect against corrosion. A large LCD display is easy to read and shows both the
conductivity/total dissolved solids and temperature measurements simultaneously. Since
change in temperature can affect accuracy, the TDS2-10 has automatic temperature
compensation. Batteries included in packaging.
Model TDS2-10, Conductivity/TDS TestingPen
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: ABS plastic and 316 SS.
Range:
Conductivity: 0 to 1999 uS or 0 to 19.99 mS;
TDS: 0 to 1999 ppm or 0 to 19.99 ppt.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Resolution:
Conductivity: 1uS or .01 mS;
TDS: 1 ppm or .01 ppt.
Power Requirements: (4) 1.5 V LR44 alkaline batteries, installed functional, user
replaceable.
Enclosure Material: ABS.
Weight: 4.3 oz (115 g).
453
454_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:14 AM Page 454
Model
WSM-10
Waterproof Salinity Testing Pen

Temperature and Salinity; 1% FS Accuracy
Liquid Analyzers
TEST EQUIPMENT
1-31/64
[37.80]
6-11/32
[161.21]
The Model WSM-10 Salinity Testing Pen can measure salt concentration of saltwater
aquariums, determine the suitability of drinking water, and be used for ecological
monitoring of aquatic habitats. This pocket sized tester is constructed of a durable ABS
plastic waterproof housing and 316 SS electrodes to protect against corrosion. A large LCD
display is easy to read and shows both the salinity and temperature measurements
simultaneously. Since change in temperature can affect accuracy, the WSM-10 has
automatic temperature compensation to achieve 1% accuracy. Batteries are included.
Model WSM-10, Salinity Testing Pen
Model
EC2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 10 ppt (NaCl) or 10.1 to 70 ppt (NaCl).
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Display: 30(H) x 18(W) mm LCD dual display.
Resolution: .01 ppt or .1 ppt for 0 to 10 ppt range and 10 to 70 ppt range
respectively.
replaceable.
Enclosure Material:ABS.
Weight: 4.3 oz (115 g).
Waterproof Conductivity Testing Pen

Conductivity and Temperature, High Resolution and Accuracy
1-31/64
[37.80]
6-11/32
[161.21]
The Model EC2-10 Conductivity Testing Pen can monitor conductivity levels by
determining the resistance between the electrodes. Conductivity of water is useful in
monitoring the quality of public drinking water and deionized water for industrial
applications. This pocket sized tester is constructed of a durable ABS plastic waterproof
housing and 316 SS electrodes to protect against corrosion. A large LCD display is easy to
read and shows both the conductivity and temperature measurements simultaneously. Since
change in temperature can affect accuracy, the EC2-10 has automatic temperature
compensation. Batteries are included in packaging.
Model EC2-10, Conductivity Testing Pen
454
SPECIFICATIONS
Range: 0 to 1999 S or 0 to 19.99 mS.
Accuracy: 1% FS.
Resolution: 1uS or .01 mS.
replaceable.
Enclosure Material: ABS.
Weight: 4.3 oz (115 g).
455_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:14 AM Page 455
Model
HP
Hand Pump
Generates Pressures up to 45 psig (3 bar), Single Hand Operation
Model HP Hand Pump provides a dual source of pneumatic pressure and vacuum for
verifying the calibration of pressure instrumentation. Pump can generate pressures up to
45 psig (3 bar) and vacuum to -27 in Hg (-910 mbar). The compact pump is designed for
portability and single hand operation.
Model HP features a pressure relief valve and fine adjustment for control better than 0.0015
psi (0.1 mbar). Pump includes two 39 (1 m) hoses terminating in 1/4 female NPT connections
and instruction manual.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Model HP-1, Hand Pump

ACCESSORIES
Model HP-1K, Service Kit
Model HP-1C, Hard Case
Series
CHP
Pneumatic Hand Pump

Vacuum or Pressure, Ranges up to 100 psig
Model CHP-P, Pressure Calibration Pump

Model CHP-V, Vacuum Calibration Pump
ACCESSORY
CHP-KIT, 2 Hose and NPT Fitting
Model
A-396A
Calibration Pump
Generates up to 72 psig, Integral Bleed Fitting
Serves as pressure source to calibrate gages and transmitters or to set pressure
switches. Use with manometer or other pressure standard. Includes volume adjuster
enabling fine pressure control and bleed valve. Generates pressures from a fraction of an
in w.c. to 72 psig (5 bar). Includes barbed fitting, tee connector and three 36 lengths of
vinyl tubing.
Model A-396A, Calibration Pump
Model
A-350
Aspirator Bulb
Single Hand Operation, Vacuum or Pressure
The Model A-350 Aspirator Bulb can be used to source pressure for calibration and
leak checking tests. Simply squeeze the bulb after the tubing is connected to
generate pressure. For applications such as our CO2 indicator, the aspirator bulb
can be squeezed before inserting the tubing to draw a vacuum to pull the smoke or
air from a duct or stack into the gage.
A-350, Aspirator Bulb
455
Calibration Pumps
The Series CHP Pneumatic Hand Pump is the most dependable and rugged pump for
applications up to 100 psi or 28.8 in Hg vacuum. The durable Acetel plastic and anodized
aluminum construction prevents body heat transfer, resulting in drift-free, accurate
readings. The Series CHP is equipped with oversized check valves in order to provide
smooth and controlled operation. Dual O-Rings on all pistons ensure the pump to be leakfree. The unit includes a 2 L hose, 1/8 female NPT gauge fitting, and 1/8 NPT pipe
plug. An optional hose kit is available so that a tee is not required when connecting a sensor
and a calibrator. The Series CHP is ideal for checking calibration of pressure or vacuum
gauges, switches, or transmitters.
456_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:13 AM Page 456
Series
PCHP
Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump

Generates up to 600 psi (40 bar), Comfort Grip Handles
1/4 BSP WITH
1/4 NPT ADAPTER
3-11/64
[80.57]
1-1/8
[28.58]
1/8 BSP WITH

1/8 NPT ADAPTER
TEST EQUIPMENT
1/8 NPT
PLUG
SLIDE
BUTTON
7-3/32
[180.1]
8-41/64
[219.48]
Calibration Pumps
5
[127]
The Series PCHP Pneumatic Hand Pump comfortably sources pressure and vacuum
to check calibration of gages, switches, transmitters, and recorders. The contoured cushion
handles provide extra comfort while preventing the pump from sliding. The oversized check
valve provides smooth operation throughout the output range. The dual O-rings on all
pistons ensure zero leakage.
Model PCHP-1, Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump
Model PCHP-1K, Pneumatic Calibration Hand Pump with Hose Kit
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: -28 in Hg to 600 psi (-0.945 to 40 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Gage Connection: 1/8 NPT/BSP.
Materials: SS fittings, anodized aluminum housing, plastic/rubber handles, and
nitrile O-rings.
ACCESSORY
PCHP-HK, High Pressure Hose
Series
HCHP
Hydraulic Calibration Hand Pump

Triple Filtration, Generates pressure up to 10,000 psi (700 bar)
1/4 BSP WITH
1/4 NPT ADAPTER
2-3/32
[53.18]
4-1/16
[103.19]
1/4 BSP WITH

1/4 NPT
ADAPTER
1/4 NPT
PLUG
9-3/8
[238.13]
7-3/4
[196.85]
5-5/32
[130.97]
The Series HCHP Hydraulic Calibration Hand Pump utilizes a fully adjustable stroke
control that allows for quick priming, easy pumping and fast pressure generation up to
10000 psi (700 bar). The ergonomically engineered handles provide extra comfort, while
the triple filtration system ensures pump operation in spite of dirty conditions. The
shatterproof reservoir and stainless steel construction guarantee leak free operation. The
Series HCHP has oversized check valves to provide smooth controlled operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Ranges: 0 to 10,000 psi (0 to 700 bar).
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Gage Connection: 1/4 NPT/BSP.
Materials: SS, polyurethane, anodized hard-coat aluminum, PTFE, and nitrile.
Model HCHP-1, Calibration Hand Pump

Model HCHP-1K, Calibration Hand Pump with Hose Kit
ACCESSORY
HCHP-1F, Spare Washer and Filter Kit
456
457_Layout 1 7/8/14 3:51 PM Page 457
Model
LPCP
Low Pressure Calibration Pump

High Resolution for Calibrating Low Pressure Gages and Transmitters
5-1/32
[128.00]
2-63/64
[76.00]
6-3/32
[154.60]
9-51/64
[248.67]
3-47/64
[95.00]
5-29/32
[150.00]
FEATURES
Portable
Pressure resolution: 0.01 Pa; 0.0001 mbar
Heat insulation and heat preservation, no negative side effects from temperature
changes
Open structure for convenient maintenance of the pumps
Easy to operate: pressure is precisely set with a simple turn of the handle, allowing
you to calibrate gages quickly and accurately
Great seal performance: minimum leakage
Model LPCP-2, Low Pressure Calibration Pump
Series
BCHP
SPECIFICATIONS
Media: Air.
Output Ranges: 5.8 psi (0.4 bar) vacuum to 5.8 psi (0.4 bar) positive pressure.
Pressure Resolution: 0.01 Pa; 0.0001 mbar.
Process Connection: M20*1.5 or 1/4 NPT.
Gage Connection: M20*1.5 or 1/4 NPT.
Material:
Ram/adapters: 316 SS;
Body: Steel/aluminum;
Seals: Buna-N.
ACCESSORY
A-113A, Fitting Kit
Fitting Kit Includes:
(1) 1/4 NPTto 1/8 quick connect fitting
(1) 1/4 NPT to hose barb fitting
(1) hose barb fitting to 1/8 quick connect fitting
(2) 19.7 (0.5 m) length of blue 1/8 O.D. tubing
(2) 12 (0.3 m) length of clear 1/4 O.D. tubing
Low Pressure Calibration Pump

Vacuum or Pressure, Generates up to 870 psi (60 bar)
1/2 FEMALE BSP

W/ O-RING
REFERENCE PORT
3-3/16
[81.02]
1-13/32
[35.83]
29/64
[11.43]
1/4 FEMALE BSP W/

O-RING TEST GAGE
CONNECTION
3-1/64
[76.57]
61/64
[24.26]
43/64
[16.88]
11/32
[8.67] APPROX. 18
3-3/16
[81.02]
11/32
[8.91]
2-3/64
1-25/32 [51.85]
[45.16]
9/64
[3.61]
29/64
[11.54]
7/8
[22.07]
4-27/64
[112.40]
The Series BCHP Calibration Test Pump is able to generate pressure and vacuum for
adjusting or calibrating pressure gauges, transmitters, or switches. The pump is hand
operated and has a pneumatic pressure range of -28 in Hg to 870 psi (-0.95 bar to 60 bar).
Dual pressure ports allow two instruments to be connected to the pump without additional
fittings. The Series BCHP can be used in laboratories and production areas. The fine
adjustment valve on this pump ensures precise measurements.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Media: Air.
Output Ranges: -28 in Hg to 870 psi (-0.95 to 60 bar).
Process Connections: 1/4 female BSP
Gauge Connection: 1/2 female BSP.
Materials: Anodized aluminum, brass, and ABS.
Model BCHP-1, Calibration TestPump

Model BCHP-KIT, TestPump with 1/4 NPTConnections, Fine Volume Adjustment
Tool and Case
ACCESSORIES
A-BCHP-CASE, Case for BCHP-1
A-BCHP-NPT, 1/4 BSP to 1/8 NPT, 1/4 NPT, 3/8 NPT and 1/2 NPT Converter
Set for Test Connection
A-BCHP-VAT, Fine Volume Adjustment Tool
457
Calibration Pumps
The Model LPCP Low Pressure Calibration Pump is a low air pressure source with
the ability to easily adjust and stabilize. This hand pump possesses a pressure range of 5.8
psi; uses air as the media, and can adjust the pressure easily with great stability. The LPCP
is made up of quick connectors for fast instrument connect and disconnect. The pump has
a heat-insulator between the cover and pressure chamber to lessen the heat effect during
the micro-pressure calibration. The adjusting resolution is up to 0.01 Pa (0.0001 mbar). These
features make the LPCP ideal for calibrating pressure transducers, precision pressure gages,
and other pressure instruments.
TEST EQUIPMENT
6-13/64
5-45/64 [157.60]
[144.91]
458_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:20 PM Page 458
Series
MC
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator

Interchangeable Ranges, 0.05% Accuracy, Datalogging Capability, NIST Traceable
MODULES
TEST EQUIPMENT
1/2
[12.70]
4-1/4
[108.0]
2-7/8
[73.03]
2-3/64
[51.99]
MULTI-CAL
SET
UP
ON
OFF
7-7/8
[200.0]
PORT
SEL
ZERO
BAT
CK
ENG
UNIT
MIN
MAX
TARE
FLOW
7
LEAK
8
DATA DATA
LOG
9 STORE
HOLD
4
DAMP
2
mA
V.
Series MC Portable Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator performs a wide variety of simple

and complex pressure based measurement, test, and calibration operations. Modular sensor
design allows user to select pressure measurement range for application flexibility.
Calibrator can accommodate up to two interchangeable pressure modules (sold separately
below) in any combination of range or accuracy.
Simultaneously display two separate measurements on the two line, alphanumeric display.
Readings can be displayed in a choice of 12 preprogrammed engineering units or any single
user-defined unit. Calibrator features min/max recall, hi/lo alarm, percentage of full-scale
pressure readings, mA/voltage measurement, leak rate and pressure decay measurement,
switch testing capabilities, including trip point and deadband, and velocity/volume flow
rates.
Quickly document calibration procedures using the data logging feature which stores up to
384 sets of pressure and time/date stamped measurements. Easily upload stored data to
an IBM compatible computer via the RS232 port. Calibrators and modules include
certification to NIST traceabilityideal as a secondary standard for calibrating pressure
equipment.
Multi-Cal Pressure Calibrator includes utility software, test leads, protection module,
adjustable hand strap, AC adapter, batteries, instruction manual, and hard carrying case.
APPLICATIONS
Pressure measurement for clean room control, filter performance monitoring, HVAC
testing and setup, draft measurement, airflow measurement control, differential pressure
measurement in laminar flowhoods, paint booths, industrial ovens and fume hoods.
Use as a secondary standard for calibrating pressure equipment.
Multi-Cal Pressure Modules are interchangeable and available in a wide selection
of pressure ranges and accuracies. Handheld calibrator accepts up to two pressure
modules. Modules include NIST calibration certification.
Model
MC1000
MC1001
MC1004
MC1006
MC2010
MC2012
MC2016
Range
0.25 H2O Differential Pressure, 0.07
25 H2O Differential Pressure, 0.06
5.0 psig Gauge Pressure, 0.05
15.0 psig Gauge Pressure, 0.05
100.0 psig Gage Pressure, 0.05
2-11/64
[55.17]
TRIP
DET
6
3
%
_
CE
2-17/64
[57.55]
ENT
3-1/4
[82.55]
Pressure Calibrators
3-1/4
[82.55]
1-3/4
[44.45]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean, dry, nonconductive, noncorrosive gases.
Accuracy: Differential pressure modules: 0.06% FS; Gauge pressure modules:
0.05% FS; Voltage input: 0.025% FS @ 0/10 VDC, 0.10% FS @ 0/30 VDC;
Current input: 0.03% FS @ 0/20 mA, 0.05% FS @ 0/50 mA.
Sensitivity: 0.002% of span with dampening 1 part in 50,000 (max).
Repeatability: Ranges 0/2 psi: 0.05% of span; Ranges 0/5 psi: 0.02% of
span.
Output: RS232 serial interface, 9-pin.
Alarm Output: SPST form C 110 VDC, 120 VDC (max), 1 A (max), 30 W, 62.5 VA
(resistive).
Display: Alphanumeric LCD, 0.37 (9.5 mm) height per line, 2 lines, 16
characters/line.
Display Update: 100 ms.
Electrical Connections: Miniature recessed banana jacks.
Power Requirements: Internal: (2) 9 V alkaline batteries, included, user
replaceable and VL1220 or BR1225 lithium metal battery, installed functional, user
replaceable; External: AC adapter 9 VDC, 500 mA.
Battery Life: 30 hours (approximate).
Engineering Units: inH2O, psi, inHg, kPa, mbar, cmH2O, mmHg, and userdefined.
Overpressure: Differential pressure modules: 50 psi positive direction, 15 psi
negative direction; Gage pressure modules: 2x range (0/5 psi to 0/1000 psi).
Temperature Compensation: 20 to 120F (-7 to 49C).
Temperature Error: Maximum of 0.004% of span per F over compensated
range for zero and span.
Temperature Effect Electrical Measurement: 0.001% of span per F over
compensated range.
Dampening: (Measurement averaging) programmable from 0 to 16 consecutive
readings.
Baud Rate: 300, 1200, 2400, or 9600, selectable.
Weight: Calibrator: 2.2 lb (1.3 kg); Pressure module: 0.5 lb (0.3 kg).
Model MC2K, Handheld Calibrator

OPTIONS
Consult factory for other pressure ranges and accuracies. FM approved models are
also available.
458
459_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:12 AM Page 459
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
page 461
Valves, Ball,
Automated
pages 462-481
Valves, Ball,
Manual
pages 482-485
Valves,
Butterfly, Automated
pages 486-488
Valves,
Butterfly, Manual
pages 489-491
Valves,
Globe
pages 492-496, 507
Valves,
Angle Seat
pages 497-498
Valves,
Solenoid
pages 499-501
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
pages 502-505
Strainers
page 506
Valves,
Needle
pages 507-508
Manifolds
pages 508-510
Position Indicators/
Switches/Transmitters
pages 511-516
Pressure to Current
Transducer
page 517
Valve Controllers,
Digital
pages 518-519
Current to Pressure
Transducers
pages 520-521
Positioners
pages 522-526
Volume Booster
page 527
Regulators
pages 527-530
VALVES | TABLEOFCONTENTS
TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS
page 460
459
Process temperature control using pneumatic Hi-Flow control

valves.
Water-side Economizer System includes 3ABV 3-way ball valve for

accurate control of flow.
Pneumatic Hi-Flow control valves provide excellent control with high flow, wide
rangeability and tight shutoff capabilities. The dispensing application shown uses a
Lin-E-Aire pneumatic actuator, operating off standard 3-15 psi control air signals,
and a Hi-Flow linear control valve that apportions steam or water to a user process.
The valve regulates cooling water or steam flow depending on the process
requirement resident in the temperature controller program. This package can be
provided with a Precisor positioner and Proximity position transmitter which
provides an excellent process control application problem solution.
To ensure efficient utilization of cold water in HVAC systems, 3ABV 3-way ball valves
are called upon to modulate flow. This common water-side economizer allows water
from the plate heat exchanger to be diverted directly to the cooling tower if the
temperature is cool enough, instead of coming directly from the condenser on the
chiller.
Quick response Hi-Flow valves control water flow in cooling

process.
Proximity Mark Series valve position indicator is perfect for valve

position indication on offshore oil rigs.
Dependable W.E. Anderson Hi-Flow control valves with Lin-E-Aire air-to-raise

actuators combine to provide unsurpassed water flow management. This retort
system employs the Hi-Flow valve because of its excellent control capabilities,
which are necessary for this application. After the cooking process, the valve is
opened slowly. Once the desired temperature has been reached, the supply is shut
off and any additional cooling is done by use of the hand valve.
Proximity Mark Series position indicator is utilized in valve automation packages in

harsh environments. The Mark Series mounts onto the top of rotary valve actuators
and connects to the actuator shaft or attaches to the shaft of a linear valve for
indicating valve position. Standard with the Mark Series is visual position indication
with OPEN, CLOSED, and degree position status. The Mark Series is available
with continuous position retransmission with a 4 to 20 mA output and up to six
adjustable position indication switches for remote indication of valve status. Remote
status transmitter is used for indication of exact valve position and switches provide
discrete indication of valve open and closed status in the control room. The Mark
Series is perfect for this application because of the 316 SS enclosure that withstands
the sea spray environment, and the magnetic drive mechanism that completely seals
the switch cavity from the environment.
VALVES
460_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:11 AM Page 460
460
461_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:10 AM Page 461
Valves
Terminology
Nomenclature
Pressure Drop
The difference in upstream and downstream pressures of the fluid flowing through the
valve.
Cv= Valve flow coefficient
Critical Flow
The flow has reached the point of being choked. At the choked condition the flow rate
has hit a maximum limit and does not increase with further increase in pressure drop
across the valve.
g = Specific gravity of liquid at flowing conditions

G = Specific gravity of gas at flowing conditions
P1 = Upstream pressure, psia
P2 = Downstream pressure, psia
Cv or Valve Flow Coefficient

The number of U. S. gallons per minute of water at 60F that will pass through the valve
with a pressure drop of 1 psi. For example, a Hi-Flow valve with a maximum Cv of
10.75 has an effective port area in the full open position such that it passes 10.75 GPM of
water with a pressure drop of 1 psi.
P = Actual pressure drop (P1-P2), psi

q = Liquid volumetric flow rate, U.S. GPM
Q = Gas volumetric flow rate, SCFH
Full Port
The port diameter of the valve is the same diameter as the piping connections.
Valve Flow Characteristic

The relationship between the stem travel or rotation of a valve, expressed in percent
travel, and the fluid flow through the valve, expressed in percent of full flow.
T = Flowing Temperature, R (460 + F)

Once the required Cv is determined, selection of the proper size control valve can be
obtained by comparing the required Cv to the Cv values for the valve. As a general rule the
maximum capacity of a control valve should be 15 to 50% above the maximum process flow,
and the minimum required Cv must be within the available rangeability of the valve for
proper control. If only the maximum process flow rate was used to calculate Cv, then the
percent travel of the valve should be checked and should fall in the range of 65 to 80% of total
travel.
VALVES
Rangeability
The ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow of a valve. For
example, a valve with a 50 to 1 rangeability and a total flow capacity of 100 GPM at full
open controls flow accurately to as low as 2 GPM.
W= Steam weight (mass) flow rate, LB/HR
Control Valve Sizing
The Cv method is an accepted way to size control valves. Basic equations are provided as
a guide to use in sizing a control valve, and the results of the equations will only be as
accurate as the information provided of the flowing conditions. The equations are broken
down into the type of media - liquid, gas or steam, and whether or not the flow is critical.
The critical flow equations are to be used for vapor flow when the pressure drop across the
valve is greater than half of the upstream pressure. As a general guide to avoid cavitation
do not size a valve for liquid service where the pressure drop is greater than 50% of the
upstream pressure.
Sub-Critical Flow
g
Liquid Cv = q
P
Critical Flow
1/2
( )
Gas Cv =
GxT
Q
963 P (P1 + P2)
Steam Cv =
Scan here
to watch
product video
Gas or steam where P >
)1/2
W
2.1 [P (P1 + P2)]1/2
Cv =
Q (G x T)1/2
750 x P1
Cv =
W
1.65 x P1
P1
2
Control Valve Actuator Sizing
Scan here
to watch
product video
Control Valve Flow
Scan here
to watch
product video
461
462_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:09 AM Page 462
Series
WE01

Full Port, Vented Ball, Electric or Pneumatic Actuators
WE01-EHD00
VALVES
WE01-EDA02
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE01-EDA02-AA05
WE01-ETD01-A
WE01-ETI02-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
462
The Series WE01 incorporates a full port

2-piece SS ball valve for great flow rates
with minimal pressure drop. The valve
features a blowout proof stem for added
safety, reinforced PTFE seats and seals for
longer life, and a 316 SS (ASTM CF8M) ball
for better performance. Actuators are
direct mounted creating a compact
assembly for tight spaces. Limit switches
are able to be mounted directly to the valves
allowing for remote position indication.
The Series WE01 can be configured with
either an electric or pneumatic actuator.
Electric actuators are available in
weatherproof or explosion-proof, a variety
of supply voltages and two-position or
modulating control. Two-position actuators
use the supply voltage to drive the valve
open or closed, while the modulating
actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for valve
positioning. Actuators feature thermal
overload protection and permanently
lubricated gear train.
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses
an air supply to drive the valve open and

closed. The actuator has two supply ports,
with one driving the valve open and the
other driving the valve closed. Spring
return pneumatic actuators use the air
supply to open the valve and internally
loaded springs return the valve to the closed
position. Also available is the SN solenoid
valve to electrically switch the air supply
pressure between the air supply ports for
opening and closing the valve. Actuators are
constructed of anodized and epoxy coated
aluminum for years of corrosion free
service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 2-piece.
End Connections: Female NPT.
Pressure Limits: 20 Hg to 1000 psi
(-0.7 to 69 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body and Ball: 316 SS (CF8M);
Stem: 316SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
Seal, Washer and Packing: PTFE.
to 200C).
Other Materials:
O-ring: Fluoroelastomer;
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Stem Nut, Locking Device,
Gland Ring: 304SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.
Electric TD and MD Series

220 VAC, 24 VAC or 24 VDC (MD
models not available in 24 VDC).
Power Consumption: See manual.
Cycle Time (per 90):
TD01 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
TD02 and MD02: 20 s;
TD03 and MD03: 30 s.
Duty Rating: 85%.
Housing Material: Powder coated
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
Modulating Input: 4 to 20 mA.
Standard Features: Manual override,
position indicator, and TD models come
with two limit switches.
ACTUATORS
Pneumatic DA and SR Series
Type: DA series is double acting and
SR series is spring return (rack and
pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure:
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psi
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
DA01: 1/8 female NPT;
DA02 to DA05: 1/4 female NPT;
SR02 to SR07: 1/4 female NPT.
Housing Material: Anodized aluminum
body and epoxy coated aluminum
end caps.
to 80C).
Accessory Mounting: NAMUR
standard.
Electric TI and MI Series

220 VAC, 24 VAC or 24 VDC.
TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
TI04 and MI04: 10 s;
TI05 and MI06: 15 s.
Duty Rating:
Two-Position: TI01-TI06: 25%;
Modulating: MI01-MI06: 75%.
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
Standard Features: Position indicator
and two limit switches.
FEATURES
Capable of being configured to fit any
application
Limit switches can be mounted to
manual valves for remote monitoring
463_Layout 1 7/15/14 8:46 AM Page 463
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 36.64
3/4 67.69
1
110.27
1-1/4 184.73
1-1/2 266.62
2
485.3
2-1/2 791.57
3
1151.95
Hand Operated
Model
WE01-CHD00
WE01-DHD00
WE01-EHD00
WE01-FHD00
WE01-GHD00
WE01-HHD00
WE01-IHD00
WE01-JHD00
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE01-CDA01
WE01-DDA01
WE01-EDA02
WE01-FDA02
WE01-GDA03
WE01-HDA03
WE01-IDA04
WE01-JDA05
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE01-CSR02
WE01-DSR02
WE01-ESR03
WE01-FSR03
WE01-GSR04
WE01-HSR05
WE01-ISR07
WE01-JSR07
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE01-CMD01-A
WE01-DMD01-A
WE01-EMD01-A
WE01-FMD01-A
WE01-GMD01-A
WE01-HMD02-A
WE01-IMD03-A
WE01-JMD03-A
WE01 Electric Actuator Model Chart

Example WE01 GMD01 A
WE01-GMD01-A
Series
WE01
316 SS 2-Piece
Size and
CTD01
1/2 NEMA 4X Two-Position
Actuator
DTD01
ETD01
1 NEMA 4X Two-Position
FTD01
1-1/4 NEMA 4X Two-Position
GTD02
HTD02
ITD03
JTD03
CMD01
1/2 NEMA 4X Modulating
DMD01
EMD01
1 NEMA 4X Modulating
FMD01
1-1/4 NEMA 4X Modulating
GMD01
HMD02
IMD03
JMD03
CTI01
1/2 Exp Two-Position
DTI01
ETI02
1 Exp Two-Position
FTI02
1-1/4 Exp Two-Position
GTI02
HTI04
2 Exp Two-Position
ITI05
JTI06
3 Exp Two-Position
CMI01
1/2 Exp Electric Modulating
DMI01
EMI02
1 Exp Electric Modulating
FMI02
1-1/4 Exp Electric Modulating
GMI02
HMI04
IMI05
JMI06
Actuator
A
110 VAC
Voltage
B
220 VAC
C
24 VAC
D
24 VDC
VALVES
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE01 Hand Operated and Pneumatic Actuator Model Chart

Example
WE01 EDA02 A A 01
WE01-EDA02-AA01
Series
WE01
316 SS 2-Piece
Size and
CHD00
1/2 Hand Operated
Actuator
DHD00
3/4 Hand Operated
EHD00
1 Hand Operated
FHD00
1-1/4 Hand Operated
GHD00
1-1/2 Hand Operated
HHD00
2 Hand Operated
IHD00
2-1/2 Hand Operated
JHD00
3 Hand Operated
CDA01
1/2 Double Acting
DDA01
3/4 Double Acting
EDA02
1 Double Acting
FDA02
1-1/4 Double Acting
GDA03
1-1/2 Double Acting
HDA03
2 Double Acting
IDA04
2-1/2 Double Acting
JDA05
3 Double Acting
CSR02
1/2 Spring Return
DSR02
3/4 Spring Return
ESR03
1 Spring Return
FSR03
1-1/4 Spring Return
GSR04
1-1/2 Spring Return
HSR05
2 Spring Return
ISR07
2-1/2 Spring Return
JSR07
3 Spring Return
Solenoid
N
NoSolenoid
A
NEMA 4X NAMURSolenoid
Solenoid
N
NoSolenoid
Voltage
A
110 VAC
B
220 VAC
C
24 VAC
D
24 VDC
E
12 VDC
Positioner
00
None
and Switches
01
42AD0 Exp Limit Switch
02
45VD0 Exp Position Transmitter
03
42AD0-B ATEX Limit Switch
04
42AD0-IE IECEX Limit Switch
05
VPI-M01 NEMA 4X Limit Switch
06
QV-210101 Poly Limit Switch
07
VPS and P1 Prox Switch
08
265ER-D5 Positioner
09
285ER-D5 Smart Positioner
Options
NO
Fail Open Spring Return Actuator
NEMA 4X TwoPosition Electric

(110 VAC) Model
WE01-CTD01-A
WE01-DTD01-A
WE01-ETD01-A
WE01-FTD01-A
WE01-GTD02-A
WE01-HTD02-A
WE01-ITD03-A
WE01-JTD03-A
ACCESSORIES
R2-2120, Air Regulator
AFR2-2, Instrument Air Filter Regulator
VB-01, Volume Booster
463
464_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:08 AM Page 464
Series
WE02

WE02-DHD00
VALVES
WE02-DDA01
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE02-DDA01-AA01
WE02-DTD01-A
WE02-CTI01-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
464

3-piece SS ball valve for great flow rates
with minimal pressure drop. The valve
features a blowout proof stem for added
safety, reinforced PTFE seats and seals for
longer life, and a 316 SS (ASTM CF8M) ball
for better performance. Actuators are
direct mounted creating a compact
assembly for tight spaces. Limit switches
are able to be mounted directly to the
valves allowing for remote position
indication.
actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for
valve positioning.
Actuators feature
thermal
overload
protection
and
permanently lubricated gear train.

supply to open the valve, and internally
loaded springs return the valve to the
closed position. Also available is the SN
solenoid valve to electrically switch the air
supply pressure between the air supply
ports for opening and closing the valve.
Actuators are constructed of anodized and
epoxy coated aluminum for years of
corrosion free service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 3-piece.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 3 .
(-0.7 to 69 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body and ball: 316 SS (CF8M);
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
Seal, Washer, and Packing: PTFE.
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
body and epoxy coated aluminum end
caps.
to 80C).
standard.

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
Duty Rating:
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
FEATURES
application
465_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:08 AM Page 465
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 36.64
3/4 67.69
1
110.27
1-1/4 184.73
1-1/2 266.62
2
485.3
2-1/2 791.57
3
1151.95
Hand Operated
Model
WE02-CHD00
WE02-DHD00
WE02-EHD00
WE02-FHD00
WE02-GHD00
WE02-HHD00
WE02-IHD00
WE02-JHD00
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE02-CDA01
WE02-DDA01
WE02-EDA02
WE02-FDA02
WE02-GDA03
WE02-HDA03
WE02-IDA04
WE02-JDA05
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE02-CSR02
WE02-DSR02
WE02-ESR03
WE02-FSR03
WE02-GSR04
WE02-HSR05
WE02-ISR07
WE02-JSR07

Example
Series
Size and
Actuators

Example WE02 ETD01 B
Series
WE02
Size and
CTD01
Actuators
DTD01
ETD01
FTD01
GTD02
HTD02
ITD03
JTD03
CMD01
DMD01
EMD01
FMD01
GMD01
HMD02
IMD03
JMD03
CTI01
DTI01
ETI02
FTI02
GTI03
HTI04
ITI05
JTI05
CMI01
DMI01
EMI02
FMI02
GMI03
HMI04
IMI05
JMI05
Actuator
A
Voltage
B
C
D
WE02-ETD01-B
316SS 3-Piece NPT
1 Exp Two-Position
2 Exp Two-Position
3 Exp Two-Position
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE02-CSR02-NN09
316SS 3-Piece NPT
1/2 Hand Operated
3/4 Hand Operated
1 Hand Operated
1-1/4 Hand Operated
1-1/2 Hand Operated
2 Hand Operated
2-1/2 Hand Operated
3 Hand Operated
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/4 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
2-1/2 Double Acting
3 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/4 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
2-1/2 Spring Return
3 Spring Return
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
265ER-D5 Positioner
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE02-CMD01-A
WE02-DMD01-A
WE02-EMD01-A
WE02-FMD01-A
WE02-GMD01-A
WE02-HMD02-A
WE02-IMD03-A
WE02-JMD03-A
VALVES
WE02 CSR02 N N 09
WE02
CHD00
DHD00
EHD00
FHD00
GHD00
HHD00
IHD00
JHD00
CDA01
DDA01
EDA02
FDA02
GDA03
HDA03
IDA04
JDA05
CSR02
DSR02
ESR03
FSR03
GSR04
HSR05
ISR07
JSR07
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
00
and Switches
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Options
NO

(110 VAC) Model
WE02-CTD01-A
WE02-DTD01-A
WE02-ETD01-A
WE02-FTD01-A
WE02-GTD02-A
WE02-HTD02-A
WE02-ITD03-A
WE02-JTD03-A
ACCESSORIES
465
466_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:07 AM Page 466
Series
WE03
3-Piece Tri-Clamp Stainless Steel Ball Valve

Cavity Filled, Full Port, Electric or Pneumatic Actuators
WE03-DHD00
VALVES
WE03-DDA01
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE03-DDA01-AA07
WE03-DDA01-AA06
WE03-DTD01-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
466

3-piece tri-clamp SS ball valve for great flow
rates with minimal pressure drop. The
valve features a blowout proof stem for
added safety, reinforced PTFE seats and
seals for longer life, and a 316 SS (ASTM
CF8M) ball for better performance.
Actuators are direct mounted creating a
compact assembly for tight spaces. Limit
switches are able to be mounted directly to
the valves allowing for remote position
indication.

closed. The actuator has two supply ports
service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 3-piece.
End Connections: Tri-clamp ends.
(-0.7 to 69 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
caps.
to 80C).
standard.
FEATURES
application
Cavity filled valve for sanitary
applications

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s.
Duty Rating:
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
467_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:07 AM Page 467
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2
14.39
3/4
42.25
1
86.17
1-1/2 223.61
2
437.98
Hand Operated
Model
WE03-CHD00
WE03-DHD00
WE03-EHD00
WE03-GHD00
WE03-HHD00
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE03-CDA01
WE03-DDA01
WE03-EDA02
WE03-GDA02
WE03-HDA02
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE03-CSR02
WE03-DSR02
WE03-ESR03
WE03-GSR04
WE03-HSR04

Example
Series
Size and
Actuator

Example
Series
Size and
Actuator
Actuator
Voltage
WE03 CMD01 A
WE03
CTD01
DTD01
ETD01
GTD01
HTD02
CMD01
DMD01
EMD01
GMD01
HMD02
CTI01
DTI01
ETI02
GTI02
HTI02
CMI01
DMI01
EMI02
GMI02
HMI02
A
B
C
D
WE03-CMD01-A
316 SS 3-Piece Tri-Clamp
1/2 NEMA4X Two-Position
3/4 NEMA4X Two-Position
1 NEMA4X Two-Position
1-1/2 NEMA4X Two-Position
2 NEMA4X Two-Position
1/2 NEMA4X Modulating
3/4 NEMA4X Modulating
1 NEMA4X Modulating
1-1/2 NEMA4X Modulating
2 NEMA4X Modulating
1 Exp Two-Position
2 Exp Two-Position
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE03-EDA02-AA06
316 SS 3-Piece Tri-Clamp
1/2 Hand Operated
3/4 Hand Operated
1 Hand Operated
1-1/2 Hand Operated
2 Hand Operated
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
265ER-D5 Positioner
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE03-CMD01-A
WE03-DMD01-A
WE03-EMD01-A
WE03-GMD01-A
WE03-HMD02-A
VALVES
WE03 EDA02 A A 06
WE03
CHD00
DHD00
EHD00
GHD00
HHD00
CDA01
DDA01
EDA02
GDA02
HDA02
CSR02
DSR02
ESR03
GSR04
HSR04
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
00
and Switches
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Options
NO

(110 VAC) Model
WE03-CTD01-A
WE03-DTD01-A
WE03-ETD01-A
WE03-GTD01-A
WE03-HTD02-A
ACCESSORIES
467
468_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:06 AM Page 468
Series
WE04
2-Piece Flanged Stainless Steel Ball Valve

150# ANSI Flange, Vented Ball, Electric or Pneumatic Actuators
WE04-DHD00
VALVES
WE04-DDA02-AA03
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE04-DDA02-NN09
WE04-DTD01-A
WE04-CTI01-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
468

2-piece flanged SS ball valve for great flow
valve features a blowout proof stem for
indication.
either a pneumatic or electric actuator.
of supply voltages, and two-position or

with one driving the valve open, and the
service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 2-piece.
End Connections: 150# ANSI flange.
(-0.7 to 19 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

220 VAC, 24 VAC OR 240 VDC (MD
TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
DA02 to DA04: 1/4 female NPT
caps.
to 80C).
standard.

220 VAC, 24 VAC or 24 VAC.
TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
Duty Rating:
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
Electrical Connection: 1/2 NPT
female.
FEATURES
application
469_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:05 AM Page 469
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 36.64
3/4 67.69
1
101.63
1-1/2 266.62
2
485.3
2-1/2 816.9
3
1121.84
Hand Operated
Model
WE04-CHD00
WE04-DHD00
WE04-EHD00
WE04-GHD00
WE04-HHD00
WE04-IHD00
WE04-JHD00
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE04-CDA01
WE04-DDA01
WE04-EDA03
WE04-GDA03
WE04-HDA03
WE04-IDA04
WE04-JDA04
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE04-CSR02
WE04-DSR02
WE04-ESR03
WE04-GSR04
WE04-HSR05
WE04-ISR06
WE04-JSR06

Example
Series
Size and
Actuator

Example
Series
Size and
Actuator
Actuator
Voltage
WE04 ITD03 B
WE04
CTD01
DTD01
ETD01
GTD02
HTD02
ITD03
JTD03
CMD01
DMD01
EMD01
GMD01
HMD02
IMD03
JMD03
CTI01
DTI01
ETI02
GTI03
HTI04
ITI04
JTI05
CMI01
DMI01
EMI02
GMI03
HMI04
IMI04
JMI05
A
B
C
D
WE04-ITD03-B
316 SS 2-Piece Flanged
1 Exp Two-Position
2 Exp Two-Position
3 Exp Two-Position
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE04-GDA03-AB05
316 SS 2-Piece Flanged
1/2 Hand Operated
3/4 Hand Operated
1 Hand Operated
1-1/2 Hand Operated
2 Hand Operated
2-1/2 Hand Operated
3 Hand Operated
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
2-1/2 Double Acting
3 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
2-1/2 Spring Return
3 Spring Return
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
265ER-D5 Positioner
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE04-CMD01-A
WE04-DMD01-A
WE04-EMD01-A
WE04-GMD01-A
WE04-HMD02-A
WE04-IMD03-A
WE04-JMD03-A
VALVES
WE04 GDA03 A B 05
WE04
CHD00
DHD00
EHD00
GHD00
HHD00
IHD00
JHD00
CDA01
DDA01
EDA03
GDA03
HDA03
IDA04
JDA04
CSR02
DSR02
ESR03
GSR04
HSR05
ISR06
JSR06
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
00
and Switches
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Options
NO

(110 VAC) Model
WE04-CTD01-A
WE04-DTD01-A
WE04-ETD01-A
WE04-GTD02-A
WE04-HTD02-A
WE04-ITD03-A
WE04-JTD03-A
ACCESSORIES
469
470_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:08 PM Page 470
Series
PBV
Automated Ball Valve - Two-Way Plastic

Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
PVCBody
PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS

SERIES PBV
CPVCBody
250
WORKING PRESSURE (psi)
232
1/2 to 2
200
2 to 4
150
100
50
40
32
VALVES
Valves, Ball,
Automated
The Series PBV is ideal for services in industrial, chemical, turf and irrigation, and pool
and spa applications, as well as for use with potable water. The valve features a shear-proof
stem designed to prevent leakage in the event of damage, reinforced TFE seats and EPDM
seals for longer life, and an all-plastic construction (PVC or CPVC) for heavyweight durability
at a lightweight cost. Valves also come standard with selectable NPT or socket process
connections.
The PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
actuator. Electrically actuated models are weatherproof, NEMA 4 (IP56), powered by
standard 115 VAC supply, and are available in either two-position or proportional control.
Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each of the valve ports open or closed,
while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning.
Actuator features include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual
position indication and a permanently lubricated gear train.
The pneumatic double acting actuator uses an air supply to drive each of the actuator ports.
Spring return pneumatic actuators use the air supply to drive the valve stem one direction,
and internally loaded springs return the valve to its original position. Also available is the
SV3 solenoid valve to electrically switch the supply pressure between the air supply ports.
Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion
free service.
92
122
ACTUATORS
Electric
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60
Hz, single phase. Optional 220 VAC, 24
VAC, 12 VDC, and 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: (Locked rotor
current): Two position: 1/2 to 1-1/2: .55
A, 2 to 4: 0.75 A. Modulating: 1/2 to 2:
0.75 A, 2-1/2: 1.1 A, 3 and 4: 0.75 A.
Cycle Time: (per 90): Two position: 1/2
to 1-1/2: 2.5 s, 2 and 2-1/2: 5 s, 3 and
4: 15 s; Modulating:1/2 to 2-1/2: 5 s, 3
and 4: 15 s.
Double Acting Pneumatic Spring Return Pneumatic Two Position Electric

Size CV
Model
Model
Model
1/2 25
PBVPSR202
PBVPU1102
PBVPDA102
3/4 51
PBVPSR203
PBVPU1103
PBVPDA103
1
PBVPSR204
PBVPU1104
97
PBVPDA104
1-1/4 204
PBVPSR205
PBVPU1105
PBVPDA105
1-1/2 285
PBVPSR306
PBVPU1106
PBVPDA206
2
PBVPSR307
PBVPU1207
540
PBVPDA207
2-1/2 712
PBVPSR608
PBVPU1308
PBVPDA308
3
PBVPSR609
PBVPU1509
1294
PBVPDA309
4
PBVPSR710
PBVPU1510
2629
PBVPDA410
Series PBV Automated 2-Way Plastic Ball Valves - CPVC
Double Acting
Spring Return
Two Position
Pneumatic
Pneumatic
Electric
Size CV
Model
Model
Model
1/2 25
PBVCDA102
PBVCSR202
PBVCU1102
3/4 51
PBVCDA103
PBVCSR203
PBVCU1103
97
1
PBVCDA104
PBVCSR204
PBVCU1104
1-1/4 204
PBVCDA105
PBVCSR205
PBVCU1105
1-1/2 285
PBVCDA206
PBVCSR306
PBVCU1106
540
2
PBVCDA207
PBVCSR307
PBVCU1207
2-1/2 712
PBVCDA308
PBVCSR608
PBVCU1308
1294
3
PBVCDA309
PBVCSR609
PBVCU1509
2629
4
PBVCDA410
PBVCSR710
PBVCU1510
470
73
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2-way.
Line Size: 1/2 to 4.
End Connections: Female NPT or
socket (field selectable).
Pressure Limit: 1/2 to 2: 232 psi
(16.0 bar) @ 73F (23C); 2-1/2 to 4:
150 psi (10.3 bar) @ 73F (23C) WOG.
Vacuum:29 Hg.
Wetted Materials: Body, end connectors:
PVC or CPVC; Ball, stem:PVC or CPVC;
Seat: TFE; Stem seal: EPDM.
Temperature Limit: 32 to 140F (0 to
60C).
Other Materials: Stem bearing:
Polypropylene (1-1/4 and up).
Series PBVAutomated 2-Way Plastic Ball Valves - PVC
Note: All spring return actuators are factory standard as spring (fail) close.
For spring (fail) open valves, add suffix -FO to the model number.
62
140
152
182
212
WORKING TEMPERATURE (F)
*Please see website for dimensional drawings
Modulating Electric
Model
PBVPV1202
PBVPV1203
PBVPV1204
PBVPV1205
PBVPV1206
PBVPV1207
PBVPV1308
PBVPV1509
PBVPV1510
Modulating
Electric
Model
PBVCV1202
PBVCV1203
PBVCV1204
PBVCV1205
PBVCV1206
PBVCV1207
PBVCV1308
PBVCV1509
PBVCV1510
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/2 to 1-1/2:

75%, 2 to 4: 25%. Modulating:75%.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. Optional
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II groups A, B, C,
D).
Housing Material:Aluminum with
thermal bonding polyester powder finish.
Temperature Limit: 0 to 150F (-18 to
65C).
Standard Features: Manual override and
visual position indicator except
modulating units.
Type:DA series is double acting and SR
series is spring return (rack and pinion).
Normal Supply Pressure: 80 psi (5.5
bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig (8
bar).
Air Connections: DA/SR1 to 5: 1/8
female NPT, all other sizes: 1/4 female
NPT.
Air Consumption: (per stroke) DA1:
2.32 in3; DA2: 9.34 in3; DA3:17.21 in3;
DA4: 20.5 in3; SR2: 9.34 in3; SR3: 17.21
in3; SR6: 54.34 in3; SR7: 85.43 in3.
Cycle Time: (per 90) DA1: .03 s; DA2:
.04 s; DA3: .08 s; DA4: .12 s; SR2: .09 s;
SR3: .14 s; SR6: .46 s; SR7: .83 s.
caps.
82C).
standard.
Standard Features: Visual position
indicator.
OPTIONS
Explosion Proof Electric Actuators
-add -EX to model number
*(Example: Third digit in U12 or V12 is the size)

Optional Electric Actuator Supply Voltages
-Contact factory for model number change
Filters and Regulators: See pages 527-530
471_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:05 AM Page 471
Series
HBAV
Two-Way Detachable Electric Ball Valve

Floating or Modulating, Position Indicator
A
W.E. ANDERSON
Model No: #HBAVXXXX
Power Supply:
Torque:
Time:
W.E. ANDERSON
A DIV. OF DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
102 INDIANA HWY 212, MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360
Phone: 219-879-8000
Email: info@dwyer-inst.com
www.dwyer-inst.com
Made In China
D
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
FEATURES
Manual override
Detachable actuator
High Cv values
Cv
4.5
4.5
4.5
7.0
7.0
7.0
11.2
11.2
11.2
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
C in [mm]
4.53 [115]
4.53 [115]
4.72 [120]
5.16 [131]
5.16 [131]
5.31 [135]
D in [mm]
2.68 [68]
2.68 [68]
3.23 [82
3.86 [98]
4.13 [105]
4.80 [122]
Weight lb [kg]
1.43 [0.65]
1.54 [0.70]
2.09 [0.95]
3.20 [1.45]
3.31 [1.50]
4.19 [1.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 2-way, NC.
Line Size: 1/2 to 2 NPT.
Pressure Limits: Max: 375 psi (25 bar); Close off: 87 psi (6 bar).
Temperature Limit:
Ambient: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C);
Process: 23 to 122F (-5 to 50C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, SS, NBR, PTFE.
Input: Floating: 3-wire; Modulating: 4 to 20 mA (24 VAC power only).
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase.
Power Consumption: Floating: 3 to 5 VA; Modulating: 4 VA.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG.
Cycle Time (per 90): 1/2 to 1: 45 sec.; 1-1/4 to 2: 50 sec.
Housing Material: Plastic, nylon, and polyoxymethylene.
Weight: See dimensions table.
Valves, Ball,
Automated
Model
HBAV0212
HBAV0214
HBAV0224
HBAV0312
HBAV0314
HBAV0324
HBAV0412
HBAV0414
HBAV0424
B in [mm]
3.03 [77]
3.03 [77]
3.03 [77]
3.07 [78]
3.07 [78]
3.07 [78]
VALVES
The Series HBAV is an electrical ball valve ideal for flow control in hot and cold water
HVAC systems. These valves are typically used in conjunction with air conditioning
systems, heating systems, water treatment and production industries. The HBAV is
electrically driven open and/or closed via a bidirectional AC motor. The electrical valve
offers a detachable actuator with position switches and indicator. The HBAV is available
with modulating or floating actuators.
A in [mm]
3.62 [92]
3.62 [92]
3.62 [92]
4.84 [123]
4.84 [123]
4.84 [123]
471
472_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:04 AM Page 472
Series
WE31
3-Way NPT Stainless Steel Ball Valve

WE31-DHD00-T1
VALVES
WE31-DDA02-L1
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE31-DDA02-T1-AA01
WE31-DDA02-T3-NN05
WE31-DTD01-T3-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
472

3-way SS ball valve for great flow rates with
minimal pressure drop. The valve features
a blowout-proof stem for added safety,
reinforced PTFE seats and seals for longer
life, and a 316 SS (ASTM CF8M) ball for
better performance. Actuators are direct
mounted creating a compact assembly for
tight spaces. Limit switches are able to be
mounted directly to the valves allowing for
remote position indication.

service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 3-way.
(-0.7 to 69 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
caps.
to 80C).
standard.

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
Duty Rating:
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
FEATURES
application
473_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:03 AM Page 473
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 11
3/4 14
1
18
1-1/4 43
1-1/2 84
2
90
Hand
Operated Model
WE31-CHD00-T1
WE31-DHD00-T1
WE31-EHD00-T1
WE31-FHD00-T1
WE31-GHD00-T1
WE31-HHD00-T1
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE31-CDA02-T2
WE31-DDA02-T2
WE31-EDA03-T2
WE31-FDA03-T2
WE31-GDA04-T2
WE31-HDA04-T2

Example
Series
Size and
Range
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE31-CMD01-T2-A
WE31-DMD01-T2-A
WE31-EMD02-T2-A
WE31-FMD02-T2-A
WE31-GMD03-T2-A
WE31-HMD03-T2-A

Example
Series
Size and
Range
Valve
Position
Actuator
Voltage
WE31 DMI02 T2 A
WE31
CTD01
DTD01
ETD02
FTD02
GTD03
HTD03
CMD01
DMD01
EMD02
FMD02
GMD03
HMD03
CTI01
DTI02
ETI02
FTI04
GTI05
HTI06
CMI01
DMI02
EMI02
FMI04
GMI05
HMI06
T1
T2
T3
T4
L1
A
B
C
D
WE31-DMI02-T2-A
316 SS 3-Way NPT
1/2 NEMA 4X Two Position
1 NEMA 4X Two Position
1-1/4 NEMA 4X Two Position
1/2 Exp Two Position
1 Exp Two Position
1-1/4 Exp Two Position
2 Exp Two Position
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE31-CSR02-T1-AA00
316 SS 3-Way NPT
1/2 Hand
3/4 Hand
1 Hand
1-1/4 Hand
1-1/2 Hand
2 Hand
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/4 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/4 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
VPI-M01 NEMA4X Limit Switch
265ER-D5 Positioner

(110 VAC) Model
WE31-CTD01-T2-A
WE31-DTD01-T2-A
WE31-ETD02-T2-A
WE31-FTD02-T2-A
WE31-GTD03-T2-A
WE31-HTD03-T2-A
VALVES
WE31 CSR02 T1 A A 00
WE31
CHD00
DHD00
EHD00
FHD00
GHD00
HHD00
CDA02
DDA02
EDA03
FDA03
GDA04
HDA04
CSR02
DSR02
ESR04
FSR05
GSR06
HSR07
Valve
T1
Position
T2
T3
T4
L1
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
00
and
01
Switches
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE31-CSR02-T2
WE31-DSR02-T2
WE31-ESR04-T2
WE31-FSR05-T2
WE31-GSR06-T2
WE31-HSR07-T2
ACCESSORIES
Flow Paths
473
474_Layout 1 7/8/14 10:03 AM Page 474
Series
WE33
3-Way Tri-Clamp Stainless Steel Ball Valve

Cavity Filled, Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
WE33-DHD00-T2
VALVES
WE33-ESR03-T1-NN07
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE33-DDA01-L1-AA06
WE33-DTD01-T3-A
WE33-DTI01-T2-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
474

3-way tri-clamp SS ball valve for great flow
valve features a blowout-proof stem for
indication.
open or close, while the modulating actuator
accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for valve

service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 3-way.
End Connections: Tri-clamp ends.
(-0.7 to 69 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
caps.
(-40 to 80C).
standard.
FEATURES
application
Cavity filled valve for sanitary
applications

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s.
Duty Rating:
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
475_Layout 1 7/14/14 12:23 PM Page 475
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 14.39
3/4 42.25
1
86.17
1-1/2 223.61
2
437.98
Hand Operated
Model
WE33-CHD00-T2
WE33-DHD00-T2
WE33-EHD00-T2
WE33-GHD00-T2
WE33-HHD00-T2
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE33-CDA01-T2
WE33-DDA01-T2
WE33-EDA02-T2
WE33-GDA02-T2
WE33-HDA03-T2
Example
Series
Size and
Actuator
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE33-CMD01-T2-A
WE33-DMD01-T2-A
WE33-EMD01-T2-A
WE33-GMD02-T2-A
WE33-HMD02-T2-A
Example WE33 DMD01 T2 B

Series
WE33
Size and
CTD01
Actuator
DTD01
ETD01
GTD02
HTD02
CMD01
DMD01
EMD01
GMD02
HMD02
CTI01
DTI01
ETI02
GTI02
HTI03
CMI01
DMI01
EMI02
GMI02
HMI03
Valve
T1
Position
T2
T3
T4
L1
Actuator
A
Voltage
B
C
D
WE33-DMD01-T2-B
316 SS 3-Way
1 Exp Two Position
2 Exp Two Position
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE33-CSR02-T4-NN07
316 SS 3-Way
1/2 Hand Operated
3/4 Hand Operated
1 Hand Operated
1-1/2 Hand Operated
2 Hand Operated
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
VPI-M01 Limit Switch
265ER-D5 Positioner

(110 VAC) Model
WE33-CTD01-T2-A
WE33-DTD01-T2-A
WE33-ETD01-T2-A
WE33-GTD02-T2-A
WE33-HTD02-T2-A
VALVES
WE33 CSR02 T4 N N 07
WE33
CHD00
DHD00
EHD00
GHD00
HHD00
CDA01
DDA01
EDA02
GDA02
HDA03
CSR02
DSR02
ESR03
GSR03
HSR04
Valve
T1
Position
T2
T3
T4
L1
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
00
and
01
Switches
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE33-CSR02-T2
WE33-DSR02-T2
WE33-ESR03-T2
WE33-GSR03-T2
WE33-HSR04-T2
ACCESSORIES
Flow Paths
475
476_Layout 1 7/30/14 9:06 AM Page 476
Series
WE34
3-Way Flanged Stainless Steel Ball Valve

150# ANSI Flange, Vented Ball, Electric or Pneumatic Actuators
WE34-DHD00-L1
VALVES
WE34-DDA03-T2
Valves, Ball,
Automated
WE34-DDA03-T1-AA01
WE34-DDA03-T2-NN08
WE34-DTI03-T3-A
Scan here
to watch
product video
476

3-way flanged SS ball valve for great flow
valve features a blowout-proof stem for
indication.

service.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE
Body: 3-way.
End Connections: 150#ANSIflange.
(-0.7 to 19 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Stem: 316 SS;
Seat: RTFE/PTFE;
(-29 to 200C).
Other Materials:
Handle: 304 SS;
Washer: 301 SS;
Gland Ring: 304 SS;
Handle Sleeve: PVC.

TD01: 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
ACTUATORS
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
caps.
(-40 to 80C).
standard.
FEATURES
application

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
Duty Rating:
Two-Position:
TI01-TI07: 25%;
TI08: 100%.
Modulating:
MI01-MI07: 75%;
MI08: 100%.
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.
477_Layout 1 7/15/14 8:22 AM Page 477
Popular Models
Cv
Size (gal/min)
1/2 26
3/4 50
1
94
1-1/2 260
2
380
2-1/2 650
3
1000
Hand Operated
Model
WE34-CHD00-T2
WE34-DHD00-T2
WE34-EHD00-T2
WE34-GHD00-T2
WE34-HHD00-T2
WE34-IHD00-T2
WE34-JHD00-T2
Double Acting
Pneumatic Model
WE34-CDA02-T2
WE34-DDA02-T2
WE34-EDA03-T2
WE34-GDA05-T2
WE34-HDA06-T2
WE34-IDA07-T2
WE34-JDA08-T2

00
NEMA 4X
Modulating Electric
(110 VAC) Model
WE34-CMD01-T2-A
WE34-DMD01-T2-A
WE34-EMD02-T2-A
WE34-GMD03-T2-A
WE34-HMD03-T2-A
WE34-IMD04-T2-A
WE34-JMD04-T2-A

Example WE34 HMD03 T3 A
Series
WE34
Size and
CTD02
Actuators
DTD02
ETD02
GTD03
HTD03
ITD04
JTD04
CMD01
DMD01
EMD02
GMD03
HMD03
IMD04
JMD04
CTI02
DTI02
ETI03
GTI05
HTI06
ITI06
JTI08
CMI02
DMI02
EMI03
GMI05
HMI06
IMI06
JMI08
Valve
T1
Position
T2
T3
T4
L1
Actuator
A
Voltage
B
C
D
WE34-HMD03-T3-A
316 SS 150# 3-Way
2-1.2 NEMA 4X Two-Position
1 Exp Two-Position
2 Exp Two-Position
3 Exp Two-Position
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
WE34-JDA08-T1-AB00
316 SS 150# 3-Way
1/2 Hand Operated
3/4 Hand Operated
1 Hand Operated
1-1/2 Hand Operated
2 Hand Operated
2-1/2 Hand Operated
3 Hand Operated
1/2 Double Acting
3/4 Double Acting
1 Double Acting
1-1/2 Double Acting
2 Double Acting
2-1/2 Double Acting
3 Double Acting
1/2 Spring Return
3/4 Spring Return
1 Spring Return
1-1/2 Spring Return
2 Spring Return
2-1/2 Spring Return
3 Spring Return
Flow Path A
Flow Path B
Flow Path C
Flow Path D
Flow Path E
NoSolenoid
NoSolenoid
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
None
265ER-D5 Positioner

(110 VAC) Model
WE34-CTD02-T2-A
WE34-DTD02-T2-A
WE34-ETD02-T2-A
WE34-GTD03-T2-A
WE34-HTD03-T2-A
WE34-ITD04-T2-A
WE34-JTD04-T2-A
VALVES
Example WE34 JDA08 T1 A B

Series
WE34
Size and
CHD00
Actuators
DHD00
EHD00
GHD00
HHD00
IHD00
JHD00
CDA02
DDA02
EDA03
GDA05
HDA06
IDA07
JDA08
CSR03
DSR03
ESR05
GSR06
HSR07
ISR08
JSR09
Valve
T1
Position
T2
T3
T4
L1
Solenoid
N
A
Solenoid
N
Voltage
A
B
C
D
E
Positioner
and
Switches
Spring Return
Pneumatic Model
WE34-CSR03-T2
WE34-DSR03-T2
WE34-ESR05-T2
WE34-GSR06-T2
WE34-HSR07-T2
WE34-ISR08-T2
WE34-JSR09-T2
ACCESSORIES
Flow Paths
477
478_Layout 1 7/15/14 12:01 PM Page 478
Series
3PBV
Automated Ball Valve - Three-Way Plastic

Electric and Pneumatic Actuators
PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE RATINGS
SERIES 3PBV
250
WORKING PRESSURE (psi)
232
Cv Values
*Please see website for dimensional drawings and Cv positions
Valves, Ball,
Automated
VALVES
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
A
3.85
9.50
14.4
27.3
33.3
63.0
Position
D
B
C
2.45 4.55 13.7
6.65 10.2 26.6
9.80 17.2 53.2
18.9 32.2 73.5
23.1 42.0 119
43.4 84.0 224
E
5.11
10.5
18.6
33.3
43.4
85.4
Flow Path
Act. Open
All Open
A-B
A-C
B-C
B-C
A-B
All Closed
1-1/4 to 2
150
100
50
40
32
62
73
92
122
140
152
182
212
WORKING TEMPERATURE (F)
The Series 3PBV is ideal for mixing or diverting services in industrial, chemical, turf
and irrigation, and pool and spa applications, as well as for use with potable water. The valve
features a 3-seat design for efficient automation, reinforced TFE seats and EPDM seals for
longer life, and an all PVC construction for heavyweight durability at a lightweight cost.
Valves also come standard with field selectable NPT or socket process connections.
The 3PBV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each of the valve ports open or closed,
while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve positioning.
Actuator features include thermal overload protection to withstand stall conditions, visual
position indication and a permanently lubricated gear train.
Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of corrosion
free service.
Port
Configuration
-T1
-T2
T Port
-T3
-T4
-L1
L Port
-L2
-L3
1/2 to 1
200
Act. Closed
A-B
A-C
B-C
All Open
A-B
All Closed
B-C
How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify pipe size and actuator.
2. Choose a Port Configuration to determine valve flow path.
Example: 3PBVPSR204-L3
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3-way.
End Connections: Female NPT or
socket (field-selectable).
Pressure Limit: 1/2 to 1: 232 psi (16.0
bar) @ 73F (23C); 1-1/4 to 2:150 psi
(10.3 bar) @ 73F (23C) WOG;
Vacuum:29 Hg. See chart for curve.
Wetted Materials: Body, end
connectors: PVC; Ball, stem:PVC; Seat:
TFE; Stem seal: EPDM.
Temperature Limit: 32 to 140F (0 to
60C).
ACTUATORS
Electric
Power Consumption (Locked Rotor
Current): Two position: 1/2 to 1-1/2:
.55 A, 2: 0.75 A; Modulating: 0.75 A.
Cycle Time: (per 90): Two position:
1/2 to 1-1/2: 2.5 s, 2: 5 s; Modulating:
5 s.
Duty Cycle: Two position: 1/2 to 1-1/2:
75%, 2: 25%; Modulating:75%.
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II groups A, B, C,
D).
Housing Material:Aluminum with
Temperature Limit: 0 to 150F (-18 to

65C).
Standard Features: Manual override
and visual position indicator except
modulating units.
Type:DA series is double acting and SR
series is spring return (rack and pinion).
bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig
(8 bar).
Air Connections: DA/SR1 to 5: 1/8
female NPT, all other sizes: 1/4 female
NPT.
Air Consumption (per stroke): DA1:
2.32 in3; DA2, SR2: 9.34 in3; SR3: 17.21
in3.
Cycle Time (per 90): DA1: .03 s; DA2:
.04 s; SR2: .09 s; SR3: .14 s.
caps.
82C).
standard.
indicator.
Series 3PBV Automated Ball Valves - 3-Way Plastic

Double Acting
Pneumatic
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
CV
See
Chart
Above
Model*
3PBVPDA102
3PBVPDA103
3PBVPDA104
3PBVPDA105
3PBVPDA206
3PBVPDA207
Spring Return
Pneumatic
Model*
3PBVPSR202
3PBVPSR203
3PBVPSR204
3PBVPSR205
3PBVPSR306
3PBVPSR307
Two Position
Electric
Model*
3PBVPU1102
3PBVPU1103
3PBVPU1104
3PBVPU1105
3PBVPU1206
3PBVPU1207
Modulating
Electric
Model*
3PBVPV1202
3PBVPV1203
3PBVPV1204
3PBVPV1205
3PBVPV1206
3PBVPV1207
OPTIONS
Explosion Proof Electric Actuators
-add -EX to model number
-Contact factory for model
number change
*Complete model includes Port Configuration - see How to Order.

478
479_Layout 1 7/15/14 7:26 AM Page 479
Series
3HBAV
Three-Way Detachable Electric Ball Valve

Floating or Modulating, Position Indicator
A
W.E. ANDERSON
Model No: #HBAVXXXX
Power Supply:
Torque:
Time:
W.E. ANDERSON
102 INDIANA HWY 212, MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46360
Phone: 219-879-8000
Email: info@dwyer-inst.com
www.dwyer-inst.com
Made In China
D
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
FEATURES
Manual override
Detachable actuator
High Cv values
Cv
4.5
4.5
4.5
7.0
7.0
7.0
11.2
11.2
11.2
Size
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Model
3HBAV0512
3HBAV0514
3HBAV0524
3HBAV0612
3HBAV0614
3HBAV0624
3HBAV0712
3HBAV0714
3HBAV0724
Cv
17.9
17.9
17.9
27.9
27.9
27.9
44.7
44.7
44.7
C in [mm]
4.53 [115]
4.53 [115]
4.72 [120]
5.16 [131]
5.16 [131]
5.31 [135]
D in [mm]
2.68 [68]
2.68 [68]
3.23 [82
3.86 [98]
4.13 [105]
4.80 [122]
Weight lb [kg]
1.43 [0.65]
1.54 [0.70]
2.09 [0.95]
3.20 [1.45]
3.31 [1.50]
4.19 [1.90]
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 3-way, NC.
Pressure Limits: Max: 375 psi (25 bar); Close off: 87 psi (6 bar).
Temperature Limit:
Ambient: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C);
Process: 23 to 122F (-5 to 50C).
Wetted Materials: Brass, SS, NBR, PTFE.
Input: Floating: 3-wire; Modulating: 4 to 20 mA (24 VAC power only).
Power Requirements: 120 VAC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase.
Power Consumption: Floating: 3 to 5 VA; Modulating: 4 VA.
Electrical Connection: 18 AWG.
Cycle Time (per 90): 1/2 to 1: 45 s.; 1-1/4 to 2: 50 s.
Housing Material: Plastic, nylon, and polyoxymethylene.
Weight: See table.
Size
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
2
Supply Voltage
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
24 VAC
Valves, Ball,
Automated
Model
3HBAV0212
3HBAV0214
3HBAV0224
3HBAV0312
3HBAV0314
3HBAV0324
3HBAV0412
3HBAV0414
3HBAV0424
B in [mm]
3.03 [77]
3.03 [77]
3.03 [77]
3.07 [78]
3.07 [78]
3.07 [78]
VALVES
The Series 3HBAV is an electrical ball valve ideal for flow control in hot and cold water
HVAC systems. These valves are typically used in conjunction with air conditioning
systems, heating systems, water treatment and production industries. The 3HBAV is
electrically driven open and/or closed via a bidirectional AC motor. The electrical valve
offers a detachable actuator with position switches and indicator. The 3HBAV is available
with modulating or floating actuators.
A in [mm]
3.62 [92]
3.62 [92]
3.62 [92]
4.84 [123]
4.84 [123]
4.84 [123]
Input
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
Floating
Floating
Modulating
479
480_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:59 AM Page 480
Series
ACT
Pneumatic and Electric Actuators

Actuators for Valve and Damper Automation
VALVES
ACT-SR03
Valves, Ball,
Automated
ACT-TD01-110VAC
ACT-MI02-110VAC
480
The W.E. Anderson Series ACT

Actuators are available in either
pneumatic or electric models. The wide
range of torques and voltages means there
is an actuator for almost any application.
The standard ISO 5211 mounting
configuration makes installation to any
valve or damper quick and simple.
W.E. Anderson pneumatic ACT models are
a compact rack-and-pinion design with a
symmetrical structure that ensures fast and
steady action, high precision and high
output power. The corrosion resistant
anodized aluminum body is designed to
withstand the harsh and abusive industrial
environments and provide reliable service.
We offer double acting and spring return
models in a variety of sizes to fit any
application.
W.E. Anderson electric ACT models are
available in two-position or modulating
configurations and NEMA 4X or NEMA 7
rated enclosures. All electric actuators
utilize a high grade powder coated
aluminum enclosure with visual indicators.
The two-position models come standard

with two auxiliary switches, and modulating
models offer an output for position
monitoring. Certain models are equipped
with manual overrides allowing the
operator to cycle the valve manually for
installation or maintenance checks.
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: DA series is double-acting and
pinion).
DA: 40 to 115 psi (2.7 to 7.9 bar);
SR: 80 psi (5.5 bar).
(8.6 bar).
Air Connections:
body and epoxy coated aluminum
end caps.
to 80C).
standard.

TI01 and MI01: 2.5 s;
TI02 and MI02: 5 s;
TI03 and MI03: 5 s;
Duty Rating:
Two-Position: TI01-TI06: 25%.
aluminum.
(-40 to 60C).
NPT.

TD01 4 s;
MD01: 10 s;
Duty Rating: 85%.
aluminum.
(-30 to 60C).
NPT.
FEATURES
ISO 5211 Mounting configuration or
easy installation
Pneumatic actuators offer corrosion
resistance anodized finish
NAMUR mounting configuration on
pneumatic actuators
Two-position electric actuators include
auxiliary limit switches
Modulating electric actuators offer an
output for position monitoring
481_Layout 1 7/30/14 9:08 AM Page 1
Popular Electric Models
Popular Pneumatic Models

Pneumatic Models
ACT-DA01
ACT-DA02
ACT-DA03
ACT-DA04
ACT-DA05
ACT-DA06
ACT-DA07
ACT-DA08
ACT-DA09
ACT-SR02
ACT-SR03
ACT-SR04
ACT-SR05
ACT-SR06
ACT-SR07
ACT-SR08
ACT-SR09
ACT-SR10
ACT-SR11
ACCESSORIES
SN-5A, 5/2 NAMUR 110 VAC Solenoid
SN-3A, 3/2 NAMUR 110 VAC Solenoid
Description
Electric Two-Position, 177 in-lb, 110 VAC
Electric Modulating, 265 in-lb, 110 VAC
EXP Electric Two-Position, 100 in-lb, 110 VAC
EXPElectric Modulating, 100 in-lb, 110 VAC
Note: Optional voltages available for the electric actuators. Change the -110 VAC to
-220 VAC, 24 VDC or 24 VAC. The ACT-TD and ACT-MD are not available with 24
VAC.
VALVES
Electric Models
ACT-TD01-110VAC
ACT-TD02-110VAC
ACT-TD03-110VAC
ACT-TD04-110VAC
ACT-TD05-110VAC
ACT-MD01-110VAC
ACT-MD02-110VAC
ACT-MD03-110VAC
ACT-MD04-110VAC
ACT-MD05-110VAC
ACT-TI01-110VAC
ACT-TI02-110VAC
ACT-TI03-110VAC
ACT-TI04-110VAC
ACT-TI05-110VAC
ACT-TI06-110VAC
ACT-TI07-110VAC
ACT-TI08-110VAC
ACT-TI09-110VAC
ACT-TI10-110VAC
ACT-MI01-110VAC
ACT-MI02-110VAC
ACT-MI03-110VAC
ACT-MI04-110VAC
ACT-MI05-110VAC
ACT-MI06-110VAC
ACT-MI07-110VAC
ACT-MI08-110VAC
ACT-MI09-110VAC
ACT-MI10-110VAC
Description
Double Acting Pneumatic Actuator, 98 in-lb
Spring Return Pneumatic Actuator, 95 in-lb
Spring Return Actuator Torque
110 psi
0
90
Start End
215 189
382 326
650 556
826 708
1175 1025
1628 1508
3178 2705
4556 3736
6911 5707
115 psi
0
90
Start End
231 205
409 353
695 601
885 767
1260 1110
1755 1635
3403 2930
4894 4074
7426 6222
Spring Torque
90
0
Start End
96
70
176
120
274
180
381
263
536
386
817
696
1416 938
2363 1575
3549 2407
Valves, Ball,
Automated
SRSingle Acting Pneumatic Actuator (in-lb)

Air Pressure
80 psi
90 psi
100 psi
70 psi
90 0
Spring
0
90 0
90 0
90
Model
Quantity Start End Start End Start End Start End
ACT-SR02 10
111 86
137 112 163 138 189 164
ACT-SR03 10
199 143 245 189 291 235 336 280
ACT-SR04 10
348 254 424 330 499 405 575 481
ACT-SR05 10
430 312 529 411 628 510 727 609
ACT-SR06 10
608 458 750 599 891 741 1033 883
ACT-SR07 10
783 663 994 874 1206 1085 1417 1297
ACT-SR08 10
1682 1208 2056 1583 2430 1957 2804 2331
ACT-SR09 10
2303 1483 2866 2046 3429 2609 3992 3173
ACT-SR10 10
3479 2274 4337 3133 5195 3991 6053 4849
Double Acting Actuator Torque
DADouble-Action Output Torque (in-lb)
Air Pressure
Model
ACT-DA01
ACT-DA02
ACT-DA03
ACT-DA04
ACT-DA05
ACT-DA06
ACT-DA07
ACT-DA08
ACT-DA09
40 psi
49
104
182
302
396
567
845
1497
2253
50 psi
61
130
228
377
495
709
1056
1871
2816
60 psi
74
155
274
453
594
851
1267
2245
3379
70 psi
86
181
319
528
693
993
1478
2619
3942
80 psi
98
207
365
603
792
1135
1690
2993
4506
90 psi
110
233
411
679
891
1277
1901
3367
5069
100 psi
123
259
456
754
990
1419
2112
3742
5632
110 psi
135
285
502
830
1089
1561
2323
4116
6195
115 psi
142
300
529
875
1148
1649
2450
4340
6533
481
482_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 482
Series
DBV
Brass Ball Valve

Full Port, Economical, 600 psi (41 bar)
VALVES
Series DBV Brass Ball Valve is an economical hand lever ball valve ideal for commercial
or general industrial use. The Series DBV is the ideal choice for a manual shut off valve,
along with many other applications. Valve body, body cap and ball are made of a quality
brass for great durability. Seats and stem packing are constructed of PTFE for long lasting
service as well. Blowout-proof stem provides safety in the event of overpressure. Full port
design allows for maximum Cv while still retaining minimal pressure drop.
Model
DBV-00
DBV-01
DBV-02
DBV-03
DBV-04
Pipe Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Model
DBV-05
DBV-06
DBV-07
DBV-08
DBV-09
Valves, Ball,
Manual
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible
End Connections: 1/4 to 3 female
NPT.
Pressure Limits: -29 Hg to 600 psi
(-736 mm Hg to 41 bar) WOG.
Temperature limit: -40 to 365F (-40
to 185C).
Pipe Size
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Series
BV2M
A
NPT Size in [mm]
1-39/64
1/4
[40.89]
1-45/64
3/8
[43.18]
2-3/16
1/2
[55.63]
2-23/64
3/4
[59.94]
1
2-7/8
[72.90]
1-1/4
3-5/16
[84.07]
1-1/2
3-47/64
[95.00]
2
4-13/32
[112.01]
2-1/2
5-53/64
[148.08]
3
6-29/64
[163.83]
B
C
in [mm] in [mm]
5/16
3-5/32
[7.87]
[80.01]
25/64
[9.91]
19/32
3-55/64 [15.24]
[98.04]
3/4
[19.05]
4-13/32 63/64
[112.01] [24.89]
4-51/64 1-17/64
[121.92] [32.00
1-9/16
5-7/16
[39.88]
[137.92] 1-31/32
[50.04]
2-31/64
8-1/2
[62.99]
[215.90] 2-61/64
[74.93]
D
in [mm]
1-47/64
[43.94]
1-13/16
[45.97]
2-11/64
[55.12]
2-9/32
[57.91]
2-11/16
[68.07]
3-5/32
[80.01]
3-55/64
[98.04]
4-13/64
[106.93]
4-61/64
[125.98]
5-1/8
[130.05]
Wetted Materials:
Body and Body Cap: Brass;
Ball: Chrome plated brass;
Stem: Brass;
Seat and Packing: PTFE.
Other Materials:
Body Gland and Stem Nut: Brass;
Handle Cover: Rubber;
Handle: Steel.
Two-Piece Stainless Steel Ball Valve

Full Port, 1000 psig (69 bar)
E
F
C
B
The Series BV2 is the economical choice for high quality, SS ball valves for use in
chemical, petrochemical, pulp and paper and general applications. The Series BV2 body
and endcaps are constructed of investment cast SS, while stem is 316 SS. Seats and body
seals are 15% glass reinforced PTFE providing broad media compatibility and bubble tight
shutoff to 1000 psig (69 bar). Internally loaded, blowout-proof stem provides safety in the
event of overpressure. Full port design allows for maximum Cv with minimal pressure
drop. Integral actuator mounting pads allows for ease of automation.
Model
BV2M100
BV2M101
BV2M102
BV2M103
BV2M104
482
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Model
BV2M105
BV2M106
BV2M107
BV2M108
BV2M109
Size
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Dimensions (in)
A
B
C
Size (Ref) (Ref) (Ref)
1/4 2.165 1.969 4.055
3/8 2.165 1.969 4.055
1/2 2.559 2.205 5.236
3/4 2.992 2.323 5.236
1
3.465 2.717 6.024
1-1/4 3.976 2.953 6.024
1-1/2 4.331 3.268 7.520
2
4.882 3.622 7.520
2-1/2 6.299 5.039 9.724
3
6.929 5.394 9.724
D
(NPT)
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
E
F
G
H
(UNC)
(+.015) (+.015) (+.015)
(2) 3/16-24 0.500 1.102 N/A
(2) 3/16-24 0.500 1.102 N/A
(2) 3/16-24 0.500 1.102 N/A
(2) 3/16-24 0.882 1.378 N/A
(2) 3/16-24 0.882 1.378 N/A
(2) 1/4-20 1.000 1.500 N/A
(2) 1/4-20 1.000 1.500 N/A
(4) 1/4-20 1.000 1.500 2.000
(4) 1/4-20 1.382 2.165 2.764
(4) 1/4-20 1.382 2.165 2.764
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 1000 psi (69 bar) WOG, 150 psi (10.3 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Body, ball, end cap: CF8M SS; Stem: 316 SS; Seat, thrust
washer: RTFE; End gasket, stem packing: PTFE.
483_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 483
Series
UBV
Uni-Flanged Ball Valve
Forged Brass Construction, Economical, 600 psi (41 bar)

NPT CONNECTION
Series UBV Uni-Flanged Ball Valve is an economical yet durable ball valve great for
residential or industrial use. The forged brass body provides the strength and versatility
needed for any application. The ball valve is constructed of quality brass in conjunction
with PFTE ball seats to work with up to 600 psi (41 bar) of working pressure. Full port
construction helps to reduce flow resistance while still maintaining great durability with
its uni-body construction. Available in a wide variety of sizes for versatile application.
Pipe Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Series
MV
A
in [mm]
1-63/43 [50.29]
2-3/16 [55.37]
2-31/64 [62.99]
2-27/32 [72.14]
3-15/64 [82.04]
3-9/16 [90.42]
B
in [mm]
2-7/8 [72.90]
2-7/8 [72.90]
2-7/8 [72.90]
4 [101.60]
4-5/32 [105.41]
4-5/32 [105.41]
C
in [mm]
35/64 [13.97]
49/64 [19.30]
61/64 [24.38]
1-3/16 [29.97]
1-31/64 [37.85]
1-37/32 [46.99]
FLANGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
End Connections:
Female NPT Pressure Limits: -29 Hg to 600 psi (-736 mm Hg to 41.3 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body and Cap: Brass;
Ball: Chrome plated brass;
Stem: Brass;
Stem Packing and Ball Seat: PTFE.
Other Materials:
Gland and Stem Nut: Brass;
Handle: Steel;
Grip: Rubber.
VALVES
Model
UBV-00
UBV-01
UBV-02
UBV-03
UBV-04
UBV-05
NPT
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Mini Brass Ball Valve

Economical, Compact Design
Valves, Ball,
Manual
Lever Handle
Tee Handle
Screwdriver Slot
Wedge Handle
See website for dimensions

Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valves are ideal for use in small, confined spaces, where
larger valves are of no use. Installation is made easy with a choice of female x female or
male x female process connections. Pure PTFE ball seats provide broad media compatibility
and bubble tight shutoff. Double seal system allows valve to be operated in both directions.
Series MV Mini Brass Ball Valve
Female x Female
Handle Style
Model
Pipe Size
Lever Handle
MVB-LF1
1/8
MVB-LF2
1/4
MVB-LF3
3/8
MVB-LF4
1/2
Tee Handle
MVB-TF1
1/8
MVB-TF2
1/4
MVB-TF3
3/8
MVB-TF4
1/2
Wedge Handle MVB-WF1
1/8
MVB-WF2
1/4
MVB-WF3
3/8
MVB-WF4
1/2
Screwdriver Slot MV5-SF1
1/8
MV5-SF2
1/4
MV5-SF3
3/8
MV5-SF4
1/2
Male x Female
Model
MVB-LM1
MVB-LM2
MVB-LM3
MVB-LM4
MVB-TM1
MVB-TM2
MVB-TM3
MVB-TM4
MVB-WM1
MVB-WM2
MVB-WM3
MVB-WM4
MV5-SM1
MV5-SM2
MV5-SM3
MV5-SM4
Pipe Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquid compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for steam
use.
End Connections: NPT, see model chart.
Pressure Limits: -29 Hg to 450 psi (-736 mm Hg to 31 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Valve Body: Chrome-plated brass;
Valve Ball: Chrome-plated brass;
O-Ring Stem Seal: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball Seats: PTFE.
483
484_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 484
Series
SMV
Mini Stainless Steel Ball Valve

Economical, Compact
1-1/16
[27]
WEDGE
HANDLE
WEDGE HANDLE
1-53/64
[46]
1-53/64
[46]
1-17/32
[39]
1-31/32
[50]
FEMALE
NPT
The Series SMV Mini Stainless Steel Ball Valves are ideal for small, confined spaces,
where larger valves are inappropriate. The 316SS, PTFE and fluoroelastomer wetted
materials are ideal for applications with corrosive media. The handles are made of an ABS
plastic for extra durability. Installation is made easy with a choice of female x female or
male x female process connections. PTFE ball seats provide broad media compatibility and
bubble tight shutoff.
FEATURES
High working pressure
Abrasion-resistant
Easy to install
Economical
VALVES
FEMALE
NPT
1-31/32 [50]
FEMALE NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for steam
use.
End Connections: NPT, see model chart.
Pressure Limits: -29 Hg to 800 psi (-763 mm Hg to 51.1 bar), WOG.
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: CF8M;
Valve ball, insert and stem: 316SS;
Ball seat: PTFE;
O-ring: Fluoroelastomer.
Pipe Size
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
3/8 NPT
1/2 NPT
Series
PGV
MALE NPT
CVValue Max Pressure

3
4
800 psi (51.1 bar)
4
WOG
6
Male X Female
Model
SMV-WM1
SMV-WM2
SMV-WM3
SMV-WM4
Female X Female
Model
SMV-WF1
SMV-WF2
SMV-WF3
SMV-WF4
Compact Plug Valve
Valves, Ball,
Manual
One Piece Body, Low Operating Torque

F
FLOW
OUTLET
D
FLOW
INLET
C
B
A
See website for dimensions.
The Series PGV Compact Plug Valves are designed to stop forward flow of up to
3000 psig with ease. The combination of 1/4 turn operation and low operating torque allows
for quick opening and closing providing positive shut off to instrumentation and process
systems. The PGV series comes in either fractional tube fitting or female NPT connections.
Available in either 316 SS or brass, the one-piece body makes this valve an economical
choice for your application.
Valve Connection
Body Type
Fractional Tube
Fitting
Brass
Female
NPT
484
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.3)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
Model
PGV-BD11
PGV-BD22
PGV-BD32
PGV-BD33
PGV-BD43
PGV-BF12
PGV-BF22
PGV-BF23
PGV-BF43
Valve
Body
SPECIFICATIONS
Body: 1-piece.
Wetted Materials:
Body: 316 SS or brass;
O-rings: PTFE coated fluorocarbon
FKM;
Plug: PTFE coated 316 SS or PTFE
coated brass.
Connection
Type
Fractional Tube
Fitting
316
Stainless
Steel
Female
NPT
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.3)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
0.172 (4.4)
0.172 (4.4)
0.283 (7.2)
0.283 (7.2)
Pressure Limits:
Stainless steel: 3000 psig (207 bar);
Brass: 3000 psig (207 bar);
2.3 mm or 4.4 mm orifice; 2000 psig
(138 bar): 7.2 mm orifice.
to 240C).
Connections: Female NPT, fractional
tube fitting.
Model
PGV-SD11
PGV-SD22
PGV-SD32
PGV-SD33
PGV-SD43
PGV-SF12
PGV-SF22
PGV-SF23
PGV-SF43
485_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:57 AM Page 485
Series
MSV
Compact Two Way Ball Valve

Blowout-Proof Ball & Stem
F
E
D
C
FLOW INLET
FLOW OUTLET
B2
A
B1
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body, connector: 316 SS or brass;
Stem, ball: 316 SS;
Stem o-ring, connector o-ring, backup rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball seats: PTFE.
Valve
Body
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.25. (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
Valve Connection
Body Type
Fractional
Tube Fitting
Brass
Female
NPT
Inlet
Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
Series
3MSV
Model
MSV-BD110
MSV-BD220
MSV-BD230
MSV-BD340
MSV-BD440
MSV-BD450
MSV-BD550
MSV-BF120
MSV-BF240
MSV-BF340
MSV-BF450
Connection Inlet Outlet

Type
Size Size
1/8 1/8
1/4 1/4
Fractional
1/4 1/4
Tube Fitting 3/8 3/8
316
1/2 1/2
Stainless
1/2 1/2
Steel
3/4 3/4
1/8 1/8
Female
1/4 1/4
NPT
1/4 1/4
1/2 1/2

to 176C).
tube fitting.
Model
MSV-SD110
MSV-SD220
MSV-SD230
MSV-SD340
MSV-SD440
MSV-SD450
MSV-SD550
MSV-SF120
MSV-SF240
MSV-SF340
MSV-SF450
VALVES
The Series MSV Compact Two Way Ball Valves are the perfect choice for directional
control of fluid in instrumentation and process systems. The micro finished ball and PTFE
seats ensure quality seal and easy operation. The straight through flow path design allows
for minimal pressure drop. The valve body comes in either brass or 316 SS, offering a
variety of options. Blow out proof ball and stem provides extra durability and safety in the
event of over pressure.
Compact 3-Way Ball Valve

3-Way Blow-Out-Proof Ball & Stem
Flow Path
B-C
A
B-A
All closed
Valves, Ball,
Manual
Handle Position
Right
Left
Straight
C
B
The Series 3MSV Compact 3-Way Ball Valves are the perfect choice for directional
control of fluid in instrumentation and process systems. The micro finished ball and PTFE
seats ensure quality seal and easy operation. The straight through flow path design allows
for minimal pressure drop. The valve body comes in either brass or 316 SS, offering a variety of options. Blow-out-proof ball and stem provides extra durability and safety in the
event of over pressure.
Valve Connection Inlet

Body Type
Size
1/8
1/4
Fractional
1/4
Tube Fitting 3/8
1/2
Brass
1/2
3/4
1/8
Female
1/4
NPT
3/8
1/2
Outlet
Size
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
Model
3MSV-BD110
3MSV-BD220
3MSV-BD230
3MSV-BD340
3MSV-BD440
3MSV-BD450
3MSV-BD550
3MSV-BF120
3MSV-BF240
3MSV-BF340
3MSV-BF450
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body, connector: 316 SS or brass;
Stem, ball: 316 SS;
Stem O-ring, connector O-ring,
back-up rings: Fluoroelastomer;
Ball seats: PTFE.
Connection Inlet Outlet

Type
Size Size
1/8 1/8
1/4 1/4
Fractional
1/4 1/4
Tube Fitting 3/8 3/8
316
Stainless
1/2 1/2
Steel
1/2 1/2
3/4 3/4
1/8 1/8
Female
1/4 1/4
NPT
3/8 3/8
1/2 1/2
Valve
Body
Orifice
in (mm)
0.093 (2.36)
0.125 (3.18)
0.187 (4.75)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)
0.437 (11.10)
0.125 (3.18)
0.250 (6.35)
0.250 (6.35)
0.437 (11.10)

to 176C).
tube fitting.
Model
3MSV-SD110
3MSV-SD220
3MSV-SD230
3MSV-SD340
3MSV-SD440
3MSV-SD450
3MSV-SD550
3MSV-SF120
3MSV-SF240
3MSV-SF340
3MSV-SF450
485
486_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:55 AM Page 486
Series
ABFV
Automated Butterfly Valve

Resilient Seated, Direct Mount Actuators
Electric
Pneumatic
Valves, Butterfly,
Automated
VALVES
*Please see website for dimensional drawings

The ABFV Series is offered with standard 316 SS disc, a through shaft that does not
come in contact with the media, and choices of EPDM, BUNA-N, or fluoroelastomer liners
for great chemical compatibility. Valve design has integral ISO mounting for direct mount
actuators creating a more compact automated package. Body is epoxy coated for durable
and attractive finish. Liner fully covers the body and assures tight seal with mating flanges
without additional gaskets. One-piece shaft ensures positive valve positioning and is an
anti-blowout design. Series ABFV is perfect for flow control of water in chillers, cooling
towers, and thermal storage systems.
ABFV valves come in two-way and three-way packages. Three-way assemblies include
valves and actuators mounted onto a 125# cast iron tee. When ordering you have the choice
of valve arrangement for mixing or diverting applications. Valves come in lug or wafer
style and wafer models have guide holes for bolts.
ABFV is an economical automated valve package with either an electric or pneumatic
Two-position actuators use the 115 VAC input to drive each of the valve ports open or
closed, while the modulating actuator accepts a 4 to 20 mA input for infinite valve
positioning. Actuator features include thermal overload protection to withstand stall
conditions, visual position indication and a permanently lubricated gear train.
Actuators are constructed of anodized aluminum and are epoxy coated for years of
corrosion free service.
Cv Values
Valve Size
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
10
0.1
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.8
2
3
4
5
20
5
8
12
17
29
45
89
151
234
30
12
20
22
36
61
95
188
320
495
40
24
37
39
78
133
205
408
694
1072
50
45
65
70
139
237
366
727
1237
1911
60
64
98
116
230
392
605
1202
2034
3162
70
90
144
183
364
620
958
1903
3240
5005
80
125
204
275
546
930
1437
2854
4859
7507
90
135
220
302
600
1022
1539
3136
5340
8250
SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Body
Body: 2-way or 3-way.
Line Size: 2 to 12.
End Connections: Wafer or lug pattern
designed for flanges to ANSI B16.1,
BS4504, DIN 2501.
Pressure Limits: Up to 8: 225 psi
(15.5 bar); 10 to 12: 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Wetted Materials: Disc: 316 SS; Liner:
EPDM BUNA-N, or Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: EPDM:
-30 to 275F (-34 to 135C); Buna-N: 10
to 180F (-12.2 to 82.2C);
Fluoroelastomer: 400F (204C).
Other Materials: Shaft: 316SS;
Bottom/top bushing: Bronze; Body: Cast
iron; Shaft seal: EPDM.
ACTUATORS
Electric U and V Series
Power Consumption: (Locked rotor
current): U_1, V_1: .55 A; U_2, 3, 4,
V_2, 3, 4: 0.75 A; U_ 5, 6, 7, V_5, 6, 7:
1.1 A; U_ 8, V_8: 2.6A; U_9, V_9: 2.9A.
(Only for 115 VAC, for other voltages
contact the factory).
Cycle Time: (sec. per 90): U_1, V_1:
2.5; U_2, 3, V_2, 3: 5; U_4, V_4: 10; U_
5, 6, V_5, 6: 15; U_7, V_7: 30; U_ 8,
V_8: 12; U_9, V_9: 14. (Only for 115
VAC, for other voltages contact the
factory).
Duty Cycle: U_1: 75%; U_2 to 7: 25%;
U_8, 9: 100%; V_1 to 7: 75%; V_8, 9:
100%.
NEMA 7 (Class 1, Div. II Groups A, B, C,
D).
Housing Material: Aluminum with
Temperature Limit: 0 to 150F

(-18 to 65C).
Modulating Input (V Series):
4 to 20 mA.
Standard Features: Manual override
and visual position indicator except
modulating units.
pinion).
bar).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 120 psig
(8 bar).
Air Connections: DA1 to 5 and SR2 to
5: 1/8 female NPT, all others: 1/4
female NPT.
Air Consumption: (in3 per stroke) DA1:
2.32, DA2: 6.59, DA3: 12.14, DA4:
16.32, DA5: 30.2, DA6: 45.3, DA7: 61.0,
DA8: 106.9, DA9: 137.9, DAA: 220.1,
DAB: 348.1, DAC: 915.4, SR2: 7.7,
SR3: 14.2, SR4: 17.2, SR5: 32.4, SR6:
54.4, SR7: 85.4, SR8: 122.1, SR9:
146.5, SRA: 215.1, SRB: 462.6, SRC:
945.9.
Cycle Time: (sec. per 90): DA1: .03,
DA2: .04., DA3: .08, DA4: .12, DA5: .19,
DA6: 0.27, DA7: .47, DA8: .66, DA9:
.93, DAA: 1.1, DAB: 1.7, DAC: 4.5, SR2:
.09, SR3: .14, SR4: .22, SR5: .33, SR6:
.46, SR7: .78, SR8: .90, SR9: .97, SRA:
1.34, SRB: 2.19, SRC: 6.20.
caps.
(-20 to 82C).
standard.
indicator.
486
487_Layout 1 7/8/14 4:09 PM Page 487
Series
ABFV
VALVES
Valves, Butterfly,
Automated

Example
ABFV 3 03 WFB 3 3 1 DA3 E SV ABFV303WFB331DA3E-SV
Construction ABFV
2
Configuration
Two-Way
3
Three-Way
Size
02
2
25
2-1/2
03
3
04
4
05
5
06
6
08
8
10
10
12
12
Body
WFB
Wafer
LTB
Lug
Stem
3
316 SS
Disc
3
316 SS
Liner
1
EPDM
2
Buna-N
3
Fluoroelastomer
Actuator Type
DA1
Direct Acting Rack and Pinion Actuator, Size 32
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA6
DA7
DA8
DA9
DAA
DAB
DAC
SR2
Spring Return Rack and Pinion Actuator, Size 52
SR3
SR4
SR5
SR6
SR7
SR8
SR9
SRA
SRB
SRC
U_1
Electric Two Position, Size 100
U_2
U_3
U_4
U_5
U_6
U_7
U_8
U_9
U_A
V_1
Electric Modulating, Size 100
V_2
V_3
Example:
3-way top view
V_4
(Common/
V_5
NO/NC)
V_6
V_7
Common
NO
V_8
V_9
NC
V_A
Arrangement
A
2-Way, Normally Open
C
2-Way, Normally Closed
E
3-Way, Common/NO/NC
G
3-Way, Common/NC/NO
I
3-Way, NO/Common/NC
K
3-Way, NC/Common/NO
L
3-Way, NO/NC/Common
M
3-Way, NC/NO/Common
Options
SV Factory Mounted Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic Only)
EX Explosion-Proof Electric Actuator (Electric Only)
For Electric U and V actuators middle term, V_1, is the

power supply required. Model Code 1 is for 120 VAC,
2 is for 220 VAC, 3 is for 24 VAC and 4 is for 24 VDC.
Example, U11, is 120 VAC two position.
Built Model Numbers: See page 488 (Series ABFV)
487
488_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:54 AM Page 488
Series
ABFV
For your convenience, sample model configurations are listed with the proper sized actuators. Models listed have cast iron body, 316 SS disc, and EPDM liner and O-rings. The 2-way models
have a valve arrangement shown of normally closed, while the 3-way models have no valve arrangement code shown, please specify when ordering. All electric actuators shown are 115 VAC
and NEMA 4. All pneumatic actuators are sized with an air supply pressure of 80 psi. Consult the factory for model number changes for electric actuator options of explosion-proof and other
supply voltages.
2-Way, Lug Style, EPDM Liner

Double Acting Pneumatic
Size
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Spring Return Pneumatic
Model
ABFV202LTB331DA3C
ABFV225LTB331DA3C
ABFV203LTB331DA3C
ABFV204LTB331DA3C
ABFV205LTB331DA5C
ABFV206LTB331DA5C
ABFV208LTB331DA6C
ABFV210LTB331DA8C
ABFV212LTB331DAAC
Model
ABFV202LTB331SR4C
ABFV225LTB331SR4C
ABFV203LTB331SR5C
ABFV204LTB331SR6C
ABFV205LTB331SR6C
ABFV206LTB331SR8C
ABFV208LTB331SR8C
ABFV210LTB331SR9C
ABFV212LTB331SRBC
Two Position Electric

Model
ABFV202LTB331U12C
ABFV225LTB331U12C
ABFV203LTB331U13C
ABFV204LTB331U14C
ABFV205LTB331U16C
ABFV206LTB331U16C
ABFV208LTB331U17C
ABFV210LTB331U19C
ABFV212LTB331U19C
Modulating Electric
Model
ABFV202LTB331V12C
ABFV225LTB331V12C
ABFV203LTB331V13C
ABFV204LTB331V14C
ABFV205LTB331V16C
ABFV206LTB331V16C
ABFV208LTB331V17C
ABFV210LTB331V19C
ABFV212LTB331V19C
Model Numbers shown are normally closed, change the model code at the end from C to A for normally open.
VALVES
2-Way, Wafer Style, EPDM Liner

Size
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Model
ABFV202WFB331DA3C
ABFV225WFB331DA3C
ABFV203WFB331DA3C
ABFV204WFB331DA3C
ABFV205WFB331DA5C
ABFV206WFB331DA5C
ABFV208WFB331DA6C
ABFV210WFB331DA8C
ABFV212WFB331DAAC
Model
ABFV202WFB331SR4C
ABFV225WFB331SR4C
ABFV203WFB331SR5C
ABFV204WFB331SR6C
ABFV205WFB331SR6C
ABFV206WFB331SR8C
ABFV208WFB331SR8C
ABFV210WFB331SR9C
ABFV212WFB331SRBC
Modulating Electric
Model
ABFV202WFB331U12C
ABFV225WFB331U12C
ABFV203WFB331U13C
ABFV204WFB331U14C
ABFV205WFB331U16C
ABFV206WFB331U16C
ABFV208WFB331U17C
ABFV210WFB331U19C
ABFV212WFB331U19C
Model
ABFV202WFB331V12C
ABFV225WFB331V12C
ABFV203WFB331V13C
ABFV204WFB331V14C
ABFV205WFB331V16C
ABFV206WFB331V16C
ABFV208WFB331V17C
ABFV210WFB331V19C
ABFV212WFB331V19C
Valves, Butterfly,
Automated
Model Numbers shown are normally closed, change the model code at the end from C to A for normally open.
3-Way, Lug Style, EPDM Liner
Size
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
Model*
ABFV302LTB331DA3_
ABFV325LTB331DA3_
ABFV303LTB331DA4_
ABFV304LTB331DA5_
ABFV305LTB331DA6_
ABFV306LTB331DA7_
ABFV308LTB331DA9_
ABFV310LTB331DAA_
ABFV312LTB331DAB_
Model*
ABFV302LTB331SR5_
ABFV325LTB331SR6_
ABFV303LTB331SR6_
ABFV304LTB331SR7_
ABFV305LTB331SR9_
ABFV306LTB331SR9_
ABFV308LTB331SR9_
ABFV310LTB331SRB_
ABFV312LTB331SRC_

Model*
ABFV302LTB331U13_
ABFV325LTB331U14_
ABFV303LTB331U15_
ABFV304LTB331U16_
ABFV305LTB331U16_
ABFV306LTB331U17_
ABFV308LTB331U19_
ABFV310LTB331U19_
ABFV312LTB331U1A_
Modulating Electric
Model*
ABFV302LTB331V13_
ABFV325LTB331V14_
ABFV303LTB331V15_
ABFV304LTB331V16_
ABFV305LTB331V16_
ABFV306LTB331V17_
ABFV308LTB331V19_
ABFV310LTB331V19_
ABFV312LTB331V1A_
*Complete model includes Valve Arrangement.
OPTIONS
-Contact factory for model number change
Solenoid Valve - Add suffix -SV
Valve Arrangement: See page 487 (Series ABFV)
488
489_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:53 AM Page 489
Series
BFV
Butterfly Valve
Low Cost, Lever Operated, Lug or Wafer Pattern, 225 psig
n=
# OF HOLES
A
A
B
n=
# OF HOLES
Wafer Style
Lug Style
Dimensions (in)
Size A
B
2
6.34 3.15
2-1/2 6.89 3.5
3
7.13 3.74
4
7.87 4.49
5
8.39 5
C
1-3/4
1-7/8
1-7/8
2-1/8
2-1/4
APPLICATIONS
Perfect for on-off or throttling service
Ideal for shut-off of water in chillers, cooling towers, and thermal storage
systems
Sewage systems, waste water treatment
Liner
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
2-1/2 EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
3
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
4
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
5
PTFE
Model
BFV202WFB311HL0
BFV202WFB341HL0
BFV202LTB311HL0
BFV202LTB341HL0
BFV225WFB311HL0
BFV225WFB341HL0
BFV225LTB311HL0
BFV225LTB341HL0
BFV203WFB311HL0
BFV203WFB341HL0
BFV203LTB311HL0
BFV203LTB341HL0
BFV204WFB311HL0
BFV204WFB341HL0
BFV204LTB311HL0
BFV204LTB341HL0
BFV205WFB311HL0
BFV205WFB341HL0
Size Liner
EPDM
5
PTFE
EPDM
6
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
8
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
10 EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
12 EPDM
PTFE
EPDM
PTFE
WF=Wafer Pattern
LT=Lug Pattern
BFV202WFB311HL0
Model
BFV205LTB311HL0
BFV205LTB341HL0
BFV206WFB311HL0
BFV206WFB341HL0
BFV206LTB311HL0
BFV206LTB341HL0
BFV208WFB312MG0
BFV208WFB342MG0
BFV208LTB312MG0
BFV208LTB342MG0
BFV210WFB312MG0
BFV210WFB342MG0
BFV210LTB312MG0
BFV210LTB342MG0
BFV212WFB312MG0
BFV212WFB342MG0
BFV212LTB312MG0
BFV212LTB342MG0
Cv
135
220
302
600
1022
Weight
5.5
7.05
7.93
10.8
15.43
Size
6
8
10
12
A
8.9
10.24
11.5
13.27
B
5.47
6.89
7.99
9.53
C
2-1/4
2-1/2
2-3/4
3-1/8
n, WF
8
8
12
12
n, LT
8
8
12
12
Cv
1579
3136
5340
8250
Weight
17.2
29.1
42.33
71.65
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVEBODY
Service:Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 2 to 12.
Body Style: 2-way, wafer or lug butterfly.
End Connections: Flange, to be used with flanges that are ANSI Class 125
(B16.1) and ANSI Class 150 (B16.5) dimensions.
Pressure Limit: 225 psi (15.5 bar) WOG.
Wetted Materials:
Body material:Ductile iron;
Disc:316 SS;
Seat and O-ring:EPDM or PTFE;
Stem: 410 SS.
Temperature Limits: Disc: EPDM:-50 to 250F (-46 to 121C); PTFE: 0 to 300F
(-18 to 149C).
Bearings:Nylatron.
Flow Rate: See Cv chart.
Operator:2 to 6: 10-position locking hand lever; 8 to 12: manual gear.
Cv Values
Degree Opening
Size 10 20 30 40
2
0.1 5
12 24
2-1/2 0.2 8
20 37
3
0.3 12 22 39
4
0.5 17 36 78
5
0.8 29 61 133
6
2 45 95 205
8
3 89 188 408
10
4 151 320 694
12
5 234 495 1072
50
45
65
70
139
237
366
727
1237
1911
60
64
98
116
230
392
605
1202
2047
3162
70
90
144
183
364
620
958
1903
3240
5005
80
125
204
275
546
930
1437
2854
4859
7505
Full Open
90
135
220
302
600
1022
1579
3136
5340
8250
Cv is the number of U.S. GPM of 60F water that will pass through
the valve with a 1 PSI pressure drop.
Operating Torque Valves (inch lb)
EPDM Seats
Size (inches)
2-1/2 3
4
Service Pressure 2
86 126 179 295
50 psi
108 144 195 310
100 psi
126 150 210 335
150 psi
150 198 297 400
200 psi
PTFE Seats
Service Pressure
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
200 psi
Size (inches)
2
2-1/2 3
125 130 195
130 145 210
142 160 248
180 220 340
4
390
430
443
490
5
540
610
699
725
6
750
780
847
940
5
650
690
720
795
6
890
940
974
1020
8
1440
1490
1549
1800
10
2466
2910
3360
3890
8
1690
1710
1770
1890
12
3510
4100
5560
7558
10
3699
4365
5040
5835
12
5265
6150
8340
11367
489
Valves, Butterfly,
Manual
FEATURES
Phenolic backed cartridge seat design for extended service and ease of
replacement. Can be used for vacuum service.
Extended neck for insulation no fabricated extensions required.
Machined flats attach disc/stem no pins.
Valve features a retainer lip for dead end service.
Triple seal reduces possibility of external leakage.
Silicone free from the factory no aftermarket cleaning required.
n, WF n, LT
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
4
8
8
Wafer Style
WF
VALVES
The most critical aspect of the Series BFV Butterfly Valves is the cartridge seat design,
which alleviates installation problems associated with common dove tail design seats.
Valve torque is lower and more consistent because the seat dynamics do not rely on being
mated between two flanges. Precision machining of the disc and body allow the cartridge
design to maintain a tighter disc to seat tolerance, providing a perfect low torque seal each
and every time the valve is cycled. Seat to disc seal is independent of flange support and
capable of full rated dead end service. Select from wafer or lug patterns with either a 10position locking handle lever or manual gear operator. Standard valves provide bubble tight
sealing to 225 psi (15.5 bar) and are designed to comply with MSS-SP-67 and API-609.
Size
2
Lug Style
LT
490_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:53 AM Page 490
Series
SAE
Butterfly Valve
Low Cost, S.A.E. Flange, Hydraulic Reservoir Shut Off Valve
K
H
G
L-O-RING
I.D. WIDTH
E - 4 PLACES
C
B
Valves, Butterfly,
Manual
VALVES
B
Valve A
Size in (mm) in (mm)
2
2
2
(50.80) (50.80)
2
2-1/2 2-1/2
(63.50) (50.80)
2-1/2
3
3
(76.20) (63.50)
3-1/4
4
4
(101.60) (82.55)
4
5
5
(127.00) (101.60)
C
in (mm)
3-1/16
(77.79)
3-1/2
(88.90)
4-3/16
(106.36)
5-1/8
(130.18)
6
(152.40)
The Series SAE Butterfly Valves are an ideal low cost hydraulic reservoir shut off valve.
These valves are designed to meet the demanding needs of the fluid power industry. Unique
features include an O-ring flange face seal complying with S.A.E. J518 dimensional
requirements. This design provides for bubble tight reservoir shut off up to 25 psi (1.72
bar) and a max temperature of 180F (82.2C). The compact envelope dimension reduces
space requirements. Unit allows for adjustment by incorporating an open/close detent
position lock which can be infinitely positioned to achieve a desired flow rate. The unique
design resists the vibrations associated with hydraulic pumps and pumping systems.
Optional fluoroelastomer seals and locking handle are available.
APPLICATIONS
As a standard feature on injection molding machines and large earth moving
equipment, the low cost SAE valve provides excellent shut-off on the reservoir side
of hydraulic systems. The valve is typically open during normal operation until service
would be required on any part of the hydraulic system, at which time the valve is
closed, allowing for service without loss of hydraulic fluid.
D
in (mm)
1-11/16
(42.86)
2
(50.80)
2-7/16
(61.91)
3-1/16
(77.79)
3-5/8
(92.08)
E
in (mm)
1/2
(12.70)
1/2
(12.70)
5/8
(15.88)
5/8
(15.88)
5/8
(15.88)
F
in (mm)
1-3/4
(44.45)
2-1/16
(52.39)
2-5/16
(58.74)
2-3/4
(69.85)
3-5/16
(84.14)
G
in (mm)
2-13/16
(71.44)
3-1/8
(79.38)
3-3/8
(85.73)
4
(101.60)
4-3/8
(111.13)
H
in (mm)
5-1/8
(130.18)
5-1/8
(130.18)
5-1/8
(130.18)
5-5/8
(142.88)
6
(152.40)
J
in (mm)
13/16
(20.64)
13/16
(20.64)
1-1/16
(26.99)
1-1/4
(31.75)
1-1/2
(38.10)
K
in (mm)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
5
(127.00)
I.D. x
WD
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
1/8
(3.18)
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 2 to 5.
Body Style: 2-way, lug butterfly.
End Connections: O-ring flange face seal (SAE J518).
Pressure Limit: Shut-off: 25 psi (1.72 bar) bubble tight; Body shell: 500 psi (34.5
bar).
Wetted Materials: Body and disc/vane: Cast iron; O-rings: Buna-N or
fluoroelastomer; Stem: Steel.
Temperature Limits: Buna-N: 180F (82C); Fluoroelastomer: 300F (149C).
Model
SAE-20
SAE-25
SAE-30
SAE-40
SAE-50
S.A.E. Flange Size

2
2-1/2
3
4
5
Fluoroelastomer O-ring seals. Add VIT suffix (SAE-30-VIT)

Locking handle. Add LHR suffix (SAE-30-LHR)
490
L
in (mm)
2-1/4
(57.15)
2-3/4
(69.85)
3-3/8
(85.73)
4-3/8
(111.13)
5-3/8
(136.53)
491_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:52 AM Page 491
Series
PBFV
Thermoplastic Butterfly Valve

One-Piece Body, Wafer Design
E
E
M
C
K B.C.
S
H
F
B
Valve
B
Size A
7-57/64 6-9/64
2
(201)
(156)
9-9/64 7-31/64
3
(232)
(190)
10-3/64 8-11/64
4
(255)
(212)
11-3/16 9-3/8
6
(284)
(238)
8/8* 12-23/64 10-7/16
(314)
(265)
10* 14-7/8 12-19/32
(378)
(320)
C
4-23/32
(120)
5-23/64
(136)
5-53/64
(148)
6-29/64
(164)
7-3/32
(180)
8-35/64
(217)
E
1-37/64
(40)
1-37/64
(40)
1-37/64
(40)
1-37/64
(40)
1-37/64
(40)
1-31/32
(50)
E
1-3/8
(35)
1-3/8
(35)
1-3/8
(35)
1-3/8
(35)
1-3/8
(35)
1-55/64
(47)
F
23/32
(18)
3/4
(19)
3/4
(19)
7/8
(22)
61/64
(24)
29/32
(23)
G
4-13/32
(112)
4-13/32
(112)
4-13/32
(112)
4-13/32
(112)
4-13/32
(112)
5-11/32
(136)
H
1-57/64
(48)
2-3/64
(52)
2-21/64
(112)
2-17/64
(66)
2-53/64
(72)
2-7/8
(73)
K
4-59/64 (125)/
5-23/32 (145)
5-57/64 (150)/
6-11/16 (170)
7-3/32 (180)/
7-9/16 (192)
7-31/64 (190)/
8-15/32 (215)
9-29/64
(240)
10-5/8 (270)/
11-47/64 (298)
L
8-21/32
(220)
9-41/64
(245)
9-41/64
(245)
12-19/32
(320)
12-19/32
(320)
15-25/64
(391)
M
2-3/4
(70)
2-3/4
(70)
2-3/4
(70)
2-3/4
(70)
2-3/4
(70)
4-1/64
(102)
N
23/64
(9)
23/64
(9)
23/64
(9)
23/64
(9)
23/64
(9)
7/16
(11)
S
13/32
(10)
31/64
(12)
5/8
(16)
25/32
(20)
25/32
(20)
1-1/32
(26)
Weight
Holes lb (kg)
4
4.5
(2.0)
8
6
(2.7)
8
8
(3.6)
8
13.5
(6.1)
8
21 (9.5)/
30 (13.6)
8
37
(16.8)
*Manual gear operator
Model
Disc Material
PBFV-202L312L PVC
PBFV-202L311L PVC
PBFV-203L312L PVC
PBFV-203L311L PVC
PBFV-204L312L PVC
PBFV-204L311L PVC
PBFV-206L312L PVC
PBFV-206L311L PVC
PBFV-208L312L PVC
PBFV-208L312G PVC
PBFV-210L312G PVC
PBFV-208L311L PVC
PBFV-208L311G PVC
PBFV-210L311G PVC
Series
MGO
Seal
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Size
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
8
8
10
8
8
10
Cv
126
126
282
282
580
580
1134
1134
2311
2311
3655
2311
2311
3655
Model
PBFV-202L322L
PBFV-202L321L
PBFV-203L322L
PBFV-203L321L
PBFV-204L322L
PBFV-204L321L
PBFV-206L322L
PBFV-206L321L
PBFV-208L322L
PBFV-208L322G
PBFV-210L322G
PBFV-208L321L
PBFV-208L321G
PBFV-210L321G
Disc Material
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
CPVC
Wetted Materials: Body material: PPH; Disc: PVC or CPVC; Liner and seals:
FPM or EPDM; Stem: 316 SS.
Temperature Limits: PVC: 150F
(66C); CPVC: 215F (102C).
Operator: L at end of model number
denotes locking hand lever. G at end of
model number denotes manual gear.
Seal
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
FPM
EPDM
EPDM
EPDM
FPM
FPM
FPM
Valves, Butterfly,
Manual
Size Cv
2 126
2 126
3 282
3 282
4 580
4 580
6 1134
6 1134
8 2311
8 2311
10 3655
8 2311
8 2311
10 3655
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Size: 2 to 10.
Body Style: Wafer.
End Connections: Flange, to be used
with flanges that are ANSI class 150
dimensions.
Gear Operator
Rugged, Cast Iron Housing
F
H
B
G
A
K
E
Size in
2 to 6
8 to 10
12
A (mm)
2.047 (52)
2.953 (75)
3.203 (81.36)
B (mm)
1.781 (45.24)
2.484 (63.10)
3.156 (80.17)
C (mm)
2.922 (74.22)
3.984 (101.20)
4.656 (118.27)
E (mm)
2.047 (52)
2.953 (75)
3.203 (81.36)
F (mm)
6.000 (152.4)
9.844 (250.03)
8.938 (227.01)
G (mm)
2.953 (75)
3.391 (86.12)
3.281 (83.34)
VALVES
The Series PBFV Thermoplastic Butterfly Valves are an economical thermoplastic

constructed butterfly valve ideal for chemical and wastewater applications. A one-piece
body design incorporates fully supported flanged bolt holes to prevent stressing of the
mating pipe flanges. Series PBFV valves feature a blowout-proof SS stem and a unique,
full body liner that has a V-notch retention design that assures positive sealing of the liner
to the valve body. An integrally molded face seal provides positive sealing against the
mating flange without the need for additional gaskets. Plastic construction gives this valve
superior corrosion resistance and the valves will not contaminate sensitive fluids that come
into contact with them.
H (mm)
5.906 (150.02)
11.813 (300.04)
11.813 (300.04)
J (mm)
1.391(35.32)
2.766 (70.25)
2.766 (70.25)
K (mm)
.109 (2.78)
.125 (3.18)
.125 (3.18)
SPECIFICATIONS
The Series MGO Gear Operators offer heavy-duty on-off or throttling service for valves
Materials: Cast iron housing, hardened steel internals, NBR seals.
or dampers, including our BFV Series butterfly valves. These gear operators are selfKeyway Type: Square ISO male.
lubricated for smooth, trouble-free operation. The rugged, cast iron body with O-ring body
Ratio: 2 to 6: 24:1; 8 to 10: 30:1; 12: 50:1.
seals is weatherproof. A self-locking worm and worm gear holds the valve in the desired
Mechanical Advantage: 2 to 6: 6.72; 8 to 10: 8.1; 12: 13.5.
position. Features include a readily accessible hand wheel, a valve position indicator and
mechanical travel stops that permit field adjustment for valve movement to specific degrees
of rotation.
Output Torque in-lb (N*m)
Weight lb (kg)
Model
Compatibility
Max
Min
11.5 (5.2)
MGO-1T Works with 2, 2.5, & 3 size BFV Series butterfly valves 1328 (150) 2390 (270)
11.5 (5.2)
MGO-2T Works with 4 size BFV Series butterfly valves
1328 (150) 2390 (270)
11.5 (5.2)
1328 (150) 2390 (270)
28.6 (13)
4425 (500) 6196 (1200)
28.6 (13)
4425 (500) 6196 (1200)
33 (15)
8851 (1000) 10621 (1200)
491
492_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:51 AM Page 492
Series
38R
Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve
Valves, Globe
VALVES
Require No External Power
Series 38R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valves require no external power

sources and are ideal for regulating the temperature of tanks, process streams and various
types of industrial equipment. The actuators are made with a rugged die-cast aluminum
housing with a fully enclosed bellow assembly and internal over-range protection. Valves
are offered in 1/2 through 6 connection sizes and 1/8 through 6 port sizes. The valve
bodies are available in single-seated direct or reverse-acting, double-seated direct or
reverse-acting, and 3-way designs with four choices of body material: bronze, cast-iron,
cast-steel, and 316 SS. Actuators are available with or without indicating dials or in FailSafe. Non-indicating actuators feature a lower profile and should be implemented where
space constraints may be an issue while the indicating actuator allows the operator to
verify the process temperature and aid in temperature adjustment. Fail-Safe actuators are
designed to cause the valve to fail in the safe control position (open in cooling application,
closed in a heating application) should some accidental damage occur to the terminal
system, resulting in loss of pressure charge. Also available with the Series 38R are a wide
range of capillaries, bulbs, and thermowells.
Please request a copy of our Valve Catalog, CT-VC, or visit our website at
www.dwyer-inst.com to see full model information and ordering details for the 38R
Series.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVEBODY
Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Body Style: 2-way or 3-way.
End Connections: 1/2 to 2 female NPT.
Wetted Materials: Body material: Bronze or 316 SS; Trim: 316 SS; Packing: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: 410F (210C) @ 250 psi (17.24 bar).
ACTUATOR
Power Requirements: Fully self-contained, no external power required.
Indicator: 3-1/2 dial thermometer, SS case, swivel and angle adjustable (available
for Indicating Actuator only).
Housing: Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated blue finish.
Set Point Scale: Integral to housing.
Bellows: High-pressure brass, corrosion resistant, tinplated finish.
Adjustment Screws: Brass.
Range Adjustment Spring: Cadmium plated.
Overrange Protection: 100F over upper range limit for temporary situations
Note: See website for additional options.
492
493_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:50 AM Page 493
38R Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve Model Chart

38R-DA3VA32-101362-R09, 1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting, Non-Indicating Actuator,
38R D00VA32 1 01 36 2 R09 Brass Union Connection, Brass Thermowell, 1-1/4 External Connection, Range 155 to 250F (68 to 121C)
38R
Self-Acting Temperature Control Valve
D00VA32
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
D01VA32
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
D02VA32
1 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
D03VA32
1-1/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
D04VA32
1-1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
D05VA32
2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Direct Acting
R00VA32
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
R01VA32
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
R02VA32
1 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
R03VA32
1-1/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
R04VA32
1-1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
R05VA32
2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way Bronze Valve, Reverse Acting
D00VA42
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316SS Valve, Direct Acting
D01VA42
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
D02VA42
1 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
D03VA42
1-1/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
D04VA42
1-1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
D05VA42
2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Direct Acting
R00VA42
1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
R01VA42
3/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
R02VA42
1 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
R03VA42
1-1/4 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
R04VA42
1-1/2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
R05VA42
2 NPT Single Seat Two-Way 316 SS Valve, Reverse Acting
300WA31
1/2 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
301WA31
3/4 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
302WA31
1 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
303WA31
1-1/4 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
304WA31
1-1/2 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
305WA31
2 NPT Three-Way Bronze Valve
300WA41
1/2 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
301WA41
3/4 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
302WA41
1 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
303WA41
1-1/4 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
304WA41
1-1/2 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
305WA41
2 NPT Three-Way 316 SS Valve
1
Actuator
Non-Indicating Actuator
2
Indicating Actuator
01
Bulb and Capillary
Brass Union Connection
02
316 SS Union Connection
03
Brass Adjustable Union Connection
04
316SS Adjustable Union Connection
05
Brass Plain Bulb
06
316 SS Plain Bulb
07
FEP Covered Brass Bulb
08
FEP Covered 316 SS Bulb
09
Brass Union with Stainless Steel Spiral Armor
10
316 SS Union with Stainless Steel Spiral Armor
36
Capillary Length
Capillary Length in Feet. Example 36 is 36 length
0
Thermowell
No Thermowell
1
316 SS Thermowell, 1-1/4 External Connection
2
Brass Thermowell, 1-1/4 External Connection
R03 30 to 115F (-1 to 46C)
Temperature Range
R04 50 to 140F (10 to 60C)
R05 75 to 165F (24 to 74C)
R06 105 to 195F (41 to 91C)
R07 125 to 215F (52 to 102C)
R09 155 to 250F (68 to 121C)
R10 200 to 280F (93 to 138C)
R11 225 to 315F (107 to 157C)
R12 255 to 370F (124 to 188C)
R13 295 to 420F (146 to 216C)
R14 310 to 440F (154 to 227C)
Example
Series
Valve
Valves, Globe
493
VALVES
494_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:49 AM Page 494
Hi-Flow Control Valves

Globe Valves, Ideal for Steam and Water Flow Control, 1/2 to 2-1/2 Sizes, 2-Way or 3-Way
C
C
A
B
Valves, Globe
VALVES
2-way with positioner
2-way with air-to-close actuator
2-way with air-to-open actuator
Hi-Flow control valves are single seated, top or cage guided globe valves - probably
the simplest, from a construction standpoint, yet most versatile control valve in use. The
Hi-Flow valve can fit applications with a smaller size valve since the valve has a greater
flow capacity than most conventional valves of the same size.
Coupled with the high flow capacity, the Hi-Flow valve maintains a wide rangeability of
50:1 to insure precise control. Heavy duty Hi-Flow valves are ruggedly constructed of the
highest quality materials, precision machined, and performance tested to assure years of
trouble free service. Standard packing consists of PTFE V-rings and wiper to minimize
friction without leakage at high operating pressures. Available in brass, iron, or 316 SS
body, trim is 316 SS with all welded plug construction to provide superior durability and
corrosion resistance.
FEATURES
Wide rangeability of 50:1
Exceptional shut-off and leak rate that meets ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class IV (0.01% of
Cv in the closed position)
Selectable fail safe condition with Air-to-Raise or Air-to-Lower actuators and
Push-to-Open or Push-to-Close valve bodies
Linear or equal percentage flow characteristics
Low flow options of restricted trim or needle plug
Removable and replaceable seat ring
APPLICATIONS
Flow control, mixing, or diverting service
Perfect for steam, water or compatible glycol solutions
Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air

can create a hazardous environment because a small
amount of gas continuously vents to atmosphere.
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Service: Compatible liquids, gases, and steam.
Line Size: 1/2 to 2-1/2.
Body Style: 2-way or 3-way globe.
End Connections: 1/2 to 2 female NPT, 2-1/2 flanged.
Pressure Limit: Iron and bronze body: 250 psi (17.2 bar); 316 SS body: 300 psi
(20.7 bar).
Wetted Materials:
Body material: Iron, bronze, or 316 SS;
Trim: 316 SS.
Packing: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 400F (-7 to 204.4C).
ACTUATOR
Type: Pneumatic spring/diaphragm.
Control Signal: 3 to 15 psi (0.21 to 1.0 bar) standard. Custom ranges available.
Maximum Supply Pressure: 220, 222, and 230: 100 psi (6.89 bar). 221, 223,
231, and 233: 50 psi (3.45 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 female NPT.
Positioners and current-to-pressure transducers available factory mounted.
How to Order:
Select model number from model chart or standard product chart and supply
maximum upstream pressure, USP.
Positioners: See page 522 (Series 165)

Transducers: See page 520 (Series 2800)
See page 521 (Series 2900)
494
495_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:48 AM Page 495

2-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
Use the chart below to aid in the selection of Hi-Flow Control Valve. As long as the maximum upstream pressure (USP) is less than, or equal to, the value listed, the model shown can be
manufactured and calibrated to your specific requirements. Specify maximum upstream pressure, USP, when ordering.
Pipe Cv Body
Size 100% Material
1/2 6.45 Bronze
316SS
3/4 10.75 Bronze
316SS
1
17.42 Bronze
316SS
1-1/4 25.30 Bronze
316SS
1-1/2 32.10 Bronze
50.30 Bronze
316SS
C
in (mm)
7-3/4 (196.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
Model
(Air-To-Close)
2000VA32-220
2000VA42-220
2001VA32-220
2001VA32-221
2001VA42-220
2001VA42-221
2002VA32-220
2002VA32-221
2002VA42-220
2002VA42-221
2003VA32-220
2003VA32-221
2003VA32-223
2003VA42-220
2003VA42-221
2003VA42-223
2004VA32-220
2004VA32-221
2004VA32-223
2004VA42-220
2004VA42-221
2004VA42-223
2005VA32-220
2005VA32-221
2005VA32-223
2005VA42-220
2005VA42-221
2005VA42-223
2006VA12-223
2006VA32-223
2006VA42-223
Max. USP
psi (bar)
3-15 (.21-1.0)
250 (17.2)
300 (20.7)
250 (17.2)
250 (17.2)
300 (20.7)
300 (20.7)
192 (13.2)
250 (17.2)
192 (13.2)
300 (20.7)
115 (7.9)
250 (17.2)
250 (17.2)
115 (7.9)
300 (20.7)
300 (20.7)
80 (5.5)
235 (16.2)
250 (17.2)
80 (5.5)
235 (16.2)
300 (20.7)
44 (3.0)
140 (9.7)
250 (17.2)
44 (3.0)
140 (9.7)
272 (18.8)
190 (13.1)
190 (13.1)
190 (13.1)
B
in (mm)
18-7/16 (468.3)
18-7/16 (468.3)
18-7/16 (468.3)
19-1/8 (485.8)
18-7/16 (468.3)
19-1/8 (485.8)
18-7/8 (479.4)
19-9/16 (496.9)
18-7/8 (479.4)
19-9/16 (496.9)
19 (482.6)
19-11/16 (500.1)
23-1/8 (587.4)
19 (482.6)
19-11/16 (500.1)
23-1/8 (587.4)
19-3/8 (492.1)
20-1/16 (509.6)
23-1/2 (596.9)
19-3/8 (492.1)
201/16 (509.6)
23-1/2 (596.9)
19-5/8 (498.5)
20-5/16 (515.9)
23-3/4 (603.3)
19-5/8 (498.5)
20-5/16 (515.9)
23-3/4 (606.3)
24-7/16 (620.7)
24-7/16 (620.7)
24-7/16 (620.7)
C
in (mm)
7-3/4 (196.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
10-5/8 (269.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
* Valve has flanged connections. Max. USP (PSI) is for Linear Valves.
Consult factory for optional trim.
Control Valves - Hi-Flow Series, 2-Way, Stocked Models

Set at USP
Body
Pipe Cv
psig (bar)
Model
Size 100% Material
6.45 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2000VA32-230-QS
1/2
10.75 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2001VA32-230-QS
3/4
17.42 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2002VA32-230-QS
1
17.42 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2002VA32-231-QS
1
98 (6.8)
2003VA32-230-QS
1-1/4 25.30 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2003VA32-231-QS
1-1/4 25.30 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2004VA32-231-QS
1-1/2 32.10 Bronze
50.30 Bronze
88 (6.1)
2005VA32-231-QS
2
50.30 Bronze
125 (8.6)
2005VA32-233-QS
2
Adjustable USP
Range psig (bar)
96-200 (6.8-13.8)
81-155 (5.6-10.7)
123-166 (8.5-11.5)
71-155 (4.9-10.7)
66-98 (4.6-6.8)
121-165 (8.3-11.4)
104-137 (7.2-9.5)
68-88 (4.7-6.1)
116-145 (8.0-10.0)
495
Valves, Globe
*
78.60 Iron
Bronze
2-1/2
316SS
Max USP
psi (bar)
A
3-15 (.21-1.0) in (mm)
250 (17.2)
19-3/4 (501.7)
300 (20.7)
19-3/4 (501.7)
250 (17.2)
19-3/4 (501.7)
250 (17.2)
20-3/8 (517.5)
285 (19.7)
19-3/4 (501.7)
300 (20.7)
20-3/8 (517.5)
166 (11.4)
20-3/16 (512.8)
250 (17.2)
20-13/16 (528.6)
166 (11.4)
20-3/16 (512.8)
300 (20.7)
20-13/16 (528.6)
98 (6.8)
20-5/16 (515.9)
245 (16.9)
20-15/16 (531.8)
250 (17.2)
25-13/32 (645.3)
98 (6.8)
20-5/16 (515.9)
245 (17.0)
20-15/16 (531.8)
300 (20.7)
25-13/32 (645.3)
65 (4.5)
20-11/16 (525.5)
168 (11.6)
21-5/16 (541.3)
250 (17.2)
25-25/32 (654.8)
65 (4.5)
20-11/16 (525.5)
168 (11.6)
21-5/16 (541.3)
300 (20.7)
25-25/32 (654.8)
31 (2.1)
20-15/16 (531.8)
88 (6.1)
21-9/16 (547.7)
175 (12.1)
26-1/32 (661.2)
31 (2.1)
20-15/16 (531.8)
88 (6.1)
21-9/16 (547.7)
175 (12.1)
26-1/32 (661.2)
105 (7.2)
26-1/4 (666.8)
105 (7.2)
26-1/4 (666.8)
105 (7.2)
26-1/4 (666.8)
VALVES
316SS
Model
(Air-To-Open)
2000VA32-230
2000VA42-230
2001VA32-230
2001VA32-231
2001VA42-230
2001VA42-231
2002VA32-230
2002VA32-231
2002VA42-230
2002VA42-231
2003VA32-230
2003VA32-231
2003VA32-233
2003VA42-230
2003VA42-231
2003VA42-233
2004VA32-230
2004VA32-231
2004VA32-233
2004VA42-230
2004VA42-231
2004VA42-233
2005VA32-230
2005VA32-231
2005VA32-233
2005VA42-230
2005VA42-231
2005VA42-233
2006VA12-233
2006VA32-233
2006VA42-233
496_Layout 1 7/21/14 9:20 AM Page 496

3-Way Standard Products for Mixing or Diverting
F
VALVES
Caution: Use of an actuator supply gas other than air can

create a hazardous environment because a small amount of
gas continuously vents to atmosphere
Use the standard models chart to aid in the selection of the most
economical Hi-Flow 3-Way Control Valve for your application. Specify
maximum upstream pressures (USPs); Mixing: USPU and USPL;
Diverting: USPC; based on standard 3-15 psi (.21-1.0 bar) pneumatic
control signal.
2 [50.8]
D
[PORT L CLOSED]
C
U
Valves, Globe
B
L
A
For diverting service, add USPU and USPC to determine the shutoff
pressure. For mixing service compute: (USPU - USPC) + (USPL USPC) to determine the shutoff pressure.
Dimension Data
Pipe B
Size in (mm)
1/2 2-9/16 (65.1)
3/4 2-9/16 (65.1)
1
3 (76.2)
1-1/4 3-3/16 (81.0)
1-1/2 3-3/4 (95.3)
2
3-15/16 (100.0)
C
in (mm)
2-3/16 (55.6)
2-3/16 (55.6)
2-7/16 (61.9)
2-1/2 (63.5)
2-3/4 (69.9)
3-3/16 (81.0)
Hi-Flow Control Valves, 3-Way Simplified Selection Guide with Standard Products
USP(S)
F
Body
E
Pipe Cv
Model
PSI (bar) in (mm)
in (mm)
Size 100% Material
3000WA32-220
250 (17.2) 18-1/16 (458.8) 7-3/4 (196.9)
6.45 Bronze
1/2
3000WA42-220
300 (20.7) 18-1/16 (458.8) 7-3/4 (196.9)
316SS
3001WA32-220
250 (17.2) 18-1/16 (458.8) 7-3/4 (196.9)
10.75 Bronze
3/4
3001WA42-220
300 (20.7) 18-1/16 (458.8) 7-3/4 (196.9)
316SS
3002WA32-220
200 (13.8) 18-5/16 (465.1) 7-3/4 (196.9)
17.42 Bronze
1
3002WA32-221
250 (17.2) 19 (482.6)
10-5/8 (269.9)
3002WA42-220
200 (13.8) 18-5/16 (465.1) 7-3/4 (196.9)
316SS
3002WA42-221
300 (20.7) 19 (482.6)
10-5/8 (269.9)
3003WA32-220
120 (8.4) 18-3/8 (466.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
1-1/4 25.30 Bronze
3003WA32-221
250 (17.2) 19-1/16 (484.2) 10-5/8 (269.9)
3003WA42-220
120 (8.3) 18-3/8 (466.7)
7-3/4 (196.9)
316SS
3003WA42-221
300 (20.7) 19-1/16 (484.2) 10-5/8 (269.9)
3004WA32-220
80 (5.6)
7-3/4 (196.9)
18-5/8 (473.1)
1-1/2 32.10 Bronze
3004WA32-221
200 (13.8) 19-5/16 (490.5) 10-5/8 (269.9)
3004WA32-223
250 (17.2) 21-3/8 (542.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
3004WA42-220
80 (5.5)
7-3/4 (196.9)
316SS
18-5/8 (473.1)
3004WA42-221
200 (13.8) 19-5/16 (490.5) 10-5/8 (269.9)
3004WA42-223
300 (20.7) 21-3/8 (542.9)
13-3/8 (339.7)
3005WA32-220
45 (3.1)
50.30 Bronze
2
19-1/16 (484.2) 7-3/4 (196.9)
3005WA32-221
100 (6.9) 19-3/4 (501.7)
10-5/8 (269.9)
3005WA32-223
175 (12.1) 21-13/16 (554.0) 13-3/8 (339.7)
3005WA42-220
45 (3.1)
316SS
19-1/16 (484.2) 7-3/4 (196.9)
3005WA42-221
100 (6.9) 19-3/4 (501.7)
10-5/8 (269.9)
3005WA42-223
175 (12.1) 21-12/16 (554.0) 13-3/8 (339.7)
3006WA12-223
97 (6.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
*2-1/2 78.6 Iron
24.52 (622.8)
3006WA32-223
Bronze
97 (6.7)
13-3/8 (339.7)
24.52 (622.8)
*Valve has flanged connections. Max. USP (PSI) is for Linear Valves.
Consult factory for optional trim.
D
in (mm)
4-1/8 (104.8)
4-1/8 (104.8)
4 (101.6)
3-3/4 (95.3)
3-11/16 (93.7)
3-11/16 (93.7)
Mixing Service:
FLOWIN - ports U&L
FLOWOUT - port C
Diverting Service:
FLOWIN- port C
FLOWOUT- ports U&L
Standard Models include
LIN-E-AIRE Air-To-Lower Actuator
- port L opens on loss of Air
496
497_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:47 AM Page 497
Series
SAV-BT
Angle Seat Valve - Bronze NPT

Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases and Liquids
B
Dimensions (in)
45
Port
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
A (in)
2.56
2.95
3.54
4.33
4.72
4.72
5.91
5.91
B (in)
6.42
6.81
8.11
10.04
10.63
12.05
11.02
12.44
C (in)
5.51
5.79
6.93
8.66
9.25
10.67
9.45
10.87
Actuator
Diameter (in)
2.76
2.76
3.32
3.32
4.58
4.58
4.58
5.54
NC
CV
6.61
12.18
23.2
33.64
53.36
53.94
68.44
53.94 77.72
NO
CV
6.61
12.18
23.2
33.06
33.3
Actuator
Diameter
2.76
2.76
3.32
3.32
4.58
5.54
4.58
5.54
Normally
Closed
SAV-BTA1-NC
SAV-BTB1-NC
SAV-BTC1-NC
SAV-BTD3-NC
SAV-BTE2-NC
SAV-BTE3-NC
SAV-BTF2-NC
SAV-BTF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-BTA2-NO
SAV-BTB2-NO
SAV-BTC3-NO
SAV-BTD3-NO
ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
Pilot Connections: NAMUR solenoid mounting pad.
Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
Valves, Angle Seat
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/4 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Service:Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials: Valve body: Bronze; Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS; Stem O-ring:
Fluoroelastomers; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 2 NPT.
Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
SAV-BTE3-NO
SAV-BTF3-NO
Line and Pilot Pressure Chart (psi)
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/4 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
2.76
2.76
3.32
3.32
4.58
5.54
4.58
5.54
Normally Closed
Max Max
Line Steam Flow
Pres. Pres. Direction
230 150
Overseat
230 150
Overseat
290 150
Overseat
230 150
Overseat
230 150
Overseat
230 150
Overseat
143 150
Overseat
232 150
Overseat
Min Max
Pilot Pilot
Pres. Pres.
60
143
60
143
60
143
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
Normally Open
Max
Max
Line Steam
Pres. Pres.
230
150
230
150
230
150
230
150
230
150
230
150
230
150
230
150
VALVES
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-BT Angle Seat
Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat valve is operated by a single acting
actuator with a mechanical spring for failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed
(NC) or normally open (NO) configurations. NO valves can be used to prevent waterhammer
on valve closure in liquid applications.
Constructed of bronze, 316 SS, and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-BT can be used in most gas,
liquid, and steam applications. Integral heat sinks dissipate heat protecting the Polyamide
actuator, ensuring longer life.
The Series SAV-BT can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator
housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pressure ports. Standard visual indicator
shows open or closed position.
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min Max
Pilot Pilot
Pres. Pres.
60
143
60
143
60
143
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
497
498_Layout 1 7/9/14 9:57 AM Page 498
Series
SAV-ST
Angle Seat Valve - Stainless Steel NPT

Low Cost, Compact Design, For Use with Gases & Liquids
B
Dimensions (in)
45
Port
Connection
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
A (in)
3.35
3.74
4.13
4.72
5.12
5.12
5.91
5.91
B (in)
7.48
7.68
8.62
10.47
10.67
12.09
11.22
12.64
C (in)
6.14
6.3
7.17
8.9
9.06
10.47
9.45
10.87
Actuator
Diameter (in)
2.76
2.76
3.32
3.32
4.58
4.58
4.58
5.54
NC
CV
6.61
12.18
23.2
33.64
53.36
53.94
68.44
53.94 77.72
NO
CV
6.61
12.18
23.2
33.06
33.3
Valves, Angle Seat
VALVES
Save space while maintaining flow rates with the compact Series SAV-ST Angle Seat
Valve. The pneumatic, externally piloted angle seat valve is operated by a single acting
actuator with a mechanical spring for failsafe operation. Select from either normally closed
(NC) or normally open (NO) configurations. NO valves can be used to prevent waterhammer
on valve closure in liquid applications.
Constructed of investment case stainless steel and PTFE seals, the Series SAV-ST can be
used in most gas, liquid, steam and corrosive applications. Integral heat sinks dissipate heat
protecting the Polyamide actuator, ensuring longer life.
The Series SAV-ST can be mounted in any position. For added flexibility, the actuator
housing rotates 360 degrees for positioning of the pressure ports. Standard visual indicator
shows open or closed position.
Port
Connection
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
1 NPT
1-1/4 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
1-1/2 NPT
2 NPT
2 NPT
Actuator
Diameter
2.76
2.76
3.32
3.32
4.58
5.54
4.58
5.54
Normally
Closed
SAV-STA1-NC
SAV-STB1-NC
SAV-STC2-NC
SAV-STD3-NC
SAV-STE2-NC
SAV-STE3-NC
SAV-STF2-NC
SAV-STF3-NC
Normally
Open
SAV-STA2-NO
SAV-STB2-NO
SAV-STC3-NO
SAV-STD3-NO
SPECIFICATIONS
VALVE BODY
Wetted Materials: Valve body: AISI 316L SS; Plug and stem: AISI 316L SS; Stem
O-ring: Fluoroelastomer; Seat and seal: PTFE.
Line Sizes: 1/2 to 2 NPT.
Flow Leakage: Meets ANSI Class VI.
ACTUATOR
Type: Piston/pneumatic spring.
Pilot Connections: NAMUR solenoid mounting pad.
Pilot Media: Air, water, inert gas.
SAV-STE3-NO
SAV-STF3-NO
Line and Pilot Pressure Chart (psi)

Normally Closed
Max
Port
Actuator Line
Connection Diameter Pres.
1/2 NPT
230
2.76
3/4 NPT
230
2.76
1 NPT
290
3.32
1-1/4 NPT
230
3.32
1-1/2 NPT
230
4.58
1-1/2 NPT
230
5.54
2 NPT
143
4.58
2 NPT
232
5.54
498
Max
Steam
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
Min Max
Flow
Pilot Pilot
Direction Pres. Pres.
Overseat 60
143
Overseat 60
143
Overseat 60
143
Overseat 60
114
Overseat 60
114
Overseat 60
114
Overseat 60
114
Overseat 60
114
Normally Open
Max
Line
Pres.
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
Max
Steam
Pres.
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
Flow
Direction
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Underseat
Min Max
Pilot Pilot
Pres. Pres.
60
143
60
143
60
143
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
60
114
499_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:46 AM Page 499
Series
SN
NAMUR Mount Solenoid Valve

Manual Override, 100% Duty Rating
2-5/8
[66.68]
61/64
[24.21]
2-49/64 [70.25]
5-21/64
[135.33]
63/64
[25.00]
NAMUR
STANDARD
3X 1/4
NPTF
1-47/64
[44.05]
MANUAL
1-1/16
OVERRIDE 1-37/64
[26.99]
[40.08]
SN-5X Models
The Series SN Solenoid Valves are designed to easily mount directly to pneumatic
valve actuators reducing the need for tubing, fittings or brackets, thereby reducing
assembly cost. The SN solenoid comes with nitrile o-rings and offers a manual override as
a standard feature. The 3/2 solenoids are designed for spring return actuators and 5/2
solenoids are designed to be used with double acting actuators. The SN series is available
in a variety of voltages for any application.
5-11/64
[131.37]
1-25/64
[35.32]
MANUAL
OVERRIDE
SN-3X Models
FEATURES
NAMUR mount means the solenoid can be mounted directly to valve actuators.
Designed for double acting or spring return actuators.
100% continuous duty rating.
Manual override.
Model
SN-5A
SN-5B
SN-5C
SN-5E
SN-5D
SN-3A
SN-3B
SN-3C
SN-3E
SN-3D
Model SN mounted to an actuator
Actuator Type
Double Acting
Double Acting
Double Acting
Double Acting
Double Acting
Spring Return
Spring Return
Spring Return
Spring Return
Spring Return
VALVES
Action
5/2
5/2
5/2
5/2
5/2
3/2
3/2
3/2
3/2
3/2
7/8
[22.23]
1-1/16
[26.99]
1-37/64
[40.08]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Power Requirements: 24 VAC, 110 VAC, 220 VAC, 12 VDC, or 24 VDC.
Supply Pressure: 22 to 116 psi (1.5 to 7.9 bar).
Air Connections: 1/4 female NPT.
Electrical Connection: DIN 43650 form A.
Mounting: NAMUR.
Standard Features: Manual override.
Power
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
12 VDC
2X
1/4 NPTF
Series
SBSV-B
Brass Solenoid Valves - 2-Way Guided NC

B
A
Series SBSV-B Solenoid Valves are compact, general-service, two-way guide type
solenoid valves for air, gas, water and other liquid applications. They are available in brass
with a normally closed design and can be oriented in any position. The solenoid enclosure
provides protection against dust, while also protecting against seepage of oil and noncorrosive coolants. The Series SBSV-B valves come assembled with an NBR seal, having a
maximum process temperature of 176F (80C). The series offers a wide range of valve
sizes and flow ranges, with connection sizes from 1/8 to 2 NPT and orifices from 3 mm
to 50 mm.
Model
SBSV-B1N1
SBSV-B2N1
SBSV-B3N1
SBSV-B4N1
SBSV-B5N1
SBSV-B6N1
SBSV-B7N1
SBSV-B8N1
SBSV-B9N1
Connection,
NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.12 (3)
0.12 (3)
0.51 (13)
0.51 (13)
0.79 (20)
0.98 (25)
1.38 (35)
1.57 (40)
1.97 (50)
CV
Value
0.23
0.23
4.5
4.5
7.6
12
22
30
48
Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
Model
SBSV-B1NX
SBSV-B2NX
SBSV-B3NX
SBSV-B4NX
SBSV-B5NX
SBSV-B6NX
SBSV-B7NX
SBSV-B8NX
SBSV-B9NX
A
in [mm]
1-5/8 [41]
1-5/8 [41]
2-5/8 [66]
2-5/8 [66]
2-61/64 [75]
3-25/32 [96]
5-11/64 [131]
5-11/64 [131]
6-1/2 [165]
B
in [mm]
1-5/32 [29]
1-5/32 [29]
1-57/64 [48]
1-57/64 [48]
2-19/64 [58]
2-49/64 [70]
3-25/32 [96]
3-25/32 [96]
4-47/64 [120]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Pressure:
1/8 to 1/4: 0 psi (0 bar) to 188.5 psi
(13 bar);
3/8 to 2: 7.3 psi (0.5 bar) to 188.5
psi (13 bar).
Pressure Limit: 246.6 psi (12 bar).
Wetted Material: Body: Brass; Spring:
304 SS; Seal:NBR.
Temperature Limits:
Process:176F (80C);
Voltage
220 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC
C
in [mm]
3-9/32 [83]
3-9/32 [83]
4-7/16 [112]
4-7/16 [112]
4-21/32 [118]
5-11/64 [131]
3-3/4 [146]
5-3/4 [146]
6-37/64 [167]
D
[NPT]
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Weight lb [kg]
SBSV-B
0.82 [0.37]
0.79 [0.36]
1.54 [0.7]
1.98 [0.9]
1.98 [0.9]
3.09 [1.4]
6.17 [2.8]
5.95 [2.7]
10.58 [4.8]
Power Requirements: Standard: 110

VAC; Optional: 220 VAC, 24 VDC, 24
VAC consult factory.
Power Consumption: See table.
Electrical Connection: DIN
connection.
Other Materials: Nylon.
MountingOrientation: Any position,
best if solenoid vertically above valve.
Weight: See table.
Type of Operation: NC.
DC
60 Hz (VA)
50 Hz (VA)
Inrush Holding Inrush Holding (W)
22
55
18
55
22
55
18
55
18
45
15
45
13
Solenoid Coils:See page 501 (Series SRC)
499
Valves, Solenoid
Compact Design, Immune to Mounting Orientation
500_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:46 AM Page 500
Series
SBSV-S
SS Solenoid Valves - 2-Way Guided NC

B
Model
SBSV-S1FX
SBSV-S2FX
SBSV-S3FX
SBSV-S4FX
SBSV-S5FX
SBSV-S6FX
SBSV-S7FX
SBSV-S8FX
SBSV-S9FX
B
C
A
in [mm]
in [mm]
in [mm]
1-5/32 [29] 3-9/32 [83]
1-5/8 [41]
1-5/32 [29] 3-9/32 [83]
1-5/8 [41]
1-57/64 [48] 4-7/16 [112]
2-5/8 [66]
1-57/64 [48] 4-7/16 [112]
2-5/8 [66]
2-61/64 [75] 2-19/64 [58] 4-21/32 [118]
3-25/32 [96] 2-49/64 [70] 5-11/64 [131]
5-11/64 [131] 3-25/32 [96] 3-3/4 [146]
5-11/64 [131] 3-25/32 [96] 3-3/4 [146]
6-1/2 [165] 3-47/64 [120] 6-37/64 [167]
D
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Weight lb [kg]
SBSV-S
0.82 [0.37]
0.79 [0.36]
1.65 [0.75]
1.54 [0.7]
1.98 [0.9]
2.87 [1.3]
5.73 [2.6]
5.51 [2.5]
9.7 [4.4]
VALVES
Series SBSV-S Solenoid Valves are compact, general-service, two-way guide type
solenoid valves for air, gas, water and other liquid applications. They are available in SS
with a normally closed design and can be oriented in any position. The solenoid enclosure
provides protection against dust, while also protecting against seepage of oil and noncorrosive coolants. The Series SBSV-S valves come assembled with a fluoroelastomer seal,
having a maximum process temperature of 248F (120C). The series offers a wide range
of valve sizes and flow ranges, with connection sizes from 1/8 to 2 NPT and orifices from
3 mm to 50 mm.
Model
SBSV-S1F1
SBSV-S2F1
SBSV-S3F1
SBSV-S4F1
SBSV-S5F1
SBSV-S6F1
SBSV-S7F1
SBSV-S8F1
SBSV-S9F1
Connection,
NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.12 (3)
0.12 (3)
0.51 (13)
0.51 (13)
0.79 (20)
0.98 (25)
1.38 (35)
1.57 (40)
1.97 (50)
CV
Value
0.23
0.23
4.5
4.5
7.6
12
22
30
48
Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
liquids.
Operating Pressure:
1/8 to 1/4: 0 psi (0 bar) to 188.5 psi
(13 bar);
3/8 to 2: 7.3 psi (0.5 bar) to 188.5 psi
(13 bar).
Pressure Limit: 246.6 psi (12 bar).
Wetted Material: Body: 316 SS;
Spring; 304 SS; Seal:
Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits:
Process:176F (80C);
Voltage
220 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC
24 VDC

VAC; Optional: 220 VAC, 24 VDC, 24
VAC consult factory.
connection.
Weight: See table.
Type of Operation: NC.
DC
50 Hz (VA)
60 Hz (VA)
Inrush Holding Inrush Holding (W)
55
22
18
55
55
22
18
55
45
18
15
45
13
Series
SSV-B
Brass Solenoid Valves - 2-Way Guided NO
Valves, Solenoid

Model
SSV-B1NX
SSV-B2NX
SSV-B3NX
SSV-B4NX
SSV-B5NX
SSV-B6NX
SSV-B7NX
SSV-B8NX
SSV-B9NX
L
in [mm]
1-5/8 [41]
1-5/8 [41]
2-19/32 [66]
2-19/32 [66]
2-61/64 [75]
3-25/32 [96]
5-5/32 [131]
5-5/32 [131]
6-1/2 [165]
H
in [mm]
3-15/32 [88]
3-17/64 [83]
4-57/64 [124]
4-57/64 [124]
5-1/8 [130]
5-5/8 [143]
6-7/32 [158]
6-7/32 [158]
7-3/64 [179]
W
in [mm]
1-9/64 [29]
1-9/64 [29]
1-57/64 [48]
1-57/64 [48]
2-9/32 [58]
2-3/4 [70]
3-25/32 [96]
3-25/32 [96]
4-47/64 [120]
Weight lb [kg]
SSV-B
0.88 [0.40]
0.86 [0.39]
1.98 [0.90]
1.98 [0.90]
2.42 [1.10]
3.52 [1.60]
6.60 [3.00]
6.16 [2.80]
5.00 [11.0]

Series SSV-B Solenoid Valves are compact, general-service, two-way guide type
solenoid valves for air, gas, water, and other liquid applications. They are available in brass
with a normally open design and can be oriented in any position. The solenoid enclosure
provides protection against dust while also protecting against seepage of oil and noncorrosive coolants. The Series SSV-B valves come assembled with an NBR seal having a
maximum process temperature of 176F (80C). The series offers a wide range of valve
sizes and flow ranges with connection sizes from 1/8 to 2 NPT and orifices from 3 mm
to 50 mm.
Connection,
NPT
Model
SSV-B1N1 1/8
SSV-B2N1 1/4
SSV-B3N1 3/8
SSV-B4N1 1/2
SSV-B5N1 3/4
SSV-B6N1 1
SSV-B7N1 1-1/4
SSV-B8N1 1-1/2
SSV-B9N1 2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.12 (3)
0.12 (3)
0.51 (13)
0.51 (13)
0.79 (20)
0.98 (25)
1.38 (35)
1.57 (40)
1.97 (50)
CV
Value
0.25
0.25
4.5
4.5
7.6
12
22
30
48
Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Pressure:
1/8 to 1/4: 0 psi (0 bar) to 87 psi (6
bar);
3/8 to 2: 7.3 psi (0.5 bar) to 116 psi
(8 bar).
Wetted Material: Body: Brass; Spring:
304 SS; Seal:NBR.
Temperature Limits:
Process:176F (80C);

VAC; Optional: 220 VAC, 24 VDC
consult factory.
connection.
Weight: See table.
Type of Operation: NO.
60 Hz (VA)
50 Hz (VA)
DC
Voltage Inrush Holding Inrush Holding (W)
82
33
220 VAC 82
28
82
33
110 VAC 82
28
24 VDC 32
500
501_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:05 AM Page 501
Series
SSV-S
SS Solenoid Valves - 2-Way Guided NO

Model
SSV-S1FX
SSV-S2FX
SSV-S3FX
SSV-S4FX
SSV-S5FX
SSV-S6FX
SSV-S7FX
SSV-S8FX
SSV-S9FX
Series SSV-S Solenoid Valves are compact, general-service, two-way guide type
solenoid valves for air, gas, water, and other liquid applications. They are available in
stainless steel with a normally open design and can be oriented in any position. The solenoid
enclosure provides protection against dust, while also protecting against seepage of oil and
non-corrosive coolants. The Series SSV-S valves come assembled with a fluoroelastomer
seal, having a maximum process temperature of 248F (120C). The series offers a wide
range of valve sizes and flow ranges, with connection sizes from 1/8 to 2 NPT and orifices
from 3 mm to 50 mm.
Connection,
NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Orifice
in (mm)
0.12 (3)
0.12 (3)
0.51 (13)
0.51 (13)
0.79 (20)
0.98 (25)
1.38 (35)
1.57 (40)
1.97 (50)
CV
Value
0.25
0.25
4.5
4.5
7.6
12
22
30
48
Voltage
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
H
in [mm]
3-15/32 [88]
3-17/64 [83]
4-57/64 [124]
4-57/64 [124]
5-1/8 [130]
5-5/8 [143]
6-7/32 [158]
6-7/32 [158]
7-3/64 [179]
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Pressure:
1/8 to 1/4: 0 psi (0 bar) to 87 psi
(6 bar);
3/8 to 2: 7.3 psi (0.5 bar) to 116 psi
(8 bar).
Wetted Material: Body: 316 SS;
Spring: 304 SS; Seal: Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits:
Process:248F (120C);
50 Hz (VA)
Voltage
220 VAC
110 VAC
24 VDC
Inrush
82
82
-
Holding
33
33
-
Weight lb [kg]
SSV-S
0.88 [0.40]
0.86 [0.39]
2.09 [0.95]
1.98 [0.90]
2.42 [1.10]
3.30 [1.50]
6.16 [2.80]
5.94 [2.70]
10.1 [4.60]
Power Requirements:
Standard: 110 VAC;
Optional: 220 VAC; 24 VDC consult
factory.
connection.
Weight: See table.
Type of Operation: NO.
60 Hz (VA)
Inrush
82
82
-
W
in [mm]
1-9/64 [29]
1-9/64 [29]
1-57/64 [48]
1-57/64 [48]
2-9/32 [58]
2-3/4 [70]
3-25/32 [96]
3-25/32 [96]
4-47/64 [120]
Holding
28
28
-
VALVES
Model
SSV-S1F1
SSV-S2F1
SSV-S3F1
SSV-S4F1
SSV-S5F1
SSV-S6F1
SSV-S7F1
SSV-S8F1
SSV-S9F1
L
in [mm]
1-5/8 [41]
1-5/8 [41]
2-19/32 [66]
2-19/32 [66]
2-61/64 [75]
3-25/32 [96]
5-5/32 [131]
5-5/32 [131]
6-1/2 [165]
DC
(W)
32
Solenoid Replacement Coils
Valves, Solenoid
Series
SRC
For the Series SSV and SBSV Solenoid Valves

2-39/64 [66.4]
3-13/64 [81.5]
1-1/2
[38.1]
1-21/32
[42.0]
1-31/64
[37.6]
Models SRC-X180X & SRC-X280X

The Series SRC Solenoid Coils electrically operate the SSV and SBSV solenoid valves.
When the solenoid coil receives an electrical input signal it acts upon the valve, changing
its state. These coils are field replaceable with their compatible solenoid valves and come
in a wide range of voltages.
SSV Compatible Coils
50 Hz (VA)
Model
Voltage Inrush Holding
33
SRC-D1B0P 220 VAC 82
33
SRC-D2B0P 110 VAC 82
29
SRC-D3B0P 24 VAC 72
SRC-D4B0P 24 VDC -
60 Hz (VA)
Inrush Holding
82
28
82
28
72
25
-
DC
(W)
32
SPECIFICATIONS
Compatible Valves: SSV or SBSV.
VAC, 24 VAC or 24 VAC.
Electrical Connections: DIN
connection.
SBSV Compatible Coils
50 Hz (VA)
Model
Voltage Inrush Holding
22
SRC-D1S0C 220 VAC 55
22
SRC-D2S0C 110 VAC 55
18
SRC-D3S0C 24 VAC 45
SRC-D4S0C 24 VDC -
1-1/8
[28.7]
Models SRC-XXS0X
60 Hz (VA)
Inrush Holding
55
18
55
18
45
15
-
DC
(W)
13
501
502_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:45 AM Page 502
Series
DCS/RDCS
Springless Diaphragm Valves

Pulse Valve, Ideal for Dust Collection Systems and Bag Houses
DCS35T1D
VALVES
Scan here
to watch
product video
DCS35C1D
The Series DCS/RDCS Springless Dust Collection Valves are ideal for use with
the Series DCT1000 and Series DCT500 duct collection timer boards. A springless design
offers not only durability, but also reliability for an exceptional cleaning pulse. Both the
Series DCS and RDCS have the option for either coupling or NPT connections. The
coupling connection allows for a quick and simple installation. Only the stub pipe and
blowtube need to be cleaned and deburred before the valve is fit into position. The T
Series DCS has female threaded connections and the C Series DCS has a coupling
connection. Both the T and C versions have a 90 angle between the inlet and outlet:
the most suitable configuration for pulse valve applications. The valves are offered in both
integrated and remote coil configurations.
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
FEATURES
Thermoplastic polyurethane diaphragm for longer life
High flow factor for effective cleaning
Unique diaphragm design eliminates spring
Valve can be mounted in any position
Quick on & off response time
ACCESSORIES
A-237, Muffler
BDA-5030-Q, 3/4 DCS/RDCS Pulse Valve Replacement Diaphragm
BDA-5230-Q, 1 DCS/RDCS Pulse Valve Replacement Diaphragm
BDA-5430-Q, 1-1/2 DCS/RDCS Pulse Valve Replacement Diaphragm
RSV1D-COIL, 110 VACDIN Replacement Solenoid Coil
RSV2D-COIL, 220 VAC DINReplacement Solenoid Coil
RSV3D-COIL, 24 VAC DINReplacement Solenoid Coil
Number of
Model
Size Solenoid Connection Diaphragms
RDCS20T 3/4
Remote NPT
1
RDCS20C 3/4
Remote Coupling
1
DCS20T1D 3/4
Integral* NPT
1
DCS20C1D 3/4
Integral* Coupling
1
RDCS25T 1
Remote NPT
1
RDCS25C 1
Remote Coupling
1
DCS25T1D 1
Integral* NPT
1
DCS25C1D 1
Integral* Coupling
1
RDCS35T 1-1/2 Remote NPT
1
RDCS35C 1-1/2 Remote Coupling
1
DCS35T1D 1-1/2 Integral* NPT
1
DCS35C1D 1-1/2 Integral* Coupling
1
*110 VAC withDIN Connector
Cv
Factor
(gal/min)
14
14
14
14
23
23
23
23
42
42
42
42
Series DCS/RDCS Model Guide

Construction DCS
Integrated coil
RDCS
Remote coil
20
Size
3/4
25
1
35
1-1/2
T
Connection
NPT
C
Coupling
Voltage
1D 110 VAC DIN (for integrated coil only)
2D 220 VAC DIN (for integrated coil only)
3D 24 VDC DIN (for integrated coil only)
502
RDCS35C
RDCS20C
RDCS35T
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum;
Diaphragm disc: Thermoplastic polyurethane;
Solenoid seals: NBR.
Other Materials:
Cover: Aluminum;
Body bolts: Zinc plated SS;
Solenoid: Nylon.
Pressure Limits: Min. of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), max. of 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits:
Ambient: -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C);
Operating: -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C).
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC for DCS models.
Power Consumption: 12 W; Inrush: 17 VA; Holding: 14.5 VA for DCS models.
Electrical Connection: DIN connection for DCS models.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) for DCS models.
DIAPHRAGM VALVECONSTRUCTION
NEMA 4X (IP65)
Solenoid Coil
Solenoid
Integrated Solenoid
Stem
Cover
Unique Diaphragm
Design Eliminates
Need for a
Spring
Diaphragm
Robust Die Cast
Aluminum Body
Body
503_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:44 AM Page 503
Series
DCS/RDCS
Springless Diaphragm Valves

Dimensional Chart
B
B
E
VALVES
E
D
A
DCS Dimensional Chart
A (mm)
3-1/8 (79.38)
3-19/64 (83.74)
4-11/32 (110.33)
4-9/64 (105.17)
4-7/16 (112.71)
5-23/64 (136.13)
B (mm)
2-47/64 (69.45)
3-7/32 (81.76)
3-43/64(93.27)
3-25/64 (86.10)
4-43/64(118.67)
5-21/64(135.33)
C (mm)
2-45/64 (68.66)
2-53/64 (71.83)
3-1/2 (88.9)
2-45/64 (68.66)
2-53/64 (71.83)
3-1/2 (88.9)
D (mm)
1-37/64 (40.08)
1-55/64 (47.23)
2-17/32 (64.29)
2-39/64 (66.28)
3 (76.20)
3-35/64 (90.09)
E (mm)
1-15/64 (31.35)
1-31/64 (37.70)
1-15/32 (37.31)
1-51/64 (45.64)
2-49/64 (70.25)
2-61/64 (75.01)
A (mm)
3-1/8 (79.38)
3-19/64 (83.74)
4-11/32 (110.33)
4-9/64 (105.17)
4-7/16 (112.71)
5-23/64 (136.13)
B (mm)
2-47/64 (69.45)
3-7/32 (81.76)
3-43/64 (93.27)
3-25/64 (86.1)
4-43/64 (118.67)
5-21/64 (135.33)
C (mm)
2-45/64 (68.66)
2-53/64 (71.83)
3-1/2 (88.9)
2-45/64 (68.66)
2-53/64 (71.83)
3-1/2 (88.9)
D (mm)
1-37/64 (40.08)
1-55/64 (47.23)
2-17/32 (64.29)
2-39/64 (66.28)
3 (76.20)
3-35/64 (90.09)
E (mm)
1-15/64 (31.35)
1-31/64 (37.70)
1-15/32 (37.31)
1-51/64 (45.64)
2-49/64 (70.25)
2-61/64 (75.01)
F (mm)
2-5/32(54.77)
2-11/32 (59.53)
2-3/8 (60.33)
2-11/64 (55.17)
2-23/64 (59.93)
2-3/8 (60.33)
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
Connection Model
DCS20TxD
NPT
DCS25TxD
DCS35TxD
DCS20CxD
Coupling
DCS25CxD
DCS35CxD
RDCS Dimensional Chart
Connection Model
RDCS20T
NPT
RDCS25T
RDCS35T
RDCS20C
Coupling
RDCS25C
RDCS35C
Operating Principle
The valve is divided into two chambers by a diaphragm. These upper and lower chambers are connected by a small air passage so both chambers see the same pressure.
When the exhaust is closed air cannot vent out of the upper chamber and the valve stays closed as shown in Figure 1. When the exhaust on the upper chamber is opened the
air pressure decreases on top of the diaphragm allowing the air pressure on the bottom to force open the valve by pushing the diaphragm up as shown in Figure 2. When the
valve opens an abrupt air blast comes through the valve outlet and is directed by the dust collector to the dirty filter. The air pulse then blows out through the filter from the inside
blowing the particulate accumulation off of the filter to clean it. After the air pulse the pressure in the upper and lower chamber will equalize and the diaphragm will return to the
closed position. The valve exhaust port is controlled by either an integral or remote solenoid.
EXHAUST
DIAPHRAGM
AIR INLET
FLOW
OUTLET
Figure 1: Closed Position
Figure 2: Open Position
503
504_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:09 AM Page 504
Series
RSV
Pilot Solenoid Valve

For Use with Remote Valves
13/16
[21]
[WIDTH]
1-11/32
[34]
1-21/32
[42]
2-9/32
[83.5]
1-1/8
[32]
5/8
[16]
25/32
[19.5]
1-1/2
[38.5]
RSV1L
RSV1D
VALVES
The Series RSV Pilot Solenoid Valve is used to operate the Series RDCV remote type
diaphragm valve to air pulse clean filters in dust collectors. Consult factory for mounting
of RSV valves with our DCT timer boards together in one enclosure all pre-wired.
Model
RSV1D
RSV2D
RSV3D
RSV1L
RSV2L
RSV3L
Voltage
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
Electrical
Connections
DIN
DIN
DIN
Wire Leads
Wire Leads
Wire Leads
Cv
.33
.33
.33
.33
.33
.33
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
Series
BHC
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Body:Aluminum; Core and spring:304 SS; Seals: NBR.
Pressure Limits: Min of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), max of 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C); Operating: -4 to 185F (20 to 85C).
Power Requirements: 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: 12 W, inrush: 17 VA, holding: 14.5 VA.
Electrical Connection: DIN connection or wire leads, 18 AWG, 22 (55 cm) long.
Mounting Orientation:Any position.
Weight: 0.60 lb (0.27 kg).
Pneumatic Tube Length: Maximum of 9.8 (3 m).
Bulk Head Connector

Coupling Accessories
B
BHC35DD
BHC35D
A in (mm)
2-3/8 (60.5)
3-19/32 (91)
2-23/32 (69)
3-31/32 (101)
2-15/16 (75)
4-11/32 (110)
B in (mm)
2-5/16 (58.5)
2-5/16 (58.5)
2-3/4 (70)
2-3/4 (70)
3-15/32 (88)
3-15/32 (88)
D in(mm)
1-25/32 to 2
(45 to 51)
2-7/32 to 2-7/16
(56 to 62)
2-27/32 to 3-1/16
(72 to 78)
Series BHC Bulk Head Connectors allow for easy installation of blow tube through
the dust collector wall and eliminate the need for welding or use of additional flanges. The
fittings enable easy removal and reassembly of blow tubes for cleaning and maintenance.
BHC models are available in single connection for through tube mounting or double
connection for two piece tube mounting.
Model
BHC20D
BHC20DD
BHC25D
BHC25DD
BHC35D
BHC35DD
504
Size
3/4
3/4
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
FILTER WALL
MOUNTING
HOLE D
Model
BHC20D
BHC20DD
BHC25D
BHC25DD
BHC35D
BHC35DD
Connections
One
Two
One
Two
One
Two
Min L in (mm)
3-27/32
(97)
4-21/32
(118)
6-3/16
(157)
BLOWTUBE
OUTBOARD
BLOWTUBE
MOUNTING
HOLE D
INBOARD
BLOWTUBE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Material: Body, ring nut, DIN nut: Aluminum; Washer: SS41; Gasket: NBR.
Pressure Limits: 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
ACCESSORY
A-237, Muffler
505_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:43 AM Page 505
Series
SVE
Solenoid Valve Enclosure

For the Series RSV Remote Solenoid Valves
6-5/16
[160]
6-5/16
[160]
4-11/64
[106]
4-11/64
[106]
10-5/8 [270]
The Series SVE are multi-valve enclosures for the RSV pilot valve. The SVE offers a
convenient weatherproof enclosure package with all solenoids pre-wired to a terminal block.
Enclosures are available in 6 or 12 valve size with choice of pilot valve voltage.
Model
SVE06WP61
SVE06WP62
SVE06WP63
SVE12WP121
SVE12WP122
SVE12WP123
Quantity of
Solenoid
6
6
6
12
12
12
Enclosure
Type
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
Weatherproof
17-9/16 [446]
SVE12
VALVES
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: (For RSV) Compatible gases, filtered and oil free.
Wetted Materials: (For RSV) Body: Aluminum; Core and spring: 304 SS; Seals:
NBR.
Pressure Limits: (For RSV) Min of 4.4 psi (0.3 bar), max of 124.7 psi (8.6 bar).
Temperature Limits: Ambient: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C); Operating: -4 to 185F
(-20 to 85C).
Power Requirement: (For RSV) 110 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC.
Power Consumption: (For RSV) 12 W, inrush: 17 VA, holding: 14.5 VA.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA4X (IP66).
Enclosure Material: Anodized aluminum with NBR gasket.
Electrical Connection: All RSV are pre-wired to a terminal strip.
Process Connection: (For RSV) 1/8 female NPT.
Pneumatic Tube Length: Max of 9.8 (3 m).
Voltage
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
24 VDC
Series
BICV
18-29/32 [480]
SVE06
SVE06WP61
SVE06WP61
9-7/32 [234]
Brass Inline Check Valve

Economical, Spring-Loaded for Fast Seating
B
The Series BICV Brass Inline Check Valves are ideal for use with a broad array of
service mediums including compatible oils, gases, fuels and hydrocarbons. They incorporate
a soft seat for a bubble-tight shutoff and are spring-loaded for rapid reseating at high and
low temperatures. The Series BICV was designed with a smooth flow profile to minimize
head loss and accumulation of debris. The low 0.5 psi (0.04 bar) cracking pressure and
patented guided-disc technology ensure reliability at low and high service pressure.
Connection Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv Value
4.55
4.55
6.0
11.0
16.9
27.4
Model
BICV-0N00
BICV-0F01
BICV-0F02
BICV-0F03
BICV-0F04
BICV-0F05
Weight
3.5 oz (100 g)
5.9 oz (168 g)
5.1 oz (145 g)
7.8 oz (222 g)
10.9 oz (308 g)
1.1 lb (.051 kg)
Connection Size
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4
A in [mm]
1-47/64 [44]
1-47/64 [44]
2-21/64 [59]
2-9/16 [65]
2-49/64 [70]
2-15/16 [74.5]
3-11/64 [80.5]
3-3/8 [85.5]
4-3/8 [111]
4-55/64 [123.5]
5-13/32 [137.5]
B in [mm]
51/64 [20]
51/64 [20]
63/64 [25]
1-13/64 [30.5]
1-31/64 [37.5]
1-7/8 [47.5]
2-7/64 [53.5]
2-11/16 [68]
3-15/64 [82]
3-27/32 [97.5]
5 [127]
C in [mm]
1-1/16 [27]
1-1/16 [27]
1-23/64 [34.5]
1-21/32 [42]
1-15/16 [49]
2-13/32 [61]
2-7/8 [73]
3-15/32 [88]
4-25/64 [111.5]
5-15/64 [133]
6-27/64 [163]
CH in [mm]
51/64 [20]
51/64 [20]
63/64 [25]
1-7/32 [31]
1-1/2 [38]
1-57/64 [48]
2-1/8 [54]
2-41/64 [67]
3-17/64 [83]
3-55/64 [98]
5-3/64 [128]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquids and gases compatible with wetted material.
Body: 1-piece.
Line Size: See model chart.
Process Connection: Female NPT.
Pressure Limits: 1/4 to 2: 400 psi (27.6 bar) WOG; 2-1/2 to 4: 175 psi (12.1
bar) WOG; All sizes: 125 psi (8.6 bar) SWP.
Wetted Materials: Valve body: Brass (CW617N); Obstructer: Polyethermide; Seat:
1/4: NBRrubber, 3/8 to 4:Fluoroelastomer; Spring: 302 SS.
Cv Value
39.1
60.7
98.4
158.0
225.4
Model
BICV-0F06
BICV-0F07
BICV-0F08
BICV-0F09
BICV-0F10
Weight
1.6 lb (0.73 kg)
2.3 lb (1.03 kg)
4.8 lb (2.19 kg)
6.7 lb (3.04 kg)
12.4 lb (5.64 kg)
505
Valves,
Diaphragm Pulse
CH
NPT Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4
506_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:41 AM Page 506
Series
BFC
Brass Flap Check Valve

Economical, Compact, Backflow Protection
NPT CONNECTION
NPT
Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
A
in [mm]
1-59/64 [49.00]
2-1/4 [57.00]
2-43/64 [68.00]
2-63/64 [76.00]
3-25/64 [86.00]
3-15/16 [100.00]
4-9/64 [105.00]
4-7/8 [124.00]
B
in [mm]
1-27/64 [36.00]
1-17/32 [39.00]
1-49/64 [45.00]
2-3/32 [53.00]
2-11/32 [59.50]
2-5/8 [66.50]
3-1/64 [76.50]
3-13/64 [81.50]
VALVES
Series BFC Brass Flap Check Valve is an economical check valve for both commercial
and industrial application. Quality brass body and stem construction allow for long service
life and reliability. Ideal where backflow could potentially cause damage to equipment by
yielding reverse flow. Pressure in the line moves the flap off of the seat, opening the valve.
When the inlet flow comes to a halt, back pressure moves the flap back onto the seat,
stopping the flow. Designed to provide excellent flow characteristics with minimal
turbulence and pressure loss while maintaining its ability to prevent backflow.
Model
BFC-00
BFC-01
BFC-02
BFC-03
BFC-04
BFC-05
BFC-06
BFC-07
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases, steam and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
End Connections: 1/2 to 3 NPT.
Maximum Pressure: 200 psi (13.8 bar); 150 psi steam (10.3 bar).
Temperature Limit: -20 to 180F (-28.9 to 82C).
Wetted Materials: Body and disc: Brass.
Other Materials: Cap and nut: Brass.
Pipe Size
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
Series
BYS
Brass Y-Strainer
Strainers
Cost Effective, Excellent Filtration, High Flow

A
NPT CONNECTION
B
Series BYS Brass Y-Strainer is a cost effective option for use in any type of industrial
application. Versatile Y configuration and availability in a wide range of sizes allow for
many different uses. Body, cap, and plug are made from a high quality brass to ensure
reliability. Seal is constructed of PTFE to ensure long service life. Stainless steel strainer
provides excellent filtration to help prevent damage to valves, meters, etc. from rust and
dirt, without sacrificing high flow characteristics.
Model
BYS-00
BYS-01
BYS-02
BYS-03
BYS-04
BYS-05
BYS-06
BYS-07
506
Pipe Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Max. Pressure
400 psi (27.6 bar)
400 psi (27.6 bar)
400 psi (27.6 bar)
400 psi (27.6 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
300 psi (20.7 bar)
NPT
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
A
in [mm]
1-31/32 [50.04]
1-31/32 [50.04]
1-31/32 [50.04]
2-23/64 [59.94]
2-41/64 [67.06]
3-3/16 [81.03]
3-7/16 [87.12]
4-19/64 [108.97]
B
in [mm]
2-11/16 [68.07]
2-11/16 [68.07]
2-11/16 [68.07]
3-59/64 [99.57]
4-17/32 [115.06]
5-25/64 [136.91]
6-17/64 [159.00]
7-31/64 [189.99]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases, steam and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: Cast brass;
Cap and plug: Brass;
Screen: SS;
Seal: PTFE.
507_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:41 AM Page 507
Series
HGV
Hand Operated Globe Valve

Low Cost, High Pressure Rating
C
Dimensions
D
L
The Series HGV Hand Operated Globe Valves are an economical and functional
alternative to large actuator/control valve packages. Metal-to-metal seating ensures
excellent flow control and shut-off service. The body and bonnet are each constructed of
CF8M (316) SS for superb corrosion resistance and chemical compatibility.
Cv Value
0.6
1.38
2.46
5.76
10.69
17.1
25.2
47.1
Series
NVII
L
in. [mm]
2-3/64 [52]
2-3/64 [52]
2-3/64 [52]
2-3/8 [60]
2-53/64 [72]
3-5/32 [80]
3-35/64 [90]
4-11/64 [106]
H (OPEN)
in. [mm]
4-1/64 [102]
4-1/64 [102]
4-1/64 [102]
4-7/16 [113]
4-27/32 [123]
5-53/64 [148]
6-19/64 [160]
7-3/32 [180]
C
in. [mm]
2-3/8 [60]
2-3/8 [60]
2-3/8 [60]
2-3/4 [70]
2-3/4 [70]
3-5/32 [80]
3-17/32 [90]
3-15/16 [100]
Valves, Globe
Needle Valve
Economical, Pressures Up to 2000 psi, Blowout-Proof Stem
63/64
[25.00]
63/64
[25.00]
1-3/4 OPEN
[44.45 OPEN]
1-41/64 CLOSED
[41.67 CLOSED]
1-41/64 CLOSED
[41.67 CLOSED]
1/4 - 18 NPT
23/32
[18.26]
NVII-1B
NVII-2B
Model NVII Needle Valve provides easy flow regulation in all applications, including
shut off and throttling for pressure gages and instruments. With a one piece, hot forged
brass body construction, years of maintenance-free service can be expected. The Model
NVII, with its tamper-proof design and blowout-proof stem, provides excellent
performance and reliability.
Flow Coefficient at Turns Open
Cv USGPM @ 1 psi
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
Turns
1/2
1-1/2
Turns Open
2-1/2
1-41/64
[41.67]
NVII-1B
33/64 TYP
[13.10 TYP]
1/4 - 18 NPT
33/64 TYP
[13.10 TYP]
VALVES
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
D
in. [mm]
13/32 [10]
15/32 [12]
19/32 [15]
25/32 [20]
63/64 [25]
1-1/4 [32]
1-37/64 [40]
1-31/32 [50]
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: 725 psi (50.0 bar) from -20 to 200F (-28.9 to 93.3C); 500 psi
(34.5 bar) at 300F (148.9C); 450 psi (31.0 bar) at 325F (162.8C); 100 psi (6.9
bar) at 350F (176.7C).
Wetted Materials: Body, bonnet, packing nut: CF8M (316) SS. disc, stem, retainer
ring; Gland: 316 SS; Packing: PTFE.
Temperature Limits: -20 to 356F (-28.9 to 180C).
Other Materials:
Hand wheel: Cast iron;
Plate: Aluminum;
Wheel nut: 316 SS.
FEATURES
Threaded ends conform to ANSI B 2.1, BS 21, DIN 259/2999, ISO 228
SS inside screw, screwed bonnet, swivel disc integral seat, rising stem and hand
wheel
Model
HGV00
HGV01
HGV02
HGV03
HGV04
HGV05
HGV06
HGV07
Pipe
Size
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1/4-18 NPT
1-3/4 OPEN
[44.45 OPEN]
23/32
[18.26]
1-23/32
[43.66]
NVII-2B
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials. Not rated for steam
use.
End Connection Size: 1/4 NPT.
Pressure Limit: 2000 psi (138 bar) (CWP).
Wetted Materials:
Valve body: Brass (CW617N);
Retainer, handwheel: Brass (CW614N);
O-Ring:Fluoroelastomer.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 350F (-40 to 176.7C). (Warning: freezing of the fluid
in the installation may severely damage the valve.)
Flow Coefficient: 0.31.
Weight: 0.22 lb.
Model NVII-1B, Needle Valve (Female x Female)
Model NVII-2B, Needle Valve (Male x Female)
NVII
Others
507
508_Layout 1 7/15/14 11:11 AM Page 508
Model
TNV
PTFE Needle Valve

All PTFE and PCTFE Wetted Parts
DOUBLE SIDED
FLATS
5/8 WIDE
3-5/16
[84.23]
3/8 NPT
CONNECTIONS
5/8
1-1/4
[31.75]
2-9/32
[58.06]
The Model TNV PTFENeedle Valve is designed for laboratory and industrial
applications for regulating corrosive gases and liquids for high purity services. Media only
come in contact with PTFE and PCTFE. Valve spindles are made of ridged PCTFE to
minimize creeping normally associated with PTFE. The TNV is designed to be used in
pressure or non-critical vacuum applications and can be used as a shut off valve.
Model TNV-1, PTFENeedle Valve (Female x Female)
VALVES
Series
HNV
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Gases and liquids compatible with wetted materials.
End Connections: 3/8 female NPT.
Pressure Limits: 75 psi (517 kPa).
Wetted Materials: Body and O-ring:PTFE; Valve spindle: PCTFE.
Temperature Limits: 150F(65C).
Flow Coefficient: 0.75.
Max. Flow: Air:300 LPM; Water:9 LPM.
Weight: 5.6 oz (158.8 g).
Needle Valve 1-Valve Block Manifold

For Use with Gas and Liquids, Pressures Up to 6000 psi
H MAX
Valves, Needle
CONNECTION SIZE
L
Dimensions in (mm)
L
Connection A
1-31/32 (50.01)
1/8 F x F
1/8 M x F 7/8 (22.3) 2-11/64 (55.17)
2-3/8 (60.33)
1/4 F x F
1/4 M x F 63/64 (25) 2-9/16 (65.09)
2-3/8 (60.33)
3/8 F x F
3/8 M x F 63/64 (25) 2-9/16 (65.09)
Connection A
1/2 F x F
2-3/8 (60.33) 1/2 M x F 1-17/64 (32.15)
3/4 F x F
2-9/16 (65.09) 3/4 M x F 1-1/2 (38.10)
1 F x F
2-9/16 (65.09) 1 M x F
1-25/32 (45.24)
Series HNV Block Manifold is a barstock style needle valve that is designed for isolating
instruments from liquids or gases. The valve series features fine threading and large seat
area to ensure tight shutoff. Wetted materials are 316 SS and PTFE making these ideal for
use with corrosives. The HNV has been tested to assure vibration and thermal stability.
Body includes a lock pin to prevent accidental bonnet disengagement. The HNV is available
in male x female and female x female connections from 1/8 to 1. Tee handle is constructed
of 316 SS and allows low torque operation.
HNV Needle Valve
Female X Female
Pipe Size
Model
1/8
HNV-SSS31B
1/4
HNV-SSS32B
3/8
HNV-SSS33B
1/2
HNV-SSS34B
3/4
HNV-SSS35B
1
HNV-SSS36B
508
Female X Male
Model
HNV-SSS21B
HNV-SSS22B
HNV-SSS23B
HNV-SSS24B
HNV-SSS25B
HNV-SSS26B
L
2-9/16 (65.09)
2-49/64 (70.25)
2-61/64 (59.13)
3-5/32 (80.17)
3-23/64 (85.33)
4-7/64 (104.38)
H
2-49/64 (70.25)
3-23/64 (85/33)
3-3/4 (95.25)
SPECIFICATIONS
End Connections: NPT.
Wetted Materials: 316 SS and PTFE packing.
Pressure Limits: 6000 psi (431 bar) @ 200F (93C). 4000 psi (276 bar) @ 464F
(240C).
Other Materials: Handle: 316 SS.
509_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:29 AM Page 509
Series
BBV-0
2-Valve Block Manifold

Stainless Steel Body, NPT Connections
INSTRUMENT
VENT
ISOLATE
BBV-0N
BBV-0F
The Series BBV-0 2-Valve Block Manifold is perfect for use over a broad range of
industrial applications including oil refineries, nuclear power stations, petrochemical
processing, and more. The Series BBV-0 is forged from 316 stainless steel bar stock and
designed to withstand repeated open and close operations. Suited to control oil, water,
toxic fluids, chemicals, air, and steam; the 2-valve block manifold has (1) isolate and (1) vent
valves. Each valve stem is precision machined with hard seats to reduce operating torque.
The BBV-0F and BBV-0N are designed to mount directly to industrial pressure
transmitters. The BBV-0F comes with two 7/16-20 UNF mounting bolts and one PTFE
gasket.
Description
Flanged 2-valve block manifold
2-valve block manifold
Series
BBV-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compatible liquids, gases, or steam.
End Connections:
Process connection: 1/2 female NPT;
Instrument connection:
No flange: 1/2 male NPT;
Flange: 1/2 DIN 19213 flange;
Vent/test: 1/4 female NPT.
Wetted Materials:
Body, stem, valve assembly: 316 SS;
Stem packing: PTFE.
VALVES
Model
BBV-0F
BBV-0N
PROCESS
3-Valve Block Manifold

Manifolds
INSTRUMENT
EQUALIZE
BBV-1M
BBV-1F
ISOLATE
PROCESS
BBV-1D
BBV-1
*Please see website for dimensional drawing
Series BBV-1 Block Manifold can be used over a broad range of industrial applications
including oil refineries, nuclear power stations, petrochemical processing, and more. The
Series BBV-1 body is forged from 316 stainless steel bar stock and designed to withstand
repeated open and close operations. Suited to control oil, water, toxic fluids, chemicals, air,
and steam; the 3-valve block manifold has (2) isolate and (1) equalizing valves. Each valve
stem is precision machined with hard seats to reduce operating torque.
The flanged model is designed to mount to an industrial differential pressure transmitter.
The BBV-1F comes with four 7/16-20 UNF mounting bolts and two PTFE gaskets, and the
BBV-1D comes with eight 7/16-20 UNF mounting bolts and four PTFE gaskets.
Model
BBV-1B
BBV-1
BBV-1F
BBV-1M
BBV-1D
Description
Mini 3-valve block manifold
3-valve block manifold
Flanged 3-valve block manifold
Multiplanar 3-valve manifold
Double flanged 3-valve block manifold
ISOLATE
Flow Diagram
BBV-1B
SPECIFICATIONS
End Connections:
BBV-1B:1/4 NPT x 1/4 NPT;
BBV-1:1/2NPT x 1/2 NPT;
BBV-1F:1/2 NPT x DIN19213 flange;
BBV-1M: 1/2 NPT x DIN 19213 flange;
BBV-1D: DIN 19213 flange x DIN 19213 flange.
Wetted Materials: Body, stem, valve assembly: 316 SS; Stem packing: PTFE.
Other Material: Handle: 304 SS.
509
510_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:28 AM Page 510
Series
BBV-2
5-Valve Block and Bleed Manifold

BBV-21
BBV-21F
INSTRUMENT
EQUALIZE
VENT
VENT
Manifolds
VALVES
ISOLATE
PROCESS
BBV-23F
BBV-22
Series BBV-2 Block and Bleed Manifold is ideal for use over a broad range of industrial applications including oil refineries, nuclear power stations, petrochemical processing, and more. The Series BBV-2 body is forged from 316 stainless steel bar stock and
designed to withstand repeated open and close operations. Suited to control oil, water,
toxic fluids, chemicals, air, and steam; the 5-Valve Block and Bleed Manifold has (2) isolate,
(1) equalizing, and (2) vent valves. Each valve stem is precision machined with hard seats
to reduce operating torque.
Flanged models are designed to mount to an industrial differential pressure transmitter.
The BBV-21F and BBV-22F come with four 7/16-20 UNF mounting bolts and two PTFE
gaskets. The BBV-23F comes with eight 7/16-20 UNF mounting bolts and two PTFE gaskets.
Model
BBV-21
BBV-21F
BBV-22
BBV-22F
BBV-23F
510
Description
5-valve manifold with side mounted vent valves
Flanged 5-valve manifold with side mounted vent valves
5-valve manifold with top mounted vent valves
Flanged 5-valve manifold with top mounted vent valves
Double flanged 5-valve manifold with top mounted vent valves
PROCESS
FLOW DIAGRAM
BBV-22F
SPECIFICATIONS
End Connections:
Process connection: No flange: 1/2 female NPT; Flange: DIN 19213 flange;
Instrument connection: No flange: 1/2 female NPT; Flange: DIN19213 flange;
Vent/test: 1/4 female NPT.
Wetted Materials: Body, stem, valve assembly: 316 SS; Stem packing: PTFE.
511_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:28 AM Page 511
Series
QV
QUICK-VIEW Valve Position Indicator/Switch

Ultra-Low Cost, Compact, Backlit, Corrosion Resistant
1/8 DIA. PINS (2)
3 [76.20] CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR COVER REMOVAL
4-15/32
[113.5]
1/2
[12.70]
5/16
[7.938]
Scan here
to watch
product video
The Series QV QUICK-VIEW Rotary Valve Position Indicators, now UL and CSA
rated, are produced by Proximity with up to four individual mechanical or proximity
switches. The QUICK-VIEW indicator is also available with optional backlighting.
Consult factory for optional VI colors
Model
QV-210101
QV-210111
Backlighting
No
Yes
Note: Stocked position indicators include two 10 amp SPDT mechanical snap
switches, are direct drive type and include the standard quarter-turn OPEN/CLOSED
visual indicator. Standard units are CSA & UL approved but not for hazardous
locations. Specify EX for hazardous location option.
Model QV mounted to an actuator
1/4 DIA.
[6.350]
SHAFT
LEVER
DRIVE
ONLY
CONDUIT
ENTRANCE
3/4 NPT
6-32 UNC 1/4

1/4 DP [6.350] [6.350]
1/4
[6.350]
2-3/8
[60.33]
3-1/16
[77.79]
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Rotation Travel - Switches only: 5.
Maximum Rotation Travel - Switches only: 360.
Switch Type: SPDT.
Electrical SPDT Switch Ratings:
QV-X1XXXX: 10 A @ 125/250 VAC; 0.5 A 125 VDC;
10 A @ 24 VDC mech. switch;
QV-X2XXXX: 1 A @ 125 VAC; 1A @ 24 VDC mech. switch;
QV-X3XXXX: 2 A @ 125 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC prox. switch;
QV-X4XXXX: 5-25 VDC NAMUR sensor;
QV-X5XXXX: 10-30 VDC INDUCTIVE sensor;
QV-X6XXXX: 10 A @ 125/250 VAC mech. switch.
Lighting Supply Voltage: 24-28 VDC.
Enclosure Material: Polycarbonate housing and conduit.
Conduit Entrance: One 3/4 NPT.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4, 4X (IP66, IP56). Optional explosion-proof, rated:
Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups F & G; Div. 2.
Maximum Altitude: 2000 m (6560 ft).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, cUL, UL.
APPLICATIONS
The QV Series Proximity Position Indicators are designed for maximum reliability in
general purpose and corrosive environments. Applications include: rotary and linear
valves, actuators, manual valves, gear operators and positioners.
1-1/2
[38.10]
4-3/4
[120.7]
VALVES
FEATURES
The lowest cost position indication
Extremely compact design
Easily interchangeable with key competition
Backlighting option available for maximum visibility
QUICK-VIEW Indicator and mounting kits, including NAMUR kits, are stocked for
fast delivery
Flame retardant
UV protection
Hazardous location option
2 MTG HOLES
1/4-20 UNC
7/16 DP [11.11]
Quick-View Complete Model Chart

QV Model Number Prefix
1st Code (1st X) Number of Switches
0
None+
1
One Switch+
2
Two Switches+
3
Three Switches+
4
Four Switches+
2nd Code (2nd X) Switch Type
0
No Switches+
1
10A Mechanical Snap Switch
2
1A Mechanical Gold Contacts
3
2A Proximity Reed Switch+
4
5-25 VDC Namur Sensor
5
10-30 VDC Inductive Sensor
6
10A Mechanical Snap Switch
3rd Code (3rd X)
0
4th Code (4th X) Driving Style
1
Direct Drive+
2
Lever Drive+
3
Namur Drive+
5th Code (5th X) Lighting Option
0
None+
1
24 to 28 VDC Bright White LEDs
6th Code (6th X) Visual Indication
0
None
1
Standard (Open Closed)+
2
Upside Down (Open Closed)+
7th Code (7th X) Additional Options
EX Class I, Div. II, Groups A, B, C & D.
Class II, Div. II Groups F & G.
- Example Popular Model Number
QV 2 1 0 1 0 1
+ EX, Explosion-proof option available.
Note: The 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 6th codes can not all be zero
511
512_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:27 AM Page 512
Position Indicators/Switches/Transmitters
Series
Mark
Mark 1
Polyester Coated Aluminum
Mark 1
Stainless Steel
The Proximity Mark Series is a line of position indicators with a selection of various output
options. Three model styles make up the Mark series to cover almost any application.
Standard models in the Mark Series have visual position indicators and are weatherproof,
explosion-proof, and submersible. A large variety of outputs are available to fit specific
applications. There is a choice of 1 to 6 switch outputs of 16 varieties including inductive
sensors, high temperature switches, gold contact switches, hermetically sealed switches,
and high current switches. Besides the switch outputs the Series offers potentiometer
outputs, transmitters and HART Communications. The units are purchased for either direct
drive applications, such as rotary valves, or lever drive applications, such as linear valves.
Adjustable visual indicator is standard on direct drive units that displays OPEN / CLOSED
status and degrees.
A magnetic drive that completely seals the switch compartment from the atmosphere for
maximum leak protection is utilized in the Mark 1. The Mark 3 uses the same magnetic
drive of the Mark 1, but it can be used for multi-turn applications with 1 to 25 revolutions,
such as gate valves. A through shaft drive is incorporated in the Mark 4 making the unit a
lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 for applications that are not as demanding.
Environmentally sealed for corrosive areas.
VALVES
Scan here
to watch
product video
Mark 1
Features a magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment, completely sealing
the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum hazard and leak protection.
EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
Flexible design allows multiple switches and transmitter options.
Ideal for corrosive environments.
Mark 1 Magnetic Coupling

Cutaway Model 12VDOJ2
Mark 3
Features a magnetic coupling that isolates the switch compartment, completely sealing
the unit from the surrounding atmosphere for maximum hazard and leak protection.
Multi-Turn models that can provide switch signals between 1 and 25 revolutions, and
transmitter models for up to 10 revolutions without gear reduction.
Ideal for corrosive environments.
Mark 3 Multi Turn
Mark 4
Thru-Shaft design that features a 1 bushing for long life and O-rings to seal the switch
compartment for hazard, corrosion, and leak protection.
EZset cams on switch models provide simple set point adjustment.
A lower cost alternative to the Mark 1 Series for less demanding applications.
Mark 4 Thru-Shaft
Cutaway Model 42RDOJ2
512
513_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:26 AM Page 513
Series
Mark
Options
D
L
0
1
6
J1
J2
SV1
SV2
MT
B
IS
IE
II
IM
EM
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-A
A
A
--A
A
--A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
--A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Driving
Method
Enclosure
Mark 1, Magnetic Coupling

Mark 3, Multi-Turn
Mark 4, Thru-Shaft
1 Switch
2 Switches
Potentiometer, 1 K . Available with switches, see *Note
4 Switches
Transmitter, 4 to 20 mA. Available with switches, see *Note
6 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, C, I, R, V, W.
AS-interface and 1 Switch. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W.
AS-interface and 2 Switches. Available with Switch Types B, I, R, W.
HART Transmitter. Available with switches, see *Note
SPDT Snap, Rated: 15 A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~) ; 1/8 hp @ 125 VAC (~),
1/4 hp @ 250 VAC (~), 1/2 A @ 125 VDC ()
-- , 1/4 A @ 250 VDC ()
-- .
Inductive Sensor. 10 to 30 VDC ()
-- . Load:0.1 A.
SPDT High Temperature Snap, 350F (176C) for 600 hours, Rated: 15.1 A @ 125/250/277 VAC (~).
DPDT Snap, Rated:10 A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 0.3 A @ 125 VDC ()
-- .
-- , 0.15 A @ 250 VDC ()
SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated: 1 A @ 125 VAC (~).
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Snap, Rated: 1 A @ 125 VAC ()
-- .
NAMUR Inductive Sensor. 15 mA max @ 5-25 VDC (~).
SPDT Magnetic Blow-Out, Rated:10 A @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC()
-- , 1/4 hp @ 125 VAC (~)/VDC ()
-- .
No Switches
SPDT Hermetically Sealed Reed, Rated: 2 A @ 125 VAC (~), 2 A @ 24 VDC ()
-- .
SPDTSnap, Rated: 4A @ 125/250 VAC (~).
SPDT High Temperature Snap, 250F (121C) Continuous, Rated: 5 A @ 125/250/480 VAC (~).
SPDT Snap, Rated:10 A @ 125/250 VAC (~), 1/3 hp @ 125/250 VAC (~),
1/2 A @ 125 VDC ()
-- , 1/4 A @ 250 VDC ()
-- , 4 A @ 125 VAC (~) (tungsten).
SPDT Gold Contact Snap, Rated 0.1 A @ 125 VAC (~).
Direct Drive (Yoke) with SS Visual Indicator.
Lever Drive (Shaft), No Visual Indicator.
Aluminum, Painted Black
Aluminum, Painted White Epoxy with SS trim
Cast 316 SS
Junction Package with One 1/2 NPT Female Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip.
Junction Package with Two 1/2 NPTFemale Conduit Connection and Terminal Strip.
1 Attached Solenoid Valve (Must be ordered with J1 option).
2 Attached Solenoid Valves (Must be ordered with J2 option).
Metric Threaded Conduit Connection, M25 (M20 for optional J1 and J2 connections).
Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 2391,
II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 (-25/-40/-50C Tamb 70C)
(T5 (-25/-40/-50C Tamb 80C) optional wording).
Directive 94/9/EC, KEMA 03 ATEX 1392 x,
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4.
IECEx DEK II.0056X Ex d IIC T6 Gb for -25C/-40C/-50C Tamb 70C and T5 for -25C/-40C/
-50C Tamb 80C.
IECEx DEK II.0061X IIEx ia IIC T4 Ga. Compliant per EN 60079-0:2007 EN 60079-11:2006 and EN
60079-26:2006.
Certificate:NCC 13.02338 X; Marking: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Certificate:NCC 13.02339 X; Marking: Ex d IIC T6 Gb or Ex d IIC T5 Gb
Available Options A signifies

available with corresponding
construction style.
Mark
3
4
1
-A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-A
A
-A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
VALVES
Construction 1
3
4
Output Type
1
2
3
32
35
310
320
4
5
6
7
8
9
Switch Type
A
& Rating
B
C
D
G
H
I
M
0
R
S
T
V
*Note: Mark 1 and 4 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with switch type 0; 2 switches if ordered with switch types B, C, I, R, V, or W;
and 4 switches if ordered with switch type S. Mark 3 potentiometer and transmitter outputs will have no switches when ordered with switch type 0, and 2 switches if ordered with
switch types A, G, M or T.
Minimum temperature depends on output and switch type selected.
Mark Series mounted to an actuator
513
514_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:15 AM Page 514
Series
Mark
Mounting kits with drive yoke (see drawing), or slotted lever arm, bracket, fasteners and
other zinc plated or stainless steel hardware fit over 2000 popular valves and actuators. A
high strength spring tempered stainless steel drive yoke/coupling is tailored to fit securely
to a specific valve or actuator stem. There is no slippage or binding. No special alignment
fixtures are required due to switch offset design and yoke to stem engagement that makes
installation a snap. Each kit is specially designed for a particular valve or actuator, making
field mounting simple with standard tools. Please specify make and model of valve or
actuator on order.
Mounting kits can be used interchangeably with all models since external mounting features
are identical. Rotary valves utilize direct drive couplings and a slotted lever drive is used
with linear valves. Lever drives convert linear motion to rotary. Stainless steel visual
indicators are standard for direct drive, automated quarter-turn valve applications.
O P E N C L OS
SWITCH
VISUAL
INDICATOR
DRIVE YOKE
MOUNTING
KIT
CLEARANCE REQUIRED
FOR COVER REMOVAL
VALVES
UL rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D (Some units available for Group A,
consult factory); Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, and G.
CSA rated: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F,
and G; Submersible to 50 feet. Certified Ex d IIC T6 IP68 15 meters.
ATEX Compliant:
B suffix, directive 94/9/EC,
KEMA 03 ATEX 2391,
II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 for (-25/-40/-50C Tamb 80C
optional wording) depending on output and switch type selected.
IS suffix directive 94/9/EC,
KEMA 03 ATEX 1392X,
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4.
(Switch type C is not available with ATEX; Switch type B is not available with ATEX
intrinsically safe, -IS suffix).
IECExCompliant:
IE suffix, IECEx DEK II.0056X Ex d IIC T6 Gb for -25C/-40C/-50C Tamb
70C and T5 for -25C/-40C/-50C Tamb 80C.
II suffix, IECEx DEK II.0061X II Ex ia IIC T4 Ga. Compliant per EN 60079-0:2007
EN 60079-11:2006 and EN 60079-26:2006.
INMETRO Compliant:
IM suffix, Certificate:NCC 13.02338 X; Marking:Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
EM suffix, Certificate:NCC 13.02339 X; Marking:Ex d IIC T6 Gb or Ex d IIC T5 Gb
Switch Outputs (Mark 1, 3 and 4)
Temperature Limits: -58 to 176F (-50 to 80C). Switch Type C rated to 350F
(176C) for 600 hours, Switch Type T rated to 250F (121C) continuous. [ATEX
flameproof, -B suffix, rated -50 to 80C (-58 to 176F) for switch type A, G, H, T, or
M; -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) for switch type O, R, S, V, or W; -25 to 80C (-13 to
176F) for switch type B, D, I, or AS Interface; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix,
rated -25 to 40C (-13 to 104F) for switch type D or I; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F)
for switch type R, V, or W, or -50 to 40C (-58 to 104F) for switch type A, G, or H.]
Switch Type: See page reference below.
Electrical Rating: See page reference below.
Set Point Adjustment: Mark 1 and 4: 5 to 360; Mark 3: 1 to 25 revolutions.
514
1-1/16
[26.99]
4-1/4
[107.95]
3
DIRECT
[76.20]
DRIVE
5-15/16
[150.81]
*4-9/16
[115.89]
1-9/16
[39.69]
7/8
[22.23]
3/4 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTION
OR OPTIONAL
M25
1-1/2
[38.10]
118
5/16
[7.94]
2-3/8
[60.33]
1-1/4
[31.75]
1/4-20 UNC
THREAD x 7/16 [11.11] DP
TYP 2 PLACES
SPECIFICATIONS
Product Rating:
Weatherproof and flameproof. NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13.
LEVER
DRIVE
4-7/8
[123.83]
2-3/8
[60.33]
.249 .001
[6.32 .03]
*For Models 11, 12, 41 & 42
1/4
[6.35]
TYP
#6-32 UNC THREAD

X 1/4 [6.35] DEEP
4-7/16
[112.71]
1/8 [3.18] PIN

TYP 2 PLACES
1/2 NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION (OPTIONAL)
OR OPTIONAL M20 2 PLACES
Potentiometer (Mark 1, 3 and 4)

Accuracy: 0.5% of full span. Optional 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C).[ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated
-40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) for switch type A, G, M, O, R, S, T, V, or W; -25 to 80C
(-13 to 176F) for switch type B, D, or I; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix, rated -25
to 40C (-13 to 104F) for switch type I; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) for switch type
O, R, S, V, or W].
Power Rating: 1.5 watt maximum.
Output Signal: 1000 ohm standard. Optional 2000, 5000, 10000, or 20000 ohms.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Span trim pot with 2000 ohm adjustment. No zero
adjustment.
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum 0, Maximum 340; Mark 3: 0 to 10
revolutions.
Transmitter (Mark 1, 3 and 4)
Accuracy: 0.5% of full span. Optional 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). [ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated 40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) for switch type A, G, M, O, R, S, T, V, or W; -25 to 80C (13 to 176F) for switch type B, D, or I; ATEX intrinsically safe, -IS suffix, rated -25 to
40C (-13 to 104F) for switch type I, -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) for switch types O,
R, S, V, or W].
Zero and Span Adjustments: Trim pots for adjusting both. Mark 1 and 4: Span is
adjustable from 50 to 300; Mark 3: Span is adjustable from 1.5 to 8.5 revolutions.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female NPT standard. Optional one or two 1/2
female NPT. M25 and M20 optional.
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Minimum 50, Maximum 300; Mark 3: Minimum
1.5 revolutions, Maximum 8.5 revolutions.
Transmitter w/ HART (Mark 1, 3 and 4)
Accuracy: 0.25% of full span.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C). [ATEX flameproof, -B suffix, rated 40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) for switch type A, G, M, O, R, S, T, V or W; -25 to 80C (-13
to 176F) for switch type B, D or I].
HART Receive Impedance: Rx = 500 kohm; Cx = 2500 pF.
Zero and Span Adjustments: Pushbuttons or HART master for setting both.
Mark 1 and 4: Span is adjustable from 0 to 330; Mark 3:Span is adjustable from
1.5 to 8.5 revolutions.
Conduit Connection: 3/4 female NPT standard. Optional one or two 1/2
female NPT. M25 and M20 optional.
Rotational Travel: Mark 1 and 4: Maximum 330; Mark 3: Minimum1.5
revolutions, Maximum 8.5 revolutions.
Switch Type: See page 513 (Series Mark)
Electrical Rating: See page 513 (Series Mark)
515_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:17 AM Page 515
Series
VPS
Valve Position Sensor

Dual Inductive, 2-Wire AC/DC Sensor, Fully Adjustable Target in 2 Increments
M12 x 1 THD, 4-PIN
QUICK DISCONNECT
.218 [5.54] (2) PL
1-5/8
[42.85]
3/8
[7.95]
1
[26.21]
2-3/8
[60.33]
3/4
[20.62] 1-1/8
[28.58]
1-1/8
[29.97]
1/2
[12.70]
1-7/8
[47.73]
3/4
1-1/2 [19.84]
[39.67]
Model VPS2411
1/4
[6.35]
Model VPS2411
Model P1
The dual inductive, 2-wire AC/DC Series VPS Valve Position Sensor maintains
VDI/VDE 3845 dimensions so positioners can be easily mounted on top of the sensor and
target. The Model VPS2411 Sensor and Model P1 Target mount easily and directly to
actuators with ISO NAMUR topworks (see picture below). Fully adjustable target in 2
increments, the sensor has two independent LEDs and bright flow line indicator that
provide local visual indication. All electrical connections are made with the Model VIP82
4-pin quick disconnect cable (6 in length) for ease in installation. Solid state components
are fully embedded in an epoxy resin to prevent condensation build-up and to protect
against vibration and shock. The rugged PBTP housing provides excellent corrosion
resistance and moisture protection.
Series
DT
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Limits:-13 to 176F (-25 to 80C).
Power Requirements: 20 to 140 VAC (50/60 Hz), 10 to 200 VDC.
Enclosure Material: Polybutylene terephthalate.
Switch Type: Dual NO.
Electrical Rating: 200 mA.
Minimum Load Current: 5 mA.
Leakage Current: 0.8 mA.
Voltage Drop: 5.0 V.
Repeatability: 0.01 mm.
Hysteresis: 3 to 15% of sensing range.
Switching Frequency: 25 Hz.
Mounting Holes: NAMUR mounting - 3.15 x 1.18 (80 x 30 mm) or 5.118 x 1.18
(130 x 30 mm).
Electrical Connection: 4-pin quick disconnect.
Model VPS2411, Valve Position Sensor
Model P1, Valve Position Target
Model VIP82, Quick Disconnect Cable
Detector Position Sensor

Reliable Magnetic Point Sensor, Stainless Steel Housing, AC or DC
Detector
Standard Target with DT1060

(3/816 UNC X 3/4)
1
[25.41]
HEX
Target
High Strength Target with DT1160

(1/213 UNC X 3/4)
The Series DT Detector Position Sensors are reliable, magnetically actuated, SS,
completely interchangeable with competitive units. AC or DC for user friendly operation.
They have no moving parts, eliminate costly seal fittings and offer enhanced reliability by
eliminating arcing. Unintentional actuation by metals is not a problem. The sensor consists
of a durable hermetically sealed reed switch potted in a SS housing and a separate 316 SS
magnetic actuator bolt. As the actuator moves within the sensing range of the sensor, the
magnet in the actuator changes the state of reed switch contacts inside the sensor. This
either opens or closes a circuit depending on wiring configuration. Sensing distance is 0.1
(2.54 mm) for the standard target. Greater sensitivity of a larger magnetic target increases
the sensing distance to 0.5 (12.7 mm).
The detector is excellent for hazardous and corrosive environments, solid state and
intrinsically safe applications. A detector may be mounted in any position. For installation
in hazardous locations, be sure to check local and national electrical codes. The detector is
designed to NEMA 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 7, 9, 12 and 13.
APPLICATIONS
The detector is used for control element position monitoring and indication with
devices such as linear valves actuators & cylinders rotary valves dampers.
Model Description
DT1060 Detector and standard actuator
DT1160 Detector and high strength actuator
VALVES
Model VPS and P1 mounted on an actuator
Model P1
1/2-14 NPT
Actuator
1-1/4
[31.75]
Detector
3-3/4
[95.24]
1-3/4
[44.44]
5/8-18 UNF
SPECIFICATIONS
TemperatureLimits: -40 to 163F (-40 to 73C).
Switch Type: Tungsten, SPDT, Form C.
Enclosure Rating:Weatherproof; Hermetically sealed; Explosion-proof UL & CSA
listed for Class I, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G. Divisions 1 & 2.
Intrinsically Safe: Simple apparatus (w/barrier).
Operating/Response Time: 3.0 m s.
Initial Contact Resistance: 0.50 (max).
Repeatability: 0.005 (.01 cm).
Hysteresis: 0.030 (.08 cm).
Electrical Connection: Factory sealed leads with 18 min, 4 conductor, PVC
insulated, 18 AWG green/red/black/white (ground/NC/ NO/common).
Housing: 316 SS.
Potting: Epoxy resin.
Conduit: 1/2-14 female NPT.
Weight: 0.32 lb (145 g); 0.45 lb (204 g) with actuator.
Agency Approvals: CSA, cUL, UL.
Sensing Distance
0.1 (2.54 mm)
0.5 (12.7 mm)
515
516_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:22 AM Page 516
Series
VPI
Valve Position Indicator

Low Cost, Mechanical or Proximity Limit Switches
4-3/4
[120.5]
3-51/64
[96.5]
3-27/32
[97.5]
1/2 NPT 1-61/64

[49.8]
2-25/32
[70.8]
L2
L1
W4
W3
Bracket
Bracket Dimensions
Model H in (mm)
L1 in (mm) L2 in (mm) W3 in (mm) W4 in (mm)
VPI-B01 1-13/64 [30.5] 3-5/32 [80] 3-15/16 [100] 1-3/16 [30] 2 [50]
VPI-B02 1-19/64 [40.5]
VPI-B03 1-19/64 [40.5] 5-1/8 [130] 5-29/32 [150]
VPI-B04 2-3/8 [60.5]
Model
VPI-M01
VPI-P01
VPI-B01
VPI-B02
VPI-B03
VPI-B04
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Rotation Travel: 60.
Maximum Rotation Travel: 360.
to 80C).
Switch Type: VPI-M: (2) mechanical
SPDT limit switches; VPI-P: (2)
inductive proximity limit switches.
Description
Rotary Valve Position Indicator, Dual Mechanical SPDT, 1/2 NPT Conduit
Rotary Valve Position Indicator, Dual Proximity SPDT, 1/2 NPT Conduit
NAMURA, 30 x 80 mm hole pattern, 20 mm shaft height
NAMURB, 30 x 80 mm hole pattern, 30 mm shaft height
NAMURC, 30 x 130 mm hole pattern, 30 mm shaft height
NAMURD, 30 x 130 mm hole pattern, 50 mm shaft height
Series
VPT
Electrical Rating: VPI-M: AC: 3 A at

250 V, 5 A at 125 V; DC: 0.2 A at 250 V,
0.4 A at 125 V, 4 A at 30 V.
Power Requirements: VPI-P: 12 to 24
VDC, 30 VDC max.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum diecasting.
Electrical Connections: 8-contact
screw terminal strip.
Conduit Connection: (2) 1/2 female
NPT.
Mounting: NAMUR.
Valve Position Transmitter

40
26 [MAX. 34]
High Accuracy, Cost Effective, LCD Display

30
The Series VPI Rotary Valve Position Indicators are compact yet rugged for confined
and severe locations. These versatile units offer visual position indication as well as two
internal limit switches. The spring-loaded splined cams require no tools for a quick and
precise adjustment. The Series VPI is available with mechanical or proximity limit switches.
The mechanical models feature two SPDT limit switches. The proximity models feature
two solid-state inductive limit switches eliminating the need for the cams to make contact
with the switches. The NEMA 6 (IP67) rating ensures protection against the ingress of
liquid and debris.
20
VALVES
Scan here
to watch
product video
3-49/64
[95.50]
2-29/32
[74.00]
13
2-1/16
[52.50]
2-11/64
[55.00]
The Series VPT Valve Position Transmitter is an ideal way to track position of valve.
With both linear and rotary motion monitoring available, this Valve Position Transmitter
can suit a wide variety of applications. Using a resistance gear in conjunction with a
potentiometer, the change in resistance outputs a proportional current signal which is sent
to the controller. The standard LCD display allows the operator to monitor precise position
of valve.
516
1-3/8
[35.00]
3-7/8
[98.60]
45/64
[17.80]
VPT-L
FEATURES
Simple zero and span adjustment
Reverse acting or direct acting settings
4 to 20 mA(2-wire)
LCDstandard
2-11/64
[55.00]
2-29/32
[74.00]
61/64
[24.30]
VPT-R
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: 0 to 30(LA1); 0 to
90(RA1).
Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum.
Electrical Connection: M20 cable
gland.
Model
VPT-LA1
VPT-RA1
Operation
Linear
Rotary
Linearity: 1% FS.
Hysteresis: 0.2% FS.
Sensitivity: 0.2% FS.
(-30 to 85C).
517_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:22 AM Page 517
Series
EPTA
Electro-Pneumatic Transducer
Low Cost, Selectable Input/Output, Manual Override
1/2
[12.7]
27/32
[21.43]
4-5/16 [109.54]
3-25/64 [86.12]
23/32
[18.26]
4-1/16
[103.19]
3-1/4
[82.55]
3-27/64
[86.92]
SPAN
OFFSET
PWR C Sig FB OV OV
AUTO
3 [76.20]
EPTA-S
3-1/4 [82.55]
1-23/64
[34.53]
23/64
[9.13]
Shown with snap-track mounting
3-23/64
[85.33]
100%
5V
0%
23/32
[18.26]
EPTA-B
0-10 PSI
0-15 PSI
0-20 PSI
POWER
PWR C SIG FB OV OV MANUAL
3/16
[4.76]
10V
15V
20mA
4-15/32
[113.5]
MANUAL
4X 13/64
[5.16]
Shown with metal bracket mounting
Model
EPTA-S0
EPTA-B0
EPTA-S1
EPTA-B1
Description
Standard Snap-Track Mount Transducer
StandardMetal Bracket Mount Transducer
Snap-Track MountTransducer with Fail-Safe
Metal Bracket Mount Transducer with Fail-Safe
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry air or any inert gas.
Input Signal: DC current (4 to 20 mA) or DC voltage (0-5/0-10/0-15).
Input Impedance: Current: 250 ; Voltage: Infinite.
Output Signal: Jumper selectable 0 to 10 psig (0 to 69 kPa), 0 to 15 psig (0 to 103
kPa), or 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa).
Feedback Output: 0 to 5 VDC.
Air Supply: 25 psig (172 kPa) max.
Air Flow: 750 scim.
Air Consumption: 0 scim normal operation, fail-safe model vents to 0 psi on
power loss.
Accuracy: 1.0% full-scale @ room temperature; 2.0% full-scale @ 32 to 120F
(0 to 48.8C).
Supply Voltage: 24 VDC (+10%/-5%) or 24 VAC (10%) 50/60 Hz.
Supply Current: 180 mA max, 200 mA max on fail-safe model.
Temperature Limits: Operating: 32 to 120F (0 to 48.8C); Storage: -20 to 150F
(-6.7 to 65.6C).
Operating Humidity Range: 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Pressure Connections: 1/4 OD (polyethylene tubing optimum).
Electrical Connections: Plug-in block terminal type with 5 mm pin spacing.
Wire Size: Up to one 14 AWG per terminal.
Weight: EPTA-S0: 6.9 oz. (196 g); EPTA-S1: 9.2 oz. (261 g); EPTA-B: 14.5 oz.
(411 g).
Model
PI
Pressure to Current
Transducer
ACCESSORIES
A-400, DIN Mounting Kit
A-403, Replacement Integral Barb Filter
Pressure To Current Transducer

Reliable, User-Oriented Performance
3/4
[19.02]
3
[76.20]
1
[25.40]
45/64
[17.78]
3/4
[19.05]
5/16
[7.75]
3-7/16
[87.12]
17/32
[13.46]
W.E. ANDERSON
A DIV OF DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC
PRESSURE INLET
1/8 NPT
The Model PI Pressure To Current Transducer converts a pneumatic input pressure

to an accurately proportional output current with uncompromising accuracy and durability.
The PI serves in high-density and panel-mounted applications. The rugged PI transducer
offers a high density DIN rail adapters and space saving with easy plug-in installation.
Model
PI-1
PI-2
Range
3 to15 psig (20 to 100 kPa)
3 to 27 psig (20 to 180 kPa)
PI-C, Replacement DIN RailAdapter
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Clean dry air filtered to 40
microns.
Input Signal: 3 to 15 psig and 3 to 27
psig.
Input Capacitance: 2-wire: 700 ,
standard; Voltage: 5k min.
Output: 2-wire: 4 to 20 mA.
Linearity: 0.15% of span.
Hysteresis: 0.15% of span max.
Accuracy: 0.15% of span
guaranteed; 0.10% of span typical.
Includes combined effects of linearity,
hysteresis and repeatability errors.
Repeatability: 0.10% of span;
0.03% of span typical.
Response Time: 10 ms to 99% of step
change.
3
[76.20]
MODEL NO. PI-X

SUPPLY: 10-42 VDC
MAX. TEMP: 75C
INPUT:X-XX PSIG
OUTPUT: 4 TO 20 mA
SERIAL NO: XX-XXXX
TAG NO: XXX-XXXX
1-63/64
[50.47]
5-3/8
[136.66]
VALVES
The Series EPTA is an electric to pneumatic transducer that converts an analog input
signal to a linearly proportionate pneumatic output by modulating its control valves to
regulate branch line pressure to the set point determined by the input signal. All models
incorporate two low voltage valves, an integral in-barb filter, a 0 to 30 psi analog gauge, an
anodized aluminum manifold, and brass barbed fittings. The EPTA offers adjustable span
and offset as well as manual override. This unit has no air consumption and is immune to
mounting orientation. Output pressure ranges include field-selectable 0 to 10, 0 to 15, and
0 to 20 psig. Also included is an analog 0 to 5 VDC feedback signal indicating the resultant
branch line pressure. Universal 24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and field-selectable 4 to 20
mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0 to 15 VDC inputs ensure single unit compatibility with
most systems. The standard models maintain branch pressure on power loss while the FailSafe models will drop the branch pressure to 0 psi on power loss. Mounting configurations
include a metal bracket mount in the EPTA-B models and a snap-track mount in the EPTAS models. The A-400 accessory kit will allow the EPTA-S models to be mounted on a
standard DIN rail.
5-25/32
[146.84]

Temperature Stability: Span and
Zero: 0.007% of span per F max.
deviation from 77F calibration.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -60 to 185F (-50 to 85C).
Calibration Adjustments: Noninteractive, multi-turn span and zero
potentiometers with approximately
10% of span adjustment range.
Connections:
Signal Air: 1/8 NPT female;
Electrical Wiring: Miniature terminal
block accepts solid or stranded wire
up to 14 AWG.
517
518_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:21 AM Page 518
Series
IP
Current to Pressure Transducer

Intrinsically Safe, NEMA 4X Enclosure, Field Reversible, Low Cost
2-3/16 SQ
[55.37]
1/2 NPT
FEMALE
4-1/4
[107.70]
1-1/2
[38.10]
35/64
[13.97]
1-7/16
[36.58]
VALVES
The Series IP Current to Pressure Transducer converts a current input signal to a

linearly proportional pneumatic output pressure. The features include built-in volume
booster, low air consumption, field reversible (provides output which is inversely
proportional to input signal) and flexible zero and span adjustments. The rugged NEMA
4X enclosure allows splashdown and outdoor installation. The IP can be used for
applications that require operation of valve actuators, pneumatic valve positioners, damper
and louver actuators, final control elements and relays.
Model
IP-42
IP-43
IP-44
Input
Output Range
psi
Ranges
3 to 15
4 to 20 mA
3 to 27
4 to 20 mA
6 to 30
4 to 20 mA
kPa
20 to 100
20 to 185
40 to 200
Valve Controllers,
Digital
Series
EP1000
1-1/2
[38.10]
1/4 NPT FEMALE
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered
to 40 microns.
Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA.
Input Impedance: IP-42: 180 ohms;
IP-43 and IP-44: 220 .
Air Pressure: Min: 3 psig (21 kPa)
above max output; Maximum: 100 psig
(700 kPa).
Linearity: < 0.75% of span.
Hysteresis: < 1% of span.
Repeatability: < 0.5% of span.
Supply Pressure Sensitivity: < 0.1%
of span per psig (< 0.15% of span per
10 kPa).
Power Requirements:Loop-powered.
to 60C).
Pressure Connections: 1/4 female

NPT.
NPT.
Air Consumption: 0.03 SCFM (0.5
m3/h) typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 SCFM (7.6 m3/h
ANR) at 25 psig (175 kPa) supply; 12
SCFM (20 m3/h) at 100 psig (700 kPa)
supply.
Relief Capacity: 2 SCFM (3.4 m3/h) at
5 psig (35 kPa) above 20 psig (140
kPa) setpoint.
Agency Approvals:CE, FM.
Electro-pneumatic Controller
Low Cost, Easy Installation, Weatherproof, Fully Programmable Controller
AT
10-1/2
[266.7]
OUT1
LOVE CONTROLS
OUT2
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
SERIES 4B
OUTPUT
SUPPLY
6-1/4
[158.75]
1-5/8
[41.28]
8-1/5
[215.9]
Stop wasting time and money trying to find a suitable location to mount your controller
and current to pressure transducer The Series EP1000 Electro-pneumatic Controller
combines the highest quality instrumentation in one compact NEMA 4X enclosure for easy,
low cost installation. Simply provide a supply pressure and voltage with a standard
thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current input to this unit and a traditional pneumatic
process quickly converts to a state-of-the-art electronic operation. The versatile
microprocessor based controller incorporates a high level of standard features. Typical
function setup items appear in the control menu only when the function is selected, so you
dont have to wade through unnecessary items. Standard features include Self-Tune, fully
adjustable PID and Auto/Manual control. Combine this versatile controller with the HiFlow Valve for excellent process operation in industries like food and beverage processing,
pulp and paper, chemical and pharmaceutical.
Model
EP1000
EP1011
518
Output Range psi (bar)

3 to 15 (0.21 to 1.03)
6 to 30 (0.41 to 2.07)
SPECIFICATIONS
Front Panel Selectable Inputs: Thermocouple, RTD, DC voltage or DC current.
Supply Pressure: Min: EP1000: 18 psig (1.24 bar); EP1011: 33 psig (2.28 bar).
Max:100 psig (6.89 bar).
Output: EP1000: 3 to 15 psig (0.21 to 1.03 bar); EP1011: 6 to 30 psig (0.41 to
2.07 bar).
Accuracy: 1.0% of span.
Linearity: 0.75% of span.
Hysteresis: 1.0% of span.
Repeatability: 0.5% of span.
Power Requirements: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Pressure Connections: 1/4 female NPT.
Air Consumption: 0.03 scfm (0.5 m3/h) typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (7.6 m3/h) at 25 psig (1.72 bar) supply; 12 scfm (20
m3/h) at 100 psig (6.89 bar) supply.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
519_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:20 AM Page 519
Model
4V-3
1/4 DIN Valve Controller

Valve Position Feedback, RS-485 Communications
RoHS
3-11/16
[93.73]
3-3/4
[95.25]
3-43/64
[93.12]
3-51/64
[96.52]
LOVE CONTROLS
Model 4V-3, Valve Controller
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs:Thermocouple, RTD, DC Voltages or DCCurrent.
Display:2 line, 7 segment LED, 4 bits and 2 bits of valve openness display.
Accuracy: 0.25%, least significant digit.
Memory Backup: Non-volatile memory.
Control Output Ratings: SPST,5A @250 VACresistive.
Communications: RS-485 Modbus A-5-11/RTU Communication Protocol.
Front Panel Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66).
VALVES
The Series 4V 1/4 DINValve Controller displays and controls the current position of
a valve or damper by accepting in a signal from a position indicator such as our QV series.
The controls can be programmed for ON/OFF, PID, ramp and soak, auto-tuning or manual
tuning control methods. For greater design flexibility, the Series 4V accepts
thermocouple, RTD, current or voltage inputs. An auto/manual key is located on the front
panel in order to toggle between manual operation and automatic operation. The RS-485
serial communications can work with either ASCII or Modbus RTU protocol. During
normal operation, the controller will display the present value (PV), set point value (SV)
and the current valve position (%). The Series 4V is equipped with two programmable
alarm set points.
SERIES 4V
ACCESSORIES
A-277, 250 precision resistor
Valve Controllers,
Digital
Input Types
Type K T/C
Type J T/C
Type T T/C
Type E T/C
Type W T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type B T/C
Type L T/C
Type U T/C
Pt 100 RTD
0-50 mV
0-5 V
0-10 V
0-20 mA*
4-20 mA*
Range
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
-148 to 2192F (-100 to 1200C)
-328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
32 to 1112F (0 to 600C)
-328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
32 to 3092F (0 to 1700C)
212 to 3272F (100 to 1800C)
-328 to 1562F (-200 to 850C)
-328 to 932F (-200 to 500C)
-328 to 1112F (-200 to 600C)
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
-999 to 9999
*Requires 250 Precision Resistor.
519
520_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:19 AM Page 520
Series
2700 &
2800

NEMA 4X Enclosure, Compact Size, Reliable
39/64
[15.5]
1-11/16
[42.7]
1
[25.4]
1/2
[12.7]
1/8
[3.17]
DIN RAIL MOUNTING

OPTION
22 GA. WIRE LEADS
MOUNTING HOLES
APPROX. 18 LONG
#10-32 UNF-2B x 3/8 DP
POS, NEG, GRD
2 PLCS
2-15/16
5/16
[74.7]
[7.92]
1-1/2
[38.1]
VALVES
1-1/8
[28.7]
1/2 NPT
3-11/16 [93.7]
1-1/2 [38.1]
3-1/8
[79.2]
1-51/64
[45.7]
Current to Pressure
Transducers
3-23/64
[85.3]
2-1/4
[57/2]
1-19/64
[33.0]
2-3/16
[55.4]
33/64
[13.1]
IN & OUT PORTS

1/4-18 NPT
4 PLCS
25/64
[9.72]
49/64
[19.4]
PIPE CLAMP MOUNTING

OPTION FOR 1-1/2 PIPE
The Series 2700 Current to Pressure Transducer combines economical startup cost,
low air consumption, and reliable performance to make the 2700 a great investment. The
unit converts a variable current signal to a proportional pneumatic output. It has input and
output ports on both the front and back which allows for versatile plumbing. The NEMA
4X enclosure enables the unit to be installed indoors or outdoors, however, the unit is not
vibration resistant. It is FM and CSA approved for intrinsically safe operation. The 2700
is designed for remote or panel mounting. An integral volume booster provides high flow
capacity, increasing control speed in critical applications. Other features include external
zero and span adjustments which are convenient for field calibration.
The Series 2800 Current to Pressure Transducer utilizes a closed loop pressure
feedback system that closely controls output and compensates for vibration, mounting
angle, temperature, and supply pressure variations. These characteristics make this unit
ideal for field mounting on a valve. The control mechanism is a piezoceramic actuator
encapsulated in a protective skin, which provides a constant defense against humidity and
contaminants. These features make this unit ideal for use in demanding applications. The
2800 also comes in a NEMA 4X enclosure and is field reversible. It is FM and CSA approved
intrinsically safe, as well. For ease of installation, this model has input and output ports on
both the front and back and can be easily panel mounted.
Series 2700
Model
Input
2713-WP 4 to 20 mA
2716-WP 4 to 20 mA
Output
3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar)
Series2800
Input
Model
2813-WP 4 to 20 mA
2816-WP 4 to 20 mA
Output
3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar)
ACCESSORIES
A-180 Valve Mounting Bracket, for Hi-FlowTM control valves (Series 2800 only)
A-181 DIN Rail Mounting Kit, suitable for EN-50035, EN-50042, and EN-50022
rails
A-182 Pipe Mounting Kit, for 1-1/2 and 2 pipes
Valve Mount, for factory mounting and calibration to Hi-FlowTM control valves, add
Current-to-Pressure Transducer model number as suffix (Series 2800 only)
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
Air Supply: Min: 5 psig (0.3 bar) above max output; Max: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar).
Accuracy: Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Linearity: Series 2700: < 0.5% of span.
Hysteresis: Series 2700: < 0.5% of span; Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Repeatability: Series 2700: < 0.5% of span; Series 2800: 0.1% of span.
Deadband: Series 2800: 0.02% of span.
Supply Pressure Sensitivity: Series 2700: < 0.1% of span per 1.0 psig (0.1 bar).
Power Requirement: Loop powered.
Temperature Limits: Series 2700: -20 to 150F (-29 to 66C); Series 2800:
Operating: -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C); Storage: -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C).
Electrical Connection: 1/2 female NPT.
Air Consumption: Series 2700: 0.03 scfm (0.01 l/s) at midrange typical; Series
2800: 0.025 scfm (0.01 l/s) at midrange typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) supply; 12.0 scfm (5.7 l/s)
at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply.
Enclosure: Chromate-treated aluminum with epoxy paint.
Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66) and intrinsically safe.
Weight: Series 2700: 1.3 lb (0.59 kg); Series 2800: 0.8 lb (0.37 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM.
Series 2700
FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F and G; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C and D; Class II and III, Division 2, Groups F and G.
CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings: Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D; Class II,
Groups E, F and G; Class III.
Series 2800
FM Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, and G; Class I, Zone 0, Group IIB;
Class I, II, and III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, F, and G.
CSA Intrinsically Safe Ratings:
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G;
Class III.
520
521_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:21 AM Page 521
Series
2900

Intrinsically Safe, Explosion-Proof, NEMA 4X Enclosure
3-1/2
[88.9]
1
[25.4]
IN & OUT
PORTS 1/4-18 NPT
4 PLACES
Output
3-15 psig (0.2-1.0 bar)
6-30 psig (0.4-2.1 bar)
ACCESSORIES
A-180 Valve Mounting Bracket, for Hi-FlowTM control valves
Valve Mount, for factory mounting and calibration to Hi-FlowTM control valves, add
Current-to-Pressure Transducer model number as suffix
49/64
[19.4]
1-1/2
[38.1]
33/64
[13.1]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Oil free, clean dry air filtered to 40 microns.
Air Supply: Min: 5 psig (0.3 bar) above max output; Max: 100 psig (6.9 bar).
Output: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1.0 bar), 6 to 30 psig (0.4 to 2.1 bar).
Accuracy: 0.1% of span.
Hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
Repeatability: 0.1% of span.
Deadband: 0.02% of span.
Power Requirement: Loop powered.
Temperature Limits:
Storage: -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C).
Electrical Connection: 1/2 female NPT.
Air Consumption: 0.05 scfm (0.02 l/s) at midrange typical.
Output Capacity: 4.5 scfm (2.1 l/s) at 25 psig (1.7 bar) supply; 12.0 scfm (5.7 l/s)
Enclosure: Chromate-treated aluminum with epoxy paint.
Enclosure Rating: Weatherproof NEMA 4X (IP66), explosion-proof and
intrinsically safe.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, FM.
FM Ratings:
Explosion-proof for Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. T6, Dust Ignitionproof for
Class I, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G, T6; Intrinsically safe for Class I, II, and III,
Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, and G, T4 hazardous (classified) locations and
intrinsically safe for Class I, Zone 0, Group IIB, T4 hazardous (classified) locations
and suitable for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D, T4, and Class II and III, Division 2, Groups
F and G, T6 hazardous (classified) locations.
CSA Ratings:
Class I Division 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D;
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class II and III, Division 2, Groups F and G.
521
Current to Pressure
Transducers
Model Input
2913-E 4-20 mA
2916-E 4-20 mA
57/64
[22.4]
2-5/64
[52.6]
VALVES
2-3/16
[55.6]
FEATURES
Designed for hazardous environments
Vibration resistant
Explosion-proof
Weatherproof and intrinsically safe
1/2 NPT PORT FOR

CONDUIT PIPING
4-19/32
[116.6]
27/32
[21.3]
2-1/2
[63.5]
The Series 2900 Current to Pressure Transducer delivers reliable high performance
for the toughest applications in the most hazardous environments. Its NEMA 4X housing
is designed and FM and CSA approved for both intrinsically safe and explosion-proof
operation. This unit has advanced circuitry which includes electronic feedback control for
superior vibration protection and highly accurate output. The 2900 is not position sensitive
and the easily accessible zero and span adjustments make field calibration quick and easy.
For ease of installation, this model has input and output ports on both the front and back.
It is also not vibration sensitive, which makes the 2900 ideal for field mounting on a valve.
These features coupled with the units compact size help make set-up and installation
simple.
4 #10-32-UNF
TAPPED HOLES FOR
MOUNTING
522_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:18 AM Page 522
Series
165
PRECISOR II Pneumatic and

Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Linear Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design, 316 SS Models
4-41/64
[117.87]
6-43/64
[169.47]
1-25/32
[45.24]
M8X 1.25P
M8X 1.25P
4 PLCS
3-5/8
[92.08]
1-31/32
[50.01] 2-49/64
[70.25]
6-9/16
[166.69]
Series 165NL
2X M8X1.25
8-3/4
[225.30]
VALVES
Electro-Pneumatic
POSITIONER
6-9/16
[166.69]
4-9/16
[115.89]
1-25/32
[45.24]
4X M8X1.25
3-19/32
[91.29]
1-31/32
[50.01] 2-3/4
[69.85]
OUT2
SUP.
Positioners
Series 165EL
The Series 165 PRECISOR II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic Positioners
deliver stable process control at an exceptionally low price. Its rugged, durable design
makes it ideal for harsh environments while maintaining precise, accurate positioning of
the control element. Units can be easily changed from direct to reverse action, or vice versa.
Low air consumption keeps operating costs at a minimum, while still responding quickly
and accurately. Excellent for use in chemical processing, food and beverage, pulp and paper,
and pharmaceutical industries, as well as many others.
FEATURE
Field selectable cam for direct or reverse acting.
Model
165NL
165EL
165EL-SS
Input
3 to 15 psig
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Enclosure
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
How To Order:
1. Select Model No. to specify input control signal.
2. For proper mounting hardware, order according to which actuator the positioner
will be mounted to:
Mounting Kits
Model
For Actuator Models
A-233
220 and 221 Air-to-Lower
A-234
222 and 223 Air-to-Lower
A-235
230 and 231 Air-to-Raise
A-236
233 Air-to-Raise
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar); Electro-pneumatic:4 to 20 mA
DC.
Input Impedance: (165EL only): 250 15 .
Enclosure Material: Aluminum diecasting or 316 SS.
Air Supply: 20 to 100 psig (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Supply Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Gage Connection: 1/8 NPT.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT (165EL only).
Linearity: 0.2% FS.
Hysteresis: 1% FS.
Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0.5 to 6 (10 to 150 mm).
Temperature Limits: Aluminum: -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C); SS: -40 to 158F (-40 to
70C).
Weight: 165NL: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg); 165EL: 6.1 lb (2.7 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE (165ELonly).
APPLICATIONS
Series 165 PRECISOR II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic Positioners provide
excellent modulating control when used between the Dwyer Temperature Controllers,
Current to Pressure Transducer, and the Hi-Flow Valve in such industries as the
food and beverage processing, chemical, pharmaceutical, and wood pulp and paper.
Valve Mount: For factory mounting and calibration to Hi-Flow control valves,
add suffix to valve model number of positioner.
Example: 2004VA32-231-165EL
522
523_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:14 AM Page 523
Series
265
PRECISOR II Pneumatic and

Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Rotary Operation, Field Selectable Cam Design, 316 SS Models
3-1/4
[83.01]
7-1/4
[184.00]
1
[25.00]
2-3/8
[59.99]
3/8
[10.01]
2-1/2
1-5/8 [65.02]
[40.00]
6-1/2
[165.51]
2-3/4
[70.00]
2-3/8
[60.01]
(4) M8X1.25P
(8) M8X1.25P
3-5/8
[91.49]
Series 265NR
4X M8X1.25
8-25/32 [223.04]
4X M8X1.25
3-19/32
[91.29]
1-31/32
[50.01] 2-3/4
[69.85]
OUT2
VALVES
6-9/16
[166.69]
4-3/8 [111.13]
1-25/32
[45.24]
SUP.
Series 265ER
FEATURES
Field selectable cam for direct or reverse acting
User selectable single or double action.
Model
265NR-D5
265ER-D5
265ER-D5SS
Input
3 to 15 psig
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Lever Type
NAMUR
NAMUR
NAMUR
Enclosure
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Pneumatic: 3 to 15 psig (0.2 to 1 bar); Electro-pneumatic:4 to 20 mA
DC.
Input Impedance: (265ER only): 250 15 .
Enclosure Material: Aluminum diecasting or 316 SS.
Air Supply: 20 to 101 psig (1.4 to 7.0 bar).
Air Supply Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Electrical Connection: Screw terminal.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT (265ER only).
Linearity: 2% FS.
Hysteresis: 1% FS.
Air Consumption: 0.10 scfm (3 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 28 scfm (80 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0 to 90.
Temperature Limits: Aluminum: -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C); SS: -40 to 158F (-40 to
70C).
Weight: 265NR: 3.1 lb (1.7 kg); 265ER: 6.2 lb (2.8 kg).
Agency Approvals: CE (265ER only).
Pneumatic Hosing and Fittings

Hosing and fittings for connecting positioners, current to pressure transducers, air filter
gauges and other accessories to pneumatic actuated valves.
Model
A-228
A-332
Description
SS steel flex hose, 12 (30.48 cm) L, 1/8 male NPT connections
Brass adapter, 1/8 female NPT to 1/4 male NPT
523
Positioners
Proximity Series 265 PRECISOR II Pneumatic and Electro-Pneumatic

Positioners combine outstanding performance with an extremely low price, making it
an exceptional value for industrial applications. Rotary valves with single or double acting
pneumatic actuators can be precisely controlled, such as our ball and butterfly valves. The
PRECISOR II positioner proportionally modulates the valve from either an electric 4 to
20 mA or pneumatic 3 to 15 psig input signal, based on the model chosen and is userselectable for single or double action. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for use in
harsh environments, while maintaining precise, accurate positioning of the control
elements. Includes a bracket for mounting onto actuators with NAMUR standard
connections, and features a versatile linear cam for direct action, reverse action, or split
ranges.
524_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:17 AM Page 524
Series
275
PRECISOR III Electro-Pneumatic Positioner

Low Cost, Rotary Operation, Selectable Single or Double Action
21/64
[8.33]
3-17/32
[89.69]
6-13/64
[157.56]
4-5/8
[117.48]
13/64
[5.16]
2-3/8
[60.33]
1-25/32
[45.24]
5-11/32
[135.73]
2-11/32
[59.53]
1-25/32
[45.24]
2-49/64
[70.25]
NPT 1/4
SUPPLY
CONDUIT 31/64
1/2 [12/30]
3/8
[9.53]
NPT 1/4
OUT 2
4-5/64
[103.58]
6-7/64 [155.18]
3-35/64
[90.09]
1-21/32
[42.07]
VALVES
NPT 1/4
OUT 1
6-17/32
[165.89]
6-31/64
[164.70]
Positioners
1-25/32
[45.24]
3-35/64
[90.09]
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Proximity Series 275 PRECISOR III Electro-Pneumatic Positioners combine an

easy to use, high performance unit with a low price. Series 275 models accurately control
valve stroke of rotary motion valves such as Dwyer Instruments ball or butterfly valves
according to an input signal of 4 to 20 mA from the controller. Its rugged, durable design
makes it ideal for harsh environments. The NEMA 4X (IP 66) enclosure rating protects
the highly efficient microprocessing unit. An analog feedback signal is outputted to stabilize
any valve system, and easy to use functions such as auto calibration ensure the accuracy of
the Series 275. Low air consumption reduces operating cost, but does not sacrifice the
performance of the positioner. The compact design of this unit makes it easy to use with
any size actuator. PRECISOR III Positioners feature user selectable single or double action
and LCD screen attached to the outer face of the unit, allowing for an easy inspection of
the positioner condition while in the field.
FEATURES
Integral LCD for monitoring or programming.
Mounting bracket is included.
Adjustable for various characteristics - quick open or linear valves.
User selectable single or double action.
Model
275ER-D5000
275ER-D5001
275ER-D5021
Communication
None
None
HART
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.
Input Impedance: 460 max @ 20 mA DC.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum diecasting.
Air Supply: 20 to 100 psi (1.4 to 6.9 bar).
Air Connection: 1/4 NPT.
Linearity: 0.5% of full-scale.
Hysteresis: 0.5% of full-scale.
Sensitivity: 0.2% of full-scale.
Air Consumption: Below 0.07 scfm (2 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 2.5 scfm (70 LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0 to 90.
Lever: NAMUR.
Option
None
Transmitter
Transmitter
524
525_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:17 AM Page 525
Series
185
Linear Smart Positioner
Fail Freeze, Linear Operation, HART Communication

3-27/32
[97.50]
8-31/64
[215.70]
CONDUIT ENTRY
1/2 NPT
3-47/64
[95.00]
LCD SCREEN
SMART POSITIONER
3-1/64
[76.50]
4-13/32
[111.90]
STAINLESS STEEL
4-31/64
[113.8]
STANDARD
2-11/32
[59.60]
2-33/64
[64.00]
4-7/64
[104.20]
SUPPLY
1/4 NPT
Scan here
to watch
product video
Model
Communication
185EL-D1
HART
185EL-D1SS HART
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Impedance: 460 max @ 20 mA
DC.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum or 316
SS.
Air Supply: 35 to 116 psi (2.4 to 8 bar).
Linearity: 0.5% FS.
Enclosure
Aluminum diecast
Stainless steel
Series
285

Air Consumption: .0004 scfm (.01
LPM) at 20 psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Flow Capacity: 2.1 scfm (60 LPM) at 20
psig (1.4 bar) supply.
Stroke: 0.5 to 6 (10 to 150 mm).
to 85C).
Weight: 3.3 lb (1.5 kg); SS models: 6.4
lb (2.9 kg).
VALVES
Proximity Series 185 Smart Positioners combine an easy to use, high performance
unit with a low price. Series 185 models accurately control the valve stroke of linear motion
valves, such as W.E. Anderson globe valves, according to an input signal of 4 to 20 mA from
the controller. Its rugged, durable aluminum or available stainless steel construction makes
it ideal for harsh environments. The NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure rating protects the highly
efficient microprocessing unit inside the Smart Positioner. An analog feedback signal is
outputted to stabilize any valve system, and easy to use functions such as auto calibration
ensure the accuracy of the unit. Low air consumption reduces operating cost, but does not
sacrifice the performance of the Smart Positioner. The compact design of this unit makes
it easy to use with any size actuator. Smart Positioners feature a LCD screen attached to
the outer surface of the unit, allowing for an easy inspection of the positioner condition
while in the field. Available in user selectable single or double action, with HART
communication as standard. In the event that the 4-20 mA input signal is lost the 185 will
fail in place.
Rotary Smart Positioner
3-27/32
[97.50]
2-CONDUIT ENTRY
1/2 NPT
LCD SCREEN
SMART POSITIONER
1-49/64
[45.00]
1-1/8
[28.50]
8-15/32
[215.00]
4-31/64
[113.80]
STANDARD
3-49/64
1-23/64
4.406 [34.60]
[95.80]
[111.9]
STAINLESS STEEL
1-7/64
[28.00]
2-33/64
[64.00]
4-7/64
[104.20]
Scan here
to watch
product video
Proximity Series 285 Smart Positioners combine an easy to use, high performance
unit with a low price. Series 285 models accurately control the valve stroke of rotary motion
valves, such as W.E. Anderson ball or butterfly valves, according to an input signal of 4 to
20 mA from the controller. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh
environments. The NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure rating protects the highly efficient
microprocessing unit inside the Smart Positioner. An analog feedback signal is outputted
to stabilize any valve system, and easy to use functions such as auto calibration ensure the
accuracy of the unit. Low air consumption reduces operating cost but does not sacrifice the
performance of the Smart Positioner. The compact design of this unit makes it easy to use
with any size actuator. Smart Positioners feature a LCD screen attached to the outer
surface of the unit, allowing for an easy inspection of the positioner condition while in the
field. Available in user selectable single or double action, with HART communication as
standard. In the event that the 4-20 mA input signal is lost the 285 will fail in place.
Model
Communication
285ER-D5
HART
285ER-D5SS HART
Positioners
Fail Freeze, Rotary Operation, HART Communication
Enclosure
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
SPECIFICATIONS
DC.
Enclosure Material: Aluminum or 316
SS.
Linearity: 0.5% FS.

Air Consumption: .0004 scfm (.01LPM)
Flow Capacity: 2.1 scfm (60 LPM) at 20
Stroke: 0 to 90.
to 85C).
Weight: 3.3 lb (1.5 kg); SS models: 6.4
lb (2.9 kg).

525
526_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:16 AM Page 526
Series
195
Compact Linear Smart Positioner
Low Cost, Linear Operation, HART Communication
5-7/16 [138.30]
5-45/64 [144.80]
VALVES
1-11/32
[34.00]
5/16
[8.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
15/16
[24.00]
3-3/32
[78.50]
1-27/64
[36.00]
4
[101.70]
Proximity Series 195 Smart Positioners are a compact, high performance unit with
a low price. Series 195 models accurately control the valve stroke of linear motion valves,
such as W.E. Anderson globe valves, according to an input signal of 4 to 20 mA from the
controller. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh environments. The NEMA
4X (IP66) enclosure rating protects the highly efficient microprocessing unit inside the
Smart Positioner. An analog feedback signal is outputted to stabilize any valve system, and
easy to use functions such as auto calibration ensure the accuracy of the unit. Low air
consumption reduces operating cost, but does not sacrifice the performance of the Smart
Positioner. The handheld size of this unit makes it easy to use with any size actuator, and
can be used in applications where a larger positioner may not fit. Series 195 Smart
Positioners feature a LCD screen attached to the outer surface of the unit, allowing for an
easy inspection of the positioner condition while in the field. Available with HART
communication.
Action
Model
195EL-S1 Single
195EL-S2 Single
2-1/4
[57.00]
2-1/2
[63.60]
40
1-3/16
[30.00]
SMART POSITIONER
30
LCD SCREEN
20
5/32
[4.00]
10
CONDUIT ENTRY
1/2 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
DC.
Linearity: 0.5% FS.

Air Consumption: .0004 scfm (.01 LPM)
Flow Capacity: .32 scfm (9 LPM) at 20
Stroke: 0.19 to 1.38 (5 to 35 mm).
(-30 to 85C).
Communication
None
HART
Series
295
Compact Rotary Smart Positioner
Positioners
Low Cost, Rotary Operation, HART Communication

CONDUIT ENTRY
1/2 NPT
5/32
[4.00] 2-37/64
[65.40]
1-3/16
[30.00]
1-27/64
[36.00]
LCD SCREEN
SMART POSITIONER
5-7/16 [138.30]
5-45/64 [144.80]
2-1/4
[57.00]
2-1/2
[63.60]
15/16
[24.00]
1-11/32
[34.00]
1-57/64
[48.00]
3-3/32
[78.50]
5-1/64
[127.32]
Proximity Series 295 Smart Positioners are a compact, high performance unit with
a low price. Series 295 models accurately control the valve stroke of rotary motion valves,
such as W.E. Anderson ball or butterfly valves, according to an input signal of 4 to 20 mA
from the controller. Its rugged, durable design makes it ideal for harsh environments. The
NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure rating protects the highly efficient microprocessing unit inside
the Smart Positioner. An analog feedback signal is outputted to stabilize any valve system
and easy to use functions such as auto calibration ensure the accuracy of the unit. Low air
consumption reduces operating cost, but does not sacrifice the performance of the Smart
Positioner. The handheld size of this unit makes it easy to use with any size actuator, and
can be used in applications where a larger positioner may not fit. Series 295 Smart
Positioners feature a LCD screen attached to the outer surface of the unit, allowing for an
easy inspection of the positioner condition while in the field. Available with HART
communication.
Model
Action
295ER-S1 Single
295ER-S2 Single
SPECIFICATIONS
DC.
Linearity: 0.5% FS.

Air Consumption: .0004 scfm (.01 LPM)
Flow Capacity: .32 scfm (9 LPM) at 20
Stroke: 0 to 90.
to 85C).
Communication
None
HART
526
527_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:10 AM Page 527
Series
VB
Volume Booster
Economical, 1:1 Ratio
SIGNAL PORT
1/4 NPT
SIGNAL PORT
1/4 NPT
SIGNAL PORT
1/4 NPT
SIG
3-7/64
[79.00]
3-25/64
[86.00]
VB-01
The Series VB Volume Booster is a one to one signal to output relay and an ideal
solution to increasing valve stroke speed. A large input signal change to the booster delivers
high volume for quick throttling control. Volume booster responds to the slightest changes
in input signal, which in turn increases accuracy of the output of air pressure to the actuator.
This booster receives the positioners signal output and supplies the proper air pressure to
the actuator to reduce response and adjustment time. Available in aluminum or stainless
steel.
Cv
1.02
1.02
2.32
2.32
4.98
4.98
Weight
1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
1.7 lb (0.76 kg)
4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
5.1 lb (2.3 kg)
11 lb (5 kg)
In/Out
Connection
1/4NPT
1/4 NPT
1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT
3/4 NPT
3/4 NPT
Series
MPR
Construction
Aluminum
SS
Aluminum
SS
Aluminum
SS
1-27/32
[47.00]
3-15/16
[100.00]
VB-02
1-3/64
[26.50]
4-51/64
[122.00]
VB-03
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Air only.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum or SS;
Diaphragm: Nitrile elastomer.
Max Supply Pressure: 145 psi (10 bar).
Max Signal/Output Pressure: 101.5 psi (7 bar).
Signal Connection: 1/4 NPT.
In/Output Pressure Ratio: 1:1.
Linearity: 1% FS.
In/Output Connection: See model chart.
VALVES
Model
VB-01
VB-01SS
VB-02
VB-02SS
VB-03
VB-03SS
25/32
[20.00]
6-3/8
[162.02]
4-15/64
[107.50]
Volume Booster
Miniature Pressure Regulator

Air or Water Regulator, Compact and Lightweight, Low Cost
1-1/2
[38.10]
1-5/8
[41.40]
3/8
[9.65]
2-27/32
[71.88]
The Series MPR Miniature Pressure Regulators are compact units that provide low
cost, high performance pressure regulation of compressed air or air/water. The low
torque, non-rising adjustment knob with locking capability provides easy and precise
adjustment. Models for use with air are self relieving. Models for air/water are nonrelieving.
ACCESSORIES
MPR-B, Mounting Bracket
MPR-N, Panel Mounting Nut
Model
Air
MPR1-0
MPR1-1
MPR1-2
MPR1-3
MPR1-4
Air/Water
MPR2-0
MPR2-1
MPR2-2
MPR2-3
MPR2-4
(2) 1/8 NPT

GAUGE PORTS
(2) 1/4 NPT INLET
& OUTLET PORTS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Compressed air or water.
Wetted Materials: Body: Zinc; Bonnet: Acetal; Diaphragm/seals: Nitrile; Internals:
Aluminum, brass, acetal, steel, music wire (MPR2 is plated with electroless nickel
for water use).
Maximum Supply Pressure: 250 psig (17.2 bar).
TemperatureLimits: 0 to 150F (-18 to 60C).
Flow Capacity: 24 SCFM (48 m3/hr) at 100 psig (6.9 bar) supply, 60 psig (4.1 bar)
output.
Process Connection: Inlet and outlet: Two 1/4 female NPT; Two 1/8 female NPT
gage ports.
Range
0 to 5 psi
0 to 15 psi
0 to 30 psi
0 to 60 psi
0 to 100 psi
527
528_Layout 1 7/15/14 10:33 AM Page 528
Series
R
Regulators
For Pneumatic Air Applications
ASSEMBLY MOUNTING
BRACKET HERE
NPT
CONNECTION
3-1/2
[88.90]
27/32
[27.43]
1-21/32
[42.07]
1-17/64
1-9/32 [32.15]
[32.54]
1-37/64
[40.08]
1
[25.40]
Mounting Bracket For Series 1
Series 1
R1
ASSEMBLE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
HERE
5-9/16
[141.29]
1-23/32
[43.66]
NPT
CONNECTION
2-31/64
[63.10]
1-17/64
[32.15]
VALVES
R Series Pressure Regulators offer economic prices and high performance pressure
regulation. Configurable units offer a variety of fitting and port sizes, and supply pressures
ranging from 30 to 120 psig. The non-rising adjustment knob allows for simple and precise
monitoring of pressure and features a push-pull lock ring.
Model
R1-1120
R1-2120
R2-2120
R1-1030
R1-2030
R2-2030
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
Pressure
Range
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
30 psi
30 psi
30 psi
Regulators
Series
SAFR
25/64 TYP
1-13/64 [9.92 TYP]
[30.60]
17/64
[6.75]
1-33/84
[38.50]
2-31/64
[63.10]
Mounting Bracket For Series 2
Series 2
R2
5/64 TYP
[7.98 TYP]
17/64
[6.75]
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Wetted Material: Aluminum, polycarbonate and nitrile elastomer.
Output: 0 to 30 psig or 0 to 120 psig.
Max. Supply Pressure:165 psig.
Temperature Limits: 41 to 140F(5 to 60C).
Sensitivity: <0.2 psig @ 25 psig.
Air Consumption: 0.3 SCFH @ max output.
Flow Capacity: R1: 40 or 60 SCFM @ 70 psig; R2: 90 SCFM @ 70 psig.
Exhaust Capacity: <0.25 SCFM@ 5 psig.
Process Connection: R1: 1/8 NPT or 1/4 NPT; R2: 1/4 NPT.
Subminiature Air Pressure Regulator

Air Regulator, Compact and Light Weight, Low Cost
3-27/32
[97.61]
(DATE CODE)
W.E. ANDERSON
SAFR-X
PRESSURE REGULATOR
0-XX PSIG (MAXIMUM SUPPLY 150 PSIG)
1-3/8
[34.88]
The Series SAFR is a miniature air pressure regulator that provides the highest level of
regulation accuracy and repeatability available in a compact, lightweight body. This is ideal
for applications that require exact pressure control and substantial flow capacity under
variable operating conditions and limited space.
Model
SAFR-1
SAFR-2
SAFR-3
Range
0 to 30 psig (0 to 2 BAR)
SAFR-BRKT, Mounting Bracket
528
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum alloy, chromate and
epoxy paint;
Diaphragm: Nitrile elastomer;
Trim: Zinc plated steel;
Additional Materials: Brass,
aluminum, SS, zinc plated steel.
Output:
0.7 to 30 psig (0.05 to 2 BAR);
1.4 to 60 psig (0.1 to 4 BAR);
1.4 to 120 psig (0.1 to 8 BAR).
Max. Supply Pressure: 150 psig (10

BAR).
(-18C to 71C).
Sensitivity: 0.25 in w.c. (6.4 mm w.c.).
Consumption: 6.0 scfh (170NI/min)
max. at 150 psig (10 BAR) supply
change.
Flow Capacity: 14 scfm (396 NI/min).
Exhaust Capacity: 7 scfm (199
NI/min).
Process Connection: 1/8 in, out,
gage (2) female NPT.
Weight: 0.35 lb (0.16 kg).
529_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:34 AM Page 529
Series
AFR
Air Filter Regulator

7-3/4 [196.85]
2-53/64
[71.83]
21/32
[16.67]
INPUT
1/4 NPT
GAUGE PORT
1/4" NPT
OUTPUT
1/4 NPT
3-9/64
[79.77]
Series AFR Air Filter Regulator provides clean air pressure to pneumatic controllers,
valve positioners, air cylinders and other equipment. Self-relieving regulator is equipped
with a 40 micron filter housed in a dripwell with gage port.
Range
0 to 10 psi (0 to 65 kPa)
0 to 30 psi (0 to 200 kPa)
0 to 60 psi (0 to 400 kPa)
0 to 120 psi (0 to 800 kPa)
AFR-BRKT, Mounting Bracket
Series
AFR2
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum alloy, irridite, and lock epoxy finish;
Filter: Phenolic impregnated cellulose;
Diaphragm and valve seat plug: Nitrile elastomer.
Max. Supply Pressure: 250 psig (1700 kPa).
Sensitivity: 1 (2.5 cm) of water.
Consumption: <6 SCFH (0.17 m3/hr).
Flow Capacity: 20 SCFM (33 m3/hr) @ 100 psig (700 kPa) supply.
Exhaust Capacity: 0.1 SCFM (0.17 m3/hr) with downstream pressure 5 psig (35
kPa) above set point.
ProcessConnection: 1/4 female NPT.
Weight: 1.6 lb (725 g).
Regulators
Instrument Air Filter Regulator

Compact, Stainless Steel Models, Cost-Effective
3
[76.20]
TM
A DIV OF DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC

AFR2-X
PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAXIMUM SUPPLY 250 PSIG
RANGE 0-XX PSIG
7
[176.38]
2-1/2
[63.50]
Series AFR2 Air Filter Regulator provides clean air pressure to pneumatic controllers,
valve positioners, air cylinders and other equipment. Self-relieving regulator is equipped
with a 40 micron filter housed in a dripwell with gage port.
Model
AFR2-1
AFR2-2
AFR2-1SS
AFR2-2SS
Range
0 to 60 psi (0 to 4 bar)
Body
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air only.
Wetted Materials:
Body: Aluminum or SS;
Filter: Polyethylene;
Diaphragm and Valve Seat Plug: Nitrile elastomer.
Max. Supply Pressure: 250 psi (17.2 bar).
Minimum Filtering Size: 5 microns.
Weight: 1.7 lb (0.6 kg), SS models: 3.0 lb (1.4 kg).
VALVES
Model
AFR1
AFR2
AFR3
AFR4
25/64
[9.92]
CAT. NO.
RANGE
DRAIN
MICHIGAN CITY, IN. 46360 U.S.A.
3-9/64
[79.77]
2-19/32
[65.88]
529
530_Layout 1 7/9/14 1:00 PM Page 530
Series
FR
Filter Regulators
Combination Packages For Pneumatic Air Applications
3-7/8
[98.43]
6-3/8
[161.93]
1-9/32
[32.54]
NPT
CONNECTION
5/64 TYP
[1.98 TYP]
1-37/64
[40.08]
Regulators
VALVES
FR1
FR2
Series FR1
The Series FR Filter-Regulators are combination units that provide maximum options
in minimal space. Constructed of aluminum and polycarbonate, these rugged units offer
the same air pressure regulation features as our standard R Series units side-by-side with
the convenience of a filter. Unscrewing the adjustment knob and retaining flange easily
adapts panel or bracket mounting.
Model
FR1-112050M
FR1-212050M
FR1-112005M
FR1-212005M
FR2-212050M
FR2-212005M
FR1-103050M
FR1-203050M
FR1-103005M
FR1-203005M
FR2-203050M
Process
Connection
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/8 NPT
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
Pressure
Range
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
120 psi
30 psi
30 psi
30 psi
30 psi
30 psi
Filtration
50 microns
50 microns
5 microns
5 microns
50 microns
5 microns
50 microns
50 microns
5 microns
5 microns
50 microns
1-17/64
[32.15]
REGULATED PRESSURE VS. FLOW
70
4.8
60
4.1
50
3.4
40
2.8
30
2.1
20
1.4
10
0.7
0
0
SCFM 0
LPM 0
530
1-1/8 NPT
20.0
575
40.0
1150
60.0
1700
1-1/4 NPT
80.0
2265
2-1/4 NPT
100.0
2875
120.00
3450
1-13/64
[30.60]
25/64 TYP
[9.92 TYP]
17/64
[6.75]
Mounting Bracket
For Series FR1
1-23/32
[43.66]
NPT
CONNECTION
1
[25.70]
1-33/64
[38.50]
17/84
[6.75]
Series FR2
Mounting Bracket
For Series FR2
Size 1
Size 2
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Service
Temperature Limits
Maximum Supply Pressure
Filters
Process Connection
Filtration (micron)
Maximum Supply Pressure
Drain
Bowl Capacity
Flow (based on 100 psi inlet
pressure w/ 50 micron filter)
Construction
Regulators
Process Connection
Effect of Supply Pressure Variation
(25 psig) on Outlet Pressure
Exhaust Capacity (5 psig above 20
psig set point)
Flow Capacity at 100 psig Supply
and 70 psig Outlet
Output Pressure Ranges
Total Air Consumption @
Maximum Output
Construction
psig BAR
80 5.5
9-7/16
[239.71]
Air
Air
41 to 140F (5 to 60C) 41 to 140F (5 to 60C)
165 psig
165 psig
1/8, 1/4 NPT
5, 50
165 psi
Manual
0.75 in3
55, 85 SCFM
1/4 NPT
5, 50
165 psi
Manual
2.75 in3
120 SCFM
Body: Aluminum; Filter: Sintered Bronze
1/8, 1/4 NPT

< 0.2 psig
1/4 NPT
< 0.2 psig
< 0.25 SCFM
< 0.25 SCFM
40, 60 SCFM
90 SCFM
0 to 30 psig
0 to 120 psig
0.3 SCFH
0 to 30 psig
0 to 120 psig
0.3 SCFH
Body: Aluminum; Bowl: Polycarbonate
531_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:07 AM Page 531
Siphons/Cooling
Extensions
pages 533-534
Gage Guards/
Pressure Snubbers
pages 534-535
Strap Wrench
page 535
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
pages 536-542
Fittings,
Nylon
pages 543-544
Pneumatic Valves
page 544
Pneumatic Fittings
pages 545-546
Gage Tubing
page 547
Static Pressure
Sensors
pages 548-549
Miscellaneous
Accessories
pages 550-551
ACCESSORIES | TABLEOFCONTENTS
Filters
page 532
531
532_Layout 1 7/9/14 1:01 PM Page 532
Model
F222
&
F451
Liquid/Particle Filters
1/4 NPT
1/4 NPT
F222
F451
Compressed air filters protect equipment and instrumentation from harmful

contaminant's such as dirt, water and oil. Liquids are continuously coalesced and released
through the manual drain valves. Replaceable filter element removes particles and droplets
as small as 0.01 micron with 93% efficiency. Units have 1/4 female NPT inlet and outlet and
manual drain valve.
Model F222, Liquid/Particle Filter

Model F451, Liquid/Particle Filter
Model 1201-3, Replacement Filters for F451 (pk of 3)
Model
F195
SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 93% (removal of 0.01 micron particles).
Maximum Pressure: 150 psig (10 bar).
Maximum Temperature: 130F (54C).
Max. Flow at 100 psig: 22 SCFM (F222); 45 SCFM (F451).
Inlet & Outlet Ports: 1/4 female NPT.
Mounting: In-line only (F222); 1/4-20 mounting holes (F451).
Materials of Construction: Anodized aluminum head, polycarbonate bowl,
cadmium plated steel tie rod, nylon internals, Buna-N seal.
Weight: 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) (F222); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) (F451).
Disposable In-Line Filter
ACCESSORIES
Flowmeter Accessories and Options

1.100
[27.94]
.750
[19.05]
3.220
[81.79]
.750
[19.05]
Filters
.100
[2.54]
Remove 99.99% of unwanted particles from within your gas flow with the Model
F195 Disposable In-Line Filter. Encapsulated microfiber filter elements are able to filter
particles as small as 0.1 micron. Filters are completely disposable simply remove the
filter from your line and throw it away when it becomes dirty. The transparent nylon
housing makes it simple to determine if the filter needs to be changed.
Line Pressure vs. Flow

Line Pressure (psig)
Gas Flow (scfm)
1.5
0.6
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 125
0.9 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.5 4.2 5.7
* 1.5 psi pressure drop.
Model F195, Disposable In-Line Filter
532
.250
[6.35]
SPECIFICATIONS
Filtration Efficiency: 99.99% (removal of 0.1 micron particles).
Housing Construction: Nylon.
Filter Tube Dimensions: 0.59 ID x 1.39 L.
Maximum Temperature: 230F @ 0 psig (110C @ 0 bar), 120F @ 125 psig
(49C @ 9 bar).
Maximum Pressure: 125 psig (8.6 bar).
Maximum Differential Pressure: 60 psi (4 bar)(in-to-out flow direction), 20 psi
(1.4 bar) (out-to-in flow direction).
Internal Volume: 11.5 cc (11.5 ml).
Connections: Barbed for 1/4 ID tubing.
533_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:38 AM Page 533
Series
A-169
Carbon Steel Siphons

1-13/64
[30.39]
MALE 1/4 NPT

CONNECTION
BOTH ENDS
2-7/16
[61.87]
5-3/32
[129.54]
4-17/64
[108.44]
2-15/32
[62.76]
Model A-169-C
MALE 1/2 NPT

CONNECTION
BOTH ENDS
9-19/32
[243.72]
Model A-169-D
The Carbon Steel Siphons protect pressure instruments in high temperature
applications. Water held in the 180 coil prevents steam from contacting the instrument.
Constructed with carbon steel, the A-169 siphons can withstand high temperature and
pressure. They are ideal for use with pressure gages and instrumentation where the process
media temperature exceeds the rating of the instrument. The male NPT connection allows
for easy installation and secure attachment.
Process
Model Connections
A-169-C 1/4 NPTmale
A-169-D 1/2 NPTmale
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials:Carbon steel.
Process Connections:See chart.
Weight: 1/4 NPT models: 8 oz (226.8 g); 1/2 NPT models: 34.9 oz (988.8 g).
Material
Carbon Steel SCH 80
Carbon Steel SCH 80
Series
A-170
316 Stainless Steel Siphons

1
[25.40]
MALE 1/4 NPT

CONNECTION
BOTH ENDS
2-13/32
[60.96]
4-1/8
[104.78]
4-19/32
[116.84]
2-19/64
[58.38]
Model A-170-A
9-13/64
[233.68]
Model A-170-B
The 316 Stainless Steel Siphons protect pressure instruments in high temperature
applications. Water held in the 180 coil prevents steam from contacting the instrument.
Constructed with 316 stainless steel, the A-170 siphons offer the best resistance to corrosion,
high temperature, and pressure. They are ideal for use with pressure gages and
instrumentation where the process media temperature exceeds the rating of the instrument.
The male NPT connection allows for easy installation and secure attachment.
Model
A-170*
A-170-A
A-170-B
Process
Connections
1/4 NPTmale
1/4 NPT male
1/2 NPTmale
Material
316 SS SCH80
316 SS SCH40
316 SS SCH40
SPECIFICATIONS
PressureLimits: See chart.
Temperature Limits: See chart.
Process Connections:See chart.
Weight: 1/4 NPT models: 8 oz (226.8 g); 1/2 NPT models: 25.6 oz (725.75 g).
Agency Approvals: RoHS. *Model A-170 is not RoHS certified.
Pressure Limit
2307 psi @ 200F
500 psi @ 680F
500 psi @ 680F
533
Siphons/Cooling Extensions
MALE 1/2 NPT

CONNECTION
BOTH ENDS
ACCESSORIES
RoHS
534_Layout 1 7/9/14 10:39 AM Page 534
Series
A-240/
A-250
Perforated or Spiral Cooling Tower

Protect Instrumentation in High Temperature Applications
A
PROCESS CONNECTION
B
PROCESS CONNECTION
Connection Chart
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
1/4 male/female BSPP
A-250
A-240
The Perforated and Spiral Cooling Towers protect pressure instruments during high
temperature applications. Both the spiral and perforated styles are made with 316L SS,
and are available with various process connections in NPT or BSPP style. Both Cooling
Towers are ideal for use with pressure gages, switches, and transmitters where the process
media temperature exceeds the rating of the instrument.
Model
A-240-A
A-240-B
A-240-C
A-240-D
A-240-E
A-240-F
5-27/35
[148.80]
[5-29/32]
[150]
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
Style
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Perforated
Model
A-250-A
A-250-B
A-250-C
A-250-D
A-250-E
A-250-F
PROCESS CONNECTION
PROCESS CONNECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Compatible liquids and gases.
Wetted Parts:316L SS.
Temperature Limits:428F (220C).
Height: 6 (150 mm).
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
Style
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
Spiral
ACCESSORIES
Adjustable Pressure Snubber

Protect Instruments from Pressure Spikes or Fluid Hammer
A
Siphons/Cooling Extensions
[C]
Dimensions
Connections
1/4 M x F
3/8 M x F
1/2 M x F
Brass
534
Material
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
A
55
60
60
B
42
44
40
C
13
16
20
H
25.0
25.0
28.0
316 SS
[HEX H]
The Adjustable Pressure Snubbersprotect pressure instruments against fluctuations,

surges, spikes and fluid hammer. The fine thread adjustable valve allows you to fine tune
harmful harmonic vibration from the fluid systems and isolate the instrument from process
when service or replacement is necessary. These Pressure Snubbers are designed to
provide fully field adjustable dampening. By using our Adjustable Pressure Snubbers, you
will alleviate surges and pulsations to assure steady pressure readings and extend the life
of your instrument.
Model
A-251
A-252
A-253
A-254
A-255
A-256
[A]
[B]
Model
A-257
A-258
A-259
A-260
A-261
A-262
Material
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
316 SS
SPECIFICATIONS
Service:Compatible liquids and gases.
Wetted Parts:Brass or 316 SS.
Temperature Limits:-4 to 302F (-20 to 150C).
Weight:8.4 oz (238 g).
Connections
1/4 male/female NPT
3/8 male/female NPT
1/2 male/female NPT
535_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:04 AM Page 535
Series
GG
Gage Guard
INSTRUMENT SIDE
1/4 FEMALE NPT
1-23/32
[43.66]
SYSTEM SIDE
1/2 MALE NPT
Protecting pressure or vacuum instruments from clogging, corrosion, or damage, the Series
GG Gage Guard provides a protective barrier between the process fluid and the instrument.
The hermetically-sealed uni-body protects from the possibility of leaking. Glass-filled
Polypropylene housing is suitable for most inorganic chemicals and temperatures up to 185F
(85C). A fluid fill station is recommended for proper installation.
Model GG1, (Buna-N diaphragm)
Model GG2, (Fluoroelastomer diaphragm)
Series
PS
1-25/64 [35.32]
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure: Liquids: 160 psi
(11 bar) @ 70 to 185F (21 to 85C);
Gases: 100 psi (6.9 bar) @ 70 to 100F
(21 to 38C) and 30 psi (2.1 bar) @ 100
to 185F (38 to 85C).
Accuracy: 4%.
Maximum Temperature: 185F

(85C).
Wetted Parts: Glass-filled
polypropylene housing, Buna-N or
fluoroelastomer diaphragm.
Dimensions: 1/4 female NPT
instrument side; 1/2 male NPT system
side; 1-3/8 (35 mm) diameter.
Pressure Snubber
C
B
Model
PS114
PS214
PS122
PS124
PS222
PS224
PS225
Service
Air &Gases
Air & Gases
Water &Oils
Air &Gases
Water &Oils
Air &Gases
Pulsating Gas
Construction
Brass 1/8 NPT
SS 1/8 NPT
Brass 1/4 NPT
Brass 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
SS 1/4 NPT
C
1-7/64
1-7/64
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure: Brass: 10,000 psi (689 bar), SS: 15,000 psi (1034 bar).
Filter Disc Material: AISI 316 SS.
Approx. Micron Rating: Air & gases: 2-5; water & oils (30-225 SSU): 10.
Dimensions: 1/4 NPT: 3/4 (19 mm) hex size, 1.5 (38 mm) length.
Strap Wrench
RUBBER STRAP
1 UP TO 6-3/8
[25.4] UP TO
[161.93]
Gage Guards/
Pressure Snubbers
Model
SWUK1
Dimension
A
B
1/8NPT 1/2
1/8NPT 1/2
1/4NPT 3/4
1/4 NPT 3/4
1/4 NPT 3/4
1/4NPT 3/4
1/4 NPT 3/4
ACCESSORIES
Designed to protect pressure instrumentation by dampening surges and pulsations and

assuring steady average pressure readings. Snubbers are available in a variety of pore
sizes for use with gases, water, and oils.
Model
PS114
PS214
PS122
PS124
PS222
PS224
PS225
8 [203.2]
3-13/16
[96.84]
The SWUK1 offers the user a versatile tool to grip, undo & tighten a wide variety of
awkwardly shaped and sized objects.
The SWUK1 also makes the job of fitting Adjustable Signal Flags (ASF) covers to
Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gages much easier by simply following the instruction
included with each cover supplied.
Model SWUK1
FEATURES
Reinforced plastic handle provides extra leverage.
Rubber strap reinforced with 38 cords of high tensile polycarbon to give a
breaking strength in excess of 2000 lb.
Strap will grip objects from .79 to 6.30 diameter.
Low cost, rugged and simple to use.
Handy multi-purpose tool.
535
536_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:01 AM Page 536
Introduction to Stainless Steel Fitting Line

The Dwyer Series A-1000 quality tube fittings have been designed and manufactured to
provide reliable leak-free connections in a wide variety of applications. A reliable leak-free
tubing system will be achieved by combining the proper selection and handling of tubing
with the proper tube fitting selection and installation. The following information is provided
to assist in the tube selection process.
Handling and Installation

Surface scratches and gouges on tubing are a source of potential leaks. Some
precaution when handling the tubing can help reduce surface scratches and maintain
the surface finish as originally intended by the manufacturer. Tubing should never
be dragged across rocks, blacktop, pavement, or tubing storage racks as scratches
and gouges can occur. Sharp blades should always be used in the tube cutters or
hacksaws used to cut the tubing so as to provide a clean, square cut. Dull cutting
blades can cause internal and external hanging burrs, and cause the tubing to
become oval and affect proper insertion within the fitting. As a good handling
practice, tubing should always be deburred prior to tube fitting installation to help
assure easy and complete tube insertion. Additionally, for bent tube assemblies, it
is important to bend tubing prior to installing tube fittings, and to provide a sufficient
straight length of tubing after the bend to allow the tube to be fully inserted into the
fitting. Also, to eliminate weight stress from the tubing upon the fitting and to provide
additional system support for vibration and thermal shock resistance, the tubing
should always be supported by tube hangers, clamps or trays.
Material
The tubing material chosen must be compatible with the systems contained media,
pressure and temperature, as well as with the environment in which it will be
installed. Also, the tubing and fittings materials should be similar for optimum sealing
action to occur (stainless fittings for stainless tube, brass fittings for copper tube,
carbon steel fittings for carbon steel tube, etc.). The mixing and contact of dissimilar
materials may leave the system susceptible to galvanic corrosion and/or not allow
proper tube fitting makeup to be achieved.
Pressure and Flow
The size of the tubes outside diameter (OD) and the necessary wall thickness are
determined by the systems pressure and flow requirements. Table A details the
suggested tubing sizes and wall thickness for use with instrumentation tube fittings.
If no pressure is shown on the table for a particular size, the tube is not
recommended for use with instrumentation tube fittings. The tubing system should
not be utilized above the tubes maximum allowable working pressure.
TABLEB - Stress Factors For Determining Tubing

Pressure Ratings at Elevated Temperatures
Temperature
C
F
Stainless Steel 316
38
100
1.00
93
200
1.00
149
300
1.00
200
400
.97
260
500
.90
316
600
.85
371
700
.82
427
800
.80*
482
900
.78*
538
1000
.73*
649
1200
.37*
Temperature
The systems operating temperature may affect the initial choice of tubing material
and may also affect the maximum allowable working temperature for the given tube
size (see Table B for temperature stress factors).
Light Gas Service
To provide a successful connection for light gas service, the tubing must have a thick
enough wall to provide resistance for the setup action of the ferrules to further
compensate for the tubes potential surface condition.
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
ACCESSORIES
*The precipitation of chromium carbides potentially

resulting in intergranular corrosion may occur when
exposed to operating temperatures.
TABLEA - STAINLESSSTEELTUBING
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (psig)
Tube OD
Wall Thickness of Tube (Inches)
[Size (in)] .010 .012 .014 .016 .020 .028
1/16
5600 6850 8150 9500 12100
1/8
8550
3/16
5450
1/4
4000
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
536
.035
11000
7000
5100
4050
3300
2450
.049
10300
7500
5850
4800
3500
2950
2400
2050
.065
10300
8050
6550
4750
4000
3300
2800
2400
.083 .095
6250
5200
4250
3600
3150
2450
6050
4950
4200
3650
2850
2350
.109 .120 .134 .156 .188
5800
4850
4200
3300
2700
2000
4700
3650 4150 4900
3000 3400 4000 4900
2200 2500 2900 3600
537_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:00 AM Page 537
Stainless Steel Fitting Line
Series
A-1000
Series A-1001 Male Elbow Fitting Line
G NUT
HEX
BX
H WRENCH PAD
D
C
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Liquid, steam and compatible gases.
Temperature Ranges:See reference Table B.
Pressure Ranges:See reference Table A.
Connections: 1/16 to 1-1/2.
Dimensions: Consult website, or contact factory.
BY
F
P PIPE THREAD
E
Model
A-1001-1
A-1001-2
A-1001-3
A-1001-4
A-1001-5
A-1001-6
A-1001-7
A-1001-8
A-1001-9
A-1001-10
A-1001-11
T=
Tube OD
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
Model
A-1001-12
A-1001-13
A-1001-15
A-1001-16
A-1001-17
A-1001-18
A-1001-19
A-1001-20
A-1001-21
A-1001-22
A-1001-23
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
T=
Tube OD
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Model
A-1001-24
A-1001-25
A-1001-26
A-1001-27
A-1001-28
A-1001-29
A-1001-30
A-1001-31
A-1001-32
A-1001-33
T=
Tube OD
5/8
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
P = Pipe
Thread Male
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
Table B: See page 536 (Introduction to Stainless Steel Fitting Line)

Table A: See page 536 (Introduction to Stainless Steel Fitting Line)
Series A-1002 Male Connector Fitting Line
D
C
H BODY HEX
ACCESSORIES
B BODY
G NUT HEX
SPECIFICATIONS
P PIPE THREAD
T=
Tube OD
1/16
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/16
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/8
1/4
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/2
3/4
Model
A-1002-17
A-1002-18
A-1002-19
A-1002-20
A-1002-21
A-1002-22
A-1002-23
A-1002-24
A-1002-25
A-1002-26
A-1002-27
A-1002-28
A-1002-29
A-1002-30
A-1002-31
T=
Tube OD
5/16
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
1/2
Model
A-1002-32
A-1002-33
A-1002-34
A-1002-35
A-1002-36
A-1002-37
A-1002-39
A-1002-40
A-1002-41
A-1002-42
A-1002-43
A-1002-44
A-1002-45
T=
Tube OD
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
Model
A-1002-1
A-1002-2
A-1002-3
A-1002-4
A-1002-5
A-1002-6
A-1002-7
A-1002-8
A-1002-9
A-1002-10
A-1002-11
A-1002-12
A-1002-13
A-1002-15
A-1002-16
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1
3/4
1/2
3/4
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2

537
538_Layout 1 7/15/14 9:44 AM Page 538
Series
A-1000
Series A-1003 Union Fitting Line

B BODY
G NUT HEX
TE
D
C
Model
A-1003-1
A-1003-2
A-1003-3
A-1003-4
A-1003-5
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
SPECIFICATIONS
G NUT HEX
H BODY
HEX
Model
A-1003-6
A-1003-7
A-1003-8
A-1003-9
A-1003-10
C
A
Model
A-1003-11
A-1003-12
A-1003-13
A-1003-14
T = Tube OD
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
T = Tube OD
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Series A-1004 Union Elbow Fitting Line

SPECIFICATIONS
A
C
D
H WRENCH PAD
BX
A
ACCESSORIES
G NUT HEX
Model
A-1004-1
A-1004-2
A-1004-3
A-1004-4
A-1004-5
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
Model
A-1004-6
A-1004-7
A-1004-8
A-1004-9
A-1004-10
Model
A-1004-11
A-1004-12
A-1004-13
A-1004-14
T = Tube OD
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
T = Tube OD
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
Series A-1005 Union Tee Fitting Line

B BODY
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
BX
SPECIFICATIONS
G NUT HEX
BX
BX
AX
D
C
H WRENCH
PAD
AX
AX
A
Model
A-1005-1
A-1005-2
A-1005-3
A-1005-4
A-1005-5
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
Model
A-1005-6
A-1005-7
A-1005-8
A-1005-9
A-1005-11
T = Tube OD
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
Model
A-1005-12
A-1005-13
A-1005-14
T = Tube OD
1-1/4
1-1/2
2

538
539_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:59 AM Page 539
Series
A-1000
Series A-1006 Front Ferrule Fitting Line

Model
A-1006-1
A-1006-2
A-1006-3
A-1006-4
A-1006-5
A-1006-6
A-1006-7
SPECIFICATIONS
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
Model
A-1006-8
A-1006-9
A-1006-10
A-1006-11
A-1006-12
A-1006-13
A-1006-14
T = Tube OD
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2

Series A-1007 Back Ferrule Fitting Line

Model
A-1007-1
A-1007-2
A-1007-3
A-1007-4
A-1007-5
A-1007-6
A-1007-7
SPECIFICATIONS
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
Model
A-1007-8
A-1007-9
A-1007-10
A-1007-11
A-1007-12
A-1007-13
A-1007-14
T = Tube OD
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2

Series A-1008 Nut Fitting Line

G NUT HEX
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
Model
A-1008-8
A-1008-9
A-1008-10
A-1008-11
A-1008-12
A-1008-13
A-1008-14
T = Tube OD
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-1008-1
A-1008-2
A-1008-3
A-1008-4
A-1008-5
A-1008-6
A-1008-7

Series A-1012 Stainless Steel Fitting Line

G HEX
EF
DC
A
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections: 1/8 to 1/2.
Dimensions: Consult website or contact factory.
Model
A-1012-1
A-1012-2
A-1012-3
A-1012-4
A-1012-6
A-1012-9
Hose Barb
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
T = Tube OD
1/8
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2

539
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
SPECIFICATIONS
540_Layout 1 7/15/14 9:39 AM Page 540
Series
A-1000
Series A-1009 Ferrule Set Fitting Line

SPECIFICATIONS
Model
A-1009-1
A-1009-2
A-1009-3
A-1009-4
A-1009-5
A-1009-6
A-1009-7
T = Tube OD
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2

Series A-1010 Bulkhead Union Fitting Line
SPECIFICATIONS
B BODY
BX
H JAM NUT HEX
G NUT HEX
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-1010-1
A-1010-2
A-1010-3
A-1010-4
A-1010-5
A-1010-6
A-1010-7
A-1010-8
A-1010-9
A-1010-10
H BODY HEX
T = Tube O.D.
1/16
1/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
D
AX

Series A-1011 Female Connector Fitting Line

G NUT HEX
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections: 1/16 to 1-1/2.
B BODY
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
T
P
PIPE THREAD
D
C
H
BODY HEX
Model
A-1011-1
A-1011-2
A-1011-3
A-1011-4
A-1011-5
A-1011-6
A-1011-7
A-1011-8
A-1011-9
A-1011-11
T=
Tube OD
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
5/16
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
1/4
Model
A-1011-12
A-1011-13
A-1011-14
A-1011-15
A-1011-16
A-1011-17
A-1011-18
A-1011-19
A-1011-20
A-1011-21
T=
Tube OD
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
3/8
Model
A-1011-22
A-1011-23
A-1011-24
A-1011-25
A-1011-26
A-1011-27
A-1011-28
A-1011-29
T=
Tube OD
5/8
3/4
3/4
7/8
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
P = Pipe
Thread Male
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2

540
541_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:48 AM Page 541
Series
A-2000
Stainless Steel Fittings

Our stainless steel fittings and pipe nipples are made from 304 or 316 SS and are rated at 150 psi.
A-2019
A-2018
Series A-2018 316 SS Hose Barb:

Male Pipe Thread
Model
A-2018-1
A-2018-2
Male NPT x HB
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
Series A-2019 Cap:

Female Pipe Thread
Series A-2020 Cross:

Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2019-1
A-2019-2
A-2019-3
A-2019-4
A-2019-5
A-2019-6
Model
A-2020-1
A-2020-2
A-2020-3
A-2020-4
A-2020-5
A-2020-6
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
A-2023
A-2022
Series A-2023 Elbow:

Female Pipe Thread, 45
Model
A-2021-1
A-2021-2
A-2021-3
A-2021-4
A-2021-5
A-2021-6
A-2021-7
A-2021-8
A-2021-9
A-2021-10
Model
A-2023-1
A-2023-2
A-2023-3
A-2023-4
A-2023-5
A-2023-6
A-2023-7
A-2023-8
A-2023-9
A-2023-10
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1-1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
Series A-2022 Elbow:

Female Pipe Thread, 90
Model
A-2022-1
A-2022-2
A-2022-3
A-2022-4
A-2022-5
A-2022-6
A-2022-7
A-2022-8
A-2022-9
A-2022-10
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1-1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
Female NPT
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1-1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
A-2024
Series A-2024 Reducer Bushings

Model
A-2024-1
A-2024-2
A-2024-3
A-2024-4
A-2024-5
A-2024-6
A-2024-7
A-2024-8
A-2024-9
A-2024-10
A-2024-11
A-2024-12
A-2024-13
A-2024-14
A-2024-15
A-2024-16
A-2024-17
Male NPT x Female NPT

1/4 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/4
3/4 x 1/2
1 x 1/2
1 x 3/4
1-1/4 x 3/4
1-1/4 x 1
1-1/2 x 3/4
1-1/2 x 1
1-1/2 x 1-1/4
2 x 1
2 x 1-1/4
2 x 1-1/2
3 x 2
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
Series A-2021 Coupling:

Female Pipe Thread
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
ACCESSORIES
A-2021
A-2020
541
542_Layout 1 7/14/14 11:51 AM Page 542
Series
A-2000
A-2025
A-2026
Series A-2025 Street Elbow:

Female Pipe Thread by Male Pipe Thread
Model
A-2025-1
A-2025-2
A-2025-3
A-2025-4
A-2025-5
A-2025-6
A-2025-7
A-2025-8
A-2025-9
A-2025-10
A-2027
Series A-2026 Tee:

Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2026-1
A-2026-2
A-2026-3
A-2026-4
A-2026-5
A-2026-6
A-2026-7
A-2026-8
A-2026-9
A-2026-10
Female NPT x Male NPT

1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
1-1/4 x 1-1/4
1-1/2 x 1-1/2
2 x 2
3 x 3
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
3
Model
A-2028-1
A-2028-2
A-2028-3
A-2028-4
A-2028-5
A-2028-6
A-2028-7
A-2028-8
A-2028-9
A-2028-10
A-2028-11
A-2028-12
A-2028-13
A-2028-14
Male NPT x Length

1/8 x 3/4
1/8 x 1-1/2
1/8 x 2
1/4 x 7/8
1/4 x 1-1/2
1/4 x 2
3/8 x 1
3/8 x 1-1/2
3/8 x 2
1/2 x 1-1/8
1/2 x 1-1/2
1/2 x 2
3/4 x 1-3/8
3/4 x 1-1/2
Model
A-2028-15
A-2028-16
A-2028-17
A-2028-18
A-2028-19
A-2028-20
A-2028-21
A-2028-22
A-2028-23
A-2028-24
A-2028-25
A-2028-26
A-2028-27
Male NPT x Length

3/4 x 2
1 x 1-1/2
1 x 2
1-1/4 x 1-5/8
1-1/4 x 2
1-1/2 x 1-3/4
1-1/2 x 2
2 x 2
2 x 2-1/2
3 x 2-5/8
3 x 3
4 x 2-7/8
4 x 4
Fittings,
Stainless Steel
ACCESSORIES
Series A-2028 Nipple:

Male Pipe Thread
542
A-2028
Series A-2027 Union:

Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2027-1
A-2027-2
A-2027-3
A-2027-4
A-2027-5
A-2027-6
A-2027-7
A-2027-8
A-2027-10
Female NPT
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
3
543_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:57 AM Page 543
Series
A-2000
Nylon Fittings
Dwyer Instruments offers a wide variety of nylon and SS fittings. Nylon fittings are generally acceptable for use at
working pressures up to 150 psi at normal room temperatures, and at very low pressures, temperatures can approach
175F.
A-2001
A-2002
Series A-2001 Male Pipe Thread (MPT)

by Hose Barb (HB)
Model
A-2001-1
A-2001-2
A-2001-3
A-2001-4
A-2001-5
A-2001-6
A-2003
Series A-2002 Female Pipe Thread (FPT)

by Hose Barb (HB)
Male NPT x HB
1/8 x 3/16
1/8 x 1/4
1/8 x 5/16
1/8 x 3/8
1/4 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
Model
A-2002-1
A-2002-2
A-2002-3
A-2002-4
Female NPT x HB
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
3/8 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
A-2004
Series A-2003 Elbows:

Male Pipe Thread by Hose Barb
Model
A-2003-1
A-2003-2
A-2003-3
A-2003-4

Female Pipe Thread by Hose Barb
Model
A-2004-1
A-2004-2
A-2006
A-2007
Female NPT x HB
1/8 x 1/4
1/4 x 1/4
A-2008
A-2009

Female Pipe Thread by Male Pipe Thread

Female Pipe Thread-90
Series A-2007 Tees:

Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2005-1
A-2005-2
A-2005-3
Model
A-2006-1
A-2006-2
A-2006-3
Model
A-2007-1
A-2007-2
A-2007-3
Female NPT x Male NPT

1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2
Female NPT x Female NPT

1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
Series A-2009 Reducer:

Bushings
Model
A-2008-1
Model
A-2009-1
A-2009-2
A-2009-3
A-2009-4
A-2009-5
A-2009-6
A-2009-7
A-2009-8
A-2009-9
A-2009-10
Female NPT
1/2

3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/8
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/8
3/4 x 1/4
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/2
1 x 1/2
Female NPT
1/4
1/2
3/4
Fittings,
Nylon
Series A-2008 Tees:

Female Pipe Thread with 1/4 Gauge Port
ACCESSORIES
A-2005
Male NPT x HB
1/8 x 1/4
1/8 x 3/8
1/4 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
Model
A-2009-11
A-2009-13
A-2009-14
A-2009-15
A-2009-16
A-2009-17
A-2009-18
A-2009-19
A-2009-20

1-1/4 x 3/4
1-1/4 x 1
1-1/2 x 3/4
1-1/2 x 1
1-1/2 x 1-1/4
2 x 3/4
2 x 1
2 x 1-1/4
2 x 1-1/2
543
544_Layout 1 7/21/14 10:46 AM Page 544
Series
A-2000
Nylon Fittings
A-2011
A-2010
A-2012
A-2013
Series A-2010 Reducing Nipples:

Male Pipe Thread
Series A-2011 Nipples:

Male Pipe Thread by Male Pipe Thread
Series A-2012 Couplings:

Female Pipe Thread
Model
A-2010-1
A-2010-2
A-2010-3
A-2010-4
A-2010-5
A-2010-6
A-2010-7
Model
A-2011-1
A-2011-2
A-2011-3
A-2011-4
Model
A-2012-1
A-2012-2
A-2012-3
Male NPT x Male NPT

1/4 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
1/2 x 1/4
1/2 x 3/8
3/4 x 3/8
3/4 x 1/2
Male NPT x Male NPT

1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8
1/2 x 1/2

Hose Barb
Model
A-2013-1
A-2013-2
A-2014
Female NPT x Female NPT

1/2 x 1/2
3/4 x 3/4
1 x 1
A-2015
HB x HB
1/4 x 1/4
3/8 x 1/4
A-2016
A-2017
Series A-2014 Hose Menders

without Center Stop
Series A-2015 Hose Menders

with Center Stop
Series A-2017 Tees:

Male Pipe Thread by Hose Barb
Model
A-2014-1
A-2014-2
Model
A-2015-1
A-2015-2
Model
A-2017-1
A-2017-2
A-2017-3
A-2017-4
HB x HB
1/4 x 3/16
5/16 x 5/16
HB x HB
1/8 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
ACCESSORIES
Series A-2016 Tees:

Hose Barb
Model
HB(1) x HB(2&3)
A-2016-1
1/4 x 1/4
A-2016-2
1/4 x 3/8
HAND VALVE
1-9/16
[39.8]
A-4022
HAND VALVE
OPEN
A-4002
Quick Connect Pneumatic Valves
2-5/16 [58.7]
11/16
[17.4]
Series A-4002 Valves:

Tubing to Male NPT
Model
A-4002-0
A-4002-1
A-4002-2
A-4002-3
A-4002-4
A-4002-5
A-4002-6
A-4002-7
Tubing (O.D.) x NPT

5/32 x 1/8
5/32 x 1/4
1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4
5/16 x 1/8
5/16 x 1/4
3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 1/4
*Please contact factory for metric and alternate connection sizes.
544
OPEN
Pneumatic Valves
Series
A-4000
Male NPT (1) x HB (2&3)

1/8 x 1/4
1/4 x 1/4
1/4 x 3/8
1/4 x 1/2
2-13/16 [71.4]
MODELS WITH EXTENSION
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air (no other gases or liquids).
Wetted Materials: Polyurethane, polyethylene and nylon.
Pressure Limits: -29.5 in Hg (-750 mm Hg) to 150 psi (10 bar).
Temperature Limits:32 to 140F (0 to 60C).
Weight: A-4002: 1 oz (28 g); A-4022: 1.3 oz (36 g).
Series A-4022 Valves:
Tubing to Male NPT with Extension
Model
A-4022-2
A-4022-4
Tubing (O.D.) x NPT withExtension

1/4 x 1/8 with Extension
5/16 x 1/8 with Extension
*Please contact factory for metric and alternate connection sizes.
545_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:55 AM Page 545
Series
A-3000
Quick Connect Pneumatic Fittings

COUPLING
SIZE
COUPLING
SIZE
A-3025 &A-3029
Model
A-3025
A-3029
-0
-1
-2
-3
Model
A-3026-0
A-3026-1
A-3026-2
A-3026-3
B
0.45 [11.5]
0.55 [14]
0.57 [14.6]
0.69 [17.6]
A
COUPLING
SIZE
Series A-3025 Fittings:

Quick Coupling Straight
Model
A-3025-0
A-3025-1
A-3025-2
A-3025-3
Coupling (O.D.) x Coupling (O.D.)

3/16 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
5/16 x 5/16
3/8 x 3/8
COUPLING
SIZE
COUPLING
SIZE
Coupling (O.D.)
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8

3/16 x 3/16
1/4 x 1/4
5/16 x 5/16
3/8 x 3/8
COUPLING
SIZE
MOUNTING
HOLES
COUPLING
SIZE
A-3028
Model
A-3028-0
A-3028-1
A-3028-2
A-3028-3
A
1.49 [37.8]
1.64 [41.6]
1.83 [46.6]
1.98 [50.4]
B
1.49 [37.8]
1.64 [41.6]
1.83 [46.6]
1.98 [50.4]
MOUNTING
HOLES
B
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Limits: -29.5 in Hg (-750 mm Hg) to 150 psi (10.3 bar).
Weight: 0.4 oz (11 g) to 0.7 oz (19 g).

3 Way Quick Coupling Adapter

4 Way Quick Coupling
Model
Coupling (O.D.)
A-3030-0
1/4 x 1/4 x 3/16
A-3030-1
5/16 x 5/16 x 1/4
A-3030-2
3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4
A-3030-3
3/8 x 3/8 x 5/16
*Please contact factory for metric sizes.
Model
A-3028-0
A-3028-1
A-3028-2
A-3028-3
Coupling (O.D.)
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
545
Pneumatic Fittings
B
0.97 [23.7]
1.09 [27.8]
1.20 [30.6]
1.33 [33.8]

3 Way Quick Coupling
Model
A-3027-0
A-3027-1
A-3027-2
A-3027-3
Model
A-3026-0
A-3026-1
A-3026-2
A-3026-3
A
1.49 [37.8]
1.64 [41.6]
1.83 [46.6]
1.98 [50.4]
ACCESSORIES
Model
A-3027
A-3030
-0
-1
-2
-3
B
0.93 [23.7]
1.09 [27.8]
1.20 [30.6]
1.33 [33.8]

Quick Coupling 90 Degree

1/4 x 3/16
5/16 x 1/4
3/8 x 1/4
3/8 x 5/16
A-3027 &A-3030
A
0.93 [23.7]
1.09 [27.8]
1.20 [30.6]
1.33 [33.8]
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.4 oz (11 g) to 0.7 oz (19 g).

Quick Coupling Straight Adapter
Model
A-3029-0
A-3029-1
A-3029-2
A-3029-3
MOUNTING
HOLE
A-3026
A
1.33 [33.8]
1.38 [35]
1.53 [38.9]
1.62 [41.1]
546_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:54 AM Page 546
Series
A-3000
Quick Connect Pneumatic Fittings
HEX SIZE
A-3021
Model
A-3021-1
A-3021-2
A-3021-3
A-3021-4
A-3021-5
A-3021-6
A
0.79 [20.3]
0.86 [21.8]
0.82 [20.9]
0.88 [22.4]
1.01 [25.7]
0.95 [24.2]
A-3022
ACCESSORIES

Quick Coupling to NPT Straight
Coupling (O.D.)
Model
x NPT
A-3021-1
1/4 x 1/8
A-3021-2
1/4 x 1/4
A-3021-3
5/16 x 1/8
A-3021-4
5/16 x 1/4
A-3021-5
3/8 x 1/8
A-3021-6
3/8 x 1/4
Pneumatic Fittings
Model
A-3022-1
A-3022-2
A-3022-3
A-3022-4
A-3022-5
A-3022-6
Quick Coupling to NPT 90 Degree
Coupling (O.D.)
Model
x NPT
A-3022-1
1/4 x 1/8
A-3022-2
1/4 x 1/4
A-3022-3
5/16 x 1/8
A-3022-4
5/16 x 1/4
A-3022-5
3/8 x 1/8
A-3022-6
3/8 x 1/4
A
0.98 [24.9]
1.02 [25.9]
1.09 [27.7]
1.13 [28.8]
1.23 [31.3]
1.26 [32]
B
1.26 [32]
1.30 [33]
1.41 [35.8]
1.45 [36.8]
1.53 [38.9]
1.57 [39.9]
A
HEX SIZE
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Materials: Polyurethane, polyethylene and nylon. Note: (A-3021 nickel
plated brass).
Weight: 0.4 oz (11 g) to 0.7 oz (19 g).
HEX SIZE
HEX SIZE
A-3023
Model
A-3023-1
A-3023-2
A-3023-3
A-3023-4
A-3023-5
A-3023-6
A-3024
A
1.31 [33.3]
1.35 [34.3]
1.43 [36.3]
1.47 [37.3]
1.53 [38.9]
1.57 [39.9]
B
1.49 [37.8]
1.49 [37.8]
1.64 [41.6]
1.64 [41.6]
1.83 [46.6]
1.83 [46.6]

3 Way-Quick Coupling by Quick Coupling to NPT
Model
A-3023-1
A-3023-2
A-3023-3
A-3023-4
A-3023-5
A-3023-6
Coupling (O.D.) x Coupling (O.D.) x NPT

1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4
5/16 x 5/16 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/16 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4

3 Way-Quick Coupling by NPT to Quick Coupling
Model
A-3024-1
A-3024-2
A-3024-3
A-3024-4
A-3024-5
A-3024-6
Coupling (O.D.) x NPT x Coupling (O.D.)

1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8
1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4
5/16 x 5/16 x 1/8
5/16 x 5/16 x 1/4
3/8 x 3/8 x 1/8
3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4
546
Model
A-3024-1
A-3024-2
A-3024-3
A-3024-4
A-3024-5
A-3024-6
A
1.83 [46.4]
1.87 [47.4]
1.97 [50.1]
2.01 [51.1]
2.16 [54.9]
2.20 [55.9]
B
1.02 [25.9]
1.06 [26.9]
1.09 [27.8]
1.13 [28.8]
1.23 [31.3]
1.26 [32]
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.4 oz (11 g) to 0.7 oz (19 g).
547_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:50 AM Page 547
Gage Tubing Accessories

MODELS
A-200, Norprene tubing is useful in a wide range of temperatures from -75 to
275F (-60 to 135C) and will not weaken after long term exposure to heat and
ozone.
A-200-1, 3/16 ID x 5/16 OD, 13 psi maximum pressure @ 73F (90 kPa @
23C); 50
A-200-2, 1/4 ID x 3/8 OD, 10 psi maximum pressure @ 73F (69 kPa @ 23C);
50
Gage Tubing
A-201, Rubber latex tubing has less tendency to kink in storage and occupies less
space, thus is best for portable work. 3/16 ID, 9 length
A-200
A-201/A-202
A-202, Rubber latex tubing. 3/16 ID, lengths to 50

A-203, Clear PVC tubing is easily inspected and is therefore best for test
applications where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists.
1/8 ID x 1/4 OD, lengths to 100; 60 psi max. pressure @ 73F (22C)
A-221, Clear flexible vinyl tubing is easily inspected, and is therefore best for test
applications where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists. 1/8 ID x 3/16
OD, lengths to 500; 40 psi maximum pressure @ 165F (276 kPa @ 74C)
A-203
A-221
A-204
A-220
A-225, Flexible double column plastic tubing is used with Mark IImanometers and
the Wind Speed Indicator. Light gray with red color code stripe. 1/8 ID, lengths to
750
A-204, Flexible colored vinyl tubing is quickly distinguishable in applications where
more than one line is required aiding installation. 3/16 ID x 5/16 OD, lengths to
500; 45 psi maximum pressure @ 165F (310 kPa @ 74C)
A-204-A, Opaque Red
A-204-B, Opaque Blue
A-204-C, Opaque White
A-204-D, Opaque Black
applications where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists. .240 ID x .375
A-225
A-222
ACCESSORIES
applications where a possibility of fluid entering the tubing exists. 3/16 ID x 5/16
A-223, Black polyethylene tubing offers long life, great stability and resistance to
corrosion. 1/8 ID x 1/4 OD, 10 length; 200 psi maximum @ 140F (1379 kPa @
60C)
A-224, Black nylon tubing is recommended for high temperature and pressure
applications. Lengths to 1312 ft; -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C).
A-224-A, 0.23 ID x 5/16 OD; 362 psi (2500 kPa) working pressure
A-224-B, 0.256 ID x 3/8 OD, 406 psi (2800 kPa) working pressure
A-223P
A-223P, Black plenum fire retardent polyethylene tubing meets NFPA standard 90A
for installation in air-conditioning and ventilating plenum spaces; also used in
building automation systems. Lengths to 500, 100 psig maximum pressure @
75F (689 kPa @ 24C).
A-223P-1, .17 ID x .25 OD
A-223P-2, 1/4 ID x 3/8 OD
A-210, Aluminum tubing is recommended for permanent installations. 1/4 OD,
5 length, 500 psi maximum pressure @ 200F (3447 kPa @ 93C)
A-224
A-210/A-211
A-211, Aluminum tubing, 1/4 OD, 50 length, 500 psi maximum pressure @ 200F
(3447 kPa @ 93C)
Norprene is a registered trademark of Saint-Gobain Adhesives, Inc.
547
Gage Tubing
A-223
548_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:50 AM Page 548
Static Pressure Tips

4
A-302F-B
A-302F-A
A-489
6
Flange View
A-491
A-302F-C
8
A-493
The Stainless Steel Static Pressure Tips are used to measure static pressures in
ducts or rooms. They are to be connected to differential pressure switches and transmitters.
Two static sensors are used in applications where differential pressure is required across
a filter or coil. These sensors include a mounting flange with integral rubber gasket and
two screws for simplifying mounting on a duct.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes:4 (101 mm), 6 (152 mm), 8 (203 mm).
Materials: 304 SS sensor tube, 303 SS hose barb, 430 SS flange.
Connection: Barb connection for use with 3/16 ID tubing.
A-302F-A, 4 Hook style SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange

A-302F-B, 6 Hook style SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange
A-302F-C, 8 Hook style SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange
A-489, 4 Straight SS Static Pressure Tip with mounting flange
Designed for simplified installation, these are easy to install, inexpensive, and
provides accurate static pressure sensing in smooth air at velocities up to 1500 FPM.
Static Pressure Sensors
ACCESSORIES
A-307, Static Pressure Fitting, for 1/4 metal tubing connection

A-307-SS, same as above in Stainless Steel
A-308, Static Pressure Fitting, for 3/16 and 1/8 ID plastic or rubber tubing
A-414, SS Clean Room Pressure Sensor
These static pressure tips are ideal for applications such as sensing the static
pressure drop across industrial air filters and refrigerant coils. Here the probability of
air turbulence requires that the pressure sensing openings be located away from the
duct walls to minimize impingement and aspiration, and thus ensure accurate
readings. For a permanent installation of this type, the Dwyer No. A-301 or A-302
Static Pressure Tip is used. It senses static pressure through radially-drilled holes
near the tip and can be used in air flow velocities up to 12,000 FPM. The angled tips
shown have 4 insertion depth. Each has four radially drilled .040 sensing holes. All
except Model A-303 mount in 3/8 hole in duct. For portable use, a magnet holds No.
A-303 in place.
A-308
A-414
A-301
A-302
A-301, Static Pressure Tip, for 1/4 metal tubing connection

A-301-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 6 insertion depth
A-301-B, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 8 insertion depth
A-301-C, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-301 with 12 insertion depth
A-301-SS, same as A-301 in Stainless Steel
A-302, Static Pressure Tip, for 3/16 and 1/8 ID plastic or rubber tubing
A-302-A, Static Pressure Tip, same as A-302 with 6 insertion depth
A-303, Portable Static Pressure Tip, for 3/16 ID rubber or plastic tubing with 4
insertion
A-305 low resistance Static Pressure Tip is designed for use in dust-laden air and
for rapid response applications. It is recommended where a very low actuation
pressure is required for a pressure switch or indicating gage or where response
time is critical.
A-303
A-305
A-305, Static Pressure Tip, low resistance application, furnished with two (2) hex jam
nuts and two (2) mounting washers for duct mounting and with 1/8 NPT pipe thread
for pressure connection
A-305-SS, same as A-305 in Stainless Steel
A-306, Outdoor static pressure sensor. Provides average outdoor pressure signal for
reference in building pressurization applications. Includes sensor, 50 vinyl tubing,
mounting bracket and hardware. Red Sensor
A-306-A, Outdoor static pressure sensor. Provides average outdoor pressure signal
for reference in building pressurization applications. Includes sensor, 50 vinyl
tubing, mounting bracket and hardware. Gray Sensor
A-306-A
548
A-307
549_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:49 AM Page 549
Static Pressure Accessories

The A-465 Static Pressure Pick-Up provides a clean solution for sensing space
pressure. The sensor can be mounted on sheetrock walls, single gang electrical
boxes, or on ceiling tiles. Molded from ABS plastic, the A-465 provides an integral
barb fitting and includes tubing, mounting screws and anchors.
A-465
Model A-417A, Static Pressure Pickup. For use in clean rooms, 60 micron filter picks
up static pressure. Stainless steel wall plate fits 2 x 4 electrical box. Sealed with
foam gasket, screws included. Barbed brass fitting holds 1/8 to 3/16 ID tubing.
A-417A
Models A-418E &A-418N, Static Pressure Pickup. Room mount with plastic
enclosure fits 2 x 4 electrical box. Fine mesh screen hides static pressure pickup
port. Clean connection to 1/8 to 3/16 ID tubing and pressure sensor. Sealed with
foam gasket, screws included.
A-418N
Model A-419A, Static Pressure Pickup Ceiling Mount. Plate rests on top of standard
3/4 thick ceiling tile while 60 micron filter faces down through 5/8 hole in tile. Filter
is barely noticeable in room being monitored. Unit mounts to junction box. Barbed
brass fitting holds 1/8 to 3/16 ID tubing.
ACCESSORIES
A-418E
A-419A
A-420A
Surge Damper
Model A-421, Static Pressure Tip measures duct static air pressure. Assembly
includes 6 probe, silicon rubber hose, and screws. Built-in surge damper ensures
stable readings on pressure sensor. Pressure spike reducer can be added to end of
tube to further smooth over pressure fluctuations.
A-421
549
Static Pressure Sensors
Model A-420A, Static Pressure Pickup for Roof or Outside Mount. Reduces effects
of wind gusts to keep pressure readings stable when plate is parallel to ground.
Structure withstands harsh environmental elements. Structure is 3-1/4 across and
2-3/8 deep. EMT Conduit fitting is 1/2. Pressure connection is brass barbed fitting
for 1/8 and 3/16 ID tubing.
550_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:48 AM Page 550
ACCESSORIES
Fittings Filters
A-324
A-326
A-327, A-328
A-329
A-330
A-331
A-332
A-333
A-334
A-336
A-337
A-338
A-339
A-340
A-342
A-345
A-349
A-346
A-391
A-392
A-398
Valves Connectors
ACCESSORIES
A-310A A-310B
A-311
Miscellaneous
Accessories
A-5000
A-355
A-315
A-316
A-319
550
A-312
A-365
A-317
A-321
A-318
A-322
A-323, Elbow Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing.
A-324, Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing.
A-326, Compression Fitting, brass 1/8 NPT to 3/8 tubing.
A-327, 5/16 Nylon Tube Union.
A-328, 1/4 Nylon Tube Union.
A-329, 1/8 NPT Close Coupled Street Ell, Brass.
A-330, 1/8 Pipe Plug, socket hex, plated steel.
A-331, 1/8 NPT Filter Vent Plug, nylon and sintered metal.
A-332, Bushing, brass, 1/8 to 1/4 NPT.
A-333, Bushing, brass, 1/8 to 1/2 NPT.
A-334, Close Nipple, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-336, 90 Street L, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-337, Coupling, brass, 1/8 NPT.
A-338, Servel Adapter, brass 3/8 and 5/16 N.F. Threads for gas appliances to 1/8 and
3/16 ID rubber or plastic tubing.
A-339, Adapter, brass, 1/8 NPT to 3/16 rubber and 1/8 ID plastic tubing.
A-340, Adapter, nylon, 1/8 NPT to 3/16 ID rubber or 1/4 plastic tubing.
A-342, T Assembly, plastic, for 3/16 ID rubber or 1/4 plastic tubing.
A-343, T Assembly, plastic, for 3/16 plastic tubing.
A-343-1, T Assembly, plastic, for 1/8 ID plastic tubing.
A-344, Terminal Tube, Brass 1/4 diameter tube, 8 L (not shown).
A-345, Flange, aluminum with gasket and sheet metal screws, 1/8 NPT.
A-346, T Compression Fitting, brass, 1/4 metal tubing.
A-349, Reducer, brass, 1/4 female NPT to 1/8 male NPT.
A-385, 1/2 Plastic Hole Plugs 20/bag.
A-386, 5/16 Metal HolePlugs 20/bag.
A-391, Line Filter for Capsuhelic gage,1/4 female NPT X 1/4 male NPT.
A-392, Line Filter for Magnehelic gage, 1/8 female NPT x 1/8 male NPT.
A-398, Probe Extension Adapter for series 640 air velocity transmitter. Brass, 1/2
female NPT x 5/16 compression.
Instrument valves for permanent installation. They mount in part A-316, A-317, type C
manometer connections or Magnehelic gage and connect to metal tubing or 1/8 pipe.
A-310A, 3-Way Vent Valve, plastic, 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing. Positions are: (1)
Line: Gage connected to pressure source. (2) Off: Both gage and connection to pressure
source closed. (3) Vent: Gage vented to atmosphere and connection to pressure source
closed. 80 psi rating. Replaces former model A310 (brass)
A-310B, same as A-310A but with 10 psi rating
A-311, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1/8 NPT to 1/8 NPT
A-312, Shut Off Valve, brass, 1/8 NPT to 1/4 metal tubing
A-5001-1, PVC 1/8 hose barb inlet x 1/8 hose barb outlet x 1/8 hose barb outlet (125
psi maximum)
A-5002-2, PVC 1/4 hose barb inlet x 1/4 hose barb outlet x 1/4 hose barb outlet (125
psi maximum)
A-5003-3, PVC 1/8 female NPT inlet x 1/8 female NPT outlet x 1/8 female NPT outlet
(125 psi maximum)
A-5003-5, PVC 1/8 male NPT inlet x 1/8 female NPT outlet x 1/8 female NPT outlet
(125 psi maximum)
A-5004-4, PVC 1/4 female NPT inlet x 1/4 female NPT outlet x 1/4 female NPT outlet
(125 psi maximum)
A-5004-6, PVC 1/4 male NPT inlet x 1/4 female NPT outlet x 1/4 female NPT outlet
(125 psi maximum)
A-5005-3, PVC 1/8 female NPT inlet x 1/8 male NPT outlet x 1/8 male NPT outlet (125
psi maximum)
A-5006-4, PVC 1/4 female NPT inlet x 1/4 male NPT outlet x 1/4 male NPT outlet (125
psi maximum)
A-355, Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1/8 NPT inserts. Used for convenient indication of
pressure at two points with a single gage
A-365, Dual Porting Valve, acrylic plastic, 1/8 NPT fittings. For monitoring three
pressures, two at a time, with one gage
Gage Connectors for Manometers. Molded nylon construction, threaded .786 x 27 N.S.,
with O-ring seal.
A-315, Gage connector, Shut off type, for 3/16 rubber tubing
A-316, Gage connector, bushing, 1/8 pipe thread opening
A-317, Gage connector, 1/8 pipe thread opening, less OD thd., for slip fit in 3/4 dia.
opening in 250 series A.F. gages
A-318, Gage connector 1/4 pipe thread opening
A-319, Flexible Red P.V.C. connector, 3/16 ID Rubber Tubing to 1/4 ID Plastic Tube for
1221,1222 and 1227 Manometers
A-321, Brass Safety Relief Valve Protects Magnehelic or Photohelic Gage against
over pressure due to regulator failure etc. Opens at 10 psi. Mounts in tee fitting in
sensing line or in unused gage port with addition of A-349 reducer. 1/4 male NPT (Use
two for D.P. application)
A-322, Gage connector for 1/4 tubing. Slip fits in 3/4 opening in 250 series A.F. gages
(Compression nut and ferrule not included)
551_Layout 1 7/8/14 8:47 AM Page 551
ACCESSORIES
Gage fluids in the 1 oz size are furnished in unbreakable plastic dispenser type bottles.
Larger sizes are supplied in plastic bottles with screw caps. CAUTION: Use only Dwyer
fluids in Dwyer gages.
Gage Fluids
Red Gage Fluid, .826 sp. gr. The standard fluid for use in inclined manometers, D type
vertical manometers and all Dwyer gages using red fluid.
A-101, 1 oz. dispenser bottle
A-102, 4 oz. bottle
A-103, 1 pt. bottle
A-104, 1 qt. bottle
Blue Gage Fluid, 1.910 sp. gr. For special instruments and Mark II Models 26 and 28.
A-111, 1 pt. bottle
Violet Gage Fluid, 1.000 sp. gr. Use in place of water if better meniscus is desired.
A-121, 4 oz. bottle
A-122, 1 pt. bottle
A-101
A-102
Fluorescein Green Color Concentrate, water coloring agent. Not to be used full
strength. Add 3/4 oz to a quart of distilled water. Contains a wetting agent to improve
the meniscus characteristics. Use in vertical manometers only.
A-103
A-104
Miscellaneous
A-352
A-353
A-357
A-363
A-364
A-465
A-370
A-371
A-366
A-362
A-395
A-356
A-397
A-369
A-368
A-300
A-497
A-360
Optional Accessory Kits for Air Filter Switches
A-602
A-603
A-604
A-602, Air Filter Kit. Accessory package for using switch without a gage includes two
pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two 5 lengths of 1/4 aluminum tubing
and two 1/8 NPT to 1/4 tubing compression fittings.
A-603, T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with an air
filter kit equipped Magnehelic or Series 250 AF gages. Includes two 1/8 NPT to 1/4
tubing compression fittings and two compression tees.
A-604, T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with Mark
II gages includes two plastic tubing connector tees and two plastic tubing to 1/8 NPT
adapters.
551
Miscellaneous
Accessories
A-464
A-354
ACCESSORIES
A-351
A-298, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Capsuhelic gage, 603A, 605, and
3000MR
A-299, Mounting Bracket, flush mount Magnehelic gage in bracket. Bracket is then
surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-300, Flat Aluminum Bracket for flush mounting Magnehelic gage
A-351, Pinch Clamp to seal rubber tubing, as in a leakage test
A-352, Magneclip, slip on magnetic holder for acrylic plastic gages. Per pair
A-353, Magnetic Mounting. Flat style, secures to flowmeter, etc. with 6-32 machine
screw and boots insert
A-354, Magnetic Mounting, Edge style, secures edge of acrylic manometer with 10-32
machine screw and boots insert
A-356, Gage plug with retainer loop, polyethylene plastic. For 1/4 ID tubing. Slip loop
over tubing OD and insert plug for seal
A-357, Thermometer and terminal tube holder. SS wire
A-360, Aluminum DINRail, 1 m
A-362, Stand-Hang bracket, aluminum, for Minihelic II gage
A-363, Scale Clamp Bar for 1221 Manometer
A-364, Magnet Assembly for 1222 Manometers, 2 required (3 required for 1222-36 and
M-1000)
A-366, Manometer Cleaning Brush 1/4 OD x 2-1/8 Long. Attach to wire for use
A-368, Surface mounting plate, aluminum, for Magnehelic gage
A-369, Stand-Hang Bracket, aluminum, for Magnehelic gage
A-370, Mounting Bracket, Flush mount Capsuhelic gage or Series 631B Transmitter in
bracket. Bracket is then surface mounted. Steel with gray hammertone epoxy finish
A-371, Surface Mounting Bracket. Use with Photohelic gage on horizontal or vertical
surfaces. Also for Capsu-Photohelic gages on vertical only
A-395, Surface Mounting Bracket for Series 4000 Capsuhelic gages. Steel with gray
hammertone epoxy finish
A-397, Step Drill. Rugged Step Drill quickly provides true round holes in thin materials.
Ideal for installation of Dwyer Pitot Tubes in sheet metal duct. No centerpunch needed
to steel. Drills 3/16 through 1/2 holes in 1/16 increments. (Net Price, No Discount
Allowed)
A-464, FlushMount Kit for Magnehelic gages
A-465, FlushMount Space Pressure Sensor
A-497, Surface Mounting Bracket for MinihelicII gage. Steel with satin black finish
552_Layout 1 7/7/14 3:58 PM Page 552
GLOSSARY
Absolute Pressure (psia): The total force per unit area exerted by a fluid. The sum of
atmospheric and gage pressures.
Drift: A gradual change in an element over time when the process conditions are
constant.
Accuracy: The degree to which an observed value matches the actual value of a
measurement over a specified range.
Dry Bulb Temperature: The ambient air temperature measured by a thermometer that
is freely expose to the air but shielded from other heating or cooling effects.
Alternating Current (AC): Current that reverses polarity at a uniform frequency.
Emissivity: The ratio of energy radiated by the material to energy radiated by a black
body at the same temperature. It is a measure of a material's ability to absorb and
radiate energy.
ANSI: The American National Standards Institute is a private nonprofit organization

that oversees the development of voluntary consensus standards for products,
services, processes, systems, and personnel in the United States.
ASTM: (Formerly known as The American Society for Testing and Materials) An
international standards developing organization that develops and publishes voluntary
technical standards for a wide range of materials, products, systems, and services.
Atmospheric Pressure: The force exerted per unit area by the weight of the
atmosphere.
Form-C Contact: A contact that has both normally open and normally closed contacts.
Fuzzy Logic: A system that uses mathematical or computational reasoning based on
fuzzy sets derived from analog inputs.
Gage Pressure (psig): The measure of force per area exerted by a fluid using
atmospheric pressure as the zero reference.
Gain: The ratio of change in output to the change in input of a process.
British Thermal Unit (BTU): The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of
one pound of water by one degree Fahrenheit. Melting a pound of ice at 32F requires
143 BTU.
Hot Junction: The joined end of the thermocouple that is exposed to the process
where the temperature measurement is desired.
BSPT: British Standard Pipe Thread.
Humidity: The amount of water vapor in a given volume of air or gas.
Capacitance: A measure of the amount of electric charge stored (or separated) for a
given electric potential. The most common form of charge storage device is a two-plate
capacitor.
Hydrostatic Pressure: The pressure due to the head of a liquid column.
Cavitation: The process where vapor bubbles in a flowing liquid collapse inside a
control valve as the pressure begins to increase.
Closed Loop: A control system that provides feedback to a controller on the state of
the process variable.
Cold Junction: The end of thermocouple that is kept at a constant temperature in
order to provide a reference point.
Contacts: Elements used to mechanically make or break an electric circuit.
Critical Pressure: The ratio of upstream to downstream pressure where the gas
velocity out of the valve is sonic and further decreases in downstream pressure no
longer increase the flow.
Cv or Valve Flow Coefficient: The number of US gallons per minute of water at 60F
that will pass through the valve with a pressure drop of 1 psi.
Deadband: The value of measurement between when a switch actuates and
deactuates.
Hysteresis: A property of a device or instrument whereby it gives different output

values in relation to its input values, depending on the directional sequence in which
the input values have been applied [IEC 61298-2]
Impedance: The opposition in an electric circuit to the flow of an alternating current
consisting of inductive reactance, ohmic resistance and capacitive reactance.
Inaccuracy: Maximum positive and negative deviation from the specified characteristic
curve observed in testing a device under specified conditions and by a specified
procedure [IEC 61298-2]
NOTE1: Accuracy is defined in IEC 60050-300,
definition 311-06-08.
NOTE 2: The term inaccuracy is sometimes referred to as
measured accuracy. This term should not be used.
Inductive Load: Current passing through wound or coiled wire creates a magnetic
field that in turn produces mechanical work.
Integral Control: A method of changing the output of a controller by an amount
proportional to the error and the duration of that error.
Density: The mass of a given substance per unit volume.
Laminar Flow: Smooth fluid flow that has a parabolic flow profile with no mixing
between streamlines.
Derivative Control: A method of changing the output of a controller in proportion to

the rate of change of the process variable.
Linearity: Ability of a measuring instrument to provide an indication having a linear

relationship with a defined quantity other than an influence quantity. [IEC 60050-300]
Dewpoint: The temperature to which air must be cooled for the air to be saturated with
water.
NOTE: The method of expression of lack of linearity is

different for different kinds of instruments and is established
in each particular instance.
Dielectric: The insulating material between the conductors of a capacitor.

Dielectric Constant: The ratio of the insulating ability of a material to the insulating
ability of vacuum.
DIN: Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V., The German national organization for
standardization and is that country's ISO member body. DIN and mini-DIN connectors,
as well as DIN rails are several examples of older DIN standards that are today used
around the world.
Long-Term Span Drift: The amount of change of a measured reading with 90% of full
scale range pressure applied and constant ambient conditions over a given period of
time which is typically quoted as an annual figure. [IEC 61298-2]
Long-Term Zero Drift: The amount of change of a measured reading with zero
pressure applied and constant ambient conditions over a given period of time which is
typically quoted as an annual figure.
Low Pressure Steam: As defined by ASME, steam under 15 psi pressure.
Direct Current (DC): A current with a constant polarity.

Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT) Switch: Two separate switches that operate
simultaneously, each with a normally open and a normally closed contact and a
common connection.
552
Manual Reset: A control that must have human input before it will return to its normal
state from an alarm state.
553_Layout 1 7/29/14 12:00 PM Page 553
GLOSSARY
Maximum Surge Pressure: Safe pressure for the switch housing but which may
damage the mechanism by continuous or repetitive application.
NEMA: The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, a trade association in the
US of electrical equipment manufacturers that develops many industry technical
standards in particular is the standard for electrical equipment enclosures.
RS-232: (Recommended Standard 232) is a standard for serial binary data signals
connecting between a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and a DCE (Data Circuitterminating Equipment).
RS-485: (Now known as EIA-485) is an OSI model physical layer electrical specification
of a two-wire, half-duplex, multipoint serial connection.
NIST: The National Institute of Standards and Technology, is a non-regulatory agency

of the United States Department of Commerces Technology Administration. The
institute provides standard references and calibration services.
Saturation Point: The point at which condensation is formed.
Non-Linearity: Deviation from linearity [IEC 61298-2]
Set or Actuation Point: The exact rate which will cause the electric switch to actuate.
NOTE 1: Linearity is defined in IEC 60050(300), definition

311-06-05.
NOTE 2: Non-linearity does not include hysteresis.
Non-Repeatability: Deviation from repeatability [IEC 61298-2]
NOTE: Repeatability is defined in IEC 60050(300), definition
311-06-06.
Normally Closed Switch: A switch in which the contacts are normally closed.
Actuation opens the contact.
Normally Open Switch: A switch in which the contacts are normally open. Actuation
closes the contacts.
Serial Transmission: Sending one bit at a time on a single transmission line.
Single-Pole Single Throw (SPST) Switch: A switch that only has one of either a
normally open or a normally closed contact.
Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) Switch: A switch combining both normally open
and normally closed switch contacts.
Solid State: Any element that controls current without moving parts, vacuum gaps or
heated filaments.
Span: The difference between the highest and lowest numbers in a range.
Span Temperature Coefficient: The maximum amount the span reading could change
at any point within the compensated temperature range. This error is typically
expressed as a percentage of full scale output of reading. It can also be expressed as
percentage of full scale per C, F or K e.g. 0.02%FS/C.
NPT: National Pipe Thread.

Specific Gravity: The ratio of the density of a fluid to the density of a reference fluid.
NSF: A not-for-profit, non-governmental organization that develops standards and
provides product certification and education in the field of public health and safety.
Null Switch: A floating contact switch with a zone of no contact. Often used to operate
reversible motors.
pH: An indication of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution in units ranging from 0 (most
acidic), to 7 (neutral), to 14 (most alkaline).
Pressure Drop: The difference in upstream and downstream pressure of the fluid
flowing through a valve.
Proportional Control: A method of changing the output of a controller by an amount
proportional to the error.
Proportional-Integral Control (PI): Proportional and integral control combined.
Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control (PID): Proportional, integral, and derivative
control combined.
Range: The span of rates within which the sensing element of a given switch can be
set to actuate an electric switch.
Static Pressure: The pressure exerted by a fluid at rest. The outward push of a fluid
against the walls of a container.
Temperature Compensation: The correction for the influence of temperature on a
measurement.
3-A: 3-A Sanitary Standards Inc., A non-profit association representing equipment
manufacturers, processors, regulatory sanitarians, and other public health
professionals that creates standards and accepted practices for dairy and food
processing equipment and systems.
Total Pressure: The sum of velocity and static pressure.
Transducer: Any device that generates an electrical signal from physical
measurements.
Transmitter: A device that translates the low-level output of a sensor or transducer to
a higher level signal suitable for transmission to a site where it can be further
processed.
Turbulent Flow: Fluid flow in which the flow profile is a flattened parabola, the
streamlines are not present, and the fluid is freely mixing.
Rated Pressure: The maximum pressure that the actuating components of the switch
in contact with the media can withstand continuously and/or repeatedly without risk of
permanent damage.
Turndown Ratio: The ratio of the maximum to minimum measurable value that can
still produce full-scale output.
Relative Humidity: The ratio of the quantity of water vapor in the air to the quantity of
water vapor required for saturation at the same temperature.
Velocity Pressure (Dynamic Pressure): The pressure exerted by the velocity of a

fluid. Can be measured by the difference between total and static pressure.
Repeatability: The closeness of agreement between the results of successive

measurements of the same measured, carried out under the same conditions of
measurement, i.e.: by the same measurement procedure; by the same observer; with
the same measuring instruments, used under the same conditions; at relatively short
intervals of time. [IEC 60050-300]
Viscosity: The resistance of a fluid to flow when subjected to shear stress.
Repetitive Accuracy: The ability of a switch to operate repetitively at its set point under
consistent conditions.
Wet Bulb Temperature: The lowest temperature that can be obtained through the
cooling effect of water evaporating into the atmosphere.
Zero Temperature Coefficient: The maximum amount the output reading at zero
pressure might deviate over the compensated temperature range. This error is typically
expressed as a percentage of full scale output of reading. It can also be expressed as
percentage of full scale per C, F or K e.g. 0.02%FS/C.
Response Time: The time it takes an element to respond to a change in the value of
the measured variable or to produce a change in the output signal.
Rotameter: A variable area flowmeter consisting of tapered tube and a float.
553
554_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:05 PM Page 554
HVACMOBILEAPPLICATION
For those customers in the HVAC or Building Automation Systems Industry, Dwyer offers the Air Velocity and Flow Calculator App available on the iOS
and Google Play Markets. One can easily convert velocity pressure to air velocity or air velocity to air volume. Converting velocity pressure to air volume
is advantageous for effortlessly changing the pressure on your Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gage or manometer to velocity. Moreover, this Calculator
also includes air density factors from humidity levels. By utilizing the air velocity to air volume functionality, one can simplistically convert the air velocity to
air flow rates from duct dimensions, with just the tap of a button.
Download the phone App or use the Web version of our Air Velocity and Flow Calculator on our website at: www.dwyer-inst.com/flowcalc.
FREEDOWNLOAD!
554
555_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:09 PM Page 555
ACCURACY | UNDERSTANDING PRESSURE SENSOR ACCURACY

What is accuracy? The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) definition of accuracy is maximum positive and
negative deviation from the specified characteristic curve observed in testing a device under specified conditions and by
a specified procedure. Unfortunately when it comes to defining accuracy for a pressure sensor its more complicated.
Accuracy has a large effect on the cost of a pressure sensor or even more important, the quality or efficiency of theprocess
Scan here
it is measuring. It is important to understand what factors determine accuracy and what questions to ask when selecting
to watch
product video a sensor so that an apples-to-apples comparison can be made instead of apples-to-oranges.
Even though there isnt a defined standard for pressure sensor accuracy there is an IEC standard that defines factors that make-up accuracy. IEC 612982 states that accuracy must include Hysteresis, Non-Repeatability and Non-Linearity. Non-Repeatability and Hysteresis are well defined. Hysteresis is the
maximum difference in sensor output at a pressure when that pressure is first approached with pressure increasing and then approached with pressure
decreasing during a full span pressure cycle. Non-Repeatability is the maximum difference in output when the same pressure is applied, consecutively,
under the same conditions and approaching from the same direction.
Output
Output
100%
Pressure (% FS)
100%
Pressure (% FS)
Non-Repeatability
Hysteresis
Where manufactures start to differentiate is with Non-Linearity. IEC 61298-2 lists three methods of Non-Linearity, the two most popular methods used by
sensor manufactures are the Best Fit Straight Line Non-Linearity and Terminal Point Non-Linearity. Usually the method of non-linearity used will be specified
with the sensors accuracy as BFSL or Terminal Point Method. Why is it important to understand the difference between these two methods? Based on the
Non-linearity characteristics of a sensor, it could have two vastly different Non-Linearity percentages. The following diagram shows how the same sensor
can have two Non-linearity percentages.
0.5%
0.25%
BFSL
Output
0.25%
Output
Terminal
Point
0.25%
0
0.5%
100%
Pressure (% FS)
Best Fit Straight Line Non-Linearity
100%
Pressure (% FS)
Terminal Point Non-Linearity
555
556_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:10 PM Page 556
ACCURACY | UNDERSTANDING PRESSURE SENSOR ACCURACY

IEC 61298-2 identifies which factors make up accuracy (Non-Linearity, Non-Repeatability, Hysteresis) but the IEC standard does not specify how these
factors are combined into a single accuracy. The methods in which the values are combined have a substantial impact on the total accuracy. Some
manufactures simply sum the three factors while others use mathematical equations such as Root of the Sum Squared or Root of the Mean Squared to
combine Non-Linearity, Non-Repeatability, and Hysteresis into a total accuracy percentage. The following examples show how the same transmitter can
have three accuracy percentages depending on which equation is used.
Non-Linearity 0.5% BFSL
Non-Repeatability 0.05% F.S.
Hysteresis 0.1% F.S.
(Non-Linearity)2 + (Hysteresis)2 + (Non-Repeatability)2
RSS =
(0.50)2
RSS =
RSS =
(0.10)2
(0.05%)2
0.51%
Root of the Sum Squared
(Non-Linearity)2 + (Hysteresis)2 + (Non-Repeatability)2
RMS =
(0.50)2
RMS =
(0.10)2
(0.05%)2
RMS = 0.30%
Root of the Mean Squared
Sum = Non-Linearity + Hysteresis + Non-Repeatability

Sum =
0.5
+
0.
+
0.05
Sum = 0.65%
Summed Factors
So why is this important? Accuracy has a price. The cost of a pressure sensor is a function of its accuracy, the more accurate the sensor the more expensive
it will be. From a manufacturing point of view, the wrong sensors can cause expensive quality or efficiency problems. That is why it is important to understand
how manufacturers calculate accuracy and recognize what parameters to look at when comparing pressure sensors. By understanding how manufacturers
calculate accuracy, you will be able to make a more informed decision when evaluating pressure sensors. Ensuring the next sensor you select will have
the required accuracy at the right price for the application.
556
557_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:11 PM Page 557
REFERENCETABLES
AREA OF CIRCLES IN FT2
Diam. Area
Diam. Area
Square
in
Square in
Inches Feet
Inches Feet
4.909
1
.0054 30
5.241
1-1/2 .0123 31
5.585
2
.0218 32
5.940
2-1/2 .0341 33
6.305
3
.0491 34
6.611
3-1/2 .0668 35
7.069
4
.0873 36
7.467
4-1/2 .1105 37
7.876
5
.1364 38
8.296
5-1/2 .1650 39
8.727
6
.1964 40
9.168
6-1/2 .2305 41
9.621
7
.2673 42
10.08
7-1/2 .3068 43
10.56
8
.3491 44
11.04
8-1/2 .3940 45
11.54
9
.4418 46
12.05
9-1/2 .4923 47
12.57
10
.5454 48
13.10
11
.6600 49
13.64
12
.7854 50
14.19
13
.9218 51
14.75
14
1.069 52
15.32
15
1.227 53
15.90
16
1.396 54
17.10
17
1.576 56
18.35
18
1.767 58
19.63
19
1.969 60
20.97
20
2.182 62
22.34
21
2.405 64
23.76
22
2.640 66
25.22
23
2.885 68
26.73
24
3.142 70
28.27
25
3.409 72
29.87
26
3.687 74
31.50
27
3.976 76
33.18
28
4.276 78
34.91
29
4.587 80
ALTITUDE PRESSURE TABLE

Mercury at 0C (32F)
In
Altitude Inches
Millimeters
in feet of Mercury of Mercury
-1,000 31.02
787.9
0
29.921
760.0
1,000
28.86
732.9
2,000
27.82
706.6
3,000
26.81
681.1
4,000
25.84
656.3
5,000
24.89
632.3
6,000
23.98
609.0
7,000
23.09
586.4
8,000
22.22
564.4
9,000
21.38
543.2
10,000 20.58
522.6
15,000 16.88
428.8
20,000 13.75
349.1
25,000 11.10
281.9
30,000 8.88
225.6
35,000 7.04
178.7
40,000 5.54
140.7
45,000 4.36
110.8
50,000 3.436
87.30
SPECIFIC GRAVITIES OF GASES

(Based on 68F and 14.7 lb. abs.)
C 2H2
Acetylene
Air
. . . . . . .
NH3
Ammonia
A
Argon
C4H40
Butane-N
(CH)3)2CH CH3
Butane-ISO
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
Carbon Monoxide CO
CL2
Chlorine
C2H6
Ethane
He
Helium
H2
Hydrogen
CH4
Methane
Natural Gas
. . . . . .
Nitric Oxide
Nitrogen
Nitrous Oxide
Oxygen
Propane
Sulphur Dioxide
NO
N2
N20
02
C3H8
SO2
.897
1.000
.587
1.378
2.390
1.990
1.517
.966
2.452
1.035
.138
.070
.553
.665
(Approx. Avg.)
1.035
.966
1.518
1.103
1.550
2.209
VOLUME EQUIVALENTS
1 Cu. Ft.
1728 Cu. In.

7.481 Gal. (U.S.)
28.317 Liters
28.317 Cu. Cm.
1 Gal. (U.S.) 231 Cu.In.
.1337 Cu. Ft.
3.785 Liters
3785 Cu. Cm.
1 Liter
.0353 Cu. Ft.
.2642 Gal. (U.S.)
1000 Cu. Cm.
FLOW EQUIVALENTS
1 Cu. Ft./Hr.
1 Cu. Ft./Min.
.0166
Cu. Ft./Min.
60
Cu. Ft./Hr.
.4719
LPM
28.316
LPM
28.316
LPH
1699
LPH
471.947 CC/Min.
28317
CC/Min.
28317
CC/Hr.
1,699,011
CC/Hr.
.1247
Gal/Min.
7.481
Gal/Min.
7.481
Gal/Hr.
448.831
Gal/Hr.
1 LPH
1 LPM
.0166
LPM
60
LPH
.00059
Cu. Ft./Min.
.035
Cu. Ft./Min.
.035
Cu. Ft./Hr.
2.1189
Cu. Ft./Hr.
16.667
CC/Min.
1000
CC/Min.
1000
CC/Hr.
60,002
CC/Hr.
.004
Gal/Min.
.264
Gal/Min.
.264
Gal/Hr.
15.851
Gal/Hr.
1 CC/Min.
60
.000035
.0021
.001
.06
.00026
.0159
1 Gal/Min.
60
.1337
8.021
3.785
227.118
3,785.412
227,125
1 CC/Hr.
CC/Hr.
.0167
Cu. Ft./Min. .0000005
Cu. Ft./Hr.
.00003
LPM
.000017
LPH
.001
Gal/Min.
.000004
Gal/Hr.
.00026
1 Gal/Hr.
Gal/Hr.
.0167
Cu. Ft./Min.
.002
Cu. Ft./Hr.
.1337
LPM
.063
LPH
3.785
CC/Min.
63.069
CC/Hr.
3785
CC/Min.
Cu. Ft./Min.
Cu. Ft./Hr.
LPM
LPH
Gal/Min.
Gal/Hr.
Gal/Min.
Cu. Ft./Min.
Cu. Ft./Hr.
LPM
LPH
CC/Min.
CC/Hr.
557
558_Layout 1 7/10/14 9:52 AM Page 558
REFERENCETABLES
SPECIFICGRAVITY OFLIQUID
Liquid
Acetone
Alcohol, ethyl
Alcohol, methyl
Ammonia, saturated
Benzene
Brine (10% Na Cl)
Carbolic acid
Carbon disulfide
Carbon tetrachloride
Chloroform
Ether
Fuel Oils
1
2
3
5A
5B
6
Gas oils
Gasolines
a
b
c
Glycerine
Heptane-n
Hexane
Kerosene
Mercury
Methyl acetate
Methyl iodide
Milk
Naptha, petroleum ether
Naptha, wood
Oils
Castor
Coconut
Cotton seed
Creosote
Linseed, boiled
Olive
Palm
Peanut
Sesame Seed
Soy Bean
Pentane
Propylene glycol
SAE 30 Lube Oil
Sea Water
Sodium chloride
5%
25%
Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda)
20%
30%
40%
Turpentine (spirits)
Water
AGENCY APPROVAL CHART

Specific Gravity
0.792
0.791
0.810
0.655
0.9
1.08
0.950 to 0.965
1.293
1.595
1.489
0.736
Products with this symbol meet certain requirements for 3-A Sanitary Standards for
design and fabrication as governed by 3-A SSI.
Products with this symbol have had representative samples tested to meet BTL
compatability.
Products with this symbol conform to certain standards and are eligible to be placed on
the market in the European Community.
This symbol assures you that the product meets certain safety standards and/or
performance criteria as set by the Canadian Standards Association.
0.82 to 0.95
0.82 to 0.95
0.82 to 0.95
0.82 to 0.95
0.82 to 0.95
0.82 to 0.95
0.89
Products with this symbol conform to certain ATEX requirements as set by the European
Union
Products with this mark meet certain requirements as reported by Factory Mutual
Research.
0.74
0.72
0.68
1.260
0.688
0.664
0.820
13.600
0.93
2.28
1.028 to 1.035
0.665
0.848 to 0.810
0.969
0.925
0.926
1.040 to 1.200
0.924
0.918
0.924
0.92
0.923
0.924 to .928
.623
1.038
0.9
1.025
Products with this mark meet certain Canadian requirements as reported by Factory
Mutual Research.
Products with this mark meet certain Canadian and U.S. requirements as reported by
Factory Mutual Research.
Products with this symbol certify to standards for safety of electrical equipment for
explosive atmosphere requirements as set by the IECEx Management Committee
ExMC.
The National Institute of Metrology, Standardization and Industrial Quality is a Brazilian
federal autarchy, linked to MDIC, the Ministry of Development, Industry and Foreign
Commerce.
Products with this symbol are listed by NSF International. Samples of these products
have been evaluated by NSF and meet the safety standards set forth by NSF
International.
RoHS
1.037
1.196
1.19
1.22
1.33
1.43
0.870
1.000
Products with this symbol meet the European Unions Directive on the restriction of the
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment 2002/95/EC.
Products with this symbol have had representative samples tested to meet ULs safety
requirements.These requirements are primarily based on ULs own published
Standards for Safety.
Products with this symbol have been evaluated by UL to Canadian safety requirements,
which may be somewhat different from U.S. safety requirements.
Products with this symbol indicate compliance with both Canadian and U.S. safety
requirements.
Products with this symbol are certified UL recognized components to U.S. requirements.
Component parts are part of a larger product or system. These components may have
restrictions on their performance or may be incomplete in construction.
Products with this symbol are certified ULrecognized components to Canadian
requirements.
Products with this symbol are certified ULrecognized components to both Canadian
and U.S. requirements.
558
559_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:13 PM Page 559
REFERENCETABLES
HAZARDOUSLOCATIONSLISTINGS
Class I (-4)
Division I (-4A)
Group A (-2)
Group B (-2)
Group C (-2)
Group D (-2)
Division II (-4B)
Class II (-5)
Division I (-5A)
Group E (-2)
Group F (-2)
Group G (-2)
Division II (-5D)
Class III (-6)
Division I (-6A)
Division II (-6B)
Flammable gases or vapors are or may be present in sufficient quantities to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.
Gases or vapors are or may be in the atmosphere in normal operations.
Containing acetylene.
Containing hydrogen, ethylene oxide & propylene oxide or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
Containing ethyl-ether vapor, ethylene or cyclopropane.
Containing gasoline, hexane, naptha, benzine, butane, propane, alcohol, acetone, lacquer solvent or natural gas.
Gases or vapors are not normally present. They may be present due to leakage, accidents or maintenance. It is possible for one atmosphere to
contain the same items as listed for Groups of Division I of this class.
Combustible dust may be present in sufficient quantities to produce an explosive atmosphere.
Dust in suspension. Dust is or may be present in the atmosphere due to normal operating conditions.
Containing metal dust, including aluminum, magnesiums and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similar hazardous characteristics.
Containing carbon black, coal or coke dust.
Containing flour, starch or grain dust.
Dust not normally in suspension. Possibly containing the same items as listed for Groups of Division I of this class.
Ignitable fibers are present, but not necessarily present in air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures.
Easily ignitable fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured or used.
Easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled.
NEMASTANDARDSFORINDUSTRIALENCLOSURES
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 3R
Type 3S
Type 4
Type 4X
Type 5
Type 6
Type 6P
Type 7
Type 8
Type 9
Type 10
Type 11
Type 12
Type 12K
Type 13
General purpose - indoor.

Drip-proof - indoor. Protects against limited amounts of falling liquids and dirt.
Dust-tight, raintight and sleet resistant - outdoor. Protects against windblown dust, rain sleet and external ice formation.
Same as Type 3, except not dust-tight.
Same as Type 3, but provides for operation of external mechanism when ice-laden.
Watertight and dust-tight - indoor and outdoor. Protects against windblown dust and rain, splashing water and hose-directed water.
Same as Type 4 except also corrosion resistant.
Dust-tight - indoor. Protects against dust and falling dirt.
Submersible, watertight and dust-tight - indoor and outdoor. Protects against water entry during occasional temporary submersion to a limited depth.
Same as Type 6 except for prolonged submersion.
Class I indoor hazardous locations. Explosion-proof, may be A, B, C or D.
Class I indoor or outdoor hazardous locations - oil immersed equipment, may be A, B, C or D.
Class II indoor hazardous locations. Explosion-proof, may be E, F or G.
Mining Enforcement Safety Administration. Explosion-proof in methane or natural gas.
Corrosion resistant and drip-proof - oil-immersed - indoor.
Dust-tight and drip-tight - indoor, non-corrosive dripping liquids.
Same as Type 12 except enclosures have knockouts.
Oil-tight and dust-tight - indoors, non-corrosive spray of water, oil and coolant.
559
560_Layout 1 7/7/14 4:16 PM Page 560
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.
Capsuhelic
Capsu-Photohelic
Digihelic
DigiMag
Duotect
Durablock
Dwyer Group
Dwyer
Flex-Tube
Flotect
Iso Verter
Lin-E-Aire
Love
Magnehelic
Common law marks of

Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
MagneSense
Mercoid
Mercoid Control
Microtector
Minihelic
Mini-Master
Mini-Photohelic
S-D
Slide Guide
SLiquid
Tell Tale
Tell Tale Jr.
Thermoguide
Ultra-Mag
Ultra-View
Vaneometer
Commonly used
marks and graphics
One-Touch
Optitrol
Photohelic
Plast-A-Vane
Precisor
Quick-View
Rate-Master
Safe-T-Ohm
Slack Tube
Spirahelic
The Low Pressure People
Visi-Float
Marks registered to companies other than Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
AQStick
Even-Action
Hi-Flow
Loop Alarms
Lovelink
Mini-Node
Minitactor
Mother Node
Pre-Trac
Proximity
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
Canadian Standards
Association
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
FM Global
Technology
MasterCard
International Inc.
Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.
BACnet International,
Inc.
Visa International
Services Association
Alumel
Android
Chromel
Darina
Duracell
Eveready
Fluon
Fluorolube
Freon
HART
Hirschmann
HyperTerminal
Iglide
Inconel
IOS
Lexan
Loctite
Modbus
Norprene
Nylatch
Open I/O
Conceptech, Inc.
Google, Inc.
Conceptech, Inc.
Shell Trademark Management B.V.
The Gillette Company
Eveready Battery Company, Inc.
AGC Chemicals Americas, Inc.
Gabriel Performance Products LLC
E.I. DuPont De Nemours and
Company
Hart Communication Foundation
Hirschmann Electronics GMBH
Hilgraeve, Inc.
Igus GMBH
Huntington Alloys Corporation
Cisco Systems, Inc.
SABIC Innovative Plastic IP B.V.
Henkel Corporation
Schneider Automation, Inc.
Saint-Gobain Abrasives,Inc. Corporation
Southco, Inc.
Easton Controls, Inc.
Open Signal
Sensorpak
Sensorpulse
Swagelock
Trendreader
Tygon
VCR
Velcro
Windows
Windows NT
Windows Vista
Excel
Powerpoint

Swagelock Company
ACR Systems, Inc.
Saint-Gobain
Performance Corporation
Swagelok Company
Velcro Industries B.V.
Microsoft Corporation
Air FlowTM
No More LeaksTM
Precision Flow
ProHoodTM
Smart InterfaceTM
TSI, Inc.
Permatex
Sierra Instruments, Inc.
TSI, Inc.
Ientek Co., Ltd.
Information about Mercury-added Products

Dwyer Instruments, Inc. continues its development of non-mercury replacement alternatives for those products currently offered containing mercury. We will continue to work
with all customers to supply mercury added products as needed for replacement of products currently in use and to guide customers towards non-mercury added products for
new applications.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. will comply with all local, state, federal, and international laws regarding the sale of mercury added products. These laws may affect our ability to sell,
distribute, or transport products into restricted states and/or countries. Mercury added product sales may be limited or denied to certain customers depending on the location
or intended use of the product.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. encourages all customers to become familiar and comply with all mercury legislation. Sales of any and all mercury added products will be discontinued
to any customer that knowingly or willfully disregards any legislation concerning mercury.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. requests that all mercury containing products are properly disposed of at the end of their useful life. Many web sites are available to help educate
consumers about proper disposal of mercury added products. Please visit www.newmoa.org for addition information related to mercury usage.
560
2015Index_Layout 2 7/21/14 9:30 AM Page 561
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
16B 1996
16B
16C
16L
100
100AV
102
123
160
160E
160F
160G
160S
165
166T
185
195
199
1000E
1000W
1205B
1207A
1211
1212
1213
1221, 1222, 1223
1227, 1227M
1230, 1235
1620
1630
1638
1640
1800
1823
1831
1900
1910
1950
1950G
1996
244
245
253
408
409
304
304
412
414
414
415
413
522
413
525
526
358
88
88
434
434
407
407
408
406
407
14
38
38
38
37
32
32
37
34
34
40
40
39
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Pressure
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
10-11
13
13
523
524
525
526
4-5
494-495
520
520
521
Valves
Valves
Valves
Temperature
Valves
Pressure
Pressure
Valves
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
479
485
478
243
492-493
13
26
496
60-61
60-61
60-61
104-105
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Valves
Temperature
271
246
247
519
254
3HBAV 3200G
3HBAV
3MSV
3PBV
32B
38R
300
3000MR/3000MRS
3000WA
3100
3100D
3100MP
3200G
4 40T/40M
4
4B
4C
4V-3
40T/40M
SECTION
PAGE
400 43000
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Level
Level
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Valves
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
Process Control
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
2-5000 2900
2-5000
200
250-AF
265
275
285
295
2000
2000VA
2700
2800
2900
PRODUCT
400
421, 422, 424
450A-1
460
471B
472A-1
475
475-AV Kit
476A
477
477-AV Kit
477A
478A
480
485B
490
4000
43000
Test Equipment
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
410
14
433
410
420
440
401
411
400
402
411
403
400
416
430
405
15
25
Temperature
Flow
Air Quality
Flow
271
175
119
175
5 550
5
500
530
550
62 682
62
605
607
607D
608
610
616
616C
616D
616KD
616W
616WL
626
628
628CR
629
631B
634ES
636
636D
641
641B
641RM
644
645
647
648B & 648C
650
651
652-0
655A
657-1
657C-1
659
660
668
670
672
673
677B
681
682
Process Control
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Pressure
Air Quality
Air Quality
Temperature
Air Quality
Pressure
Air Quality
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
356
52
44
44
59
49
45
47
45
48
51
51
100-101
100-101
102
63
65
99
103
62
122
123
123
96
64
64
46
263
264
265
62
128
128
264
118
47
118
98
98
46
97
97
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Pressure
276
357
358
74
7 765
7
725
750H
765
561
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
781 7312
781
782
782H
783
784
7000
7000B
7100B
7112
7112B
7312
360
360
359
361
361
73-74
74
74
73
74
73
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Temperature
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
TestEquipment
270
248
249
378
359
356
260
418
420
419
417
Process Control
Temperature
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
357
272
435
419
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Accessories
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Pressure
Pressure
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Process Control
Process Control
Temperature
Process Control
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
Pressure
533
533
534
7
7
7
548
5
7
7
455
7
7
7
455
549
549
549
549
549
549
4
7
549
548
548
548
430
430
430
4
7
367
367
265
351
536-540
541-544
545-546
544
550
89
9 9671
9
9
920
9671
A-169 A1F
A-169
A-170
A-240/250
A-286
A-299
A-300
A-302F
A-310A
A-320-A
A-320-B
A-350
A-368
A-369
A-371
A-396A
A-417A
A-418E
A-418N
A-419A
A-420A
A-421
A-432
A-464
A-465
A-489
A-491
A-493
A-525
A-527
A-530
A-605
A-610
A-699
A-700
A-709
A-900, A-901
A-1000
A-2000
A-3000
A-4000
A-5000
A1F
562
SECTION
PAGE
A1PS/A1VS AVUB
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
8 89088
8
8B
8C
820
861H
861SSR
862E
8901
8904
8912
89088
PRODUCT
A1PS/A1VS
A2
A4
A6
A9
A3000
AAFS
ABFV
ACT
ADPS
AFG
AFH2
AFR
AFR2
AFS
AN2
ANE-1
AP
AP1
AP2
APM
APS/AVS
APT
APV-C
APV-I
AQH-20
AQS-1
AQTI
ASG
AT11910
AT1ADPS
AT21823
AT22000
AT23000MR/MRS
AT2605
AT2DH3
AT2MS
AT3A3000
AVFS
AVU
AVUB
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Air Quality
Valves
Valves
Pressure
Air Quality
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
Flow
Process Control
Test Equipment
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Process Control
Pressure
Process Control
Level
Level
Test Equipment
Air Quality
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
90
92
41
91
91
22-23
119
486-488
480-481
30
111
421
529
529
188
354
415
94
426
427
346
90
369
337
337
433
130
423
451
35
31
33
8
27
53
21
56
24
120
120
120
Level
Level
Flow
Valves
Valves
Valves
Test Equipment
Pressure
Process Control
Pressure
Valves
Valves
Process Control
Valves
Valves
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Level
Temperature
Test Equipment
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Valves
Pressure
Valves
306
335
229
509
509
510
457
75
387
29
506
489
353
504
505
352
368
368
336
234
440
235
236
236
242
237
237
262
482
30
506
B-190 BYS
B-190
BAP
BAT
BBV-0
BBV-1
BBV-2
BCHP
BDG
BDL
BDPA
BFC
BFV
BGM
BHC
BICV
BPI
BPS-005
BPS-015
BPV
BT
BTK2
BTL
BTLRN
BTM3
BTO
BTP
BTPM
BTT
BV2M
BYDS
BYS
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
CAM CXA
CAM
Capsu-Photohelic Gage
Capsuhelic Gage
CBAS
CBT
CC1
CCS
CCT40/50
CCT60/70
CD
CDD
CDT
CDTA
CDTR
CDW2
CDX
CFS2
CHP
CLD20
CLP
CLS1
CLS2
CLT
CM-1
CM-2
CM-3
CMT200
Cooling Tower/Snubber
CPF
CPS
CRF2
CS
CSG
CTF
CX
CXA
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
DPGA DX
Flow
Pressure
Pressure
Process Control
Temperature
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Pressure
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Level
TestEquipment
Test Equipment
Level
Level
Level
Level
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Air Quality
Accessories
Flow
Process Control
Level
Pressure
TestEquipment
Level
Pressure
Pressure
190
25
15
384
235
282
362
364
364
93
131
132
133
134
135
131
305
455
436
307
309
308
330
449
449
448
136
534
160-161
384
322
93
451
312
93
92
Temperature
Temperature
Pressure
Air Quality
Level
Level
Temperature
Valves
Pressure
Valves
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
ProcessControl
ProcessControl
Test Equipment
Pressure
Air Quality
Flow
Flow
Temperature
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Level
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Flow
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
273
261
86-87
113
313
331
240
482
79
502-503
374
374
375
376
377
437
105
138
204
205
261
19
17
20
18
17
18-20
9
441
334
95
95
9
9
57
223
41
78
78
82
DPGA
DPGAB
DPGW
DPGWB
DPL110
DPM
DPMA
DPMF
DPML
DPMP
DPMW
DPMX
DPT
DPW
DR
DRFT
DS
DSGT
DT
DTFA
DTFF
DTFO
DTFW
DTG
DTM
DTP
DTV
Duotect Switch
Durablock Gage
Durablock Gage
Durablock Manometer
DW-DATAPAD
DW-USB
DW-USB-1-HT
DW-USB-LCD
DW-USB-LITE
DW-WIFI
DX
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Level
Process Control
ProcessControl
Process Control
Process Control
ProcessControl
Process Control
Process Control
Pressure
Flow
Flow
Temperature
Flow
Pressure
Valves
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Pressure
Level
Level
Level
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Pressure
Process Control
Process Control
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Pressure
76
77
76
77
307
380
343
344
344
344
343
345
84
206
156
241
168-169
81
515
167
167
166
166
80
292
293
293
89
13
409
14
391
390
286
391
390
389
43
Level
Temperature
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Flow
Flow
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
338
277
454
83
30
213
212
429
518
517
Accessories
Accessories
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Air Quality
Level
Process Control
Level
Level
Pressure
Test Equipment
Flow
Flow
Level
Air Quality
Flow
Valves
Flow
Level
532
532
299-300
298
302
301
303
112
321
370
309
335
103
406-407
210
178-183
295-298
114-115
230
530
184
305
D DPG-200
D
DA-7035N
DA/DS
DAFM
DBLM
DBOB
DBT
DBV
DCGII
DCS
DCT500A
DCT500ADC
DCT600
DCT1000
DCT1000DC
DDM-01
DevCom2000
DF
DFMT
DFMT2
DFS
DH
DH Links
DH3
DHII
Digihelic Links
Digihelic Controller
DigiMag Gage
DKT-1
DLD
DLI2
DLP
DM-1100
DM-1200
DM-2000
DMF
DP
DPG-000
DPG-100
DPG-200
EBV EPTA
EBV
EC
EC2-10
EDA
EDPS
EFF
EFS2
EMMA
EP1000
EPTA
F195 FSW2
F195
F222, F451
F6/F7
F7-MLK
F7-MM
F7-MQ
F7-MS
FAFM
FBLT
FC-1000
FCLS
FD-1
FDT
Flex-Tube Manometer
FLMG
Flotect Switch
Flotect Switch
FLST
FPCA
FR
FS-2
FSW2
563
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
Gage Tubing Accessories GVS

Gage Tubing Accessories
GBT
GDL
GDL-T
GFC
GFM2
GFM3
GFM4
GFT2
GG
GSTA
GVS
547
234
386
386
227
224
225
226
228
535
136
189
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Valves
Test Equipment
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Valves
Air Quality
Valves
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Valves
Test Equipment
Air Quality
Temperature
Pressure
89
42
43
442
471
456
159
189
158
158
190
507
129
494-496
405
404
508
455
124
286
80
Temperature
Flow
Flow
Temperature
Valves
Flow
Level
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
ProcessControl
Temperature
Temperature
284
211
157
285
518
194
338
445
445
445
446
106
58
355
239
239
Process Control
Process Control
367
370
Level
Level
Level
Level
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Level
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
295
296
297
298
345
392
392
373
373
323
152
152
153
153
I2-1 IT-W
I2-1
IEFS
IF
ILA
IP
IPFS
IPV
IR2
IR3
IR4
IR6/IR7
IS626
ISDP
Iso Verter Module
IT
IT-W
KF-CC-304 KFD0
KF-CC-304
KFD0
L4 LFMD
L4
L6
L8
L10
LCI132
LCR10
LCR20
LCT216
LCT316
LDL2-030
LFMA
LFMB
LFMC
LFMD
564
SECTION
PAGE
LFME LVT
Accessories
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Accessories
Air Quality
Flow
H2 HTG
H2
H3
HADP
Hand Held Thermocouples
HBAV
HCHP
HF
HFO
HFPC
HFPS
HFT
HGV
HHT
Hi-Flow Valve
HM28
HM35
HNV
HP
HS
HTDL-20/30
HTG
PRODUCT
LFME
LFMF
LOFM
LoveLinkIII
LPCP
LPG4
LPG5
LPI
LPTK
LTC
LTI
LTS
LTT
LTTJ
LUX-01
LVT
Flow
Flow
Flow
Temperature
Test Equipment
Pressure
Pressure
Process Control
Test Equipment
Level
Temperature
Level
Process Control
Process Control
Test Equipment
Temperature
153
153
209
250
457
71
71
352
435
310
251
310
365
365
439
259
Air Quality
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Valves
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Level
Test Equipment
Process Control
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Level
Flow
Flow
Valves
Flow
Process Control
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Flow
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Process Control
Test Equipment
Pressure
Level
Level
Process Control
Valves
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Valves
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
Valves
Test Equipment
Level
Pressure
Test Equipment
110
4-5
52
54-55
512-514
12
409
416
319
458
362
36
81
36
335
207
208
491
144-145
366
28
10-11
444
144-145
447
447
448
366
422
28
332
333
347
527
54-55
432
432
485
387
371
372
483
429
291
94
417
MAFS MW-1
MAFS
Magnehelic Gage
Magnehelic Transmitter
Magnesense Transmitter
Mark 1, 3, 4
Mark II
Mark II
Mark II WSI
MBLT
MC
MCS
MDA
MDPC
MDS
MFD-1
MFS
MFS2
MGO
Mini-Master Flowmeter
Mini-Node
Mini-Photohelic Gage
Minihelic Gage
MIT
MM
MM-1
MM-2
MM10
MN-1
Mobile Meter
MP
MPC
MPC Jr.
MPM
MPR
MS2
MST-01
MST2-01
MSV
MTL20/30
MTL5041/5045
MTL7706/7787
MV
MVA
MVR
MVS
MW-1
NVII
NVII
Valves
507
O-4 OSW-100
O-4
OLS
One-Touch Transmitter
OP
OSC-200
OSW-100
Temperature
Level
Pressure
Flow
Air Quality
Air Quality
283
306
48
170-171
137
137
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
Temperature
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Air Quality
Valves
Level
Level
Valves
TestEquipment
Pressure
Flow
Flow
Pressure
Flow
Pressure
Valves
Pressure
Valves
Test Equipment
Level
Level
Temperature
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Process Control
Process Control
Process Control
ProcessControl
Process Control
Valves
Level
Accessories
Flow
Pressure
Level
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
272
188
186
186
187
187
110
491
320
320
470
456
29
197
172-173
17
195
39
484
22-23, 26
517
444
315
314
259
450
450
349
350
381
382
348
522-524
336
535
219
16
337
220
220
218
160-161
198
P PWF
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
S2-1 SX3
P
P1
P2
P3
P5
P8
PAFS-1000
PBFV
PBLT2
PBLTX
PBV
PCHP
PDPS
PDWS
PE
PFG2
PFT
PG
PGV
Photohelic Gage
PI
PIT
PLS
PLS2
PLVT1
PM-1
PM-2
PMA
PME
PMS
PMT
PPM
PRECISOR Positioner Valves
PRV
PS
PSX2
PTGD
PTV
PUB
PUF
PUX2
PVF
PWF
Quick-View Indicator QV
Quick-View Indicator
QV
Valves
Valves
511
511
R RVM
R
R
Rate-Master Flowmeter
RDCS
Regulator Kits
RH-R
RHP
RHP-E/N
RHRS
RLD1
RLD2
RM
RMV
RMV II
RP1
RP2
RRT3
RSF
RSM
RSV
RTD
RTI
RVM
Temperature
Valves
Flow
Valves
Flow
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Air Quality
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Flow
Flow
Flow
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Temperature
Flow
Pressure
Valves
Temperature
Flow
Flow
270
528
146-147, 165
502-503
149
127
126
125
127
436
437
146-147
165
165
426
427
241
157
50
504
285
229
222
S2-1
SA1100
SAE
SAFR
SAV-BT
SAV-ST
SBLT2
SBLTX
SBSV-B
SBSV-S
SC1
SC4
SCD
SCS
SCT
SDF
SF
SF2
SFI
SFI-100
SFI-100T
SFI-300, SFI-350, SFI-360
SFI-300F, SFI-360F
SFI-400, SFI-400F
SFI-500
SFI-550
SFI-700
SFI-800
SG1
SG3
SG5
SGF
SGO
SGP
SGX
SGY
SGZ
SLR-01
SM-100
SMC-1
SMV
SN
Spirahelic Gage
SPK
SPPM
SRC
SSM
SSV-B
SSV-S
ST
STC
STFLO
STRA
Surge Damper
SVE
SVT
SWUK1
SX3
Temperature
Pressure
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Level
Level
Valves
Valves
ProcessControl
ProcessControl
Temperature
Process Control
Process Control
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
Pressure
Flow
Process Control
Valves
Flow
Valves
Valves
Temperature
Temperature
Flow
Air Quality
Accessories
Valves
Process Control
Accessories
Flow
283
85
490
528
497
498
318
318
499
500
354
355
250
363
366
196
201
201
176-177
176-177
203
176-177
176-177
176-177
175
175
176-177
202
67
68
69
72
70
70
72
68
69
407
439
438
438
484
499
73-74
230
342
501
163
500
501
238
238
164
116-117
549
505
378
535
215
Temperature
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Temperature
Flow
Process Control
Flow
Test Equipment
Flow
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Level
274
452
452
254
184
379
185
453
172-173
278
282
281
279
280
284
281
311
T TFLS
T
TAC-L
TAC3
TCS
TDFS
TDRSOX/SRX
TDS
TDS2-10
TE
TE
TE-A
TE-E/N
TE-I
TE-OND/RND/OSA
TE-SNW
TE-WSS
TFLS
565
INDEXBY PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SECTION
PAGE
TFLS2 TVF
TFLS2
TFM-LI
TFM-LP
TFP-GI
TFP-GV
TFP-LI
TFP-LP
TH2-10
THC
THI-10
THI2-10
TIC
TID
TLVT1
TM2
TNV
TP2
TPT
TR-7
TRI2
TS Probes
TS2
TS3
TS485
TSCC
TSF
TSF-DF
TSP
TSS2
TSW
TSWB
TSX3
TTE
TTM
TTW
TVA
TVF
312
192
192
191
191
193
193
431
124
430
431
446
251
260
228
508
441
99
379
72
258
256
255
258
253
252
252
185
256
257
257
255
266
203
263
154
162
Valves
Process Control
Flow
Flow
Flow
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Level
Flow
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Flow
Level
Flow
Level
Flow
Flow
483
385
216
216
217
66
66
67
424-425
428
422
323
221
323
329
328
327
324
326
316-317
151
325
221
325
151
214
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Valves
Test Equipment
Flow
178-179
180-181
182
183
182
155
514
416
154
V4 VAT
V4
V6
V7
V8
V10
VA
Valve Mounting Kits
Vaneometer Anemometer
VAT
566
SECTION
PAGE
VB VTT
Level
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Test Equipment
Air Quality
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Temperature
Temperature
Flow
Valves
Test Equipment
Pressure
Process Control
Pressure
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Flow
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Flow
Temperature
Flow
Flow
UBV UXF3
UBV
UDL
UFB
UFC
UFM
UGI
UGJ
UGK
UHH
UHH Accessories
UHH-BTG
ULB
ULF
ULL
ULSL
ULSM
ULSS
ULT
ULTM
Ultra-Mag Switch
Ultra-View Flowmeter
UTC
UTG
UTS
UV
UXF3
PRODUCT
VB
VBS
VBT-1
Venturi Flow Meter
VFA, VFB
VFC, VFCII
Visi-Float Flowmeter
VP1
VP2
VPI
VPS
VPT
VR
VRLS
VTT
Valves
Process Control
Process Control
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
Valves
Level
Level
AirQuality
527
383
383
174
148-149
150
148-150
426
427
516
515
516
290
313
121
Temperature
Level
Level
Pressure
Test Equipment
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Valves
Air Quality
Test Equipment
Flow
Flow
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Process Control
Pressure
275
294
294
75
428
462-463
464-465
466-467
468-469
472-473
474-475
476-477
130
418
199
200
453
416
454
443
443
388
65
W WWDP
W
WD
WD3
WDG
WDPM
WE01
WE02
WE03
WE04
WE31
WE33
WE34
WHT
Wind Meter
WM2
WMT2
WPH2
WSI
WSM-10
WT-10
WT2-10
WTDL
WWDP
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
2
2 Valves
Manifold
509
Manifold
509
Manifold
510
3
3 Valves
5
5 Valves
A
Accessories
532-551
Communication Modules
258
Connectors
504,550
Cooling Towers
534
Digital Temperature Switch Configuration Key
258
Enclosures
265,350-351
Filters
532,550
Fittings
504,550
Gage Fluid
551
Gage Guards
535
Hosing
547
Humidity Radiation Shield
127
Mounting Brackets
551
Panel Meters/Indicators
349
Pressure Snubbers
534-535
Psychrometer
430
Quick Connect Pneumatic Valves
544
Regulators and Lubricators
527-530
Siphons
533
Static Pressure
548-549
Strap Wrenches
535
Temperature
258
Thermowells
239,275,284
Accuracy Descriptions
555-556
Actuated
Actuators
480-481
Valves
462-467,470,472-478,486-488
Actuators
Electric
480-481
Pneumatic
480-481
Air
Filters
138
Filter Instruments
4-5,10-11,17
Air Compressor
Pressure Switches
93
Air Control
Manifolds
509-510
Air Filters/Regulators
527-528,530
Air Filtrations
138
Air Flow
Gages
4-11,15
Meters
144-157,159-165
Meters with Switches
189
Mobile Application
554
Sensors
110-117,170-173,412-415
Stations
114-117
Switches
119-120,178-184,186,188-189
Air Hammer
338
Air Quality
110-137
Applications
108-109
Filters
138
Gas Sensing Transmitters
132-136
Pitot Tubes
412-414
Air Temperature
Sensors
433
PAGE
Air Velocity
Flow Stations
114-117
Flow Switches
119,178-182,184
Gages
4-11,15,409-410
Indicators
118,409-410,416,418,420,426-427,429
Manometer, Digital
401,411,428
Manometer, Fluid
409-410
Meters
409-411,416,418,420-421,426-427
Mobile Application
554
Monitors
118-120,409-410
Sensors
110-117,168-173,412-415
Switches
119-120
Test Kits
409-411,417
Transmitters
120-123
Wind Meters
415-418
Alarms
29
Loop and Limit
252-254,354
Process Indicator
251,345,354
Ambient Air Temperature Sensors
280-281,283
Analog Signal Generator
451
Analyzers
Carbon Monoxide/Carbon Dioxide
433-434
Flue Gas
434
ANDERSON-MIDWEST
176-177,202-203
Annunciators
354
Applications
Air Quality
108-109
Flow
140-142
Level
288-289
Pressure
2-3
Process Control
340-341
Temperature
232-233
Test Equipment
394-395
Valves
460
AS-Interface
512-514
Assemblies
Protection Tube
276
Temperature Sensor
274
ATEX
Barrier
Galvanic
371
Zener
372
Flow Switches
178-181
Level Switches
295-296
24,27
512-514
Pressure Controller
Differential
21
Pressure Gages
Differential
8
Pressure Switches
40,42,85
Differential
31,33,35
104-105
Differential
53,56,60-61
Automated
Valves
462-481,486-488
Averaging
Flow Grid
111
Flow Sensors
110
Pitot Tubes
168-169
Temperature Sensors/Clips
282
B
Backflow Prevention
Test Kits
Valves
BACnet
Pressure Transmitters
Room Status Monitor
Ball Valves
Actuators
Automated
Mini
Three-Way
Two-Way
Battery Powered Temperature Indicator
Bayonet Thermocouples
440
506
54-55
50
480-481
462-479
483-485
472-479,485
462-471,482-483,485
352
271
567
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
Belt Alignment Switches
Bimetal Thermometers
Bin Aerator Pad
Bin Level Switches
Bin Vibrators
Block Manifolds
Boiler
Flow Switches
Level Switches
Bourdon Tube
Pressure Gages
Pressure Switches
BTU
Bulk Head Connectors
Butterfly Valves
Actuators
Automated
Manual
Three-Way
Two-Way
Button Data Loggers
384
234-238,240,242
335
311-313,315-317
335-338
508-510
182
257,304
257
568
534
373
362-363,365
364-366
517-518,520-521
D
Dampers
72-74
86-87
261
218,419
504
480-481
486-488
489-491
486-488
486-491
387
C
Cable Level Switches
Cable Pull Switches
Calibration Pumps
Calibrators
Pressure
Sound
Capacitive
Level Switches
Level Transmitters
Capsu-Photohelic
Capsuhelic
Carbon Dioxide
Indicators
Sensors
Transmitters
Indicating
Carbon Monoxide
Sensors
Transmitters
CFM Gages
Chamber Level Switches
Check Valves
Chemical Control Manifolds
Circular Chart Recorder
Clamp Meter
Combustion Test Kits
Communication
HART Software
Compact USB Data Logger
Compact USB Data Logger with Display
Compressed Air Meters
Conductivity
Level Switches
Testers
Connectors
Bulk Head
Continuity Controls
Continuous Cleaning Timer Controllers
Control Valves
Actuators
Controllers
Dust Collection
Electro-Pneumatic
Fan Speed
Flow
Grounding
Humidity
Level
Mass Flow
Process
Pump
Temperature
Valves
Conveyer Belt Alignment Switches
PAGE
Cooling Towers
Counters
Current
Switches
Transformers
Current to Pressure Transducers
305
384
455-457
458
438
308-309
322
25
15,65
435
433-434
131-135
132-133
433-434
136
4-5,9
304
505-506
509-510
392
448-449
434-435
105
390
391
190
307
453-454
504
379
376-377
494-496
480-481
374-377
518
370
185,346-348
379
124
332-333,346-348
223,227
243-250,519
332-333,346-348
243-250,252-257,519
518-519
384
511-516
Data Acquisition
95,286,323,385-387,390-392
Data Loggers
Button
387
Flow
216,218,220
Graphical Display
386
Pressure
95
Temperature
95,286,386-391
Universal Input
385
USB
286,387,390-391
Wireless
388-389
Detachable Probe Thermo-Anemometers
418-419,429
Detectors
Leak
334
Occupancy
137
Particulate
381
Plugged Shoot
316-317
Position
515
Refrigerant
436-437
Water
294
Diaphragm Seals
Pressure Switches
86-87
Diaphragm Valves
502-503
Alarms
29
Gages
4-5,8-11,15-17
Indicating Transmitters
18-20
Indicators
4-5,8-14,16,400-405,407,428
Switches
29-30,32,34,36-43
Switches/Gages
18-20,25-26,28
Transmitters
43-52,57-65
Diaphragm Seals
60-61
High Accuracy
43
Indicating
18-20,49-52,54-55,57-58,60-61,63,65
Digihelic Links
17
18-20
Digihelic Controllers
Software
17
9
DigiMag
Digital
Auto-Range Multimeter
447
Clamp Meter
448-449
Gages
76-82
Indicating
Meters, Panel
343-348
Pressure Switches
81-84
18-21,49-51,54-58,81-84,
104-105
Temperature
Controllers
245,247,249-250,253,519
Switches
252,254,256-257
Indicators
343-344
Manometers
400-403,428
Mass Flow Controllers
223
Meter
448-449
Multimeters
447-448,450
Multimeters with True RMS
447
Panel Meters
251,343-348
Pen Meters
344, 450
Pen Meters with Phase Rotation
450
Pressure Gages
9
DigiMag
Temperature Switch Configuration Key
258
Timers
373-377
DIN
Control Enclosures
350-351
Rail Differential Pressure Transmitters
45
Rail SSR
356,359
Dip Tape Indicators
292-293
Displacer
Level Switches
306
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
Displays
Disposable In-Line Filter
Distance Meter
DPDT Low Differential Pressure Switches
Draft
Pressure Gages
Drain
Pan Level
Drip Pan Level
Drum Level
Duct Mount
Carbon Dioxide Transmitter
Humidity Transmitters
Temperature Sensors
Duotect Switches
Duplexing Pump Controllers
Durablock Gage/Manometers
Durablock Solid Plastic Portable Gages
Dust Collector
Timer Controls
Valves
251,342-348,352-353
532
437
37
4-5
294
294
292-293
131
126,128
54-55
278
89
332-333,346-348
13-14,409
408
374-377
502-503
E
Electric
Actuator
480-481
Ball Valves
462-479
Bin Vibrator
338
Multimeters
447-448
Electrical Testing
448-449
Electro-Pneumatic Controllers
518
Electromagnetic
Flow Transmitters
209-212
Electromechanical Relays
357
Electronic Fan Speed Control
370
Enclosures
Panel Meters/Indicators/Controllers
350-351
Solenoid Valves
378,505
Environmental Meter
429
Explosion-Proof
Ball Valves
462-470,472-478
Butterfly Valves
486-488
521
Differential Pressure Control
21,24,27
Differential Pressure Gage
8
31,33,35,39-42
53,56,60-62
Flow Switches
178-181
129
Level Switches
295-296,299,304,306,315-317
511-514
Pressure Switches
85-89,94
103-105
261
Temperature Transmitters
129,266
Thermostats
260
Extension Cables for Temperature Sensors
277
PAGE
Flow
144-230
Applications
140-142
Backflow Prevention
440
Controllers
185,227
Data Loggers
216,218,220
Indicators
175-177,201-203,214-215,218-219,228
Switch Output
201-202
Transmitter Output
201-203
Meters
144-167,170-174,190-193,199-200,214-220,224-227
Digital
190-193,214,216-218,220,224-227
Fluoropolymer
154
Glass
155-157
In-Line
151-154,157-165,168-171
Mass
223-227
Polycarbonate
146-147,152-153,158
Polysulfone
151,158
Purge
144-150
Rotatable Scale
157
Switch Output
189
Transmitter Output
191-193,214-215,218-219,223,227
Turbine
191-193
Ultrasonic
214-220
Variable Area
144-157
Multitube
Variable Area
148-149
Orifice Plates
170-173
Pipe Fittings
196,198,213
Sensors
170-174,190-193,195,199-203
In-Line
168-169
Switches
184
Surface Velocity Meter
222
Switches
178-189,201-202
Paddle
178-184
Shuttle/Piston
186-189
Thermal
184-185
143
Totalizers
199-200,202-203,214-219
Transducers
201-202
Transmitters
190-193
Electromagnetic
209-212
In-Line
190,207-208
Indicating
190-193,201-202
Insertion
194-195,197,211-212
Paddlewheel
195,201-203
Turbine
191-193
Ultrasonic
214-215,218-219,221
Flow Control
Actuators
480-481
Valves
462-470,472-478,494-498,507-508
Flow Indicators/Controllers
228-229,346-348
Flow Sensor
168-169
Flow Stations
114-117
Flow Totalizers
199-200,202-203,228-229,346,348
Fluid Control
Actuators
480-481
Valves
462-469,472-477,485
Fluidizer Disk
335
Frequency Testing
447,449
Fume Hood Monitors
118
F
Fan Speed Controllers
Filter
Accessories
Gages
Filters
Fittings
Accessories
Bulk Head Connectors
Nylon
Pneumatic Quick Connect
Saddles
Stainless Steel
Tees
Weld/Braze
Flex-Tube Manometers
Float Level Transmitters
Float Switch
Flotect Switch
370
550
4-5,9,13,17
138,144-149,532
196,198,213
550
504
542-544
544-546
196,198,213
536-542
198,213
198,213
14
330
295-305
178-183,295-298
569
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
G
Gage Fluid
Gage Guards
Gage/Switches-Dial
Gages
Air Filter
Air Velocity
Dial
Digital
Draft
Low Pressure
Piston Type
Pressure, Dial
Pressure/Temperature
Spirahelic
Stainless Steel
Temperature
Galvanic Barrier
Gas Analyzers
Gas Detectors
Carbon Dioxide
Carbon Monoxide
Gas Mass Flow
Gas Meter Flow
Gas Pressure
Kits
Manometer
Switches
Globe Valves
Glossary
Ground Control
551
535
22-25,28
4-5,9,12-14
4-5,409-410
4-5,10-11,15-16,66-67,70-74
4-5,9-11,15-17
18-21,75-79,81-82
4-5,12-14,406-407
4-5,71-72
16
66-74
72
73-74
70
234-242
370-371
433-434
131-135
136
227
224-226
407
408
39
492-496,507
552-553
386
379
PAGE
Humidistat
Humidity
Accessories
Radiation Shield
Controllers
Data Loggers
Handhelds
Indicators
Loggers/Recorders
Switches
Transmitters
Duct Mount
Indicating
Remote Mount
Wall Mount
HVAC
Ball Valve
Clamp Meter
Filters
Measurement Guide
Mobile Application
Hydraulic
Calibration Hand Pump
Valves
Hygrometers
124
127
124
385-391
426-427,429-431,433
124
385-391
124
125-130
126
129
127
125
479
448-449
138
396-399
554
456
490
426-427,430-431
I
I to P
Immersion
517-518,520-521
Temperature Sensors
278-279,284
60-61,63,65,100-101
Indicating
Indicators
H
Hand Pump
455-457
Pneumatic
455-456
Handheld Instruments
Air Quality
423-428,433-434
Air Velocity
410-411,417-420,426-427
Calibrators
448,451,455,458
Humidity
426-427,430-431,433
Moisture
432
Pressure
400-405,428
Sound
438
Temperature
440-446
Tire Gage
80
Water Testers
453-454
HART
Communication Software
105
512-514
Positioners
524-526
60-61,104-105
Hazardous Rated
Actuators
480-481
Ball Valves
462-470,472-478
Butterfly Valves
486-488
518,520-521
39-42
Flow Switches
178-181
129
Level Switches
295-296,299,304,306,315-317
Level Transmitters
318,320,324
Particulate
Sensor
380-381
Transmitter
382
511-514
Pressure
Switches
32,34,85-89,94
Transmitters
58-62,103-106
Solid State Relay
359
Temperature
Switches
261
Transmitters
266
Thermostats
260
HI-FLOW
494-496
Hockey Puck SSR
356
Hosing
Accessories
547
570
Air Flow
144-155,157,159-165,176-177
Air Velocity
118,416,418
Annunciators
354
4,9-14,16-17,400-407,409,428
Flow
191-193,346-348
In-Line
158,165
Sight Flow
175-177
Totalizers
228
Ultrasonic
214-215,218-219
Variable Area
144-145,151,154-155,157
Flow Totalizers
203
Humidity
124,386,426-427,430
Level
291-294,346-348
Position
511-516
Process
251,342-348,352-354
Sight Flow
176-177,201-203
Temperature
234-239,241-242,444-446
Variable Area
152-153
Water Leak
294
Wind Speed
416-418
Indoor Air Quality
Carbon Dioxide and Temperature Transmitters
132,134-135
Carbon Dioxide Transmitters
131
Carbon Monoxide Transmitters
136
Volatile Organic Compound Monitor
130
Infrared Thermometers
444-446
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
370-372
517-518,520-521
129
Isolators
370-371
Level Transmitters
318,320
Particulate Sensors
380-381
512-514
58-59,106
IR Sensors
Temperature
285
355
Iso Verter Modules
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
K
PAGE
M
Kits
Air Filter Gage/Switch
Air Velocity
Backflow Prevention
Combustion
Portable Gage
Tachometer
551
409-411
440
434-435
407,409-410
452
L
LCD
Data Loggers
385
Indicators
343-344,353
Pressure Data Loggers
95
Leak Detectors
Combustion
436
Gas
435
Particulate
380-382
Refrigerant
436-437
Water
294,334
Level
290-338
Applications
288-289
Bin Vibrators
335-338
Controllers
332-333
Indicators
290-291,294
Multi-Point
298
Sensors
221,295-311,313,315,318-320,322-324,327-330
Switches
295-300,316-317
Bin Level
308-309,311,313,315
Capacitance
309
Capacitive
308-309
Chamber Type
304
Conductivity
307
Diaphragm
316-317
Displacer
306
Float
295-296,298-305
Multi-Point
301-303,306-307
Optical
306
Paddle
313,315
Powder and Bulk
308-311,313,315-317
Tilt
310
Tuning Fork
311-312
Vibrating Rod
313
Transducer
221,318-319,321-324,327-330
Transmitters
Capacitive
322
Float
330
Indicating
221,323-324,327-329
Mechanical
331
Powder and Bulk
323
Submersible
318-321
Ultrasonic
221,323-329
Water Detectors
294
Level Indicators
290-293
Level Transmitters
325
Lift Station
Level Switches
305
Level Transmitter
321
Level Transmitters
320
Pump Controls
332-333,346-348
Light Meter
429,439
Limit Controls
253
Limit Switches
29-30,32,34,36-43
Flow
119,180-182,186-189
Gas Pressure
39
Level
295-311,313,315-317
Pressure
29-30,32,34,36-43,82-83,85-94
Temperature
252-254,256,261
494-496
Lin-E-Aire
Liquid Level
Controllers
332-333
Indicators
175,290-294
Switches
295-308
Transmitters
221,318-320,322-330
Liquid/Particle Filter
532
Loop Powered Indicators
352
Low Pressure Calibration Pumps
457
Magnehelic
Mounting
Options
Magnesense
Manifold
1-Valve
2-Valve
3-Valve
5-Valve
Manometers
Digital Handheld
Fluid Filled
Inclined
Inclined/Vertical
U-Tube
Well-Type
Gage Fluid
Manual Gear Operators
Mark
Mass Flowmeters And Controllers
Meters
Distance
Environmental
Indoor Air Quality
Light
Moisture
Multi-Function
Sound
Tachometer
Mineral Insulated Temperature Sensors
Mini Temperature Data Logger
Mini Vane
Mini View Rite
Mini-Master Flowmeter
Mini-Node
Mini-Photohelic
Minihelic II
Mobile
Level Transmitters
Mobile Application
HVAC
Moisture Meter
Monitors
Indoor Air Quality
Room Status
SSR
Volatile Organic Compound
Motion/Safety Switches
Mounting Brackets
Multi-Function Anemometers
Multi-Function Meter
Multi-Jet Water Meters
Multi-Loop
Temperature Controllers
Multimeters
4-5,52
7
6
54-55
508
509
509
510
400-405,428,434
12-14
12-13,407-408
406-407
14
551
491
512-514
223-227
437
429
433
429,439
432
429
429,438
452
270
390
429
291
144-145
366
28
10-11
326
422,554
432
433
5,50
365
130
384
7,230,282,551
419
423-425,429
199-200
250
447-448
N
Needle Valves
Noise Level
Non-Contact
Temperature Sensors
Null Switches
Nylon
Fittings
507-508
438
285
37
542-544
571
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
O
Occupancy Sensors
Oil Controls
Manifold
One-Touch
Open Channel Flow
Optical
Level Switches
Orifice Plates
Outside Air
Humidity Radiation Shield
137
508-510
45,47-48
221,325,346
306
170-173
127
126
P
Paddle
Level Switches
Paddlewheel
Flow Transmitters
Panel Meter Accessories
Panel Meter Enclosures
Panel Meters
Panel Mount
SSR
Parameter Configuration Key
Particulate
Monitor
Sensors
Transmitters
Penetration Probe Temperature Sensors
Perforated Cooling Towers
pH Testers
Photohelic
Pipe Fittings
Piston Vibrators
Pitot Tubes
Averaging
Plug Valves
Pneumatic
Actuators
Ball Valves
Ball Vibrators
Calibration Hand Pumps
Conveying
Timer Boards
Fittings
Hand Pumps
Roller Vibrators
Turbine Vibrators
Pocket Wind Meters
Pocket-Size Thermocouple Thermometer
Position
Indicators
Sensors
Switches
Transmitters
Positioners
Compact
Linear
Electro-Pneumatic
Pneumatic
Rotary
Powder And Bulk
Level Switches
Level Transmitters
Power
Converter
Supplies
Transformers
Precisor II
572
PAGE
Pressure
314-315
194-195,197
349
350
251,342-348,353
356,359
258
380
381
382
272
534
453
22-24,26-27
196,198,213
337
168-169,412-414
110,415
484
480-481
462-469,472-477
336
456
374-375
545-546
455-456
336
337
417
441
511-516
511-516
511-516
511-514,516
522-526
526
522,525-526
522-524
522-523
523-526
308-309,311-313,315-317
322-323
230,367
230,367-369
367-369
522-524
Applications
Backflow Prevention Test
BACnet
Calibrators
Controllers
Data Loggers
Data Logging Software
Differential
Gages
Switches
Transmitters
Digihelic Links
Indicating Switches
Indicating Transmitters
Regulators
Single
Gages, Dial
Gages, Digital
Switch/Gages
Switches
Transmitters
Snubbers
Switches
Air Compressor
Digital
Indicating
Null
Submersible
Two-Stage
Water Pump
Tire Gage
Transmitters
Indicating
Sanitary
Pressure/Temperature Data Logger
Process
Alarm Switch Modules
Controllers
Current Transformers/Switches
Data Loggers
Fan Speed Controllers
Filter Gage
Loggers/Recorders
Loop Alarms
Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) Sensors
Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag) Transmitter
Signal Conditioners
Signal Converters/Isolators
SSR Monitors
Switches
Alarm
Timer Boards
Transmitters
Particulate (Dust or Broken Bag)
Vibration Switch
Vibration Transmitter
Process Control
Applications
Current Monitoring
Power Supplies
24 AC To 24 DC
Relays
Hermetically Sealed
Ice Cube
Power
Time Delay
Transformers
120 VAC to 24 VAC
Protection Tube Type Temperature Sensors
Pulse Valves
Pump
Calibration
Controllers
Leak Detectors
Purge Meters
4-106
2-3
440
54-55
448,455-458
527-530
95
17
4-5,8-11,15-17
29-30,32,34,36-43
43-52,57-65
17
81,83-84
81-84,104-105
95
66-74
75-82
81
81-94
79,81,96-99,102-106
534-535
39
93
20,81-84
18-20,22-23,25-26,28
37
92
38,86-87,89
92
80
18-20,96-103,106
100-101
97
95
354
243-250,253,519
364-366
362-363,365
286,387,390
370
17
385
354
251,342-345,352-354
380-381
382
355
355
365-366
354,374-377
354
374-377
382
383
383
342-392
340-341
364-366
367-368
358-359
359-361
358
378-379
369
276
502-503
455-456
332-333,346-348
334
144-150
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
Q
Quadraplex Pump Controllers
Quick Connect
Pneumatic Fittings
Pneumatic Valves
Quick-View
346-348
545-546
544
511
R
Radiation Shield
Rate-Master Flowmeter
Recorders
Reference Tables
Regulators
Relative Humidity
Switches
Transmitters
Relays
Electromechanical
Ice Cube
Hermetically Sealed
Solid State
Time Delay
Remote Mount
RH
Switches
Transmitters
Room Status Monitor
Rotometers
RTD
Sensors
Transmitters
127
146-147,165
392
557-559
527-530
124
125-130
356,365-366
357,359
359-361
358-359
356,359
378-379
128
124
125-130
5,50
144-157
281
267-273,278-285
264-265,355
S
SAE
Valve
490
Sanitary
Ball Valves
Meters
Temperature Sensors
Self-Acting Temperature Control Valves
Sensors
Air Flow
Air Velocity
Transmitters
Belt Alignment
Switches
Broken Bag
BTU
Transmitters
Carbon Dioxide
Transmitters
Carbon Monoxide
Transmitters
Current
Switches
Transmitters
Transmitters
Flow
Meters
Switches
Transmitters
466-467
454
97
272-273
492-493
110-117,170-173,412-415
110-117,168-173,412-415
120-123
384
380-382
218
131-135
132,136
362-363,365
364-366
29-30,32,34,36-43
43-47,49-52,54-55,57-65
114-115,168-169
170-173,190
184,201
190-193,195,200-212,
214-217,221,223-227
Humidity
Transmitters
125-130
HVAC
Occupancy
137
221,295-311,313,315,318-320,322-324,327-330
Switches
295-313,315
Transmitters
221,318-320,322-324,327-330
Occupancy
137
Particulate
380-382
Position
511-516
Pressure
Transmitters
18-20,96-106
Level
PAGE
Temperature
Ambient Air
Duct Mount
Immersion
IR
Non-Contact
Outside Air
RTD
Surface
Thermocouple
Thermowells
Transmitters
Wall Mount
Shut-Off Valves
Sight Flow
Indicators
Transmitters
Signal
Conditioners
Converters
Generators
Single Pressure Gages
Dial
Smart Programmable Panel Meters
Smoke Gages
Software
Digihelic Controller
HART Communication
LoveLink
Solar
Meter
Panel Kit
Thermometers
Solenoid Valve
Enclosures
Solenoid Valves
With Timer
Solid State Relays
Sound Calibrators
Sound Meters
Spirahelic Gage
Spiral Cooling Towers
SSR Monitors
Steam Control
Manifolds
Valves
Strap Wrench
Submersible
Level Transmitters
Pressure Switches
Temperature Data Logger
Sump
Level Switches
267-285
280,283
278
278-279,284
285
285
280,283
267-274,277-279,281,283-285
283
270-274,276-277,442
239,275,284
121,125-130,132-135,262-266
281
490
175-177,201-203
201-203
364,366
229,258,366
451
66-74
407
342
435
17
105
250
230,240-241,439
439
230
240-241
378
499,504-505
378
356,359
438
429,438
73-74
534
365
536-542
509-510
494-496
535
318-321
92
286
305
Surface
Temperature Sensors
Surface Mount
Temperature Sensors
Swing Vane Anemometer
Switch/Gages
Switches
Belt Alignment
Bin Level
Cable Pull
Current
Electronic Pressure
Flow
Gas Pressure
Humidity
Level
Limit
Air Flow
Gas Pressure
Pressure
Temperature
Position
Single Pressure
Temperature
283
283-284
416
18-20,22-25,28,81-83
384
311-313,315-317
384
362-363,365
29-30,32,34,36-43
81-84
178-189,201-202
39
124
295-300,316-317
119-120,178-181,184,188-189
39
29-30,32,34,36-41,43,81,83,85-94
252-254,256,261,354
511-516
81-94
252-257,260-261,354
573
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
T
Tachometers
373,452
TDS
Testers
453
Accuracy
555-556
Flow
143
Glossary
552-553
HVAC Measurement
396-399
HVAC Mobile App
554
Reference Tables
557-559
Temperature Sensors
267
Valves
461
Temperature
234-286
Applications
232-233
Control Valves
492-493
Controllers
243-250,252-257,519
Multi-Loop
250
Rail Mount
250
Software
250
Data Loggers
95,286,385-391
Handhelds
429,433,440-443
Indicators
234-257,343-345,352,354,440-441,444-445
Loggers/Recorders
95,286,385-391
343-345
Sensors
267-285
Ambient Air
280,283
Averaging
282
Averaging Sensor Clip
282
Duct
278
Extension Cables
277
Immersion
278-279,284
IR
285
Mineral Insulated
270
Non-Contact
285
Outside Air
280,283
Penetration
272
Protection Tube Type
276
RTD
267-274,277-279,281,283-285
Sanitary
272-273
Surface
283
Thermistor
278-279
Thermocouple
270-274,276-277,442
Thermowells
239,275,284
Wall Mount
281
Signal Conditioners
355
Switches
252-257
Digital Indicating
Weather Proof
257
Digital Panel Mount
253
Indicating
241,252-257
Limit
252
Low Limit
261
Thermostat
259-260
Two-Stage
256
Temperature/Process Controller
243-244,246,248
Thermometers
235-236,242,441,443-446
Clip-On
235,444
Dial
234-238
Digital
240-241,441,443-446
Glass
239
Glow-in-the-Dark
234
Infrared
444-446
Needle
443
Solar
240-241
Surface Mount
238
Thermocouple
441
Thermowells
239,275,284
Transmitter Output
242
Thermostats
259-260
Transmitters
120-121,125-126,128-130,263-266
Enclosure
265
Indicating
242
Weather Proof
263
Weatherproof (NEMA 4)
262
574
PAGE
Test Equipment
Air Quality
Analyzers
Flue Gas
Water
Applications
Backflow Prevention Test Kit
Calibrators
Pressure
Distance Meters
Kits
Air Velocity
Combustion
Gas Pressure
Portable Gage
RH
Smoke Gage
Universal Handheld
Leak Detectors
Combustion
Gas
Refrigerant
Light Meter
Moisture
PH/ORP/Temperature Meters
Pitot Tubes
Pumps
Solar Radiation
Surface Velocity Meter
Temperature
Thermohygrometers
Testers
Conductivity
pH
Salinity
TDS
Thermal Imager
Thermistors
Wall
Thermo-Anemometers
Thermocouple Thermometers
Digital
Dual Input
Thermocouples
Thermocouples Transmitter
Thermohygrometers
Thermometers
Dial
Digital
Glass
Glow-in-the-Dark
Infrared
Thermocouple
Thermostat
Thermowells
Tilt Level Switches
Timer Boards
Timer Controllers
Timers
Tire Pressure Gage
Totalizing Meters
Flow
Toxic Fluids Control
Manifold
Trademarks
Transducer
Current to Pressure
Electro-Pneumatic
Transformers
Current
Particulate
400-458
430,433-435
434
453-454
394-395
440
455
458
437
222,428
409-411,416-417,423,426-427
435
407,435
408-410,440
423,426-427
435
422-429
434,436
435
436-437
439
432
448
412,414-415
455-457
439
222
441,443,446
427,430-431
221
448-454
454
453
454
453
446
281
418-420,426-427,429
441
440
267-274,276-277,283-284,442
355
426-427,429-431
234-238
240-241,441,443-446
239
234
444-446
441
259-260
239,275,284
310
374-377
374-377
373,378-379
80
199-200,202-203,228-229,346,348
509-510
560
517-518,520-521
517
363,365
364-366
382
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
Transmitters
Air Velocity
120-123
Carbon Dioxide
131-135
Carbon Dioxide and Temperature
132-135
Carbon Dioxide Temperature and Relative Humidity
133-135
Carbon Monoxide
136
43-52,57-65
High Accuracy
43
Indicating
18-20,49-52,54-55,57-58,60-61,63,65
Flow
190-193,195,201-203,214-215,218-219,223,227
Humidity
125-130
Duct Mount
126
Indicating
129
Remote Mount
127
Wall Mount
125
Humidity and Temperature
125-128,130
Level
221,318-330
Particulate
380-381
Position
511-514,516
Pressure
18-20,96-103,106
Indicating
81-82,84,100-101,104-105
Smart
Pressure
104-105
Temperature
120-121,125-130,132,263-266,355
Enclosure
265
Indicating
242
Vibration
383
True RMS Current Transformer
364
Tubing
Accessories
547
Tuning Fork
Level Switch
311-312
U
U-Tube Manometers
Ultra-Mag
Ultra-View Flowmeter
Ultrasonic
Flowmeters
Level
Transmitters
406-407
316-317
151
214-220
221,323-329
221
PAGE
V
Valves
462-530
Actuators
480-481
Actuated
462-467,470,472-478,486-488
Angle Seat
497-498
Applications
460
Ball
462-485
Automated
462-481
Flanged
468-469,476-477,479
HVAC
471
Manual
462-469,472-477,482-485
Mini
483-485
NPT
462-465,472-473
Regulators and Lubricators
527-530
Three-Piece
464-467
Three-Way
472-478,485
Tri-Clamp
466-467,474-475
Two-Piece
462-463,468-469,482
Two-Way
462-470,482,485
Uni-Flange
483
Butterfly
486-491
Automated
486-488
Three-Way
486-488
Two-Way
486-491
Check
505-506
Control
492-496
Controllers
220,518-519
517-518,520-521
Diaphragm
502-503
Electric Actuated
462-470,472-478,486-488
Enclosures
378,479,505
Globe
492-496,507
Manifold
508-510
Manual Gear Operators
491
Needle
507-508
Plug
484
Pneumatic Actuated
462-470,472-478,486-488,494-498
Position Indicator
516
511-516
Positioners
522-526
Pulse
502-503
Quick Connect Pneumatic
544
SAE
490
Solenoids
378,499-501,504-505
Strainer
506
461
Temperature Control
492-493
Volume Booster
527
418-420
Vaneometers
416
Variable Area
Flowmeters
144-157
Vented Water Level Data Logger
323
Venturi Meter/Gage
174
Vibrating Rod
Level Switch
313
Vibration
Switches
383
Transmitters
383
Vibrators
335-338
View-Rite
290-291
148-150
Visi-Float Flowmeter
VOC
Monitors
130
Volatile Organic Compound Monitor
130
575
INDEXBY CATEGORY
PAGE
W
Wall Mount
Carbon Dioxide and Temperature Transmitters
Carbon Dioxide Transmitter
Occupancy Sensors
Temperature Sensors
Water
Control Manifold
Detectors
Meters
Pump Pressure Switches
Weatherproof Enclosures
Well Level Transmitter
Wet/Wet
Wind Meters
Wind Speed Indicators
132-135
131-135
125
137
281
509-510
294
199-200
92
265,350-351
319
41-43
60-65
416-418
416-418
Z
Zener Barriers
576
372
ifc/ibc_Layout 1 7/30/14 11:37 AM Page 1
ORDERING IS EASY FROM DWYER
PRESSURE CONVERSION CHART
PHONE
EMAIL
219/879-8000
orders@dwyermail.com
FAX
WEBSITE
219/872-9057
www.dwyer-inst.com
DWYER AROUND THE GLOBE | LOCAL SUPPORT GLOBALLY

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
AUSTRALIA
DWYERINSTRUMENTS, PTY. LTD.
102 Indiana Highway 212,

P.O. Box 373
Michigan City, IN 46360, U.S.A.
Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive

P.O. Box 359
Unanderra, NSW 2526 Australia
PHONE
219/879-8000
PHONE
(+61) (0) 2 4272 2055
FAX
219/872-9057
FAX
(+61) (0) 2 4272 4055
UNITED KINGDOM
HONG KONG
DWYERINSTRUMENTS LTD
DWYERINSTRUMENTS HK, LTD.
Unit 16, The Wye Estate, London Road

High Wycombe, Bucks HP11 1LH-U.K.
Unit 605A, 6/F, Shui Hing Centre

13 Sheung Yuet Road, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
PHONE
(+44) (0) 1494 461707
PHONE
+852-23181007
FAX
(+44) (0) 1494 465102
FAX
+852-27561565
INTERNATIONAL CUSTOMERS
Dwyer has local distributors in over 50 countries. Contact the office of your country or contact the corporate headquarters to
find your local distributor. You can also go to our website at the following address to be contacted by your local distributor:
http://www.dwyer-inst.com/Distributors/DistContactInfo.cfm.
OTHERCONTACTS
TECHNICAL
SUPPORT
LITERATURE
REQUESTS
QUOTATION/
BIDREQUESTS
GENERAL
INFORMATION
tech@dwyermail.com
lit@dwyermail.com
quotes@dwyermail.com
info@dwyermail.com
in/H2O
P.S.I.
in/Hg
mm/H2O mm/Hg
.1
.2
.4
.6
.8
1.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
.0036
.0072
.0144
.0216
.0289
.0361
.0722
.1083
.1444
.1804
.2165
.2526
.2887
.3248
.3609
.3970
.4331
.4692
.5053
.5414
.5774
.6136
.6496
.6857
.7218
.7579
.7940
.8301
.8662
.9023
.9384
.9745
1.010
1.047
1.083
1.119
1.155
1.191
1.227
1.263
1.299
1.335
1.371
1.408
1.444
1.480
1.516
1.552
1.588
1.624
1.660
1.696
1.732
1.768
1.804
1.841
1.877
1.913
1.949
1.985
2.021
2.057
2.093
2.129
2.165
2.202
2.238
2.274
2.310
2.346
2.382
2.418
2.454
2.490
2.526
2.562
2.598
2.635
2.671
2.707
2.743
2.779
2.815
2.851
2.887
2.923
2.959
2.996
3.032
3.068
3.104
3.140
3.176
3.212
3.248
3.284
3.320
3.356
3.392
3.429
3.456
3.501
3.537
3.573
3.609
.0073
.0146
.0293
.0440
.0588
.0735
.1470
.2205
.2940
.3673
.4408
.5143
.5878
.6613
.7348
.8083
.8818
.9553
1.029
1.102
1.176
1.249
1.322
1.396
1.470
1.543
1.616
1.690
1.764
1.837
1.910
1.984
2.056
2.132
2.205
2.278
2.352
2.425
2.498
2.571
2.645
2.718
2.791
2.876
2.940
3.013
3.086
3.160
3.233
3.306
3.378
3.453
3.526
3.600
3.673
3.748
3.822
3.895
3.968
4.041
4.115
4.188
4.261
4.335
4.408
4.483
4.556
4.630
4.703
4.776
4.850
4.923
4.996
5.070
5.143
5.216
5.290
5.365
5.438
5.511
5.585
5.658
5.731
5.805
5.878
5.951
6.024
6.100
6.173
6.246
6.320
6.393
6.466
6.450
6.613
6.686
6.760
6.833
6.906
6.981
7.055
7.128
7.201
7.275
7.348
2.534
5.067
10.13
15.20
20.34
25.41
50.81
76.22
101.62
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
279.4
304.8
330.2
355.6
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
660.4
685.8
710.8
736.8
762.2
787.5
812.8
836.2
863.5
888.9
914.2
939.5
964.9
990.9
1016
1042
1067
1092
1118
1143
1168
1194
1219
1244
1270
1296
1321
1346
1372
1397
1422
1448
1473
1498
1524
1550
1575
1600
1626
1651
1676
1702
1727
1752
1778
1803
1828
1854
1880
1905
1930
1956
1981
2006
2032
2057
2082
2108
2134
2159
2184
2210
2265
2260
2286
2311
2336
2362
2387
2413
2438
2464
2489
2514
2540
.1863
.3726
.7452
1.118
1.496
1.868
3.736
5.604
7.472
9.335
11.203
13.072
14.940
16.808
18.676
20.544
22.412
24.280
26.148
28.016
29.879
31.752
33.616
35.484
37.352
39.22
41.09
42.96
44.82
46.69
48.56
50.43
52.26
54.18
56.04
57.91
59.77
61.63
63.49
65.36
67.22
69.08
70.95
72.86
74.72
76.59
78.45
80.31
82.18
84.04
85.90
87.76
89.63
91.49
93.35
95.27
97.13
98.99
100.8
102.7
104.6
106.4
108.3
110.2
112.0
113.9
115.8
117.7
119.5
121.4
123.3
125.1
127.0
128.8
130.7
132.6
134.4
136.4
138.2
140.1
141.9
143.8
145.7
147.5
149.4
151.2
153.1
155.0
156.9
158.8
160.6
162.5
164.4
166.2
168.1
169.9
171.8
173.7
175.5
177.4
179.3
181.2
183.0
184.9
186.8
kg/cm2
bar
mbar
Pa
kPa
P.S.I.
in/H2O
in/Hg
mm/H2O mm/Hg
kg/cm2
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0051
.0076
.0102
.0127
.0152
.0178
.0203
.0228
.0254
.0279
.0304
.0330
.0355
.0381
.0406
.0431
.0457
.0482
.0507
.0533
.0558
.0584
.0609
.0634
.0660
.0685
.0710
.0736
.0761
.0787
.0812
.0837
.0862
.0888
.0913
.0938
.0964
.0990
.1015
.1040
.1066
.1091
.1116
.1142
.1167
.1192
.1218
.1243
.1268
.1294
.1320
.1345
.1370
.1395
.1421
.1146
.1471
.1497
.1522
.1548
.1573
.1599
.1624
.1649
.1674
.1700
.1725
.1750
.1776
.1801
.1826
.1852
.1878
.1903
.1928
.1954
.1979
.2004
.2030
.2055
.2080
.2106
.2131
.2157
.2182
.2207
.2233
.2258
.2283
.2309
.2334
.2359
.2384
.2410
.2436
.2461
.2486
.2512
.2537
.0002
.0005
.0010
.0015
.0020
.0025
.0050
.0075
.0099
.0124
.0149
.0174
.0199
.0224
.0249
.0274
.0299
.0324
.0348
.0373
.0398
.0423
.0448
.0473
.0498
.0523
.0547
.0572
.0597
.0622
.0647
.0672
.0696
.0722
.0747
.0772
.0796
.0821
.0846
.0871
.0896
.0920
.0945
.0971
.0996
.1020
.1045
.1070
.1095
.1120
.1144
.1169
.1194
.1219
.1244
.1269
.1294
.1319
.1344
.1369
.1393
.1418
.1443
.1468
.1493
.1518
.1543
.1568
.1593
.1618
.1642
.1667
.1692
.1717
.1742
.1766
.1791
.1817
.1842
.1866
.1891
.1916
.1941
.1966
.1991
.2015
.2040
.2066
.2091
.2115
.2140
.2165
.2190
.2215
.2239
.2264
.2289
.2314
.2339
.2364
.2389
.2414
.2439
.2464
.2488
.2482
.4964
.9928
1.489
1.992
2.489
4.978
7.467
9.956
12.44
14.93
17.42
19.90
22.39
24.88
27.37
29.86
32.35
34.84
37.33
39.81
42.31
44.79
47.28
49.77
52.26
54.74
57.23
59.72
62.21
64.70
67.19
69.64
72.19
74.67
77.15
79.63
82.12
84.60
87.08
89.56
92.04
94.53
97.08
99.56
102.0
104.5
107.0
109.5
112.0
114.5
116.9
119.4
121.9
124.4
126.9
129.4
131.9
134.4
136.9
139.3
141.8
144.3
146.8
149.3
151.8
154.3
156.8
159.3
161.8
164.2
166.7
169.2
171.7
174.2
176.6
179.1
181.7
184.2
186.6
189.1
191.6
194.1
196.6
199.1
201.5
204.0
206.6
209.1
211.5
214.0
216.5
219.0
221.5
223.9
226.4
228.9
231.4
233.9
236.4
238.9
241.4
243.9
246.4
248.8
24.82
49.64
99.28
148.9
199.2
248.9
497.8
746.7
995.6
1244
1493
1742
1990
2239
2488
2737
2986
3235
3484
3733
3981
4231
4479
4728
4977
5226
5474
5723
5972
6221
6470
6719
6964
7219
7467
7715
7963
8212
8460
8708
8956
9204
9453
9708
9956
10204
10452
10701
10949
11197
11445
11694
11942
12190
12438
12693
12941
13190
13438
13686
13934
14182
14431
14679
14927
15182
15430
15679
15927
16175
16423
16672
16920
17168
17416
17664
17912
18168
18416
18664
18912
19160
19409
19657
19905
20153
20402
20657
20905
21153
21401
21650
21898
22146
22394
22642
22890
23139
23387
23642
23890
24138
24387
24635
24883
.0248
.0496
.0993
.1489
.1992
.2489
.4978
.7476
.9956
1.244
1.493
1.742
1.990
2.239
2.488
2.737
2.986
3.235
3.484
3.733
3.981
4.231
4.479
4.728
4.977
5.226
5.474
5.723
5.972
6.221
6.470
6.719
6.964
7.219
7.467
7.715
7.963
8.212
8.460
8.708
8.956
9.204
9.453
9.708
9.956
10.20
10.45
10.70
10.95
11.20
11.44
11.69
11.94
12.19
12.44
12.69
12.94
13.19
13.44
13.69
13.93
14.18
14.43
14.68
14.93
15.18
15.43
15.68
15.93
16.18
16.42
16.67
16.92
17.17
17.42
17.66
17.91
18.17
18.42
18.66
18.91
19.16
19.41
19.66
19.90
20.15
20.40
20.66
20.90
21.15
21.40
21.65
21.90
22.15
22.39
22.64
22.89
23.14
23.39
23.64
23.89
24.14
24.39
24.64
24.88
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
14.7
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
27.71
30.45
33.22
35.98
38.75
41.52
44.29
47.06
49.82
52.59
55.36
58.13
60.90
63.67
66.43
69.20
71.97
74.74
77.51
80.27
83.04
85.81
88.58
91.35
94.11
96.88
99.65
102.4
105.2
108.0
110.7
113.5
116.3
119.0
121.8
124.6
127.3
130.1
132.9
135.6
138.4
141.2
143.9
146.7
149.5
152.2
155.0
157.8
160.5
163.3
166.1
168.8
171.6
174.4
177.2
179.9
182.7
185.5
188.2
191.0
193.8
196.5
199.3
202.1
204.8
207.6
210.4
215.9
221.4
227.0
232.5
238.0
243.6
249.1
254.7
260.2
265.7
271.3
276.8
304.5
332.2
359.8
387.5
406.9
415.2
442.9
470.6
498.2
525.9
553.6
581.3
609.0
636.7
664.3
692.0
2.036
2.240
2.443
2.647
2.850
3.054
3.258
3.461
3.665
3.686
4.072
4.276
4.479
4.683
4.886
5.090
5.294
5.497
5.701
5.904
6.108
6.312
6.515
6.719
6.922
7.126
7.330
7.535
7.737
7.940
8.144
8.348
8.551
8.775
8.958
9.162
9.366
9.569
9.773
9.976
10.18
10.38
10.59
10.79
10.99
11.20
11.40
11.60
11.81
12.01
12.22
12.42
12.62
12.83
13.03
13.23
13.44
13.64
13.84
14.05
14.25
14.46
14.66
14.86
15.07
15.27
15.47
15.88
16.29
16.70
17.10
17.51
17.92
18.32
18.73
19.14
19.54
19.95
20.36
22.40
24.43
26.47
28.50
29.93
30.54
32.58
34.61
36.65
36.68
40.72
42.76
44.79
46.83
48.86
50.90
703.1
773.4
843.7
914.0
984.3
1055
1125
1195
1266
1336
1406
1476
1547
1617
1687
1758
1828
1898
1969
2039
2109
2180
2250
2320
2390
2461
2531
2601
2672
2742
2812
2883
2953
3023
3094
2164
3234
3304
3375
3445
3515
3586
3656
3726
3797
3876
3973
4008
4078
4148
4218
4289
4359
4429
4500
4570
4640
4711
4781
4851
4922
4992
5062
5132
5203
5273
5343
5484
5625
5765
5906
6047
6187
6328
6468
6609
6750
6890
7031
7734
8437
9140
9843
10340
10550
11250
11950
12660
13360
14060
14770
15470
16170
16870
17580
.0703
.0773
.0844
.0914
.0984
.1055
.1125
.1195
.1266
.1336
.1406
.1476
.1547
.1617
.1687
.1758
.1828
.1898
.1968
.2039
.2109
.2180
.2250
.2320
.2390
.2461
.2531
.2601
.2672
.2742
.2812
.2883
.2953
.3023
.3094
.3164
.3234
.3304
.3375
.3445
.3515
.3586
.3656
.3726
.3797
.3867
.3937
.4007
.4078
.4148
.4218
.4289
.4359
.4429
.4500
.4570
.4640
.4710
.4781
.4851
.4921
.4992
.5062
.5132
.5203
.5273
.5343
.5484
.5625
.5765
.5906
.6046
.6187
.6328
.6468
.6609
.6749
.6890
.7031
.7734
.8437
.9140
.9843
1.033
1.055
1.125
1.195
1.265
1.336
1.406
1.476
1.547
1.617
1.687
1.758
51.75
56.89
62.06
67.23
72.40
77.57
82.74
87.92
93.09
98.26
103.4
108.6
113.8
118.9
124.1
129.3
134.5
139.6
144.8
150.0
155.1
160.3
165.5
170.7
175.8
181.0
186.2
191.3
196.5
201.7
206.9
212.0
217.2
222.4
227.5
232.7
237.9
243.1
248.2
253.4
258.6
263.7
268.9
274.1
279.3
284.4
289.6
294.8
299.9
305.1
310.3
315.5
320.6
325.8
331.0
336.1
341.3
346.5
351.7
356.8
362.0
367.2
372.3
377.5
382.7
387.9
393.0
403.4
413.7
424.1
434.4
444.7
455.1
465.4
475.8
486.1
496.5
506.8
517.1
568.9
620.6
672.3
724.0
760.2
775.7
827.4
879.1
930.9
982.6
1034
1086
1138
1189
1241
1293
bar
.0689
.0758
.0827
.0896
.0965
.1034
.1103
.1172
.1241
.1310
.1379
.1448
.1517
.1586
.1655
.1724
.1793
.1862
.1930
.1999
.2068
.2137
.2206
.2275
.2344
.2413
.2482
.2551
.2620
.2689
.2758
.2827
.2896
.2965
.3034
.3103
.3172
.3240
.3310
.3378
.3447
.3516
.3585
.3654
.3723
.3792
.3861
.3930
.3999
.4068
.4137
.4206
.4275
.4344
.4413
.4482
.4550
.4619
.4688
.4757
.4826
.4895
.4964
.5033
.5102
.5171
.5240
.5378
.5516
.5654
.5792
.5929
.6067
.6205
.6343
.6481
.6619
.6757
.6895
.7584
.8274
.8963
.9652
1.014
1.034
1.103
1.172
1.241
1.310
1.379
1.448
1.517
1.586
1.655
1.724
mbar
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.0
199.9
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.0
331.0
337.8
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.0
461.9
468.8
475.7
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
537.8
551.6
565.4
579.2
592.9
606.7
620.5
634.3
648.1
661.9
675.7
689.5
758.4
827.4
896.3
965.2
1014
1034
1103
1172
1241
1310
1379
1448
1517
1586
1655
1724
Pa
6895
7584
8274
8963
9652
10340
11030
11720
12410
13100
13790
14480
15170
15860
16550
17240
17930
18620
19300
19990
20680
21370
22060
22750
23440
24130
24820
25510
26200
26890
27580
28270
28960
29650
30338
31030
31720
32400
33100
33780
34470
35160
35850
36540
37230
37920
38610
39300
39990
40680
41370
42060
42750
43440
44130
44820
45500
46190
46880
47570
48260
48950
49640
50330
51020
51710
52400
53780
55160
56540
57920
59290
60670
62050
63430
64810
66190
67570
68950
75840
82740
98630
96520
101400
103400
110300
117200
124100
131000
137900
144800
151700
158600
165500
172400
kPa
6.895
7.584
8.274
8.963
9.652
10.34
11.03
11.72
12.41
13.10
13.79
14.48
15.17
15.86
16.55
17.24
17.93
18.62
19.30
19.99
20.68
21.37
22.06
22.75
23.44
24.13
24.82
25.51
26.20
26.89
27.58
28.27
28.96
29.65
30.34
31.03
31.72
32.40
33.10
33.78
34.47
35.16
35.85
36.54
37.23
37.92
38.61
39.30
39.99
40.68
41.37
42.06
42.75
43.44
44.13
44.82
45.50
46.19
46.88
47.57
48.26
48.95
49.64
50.33
51.02
51.71
52.40
53.78
55.16
56.54
57.92
59.29
60.67
62.05
63.43
64.81
66.19
67.57
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.52
101.4
103.4
110.3
117.2
124.1
131.0
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
CONVERSION
FACTORS
P.S.I. x 27.71 = in. H2O

P.S.I. x 2.036 = in. Hg
P.S.I. x .0689 = bar

P.S.I. x 68.95 = mbar
Note: Conversion
Factors Rounded
P.S.I. x 703.1 = mm/H2O

P.S.I. x 51.75 = mm/Hg
P.S.I. x .0703 = kg/cm2
P.S.I. x 6895 = Pa
P.S.I. x 6.895 = kPa
2015ofcobc_Layout 4 7/7/14 3:38 PM Page 1
CT-D-I
Instrumentation leaders for over 80 years through

innovation, service & quality
www.dwyer-inst.com
pressure
air quality
flow
temperature
level
process control
test equipment
valves
2015
Phone: 219/879-8000 | Fax: 219/872-9057

www.dwyer-inst.com
www.dwyer-inst.com
2015
TO ORDER:

INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL
pressure
air quality
flow
temperature
level
process control
test equipment
valves
2015
Printed in U.S.A. 09/14 - INTL

Dawyer

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Dawyer

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2015ofcobc_Layout 4 7/7/14 3:38 PM Page 1

Instrumentation leaders for over 80 years through

RIGHT CHOICE. RIGHT PRICE. RIGHT NOW.

Phone: 219/879-8000 | Fax: 219/872-9057

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

Printed in U.S.A. 09/14 - INTL

ifc/ibc_Layout 1 7/30/14 11:37 AM Page 1

ORDERING IS EASY FROM DWYER

PRESSURE CONVERSION CHART

DWYER AROUND THE GLOBE | LOCAL SUPPORT GLOBALLY

DWYERINSTRUMENTS, PTY. LTD.

102 Indiana Highway 212,

Unit 1, 11 Waverley Drive

DWYERINSTRUMENTS HK, LTD.

Unit 16, The Wye Estate, London Road

Unit 605A, 6/F, Shui Hing Centre

P.S.I. x 27.71 = in. H2O

P.S.I. x .0689 = bar

P.S.I. x 703.1 = mm/H2O

I_IntroManufacturing_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:39 PM Page I

RIGHT CHOICE. RIGHT PRICE. RIGHT NOW.

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC.

MANUFACTURING EXPERTISE | AFFORDABLE & RELIABLE

II_RightChoice_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:41 PM Page 1

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com

III_CustServiceTech_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:44 PM Page I

PRODUCTDELIVERY | PROMPT &ACCURATE

TECHNICAL SUPPORT | KNOWLEDGEABLE & HELPFUL

IV_Web1_i_left tabs copy 7/7/14 3:56 PM Page 1

Product applications and technical guides

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com

V_Web2_SocialMedia_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:01 PM Page 1

SHOPPING CART & CHECKOUT

Try it now at:WWW.DWYER-INST.COM

CHECK DWYER OUT ONLINE

VI_Calibration_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:08 PM Page 1

CALIBRATION &CERTIFICATE SERVICES

A standard Certificate of Conformance is available FREEof

A standard Certificate of Calibration is available FREE of

A Factory Calibration Certificate gives you assurance that the

A Certificate of NIST Calibration is available for most indicating

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com

VII_CreditCard_left tabs copy 7/9/14 11:00 AM Page I

SPECIAL MODELS FOR OEM REQUIREMENTS

VIII_Terms_left tabs copy 7/7/14 4:10 PM Page 1

STANDARD TERMS &CONDITIONS OF SALE

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com

IX_TableContents_table of contents 7/7/14 4:00 PM Page 1

Detailed Product Index by Series or Model Number and Category

CALL TO ORDER | 800/872-9141 IX

X_KeyProducts_Layout 1 7/21/14 7:55 AM Page 1

SERIESDFMT & DFMT2

PAGES 204 &205

Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation, Inc.

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. | www.dwyer-inst.com

XI_KeyProducts_Layout 1 7/8/14 12:13 PM Page 1

XII_NewProducts_Layout 2 7/8/14 12:15 PM Page 1

Wall Mount Humidity/

NDIR CO2 Sensor,

Flow and Total